ICP Printing and Graphic Arts

Release: 1.1

Contents

ICP Printing and Graphic Arts	21

ICP20115 Certificate II in Printing and Graphic Arts (General)	22

ICP30115 Certificate III in Printing and Graphic Arts (Graphic Design Production)	30

ICP30215 Certificate III in Printing and Graphic Arts (Graphic Prepress)	34

ICP30315 Certificate III in Printing and Graphic Arts (Multimedia)	38

ICP30415 Certificate III in Printing and Graphic Arts (Digital Printing)	42

ICP30515 Certificate III in Printing and Graphic Arts (Printing)	46

ICP30615 Certificate III in Printing and Graphic Arts (Screen Printing)	51

ICP30715 Certificate III in Printing and Graphic Arts (Print Finishing)	55

ICP30815 Certificate III in Printing and Graphic Arts (Sacks and Bags)	59

ICP30915 Certificate III in Printing and Graphic Arts (Cartons and Corrugating)	62

ICP31015 Certificate III in Printing and Graphic Arts (Mail House)	65

ICP31115 Certificate III in Printing and Graphic Arts (Ink Manufacture)	68

ICP40115 Certificate IV in Printing and Graphic Arts	71

ICP40515 Certificate IV in Printing and Graphic Arts (Mail House)	78

ICP40815 Certificate IV in ePublishing	82

ICP50115 Diploma of Printing and Graphic Arts	86

BSBDES403 Develop and extend design skills and practice	92

Assessment Requirements for BSBDES403 Develop and extend design skills and practice	97

ICPCBF105 Operate in-line mail machine	99

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF105 Operate in-line mail machine	102

ICPCBF202 Handline mail	103

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF202 Handline mail	107

ICPCBF203 Collate and insert mail manually	109

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF203 Collate and insert mail manually	113

ICPCBF204 Operate addressing machine	115

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF204 Operate addressing machine	119

ICPCBF208 Set up and operate a cheque mailer machine	121

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF208 Set up and operate a cheque mailer machine	125

ICPCBF209 Set up and operate in-line mail machine	127

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF209 Set up and operate in-line mail machine	132

ICPCBF211 Set up and run machine for sewing	134

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF211 Set up and run machine for sewing	137

ICPCBF214 Set up single-faced web	139

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF214 Set up single-faced web	143

ICPCBF216 Set up double-faced web	145

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF216 Set up double-faced web	150

ICPCBF218 Produce basic folded and glued cartons	152

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF218 Produce basic folded and glued cartons	157

ICPCBF220 Produce basic converted or finished product	160

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF220 Produce basic converted or finished product	166

ICPCBF221 Set up and produce basic guillotined product	170

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF221 Set up and produce basic guillotined product	175

ICPCBF222 Set up and operate in-line cutter	178

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF222 Set up and operate in-line cutter	181

ICPCBF223 Set up machine for cutting (trimming)	182

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF223 Set up machine for cutting (trimming)	186

ICPCBF224 Produce cut (trimmed) product	189

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF224 Produce cut (trimmed) product	194

ICPCBF225 Set up machine for basic flat-bed die cutting or embossing	196

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF225 Set up machine for basic flat-bed die cutting or embossing	200

ICPCBF226 Produce basic flat-bed die cut or embossed product	203

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF226 Produce basic flat-bed die cut or embossed product	208

ICPCBF227 Set up machine for basic rotary die cutting or embossing	210

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF227 Set up machine for basic rotary die cutting or embossing	215

ICPCBF228 Produce basic rotary die cut or embossed product	217

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF228 Produce basic rotary die cut or embossed product	222

ICPCBF231 Set up machine for basic flat-bed cutting	224

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF231 Set up machine for basic flat-bed cutting	228

ICPCBF232 Produce basic flat-bed cut product	230

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF232 Produce basic flat-bed cut product	235

ICPCBF235 Set up machine for basic rotary cutting	237

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF235 Set up machine for basic rotary cutting	241

ICPCBF236 Produce basic rotary cut product	243

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF236 Produce basic rotary cut product	248

ICPCBF241 Set up machine for basic single or continuous folding	250

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF241 Set up machine for basic single or continuous folding	254

ICPCBF242 Produce basic single or continuous folded product	257

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF242 Produce basic single or continuous folded product	262

ICPCBF243 Set up machine for basic collating or inserting (sheet/section)	264

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF243 Set up machine for basic collating or inserting (sheet/section)	267

ICPCBF244 Produce basic collated or inserted (sheet/section) product	269

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF244 Produce basic collated or inserted (sheet/section) product	274

ICPCBF245 Set up and produce hand-collated or inserted product	276

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF245 Set up and produce hand-collated or inserted product	280

ICPCBF261 Set up machine for basic adhesive, mechanical or thermal fastening	282

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF261 Set up machine for basic adhesive, mechanical or thermal fastening	286

ICPCBF262 Produce basic adhesive, mechanical or thermal fastened product	289

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF262 Produce basic adhesive, mechanical or thermal fastened product	294

ICPCBF263 Set up and produce hand-fastened product	297

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF263 Set up and produce hand-fastened product	302

ICPCBF281 Set up machine for basic laminating	304

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF281 Set up machine for basic laminating	308

ICPCBF282 Produce basic laminated product	309

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF282 Produce basic laminated product	314

ICPCBF294 Set up profile cutting for envelope manufacture	316

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF294 Set up profile cutting for envelope manufacture	319

ICPCBF297 Clean sack and bag machines	321

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF297 Clean sack and bag machines	324

ICPCBF298 Run and monitor sack and bag machines	326

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF298 Run and monitor sack and bag machines	329

ICPCBF300 Run and monitor in-line tube making machine for sack or bag manufacture	331

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF300 Run and monitor in-line tube making machine for sack or bag manufacture	334

ICPCBF301 Run and monitor in-line bottom making machine for sack or bag manufacture	336

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF301 Run and monitor in-line bottom making machine for sack or bag manufacture	339

ICPCBF302 Set up and monitor in-line scoring, folding and gluing machine for sack or bag manufacture	341

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF302 Set up and monitor in-line scoring, folding and gluing machine for sack or bag manufacture	345

ICPCBF303 Run and monitor envelope manufacturing machines	347

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF303 Run and monitor envelope manufacturing machines	350

ICPCBF305 Produce single-faced web	352

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF305 Produce single-faced web	357

ICPCBF306 Set up machine for basic carton folding and gluing	359

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF306 Set up machine for basic carton folding and gluing	362

ICPCBF307 Produce double-faced web	365

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF307 Produce double-faced web	371

ICPCBF309 Produce complex folded and glued cartons	373

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF309 Produce complex folded and glued cartons	378

ICPCBF311 Prepare for cutting forme and stripper making	381

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF311 Prepare for cutting forme and stripper making	384

ICPCBF312 Set cutting forme and strippers	386

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF312 Set cutting forme and strippers	390

ICPCBF320 Produce complex converted or finished product	392

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF320 Produce complex converted or finished product	398

ICPCBF321 Set up and produce complex guillotined product	402

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF321 Set up and produce complex guillotined product	407

ICPCBF326 Undertake pre make-ready for die cutting	410

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF326 Undertake pre make-ready for die cutting	413

ICPCBF327 Set up machine for complex rotary die cutting or embossing	415

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF327 Set up machine for complex rotary die cutting or embossing	419

ICPCBF328 Produce complex rotary die cut or embossed product	422

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF328 Produce complex rotary die cut or embossed product	427

ICPCBF341 Set up machine for complex sequenced or multiple folding	430

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF341 Set up machine for complex sequenced or multiple folding	434

ICPCBF342 Produce complex sequenced or multiple folded product	437

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF342 Produce complex sequenced or multiple folded product	442

ICPCBF343 Set up machine for complex collating or inserting (sheet/section/reel)	445

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF343 Set up machine for complex collating or inserting (sheet/section/reel)	449

ICPCBF344 Produce complex collated or inserted product	452

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF344 Produce complex collated or inserted product	457

ICPCBF361 Set up machine for complex adhesive, mechanical or sewn fastening	459

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF361 Set up machine for complex adhesive, mechanical or sewn fastening	463

ICPCBF362 Produce complex adhesive, mechanical or sewn fastened product	466

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF362 Produce complex adhesive, mechanical or sewn fastened product	471

ICPCBF369 Set up and produce hand-made box	474

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF369 Set up and produce hand-made box	478

ICPCBF371 Decorate paper	480

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF371 Decorate paper	484

ICPCBF381 Set up machine for complex laminating	486

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF381 Set up machine for complex laminating	490

ICPCBF382 Produce complex laminated product	492

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF382 Produce complex laminated product	497

ICPCBF391 Use electronic monitoring systems (converting and finishing)	500

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF391 Use electronic monitoring systems (converting and finishing)	503

ICPCBF392 Produce product on window gluer	505

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF392 Produce product on window gluer	510

ICPCBF393 Set up machine for envelope manufacture	512

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF393 Set up machine for envelope manufacture	516

ICPCBF395 Set up and operate folder gluer machine	518

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF395 Set up and operate folder gluer machine	522

ICPCBF396 Set up in-line scoring, folding and gluing machine for envelope manufacture	524

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF396 Set up in-line scoring, folding and gluing machine for envelope manufacture	527

ICPCBF398 Set up in-line bottom making machine for sack or bag manufacture	529

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF398 Set up in-line bottom making machine for sack or bag manufacture	533

ICPCBF399 Set up in-line tube making machine for sack or bag manufacture	535

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF399 Set up in-line tube making machine for sack or bag manufacture	538

ICPCBF406 Set up and load in-line smart card machine	540

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF406 Set up and load in-line smart card machine	544

ICPCBF407 Operate a smart card machine and pack product	546

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF407 Operate a smart card machine and pack product	551

ICPCBF410 Set up machine for complex carton folding and gluing	553

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF410 Set up machine for complex carton folding and gluing	557

ICPCBF425 Set up machine for complex flat-bed die cutting or embossing	560

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF425 Set up machine for complex flat-bed die cutting or embossing	564

ICPCBF426 Produce complex flat-bed die cut or embossed product	567

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF426 Produce complex flat-bed die cut or embossed product	572

ICPCBF465 Set up and produce hand-bound book	575

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF465 Set up and produce hand-bound book	579

ICPCBF467 Restore books	582

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF467 Restore books	587

ICPDMT263 Access and use the internet	591

Assessment Requirements for ICPDMT263 Access and use the internet	594

ICPDMT296 Create and test an interactive CD-ROM/DVD	596

Assessment Requirements for ICPDMT296 Create and test an interactive CD-ROM/DVD	599

ICPDMT321 Capture a digital image	601

Assessment Requirements for ICPDMT321 Capture a digital image	605

ICPDMT322 Edit a digital image	607

Assessment Requirements for ICPDMT322 Edit a digital image	610

ICPDMT344 Manipulate and incorporate audio into multimedia presentations	612

Assessment Requirements for ICPDMT344 Manipulate and incorporate audio into multimedia presentations	616

ICPDMT346 Incorporate video into multimedia presentations	618

Assessment Requirements for ICPDMT346 Incorporate video into multimedia presentations	622

ICPDMT491 Create an extensible document	624

Assessment Requirements for ICPDMT491 Create an extensible document	627

ICPDMT492 Create an extensible style sheet	629

Assessment Requirements for ICPDMT492 Create an extensible style sheet	632

ICPDMT581 Manage multimedia production	634

Assessment Requirements for ICPDMT581 Manage multimedia production	638

ICPDMT582 Manage multimedia projects	640

Assessment Requirements for ICPDMT582 Manage multimedia projects	645

ICPINK211 Select and prepare materials for production	647

Assessment Requirements for ICPINK211 Select and prepare materials for production	650

ICPINK221 Blend chemicals	652

Assessment Requirements for ICPINK221 Blend chemicals	655

ICPINK251 Filter and pack product	658

Assessment Requirements for ICPINK251 Filter and pack product	661

ICPINK331 Manufacture inks and coatings	664

Assessment Requirements for ICPINK331 Manufacture inks and coatings	669

ICPINK335 Manufacture varnish and resin	672

Assessment Requirements for ICPINK335 Manufacture varnish and resin	677

ICPKNW311 Apply knowledge of the graphic pre-press sector	680

Assessment Requirements for ICPKNW311 Apply knowledge of the graphic pre-press sector	686

ICPKNW312 Apply knowledge of printing machining	688

Assessment Requirements for ICPKNW312 Apply knowledge of printing machining	694

ICPKNW313 Apply knowledge and requirements of the converting, binding and finishing sector	696

Assessment Requirements for ICPKNW313 Apply knowledge and requirements of the converting, binding and finishing sector	702

ICPKNW314 Apply knowledge and requirements of the screen printing sector	704

Assessment Requirements for ICPKNW314 Apply knowledge and requirements of the screen printing sector	710

ICPKNW315 Apply knowledge and requirements of the multimedia sector	713

Assessment Requirements for ICPKNW315 Apply knowledge and requirements of the multimedia sector	719

ICPKNW316 Apply knowledge and requirements of paper and printing processes	721

Assessment Requirements for ICPKNW316 Apply knowledge and requirements of paper and printing processes	727

ICPKNW317 Apply knowledge and requirements of the ink manufacturing sector	730

Assessment Requirements for ICPKNW317 Apply knowledge and requirements of the ink manufacturing sector	734

ICPKNW318 Apply knowledge and requirements of mail house operations	736

Assessment Requirements for ICPKNW318 Apply knowledge and requirements of mail house operations	742

ICPKNW319 Apply knowledge and processes of converting paper-based products	745

Assessment Requirements for ICPKNW319 Apply knowledge and processes of converting paper-based products	751

ICPKNW320 Apply knowledge and requirements of information technology systems in the printing industry	753

Assessment Requirements for ICPKNW320 Apply knowledge and requirements of information technology systems in the printing industry	759

ICPKNW321 Apply knowledge and requirements of digital production	761

Assessment Requirements for ICPKNW321 Apply knowledge and requirements of digital production	766

ICPPRN211 Mount and proof flexographic plates for basic printing	768

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRN211 Mount and proof flexographic plates for basic printing	772

ICPPRN214 Produce basic flexographic printed product	774

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRN214 Produce basic flexographic printed product	780

ICPPRN222 Produce basic gravure printed product	783

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRN222 Produce basic gravure printed product	789

ICPPRN232 Produce basic lithographic printed product	792

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRN232 Produce basic lithographic printed product	797

ICPPRN242 Produce basic pad printed product	800

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRN242 Produce basic pad printed product	805

ICPPRN261 Set up for foil stamping	807

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRN261 Set up for foil stamping	813

ICPPRN262 Produce foil stamped product	816

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRN262 Produce foil stamped product	821

ICPPRN271 Set up for basic coating	824

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRN271 Set up for basic coating	829

ICPPRN272 Produce basic coated product	832

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRN272 Produce basic coated product	837

ICPPRN282 Produce and manage basic digital print	839

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRN282 Produce and manage basic digital print	844

ICPPRN283 Use digital media consumables	847

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRN283 Use digital media consumables	850

ICPPRN284 Use colour management systems	852

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRN284 Use colour management systems	856

ICPPRN285 Use digital workflow	858

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRN285 Use digital workflow	862

ICPPRN286 Finish a digital product	864

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRN286 Finish a digital product	868

ICPPRN287 Use digital processes	870

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRN287 Use digital processes	873

ICPPRN288 Produce basic relief printed product	875

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRN288 Produce basic relief printed product	881

ICPPRN313 Set up for basic flexographic printing	884

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRN313 Set up for basic flexographic printing	891

ICPPRN314 Produce complex flexographic printed product	895

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRN314 Produce complex flexographic printed product	901

ICPPRN321 Set up for basic gravure printing	905

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRN321 Set up for basic gravure printing	910

ICPPRN322 Produce complex gravure printed product	913

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRN322 Produce complex gravure printed product	919

ICPPRN331 Set up for basic lithographic printing	923

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRN331 Set up for basic lithographic printing	928

ICPPRN332 Produce complex lithographic printed product	932

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRN332 Produce complex lithographic printed product	938

ICPPRN341 Set up for basic pad printing	943

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRN341 Set up for basic pad printing	948

ICPPRN342 Produce complex pad printed product	951

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRN342 Produce complex pad printed product	956

ICPPRN382 Produce and manage complex digital print	958

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRN382 Produce and manage complex digital print	964

ICPPRN383 Prepare for personalised digital printing	968

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRN383 Prepare for personalised digital printing	972

ICPPRN384 Set up and produce basic digital print	974

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRN384 Set up and produce basic digital print	980

ICPPRN385 Apply software applications to digital production	983

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRN385 Apply software applications to digital production	987

ICPPRN386 Troubleshoot digital media	989

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRN386 Troubleshoot digital media	993

ICPPRN387 Use colour management for production	995

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRN387 Use colour management for production	999

ICPPRN388 Preflight and import complex images for digital devices	1001

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRN388 Preflight and import complex images for digital devices	1005

ICPPRN389 Manage digital files	1007

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRN389 Manage digital files	1010

ICPPRN390 Generate a proof for digital production	1012

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRN390 Generate a proof for digital production	1016

ICPPRN392 Set up and produce specialised digital print	1018

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRN392 Set up and produce specialised digital print	1023

ICPPRN393 Set up for basic relief printing	1025

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRN393 Set up for basic relief printing	1031

ICPPRN394 Produce complex relief printed product	1034

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRN394 Produce complex relief printed product	1040

ICPPRN411 Mount and demount flexographic plates for complex printing	1043

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRN411 Mount and demount flexographic plates for complex printing	1047

ICPPRN413 Set up for complex flexographic printing	1049

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRN413 Set up for complex flexographic printing	1055

ICPPRN414 Produce specialised flexographic printed product	1059

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRN414 Produce specialised flexographic printed product	1064

ICPPRN421 Set up for complex gravure printing	1067

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRN421 Set up for complex gravure printing	1072

ICPPRN422 Produce specialised gravure printed product	1076

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRN422 Produce specialised gravure printed product	1081

ICPPRN431 Set up for complex lithographic printing	1084

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRN431 Set up for complex lithographic printing	1089

ICPPRN432 Produce specialised lithographic printed product	1093

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRN432 Produce specialised lithographic printed product	1099

ICPPRN441 Set up for complex pad printing	1103

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRN441 Set up for complex pad printing	1108

ICPPRN442 Produce specialised pad printed product	1110

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRN442 Produce specialised pad printed product	1116

ICPPRN451 Set up for complex relief printing	1118

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRN451 Set up for complex relief printing	1123

ICPPRN452 Produce specialised relief printed product	1127

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRN452 Produce specialised relief printed product	1132

ICPPRN471 Set up for complex coating	1135

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRN471 Set up for complex coating	1140

ICPPRN472 Produce complex coated product	1143

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRN472 Produce complex coated product	1148

ICPPRN484 Prepare for variable data printing	1151

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRN484 Prepare for variable data printing	1155

ICPPRN491 Use on-press monitoring of print quality	1157

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRN491 Use on-press monitoring of print quality	1160

ICPPRN492 Use on-press print control devices	1162

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRN492 Use on-press print control devices	1166

ICPPRN493 Set up and monitor in-line printing operations	1168

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRN493 Set up and monitor in-line printing operations	1173

ICPPRN494 Apply advanced software applications to digital production	1176

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRN494 Apply advanced software applications to digital production	1181

ICPPRN495 Set up and use complex colour management for production	1183

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRN495 Set up and use complex colour management for production	1186

ICPPRN496 Set up and produce complex digital print	1189

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRN496 Set up and produce complex digital print	1194

ICPPRN497 Work with digital information	1197

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRN497 Work with digital information	1200

ICPPRN498 Adapt digital content for publication on different devices	1203

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRN498 Adapt digital content for publication on different devices	1207

ICPPRN513 Set up for specialised flexographic printing	1209

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRN513 Set up for specialised flexographic printing	1214

ICPPRN521 Set up for specialised gravure printing	1218

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRN521 Set up for specialised gravure printing	1223

ICPPRN531 Set up for specialised lithographic printing	1226

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRN531 Set up for specialised lithographic printing	1231

ICPPRN541 Set up for specialised pad printing	1235

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRN541 Set up for specialised pad printing	1240

ICPPRN551 Set up for specialised relief printing	1242

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRN551 Set up for specialised relief printing	1247

ICPPRN552 Manage digital workflow	1251

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRN552 Manage digital workflow	1255

ICPPRP211 Develop a basic design concept	1257

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRP211 Develop a basic design concept	1262

ICPPRP221 Select and apply type	1264

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRP221 Select and apply type	1267

ICPPRP223 Photograph a line image	1269

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRP223 Photograph a line image	1272

ICPPRP224 Produce pages using a page layout application	1274

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRP224 Produce pages using a page layout application	1278

ICPPRP225 Produce graphics using a graphics application	1280

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRP225 Produce graphics using a graphics application	1284

ICPPRP231 Manually combine spot colour and basic four-colour images	1286

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRP231 Manually combine spot colour and basic four-colour images	1290

ICPPRP232 Electronically combine and assemble data	1292

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRP232 Electronically combine and assemble data	1295

ICPPRP252 Output images	1297

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRP252 Output images	1300

ICPPRP260 Proof images	1302

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRP260 Proof images	1305

ICPPRP266 Produce relief plates	1307

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRP266 Produce relief plates	1310

ICPPRP267 Produce offset lithographic plates	1312

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRP267 Produce offset lithographic plates	1315

ICPPRP268 Make photopolymer plates (flexographic)	1317

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRP268 Make photopolymer plates (flexographic)	1321

ICPPRP269 Produce photopolymer plates for pad printing	1323

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRP269 Produce photopolymer plates for pad printing	1327

ICPPRP272 Produce gravure cylinders manually	1329

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRP272 Produce gravure cylinders manually	1332

ICPPRP281 Design basic carton	1334

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRP281 Design basic carton	1338

ICPPRP283 Prepare artwork for screen printing	1340

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRP283 Prepare artwork for screen printing	1345

ICPPRP284 Produce PDF files for online or screen display	1347

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRP284 Produce PDF files for online or screen display	1352

ICPPRP285 Scan a mono image	1354

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRP285 Scan a mono image	1357

ICPPRP286 Scan images for reproduction	1359

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRP286 Scan images for reproduction	1362

ICPPRP311 Develop a detailed design concept	1364

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRP311 Develop a detailed design concept	1368

ICPPRP321 Produce a typographic image	1370

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRP321 Produce a typographic image	1374

ICPPRP322 Digitise images for reproduction	1376

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRP322 Digitise images for reproduction	1379

ICPPRP323 Photograph and produce halftone images	1381

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRP323 Photograph and produce halftone images	1385

ICPPRP324 Create pages using a page layout application	1387

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRP324 Create pages using a page layout application	1392

ICPPRP325 Create graphics using a graphics application	1394

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRP325 Create graphics using a graphics application	1398

ICPPRP331 Manually combine complex four-colour images	1400

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRP331 Manually combine complex four-colour images	1403

ICPPRP333 Electronically combine complex images	1405

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRP333 Electronically combine complex images	1408

ICPPRP334 Prepare an imposition format for printing processes	1410

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRP334 Prepare an imposition format for printing processes	1412

ICPPRP352 Output complex images	1414

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRP352 Output complex images	1417

ICPPRP360 Undertake special colour proofing	1419

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRP360 Undertake special colour proofing	1422

ICPPRP370 Produce multiple image plates	1424

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRP370 Produce multiple image plates	1428

ICPPRP372 Produce gravure cylinders electronically	1430

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRP372 Produce gravure cylinders electronically	1434

ICPPRP382 Produce computer image for screen printing	1436

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRP382 Produce computer image for screen printing	1439

ICPPRP385 Operate a database for digital printing	1441

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRP385 Operate a database for digital printing	1445

ICPPRP386 Undertake digital proofing	1447

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRP386 Undertake digital proofing	1451

ICPPRP396 Generate high-end PDF files	1453

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRP396 Generate high-end PDF files	1458

ICPPRP397 Transfer digital files	1460

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRP397 Transfer digital files	1463

ICPPRP411 Undertake a complex design brief	1465

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRP411 Undertake a complex design brief	1470

ICPPRP421 Compose and evaluate typography	1472

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRP421 Compose and evaluate typography	1476

ICPPRP422 Digitise complex images for reproduction	1478

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRP422 Digitise complex images for reproduction	1481

ICPPRP423 Apply colour to design brief	1483

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRP423 Apply colour to design brief	1486

ICPPRP430 Manage colour	1488

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRP430 Manage colour	1493

ICPPRP435 Generate complex imposition	1496

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRP435 Generate complex imposition	1499

ICPPRP452 Output complex images direct to plate or press	1502

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRP452 Output complex images direct to plate or press	1506

ICPPRP481 Design complex carton	1508

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRP481 Design complex carton	1512

ICPPRP484 Set up and operate automated workflow	1515

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRP484 Set up and operate automated workflow	1520

ICPPRP485 Develop a digital data template	1522

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRP485 Develop a digital data template	1526

ICPPRP494 Develop document content and structure	1528

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRP494 Develop document content and structure	1532

ICPSCP211 Reclaim screen automatically	1534

Assessment Requirements for ICPSCP211 Reclaim screen automatically	1538

ICPSCP215 Prepare screen	1540

Assessment Requirements for ICPSCP215 Prepare screen	1544

ICPSCP221 Prepare substrate	1546

Assessment Requirements for ICPSCP221 Prepare substrate	1549

ICPSCP222 Prepare and cut screen print substrate	1551

Assessment Requirements for ICPSCP222 Prepare and cut screen print substrate	1555

ICPSCP233 Manually prepare direct emulsion stencil	1556

Assessment Requirements for ICPSCP233 Manually prepare direct emulsion stencil	1561

ICPSCP235 Prepare stencil using photographic indirect method	1563

Assessment Requirements for ICPSCP235 Prepare stencil using photographic indirect method	1568

ICPSCP270 Manually prepare and produce screen prints	1570

Assessment Requirements for ICPSCP270 Manually prepare and produce screen prints	1575

ICPSCP271 Manually produce basic screen prints	1577

Assessment Requirements for ICPSCP271 Manually produce basic screen prints	1582

ICPSCP273 Semi-automatically produce basic screen prints	1584

Assessment Requirements for ICPSCP273 Semi-automatically produce basic screen prints	1589

ICPSCP275 Automatically produce basic screen prints	1591

Assessment Requirements for ICPSCP275 Automatically produce basic screen prints	1596

ICPSCP281 Finish screen print products	1598

Assessment Requirements for ICPSCP281 Finish screen print products	1602

ICPSCP282 Prepare film for basic screen printing	1604

Assessment Requirements for ICPSCP282 Prepare film for basic screen printing	1608

ICPSCP311 Reclaim screen manually	1610

Assessment Requirements for ICPSCP311 Reclaim screen manually	1614

ICPSCP333 Automatically prepare direct emulsion stencil	1616

Assessment Requirements for ICPSCP333 Automatically prepare direct emulsion stencil	1620

ICPSCP337 Prepare stencil using photographic capillary method	1623

Assessment Requirements for ICPSCP337 Prepare stencil using photographic capillary method	1628

ICPSCP339 Prepare stencil using direct projection method	1631

Assessment Requirements for ICPSCP339 Prepare stencil using direct projection method	1636

ICPSCP341 Prepare stencil using direct electronic imaging method	1639

Assessment Requirements for ICPSCP341 Prepare stencil using direct electronic imaging method	1644

ICPSCP351 Prepare machine and drying/curing unit	1647

Assessment Requirements for ICPSCP351 Prepare machine and drying/curing unit	1651

ICPSCP371 Manually produce complex screen prints	1653

Assessment Requirements for ICPSCP371 Manually produce complex screen prints	1658

ICPSCP373 Semi-automatically produce complex screen prints	1660

Assessment Requirements for ICPSCP373 Semi-automatically produce complex screen prints	1665

ICPSCP374 Operate a semi-automatic screen printing machine	1667

Assessment Requirements for ICPSCP374 Operate a semi-automatic screen printing machine	1672

ICPSCP375 Automatically produce complex screen prints	1674

Assessment Requirements for ICPSCP375 Automatically produce complex screen prints	1679

ICPSCP376 Operate an automatic screen printing machine	1682

Assessment Requirements for ICPSCP376 Operate an automatic screen printing machine	1687

ICPSCP382 Produce computer image for screen printing	1689

Assessment Requirements for ICPSCP382 Produce computer image for screen printing	1692

ICPSCP383 Prepare film for complex screen printing	1694

Assessment Requirements for ICPSCP383 Prepare film for complex screen printing	1698

ICPSUP120 Pack product	1700

Assessment Requirements for ICPSUP120 Pack product	1703

ICPSUP201 Prepare, load and unload reels and cores on and off machine	1705

Assessment Requirements for ICPSUP201 Prepare, load and unload reels and cores on and off machine	1708

ICPSUP202 Prepare, load and unload product on and off machine	1710

Assessment Requirements for ICPSUP202 Prepare, load and unload product on and off machine	1713

ICPSUP203 Prepare and maintain the work area	1715

Assessment Requirements for ICPSUP203 Prepare and maintain the work area	1718

ICPSUP207 Prepare machine for operation (basic)	1720

Assessment Requirements for ICPSUP207 Prepare machine for operation (basic)	1725

ICPSUP208 Operate and monitor machines (basic)	1727

Assessment Requirements for ICPSUP208 Operate and monitor machines (basic)	1732

ICPSUP211 Prepare ink and additives	1735

Assessment Requirements for ICPSUP211 Prepare ink and additives	1738

ICPSUP212 Prepare coatings and adhesives	1740

Assessment Requirements for ICPSUP212 Prepare coatings and adhesives	1743

ICPSUP216 Inspect quality against required standards	1745

Assessment Requirements for ICPSUP216 Inspect quality against required standards	1748

ICPSUP221 Pack and dispatch product	1750

Assessment Requirements for ICPSUP221 Pack and dispatch product	1753

ICPSUP222 Pack and dispatch solid waste	1755

Assessment Requirements for ICPSUP222 Pack and dispatch solid waste	1758

ICPSUP235 Lift loads mechanically	1760

Assessment Requirements for ICPSUP235 Lift loads mechanically	1764

ICPSUP236 Shift loads mechanically	1766

Assessment Requirements for ICPSUP236 Shift loads mechanically	1769

ICPSUP241 Undertake warehouse or stores materials processing	1771

Assessment Requirements for ICPSUP241 Undertake warehouse or stores materials processing	1775

ICPSUP243 Reconcile process outputs	1777

Assessment Requirements for ICPSUP243 Reconcile process outputs	1780

ICPSUP260 Maintain a safe work environment	1781

Assessment Requirements for ICPSUP260 Maintain a safe work environment	1785

ICPSUP261 Follow WHS practices and identify environmental hazards	1787

Assessment Requirements for ICPSUP261 Follow WHS practices and identify environmental hazards	1791

ICPSUP262 Communicate in the workplace	1793

Assessment Requirements for ICPSUP262 Communicate in the workplace	1798

ICPSUP263 Perform basic industry calculations	1800

Assessment Requirements for ICPSUP263 Perform basic industry calculations	1803

ICPSUP271 Provide basic instruction for a task	1805

Assessment Requirements for ICPSUP271 Provide basic instruction for a task	1808

ICPSUP280 Enter data into electronic system	1810

Assessment Requirements for ICPSUP280 Enter data into electronic system	1813

ICPSUP281 Use computer systems	1815

Assessment Requirements for ICPSUP281 Use computer systems	1818

ICPSUP282 Undertake basic machine maintenance	1820

Assessment Requirements for ICPSUP282 Undertake basic machine maintenance	1825

ICPSUP311 Prepare ink and additives (advanced)	1828

Assessment Requirements for ICPSUP311 Prepare ink and additives (advanced)	1831

ICPSUP321 Pack and dispatch (advanced)	1834

Assessment Requirements for ICPSUP321 Pack and dispatch (advanced)	1838

ICPSUP323 Dispose of waste	1841

Assessment Requirements for ICPSUP323 Dispose of waste	1844

ICPSUP342 Undertake inventory procedures	1846

Assessment Requirements for ICPSUP342 Undertake inventory procedures	1849

ICPSUP345 Purchase materials and schedule deliveries	1851

Assessment Requirements for ICPSUP345 Purchase materials and schedule deliveries	1854

ICPSUP351 Undertake basic production scheduling	1856

Assessment Requirements for ICPSUP351 Undertake basic production scheduling	1859

ICPSUP352 Plan operational processes	1861

Assessment Requirements for ICPSUP352 Plan operational processes	1864

ICPSUP357 Apply quick changeover procedures	1866

Assessment Requirements for ICPSUP357 Apply quick changeover procedures	1869

ICPSUP362 Communicate as part of a work team	1871

Assessment Requirements for ICPSUP362 Communicate as part of a work team	1875

ICPSUP381 Operate and maintain computer resources	1877

Assessment Requirements for ICPSUP381 Operate and maintain computer resources	1882

ICPSUP389 Undertake basic root cause analysis	1885

Assessment Requirements for ICPSUP389 Undertake basic root cause analysis	1889

ICPSUP417 Perform laboratory quality tests of materials and finished product	1891

Assessment Requirements for ICPSUP417 Perform laboratory quality tests of materials and finished product	1895

ICPSUP455 Supervise and schedule work of others	1898

Assessment Requirements for ICPSUP455 Supervise and schedule work of others	1902

ICPSUP456 Control production	1904

Assessment Requirements for ICPSUP456 Control production	1908

ICPSUP458 Monitor production workflow	1910

Assessment Requirements for ICPSUP458 Monitor production workflow	1913

ICPSUP464 Provide customer service and education	1915

Assessment Requirements for ICPSUP464 Provide customer service and education	1919

ICPSUP482 Troubleshoot and optimise materials and machinery	1921

Assessment Requirements for ICPSUP482 Troubleshoot and optimise materials and machinery	1925

ICPSUP485 Implement a Just-in-Time system	1927

Assessment Requirements for ICPSUP485 Implement a Just-in-Time system	1931

ICPSUP486 Mistake proof a production process	1933

Assessment Requirements for ICPSUP486 Mistake proof a production process	1937

ICPSUP487 Analyse manual handling processes	1939

Assessment Requirements for ICPSUP487 Analyse manual handling processes	1943

ICPSUP488 Ensure process improvements are sustained	1945

Assessment Requirements for ICPSUP488 Ensure process improvements are sustained	1949

ICPSUP516 Set and apply quality standards	1951

Assessment Requirements for ICPSUP516 Set and apply quality standards	1956

ICPSUP553 Prepare production costing estimates	1959

Assessment Requirements for ICPSUP553 Prepare production costing estimates	1962

ICPSUP554 Manage teams	1964

Assessment Requirements for ICPSUP554 Manage teams	1969

ICPSUP561 Implement and monitor WHS	1971

Assessment Requirements for ICPSUP561 Implement and monitor WHS	1976

ICPSUP583 Troubleshoot and optimise the production process	1978

Assessment Requirements for ICPSUP583 Troubleshoot and optimise the production process	1983

ICPSUP684 Determine and improve process capability	1986

Assessment Requirements for ICPSUP684 Determine and improve process capability	1990

AUMAQA001 Apply quality assurance techniques	1992

Assessment Requirements for AUMAQA001 Apply quality assurance techniques	1996

BSBCMM401 Make a presentation	1998

Assessment Requirements for BSBCMM401 Make a presentation	2002

BSBCRT301 Develop and extend critical and creative thinking skills	2004

Assessment Requirements for BSBCRT301 Develop and extend critical and creative thinking skills	2008

BSBCUS301 Deliver and monitor a service to customers	2010

Assessment Requirements for BSBCUS301 Deliver and monitor a service to customers	2014

BSBCUS401 Coordinate implementation of customer service strategies	2016

Assessment Requirements for BSBCUS401 Coordinate implementation of customer service strategies	2020

BSBCUS501 Manage quality customer service	2022

Assessment Requirements for BSBCUS501 Manage quality customer service	2026

BSBDES301 Explore the use of colour	2028

Assessment Requirements for BSBDES301 Explore the use of colour	2032

BSBDES302 Explore and apply the creative design process to 2D forms	2034

Assessment Requirements for BSBDES302 Explore and apply the creative design process to 2D forms	2038

BSBDES303 Explore and apply the creative design process to 3D forms	2040

Assessment Requirements for BSBDES303 Explore and apply the creative design process to 3D forms	2044

BSBDES305 Source and apply information on the history and theory of design	2046

Assessment Requirements for BSBDES305 Source and apply information on the history and theory of design	2050

BSBDES401 Generate design solutions	2051

Assessment Requirements for BSBDES401 Generate design solutions	2056

BSBDES402 Interpret and respond to a design brief	2058

Assessment Requirements for BSBDES402 Interpret and respond to a design brief	2063

BSBDES601 Manage design realisation	2065

Assessment Requirements for BSBDES601 Manage design realisation	2069

BSBEBU501 Investigate and design e-business solutions	2071

Assessment Requirements for BSBEBU501 Investigate and design e-business solutions	2076

BSBEBU502 Implement e-business solutions	2078

Assessment Requirements for BSBEBU502 Implement e-business solutions	2082

BSBFLM309 Support continuous improvement systems and processes	2084

Assessment Requirements for BSBFLM309 Support continuous improvement systems and processes	2088

BSBINN201 Contribute to workplace innovation	2090

Assessment Requirements for BSBINN201 Contribute to workplace innovation	2094

BSBINN301 Promote innovation in a team environment	2096

Assessment Requirements for BSBINN301 Promote innovation in a team environment	2101

BSBIPR401 Use and respect copyright	2103

Assessment Requirements for BSBIPR401 Use and respect copyright	2108

BSBIPR601 Develop and implement strategies for intellectual property management	2110

Assessment Requirements for BSBIPR601 Develop and implement strategies for intellectual property management	2115

BSBITU306 Design and produce business documents	2117

Assessment Requirements for BSBITU306 Design and produce business documents	2121

BSBLDR403 Lead team effectiveness	2123

Assessment Requirements for BSBLDR403 Lead team effectiveness	2127

BSBMGT402 Implement operational plan	2129

Assessment Requirements for BSBMGT402 Implement operational plan	2133

BSBMGT403 Implement continuous improvement	2135

Assessment Requirements for BSBMGT403 Implement continuous improvement	2139

BSBMGT407 Apply digital solutions to work processes	2141

Assessment Requirements for BSBMGT407 Apply digital solutions to work processes	2144

BSBMGT516 Facilitate continuous improvement	2146

Assessment Requirements for BSBMGT516 Facilitate continuous improvement	2150

BSBMGT517 Manage operational plan	2152

Assessment Requirements for BSBMGT517 Manage operational plan	2157

BSBMGT519 Incorporate digital solutions into plans and practices	2159

Assessment Requirements for BSBMGT519 Incorporate digital solutions into plans and practices	2163

BSBMGT608 Manage innovation and continuous improvement	2165

Assessment Requirements for BSBMGT608 Manage innovation and continuous improvement	2170

BSBMKG401 Profile the market	2172

Assessment Requirements for BSBMKG401 Profile the market	2176

BSBMKG412 Conduct e-marketing communications	2178

Assessment Requirements for BSBMKG412 Conduct e-marketing communications	2183

BSBMKG413 Promote products and services	2185

Assessment Requirements for BSBMKG413 Promote products and services	2189

BSBMKG501 Identify and evaluate marketing opportunities	2191

Assessment Requirements for BSBMKG501 Identify and evaluate marketing opportunities	2195

BSBPMG409 Apply project scope management techniques	2197

Assessment Requirements for BSBPMG409 Apply project scope management techniques	2201

BSBPRO401 Develop product knowledge	2203

Assessment Requirements for BSBPRO401 Develop product knowledge	2207

BSBREL401 Establish networks	2209

Assessment Requirements for BSBREL401 Establish networks	2213

BSBREL402 Build client relationships and business networks	2215

Assessment Requirements for BSBREL402 Build client relationships and business networks	2219

BSBSLS407 Identify and plan sales prospects	2221

Assessment Requirements for BSBSLS407 Identify and plan sales prospects	2226

BSBSLS408 Present, secure and support sales solutions	2228

Assessment Requirements for BSBSLS408 Present, secure and support sales solutions	2233

BSBSLS501 Develop a sales plan	2235

Assessment Requirements for BSBSLS501 Develop a sales plan	2239

BSBSMB301 Investigate micro business opportunities	2241

Assessment Requirements for BSBSMB301 Investigate micro business opportunities	2245

BSBSMB402 Plan small business finances	2247

Assessment Requirements for BSBSMB402 Plan small business finances	2251

BSBSMB403 Market the small business	2253

Assessment Requirements for BSBSMB403 Market the small business	2258

BSBSMB404 Undertake small business planning	2260

Assessment Requirements for BSBSMB404 Undertake small business planning	2264

BSBSMB412 Introduce cloud computing into business operations	2266

Assessment Requirements for BSBSMB412 Introduce cloud computing into business operations	2270

BSBSUS201 Participate in environmentally sustainable work practices	2272

Assessment Requirements for BSBSUS201 Participate in environmentally sustainable work practices	2276

BSBSUS301 Implement and monitor environmentally sustainable work practices	2278

Assessment Requirements for BSBSUS301 Implement and monitor environmentally sustainable work practices	2283

BSBSUS501 Develop workplace policy and procedures for sustainability	2285

Assessment Requirements for BSBSUS501 Develop workplace policy and procedures for sustainability	2290

BSBWOR301 Organise personal work priorities and development	2292

Assessment Requirements for BSBWOR301 Organise personal work priorities and development	2296

BSBWOR404 Develop work priorities	2298

Assessment Requirements for BSBWOR404 Develop work priorities	2302

BSBWOR501 Manage personal work priorities and professional development	2304

Assessment Requirements for BSBWOR501 Manage personal work priorities and professional development	2308

BSBWOR502 Lead and manage team effectiveness	2310

Assessment Requirements for BSBWOR502 Lead and manage team effectiveness	2315

CUFANM301A Create 2D digital animations	2317

CUFANM302A Create 3D digital animations	2327

CUFANM303A Create 3D digital models	2340

CUFANM401A Prepare 3D digital models for production	2350

CUFANM403A Create titles for screen productions	2361

CUFANM503A Design animation and digital visual effects	2372

CUFCMP301A Implement copyright arrangements	2385

CUFDIG201A Maintain interactive content	2394

CUFDIG301A Prepare video assets	2401

CUFDIG302A Author interactive sequences	2410

CUFDIG304A Create visual design components	2419

CUFDIG401A Author interactive media	2431

CUFDIG402A Design user interfaces	2443

CUFDIG403A Create user interfaces	2452

CUFDIG404A Apply scripting language in authoring	2464

CUFDIG501A Coordinate the testing of interactive media products	2471

CUFDIG502A Design web environments	2480

CUFDIG503A Design e-learning resources	2493

CUFDIG504A Design games	2508

CUFDIG505A Design information architecture	2521

CUVACD101A Use basic drawing techniques	2532

CUVACD201A Develop drawing skills to communicate ideas	2538

CUVACD401A Integrate colour theory and design processes	2544

CUVDIG401A Experiment with techniques to enhance digital images	2550

CUVGRD301A Prepare files for publication	2560

CUVGRD302A Use typography techniques	2568

CUVGRD401A Research and apply graphic design techniques	2577

CUVPRP401A Realise a creative project	2585

CUVGRD504A Create and manipulate graphics	2594

CUVGRD505A Design and manipulate complex layouts	2605

CUVPHI529A Employ colour management in a digital imaging workplace	2617

CUVPHI530A Prepare digital images for pre-press processing	2628

ICAB4135B Create a simple mark-up language document to specification	2637

ICTDBS504 Integrate database with a website	2646

Assessment Requirements for ICTDBS504 Integrate database with a website	2649

ICTNWK301 Provide network systems administration	2651

Assessment Requirements for ICTNWK301 Provide network systems administration	2655

ICTNWK302 Determine and action network problems	2657

Assessment Requirements for ICTNWK302 Determine and action network problems	2661

ICTNWK303 Configure and administer a network operating system	2663

Assessment Requirements for ICTNWK303 Configure and administer a network operating system	2668

ICTNWK304 Administer network peripherals	2670

Assessment Requirements for ICTNWK304 Administer network peripherals	2674

ICTNWK305 Install and manage network protocols	2676

Assessment Requirements for ICTNWK305 Install and manage network protocols	2680

ICTNWK401 Install and manage a server	2682

Assessment Requirements for ICTNWK401 Install and manage a server	2687

ICTNWK402 Install and configure virtual machines for sustainable ICT	2690

Assessment Requirements for ICTNWK402 Install and configure virtual machines for sustainable ICT	2694

ICTNWK403 Manage network and data integrity	2696

Assessment Requirements for ICTNWK403 Manage network and data integrity	2700

ICTNWK404 Install, operate and troubleshoot a small enterprise branch network	2702

Assessment Requirements for ICTNWK404 Install, operate and troubleshoot a small enterprise branch network	2707

ICTNWK405 Build a small wireless local area network	2709

Assessment Requirements for ICTNWK405 Build a small wireless local area network	2713

ICTNWK406 Install, configure and test network security	2715

Assessment Requirements for ICTNWK406 Install, configure and test network security	2719

ICTNWK407 Install and configure client-server applications and services	2722

Assessment Requirements for ICTNWK407 Install and configure client-server applications and services	2726

ICTNWK408 Configure a desktop environment	2728

Assessment Requirements for ICTNWK408 Configure a desktop environment	2733

ICTNWK409 Create scripts for networking	2736

Assessment Requirements for ICTNWK409 Create scripts for networking	2741

ICTNWK410 Install hardware to a network	2743

Assessment Requirements for ICTNWK410 Install hardware to a network	2747

ICTNWK411 Deploy software to networked computers	2749

Assessment Requirements for ICTNWK411 Deploy software to networked computers	2753

ICTNWK412 Create network documentation	2755

Assessment Requirements for ICTNWK412 Create network documentation	2759

ICTNWK414 Create a common gateway interface script	2761

Assessment Requirements for ICTNWK414 Create a common gateway interface script	2765

ICTNWK416 Build security into virtual private networks	2767

Assessment Requirements for ICTNWK416 Build security into virtual private networks	2770

ICTNWK417 Build an enterprise wireless network	2772

Assessment Requirements for ICTNWK417 Build an enterprise wireless network	2777

ICTNWK418 Implement backbone technologies in a local area network	2779

Assessment Requirements for ICTNWK418 Implement backbone technologies in a local area network	2783

ICTWEB401 Design a website to meet technical requirements	2785

Assessment Requirements for ICTWEB401 Design a website to meet technical requirements	2789

ICTWEB402 Confirm accessibility of websites for people with special needs	2791

Assessment Requirements for ICTWEB402 Confirm accessibility of websites for people with special needs	2795

ICTWEB403 Transfer content to a website using commercial packages	2797

Assessment Requirements for ICTWEB403 Transfer content to a website using commercial packages	2801

ICTWEB404 Maintain website performance	2803

Assessment Requirements for ICTWEB404 Maintain website performance	2808

ICTWEB405 Monitor traffic and compile website traffic reports	2810

Assessment Requirements for ICTWEB405 Monitor traffic and compile website traffic reports	2814

ICTWEB406 Create website testing procedures	2816

Assessment Requirements for ICTWEB406 Create website testing procedures	2820

ICTWEB407 Conduct operational acceptance tests of websites	2822

Assessment Requirements for ICTWEB407 Conduct operational acceptance tests of websites	2827

ICTWEB408 Ensure basic website security	2829

Assessment Requirements for ICTWEB408 Ensure basic website security	2833

ICTWEB409 Develop cascading style sheets	2835

Assessment Requirements for ICTWEB409 Develop cascading style sheets	2839

ICTWEB410 Apply web authoring tool to convert client data for websites	2841

Assessment Requirements for ICTWEB410 Apply web authoring tool to convert client data for websites	2846

ICTWEB411 Produce basic client-side script for dynamic web pages	2848

Assessment Requirements for ICTWEB411 Produce basic client-side script for dynamic web pages	2852

ICTWEB412 Produce interactive web animation	2854

Assessment Requirements for ICTWEB412 Produce interactive web animation	2858

ICTWEB413 Optimise search engines	2861

Assessment Requirements for ICTWEB413 Optimise search engines	2866

ICTWEB414 Design simple web page layouts	2868

Assessment Requirements for ICTWEB414 Design simple web page layouts	2872

ICTWEB415 Produce server-side script for dynamic web pages	2874

Assessment Requirements for ICTWEB415 Produce server-side script for dynamic web pages	2878

ICTWEB416 Customise content management system	2880

Assessment Requirements for ICTWEB416 Customise content management system	2884

ICTWEB417 Integrate social web technologies	2886

Assessment Requirements for ICTWEB417 Integrate social web technologies	2890

ICTWEB418 Use development software and ICT tools to build a basic website	2892

Assessment Requirements for ICTWEB418 Use development software and ICT tools to build a basic website	2896

ICTWEB419 Develop guidelines for uploading information to a website	2898

Assessment Requirements for ICTWEB419 Develop guidelines for uploading information to a website	2902

ICTWEB420 Write content for web pages	2904

Assessment Requirements for ICTWEB420 Write content for web pages	2908

ICTWEB421 Ensure website content meets technical protocols and standards	2910

Assessment Requirements for ICTWEB421 Ensure website content meets technical protocols and standards	2914

ICTWEB422 Ensure website access and useability	2916

Assessment Requirements for ICTWEB422 Ensure website access and useability	2921

ICTWEB423 Ensure dynamic website security	2923

Assessment Requirements for ICTWEB423 Ensure dynamic website security	2928

ICTWEB424 Evaluate and select a web hosting service	2931

Assessment Requirements for ICTWEB424 Evaluate and select a web hosting service	2936

ICTWEB425 Apply structured query language to extract and manipulate data	2938

Assessment Requirements for ICTWEB425 Apply structured query language to extract and manipulate data	2942

ICTWEB429 Create a markup language document to specification	2945

Assessment Requirements for ICTWEB429 Create a markup language document to specification	2949

ICTWEB502 Create dynamic web pages	2951

Assessment Requirements for ICTWEB502 Create dynamic web pages	2955

ICTWEB510 Analyse information and assign meta tags	2957

Assessment Requirements for ICTWEB510 Analyse information and assign meta tags	2961

MSACMT270A Use sustainable energy practices	2963

MSACMT271A Use sustainable environmental practices	2970

MSAENV272B Participate in environmentally sustainable work practices	2978

MSAENV472B Implement and monitor environmentally sustainable work practices	2987

MSAPMSUP390A Use structured problem solving tools	2997

MSL933001A Maintain the laboratory/field workplace fit for purpose	3003

MSL954001A Obtain representative samples in accordance with sampling plan	3018

MSL973001A Perform basic tests	3031

MSL973002A Prepare working solutions	3043

MSL974001A Prepare, standardise and use solutions	3054

MSS402001A Apply competitive systems and practices	3066

MSS402002A Sustain process improvements	3073

MSS402010A Manage the impact of change on own work	3081

MSS402030A Apply cost factors to work practices	3089

MSS402040A Apply 5S procedures	3095

MSS402080A Undertake root cause analysis	3103

MSS403010A Facilitate change in an organisation implementing competitive systems and practices	3111

MSS403040A Facilitate and improve implementation of 5S	3120

MSS405021A Develop a Just in Time system	3130

SIRXCCS006A Maintain business to business relationships	3139

SIRXCCS509 Manage business customers	3147

SIRXSLS002A Advise on products and services	3155

SIRXSLS008A Develop a sales strategy	3161

SIRXSLS201 Sell products and services	3167

SIRXSLS406 Manage sales and service delivery	3176

TAEASS402B Assess competence	3186

TAEDEL402A Plan, organise and facilitate learning in the workplace	3195

TLIA2041A Manually sort mail and parcels	3205

TLIA2043A Consolidate mail	3213

TLIA2047A Stream mail	3221

TLIW3006A Operate computerised mail and parcels sorting equipment	3229

ICP Printing and Graphic Arts	3237

ICPSS00001 Digital Fundamentals skill set	3238

ICP Printing and Graphic Arts

Copyright Statement
© 2015 Commonwealth of Australia. With the exception of the Commonwealth Coat of Arms, the Department’s logo, any material protected by a trade mark and where otherwise noted, all material presented in this document is provided under a Creative Commons Attribution-No Derivative Works 3.0 Australia licence. You are free: to copy, distribute, display, and perform the work to make commercial use of the work Under the following conditions: Attribution - You must give the original author credit. No Derivative Works - You may not alter, transform, or build upon this work. Special Conditions (Waiver) For the sake of clarity, where the license refers to "the work", in addition to meaning the work in its entirety this term shall also mean "extracts of the work". Extracts of the work carry with it the respective licence, and is thus “partitioned”. The details of the relevant licence conditions are available on the Creative Commons website (www.creativecommons.org.au) as is the full legal code. The document must be attributed as the ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Release 1.1.
Disclaimer
This work is the result of wide consultations with Australian industry participants. It is a collaborative view and does not necessarily represent the view of Department of Industry or any specific body. For the sake of brevity it may omit factors which could be pertinent in particular cases. While care has been taken in the preparation of this Training Package, Department of Industry and the original developer do not warrant that any licensing or registration requirements specified here are either complete or up-to-date for your State or Territory. Department of Industry and the original developer do not accept any liability for any damage or loss (including indirect and consequential loss) incurred by any person as a result of relying on the information contained in this Training Package. The Commonwealth, through the Department of Industry, does not accept any liability to any person for the information or advice (or the use of such information or advice) which is provided in this material or incorporated into it by reference. The information is provided on the basis that all persons accessing this material undertake responsibility for assessing the relevance and accuracy of its content. No liability is accepted for any information or services which may appear in any other format. No responsibility is taken for any information or services which may appear on any linked websites.

Published by:	Innovation and Business Skills Australia

Release Date:	April 2015

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICP20115 Certificate II in Printing and Graphic Arts (General)

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This qualification first released with ICP Printing & Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Qualification Description

This qualification applies to individuals who perform a range of mainly routine tasks in the printing and graphic arts industry. They work under direct supervision, and use limited practical skills and fundamental operational knowledge in a defined context.

It is a preparatory qualification that can be used as a pathway into a range of specialist Certificate III qualifications within the printing and graphic arts industry.

Licensing/Regulatory Information

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this qualification at the time of publication.

Entry Requirements

Nil

Packaging Rules

Total number of units = 15 units

4 core units, plus

11 elective units of which:

8 elective units must be selected from the elective groups below

3 elective units may be selected from the remaining units or from qualifications at the same level or one level higher in any endorsed Training Package or accredited course.

Elective units must be relevant to the work environment and the qualification, maintain the integrity of the AQF alignment and contribute to a valid, industry-supported vocational outcome.

Refer to the Companion Volume Implementation Guide for advice about choosing electives to support specialisations in particular sectors of the printing and graphics arts industry.

Core Units

BSBSUS201 Participate in environmentally sustainable work practices

ICPSUP216 Inspect quality against required standards

ICPSUP260 Maintain a safe work environment

ICPSUP262 Communicate in the workplace

Elective Units

Group A

Converting, binding and finishing

ICPCBF105 Operate in-line mail machine

ICPCBF202 Handline mail

ICPCBF203 Collate and insert mail manually

ICPCBF204 Operate addressing machine

ICPCBF208 Set up and operate a cheque mailer machine

ICPCBF209 Set up and operate in-line mail machine

ICPCBF211 Set up and run machine for sewing

ICPCBF214 Set up single-faced web

ICPCBF216 Set up double-faced web

ICPCBF218 Produce basic folded and glued cartons

ICPCBF220 Produce basic converted or finished product

ICPCBF221 Set up and produce basic guillotined product

ICPCBF222 Set up and operate in-line cutter

ICPCBF223 Set up machine for cutting (trimming)

ICPCBF224 Produce cut (trimmed) product

ICPCBF225 Set up machine for basic flat-bed die cutting or embossing

ICPCBF226 Produce basic flat-bed die cut or embossed product

ICPCBF227 Set up machine for basic rotary die cutting or embossing

ICPCBF228 Produce basic rotary die cut or embossed product

ICPCBF231 Set up machine for basic flat-bed cutting

ICPCBF232 Produce basic flat-bed cut product

ICPCBF235 Set up machine for basic rotary cutting

ICPCBF236 Produce basic rotary cut product

ICPCBF241 Set up machine for basic single or continuous folding

ICPCBF242 Produce basic single or continuous folded product

ICPCBF243 Set up machine for basic collating or inserting (sheet/section)

ICPCBF244 Produce basic collated or inserted (sheet/section) product

ICPCBF245 Set up and produce hand-collated or -inserted product

ICPCBF261 Set up machine for basic adhesive, mechanical or thermal fastening

ICPCBF262 Produce basic adhesive, mechanical or thermal fastened product

ICPCBF263 Set up and produce hand-fastened product

ICPCBF281 Set up machine for basic laminating

ICPCBF282 Produce basic laminated product

ICPCBF294 Set up profile cutting for envelope manufacture

ICPCBF297 Clean sack and bag machines

ICPCBF298 Run and monitor sack and bag machines

ICPCBF300* Run and monitor in-line tube making machine for sack or bag manufacture

ICPCBF301* Run and monitor in-line bottom making machine for sack or bag manufacture

ICPCBF305 Produce single-faced web

ICPCBF307 Produce double-faced web

ICPCBF311 Prepare for cutting forme and stripper making

ICPCBF312 Set cutting forme and strippers

ICPCBF341 Set up machine for complex sequenced or multiple folding

TLIA2043A Consolidate mail

TLIA2047A Stream mail

TLIA2041A Manually sort mail and parcels

TLIW3006A Operate computerised mail and parcels sorting equipment

Group B

Ink manufacture

ICPINK211 Select and prepare materials for production

ICPINK221 Blend chemicals

ICPINK251 Filter and pack product

ICPINK331 Manufacture inks and coatings

ICPINK335 Manufacture varnish and resin

Group C

Digital media technologies

ICPDMT263 Access and use the Internet

ICPDMT296 Create and test a CD-ROM/DVD

ICPDMT321 Capture a digital image

ICPDMT322 Edit a digital image

ICTWEB429 Create a markup language document to specification

Group D

Pre-press

ICPPRP211 Develop a basic design concept

ICPPRP221 Select and apply type

ICPPRP223 Photograph a line image

ICPPRP224 Produce pages using a page layout application

ICPPRP225 Produce graphics using a graphics application

ICPPRP231 Manually combine spot colour and basic four-colour images

ICPPRP232 Electronically combine and assemble data

ICPPRP252 Output images

ICPPRP260 Proof images

ICPPRP266 Produce relief plates

ICPPRP267 Produce offset lithographic plates

ICPPRP268 Make photopolymer plates (flexographic)

ICPPRP269 Produce photopolymer plates for pad printing

ICPPRP272 Produce gravure cylinders manually

ICPPRP281 Design basic carton

ICPPRP283 Prepare artwork for screen printing

ICPPRP284 Produce PDF files for online or screen display

ICPPRP286 Scan images for reproduction

ICPPRP321* Produce a typographic image

ICPPRP322 Digitise images for reproduction

ICPPRP385 Operate a database for digital printing

ICPPRP397 Transfer digital files

Group E

Printing

ICPPRN211 Mount and proof flexographic plates for basic printing

ICPPRN214 Produce basic flexographic printed product

ICPPRN222 Produce basic gravure printed product

ICPPRN232 Produce basic lithographic printed product

ICPPRN242 Produce basic pad printed product

ICPPRN261 Set up for foil stamping

ICPPRN262 Produce foil stamped product

ICPPRN271 Set up for basic coating

ICPPRN272 Produce basic coated product

ICPPRN282 Produce and manage basic digital print

ICPPRN283 Use digital media consumables

ICPPRN284 Introduction to colour management

ICPPRN285 Use digital workflow

ICPPRN286 Finish a digital product

ICPPRN287 Use digital processes

ICPPRN288 Produce basic relief printed product

ICPPRN313 Set up for basic flexographic printing

ICPPRN341 Set up for basic pad printing

ICPPRN384 Set up and produce basic digital print

Group F

Screen printing

ICPSCP211 Reclaim screen automatically

ICPSCP215 Prepare screen

ICPSCP221 Prepare substrate

ICPSCP222 Prepare and cut screen print substrate

ICPSCP233 Manually prepare direct emulsion stencil

ICPSCP235 Prepare stencil using photographic indirect method

ICPSCP270 Manually prepare and produce screen prints

ICPSCP271 Manually produce basic screen prints

ICPSCP273 Semi-automatically produce basic screen prints

ICPSCP275 Automatically produce basic screen prints

ICPSCP281 Finish screen print products

ICPSCP282 Prepare film for basic screen printing

ICPSCP311 Reclaim screen manually

ICPSCP383 Prepare film for complex screen printing

Group G

Support

BSBCUS301 Deliver and monitor a service to customers

ICPSUP120 Pack product

ICPSUP201 Prepare, load and unload reels and cores on and off machine

ICPSUP202 Prepare, load and unload product on and off machine

ICPSUP203 Prepare and maintain the work area

ICPSUP207 Prepare machine for operation (basic)

ICPSUP208 Operate and monitor machines (basic)

ICPSUP211 Prepare ink and additives

ICPSUP212 Prepare coatings and adhesives

ICPSUP221 Pack and dispatch product

ICPSUP222 Pack and dispatch solid waste

ICPSUP235 Lift loads mechanically

ICPSUP236 Shift loads mechanically

ICPSUP241 Undertake warehouse or stores materials processing

ICPSUP243 Reconcile process outputs

ICPSUP261 Follow WHS practices and identify environmental hazards

ICPSUP263 Perform basic industry calculations

ICPSUP271 Provide basic instruction for a task

ICPSUP280 Enter data into electronic system

ICPSUP281 Use computer systems

ICPSUP282 Undertake basic machine maintenance

ICPSUP323 Dispose of waste

ICPSUP342 Undertake inventory procedures

ICPSUP357 Apply quick changeover procedures

ICPSUP389 Undertake basic root cause analysis

MSAENV272B Participate in environmentally sustainable work practices

MSS402010A Manage the impact of change on own work

MSS402001A Apply competitive systems and practices

MSS402002A Sustain process improvements

MSS402030A Apply cost factors to work practices

MSS402040A Apply 5S procedures

MSS402080A Undertake root cause analysis

* Note the following prerequisite unit requirements:

Code and title in this qualification	Prerequisite units required
ICPPRP321 Produce a typographic image	ICPRP221 Select and apply type
ICPCBF300 Run and monitor in-line tube making machine for sack or bag manufacture	ICPCBF298 Run and monitor sack and bag machines
ICPCBF301 Run and monitor in-line bottom making machine for sack or bag manufacture	ICPCBF298 Run and monitor sack and bag machines

Qualification Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICP20114 Certificate II in Printing and Graphic Arts	ICP20110 Certificate II in Printing and Graphic Arts (General) ICP20210 Certificate II in Printing and Graphic Arts (Desktop Publishing) ICP20310 Certificate II in Printing and Graphic Arts (Digital Printing) ICP20410 Certificate II in Printing and Graphic Arts (Print Production Support) ICP20510 Certificate II in Printing and Graphic Arts (Screen Printing) ICP20610 Certificate II in Printing and Graphic Arts (Converting, Binding and Finishing) ICP20710 Certificate II in Printing and Graphic Arts (Sacks and Bags) ICP20810 Certificate II in Printing and Graphic Arts (Cartons) ICP20910 Certificate II in Printing and Graphic Arts (Corrugating) ICP21010 Certificate II in Printing and Graphic Arts (Mail House) ICP21110 Certificate II in Printing and Graphic Arts (Ink Manufacture)	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages 11 qualifications merged into one to allow more flexibility	Equivalent qualification

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICP30115 Certificate III in Printing and Graphic Arts (Graphic Design Production)

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This qualification first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Qualification Description

This qualification applies to an individual who produces art and layouts of wording for reproduction in print and electronic media. In roles such as a desktop publisher or assistant graphic artist, they may also provide some leadership and guidance to others with some limited responsibility for the output of others.

Licensing/Regulatory Information

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this qualification at the time of publication.

Entry Requirements

Nil

Packaging Rules

Total number of units = 19 units

4 core units, plus

15 electives of which:

9 elective units must be from Group A

3 elective units must be from Group A or B

the remaining 3 elective units may be selected from the remaining elective units, from other qualifications in this Training Package or any other endorsed Training Package, or from an accredited course at Certificate III or IV level.

Elective units must be relevant to the work environment and the qualification, maintain the integrity of the AQF alignment and contribute to a valid, industry-supported vocational outcome.

Core Units

BSBSUS201 Participate in environmentally sustainable work practices

ICPSUP216 Inspect quality against required standards

ICPSUP260 Maintain a safe work environment

ICPSUP262 Communicate in the workplace

Elective Units

Group A

CUVGRD302A Use typography techniques

ICPKNW311 Apply knowledge of the graphic pre-press sector

ICPDMT322 Edit a digital image

ICPPRP211 Develop a basic design concept

ICPPRP221 Select and apply type

ICPPRP224 Produce pages using a page layout application

ICPPRP225 Produce graphics using a graphics application

ICPPRP252 Output images

ICPPRP311 Develop a detailed design concept *

ICPPRP324 Create pages using a page layout application *

ICPPRP325 Create graphics using a graphics application

ICPPRP397 Transfer digital files

Group B

BSBCMM401 Make a presentation

BSBDES302 Explore and apply the creative design process to 2D forms

CUVACD101A Use basic drawing techniques

CUVACD201A Develop drawing skills to communicate ideas

CUVACD401A Integrate colour theory and design processes

ICPDMT321 Capture a digital image

ICPPRP260 Proof images

ICPPRP284 Produce PDF files for online or screen display

ICPPRP286 Scan images for reproduction

ICPPRP334 Prepare an imposition format for printing processes

ICPPRP352 Output complex images *

ICPPRP386 Undertake digital proofing

ICPPRP411 Undertake a complex design brief

ICPPRP421 Compose and evaluate typography

ICPPRP423 Apply colour to design brief

ICPPRP430 Manage colour

ICPPRP435 Generate complex imposition

ICPPRP452 Output complex images direct to plate or press*

ICPSUP351 Undertake basic production scheduling

ICPSUP381 Operate and maintain computer resources

ICPSUP456 Control production

MSS402010A Manage the impact of change on own work

MSS402001A Apply competitive systems and practices

MSS402002A Sustain process improvements

MSS402030A Apply cost factors to work practices

MSS402040A Apply 5S procedures

MSS402080A Undertake root cause analysis

MSAENV272B Participate in environmentally sustainable work practices

MSAPMSUP390A Use structured problem solving tools

*Note the following prerequisite unit requirements:

Unit in this qualification	Prerequisite unit
ICPPRP311 Develop a detailed design concept	ICPPRP211 Develop a basic design concept
ICPPRP324 Create pages using a page layout application	ICPPRP224 Produce pages using a page layout application
ICPPRP452 Output complex images direct to plate or press	ICPPRP352 Output complex images
ICPPRP352 Output complex images	ICPPRP252 Output images

Qualification Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICP30115 Certificate III in Printing and Graphic Arts (Graphic Design Production)	ICP30112 Certificate III in Printing and Graphic Arts (Graphic Design Production)	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent qualification

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICP30215 Certificate III in Printing and Graphic Arts (Graphic Prepress)

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This qualification first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Qualification Description

This qualification applies to individuals working as a pre-press tradesperson. Typically they design and prepare layouts and artwork, manipulate images and text to meet production and design requirements and apply solutions to a defined range of problems associated with, and characteristic to, the print medium. They may also provide some leadership and guidance to others with some limited responsibility for the output of others.

Licensing/Regulatory Information

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this qualification at the time of publication.

Entry Requirements

Nil

Packaging Rules

Total number of units = 21 units

4 core units, plus

17 elective units of which:

10 elective units must be from Group A

2 elective units must be from group A or B

2 elective units must be from Group B

the remaining 3 elective units may be selected from the remaining elective units, from other qualifications in this Training Package or any other endorsed Training Package, or from an accredited course at Certificate III or IV level.

Elective units must be relevant to the work environment and the qualification, maintain the integrity of the AQF alignment and contribute to a valid, industry-supported vocational outcome.

Core Units

BSBSUS201 Participate in environmentally sustainable work practices

ICPSUP216 Inspect quality against required standards

ICPSUP260 Maintain a safe work environment

ICPSUP262 Communicate in the workplace

Elective Units

Group A

ICPKNW311 Apply knowledge of the graphic pre-press sector

ICPDMT263 Access and use the Internet

ICPPRP211 Develop a basic design concept

ICPPRP221 Select and apply type

ICPPRP224 Produce pages using a page layout application

ICPPRP225 Produce graphics using a graphics application

ICPPRP252 Output images

ICPPRP321* Produce a typographic image

ICPPRP322 Digitise images for reproduction

ICPPRP324* Create pages using a page layout application

ICPPRP334 Prepare an imposition format for printing processes

ICPPRP386 Undertake digital proofing

ICPPRP397 Transfer digital files

Group B

CUFANM301A Create 2D digital animation

ICTWEB429 Create a markup language document to specification

ICTWEB410 Apply web authoring tool to convert client data for websites

ICPDMT296 Create and test a CD-ROM/DVD

ICPDMT321 Capture a digital image

ICPDMT322 Edit a digital image

ICPDMT344 Manipulate and incorporate audio into multimedia presentations

ICPDMT346 Incorporate video into multimedia presentations

ICPPRP231 Manually combine spot colour and basic four-colour images

ICPPRP266 Produce relief plates

ICPPRP267 Produce offset lithographic plates

ICPPRP268 Make photopolymer plates (flexographic)

ICPPRP269 Produce photopolymer plates for pad printing

ICPPRP272 Produce gravure cylinders manually

ICPPRP284 Produce PDF files for online or screen display

ICPPRP325 Create graphics using a graphics application

ICPPRP331 Manually combine complex four-colour images

ICPPRP370 Produce multiple image plates

ICPPRP372 Produce gravure cylinders electronically

ICPPRP385 Operate a database for digital printing

ICPPRP396* Generate high-end PDF files

ICPPRP430 Manage colour

ICPPRN282 Produce and manage basic digital print

ICPPRN284 Introduction to colour management

ICPPRN383 Prepare for personalised digital printing

ICPPRN384 Set up and produce basic digital print

ICPPRN387* Use colour management for production

ICPPRN388 Preflight and import complex images for digital device

ICPPRN389 Manage digital files

ICPPRN495* Set up and use complex colour management for production

ICPSUP345 Purchase materials and schedule deliveries

MSS402010A Manage the impact of change on own work

MSS402001A Apply competitive systems and practices

MSS402002A Sustain process improvements

MSS402030A Apply cost factors to work practices

MSS402040A Apply 5S procedures

MSS402080A Undertake root cause analysis

MSAPMSUP390A Use structured problem solving tools

SIRXSLS406 Manage sales and service delivery

* Note the following prerequisite unit requirements:

Unit in this qualification	Prerequisite unit
ICPPRP321 Produce a typographic image	ICPPP221 Select and apply type
ICPPRP324 Create pages using a page layout application	ICPPP224 Produce pages using a page layout application
ICPPRP396 Generate high-end PDF files	ICPPP284 Produce PDF files for online or screen display
ICPPRN387 Use colour management for production	ICPPRN284 Introduction to colour management
ICPPRN495 Set up and use complex colour management for production	ICPPRN387 Use colour management for production

Qualification Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICP30215 Certificate III in Printing and Graphic Arts (Graphic Prepress)	ICP30212 Certificate III in Printing and Graphic Arts (Graphic Prepress)	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent qualification

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICP30315 Certificate III in Printing and Graphic Arts (Multimedia)

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This qualification first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Qualification Description

This qualification applies to individuals working in the multimedia sector in roles such as a content author, graphic design assistant, website designer, print press worker or desktop publisher. They apply solutions to a defined range of unpredictable problems, design and author multimedia information, create electronic documents, manipulate databases and information systems. They may also provide leadership and guidance to others with some limited responsibility for the output of others

Licensing/Regulatory Information

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this qualification at the time of publication.

Entry Requirements

Nil

Packaging Rules

Total number of units = 19 units

4 core units, plus

15 elective units of which:

9 elective units must be from Group A

2 elective units must be from Group A or Group B

2 elective units must be selected from Group B

the remaining 2 elective units may be selected from the remaining elective units, from other qualifications in this Training Package or any other endorsed Training Package, or from an accredited course at Certificate III or IV level.

Elective units must be relevant to the work environment and the qualification, maintain the integrity of the AQF alignment and contribute to a valid, industry-supported vocational outcome.

Core Units

BSBSUS201 Participate in environmentally sustainable work practices

ICPSUP216 Inspect quality against required standards

ICPSUP260 Maintain a safe work environment

ICPSUP262 Communicate in the workplace

Elective Units

Group A

ICTWEB429 Create a markup language document to specification

ICPKNW315 Apply knowledge and requirements of the multimedia sector

ICPDMT263 Access and use the Internet

ICPDMT322 Edit a digital image

ICPPRP211 Develop a basic design concept

ICPPRP221 Select and apply type

ICPPRP224 Produce pages using a page layout application

ICPPRP225 Produce graphics using a graphics application

ICPPRP252 Output images

ICPPRP324* Create pages using a page layout application

ICPSUP381 Operate and maintain computer resources

ICPPRP397 Transfer digital files

Group B

BSBCUS301 Deliver and monitor a service to customers

BSBDES302 Explore and apply the creative design process to 2D forms

BSBINN201 Contribute to workplace innovation

CUFANM301A Create 2D digital animation

CUFDIG404A Apply scripting language to authoring

CUFDIG201A Maintain interactive content

ICTNWK414 Create a common gateway interface script

ICTWEB418 Use development software and ICT tools to build a basic website

ICTWEB409 Develop cascading style sheets

ICTWEB510 Analyse information and assign meta tags

ICTWEB421 Ensure website content meets technical protocols and standards

ICTWEB410 Apply web authoring tool to convert client data for websites

ICPDMT296 Create and test a CD-ROM/DVD

ICPDMT321 Capture a digital image

ICPDMT344 Manipulate and incorporate audio into multimedia presentations

ICPDMT346 Incorporate video into multimedia presentations

ICPPRP284 Produce PDF files for online or screen display

ICPPRP311* Develop a detailed design concept

ICPPRP325 Create graphics using a graphics application

ICPPRP396* Generate high-end PDF files

ICPPRP334 Prepare an imposition format for printing processes

ICPPRP386 Undertake digital proofing

ICPPRP385 Operate a database for digital printing

ICPSUP351 Undertake basic production scheduling

ICPSUP456 Control production

MSS402010A Manage the impact of change on own work

MSS402001A Apply competitive manufacturing practices

MSS402002A Sustain process improvements

MSS402030A Apply cost factors to work practices

MSS402040A Apply 5S procedures

MSS402080A Undertake root cause analysis

MSAPMSUP390A Use structured problem solving tools

*Note the following prerequisite unit requirements:

Unit in this qualification	Prerequisite unit
ICPPRP324 Create pages using a page layout application	ICPPRP224 Produce pages using a page layout application
ICPPRP311 Develop a detailed design concept	ICPPRP211 Develop a basic design concept
ICPPRP396 Generate high-end PDF files	ICPPRP284 Produce PDF files for online or screen display

Qualification Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICP30315 Certificate III in Printing and Graphic Arts (Multimedia)	ICP30312 Certificate III in Printing and Graphic Arts (Multimedia)	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent qualification

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICP30415 Certificate III in Printing and Graphic Arts (Digital Printing)

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This qualification first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Qualification Description

This qualification applies to skilled operators such as digital print managers who are responsible for digital production workflow, such as job creation, printing and finishing. They apply a broad range of competencies in a varied work context, using some discretion and judgement and relevant theoretical knowledge. They provide technical advice and support to others.

Licensing/Regulatory Information

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this qualification at the time of publication.

Entry Requirements

Nil

Packaging Rules

Total number of units = 19 units

4 core units, plus

15 elective units of which

9 elective units must be from Group A

4 elective units must be from Group A or B

the remaining 2 elective units may be selected from the remaining elective units, from other qualifications in this Training Package or any other endorsed Training Package, or from an accredited course at Certificate III or IV level.

Elective units must be relevant to the work environment and the qualification, maintain the integrity of the AQF alignment and contribute to a valid, industry-supported vocational outcome.

Core Units

BSBSUS201 Participate in environmentally sustainable work practices

ICPSUP216 Inspect quality against required standards

ICPSUP260 Maintain a safe work environment

ICPSUP262 Communicate in the workplace

Elective Units

Group A

BSBCUS301 Deliver and monitor a service to customers

BSBSMB301 Investigate micro business opportunities

ICPKNW321 Apply knowledge and requirements of digital production

ICPPRN282 Produce and manage basic digital print

ICPPRN384 Set up and produce basic digital print

ICPSUP203 Prepare and maintain the work area

ICPSUP263 Perform basic industry calculations

ICPSUP281 Use computer systems

ICPSUP342 Undertake inventory procedures

ICPSUP351 Undertake basic production scheduling

SIRXSLS201 Sell products and services

SIRXSLS002A Advise on products and services

Group B

BSBITU306 Design and produce business documents

BSBSMB402 Plan small business finances

BSBSMB403 Market the small business

ICTWEB429 Create a markup language document to specification

ICPCBF221 Set up and produce basic guillotined product

ICPCBF225 Set up machine for basic flat-bed die cutting or embossing

ICPCBF226 Produce basic flat-bed die cut or embossed product

ICPCBF231 Set up machine for basic flat-bed cutting

ICPCBF232 Produce basic flat-bed cut product

ICPCBF241 Set up machine for basic single or continuous folding

ICPCBF242 Produce basic single or continuous folded product

ICPCBF243 Set up machine for basic collating or inserting (sheet/section)

ICPCBF244 Produce basic collated (sheet/section) product

ICPCBF281 Set up machine for basic laminating

ICPCBF282 Produce basic laminated product

ICPCBF381 Set up machine for complex laminating

ICPCBF382 Produce complex laminated product

ICPPRP211 Develop a basic design concept

ICPPRP224 Produce pages using a page layout application

ICPPRP252 Output images

ICPPRP266 Produce relief plates

ICPPRP268 Make photopolymer plates (flexographic)

ICPPRP269 Produce photopolymer plates for pad printing

ICPPRP284 Produce PDF files for online or screen display

ICPPRP334 Prepare an imposition format for printing processes

ICPPRP352 Output complex images

ICPPRP370 Produce multiple image plates

ICPPRP385 Operate a database for digital printing

ICPPRP396 Generate high-end PDF files

ICPPRP397 Transfer digital files

ICPPRP452 Output complex images direct to plate or press

ICPPRP484 Set up and operate automated workflow

ICPPRN271 Set up for basic coating

ICPPRN272 Produce basic coated product

ICPPRN382 Produce and manage complex digital print

ICPPRN383 Prepare for personalised digital printing

ICPPRN385 Apply software applications to digital production

ICPPRN386 Troubleshoot digital media

ICPPRN387 Use colour management for production

ICPPRN388 Preflight and import complex images for digital device

ICPPRN389 Manage digital files

ICPPRN390 Generate a proof for digital production

ICPPRN392 Set up and produce specialised digital print

ICPPRN471 Set up for complex coating

ICPPRN472 Produce complex coated product

ICPPRN496 Set up and produce complex digital print

ICPPRN484 Prepare for variable data printing

ICPSCP215 Prepare screen

ICPSCP222 Prepare and cut screen print substrate

ICPSCP270 Manually prepare and produce screen prints

ICPSCP273 Semi-automatically produce basic screen prints

ICPSCP275 Automatically produce basic screen prints

ICPSCP311 Reclaim screen manually

ICPSCP351 Prepare machine and drying/curing unit

ICPSCP374 Operate a semi-automatic screen printing machine

ICPSCP382 Produce computer image for screen printing

ICPSCP383 Prepare film for complex screen printing

ICPSUP485 Implement a just-in-time system

MSS402010A Manage the impact of change on own work

MSS402001A Apply competitive systems and practices

MSS402002A Sustain process improvements

MSS402030A Apply cost factors to work practices

MSS402040A Apply 5S procedures

MSACMT270A Use sustainable energy practices

MSACMT271A Use sustainable environmental practices

MSS402080A Undertake root cause analysis

MSAENV272B Participate in environmentally sustainable work practices

MSAPMSUP390A Use structured problem solving tools

*Note the following prerequisite unit requirements:

Unit in this qualification	Prerequisite unit
ICPPRP396 Generate high-end PDF files	ICPPRP284 Produce PDF files for online or screen display
ICPPRP452 Output complex image direct to plate or press	ICPPRP352 Output complex images
ICPPRN496 Set up and produce complex digital print	ICPPRN384 Set up and produce basic digital print

Qualification Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICP30415 Certificate III in Printing and Graphic Arts (Digital Printing)	ICP30412 Certificate III in Printing and Graphic Arts (Digital Printing)	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent qualification

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICP30515 Certificate III in Printing and Graphic Arts (Printing)

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This qualification first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Qualification Description

This qualification applies to individuals working as print machinists who typically set up and operate letterpress, lithographic, flexographic, gravure printing presses, digital printers and work on a range of printed products. They prepare material, monitor and run equipment and machinery and apply solutions to a defined range of unpredictable problems. They may also provide leadership and guidance to others with some limited responsibility for the output of others.

Licensing/Regulatory Information

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this qualification at the time of publication.

Entry Requirements

Nil

Packaging Rules

Total number of units = 21 units

4 core units, plus

17 elective units of which:

9 elective units must be from Group A

3 elective units must be from Group A or B

3 elective units must be from Group B or C

the remaining 2 elective units may be selected from the remaining elective units, from other qualifications in this Training Package or any other endorsed Training Package, or from an accredited course at Certificate III or IV level.

Elective units must be relevant to the work environment and the qualification, maintain the integrity of the AQF alignment and contribute to a valid, industry-supported vocational outcome.

Core Units

BSBSUS201 Participate in environmentally sustainable work practices

ICPSUP216 Inspect quality against required standards

ICPSUP260 Maintain a safe work environment

ICPSUP262 Communicate in the workplace

Elective Units

Group A

ICPKNW312 Apply knowledge of printing machining OR

ICPKNW321 Apply knowledge and requirements of digital production

ICPSUP201 Prepare, load and unload reels and cores on and off machine* OR

ICPSUP202 Prepare, load and unload product on and off machine*

ICPSUP203 Prepare and maintain the work area

ICPSUP207 Prepare machine for operation (basic)

ICPSUP208 Operate and monitor machines (basic)

ICPSUP211 Prepare ink and additives

ICPSUP282 Undertake basic machine maintenance

ICPSUP263 Perform basic industry calculations

ICPSUP281 Use computer systems

ICPSUP323 Dispose of waste

ICPSUP357 Apply quick changeover procedures

ICPPRN385 Apply software applications to digital production

Group B

ICPPRN392 Set up and produce specialised digital print

ICPPRN413 Set up for complex flexographic printing

ICPPRN421 Set up for complex gravure printing

ICPPRN431 Set up for complex lithographic printing

ICPPRN441 Set up for complex pad printing

ICPPRN451 Set up for complex relief printing

ICPPRN496 Set up and produce complex digital print

Group C

BSBCUS301 Deliver and monitor a service to customers

ICTWEB429 Create a markup language document to specification

ICPCBF221 Set up and produce basic guillotined product

ICPCBF225 Set up machine for basic flat-bed die cutting or embossing

ICPCBF226 Produce basic flat-bed die cut or embossed product

ICPCBF231 Set up machine for basic flat-bed cutting

ICPCBF232 Produce basic flat-bed cut product

ICPCBF241 Set up machine for basic single or continuous folding

ICPCBF242 Produce basic single or continuous folded product

ICPCBF243 Set up machine for basic collating or inserting (sheet/section)

ICPCBF244 Produce basic collated (sheet/section) product

ICPCBF281 Set up machine for basic laminating

ICPCBF282 Produce basic laminated product

ICPCBF341 Set up machine for complex sequenced or multiple folding

ICPCBF381 Set up machine for complex laminating

ICPCBF382 Produce complex laminated product

ICPPRP211 Develop a basic design concept

ICPPRP252 Output images

ICPPRP266 Produce relief plates

ICPPRP267 Produce offset lithographic plates

ICPPRP268 Make photopolymer plates (flexographic)

ICPPRP269 Produce photopolymer plates for pad printing

ICPPRP272 Produce gravure cylinders manually

ICPPRP352 Output complex images

ICPPRP370 Produce multiple image plates

ICPPRP372 Produce gravure cylinders electronically

ICPPRP397 Transfer digital images

ICPPRN211 Mount and proof flexographic plates for basic printing

ICPPRN214 Produce basic flexographic printed product

ICPPRN261 Set up for foil stamping

ICPPRN262 Produce foil stamped product

ICPPRN271 Set up for basic coating

ICPPRN272 Produce basic coated product

ICPPRN282 Produce and manage basic digital print

ICPPRN313 Set up for basic flexographic printing

ICPPRN314 Produce complex flexographic printed product OR

ICPPRN222 Produce basic gravure printed product

ICPPRN321 Set up for basic gravure printing

ICPPRN322 Produce complex gravure printed product OR

ICPPRN232 Produce basic lithographic printed product

ICPPRN331 Set up for basic lithographic printing

ICPPRN332 Produce complex lithographic printed product OR

ICPPRN242 Produce basic pad printed product

ICPPRN341 Set up for basic pad printing

ICPPRN342 Produce complex pad printed product OR

ICPPRN288 Produce basic relief printed product

ICPPRN382 Produce and manage complex digital print

ICPPRN383 Prepare for personalised digital printing

ICPPRN384 Set up and produce basic digital print OR

ICPPRN394 Produce complex relief printed product

ICPPRN386 Troubleshoot digital media

ICPPRN387 Use colour management for production

ICPPRN388 Preflight and import complex images for digital device

ICPPRN389 Manage digital files

ICPPRN390 Generate a proof for digital production

ICPPRN393 Set up for basic relief printing

ICPPRN494* Apply advanced software applications to digital production

ICPSCP311 Reclaim screen manually

ICPSCP215 Prepare screen

ICPSCP222 Prepare and cut screen print substrate

ICPSCP270 Manually prepare and produce screen prints

ICPSCP273 Semi-automatically produce basic screen prints

ICPSCP275 Automatically produce basic screen prints

ICPSCP351 Prepare machine and drying/curing unit

ICPSCP374 Operate a semi-automatic screen printing machine

ICPSCP382 Produce computer image for screen printing

ICPSCP383 Prepare film for complex screen printing

ICPSUP212 Prepare coatings, adhesives

ICPSUP221 Pack and dispatch product

ICPSUP222 Pack and dispatch solid waste

ICPSUP235 Lift loads mechanically

ICPSUP236 Shift loads mechanically

ICPSUP241 Undertake warehouse or stores materials processing

ICPSUP271 Provide basic instruction for a task

ICPSUP311* Prepare ink and additives (advanced)

ICPSUP342 Undertake inventory procedures

ICPSUP351 Undertake basic production scheduling

ICPSUP362 Communicate as part of a work team

ICPSUP381 Operate and maintain computer resources

MSS402010A Manage the impact of change on own work

MSS402001A Apply competitive systems and practices

MSS402002A Sustain process improvements

MSS402030A Apply cost factors to work practices

MSS402040A Apply 5S procedures

MSS402080A Undertake root cause analysis

MSAENV272B Participate in environmentally sustainable work practices

MSAPMSUP390A Use structured problem solving tools

*Note the following prerequisite unit requirements:

Unit in this qualification	Prerequisite unit
ICPSUP311 Prepare ink and additives (advanced)	ICPSUP211 Prepare ink and additives
ICPPRN494 Apply advanced software applications to digital production	ICPPRN385 Apply software applications to digital production

Qualification Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICP30515 Certificate III in Printing and Graphic Arts (Printing)	ICP30512 Certificate III in Printing and Graphic Arts (Printing)	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent qualification

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICP30615 Certificate III in Printing and Graphic Arts (Screen Printing)

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This qualification first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Qualification Description

This qualification applies to individuals working as a screen printer or stencil preparer who set up and operate power driven or hand-operated, screen printing machines to create visual images. They may also provide leadership and guidance to others with some limited responsibility for the output of others.

Licensing/Regulatory Information

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this qualification at the time of publication.

Entry Requirements

Nil

Packaging Rules

Total number of units = 21 units

4 core units, plus

17 elective units of which

9 elective units must be from Group A

3 elective units must be from Group A or B

1 elective unit must be from Group B

1 elective unit must be from Group C

1 elective unit must be from Group B, C or D

the remaining 2 elective units may be selected from the remaining elective units, from other qualifications in this Training Package or any other endorsed Training Package, or from an accredited course at Certificate III or IV level.

Elective units must be relevant to the work environment and the qualification, maintain the integrity of the AQF alignment and contribute to a valid, industry-supported vocational outcome.

Core Units

BSBSUS201 Participate in environmentally sustainable work practices

ICPSUP216 Inspect quality against required standards

ICPSUP260 Maintain a safe work environment

ICPSUP262 Communicate in the workplace

Elective Units

Group A

ICPKNW314 Apply knowledge and requirements of the screen printing sector

ICPPRP382 Produce computer image for screen printing

ICPSCP215 Prepare screen

ICPSCP233 Manually prepare direct emulsion stencil

ICPSCP311 Reclaim screen manually

ICPSUP202 Prepare, load and unload product on and off machine

ICPSUP203 Prepare and maintain the work area

ICPSUP211 Prepare ink and additives

ICPSUP263 Perform basic industry calculations

ICPSUP281 Use computer systems

ICPSUP352 Plan operational processes

ICPSUP362 Communicate as part of a work team

Group B

ICPSCP235 Prepare stencil using photographic indirect method

ICPSCP337 Prepare stencil using photographic capillary method

ICPSCP282 Prepare film for basic screen printing

ICPSCP333 Automatically prepare direct emulsion stencil

ICPSCP339 Prepare stencil using direct projection method

ICPSCP341 Prepare stencil using direct electronic imaging method

Group C

ICPSCP371 Manually produce complex screen prints OR

ICPSCP373 Semi-automatically produce complex screen prints OR

ICPSCP376 Operate an automatic screen printing machine OR

ICPSCP374 Operate a semi-automatic screen printing machine

Group D

ICPSCP371 Manually produce complex screen prints OR

ICPSCP373 Semi-automatically produce complex screen prints OR

ICPSCP376 Operate an automatic screen printing machine OR

ICPSCP374 Operate a semi-automatic screen printing machine

ICPCBF220 Produce basic converted or finished product

ICPCBF221 Set up and produce basic guillotined product

ICPCBF225 Set up machine for basic flat-bed die cutting or embossing

ICPCBF231 Set up machine for basic flat-bed cutting

ICPPRP211 Develop a basic design concept

ICPPRP221 Select and apply type

ICPPRP286 Scan images for reproduction

ICPPRP223 Photograph a line image

ICPPRP224 Produce pages using a page layout application

ICPPRP231 Manually combine spot colour and basic four-colour images

ICPPRP232 Electronically combine and assemble data

ICPPRP252 Output images

ICPPRP283 Prepare artwork for screen printing

ICPPRP311 Develop a detailed design concept

ICPPRP321 Produce a typographic image

ICPPRP322 Digitise images for reproduction

ICPPRP323 Photograph and produce halftone images

ICPPRP334 Prepare an imposition format for printing processes

ICPPRP352 Output complex images

ICPPRP422 Digitise complex images for reproduction

ICPPRP430 Manage colour

ICPPRN342 Produce complex pad printed product

ICPPRN382 Produce and manage complex digital print

ICPPRN441 Set up for complex pad printing

ICPPRN496 Set up and produce complex digital print

ICPSCP211 Reclaim screen automatically

ICPSCP221 Prepare substrate

ICPSCP271 Manually produce basic screen prints

ICPSCP273 Semi-automatically produce basic screen prints

ICPSCP275 Automatically produce basic screen prints

ICPSCP281 Finish screen print products

ICPSCP351 Prepare machine and drying/curing unit

ICPSCP383 Prepare film for complex screen printing

ICPSUP241 Undertake warehouse or stores materials processing

ICPSUP311 Prepare ink and additives (advanced)

ICPSUP321 Pack and dispatch (advanced)

ICPSUP323 Dispose of waste

ICPSUP351 Undertake basic production scheduling

ICPSUP381 Operate and maintain computer resources

ICPSUP464 Provide customer service and education

MSS402010A Manage the impact of change on own work

MSS402001A Apply competitive systems and practices

MSS402002A Sustain process improvements

MSS402030A Apply cost factors to work practices

MSS402040A Apply 5S procedures

MSS402080A Undertake root cause analysis

MSAPMSUP390A Use structured problem solving tools

*Note the following prerequisite unit requirements:

Unit in this qualification	Prerequisite unit
ICPPRP311 Develop a detailed design concept	ICPPRP211 Develop a basic design concept
ICPPRP321 Produce a typographic image	ICPPRP221 Select and apply type
ICPSUP311 Prepare ink and additives (advanced)	ICPSUP211 Prepare ink and additives

Qualification Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICP30615 Certificate III in Printing and Graphic Arts (Screen Printing)	ICP30612 Certificate III in Printing and Graphic Arts (Screen Printing)	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent qualification

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICP30715 Certificate III in Printing and Graphic Arts (Print Finishing)

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This qualification first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Qualification Description

This qualification applies to individuals working as a binder and finisher to assemble, bind and cover books, other publications and printed products by hand or machine. They are responsible for post-press and finishing stages of the print process and apply solutions to a defined range of unpredictable problems and may provide leadership and guidance to others with some limited responsibility for the output of others.

Licensing/Regulatory Information

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this qualification at the time of publication.

Entry Requirements

Nil

Packaging Rules

Total number of units = 21

4 core units plus

17 elective units of which:

6 elective units must be from Group A

2 elective units must be from group A or B

7 elective units must be from Group B

the remaining 2 elective units may be selected from the remaining elective units, or from other qualifications in this Training Package or any other endorsed Training Package, or from an accredited course at Certificate III or IV level.

Elective units must be relevant to the work environment and the qualification, maintain the integrity of the AQF alignment and contribute to a valid, industry-supported vocational outcome.

Core Units

BSBSUS201 Participate in environmentally sustainable work practices

ICPSUP216 Inspect quality against required standards

ICPSUP260 Maintain a safe work environment

ICPSUP262 Communicate in the workplace

Elective Units

Group A

ICPKNW313 Apply knowledge and requirements of the converting, binding and finishing sector

ICPSUP201 Prepare, load and unload reels and cores on and off machine* OR

ICPSUP202 Prepare, load and unload product on and off machine*

ICPSUP203 Prepare and maintain the work area

ICPSUP207 Prepare machine for operation (basic)

ICPSUP208 Operate and monitor machines (basic)

ICPSUP282 Undertake basic machine maintenance

ICPSUP323 Dispose of waste

ICPSUP351 Undertake basic production scheduling

ICPSUP352 Plan operational processes

Group B

ICPCBF221 Set up and produce basic guillotine product

ICPCBF225 Set up machine for basic flat-bed die cutting or embossing

ICPCBF226 Produce basic flat-bed die cut or embossed product

ICPCBF231 Set up machine for basic flat-bed cutting

ICPCBF232 Produce basic flat-bed cut product

ICPCBF241 Set up machine for basic single or continuous folding

ICPCBF242 Produce basic single or continuous folded product

ICPCBF243 Set up machine for basic collating or inserting (sheet/section)

ICPCBF244 Produce basic collated (sheet/section) product

ICPCBF281 Set up machine for basic laminating

ICPCBF282 Produce basic laminated product

ICPCBF303 Run and monitor envelope manufacturing machines

ICPCBF305 Produce single-faced web

ICPCBF307 Produce double-faced web

ICPCBF311 Prepare for cutting forme and stripper making

ICPCBF312 Set cutting forme and strippers

ICPCBF320 Produce complex converted or finished product

ICPCBF321 Set up and produce complex guillotined product

ICPCBF326 Undertake pre make-ready for die cutting

ICPCBF327 Set up machine for complex rotary die cutting or embossing

ICPCBF341 Set up machine for complex sequenced or multiple folding

ICPCBF342 Produce complex sequenced or multiple folded product

ICPCBF343 Set up machine for complex collating or inserting (sheet/section/reel)

ICPCBF344 Produce complex collated or inserted (sheet/section/reel) product

ICPCBF361 Set up machine for complex adhesive, mechanical or sewn fastening

ICPCBF362 Produce complex adhesive, mechanical or sewn fastened product

ICPCBF369 Set up and produce hand-made box

ICPCBF371 Decorate paper

ICPCBF381 Set up machine for complex laminating

ICPCBF382 Produce complex laminated product

ICPCBF391 Use electronic monitoring systems (converting and finishing)

ICPCBF392 Produce product on window gluer

ICPCBF393 Set up machine for envelope manufacture

ICPCBF395 Set up and operate folder gluer machine

ICPCBF396 Set up in-line scoring, folding and gluing machine for envelope manufacture

ICPCBF465 Set up and produce hand bound book

ICPPRN261 Set up for foil stamping

ICPPRN262 Produce foil stamped product

ICPPRN271 Set up for basic coating

ICPPRN272 Produce basic coated product

ICPPRN282 Produce and manage basic digital print

ICPPRN382 Produce and manage complex digital print

ICPSUP221 Pack and dispatch product

ICPSUP222 Pack and dispatch solid waste

ICPSUP235 Lift loads mechanically

ICPSUP236 Shift loads mechanically

ICPSUP241 Undertake warehouse or stores materials processing

ICPSUP263 Perform basic industry calculations

ICPSUP321 Pack and dispatch (advanced)

ICPSUP342 Undertake inventory procedures

ICPSUP345 Purchase materials and schedule deliveries

ICPSUP351 Undertake basic production scheduling

ICPSUP357 Apply quick changeover procedures

ICPSUP362 Communicate as part of a work team

ICPSUP554 Manage teams

MSS402010A Manage the impact of change on own work

MSS402001A Apply competitive systems and practices

MSS402002A Sustain process improvements

MSS402030A Apply cost factors to work practices

MSS402040A Apply 5S procedures

MSS402080A Undertake root cause analysis

MSAENV272B Participate in environmentally sustainable work practices

MSAPMSUP390A Use structured problem solving tools

Qualification Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICP30715 Certificate III in Printing and Graphic Arts (Print Finishing)	ICP30712 Certificate III in Printing and Graphic Arts (Print Finishing)	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent qualification

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICP30815 Certificate III in Printing and Graphic Arts (Sacks and Bags)

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This qualification first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Qualification Description

This qualification applies to skilled operators who work as sacks and bags machinists. They prepare material, monitor and run a range of sack and bag equipment and apply solutions to a defined range of unpredictable problems. They may also provide leadership and guidance to others with some limited responsibility for the output of others.

Licensing/Regulatory Information

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this qualification at the time of publication.

Entry Requirements

Nil

Packaging Rules

Total number of units = 19 units

4 core units, plus

15 elective units of which:

3 elective units must be from Group A

2 elective units must be from Group A or B

6 elective units must be from Group B

the remaining 4 elective units may be selected from the remaining elective units, from other qualifications in this Training Package or any other endorsed Training Package, or from an accredited course at Certificate III or IV level.

Elective units must be relevant to the work environment and the qualification, maintain the integrity of the AQF alignment and contribute to a valid, industry-supported vocational outcome.

Core Units

BSBSUS201 Participate in environmentally sustainable work practices

ICPSUP216 Inspect quality against required standards

ICPSUP260 Maintain a safe work environment

ICPSUP262 Communicate in the workplace

Elective Units

Group A

BSBWOR301 Organise personal work priorities and development

ICPKNW319 Apply knowledge and processes of converting paper-based products

ICPCBF298 Run and monitor sack and bag machines

ICPSUP201 Prepare, load and unload reels and cores on and off machine* OR

ICPSUP202 Prepare, load and unload product on and off machine*

ICPSUP203 Prepare and maintain the work area

ICPSUP282 Undertake basic machine maintenance

ICPSUP323 Dispose of waste

Group B

BSBINN201 Contribute to workplace innovation

BSBFLM309 Support continuous improvement systems and processes

ICPCBF221 Set up and produce basic guillotined product

ICPCBF241 Set up machine for basic single or continuous folding

ICPCBF261 Set up machine for basic adhesive, mechanical or thermal fastening

ICPCBF281 Set up machine for basic laminating

ICPCBF298 Run and monitor sack and bag machines

ICPCBF300* Run and monitor in-line tube making machine for sack or bag manufacture

ICPCBF398* Set up in-line bottom making machine for sack or bag manufacture

ICPPRN313 Set up for basic flexographic printing

ICPSUP211 Prepare ink and additives

ICPSUP221 Pack and dispatch product

ICPSUP241 Undertake warehouse or stores materials processing

ICPSUP263 Perform basic industry calculations

ICPSUP342 Undertake inventory procedures

ICPSUP351 Undertake basic production scheduling

ICPSUP352 Plan operational processes

ICPSUP362 Communicate as part of a work team

ICPSUP456 Control production

MSS402010A Manage the impact of change on own work

MSS402001A Apply competitive systems and practices

MSS402002A Sustain process improvements

MSS402030A Apply cost factors to work practices

MSS402040A Apply 5S procedures

MSS402080A Undertake root cause analysis

MSAPMSUP390A Use structured problem solving tools

*Note the following prerequisite unit requirements:

Unit in this qualification	Prerequisite unit
ICPCBF300 Run and monitor in-line tube making machine for sack or bag manufacture	ICPCBF298 Run and monitor sack and bag machines
ICPCBF398 Set up in-line bottom making machine for sack or bag manufacture	ICPCBF298 Run and monitor sack and bag machines

Qualification Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICP30815 Certificate III in Printing and Graphic Arts (Sacks and Bags)	ICP30812 Certificate III in Printing and Graphic Arts (Sacks and Bags)	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent qualification

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICP30915 Certificate III in Printing and Graphic Arts (Cartons and Corrugating)

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This qualification first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Qualification Description

This qualification applies to individuals engaged in the paper converting area as skilled hands or machinists. They prepare materials and set up and run a range of equipment and machinery for cutting, embossing, folding, collating and fastening to produce the finished product. They may also provide leadership and guidance to others with some limited responsibility for the output of others.

Licensing/Regulatory Information

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this qualification at the time of publication.

Entry Requirements

Nil

Packaging Rules

Total number of units = 19 units

4 core units, plus

15 elective units of which:

5 elective units must be from Group A

2 elective units must be from Group A or B.

4 elective units must be from Group B

the remaining 4 elective units may be selected from the remaining elective units, from other qualifications in this Training Package or any other endorsed Training Package, or from an accredited course at Certificate III or IV level.

Elective units must be relevant to the work environment and the qualification, maintain the integrity of the AQF alignment and contribute to a valid, industry-supported vocational outcome.

Core Units

BSBSUS201 Participate in environmentally sustainable work practices

ICPSUP216 Inspect quality against required standards

ICPSUP260 Maintain a safe work environment

ICPSUP262 Communicate in the workplace

Elective Units

Group A

ICPCBF220 Produce basic converted or finished product

ICPCBF306 Set up machine for basic carton folding and gluing

ICPKNW319 Apply knowledge and processes of converting paper-based products

ICPSUP201 Prepare, load and unload reels and cores on and off machine* OR

ICPSUP202 Prepare, load and unload product on and off machine*

ICPSUP203 Prepare and maintain the work area

ICPSUP282 Undertake basic machine maintenance

ICPSUP281 Use computer systems

ICPSUP323 Dispose of waste

Group B

ICPCBF341 Set up machine for complex sequenced or multiple folding

ICPCBF361 Set up machine for complex adhesive, mechanical or sewn fastening

ICPCBF392 Produce product on window gluer

ICPPRP322 Digitise images for reproduction

ICPPRP481 Design complex carton

ICPPRN313 Set up for basic flexographic printing

ICPPRN314 Produce complex flexographic printed product

ICPSUP342 Undertake inventory procedures

ICPSUP345 Purchase materials and schedule deliveries

ICPSUP351 Undertake basic production scheduling

ICPSUP362 Communicate as part of a work team

ICPSUP381 Operate and maintain computer resources

ICPPRN493 Set up and monitor in-line printing operations

Group C

ICPPRP281 Design basic carton

ICPCBF321 Set up and produce complex guillotined product OR

ICPCBF326 Undertake pre make-ready for die cutting OR

ICPCBF225 Set up machine for complex flat-bed die cutting or embossing

ICPCBF426 Produce complex flat-bed die cut or embossed product OR

ICPCBF327 Set up machine for complex rotary die cutting or embossing

ICPCBF328 Produce complex rotary die cut or embossed product OR

ICPCBF309 Produce complex folded and glued cartons

ICPCBF410 Set up machine for complex carton folding and gluing OR

ICPCBF320 Produce complex converted or finished product

ICPCBF342 Produce complex sequenced or multiple folded product OR

ICPCBF362 Produce complex adhesive, mechanical or sewn fastened product

MSS402010A Manage the impact of change on own work

MSS402001A Apply competitive systems and practices

MSS402002A Sustain process improvements

MSS402030A Apply cost factors to work practices

MSS402040A Apply 5S procedures

MSS402080A Undertake root cause analysis

MSAENV272B Participate in environmentally sustainable work practices

Qualification Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICP30915 Certificate III in Printing and Graphic Arts (Cartons and Corrugating)	ICP30912 Certificate III in Printing and Graphic Arts (Cartons and Corrugating)	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent qualification

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICP31015 Certificate III in Printing and Graphic Arts (Mail House)

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This qualification first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Qualification Description

This qualification applies to individuals engaged in mail management services, such as direct marketing and transactional mailing. They are responsible for the preparation, set-up, monitoring and operation of various mailing house machinery and equipment in roles such as a mail processor or team leader. They may provide leadership and guidance to others with some limited responsibility for the output of others.

Licensing/Regulatory Information

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this qualification at the time of publication.

Entry Requirements

Nil

Packaging Rules

Total number of units = 19 units

4 core units, plus

15 Electives of which:

6 elective units must be from Group A

2 elective units must be from Group A or B

3 elective units must be from Group B

the remaining 4 elective units may be selected from the remaining elective units, from other qualifications in this Training Package or any other endorsed Training Package, or from an accredited course at Certificate III or IV level.

Elective units must be relevant to the work environment and the qualification, maintain the integrity of the AQF alignment and contribute to a valid, industry-supported vocational outcome.

Core Units

BSBSUS201 Participate in environmentally sustainable work practices

ICPSUP216 Inspect quality against required standards

ICPSUP260 Maintain a safe work environment

ICPSUP262 Communicate in the workplace

Elective Units

Group A

ICPKNW313 Apply knowledge and requirements of the converting, binding and finishing sector

ICPSUP202 Prepare, load and unload product on and off machine

ICPSUP203 Prepare and maintain the work area

ICPSUP243 Reconcile process outputs

ICPSUP282 Undertake basic machine maintenance

ICPSUP351 Undertake basic production scheduling

ICPSUP352 Plan operational processes

ICPSUP362 Work team communication

TLIA2041A Manually sort mail and parcels

Group B

ICTWEB429 Create a markup language document to specification

ICPCBF294 Set up profile cutting for envelope manufacture

ICPCBF303 Run and monitor envelope manufacturing machines

ICPCBF326 Undertake pre make-ready for die cutting

ICPCBF327 Set up machine for complex rotary die cutting or embossing

ICPCBF341 Set up machine for complex sequenced or multiple folding

ICPCBF342 Produce complex sequenced or multiple folded product

ICPCBF396 Set up in-line scoring, folding and gluing machine for envelope manufacture

ICPCBF406 Set up and load in-line smart card machine

ICPCBF407 Operate a smart card machine and pack product

ICPPRP385 Operate a database for digital printing

ICPPRN393 Set up for basic relief printing

ICPPRN282 Produce and manage basic digital print

ICPPRN288 Produce basic relief printed product

ICPPRN383 Prepare for personalised digital printing

ICPPRN384 Set up and produce basic digital print

ICPPRN484 Prepare for variable data printing

ICPSUP211 Prepare ink and additives

ICPSUP212 Prepare coatings, adhesives

ICPSUP235 Lift loads mechanically

ICPSUP236 Shift loads mechanically

ICPSUP271 Provide basic instruction for a task

ICPSUP321 Pack and dispatch (advanced)

ICPSUP342 Undertake inventory procedures

ICPSUP345 Purchase materials and schedule deliveries

ICPSUP381 Operate and maintain computer resources

ICPSUP487 Analyse manual handling processes

ICPSUP488 Ensure process improvements are sustained

ICPSUP554 Manage teams

MSS402010A Manage the impact of change on own work

MSS402001A Apply competitive systems and practices

MSS402002A Sustain process improvements

MSS402030A Apply cost factors to work practices

MSS402040A Apply 5S procedures

MSS402080A Undertake root cause analysis

MSAENV272B Participate in environmentally sustainable work practices

MSAPMSUP390A Use structured problem solving tools

Qualification Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICP31015 Certificate III in Printing and Graphic Arts (Mail House)	ICP31012 Certificate III in Printing and Graphic Arts (Mail House)	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent qualification

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICP31115 Certificate III in Printing and Graphic Arts (Ink Manufacture)

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This qualification first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Qualification Description

This qualification applies to skilled ink mixer operators who undertake appropriate testing procedures for each stage of product manufacture and evaluate and implement improvements. They may also provide guidance to others with some limited responsibility for the output of others.

Licensing/Regulatory Information

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this qualification at the time of publication.

Entry Requirements

Nil

Packaging Rules

Total number of units = 19 units

4 core units, plus

15 elective units of which:

4 elective units must be from Group A

2 elective units must be from group A or B

5 elective units must be from Group B

the remaining 4 elective units may be selected from the remaining elective units, from other qualifications in this Training Package or any other endorsed Training Package, or from an accredited course at Certificate III or IV level.

Elective units must be relevant to the work environment and the qualification, maintain the integrity of the AQF alignment and contribute to a valid, industry-supported vocational outcome.

Core Units

BSBSUS201 Participate in environmentally sustainable work practices

ICPSUP216 Inspect quality against required standards

ICPSUP260 Maintain a safe work environment

ICPSUP262 Communicate in the workplace

Elective Units

Group A

ICPINK211 Select and prepare materials for production

ICPINK221 Blend chemicals

ICPINK331 Manufacture inks and coatings

ICPKNW317 Apply knowledge and requirements of the ink manufacturing sector

ICPPRP430 Manage colour

ICPSUP203 Prepare and maintain the work area

ICPSUP263 Perform basic industry calculations

Group B

ICPSUP271 Provide basic instruction for a task

ICPSUP321 Pack and dispatch (advanced)

ICPSUP342 Undertake inventory procedures

ICPSUP345 Purchase materials and schedule deliveries

ICPSUP351 Undertake basic production scheduling

ICPSUP362 Communicate as part of a work team

ICPSUP381 Operate and maintain computer resources

ICPSUP417 Perform laboratory quality tests of materials and finished product

ICPSUP554 Manage teams

MSS402010A Manage the impact of change on own work

MSS402001A Apply competitive systems and practices

MSS402002A Sustain process improvements

MSS402030A Apply cost factors to work practices

MSS402040A Apply 5S procedures

MSS402080A Undertake root cause analysis

MSAENV272B Participate in environmentally sustainable work practices

MSAPMSUP390A Use structured problem solving tools

MSL933001A Maintain the laboratory/field workplace fit for purpose

MSL954001A Obtain representative samples in accordance with sampling plan

MSL973001A Perform basic tests

MSL973002A Prepare working solutions

MSL974001A Prepare, standardise and use solutions

Qualification Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICP31115 Certificate III in Printing and Graphic Arts (Ink Manufacture)	ICP31112 Certificate III in Printing and Graphic Arts (Ink Manufacture)	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent qualification

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICP40115 Certificate IV in Printing and Graphic Arts

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This qualification first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Qualification Description

This qualification applies to individuals working in the printing and graphic arts industry. They apply solutions to a defined range of problems and analyse and evaluate information from a variety of sources. They may also take responsibility for production flow and provide leadership and guidance to others with some limited responsibility for the output of others.

Licensing/Regulatory Information

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this qualification at the time of publication.

Entry Requirements

Nil

Packaging Rules

Total number of units = 10 units

This qualification has no core units.

10 elective units must be selected, of which:

4 electives must be selected from Group A

4 elective units must be selected from Group B, C, D, E, or F

the remaining 2 elective units may be selected from the remaining elective units or from any endorsed Training Package or accredited course at Certificate IV or Diploma level.

Elective units must be relevant to the work environment and the qualification, maintain the integrity of the AQF alignment and contribute to a valid, industry-supported vocational outcome.

Refer to the Companion Volume Implementation Guide for advice about choosing electives to support specialisations in particular sectors of the printing and graphics arts industry.

Group A

BSBSUS301 Implement and monitor environmentally sustainable work practices

ICPCBF391 Use electronic monitoring systems (converting and finishing)

ICPPRN491 Use on-press monitoring of print quality

ICPPRN492 Use on-press print control devices

ICPPRN493 Set up and monitor in-line printing operations

ICPSUP216 Inspect quality against required standards

ICPSUP260 Maintain a safe work environment

ICPSUP262 Communicate in the workplace

ICPSUP482 Troubleshoot and optimise materials and machinery

ICPSUP487 Analyse manual handling processes

Group B

Converting, binding and finishing

ICPCBF303 Run and monitor envelope manufacturing machines

ICPCBF341 Set up machine for complex sequenced or multiple folding

ICPCBF343 Set up machine for complex collating or inserting (sheet/section/reel)

ICPCBF391 Use electronic monitoring systems (converting and finishing)

ICPCBF392 Produce product on window gluer

ICPCBF393 Set up machine for envelope manufacture

ICPCBF395 Set up and operate folder gluer machine

ICPCBF396 Set up in-line scoring, folding and gluing machine for envelope

ICPCBF406 Set up and load in-line smart card machine

ICPCBF407 Operate a smart card machine and pack product

ICPCBF465 Set up and produce hand-bound book

ICPCBF467 Restore books

ICPKNW313 Apply knowledge and requirements of the converting, binding and finishing sector

ICPKNW319 Apply knowledge and processes of converting paper-based products

TLIA2041A Manually sort mail and parcels

Group C

Digital Media Technologies

CUFANM302A Create 3D digital animations

CUFANM303A Create 3D digital models

CUFANM401A* Prepare 3D digital models for production

CUFCMP301A Implement copyright arrangements

CUFDIG304A Create visual design components

CUFDIG401A Author interactive media

CUFDIG403A Create user interfaces

CUFDIG501A Coordinate the testing of interactive media products

CUFDIG503A Design e-learning resources

CUFDIG504A Design games

CUFDIG505A Design information architecture

ICPDMT263 Access and use the Internet

ICPDMT321 Capture a digital image

ICPDMT322 Edit a digital image

ICPDMT491* Create an extensible document

ICPDMT492* Create an extensible style sheet

ICPKNW311 Apply knowledge of the graphic pre-press sector

ICPKNW315 Apply knowledge and requirements of the multimedia sector

ICPKNW317 Apply knowledge and requirements of the ink manufacturing sector

ICPKNW318 Apply knowledge and requirements of mail house operations

ICPKNW320 Apply knowledge and requirements of information technology systems

ICTDBS504 Integrate database with a website

ICTNWK414 Create a common gateway interface script

ICTWEB409 Develop cascading style sheets

ICTWEB419 Develop guidelines for uploading information to a website

ICTWEB429 Create a simple markup language document to specification

ICTWEB502 Create dynamic web pages

ICTWEB510 Analyse information and assign meta tags

Group D

Printing

ICPKNW312 Apply knowledge of printing machining

ICPKNW314 Apply knowledge and requirements of the screen printing sector

ICPKNW316 Apply knowledge and requirements of paper and printing processes

ICPPRN284 Introduction to colour management

ICPPRN382 Produce and manage complex digital print

ICPPRN384 Set up and produce basic digital print

ICPPRN385 Apply software applications to digital production

ICPPRN387* Use colour management for production

ICPPRN411 Mount and proof flexographic plates for complex printing

ICPPRN413 Set up for complex flexographic printing

ICPPRN414 Produce specialist flexographic printed product

ICPPRN421 Set up for complex gravure printing

ICPPRN422 Produce specialist gravure printed product

ICPPRN431 Set up for complex lithographic printing

ICPPRN432 Produce specialist lithographic printed product

ICPPRN441 Set up for complex pad printing

ICPPRN442 Produce specialist pad printed product

ICPPRN451 Set up for complex relief printing

ICPPRN452 Produce specialist relief printed product

ICPPRN471 Set up for complex coating

ICPPRN472 Produce complex coated product

ICPPRN484 Prepare for variable data printing

ICPPRN491 Use on-press monitoring of print quality

ICPPRN492 Use on-press print control devices

ICPPRN493 Set up and monitor in-line printing operations

ICPPRN494* Apply advanced software applications to digital production

ICPPRN495* Set up and use complex colour management for production

ICPPRN496* Set up and produce complex digital print

ICPPRN513 Set up for specialist flexographic printing

ICPPRN521 Set up for specialist gravure printing

ICPPRN531 Set up for specialist lithographic printing

ICPPRN541 Set up for specialist pad printing

ICPPRN551 Set up for specialist relief printing

Group E

Pre-press

ICPPRP211 Develop a basic design concept

ICPPRP221 Select and apply type

ICPPRP224 Produce pages using a page layout application

ICPPRP225 Produce graphics using a graphics application

ICPPRP252 Output images

ICPPRP284 Produce PDF files for online or screen display

ICPPRP311* Develop a detailed design concept

ICPPRP334 Prepare an imposition format for printing processes

ICPPRP352 Output complex images

ICPPRP385 Operate a database for digital printing

ICPPRP396* Generate high-end PDF files

ICPPRP411* Undertake a complex design brief

ICPPRP421 Compose and evaluate typography

ICPPRP422 Digitise complex images for reproduction

ICPPRP430 Manage colour

ICPPRP435 Generate complex imposition

ICPPRP452* Output complex images direct to plate or press

ICPPRP484 Set up and operate automated workflow

ICPPRP485* Develop a digital data template

ICPPRP494* Develop document content and structure

Group F

Support

AUMAQA001 Apply quality assurance techniques

BSBCUS401 Coordinate implementation of customer service strategies

BSBINN301 Promote innovation in a team environment

BSBIPR601 Develop and implement strategies for intellectual property management

BSBLDR403 Lead team effectiveness

BSBMGT402 Implement operational plan

BSBMGT403 Implement continuous improvement

BSBMKG413 Promote products and services

BSBPRO401 Develop product knowledge

BSBREL401 Establish networks

BSBREL402 Build client relationships and business networks

BSBSLS407 Identify and plan sales prospects

BSBSLS408 Present, secure and support sales solutions

BSBSUS501 Develop workplace policy and procedures for sustainability

BSBWOR404 Develop work priorities

BSBWOR501 Manage personal work priorities and professional development

ICPSUP202 Prepare, load and unload product on and off machine

ICPSUP203 Prepare and maintain the work area

ICPSUP216 Inspect quality against required standards

ICPSUP243 Reconcile process outputs

ICPSUP282 Undertake basic machine maintenance

ICPSUP342 Undertake inventory procedures

ICPSUP345 Purchase materials and schedule deliveries

ICPSUP351 Undertake basic production scheduling

ICPSUP352 Plan operational processes

ICPSUP357 Apply quick changeover procedures

ICPSUP389 Undertake basic root cause analysis

ICPSUP455 Supervise and schedule work of others

ICPSUP456 Control production

ICPSUP458* Monitor production workflow

ICPSUP464 Provide customer service and education in the printing industry

ICPSUP482 Troubleshoot and optimise materials and machinery

ICPSUP485 Implement a just-in-time system

ICPSUP486 Mistake proof a production process

ICPSUP488 Ensure process improvements are sustained

ICPSUP553 Prepare production costing estimates

MSS403010A Facilitate change in an organisation implementing competitive systems and practices

MSS403040A Facilitate and improve implementation of 5S

MSAENV472B Implement and monitor environmentally sustainable work practices

MSAPMSUP390A Use structured problem solving tools

TAEASS402B Assess competence

TAEDEL402A Plan, organise and facilitate learning in the workplace

*Note the following prerequisite unit requirements

Unit in this qualification	Prerequisite unit
CUFANM401A Prepare 3D digital models for production	CUFANM303A Create 3D digital models
ICPDMT491 Create an extensible document	ICTWEB429 Create a markup language document to specification
ICPDMT492 Create an extensible style sheet	ICTWEB429 Create a markup language document to specification
ICPPRP311 Develop a detailed design concept	ICPPRP211 Develop a basic design concept
ICPPRP396 Generate high-end PDF files	ICPPRP284 Produce PDF files for online or screen display
ICPPRP411 Undertake a complex design brief	ICPPRP311 Develop a detailed design concept
ICPPRP421 Compose and evaluate typography	ICPPRP221 Select and apply type
ICPPRP452 Output complex images direct to plate or press	ICPPRP352 Output complex images
ICPPRP485 Develop a digital data template	ICPPRP385 Operate a database for digital printing
ICPPRP494 Develop document content and structure	ICPPRP396 Generate high-end PDF files
ICPPRN387 Use colour management for production	ICPPRN284 Introduction to colour management
ICPPRN494 Apply advanced software applications to digital production	ICPPRN385 Apply software applications to digital production
ICPPRN495 Set up and use complex colour management for production	ICPPRN387 Use colour management for production
ICPPRN496 Set up and produce complex digital print	ICPPRN384 Set up and produce basic digital print
ICPSUP458 Monitor production workflow	ICPSUP216 Inspect quality against required standards

Qualification Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICP40115 Certificate IV in Printing and Graphic Arts	ICP40110 Certificate IV in Printing and Graphic Arts (Graphic Pre-press) ICP40310 Certificate IV in Printing and Graphic Arts (Printing)	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages Qualifications have been merged into one to allow more flexibility	Equivalent qualification
ICP40115 Certificate IV in Printing and Graphic Arts	ICP40410 Certificate IV in Printing and Graphic Arts (Print Finishing)	Number of units increased from 8 to 10	No equivalent qualification

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICP40515 Certificate IV in Printing and Graphic Arts (Mail House)

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Qualification Description

This qualification applies to individuals engaged in production coordination, scheduling and supervising in the mail house sector. They apply solutions to a defined range of problems, and analyse and evaluate information from a variety of sources. They may provide leadership and guidance to others with some limited responsibility for the output of others.

Licensing/Regulatory Information

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this qualification at the time of publication.

Entry Requirements

Nil

Packaging Rules

Total number of units = 25 units

4 core units, plus

21 elective units of which:

7 elective units must be from Group A

2 elective units must be from Group A or Group B

4 elective units must be from Group B

4 elective units must be from Group C

the remaining 4 elective units may be selected from the remaining elective units, from other qualifications in this Training Package or any other endorsed Training Package, or from an accredited course at Certificate IV or Diploma level.

Elective units must be relevant to the work environment and the qualification, maintain the integrity of the AQF alignment and contribute to a valid, industry-supported vocational outcome.

Core Units

BSBSUS301 Implement and monitor environmentally sustainable work practices

ICPSUP216 Inspect quality against required standards

ICPSUP260 Maintain a safe work environment

ICPSUP262 Communicate in the workplace

Elective Units

Group A

BSBCUS401 Coordinate implementation of customer service strategies

ICPCBF391 Use electronic monitoring systems (converting and finishing)

ICPKNW318 Apply knowledge and requirements of mail house operations

ICPSUP202 Prepare, load and unload product on and off machine

ICPSUP203 Prepare and maintain the work area

ICPSUP243 Reconcile process outputs

ICPSUP282 Undertake basic machine maintenance

ICPSUP458* Monitor production workflow

ICPSUP482 Troubleshoot and optimise materials and machinery

ICPSUP487 Analyse manual handling processes

TLIA2041A Manually sort mail and parcels

Group B

BSBMGT402 Implement operational plan

BSBMGT403 Implement continuous improvement

BSBLDR403 Lead team effectiveness

BSBWOR404 Develop work priorities

ICPSUP464 Provide customer service and education

ICPSUP482 Troubleshoot and optimise materials and machinery

ICPSUP485 Implement a Just-In-Time (JIT) system

TAEASS402B Assess competence

TAEDEL402A Plan, organise and facilitate learning in the workplace

Group C

BSBINN301 Promote innovation in a team environment

ICPCBF303 Run and monitor envelope manufacturing machines

ICPCBF341 Set up machine for complex sequenced or multiple folding

ICPCBF343 Set up machine for complex collating or inserting (sheet/section/reel)

ICPCBF391 Use electronic monitoring systems (converting and finishing)

ICPCBF392 Produce product on window gluer

ICPCBF393 Set up machine for envelope manufacture

ICPCBF395 Set up and operate folder gluer machine

ICPCBF396 Set up in-line scoring, folding and gluing machine for envelope manufacture

ICPCBF406 Set up and load in-line smart card machine

ICPPRP385 Operate a database for digital printing

ICPPRN382 Produce and manage complex digital print

ICPPRN384 Set up and produce basic digital print

ICPPRN496* Set up and produce complex digital print

ICPSUP342 Undertake inventory procedures

ICPSUP351 Undertake basic production scheduling

ICPSUP352 Plan operational processes

ICPSUP357 Apply quick changeover procedures

ICPSUP389 Undertake basic root cause analysis

MSS403010A Facilitate change in an organisation implementing competitive systems and practices

MSS403040A Facilitate and improve implementation of 5S

MSAENV472B Implement and monitor environmentally sustainable work practices

MSAPMSUP390A Use structured problem solving tools

*Note the following prerequisite unit requirements

Unit in this qualification	Prerequisite unit
ICPPRN496 Set up and produce complex digital print	ICPPRN384 Set up and produce basic digital print
ICPSUP458 Monitor production workflow	ICPSUP216 Inspect quality against required standards

Qualification Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICP40515 Certificate IV in Printing and Graphic Arts (Mail House)	ICP40510 Certificate IV in Printing and Graphic Arts (Mail House)	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent qualification

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICP40815 Certificate IV in ePublishing

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This qualification first released with ICP Printing & Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Qualification Description

This qualification reflects the role of individuals working with digital content for publication across one or more platforms. They have broad technical and theoretical knowledge of digital publication processes and need to analyse, compare and act on information from a range of sources to complete specialised tasks. Individuals take responsibility for their own outputs and may have limited responsibility for the organisation of others.

Licensing/Regulatory Information

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this qualification at the time of publication.

Entry Requirements

Nil

Packaging Rules

Total number of units = 14

8 core units plus

6 elective units of which:

4 elective units must be from the list below

the remaining 2 elective units may be selected from the elective units list below, from other qualifications in this Training Package or any other endorsed Training Package, or from an accredited course at Certificate III or above.

Elective units must be relevant to the work environment and the qualification, maintain the integrity of the AQF alignment and contribute to a valid, industry-supported vocational outcome.

Core Units

BSBIPR401 Use and protect copyright

BSBSMB412 Introduce cloud computing into business operations

BSBSUS301 Implement and monitor environmentally sustainable work practices

CUVPHI529A Employ colour management in a digital imaging workplace

ICPPRN497 Work with digital information

ICPPRN498 Adapt digital content for publication on different devices

ICPPRN494 Apply advanced software applications to digital production

ICTNWK303 Configure and administer a network operating system

Elective Units

BSBCRT301 Develop and extend critical and creative thinking skills

BSBDES301 Explore the use of colour

BSBDES302 Explore and apply the creative design process to 2D forms

BSBDES303 Explore and apply the creative design process to 3D forms

BSBDES305 Source and apply information on the history and theory of design

BSBDES401 Generate design solutions

BSBDES402 Interpret and respond to a design brief

BSBDES403 Develop and extend design skills and practice

CUVACD401A Integrate colour theory and design processes

CUVPRP401A Realise a creative project

CUVGRD301A Prepare files for publication

CUVGRD302A Use typography techniques

CUVGRD401A Research and apply graphic design techniques

CUVGRD504A Create and manipulate graphics

CUVGRD505A Design and manipulate complex layouts

CUFDIG301A Prepare video assets

CUFDIG302A Author interactive sequences

CUFDIG304A Create visual design components

CUFDIG401A Author interactive media

CUFDIG402A Design user interfaces

CUFDIG403A Create user interfaces

CUFDIG404A Apply scripting language in authoring

CUVDIG401A Experiment with techniques to enhance digital images

CUVPHI530A Prepare digital images for pre-press processing

BSBMGT407 Apply digital solutions to work processes

BSBMGT519 Incorporate digital solutions into plans and practices

BSBMKG412 Conduct e-marketing communications

BSBEBU501 Investigate and design e-business solutions

BSBEBU502 Implement e-business solutions

ICTNWK301 Provide network systems administration

ICTNWK302 Determine and action network problems

ICTNWK304 Administer network peripherals

ICTNWK305 Install and manage network protocols

ICTNWK401 Install and manage a server

ICTNWK402 Install and configure virtual machines for sustainable ICT

ICTNWK403 Manage network and data integrity

ICTNWK404 Install, operate and troubleshoot a small enterprise branch network

ICTNWK405 Build a small wireless local area network

ICTNWK406 Install, configure and test network security

ICTNWK407 Install and configure client-server applications and services

ICTNWK408 Configure a desktop environment

ICTNWK409 Create scripts for networking

ICTNWK410 Install hardware to a network

ICTNWK411 Deploy software to networked computers

ICTNWK412 Create network documentation

ICTNWK414 Create a common gateway interface script

ICTNWK416 Build security into virtual private networks

ICTNWK417 Build an enterprise wireless network

ICTNWK418 Implement backbone technologies in a local area network

ICPPRP324 Create pages using a page layout application

ICPPRP325 Create graphics using a graphics application

ICPPRP385 Operate a database for digital printing

ICPPRP421 Compose and evaluate typography

ICPPRP422 Digitise complex images for reproduction

ICPPRP430 Manage colour

ICPPRP435 Generate complex imposition

ICPPRP484 Set up and operate automated workflow

ICPPRN496 Set up and produce complex digital print

ICTWEB401 Design a website to meet technical requirements

ICTWEB402 Confirm accessibility of websites for people with special needs

ICTWEB403 Transfer content to a website using commercial packages

ICTWEB404 Maintain website performance

ICTWEB405 Monitor traffic and compile website traffic reports

ICTWEB406 Create website testing procedures

ICTWEB407 Conduct operational acceptance tests of websites

ICTWEB408 Ensure basic website security

ICTWEB409 Develop cascading style sheets

ICTWEB410 Apply web authoring tool to convert client data for websites

ICTWEB411 Produce basic client-side script for dynamic web pages

ICTWEB412 Produce interactive web animation

ICTWEB413 Optimise search engines

ICTWEB414 Design simple web page layouts

ICTWEB415 Produce server-side script for dynamic web pages

ICTWEB416 Customise content management system

ICTWEB417 Integrate social web technologies

ICTWEB418 Use development software and ICT tools to build a basic website

ICTWEB419 Develop guidelines for uploading information to a website

ICTWEB420 Write content for web pages

ICTWEB421 Ensure website content meets technical protocols and standards

ICTWEB422 Ensure website access and useability

ICTWEB423 Ensure dynamic website security

ICTWEB424 Evaluate and select a web hosting service

ICTWEB425 Apply structured query language to extract and manipulate data

Qualification Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICP40815 Certificate IV in ePublishing	Not applicable	New qualification	No equivalent qualification

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICP50115 Diploma of Printing and Graphic Arts

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This qualification first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Qualification Description

This qualification applies to individuals who possess a sound theoretical knowledge in the Printing and Graphic arts industry and are responsible for production workflow.

They analyse and evaluate information from a variety of sources and are involved in planning, scheduling and the supervision of labour, machines, and materials for production. They provide leadership and guidance to others with responsibility for the output of others.

Licensing/Regulatory Information

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this qualification at the time of publication.

Entry Requirements

Nil

Packaging Rules

Total number of units = 20 units

4 core units, plus

16 elective units of which:

13 elective units must be from Groups A, B, C, D, E or F

the remaining 3 elective units may be selected from the remaining elective units or from any endorsed Training Package or accredited course at Certificate IV level or higher.

Elective units must be relevant to the work environment and the qualification, maintain the integrity of the AQF alignment and contribute to a valid, industry-supported vocational outcome.

Refer to the Companion Volume Implementation Guide for advice about choosing electives to support specialisations in particular sectors of the printing and graphics arts industry.

Core Units

BSBSUS501 Develop workplace policy and procedures for sustainability

ICPSUP216 Inspect quality against required standards

ICPSUP260 Maintain a safe work environment

ICPSUP262 Communicate in the workplace

Elective Units

Group A

Converting, binding and finishing

ICPCBF381 Set up machine for complex laminating

ICPCBF382 Produce complex laminated product

ICPCBF391 Use electronic monitoring systems (converting and finishing)

Group B

Digital media technologies

CUFANM302A Create 3D digital animations

CUFANM401A* Prepare 3D digital models for production

CUFANM403A Create titles for screen productions

CUFANM503A Design animation and digital visual effects

CUFCMP301A Implement copyright arrangements

CUFDIG302A Author interactive sequences

CUFDIG401A Author interactive media

CUFDIG502A Design web environments

CUFDIG503A Design e-learning resources

CUFDIG504A Design games

CUFDIG505A Design information architecture

ICPDMT491* Create an extensible document

ICPDMT492* Create an extensible style sheet

ICPDMT581 Manage multimedia production

ICPDMT582 Manage multimedia projects

ICPKNW315 Apply knowledge and requirements of the multimedia sector OR

ICPKNW320 Apply knowledge and requirements of information technology systems in the printing industry

ICTDBS504 Integrate database with a website

ICTWEB429 Create a markup language document to specification

ICTWEB510 Analyse information and assign meta tags

Group C

Pre-press

ICPPRP284 Produce PDF files for online or screen display

ICPPRP322 Digitise images for reproduction

ICPPRP334 Prepare an imposition format for printing processes

ICPPRP352 Output complex images

ICPPRP370 Make multiple image plates

ICPPRP385 Operate a database for digital printing

ICPPRP396* Generate high-end PDF files

ICPPRP397 Transfer digital files

ICPPRP422 Digitise complex images for reproduction

ICPPRP430 Manage colour

ICPPRP435 Generate complex imposition

ICPPRP452* Output complex images direct to plate or press

ICPPRP484 Set up and operate automated workflow

ICPPRP485* Develop a digital data template

ICPPRP494* Develop document content and structure

Group D

Printing

ICPKNW316 Apply knowledge and requirements of paper and printing processes or ICPPRN382 Produce and manage complex digital print

ICPPRN383 Prepare for personalised digital printing

ICPPRN384 Set up and produce basic digital print

ICPPRN414 Produce specialist flexographic printed product

ICPPRN422 Produce specialist gravure printed product

ICPPRN432 Produce specialist lithographic printed product

ICPPRN442 Produce specialist pad printed product

ICPPRN452 Produce specialist relief printed product

ICPPRN471 Set up for complex coating

ICPPRN472 Produce complex coated product

ICPPRN484 Prepare for variable data printing

ICPPRN491 Use on-press monitoring of print quality

ICPPRN492 Use on-press print control devices

ICPPRN493 Set up and monitor in-line printing operations

ICPPRN496* Set up and produce complex digital print

ICPPRN513 Set up for specialist flexographic printing

ICPPRN521 Set up for specialist gravure printing

ICPPRN531 Set up for specialist lithographic printing

ICPPRN541 Set up for specialist pad printing

ICPPRN551 Set up for specialist relief printing

ICPPRN552 Manage digital production workflow

Group E

Screen printing

ICPSCP351 Prepare machine and drying/curing unit

ICPSCP374 Operate a semi-automatic screen printing machine

ICPSCP382 Produce computer image for screen printing

Group F

Support

BSBCUS401 Coordinate implementation of customer service strategies

BSBCUS501 Manage quality customer service

BSBDES601 Manage design realisation

BSBMGT402 Implement operational plan

BSBMGT403 Implement continuous improvement

BSBMGT517 Manage operational plan

BSBMGT516 Facilitate continuous improvement

BSBMGT608 Manage innovation and continuous improvement

BSBMKG401 Profile the market

BSBMKG413 Promote products and services

BSBMKG501 Identify and evaluate marketing opportunities

BSBPMG409 Apply project scope management techniques

BSBREL401 Establish networks

BSBREL402 Build client relationships and business networks

BSBSLS501 Develop a sales plan

BSBSMB402 Plan small business finances

BSBSMB403 Market the small business

BSBSMB404 Undertake small business planning

BSBSUS501 Develop workplace policy and procedures for sustainability

BSBLDR403 Lead team effectiveness

BSBWOR404 Develop work priorities

BSBWOR501 Manage personal work priorities and professional development

BSBWOR502 Lead and manage team effectiveness

ICPSUP216 Inspect quality against required standards

ICPSUP351 Undertake basic production scheduling

ICPSUP455 Supervise and schedule work of others

ICPSUP458* Monitor production workflow

ICPSUP464 Provide customer service and education

ICPSUP485 Implement a just-in-time system

ICPSUP487 Analyse manual handling processes

ICPSUP488 Ensure process improvements are sustained

ICPSUP516 Set and apply quality standards

ICPSUP553 Prepare production costing estimates

ICPSUP554 Manage teams

ICPSUP561 Implement and monitor WHS

ICPSUP583 Troubleshoot and optimise production processes

ICPSUP684 Determine and improve process capability

MSS403010A Facilitate change in an organisation implementing competitive systems and practices

MSS403040A Facilitate and improve implementation of 5S

MSS405021A Develop a Just in Time system

MSAENV472B Implement and monitor environmentally sustainable work practices

MSAPMSUP390A Use structured problem solving tools

SIRXCCS509 Manage business customers

SIRXCCS006A Maintain business to business relationships

SIRXSLS008A Develop a sales strategy

TAEASS402B Assess competence

TAEDEL402A Plan, organise and facilitate learning in the workplace

*Note the following prerequisite unit requirements:

Unit in this qualification	Prerequisite unit
CUFANM401A Prepare 3D digital models for production	CUFANM303A Create 3D digital models
ICPDMT491 Create an extensible document	ICTWEB429 Create a markup language document to specification
ICPDMT492 Create an extensible style sheet	ICTWEB429 Create a markup language document to specification
ICPPRP396 Generate high-end PDF files	ICPPRP284 Produce PDF files for online or screen display
ICPPRP452 Output complex images direct to plate or press	ICPPRP352 Output complex images
ICPPRP485 Develop a digital data template	ICPPRP385 Operate a database for digital printing
ICPPRP494 Develop document content and structure	ICPPRP396 Generate high-end PDF files
ICPPRN496 Set up and produce complex digital print	ICPPRN384 Set up and produce basic digital print
ICPSUP458 Monitor production workflow	ICPSUP216 Inspect quality against required standards

Qualification Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICP50115 Diploma of Printing and Graphic Arts	ICP50110 Diploma of Printing and Graphic Arts (Digital Production) ICP50210 Diploma of Printing and Graphic Arts (Multimedia) ICP50310 Diploma of Printing and Graphic Arts (Printing) ICP50510 Diploma of Printing and Graphic Arts (Process Improvement)	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages Qualifications have been merged into one to allow more flexibility	Equivalent qualification

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

BSBDES403 Develop and extend design skills and practice

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with BSB Business Services Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to develop and extend skills as a practising designer.

It applies to individuals who work as a designer, in any industry context, either independently or employed by an organisation.

Designers must continually refine, develop and evaluate their own conceptual and technical skills. Research, experimentation and collaboration are key factors in this process.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Design – Design Process

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1 Acquire and develop technical skills	1.1 Plan strategies to ensure the development of appropriate technical skills in design practice 1.2 Plan and use opportunities to develop and assess technical skills 1.3 Identify and use practice, feedback, discussion and evaluation opportunities to continuously improve technical skills 1.4 Develop and extend technical skills through testing capabilities of materials, tools and equipment 1.5 Identify and use relevant media to stimulate technical and professional development
2 Develop conceptual skills and ideas	2.1 Engage in ongoing experimentation and exploration of different ideas and techniques 2.2 Discuss ideas with others and apply knowledge gained to inform own work 2.3 Use work practice to gain experience in a range of genres and interpretations 2.4 Study the work of others to stimulate conceptual and technical skills development 2.5 Research and share ideas across a range of design disciplines 2.6 Identify and use a range of opportunities to develop own skills and keep informed about current design practice
3 Develop own voice	3.1 Explore and experiment with new ideas in making and/or interpreting design work 3.2 Explore and use technology, where appropriate, to develop own voice and expand practice 3.3 Demonstrate own voice through design project realisation implementation
4 Evaluate own work	4.1 Seek and apply constructive criticism from others to improve own work 4.2 Evaluate own work against planned strategy for own practice 4.3 Evaluate own work in the context of work by others to extend own practice 4.4 Adjust work processes and practice as necessary to improve technical, conceptual and commercial outcomes
5 Research work opportunities	5.1 Correctly identify sources of information relating to work opportunities for designers 5.2 Identify networks and promotional opportunities for designers which may be helpful in developing career opportunities 5.3 Incorporate research results and information into own work and career planning

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Learning	1.1-1.5, 2.2, 2.4, 2.6, 3.2, 4.1-4.3	Uses practical strategies to identify and implement improvements in own creative skills and technical design skills and practice
Reading	1.5, 2.4, 2.5, 5.1-5.3	Researches and evaluates a variety of textual information from a wide range of sources
Writing	2.5, 4.1, 5.3	Uses clear and specific language to document ideas, feedback and research results
Oral Communication	1.3, 2.2, 2.5, 4.1	Participates in a range of verbal exchanges and presentations using appropriate tone and vocabulary to suit the audience Uses active listening and questioning techniques to clarify and confirm understanding
Navigate the world of work	1.2, 1.3, 2.3, 4.1, 5.2	Recognises the importance of developing technical skills and of learning from feedback and self-reflection Begins to broaden areas of interest and focus, seeking new challenges and recognising that expertise can be adapted and applied in diverse contexts
Interact with others	2.5, 4.1, 5.2	Begins to cultivate relationships with people with the knowledge, skills and influence to provide collaborative support
Get the work done	1.1, 1.2, 1.4, 1.5, 2.1, 2.3, 2.6, 3.1-3.3, 4.2, 4.4, 5.1	Takes responsibility for planning and implementing tasks required to achieve outcomes, including those times when interaction with others is Systematically analyses and evaluates information to aid in decision making and problem solving Applies some basic principles of lateral thinking to generate new or innovative ideas Recognises the potential of new approaches to enhance work practices and outcomes Evaluates effectiveness of decisions on how well they meet stated goals Understands key principles and concepts underpinning the design and operation of digital systems and applies these when seeking to understand the potential of new technology

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
BSBDES403 Develop and extend design skills and practice	BSBDES403A Develop and extend design skills and practice	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for BSBDES403 Develop and extend design skills and practice

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with BSB Business Services Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

use strategies to develop or extend skills, ideas and a unique voice

adjust work processes as a result of peer feedback and self-evaluation

research work options, networking and promotional opportunities and incorporate information into own work and career development.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

list current and emerging designers in the relevant design discipline

discuss current and emerging trends and technologies in the relevant design discipline, and the opportunities and challenges they represent

identify professional development information and resources available to designers

summarise sources of information relating to work opportunities and career planning.

Assessment Conditions

Assessment must be conducted in a safe environment where evidence gathered demonstrates consistent performance of typical activities experienced in the design process field of work and include access to materials, resources and equipment used in the development of technical and conceptual skills in the relevant design context.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPCBF105 Operate in-line mail machine

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to safely monitor and operate an intelligent in-line cut sheet form feeder, folder and inserter mail machine, and correctly offload, pack and label completed mail for distribution.

It applies to individuals working in a mail house environment under direct supervision and performing mainly routine tasks such as monitoring machinery operations and reporting production faults.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Converting, Binding and Finishing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Monitor operation	1.1 Job is checked for sign-off by printers and ready for mailing procedures 1.2 Machine is jogged to ensure correct positioning and hopper feed operation 1.3 All units are monitored to ensure optimum operation 1.4 Envelopes are manipulated and fanned to ensure they move efficiently through the machine 1.5 Folds, inserts and envelopes are continuously monitored for defects, and defects are put aside for remake 1.6 Materials are checked and hoppers reloaded as required
2. Check quality	2.1 Mail is monitored to ensure quality standards are met 2.2 Supervisor is contacted when quality standards are not met 2.3 Sequence is monitored according to job specifications 2.4 Number of spoils are documented according to enterprise procedures
3. Pack envelopes	3.1 Completed envelopes are unloaded and checked for quality 3.2 Completed packages are packed into labelled trays and Australia Post labels are affixed according to job specifications 3.3 Sequence numbers and postcodes are in correct pre-sort order ensuring job continuity 3.4 Job is reconciled and documented and supervisor is notified if job does not reconcile

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 2.3, 2.4, 3.2	Recognises text within job specifications and follows written instructions Checks accuracy of labelled information against written instructions
Writing	2.4, 3.4	Documents information required for records
Oral Communication	2.2, 3.4	Speaks clearly using appropriate vocabulary, tone and pace to report faults and discrepancies
Numeracy	2.4, 3.3	Uses simple mathematical calculations and arranges sequential numerical information
Oral Communication	2.2, 3.4	Identifies and reports discrepancies and production faults to supervisor/s
Navigate the world of work	1.1, 2.1, 2.4, 3.1	Follows explicit procedures immediately related to role
Interact with others	2.2, 3.4	Follows accepted communication practices for reporting issues when seeking advice
Get the work done	1.1-1.6, 2.1, 2.3, 3.1-3.4	Follows pre-determined plans for tasks with multiple steps Initiates standard procedures when responding to familiar problems within immediate context Uses digital systems and tools to complete routine tasks

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPCBF105 Operate in-line mail machine	ICPCF105C Operate in-line mail machine	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF105 Operate in-line mail machine

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

correctly complete TWO jobs involving multiple inserts on an in-line mail machine according to job specifications and enterprise procedures

safely operate and demonstrate all safety devices on an in-line mail machine

correctly monitor production and notify supervisor when problems arise.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

explain setup procedures to meet work health and safety and enterprise requirements

explain the quality check process

identify waste disposal procedures relevant to task

explain documentation requirements, where the documents are kept, and the information included.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the converting, binding and finishing field of work and include use of an in-line cut sheet form feeder, folder and inserter machine.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPCBF202 Handline mail

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to manually collate and insert irregular and bulky mail documents.

It applies to individuals working in a mail house environment under direct supervision and performing mainly routine and repetitive tasks such as matching inserts, verifying data and reporting discrepancies and faults.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Converting, Binding and Finishing

Elements and Performance Criteria

Elements Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance Criteria Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Collate materials	1.1 All materials required for the job are checked and confirmed against job specifications 1.2 Materials are changed or adapted according to job specifications 1.3 Materials are arranged to make manual collation as easy and safe as possible 1.4 Collated materials are correct and in sequence, and any faulty materials are removed and documented 1.5 If required, items are decollated according to job specifications 1.6 Manual wrapping of materials is completed, if required according to job specifications
2. Match inserts	2.1 Collated data is correctly matched to addressee 2.2 Address information is verified as accurate 2.3 Random checks are performed to ensure quality is met 2.4 Discrepancies are reported to supervisor 2.5 Envelopes or packs are glued or sealed according to job specifications
3. Reconcile output	3.1 Total number of throughputs matches job specifications 3.2 Destination delivery unit rate matches the job specifications and meets Australia Post standards 3.3 Information matching trail is documented 3.4 Correct procedures for control of materials are followed 3.5 Discrepancies are reported to supervisor

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 1.2, 1.5, 1.6, 2.1, 2.2, 2.5, 3.1, 3.2	Recognises text within job specifications and follows written instructions Verifies accuracy of information
Writing	1.4, 3.3, 3.5	Records information related to outcomes of job according to organisational requirements
Oral Communication	2.4, 3.5	Speaks clearly using appropriate vocabulary, tone and pace to report faults and discrepancies
Numeracy	3.1, 3.2	Uses simple mathematical calculations and arranges sequential numerical information
Navigate the world of work	1.3, 3.2, 3.4	Complies with legislative requirements and follows organisational policies and procedures relevant to own role
Interact with others	2.4, 3.5	Follows accepted practices and protocols for reporting issues to supervisors
Get the work done	1.1-1.6, 2.1-2.5, 3.3-3.5	Follows clearly sequenced instructions and monitors own progress, seeking assistance when necessary Responds to predictable problems and implements standard or logical solutions related to own job role

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPCBF202 Handline mail	ICPCF202C Handline mail	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF202 Handline mail

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

manually collate and insert irregular and bulky mail or packages according to job specifications and within production timeframe, removing any spoils or faulty work, and reporting discrepancies to supervisor.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

explain setup procedures to meet work health and safety and enterprise requirements

explain the quality check process

identify waste disposal procedures relevant to this task

explain documentation requirements, where the documents are kept, and the information included in them.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the converting, binding and finishing field of work and include access to special purpose tools, equipment and materials.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPCBF203 Collate and insert mail manually

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to manually collate and insert mail documents and verify product output.

It applies to individuals working in a mail house environment performing routine activities with some accountability for quality of outcomes.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Converting, Binding and Finishing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Collate inserts	1.1 Inserts required for job are checked and confirmed against job specifications 1.2 Inserts are arranged to make manual collation as easy and safe as possible 1.3 Collated inserts are correct and in sequence
2. Match inserts	2.1 Collated data is correctly matched to addressee 2.2 Address information is verified as accurate 2.3 Bar code information is checked for correct sequence of addressees to collated information where relevant 2.4 Discrepancies are reported to supervisor
3. Reconcile output	3.1 Total number of throughputs matches job specifications 3.2 Destination delivery unit rate matches job specifications 3.3 Information matching trail is documented 3.4 Correct procedures for control of materials are followed 3.5 Discrepancies are reported to supervisor

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 2.1-2.3, 3.1, 3.2	Recognises text within job specifications and follows written instructions Checks accuracy of labelled information against written instructions
Writing	2.4, 3.3, 3.5	Records information according to organisational requirements
Oral Communication	2.4, 3.5	Speaks clearly using appropriate vocabulary, tone and pace to report faults and discrepancies
Numeracy	3.1, 3.2	Recognises and organises sequential numerical data
Navigate the world of work	1.2, 3.4	Complies with legislative requirements and follows organisational policies and procedures relevant to own role
Interact with others	2.4, 3.5	Follows accepted practices and protocols for reporting issues to supervisors
Get the work done	1.1-1.3, 2.1-2.4, 3.1-3.5	Plans, identifies and assembles resources required to complete tasks Sequences steps involved in clearly defined, familiar tasks and sets up simple strategies to track progress Responds to predictable problems and implements standard or logical solutions, seeking assistance when necessary

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPCBF203 Collate and insert mail manually	ICPCF203C Collate and insert mail manually	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF203 Collate and insert mail manually

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

correctly collate and insert mail documents manually and reconcile TWO full jobs according to job specifications and within production timeframes.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

explain setup procedures to meet work health and safety and enterprise requirements

explain the quality check process

identify waste disposal procedures relevant to this task

explain documentation required, where the documents are kept, and the information in them.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the converting, binding and finishing field of work and include access to special purpose tools, equipment and materials.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPCBF204 Operate addressing machine

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to operate an addressing machine, monitor production for problems and correctly pack mail at process completion.

It applies to individuals working in a mail house environment under direct supervision, with some accountability for quality of outcomes including checking and cleaning materials and equipment, and clearing the machine of materials and waste.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Converting, Binding and Finishing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Prepare for job	1.1.Job specifications are read and interpreted from job documentation or process control system 1.2 Job is signed off by printers and ready for mailing procedures 1.3 Materials are checked and in correct order for job, and all sheets are in correct position for barcode scanning if required 1.4 Blades are sharp and correctly fitted, and water for gluing is available 1.5 All tracks and conveyor belts are clean and clear 1.6 Work area is safe and ready for production according to safety requirements
2. Monitor operation	2.1 Machine is jogged to ensure correct positioning and hopper feed operation 2.2 All units are monitored to ensure optimum operation 2.3 Mail is monitored to ensure it moves efficiently through the machine 2.4 Materials are checked and hoppers reloaded as required 2.5 Adjustments are made when quality standards are not met 2.6 Quality is monitored according to job specifications 2.7 Number of spoils are documented according to enterprise procedures
3. Identify and rectify problems	3.1 Sequence, placement or gluing errors are identified and changes made to guides or on the console as required 3.2 Tracks, conveyors and gluer are cleaned and cleared if lags and jams occur 3.3 Faulty performance of equipment is identified and reported according to enterprise procedures 3.4 Wastage is monitored, kept to a minimum and correctly disposed of according to enterprise quality standards
4. Pack mail	4.1 Addressed mail is unloaded and quality checked 4.2 Completed packages are packed into labelled trays and Australia Post labels are affixed according to job specifications 4.3 Sequence numbers and postcodes are in correct pre-sort order ensuring job continuity 4.4 Job is reconciled and documented and supervisor is notified if job does not reconcile 4.5 Machine is cleared and stock put away

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 2.6, 4.2	Recognises text within job specifications and follows written instructions Checks accuracy of labelled information against written instructions
Writing	1.2, 2.7, 3.3, 4.4	Records information related to outcomes of job according to organisational requirements
Oral Communication	3.3, 4.4	Speaks clearly using appropriate vocabulary, tone and pace to report faults and discrepancies
Numeracy	2.7, 4.3	Uses simple mathematical calculations and arranges sequential numerical data
Navigate the world of work	1.2, 1.5, 1.6, 2.5, 2.7, 3.2-3.4	Complies with legislative requirements and follows organisational policies and procedures relevant to own role
Interact with others	3.3, 4.4	Follows accepted practices and protocols for reporting issues to supervisors
Get the work done	1.1, 1.3, 1.4, 2.1, 2.4-2.6, 3.1-3.4, 4.1-4.5	Follows clearly defined instructions, and monitors own progress on tasks, seeking assistance when necessary Responds to predictable problems and implements standard or logical solutions

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPCBF204 Operate addressing machine	ICPCF204C Operate addressing machine	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF204 Operate addressing machine

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

correctly complete TWO jobs according to job specifications and enterprise procedures, ensuring addresses are affixed securely and in correct position, and any production problems are fixed with minimum downtime

operate all safety devices on the machine.

If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

explain setup procedures to meet work health and safety and enterprise requirements

explain the quality check process

identify waste disposal procedures relevant to this task

explain documentation required, where they are kept, and the information included.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the converting, binding and finishing field of work and include access to a Cheshire labelling machine and special purpose tools, equipment and materials.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPCBF208 Set up and operate a cheque mailer machine

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to safely set up, operate and monitor a cheque mailer machine including rectifying any production faults. The individual off-loads completed books and correctly packs and completes reconciliation requirements.

It applies to individuals working under direct supervision performing mainly routine tasks, operating machinery and completing production requirements according to job specifications and internal procedures.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Converting, Binding and Finishing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Prepare for job	1.1 Job specifications are read and interpreted from job documentation or process control system 1.2 Books are checked and in correct order and position for job 1.3 First and last name listings are checked as correct 1.4 Correct envelopes are obtained from enterprise storage area and water container is checked 1.5 Envelopes are correctly loaded and hopper guides adjusted according to job specifications 1.6 Books are correctly loaded and book feeder adjusted according to job specifications 1.7 All feeders and conveyor belts are clean and clear 1.8 Work area is safe and ready for production according to safety requirements
2. Monitor operation	2.1 Machine is jogged to ensure correct positioning and hopper feed operation 2.2 Books and envelopes are replenished to ensure continuous supply 2.3 Books and envelopes are continuously monitored for faulty work and put aside securely for remake
3. Reconcile job	3.1 Sequence of names is checked against job specifications/listing sheet 3.2 Number of spoils are documented according to enterprise procedures 3.3 Details of spoils are marked-off on job documentation and supervisor is notified 3.4 All remaining documentation is completed according to reconciliation and security requirements
4. Complete job	4.1 Completed packages are packed into labelled trays and Australia Post labels are affixed according to job specifications 4.2 Faulty work is disposed of according to security requirements 4.3 Machine is cleared and stock put away according to security requirements

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 1.3, 1.5, 1.6, 3.1, 4.1	Interprets text in documents or within systems to establish job requirements Checks accuracy of information against written instructions
Writing	3.2-3.4	Completes workplace documentation as per job and enterprise requirements
Oral Communication	3.3	Speaks clearly using appropriate vocabulary, tone and pace to report faults and discrepancies
Numeracy	3.2	Uses simple mathematical calculations to calculate quantities
Navigate the world of work	1.7, 1.8, 3.2, 3.4, 4.3	Complies with legislative requirements and follows organisational policies and procedures relevant to own role
Interact with others	3.3	Follows accepted practices and protocols for reporting issues to supervisors
Get the work done	1.1-1.6, 2.1-2.3, 3.1	Follows clearly defined instructions and monitors own progress on tasks Identifies and assembles resources required for tasks Responds to predictable problems and implements standard or logical solutions

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPCBF208 Set up and operate a cheque mailer machine	ICPCF208C Set up and operate a cheque mailer machine	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF208 Set up and operate a cheque mailer machine

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

safely operate and monitor a cheque mailer machine for TWO jobs in accordance with job specifications and internal requirements (including documenting all faults, reconciling work, and completing all required documentation and reconciliations with minimum downtime)

demonstrate all safety devices on the machine.

If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

explain setup procedures to meet work health and safety and enterprise requirements

explain the quality check process

identify waste disposal procedures relevant to this task, where they are kept and information included in these documents

identify security requirements for completing reconciliation documentation.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the converting, binding and finishing field of work and include access to:

cheque book

mailer machine

special purpose tools, equipment and materials.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPCBF209 Set up and operate in-line mail machine

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to safely set up and operate an intelligent in-line cut sheet form feeder, folder and inserter mail machine and perform production tasks involving off-loading, packing and labelling completed packages for distribution, and identifying any production problems.

It applies to individuals who work under direct supervision performing mainly routine tasks with some accountability for completing requirements in accordance with job specifications and internal procedures.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Converting, Binding and Finishing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Prepare for job	1.1 Job specifications are read and interpreted from job documentation or process control system 1.2 Job is signed off by printers 1.3 Mailing procedures are identified from job specifications 1.4 Materials are checked and in correct order for job and all sheets are in correct position for barcode scanning if required 1.5 All tracks and conveyor belts are clean and clear 1.6 Work area is safe and ready for production, according to safety requirements
2. Set up job	2.1 Mail type is identified from job specifications 2.2 Number and type of inserts are identified 2.3 Job specifications are entered into console 2.4 Settings are checked against job specifications before production starts
3. Monitor operation	3.1 Machine is jogged to ensure correct positioning and hopper feed operation 3.2 All sections of the machine are monitored to ensure optimum operation 3.3 Envelopes are manipulated and fanned to ensure they move efficiently through the machine 3.4 Folds, inserts and envelopes are continuously monitored for defects, and defects are put aside for remake 3.5 Materials are checked and hoppers reloaded as required 3.6 Adjustments are made when quality standards are not met 3.7 Sequence is monitored according to job specifications 3.8 Number of spoils is documented according to enterprise procedures
4. Identify and rectify problems	4.1 Sequence or inserter errors are identified and barcodes checked, and changes entered into console, if required 4.2 Tracks, conveyors and sensors are cleaned and cleared if lags and jams occur 4.3 Any machine consumables needing replacement are replaced or adjusted with a minimum of downtime 4.4 Faulty performance of equipment is identified and reported according to enterprise procedures 4.5 Wastage is monitored, kept to a minimum and correctly disposed of according to enterprise quality standards
5. Pack envelopes	5.1 Completed envelopes are unloaded and checked for quality 5.2 Completed packages are packed into labelled trays and Australia Post labels are affixed according to job specifications 5.3 Sequence numbers and postcodes are in correct pre-sort order ensuring job continuity 5.4 Job is reconciled and documented and supervisor is notified if job does not reconcile 5.5 Machine is cleared and stock put away

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 1.3, 2.1-2.4, 3.7, 3.8, 4.4, 5.2	Establishes job requirements from information contained in relevant systems and documents Checks accuracy of information against written instructions
Writing	1.2, 3.8, 4.4, 5.4	Records information related to outcomes of job according to organisational requirements
Oral Communication	4.4, 5.4	Speaks clearly using appropriate vocabulary, tone and pace to report faults and discrepancies
Numeracy	3.8, 5.3	Uses simple mathematical calculations and arranges sequential numerical information
Navigate the world of work	1.3, 1.5, 1.6, 3.6, 3.8, 4.4, 4.5, 5.1	Complies with legislative requirements and follows organisational policies and procedures relevant to own role
Interact with others	4.4, 5.4	Follows accepted practices and protocols for reporting issues to supervisors
Get the work done	1.1-1.4, 2.2, 2.4, 3.1-3.6, 3.7, 4.1-4.5, 5.1, 5.3, 5.5	Follows clearly defined instructions and monitors own progress on tasks Identifies and responds to familiar problems related directly to own role by initiating standard procedures

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPCBF209 Set up and operate in-line mail machine	ICPCF209C Set up and operate in-line mail machine	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF209 Set up and operate in-line mail machine

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

safely set up, operate and monitor an in-line mail machine

demonstrate all safety devices on the machine

complete job that includes multiple inserts and rectify any routine production problems that occur with minimum downtime.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

explain correct setup procedure to meet work health and safety (WHS) and enterprise requirements

explain how quality checks are achieved

identify waste disposal procedures relevant to this task, where they are kept and the information included in them.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the converting, binding and finishing field of work and include access to:

in-line cut sheet form feeder

folder and inserter

special purpose tools, equipment and materials.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPCBF211 Set up and run machine for sewing

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to set up and run a machine for sewn fastening.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Converting, Binding and Finishing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Prepare for job	1.1 Job specifications are determined from job documentation or production control system 1.2 Availability of all job related components is checked
2. Set up sewing machine	2.1 Feeder is set up and adjusted according to job specifications 2.2 Different types of thread are set up according to job specifications, and thread tension is correct 2.3 Different types of needles are fitted according to job specifications 2.4 Correct sewing tape is attached to the machine according to job specifications 2.5 Hand rules are set according to job specifications 2.6 Timing of slitter is adjusted according to job specifications
3. Complete work	3.1 Sewing machine is operated safely according to enterprise procedures 3.2 Job is completed in required time 3.3 Samples are continuously monitored for defects, and defects are removed 3.4 Locations of all emergency shutdown buttons and triggers are known 3.5 All processed product is stacked and packed in bundles

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 2.1-2.6	Recognises and interprets text to confirm work requirements from information contained within relevant specifications or systems
Navigate the world of work	3.1, 3.4	Recognises and follows organisational and legislative requirements, including safety requirements, associated with own role
Get the work done	1.1, 1.2, 2.1-2.6, 3.1-3.5	Determines priorities and sequences steps involved in clearly defined, familiar tasks Implements actions as per instructions, making slight adjustments if necessary Identifies and assembles resources required to complete tasks

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPCBF211 Set up and run machine for sewing	ICPCF2101C Set up and run machine for sewing	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF211 Set up and run machine for sewing

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

set up and efficiently operate a machine to produce THREE different sewn products according to job specifications, listed performance criteria, and within production timeframes

demonstrate all safety devices on the machine.

If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

explain work health and safety factors for setting up the machine

establish effect of sewing in the wrong position

identify largest/smallest size bag or sack that can be processed on the machine

describe how to adapt the machines to facilitate smaller/larger stock.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the converting, binding and finishing field of work and include access to relevant facilities, materials and access to a machine for sewn fastening.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPCBF214 Set up single-faced web

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to set up a single-faced web for corrugated board manufacture involving the reel in-feed, splicer, pre-conditioner, pre-heater, single facer, curing, coating and/or waxing sections of a corrugator.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Converting, Binding and Finishing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Prepare for set up	1.1 Job specifications are read and interpreted from job documentation or process control system 1.2 Set-up is carried out correctly and in minimum time 1.3 Paper/board quantity requirements are estimated, ordered and checked
2. Set up reel transportation system	2.1 Unwind reel is set up and adjusted according to job specifications 2.2 Webbing procedures are carried out according to machinery requirements 2.3 Web control system is set up and adjusted according to job specifications 2.4 Reels are spliced/joined according to job specifications
3. Set up machine for single facing	3.1 Steam delivery system is set up and adjusted to suit corrugating process and according to job specifications 3.2 Corrugating rolls and pressure roll are set to correct pressure 3.3.Starch delivery system is set up and adjusted to suit corrugating process, and according to job specifications 3.4 Heat delivery system is set up and adjusted to suit corrugating process, and according to job specifications
4. Set up in-line units	4.1 Wax units are set up and adjusted to suit corrugating process, and according to job specifications 4.2 Coating units are set up and adjusted to suit corrugating process, and according to job specifications 4.3 Slitters are set up and adjusted according to job specifications 4.4 Cut-off knife is set up and adjusted according to job specifications
5. Inspect and adjust quality	5.1 Inspection and/or testing of sample is organised 5.2 Sample is visually inspected and/or tested according to enterprise procedures 5.3 Results are interpreted to determine adjustment requirements 5.4 Adjustment changes are carried out according to product and machine specifications

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 2.1-2.4, 3.1, 3.3, 3.4, 4.1-4.4, 5.4	Recognises and interprets text to confirm work requirements from information contained within relevant specifications or systems
Numeracy	1.3	Uses mathematical processes to estimate and check quantities
Navigate the world of work	5.2	Recognises and follows organisational procedures relevant to own role
Get the work done	1.1-1.3, 2.1-2.4, 3.1-3.4, 4.1-4.4, 5.1-5.5	Sequences and schedules activities required for tasks and monitors implementation, making adjustments as necessary Plans, identifies and assembles resources required to complete tasks Uses analytical processes to interpret relevant information and make decisions directly related to tasks Follows routine procedures for using digital technology by reading data from electronic monitoring and control systems

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPCBF214 Set up single-faced web	ICPCF2104C Set up single-faced web	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF214 Set up single-faced web

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

correctly set up reel in-feed, splicer, pre-conditioner, pre-heater, single facer, curing, coating and/or waxing sections of a corrugator for at least TWO different product runs, according to manufacturer’s and job specifications, enterprise procedures and listed performance criteria.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

explain main requirements to run a corrugator and meet work health and safety and enterprise requirements

identify FIVE different types/categories of rolled paperboard

list end products commonly made from each rolled paperboard type

identify principal components of a typical, single-face corrugated board adhesive and how to determine satisfactory performance of this adhesive

list main tools and/or equipment items required for efficient handling of paperboard rolls in the corrugation in-feed section, and for each item explain:

how to determine if correct settings have been applied

the required checks

explain what product factors are monitored automatically during production and how the monitoring function is achieved

briefly explain the preparation required prior to setting up a sewing machine

list the steps required to set roll pressures, adjust a steam delivery system and calibrate equipment

identify the location and contents of relevant machine manuals, safety and other documentation.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the converting, binding and finishing field of work and include access to relevant facilities, materials, and in-line corrugating machinery.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPCBF216 Set up double-faced web

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to set up a double-faced web for corrugated board manufacture involving the reel in-feed, splicer, bridge, pre-heater, double backer, curing, coating and/or waxing sections of a corrugator.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Converting, Binding and Finishing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Prepare for set-up	1.1 Job specifications are read and interpreted from job documentation or process control system 1.2 Set-up is carried out correctly and in minimum time 1.3 Paper/board quantity requirements are estimated, ordered and checked
2. Set up reel transportation system	2.1 Unwind reel is set up and adjusted according to job specifications 2.2 Webbing procedures are carried out according to machinery requirements 2.3 Web control system is set up and adjusted according to job specifications 2.4 Reels are spliced/joined according to job specifications
3. Set up machine for double facing	3.1 Starch delivery system is set up and adjusted to suit corrugating process and according to job specifications 3.2 Rider roll is set to correct pressure 3.3 Heat delivery system is set up and adjusted to suit corrugating process and according to job specifications
4. Set up in-line units	4.1 Wax units are set up and adjusted to suit corrugating process and according to job specifications 4.2 Coating units are set up and adjusted to suit corrugating process and according to job specifications 4.3 Tape dispensing units are set up and adjusted to suit corrugating process and according to job specifications 4.4 Slitters are set up and adjusted according to job specifications 4.5 Cut-off knife is set up and adjusted according to job specifications
5. Inspect and adjust quality	5.1 Inspection and/or testing of sample is organised 5.2 Sample is visually inspected and/or tested according to enterprise procedures 5.3 Results are interpreted to determine adjustment requirements 5.4 Adjustments are carried out according to product and machine specifications

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 2.1, 2.3, 2.4, 3.1, 3.3, 4.1-4.5, 5.4	Recognises and interprets text to confirm work requirements from information contained within relevant specifications or systems
Numeracy	1.3	Uses mathematical processes to estimate and check quantities
Navigate the world of work	5.2	Recognises and follows organisational procedures relevant to own role
Get the work done	1.1-1.3, 2.1-2.4, 3.1-3.3, 4.1-4.5, 5.1-5.4	Sequences and schedules activities required to complete tasks and monitors implementation making adjustments as necessary Uses analytical processes to interpret relevant information and make decisions directly related to tasks Plans, identifies and assembles resources required to complete tasks Follows routine procedures for using digital technology by reading data from electronic monitoring and control systems
Reading	1.1, 2.1, 2.3, 2.4, 3.1, 3.3, 4.1-4.5, 5.4	Recognises and interprets text to confirm work requirements from information contained within relevant specifications or systems
Numeracy	1.3	Uses mathematical processes to estimate and check quantities
Navigate the world of work	5.2	Recognises and follows organisational procedures relevant to own role
Get the work done	1.1-1.3, 2.1-2.4, 3.1-3.3, 4.1-4.5, 5.1-5.4	Sequences and schedules activities required to complete tasks and monitors implementation making adjustments as necessary Uses analytical processes to interpret relevant information and make decisions directly related to tasks Plans, identifies and assembles resources required to complete tasks Follows routine procedures for using digital technology by reading data from electronic monitoring and control systems

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPCBF216 Set up double-faced web	ICPCF2106C Set up double-faced web	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF216 Set up double-faced web

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

correctly set up the reel in-feed, splicer, bridge, pre-heater, double backer, curing, coating and/or waxing sections of a corrugator for at least TWO different product runs, according to manufacturer’s and job specifications, enterprise procedures and listed performance criteria

demonstrate all safety devices on the machine.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

describe significant risks posed to workers in this activity

explain measures employed to prevent injury and/or illness in the case of the above identified risks

identify FIVE different types/categories of rolled paperboard

list end products commonly made from each rolled paperboard type

identify principal components of a typical, double-backed corrugated board adhesive, and how to determine satisfactory performance of this adhesive

list main tools and/or equipment items required for efficient handling of paperboard rolls in the corrugation in-feed section

list the check required to ensure a sample conforms to required quality standards

list preparation required prior to setting up the sewing machine

list steps required to set roll pressures, adjust steam delivery system and calibrate equipment

list steps required to determine if the correct settings have been applied

list product factors that are monitored automatically during production

ensure monitoring function is effective

explain how to set up machine checks

identify machine manuals, safety and other documentation relevant to this task, where they are kept, and the information included in them.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the converting, binding and finishing field of work and include access to in-line corrugated machinery, special purpose tools, equipment and materials.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPCBF218 Produce basic folded and glued cartons

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to produce basic folded and glued cartons and correctly shut down machinery when the job is completed.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Converting, Binding and Finishing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Maintain operation of carton blank system	1.1 Feeder is monitored and adjusted to ensure continuous and efficient feeding to machine 1.2 Carton blank pick-up and transport system is monitored and adjusted to ensure accurate and continuous carton blank handling and efficient operation 1.3 Transfer systems are monitored and adjusted to ensure correct and continuous carton blank handling and efficient operation 1.4 Delivery is monitored and adjusted to ensure quality and efficient product delivery
2. Maintain basic gluing and continuous folding process	2.1 Registration and squareness of fold are monitored and adjusted to ensure quality of product meets approved sample standard 2.2 Registration of gluing is monitored and adjusted to ensure quality of product meets approved sample standard 2.3 Adhesion is monitored and adjusted to ensure quality meets approved sample standard
3. Maintain production process	3.1 Production process is operated in association with fellow workers and according to enterprise procedures and planned daily schedule 3.2 Production is maintained according to work health and safety (WHS) requirements, manufacturer’s specifications and enterprise procedures 3.3 Performance is monitored and verified using the process control system according to enterprise procedures 3.4 Production difficulties are anticipated and preventive action taken to prevent occurrence by timely intervention 3.5 Process adjustments to eliminate problems are reported according to enterprise procedures 3.6 Faulty performance of equipment is identified and reported according to enterprise procedures 3.7 Waste is sorted according to procedures
4. Identify and rectify minor problems	4.1 Problems in folding operation are identified and reported according to enterprise procedures 4.2 Adjustments or corrections are carried out according to enterprise procedures 4.3 Folding is checked to ensure correct operation 4.4 Problems in gluing unit are identified and reported according to enterprise requirements 4.5 Adjustments or corrections are carried out according to enterprise procedures, and consistent with operator’s skill level 4.6 Gluing unit operation is checked to ensure correct operation
5. Conduct shutdown of production process	5.1 Correct shutdown sequence is followed according to manufacturer’s specifications and enterprise procedures 5.2 Shutdown is conducted in association with fellow workers and in compliance with WHS requirements 5.3 Glue system is washed ready for next run and liquid waste is disposed of according to regulatory requirements and enterprise procedures 5.4 Waste is removed from operating area and recycled or disposed of, where required, according to regulatory requirements and enterprise procedures 5.5 Machine faults requiring repair are identified and reported to designated person, according to enterprise procedures 5.6 Repair/adjustment is verified prior to resumption of operations 5.7 Production records or other documentation are accurately completed where required by enterprise procedures

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	3.2, 5.1	Recognises and interprets text to confirm work requirements from information contained within relevant specifications and enterprise documents
Writing	3.5, 3.6, 4.1, 4.4, 5.5, 5.7	Enters routine data associated with production processes and enterprise procedures
Oral Communication	3.1, 3.5, 3.6, 4.1, 4.4, 5.2, 5.5	Participates effectively in spoken interactions to report issues or to confirm or clarify requirements
Navigate the world of work	2.1-2.3, 3.1-3.3, 3.5-3.7, 4.1, 4.2, 4.4, 4.5, 5.1-5.5, 5.7	Recognises and follows all procedures for operation and maintenance of equipment, incorporating regulatory and enterprise requirements
Interact with others	3.1, 3.5, 3.6, 4.1, 4.4, 5.2, 5.5	Cooperates with others as part of familiar routine activities, and contributes to specific activities requiring joint responsibility and accountability Understands what to communicate, with whom and how, in routine work situations
Get the work done	1.1-1.4, 2.1-2.3, 3.1-3.7, 4.1-4.6, 5.1-5.7	Sequences and schedules activities required to complete tasks and monitors implementation making adjustments as necessary Uses analytical processes to interpret relevant information and make decisions directly related to tasks Recognises and anticipates an increasing range of familiar problems, actively looking for early warning signs and implementing contingency plans Follows routine procedures for using digital technology by reading data from electronic monitoring and control systems

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPCBF218 Produce basic folded and glued cartons	ICPCF2108C Produce basic folded and glued cartons	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF218 Produce basic folded and glued cartons

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

produce at least FOUR simple straight line folded and glued cartons of different sizes and weights according to manufacturer’s and job specifications and enterprise procedures on one of the following machines:

Royal 40

Bobst Media

Bobst Domino.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

identify the work health and safety factors for:

setting and/or operating machine delivery systems

using the folder/gluer machine

adjusting/correcting the machine

cleaning the machine

identify areas of the sheet-fed feeder that need to be monitored to ensure trouble-free operation

list checks to be undertaken when substrate is removed from the machine

identify areas to continually observe to ensure smooth trouble-free operation of the machine

list causes of out-of-square folding and how each can be corrected

identify segments of quality assurance that are inspected at completion of the sample run, and changes required to production to ensure client requirements are met

list part(s) of the machine that can be adjusted if carton blanks are creasing

determine factors that cause poor glue adhesion on cartons, and requirements to adjust glue application

list important tasks to correctly shut down the machine

list tasks to prepare the finished work for dispatch

identify areas of the machine that need regular cleaning, and materials that need to be cleaned from the machine

identify requirements to keep the machine clear of surface rust (condensation)

list factors that determine a quality product in a completed folded job

identify machine manuals and safety documentation relevant to this task, where they are kept, and the information included in them.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the converting, binding and finishing field of work and include access to special purpose tools, equipment and materials, as well as one of these machines:

Royal 40

Bobst Media

Bobst Domino.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPCBF220 Produce basic converted or finished product

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to cover most converting and finishing operations including how to maintain substrate operations and complete relevant finishing processes.

It applies to individuals who prepare materials and set up and run a range of equipment and machinery for cutting, embossing, folding, collating and fastening. They work under direct supervision, however have certain responsibilities in the production process.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Converting, Binding and Finishing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Maintain operation of delivery system	1.1 Delivery systems are monitored and adjusted to ensure efficient and continuous operation of the process and ensure no damage to finished product 1.2 Substrate is added to and removed from the process according to job specifications
2. Maintain basic cutting or embossing process	2.1 Cutting edge and knife or die condition is monitored and adjusted to ensure quality of product meets the approved sample standard 2.2 Cutting/embossing pressures are monitored and adjusted to ensure quality of product meets the approved sample standard 2.3 Registration of cutting devices and knives or dies is monitored and adjusted to ensure quality of product meets the approved sample standard 2.4 Packing of cutting/embossing devices is monitored and adjusted to ensure quality of product meets the approved sample standard
3. Maintain folding process	3.1 Registration and squareness of fold are monitored and adjusted to ensure quality of product meets the approved sample standard, if relevant 3.2 Collating/inserting process is monitored and adjusted to ensure quality of product meets the approved sample standard, if relevant
4. Maintain basic fastening (adhesive/ mechanical/thermal) process	4.1 Registration of fastening is monitored and adjusted to ensure quality of product meets the approved sample standard 4.2 Wire straightness, length, cut-off and clinching pressures or power current and dwell time are monitored and adjusted to ensure quality of product meets the approved sample standard
5. Maintain basic laminating process	5.1 Registration of laminating is monitored and adjusted to ensure quality of product meets the approved sample standard 5.2 Pressures are monitored and adjusted to ensure quality of product meets the approved sample standard 5.3 Adhesion is monitored and adjusted to ensure quality of product meets the approved sample standard 5.4 Basic in-line printing/coating processes are monitored and adjusted to ensure quality of product meets the approved sample standard
6. Maintain production process	6.1 Production process is operated in association with fellow workers, and according to enterprise procedures and planned daily schedule 6.2 Production is maintained according to work health and safety (WHS) requirements, manufacturer’s specifications and enterprise procedures 6.3 Manual and/or automatic control is used according to job specifications 6.4 Performance is monitored and verified using the process control system according to enterprise procedures 6.5 Production difficulties are anticipated and preventive action is taken to prevent occurrence by timely intervention 6.6 Process adjustments to eliminate problems are reported according to enterprise procedures 6.7 Faulty performance of equipment is identified and reported according to enterprise procedures 6.8 Waste is sorted according to enterprise procedures
7. Identify and rectify problems or faults	7.1 Product and substrate are monitored and tested to ensure conformance to client requirements 7.2 Problems in converting/finishing machine operation are identified and reported according to enterprise procedures 7.3 Adjustments or corrections are carried out according to specified procedures and are consistent with operator’s skill level 7.4 Converting/finishing machine operation is checked to ensure correct operation
8. Conduct shutdown of production process	8.1 Correct shutdown sequence is followed according to manufacturer’s specifications and enterprise procedures 8.2 Shutdown is conducted in association with fellow workers and in compliance with WHS requirements 8.3 Substrate waste is removed from operating area and recycled or disposed of, where required, according to regulatory requirements and enterprise procedures 8.4 Machine faults requiring repair are identified and reported to designated person according to enterprise procedures 8.5 Repair/adjustment is verified prior to resumption of operations
9. Clean converting/ finishing machine at end of run	9.1 Cutting units are disengaged and cleaned ready for next run 9.2 Cutting devices are sharpened according to WHS procedures 9.3 Machine bed is cleaned ready for next run 9.4 Cutting devices and knives are cleaned or replaced ready for next run 9.5 All units are disengaged and cleaned ready for next run 9.6 Adhesive or glue system is washed ready for next run, and liquid waste is disposed of according to regulatory requirements and enterprise procedures 9.7 Transportation and delivery systems are disengaged and cleaned ready for next run 9.8 Production records or other documentation are accurately completed where required by enterprise procedures

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	6.2, 6.3, 8.1	Recognises and interprets texts to establish job requirements from information contained within relevant procedures and specifications
Writing	6.6, 6.7, 7.2, 8.4, 9.8	Enters routine data associated with production processes and enterprise procedures
Oral Communication	6.1, 6.6, 6.7, 7.2, 8.2, 8.4	Speaks clearly using appropriate vocabulary, tone and pace to report faults and discrepancies to supervisors or discuss job requirements with colleagues
Navigate the world of work	2.1-2.4, 3.1, 3.2, 4.1, 4.2, 5.1-5.4, 6.1, 6.2, 6.4, 6.6-6.8, 7.2, 7.3, 8.1-8.4, 9.1-9.9	Complies with legislative requirements and follows organisational policies and procedures relevant to own role
Interact with others	6.1, 6.6, 6.7, 7.2, 8.2, 8.4	Cooperates with others as part of familiar routine activities, and contributes to specific activities requiring joint responsibility and accountability Follows accepted practices and protocols for reporting issues to supervisors
Get the work done	1.1, 1.2, 2.1-2.4, 3.1, 3.2, 4.1, 4.2, 5.1-5.4, 6.1, 6.4, 6.5, 6.8, 7.1, 7.3, 7.4, 8.3, 8.5	Determines priorities and sequences steps involved in clearly defined, familiar tasks Recognises and anticipates an increasing range of familiar problems, their symptoms and causes; actively looking for early warning signs and implementing contingency plans Follows routine procedures for using digital technology by reading data from electronic monitoring and control systems

Range of Conditions

This section specifies different work environments and conditions that may affect performance. Essential operating conditions that may be present (depending on the work situation, needs of the candidate, accessibility of the item, and local industry and regional contexts) are included.

Delivery systems MUST include EITHER:	reel OR sheet
Monitoring and adjusting MUST include EITHER:	reel stand and rewind web control system sheeting section OR feeder and delivery system sheet pick-up and transport system transfer system

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPCBF220 Produce basic converted or finished product	ICPCF220C Produce basic converted or finished product	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages Changes to elements and performance criteria to clarify intent	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF220 Produce basic converted or finished product

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

correctly use any converting or finishing equipment (involving one process or a sequence of processes) to complete TWO different jobs involving different types, sizes and weights of substrate according to manufacturer’s specifications, job specifications and enterprise procedures OR in the case of standalone minor flat-bed or rotary cutting processes THREE processes must be demonstrated

correctly maintain substrate operation and complete relevant finishing process according to job specifications and within the production timeframe

demonstrate all safety devices on the machine

demonstrate use of computerised control, monitoring and data entry.

If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

Work health and safety (WHS)

identify WHS factors for:

setting up/adjusting the collating machine

setting up and/or operating machine transport and machine delivery systems

maintaining the cutting process

using the folding machine

using hot melt adhesive

maintaining laminating and in-line processes

keeping the machine clear of surface rust (condensation)

conducting machine shutdown procedures

identify safety clothing for use when operating adhesive binders

Reel Delivery Systems Only

list areas of the reel stand to be monitored to ensure trouble-free operation

identify the area of the web control system to adjust to maintain correct web tension

identify WHS factors for straightening the wire feed of a wire stitcher

Sheet Delivery Systems Only

name THREE procedures to ensure smooth transport of sections through the machine

list steps to ensure smooth delivery of sections

list FOUR important factors to consider when setting the feeder

explain the setting of the double/misfeed sheet calliper system

name different types of sheet/section delivery systems

list checks required when substrate is removed from the machine

Paper sizes and weights

determine largest and smallest sheet or section size that can be run through this machine

identify which areas of the machine should be adjusted to allow for 42gsm stock

maintenance of cutting processes

explain indicators of the need to replace a knife and how cutting pressure is adjusted

list FOUR requirements to maintain the cutting process to ensure the machine can be kept running without interruption

Cutting machine faults and problems

identify checks required when packing cutting devices

explain the procedure for correcting THREE common machine faults

list adjustments required if the cover is marked (scuffed) when trimming

Maintaining basic folding processes

list THREE areas to continuously observe to ensure smooth, trouble-free operation of the machine

list areas of the in-line process to monitor to assure quality of the product

Folding machine faults and minor problem-solving

identify TWO causes of out-of-square folding and explain how each may be corrected

list areas of the client’s sample to be inspected to determine quality assurance

explain communication to instigate if the:

job is out-of-square

ink is too wet for production

job does not coincide with the sample

list parts of the machine to adjust if the sheet is creasing

Collating machine operation, problems and fault correction

list factors that govern speed the machine operates at

list indicators the machine needs lubrication

identify how to prevent double sheet feeds

identify circumstances indicating the machine needs adjustment

list FOUR items to check against the client sample to constitute an acceptable collating result

Maintaining basic fastening (adhesive/mechanical/thermal) process

list areas of the in-line process to monitor to ensure product quality

name TWO sectors to observe to ensure the production process is trouble-free and continuous

Fastening operating problems and minor fault correction

list circumstances when the machine needs to be adjusted

explain how adhesive application is adjusted

explain how wire can be straightened in the wire feed

identify TWO possible reasons welding might be unsuccessful for a high-frequency welder

determine quality aspects to consider in a completed:

adhesive-bound job

high-frequency welded job

wire-stitched job

explain how production may need to be altered to meet client requirements

Maintaining laminating production processes and minor fault correction

explain methods for assuring registration of laminating

list areas of the in-line process to monitor to ensure a quality product

identify TWO laminating problems that may occur during operation of the machine and adjustments or correction procedures required to ensure accurate operation

determine quality aspects to consider in a completed laminated job, and ways production may need to be altered to meet client requirements

Machine shutdown procedures

determine checks required when waste is removed from the machine and surrounding area for disposal or recycling

list checks required during the machine shutdown procedure

list checks required when cutting devices or knives are cleaned or replaced ready for the next run

identify materials to be cleaned from the machine, and areas of the machine that require cleaning at the end of the run

Quality assurance

list features to check on the finished product

list THREE common faults that cause the finished product to be rejected, and how they can be fixed/avoided

explain available testing procedures and why they are used

list production records to be kept or written up, and the information that should be included

Information sources

identify machine manuals, safety and other documentation relevant to this task, where are they kept and information included in them.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the converting, binding and finishing field of work and include access to and use of relevant facilities, and equipment and materials used to produce a converted or finished product.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPCBF221 Set up and produce basic guillotined product

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to perform basic manual guillotining, including preparing machinery, inspecting results and rectifying production issues.

It applies to individuals who work under direct supervision, who are responsible for operating and monitoring equipment and machinery.

Note: Knife installation is part of ICPCBF321 Set up and produce complex guillotined product.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Converting, Binding and Finishing

Elements and Performance Criteria

1. Prepare job	1.1 Job specifications are read and interpreted from job documentation or production control system 1.2 Set-up is carried out correctly in minimum time with minimum wastage 1.3 Availability of all job-related components is checked 1.4 Grip and lay edges of sheet are identified
2. Check knife sharpness	2.1 Knives are checked for appropriate sharpness 2.2 Dull knives are reported and arrangements made for them to be changed 2.3 Cutting sticks are replaced where necessary
3. Set up machine for basic guillotining	3.1 Guillotine is manually set up and adjusted according to job specifications 3.2 Clamping pressures are set up and adjusted according to job specifications
4. Conduct simple cut process	4.1 Material to be used for sample is organised correctly 4.2 Machine is set up and operated to produce a specified sample according to work health and safety (WHS) requirements, manufacturer’s specifications and enterprise procedures
5. Organise sample inspection and/or testing	5.1 Sample is visually inspected and/or tested or laboratory testing is organised according to enterprise procedures 5.2 Results are interpreted to determine adjustment requirements 5.3 Adjustment changes are carried out according to product and machine specifications
6. Maintain basic guillotining process	6.1 Knife and cutting stick condition is monitored and adjusted to ensure product quality meets the approved sample standard 6.2 Cutting pressures are monitored and adjusted to ensure product quality meets the approved sample standard 6.3 Registration of knives is monitored and adjusted to ensure product quality meets the approved sample standard
7. Maintain production process	7.1 Production process is operated in association with fellow workers and according to enterprise procedures and planned daily schedule 7.2 Production is maintained according to WHS requirements, manufacturer’s specifications and enterprise procedures 7.3 Manual and/or automatic control is used according to job specifications 7.4 Performance is monitored and verified using the process control system according to enterprise procedures 7.5 Production difficulties are anticipated and preventive action is taken to prevent occurrence by timely intervention 7.6 Process adjustments to eliminate problems are reported according to enterprise procedures 7.7 Faulty performance of equipment is identified and reported according to enterprise procedures 7.8 Waste is sorted according to enterprise procedures
8. Identify and rectify problems and faults	8.1 Problems in guillotining machine operation are identified and reported according to enterprise procedures 8.2 Adjustments or corrections are carried out according to specified procedures and are consistent with operator’s skill level 8.3 Guillotining machine operation is checked to ensure correct operation
9. Conduct shutdown of production process	9.1 Correct shutdown sequence is followed according to manufacturer’s specifications and enterprise procedures 9.2 Shutdown is conducted in association with fellow workers and in compliance with WHS requirements 9.3 Substrate waste is removed from operating area and recycled or disposed of, where required, according to regulatory requirements and enterprise procedures 9.4 Machine faults requiring repair are identified and reported to designated person according to enterprise procedures 9.5 Repair/adjustment is verified prior to resumption of operations
10. Clean guillotining machine at end of run	10.1 Knives are replaced and cleaned ready for next run 10.2 Machine bed is cleaned ready for next run 10.3 Cutting units are disengaged and cleaned ready for next run 10.4 Production records or other documentation are accurately completed where required by enterprise procedures

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 3.1, 3.2, 4.2, 5.3, 7.1-7.3, 9.1	Recognises and interprets text to establish job requirements from information contained within relevant procedures and specifications
Writing	2.2, 7.6, 7.7, 8.1, 9.4, 10.4	Records information relating to production and machinery problems and completes production reports and other relevant documentation in required format
Oral Communication	2.2, 7.1, 7.6, 7.7, 8.1, 9.2, 9.4	Uses appropriate language to adequately report discrepancies and listens for relevant information to confirm operations can resume
Navigate the World of work	1.1, 3.1, 3.2, 4.2, 5.1, 5.3, 6.1-6.3, 7.1-7.4, 7.6-7.8, 8.1, 8.2, 9.1-9.4, 10.1-10.4	Recognises and follows all procedures for cleaning and maintenance of equipment, incorporating regulatory requirements and enterprise procedures Takes personal responsibility for adherence to regulatory responsibilities relevant to own work context
Interact with others	2.2, 7.1, 7.6, 7.7, 8.1, 9.2, 9.4	Cooperates with others as part of familiar routine activities, and contributes to specific activities requiring joint responsibility and accountability Follows accepted practices and protocols for reporting issues to supervisors
Get the work done	1.2-1.4, 2.1-2.3, 4.1, 5.1-5.3, 6.1-6.3, 7.1, 7.2, 7.4-7.8, 8.1-8.3, 9.1-9.5	Determines priorities and sequences steps involved in clearly defined, familiar tasks, and identifies and assembles required resources Recognises and anticipates an increasing range of familiar problems, their symptoms and causes; actively looking for early warning signs and implementing contingency plans

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPCBF221 Set up and produce basic guillotined product	ICPCF221C Set up and produce basic guillotined product	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF221 Set up and produce basic guillotined product

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

demonstrate all safety devices on the machine

correctly set up (not including knife change) and produce TWO basic guillotined products (if possible, one large sheet and one small sheet) according to manufacturer’s and job specifications and enterprise procedures.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

identify health and safety factors for:

setting up and operating the machine

checking and adjusting the machine

maintaining the production process

handling knife blades during the knife change operation

shutting down or cleaning the machine

identify information concerning cutting that should be found in the job documentation or production control system

identify factors that:

indicate a new blade is needed

indicate the need to replace a cutting stick

should be considered when setting up a guillotine for cutting

indicate the need for machine lubrication

identify the difference between a sharp knife from a dull knife, and problems arising from continuously using a dull blade

explain how correct clamping pressure is determined for a given job

identify reporting procedures for when the machine malfunctions

explain treatment/disposal of guillotine waste

identify the part of the guillotine that should be checked if, after a cut:

top sheets are out-of-square

top sheets are creasing across the cut line

identify where information is found regarding correct types and methods of lubrication

list special operations that are essential when shutting down the machine

identify quality aspects to consider in a completed cutting job and when checking against the sample

list steps to take if the cutting result does not coincide with the sample

identify machine manuals, safety and other documentation relevant to this task, where they are kept, and the information included in them.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the converting, binding and finishing field of work and include access to and use of facilities, equipment and materials used to set up and produce a basic guillotined product.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPCBF222 Set up and operate in-line cutter

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to safely set up and operate an in-line cutter set for high run jobs, including determining the quality of output and correctly packing completed product.

It applies to individuals working under direct supervision, performing tasks related to operating machinery and completing production requirements according to job specifications and internal procedures.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Converting, Binding and Finishing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Prepare for job	1.1 Job specifications are read and interpreted from job documentation or process control system 1.2 Job is signed off from previous process and ready for mailing procedures 1.3 Materials are checked and in correct order for the job 1.4 Work area is safe and ready for production according to safety requirements
2. Set up job	2.1 Job specifications are entered into console according to enterprise requirements 2.2 Guides and guards and cut depth are correctly set and positioned according to job specifications 2.3 Settings are checked against job specifications before production is commenced 2.4 Settings are tested with a product sample, and adjustments are made if necessary
3. Operate in-line cutter	3.1 Product is loaded in correct position according to job specifications 3.2 Quality check is carried out and defective product is removed according to enterprise procedures 3.3 Adjustments are made when quality standards are not met 3.4 Wastage is monitored, kept to a minimum and correctly disposed of according to enterprise quality standards
4. Pack cut product	4.1 Completed product is unloaded and checked for quality 4.2 Completed product is packed into labelled trays ensuring job/order continuity for transfer to the next process 4.3 Documentation relating to the product is completed correctly 4.4 Machine is cleared and stock put away

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 2.2, 2.3, 3.1, 4.2	Evaluates textual information and establishes job and component requirements from information contained within relevant systems
Writing	2.1, 4.3	Uses appropriate and clear language to complete workplace documentation
Navigate the world of work	1.2, 1.4, 3.2-3.4, 4.1	Complies with legislative requirements and follows organisational policies and procedures relevant to own role
Get the work done	1.3, 2.4, 3.2, 3.3, 4.2-4.4	Follows clearly defined instructions and sequencing, and monitors own progress on the task Responds to predictable problems and implements standard or logical solutions related to own role in immediate work environment Follows routine procedures for using digital technology by reading data from electronic monitoring and control system

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPCBF222 Set up and operate in-line cutter	ICPCF222C Set up and operate in-line cutter	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF222 Set up and operate in-line cutter

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

safely operate and set up an in-line cutter to complete TWO jobs to meet job specifications, including quality monitoring during the process and when packing the product.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

explain set-up procedures to meet work health and safety and enterprise requirements

explain the quality check process

identify and explain waste disposal procedures relevant to this task.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the converting, binding and finishing field of work and include access to an in-line cutter and other special purpose tools, equipment and materials.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPCBF223 Set up machine for cutting (trimming)

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to set up 3- or 5-knife trimmers or spine trimmers, and may involve gathering (collating) and fastening.

It applies to individuals who work under direct supervision with some accountability for the quality of outcomes.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Converting, Binding and Finishing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Prepare for job	1.1 Job specifications are read and interpreted from job documentation or production control system 1.2 Set-up is carried out correctly in minimum time with minimum wastage 1.3 Availability of all job related components is checked
2. Install and replace cutting knives into machine	2.1 Appropriate knives are selected and secured to the machine 2.2 Dull blades are securely bolted into protective holder
3. Set up section transportation system	3.1 Feeder is set up and adjusted according to job specifications 3.2 Section pick-up and transportation system is set up and adjusted according to job specifications 3.3 Transfer systems are set up and adjusted according to job specifications
4. Set up stacking system	4.1 Delivery is set up and adjusted according to job specifications 4.2 Section transfer and control system is set up and adjusted according to job specifications
5. Set up machine for trimming	5.1 Trimmer knives are set up and adjusted according to job specifications 5.2 Clamping pressures are set up and adjusted according to job specifications 5.3 Stops and lays are set to remove desired trim
6. Conduct sample run	6.1 Material to be used for sample is organised correctly 6.2 Machine is set up and operated to produce a specified sample according to work health and safety requirements, manufacturer’s specifications and enterprise procedures 6.3 Sample is visually inspected and/or tested or laboratory testing is organised according to enterprise procedures 6.4 Results are interpreted to determine adjustment requirements 6.5 Adjustment changes are carried out according to product and machine specifications

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 3.1-3.3, 4.1, 4.2, 5.1, 5.2, 6.2, 6.3, 6.5	Recognises and evaluates text to establish job requirements from information contained within relevant systems
Navigate the world of work	2.1, 2.2, 6.2, 6.3	Complies with legislative requirements and follows organisational policies and procedures relevant to own role
Get the work done	1.2, 1.3, 2.1, 3.1-3.3, 4.1, 4.2, 5.1-5.3, 6.1, 6.2, 6.4, 6.5	Follows clearly defined instructions and sequencing, and monitors own progress on the task Responds to predictable problems and implements standard or logical solutions
Reading	1.1, 3.1-3.3, 4.1, 4.2, 5.1, 5.2, 6.2, 6.3, 6.5	Recognises and evaluates text to establish job requirements from information contained within relevant systems
Navigate the world of work	2.1, 2.2, 6.2, 6.3	Complies with legislative requirements and follows organisational policies and procedures relevant to own role
Get the work done	1.2, 1.3, 2.1, 3.1-3.3, 4.1, 4.2, 5.1-5.3, 6.1, 6.2, 6.4, 6.5	Follows clearly defined instructions and sequencing, and monitors own progress on the task Responds to predictable problems and implements standard or logical solutions

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPCBF223 Set up machine for cutting (trimming)	ICPCF223C Set up machine for cutting (trimming)	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF223 Set up machine for cutting (trimming)

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

correctly set up trimming machines according to job specifications and within the production timeframe on TWO occasions using different grammage or thickness of sections or books, and different size alterations (e.g. A4 to A5)

demonstrate all safety devices on one of these machines:

book block trimmer or single section copy trimmer (3-knife section gather/stitch/trim)
OR

single section copy trimmer (1- or 3-knife multiple flat sheet gather/fold/stitch/trim)
OR

5-knife trimmer.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

explain information found on a job ticket or production control system

identify work health and safety factors that must be considered when:

handling knife blades during the knife change operation

setting up transportation systems

setting up three-knife stacking systems

setting up the trimming unit

explain how trimmer knives should be transported to and from the machine and the safety devices to use when replacing trimmer knives

identify danger areas at the delivery end of the book trimming machine and machinery safeguards for setting up the trimmer

list factors that indicate:

a new blade is needed

a cutting stick needs to be replaced

knives need to be replaced

explain important elements to consider when moving knives to suit a different size book and when moving knives to suit maximum/minimum size

list recommended knife angles for the trimming machine

describe what can occur if a dull blade is used continuously

explain differences between a sharp knife and a dull knife

explain when belt timing readjustment is required

identify what determines book transport speed, and adjustments required to ensure book is fast against book stops

explain adjustments required when the book is:

out-of-square

scratched or scuffed

explain how the batching device is activated

identify problems expected in the delivery area of the machine

explain how clamp pressure for each job is determined and the evidence that indicates clamp pressure is insufficient

determine machine adjustments required to remove:

more offcut from the fore edge of the book

more offcut from the head and tail of the book

explain how to correct these:

book out-of-square

book scuffing

wrong sections

incorrect cover creasing

wrong wire stitch positions

wrong sheet/section sequence

wet ink problems

book spines bursting

waste not transferring from cut line

identify areas to check on the final job sample

identify machine manuals, safety and other documentation relevant to this task, where they are kept, and information included in them.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the converting, binding and finishing field of work and include access to special purpose tools, equipment and materials.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPCBF224 Produce cut (trimmed) product

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to produce a knife-trimmed product using a single or multiple knife trimmer or spine trimmer while maintaining the production process, monitoring machinery for faults and problems, and rectifying minor problems according to enterprise procedures.

It applies to individuals performing a range of routine tasks, who utilise a variety of skills to ensure production of products in line with quality standards.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Converting, Binding and Finishing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Maintain operation of transportation system	1.1 Feeder is monitored and adjusted to ensure continuous and efficient feeding to the machine 1.2 Section pick-up and transport system is monitored and adjusted to ensure accurate and continuous sheet/section/book handling and efficient operation 1.3 Transfer systems are monitored and adjusted to ensure correct and continuous sheet handling and efficient operation 1.4 Substrate is added to the process according to job specifications
2. Maintain section delivery system	2.1 Delivery is monitored and adjusted to ensure quality and efficient product delivery
3. Maintain cutting (trimming) process	3.1 Knife condition is monitored and adjusted to ensure product quality meets the approved sample standard 3.2 Cutting pressures are monitored and adjusted to ensure product quality meets the approved sample standard 3.3 Registration of knife(s) is monitored and adjusted to ensure product quality meets the approved sample standard
4. Maintain production process	4.1 In-line printing/converting/binding/finishing processes are monitored and adjusted to ensure product quality meets the approved sample standard 4.2 Production process is operated in association with fellow workers and according to enterprise procedures and planned daily schedule 4.3 Production is maintained according to work health and safety requirements, manufacturer’s specifications and enterprise procedures 4.4 Manual and/or automatic control is used according to job specifications 4.5 Performance is monitored and verified using the process control system according to enterprise procedures 4.6 Process adjustments to eliminate problems are reported according to enterprise procedures. 4.7 Faulty performance of equipment is identified and reported according to enterprise procedures 4.8 Waste is sorted according to enterprise procedures
5. Identify and rectify problems and faults	5.1 Problems in cutting (trimming) machine operation are identified and reported according to enterprise procedures 5.2 Adjustments or corrections are carried out according to specified procedures 5.3 Cutting (trimming) machine operation is checked to ensure correct operation 5.4 Machine faults requiring repair are identified and reported to designated person according to enterprise procedures 5.5 Repair/adjustment is verified prior to resumption of operations
6. Conduct shutdown of production process	6.1 Correct shutdown sequence is followed according to manufacturer’s specifications and enterprise procedures 6.2 Shutdown is conducted in association with fellow workers and in compliance with WHS requirements 6.3 Substrate waste is removed from operating area and recycled or disposed of, where required, according to regulatory requirements and enterprise procedures
7. Clean machine	7.1 Knife/knives, cutting sticks and machine bed are cleaned ready for next run 7.2 Cutting machine is disengaged and cleaned ready for next run 7.3 In-line printing/converting/binding/finishing units are cleaned ready for next run 7.4 Section feed, transport and delivery systems are disengaged and cleaned ready for next run 7.5 Production records or other documentation are accurately completed where required by enterprise procedures

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.4, 4.3, 4.4, 6.1	Recognises and interprets texts to establish job requirements from information contained within relevant procedures and specifications
Writing	4.6-4.8, 5.1, 5.4, 7.5	Produces familiar text types using simple vocabulary, grammatical structures and conventions
Oral Communication	4.2, 4.6, 4.7, 5.1, 5.4, 6.2	Speaks clearly using appropriate vocabulary, tone and pace to report faults and discrepancies to supervisors or discuss job requirements with colleagues
Navigate the world of work	1.1-1.3, 2.1, 3.1-3.3, 4.1-4.8, 5.1-5.4, 6.1-6.3, 7.1-7.5	Recognises and follows explicit and implicit protocols and meets expectations associated with own role Recognises and follows all procedures for cleaning and maintenance of equipment, incorporating regulatory requirements and enterprise procedures
Interact with others	4.2, 4.7, 4.8, 5.1, 5.4, 6.2	Cooperates with others as part of familiar routine activities, and contributes to specific activities requiring joint responsibility and accountability Follows accepted practices and protocols for reporting issues to supervisors
Get the work done	1.1-1.4, 2.1, 3.1-3.3, 4.4-4.7, 5.2, 5.4, 5.5, 6.1, 6.3	Determines priorities and sequences steps involved in clearly defined, familiar tasks Recognises and anticipates an increasing range of familiar problems, their symptoms and causes; actively looking for early warning signs and implementing contingency plans

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPCBF224 Produce cut (trimmed) product	ICPCF224C Produce cut (trimmed) product	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF224 Produce cut (trimmed) product

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

use a three-knife trimming unit to accurately complete THREE jobs of various types, sizes and thicknesses of substrate according to manufacturer’s and job specifications and enterprise procedures within required production schedule timeframes

demonstrate all safety devices on the machine

demonstrate use of computerised control, monitoring and data entry systems

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

identify work health and safety factors to consider:

for the transport and delivery areas of the machine

while the trimming process is operational

while conducting machine shutdown, maintenance and cleaning

name procedures to ensure smooth transport of sections through the machine

list steps to ensure smooth delivery of the sections

identify how waste (offcut) should be removed from the work area

describe procedures to ensure the machine is kept running without interruption

describe what needs to be adjusted if the cover is marked (scuffed)

identify basic in-line processes associated with the machine

list checks to be made during the machine shutdown procedure

identify areas of the machine that require cleaning at the end of the run

identify quality aspects to consider in a completed cutting job

list what needs to be checked when waste is removed from the machine and surrounding area for disposal or recycling

identify machine manuals, safety and other documentation relevant to this task, where they are kept, and information included in them.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the converting, binding and finishing field of work and include access to a three-knife trimming unit and use of, special purpose tools, equipment and materials.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPCBF225 Set up machine for basic flat-bed die cutting or embossing

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to set up a machine for basic flat-bed die cutting or embossing.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Converting, Binding and Finishing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Prepare job	1.1 Job specifications are read and interpreted from job documentation or production control system 1.2 Set-up is carried out correctly in minimum time with minimum wastage 1.3 Availability of all job related components is checked
2. Prepare cutting or embossing devices	2.1 Appropriate cutting devices or dies are selected and secured to machine 2.2 Cutting devices or dies are registered and proofed 2.3 Cutting devices or dies are correctly mounted
3. Set up delivery system	3.1 Delivery systems are set up and adjusted 3.2 Substrate is added to and removed from the process according to job specifications
4. Set up machine	4.1 Flat-bed cutting or embossing devices are set up and adjusted 4.2 Cutting/embossing pressures are set up and adjusted 4.3 Machine lays are set to correct position for registration
5. Set up in-line units for basic processes	5.1 Minor in-line printing/converting/binding units are set up for basic processes and adjusted according to machine requirements and job specifications 5.2 Assistance is given in set up of major in-line printing/converting/binding units
6. Conduct sample run	6.1 Material to be used for sample is organised correctly 6.2 Machine is set up and operated to produce a specified sample according to work health and safety (WHS) requirements, manufacturer’s specifications and enterprise procedures 6.3 Sample is visually inspected and/or tested or laboratory testing is organised according to enterprise procedures 6.4 Results are interpreted to determine adjustment requirements 6.5 Adjustments are carried out according to product and machine specifications

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 4.2, 5.1, 6.2, 6.5	Recognises and evaluates texts to establish job requirements from information contained within relevant systems
Oral Communication	5.2	Participates effectively in spoken interactions to confirm or clarify understanding
Navigate the world of work	6.2, 6.3	Complies with legislative requirements and follows organisational policies and procedures relevant to own role
Interact with others	5.2	Cooperates with others as part of familiar routine activities, and contributes to specific activities requiring joint responsibility and accountability
Get the work done	1.1-1.3, 2.1-2.3, 3.1, 3.2, 4.1-4.3, 5.1, 5.2, 6.1-6.5	Determines priorities and sequences steps involved in clearly defined tasks Implements actions as per instructions, making slight adjustments if necessary Plans, identifies and assembles resources required to complete tasks Follows routine instructions for using digital technology by reading data from electronic monitoring and control systems

Range of Conditions

This section specifies different work environments and conditions that may affect performance. Essential operating conditions that may be present (depending on the work situation, needs of the candidate, accessibility of the item, and local industry and regional contexts) are included.

Delivery systems MUST include EITHER:	reel OR sheet.
Setting up and adjusting MUST include EITHER:	unwind reel webbing procedures web control system folder and sheeter OR feeder and delivery system sheet pick-up system transfer system sheet transfer and control.

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPCBF225 Set up machine for basic flat-bed die cutting or embossing	ICPCF225C Set up machine for basic flat-bed die cutting or embossing	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF225 Set up machine for basic flat-bed die cutting or embossing

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

correctly set up a machine for basic flat-bed die cutting or embossing for TWO jobs, changing the type and size of substrates and design of finished patterns according to job specifications and within the production timeframe

demonstrate all safety devices on the machine.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

identify work health and safety factors for:

setting up and/or operating machine delivery systems

setting up cutting devices

list the information, required when setting up transportation systems, concerning die cutting or embossing that is found in the job documentation or production control system

identify checks needed for:

mounting cutting devices on a flat-bed

registering and proofing cutting devices

securing cutting devices to the machine

setting up, adjusting and operating flat-bed cutting devices

determine the selection criteria of particular cutting devices

identify important areas to consider/check:

during feeder unit set up

to ensure suitability of in-line processes

list steps to ensure the delivery system operates effectively

determine machine pressure, machine cutting depths and adjustments needed to in-line units

identify details of the completed sample to examine to ensure conformance with client requirements

explain product testing procedures available and how often they should be used

common faults that can occur with the flat-bed cutting process

determine factors that indicate a need to replace knives/blades/cutting edges

explain cutting edges storing to guard against damage and deterioration

identify machine manuals, safety and other documentation relevant to this task, where they are kept, and the information included in them

Reel Systems Only

identify checks needed:

during webbing procedures

of the reel delivery system that may need adjustment according to job specifications, and to be observed to prevent damage to the finished product

for adjustments to the unwind reel that may be needed to suit various jobs

Sheet Systems Only

facilitate accurate sheet pick-up and transportation

identify ways folded sheets can be secured for dispatch.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the converting, binding and finishing field of work and include access to flat-bed die cutting or embossing machine and special purpose tools, equipment and materials.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPCBF226 Produce basic flat-bed die cut or embossed product

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to produce either a flat-bed die cut or embossed product, and clean down the equipment.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Converting, Binding and Finishing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1.Maintain operation of delivery systems	1.1 Delivery systems are monitored and adjusted to ensure efficient continuous operation to ensure no damage to finished product 1.2 Substrate is added to and removed from the process according to job specifications
2. Maintain basic flat-bed cutting process	2.1 Cutting edge and knife condition are monitored and adjusted to ensure product quality meets the approved sample standard 2.2 Cutting pressures are monitored and adjusted to ensure product quality meets the approved sample standard 2.3 Registration of cutting devices and knife(s) is monitored and adjusted to ensure product quality meets the approved sample standard 2.4 Packing of cutting devices is monitored and adjusted to ensure product quality meets the approved sample standard 2.5 Basic in-line printing/converting/binding/finishing process(es) are monitored and adjusted to ensure product quality meets the approved sample standard
3. Maintain production process	3.1 Production process is operated in association with fellow workers and according to enterprise procedures and planned daily schedule 3.2 Production is maintained according to work health and safety (WHS) requirements, manufacturer’s specifications and enterprise procedures 3.3 Manual and/or automatic control is used according to job specifications 3.4 Performance is monitored and verified using the process control system according to enterprise procedures 3.5 Production difficulties are anticipated and preventive action is taken to prevent occurrence by timely intervention 3.6 Process adjustments to eliminate problems are reported according to enterprise procedures 3.7 Faulty performance of equipment is identified and reported according to enterprise procedures 3.8 Waste is sorted according to enterprise procedures
4. Identify and rectify problems	4.1 Problems in cutting (flat-bed) machine operation are identified and reported according to enterprise procedures 4.2 Adjustments or corrections are carried out according to specified procedures and are consistent with operator’s skill level 4.3 Cutting (flat-bed) machine operation is checked to ensure correct operation
5. Conduct shutdown of production process	5.1 Correct shutdown sequence is followed according to manufacturer’s specifications and enterprise procedures 5.2 Shutdown is conducted in association with fellow workers and in compliance with WHS requirements 5.3 Substrate waste is removed from operating area and recycled or disposed of, where required, according to regulatory requirements and enterprise procedures 5.4 Machine faults requiring repair are identified and reported to designated person according to enterprise procedures 5.5 Repair/adjustment is verified prior to resumption of operations
6. Clean flat-bed cutting machine at end of run	6.1 Cutting devices and knife(s) are cleaned or replaced ready for next run 6.2 Cutting devices are sharpened 6.3 Machine bed is cleaned ready for next run 6.4 Cutting units are disengaged and cleaned ready for next run 6.5. In-line printing/converting/binding/finishing units are cleaned ready for next run 6.6 Transportation and delivery systems are disengaged and cleaned ready for next run 6.7 Production records or other documentation are accurately completed, where required by enterprise procedures

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	3.2, 3.3, 5.1	Recognises and interprets text to establish job requirements from information contained within relevant procedures and specifications
Writing	3.6, 3.7, 4.1, 5.4, 6.8	Enters routine data associated with production processes and enterprise procedures
Oral Communication	3.1, 3.6, 3.7, 4.1, 5.2, 5.4	Speaks clearly using appropriate vocabulary, tone and pace to report faults and discrepancies to supervisors or discuss job requirements with colleagues
Navigate the World of work	2.1-2.5, 3.6-3.8, 4.1, 4.2, 5.1-5.4, 6.1-6.8	Complies with legislative requirements and follows organisational policies and procedures relevant to own role, particularly with regard to safe operation of machinery and equipment
Interact with others	3.1, 3.6, 3.7, 4.1, 5.2, 5.4	Cooperates with others as part of familiar routine activities, and contributes to specific activities requiring joint responsibility and accountability Follows accepted practices and protocols for reporting issues to supervisors
Get the work done	2.1-2.5, 3.1-3.5, 3.7-3.8, 4.1, 4.2, 5.3-5.5	Determines priorities and sequences steps involved in clearly defined, familiar tasks Recognises and anticipates an increasing range of familiar problems, their symptoms and causes; actively looking for early warning signs and implementing contingency plans Follows routine procedures for using digital technology by reading data from electronic monitoring and control systems

Range of Conditions

This section specifies different work environments and conditions that may affect performance. Essential operating conditions that may be present (depending on the work situation, needs of the candidate, accessibility of the item, and local industry and regional contexts) are included.

Delivery systems MUST include EITHER:	reel OR sheet.
Monitoring and adjusting MUST include EITHER:	reel stand and rewind reel to maintain correct tension web control system to ensure correct tension sheeting section OR feeder and delivery systems sheet pick-up and transportation systems to ensure accurate and efficient sheet handling transfer system.

New Topic (127)

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPCBF226 Produce basic flat-bed die cut or embossed product	ICPCF226C Produce basic flat-bed die cut or embossed product	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF226 Produce basic flat-bed die cut or embossed product

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

demonstrate all safety devices on the required machine.

correctly produce either a flat-bed die cut or embossed product for TWO jobs with different types and sizes of substrate and design of finished patterns according to manufacturer’s and job specifications, enterprise procedures and unit requirements.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

identify work health and safety factors for:

setting up and/or operating machine transport systems

setting up and/or operating machine delivery systems

maintaining the cutting process

conducting machine shutdown procedures

identify areas of the machine to monitor to ensure trouble-free operation

list checks required when:

substrate is removed from the machine

cutting devices or knives are cleaned or replaced ready for the next run

packing cutting devices

waste is removed from the machine and surrounding area for disposal or recycling

during the machine shutdown process

determine indicators that demand knife replacement

explain pressure adjustment

identify the procedure for correcting common machine faults

identify areas of the machine that require cleaning at the end of the run

identify production records to be kept or written up

identify machine manuals, safety and other documentation relevant to this task and where they are kept, and the information included in them.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the converting, binding and finishing field of work and include access to special purpose tools, equipment and materials required to produce a basic flat-bed die cut or embossed product.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPCBF227 Set up machine for basic rotary die cutting or embossing

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to set up a machine for basic rotary die cutting or embossing.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Converting, Binding and Finishing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Prepare job	1.1 Job specifications are read and interpreted from job documentation or production control system 1.2 Set-up is carried out correctly in minimum time with minimum wastage 1.3 Availability of all job related components is checked
2. Mount rotary cutting or embossing devices	2.1 Appropriate cutting devices or dies are selected and secured to machine according to job specifications 2.2 Cutting devices or dies are registered and proofed 2.3 Cutting devices or dies are correctly mounted
3. Set up reel system	3.1 Unwind and rewind reels are set up and adjusted according to job specifications 3.2 Webbing procedures are carried out according to job specifications 3.3 Web control system is set up and adjusted according to job specifications 3.4 Reels are spliced/joined according to job specifications 3.5 Folder and sheeter are set up and adjusted according to job specifications
4. Set up sheet system	4.1 Feeder and delivery systems are set up and adjusted according to job specifications 4.2 Sheet pick-up and transportation system is set up and adjusted according to job specifications 4.3 Transfer systems are set up and adjusted according to job specifications 4.4 Substrate is removed from process according to job specifications
5. Set up machine for basic rotary cutting	5.1 Rotary cutting devices are set up and adjusted according to job specifications 5.2 Cutting pressures are set up and adjusted according to job specifications 5.3 Counter knives/anvils are set in correct position
6. Set up in-line units for basic processes	6.1 Minor in-line printing/converting/binding units are set up for basic processes and adjusted according to machine requirements and job specifications 6.2 Assistance is given in set-up of major in-line printing/converting/binding units
7. Conduct sample run	7.1 Material to be used for sample is organised correctly 7.2 Machine is set up and operated to produce a specified sample according to work health and safety (WHS) requirements, manufacturer’s specifications and enterprise procedures 7.3 Sample is visually inspected and/or tested or laboratory testing is organised according to enterprise procedures 7.4 Results are interpreted to determine adjustment requirements 7.5 Adjustments are carried out according to product and machine specifications

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 2.1, 3.1-3.5, 4.1-4.4, 5.1, 5.2, 6.1, 7.2, 7.5	Recognises and interprets texts to establish job requirements
Oral Communication	6.2	Participates effectively in spoken interactions to confirm or clarify understanding
Navigate the world of work	7.2, 7.3	Complies with legislative requirements and follows organisational policies and procedures relevant to own role
Interact with others	6.2	Cooperates with others as part of familiar, routine activities, and contributes to specific activities requiring joint responsibility and accountability
Get the work done	1.1-1.3, 2.1-2.3, 3.1-3.5, 4.1-4.4, 5.1-5.3, 6.1, 6.2, 7.1-7.5	Determines priorities and sequences steps involved in clearly defined tasks Implements actions as per instructions, making slight adjustments if necessary Plans, identifies and assembles resources required to complete tasks Follows routine procedures for using digital technology by reading data from electronic monitoring and control systems

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPCBF227 Set up machine for basic rotary die cutting or embossing	ICPCF227C Set up machine for basic rotary die cutting or embossing	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF227 Set up machine for basic rotary die cutting or embossing

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

correctly set up machines for basic rotary die cutting or embossing for up TWO jobs, changing the type and size of substrates and design of finished patterns according to manufacturer’s and job specifications, enterprise procedures and the unit requirements

demonstrate all safety devices on the machine.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

identify work health and safety (WHS) factors for:

setting up cutting devices

setting up and/or operating machine delivery systems

setting up sheet transportation systems

setting up reel transportation systems

identify the checks needed when:

cutting devices are mounted on a cylinder

cutting devices are attached to the machine

substrate is removed from the machine

explain information concerning rotary die cutting or embossing found in the job documentation or production control system

determine adjustments to the unwind reel that may be needed to suit various jobs

identify important areas to be considered during webbing procedures

identify important areas to check when the feeder unit is set up

identify important areas of the reel delivery system that may need to be adjusted according to job specifications

list steps to ensure the delivery system operates effectively

determine ways the finished product can be secured for dispatch

identify ways to determine machine pressure

identify ways to determine machine cutting depths

identify the need to adjust in-line units

list details of the completed sample to be examined to ensure conformance with client requirements

explain storing the cutting edges and counter knives (anvils) to guard against damage and deterioration

identify machine manuals, safety and other documentation relevant to this task, where they are kept, and the information in them.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the converting, binding and finishing field of work and include access to basic rotary die cutting or embossing machinery and special purpose tools, equipment and materials.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPCBF228 Produce basic rotary die cut or embossed product

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to produce either a flat-bed die cut or embossed product and clean down the equipment.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Converting, Binding and Finishing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Maintain transportation system	1.1 Delivery systems are monitored and adjusted to ensure accurate and continuous operation and eliminate damage to finished product 1.2 Substrate is added to and removed from the process according to job specifications
2. Maintain basic rotary die cutting or embossing process	2.1 Cutting edge and knife condition are monitored and adjusted to ensure product quality meets the approved sample standard 2.2 Cutting pressures are monitored and adjusted to ensure product quality meets the approved sample standard 2.3 Registration of cutting devices and knife(s) is monitored and adjusted to ensure product quality meets the approved sample standard 2.4 Packing of cutting devices is monitored and adjusted to ensure product quality meets the approved sample standard
3. Maintain production process	3.1 Basic in-line printing/converting/binding/finishing process(es) are monitored and adjusted to ensure product quality meets the approved sample standard 3.2 Production process is operated in association with fellow workers and according to enterprise procedures and planned daily schedule 3.3 Production is maintained according to work health and safety (WHS) requirements, manufacturer’s specifications and enterprise procedures 3.4 Manual and/or automatic control is used according to job specifications 3.5 Performance is monitored and verified using the process control system according to enterprise procedures 3.6 Production difficulties are anticipated and preventive action is taken to prevent occurrence by timely intervention 3.7 Process adjustments to eliminate problems are reported according to enterprise procedures 3.8 Faulty performance of equipment is identified and reported according to enterprise procedures 3.9 Waste is sorted according to enterprise procedures
4. Identify and rectify problems and faults	4.1 Problems in cutting (rotary) machine are identified and reported according to enterprise procedures 4.2 Adjustments or corrections are carried out according to specified procedures and are consistent with operator’s skill level 4.3 Cutting (rotary) machine operation is checked to ensure correct operation 4.4 Machine faults requiring repair are identified and reported to designated person according to enterprise procedures 4.5 Repair/adjustment is verified prior to resumption of operations
5. Conduct shutdown of production process	5.1 Correct shutdown sequence is followed according to manufacturer’s specifications and enterprise procedures 5.2 Shutdown is conducted in association with fellow workers and in compliance with WHS requirements 5.3 Substrate waste is removed from operating area and recycled or disposed of, where required, according to regulatory requirements and enterprise procedures
6. Clean rotary cutting machine at end of run	6.1 Cutting devices and knife/knives are cleaned or replaced ready for next run 6.2 Cutting devices are sharpened correctly 6.3 Machine bed is cleaned ready for next run 6.4 Cutting units are disengaged and cleaned ready for next run 6.5 In-line printing/converting/binding/finishing units are cleaned ready for next run 6.6 Transport and delivery systems are disengaged and cleaned ready for next run 6.7 Production records or other documentation are accurately completed where required by enterprise procedures

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	3.3, 3.4, 5.1	Recognises and interprets texts to establish job requirements from information contained within relevant procedures and specifications
Writing	5.7, 5.8, 4.1, 4.4, 6.8	Enters routine data associated with production processes and enterprise procedures
Oral Communication	3.2, 3.7, 3.8, 4.1, 4.4, 5.2	Speaks clearly using appropriate vocabulary, tone and pace to report faults and discrepancies to supervisors or discuss job requirements with colleagues
Navigate the world of work	2.1-2.4, 3.1-3.3, 3.5, 3.7-3.9, 4.1-4.4, 5.1-5.3, 6.1-6.8	Complies with legislative requirements and follows organisational policies and procedures relevant to own role, particularly with regard to safe operation of machinery and equipment
Interact with others	3.2, 3.7, 3.8, 4.1, 4.4, 5.2	Cooperates with others as part of familiar routine activities, and contributes to specific activities requiring joint responsibility and accountability Follows accepted practices and protocols for reporting issues to supervisors
Get the work done	1.1, 1.2, 2.1-2.4, 3.2-3.6, 3.9, 4.1-4.3, 4.5, 5.1, 5.3	Determines priorities and sequences steps involved in clearly defined, familiar tasks Recognises and anticipates an increasing range of familiar problems, their symptoms and causes; actively looking for early warning signs and implementing contingency plans Follows routine procedures for using digital technology by reading data from electronic monitoring and control systems

Range of Conditions

This section specifies different work environments and conditions that may affect performance. Essential operating conditions that may be present (depending on the work situation, needs of the candidate, accessibility of the item, and local industry and regional contexts) are included.

Delivery systems MUST include EITHER:	reel OR sheet
Monitoring and adjusting MUST include EITHER:	reel stand and rewind reel web control system sheeting section OR feeder and delivery system sheet pick-up system transfer system

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPCBF228 Produce basic rotary die cut or embossed product	ICPCF228C Produce basic rotary die cut or embossed product	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF228 Produce basic rotary die cut or embossed product

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

produce basic products using either rotary die cutting or embossing on TWO jobs, with different types and sizes of substrate and design of finished patterns according to manufacturer’s and job specifications, enterprise procedures and listed performance criteria.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

explain work health and safety factors for:

setting up and/or operating machine transport systems

setting up and/or operating machine delivery systems

maintaining the cutting process

conducting machine shutdown procedures

identify areas of the delivery system to monitor to ensure trouble-free operation

explain checks needed when:

substrate is removed from the machine

waste is removed from the machine and surrounding area for disposal or recycling

cutting devices or knives are cleaned, stored or replaced ready for the next run

determine important areas to monitor when maintaining the rotary cutting process

list sectors of the basic in-line printing/converting/binding/finishing process that may need to be monitored and adjusted to meet approved standards

identify production difficulties that can be expected during production runs

explain the procedure for correcting common machine faults

identify areas of the machine that require cleaning at the end of the run

list quality aspects to consider in a completed rotary cutting job

identify machine manuals, safety and other documentation relevant to this task, where they are kept, and the information in them.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the converting, binding and finishing field of work and include access to basic rotary die cutting or embossing machinery and special purpose tools, equipment and materials.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPCBF231 Set up machine for basic flat-bed cutting

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to set up minor flat-bed cutting processes, including kiss cutting, hole punching, hole drilling, slotting, slitting, sheeting, creasing, scoring, and pin perforating, indexing and round cornering.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Converting, Binding and Finishing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Prepare for job	1.1 Job specifications are read and interpreted from job documentation or production control system 1.2 Set-up is carried out correctly in minimum time with minimum wastage 1.3 Availability of all job related components is checked
2. Mount flat-bed cutting devices	2.1 Cutting devices are correctly mounted 2.2 Cutting devices are registered and proofed 2.3 Appropriate cutting devices are selected and secured to machine according to job specifications
3. Set up delivery systems	3.1 Delivery systems are set up and adjusted according to job specifications 3.2 Substrate is added to and removed from process according to job specifications
4. Set up machine	4.1 Flat-bed cutting devices are set up and adjusted according to job specifications 4.2 Cutting pressures are set up and adjusted according to job specifications 4.3 Machine lays are set to correct position for registration
5. Assist in set-up for other in-line processes	5.1 Assistance is given in set-up of in-line printing/converting/binding units. 5.2 Minor in-line printing processes (date stamping, numbering) are set up correctly
6. Conduct sample run	6.1 Material to be used for sample is organised correctly 6.2 Machine is set up and operated to produce a specified sample according to work health and safety requirements, manufacturer’s specifications and enterprise procedures 6.3 Sample is visually inspected and/or tested, or laboratory testing is organised, according to enterprise procedures 6.4 Results are interpreted to determine adjustment requirements 6.5 Adjustment changes are carried out according to product and machine specifications

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 2.2, 4.1, 4.2, 6.2, 6.5	Recognises and interprets texts to establish job requirements
Oral Communication	5.1	Participates effectively in spoken interactions to confirm or clarify understanding
Navigate the world of work	6.2, 6.3	Complies with legislative requirements and follows organisational policies and procedures relevant to own role
Interact with others	5.1	Cooperates with others as part of familiar routine activities, and contributes to specific activities requiring joint responsibility and accountability
Get the work done	1.1-1.3, 2.1-2.3, 4.1-4.3, 5.1, 5.2, 6.1-6.5	Determines priorities and sequences steps involved in clearly defined tasks Implements actions as per instructions, making slight adjustments if necessary Plans, identifies and assembles resources required to complete tasks Follows routine procedures for using digital technology by reading data from electronic monitoring and control systems

Range of Conditions

This section specifies different work environments and conditions that may affect performance. Essential operating conditions that may be present (depending on the work situation, needs of the candidate, accessibility of the item, and local industry and regional contexts) are included.

Delivery systems MUST include EITHER:	reel OR sheet.
Setting up and adjusting MUST include EITHER:	unwind and rewind reels web control folder and sheeter OR feeder and delivery sheet pick-up and transportation transfer.

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPCBF231 Set up machine for basic flat-bed cutting	ICPCF231C Set up machine for basic flat-bed cutting	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF231 Set up machine for basic flat-bed cutting

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

demonstrate all safety devices on the machinery

demonstrate any THREE cutting processes, including relevant minor in-line processes, and for each process:

correctly set up machinery for basic flat-bed cutting for TWO jobs, and

change the type and size of substrates and design of finished patterns according to manufacturer’s and job specifications, enterprise procedures and listed performance criteria.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

identify work health and safety (WHS) factors for:

setting up cutting devices

setting up and/or operating delivery systems

explain checks needed when:

cutting devices are mounted on a cylinder

cutting devices are attached to the machine

substrate is removed from the machine

explain information concerning flat-bed hole punching/indexing/creasing and scoring found in the job documentation or production control system

For Reel Systems Only

explain webbing configuration requirements

determine adjustments to the unwind reel that may be needed to suit various jobs

identify important areas of the reel delivery system that may need to be adjusted according to job specifications

identify important areas on the machine to check to ensure the system operates effectively

list steps to ensure the delivery system operates effectively

determine ways the finished product can be secured for despatch

explain how machine pressure, machine cutting depths and the need to adjust machine cutting depths are determined

determine details of the completed sample to examine to ensure conformance to client requirements

explain cutting tools and equipment storage required to guard against damage and deterioration

identify machine manuals, safety and other documentation relevant to this task, where they are kept, and the information in them.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the converting, binding and finishing field of work and include access to special purpose tools, equipment and materials.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPCBF232 Produce basic flat-bed cut product

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to undertake minor flat-bed cutting processes including kiss cutting, hole punching, hole drilling, slotting, slitting, sheeting, creasing, scoring, and pin perforating, indexing and round cornering.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Converting, Binding and Finishing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Maintain delivery system	1.1 Delivery systems are monitored and adjusted to ensure continuous and efficient operation and ensure no damage to finished product 1.2 Substrate is added to and removed from the process according to job specifications
2. Maintain basic flat-bed cutting process	2.1 Cutting edges and knife condition are monitored and adjusted to ensure product quality meets the approved sample standard 2.2 Webbing procedures are carried out according to enterprise procedures 2.3 Cutting pressures are monitored and adjusted to ensure product quality meets the approved sample standard 2.4 Reels are spliced/joined according to job specifications 2.5 Registration of cutting devices and knife(s) is monitored and adjusted to ensure product quality meets the approved sample standard 2.6 Packing of cutting devices is monitored and adjusted to ensure product quality meets the approved sample standard
3. Maintain production process	3.1 Basic in-line printing/converting/binding/finishing process(es) are monitored and adjusted to ensure product quality meets the approved sample standard 3.2 Production process is operated in association with fellow workers and according to enterprise procedures and planned daily schedule 3.3 Production is maintained according to work health and safety (WHS) requirements, manufacturer’s specifications and enterprise procedures 3.4 Manual and/or automatic control is used according to job specifications 3.5 Performance is monitored and verified using the process control system according to enterprise procedures 3.6 Production difficulties are anticipated and preventive action is taken to prevent occurrence by timely intervention 3.7 Process adjustments to eliminate problems are reported according to enterprise procedures 3.8 Faulty performance of equipment is identified and reported according to enterprise procedures 3.9 Waste is sorted according to enterprise procedures
4. Identify and rectify problems and faults	4.1 Problems in flat-bed cutting machine operation are identified and reported according to enterprise procedures 4.2 Adjustments or corrections are carried out according to specified procedures and are consistent with operator’s skill level 4.3 Flat-bed cutting machine operation is checked to ensure correct operation 4.4 Machine faults requiring repair are identified and reported to designated person according to enterprise procedures 4.5 Repair/adjustment is verified prior to resumption of operations
5. Conduct shutdown of production process	5.1 Correct shutdown sequence is followed according to manufacturer’s specifications and enterprise procedures 5.2 Shutdown is conducted in association with fellow workers and in compliance with WHS requirements 5.3 Substrate waste is removed from operating area and recycled or disposed of, where required, according to regulatory requirements and enterprise procedures
6. Clean flat-bed cutting machine at end of run	6.1 Cutting devices and knife/knives are cleaned or replaced ready for next run 6.2 Cutting devices are sharpened 6.3 Machine bed is cleaned ready for next run 6.4 Cutting units are disengaged and cleaned ready for next run 6.5 In-line printing/converting/binding/finishing units are cleaned ready for next run 6.6 Delivery systems are disengaged and cleaned ready for next run 6.7 Production records or other documentation are accurately completed where required by enterprise procedures

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	2.4, 3.3, 3.4, 5.1	Recognises and interprets texts to establish job requirements
Writing	3.7, 3.8, 4.1, 4.4, 6.7	Enters routine data associated with production processes and enterprise procedures
Oral Communication	3.2, 3.7, 3.8, 4.1, 4.4, 5.2	Speaks clearly using appropriate vocabulary, tone and pace to report faults and discrepancies to supervisors or discuss job requirements with colleagues
Navigate the world of work	2.1-2.6, 3.1-3.3, 3.5, 3.7-3.9, 4.1, 4.2, 4.4, 5.1-5.3, 6.1-6.7	Complies with legislative requirements and follows organisational policies and procedures relevant to own role, particularly with regard to safe operation of machinery and equipment
Interact with others	3.2, 3.7, 3.8, 4.1, 4.4, 5.2	Cooperates with others as part of familiar routine activities, and contributes to specific activities requiring joint responsibility and accountability Follows accepted practices and protocols for reporting issues to supervisors
Get the work done	1.2, 2.1, 2.3, 2.5, 2.6, 3.1-3.3, 3.5, 3.6, 3.9, 4.1-4.3, 4.5, 5.1-5.3	Takes responsibility for planning and organising own workload, identifying ways of sequencing and combining elements for greater efficiency Recognises and anticipates an increasing range of familiar problems, their symptoms and causes, actively looking for early warning signs and implementing contingency plans Follows routine procedures for using digital technology by reading data from electronic monitoring and control systems

Range of Conditions

This section specifies different work environments and conditions that may affect performance. Essential operating conditions that may be present (depending on the work situation, needs of the candidate, accessibility of the item, and local industry and regional contexts) are included.

Delivery systems MUST include EITHER:	reel OR sheet
Maintaining MUST include EITHER:	reel stand and rewind web control system sheeting section OR feeder and delivery sheet pick-up system transfer system

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPCBF232 Produce basic flat-bed cut product	ICPCF232C Produce basic flat-bed cut product	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF232 Produce basic flat-bed cut product

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

produce products involving a range of minor flat-bed cutting processes including: kiss cutting, hole punching, hole drilling, slotting, slitting, sheeting, creasing, scoring, and pin perforating, indexing and round cornering according to job specifications and production timeframes

demonstrate THREE different processes, and for each process, complete TWO jobs with different types and sizes of substrate and design of finished patterns, according to manufacturer’s and job specifications, enterprise procedures and listed performance criteria.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

explain work health and safety (WHS) factors for:

setting up and/or operating machine transport systems

setting up and/or operating machine delivery systems

maintaining and adjusting the cutting process

conducting machine shutdown procedures

identify checks needed when:

substrate is removed from the machine

packing cutting devices

waste is removed from the machine and surrounding area for disposal or recycling

cutting devices or knives are cleaned or replaced ready for the next run

during the machine shutdown procedure

identify areas of the machine to monitor and adjust to ensure trouble-free operation

explain indicators that mean knife replacement is needed

determine when a cutting pressure adjustment is required

explain the procedure for correcting common machine faults

determine machine cleaning requirements at the end of the run

determine production records to be kept or written up, and information to include in this reporting procedure

identify machine manuals, safety and other documentation relevant to this task, where they are kept, and the information in them.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the converting, binding and finishing field of work and include access to special purpose tools, equipment and materials.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPCBF235 Set up machine for basic rotary cutting

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to set up minor rotary cutting processes, including kiss cutting, perforating, sprocket hole punching, slotting, sheeting, slitting, creasing and scoring.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Converting, Binding and Finishing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Prepare for job	1.1 Job specifications are read and interpreted from job documentation or production control system 1.2 Set-up is carried out correctly in minimum time with minimum wastage 1.3 Availability of all job related components is checked
2. Mount rotary cutting devices to cylinders	2.1 Cutting devices are correctly mounted 2.2 Cutting devices are registered and proofed 2.3 Appropriate cutting devices are selected and secured to machine according to job specifications
3. Set up delivery systems	3.1 Delivery systems are set up and adjusted according to job specifications 3.2 Substrate is removed from process according to job specifications
4. Set up machine	4.1 Rotary cutting devices are set up and adjusted according to job specifications 4.2 Cutting pressures are set up and adjusted according to job specifications 4.3 Counter knives/anvils are set in correct position
5. Assist in set-up for other in-line processes	5.1 Assistance is given in set-up of in-line printing/ converting/binding units 5.2 Minor in-line printing processes (date stamping, numbering) are set up correctly
6. Conduct sample run	6.1 Material to be used for sample is organised correctly 6.2 Machine is set up and operated to produce a specified sample according to work health and safety requirements, manufacturer’s specifications and enterprise procedures 6.3 Sample is visually inspected and/or tested or laboratory testing is organised according to enterprise procedures 6.4 Results are interpreted to determine adjustment requirements 6.5 Adjustments are carried out according to product and machine specifications

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 2.2, 4.1, 4.2, 6.2, 6.5	Recognises and evaluates text to establish job requirements from information contained within relevant systems
Oral Communication	5.1	Participates effectively in spoken interactions to confirm or clarify understanding
Navigate the world of work	6.2, 6.3, 6.5	Complies with legislative requirements and follows organisational policies and procedures relevant to own role
Interact with others	5.1	Cooperates with others as part of familiar routine activities, and contributes to specific activities requiring joint responsibility and accountability
Get the work done	1.1-1.3, 2.1, 2.2, 3.1, 3.2, 4.1-4.3, 5.1, 5.2, 6.3-6.5	Determines priorities and sequences steps involved in clearly defined tasks Implements actions as per instructions, making slight adjustments if necessary Plans, identifies and assembles resources required to complete tasks Follows routine procedures for using digital technology by reading data from electronic monitoring and control systems

Range of Conditions

This section specifies different work environments and conditions that may affect performance. Essential operating conditions that may be present (depending on the work situation, needs of the candidate, accessibility of the item, and local industry and regional contexts) are included.

Delivery systems MUST include EITHER:	reel systems OR sheet systems.
Setting up and adjusting MUST include EITHER:	unwind and rewind reels web control system splicing/joining reels folder and sheeter OR feeder and delivery systems sheet pick-up and delivery systems transfer systems.

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPCBF235 Set up machine for basic rotary cutting	ICPCF235C Set up machine for basic rotary cutting	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF235 Set up machine for basic rotary cutting

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

demonstrate all safety devices on the machinery

demonstrate any THREE cutting processes, including relevant minor in-line processes, and for each process:

correctly set up machinery for basic flat-bed cutting for TWO jobs, and

change the type and size of substrates and design of finished patterns according to manufacturer’s and job specifications, enterprise procedures and listed performance criteria.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

identify work health and safety factors for:

setting up and/or operating machine delivery systems

setting up cutting devices

determine important areas pertinent to the relevant system:

to check when the feeder unit is set up

of the reel delivery system that may need to be adjusted according to job specifications

to consider during webbing procedures

identify checks needed when:

cutting devices are mounted on a cylinder

cutting devices are attached to the machine

substrate is removed from the machine

explain the rotary hole punching/indexing/creasing information found in the job documentation or production control system

identify adjustments to the delivery systems that may be needed to suit various jobs

list steps to ensure the delivery systems operate effectively

explain ways the finished product can be secured for dispatch

explain how machine pressure, machine cutting depths and the need to adjust in-line units are determined

determine details of the completed sample to examine to ensure conformance to client requirements

explain methods for storing cutting tools and equipment to prevent damage and deterioration

identify machine manuals, safety and other documentation relevant to this task, where they are kept, and the information included in them.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the converting, binding and finishing field of work and include access to special purpose tools, equipment and materials.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPCBF236 Produce basic rotary cut product

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to produce basic rotary cut product, monitor and adjust machinery, maintain transportation of the substrate, identify and rectify faults, and correctly clean and shut down equipment.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Converting, Binding and Finishing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Maintain delivery systems	1.1 Delivery systems are monitored and adjusted to ensure efficient and continuous operation and ensure no damage to finished product 1.2 Substrate is added to and removed from machine according to job specifications
2. Maintain basic rotary cutting process	2.1 Cutting edges and knife condition are monitored and adjusted to ensure product quality meets the approved sample standard 2.2 Cutting pressures are monitored and adjusted to ensure product quality meets the approved sample standard 2.3 Registration of cutting devices and knife(s) are monitored and adjusted to ensure product quality meets the approved sample standard 2.4 Packing of cutting devices is monitored and adjusted to ensure product quality meets the approved sample standard
3. Maintain production process	3.1 Basic in-line printing/converting/binding/finishing process(es) are monitored and adjusted to ensure product quality meets the approved sample standard 3.2 Production process is operated in association with fellow workers and according to enterprise procedures and planned daily schedule 3.3 Production is maintained according to work health and safety (WHS) requirements, manufacturer’s specifications and enterprise procedures 3.4 Manual and/or automatic control is used according to job specifications 3.5 Performance is monitored and verified using the process control system according to enterprise procedures 3.6 Production difficulties are anticipated and preventive action is taken to prevent occurrence by timely intervention 3.7 Process adjustments to eliminate problems are reported according to enterprise procedures 3.8 Faulty performance of equipment is identified and reported according to enterprise procedures 3.9 Waste is sorted according to enterprise procedures
4. Identify and rectify problems and faults	4.1 Problem in rotary cutting machine operation is identified and reported according to enterprise procedures 4.2 Adjustments or corrections are carried out according to specified procedures and are consistent with operator’s skill level 4.3 Rotary cutting machine operation is checked to ensure correct operation 4.4 Machine faults requiring repair are identified and reported to designated person according to enterprise procedures 4.5 Repair/adjustment is verified prior to resumption of operations
5. Conduct shutdown of production process	5.1 Correct shutdown sequence is followed according to manufacturer’s specifications and enterprise procedures 5.2 Shutdown is conducted in association with fellow workers and in compliance with WHS requirements 5.3 Substrate waste is removed from operating area and recycled or disposed of, where required, according to regulatory requirements and enterprise procedures
6. Clean rotary cutting machine at end of run	6.1 Cutting devices and knife/knives are cleaned or replaced ready for next run 6.2 Cutting devices are sharpened 6.3 Machine bed is cleaned ready for next run 6.4 Cutting units are disengaged and cleaned ready for next run 6.5 In-line printing/converting/binding/finishing units are cleaned ready for next run 6.6 Transportation and delivery systems are disengaged and cleaned ready for next run 6.7 Production records or other documentation are accurately completed where required by enterprise procedures

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.2, 3.3, 3.4, 5.1	Recognises and interprets text to establish job requirements from information contained within relevant procedures and specifications
Writing	3.7, 3.8, 4.1, 4.4, 6.7	Enters routine data associated with production processes and enterprise procedures
Oral Communication	3.2, 3.7, 3.8, 4.1, 4.4, 5.2	Speaks clearly using appropriate vocabulary, tone and pace to report faults and discrepancies to supervisors or discuss job requirements with colleagues
Navigate the World of work	2.1-2.4, 3.1-3.3, 3.5, 3.7-3.9, 4.1-4.4, 5.1-5.3, 6.1-6.7	Complies with legislative requirements and follows organisational policies and procedures relevant to own role, particularly with regard to safe operation of machinery and equipment
Interact with others	3.2, 3.7, 3.8, 4.1, 4.4, 5.2	Cooperates with others as part of familiar routine activities, and contributes to specific activities requiring joint responsibility and accountability Follows accepted practices and protocols for reporting issues to supervisors
Get the work done	1.1, 2.1-2.4, 3.2-3.6, 3.9, 4.2, 4.3, 4.5, 5.1, 5.3	Takes responsibility for planning and organising own workload, identifying ways of sequencing and combining elements for greater efficiency Recognises and anticipates an increasing range of familiar problems, their symptoms and causes; actively looking for early warning signs and implementing contingency plans Follows routine procedures for using digital technology by reading data from electronic monitoring and control systems

Range of Conditions

This section specifies different work environments and conditions that may affect performance. Essential operating conditions that may be present (depending on the work situation, needs of the candidate, accessibility of the item, and local industry and regional contexts) are included.

Delivery systems MUST include EITHER:	reel OR sheet
Monitoring and adjusting MUST include EITHER:	reel stand and rewind section web control system sheeting section OR feeder and delivery system sheet pick-up and transportation system transfer system

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPCBF236 Produce basic rotary cut product	ICPCF236C Produce basic rotary cut product	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF236 Produce basic rotary cut product

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

demonstrate all safety devices on the machinery

demonstrate any THREE cutting processes, and for each process:

produce rotary cut products for TWO jobs, with different types and sizes of substrate and design of finished patterns, according to manufacturer’s and job specifications, enterprise procedures and listed performance criteria.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

identify work health and safety factors for:

setting up and/or operating machine transport systems

setting up and/or operating machine delivery systems

maintaining the cutting process

monitoring the rotary cutting process

conducting machine shutdown procedures

identify checks needed when:

substrate is removed from the machine

waste is removed from the machine and surrounding area for disposal or recycling

cutting devices or knives are cleaned, stored or replaced ready for the next run

identify areas of the delivery system to monitor to ensure trouble-free operation

identify sectors of the basic in-line printing/converting/binding/finishing process that may need to be monitored and adjusted to meet approved standards

explain production difficulties that can be expected during production runs and areas that may need adjustment to meet client requirements

explain the procedure for correcting common machine faults

identify areas of the machine that require cleaning at the end of the run

determine production records to be kept or written up and information that should be included

determine quality aspects to consider in a completed rotary cutting job

identify machine manuals, safety and other documentation relevant to this task, where they are kept, and the information included in them.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the converting, binding and finishing field of work and include access to special purpose tools, equipment and materials.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPCBF241 Set up machine for basic single or continuous folding

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to set up a machine for basic folding.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Converting, Binding and Finishing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Prepare for job	1.1 Job specifications are read and interpreted from job documentation or production control 1.2 Set-up is carried out correctly in minimum time with minimum wastage 1.3 Availability of all job-related components is checked
2. Set up delivery systems	2.1 Delivery systems are set up and adjusted according to job specifications
3. Set up machine for basic single or continuous folding	3.1 Folding units are set up and adjusted according to job specifications 3.2 Folding rollers/belts/rails are set up and adjusted according to job specifications
4. Set up in-line units for basic processes	4.1 Minor in-line printing/converting/binding units are set up for basic processes and adjusted according to machine requirements and job specifications 4.2 Assistance is given setting up major in-line printing/converting/binding units
5. Conduct sample run	5.1 Material to be used for sample is organised correctly 5.2 Machine is set up and operated to produce a specified sample according to work health and safety requirements, manufacturer’s specifications and enterprise procedures 5.3 Sample is visually inspected to determine adjustment requirements 5.4 Results are interpreted to determine adjustment requirements 5.5 Adjustments are carried out according to product and machine specifications

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 3.1, 3.2, 4.1, 5.2, 5.5	Recognises and evaluates text to establish job requirements from information contained within relevant systems
Oral Communication	4.2	Participates effectively in spoken interactions to confirm or clarify understanding
Navigate the world of work	5.2, 5.5	Complies with legislative requirements and follows organisational policies and procedures relevant to own role
Interact with others	4.2	Cooperates with others as part of familiar routine activities, and contributes to specific activities requiring joint responsibility and accountability
Get the work done	1.1-1.3, 3.1, 3.2, 4.1, 4.2, 5.1-5.5	Determines priorities and sequences steps involved in clearly defined tasks Implements actions as per instructions, making slight adjustments if necessary Plans, identifies and assembles resources required to complete tasks Follows routine procedures for using digital technology by reading data from electronic monitoring and control systems

Range of Conditions

This section specifies different work environments and conditions that may affect performance. Essential operating conditions that may be present (depending on the work situation, needs of the candidate, accessibility of the item, and local industry and regional contexts) are included.

Delivery systems MUST include EITHER:	reel OR sheet
Setting up and adjusting MUST include EITHER:	unwind and rewind reels webbing procedures web control systems splicing/joining reels OR feeder and delivery sheet pick-up and transportation transfer system sheet transfer and control system

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPCBF241 Set up machine for basic single or continuous folding	ICPCF241C Set up machine for basic single or continuous folding	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF241 Set up machine for basic single or continuous folding

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

demonstrate all safety devices on the machinery

correctly set up machines for basic folding for TWO jobs (if possible using different sizes and weights of substrate) EITHER with a single fold to run continuously OR a single quire fold on a sheet gather/stitch/fold/trim machine OR an automatic web-fed machine to achieve a single fold according to manufacturer’s and job specifications, enterprise procedures and listed performance criteria.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

explain the work health and safety factors that must be considered when:

setting up and/or operating machine transport systems

setting folder transportation and delivery systems

setting up and/or adjusting the folding unit

adjusting machine units

explain folding requirements information that would be found in the job documentation or production control system

for reel systems only, identify areas of the reel stand to monitor to ensure trouble-free operation

for sheet systems only, identify areas of the sheet-fed transportation system to monitor to ensure trouble-free operation

identify areas of the delivery system to observe to prevent damage to the finished product

list ways folded sheets can be secured for dispatch

explain communication to instigate if the:

job is out-of-square

ink is too wet for production

job does not coincide with the sample

explain how to avoid substrate scratching/scuffing during transportation

list problems to expect if the machine is running too fast

determine checks of roller pressures for correctness

explain the adjustment if the sheet is out-of-square

explain possible reasons for the sheet being out-of-square, and adjustments required if the sheet will not leave the folding unit

explain the adjustment to ensure sheets are not smudging/scuffing

list steps to ensure correct alignment of in-line processes/units

explain adjustments to keep units correctly positioned

identify segments of the product to inspect at sample run completion to ensure product quality

identify machine manuals, safety and other documentation relevant to this task, where they are kept, and the information included in them.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the converting, binding and finishing field of work and include access to special purpose tools, machinery, equipment and materials.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPCBF242 Produce basic single or continuous folded product

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to produce basic folded product, monitor and adjust machinery, maintain transportation of the substrate, identify and rectify faults, and correctly clean and shut down equipment.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Converting, Binding and Finishing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Maintain delivery system	1.1 Delivery systems are monitored and adjusted to ensure accurate and continuous operation and eliminate damage to finished product 1.2 Substrate is added to and removed from the process according to job specifications
2. Maintain production process	2.1 Registration and squareness of fold are monitored and adjusted to ensure product quality meets the approved sample standard 2.2 Basic in-line printing/converting/binding/finishing process(es) are monitored and adjusted to ensure product quality meets the approved sample standard 2.3 Production process is operated in association with fellow workers and according to enterprise procedures and planned daily schedule 2.4 Production is maintained according to work health and safety (WHS) requirements, manufacturer’s specifications and enterprise procedures 2.5 Manual and/or automatic control is used according to job specifications 2.6 Performance is monitored and verified using the process control system according to enterprise procedures 2.7 Production difficulties are anticipated and preventive action is taken to prevent occurrence by timely intervention 2.8 Process adjustments to eliminate problems are reported according to enterprise procedures 2.9 Faulty performance of equipment is identified and reported according to enterprise procedures 2.10 Waste is sorted according to enterprise procedures
3. Identify and rectify problems and faults	3.1 Problems in folding (single/continuous) machine operation are identified and reported according to enterprise procedures 3.2 Adjustments or corrections are carried out according to specified procedures and are consistent with operator’s skill level 3.3 Folding (single/continuous) machine operation is checked to ensure correct operation 3.4 Machine faults requiring repair are identified and reported to designated person according to enterprise procedures 3.5 Repair/adjustment is verified prior to resumption of operations
4. Conduct shutdown of production process	4.1 Correct shutdown sequence is followed according to manufacturer’s specifications and enterprise procedures 4.2 Shutdown is conducted in association with fellow workers and in compliance with WHS requirements 4.3 Substrate waste is removed from operating area and recycled or disposed of, where required, according to regulatory requirements and enterprise procedures
5. Clean folding (single/continuous) machine at end of run	5.1 Folding units are disengaged and cleaned ready for next run 5.2 In-line printing/converting/binding/finishing units are cleaned ready for next run 5.3 Transport and delivery systems are disengaged and cleaned ready for next run 5.4 Production records or other documentation are accurately completed where required by enterprise procedures

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	2.4, 2.5, 4.1	Recognises and interprets text to establish job requirements from information contained within relevant procedures and specifications
Writing	2.8, 2.9, 3.1, 3.4, 5.5	Enters routine data associated with production processes and enterprise procedures
Oral Communication	2.3, 2.8, 2.9, 3.1, 3.4, 4.2	Speaks clearly using appropriate vocabulary, tone and pace to report faults and discrepancies to supervisors or discuss job requirements with colleagues
Navigate the world of work	2.1-2.4, 2.6-2.10, 3.1-3.4, 4.1-4.3, 5.1-54	Recognises and follows explicit and implicit protocols and meets expectations associated with own role Recognises and follows all procedures for cleaning and maintenance of equipment, incorporating regulatory requirements and enterprise procedures
Interact with others	2.3, 2.8, 2.9, 3.1, 3.4, 4.2	Cooperates with others as part of familiar, routine activities, and contributes to specific activities requiring joint responsibility and accountability Follows accepted practices and protocols for reporting issues to supervisors
Get the work done	1.1-1.2, 2.1-2.10, 3.2, 3.3, 3.5, 4.1-4.3	Takes responsibility for planning and organising own workload, identifying ways of sequencing and combining elements for greater efficiency Recognises and anticipates an increasing range of familiar problems, their symptoms and causes; actively looking for early warning signs and implementing contingency plans Follows routine procedures for using digital technology by reading data from electronic monitoring and control systems

Range of Conditions

This section specifies different work environments and conditions that may affect performance. Essential operating conditions that may be present (depending on the work situation, needs of the candidate, accessibility of the item, and local industry and regional contexts) are included.

Delivery systems MUST include EITHER:	reel OR sheet.
Monitoring and adjusting MUST include EITHER:	reel stand web control system OR feeder and delivery system sheet pick-up and transport system

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPCBF242 Produce basic single or continuous folded product	ICPCF242C Produce basic single or continuous folded product	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF242 Produce basic single or continuous folded product

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

produce a single or continuous folded product for TWO jobs (if possible using different sizes and weights of substrate) either with:

a single fold to run continuously, or,

a single quire fold on a sheet gather/stitch/fold/trim machine, or

an automatic web-fed machine to achieve a single fold according to manufacturer’s and job specifications, enterprise procedures and listed performance criteria.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

identify work health and safety (WHS) factors for:

setting up and/or operating machine transport systems

setting up and/or operating machine delivery systems

using the folding machine

adjusting/correcting the machine

cleaning the machine

identify areas of the machine to:

monitor to ensure trouble-free operation

regularly clean, and the materials to be cleaned from it

continuously observe to ensure smooth, trouble-free operation

identify areas of the in-line process to monitor to ensure product quality

explain checks needed when substrate is removed from the machine

explain TWO causes of out-of-square folding and how each can be corrected

determine segments of quality assurance inspected at the completion of the sample run, as well as in a completed folded job

explain communication to be instigated if the:

job is out-of-square

ink is too wet for production

job does not coincide with the sample

list the part(s) of the machine to adjust if the sheet is creasing

identify important tasks to correctly shut down the machine

explain work preparation required for dispatch

explain the requirement to keep the machine clear of surface rust (condensation)

determine production alterations needed to meet client requirements

identify machine manuals, safety and other documentation relevant to this task, where they are kept, and the information included in them.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the converting, binding and finishing field of work and include access to special purpose tools, equipment and materials.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPCBF243 Set up machine for basic collating or inserting (sheet/section)

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to set up a machine for basic collating, gathering or inserting of sheets or sections, and is appropriate for binding and finishing operations, mail houses and newspapers.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Converting, Binding and Finishing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Prepare for job	1.1 Job specifications are read and interpreted from job documentation or production control system 1.2 Set-up is carried out correctly in minimum time with minimum wastage 1.3 Availability of all job-related components is checked
2. Set up sheet/section system	2.1 Feeder and delivery systems are set up and adjusted according to job specifications 2.2 Double/misfeed detectors are set up according to job specifications 2.3 Sheet/section pick-up, transfer and transportation system is set up and adjusted according to job specifications 2.4 Transfer systems are set up and adjusted according to job specifications
3. Set up machine and conduct sample run	3.1 Collating/inserting system is set up and adjusted according to job specifications 3.2 Material to be used for sample is organised correctly 3.3 Machine is set up and operated to produce a specified sample according to Work Health and Safety (WHS) requirements, manufacturer’s specifications and enterprise procedures
4. Organise sample inspection and/or testing	4.1 Sample is visually inspected and/or tested, or laboratory testing is organised, according to enterprise procedures 4.2 Results are interpreted to determine adjustment requirements 4.3 Adjustments are carried out according to product and machine specifications

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 2.1-2.4, 3.1, 3.3, 4.3	Recognises and evaluates text to establish job requirements from information contained within relevant systems
Navigate the world of work	3.3, 4.1	Complies with legislative requirements and follows organisational policies and procedures relevant to own role
Get the work done	1.1-1.3, 2.1-2.4, 3.1-3.3, 4.1-4.3	Determines priorities and sequences steps involved in clearly defined tasks Implements actions as per instructions, making slight adjustments if necessary Plans, identifies and assembles resources required to complete tasks Follows routine procedures for using digital technology by reading data from electronic monitoring and control systems

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPCBF243 Set up machine for basic collating or inserting (sheet/section)	ICPCF243C Set up machine for basic collating or inserting (sheet/section)	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF243 Set up machine for basic collating or inserting (sheet/section)

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

correctly set up machines for basic collating or inserting according to job specifications, and within the production timeframe for TWO different jobs (if possible one sheet and one section) involving a minimum of FOUR products, according to listed performance criteria

operate all safety devices on the machine.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

set up a double/misfeed sheet calliper system that ensures smooth transportation and delivery of sheets or sections through the machine

identify largest and smallest sheet or section size that can be run through this machine

identify areas of the machine that can be adjusted to allow for 42gsm stock

confirm the speed the machine can operate at

identify indicators the machine needs lubrication

determine an acceptable collating result

determine adjustments to the machine to alleviate ‘bruising’ of NCR paper

identify circumstances in which the machine needs adjustment, and the cause of sheets creasing in the machine delivery

consider important information concerning collating included in the job documentation or production control system

work health and safety factors for:

operating and adjusting a double/misfeed sheet calliper system

setting up sheet/section transportation and delivery systems

identify factors to consider when setting up the feeder

name different types of sheet/section delivery systems

identify machine manuals, safety and other documentation relevant to this task, where they are kept, and the information included in them.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the converting, binding and finishing field of work and include access to:

work request documents

double/misfeed sheet calliper system

special purpose tools, equipment and materials.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPCBF244 Produce basic collated or inserted (sheet/section) product

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to produce a basic collated or inserted sheet or section product, monitor and adjust machinery, maintain transportation of the substrate, identify and rectify faults, and correctly clean and shut down equipment.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Converting, Binding and Finishing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Maintain operation of sheet/section transportation system on machine	1.1 Feeder and delivery systems are monitored and adjusted to ensure continuous and efficient feeding to machine 1.2 Sheet/section pick-up and transport system is monitored and adjusted to ensure accurate and continuous sheet handling and efficient operation 1.3 Transfer systems are monitored and adjusted to ensure correct and continuous sheet handling and efficient operation 1.4 Substrate is added to process according to job specifications
2. Maintain production process	2.1 Collating or inserting process is monitored and adjusted to ensure product quality meets the approved sample standard 2.2 Production process is operated in association with fellow workers and according to enterprise procedures and planned daily schedule 2.3 Production is maintained according to work health and safety (WHS) requirements, manufacturer’s specifications and enterprise procedures 2.4 Manual and/or automatic control is used according to job specifications 2.5 Performance is monitored and verified using the process control system according to enterprise procedures 2.6 Production difficulties are anticipated and preventive action is taken to prevent occurrence by timely intervention 2.7 Process adjustments to eliminate problems are reported according to enterprise procedures 2.8 Waste is sorted according to enterprise procedures 2.9 Basic in-line printing/converting/binding/finishing process(es) are monitored and adjusted to ensure product quality meets the approved sample standard
3. Identify and rectify problems and faults	3.1 Problems in collating or inserting (sheet/section) machine are identified and reported according to enterprise procedures 3.2 Adjustments or corrections are carried out according to specified procedures, and are consistent with operator’s skill level 3.3 Collating or inserting (sheet/section) machine operation is checked to ensure correct operation 3.4 Machine faults requiring repair are identified and reported to designated person according to enterprise procedures 3.5 Repair/adjustment is verified prior to resumption of operations
4. Conduct shutdown of production process	4.1 Correct shutdown sequence is followed according to manufacturer’s specifications and enterprise procedures 4.2 Shutdown is conducted in association with fellow workers and in compliance with WHS requirements 4.3 Substrate waste is removed from operating area and recycled or disposed of, where required, according to regulatory requirements and enterprise procedures
5. Clean (sheet/section) machine at end of run	5.1 Collating or insert machine is cleaned ready for next run 5.2 In-line printing/converting/binding/finishing units are cleaned ready for next run 5.3 Sheet feed, transport and delivery systems are disengaged and cleaned ready for next run 5.4 Production records or other documentation are accurately completed where required by enterprise procedures

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	2.3, 2.4, 4.1	Recognises and interprets text to establish job requirements from information contained within relevant procedures and specifications
Writing	3.4, 5.4	Enters routine data associated with production processes and enterprise procedures
Oral Communication	2.2, 2.7, 3.1, 3.4, 4.2	Speaks clearly using appropriate vocabulary, tone and pace to report faults and discrepancies to supervisors or discuss job requirements with colleagues
Navigate the world of work	2.1-2.3, 2.5, 2.7-2.9, 3.1, 3.2, 3.4, 4.1-4.3, 5.1-5.4	Recognises and follows explicit and implicit protocols and meets expectations associated with own role Recognises and follows all procedures for cleaning and maintenance of equipment, incorporating regulatory requirements and enterprise procedures
Interact with others	2.2, 2.7, 3.1, 3.4, 4.2	Cooperates with others as part of familiar routine activities, and contributes to specific activities requiring joint responsibility and accountability Follows accepted practices and protocols for reporting issues to supervisors
Get the work done	1.1-1.4, 2.1-2.7, 2.9, 3.1-3.5, 4.1, 4.3	Takes responsibility for planning and organising own workload, identifying ways of sequencing and combining elements for greater efficiency Recognises and anticipates an increasing range of familiar problems, their symptoms and causes; actively looking for early warning signs and implementing contingency plans Follows routine procedures for using digital technology by reading data from electronic monitoring and control systems

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPCBF244 Produce basic collated or inserted (sheet/section) product	ICPCF244C Produce basic collated or inserted (sheet/section) product	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF244 Produce basic collated or inserted (sheet/section) product

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

use a collating machine for basic collating (gathering and/or inserting) for TWO different jobs (if possible, one sheet and one section), involving a minimum of FOUR products, that meet job specifications, production timeframes and quality standards.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

identify work health and safety factors:

when operating the machine

prior to adjusting the machine

determine factors that govern the speed the machine operates at

list circumstances that show the machine needs to be adjusted, and explain how to prevent double sheet feeds

list checks required to shut down the machine correctly

identify areas of the machine that need regular cleaning and must be kept clear of surface rust (condensation)

ensure materials are cleaned from the machine

determine items to check against client sample to ensure an acceptable collating result

identify machine manuals, safety and other documentation relevant to this task, where they are kept, and the information included in them.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the converting, binding and finishing field of work and include access to special purpose tools, equipment, machinery and materials.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPCBF245 Set up and produce hand-collated or inserted product

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to hand-collate or insert product.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Converting, Binding and Finishing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Prepare for job	1.1 Job specifications are read and interpreted from job documentation or production control system 1.2 Set-up is carried out correctly in minimum time with minimum wastage 1.3 Availability of all job related components is checked 1.4 Collating/inserting system is set up according to job specifications
2. Conduct sample run	2.1 Material to be used for sample is organised correctly 2.2 Collating or inserting system is operated to produce a specified sample according to work health and safety (WHS) requirements, manufacturer’s specifications and enterprise procedures
3. Organise sample inspection and/or testing	3.1.Sample is visually inspected and/or tested, or laboratory testing is organised, according to enterprise procedures 3.2 Results are interpreted to determine adjustment requirements 3.3 Adjustments are carried out according to product specifications
4. Maintain production process	4.1 Hand-collating process is monitored and adjusted to ensure product quality meets the approved sample standard 4.2 Production process is operated in association with fellow workers and according to enterprise procedures and planned daily schedule 4.3 Production is maintained according to WHS requirements, manufacturer’s specifications and enterprise procedures 4.4 Production difficulties are anticipated and preventive action is taken to prevent occurrence by timely intervention 4.5 Process adjustments to eliminate problems are reported according to enterprise procedures
5. Clean work area at end of run	5.1 Collating area is cleaned ready for next run 5.2 Waste is sorted according to enterprise procedures 5.3 Substrate waste is removed from operating area and recycled or disposed of, where required, according to regulatory requirements and enterprise procedures 5.4 Production records or other documentation are accurately completed, where required by enterprise procedures

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 1.4, 2.2	Recognises and interprets text to establish job requirements from information contained within relevant procedures and specifications
Writing	4.5, 5.4	Records information relating to production and machinery problems and completes production reports and other relevant documentation
Oral Communication	4.2, 4.5	Speaks clearly using appropriate vocabulary, tone and pace to report faults and discrepancies to supervisors or discuss job requirements with colleagues
Navigate the world of work	2.2, 3.1, 4.1-4.3, 4.5, 5.1-5.4	Recognises and follows all procedures for cleaning and maintenance of equipment, incorporating regulatory requirements and enterprise procedures Understands roles and responsibilities for task and makes basic decisions on work completion parameters
Interact with others	4.2, 4.5	Cooperates with others as part of familiar routine activities, and contributes to specific activities requiring joint responsibility and accountability Follows accepted practices and protocols for reporting issues to supervisors
Get the work done	1.1-1.4, 2.1, 2.2, 3.1-3.3, 4.1-4.4, 5.1-5.4	Takes responsibility for planning and organising own workload, identifying ways of sequencing; and identifies and assembles required resources Recognises and anticipates an increasing range of familiar problems, their symptoms and causes, actively looking for early warning signs and implementing contingency plans Follows routine procedures for using digital technology by reading data from electronic monitoring and control systems

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPCBF245 Set up and produce hand-collated or inserted product	ICPCF245C Set up and produce hand-collated or inserted product	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF245 Set up and produce hand-collated or inserted product

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

correctly set up and produce hand-collated and inserted product according to job specifications and within production timeframe

find and use information relevant to the task from a variety of information sources

set up and collate TWO different jobs (at least FIVE products, and if possible, one sheet job and one section job) by hand according to manufacturer’s and job specifications, enterprise procedures and listed performance criteria.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

identify important information found on the production control job ticket

list steps to ensure important features of the production control system are followed

determine production records to be kept or written up and the information that should be included

identify ergonomic and work health and safety (WHS) factors for setting up the job to facilitate ease of operation

explain facilities available to assist picking up product by hand

identify precautions for handling NCR paper

identify methods to separate finished sets of product

identify methods of assistance to open sections to be inserted

explain how printed images assure correct sequence of sections

list steps to ensure important features of the production control system are followed

determine areas of the finished product to be inspected

list steps to take if the test sample is incorrect

explain the procedure for processing remaining sheets (overs) at the completion of the job

identify manuals, safety and other documentation relevant to this task, where they are kept, and the information included in them.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the converting, binding and finishing field of work and include access to special purpose tools, equipment and materials.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPCBF261 Set up machine for basic adhesive, mechanical or thermal fastening

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to set up a machine for basic adhesive, mechanical or thermal fastening. Some equipment may also involve cutting, trimming, folding and/or gathering (collating) which may be assessed at the same time.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Converting, Binding and Finishing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Prepare for job	1.1 Job specifications are read and interpreted from job documentation or production control system 1.2 Set-up is carried out correctly in minimum time with minimum wastage 1.3 Availability of all job related components is checked
2. Set up delivery systems	2.1 Delivery systems are set up and adjusted according to job specifications 2.2 Substrate is removed from the process according to job specifications
3. Set up equipment and in-line units	3.1 Fastening system is set up and adjusted according to job specifications 3.2 Minor in-line printing/converting/binding units are set up for basic processes and adjusted according to machine requirements and job specifications 3.3 Assistance is given in set-up of major in-line printing/converting/binding units
4. Conduct sample run	4.1 Raw material to be used for sample is organised 4.2 Machine is set up and operated to produce a specified sample according to work health and safety requirements, manufacturer’s specifications and enterprise procedures 4.3 Sample is visually inspected and/or tested or laboratory testing is organised according to enterprise procedures 4.4 Results are interpreted to determine adjustment requirements 4.5 Adjustments are carried out according to product and machine specifications

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 2.1, 2.2, 3.1, 3.2, 4.2, 4.3	Recognises and evaluates text to establish job requirements from information contained in systems or documents
Oral Communication	3.3	Participates effectively in spoken interactions to confirm or clarify understanding
Navigate the world of work	4.2, 4.3	Complies with legislative requirements and follows organisational policies and procedures relevant to own role
Interact with others	3.3	Cooperates with others as part of familiar routine activities, and contributes to specific activities requiring joint responsibility and accountability
Get the work done	1.1-1.3, 2.1, 2.2, 3.1-3.3, 4.1-4.5	Determines priorities and sequences steps involved in clearly defined tasks Implements actions as per instructions, making slight adjustments if necessary Plans, identifies and assembles resources required to complete tasks Follows routine procedures for using digital technology by reading data from electronic monitoring and control systems

Range of Conditions

This section specifies different work environments and conditions that may affect performance. Essential operating conditions that may be present (depending on the work situation, needs of the candidate, accessibility of the item, and local industry and regional contexts) are included.

Delivery systems MUST include EITHER:	reel OR sheet.
Setting up and adjusting MUST include EITHER:	unwind and delivery reels webbing procedures web control system OR feeder and delivery systems sheet/section pick-up and transportation systems transfer systems sheet/section transfer and control system.

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPCBF261 Set up machine for basic adhesive, mechanical or thermal fastening	ICPCF261C Set up machine for basic adhesive, mechanical or thermal fastening	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF261 Set up machine for basic adhesive, mechanical or thermal fastening

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

correctly set up machine for basic fastening according to job specifications and within the production timeframe

find and use information relevant to the task from a variety of information sources

demonstrate all safety devices on the machine

set up machine on TWO occasions for adhesive OR mechanical OR thermal fastening, using different weights and sizes of substrate according to manufacturer’s and job specifications, enterprise procedures and listed performance criteria

use computerised control, monitoring and data entry systems, if available and appropriate.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

All Systems

identify work health and safety (WHS) factors for:

setting up the machine

setting up the delivery systems

before readjusting the machine

working with hot melt adhesives

determine important information concerning binding requirements found in the job documentation or production control system

identify elements to consider when planning a binding sample

list checks needed when using the delivery systems on the various machines

identify ways completed work can be secured for dispatch

explain binding techniques for different types of jobs

determine in-line units available for these binding processes

identify circumstances under which the machine would need to be adjusted

determine quality aspects to consider in the completed binding job

list steps to ensure important features of the production control system are addressed

identify machine manuals, safety and other documentation relevant to this task, where they are kept, and the information included in them

For Reel Systems Only

describe webbing procedures commonly used in the delivery area

identify areas to consider when setting up the web control system

For Sheet Systems Only

determine problems likely to be encountered when setting up the sheeter

For Adhesive Or Thermal Only

identify special delivery problems associated with adhesive machines and requirements to overcome these problems

determine WHS safeguards necessary with hot melt adhesives

explain methods of adhesive metering on the machine

explain care to ensure a neat and clean adhesive binding job

For Mechanical Only

list parts of the wire stitcher that need to be adjusted to process books of different thicknesses

determine required positioning of the wire stitches on the book

explain the difference between a staple and a wire stitch

determine the appropriate wire calliper for a particular job.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the converting, binding and finishing field of work and include access to special purpose tools, equipment and materials.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPCBF262 Produce basic adhesive, mechanical or thermal fastened product

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to produce basic adhesive, mechanical or thermal fastened product, monitor and adjust machinery, maintain transportation of the substrate, identify and rectify faults, and correctly clean and shut down equipment.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Converting, Binding and Finishing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Maintain sheet delivery system	1.1 Feeder and delivery systems are monitored and adjusted to ensure continuous and efficient feeding to machine 1.2 Sheet pick-up and transport system is monitored and adjusted to ensure accurate and continuous sheet handling and efficient operations 1.3 Transfer systems are monitored and adjusted to ensure correct and continuous sheet handling and efficient operation 1.4 Substrate is added to process according to job specifications
2. Maintain basic adhesive/mechanical/ thermal fastening process	2.1 Registration of fastening is monitored and adjusted to ensure product quality meets the approved sample standard 2.2 Wire straightness, length, cut-off and clinching pressures are monitored and adjusted to ensure product quality meets the approved sample standard OR 2.3 Adhesion is monitored and adjusted to ensure product quality meets the approved sample standard OR 2.4 Power current and dwell time is monitored and adjusted to ensure product quality meets the approved sample standard adjusted according to job specifications
3. Maintain production process	3.1 Basic in-line printing/converting/binding/finishing process(es) are monitored and adjusted to ensure product quality meets the approved sample standard 3.2 Production process is operated in association with fellow workers and according to enterprise procedures and planned daily schedule 3.3 Production is maintained according to work health and safety requirements, manufacturer’s specifications and enterprise procedures 3.4 Manual and/or automatic control is used according to job specifications 3.5 Performance is monitored and verified using the process control system according to enterprise procedures 3.6 Production difficulties are anticipated and preventive action is taken to prevent occurrence by timely intervention 3.7 Process adjustments to eliminate problems are reported according to enterprise procedures 3.8 Waste is sorted according to enterprise procedures
4. Identify and rectify problems and faults	4.1 Problems in adhesive/mechanical/thermal fastening machine are identified and reported according to enterprise procedures 4.2 Adjustments or corrections are carried out according to specified procedures, and are consistent with operator’s skill level 4.3 Adhesive/mechanical/thermal fastening machine operation is checked to ensure correct operation 4.4 Faulty performance of equipment is identified and reported according to enterprise procedures 4.5 Machine faults requiring repair are identified and reported to designated person according to enterprise procedures 4.6 Repair/adjustment is verified prior to resumption of operations
5. Conduct shutdown of production process	5.1 Correct shutdown sequence is followed according to manufacturer’s specifications and enterprise procedures 5.2 Shutdown is conducted in association with fellow workers and in compliance with Work Health and Safety (WHS) requirements 5.3 Substrate waste is removed from operating area and recycled or disposed of, where required, according to regulatory requirements and enterprise procedures
6. Clean machine at end of run	6.1 Mechanical fastening unit is disengaged and cleaned ready for next run 6.2 Thermal fastening unit is disengaged and cleaned ready for next run 6.3 Glue system is washed up ready for next run, and liquid waste is disposed of according to regulatory requirements and enterprise procedures 6.4 In-line printing/converting/binding/finishing units are cleaned ready for next run 6.5 Transportation and delivery systems are disengaged and cleaned ready for next run 6.6 Production records or other documentation are accurately completed where required by enterprise procedures

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.4, 2.4, 3.3, 3.4, 5.1	Recognises and interprets text to establish job requirements from information contained within relevant procedures and specifications
Writing	3.7, 4.1, 4.4, 6.6	Enters routine data associated with production processes and enterprise procedures
Oral Communication	3.2, 3.7, 4.1, 4.4, 4.5, 5.2	Speaks clearly using appropriate vocabulary, tone and pace to report faults and discrepancies to supervisors or discuss job requirements with colleagues
Navigate the world of work	2.1-2.4, 3.1-3.3, 3.5, 3.7, 3.8, 4.1-4.5, 5.1-5.3, 6.1-6.6	Complies with legislative requirements and follows organisational policies and procedures relevant to own role, particularly with regard to safe operation of machinery and equipment
Interact with others	3.2, 3.7, 4.1, 4.4, 4.5, 5.2	Cooperates with others as part of familiar routine activities, and contributes to specific activities requiring joint responsibility and accountability Follows accepted practices and protocols for reporting issues to supervisors
Get the work done	1.1-1.4, 2.1-2.4, 3.1-3.8, 4.1-4.4, 4.6, 5.1, 5.3	Takes responsibility for planning and organising own workload, identifying ways of sequencing and combining elements for greater efficiency Recognises and anticipates an increasing range of familiar problems, their symptoms and causes; actively looking for early warning signs and implementing contingency plans Follows routine procedures for using digital technology by reading data from electronic monitoring and control systems

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPCBF262 Produce basic adhesive, mechanical or thermal fastened product	ICPCF262C Produce basic adhesive, mechanical or thermal fastened product	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF262 Produce basic adhesive, mechanical or thermal fastened product

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

on TWO occasions, produce adhesive OR mechanical OR thermal fastened products, using different weights and sizes of substrate, according to manufacturer’s and job specifications, enterprise procedures, production timeframes, quality standards and listed performance criteria.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

identify work health and safety (WHS) factors for:

operating sheet-fed transportation and delivery systems

using hot melt adhesive

readjusting the machine, and prior to any adjustments

shutting down and cleaning the machine

identify areas of the:

sheet-fed feeder to monitor to ensure trouble-free operation

delivery system to observe to maintain tension

delivery system to observe to prevent damage to the finished product

in-line process to monitor to ensure product quality

machine that need regular cleaning

list checks needed when substrate is removed from the machine

list safety clothing available for use when operating adhesive binders

determine sectors to observe to ensure the production process is trouble-free and continuous

explain when the machine needs to be adjusted and production alterations are needed to meet client requirements

explain adjustment of the adhesive application on the adhesive binder

explain straightening wire in the wire feed on the wire stitcher

identify possible reasons for unsuccessful welding for a high-frequency welder

list materials to clean from the machine and how to keep the machine clear of surface rust (condensation)

determine quality aspects to consider in a completed:

adhesive bound job

high-frequency welded job

wire stitched job

identify machine manuals, safety and other documentation relevant to this task, where they are kept, and the information included in them.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the converting, binding and finishing field of work and include access to special purpose tools, equipment and materials.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPCBF263 Set up and produce hand-fastened product

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to set up and produce hand-fastened product.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Converting, Binding and Finishing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Prepare for job	1.1 Job specifications are read and interpreted from job documentation or production control system 1.2 Set-up is carried out correctly in minimum time with minimum wastage 1.3 Availability of all job related components is checked 1.4 Fastening system is set up and adjusted according to job specifications
2. Conduct sample run	2.1 Raw material to be used for sample is organised correctly 2.2 Equipment is set up and operated to produce a specified sample according to work health and safety requirements, manufacturer’s specifications and enterprise procedures 2.3 Sample is visually inspected and/or tested or laboratory testing is organised according to enterprise procedures 2.4 Results are interpreted to determine adjustment requirements 2.5 Adjustments are carried out according to product and equipment specifications
3. Maintain basic fastening process	3.1 Fastening process is monitored and adjusted to ensure quality product is achieved
4. Maintain production process	4.1 Production process is operated in association with fellow workers and according to enterprise procedures and planned daily schedule 4.2 Production is maintained according to WHS requirements, manufacturer’s specifications and enterprise procedures 4.3 Performance is monitored and verified using the process control system according to enterprise procedures 4.4 Production difficulties are anticipated and preventive action is taken to prevent occurrence by timely intervention 4.5 Process adjustments to eliminate problems are reported according to enterprise procedures 4.6 Faulty performance of equipment is identified and reported according to enterprise procedures 4.7 Waste is sorted according to enterprise procedures
5. Identify and rectify problems and faults	5.1 Problems fastening (adhesive/mechanical) equipment are identified and reported according to enterprise procedures 5.2 Adjustments or corrections are carried out according to specified procedures and are consistent with operator’s skill level 5.3 Fastening (adhesive/mechanical) equipment operation is checked to ensure correct operation
6. Clean fastening equipment	6.1 Mechanical fastening unit is disengaged and cleaned ready for next run OR 6.2 Glue system is washed ready for next run, and liquid waste is disposed of according to regulatory requirements and enterprise procedures 6.3 Substrate waste is removed from operating area and recycled or disposed of, where required, according to regulatory requirements and enterprise procedures 6.4 Machine faults requiring repair are identified and reported to designated person according to enterprise procedures 6.5 Repair/adjustment is verified prior to resumption of operations 6.6 Production records or other documentation are accurately completed, where required by enterprise procedures

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 1.4, 2.2, 2.5,	Recognises and interprets text to establish job requirements from information contained within relevant procedures and specifications
Writing	4.5, 4.6, 5.1, 6.4, 6.6	Records information relating to production and machinery problems and completes production reports and other relevant documentation
Oral Communication	4.1, 4.5, 4.6, 5.1, 6.4	Speaks clearly using appropriate vocabulary, tone and pace to report faults and discrepancies to supervisors or discuss job requirements with colleagues
Navigate the World of work	2.2, 2.3, 4.1-4.3, 4.5-4.7, 5.1, 5.2, 6.1-6.4, 6.6	Complies with legislative requirements and follows organisational policies and procedures relevant to own role, particularly with regard to operation and maintenance of machinery and equipment
Interact with others	4.1, 4.5, 4.6, 5.1, 6.4	Cooperates with others as part of familiar routine activities, and contributes to specific activities requiring joint responsibility and accountability Follows accepted practices and protocols for reporting issues to supervisors
Get the work done	1.1-1.4, 2.1-2.5, 4.1-4.7, 5.1-5.3, 6.4, 6.5	Takes responsibility for planning and organising own workload, identifying ways of sequencing and combining elements for greater efficiency Recognises and anticipates an increasing range of familiar problems, their symptoms and causes; actively looking for early warning signs and implementing contingency plans Seeks assistance when problems are beyond immediate responsibilities or experience

Range of Conditions

This section specifies different work environments and conditions that may affect performance. Essential operating conditions that may be present (depending on the work situation, needs of the candidate, accessibility of the item, and local industry and regional contexts) are included.

Fastening process MUST include EITHER:	adhesive/mechanical including gluing, stapling (stitching) or sewing (thread) OR hand sewing including gluing, stapling (stitching) or sewing (thread).
Monitoring and adjusting MUST include EITHER:	registration of fastening to ensure product quality meets the approved sample standard wire straightens, length, cut-off and clinching pressures OR adhesion to ensure product quality meets the approved sample standard OR selecting and spacing supports maintaining thread tension aligning sections at the head swelling.

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPCBF263 Set up and produce hand-fastened product	ICPCF263C Set up and produce hand-fastened product	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF263 Set up and produce hand-fastened product

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

demonstrate all safety devices on the equipment

demonstrate competency in TWO areas of: adhesive/thermal (drawn on cover or heated binding tape application), mechanical (wire stitcher or heavy duty stapler including saddle and flat stitching), hand sewing (single and multi-section books), and for each area:

correctly set up equipment and produce TWO basic hand-fastened products of different thickness and spine length to demonstrate equipment adjustment, according to manufacturer’s and job specifications, enterprise procedures and listed performance criteria.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

determine information concerning binding found in the job documentation or production control system

identify work health and safety (WHS) factors for:

setting up and operating the machinery

adjusting machinery

determine circumstances in which a machine needs to be adjusted

identify the correct binding technique for a job

determine parts of the wire stitcher toe adjust to process books of different thicknesses

explain positioning of the wire stitches on the book

explain difference between a staple and a wire stitch

determine the appropriate wire calliper for a particular job

explain the care to ensure a neat and clean adhesive binding job

describe sewing stages positioning on the book

explain ‘kettle stitch’

identify common sewing problems likely to be met when sewing a multi-section book

explain the purpose of sewing frames

explain how to ensure hand sewing remains firmly together

list problems associated with:

oiling a wire stitcher

not properly cleaning and maintaining equipment

identify measures to prevent production interruptions

describe an acceptable binding result

explain consequences if wire stitches are not in the right position

list what causes a book to be ‘stab’ stitched and special problems encountered with ‘stab’ stitching

determine when to use ‘saddle’ stitch or ‘flat’/’side’ stitch

identify manuals, safety and other documentation relevant to this task, where they are kept, and the information included in them.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the converting, binding and finishing field of work and include access to special purpose tools, equipment and materials.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPCBF281 Set up machine for basic laminating

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to set up a machine for a range of laminating processes, including laminating reel to reel, sheet to reel and reel to sheet.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Converting, Binding and Finishing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Prepare for job	1.1 Job specifications are read and interpreted from job documentation or production control system 1.2 Set-up is carried out correctly in minimum time with minimum wastage 1.3 Availability of all job related components is checked
2. Set up delivery systems	2.1 Delivery systems are set up and adjusted according to job instructions
3. Set up laminating machine	3.1 Application system cylinder is set up and adjusted according to job specifications 3.2 Adhesive application system is set up and adjusted according to job specifications 3.3 Binding pressures are set and adjusted according to job specifications 3.4 Drying system is set up and adjusted according to job specifications
4. Set up in-line units	4.1 Minor in-line printing/converting/binding units are set up for basic processes and adjusted according to machine requirements and job specifications 4.2 Assistance is given in set-up of major in-line printing/converting/binding units
5. Conduct sample run	5.1 Raw material to be used for sample is organised correctly 5.2 Machine is set up and operated to produce a specified sample according to work health and safety requirements, manufacturer’s specifications and enterprise procedures 5.3 Sample is visually inspected and/or tested or laboratory testing is organised according to enterprise procedures 5.4 Results are interpreted to determine adjustment requirements 5.5 Adjustments are carried out according to product and machine specifications

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 3.1-3.4, 4.1, 5.2, 5.5	Recognises and evaluates text to establish job requirements
Oral Communication	4.2	Participates effectively in spoken interactions to confirm or clarify understanding
Navigate the world of work	5.2, 5.3	Complies with legislative requirements and follows organisational policies and procedures relevant to own role
Interact with others	4.2	Cooperates with others as part of familiar routine activities, and contributes to specific activities requiring joint responsibility and accountability
Get the work done	1.1-1.3, 3.1-3.4, 4.1, 4.2, 5.1-5.5	Determines priorities and sequences steps involved in clearly defined tasks Implements actions as per instructions, making slight adjustments if necessary Plans, identifies and assembles resources required to complete tasks Follows routine procedures for using digital technology by reading data from electronic monitoring and control systems

Range of Conditions

This section specifies different work environments and conditions that may affect performance. Essential operating conditions that may be present (depending on the work situation, needs of the candidate, accessibility of the item, and local industry and regional contexts) are included.

Delivery systems MUST include EITHER:	reel OR sheet.
Setting up and adjusting MUST include EITHER:	unwind and rewind reels webbing procedures and web control systems splicing/joining reels sheeter OR feeder sheet/section pick-up and transportation system transfer system.

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPCBF281 Set up machine for basic laminating	ICPCF281C Set up machine for basic laminating	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF281 Set up machine for basic laminating

Modification History

Not applicable.

Performance Evidence

Knowledge Evidence

Assessment Conditions

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPCBF282 Produce basic laminated product

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to produce basic laminated product, monitor and adjust machinery, maintain transportation of the substrate, identify and rectify faults, and correctly clean and shut down equipment.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Converting, Binding and Finishing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Maintain reel transportation system	1.1 Reel stand is monitored and adjusted to ensure efficient, continuous operation 1.2 Web control system is monitored and adjusted to ensure correct tension and accurate, continuous positioning of the web for efficient operation 1.3 Substrate is added to the process according to job specifications 1.4 Reel rewind section is monitored and adjusted to maintain correct tension and to ensure no marks, blemishes or damage to finished product 1.5 Substrate is removed from process according to job specifications 1.6 Sheeting section is monitored and adjusted to ensure quality and efficient product delivery
2. Maintain basic laminating process	2.1 Registration of laminating is monitored and adjusted to ensure product quality meets the approved sample standard 2.2 Pressures are monitored and adjusted to ensure product quality meets the approved sample standard 2.3 Adhesion is monitored and adjusted to ensure product quality meets the approved sample standard
3. Maintain production process	3.1 Basic in-line printing/coating/converting/binding/finishing process(es) are monitored and adjusted to ensure product quality meets the approved sample standard 3.2 Production process is operated in association with fellow workers and according to enterprise procedures and planned daily schedule 3.3 Production is maintained according to work health and safety requirements, manufacturer’s specifications and enterprise procedures 3.4 Manual and/or automatic control is used according to job specifications 3.5 Performance is monitored and verified using the process control system according to enterprise procedures 3.6 Production difficulties are anticipated and preventive action is taken to prevent occurrence by timely intervention 3.7 Waste is sorted according to enterprise procedures
4. Identify and rectify problems and faults	4.1 Problems in laminating machine are identified and reported according to enterprise procedures 4.2 Adjustments or corrections are carried out according to specified procedures and are consistent with operator’s skill level 4.3 Laminating machine operation is checked to ensure correct operation 4.4 Process adjustments to eliminate problems are reported according to enterprise procedures 4.5 Faulty performance of equipment is identified and reported according to enterprise procedures
5. Conduct shutdown of production process	5.1 Correct shutdown sequence is followed according to manufacturer’s specifications and enterprise procedures 5.2 Shutdown is conducted in association with fellow workers and in compliance with Work Health and Safety (WHS) requirements 5.3 Substrate waste is removed from operating area and recycled or disposed of, where required, according to regulatory requirements and enterprise procedures 5.4 Machine faults requiring repair are identified and reported to designated person according to enterprise procedures 5.5 Repair/adjustment is verified prior to resumption of operations
6. Clean laminating machine at end of run	6.1 Laminating machine is disengaged and cleaned ready for next run 6.2 Adhesive system is washed ready for next run and liquid waste is disposed of according to regulatory requirements and enterprise procedures 6.3 In-line printing/coating/converting/binding/finishing units are cleaned ready for next run 6.4 Reel feed, transportation and delivery systems are disengaged and cleaned ready for next run 6.5 Production records or other documentation are accurately completed where required by enterprise procedures

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.3, 3.3, 3.4, 5.1	Recognises and interprets text to establish job requirements from information contained within relevant procedures and specifications
Writing	4.1, 4.4, 4.5, 5.4, 6.5	Enters routine data associated with production processes and enterprise procedures
Oral Communication	3.2, 4.1, 4.4, 4.5, 5.2, 5.4	Speaks clearly using appropriate vocabulary, tone and pace to report faults and discrepancies to supervisors or discuss job requirements with colleagues
Navigate the world of work	2.1-2.3, 3.1-3.3, 3.5, 3.7, 4.1-4.5, 5.1-5.4, 6.1-6.5	Complies with legislative requirements and follows organisational policies and procedures relevant to own role, particularly with regard to operation and maintenance of machinery and equipment
Interact with others	3.2, 4.1, 4.4, 4.5, 5.2, 5.4	Cooperates with others as part of familiar routine activities, and contributes to specific activities requiring joint responsibility and accountability Follows accepted practices and protocols for reporting issues to supervisors
Get the work done	2.1-2.3, 3.1-3.6, 4.1-4.3, 5.1-5.3, 5.5	Takes responsibility for planning and organising own workload, identifying ways of sequencing and combining elements for greater efficiency Recognises and anticipates an increasing range of familiar problems, their symptoms and causes; actively looking for early warning signs and implementing contingency plans Follows routine procedures for using digital technology by reading data from electronic monitoring and control systems

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPCBF282 Produce basic laminated product	ICPCF282C Produce basic laminated product	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF282 Produce basic laminated product

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

operate laminating machine to complete TWO two-ply jobs on different substrates and of different sizes (if possible, including one in-line process) according to manufacturer’s and job specifications, enterprise procedures and listed performance criteria.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

identify work health and safety (WHS) factors for:

operating web machine transport and delivery systems

maintaining laminating and in-line processes

determine areas of the reel stand to monitor to ensure trouble-free operation

list checks needed when substrate is removed from the machine

explain how to assure registration of laminating

identify areas of in-line processes to monitor to ensure a quality product

explain laminating problems that may occur during operation of the machine

identify adjustments or correction procedures that may be needed to ensure accurate operation of the process, and alternations that may be required to production to meet client requirements

identify important tasks to correctly shut down, and how to keep the machine clear of surface rust (condensation)

identify areas of the machine that need regular cleaning, and the materials that need to be cleaned from the machine

determine quality aspects to consider in a completed laminated job

identify machine manuals, safety and other documentation relevant to this task, where they are kept, and the information included in them.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the converting, binding and finishing field of work and include access to special purpose tools, equipment and materials.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPCBF294 Set up profile cutting for envelope manufacture

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to correctly set up profile cutting equipment.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Converting, Binding and Finishing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Set up profile cutting	1.1 All details required for the job are checked and confirmed against job specifications 1.2 Correct materials are checked and available for the job 1.3 Adhesives are appropriate for the substrate, application process and machine 1.4 Work area is made safe and ready for production according to safety requirements 1.5 Profile cutting unit including profile knives, and where appropriate, fly knives, is set up according to job specifications 1.6 Blades are checked for sharpness and fitted as necessary, with units calibrated according to job specifications 1.7 Settings are checked against job specifications before production is commenced 1.8 Machine is stepped to ensure profile is in the correct position and paper tension is accurate 1.9 Envelope shape and size conforms to job specifications and cuts are clean and meet quality requirements
2. Confirm quality	2.1 Sample from the machine is selected and checked to ensure it conforms to quality standards 2.2 Adjustments are made when standards are not met 2.3 Samples are continuously monitored for defects, and defects are removed 2.4 Efficiency, quality and output rate of production run are monitored for problems, and any deficiencies resolved 2.5 Wastage is monitored, kept to a minimum and correctly disposed of according to enterprise quality standards 2.6 Locations of all emergency shutdown buttons and triggers are known

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 1.5-1.7, 1.9	Recognises and interprets text to establish job requirements from information contained within relevant procedures and specifications
Navigate the world of work	1.4, 1.9, 2.1, 2.5, 2.6	Complies with legislative requirements and follows organisational policies and procedures relevant to own role, particularly with regard to safety
Get the work done	1.1-1.3, 1.5-1.8, 2.1-2.5	Takes responsibility for planning and organising own workload, identifying ways of sequencing and combining elements for greater efficiency Plans, identifies and assembles resources required to complete tasks Responds to predictable problems and implements standard or logical solutions

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPCBF294 Set up profile cutting for envelope manufacture	ICPCF294C Set up profile cutting for envelope manufacture	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF294 Set up profile cutting for envelope manufacture

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

set up profile cutting units for manufacturing banker, open-sided wallet, open-ended pocket and automatic filling envelopes, according to job specifications and within the production timeframe.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

identify common faults associated with profile cutting, and causes and methods to correct

explain how blades are checked for sharpness in accordance with enterprise and work health and safety requirements

identify relevant enterprise documentation procedures and other documentation, where they are kept, and the information included in them.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the converting, binding and finishing field of work and include access to and use of:

job sheets, work tickets or processing orders

profile cutting machinery used for cutting envelope profiles

special purpose tools, equipment and materials.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPCBF297 Clean sack and bag machines

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to clean and check a sack and bag machine with minimum downtime.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Converting, Binding and Finishing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Prepare for cleaning	1.1 Machinery is safely switched off before cleaning is started 1.2 Cleaning equipment and materials most suitable for the machine are selected
2. Commence cleaning	2.1 Vacuum systems are checked for wear, opened and cleaned with compressed air, and suctions replaced if necessary 2.2 Rollers and drums are checked for wear and cleaned 2.3 Jaws and grippers are cleaned and checked for wear 2.4 Glue units are checked for wear and cleaned, and excess glue and build-up removed from glue nipples 2.5 Glue applicators are cleaned and checked for wear 2.6 Hot melt residues are removed and glue pot is cleaned 2.7 Base and underneath of machine are cleaned of print ink and glue residue 2.8 Entire machine is blown down, top to bottom, and all grease and oil is removed from components, housings and the floor 2.9 Cleaning methods which are safe, avoid harm to the environment and follow the manufacturer’s instructions are used
3. Complete cleaning	3.1 Used cleaning agents and waste materials are disposed of safely 3.2 When cleaning is finished, machine is checked to ensure it is safe to operate, and all machine guarding is replaced or repositioned in safe working order 3.3 Obvious faults and wear are documented and reported

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	2.9	Comprehends information contained in instructions
Writing	3.3	Documents information required for reporting faults or discrepancies
Navigate the world of work	1.1, 2.9, 3.1, 3.2	Complies with work health and safety (WHS) and legislative requirements, and follows organisational policies and procedures relevant to own role
Get the work done	1.2, 2.1-2.8	Plans, identifies and assembles resources required to complete tasks Follows directions to complete familiar tasks

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPCBF297 Clean sack and bag machines	ICPCF297C Clean sack and bag machines	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF297 Clean sack and bag machines

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

safely clean and check a sack and bag machine with minimum downtime according to manufacturer’s specifications and work health and safety (WHS) regulations.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

list common faults associated with sack or bag manufacturing machines, the causes, and how to correct them

identify environmental obligations to be observed

explain WHS procedures for using cleaning fluids and equipment.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the converting, binding and finishing field of work and include access to a sack or bag machine, relevant facilities, special purpose tools, equipment and materials.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPCBF298 Run and monitor sack and bag machines

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to run and monitor sack and bag machines with a prescribed range of functions involving known routines and procedures, with some accountability for the quality of outcomes.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Converting, Binding and Finishing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Monitor production process	1.1 All details required for the job are checked and confirmed against job specifications 1.2 Supply of materials throughout the run is maintained 1.3 Paper tension is monitored on an ongoing basis 1.4 Machine is run at optimum speed for maintaining quality outputs
2. Maintain quality	2.1 Location of all emergency shutdown buttons and triggers are known 2.2 Sample from the machine is selected and checked to ensure it matches the required standards 2.3 Adjustments are made when standards are not met 2.4 Each in-line process is monitored and minor adjustments are made during production, if required 2.5 Samples are continuously monitored for defects, and defects are removed 2.6 Efficiency, quality and output rate of the production run are monitored for problems, and any deficiencies resolved 2.7 Wastage is monitored, kept to a minimum and correctly disposed of according to enterprise quality standards
3. Identify problems	3.1 Faults which affect quality of the sacks or bags are identified and rectified 3.2 Problems that reduce the output rate are identified and fixed 3.3 Faults that affect efficient operation of equipment are identified and resolved

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1	Recognises and interprets text to establish job requirements from information contained within relevant procedures and specifications
Navigate the world of work	1.4, 2.1-2.3, 2.7	Complies with legislative requirements and follows organisational policies and procedures relevant to own role
Get the work done	1.1-1.3, 2.2, 2.4-2.7, 3.1-3.3	Plans, identifies and assembles resources required to complete tasks Responds to predictable problems and implements standard or logical solutions related to own role in immediate work environment

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPCBF298 Run and monitor sack and bag machines	ICPCF298C Run and monitor sack and bag machines	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF298 Run and monitor sack and bag machines

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

demonstrate all safety devices on the machine

maintain throughput of sack or bag machines consistently over a period of time, according to job specifications and unit requirements.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

list common faults associated with sack or bag manufacturing machines, the causes and how to correct them

identify locations of all emergency shutdown buttons and triggers

identify quality standards for jobs.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the converting, binding and finishing field of work and include access to a sack or bag machine, relevant facilities, special purpose tools, equipment and materials.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPCBF300 Run and monitor in-line tube making machine for sack or bag manufacture

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to run, monitor and adjust in-line tube making machines for the manufacture of sacks or bags, including production tasks related to managing waste, resolving issues and monitoring defects.

It applies to individuals who assist in the preparation and operation of sack and bag equipment. They generally work under supervision but have some responsibility in maintaining the production process and ensuring quality output.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Pre-requisite Unit

ICPCBF298	Run and monitor sack and bag machines

Unit Sector

Converting, Binding and Finishing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Monitor throughput	1.1 Machine is stepped to ensure scores and folds are in correct position and paper tension is correct 1.2 Guide positions are monitored and adjusted if necessary to ensure adhesive is applied evenly and in the correct position 1.3 Multi-walls adhere correctly and without creasing 1.4 Paper moisture is monitored and correct moisture levels are maintained 1.5 Perforation occurs to the correct depth and in the right place 1.6 Creasing units and folding units work in the correct location 1.7 Folds and guillotine cuts are correctly placed 1.8 Glues dry at correct rates for in-line processes 1.9 All units run at the speed required by enterprise quality standards
2. Confirm quality of output	2.1 Sample from the machine is selected and checked to ensure it conforms to required quality standards 2.2 Adjustments are made when standards are not met 2.3 Each in-line process is monitored and minor adjustments are made during production, if required 2.4 Samples are continuously monitored for defects, and defects are removed 2.5 Efficiency, quality and output rate of the production run are monitored for problems, and any deficiencies resolved 2.6 Wastage is monitored, kept to a minimum and correctly disposed of according to enterprise quality standards
3. Rectify quality of output	3.1 Faults which affect quality of sacks or bags are identified and rectified 3.2 Problems that reduce output rate are identified and fixed 3.3 Faults that affect efficient operation of equipment are identified and resolved

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.9, 2.1, 2.6	Interprets textual information and establishes requirements to ensure tasks are completed in accordance with required standards
Navigate the world of work	1.9, 2.1, 2.6	Complies with legislative requirements and follows organisational policies and procedures relevant to own role
Get the work done	1.1, 1.2, 1.4-1.9, 2.1-2.6, 3.1-3.3	Plans, identifies and assembles resources required to complete tasks Sequences and schedules activities required to complete tasks and monitors implementation making adjustments as necessary Responds to predictable problems and implements standard or logical solutions as required by job role

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPCBF300 Run and monitor in-line tube making machine for sack or bag manufacture	ICPCF3100C Run and monitor in-line tube making machine for sack or bag manufacture	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF300 Run and monitor in-line tube making machine for sack or bag manufacture

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

run and monitor in-line tube making machines to job pecifications and enterprise quality standards for the manufacture of sacks or bags

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

identify common faults associated with in-line tubing machines, and explain their causes and how to correct

explain different types of adhesive and their drying time

explain the procedure for quality checks

identify enterprise documentation procedures, enterprise quality standards and enterprise faults procedures relevant to this task, where they are kept, and the information included in them.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the converting, binding and finishing field of work and include access to an in-line scoring, folding and gluing machine used in the manufacture of sacks and bags.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPCBF301 Run and monitor in-line bottom making machine for sack or bag manufacture

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to operate and monitor an in-line bottom making machine for the manufacture of sacks or bags with minimum downtime.

This unit applies to skilled operators working in the sacks and bags area in the printing industry who may have to solve problems, provide leadership and guidance to others, and who have some limited responsibility for the output of others.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Pre-requisite Unit

ICPCBF298	Run and monitor sack and bag machines

Unit Sector

Converting, Binding and Finishing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Monitor production process	1.1 Details required for the job are checked and confirmed against job specifications 1.2 Supply of materials throughout the run is maintained 1.3 Paper tension is monitored on an ongoing basis 1.4 Machine is run at optimum speed for maintaining quality of output 1.5 Machine is adjusted to maintain quality of output
2. Monitor production	2.1 Correct perforation alignment is maintained 2.2 Pick-up rollers are working correctly and pressure and timing are maintained 2.3 Glue patch applicator or glue impression roller remains clear and dispenses required amount of glue 2.4 Doctor blades and hot melt unit are operating correctly 2.5 Timing between all units is maintained or adjusted to avoid production problems 2.6 Overall production is monitored and adjustments made to avoid production problems and improve production speeds
3. Maintain quality	3.1 Correct procedures for removal of waste are followed according to enterprise procedures 3.2 Samples are continuously monitored for defects, and defects are removed 3.3 Efficiency, quality and output rate of production run are monitored for problems, and any deficiencies resolved 3.4 Locations of all emergency shutdown buttons and triggers are known
4. Identify problems and rectify	4.1 Faults which affect quality of the sacks or bags are identified and rectified 4.2 Problems that reduce rate of output are identified and fixed 4.3 Faults that affect efficient operation of equipment are identified and resolved

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1	Interprets textual information to establish and check job requirements and to aid planning process
Navigate the world of work	3.1, 3.4	Recognises and follows legislative and organisational procedures for production processes in relation to own role
Get the work done	1.1-1.5, 2.1-2.6, 3.1-3.3, 4.1-4.3	Plans, identifies and assembles resources required to complete tasks Sequences and schedules activities required to complete tasks and monitors implementation, making adjustments as necessary Identifies and responds to predictable problems and implements standard or logical solutions as required by job role

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPCBF301 Run and monitor in-line bottom making machine for sack or bag manufacture	ICPCF3101C Run and monitor in-line bottom making machine for sack or bag manufacture	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF301 Run and monitor in-line bottom making machine for sack or bag manufacture

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

correctly operate an in-line bottom making machine for the manufacture of sacks or bags according to job specifications and enterprise procedures

ability to anticipate, identify and rectify production problems with minimum downtime.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

identify common faults associated with setting up in-line scoring, folding and gluing machines, and how to correct them

explain procedures for quality assurance

explain enterprise documentation procedures including quality standards, production standards and faults procedures.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the converting, binding and finishing field of work and include access to an in-line bottom-making machine for sack or bag manufacture.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPCBF302 Set up and monitor in-line scoring, folding and gluing machine for sack or bag manufacture

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to set up, monitor and adjust in-line scoring, folding and gluing machines and materials used in the manufacture of sacks or bags.

It applies to individuals who work under direct supervision with limited responsibility for maintaining the production process and ensuring output is in accordance with quality standards.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Pre-requisite Unit

ICPCBF298	Run and monitor sack and bag machines

Unit Sector

Converting, Binding and Finishing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Set up and adjust units	1.1 All details required for the job are checked and confirmed against job specifications 1.2 Correct materials and tools are checked and available for the job 1.3 Adhesives are appropriate for the substrate, application process and machine 1.4 Work area is safe and ready for production according to safety requirements 1.5 Blades are sharp and fitted as necessary and units are calibrated according to job specifications 1.6 Settings are checked against job specifications before production is commenced 1.7 Machine is stepped to ensure scores and folds are in correct position and paper tension is corrected/adjusted
2. Monitor throughput	2.1 Once settings are fixed, unit is run at speed required to produce a quality product 2.2 Machine is monitored to ensure scores and folds are in correct position and paper tension is correct 2.3 Guide positions are monitored to ensure adhesive is applied evenly and in correct position 2.4 Paper moisture is monitored and correct moisture levels are maintained 2.5 Folds and guillotine cuts are correctly placed 2.6 Glues dry at correct rates for substrate and adequate fibre tears are visible
3. Confirm quality of output	3.1 Sample from the machine is selected and checked to ensure it conforms to required quality standards 3.2 Adjustments are made when standards are not met 3.3 Each in-line process is monitored and minor adjustments are made during production, as necessary 3.4 Samples are continuously monitored for defects, and defects are removed 3.5 Efficiency, quality and output rate of production run are monitored for problems, and any deficiencies resolved 3.6 Wastage is monitored, kept to a minimum and correctly disposed of according to enterprise quality standards 3.7 Locations of all emergency shutdown buttons and triggers are known

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 1.5, 1.6	Interprets textual information to establish and check job requirements and to aid planning process
Navigate the world of work	1.4, 3.1, 3.6, 3.7	Recognises and follows legislative and organisational procedures for production processes in relation to own role
Get the work done	1.1-1.7, 2.1-2.6, 3.1-3.6	Sequences and schedules activities required to complete tasks and monitors implementation, making adjustments as necessary Plans, identifies and assembles resources required to complete tasks

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPCBF302 Set up and monitor in-line scoring, folding and gluing machine for sack or bag manufacture	ICPCF3102C Set up and monitor in-line scoring, folding and gluing machine for sack or bag manufacture	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF302 Set up and monitor in-line scoring, folding and gluing machine for sack or bag manufacture

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

set up and monitor in-line scoring, folding and gluing machines used in the manufacture of sacks or bags according to job specifications and within the production timeframe.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

explain common faults associated with in-line scoring, folding and gluing machines, the causes, and how to correct

identify enterprise quality standards relevant to this task

explain different types of adhesive and their drying time

explain correct procedure for maintenance of blades.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the converting, binding and finishing field of work and include access to special purpose tools, materials and equipment such as an in-line scoring, folding and gluing machine used in the manufacture of sacks and bags.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPCBF303 Run and monitor envelope manufacturing machines

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to run, monitor and adjust envelope manufacturing machines and maintain the production process.

It applies to individuals who work under direct supervision with limited responsibility for ensuring output is in accordance with quality standards and issues are resolved with minimum downtime.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Converting, Binding and Finishing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Monitor production process	1.1 All details required for the job are checked and confirmed against job specifications 1.2 Correct materials and tools are checked and available for the job 1.3 Supply of materials throughout run is maintained 1.4 Work area is safe and ready for production according to safety requirements 1.5 Machine is run at optimum speed for maintaining quality output 1.6 Samples from the machine are selected and checked to ensure they conform with required quality standards 1.7 Machines are adjusted to maintain quality of output
2. Maintain quality	2.1 Correct procedures for removal of waste are followed according to enterprise procedures 2.2 Samples are continuously monitored for defects, and defects are removed 2.3 Efficiency, quality and output rate of production run are monitored for problems, and any deficiencies resolved 2.4 Locations of all emergency shutdown buttons and triggers are known
3. Identify problems	3.1 Faults which affect quality of envelopes are identified and rectified 3.2 Problems that reduce rate of output are identified and fixed 3.3 Faults that affect efficient operation of equipment are identified and resolved

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1	Interprets textual information to establish and check job requirements and to aid planning process
Navigate the world of work	1.4, 1.6, 2.1, 2.4	Complies with legislative requirements and follows organisational policies and procedures relevant to own role
Get the work done	1.1-1.7, 2.1-2.3, 3.1-3.3	Sequences and schedules activities required to complete tasks and monitors implementation, making adjustments as necessary Plans, identifies and assembles resources required to complete tasks Responds to predictable problems and implements standard or logical solutions related to own role in immediate work environment

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPCBF303 Run and monitor envelope manufacturing machines	ICPCF3103C Run and monitor envelope manufacturing machines	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF303 Run and monitor envelope manufacturing machines

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

demonstrate how to maintain throughput of envelope manufacturing machines consistently, according to job specifications, safety requirements and quality standards

locate and operate all safety devices on the machine.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

explain common faults associated with envelope manufacturing machines, the causes and how to correct

identify enterprise quality standards, documentation procedures and fault procedures relevant to this task, where they are kept, and the information included in them.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the converting, binding and finishing field of work and include access to special purpose tools, materials and equipment used to manufacture envelopes.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPCBF305 Produce single-faced web

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to produce a single-faced web for corrugated board manufacture, including inspecting and maintaining production quality, and identifying and rectifying problems.

It applies to individuals who generally work under direct supervision and perform a range of mainly routine tasks such as maintaining, cleaning and shutting down machinery and equipment.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Converting, Binding and Finishing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Inspect and adjust quality	1.1 Inspection and/or testing of sample is organised 1.2 Sample is visually inspected and/or tested according to enterprise procedures 1.3 Results are interpreted to determine adjustment requirements 1.4 Adjustments are carried out according to product and machine specifications
2. Maintain operation of reel transportation system	2.1 Reel stand is monitored and adjusted to ensure efficient continuous operation 2.2 Web control system is monitored and adjusted to ensure correct tension and accurate continuous positioning of the web and efficient operation 2.3 Substrate is added to the process according to job specifications
3. Maintain single facing process	3.1 Starch delivery system is monitored and adjusted to suit corrugating process and according to job specifications 3.2 Heat delivery system is monitored and adjusted to suit corrugating process and according to job specifications 3.3 Steam delivery system is monitored and adjusted to suit corrugating process and according to job specifications 3.4 Corrugating roll and pressure rolls are monitored and adjusted to suit corrugating process and according to job specifications 3.5 Speed of machine is optimised according to running conditions 3.6 Appropriate quantity of paper is run with a minimum of wastage
4. Maintain in-line process(es)	4.1 Coating units are monitored and adjusted to suit corrugating process and according to job specifications 4.2 Waxing units are monitored and adjusted to suit corrugating process and according to job specifications 4.3 Slitters are monitored and adjusted according to job specifications 4.4 Cut-off knife is monitored and adjusted according to job specifications
5. Synchronise machine operation	5.1 Machine down-time is minimised during flute, grade or deckle changes 5.2 Quality of board is maintained according to enterprise procedures or client acceptance standard 5.3 Machine speed is optimised and waste minimised
6. Maintain production process	6.1 Production process is operated in association with fellow workers and according to enterprise procedures and planned daily schedule 6.2 Production is maintained according to Work Health and Safety (WHS) requirements, manufacturer’s specifications and enterprise procedures 6.3 Manual and/or automatic control is used according to job specifications 6.4 Performance is monitored and verified using the process control system according to enterprise procedures 6.5 Starch performance is monitored and adjusted throughout production run 6.6 Quality checks are carried out on a regular basis and adjustments made as necessary
7. Identify and rectify problems	7.1 Production difficulties are anticipated and preventive action is taken to prevent occurrence by timely intervention 7.2 Process adjustments to eliminate problems are reported according to enterprise procedures 7.3 Faulty performance of equipment is identified and reported according to enterprise procedures 7.4 Waste is sorted according to enterprise procedures 7.5 Problems in corrugator operation are identified and reported according to enterprise procedures 7.6 Adjustments or corrections are carried out according to specified procedures and are consistent with operator’s skill level 7.7 Corrugator operation is checked to ensure correct operation
8. Conduct shutdown of production process	8.1 Correct shutdown sequence is followed according to manufacturer’s specifications and enterprise procedures 8.2 Shutdown is conducted in association with fellow workers and in compliance with WHS requirements 8.3 Solid and liquid waste is removed from operating area and recycled or disposed of, where required, according to regulatory requirements and enterprise procedures 8.4 All product is removed from operating area 8.5 Machine faults requiring repair are identified and reported to designated person according to enterprise procedures 8.6 Repair/adjustment is verified prior to resumption of operations
9. Clean and wash up	9.1 In-line wax and coating units are cleaned ready for next run 9.2 Starch delivery system is washed ready for next run and liquid waste is disposed of according to regulatory requirements and enterprise procedures 9.3 Reel feed and transportation systems are disengaged and cleaned ready for next run 9.4 Production records or other documentation are accurately completed where required by enterprise procedures

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.4, 2.3, 3.1-3.4, 4.1-4.4, 6.2, 6.3, 8.1	Recognises and evaluates text to establish job requirements from information contained within relevant systems
Writing	7.2, 7.3, 7.5, 8.5, 9.4	Uses clear and specific language to record problems and document other information according to enterprise procedures
Oral Communication	6.1, 7.2, 7.3, 7.5, 8.2, 8.5	Participates effectively in spoken interactions to report issues or to confirm or clarify requirements
Navigate the world of work	1.2, 6.1, 6.2, 6.4, 6.6, 7.2-7.6, 8.1-8.3, 8.5, 9.1-9.4	Complies with legislative requirements and follows organisational policies and procedures relevant to own role
Interact with others	6.1, 7.2, 7.3, 7.5, 8.2, 8.5	Cooperates with others as part of familiar routine activities, and contributes to specific activities requiring joint responsibility and accountability Follows accepted practices and protocols for reporting issues to supervisors
Get the work done	1.1-1.4, 2.1-2.3, 3.1-3.6, 4.1-4.4, 6.1- 6.6, 7.1, 7.4, 7.6, 7.7, 8.1-8.4, 8.6, 9.4	Sequences and schedules activities required to complete tasks and monitors implementation making adjustments as necessary Plans, identifies and assembles resources required to complete tasks Recognises and anticipates an increasing range of familiar problems, actively looking for early warning signs and implementing contingency plans Follows routine procedures for using digital technology by reading data from electronic monitoring and control systems

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPCBF305 Produce single-faced web	ICPCF3105C Produce single-faced web	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF305 Produce single-faced web

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

perform at least TWO runs on the single-facer to produce TWO different types of single-faced web for corrugated board manufacture, according to manufacturer’s and job specifications and enterprise procedures including inspecting the quality of the product and identifying and rectifying problems.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

explain significant work health and safety risks workers face when producing single-faced web, and measures employed to prevent injury and/or illness

identify principle support systems on line to the corrugating machine and describe how the operator can effectively control and monitor these systems

explain which sections of the single-facer have higher potential for operational problems during the run

describe product faults commonly found during production runs and explain how can they be corrected

describe how settings are monitored and adjusted during the run to cater for the following: in-feed, web alignment control, pre-conditioners, adhesive application, corrugation, single-facer, steam delivery, heating of web and speed

identify which product factors can be monitored visually/manually, and explain how these can be adjusted to respond to problems found by staff operating end stages of the corrugator machine

explain functions that must be attended to for the wash-up and shutdown of the single-facer if it will be idle for two or more days

identify machine manuals, safety and other documentation relevant to the task, where they are kept, and the information contained in them.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the converting, binding and finishing field of work and include access to and use of special purpose tools, materials and equipment including an in-line corrugating machine.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPCBF306 Set up machine for basic carton folding and gluing

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to set up and adjust a machine for basic carton folding and gluing to ensure the finished product is in accordance with specifications and requirements.

It applies to individuals who work under direct supervision but have limited responsibility with preparing materials, equipment and machinery to ensure the production process is maintained.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Converting, Binding and Finishing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Set up carton blank transportation system	1.1 Feeder is set up and adjusted according to job specifications 1.2 Carton blank pick-up and transportation system is set up and adjusted according to job specifications 1.3 Transfer systems are set up and adjusted according to job specifications
2. Set up carton delivery system	2.1 Delivery is set up and adjusted according to job specifications 2.2 Substrate is removed from process according to job specifications
3. Set up machine for basic folding and gluing (single/continuous)	3.1 Folding units are set up and adjusted according to job specifications 3.2 Folding rollers/belts/rails are set up and adjusted according to job specifications 3.3 Gluing system is set up and adjusted according to job specifications using either glue wheel or one glue head
4. Conduct sample run	4.1 Material to be used for sample is organised correctly 4.2 Machine is set up and operated according to Work Health and Safety (WHS) requirements, manufacturer’s specifications and enterprise procedures to produce a specified sample 4.3 Slitters are monitored and adjusted according to job specifications 4.4 Sample is visually inspected and/or tested for accuracy of folds, fibre tear, opening force, fluff and glue placement according to enterprise procedures
5. Readjust settings	5.1 Results are interpreted to determine adjustment requirements 5.2 Adjustments are carried out according to product and machine specifications

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1-1.3, 2.1, 2.2, 3.1-3.3, 4.2-4.4, 5.2	Recognises and interprets text to confirm work requirements from information contained within relevant specifications and enterprise documents
Navigate the world of work	4.2, 4.4	Recognises and follows organisational and legislative requirements associated with own role
Get the work done	1.1-1.3, 2.1-2.2, 3.1-3.3, 4.1-4.4, 5.1, 5.2	Determines priorities and sequences steps involved in clearly defined, familiar tasks Implements actions as per instructions, making slight adjustments if necessary Plans, identifies and assembles resources required to complete tasks

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPCBF306 Set up machine for basic carton folding and gluing	ICPCF3106C Set up machine for basic carton folding and gluing	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF306 Set up machine for basic carton folding and gluing

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

correctly set up a machine, on at least FOUR occasions, for basic straight line folding and gluing of cartons with different weights and sizes of carton board according to manufacturer’s and job specifications and enterprise procedures.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

explain information concerning folding requirements found in the job documentation or production control system

explain work health and safety factors for:

setting up folder transportation and delivery systems

setting up and/or adjusting the folding unit

adjusting the inkjet printer

working with hot melt adhesives

describe areas of the sheet-fed transportation system to monitor to ensure trouble-free operation

identify areas of the delivery system to observe to prevent damage to the finished product

describe ways that folded sheets can be secured for dispatch

explain causes of scratching/scuffing of substrate during transportation

describe what determines speed of the machine

give a detailed account of problems to expect if the machine is running too fast

demonstrate how roller pressures can be checked for correctness

explain adjustments to make if the sheet is out-of-square

provide possible reasons for the sheet being out-of-square

describe what adjustments to make to ensure sheets are not smudging/scuffing

recommend adjustments to make if the sheet does not leave the folding unit

list steps to ensure correct alignment of the inkjet printer

explain adjustments to make to keep units correctly positioned

explain what determines the correct binding technique for a job

describe methods of adhesive metering present on the machine

explain why it is important to take care to ensure a neat and clean adhesive binding job

identify segments of quality assurance to inspect at the completion of the sample run

recommend communication actions to take if the job is out-of-square, if the ink is too wet for production, or if the job does not conform to quality assurance checks

identify machine manuals and safety documentation relevant to this task, where they are kept, and the information included in them.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the converting, binding and finishing field of work and include access to and use of special purpose tools, materials and equipment including a Royal 40, a Bobst Media, or a Bobst Domino machine.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPCBF307 Produce double-faced web

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to safely operate, adjust, monitor and shut down equipment and machinery used to produce double-faced web for corrugated board manufacture.

It applies to performing tasks such as monitoring machinery operations, dealing with routine problems and reporting production and machinery faults.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Converting, Binding and Finishing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Inspect and adjust quality	1.1 Inspection and/or testing of sample is organised 1.2 Sample is visually inspected and/or tested according to enterprise procedures 1.3 Results are interpreted to determine adjustment requirements 1.4 Adjustments are carried out according to product and machine specifications
2. Maintain operation of reel transportation system	2.1 Reel stand is monitored and adjusted to ensure efficient continuous operation 2.2 Web control system is monitored and adjusted to ensure correct tension and accurate continuous positioning of the web and efficient operation 2.3 Substrate is added to the process according to job specifications
3. Maintain double-facing process	3.1 Starch delivery system is monitored and adjusted to suit corrugating process and according to job specifications 3.2 Heat delivery system is monitored and adjusted to suit corrugating process and according to job specifications 3.3 Speed of machine is optimised according to running conditions 3.4 Appropriate quantity of paper is run
4. Maintain in-line process(es)	4.1 Waxing units are monitored and adjusted to suit corrugating process and according to job specifications 4.2 Coating units are monitored and adjusted to suit corrugating process and according to job specifications 4.3 Tape dispensing units are monitored and adjusted to suit corrugating process and according to job specifications 4.4 Slitters are monitored and adjusted according to job specifications 4.5 Cut-off knife is monitored and adjusted according to job specifications
5. Synchronise machine operation	5.1 Machine downtime is minimised during flute, grade or deckle changes 5.2 Quality of board is maintained according to enterprise procedures or client acceptance standard 5.3 Machine speed is optimised and waste minimised
6. Maintain production process	6.1 Production process is operated in association with fellow workers and according to enterprise procedures and planned daily schedule 6.2 Production is maintained according to Work Health and Safety (WHS) requirements, manufacturer’s specifications and enterprise procedures 6.3 Manual and/or automatic control is used according to job specifications 6.4 Performance is monitored and verified using the process control system according to enterprise procedures 6.5 Starch performance is monitored and adjusted throughout production run 6.6 Production difficulties are anticipated and preventive action is taken to prevent occurrence by timely intervention 6.7 Process adjustments to eliminate problems are reported according to enterprise procedures 6.8 Faulty performance of equipment is identified and reported according to enterprise procedures 6.9 Waste is sorted according to enterprise procedures 6.10 Quality checks of product are undertaken on a regular basis and adjustments made as required
7. Identify and rectify problems	7.1 Problems in corrugator operation are identified and reported according to enterprise procedures 7.2 Adjustments or corrections are carried out according to specified procedures and are consistent with operator’s skill level 7.3 Corrugator operation is checked to ensure correct operation
8. Conduct shutdown of production process	8.1 Correct shutdown sequence is followed according to manufacturer’s specifications and enterprise procedures 8.2 Shutdown is conducted in association with fellow workers and in compliance with WHS requirements 8.3 Solid and liquid waste is removed from operating area and recycled or disposed of, where required, according to regulatory requirements and enterprise procedures 8.4 All product is removed from operating area 8.5 Machine faults requiring repair are identified and reported to designated person according to enterprise procedures 8.6 Repair/adjustment is verified prior to resumption of operations
9. Clean and wash up corrugator at end of run	9.1 In-line wax, coating and tape dispensing units are cleaned ready for next run 9.2 Starch delivery system is washed ready for next run, and liquid waste is disposed of according to regulatory requirements and enterprise procedures 9.3 Reel feed and transportation systems are disengaged and cleaned ready for next run 9.4 Production records or other documentation are accurately completed where required by enterprise procedures

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.4, 2.3, 3.1, 3.2, 4.1-4.5, 6.2, 6.3, 8.1	Recognises and evaluates text to establish job requirements from information contained in procedures or systems
Writing	6.7, 6.8, 8.5, 9.4	Uses clear language to record problems and document other information according to enterprise requirements
Oral Communication	6.1, 6.7, 6.8, 7.1, 8.2, 8.5	Speaks clearly using appropriate vocabulary, tone and pace to report faults and discrepancies Participates effectively in spoken interactions to confirm or clarify requirements
Navigate the world of work	1.2, 5.2, 6.1, 6.2, 6.4, 6.7-6.9, 7.1, 7.2, 8.1, 8.3, 8.5, 9.1-9.4	Recognises and follows all procedures for operation and maintenance of equipment, incorporating regulatory requirements, enterprise procedures or client standards
Interact with others	6.1, 6.7, 6.8, 7.1, 8.2, 8.5	Cooperates with others as part of familiar routine activities, and contributes to specific activities requiring joint responsibility and accountability Understands what to communicate, with whom and how, in routine work situations
Get the work done	1.1-1.4, 2.1-2.3, 3.1-3.4, 4.1-4.5, 5.1-5.3, 6.2-6.6, 6.9, 6.10, 7.1-7.3, 8.1-8.6, 9.4	Determines priorities and sequences steps involved in clearly defined, familiar tasks Plans, identifies and assembles resources required to complete tasks Recognises and anticipates an increasing range of familiar problems, their symptoms and causes, actively looking for early warning signs and implementing contingency plans Follows routine procedures for using digital technology by reading data from electronic monitoring and control systems

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPCBF307 Produce double-faced web	ICPCF3107C Produce double-faced web	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF307 Produce double-faced web

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

correctly and safely perform at least TWO runs on the double backer machine to produce TWO different types/classes of product, according to manufacturer’s and job specifications and enterprise procedures

monitor operations and adjust equipment and machinery as required to ensure production quality

accurately complete relevant enterprise production records/reports when producing double-faced web.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

identify significant work health and safety risks to workers operating machinery and undertaking this activity

identify measures employed to prevent injury and/or illness in the case of the risks identified previously

identify principle support systems on line to the corrugating machine

explain how support systems are used to effectively control and monitor the corrugator

identify sections of the double backer with the highest potential for operational problems during the run

describe product faults commonly found during production runs, and how they can be corrected

describe how settings for the following factors are monitored and adjusted during the run: in-feed, web alignment control, adhesive application, double backer, steam delivery, heating of web and speed

identify product factors monitored visually/manually by staff operating end stages of the corrugator machine

outline adjustments to make in response to problems found by staff operating end stages of the corrugator machine

identify functions that must be attended to during wash-up and shutdown of the machine if it will be idle for two or more days

identify key information contained in machine manuals, safety and other documentation relevant to producing double-faced web, and where they are kept.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the Converting, Binding and Finishing field of work and include access to and use of special purpose tools, equipment (including in-line double back corrugating equipment) and materials used to produce double-faced web.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPCBF309 Produce complex folded and glued cartons

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to produce complex folded and glued products while maintaining the production process and machinery operation.

It applies to individuals who work under direct supervision with limited responsibility in preparing materials and equipment and resolving issues to produce a finished product.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Converting, Binding and Finishing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Maintain operation of carton blank system	1.1 Feeder is monitored and adjusted to ensure continuous and efficient feeding to machine 1.2 Carton blank pick-up and transportation system is monitored and adjusted to ensure accurate and continuous sheet handling and efficient operation 1.3 Transfer systems are monitored and adjusted to ensure correct and continuous carton blank handling and efficient operation 1.4 Substrate is added to process according to job specifications 1.5 Delivery is monitored and adjusted to ensure quality and efficient product delivery
2. Maintain complex carton folding and gluing process	2.1 Registration and accuracy of folds are monitored and adjusted to ensure product quality meets the approved sample standard 2.2 Gluing process is monitored and adjusted to ensure accuracy of glue application and strength of adhesion conforms to quality standards
3. Maintain operation of production process	3.1 Production process is operated in association with fellow workers and according to enterprise specifications and planned daily schedule 3.2 Production is maintained according to work health and safety requirements, manufacturer’s specifications and enterprise procedures 3.3 Performance is monitored and verified using the process control system according to enterprise procedures 3.4 Production difficulties are anticipated and preventive action is taken to prevent occurrence by timely intervention 3.5 Process adjustments to eliminate problems are reported according to enterprise procedures 3.6 Faulty performance of equipment is identified and reported according to enterprise procedures 3.7 Waste is sorted according to enterprise procedures
4. Identify and rectify problems	4.1 Problems in folding and gluing machine operation are identified and reported according to enterprise requirements 4.2 Adjustments or corrections are carried out according to specified procedures and consistent with operator’s skill level 4.3 Complex folding/gluing machine operation is checked to ensure correct operation
5. Conduct shutdown of production process	5.1 Correct shutdown sequence is followed according to manufacturer’s specifications and enterprise procedures 5.2 Shutdown is conducted in association with fellow workers and in compliance with WHS requirements 5.3 Waste is removed from operating area and recycled or disposed of, where required, according to regulatory requirements and enterprise procedures 5.4 Machine faults requiring repair are identified and reported to designated person, according to enterprise procedures 5.5 Repair/adjustment is verified prior to resumption of operations
6. Clean folding/gluing machine at end of run	6.1 Folding unit is cleaned ready for next run 6.2 Gluing unit is disengaged and cleaned ready for next run 6.3 Transport and delivery systems are cleaned ready for next run 6.4 Production records or other documentation are accurately completed where required by enterprise procedures

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.4, 2.2, 3.1-3.3, 3.5-3.7, 4.1, 4.2, 5.1, 5.3, 5.4, 6.4	Recognises and interprets text to confirm work requirements from information contained within relevant procedures and specifications
Writing	3.5, 3.6, 4.1, 5.4, 6.4	Enters routine data associated with production processes and enterprise procedures
Oral Communication	3.1, 3.5, 3.6, 4.1, 5.2, 5.4	Speaks clearly using appropriate vocabulary, tone and pace to report faults and discrepancies Participates effectively in spoken interactions to confirm or clarify
Navigate the world of work	2.1, 2.2, 3.1-3.3, 3.5-3.7, 4.1, 4.2, 5.1-5.4, 6.1-6.4	Recognises and follows all procedures for operation and maintenance of equipment, incorporating regulatory requirements and enterprise procedures
Interact with others	3.1, 3.5, 3.6, 4.1, 5.2, 5.4	Cooperates with others as part of familiar routine activities, and contributes to specific activities requiring joint responsibility and accountability Understands what to communicate, with whom and how, in routine work situations
Get the work done	1.1-1.5, 2.1, 2.2, 3.1-3.4, 3.6, 3.7, 4.1-4.3, 5.1-5.5, 6.4	Determines priorities and sequences steps involved in clearly defined, familiar tasks Recognises and anticipates an increasing range of familiar problems, their symptoms and causes; actively looking for early warning signs and implementing contingency plans Follows routine procedures for using digital technology by reading data from electronic monitoring and control systems

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPCBF309 Produce complex folded and glued cartons	ICPCF3109C Produce complex folded and glued cartons	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF309 Produce complex folded and glued cartons

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

complete THREE crashlock, six-corner and specialty work carton jobs, with different sizes and weights of carton board, using multiple gluing units, according to manufacturer’s and job specifications and enterprise procedures on either a Royal 40, a Bobst Media or Bobst Domino.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

explain work health and safety factors for:

setting and/or operating folder/gluer transport and delivery systems

adjusting/correcting the machine

cleaning the machine

identify areas of the feeder to monitor to ensure trouble-free operation

identify parts of the pick-up system to adjust to ensure accurate and continuous feeding

explain which areas of the delivery system to observe to prevent damage to the finished product

describe areas to observe continually to ensure smooth, trouble-free operation of the machine

explain areas of the gluing unit to monitor continuously

list causes of incorrect folding, and explain how each can be corrected

identify segments of quality assurance inspected at sample run completion

describe action to take if adhesive viscosity in gluing unit is too low/high

explain how application of glue is adjusted

identify areas of the machine to adjust if:

sheets are not neatly entering delivery

carton blanks are creasing

carton blanks are not entering the machine

explain checks to correctly shut down the machine

describe checks to make when preparing finished work for dispatch

identify areas of the machine to clean regularly, and materials to clean from the machine

explain how to keep the machine clear of surface rust (condensation)

identify recommended cleaning agents

identify production records to keep or write-up, and information to include

explain quality aspects to consider in a completed folded carton

list steps to ensure important features of the production control system are followed

explain how production needs to be altered to meet client requirements

list items to check against the client sample

identify machine manuals, safety and other documentation relevant to this task, where they are kept, and the information included in them.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the converting, binding and finishing field of work and include access to and use of special purpose tools, equipment and materials used to produce folded and glued cartons.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPCBF311 Prepare for cutting forme and stripper making

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to prepare for making cutting formes and strippers.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Converting, Binding and Finishing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Prepare for die and stripper making	1.1 Die and stripper making requirements are identified and selected from die drawing or inspection 1.2 Availability of all job related components is checked 1.3 Materials chosen are appropriate for cutting forme design and the machine cutting forme/stripper they are to be used on
2. Prepare materials	2.1 Cutting forme/stripper making materials are assessed and cut to size 2.2 Cutting forme/stripper making materials are correct size for production requirements 2.3 Stripper backing material is correct size for production requirements 2.4 Product design is drawn onto cutting forme blank to match cutting forme design 2.5 Drawing is in register on cutting forme blank 2.6 Drawing is in register on stripper backing material
3. Prepare lay down sheet and cutting forme tracing	3.1 Lay down sheet and cutting forme tracing are glued correctly onto cutting forme blank 3.2 Lay down sheet is in register on cutting forme blank 3.3 Cutting forme tracing matches product design
4. Design location of bridges, stripping rule and mounting holes	4.1 Cutting forme maintains required strength 4.2 Waste is cut to suit waste extraction system 4.3 Mounting holes register with holes in cutting forme blank

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 3.3	Recognises and evaluates text to establish job requirements from information contained within relevant systems
Numeracy	2.1-2.3	Identifies and comprehends relevant mathematical information in familiar diagrams and text
Get the work done	1.1-1.3, 2.1-2.6, 3.1-3.3, 4.1-4.3	Takes responsibility for planning and organising own workload, identifying ways of sequencing and combining elements for greater efficiency Plans, identifies and assembles resources required to complete tasks Responds to predictable problems and implements standard or logical solutions Follows routine procedures for using digital technology by reading data from electronic monitoring and control systems

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPCBF311 Prepare for cutting forme and stripper making	ICPCF311C Prepare for cutting forme and stripper making	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF311 Prepare for cutting forme and stripper making

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

prepare materials for TWO cutting formes (one large, one small) to accommodate TWO differing typically used substrates, using all relevant processes according to manufacturer’s and job specifications, enterprise procedures and listed performance criteria, within the production timeframe.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

identify work health and safety factors for cutting materials

list names of substrates commonly cut by these cutting formes

determine the impact of different substrates on forme setting

determine the size of the stripper backer material

explain the care to take when drawing design onto blank

ensure correct registration when drawing design onto blank, and when gluing and laying down the cutting forme tracing onto the cutting forme blank

list the factors that determine the:

thickness of stripping rule

position and number of bridges

position and number of mounting holes

identify machine manuals, safety and other documentation relevant to this task, where they are kept, and the information included in them.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the converting, binding and finishing field of work and include access to relevant facilities, special purpose tools, equipment and materials.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPCBF312 Set cutting forme and strippers

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to set and maintain cutting formes and strippers, and proof the forme.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Converting, Binding and Finishing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Cut cutting forme wood	1.1 Bridge holes are accurately drilled 1.2 Saw cuts accurately match line drawing on cutting forme blank 1.3 Holes are reinforced and in register with fixing screws 1.4 Knives and creasers are cut and shaped accurately to suit cutting forme
2. Prepare knives, creasers and cutting forme rubbers	2.1 Knives and creasers are set accurately into place on cutting forme blank 2.2 Rubber is located on cutting forme to eject product and waste as required
3. Set stripping material	3.1 Stripping materials are attached securely and accurately to stripper backing material 3.2 Mounting strips are correctly fixed
4. Proof cutting forme	4.1 Sample meets production order specifications 4.2 Cutting forme is adjusted or re-cut if required
5. Maintain cutting forme and stripper	5.1 Correct number is allocated to cutting formes/strippers and recorded as per enterprise procedures 5.2 Cutting forme machine is cleaned according to work health and safety requirements and enterprise procedures 5.3 Problems are accurately described to supervisor or maintenance department 5.4 Status of cutting formes/strippers is reported correctly and without delay to production

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	4.1	Recognises and interprets text and diagrams to establish job requirements from information contained within relevant procedures and specifications
Writing	5.1, 5.4	Records data according to enterprise procedures Uses appropriate vocabulary to report on job status
Oral Communication	5.3, 5.4	Speaks clearly using appropriate vocabulary, tone and pace to report job status or faults to supervisors or colleagues
Numeracy	1.2,	Identifies and comprehends relevant mathematical information in familiar diagrams and text
Navigate the world of work	5.2	Takes personal responsibility for adherence to legal/regulatory and safety responsibilities relevant to own work context
Interact with others	5.3, 5.4	Initiates and contributes to a range of formal and informal conversations relevant to role, responding, explaining, clarifying and expanding on ideas and information immediately
Get the work done	1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 2.1, 2.2, 3.1, 3.2, 4.1, 4.2	Sequences and schedules complex activities and monitors implementation Recognises and anticipates an increasing range of familiar problems, their symptoms and causes

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPCBF312 Set cutting forme and strippers	ICPCF312C Set cutting forme and strippers	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF312 Set cutting forme and strippers

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

correctly prepare TWO cutting formes (one large, one small) to accommodate TWO different, typically used substrates using all relevant processes according to manufacturer’s and job specifications, enterprise procedures and listed performance criteria.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

identify work health and safety factors for:

setting knives

cleaning the machine

list checks made to correctly position bridge holes

explain reinforcing bridge holes

identify checks to ensure saw cuts accurately match the line drawings

list checks made when cutting and shaping knives and creasers

list factors that determine the amount of rubber attached to the forme

list factors that determine positioning of the rubber on the forme

list important items to consider when setting knives and creasers into position on the forme blank

list checks required when attaching stripping materials to stripper backing materials and determine how this is done accurately

explain the purpose of mounting strips

identify areas to proof to ensure the cutting forme meets production order specifications

explain the importance of allocating numbers to each forme, and the accepted method of recording forme allocation numbers

identify areas of the machine that need regular cleaning, materials that need to be cleaned from the machine, and how to keep the machine clear of surface rust (condensation)

list recommended cleaning agents applicable to the cutting forme machine

identify how to record and report machine maintenance problems

identify indicators that the machine is in need of oiling/greasing

explain the importance of monitoring condition of the forme and stripper, and information to record when reporting the condition status

identify machine manuals, safety and other documentation relevant to this task, where they are kept, and the information included in them.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the converting, binding and finishing field of work and include access to relevant facilities, special purpose tools, equipment and materials.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPCBF320 Produce complex converted or finished product

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to cover complex die cutting, embossing, folding, collating or fastening.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Converting, Binding and Finishing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Maintain delivery systems	1.1 Delivery systems are monitored and adjusted to ensure continuous and efficient operation and avoid damage to finished product 1.2 Substrate is added and removed to and from the process according to job specifications
2. Maintain cutting system	2.1 Knife or die condition is monitored and adjusted to ensure product quality meets the approved sample standard 2.2 Cutting pressures are monitored and adjusted to ensure product quality meets the approved sample standard 2.3 Registration of cutting devices and knives or dies are monitored and adjusted to ensure product quality meets the approved sample standard 2.4 Packing of cutting devices or dies is monitored and adjusted to ensure product quality meets the approved sample standard
3. Maintain complex process	3.1 Registration and squareness of folds are monitored and adjusted to ensure product quality meets the approved sample standard, if relevant 3.2 Collating/inserting process is monitored and adjusted to ensure product quality meets the approved sample standard, if relevant
4. Maintain production process	4.1 Production process is operated in association with fellow workers and according to enterprise procedures and planned daily schedule 4.2 Production is maintained according to work health and safety (WHS) requirements, manufacturer’s specifications and enterprise procedures 4.3 Manual and/or automatic control is used according to job specifications 4.4 Performance is monitored and verified using the process control system according to enterprise procedures 4.5 Production difficulties are anticipated and preventive action is taken to prevent occurrence by timely intervention 4.6 Process adjustments to eliminate problems are reported according to enterprise procedures 4.7 Faulty performance of equipment is identified and reported according to enterprise procedures 4.8 Waste is sorted according to enterprise procedures
5. Identify and rectify problems or faults	5.1 Product and substrate are monitored and tested to ensure conformance to client requirements 5.2 Problems in converting/finishing machine operation are identified and reported according to enterprise procedures 5.3 Adjustments or corrections are carried out according to specified procedures and manufacturer’s specifications 5.4 Converting/finishing machine operation is checked to ensure correct operation
6. Conduct shutdown of production process	6.1 Correct shutdown sequence is followed according to manufacturer’s specifications and enterprise procedures 6.2 Shutdown is conducted in association with fellow workers and in compliance with WHS requirements 6.3 Substrate waste is removed from operating area and recycled or disposed of, where required, according to regulatory requirements and enterprise procedures 6.4 Machine faults requiring repair are identified and reported to designated person according to enterprise procedures 6.5 Repair/adjustment is verified prior to resumption of operations
7. Clean converting/finishing machine at end of run	7.1 Cutting devices and knives or dies are cleaned or replaced ready for next run 7.2 Cutting devices are sharpened according to WHS procedures 7.3 All units are disengaged and cleaned ready for next run 7.4 Delivery systems are disengaged and cleaned ready for next run 7.5 Production records or other documentation are accurately completed where required by enterprise procedures

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	4.2-4.4, 5.3, 6.1	Recognises and interprets text to establish job requirements from information contained within relevant procedures and specifications
Writing	4.6, 4.7, 5.2, 6.4, 7.5	Enters routine data associated with production processes and enterprise procedures
Oral Communication	4.1, 4.7, 5.2, 6.2, 6.4	Speaks clearly using appropriate vocabulary, tone and pace to report faults and discrepancies Participates effectively in spoken interactions to confirm or clarify requirements
Navigate the world of work	2.1-2.4, 3.1, 3.2, 4.1, 4.2, 4.4, 4.6-4.8, 5.2, 5.3, 6.1-6.4, 7.1-7.5	Recognises and follows all procedures for operation, cleaning and maintenance of equipment, incorporating regulatory requirements and enterprise procedures
Interact with others	4.1, 4.7, 5.2, 6.2, 6.4	Cooperates with others as part of familiar routine activities, and contributes to specific activities requiring joint responsibility and accountability Understands what to communicate, with whom and how, in routine work situations
Get the work done	1.1, 1.2, 2.1-2.4, 3.1, 3.2, 4.1-4.8, 5.1-5.4, 6.1-6.5, 7.5	Determines priorities and sequences steps involved in clearly defined, familiar tasks Recognises and anticipates an increasing range of familiar problems, their symptoms and causes; actively looking for early warning signs and implementing contingency plans Follows routine procedures for using digital technology by reading data from electronic monitoring and control systems

Range of Conditions

This section specifies different work environments and conditions that may affect performance. Essential operating conditions that may be present (depending on the work situation, needs of the candidate, accessibility of the item, and local industry and regional contexts) are included.

Delivery systems MUST include EITHER:	reel delivery system OR sheet delivery system OR complex fastening (adhesive/mechanical/sewing) system.
Monitoring and adjusting MUST include EITHER:	reel stand and rewind section web control system to ensure correct tension delivery system sheeting system OR feeder sheet pick-up and transportation transfer system to ensure correct and continuous sheet handling OR fastening registration wire straightening, length, cut off and clinching pressures adhesion thread tension and stitch quality.
Units MUST include EITHER:	machine bed OR glue system OR laminating machine.

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPCBF320 Produce complex converted or finished product	ICPCF320C Produce complex converted or finished product	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF320 Produce complex converted or finished product

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

demonstrate all safety devices on the machinery

correctly produce complex converted or finished product involving complex die cutting, embossing, folding, collating or fastening for TWO different jobs involving different types, sizes and weights of substrate according to manufacturer’s and job specifications, enterprise procedures and listed performance criteria.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

individual must:

identify work health and safety (WHS) factors for:

setting up and/or operating machine transport systems

setting up and/or operating machine delivery systems

maintaining the cutting process

using the folding machine

adjusting/correcting the machine, and prior to any required adjustments

maintaining or adjusting the operation of the machine

using hot melt adhesive

cleaning the machine

identify safety clothing available for use when operating adhesive binders

explain how to carry out buckle, knife and pharmaceutical folding

outline the actions required if:

the gate fold unit is out of timing

the right angle fold is out-of-square

double sheet feeds occur

identify areas of the machine to adjust if:

the sheet is creasing

the sheet is caught in the fold plate

the sheet is not entering the machine

sheets are not entering delivery neatly

list and describe common machine faults and how to correct them

explain why gluing units and delivery systems require careful monitoring

identify indicators showing replacement of a knife/cutting edge is required

list checks required when cutting pressure is adjusted, and the points to monitor when maintaining cutting pressures

list checks made when:

sections fail to open on the chain

packing cutting devices

correcting dull cutting edges on equipment

correcting depth of embossing

substrate is removed from the machine

explain the terms:

side lay

deflector

glue line

determine segments of quality assurance inspected at the completion of the sample run

determine action if the:

viscosity of adhesive in the gluing unit is too low/high

gluing unit is out of timing

explain solutions when:

job is out-of-square

ink is too wet for production

job does not coincide with the sample

sheet is creasing

sheet is caught in the fold plate

sheet is not entering the machine

sheet falls out of the machine after folding

sheets misfeed during production

‘bruising’ of the NCR sheets occurs

determine factors that govern speed the machine operates at

identify indicators the machine needs lubrication

explain consequence/s of too much or too little adhesive

determine factors indicating:

the machine need to be adjusted

the machine need to be slowed down

when machine speed can be increased

explain how to adjust position and quantity of adhesive on an adhesive binder/gluer

explain how to adjust adhesive thickness and pressure on an adhesive binder/gluer

explain how to achieve more spine milling on an adhesive binder

explain how to straighten or adjust wire in the wire feed on a wire stitcher

explain how to increase/decrease dwell time on a high frequency welder

list checks for shutting down a given machine, and identify the key reasons for the checks

identify materials to clean from the machine

list recommended cleaning agents for this machine and how to keep the machine clear of surface rust

determine quality aspects to monitor during production as well as those to check on the finished product

list steps to ensure important features of the production control system are followed

identify items to check against the client sample

explain required production records and the information to include

identify machine manuals, safety and other documentation relevant to this task, where they are kept, and the information included in them

For Reel Systems Only

identify areas of the reel stand to monitor to ensure trouble-free operation

explain how to adjust the web control system to maintain correct web tension and correct positioning of the web

For Sheet Systems Only

identify areas of the sheet-fed feeder to monitor to ensure trouble-free operation

determine parts of the sheet or section pick-up system to adjust to ensure accurate and continuous sheet handling.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the converting, binding and finishing field of work and include access to relevant facilities, special purpose tools, machinery, equipment and materials.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPCBF321 Set up and produce complex guillotined product

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to complete complex guillotining (including knife changing) involving programmable guillotines and/or complex cutting sequences.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Converting, Binding and Finishing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Prepare job	1.1 Job specifications are read and interpreted from job documentation or production control system 1.2 Set-up is planned and carried out correctly in minimum time with minimum wastage 1.3 Availability of all job related components is checked 1.4 Grip and lay edges of sheet are identified
2. Install and replace cutting knives into machine	2.1 Appropriate knives are selected and safely secured to machine 2.2 Dull knives are removed and bolted securely to protective board 2.3 Cutting sticks are replaced when necessary
3. Set up machine for guillotining	3.1 Guillotine is set up and adjusted according to job specifications 3.2 Clamping pressures are set up and adjusted according to job specifications
4. Conduct sample cut	4.1 Material to be used for sample is organised correctly 4.2 Machine is set up and operated to produce a specified sample according to work health and safety (WHS) requirements, manufacturer’s specifications and enterprise procedures 4.3 Sample is visually inspected and/or tested or laboratory testing is organised according to enterprise procedures 4.4 Results are interpreted to determine adjustment requirements 4.5 Adjustments are carried out according to product and machine specifications
5. Maintain guillotining process	5.1 Knife and cutting stick condition is monitored and adjusted to ensure product quality meets the approved sample standard 5.2 Cutting pressures are monitored and adjusted to ensure product quality meets the approved sample standard 5.3 Registration of knives is monitored and adjusted to ensure product quality meets the approved sample standard
6. Maintain operation of production process	6.1 Production process is operated in association with fellow workers and according to enterprise procedures and planned daily schedule 6.2 Production is maintained according to WHS requirements, manufacturer’s specifications and enterprise procedures 6.3 Manual and/or automatic control is used according to job specifications 6.4 Performance is monitored and verified using the process control system according to enterprise procedures 6.5 Production difficulties are anticipated and preventive action is taken to prevent occurrence by timely intervention 6.6 Process adjustments to eliminate problems are reported according to enterprise procedures 6.7 Faulty performance of equipment is identified and reported according to enterprise procedures 6.8 Waste is sorted according to enterprise procedures
7. Identify and rectify problems and faults	7.1 Problems in guillotining machine operation are identified and reported according to enterprise procedures 7.2 Adjustments or corrections are carried out according to specified procedures and are consistent with operator’s skill level 7.3 Guillotining machine operation is checked to ensure correct operation
8. Conduct shutdown of production process	8.1 Correct shutdown sequence is followed according to manufacturer’s specifications and enterprise procedures 8.2 Shutdown is conducted in association with fellow workers and in compliance WHS requirements 8.3 Substrate waste is removed from operating area and recycled or disposed of, where required, according to regulatory requirements and enterprise procedures 8.4 Machine faults requiring repair are identified and reported to designated person according to enterprise procedures 8.5 Repair/adjustment is verified prior to resumption of operations
9. Clean guillotining machine at end of run	9.1 Knife and machine bed are cleaned ready for next run 9.2 Cutting machine is disengaged and cleaned ready for next run 9.3 Production records or other documentation are accurately completed where required by enterprise procedures

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 3.1, 3.2, 4.2, 4.5, 6.2, 6.3, 8.1, 9.3	Recognises and interprets text to establish job requirements from information contained within relevant procedures and specifications
Writing	6.6, 6.7, 7.1, 8.4	Records information relating to production and machinery problems and completes production reports and other relevant documentation
Oral Communication	6.1, 6.6, 6.7, 8.2, 8.4	Uses appropriate language to adequately report discrepancies and faults to designated person Participates effectively in spoken interactions to confirm or clarify requirements
Navigate the world of work	2.1-2.3, 4.2, 4.3, 5.1-5.3, 6.1, 6.2, 6.4, 6.6-6.8, 7.1-7.3, 8.1-8.4, 9.3	Recognises and follows all procedures for cleaning and maintenance of equipment, incorporating regulatory requirements and enterprise procedures Understands roles and responsibilities for task and makes basic decisions on work completion parameters Takes personal responsibility for adherence to regulatory responsibilities relevant to own work context
Interact with others	6.1, 6.6, 6.7, 8.2, 8.4	Cooperates with others as part of familiar routine activities, and contributes to specific activities requiring joint responsibility and accountability Understands what to communicate, with whom and how, in routine work situations
Get the work done	1.1-1.4, 2.1-2.3, 3.1, 3.2, 4.1-4.5, 5.1-5.3, 6.1-6.5, 6.7, 6.8, 7.1-7.3, 8.1-8.5	Determines priorities and sequences steps involved in clearly defined, familiar tasks and identifies and assembles required resources Recognises and anticipates an increasing range of familiar problems, their symptoms and causes, actively looking for early warning signs and implementing contingency plans

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPCBF321 Set up and produce complex guillotined product	ICPCF321C Set up and produce complex guillotined product	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF321 Set up and produce complex guillotined product

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

correctly set up (including knife change) and produce THREE complex guillotined products (with three different substrates eg paper, strawboard, plastic, book cloth, and both large and small sheets) using a semi-automated or automated electronic guillotine, and setting a complex cutting program according to manufacturer’s and job specifications, enterprise procedures and listed performance criteria

demonstrate all safety devices on the machine

demonstrate use of computerised control, monitoring and data entry systems if available and appropriate.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

identify work health and safety (WHS) factors for:

handling knife blades during the knife change operation

setting up and operating the guillotine for a complex cutting job

checking and adjusting the machine

maintaining the production process

shutting down and/or cleaning the machine

determine information concerning cutting found in the job documentation or production control system, and how to interpret this information to ensure smooth workflow throughout the factory

explain SIX trade terms that may be used in the documentation for complex cutting or guillotine knife change operations

determine elements that must be considered when planning a cutting sequence

identify recommended knife angles for general cutting and the result if the:

knife angle is less than 19 degrees

knife angle is more than 24 degrees

explain the use of a double bevel on a guillotine knife

list factors that indicate a new blade is needed, and the result if a dull blade is used continuously

explain the difference between a sharp knife and a dull knife, and the information to record when a dull knife is replaced

explain when to replace a cutting stick, and the result of not replacing the cutting stick regularly

determine when a knife with a double angle is required

determine forces acting on a guillotine knife

list requirements to choose, and adjust the correct clamping pressure for a given job, and explain the result of the clamp pressure not being appropriate for the stock

identify clamp pressure recommended for:

NCR paper

80gsm offset paper

2400um strawboard

identify the largest and smallest size sheets that can be processed on this machine and the procedures used to complete undersize requirements

determine how to recognise a:

‘work and turn’ job

‘work and twist’ job

‘work and tumble’ job

‘work and back’ job

list problems that can occur when activating the automatic knife, and types of jobs unsuitable for automatic cutting

explain requirements of trimming multi-section books or magazines with bulky spines

determine machine adjustment parameters and the setting that may need to be altered after checks have been made

list FIVE methods for identifying a lay and gripper edge if not marked

identify reporting procedures if the machine malfunctions

explain treatment/disposal of waste from the guillotine area

list ways to mark lay and gripper edges on sheets, and the result if the lay and grip edges are not recognised

determine need to build-up the clamp of a guillotine, and how to ‘pack-up’ the clamp of a guillotine

identify why:

the guillotine knife will not operate when the machine is turned on

a book block may be cut out-of-square

the program not working after it has been entered into the machine

identify parts of the guillotine to check if, after a cut, top sheets are:

longer than the bottom sheets

shorter than the bottom sheets

out-of-square

creasing along the cut line

list checks necessary when the clamp plate is removed and the machine adjusted

explain factors that indicate a need for machine lubrication, and the correct types and methods of lubrication

determine special operations essential when shutting down the machine

identify maintenance procedures to keep the machine in good condition and order, and methods to rid the machine of waste

list recommended cleaning agents to use on the guillotine

identify quality aspects to consider in a completed cutting job

list steps to ensure important features of the production control system are followed

determine items to check against the client sample (including the cutting result) and the steps required if the result does not coincide with the sample produced

determine areas of the finished product to inspect, and any production alterations required to meet client requirements

identify machine manuals, safety and other documentation relevant to this task, where they are kept, and the information included in them.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the converting, binding and finishing field of work and include access to relevant facilities, equipment and materials.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPCBF326 Undertake pre make-ready for die cutting

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to prepare cutting formes (two large and two small) to accommodate different complexities of cutting containing multiple images with extremely tight registration and highly accurate cutting requirements.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Converting, Binding and Finishing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Obtain job instuctions and locate forme	1.1 Job sheets or instructions are interpreted correctly 1.2 Existing formes are located in storage area using filing system and new formes and associated tooling are collected from holding location
2. Check cutting forme	2.1 Cutting forme/tooling is checked against master sample for accuracy of cut and fold 2.2 Centre line is located and checked to ensure accuracy of positioning/registration on Bobst
3. Position and set up counters	3.1 Cutting plate is located and prepared for counters 3.2 Counters are accurately positioned and set up on cutting plate to ensure registration with cutting forme
4. Conduct sample cut	4.1 Material to be used for sample cut is obtained 4.2 Cutting forme and cutting plate are accurately positioned on machine 4.3 Machine is operated to produce sample according to enterprise procedures
5. Check sample	5.1 Sample is accurately cut and registration of tooling is precise 5.2 Forme or tooling is adjusted if necessary, according to job specifications 5.3 Sample is confirmed as correct by supervisor if required
6. Set up stripping forme and blank separator	6.1 Pins are positioned on stripping forme to ensure accurate removal of waste board 6.2 Blank separator is set up according to job specifications
7. Undertake filing procedure	7.1 Correct identification number is allocated to cutting formes/tooling and strippers, and recorded 7.2 Information is correctly entered into filing system according to enterprise procedures

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 1.2, 5.2, 6.2, 7.2	Recognises and interprets text to establish job requirements from information in relevant procedures and specifications
Writing	7.1, 7.2	Gathers information from a range of sources to record using headings, instructions and layout to meet needs of audience and purpose of text
Navigate the world of work	4.3, 7.2	Recognises and follows organisational policies and procedures relevant to own role
Get the work done	1.1, 1.2, 2.1, 2.2, 3.2, 4.1-4.3, 5.1, 5.2, 6.1, 6.2, 7.2	Plans, identifies and assembles resources required to complete tasks Implements actions as per plan, making accurate adjustments as necessary Takes responsibility for planning and organising own workload, identifying ways of sequencing and combining elements for greater efficiency

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPCBF326 Undertake pre make-ready for die cutting	ICPCF326C Undertake pre make-ready for die cutting	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF326 Undertake pre make-ready for die cutting

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

prepare FOUR cutting formes (two large and two small) to accommodate TWO different complexities of cutting (at least one must contain multiple images with extremely tight registration and highly accurate cutting requirements)

demonstrate accurate attachment of stripper materials

evidence for assessment may be gathered from assessment of the unit of competency alone or through an integrated assessment activity.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

list checks required to correctly position bridge holes

explain how to reinforce bridge holes

list checks to perform to ensure saw cuts accurately match line drawings

list checks when cutting and shaping the knives and creasers

identify work health and safety factors for setting knives

identify factors that determine the amount and positioning of rubber attached to the forme

determine important items to consider when setting knives and creasers into position on the forme blank

list checks for attaching stripping materials to stripper backing materials

explain the purpose of mounting strips

identify areas to proof to ensure cutting forme meets production order specifications

explain allocation of numbers to each forme

determine the method of recording forme allocation numbers that is the accepted formula.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the converting, binding and finishing field of work and include access to relevant facilities, equipment and materials.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPCBF327 Set up machine for complex rotary die cutting or embossing

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to set up a machine for complex rotary die cutting or embossing.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Converting, Binding and Finishing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Prepare for job	1.1 Job specifications are read and interpreted from job documentation or production control system 1.2 Set-up is planned and carried out correctly in minimum time with minimum wastage 1.3 Availability of all job related components is checked
2. Mount rotary cutting or embossing devices	2.1 Cutting devices or dies are correctly mounted to die 2.2 Cutting devices or dies are registered and proofed on die cylinder 2.3 Appropriate cutting devices or dies are selected and secured to machine according to job specifications
3. Set up delivery systems	3.1 Delivery systems are set up and adjusted according to job specifications 3.2 Substrate is removed according to job specifications
4. Set up machine for basic rotary cutting	4.1 Rotary cutting devices are set up and adjusted according to job specifications 4.2 Cutting pressures are set up and adjusted according to job specifications 4.3 Counter knives/anvils are set in correct position
5. Set up in-line units	5.1 Minor in-line printing/converting/binding units are set up for basic processes and adjusted according to machine requirements and job specifications 5.2 Assistance is given in set-up of major in-line printing/converting/binding units
6. Conduct sample run	6.1 Material to be used for sample is organised correctly 6.2 Machine is set up and operated to produce a specified sample according to work health and safety (WHS) requirements, manufacturer’s specifications and enterprise procedures 6.3 Sample is visually inspected and/or tested, or laboratory testing is organised, according to enterprise procedures 6.4 Results are interpreted to determine adjustment requirements 6.5 Adjustments are carried out according to product and machine specifications

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 4.1, 4.2, 6.5	Recognises and interprets text to establish job requirements from information in relevant procedures and specifications
Oral Communication	5.2	Participates effectively in spoken interactions to confirm or clarify understanding
Navigate the world of work	6.2, 6.3	Recognises and follows legislative requirements and organisational policies and procedures relevant to own role
Interact with others	5.2	Cooperates with others as part of familiar routine activities, and contributes to specific activities requiring joint responsibility and accountability
Get the work done	1.1-1.3, 2.1-2.3, 3.1, 3.2, 4.1-4.3, 5.1, 6.1-6.5	Determines priorities and sequences steps involved in clearly defined, familiar tasks Implements actions as per instructions, making slight adjustments if necessary Plans, identifies and assembles resources required to complete tasks Follows routine procedures for using digital technology by reading data from electronic monitoring and control systems

Range of Conditions

This section specifies different work environments and conditions that may affect performance. Essential operating conditions that may be present (depending on the work situation, needs of the candidate, accessibility of the item, and local industry and regional contexts) are included.

Delivery systems MUST include EITHER:	reel systems OR sheet systems.
Setting up and adjusting MUST include EITHER:	unwind and rewind reels web control system folder and sheeter OR feeder and delivery systems sheet pick-up and transportation systems transfer systems.

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPCBF327 Set up machine for complex rotary die cutting or embossing	ICPCF327C Prepare for cutting forme and stripper making	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF327 Set up machine for complex rotary die cutting or embossing

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

correctly set up machine for EITHER rotary die cutting OR embossing; for either process, set up TWO complex jobs (including in-line processes) with different substrates, sizes and patterns according to manufacturer’s and job specifications, enterprise procedures and listed performance criteria, within the production timeframe

demonstrate all safety devices on the machine.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

identify work health and safety factors that must be considered when either:

setting up and/or operating sheet transport and delivery systems

setting up and adjusting rotary cutting devices

OR

setting up reel delivery systems

determine information concerning rotary die cutting or embossing found in the job documentation or production control system, and interpret this information to ensure smooth workflow throughout the factory

determine factors to consider when deciding on a cutting system

explain checks for when cutting devices are mounted on a cylinder

identify methods used for registering and proofing cutting devices

explain checks for when cutting devices are attached to the machine

list criteria that determines selection of particular cutting devices

list steps to ensure the delivery system operates effectively

identify important areas or sections of the feeder unit set up

identify areas of the delivery system to observe to maintain neat delivery of finished work and prevent damage to the finished product

list necessary checks when substrate is removed from the machine

list ways the finished product can be secured for despatch

explain machine pressure and machine cutting depths

explain adjusting lays for registration, what to check, and when it is done

identify problems that occur if counter knives/anvils are incorrectly set

determine the largest/smallest size sheet that can be processed on this machine

list necessary checks to ensure suitability of in-line process

determine details of the completed sample to examine to ensure conformance with the client requirements

list common faults that can occur with the rotary cutting process

determine factors that indicate a need for replacement of knives/blades/cutting edges

explain how cutting edges and counter knives (anvils) should be stored to guard against damage and deterioration

identify machine manuals, safety and other documentation relevant to this task, where they are kept, and the information included in them

For Reel Systems Only

list adjustments required to the:

unwind reel to suit various jobs

sheeter during production

folder during production

rewind wheel during production

identify important areas to consider during webbing procedures

determine important areas of the reel delivery system to adjust according to job specifications

For Sheet Systems Only

list adjustments:

required to the sheeter during production

that can be made to the machine to facilitate accurate sheet pick-up and transportation.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the converting, binding and finishing field of work and include access to relevant facilities, equipment and materials.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPCBF328 Produce complex rotary die cut or embossed product

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to produce complex rotary die cut or embossed product, maintain operation of machinery and the production process, rectify problems and shut down the equipment.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Converting, Binding and Finishing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Maintain operation of delivery systems	1.1 Delivery systems are monitored and adjusted to ensure efficient and continuous operation and ensure no damage to finished product 1.2 Substrate is added to and removed from the process according to job specifications
2. Maintain operation of complex rotary die cutting or embossing process	2.1 Knife condition is monitored and adjusted to ensure product quality meets the approved sample standard 2.2 Cutting pressures are monitored and adjusted to ensure product quality meets the approved sample standard 2.3 Registration of knife(s) is monitored and adjusted to ensure quality 2.4 Packing of cutting devices is monitored and adjusted to ensure product quality meets the approved sample standard
3. Maintain production process	3.1 In-line printing/converting/binding/finishing processes are monitored and adjusted to ensure product quality meets the approved sample standard 3.2 Production process is operated in association with fellow workers and according to enterprise procedures and planned daily schedule 3.3 Production is maintained according to Work Health and Safety (WHS) requirements, manufacturer’s specifications and enterprise procedures 3.4 Manual and/or automatic control is used according to job specifications 3.5.Performance is monitored and verified using the process control system according to enterprise procedures 3.6 Production difficulties are anticipated and preventive action is taken to prevent occurrence by timely intervention 3.7 Process adjustments to eliminate problems are reported according to enterprise procedures 3.8 Faulty performance of equipment is identified and reported according to enterprise procedures 3.9 Waste is sorted according to enterprise procedures
4. Identify and rectify rotary cutting machine problems and faults	4.1 Problems in rotary cutting machine are identified and reported according to enterprise procedures 4.2 Adjustments or corrections are carried out according to specified procedures and are consistent with operator’s skill level 4.3 Cutting rotary machine operation is checked to ensure correct operation
5. Conduct shutdown of production process	5.1 Correct shutdown sequence is followed according to manufacturer’s specifications and enterprise procedures 5.2 Shutdown is conducted in association with fellow workers and in compliance with WHS requirements 5.3 Substrate waste is removed from operating area and recycled or disposed of, where required, according to regulatory requirements and enterprise procedures 5.4 Machine faults requiring repair are identified and reported to designated person according to enterprise procedures 5.5 Repair/adjustment is verified prior to resumption of operations
6. Clean rotary cutting units at end of run	6.1 Knife and machine bed are cleaned ready for next run 6.2 Cutting devices are sharpened correctly according to WHS requirements and enterprise procedures 6.3 Cutting machine is disengaged and cleaned ready for next run 6.4 In-line printing/converting/binding/finishing units are cleaned ready for next run 6.5 Transportation and delivery systems are disengaged and cleaned ready for next run 6.6 Production records or other documentation are accurately completed, where required by enterprise procedures

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	5.1	Recognises and interprets text to establish job requirements from information in procedures and specifications
Writing	3.7, 3.8, 4.1, 5.4, 6.6	Enters routine data associated with production processes and enterprise procedures
Oral Communication	3.2, 3.7, 3.8, 4.1, 5.2, 5.4	Speaks clearly using appropriate vocabulary, tone and pace to report faults and discrepancies Participates effectively in spoken interactions to confirm or clarify requirements
Navigate the world of work	2.1-2.4, 3.1-3.3, 3.5, 3.7-3.9, 4.1, 4.2, 5.1-5.4, 6.1-6.6	Recognises and follows all procedures for operation and maintenance of equipment, incorporating regulatory and enterprise requirements
Interact with others	3.2, 3.7, 4.8, 4.1, 5.2, 5.4	Cooperates with others as part of familiar routine activities, and contributes to specific activities requiring joint responsibility and accountability Understands what to communicate, with whom and how, in routine work situations
Get the work done	1.1, 1.2, 2.1-2.4, 3.1-3.9, 4.1-4.3, 5.1-5.5, 6.1-6.6	Determines priorities and sequences steps involved in clearly defined, familiar tasks Recognises and anticipates an increasing range of familiar problems, their symptoms and causes, actively looking for early warning signs and implementing contingency plans Follows routine procedures for using digital technology by reading data from electronic monitoring and control systems

Range of Conditions

This section specifies different work environments and conditions that may affect performance. Essential operating conditions that may be present (depending on the work situation, needs of the candidate, accessibility of the item, and local industry and regional contexts) are included.

Delivery systems MUST include EITHER:	reel OR sheet.
Monitoring and adjusting MUST include:	reel stand and rewind stand web control system sheeting section OR feeder and delivery systems sheet pick-up and transportation systems transfer systems.

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPCBF328 Produce complex rotary die cut or embossed product	ICPCF328C Produce complex rotary die cut or embossed product	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF328 Produce complex rotary die cut or embossed product

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

produce complex products on EITHER rotary die cutting OR embossing. For either process produce TWO complex jobs (including in-line processes) with different substrates, sizes and patterns according to manufacturer’s and job specifications, enterprise procedures and listed performance criteria.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

All Systems

identify work health and safety (WHS) factors for:

setting up and/or operating machine transport systems

setting up and/or operating machine delivery systems

maintaining the cutting process

problem-solving on the rotary machine cutting process

conducting machine shutdown procedures

identify areas of the machinery that require cleaning at the end of the run

identify items of importance to consider when maintaining rotary cutting operations

lists checks to be made:

on cutting pressures, cutting registration, packing of cutting area, condition of cutting edges, and the smooth running of the operation

cutting accuracy once it has been adjusted

when removing substrate from the machine

when packing cutting devices

when waste is removed from the machine and surrounding area for disposal or recycling

when cutting devices or knives are cleaned, stored or replaced ready for the next run

when shutting down the machine

determine indicators that demand replacement of cutting edges

identify ways to guarantee a clean and precise result

explain production difficulties expected during production runs and procedure for correcting any machine faults

identify cleaning agents used to clean the machine

identify production records to be kept or written up and the information that should be included

determine quality aspects to consider in a completed rotary cutting job

list steps to ensure important features of the production control system are followed

identify production areas that may have to be adjusted to meet client requirements

identify items to check against the client sample

identify machine manuals, safety and other documentation relevant to this task, where they are kept, and the information included in them

For Reel Systems Only

identify areas of the:

reel stand to monitor to ensure trouble-free operation

web control system to adjust to maintain correct web tension and the correct positioning of the web

delivery system to observe to maintain tension and prevent damage to the finished product

For Sheet Systems Only

identify areas of the sheet-fed feeder to monitor to ensure trouble-free operation

list parts of the sheet pick-up system to adjust to ensure accurate and continuous sheet handling.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the converting, binding and finishing field of work and include access to relevant facilities, equipment and materials.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPCBF341 Set up machine for complex sequenced or multiple folding

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to set up a machine for complex folding.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Converting, Binding and Finishing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Prepare for job	1.1 Job specifications are read and interpreted from job documentation or production control system 1.2 Set-up is planned and carried out correctly in minimum time with minimum wastage 1.3 Availability of all job related components is checked
2. Set up delivery system	2.1 Delivery systems are set up and adjusted according to job specifications
3. Set up machine for complex sequenced or multiple folding	3.1 Buckle/knife folding units are set up and adjusted according to job specifications 3.2 Folding rollers/belts/rails are set up and adjusted according to job specifications
4. Set up in-line units	4.1 Minor in-line printing/converting/binding units are set up for basic processes and adjusted according to machine requirements and job specifications 4.2 Assistance is given in set-up of major in-line printing/converting/binding units
5. Conduct sample run	5.1 Material to be used for sample is organised correctly 5.2 Machine is set up and operated to produce a specified sample according to work health and safety requirements, manufacturer’s specifications and enterprise procedures 5.3 Sample is visually inspected and/or tested, or laboratory testing is organised, according to enterprise procedures 5.4 Results are interpreted to determine adjustment requirements 5.5 Adjustment changes are carried out according to product and machine specifications

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 3.1, 3.2, 4.1, 5.2, 5.5	Recognises and interprets text to establish job requirements from information in relevant procedures and specifications
Oral Communication	4.2	Participates effectively in spoken interactions to confirm or clarify requirements
Navigate the world of work	5.1-5.3	Recognises and follows legislative requirements and organisational policies and procedures relevant to own role
Interact with others	4.2	Cooperates with others as part of familiar routine activities, and contributes to specific activities requiring joint responsibility and accountability
Get the work done	1.2, 1.3, 2.1, 3.1-3.2, 4.1, 4.2, 5.1-5.5	Determines priorities and sequences steps involved in clearly defined, familiar tasks Implements actions as per instructions, making slight adjustments if necessary Plans, identifies and assembles resources required to complete tasks Follows routine procedures for using digital technology by reading data from electronic monitoring and control systems

Range of Conditions

This section specifies different work environments and conditions that may affect performance. Essential operating conditions that may be present (depending on the work situation, needs of the candidate, accessibility of the item, and local industry and regional contexts) are included.

Delivery systems MUST include EITHER:	reel OR sheet.
Setting up and adjusting MUST include EITHER:	unwind reel webbing procedures web control system splicing/joining reels folder and sheeter OR feeder and delivery system sheet pick up system transfer system sheet transfer and control.

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPCBF341 Set up machine for complex sequenced or multiple folding	ICPCF341C Set up machine for complex sequenced or multiple folding	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF341 Set up machine for complex sequenced or multiple folding

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

correctly set up set up THREE multiple sequenced folding jobs (e.g. letter folds, concertina folds) OR gusseting (envelope adjuster) jobs, using different sizes and weights of substrates e.g. 45-110 grams per square meter (gsm) and including use of a gluing unit and/or gate fold unit, according to manufacturer’s and job specifications, enterprise procedures and the listed performance criteria

demonstrate all safety devices on the machine.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

All Systems

identify work health and safety factors that must be considered when:

setting up and/or operating machine transport systems

setting folder transportation and delivery systems

setting up and/or adjusting the folding unit

adjusting machine units

determine the information concerning folding requirements that would be found in the job documentation or production control system and how this information could be interpreted to ensure smooth workflow throughout the factory

determine the factors that must be considered when planning a folding sample

identify the areas that should be monitored to ensure trouble-free operation for either the reel stand or sheet-fed delivery system

identify areas of the delivery system to observe to maintain neat delivery of finished work and prevent damage to the finished product

list checks to make when substrate is removed from the machine

list ways folded sheets can be secured for dispatch

determine the largest/smallest size sheet that can be processed on the machine

list ways the machine can be adapted to facilitate smaller/larger stock

list causes of scratching/scuffing of substrate during transportation

identify factors that determine machine speed

explain problems that can be expected if:

the machine is running too fast

the machine rollers are set too loose

there is too much roller pressure

the delivery system is not set correctly

identify factors that determine correct roller pressure for a given job

list roller pressure checks for correctness

list steps to ensure correct alignment of in-line processes/units

list checks when operating the electronic gate fold unit

explain the use of a gate fold unit

explain the use of a gluing unit on a job

determine adhesive used in the gluing unit

identify adjustments made to the glue line length

determine segments of quality assurance to inspect at the sample run completion

explain actions required if the:

job is out-of-square

ink is too wet for production

job does not coincide with sample

identify items to check against the client sample

identify machine manuals, safety and other documentation relevant to this task, where they are kept, and the information included in them

For Reel Systems Only

identify areas to adjust for the web control system to maintain correct web tension and correct web positioning

For Sheet Systems Only

identify adjustments required in each of the following cases:

the sheet is creasing

the sheet is caught in the fold plate

the sheet is not entering the machine

the sheet is not reaching the folding unit

the sheet not leaving the folding unit

the sheets are smudging/scuffing

the sheet is turned on the transportation unit

identify parts of the sheet pick-up system to adjust to ensure accurate and continuous sheet handling

identify factors that determine accuracy of sheets entering folding rollers

determine the adjustment to be made if the sheet is out-of-square

list the reasons for the sheet being out-of-square and explain how each may be corrected.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the converting, binding and finishing field of work and include access to relevant facilities, equipment and materials.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPCBF342 Produce complex sequenced or multiple folded product

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to produce complex folded product, monitor and adjust machinery, maintain transportation of the substrate, identify and rectify faults, and correctly clean and shut down equipment.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Converting, Binding and Finishing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Maintain delivery system	1.1 Delivery systems are monitored and adjusted to ensure continuous and efficient operation 1.2 Substrate is added to the process according to job specifications
2. Maintain production process	2.1 Registration and squareness of fold are monitored and adjusted to ensure product quality meets the approved sample standard 2.2 Basic in-line printing/converting/binding/finishing process(es) are monitored and adjusted to ensure product quality meets the approved sample standard 2.3 Production process is operated in association with fellow workers and according to enterprise procedures and planned daily schedule 2.4 Production is maintained according to work health and safety (WHS) requirements, manufacturer’s specifications and enterprise procedures 2.5 Manual and/or automatic control is used according to job specifications 2.6 Performance is monitored and verified using the process control system according to enterprise procedures 2.7 Production difficulties are anticipated and preventive action is taken to prevent occurrence by timely intervention 2.8 Process adjustments to eliminate problems are reported according to enterprise procedures 2.9 Faulty performance of equipment is identified and reported according to enterprise procedures 2.10 Waste is sorted according to enterprise procedures
3. Identify and rectify problems and faults	3.1 Problems in folding (sequenced/multiple) machine operation are identified and reported according to enterprise procedures 3.2 Adjustments or corrections are carried out according to specified procedures, and are consistent with operator’s skill level 3.3 Folding (sequenced/multiple) machine operation is checked to ensure correct operation 3.4 Machine faults requiring repair are identified and reported to designated person according to enterprise procedures 3.5 Repair/adjustment is verified prior to resumption of operations
4. Conduct shutdown of production process	4.1 Correct shutdown sequence is followed according to manufacturer’s specifications and enterprise procedures 4.2 Shutdown is conducted in association with fellow workers and in compliance with WHS requirements 4.3 Substrate waste is removed from operating area and recycled or disposed of, where required, according to regulatory requirements and enterprise procedures
5. Clean folding (single/ continuous) machine at end of run	5.1 Folding units are disengaged and cleaned ready for next run 5.2 In-line printing/converting/binding/finishing units are cleaned ready for next run 5.3 Reel feed and transportation systems are disengaged and cleaned ready for next run 5.4 Production records or other documentation are accurately completed where required by enterprise procedures

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	2.4, 2.5	Recognises and interprets text to establish job requirements from information contained within relevant procedures and specifications
Writing	3.1, 3.4, 5.4	Enters routine data associated with production processes and enterprise procedures
Oral Communication	2.3, 2.8, 2.9, 3.1, 3.4, 4.2	Speaks clearly using appropriate vocabulary, tone and pace to report faults and discrepancies Participates effectively in spoken interactions to confirm or clarify requirements
Navigate the world of work	2.1-2.4, 2.6, 2.8-2.10, 3.1, 3.2, 3.4, 4.1-4.3, 5.1-5.4	Recognises and follows all procedures for operation and maintenance of equipment, incorporating regulatory and enterprise requirements
Interact with others	2.3, 2.8, 2.9, 3.1, 3.4, 4.2	Cooperates with others as part of familiar routine activities, and contributes to specific activities requiring joint responsibility and accountability Understands what to communicate, with whom and how, in routine work situations
Get the work done	1.2, 1.2, 2.1-2.10, 3.1-3.5, 4.1-4.3, 5.4	Determines priorities and sequences steps involved in clearly defined, familiar tasks Recognises and anticipates an increasing range of familiar problems, their symptoms and causes; actively looking for early warning signs and implementing contingency plans Follows routine procedures for using digital technology by reading data from electronic monitoring and control systems

Range of Conditions

This section specifies different work environments and conditions that may affect performance. Essential operating conditions that may be present (depending on the work situation, needs of the candidate, accessibility of the item, and local industry and regional contexts) are included.

Delivery systems MUST could include EITHER:	reel OR sheet.
Monitoring and adjusting MUST include EITHER:	reel stand web control systems OR feeder and delivery systems sheet pick-up and transport systems transfer systems.

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPCBF342 Produce complex sequenced or multiple folded product	ICPCF342C Produce complex sequenced or multiple folded product	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF342 Produce complex sequenced or multiple folded product

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

complete TWO jobs (if possible, using different sizes and weights of substrate) with:

a single fold to run continuously,

OR

a single quire fold on a sheet gather/stitch/fold/trim machine,

OR

an automatic web-fed machine to achieve a single fold,according to manufacturer’s and job specifications, enterprise procedures and listed performance criteria

demonstrate use of computerised control, monitoring and data entry systems if available and appropriate.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

All Systems

identify work health and safety factors for:

setting up and/or operating machine transport systems

setting up and/or operating machine delivery systems

using the folding machine

adjusting/correcting the machine

cleaning the machine

list checks to make when substrate is removed from the machine

list areas of the in-line process to monitor to ensure product quality

determine causes of out-of-square folding and explain how each can be corrected

determine segments of quality assurance inspected at sample run completion as well as in a completed folded job

explain communication to instigate if the:

job is out-of-square

ink is too wet for production

job does not coincide with the sample

identify important tasks to correctly shut down the machine

explain requirements to prepare finished work for dispatch

identify areas of the machine to clean regularly and materials to clean from the machine

explain requirements to keep the machine clear of surface rust (condensation)

determine production alterations needed to meet client requirements

identify machine manuals, safety and other documentation relevant to this task, where they are kept, and the information included in them

Reel Systems Only

identify areas of the reel stand to monitor to ensure trouble-free operation

list part(s) of the machine to adjust if the sheet is creasing

Sheet Systems Only

identify areas of the sheet-fed feeder to monitor to ensure trouble-free operation.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the converting, binding and finishing field of work and include access to relevant facilities, equipment and materials.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPCBF343 Set up machine for complex collating or inserting (sheet/section/reel)

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to set up a machine for complex collating, gathering or inserting of sheets or sections.

It applies to individuals working in binding and finishing operations, mail houses and newspapers.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Converting, Binding and Finishing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Prepare for job	1.1 Job specifications are read and interpreted from job documentation or production control system 1.2 Set-up is planned and carried out correctly in minimum time with minimum wastage 1.3 Availability of all job related components is checked
2. Set up delivery systems	2.1 Delivery systems are set up and adjusted according to job specifications 2.2 Substrate is added to and removed from the process according to job specifications
3. Set up machine and in-line units	3.1 Collating/inserting system is set up and adjusted according to job specifications 3.2 Minor in-line printing/converting/binding units are set up for basic processes and adjusted according to machine requirements and job specifications 3.3 Assistance is given in set-up of major in-line printing/converting/binding units (NOTE: if entire set-up is completed, refer to appropriate competency standards)
4. Conduct sample run	4.1 Material to be used for sample is organised correctly 4.2 Machine is set up and operated to produce a specified sample according to work health and safety requirements, manufacturer’s specifications and enterprise procedures 4.3 Sample is visually inspected and/or tested or laboratory testing is organised according to enterprise procedures 4.4 Results are interpreted to determine adjustment requirements 4.5 Adjustments are carried out according to product and machine specifications

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 3.1, 3.2, 4.2, 4.5	Recognises and interprets texts to establish job requirements from information contained within relevant procedures and specifications
Oral communication	Participates effectively in spoken interactions to confirm or clarify requirements
Navigate the world of work	4.2, 4.3	Complies with legislative requirements and follows organisational policies and procedures relevant to own role
Interact with others	3.3	Cooperates with others as part of familiar routine activities, and contributes to specific activities requiring joint responsibility and accountability
Get the work done	1.1-1.3, 2.1-2.6, 3.1, 3.2, 4.1-4.5	Determines priorities and sequences steps involved in clearly defined, familiar tasks Implements actions as per instructions, making slight adjustments if necessary Plans, identifies and assembles resources required to complete tasks Follows routine procedures for using digital technology by reading data from electronic monitoring and control systems

Range of Conditions

This section specifies different work environments and conditions that may affect performance. Essential operating conditions that may be present (depending on the work situation, needs of the candidate, accessibility of the item, and local industry and regional contexts) are included.

Delivery systems MUST include EITHER:	reel OR sheet.
Setting up and adjusting MUST include EITHER:	unwind and rewind reels web control systems splicing/joining reels OR feeder and delivery systems sheet/section/reel pick-up and transportation systems transfer systems.

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPCBF343 Set up machine for complex collating or inserting (sheet/section/reel)	ICPCF343C Set up machine for complex collating or inserting (sheet/section/reel)	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF343 Set up machine for complex collating or inserting (sheet/section/reel)

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

correctly set up machines for complex collating for a minimum of FOUR products, including in-line processes on FOUR occasions, (if possible) including:

two sheet jobs, each using different sizes and weights of substrate

two section jobs, with and without lip/lap, according to manufacturer’s and job specifications, enterprise procedures and listed performance criteria

demonstrate all safety devices on the machine.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

All Systems

identify work health and safety (WHS) factors for:

setting up and/or operating machine transport systems

when the machine is operating

adjusting machine units and before readjusting the machine

determine important information concerning collating found in the job documentation or production control system and how to interpret this information to ensure smooth workflow throughout the factory

explain elements to consider when planning a collated sample

identify areas of the machine to adjust to allow for 42gsm stock

list ways the machine can be adapted to facilitate smaller/larger stock

identify factors that govern speed the machine operates at

determine indicators that show the machine needs lubrication

list steps to ensure correct alignment of in-line processes/units

determine adjustments to keep units correctly positioned

determine requirements for an acceptable collating result

explain the cause of sheets creasing in the machine delivery

determine adjustments to the machine to alleviate bruising of no carbon required (NCR) paper

identify items to check against the client sample

identify when the machine needs to be adjusted

identify machine manuals, safety and other documentation relevant to this task, where they are kept, and the information included in these documents

For Reel Systems Only

identify areas of the reel stand to monitor to ensure trouble-free operation

identify area of the web control system to adjust to maintain correct web tension

identify area of the web control system to adjust to maintain correct positioning of the web

For Sheet Systems Only

list important factors to consider when setting up the feeder and double/misfeed sheet calliper system

identify requirements to ensure smooth transportation of sheets or sections to and through the machine

name different types of sheet/section delivery systems

determine largest/smallest size sheet that can be processed on this machine

determine the largest/smallest sheet/section size to be run on the machine.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the converting, binding and finishing field of work and include access to facilities, equipment and materials.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPCBF344 Produce complex collated or inserted product

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to produce a complex collated or inserted sheet, section or reel product, to monitor and adjust machinery, maintain transportation of the substrate, identify and rectify faults, and correctly clean and shut down equipment.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Converting, Binding and Finishing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Maintain delivery systems	1.1 Delivery systems are monitored and adjusted to ensure efficient and continuous operation 1.2 Substrate is added to and removed from the process according to job specifications
2. Maintain production process	2.1 Collating or inserting process is monitored and adjusted to ensure product quality meets the approved sample standard 2.2 In-line printing/converting/binding/finishing processes are monitored and adjusted to ensure product quality meets the approved sample standard 2.3 Production process is operated in association with fellow workers and according to enterprise procedures and planned daily schedule 2.4 Production is maintained according to work health and safety (WHS) requirements, manufacturer’s specifications and enterprise procedures 2.5 Manual and/or automatic control is used according to job specifications 2.6 Performance is monitored and verified using the process control system according to enterprise procedures 2.7 Production difficulties are anticipated and preventive action is taken to prevent occurrence by timely intervention 2.8 Waste is sorted according to enterprise procedures
3. Identify and rectify problems and faults	3.1 Problems in collating or inserting (sheet/section/reel) machine are identified and reported according to enterprise procedures 3.2 Adjustments or corrections are carried out according to specified procedures, and are consistent with operator’s skill level 3.3 Collating or inserting (sheet/section/reel) machine operation is checked to ensure correct operation 3.4 Process adjustments to eliminate problems are reported according to enterprise procedures 3.5 Faulty performance of equipment is identified and reported according to enterprise procedures
4. Conduct shutdown of production process	4.1 Correct shutdown sequence is followed according to manufacturer’s specifications and enterprise procedures 4.2 Shutdown is conducted in association with fellow workers and in compliance with WHS requirements 4.3 Substrate waste is removed from operating area and recycled or disposed of, where required, according to regulatory requirements and enterprise procedures 4.4 Machine faults requiring repair are identified and reported to designated person according to enterprise procedures 4.5 Repair/adjustment is verified prior to resumption of operations
5. Clean collating or inserting (sheet/section/reel) machine at end of run	5.1 Collating or inserting machine is cleaned ready for next run 5.2 In-line printing/converting/binding/finishing units are cleaned ready for next run 5.3 Reel feed transportation and delivery systems are disengaged and cleaned ready for next run 5.4 Sheet feed, transportation and delivery systems are disengaged and cleaned ready for next run 5.5 Production records or other documentation are accurately completed, where required by enterprise procedures

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	2.4, 2.5, 4.1	Recognises and interprets text to establish job requirements from information contained within relevant procedures and specifications
Writing	3.1, 3.4, 3.5, 4.4, 5.5	Enters routine data associated with production processes and enterprise procedures
Oral Communication	2.3, 3.1, 3.4, 3.5, 4.2, 4.4	Speaks clearly using appropriate vocabulary, tone and pace to report faults and discrepancies Participates effectively in spoken interactions to confirm or clarify requirements
Navigate the world of work	2.1-2.4, 2.6, 2.8, 3.1, 3.2, 3.4, 3.5, 4.1-4.4, 5.1-5.5	Recognises and follows all procedures for operation, cleaning and maintenance of equipment, incorporating regulatory requirements and enterprise procedures
Interact with others	2.3, 3.1, 3.4, 3.5, 4.2, 4.4	Cooperates with others as part of familiar routine activities, and contributes to specific activities requiring joint responsibility and accountability Understands what to communicate, with whom and how, in routine work situations
Get the work done	2.1-2.8, 3.1-3.3, 4.1-4.5, 5.5	Determines priorities and sequences steps involved in clearly defined, familiar tasks Recognises and anticipates an increasing range of familiar problems, their symptoms and causes; actively looking for early warning signs and implementing contingency plans Follows routine procedures for using digital technology by reading data from electronic monitoring and control systems

Range of Conditions

This section specifies different work environments and conditions that may affect performance. Essential operating conditions that may be present (depending on the work situation, needs of the candidate, accessibility of the item, and local industry and regional contexts) are included.

Delivery systems MUST include EITHER:	reel transportation OR sheet transportation.
Monitoring and adjusting MUST include EITHER:	cleaning collating or inserting (sheet/section/reel) machine web control system OR feeder sheet pick-up and transportation system transfer system.

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPCBF344 Produce complex collated or inserted product	ICPCF344C Produce complex collated or inserted (sheet/section/reel) product	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages Minor title change	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF344 Produce complex collated or inserted product

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

operate machines for complex collating for a minimum of FOUR products, including in-line processes on FOUR occasions, (if possible) including:

two sheet jobs, each using different sizes and weights of substrate

two section jobs, with and without lip/lap, to produce a complex collated products according to manufacturer’s and job specifications, enterprise procedures and listed performance criteria.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

identify work health and safety (WHS) factors for:

when the machine is operating

before readjusting the machine

when cleaning materials from the machine

explain factors that govern speed the machine operates at

determine indicators that show the machine needs lubrication

identify when the machine needs adjustment

list areas to check when sections are failing to open on the chain

list checks to do when correctly shutting down the machine

determine areas of the machine that need regular cleaning and list recommended cleaning agents

explain how to keep the machine clear of surface rust (condensation)

determine production records to be kept or written up, and the information to include

list steps to ensure important features of the production control system are followed

determine requirements for an acceptable collating result

explain the cause of sheets creasing in the machine delivery

identify machine manuals, safety and other documentation relevant to this task, where they are kept, and the information included in them

For Sheet Systems Only

explain causes of sheets misfeeding during production and how to correct creasing of sheets and prevent double sheet feeds

determine adjustment to make to prevent bruising of no carbon required sheets.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the converting, binding and finishing field of work and include access to relevant facilities, equipment and materials used to produce a collated or inserted product.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPCBF361 Set up machine for complex adhesive, mechanical or sewn fastening

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to set up a machine for complex adhesive, mechanical or sewn fastening. Some equipment may also involve cutting, trimming, folding and/or gathering (collating), which may be assessed at the same time.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Converting, Binding and Finishing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Prepare for job	1.1 Job specifications are read and interpreted from job documentation or production control system 1.2 Set-up is planned and carried out correctly in minimum time with minimum wastage 1.3 Availability of all job related components is checked
2. Set up sheet/section system	2.1 Feeder and delivery systems are set up and adjusted according to job specifications 2.2 Sheet/section pick-up and transportation system is set up and adjusted according to job specifications 2.3 Transfer systems are set up and adjusted according to job specifications 2.4 Substrate is removed from the process according to job specifications 2.5 Sheet/section transfer and control system is set up and adjusted according to job specifications
3. Set up machine and in-line units	3.1 Fastening system is set up and adjusted according to job specifications 3.2 Minor in-line printing/converting/binding units are set up for basic processes and adjusted according to machine requirements and job specifications 3.3 Assistance is given in set-up of major in-line printing/converting/binding units
4. Conduct sample run	4.1 Material to be used for sample is organised correctly 4.2 Machine is set up and operated to produce a specified sample according to work health and safety requirements, manufacturer’s specifications and enterprise procedures 4.3 Sample is visually inspected and/or tested, or laboratory testing is organised, according to enterprise procedures 4.4 Results are interpreted to determine adjustment requirements 4.5 Adjustments are carried out according to product and machine specifications

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 2.1-2.5, 3.1, 3.2, 4.2, 4.5	Recognises and interprets text to establish job requirements from information contained within relevant procedures and specifications
Navigate the world of work	4.2, 4.3	Recognises and follows protocols and meets expectations associated with own role
Interact with others	3.3	Cooperates with others as part of familiar routine activities, and contributes to specific activities requiring joint responsibility and accountability
Get the work done	1.1-1.3, 2.1-2.5, 3.1-3.3, 4.1-4.5	Determines priorities and sequences steps involved in clearly defined, familiar tasks Implements actions as per instructions making slight adjustments if necessary Plans, identifies and assembles resources required to complete tasks Follows routine procedures for using digital technology by reading data from electronic monitoring and control systems

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPCBF361 Set up machine for complex adhesive, mechanical or sewn fastening	ICPCF361C Set up machine for complex adhesive, mechanical or sewn fastening	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF361 Set up machine for complex adhesive, mechanical or sewn fastening

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

correctly set up machines for one complex process of adhesive, thermal, mechanical or section sewing

set up (including replacing adhesive, thread, wire) TWO complex jobs using different sizes and weights of substrate according to manufacturer’s and job specifications, enterprise procedures and listed performance criteria

demonstrate all safety devices on the machine.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

identify work health and safety factors for:

setting up the machine

setting up transportation systems

setting up fastening equipment on the machine

working with hot melt adhesives

readjusting the machine

determine information concerning binding requirements found in the job documentation or production control system and how this information is interpreted to ensure smooth workflow throughout the factory

explain elements to consider when planning a collated sample

explain special delivery problems associated with adhesive machines and how to overcome these problems

identify different section feeding systems

explain how to monitor delivery systems present on the various machines

explain ways completed work can be secured for dispatch

determine the largest/smallest size sheet that can be processed on each machine

list how the machine can be adapted to facilitate smaller/larger stock

describe a job-correct binding technique

describe methods of adhesive metering present on the machine

explain the care required to ensure a neat and clean adhesive binding job

list outcomes if sewing is not completed in the right position

determine parts of the wire stitcher to adjust to process books of different thicknesses

identify position of wire stitches on the book

explain the difference between a staple and a wire stitch

determine the appropriate wire calliper for a particular job

list how the machine can be adapted to facilitate smaller/larger stock

identify in-line units available for binding processes

determine circumstances in which the machine needs to adjustment

determine quality aspects to consider in the completed binding job

list steps to ensure important features of the production control system are addressed

identify machine manuals, safety and other documentation relevant to this task, where they are kept, and the information included in them.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the converting, binding and finishing field of work and include access to relevant facilities, equipment and materials.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPCBF362 Produce complex adhesive, mechanical or sewn fastened product

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to produce complex adhesive, mechanical or sewn fastened product, to monitor and adjust machinery, maintain transportation of the substrate, identify and rectify faults, and correctly clean and shut down equipment.

Some equipment may also involve cutting, trimming, folding and/or gathering (collating), which may be assessed at the same time.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Converting, Binding and Finishing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Maintain operation of sheet/section transportation system	1.1 Feeder is monitored and adjusted to ensure continuous and efficient feeding to machine 1.2 Sheet/section pick-up and transport system is monitored and adjusted to ensure accurate and continuous sheet handling and efficient operation 1.3 Sheet/section transfer systems are monitored and adjusted to ensure correct and continuous sheet handling and efficient operation 1.4 Substrate is added to the process according to job specifications
2. Maintain operation of sheet/section delivery system	2.1 Delivery system is monitored and adjusted to ensure quality and efficient product delivery 2.2 Wire straightness, length, cut-off and clinching pressures are monitored and adjusted to ensure product quality meets the approved sample standard 2.3 Adhesion is monitored and adjusted to ensure product quality meets the approved sample standard 2.4 Thread tension and stitch quality are monitored and adjusted to ensure product quality meets the approved sample standard
3. Maintain production process	3.1 In-line printing/converting/binding/finishing processes are monitored and adjusted to ensure product quality meets the approved sample standard 3.2 Production process is operated in association with fellow workers and according to enterprise procedures and planned daily schedule 3.3 Production is maintained according to work health and safety (WHS) requirements, manufacturer’s specifications and enterprise procedures 3.4 Manual and/or automatic control is used according to job specifications 3.5 Performance is monitored and verified using the process control system according to enterprise procedures 3.6 Production difficulties are anticipated and preventive action is taken to prevent occurrence by timely intervention 3.7 Waste is sorted according to enterprise procedures
4. Identify and rectify problems and faults	4.1 Problems in sewing fastening machine are identified and reported according to enterprise procedures 4.2 Adjustments or corrections are carried out according to specified procedures, and are consistent with operator’s skill level 4.3 Sewing fastening machine operation is checked to ensure correct operation 4.4 Process adjustments to eliminate problems are reported according to enterprise procedures 4.5 Faulty performance of equipment is identified and reported according to enterprise procedures
5. Conduct shutdown of production process	5.1 Correct shutdown sequence is followed according to manufacturer’s specifications and enterprise procedures 5.2 Shutdown is conducted in association with fellow workers and in compliance with WHS requirements 5.3 Substrate waste is removed from operating area and recycled or disposed of, where required, according to regulatory requirements and enterprise procedures 5.4 Machine faults requiring repair are identified and reported to designated person according to enterprise procedures 5.5 Repair/adjustment is verified prior to resumption of operations
6. Clean adhesive/ mechanical/sewing fastening machine at end of run	6.1 Sewing unit is disengaged and cleaned ready for next run 6.2 Mechanical fastening unit is disengaged and cleaned ready for next run 6.3 Glue system is washed ready for next run and liquid waste is disposed of according to regulatory requirements and enterprise procedures 6.4 In-line printing/converting/binding/finishing units are cleaned ready for next run 6.5 Sheet feed, transport and delivery systems are disengaged and cleaned ready for next run 6.6 Production records or other documentation are accurately completed where required by enterprise procedures

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.4, 3.3, 3.4, 5.1	Recognises and interprets text to establish job requirements from information contained within relevant procedures and specifications
Writing	4.1, 4.4, 4.5, 6.6	Enters routine data associated with production processes and enterprise procedures
Oral Communication	3.2, 4.1, 4.4, 4.5, 5.2, 5.4	Speaks clearly using appropriate vocabulary, tone and pace to report faults and discrepancies Participates effectively in spoken interactions to confirm or clarify requirements
Navigate the world of work	2.2-2.4, 3.1-3.3, 3.5, 3.7, 4.1, 4.2, 4.4, 4.5, 5.1-5.4, 6.1-6.5	Recognises and follows explicit and implicit protocols and meets expectations associated with own role Recognises and follows all procedures for cleaning and maintenance of equipment, incorporating regulatory requirements and enterprise procedures
Interact with others	3.2, 4.1, 4.4, 4.5, 5.2, 5.4	Cooperates with others as part of familiar, routine activities, and contributes to specific activities requiring joint responsibility and accountability Understands what to communicate, with whom and how, in routine work situations
Get the work done	1.1-1.3, 2.1-2.4, 3.1-3.7, 4.1-4.5, 5.1-5.5, 6.6	Determines priorities and sequences steps involved in clearly defined, familiar tasks Recognises and anticipates an increasing range of familiar problems, their symptoms and causes; actively looking for early warning signs and implementing contingency plans

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPCBF362 Produce complex adhesive, mechanical or sewn fastened product	ICPCF362C Produce complex adhesive, mechanical or sewn fastened product	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF362 Produce complex adhesive, mechanical or sewn fastened product

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

produce a complex fastened product in either adhesive, mechanical or section sewing

produce TWO complex jobs using different sizes and weights of substrate according to manufacturer’s and job specifications, enterprise procedures and listed performance criteria

demonstrate adjustment of adhesive application on an adhesive binder

demonstrate adjustment of wire length on a wire stitcher

demonstrate straightening the wire in the wire feed on a wire stitcher.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

identify work health and safety (WHS) factors for:

operating sheet-fed transportation and delivery systems

maintaining or adjusting operation of the machine

using hot melt adhesive

cleaning hot melt from the machine

identify areas of the sheet-fed feeder to monitor to ensure trouble-free operation

identify parts of the sheet pick-up system to adjust to ensure accurate and continuous sheet feeding

identify areas of the delivery system to observe to maintain tension

identify areas of the delivery system to observe to prevent damage to the finished product

list checks to make when substrate is removed from the machine

list safety clothing available for use when operating adhesive binders

determine speed of production

determine sectors to observe to guarantee the production process is trouble-free and continuous

identify areas of the in-line process to monitor to ensure product quality

explain circumstances that require the machine:

to be adjusted

to be slowed down

to be sped up

determine how to achieve more spine milling on an adhesive binder

explain how to increase/decrease dwell time on a high frequency welder

explain how to increase/decrease current on a high frequency welder

list checks to make when shutting down a given machine

describe the main reasons for a thorough shutdown of operations

identify areas of the machine that need regular cleaning, materials to be cleaned from the machine, and how to ensure the machine is kept clear of surface ruse (condensation)

list recommended cleaning agents

identify production records to be kept or written up and the information that should be included in them

determine quality aspects to be considered in a completed:

adhesive bound job

high frequency welded job

wire stitched job

list steps to ensure important features of the production control system are followed

determine production alterations required to meet client requirements

list items to check against the client sample

identify machine manuals, safety and other documentation relevant to this task, where they are kept, and the information included in them.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the converting, binding and finishing field of work and include access to facilities, equipment and materials used to produce adhesive, mechanical or sewn fastened products.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPCBF369 Set up and produce hand-made box

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to set up and produce a hand-made box. It applies to the binding and finishing sector, not the carton sector of the industry.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Converting, Binding and Finishing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Determine dimensions and style of box	1.1 Options for style and cost are discussed with client 1.2 Dimensions of article to be contained are determined through measurement and/or job specifications 1.3 Final job specifications are determined and confirmed with client
2. Select materials	2.1 Board weight, covering and lining materials are selected according to job specifications 2.2 Grain direction is determined if relevant
3. Cut board, cover material and lining to size	3.1 Board, cover material and lining are cut to correct size 3.2 Board is scored to appropriate depth if necessary 3.3 Waste is removed if applicable 3.4 Lids are fitted, if necessary, to allow for the thickness of covering material
4. Assemble box	4.1 Box is assembled according to job specifications
5. Attach covering material and lining	5.1 Corners are cut correctly according to job specifications 5.2 Covering material and lining are fixed with adequate and smooth adhesion 5.3 Material is rubbed smoothly into corners of box
6. Press box if necessary	6.1 Block for pressing is made up as required 6.2 Even pressure is applied to box sections
7. Decorate or furnish box if required	7.1 Appropriate decorating techniques are used where relevant 7.2 Appropriate furnishings (clasps, hinges) are attached if required

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.2, 1.3, 2.1	Recognises and interprets text to establish job requirements from information contained within relevant procedures and specifications
Oral Communication	1.1, 1.3	Uses language and non-verbal features appropriate to audience, to exchange ideas and suggest options Listens and asks questions to confirm or clarify requirements
Numeracy	1.2, 3.1, 3.2, 3.4, 5.1	Selects from and uses a variety of mathematical and problem-solving strategies in a range of familiar contexts
Interact with others	1.1, 1.3	Understands what to communicate, with whom and how, in routine work situations
Get the work done	1.2, 2.1, 2.2, 3.1, 3.4, 5.1-5.3, 6.1, 6.2, 7.1, 7.2	Determines priorities and sequences steps involved in clearly defined, familiar tasks Implements actions as per instructions making slight adjustments if necessary Plans, identifies and assembles resources required to complete tasks

Range of Conditions

This section specifies different work environments and conditions that may affect performance. Essential operating conditions that may be present (depending on the work situation, needs of the candidate, accessibility of the item, and local industry and regional contexts) are included.

Box assembly MUST include EITHER:	Folding and scoring corners with straight folds at correct angles and secured with reinforcing material if necessary OR Gluing and butt join with walls set at correct angles to base and flush joints made with adequate adhesion.

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPCBF369 Set up and produce hand-made box	ICPCF369C Set up and produce hand-made box	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF369 Set up and produce hand-made box

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

produce TWO boxes in different styles and materials, at least one of which must have a lid, according to manufacturer’s and job specifications, enterprise procedures, listed performance criteria, and within the production timeframe.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

identify work health and safety (factors for making boxes

identify necessary board calliper for a box

determine the maximum calliper for a folded box

explain how to make inconspicuous corner reinforcements

identify appropriate covering material and style

determine style of box that is appropriate in line with client requirements

list recommended allowances in a book box

in slip cases, list techniques to reduce scuffing of a book cover

determine how to reduce corner bulk when using heavyweight board

list techniques used when cutting turn-ins for a rounded spine

explain need to cover the edge of a board before attaching the main covering

explain consequences of adhesives either too thick or too thin

explain the effect open time of an adhesive has on the covering process

list criteria used to evaluate a finished box and ensure a clean finished job.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the converting, binding and finishing field of work and include access to facilities, equipment and materials used to produce a hand-made box.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPCBF371 Decorate paper

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to set up and use a range of paper and edge decorating techniques including marbling, gilding, gauffering, staining, sprinkling, spraying, burnishing and paste paper.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Converting, Binding and Finishing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Prepare for job	1.1 Surface to be decorated is prepared 1.2 Edges are trimmed, scraped and sanded as appropriate to the technique being used 1.3 Appropriate size, mordant or glair is prepared and applied
2. Carry out marbling	2.1 Bath is prepared with gum or water as appropriate to technique being used 2.2 Equipment is selected and set up according to job and manufacturer’s specifications 2.3 Colours are mixed to correct consistency for required spread 2.4 Books are tied up if edges are to be marbled 2.5 Bath is prepared according to job specifications 2.6 Substrate is correctly dipped and removed, then rinsed and dried
3. Gild edges with leaf	3.1 Book is loaded into laying press 3.2 Red bole or black lead (graphite) is correctly applied and treated 3.3 Gold and glair are correctly applied and burnished
4. Gild edges mechanically	4.1 Substrate is loaded into press 4.2 Substrate is prepared according to technical requirements 4.3 Gilding machine is set up with appropriate pressure, heat and dwell time 4.4 Gilding foil is applied to substrate using correct technique 4.5 Appropriate additives are used if foil fails to take
5. Carry out gauffering	5.1 Design to be transferred is drawn up using correct technique 5.2 Tools are selected and prepared 5.3 Book is locked into laying press 5.4 Impressions are made ensuring even result
6. Carry out staining or sprinkling or spraying	6.1 Books or papers are positioned and clamped or weighted 6.2 Covering colour is prepared according to job specifications 6.3 Colour is applied with sponge, spray gun, roller or sprinkling brush as appropriate, ensuring even application and adequate time to dry
7. Apply graphite	7.1 Book is locked into laying press 7.2 Graphite powder is applied using the correct technique 7.3 Edges are burnished to required effect
8. Carry out burnishing	8.1 Book is locked into laying press 8.2 Bloodstone or agate tools are selected as appropriate 8.3 Beeswax is suppled in fine film or worked through waxed paper 8.4 Edges of book are burnished using appropriate pressure
9. Make paste paper	9.1 Paste is prepared to correct consistency and colour 9.2 Required patterns are created using brushes, combs, dies or pulling off

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	2.2, 2.5, 6.2	Recognises and interprets text to establish job requirements from information contained within relevant procedures and specifications
Get the work done	1.1-1.3, 2.1-2.6, 3.2, 3.3, 4.2-4.5, 5.1, 5.2, 5.4, 6.1-6.3, 7.2, 7.3, 8.2-8.4, 9.1, 9.2	Plans, identifies and assembles resources required to complete tasks Makes basic decisions in relation to choice of techniques, equipment and materials

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPCBF371 Decorate paper	ICPCF371C Decorate paper	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF371 Decorate paper

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

correctly decorate paper using any THREE processes OR using TWO processes of which one must be marbling or gilding. For each process, produce TWO jobs (if possible, using different sizes, styles and substrates), according to manufacturer’s and job specifications, enterprise procedures and listed performance criteria.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

identify work health and safety factors for using various methods of paper decoration

identify size/mordant/glair used for a particular process and its appropriate strength

explain FIVE methods of application, and describe where each is used

determine surface preparation timing before treatment

explain different gums used in the bath, and the correct consistency required of the bath

determine likely causes of blank spots on the substrate and explain importance of keeping the substrate free of dust

explain how to control of spread of colour

describe temperature affect on the marbling process

identify reasons for gold not sticking

explain the repair of a break in a gilt edge

describe methods of picking up gold leaf for edge gilding

determine the technique used for gilding in the round

explain the difference of antique gilding from a solid gilt edge

determine use of red bole or black lead with the gold

describe the technique used to obtain an even impression

explain the consequence of inappropriate pressure

list ways to ensure an even finish

explain how to minimise colour absorption in absorbent stocks

confirm methods to prevent colour appearing on an adjacent edge

list how correct consistency of graphite/paste mixture is determined

list ways an even coating is ensured

identify the most common fault with burnished edges

list steps to ensure a smooth result

list ways correct consistency for paste is determined

list ways colour fastness is ensured

explain techniques to produce different patterns or effects

identify manuals, safety and other documentation relevant to this task, where they are kept, and the information included in them.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the converting, binding and finishing field of work and include access to facilities, equipment and materials used to decorate paper.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPCBF381 Set up machine for complex laminating

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to set up a machine for a range of complex laminating processes including laminating reel to reel, sheet to reel and reel to sheet.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Converting, Binding and Finishing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Prepare for job	1.1 Job specifications are read and interpreted from job documentation or production control system 1.2 Set-up is planned and carried out correctly in minimum time with minimum wastage
2. Set up reel transportation system	2.1 Unwind reel is set up and adjusted according to job specifications 2.2 Webbing procedures are carried out 2.3 Web control system is set up and adjusted according to job specifications 2.4 Reels are spliced/joined according to job specifications 2.5 Rewind reel is set up and adjusted according to job specifications 2.6 Sheeter is set up and adjusted according to job specifications
3. Set up machine for complex laminating	3.1 Application system cylinder is set up and adjusted according to job specifications 3.2 Adhesive application system is set up and adjusted according to job specifications 3.3 Binding pressures are set up and adjusted according to job specifications 3.4 Drying system is set up and adjusted according to job specifications
4. Set up in-line unit(s)	4.1 Minor in-line printing/converting/binding unit(s) are set up for basic process(es) and adjusted according to machine requirements and job specifications 4.2 Assistance is given in set-up of major in-line printing/converting/binding unit(s)
5. Conduct sample run	5.1 Raw material to be used for sample is organised correctly 5.2 Machine is set up and operated to produce a specified sample according to work health and safety requirements, manufacturer’s specifications and enterprise procedures 5.3 Sample is visually inspected and/or tested or laboratory testing is organised according to enterprise procedures 5.4 Results are interpreted to determine adjustment requirements 5.5 Adjustment changes are carried out according to product and machine specifications

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 2.1, 2.3-2.6, 3.1-3.4, 4.1, 5.2, 5.5	Recognises and interprets text to establish job requirements from information contained within relevant procedures and specifications
Navigate the world of work	5.2, 5.3	Complies with legislative requirements and follows organisational policies and procedures relevant to own role
Interact with others	4.2	Cooperates with others as part of familiar routine activities, and contributes to specific activities requiring joint responsibility and accountability
Get the work done	1.2, 2.1-2.6, 3.1-3.4, 4.1, 5.1-5.5	Plans and organises familiar tasks Implements actions as per instructions, making adjustments if necessary Plans, identifies and assembles resources required to complete tasks Analyses results to decide on adjustments needed to achieve required outcomes Follows routine procedures for using digital technology by reading data from electronic monitoring and control systems

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPCBF381 Set up machine for complex laminating	ICPCF381C Set up machine for complex laminating	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF381 Set up machine for complex laminating

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

demonstrate all safety devices on the machine

correctly set up machine for TWO moisture, chemical and extrusion laminating processes. For each process set up a laminating machine (2 or more ply) to complete TWO jobs on different substrates, of different sizes (large/small formats including one in-line process) while demonstrating splicing techniques in minimum time according to manufacturer’s and job specifications, enterprise procedures and listed performance criteria (at least one machine used must be fully automated).

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

determine information concerning laminating requirements found in the job documentation or production control system, and how this information can be interpreted to ensure smooth workflow throughout the factory

describe elements to consider when planning a laminating sample

identify work health and safety factors for:

setting up the laminating machine

adjusting the machine, and prior to any readjustments

setting the drying system

identify webbing procedures commonly used in the transportation area

identify areas to consider when setting up the web control system

identify problem areas likely to occur when setting up the sheeter

explain methods of splicing a web on the laminating process

list checks to make when setting up (and adjusting) the application system cylinder

list checks to make when setting up (and adjusting) the adhesive application system

identify factors that determine setting of the binding pressures

identify the largest/smallest size sheet that can be processed on this machine

explain how to adapt the machine to facilitate smaller/larger stock

determine in-line units available for the laminating process

describe circumstances that require machine adjustment

explain quality aspects to consider in a completed laminating job, and items to check against the client sample

list steps to ensure important features of the production control system are addressed

identify machine manuals, safety and other documentation relevant to this task, where they are kept, and the information included in them.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the converting, binding and finishing field of work and include access to facilities, equipment and materials used for laminating.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPCBF382 Produce complex laminated product

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to produce complex laminated product, to monitor and adjust machinery, maintain transportation of the substrate, identify and rectify faults, and correctly clean and shut down equipment.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Converting, Binding and Finishing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Maintain operation of reel transportation system on web-fed machine	1.1 Reel stand is monitored and adjusted to ensure efficient continuous operation 1.2 Web control system is monitored and adjusted to ensure correct tension and accurate continuous positioning of the web for efficient operation 1.3 Substrate is added to the process according to job specifications
2. Maintain operation of reel delivery system on web-fed machine	2.1 Reel rewind section is monitored and adjusted to maintain correct tension and to ensure no marks, blemishes or damage to finished product 2.2 Substrate is removed from the process according to job specifications 2.3 Sheeting section is monitored and adjusted to ensure quality and efficient product delivery
3. Maintain complex laminating process	3.1 Registration of laminating is monitored and adjusted to ensure product quality meets the approved sample standard 3.2 Pressures are monitored and adjusted to ensure product quality meets the approved sample standard 3.3 Adhesion is monitored and adjusted to ensure product quality meets the approved sample standard
4. Maintain production processes	4.1 In-line printing/coating/converting/binding/finishing process(es) are monitored and adjusted to ensure product quality meets the approved sample standard 4.2 Production process is operated in association with fellow workers and according to enterprise procedures and planned daily schedule 4.3 Production is maintained according to work health and safety (WHS) requirements, manufacturer’s specifications and enterprise procedures 4.4 Manual and/or automatic control is used according to job specifications 4.5 Performance is monitored and verified using the process control system according to enterprise procedures 4.6 Production difficulties are anticipated and preventive action is taken to prevent occurrence by timely intervention 4.7 Process adjustments to eliminate problems are reported according to enterprise procedures 4.8 Faulty performance of equipment is identified and reported according to enterprise procedures 4.9 Waste is sorted according to enterprise procedures
5. Identify and rectify machine operating problem	5.1 Problems in laminating machine are identified and reported according to enterprise procedures 5.2 Adjustments or corrections are carried out according to specified procedures, and are consistent with operator’s skill level 5.3 Laminating machine operation is checked to ensure correct operation
6. Conduct shutdown of production process	6.1 Correct shutdown sequence is followed according to manufacturer’s specifications and enterprise procedures 6.2 Shutdown is conducted in association with fellow workers and in compliance with WHS requirements 6.3 Substrate waste is removed from operating area and recycled or disposed of, where required, according to regulatory requirements and enterprise procedures 6.4 Machine faults requiring repair are identified and reported to designated person according to enterprise procedures 6.5 Repair/adjustment is verified prior to resumption of operations
7. Clean laminating machine at end of run	7.1 Laminating machine is disengaged and cleaned ready for next run 7.2 Adhesive system is washed ready for next run and liquid waste is disposed of according to regulatory requirements and enterprise procedures 7.3 In-line printing/coating/converting/binding/finishing units are cleaned ready for next run 7.4 Reel feed, transportation and delivery systems are disengaged and cleaned ready for next run 7.5 Production records or other documentation are accurately completed where required by enterprise procedures

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.3, 2.2, 4.3, 4.4, 6.1	Recognises and interprets text to establish job requirements from information contained within relevant procedures and specifications
Writing	4.7, 4.8, 5.1, 6.4, 7.5	Enters routine data associated with production processes and enterprise procedures
Oral Communication	4.2, 4.7, 4.8, 5.1, 6.2, 6.4	Speaks clearly using appropriate vocabulary, tone and pace to report faults and discrepancies Participates effectively in spoken interactions to confirm or clarify requirements
Navigate the world of work	3.1-3.3, 4.1-4.3, 4.5, 4.7-4.9, 5.1, 5.2, 6.1-6.4, 7.1-7.5	Recognises and follows all procedures for operation and maintenance of equipment, incorporating regulatory requirements and enterprise procedures
Interact with others	4.2, 4.7, 4.8, 5.1, 6.2, 6.4	Cooperates with others as part of familiar, routine activities, and contributes to specific activities requiring joint responsibility and accountability Understands what to communicate, with whom and how, in routine work situations
Get the work done	1.1-1.3, 2.1-2.3, 3.1-3.3, 4.1-4.9, 5.1-5.3, 6.1-6.5, 7.5	Determines priorities and sequences steps involved in clearly defined, familiar tasks Recognises and anticipates an increasing range of familiar problems, their symptoms and causes; actively looking for early warning signs and implementing contingency plans Follows routine procedures for using digital technology by reading data from electronic monitoring and control systems

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPCBF382 Produce complex laminated product	ICPCF382C Produce complex laminated product	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF382 Produce complex laminated product

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

correctly produce a complex laminated product using any TWO of moisture, chemical and extrusion laminating processes. For each process, operate a laminating machine (2 or more ply) to complete TWO jobs on different substrates and of different sizes (large/small formats including one in-line process), while demonstrating splicing techniques in minimum time according to manufacturer’s and job specifications, enterprise procedures and listed performance criteria (at least one machine used must be fully automated).

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

explain work health and safety factors for:

operating web machine transport and delivery systems

maintaining the laminating process

maintaining complex in-line processes

shutting down and cleaning the machine

determine areas of the:

reel stand to monitor to ensure trouble-free operation

web control system to adjust to maintain correct web tension and positioning of the web

delivery system to observe to maintain tension

delivery system to observe to prevent damage to the finished product

in-line processes to monitor to ensure a quality product

machine that need regular cleaning

explain the process for correct and continuous feeding and delivery of substrate

list checks to make when substrate is removed from the machine

determine ways:

registration of laminating is assured

adjustment of the machine is achieved

pressure can be adjusted during production

determine areas of production to monitor to ensure trouble-free operation

identify laminating problems that may occur during operation of the machine

explain adjustments or correction procedures to ensure accurate operation of the process and to meet client requirements

list checks to make when correctly shutting down the machine

identify materials to clean from the machine

explain requirements to keep the machine clear of surface rust (condensation)

list recommended cleaning agents, and materials to be cleaned from the machine

identify production records to be kept or written up, and the information to include

determine quality aspects to consider in a completed laminated job

list steps to ensure important features of the production control system are followed

explain items to check against the client sample

identify machine manuals, safety and other documentation relevant to this task, where they are kept, and the information included in them.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the converting, binding and finishing field of work and include access to facilities, equipment and materials used to produce a laminated product.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPCBF391 Use electronic monitoring systems (converting and finishing)

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to use electronic monitoring systems for glue lines used in the container and carton sector of the industry, and for gatherers and folders used in the binding and finishing sector.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Converting, Binding and Finishing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Set up electronic monitoring system	1.1 Parameters are set according to job type and specifications and enterprise procedures 1.2 Monitoring system is positioned according to job type and specifications 1.3 Ejection system is positioned according to job type and specifications, where relevant 1.4 Marking system is positioned according to job type and specifications, where relevant 1.5 ‘Learn’ function is started to identify sheets and signatures, where relevant
2. Run job and monitor production	2.1 Glue line registration and glue application is monitored to ensure product conforms to job specifications 2.2 Machine is adjusted if the number of rejects exceeds specified limits 2.3 Reasons for stoppages are identified and corrected 2.4 Initial set-up parameters are monitored and reviewed to ensure smooth production of quality product
3. Review production data	3.1 Production rejects are monitored and causes identified 3.2 Overall data is reviewed at the end of the product run 3.3 Information on production documentation is recorded as required

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1-1.4, 2.1	Recognises and interprets text to establish job requirements from information contained within relevant procedures and specifications
Writing	3.3	Enters routine data associated with production processes according to organisational requirements
Navigate the world of work	1.1, 2.4	Recognises and follows all procedures for operation of equipment, incorporating regulatory requirements and enterprise procedures
Get the work done	1.1-1.5, 2.1-2.4, 3.1, 3.2	Determines priorities and sequences steps involved in clearly defined, familiar tasks Applies analytical processes to identify causes of production problems Follows routine procedures for using digital technology by reading data from electronic monitoring and control systems

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPCBF391 Use electronic monitoring systems (converting and finishing)	ICPCF391C Use electronic monitoring systems (converting and finishing)	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF391 Use electronic monitoring systems (converting and finishing)

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

correctly set up and use electronic monitoring systems for glue lines, gatherers and folders for TWO different jobs (preferably of different sizes and substrates), according to manufacturer’s and job specifications, enterprise procedures and listed performance criteria

demonstrate an ability to retrieve information from the electronic system.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

explain work health and safety factors for setting up and operating electronic monitoring systems

explain importance of distance between cartons on the machine for production and for the operation of the electronic monitoring system, as well as checking the ejector (or marker) for correct operation

explain different carton types and substrates, and the effect on the amount and position of glue required for different carton types

describe the result of too much or too little glue, and explain the correction process

describe the result of an incorrectly positioned glue line and explain the process to adjust the position with respect to the length of the glue flap

determine what machine faults are registered on the EMS

list parts of the folding/gluing system that cause the monitoring system to reject product

list ways of ensuring the EMS is ejecting/marking only faulty cartons

identify parts of the machine to adjust if reject cartons are not correctly identified and culled

list faults likely to trigger the signature or sheet monitoring system

identify the cause of common faults and how can they be avoided and corrected

explain quality principles behind the use of electronic monitoring

explain work procedures to implement to minimise faults

identify production records to be kept or written up, and the information to be included

list steps to ensure important features of the EMS are followed

identify machine manuals, safety and other documentation relevant to this task, where they are kept, and the information included in them.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the converting, binding and finishing field of work and include access to facilities, equipment and materials used with electronic monitoring systems.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPCBF392 Produce product on window gluer

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to produce a range of different size jobs on the window gluer.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Converting, Binding and Finishing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Maintain operation of transportation system	1.1 Feeder is monitored and adjusted to ensure continuous and efficient feeding of cartons to the machine 1.2 Carton pick-up and transport system is monitored and adjusted to ensure accurate continuous carton handling and efficient operation 1.3 Transfer systems are monitored and adjusted to ensure correct and continuous carton handling and efficient operation
2. Maintain operation of processes	2.1 Delivery is monitored and adjusted to ensure quality and efficient carton delivery 2.2 Registration of gluing is monitored and adjusted to ensure product quality meets the approved sample standard 2.3 Adhesion is monitored and adjusted to ensure product quality meets the approved sample standard
3. Maintain basic rotary cutting process	3.1 Cutting edges and knife condition are monitored and adjusted to ensure product quality meets the approved sample standard 3.2 Cutting pressures are monitored and adjusted to ensure product quality meets the approved sample standard
4. Maintain production process	4.1 Production process is operated in association with fellow workers and according to enterprise procedures and planned daily schedule 4.2 Production is maintained according to work health and safety (WHS) requirements, manufacturer’s specifications and enterprise procedures 4.3 Performance is monitored and verified using the process control system according to enterprise procedures 4.4 Production difficulties are anticipated and preventive action is taken to prevent occurrence by timely intervention 4.5 Process adjustments to eliminate problems are reported according to enterprise procedures 4.6 Faulty performance of equipment is identified and reported according to enterprise procedures 4.7 Waste is sorted according to procedures
5. Identify and rectify problems	5.1 Problems in window gluing machine operation are identified and reported according to enterprise procedures 5.2 Adjustments or corrections are carried out according to enterprise procedures 5.3 Problems in film cutting and application operation are identified and rectified according to enterprise procedures
6. Conduct shutdown of production process	6.1 Correct shutdown sequence is followed according to manufacturer’s specifications and enterprise procedures 6.2 Shutdown is conducted in association with fellow workers and in compliance with WHS requirements 6.3 Glue system is washed ready for next run and liquid waste is disposed of according to regulatory requirements and enterprise procedures 6.4 Cutting devices are checked and sharpened if needed 6.5 Waste cartons are removed from operating area and recycled or disposed of, where required, according to regulatory requirements and enterprise procedures 6.6 Machine faults requiring repair are identified and reported to designated person according to enterprise procedures 6.7 Repair/adjustment is verified prior to resumption of operations 6.8 Production records or other documentation are accurately completed where required by enterprise procedures

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	4.2, 6.1	Recognises text within job specifications and follows written instructions Ensures accuracy of information according to written instructions
Writing	4.5, 4.6, 6.6, 6.8	Records information related to outcomes of job according to organisational requirements
Oral Communication	4.1, 4.5, 4.6, 5.1, 6.2, 6.6	Speaks clearly using appropriate vocabulary, tone and pace to report faults and discrepancies Participates effectively in spoken interactions to confirm or clarify requirements
Navigate the world of work	2.1-2.3, 3.1, 3.2, 4.1-4.3, 4.5-4.7, 5.1-5.3, 6.1-6.3, 6.5, 6.6, 6.8	Complies with legislative requirements and follows organisational policies and procedures relevant to own role
Interact with others	4.1, 4.5, 4.6, 5.1, 6.2	Follows accepted practices and protocols for reporting issues to supervisors Cooperates with others as part of familiar routine activities, and contributes to specific activities requiring joint responsibility and accountability
Get the work done	1.1-1.3, 2.1-2.3, 3.1, 3.3, 4.1-4.4, 4.6, 4.7, 5.1-5.3, 6.1-6.8	Determines priorities and sequences steps involved in clearly defined, familiar tasks Recognises and anticipates an increasing range of familiar problems, their symptoms and causes; actively looking for early warning signs and implementing contingency plans Follows routine procedures for using digital technology by reading data from electronic monitoring and control systems

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPCBF392 Produce product on window gluer	ICPCF392C Produce product on window gluer	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF392 Produce product on window gluer

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

complete different size jobs on the window gluer, including 1, 2 and 3 cycle operate and dual-feed, according to job specifications, listed performance criteria and within the production timeframe.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

explain work health and safety factors for:

setting up and/or operating machine delivery systems

using the window facer machine

adjusting/correcting the machine

identify areas of the:

feeder to monitor to ensure trouble-free operation

machine to continuously observe to ensure smooth, trouble-free operation

gluing and film cutting process to monitor to ensure product quality

explain adjustment of the glue application to ensure product quality

determine segments of quality assurance inspected at the completion of the sample run, and in a completed job to meet client requirements

explain communication to instigate if the job does not coincide with the sample

list part(s) of the machine to adjust if window film is cut/slit incorrectly

explain factors that cause poor glue adhesion on cartons

list key tasks to correctly shut down the machine

explain ways finished work is prepared for the next process

identify areas of the machine that need regular cleaning, and materials to clean from the machine.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the converting, binding and finishing field of work and include access to relevant facilities, equipment and materials used to produce a range of different size jobs on the window gluer.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPCBF393 Set up machine for envelope manufacture

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to set up a machine to cut and add patches during the manufacture of envelopes.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Converting, Binding and Finishing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Calibrate and adjust settings	1.1 All details required for the job are checked and confirmed against job specifications 1.2 Correct materials are checked and available for the job 1.3 Adhesives are selected that are appropriate for the substrate, application process and machine 1.4 Work area is made safe and prepared for production according to safety requirements 1.5 Window cutting and patch unit settings are set according to job specifications 1.6 Measurement settings are checked thoroughly against job specifications before production is commenced 1.7 Window position and size are set to meet requirements to ensure the machine runs efficiently and safely 1.8 Wastage is monitored, kept to a minimum and correctly disposed of according to enterprise quality standards 1.9 Process is monitored to maintain quality and identify opportunities for improvement
2. Confirm quality	2.1 A sample is produced and checked for conformance with quality standards, and adjustments made if required 2.2 Efficiency, quality and output rate of production run are monitored for problems, and any deficiencies resolved 2.3 Any machine faults are reported to appropriate responsible person 2.4 Locations of all emergency shutdown buttons and triggers are known

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 1.5, 1.6	Recognises and interprets text to establish job requirements from information contained within relevant procedures and specifications
Writing	2.3	Records information related to outcomes of job according to organisational requirements
Oral Communication	2.3	Speaks clearly using appropriate vocabulary, tone and pace to report faults and discrepancies
Navigate the world of work	1.4, 1.7, 1.8, 2.1, 2.4	Complies with legislative requirements and follows organisational policies and procedures relevant to own role, particularly with respect to workplace safety and emergency procedures
Interact with others	2.3	Follows accepted practices and protocols for reporting issues to supervisors
Get the work done	1.1, 1.2, 1.4, 1.5, 1.8, 1.9, 2.1, 2.2	Determines priorities and sequences steps involved in clearly defined, routine tasks Implements actions as per instructions, monitoring results and making adjustments if necessary Plans, identifies and assembles resources required to complete tasks

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPCBF393 Set up machine for envelope manufacture	ICPCF393C Set up machine for envelope manufacture	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF393 Set up machine for envelope manufacture

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

set up window cutting and patching units and produce a clean window cut with correct gum position, even level patch size and position, according to job specifications, enterprise procedures and performance criteria, and within the production timeframe

demonstrate all safety devices on the machine.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

describe correct procedures for set-up according to health and safety and workplace requirements

explain factors that determine selection of materials and adhesives

explain enterprise procedures for quality standards, reporting faults and emergencies

identify principles of envelope manufacture and setting window cutting and patching units

list common faults associated with window cutting and patching.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the converting, binding and finishing field of work and include access to relevant facilities and envelope manufacturing equipment with window cutting and patching units.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPCBF395 Set up and operate folder gluer machine

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to set up and operate a folder gluer machine with minimum downtime or wastage.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Converting, Binding and Finishing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Set up and adjust units	1.1 All details required for the job are checked and confirmed against job specifications 1.2 Correct materials are checked and available for the job 1.3 Adhesives appropriate for the substrate, application process and machine are selected 1.4 Work area is made safe and ready for production according to safety requirements 1.5 Folding guides and pressing plates are set to required dimensions for the job 1.6 Feeder, folding part, gluer, stacker, belts, vacuums and glue applicators are clean, clear and ready for use 1.7 Settings are checked against job specifications before production commences
2. Monitor throughput	2.1 Machine is run at speed required to produce a quality product 2.2 Machine is jogged to ensure folds and glue are in correct position 2.3 Guide positions are monitored to ensure adhesive is applied evenly and in correct position 2.4 Paper moisture is monitored and correct moisture levels are maintained 2.5 Blank spacing is controlled and product spacing and flow are maintained for efficient operation 2.6 Folds are correctly placed and the product stacks correctly 2.7 Glues dry at correct rates for the substrate
3. Confirm quality of output	3.1 A sample from the machine is selected and checked to ensure it conforms to required quality standards 3.2 Adjustments are made when standards are not met 3.3 Each process is monitored and minor adjustments are made during production, if required 3.4 Samples are continuously monitored for defects, and defects are removed 3.5 Efficiency, quality and output rate of production run are monitored for problems, and any deficiencies resolved 3.6 Wastage is monitored, kept to a minimum and correctly disposed of according to enterprise quality standards 3.7 Locations of all emergency shutdown buttons and triggers are known

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 1.7	Recognises and interprets text to establish job requirements from information contained within relevant procedures and specifications
Navigate the world of work	1.6, 3.1, 3.6, 3.7	Complies with legislative requirements and follows organisational policies and procedures relevant to own role, particularly with respect to workplace safety and emergency procedures
Get the work done	1.1-1.5, 1.7, 2.1, 2.2, 2.4, 2.5, 3.1-3.6	Determines priorities and sequences steps involved in clearly defined, routine tasks Plans, identifies and assembles resources required to complete tasks Implements actions as per instructions, monitoring results and making adjustments if necessary Responds to predictable problems and implements standard or logical solutions

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPCBF395 Set up and operate folder gluer machine	ICPCF395C Set up and operate folder gluer machine	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF395 Set up and operate folder gluer machine

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

correctly set up and operate a folder gluer machine according to job specifications, performance criteria, and within the production timeframe with minimum downtime or wastage.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

list common faults associated with folder gluer machines, the causes, and corrective measures

describe correct procedures for set-up according to health and safety and workplace requirements

explain types of adhesive used and why they are chosen.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the converting, binding and finishing field of work and include access to a folder gluer machine and other special purpose tools, equipment and materials.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPCBF396 Set up in-line scoring, folding and gluing machine for envelope manufacture

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to set up in-line scoring, folding and gluing machines used in the manufacture of envelopes.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Converting, Binding and Finishing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Set up and adjust units	1.1 All details required for job are checked and confirmed against job specifications 1.2 Correct materials are checked and made available for the job 1.3 Adhesives appropriate for the substrate, application process, and machine are selected 1.4 Work area is made safe and ready for production according to safety requirements 1.5 Blades are sharp and fitted as necessary, with units calibrated according to job specifications 1.6 Settings are checked against job specifications before production is commenced 1.7 Adhesives are positioned correctly and applied evenly
2. Confirm quality of output	2.1 A sample from the machine is selected and checked to ensure it conforms to required quality standards 2.2 Adjustments are made when standards are not met 2.3 Each in-line process is monitored and minor adjustments made during production, as required 2.4 Samples are continuously monitored for defects, and removed where relevant 2.5 Efficiency, quality and output rate of the production run are monitored for problems, and any deficiencies resolved 2.6 Wastage is monitored, kept to a minimum and correctly disposed of according to enterprise quality standards 2.7 Locations of all emergency shutdown buttons and triggers are known

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 1.5, 1.6	Recognises and evaluates text to establish job requirements from information contained within relevant systems
Navigate the world of work	1.4, 2.1, 2.6, 2.7	Complies with legislative requirements and follows organisational policies and procedures relevant to own role, particularly with respect to workplace safety and emergency procedures
Get the work done	1.1-1.7, 2.1-2.6	Takes responsibility for planning, organising and completing tasks according to organisational requirements Plans, identifies and assembles resources required to complete tasks Implements actions as per instructions, monitoring results and making adjustments if necessary Responds to predictable problems and implements standard or logical solutions

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPCBF396 Set up in-line scoring, folding and gluing machine for envelope manufacture	ICPCF396C Set up in-line scoring, folding and gluing machine for envelope manufacture	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF396 Set up in-line scoring, folding and gluing machine for envelope manufacture

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

correctly set up machinery and produce scoring, folding and gumming that meets job specifications for envelope dimensions, envelope squareness, flap dimensions, throat size, gum position, gum level and gum evenness according to job specifications, performance criteria, and within the production timeframe.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

list common faults associated with folder gluer machines, the causes, and corrective measures

explain correct set-up procedures to meet work health and safety requirements and enterprise requirements

describe different types of adhesives used

describe the process used to check quality.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the converting, binding and finishing field of work and include access to an in-line scoring, folding and gluing machine used in the manufacture of envelopes.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPCBF398 Set up in-line bottom making machine for sack or bag manufacture

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to set up in-line bottom making machines for the manufacture of sacks or bags with minimum downtime.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Pre-requisite Unit

ICPCBF298	Run and monitor sack and bag machines

Unit Sector

Converting, Binding and Finishing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Set up and adjust units	1.1 Job specifications are obtained and read, and tools and transfer segments are available for set up 1.2 Draw rollers and nip rollers and transfer segments are positioned correctly and pressures calibrated with timing set 1.3 Gears are changed and correctly set up 1.4 Knife assembly for guillotining and serration measurements are set, and accurate timing assigned 1.5 Pre-creaser blades are positioned in relation to one another and angular timing fixed 1.6 Centre grippers are correct in size, pressures and positioning 1.7 Vacuum holes are correctly positioned, and opening cylinder is set up and timed 1.8 Bottom forming guides and bottom paste unit are set up 1.9 Bottom closing and patch units are calibrated 1.10 Delivery chute and bag counter are prepared and ready
2. Set up in-line units	2.1 Correct perforation unit or perforation impression roller is set up 2.2 Pick-up rollers are installed and pressure and time are fixed 2.3 Tucking position, timing and depth are correctly set 2.4 Glue patch applicator or glue impression roller is set up according to job specifications 2.5 Press roller is positioned and pressured, and timing is programmed 2.6 Doctor blades and hot melt unit are set up 2.7 Timing between all units is checked for conformance with job specifications 2.8 Gears are changed according to job specifications 2.9 Settings and tensions of the raw material unwind and brake assembly are correct according to job specifications
3. Check availability of materials	3.1 Cut tubes are available and stacked ready 3.2 Adhesives are appropriate for the substrate, application process and machine 3.3 Correct procedures for control of materials are followed
4. Check set up	4.1 Work area is safe and ready for production according to safety requirements 4.2 All details required for the job are checked again and confirmed against job specifications 4.3 Settings are checked against specifications before production is commenced 4.4 Machine is stepped to ensure scores and folds are in correct position, and paper tension is corrected/adjusted

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 2.4, 2.7-2.9, 3.3, 4.2, 4.3	Recognises and interprets information in specifications to establish or confirm job requirements
Numeracy	1.7	Recognises and compares familiar basic metric measurements and quantities
Navigate the world of work	3.3, 4.1	Complies with health and safety requirements and follows organisational policies and procedures relevant to own role
Get the work done	1.1-1.7, 1.10, 2.1-2.9, 3.1-3.3, 4.1-4.4	Takes responsibility for planning, organising and completing tasks according to organisational requirements Plans, identifies and assembles resources required to complete tasks Makes routine decisions about appropriate equipment and materials by referring to job instructions

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPCBF398 Set up in-line bottom making machine for sack or bag manufacture	ICPCF398C Set up in-line bottom making machine for sack or bag manufacture	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF398 Set up in-line bottom making machine for sack or bag manufacture

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

correctly set up in-line bottom making machines for the manufacture of sacks or bags in accordance with job specifications, performance criteria, and with minimum downtime.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

list common faults associated with folder gluer machines, the causes, and methods to correct them

explain correct set-up procedures to meet work health and safety and enterprise requirements

explain the procedure for blade setup.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the converting, binding and finishing field of work and include access to scoring, folding, and gluing machinery used in the manufacture of sacks and bags.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPCBF399 Set up in-line tube making machine for sack or bag manufacture

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to set up in-line tube making machines for the manufacture of sacks or bags with minimum downtime.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Pre-requisite Unit

ICPCBF298	Run and monitor sack and bag machines

Unit Sector

Converting, Binding and Finishing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Set up and adjust units	1.1 Job specifications are obtained and read and tools are available for set up 1.2 Draw rollers are positioned correctly and pressures calibrated 1.3 Gears are changed and correctly set up 1.4 Knife assembly for guillotining and serration measurements are set and accurate timing assigned 1.5 Nip roller position, timing and pressures are set 1.6 Pre-creaser blades are positioned in relation to one another, and angular timing fixed 1.7 Centre grippers are correct in size, pressures and positioning 1.8 Vacuum holes are correctly positioned and timed
2. Prepare materials for manufacturing process	2.1 Substrate reels are positioned in correct unwind direction and in correct order, and web position, tension and web aligner are set up 2.2 Reels are loaded according to work health and safety requirements, manufacturer’s specifications and enterprise procedures 2.3 Adhesives are appropriate for the substrate, application process and machine 2.4 Correct procedures for control of materials are followed
3. Check set up	3.1 Work area is safe and ready for production according to safety requirements 3.2 All details required for the job are checked again and confirmed against job specifications 3.3 Settings are checked against specifications before production starts 3.4 Machine is stepped to ensure scores and folds are in correct position and paper tension is corrected/adjusted

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 2.2, 3.2, 3.3	Recognises and interprets information in specifications to establish or confirm job requirements
Numeracy	1.7	Recognises and compares familiar basic metric measurements and quantities
Navigate the world of work	2.2, 2.4, 3.1	Complies with health and safety requirements and follows organisational policies and procedures relevant to own role
Get the work done	1.1-1.6, 2.1-2.3, 3.1-3.4	Takes responsibility for planning and organising own workload, identifying ways of sequencing and combining elements for greater efficiency Plans, identifies and assembles resources required to complete tasks Makes routine decisions about appropriate equipment and materials by referring to job instructions

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPCBF399 Set up in-line tube making machine for sack or bag manufacture	ICPCF399C Set up in-line tube making machine for sack or bag manufacture	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF399 Set up in-line tube making machine for sack or bag manufacture

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

correctly set up in-line tube making machines for the manufacture of sacks or bags in accordance with job specifications and performance criteria, and with minimum downtime.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

list common faults associated with folder gluer machines, the causes and corrective measures

determine requirements to ensure centre grippers are correct in size and positioning

explain adjustment requirements for blades and guillotine.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the converting, binding and finishing field of work and include access to:

relevant facilities, equipment and materials

in-line scoring, folding, and gluing machinery used in manufacture of sacks and bags.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPCBF406 Set up and load in-line smart card machine

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the performance outcomes, skills and knowledge required to set up, adjust and load an in-line smart card machine in preparation for production.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Converting, Binding and Finishing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Set and adjust sections of machine	1.1 All details required for the job are checked and confirmed according to job specifications 1.2 Correct materials are checked and available for the job 1.3 All light sensors and proximity sensors are operating 1.4 Mills are set to right cavity depth for chips 1.5 Tape indexer and die are cleaned and chip registration is correct 1.6 Implanting module is set up and registered and adhesives are available and dispenser is clean and ready 1.7 Machine and in-line components are initialised
2. Confirm computer settings	2.1 Encoder settings are correct and conform to job specifications 2.2 Tester settings are correct and conform to job specifications 2.3 Setting on the computer that controls entire machine is correctly set
3. Set up printer unit	3.1 Print head is set up and adjusted according to job specifications 3.2 Ink and solvent levels are checked and refilled if necessary 3.3 Settings are selected according to job specifications 3.4 Drying is checked as sufficient to key ink to the substrate 3.5 Printer is set up according to work health and safety (WHS) guidelines
4. Load machine	4.1 Substrate is prepared according to job specifications 4.2 Substrate is positioned correctly to the machine 4.3 Faulty material is visually identified and removed according to WHS requirements and enterprise procedures 4.4 Cards are loaded according to WHS requirements and manufacturer’s specifications and enterprise procedures 4.5 Settings are checked according to job specifications before production starts 4.6 Work area is safe and ready for production according to safety requirements

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 2.1, 2.2, 4.1, 4.4, 4.5	Recognises and interprets text to confirm work requirements from information contained within relevant specifications and standards
Numeracy	1.4	Uses mathematical processes to determine correct settings for job
Navigate the world of work	3.5, 4.3, 4.4, 4.6	Recognises and follows organisational and regulatory requirements associated with own role
Get the work done	1.1-1.7, 2.1-2.3, 3.1-3.5, 4.1-4.6	Determines priorities and sequences steps involved in familiar tasks Implements actions as per instructions, making slight adjustments if necessary Plans, identifies and assembles resources required to complete tasks Follows routine procedures for using digital technology by reading data from electronic monitoring and control systems

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPCBF406 Set up and load in-line smart card machine	ICPCF406C Set up and load in-line smart card machine	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF406 Set up and load in-line smart card machine

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

correctly set up and adjust an in-line smart card machine and load it in preparation for production in accordance with job specifications and listed performance criteria

demonstrate all safety devices on the machine.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

describe production quality requirements

explain waste disposal procedures for faulty material and procedures for correct handling of material

explain important features of the smart card printing and encoding machine

explain principles of printing and ink usage.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the converting, binding and finishing field of work and include access to:

special purpose tools

smart card printing and encoding machine.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPCBF407 Operate a smart card machine and pack product

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to operate a smart card machine, monitor production for problems, correctly pack product and clear the machine of materials and wastage.

It applies to individuals who have some responsibility for preparation, monitoring and operation of machinery and equipment, maintaining production and quality of output.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Converting, Binding and Finishing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Monitor production process	1.1 All details required for the job are checked and confirmed against job specifications 1.2 Supply of materials throughout run is maintained 1.3 Machine is run at optimum speed for maintaining quality outputs 1.4 Samples from the machine are selected and checked to ensure they conform to job specifications 1.5 Machines are adjusted to maintain quality of outputs
2. Maintain quality	2.1 Correct procedures for removal of waste are followed according to enterprise procedures 2.2 Samples are continuously monitored for defects, and defects are removed 2.3 Efficiency, quality and output rate of production run are monitored for problems and any deficiencies resolved 2.4 Milled cavities are checked to ensure right cavity depth for the chips 2.5 Die cuts are correct and meet quality standards 2.6 Correct amount of glue is applied by the dispensing station 2.7 Chips are correctly inserted into the cavity by the implanting module 2.8 Print quality meets standards in the job specifications or sample
3. Code and check chips	3.1 Encoder settings are correct and conform to job specifications 3.2 Tester settings are correct and conform to job specifications 3.3 Details of any cards needing to be remade are entered into computer console
4. Monitor printer unit	4.1 Ink and solvent levels are monitored and filled when required and stock levels are recorded according to enterprise procedures 4.2 Quality of inkjet is monitored to ensure it conforms to job specifications 4.3 Chemicals are handled according to work health and safety (WHS) requirements 4.4 Drying is checked as sufficient to key ink to the substrate
5. Identify problems	5.1 Faults that affect quality of the cards are identified and rectified 5.2 Problems that reduce rate of output are identified and fixed 5.3 Faults that affect efficient operation of equipment are identified and deleted
6. Unload and pack cards	6.1 Cards are unloaded according to WHS requirements, manufacturer’s specifications and enterprise procedures 6.2 Reconciliation and final quality check are documented 6.3 Cards are prepared (stacked, wrapped and labelled) for next process according to manufacturer’s specifications and enterprise procedures 6.4 Wastage is recorded and disposed of according to enterprise procedures
7. Shut down machine	7.1 Dispensing needle is moved to the safety position and solvent is checked to ensure needle coverage 7.2 Inkjet is cleaned and shutdown according to manufacturer’s specifications 7.3 Encoding computer is shut down correctly to ensure no loss of data 7.4 Milling vacuum is emptied and cleaned 7.5 Machine and work area are cleaned according to enterprise procedures 7.6 Air supply is turned off 7.7 Waste chemicals are handled and disposed of according to WHS requirements

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 1.4, 2.8, 3.1, 3.2, 4.2	Recognises and interprets text to confirm work requirements from information in specifications and organisational documents Checks settings on equipment to confirm accuracy
Writing	4.1, 6.2-6.4	Completes records and labels using correct format and language
Numeracy	4.1	Uses basic mathematical formulae to calculate stock and wastage levels
Navigate the world of work	2.1, 4.1, 4.3, 6.1, 6.3, 6.4, 7.5, 7.7	Recognises and follows organisational and regulatory requirements associated with own role
Get the work done	1.1-1.5, 2.1-2.8, 3.1-3.3, 5.1-5.3, 6.1-6.4, 7.1-7.7	Takes responsibility for planning. organising and implementing tasks monitoring output and making adjustments if necessary Recognises and takes responsibility for addressing predictable, and some less predictable, problems in familiar work contexts Plans, identifies and assembles resources required to complete tasks Follows routine procedures for using digital technology by reading data from electronic monitoring and control systems

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPCBF407 Operate a smart card machine and pack product	ICPCF407C Operate a smart card machine and pack product	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF407 Operate a smart card machine and pack product

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

operate a smart card machine and produce cards for TWO different jobs according to job specifications and within the production timeframe

demonstrate all safety devices on the smart card printing and encoding machine.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

describe operation of the card printing unit

describe operation of the card encoding unit

identify production quality requirements

describe waste disposal procedures

describe correct material handling procedures

list principles of printing and ink usage.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the converting, binding and finishing field of work and include access to:

smart card printing and encoding machine

special purpose tools, equipment and materials.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPCBF410 Set up machine for complex carton folding and gluing

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to set up and adjust a machine for complex carton folding and gluing to maintain the production process.

It applies to individuals who have limited responsibility for preparation of materials and equipment in accordance with job specifications and procedures, and ensuring quality of output.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Converting, Binding and Finishing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Prepare for job	1.1 Read and interpret job requirements from job documentation or production control system 1.2 Set-up is planned and carried out correctly in minimum time with minimum wastage
2. Set up carton blank transportation system	2.1 Feeder is set up and adjusted according to job specifications 2.2 Carton blank pick-up and transportation system is set up and adjusted according to job specifications 2.3 Transfer systems are set up and adjusted according to job specifications
3. Set up machine for complex carton folding/gluing	3.1 Folding units are set up and adjusted according to job specifications 3.2 Folding rollers/belts/rails are set up and adjusted according to job specifications 3.3 Gluing system is set up and adjusted according to job specifications using glue wheel and/or multiple glue heads
4. Set up carton delivery system	4.1 Delivery is set up and adjusted according to job specifications 4.2 Substrate is removed from process according to job specifications 4.3 Carton transfer and control system is set up and adjusted according to job specifications
5. Conduct sample run	5.1 Material to be used for sample is organised correctly 5.2 Machine is set up and operated according to work health and safety requirements, manufacturer’s specifications and enterprise procedures to produce a specified sample 5.3 Sample is visually inspected and/or tested for accuracy of folds, fibre tear, opening force, and fluff and glue placement according to enterprise procedures
6. Readjust settings	6.1 Results are interpreted to determine adjustment requirements 6.2 Adjustments are carried out according to product and machine specifications

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 2.1-2.3, 3.1-3.3, 4.1-4.3, 5.2, 6.2	Recognises and interprets text to confirm work requirements from information contained in specifications, organisational procedures and control systems
Numeracy	1.1, 3.1, 4.3	Interprets and comprehends mathematical information in job documentation or control system
Navigate the world of work	5.2, 5.3	Recognises and follows organisational and regulatory requirements associated with own role
Get the work done	1.1, 1.2, 2.1-2.3, 3.1-3.3, 4.1-4.3, 5.1-5.3, 6.1, 6.2	Sequences and schedules steps required to complete tasks, monitors implementation and makes adjustments as necessary Uses analytical processes to interpret relevant information and decide on adjustments needed to achieve required outcomes Plans, identifies and assembles resources required to complete tasks Follows routine procedures for using digital technology by reading data from electronic monitoring and control systems

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPCBF410 Set up machine for complex carton folding and gluing	ICPCF410C Set up machine for complex carton folding and gluing	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF410 Set up machine for complex carton folding and gluing

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

set up at least THREE crash lock, six-corner and specialty work carton jobs using different carton sizes and weights, which include use of multiple gluing units, according to manufacturer’s and job specifications and enterprise procedures.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

Documentation

identify information concerning folding requirements found in the job documentation or production control system, and how it is interpreted to ensure smooth workflow throughout the factory

list factors to consider when planning a folding sample

Sheet transportation and delivery systems

explain work health and safety (WHS) factors for setting folder transportation and delivery systems

identify areas of the carton blank transportation system to monitor to ensure trouble-free operation

list parts of the carton blank pick-up system to adjust to ensure accurate and continuous sheet handling

identify areas of the delivery system to observe to maintain neat delivery of finished work and to prevent damage to the finished product

explain checks required when substrate is removed from the machine

Machine setting for complex folding and gluing

explain WHS factors for setting and/or adjusting the folding unit

identify the largest/smallest size carton blank that can be processed on this machine

describe ways the machine can be adapted to facilitate smaller/larger stock

identify accuracy of a carton blank entering folding rollers

describe causes of scratching/scuffing of substrate during transportation

identify machine speed variations

describe problems that can be expected if:

the machine is running too fast

the machine rollers are set too loose

there is too much roller pressure

the delivery system is not set correctly

identify how correct roller pressure is determined for a given job

describe how roller pressures checks are made

describe required adjustments if the carton blank is out-of-square

list reasons for the sheet being out-of-square

describe adjustment required to eliminate smudging/scuffing on carton blanks

describe adjustment required if the sheet will not leave the folding unit

In-line processes

list necessary steps to set up gluing units

describe how a neat and clean gluing job is achieved

identify adhesive used in the gluing unit and how length of the glue line is adjusted

Checking and adjustment

identify causes of out-of-square folding and how they are rectified

list segments of quality assurance inspected at sample run completion

identify areas of the machine to adjust if carton blank is creasing

identify areas of the machine to adjust if carton blank is not entering the machine

explain items to check against client sample

Information sources

identify machine manuals and safety documentation relevant to this task, where they are kept, and the information included in them.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the converting, binding and finishing field of work and include access to:

Royal 40, Bobst Media or Bobst Domino machine, which includes multiple gluing units

relevant materials and equipment.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPCBF425 Set up machine for complex flat-bed die cutting or embossing

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to set up and adjust machinery to produce complex flat-bed die cutting or embossing.

It applies to individuals working in a printing environment, performing tasks specific to cartons and corrugating that involve set-up of machinery operations and conducting sample runs.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Converting, Binding and Finishing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Prepare job	1.1 Job specifications are read and interpreted from job documentation or production control system 1.2 Set-up is planned and carried out correctly in minimum time with minimum wastage 1.3 Availability of all job related components is checked
2. Prepare flat-bed die cutting or embossing devices	2.1 Appropriate cutting devices or dies are selected and secured to machine according to job specifications 2.2 Cutting devices or dies are registered and proofed according to job specifications 2.3 Cutting devices or dies are correctly mounted
3. Set up delivery systems	3.1 Delivery systems are set up and adjusted according to job specifications 3.2 Substrate is removed from process according to job specifications
4. Set up machine for complex flat-bed die cutting or embossing	4.1 Flat-bed cutting devices are set up and adjusted according to job specifications 4.2 Cutting pressures are set up and adjusted according to job specifications 4.3 Machine lays are set to correct position to register
5. Set up in-line units	5.1 Minor in-line printing/converting/binding units are set up for basic processes and adjusted according to machine requirements and job specifications 5.2 Assistance is given in set-up of major in-line printing/converting/binding units
6. Conduct sample run	6.1 Material to be used for sample is organised correctly 6.2 Machine is set up and operated to produce a specified sample according to work health and safety (WHS) requirements, manufacturer’s specifications and enterprise procedures 6.3 Sample is visually inspected and/or tested, or laboratory testing is organised, according to enterprise procedures 6.4 Results are interpreted to determine adjustment requirements 6.5 Adjustments are carried out according to product and machine specifications

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 2.1, 2.2, 4.1, 4.2, 5.1, 6.2, 6.3, 6.5	Recognises and interprets text to confirm work requirements from information contained in specifications, organisational procedures and control systems
Oral Communication	5.2	Participates effectively in spoken interactions to confirm or clarify understanding
Numeracy	1.1	Estimates, accurately measures and calculates quantities, including areas and volumes, using relevant routine formulae
Navigate the world of work	6.2, 6.3	Recognises and follows explicit and implicit protocols and meets expectations associated with own role
Interact with others	6.2	Cooperates with others as part of familiar routine activities, and contributes to specific activities requiring joint responsibility and accountability
Get the work done	1.1-1.3, 2.1-2.3, 3.1, 3.2, 4.1-4.3, 5.1, 6.1-6.5	Determines priorities and sequences steps involved in clearly defined tasks Implements actions as per instructions, making slight adjustments if necessary Plans, identifies and assembles resources required to complete complex tasks

Range of Conditions

This section specifies different work environments and conditions that may affect performance. Essential operating conditions that may be present (depending on the work situation, needs of the candidate, accessibility of the item, and local industry and regional contexts) are included.

Delivery systems MUST include EITHER:	reel OR sheet.
Setting up and adjusting MUST include EITHER:	unwind and rewind reels webbing procedures web control system splicing/joining reels OR feeder and delivery system sheet pick-up and transportation system transfer and control system folder and sheeter.

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPCBF425 Set up machine for complex flat-bed die cutting or embossing	ICPCF425C Set up machine for complex flat-bed die cutting or embossing	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF425 Set up machine for complex flat-bed die cutting or embossing

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

demonstrate all safety devices on the flat-bed die cutting or embossing machine

correctly set up TWO jobs (using either flat-bed die cutting OR embossing machine) changing type and size of substrates and design of finished patterns according to manufacturer’s specifications, job timeframes, enterprise procedures and health and safety requirements, and incorporating a sample run to inspect and amend output.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

Documentation and information

identify the factors that must be considered when deciding on a cutting system

identify the methods for registering and proofing the cutting devices

Mounting and installing flatbed devices

explain what needs to be checked when the cutting devices are secured to the machine

identify what criteria applies for determining the selection of particular cutting devices

Delivery systems

describe areas of the delivery system to observe to maintain neat delivery of finished work

describe areas of the delivery system to observe to prevent damage to finished product

list ways the finished product can be secured for dispatch

For Reel System Only

explain work health and safety (WHS) requirements for setting up reel transportation systems

explain what adjustments to the unwind reel may be needed to suit various jobs

identify important areas to consider during webbing procedures

list and explain adjustments available to the web, and what to check when splicing/joining the web

explain areas of the reel delivery system that may need adjustment according to job specifications

explain when it would be necessary to adjust the:

sheeter during production

folder during production

rewind wheel during production

list areas to check to ensure suitability of in-line processes

For Sheet System Only

explain information concerning flat-bed die cutting or embossing found in the job documentation or production control system, and how this information is interpreted to ensure smooth workflow throughout the factory

explain WHS requirements for setting up and/or operating sheet transport and delivery systems

list important areas of the feeder unit set up

explain adjustments to facilitate accurate sheet pick-up and transportation

describe steps to ensure the delivery system operates effectively

list common faults with the flat-bed cutting process

Setting up machines for complex flatbed die cutting or embossing

explain WHS requirements for setting up cutting devices

explain what to check when setting up, adjusting and operating flat-bed cutting devices

explain how machine pressure and machine cutting depths are determined

In-line processes

explain when it is necessary to adjust in-line units

identify the largest/smallest size sheet that can be processed on this machine

Checking and adjustment

identify details of the completed sample to check to ensure conformance with client requirements

explain product testing procedures available and how often they should be used

identify factors that indicate a need for replacement of knives/blades/cutting edges

describe the process for storing cutting edges to guard against damage and deterioration

identify machine manuals, safety and other documentation relevant to this task, where are they kept, and the information included in them.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the converting, binding and finishing field of work and include access to:

flatbed die cut and embossing equipment

special purpose tools, equipment and materials.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPCBF426 Produce complex flat-bed die cut or embossed product

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the performance outcomes, skills and knowledge required to produce complex flat-bed die cutting or embossing.

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required for complex flat-bed die cutting or embossing.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Converting, Binding and Finishing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Maintain machine delivery system	1.1 Delivery systems are monitored and adjusted to ensure accurate and continuous operation and eliminate damage to finished product 1.2 Substrate is added to and removed from the process according to job specifications
2. Maintain complex flat-bed cutting process	2.1 Knife condition is monitored and adjusted to ensure product quality meets the approved sample standard 2.2 Cutting pressures are monitored and adjusted to ensure product quality meets the approved sample standard 2.3 Registration of knife/knives is monitored and adjusted to ensure product quality meets the approved sample standard 2.4 Packing of cutting devices is monitored and adjusted to ensure product quality meets the approved sample standard 2.5 In-line printing/converting/binding/finishing processes are monitored and adjusted to ensure product quality meets the approved sample standard
3. Maintain operation of production process	3.1 Production process is operated in association with fellow workers and according to enterprise procedures and planned daily schedule 3.2 Production is maintained according to work health and safety (WHS) requirements, manufacturer’s specifications and enterprise procedures 3.3 Manual and/or automatic control is used according to job specifications 3.4 Performance is monitored and verified using the process control system according to enterprise procedures 3.5 Production difficulties are anticipated and preventive action is taken to prevent occurrence by timely intervention 3.6 Process adjustments to eliminate problems are reported according to enterprise procedures 3.7 Faulty performance of equipment is identified and reported according to enterprise procedures 3.8 Waste is sorted according to enterprise procedures
4. Identify and rectify problems	4.1 Problems in cutting (flat-bed) machine operation are identified and reported according to enterprise procedures 4.2 Adjustments or corrections are carried out according to specified procedures, and are consistent with operator’s skill level 4.3 Cutting (flat-bed) machine operation is checked to ensure correct operation
5. Conduct shutdown of production process	5.1 Correct shutdown sequence is followed according to manufacturer’s specifications and enterprise procedures 5.2 Shutdown is conducted in association with fellow workers and in compliance with WHS requirements 5.3 Substrate waste is removed from operating area and recycled or disposed of, where required, according to regulatory requirements and enterprise procedures 5.4 Machine faults requiring repair are identified and reported to designated person according to enterprise procedures 5.5 Repair/adjustment is verified prior to resumption of operations
6. Clean flat-bed cutting machine at end of run	6.1 Knife and machine bed are cleaned ready for next run 6.2 Cutting devices are sharpened correctly according to WHS requirements and enterprise procedures 6.3 Cutting machine is disengaged and cleaned ready for next run 6.4 In-line printing/converting/binding/finishing units are cleaned ready for next run 6.5 Transportation and delivery systems are disengaged and cleaned ready for next run 6.6 Production records or other documentation are accurately completed where required by enterprise procedures

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	3.2, 3.3, 5.1	Recognises and interprets text to confirm work requirements from information contained in specifications, organisational procedures and control systems
Writing	3.6, 3.7, 4.1, 5.4, 6.7	Enters routine data associated with production processes and enterprise procedures
Oral Communication	3.1-3.3, 3.6, 3.7, 4.1, 5.1, 5.2, 5.4	Speaks clearly using appropriate vocabulary, tone and pace to report faults and discrepancies Participates effectively in spoken interactions to confirm or clarify
Numeracy	1.1	Make estimations in relation to context
Navigate the world of work	1.1, 2.1-2.5, 3.1-3.4, 3.6-3.8, 4.1-4.3, 5.1-5.4, 6.1-6.6, 6.7	Recognises and follows explicit and implicit protocols and meets expectations associated with own role Recognises and follows all procedures for cleaning and maintenance of equipment incorporating regulatory requirements and enterprise procedures
Interact with others	3.1, 5.1, 5.2, 5.4	Cooperates with others as part of familiar routine activities, and contributes to specific activities requiring joint responsibility and accountability Understands what to communicate, with whom and how, in routine work situations
Get the work done	1.1-1.2, 2.1-2.5, 3.1, 3.4, 3.5, 3.8, 4.1-4.3, 5.2-5.5	Determines priorities and sequences steps involved in clearly defined, familiar tasks Recognises and anticipates an increasing range of familiar problems, their symptoms and causes, actively looking for early warning signs and implementing contingency plans Follows routine procedures for using digital technology by reading data from electronic monitoring and control systems

Range of Conditions

This section specifies different work environments and conditions that may affect performance. Essential operating conditions that may be present (depending on the work situation, needs of the candidate, accessibility of the item, and local industry and regional contexts) are included.

Delivery systems MUST include EITHER:	reel delivery system OR sheet delivery system.
Monitoring and adjusting MUST include EITHER:	reel stand, web control system, rewind reel and/or sheeting section OR feeder/sheet pick-up and transport system, transfer system and delivery system.

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPCBF426 Produce complex flat-bed die cut or embossed product	ICPCF426C Produce complex flat-bed die cut or embossed product	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF426 Produce complex flat-bed die cut or embossed product

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

demonstrate all safety devices on either the flat-bed die cutting or embossing machine

produce TWO complex jobs (including in-line processes) using EITHER the flat-bed die cutting OR embossing machine, with different substrates, sizes and patterns according to manufacturer’s and job specifications, enterprise procedures and work health and safety (WHS) requirements

demonstrate use of computerised control, monitoring and data entry systems if available and appropriate.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

describe WHS factors for setting up and/or operating machine transport systems

outline checks to make when substrate is removed from the machine

For Reel Delivery Systems Only

explain areas of the:

reel stand to monitor to ensure trouble-free operation

web control system to adjust to maintain correct web tension

web control system to adjust to maintain correct positioning of the web

delivery system to observe to maintain quality and prevent damage to the finished product

For Sheet Delivery Systems Only

explain areas of the:

sheet-fed feeder to monitor to ensure trouble-free operation

sheet pick-up system to adjust to ensure accurate and continuous sheet handling

Flat bed cutting operations

describe WHS factors for maintaining the cutting process

explain indicators that demand replacement of a knife

determine checks to make when cutting pressure is adjusted

list ways registration can be guaranteed

explain what production difficulties can be expected during production runs

Machine problems and cutting faults

describe WHS factors for problem-solving on the machine maintaining the cutting process

identify checks to make when:

packing cutting devices

correcting dull cutting edges on equipment

correcting the depth of embossing

correcting out-of-square results

Machine shut down and cleaning

describe WHS factors for conducting machine shutdown procedures

identify what checks to make when:

waste is removed from the machine and surrounding area for disposal or recycling

shutting down and/or disengaging the machine

cutting devices or knives are cleaned or replaced ready for next run

list areas of the machine to clean at the end of the run

Quality assurance

describe production records to keep or write up, and the information to include

explain quality aspects to consider in a completed cutting job

describe steps to ensure important features of the production control system are followed

Information sources

identify machine manuals, safety and other documentation relevant to this task, where they are kept, and the information included in them

explain other available sources of information.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the converting, binding and finishing field of work and include access to:

special purpose tools, equipment and materials

industry software packages

flat bed die cut and embossing equipment.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPCBF465 Set up and produce hand-bound book

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to produce hand-bound books including set up and assembly of materials, and techniques involving adhesive binding/tipping, sewing, forwarding, blocking and hand finishing.

Some elements of this competency are also included in ICPCF467 Restore books. It applies to individuals who may assemble, bind and cover books, other publications and printed products by hand or machine, with limited responsibility to ensure the production process is maintained.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Converting, Binding and Finishing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Prepare for job	1.1 Job specifications are read and interpreted from job documentation 1.2 All necessary materials are assembled according to job specifications
2. Complete adhesive binding/tipping	2.1 Sheets are fanned and masked every 3-4 mm 2.2 Thin even coating of adhesive is applied on area of sheet designated for tipping 2.3 Correct adhesive is applied to achieve a good bond 2.4 Tipped sheet is accurately positioned
3. Number book	3.1 Sheets are placed in correct sequence and numbered correctly according to job specifications 3.2 Numbering machine is set for appropriate number of copies 3.3 Sheets are knocked up squarely without damage
4. Index book	4.1 Index is spaced correctly and evenly 4.2 Durable square, clean and neat cut tabs or cut-outs are constructed 4.3 Headings are constructed legible and permanent
5. Apply adhesive binding/padding by hand	5.1 Product is knocked up squarely to spine and head with boards inserted between pads 5.2 Spine folds are completely removed from sections in guillotine 5.3 Adequate spine margin is preserved 5.4 Appropriate number of saw cuts are made in work 5.5 Edge of spine is roughened sufficiently to improve adhesion 5.6 Thin even application of appropriate adhesive is applied 5.7 Book is fanned before gluing (except for pads) to ensure increased surface coverage 5.8 Thoroughness of adhesive is assessed after book has dried
6. Sew sections	6.1 Appropriate sewing supports are selected and spaced according to job specifications 6.2 Consistent thread tension is maintained during sewing 6.3 Sections are aligned at the head 6.4 Swelling is monitored and controlled
7. Forward book	7.1 Spine is glued, rounded and backed 7.2 Spine lining is attached 7.3 Text block is covered (board attached) 7.4 Text block is cased in
8. Block book	8.1 Image is blocked into required position according to job specifications
9. Hand finish book	9.1 Hand finish book according to job specifications 9.2 Typeface size and type are appropriate 9.3 Design is in keeping with the period of publication 9.4 Embellishment is evenly applied

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 1.2, 3.1, 6.1, 8.1, 9.1	Recognises and interprets text and diagrams to establish job requirements from information contained in specifications
Numeracy	2.1, 3.1, 3.2, 5.3, 5.4	Uses mathematical concepts to estimate measurement, calculate quantities and to ensure correct sequence of number sheets
Get the work done	1.1, 1.2, 2.1-2.3, 3.1-3.3, 4.1-4.3, 5.1-5.8, 6.1-6.4, 7.1-7.4, 8.1, 9.1-9.4	Determines priorities and sequences steps involved in clearly defined, familiar tasks Implements actions as per instructions, making slight adjustments if necessary Plans, identifies and assembles resources required to complete tasks Makes routine decisions directly related to completion of set tasks

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPCBF465 Set up and produce hand-bound book	ICPCF465C Set up and produce hand-bound book	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF465 Set up and produce hand-bound book

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

correctly set up and produce at least THREE hand-bound books within the accepted production timeframe, according to job specifications and enterprise procedures; use a range of substrates and pulling down and section sewing on the multi-section books (minimum of ten sections).

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

Work health and safety (WHS)

explain WHS concerns relating to hand binding

Adhesive binding/tipping

explain ‘viscosity’

explain the role of grain direction in relation to the tipping operation

identify recommended tipping width for endpapers and the recommended adhesive to use in tipping

Numbering

explain what needs to be checked when the numbering machine is:

set for duplicate/triplicate numbering

re-inked

explain how a given number is set on the machine

Indexing

list different types of indices and ways to reinforce an index

explain how an index is evenly and correctly spaced down the sheet

Adhesive binding/padding

identify adhesives not recommended for padding, and explain why some of these adhesives are not suitable

explain the terms ‘pH’, ‘viscosity’, ‘open time’, ‘tack’, ‘specific adhesion’, ‘molecular adhesion’ and ‘mechanical adhesion’

list techniques to ensure permanent adhesion of the padded sheets

name ways the padding operation can be accelerated

Sewing

identify different methods of hand sewing

describe important considerations to be addressed when setting up for sewing

describe the importance of using a sewing frame

identify the ‘cord’ (calliper) thread suitable for sewing 8pp sections

describe checks to make when sewing thread is joined during the sewing operation

identify checks to make when the sewing operation is finished off

describe the result of sewing being too loose/too tight

Book forwarding

describe the important result to achieve when gluing the book spine, and what occurs if the spine glue is too thick/too thin

explain how to recognise a correct round in a book spine

outline problems likely if too much round is applied to the spine

outline problems likely if insufficient round is applied to the spine

name different spine linings and reasons for spine linings

describe special techniques applied to 2-on 2-off spine linings

explain the important considerations to be given to spine linings

identify the correct direction of the grain in spine linings

describe the result if the grain direction in the spine lining is incorrect

describe how to recognise a good corner

identify the recommended turn-in

identify steps to ensure a clean job

describe how to ‘trim-out’ a case

explain the correct board calliper on a book

identify the micron board recommended on a book 5mm thick

explain what to monitor when casing-in a book

Blocking

explain which procedures ensure a good blocking result

describe the checks to do when positioning type on a book spine, and when positioning type on the front of a book

explain ‘blind blocking’

Hand finishing

name methods of hand finishing a book cover

explain criteria used to ensure an appropriate typeface is selected

explain criteria used to ensure the design chosen corresponds with the era of the book

explain what considerations to give to hand finishing a book

describe the result of uneven impressions

Information sources

identify manuals and safety documentation relevant to this task, where they are kept, and the information included in them.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the converting, binding and finishing field of work and include access to:

special purpose tools, equipment, materials

industry software packages.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPCBF467 Restore books

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to determine the condition and appropriate materials and techniques required to restore a book.

It applies to individuals who apply solutions to a defined range of problems relating to the restoration and production of hand bound books.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Converting, Binding and Finishing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Assess physical condition of book to be rebound/restored	1.1 Physical construction and binding style of the book are identified 1.2 Areas of damage and weakness are identified and recorded
2. Identify and select treatment options	2.1 Paper and cover cleaning options are assessed 2.2 Paper and cover repair options are assessed 2.3 Ethical/rarity/value cost alternatives are evaluated 2.4 Treatment options are discussed with owner
3. Assemble materials for binding	3.1 Materials and equipment are assembled according to job specifications 3.2 Binding equipment is set up according to job specifications
4. Dissect/pull down book	4.1 Original page securing method and section structure are determined 4.2 Cover/endpapers, threads and stitches are removed with minimal damage to sections and text 4.3 Sheets and sections are cleaned with minimal damage 4.4 Dog-ears are straightened with old joints flattened 4.5 Book is pressed
5. Treat paper	5.1 Paper is cleaned using dry or wet methods as appropriate 5.2 Paper is de-acidified if necessary by most appropriate method 5.3 Paper is repaired and/or reinforced using appropriate methods 5.4 Paper is resized if required 5.5 New paper is tinted to resemble original if requested 5.6 Wire stitches or sewing threads are removed 5.7 Original adhesive is removed without damaging the book
6. Resew book	6.1 Appropriate sewing supports are selected and spaced according to job specifications 6.2 Consistent thread tension is maintained during sewing 6.3 Sections are aligned at the head 6.4 Swelling is monitored and controlled 6.5 Headbands are re-sewn if necessary
7. Forward book by hand	7.1 Old spine and sides and turn-ins are lifted and reattached if rebacking is necessary 7.2 Edges are knocked up into original alignment 7.3 Round and back spine are glued 7.4 Spine lining is attached 7.5 Appropriate corner repairs on coverboards are carried out 7.6 Boards are reattached 7.7 New covering material is tinted to resemble original if requested 7.8 Text blocks are covered or rebacked 7.9 Endpapers are pasted down or hinge realigned 7.10 Book is opened after pressing
8. Finish book by hand	8.1 Book is hand finished according to job specifications 8.2 Typeface size and type are appropriate 8.3 Design is in keeping with period of publication 8.4 An even embellishment is applied

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	3.1, 3.2, 6.1, 8.1	Recognises and interprets text and diagrams to establish job requirements from information contained within specifications
Writing	1.2	Completes required records using clear and precise language
Oral Communication	2.4	Uses appropriate language to provide information to clients Uses questioning and uses listening skills to confirm understanding
Numeracy	2.3, 5.4	Uses mathematical calculations to analyse cost alternatives against the value of the product and to determine appropriate paper size during treatment
Interact with others	2.4	Uses collaborative techniques to engage clients in discussions
Get the work done	1.1, 1.2, 2.1-2.3, 3.1, 3.2, 4.1-4.3, 5.1-5.5, 6.1, 6.2, 6.4, 6.5, 7.1, 7.5, 7.7, 7.9, 8.1-8.4	Determines priorities and sequences steps involved in clearly defined, familiar tasks Implements actions as per instructions, making slight adjustments if necessary Plans, identifies and assembles resources required to complete tasks Analyses alternatives to make decisions directly related to completion of set tasks

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPCBF467 Restore books	ICPCF467C Restore books	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPCBF467 Restore books

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

correctly assess the physical condition and restore TWO books (one requiring rebacking and one requiring rebinding) according to job specifications, enterprise procedures and production timeframes.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

Determine physical condition of a book to be rebound/restored

identify factors that render a book unsuitable for restoration/rebinding and possible options to suggest

explain areas of a book most commonly in need of attention

explain how areas of weakness and damage are identified and recorded

identify and select treatment options

explain available paper and cover cleaning options

list methods of repairing a tear in paper

describe how to replace a missing corner of a book page

identify situations when there is a need to reback a book

describe steps to repair a coverboard corner

explain methods of treating aged leather

Assemble materials for binding

explain work health and safety (WHS) factors for restoring books

name tools used when gold finishing books

name adhesives used in book restoration and repair, and describe under what circumstances each is used

identify possible covering materials and indicate where each is used

explain styles of book edge decoration

name and describe methods of tanning leather

explain how covering material is selected for a given job

explain what to monitor when paring leather and when sharpening knives for leather paring

name types of leather commonly used in bookbinding

explain the term ‘skiver’

Dissecting/pulling down

list different page securing methods

explain how to remove endpapers with minimal damage

explain how to clean sections without damage

define the terms ‘dog-ears’ and ‘joints’

describe special care to take when removing wire stitches/sewing thread

identify and describe different methods of removing adhesive from the book spine

identify types of adhesive that might be found on book spines

Section sewing

name methods of hand sewing and important considerations when setting up for sewing

explain why a sewing frame is used

describe how thickness of thread is chosen

explain what to check when sewing thread is joined during the sewing operation and when the sewing operation is finished off

explain the result if sewing is too loose/too tight

describe hand-worked headband styles

Book forwarding

explain the important result to achieve when gluing the spine of the book, and the outcome if the spine glue is too thick/too thin

explain how to recognise a correct spine shape

describe problems likely if too much round or insufficient round is applied to the spine

name different spine linings and styles they are used on

state reasons for spine linings

explain special techniques applied to 2-on 2-off spine linings

explain important considerations for spine linings

describe how to recognise a good corner

explain the recommended turn-in

list steps to ensure a clean job

explain ‘trimming-out’

explain what determines the correct board calliper on a book

identify what micron board is recommended on a book 5mm thick

explain to monitor when casing-in a book

Hand finishing

name methods of hand finishing a book cover

identify criteria used to ensure an appropriate typeface is selected

outline criteria used to ensure the design chosen corresponds with the era of the book

describe the result of uneven impressions

describe the method to correct an error in finishing the title

Quality assurance

describe quality aspects found in a competently restored book

list steps to ensure cost effectiveness of book restoration

explain what can be done to maintain the rarity component of a book

identify machine manuals and safety documentation relevant to this task, where they are kept, and the information included in them.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the converting, binding and finishing field of work and include access to special purpose tools, equipment and materials used to restore books.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPDMT263 Access and use the internet

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to use the internet to browse and download information and includes identifying required software and security risks.

It applies to individuals who create electronic documents and use multimedia information within their work environments.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Digital media technologies

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1 Identify and use local resources	1.1 Installed internet software applications and their purposes are identified 1.2 Internet software applications are used online and offline 1.3 Extracting (decompressing) software and virus scanners are used on downloaded files 1.4 Internet connection and protocols are identified 1.5 Applications and files are downloaded and installed correctly 1.6 Potential security risks are identified and avoided
2 Identify and use remote resources	2.1 Websites are navigated to locate required information 2.2 Files and documents are accessed using internet search engines 2.3 Internet is browsed to find related sites via links 2.4 Files are retrieved from File Transfer Protocol (FTP) repository 2.5 Emails are sent, downloaded, read, responded to and saved 2.6 Files attached to incoming email are retrieved and attached files are saved 2.7 Newsgroups relevant to industry are accessed

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 1.5, 2.1-2.5	Locates and interprets information from online sources Follows written instructions displayed on computer screens
Writing	2.5	Composes and sends emails to convey information or to respond to emails received
Get the work done	1.1-1.6, 2.1-2.7	Uses digital technologies and systems to locate, enter and present information and to communicate with others Follows required protocols for accessing and storing electronic information Identifies potential security problems and implements appropriate prevention measures related to own tasks

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPDMT263 Access and use the internet	ICPMM263C Access and use the Internet	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPDMT263 Access and use the internet

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

download and install an application from the internet correctly and safely

use software to extract and virus-scan downloaded files or applications

perform an internet search to locate specific information

send an email with a correctly formatted attachment

respond to an email which has attachments and save the attached files

contribute to a newsgroup .

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

list potential security risks when downloading applications or files from the internet and describe ways to avoid these risks

identify possible causes of a failed connection attempt and processes for correcting failures

explain the differences between an online and offline internet software application

explain why extracting and virus scanning software are used

explain what a search engine does and identify TWO search engines

explain the following terms or acronyms:

Uniform Resource Locator (URL)

File Transfer Protocol (FTP)

shareware

explain why email might be used to respond to a newsgroup post

identify in which of these maintaining (upper or lower) case is important: URLs, file names, passwords

explain what ‘zip’ files are and why are they used

identify the difference between Java and JavaScript

identify ways to use the internet to obtain product information and technical support

explain the privacy information that should not be provided when filling out a form on a web page

explain what cookies are

identify the types of files that can carry viruses

explain the importance of scanning for viruses before and after extracting files from a compressed archive.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the digital media technologies field of work and include access to the internet and relevant software applications.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPDMT296 Create and test an interactive CD-ROM/DVD

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to produce an interactive CD-ROM/DVD.

It applies to individuals who are responsible for the creation and testing of all interactive functions to ensure that the automatic start and other functions operate correctly.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Digital media technologies

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1 Confirm data requirements	1.1 All details required for job are checked and confirmed against job specifications 1.2 Media content is tested to ensure all interactivity performs according to job specifications 1.3 Media is compressed correctly with images at right resolution and any text in correct format
2 Prepare CD-ROM/DVD structure	2.1 Target audience is identified from job specifications 2.2 Welcome page is developed that identifies navigational structure of media 2.3 Folders for containing media are prepared according to interactivity requirements 2.4 All files are named using correct filename convention
3 Set up auto functions	3.1 Autorun is set up to automatically start up CD-ROM/DVD media 3.2 ShelExec.exe is incorporated into autorun script to ensure default programs within shell are started 3.3 Autorun is linked to reader in case target audience does not have one pre-installed 3.4 Where autorun is linked to Adobe Reader, JavaScript is added to appropriate folder to launch PDF file
4 Burn CD-ROM/DVD	4.1 CD-ROM/DVD layout is validated and saved correctly 4.2 Preferred CD-ROM/DVD format is chosen for job 4.3 Test CD-ROM/DVD is burned to test automatic functions and confirm interactivity across different platforms 4.4 Master disc is produced for mass duplication

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1-1.3, 2.1	Interprets textual information to determine job requirements
Writing	2.2, 2.4	Uses correct terminology and format to convey navigational structures Uses required file naming conventions
Numeracy	1.3	Uses mathematical techniques to determine and confirm correct image resolution
Get the work done	1.2, 1.3, 2.1-2.4, 3.1-3.4, 4.1-4.4	Takes responsibility for planning, organising and implementing tasks required to produce products that meet job requirements Analyses job requirements to decide on appropriate formats, functions and structures Systematically tests functionality of CDs or DVDs to identify operational errors Understands the purposes, specific functions and key features of common digital systems and tools, and operates them effectively to complete routine tasks

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPDMT296 Create and test an interactive CD-ROM/DVD	ICPMM296C Create and test a CD-ROM/DVD	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages. Title changed.	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPDMT296 Create and test an interactive CD-ROM/DVD

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

produce TWO CD-ROMs/DVDs which:

include different interactive functions

start automatically with autorun

will link with a reader for computers without a reader installed

have no errors in any of the interactive functions

meet job and organisational requirements.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

explain the purpose of compression technologies

identify relevant media types and multimedia software to create and test a CD-ROM/DVD

describe relevant CD/DVD hardware for burning CDs/DVDs

explain the requirements for multimedia navigation

explain the purpose of scripting languages

clarify types and purposes of different multimedia file formats.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the digital media technologies field of work and include access to appropriate computer hardware and software.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPDMT321 Capture a digital image

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to evaluate and use digital camera technology and alter and upload digital images.

It applies to individuals who may work in a team environment with some responsibility for producing quality outcomes based on requirements.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Digital media technologies

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1 Assess digital camera qualities	1.1 Camera software compatibility with hardware system is assessed and appropriate software is selected for job 1.2 Pixel resolution of camera is matched to required quality and resolution of outcome 1.3 RAM capacity of camera is checked to be sufficient for number of images required to be captured 1.4 Shutter speed, focal lengths and camera feature modes are assessed as suitable for quality and use of photographic images required 1.5 Lithium batteries are handled and stored according to work health and safety (WHS) requirements
2 Set up for image capture	2.1 Camera is set up for image composition according to job specifications 2.2 Lighting is arranged according to job specifications 2.3 Light intensity is set for correct exposure
3 Preview image	3.1 Tone curves are adjusted according to job specifications 3.2 Neutral balance of image is arranged and adjusted 3.3 Adjustments to image composition and exposure are made
4 Photograph and upload digital image	4.1 Digital camera is loaded and operated according to manufacturer’s and job specifications appropriate to quality of image to be photographed 4.2 File is uploaded on to relevant computer and image saved on hard disk 4.3 Photographic image files are created and stored on computer 4.4 Photographic images are enhanced, cropped and altered electronically to deliver required image 4.5 Photographic images are checked to ensure they meet job brief 4.6 Photographic images are delivered using required delivery mode

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.5, 2.1, 2.2, 3.1, 4.1, 4.5	Interprets textual information to determine and confirm job requirements
Writing	4.3	Uses required conventions to name electronic files
Numeracy	1.2-1.4, 2.3	Recognises mathematical data related to memory capacity Uses basic mathematical calculations to select appropriate camera features related to shutter speed, focal length or pixel resolutions
Navigate the world of work	1.5	Adheres to legislative requirements related to own role with specific reference to safety
Get the work done	1.1-1.4, 2.1-2.3, 3.1-3.3, 4.1-4.6	Plans and implements tasks required to complete jobs according to specifications Assesses job requirements to make decisions related to camera settings and image outputs Analyses image quality problems and identifies and implements appropriate correction methods Understands the purposes, specific functions and key features of common digital systems and tools and operates them effectively to produce digital images

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPDMT321 Capture a digital image	ICPMM321C Capture a digital image	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPDMT321 Capture a digital image

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

find and use information relevant to the task from various sources

set up a digital camera correctly and safely

use a digital camera to:

preview and capture THREE digital images

transfer images to a computer

use relevant software to produce final images that meet job requirements.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

identify and explain the key features of the digital camera that impact on the quality of the photographic image

determine the safety requirements for handling and storing lithium batteries

explain how to transfer and store images from a camera to a computer list and describe ways that photographic images can be altered or enhanced electronically

explain why the required delivery mode is important when preparing a photographic image.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the digital media technologies field of work and include access to:

a digital camera

computer hardware and software

photographic equipment and materials.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPDMT322 Edit a digital image

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to edit and manipulate an image captured using digital equipment.

It applies to individuals who prepare files for export to electronic image assembly.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Digital media technologies

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1 Assess digital image	1.1 Digital image is opened and resolution parameters assessed against job specifications 1.2 Image is converted from Red Green Blue (RGB) to Cyan Magenta Yellow Black (CMYK) colour space 1.3 Image characteristics are evaluated for colour and tone requirements
2 Edit digital image	2.1 Suitable software is engaged to enable print image profiling and/or manipulation to suit print requirement 2.2 Image is retouched to conform with job specifications 2.3 Local colour correction is employed to conform with job specifications 2.4 Tone correction is undertaken to conform with job specifications 2.5 Edited image is saved to conform with job specifications 2.6 Image storage requirements are identified and employed 2.7 Image is saved ready for export

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 2.2-2.6	Recognises and interprets textual information to determine and confirm job requirements
Numeracy	1.1	Applies basic mathematical formulas to calculate image resolution requirements
Get the work done	1.1-1.3, 2.1-2.7	Plans and implements tasks required to complete jobs according to specifications provided Examines images and makes routine decisions about resolution and editing requirements Understands the purposes, specific functions and key features of common digital systems and tools and operates them effectively to edit digital images

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPDMT322 Edit a digital image	ICPMM322C Edit a digital image	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPDMT322 Edit a digital image

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

interpret instructions in job specifications to determine task requirements

open and convert an image to required colour space

use suitable software to edit and save an image ready for export according to job specifications.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

explain why some images require editing or manipulation

explain what image profiling is and why it could be required

explain why image storage requirements should be identified

explain when a Joint Photographic Experts Group (JPEG) rather than a Tagged Image File Format (TIFF) would be selected as a file format

list and describe factors which may influence the grey balance and colour in an image.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the digital media technologies field of work and include access to appropriate image manipulation software, hardware and file storage capability.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPDMT344 Manipulate and incorporate audio into multimedia presentations

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to edit, combine and incorporate audio into multimedia presentations.

It applies to individuals who determine audio requirements from job specifications and use digital software to prepare audio tracks.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Digital media technologies

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1 Identify and describe formats of digital audio	1.1 Distinguishing features and uses of analogue and digital audio are determined 1.2 Terms describing audio characteristics are used correctly 1.3 Contemporary digital audio formats and their application in achieving defined outcomes are identified 1.4 Data rates for major digital sources and their relevance to defined outcomes are determined 1.5 Appropriate methods for saving and producing digital audio outputs are determined for range of sources and destinations 1.6 Sampling techniques and sources for digital audio appropriate to defined outcomes are determined 1.7 Uses of Musical Instrument Digital Interface (MIDI) technology are determined
2 Use digital audio software	2.1 Appropriate digital audio software is assessed and selected for job 2.2 Programs are used to edit and manipulate audio according to job specifications
3 Edit digital audio	3.1 Single and multiple audio tracks are edited to achieve defined outcome 3.2 Multiple tracks of digital audio are joined according to job specifications 3.3 Digital effects are employed to modify and integrate digital audio tracks according to job specifications 3.4 Time encoding is applied to single and multiple edited digital audio tracks according to job specifications 3.5 Audio track is inserted into multimedia production sequence according to job specifications
4 Construct digital audio track	4.1 Techniques for hooking sounds are identified 4.2 Defects on sound recordings are eliminated and/or treated 4.3 Special effects and mixing techniques are used on audio track according to job specifications 4.4 Sequencers are used to create digital audio tracks according to job specifications 4.5 MIDI and sound cards are used to create digital audio according to job specifications 4.6 Audio track is produced using appropriate track construction software and hardware 4.7 Audio tracks are saved in appropriate file formats

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 1.3, 1.4, 1.6, 2.1, 2.2, 3.2-3.5, 4.3-4.5	Interprets textual information to establish audio format and software requirements
Oral Communication	1.2, 4.2, 4.3	Uses clear technical terminology to describe audio characteristics Uses listening techniques to identify audio issues
Numeracy	1.4, 3.4	Recognises numerical data to identify digital audio formats and apply time encoding and data rates
Get the work done	1.1, 1.3, 1.5-1.7, 2.1, 2.2, 3.1-3.5, 4.1-4.7	Plans and implements tasks required to complete jobs according to specifications Assesses alternatives and makes routine decisions directly related to own role Identifies and rectifies defects in sound recordings Understands the purposes, functions and features of digital systems and tools used for sound recording and editing, and uses them effectively to complete tasks

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPDMT344 Manipulate and incorporate audio into multimedia presentations	ICPMM344C Manipulate and incorporate audio into multimedia presentations	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPDMT344 Manipulate and incorporate audio into multimedia presentations

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

construct, edit and incorporate audio elements into at least TWO different multimedia sequences including:

finding and using information relevant to the task from a variety of sources

interpreting requirements from job specifications

selecting and using suitable software and hardware.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

identify the distinguishing features of analogue and digital audio

explain the terms: amplitude, sound waves, frequency, mono and stereo

identify the main contemporary digital audio formats

describe data rates that apply to selected digital sources

identify sampling, sampling techniques and sources for sampling digital audio

explain the different uses of Musical Instrument Digital Interface (MIDI) technology

identify the distinguishing features of selected digital audio software

explain the purpose of an audio frame when saving and producing digital audio outputs

explain the process to join multiple tracks of digital audio

identify the types of digital effects that are used to modify and integrate digital audio tracks

explain the purpose of time encoding

clarify how sequencers are used to create digital audio tracks

explain the purposes of sound cards.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the digital media technologies field of work and include access to software, hardware and equipment and materials required for construction and editing of sound files.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPDMT346 Incorporate video into multimedia presentations

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to edit and add video to multimedia presentations.

It applies to individuals who select and use appropriate software and hardware to produce digital video sequences to meet required outcomes.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Digital media technologies

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1 Identify and describe formats of digital video	1.1 Distinguishing features and uses of range of digital video software are determined 1.2 Current video software appropriate to range of given outcomes is selected 1.3 Limiting factors of computer hardware on video production for specified job are determined 1.4 Differences of image quality and image size required to deliver desired outcome are determined 1.5 Data input, processing and output relevant to video are explained 1.6 Formats employed to create given computer video sequence for specified outcome are analysed
2 Design digital video	2.1 Appropriate digital video software for job is assessed and selected 2.2 Digital video editing software is used to combine video assets 2.3 Variations in video frame rates are controlled as required for job to be undertaken 2.4 Time stamping techniques are applied to video frames as required 2.5 Digital video is saved using appropriate file techniques
3 Edit digital video	3.1 Single and multiple video tracks are edited to achieve defined outcome 3.2 Multiple tracks of digital video are joined according to job specifications 3.3 Digital effects are employed to modify and integrate digital video tracks according to job specifications 3.4 Time encoding is applied to single and multiple edited digital video tracks according to job specifications 3.5 Video track is inserted into multimedia production sequence according to job specifications
4 Present digital video sequence	4.1 Digital video is tested and combined with other digital imaging, sound and/or animation to create multimedia sequence 4.2 Multimedia sequence including video is saved and presented to client

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	2.1, 2.3, 2.4, 3.3-3.5	Interprets textual information to establish or confirm job requirements
Oral Communication	1.5	Uses clear technical terminology to provide information about video to others
Numeracy	1.4, 2.3, 2.4, 3.4	Uses simple mathematical calculations to verify image quality and image size and to measure frame frequencies and track lengths
Interact with others	4.2	Selects and uses appropriate communication methods and protocols when presenting information to clients
Get the work done	1.1-1.4, 1.6, 2.1-2.5, 3.1-3.5, 4.1, 4.2	Plans and implements tasks required to complete jobs according to specifications Determines requirements and makes routine decisions directly related to completion of tasks Understands the purposes, functions and features of digital systems and tools used for video recording and editing, and uses them effectively to complete tasks

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPDMT346 Incorporate video into multimedia presentations	ICPMM346C Incorporate video into multimedia presentations	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPDMT346 Incorporate video into multimedia presentations

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

design, compile, edit and present at least TWO multimedia sequences incorporating video including:

interpreting requirements from job specifications

selecting and using suitable software and hardware.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

outline important considerations when combining digital video with other digital imaging, sound and/or animation to create a multimedia sequence

summarise the features of current video software programs, including the differences between the programs

explain the limiting factors of video production on computers

determine how the differences of image quality and image size are obtained

describe the process used to combine video assets

explain how variations in video frame rates are controlled

explain why time stamping techniques are applied to video frames.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the digital media technologies field of work and include access to software, hardware and equipment and materials required for construction and editing of video files.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPDMT491 Create an extensible document

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 2	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.1. Version created to correct mapping table information.
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to create a well-formed syntax error-free Extensible Mark-up Language/Personalised Print Mark-up Language (XML/PPML) document.

It applies to individuals who have the responsibility to ensure requirements meet the current and future needs of the business.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Pre-requisite Unit

ICTWEB429	Create a markup language document to specification

Unit Sector

Digital media technologies

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1 Define document structure	1.1 All details required for job are checked and confirmed against job specifications 1.2 Mark-up language version and character encoding used in document or declaration statement are defined and/or inserted in document 1.3 External or internal Document Type Definition (DTD) or mark-up language schema is chosen and correctly wrapped and referenced depending on project requirements 1.4 Root element is correctly defined and all elements are accurately nested 1.5 Attribute types and default values are declared, where necessary, to provide information about data 1.6 Occurrences of elements are stated and elements of mixed content declared
2 Confirm validity	2.1 Start and end tags are included and closed to ensure no element errors 2.2 Namespaces are used to resolve name conflicts 2.3 Checks are performed to ensure that document is well-formed, error-free and conforms to mark-up language syntax rules 2.4 Document is checked to ensure it conforms to rules of DTD or mark-up language schema
3 Finalise and test document	3.1 Character Data (CDATA) sections are added to document structure 3.2 Final document is viewed with mark-up language parser 3.3 Mark-up language document is well formed, free of errors and meets needs of business 3.4 Document is linked to extensible style sheet and template, and tested 3.5 Document is made extensible to meet future business needs

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 1.3, 1.6, 2.1, 2.3, 2.4, 3.2-3.5	Interprets textual information to identify job requirements Proofreads texts to ensure accuracy and compliance with mark-up language syntax rules
Writing	1.2, 1.3, 1.6, 2.1, 3.1	Uses industry specific language to produce and edit technical documents
Get the work done	1.1-1.6, 2.1-2.4, 3.1-3.5	Plans, organises and implements steps required to construct a valid document that meets organisational requirements Analyses documents to identify and correct errors in mark-up language Selects and uses appropriate digital software and tools to create mark-up language document

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPDMT491 Create an extensible document	ICPMM491D Create an extensible document	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPDMT491 Create an extensible document

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 2	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.1. Version created to correct mapping table information.
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

produce TWO Extensible Mark-up Language (XML) documents that are well-formed, free of errors and meet the job specifications

validate and parse both XML files

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

explain what a Standard Generalised Mark-up Language (SGML) is and what is used for

explain how SGML relates to XML and Personalised Print Mark-up Language (PPML)

explain the differences between SGML, PPML and XML and when to use SGML over XML

describe how Cascading Style Sheets (CSS) and Extensible Stylesheet Language (XSL) differ

explain the purpose of XSL

explain when to use XML over Hyper Text Mark-up Language( HTML) and why

explain how PPML relates to XML

outline ways to use XML and HTML with the one set of data

explain the purpose of metadata within a mark-up language document.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the digital media technologies field of work and include access to a standalone computer and mark-up language parser.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPDMT492 Create an extensible style sheet

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 2	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.1. Version created to correct mapping table information.
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to create extensible style sheets which transform Extensible Mark-up Language/Personalised Print Mark-up Language (XML/PPML) into screen or print output.

It applies to individuals who create extensible style sheets for electronic publishing or online documents including computer screens and handheld devices. Individuals incorporate the presentation and transformation requirements in the style sheets and templates.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Pre-requisite Unit

ICTWEB429	Create a markup language document to specification

Unit Sector

Digital media technologies

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1 Prepare source document	1.1 Source document is validated as free of errors 1.2 Style and transformation requirements of source document are confirmed 1.3 Advanced styling requirements are confirmed as required 1.4 Different media, display formats and target audience preferred platforms and abilities are confirmed 1.5 Source document is prepared for style sheet
2 Create style sheet	2.1 Multiple templates are designed and applied to style sheet 2.2 Style sheet is developed using required presentation styles 2.3 Transformation requirements are incorporated into several style sheets 2.4 Style sheet is associated and/or linked with source document and tested
3 Test style sheet	3.1 Style sheets are validated to ensure correct presentation and transformation 3.2 Style sheet is updated if errors occur and validated again 3.3 Style sheet is linked to data-store and to digital template, and tested 3.4 Style sheet is made extensible to meet future business needs

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1-1.4, 2.1, 2.2, 2.4, 3.1, 3.4	Interprets textual information to identify job requirements Proofreads texts to ensure accuracy and conformity with job requirements
Writing	1.5, 2.1-2.3, 3.2	Uses industry specific language to produce and edit technical documents
Interact with others	1.3, 1.4	Selects and uses appropriate method and form of communication to confirm requirements with relevant persons
Get the work done	1.1-1.4, 2.1-2.4, 3.1-3.4	Plans, organises and implements activities required to create style sheets that meet organisational and user requirements Analyses documents to identify and correct errors Selects and uses appropriate digital software and tools to create extensible style sheets

Mapping

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPDMT492 Create an extensible style sheet	ICPMM492D Create an extensible style sheet	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPDMT492 Create an extensible style sheet

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 2	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.1. Version created to correct mapping table information.
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

create extensible style sheets for electronic publishing or online documents.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

explain the application of Document Style Semantics and Specification Language (DSSSL), where it can be used to develop an extensible style sheet

explain the intended purpose of Extensible Stylesheet Language (XSL)

explain when to use an Extensible Mark-up Language (XML) in preference to Hyper Text Mark-up Language (HTML)

describe the ways to use both XML and HTML with the one set of data

describe how Personalised Print Mark-up Language (PPML) relates to XML

describe a work-based example of the application of metadata and/or PRISM

outline the essential differences between metadata and PRISM.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the digital media technologies field of work and include access to industry standard software and relevant hardware.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPDMT581 Manage multimedia production

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to manage the multimedia production cycle.

It applies to individuals who are responsible for the entire production cycle including researching requirements, designing and developing products, quality testing and liaising with clients.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Digital media technologies

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1 Design production cycle for multimedia product	1.1 Management components of production cycle are identified and coordinated to achieve defined outcome 1.2 Concepts for multimedia integration are put forward and their sequence planned 1.3 Prototype sequences are designed and tested according to job specifications 1.4 Multimedia production is undertaken that conforms to product specifications 1.5 Final product is tested for conformance to specifications and released to client
2 Define attributes of interactive multimedia products	2.1 Attributes of hypermedia are defined and incorporated into given productions when required 2.2 Attributes of hypertext are defined and incorporated into given productions when required 2.3 Linear and interactive information structures are distinguished and incorporated into productions when required
3 Manage research	3.1 Client specifications are researched and checked with client to deliver desired outcome 3.2 Files, documents, images and footage relevant to project requirements are sourced and their functions documented and sequenced 3.3 Liaison with clients is undertaken, records of interviews kept, and specifications monitored within management of project to achieve required outcomes 3.4 Files, documents, images and footage relevant to specific projects are filed for future reference, with regard for client confidentiality
4 Manage multimedia process	4.1 Order of process procedure is determined and documented to deliver desired outcome 4.2 Costs are determined, checked with client and documented to deliver desired outcome 4.3 Quality outcomes are determined and documented, and quality system is established to monitor quality of product 4.4 Product is tested against specifications prior to client release 4.5 Endorsement of product by client is gained to ensure specifications have been fulfilled

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 1.3, 1.4, 2.1-2.3, 3.1-3.3, 4.4, 4.5	Interprets and evaluates technically specific textual information from a range of sources to identify and manage requirements
Writing	1.2, 1.3, 2.1, 2.2, 3.2, 3.3, 4.1-4.3	Prepares required documentation for designing, managing and monitoring multimedia production using appropriate language and structure Records accurate notes from discussions with clients
Oral Communication	3.1, 3.3, 4.2	Delivers or seeks information using language and technical references suitable to audience Uses listening and questioning techniques to confirm understanding
Numeracy	4.2	Uses mathematical skills to calculate production costs and budgetary constraints
Interact with others	1.5, 3.1, 3.3, 4.2, 4.5	Identifies the requirements of important communication exchanges, selecting appropriate communication methods and protocols to suit the purpose and audience
Get the work done	1.1-1.4, 2.1-2.3, 3.2-3.4, 4.1, 4.3-4.5	Sequences and schedules complex activities, monitors implementation and manages relevant communication Takes responsibility for planning, organising and implementing processes and systems to manage and protect project related information Uses systematic, analytical processes to test and evaluate products against required outcomes Uses features of digital systems and tools for multimedia production or management

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPDMT581 Manage multimedia production	ICPMM581C Manage multimedia production	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPDMT581 Manage multimedia production

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

manage multimedia production in TWO separate projects over at least a THREE month period and produce a portfolio that demonstrates:

how all components of the production cycle were monitored and managed

concepts used for multimedia integration

how content was sourced and managed

prototype sequences developed and their attributes

how product testing was undertaken

measures used to establish and maintain effective liaison with clients.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

explain the typical management components of a production cycle

identify factors to take into account when considering multimedia integration

describe the steps involved in designing, building and testing a prototype

define hypermedia and hypertext, and explain the similarities and differences between the two

explain the difference between linear and interactive information structures

explain how quality outcomes are determined

identify appropriate methods for sourcing and storing content.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the digital media technologies field of work and include access to:

resources, equipment and materials for multimedia production and management

relevant workplace documentation

case studies and, where possible, real situations.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPDMT582 Manage multimedia projects

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to manage multimedia projects including research, client liaison, and budgetary and milestone considerations.

It applies to individuals who supervise others and have responsibility for a range of resources and outcomes.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Digital media technologies

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1 Develop project plan	1.1 Elements of project plan are identified according to principles of project management 1.2 Planning tools are identified for project 1.3 Time and budget factors are identified and incorporated into plan
2 Manage resources and time	2.1 Hardware resources relevant to specific multimedia tasks are identified, evaluated and incorporated to achieve required outcome 2.2 Time management is integrated into project planning and monitoring 2.3 Human resources are incorporated and supported within project framework to achieve required outcome 2.4 Teamwork elements are identified and developed to achieve required outcome
3 Identify legal issues	3.1 Copyright principles and conventions relevant to digital data are identified and legal precedents noted 3.2 Copyright issues relating to multimedia authoring, digital imaging and digital sound are explained and strategies are devised to account for relevant contingencies 3.3 Copyright ownership of multimedia authoring, digital imaging and digital sound is established prior to commencing brief 3.4 Applications of law with reference to multimedia product warranties, software licences, consultants, sponsors and distribution are determined appropriate for job to be undertaken and relevant to industry sector
4 Manage research	4.1 Files, documents, images and footage relevant to project requirements are sourced and their functions documented and sequenced 4.2 Liaison with clients is undertaken, records of interviews kept and specifications monitored within management of project to achieve required outcomes 4.3 Files, documents, images and footage relevant to specific projects are filed for future reference with regard for client confidentiality
5 Determine and manage multimedia budgets	5.1 Estimation models of costs are identified and applied to range of multimedia products 5.2 Budget plans are established and checked against estimations to deliver accurate costings 5.3 Tendering processes and costs are determined and implemented to deliver required outcome within designated timeframes and available budgets 5.4 Project costs are determined, documented and monitored continuously to comply with business commitments and legal obligations 5.5 Business transactions are undertaken ethically and according to law 5.6 Multimedia project budget estimates and expenditure are contrasted and documented to assist in future business dealings
6 Manage project outcomes	6.1 Multimedia inputs are combined to form definitive master 6.2 Master product is duplicated and distributed according to client specifications 6.3 Project outcomes are refined to meet quality standards

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 3.1-3.4, 4.1, 5.3, 5.5, 6.3	Interprets and compares complex information from a range of sources and extracts content relevant to purpose
Writing	1.1-1.3, 3.1, 4.2, 5.4, 5.6, 6.3	Prepares required documentation for planning and monitoring projects using appropriate language and structure Records accurate notes from discussions with clients for future reference
Oral Communication	3.2, 4.2	Clearly explains requirements using language and technical references suitable to the audience Uses listening and questioning techniques to confirm understanding
Numeracy	1.3, 2.2, 5.1-5.4, 5.6	Uses mathematical skills to determine project budget and timelines for completion Calculates costs including comparing and contrasting estimates
Navigate the world of work	3.1-3.4, 5.4, 5.5	Establishes and adheres to organisational, legal and regulatory obligations and responsibilities and passes on relevant requirement to others
Interact with others	3.2, 4.2, 6.2	Identifies the requirements of important communication exchanges, selecting appropriate communication methods and protocols to suit the purpose and audience
Get the work done	1.1-1.3, 2.1-2.4, 3.2, 4.1-4.3, 5.1-5.4, 6.1- 6.3	Sequences and schedules complex activities, monitors implementation and manages relevant communication Takes responsibility for planning, organising and implementing processes and systems to manage, monitor and protect project related information Anticipates potential problems and has contingency plans ready for implementation Uses features of digital systems and tools to manage multimedia products

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPDMT582 Manage multimedia projects	ICPMM582C Manage multimedia projects	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPDMT582 Manage multimedia projects

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

manage TWO separate multimedia projects from start-up to completion and produce a portfolio that demonstrates:

use of suitable tools to develop a project plan, monitor progress and deliver the project outcomes

how time and budget factors were managed

how legal requirements were identified and managed

how content was sourced and managed to ensure confidentiality and compliance with regulatory requirements

how resource requirements were identified, accessed and managed

how effective liaison with clients and the team was established and maintained.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

list and describe typical elements of a multimedia project plan

explain how time and budget factors are taken into account when planning and implementing a project

identify resource requirements for a multimedia project and describe the role of each resource including:

hardware

software

human resources

identify appropriate methods for sourcing and storing content

explain methods for creating, duplicating and distributing a multimedia master

list and describe legal or ethical considerations relevant to multimedia development including:

copyright issues relating to multimedia authoring and use of digital data, images and sound

product warranties

software licences

use of consultants or sponsors

distribution

explain which estimation models might be used in multimedia production

explain what is involved with tendering processes.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the digital media technologies field of work and include access to:

resources, equipment and materials for managing a multimedia project

relevant legislation, regulations, standards and codes

relevant workplace documentation

case studies and, where possible, real situations

interaction with others.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPINK211 Select and prepare materials for production

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to prepare materials for ink and varnish manufacture.

It applies to individuals who typically work under supervision to ensure production requirements are met. Individuals identify and select materials and equipment and complete the preparation process according to defined procedures.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Ink manufacture

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1 Read and interpret job requirements and locate materials	1.1 Material requirements and quantities are correctly identified from documentation 1.2 Materials are located and checked according to enterprise procedures 1.3 Required quantities of material are confirmed and shortages and/or defective materials are reported and recorded
2 Prepare materials	2.1 Weighing and measuring devices are checked for accuracy and reset if required 2.2 Bowls, vats, tanks and pots are selected according to job specifications and checked to ensure they are free from contamination 2.3 Quantities of material are weighed or measured 2.4 Materials are prepared according to enterprise procedures 2.5 Quality checks are undertaken according to enterprise procedures 2.6 Materials are adjusted to conform to job specifications
3 Transfer prepared materials to production area	3.1 Prepared materials are stored, transferred or located according to enterprise and legislative requirements 3.2 Documentation is accurately completed according to enterprise procedures

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 1.2, 2.4	Establishes job requirements by interpreting information in relevant documentation
Writing	1.3, 3.2	Records information related to faulty materials and job outcomes in required enterprise format
Oral communication	1.3	Uses clear and specific language to report issues
Numeracy	1.1, 2.1, 2.3	Identifies and calculates required quantities of materials Checks and adjusts measuring devices for accuracy
Navigate the world of work	1.2, 2.4, 2.5, 3.1, 3.2	Complies with organisational policies and procedures relevant to own role
Get the work done	1.2, 1.3, 2.1, 2.2, 2.4, 2.6	Follows clearly defined instructions and monitors own progress on tasks Makes routine decisions relevant to the immediate task in accordance with job requirements Responds to problems by referring to procedures and implementing required solutions

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPINK211 Select and prepare materials for production	ICPIM211C Select and prepare materials for production	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPINK211 Select and prepare materials for production

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

locate, interpret and use information from various sources required to carry out tasks

select, measure, prepare and store TWO batches of materials for use in the production of ink or chemicals, according to manufacturer’s and job specifications and enterprise procedures

complete required documentation for each batch of materials according to enterprise procedures.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

list relevant information sources and for each source briefly outline why it is needed

summarise the health, safety and environmental considerations when completing ink production tasks including:

relevant enterprise procedures

potential hazards in the selection and preparation of materials for ink production

potential environmental issues when working with raw materials

safety equipment requirements

specify the details needed for selection of materials for ink production

briefly summarise the enterprise procedures for:

determining whether a material is defective

preparing materials and containers for ink production

recording the quantities and formulations

dealing with a shortage of materials

approving prepared materials prior to commencement of production

outline the checks needed during the preparation of materials required for ink production

summarise the methods or procedures for checking accuracy and resetting measuring devices used in the work area including at least:

scales

flow meters

graduated vessels

describe the purpose and correct use of equipment and machinery used to transfer materials to the preparation area.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the ink manufacture field of work and include access to:

enterprise documents and policies and procedures

raw materials, packaging materials, containers and consumables

machines or equipment for weighing, measuring and moving materials.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPINK221 Blend chemicals

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to blend chemicals for ink and varnish manufacture.

It applies to individuals who typically perform routine tasks under direct supervision to ensure production requirements are met. Individuals identify process and job requirements, set up machinery or equipment and complete the blending process according to defined procedures.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Ink Manufacture

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1 Read and interpret job requirements and locate materials	1.1 Appropriate processes are identified and confirmed, and original is assessed to determine scanner settings 1.2 Appropriate chemicals, inks, materials and/or equipment are selected according to job specifications
2 Set up machines/equipment	2.1 Pre-startup checks are completed and documented according to enterprise procedures 2.2 Raw materials or feed lines are checked to ensure availability 2.3 Machine and equipment operation is verified according to enterprise procedures
3 Maintain blending or homogenising process	3.1 Mix is completed according to enterprise procedures and work health and safety (WHS) requirements 3.2 Materials are added to process according to job specifications 3.3 Quality inspection and sampling is carried out according to enterprise procedures 3.4 Adjustments to mix or equipment are made to correct identified quality problems 3.5 Records, log or checklists are completed according to enterprise procedures
4 Shut down	4.1 Correct shutdown sequence is followed according to manufacturer’s specifications and enterprise procedures 4.2 Product or materials used in manufacture are removed from operating area where appropriate 4.3 Solid and liquid waste is removed from operating area and recycled or disposed of, where required, according to regulatory requirements and enterprise procedures
5 Clean up	5.1 Equipment cleaning requirements are identified 5.2 Correct equipment or materials for manual or mechanical cleaning are selected 5.3 Cleaning is undertaken according to enterprise procedures and WHS requirements

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 1.2, 3.2	Establishes job requirements from job documentation or production control system
Writing	2.1, 3.5	Records information related to job outcomes Accurately completes records, logs and checklists
Numeracy	1.2, 3.1-3.4	Measures and records quantities of materials Checks measuring devices for accuracy and resets as required
Navigate the world of work	2.1, 2.3, 3.1, 3.3, 3.5, 4.1-4.3, 5.1, 5.3	Complies with legislative requirements and organisational policies and procedures relevant to own role
Get the work done	1.1, 1.2, 2.1, 2.2, 3.4, 5.1, 5.2	Follows clearly defined instructions and monitors own progress on tasks Makes routine decisions relevant to immediate task in accordance with job requirements Responds to problems by referring to procedures and implementing required solutions

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPINK221 Blend chemicals	ICPIM221C Blend chemicals	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPINK221 Blend chemicals

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

locate, interpret and use information from various sources to carry out tasks

use a mixer disperser OR a bead mill OR an automatic ink dispensing system to blend TWO batches of chemicals OR tint TWO batches of ink intermediates or concentrates according to manufacturer’s and job specifications, health and safety requirements and enterprise procedures including:

selecting, checking and setting up chemicals, ink, materials and equipment

carrying out quality checks during blending and making required adjustments

completing required records

cleaning and removal of waste.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

list and briefly describe the purpose of each of the listed items used in the blending of chemicals for ink or varnish manufacture:

high and low speed dispersers

pan washer or scrubbers

pumps

valves

automatic ink dispensing system

homogeniser

de-ioniser

identify potential hazards in the selection, preparation and clean up of materials and equipment for blending chemicals, including the correct use of safety equipment

identify environmental issues that need to be considered when working with the range of materials used in chemical blending and tinting

describe the enterprise procedures for:

preparing containers and equipment for blending and tinting

adding chemicals and constructing correct colours according to formulae

testing conductivity, viscosity and pH, where in-process testing is conducted

sampling and testing

a planned shutdown

explain the purpose and process of:

homogenisation

de-ionising water when it is to be used in the blending process

batch coding systems

outline the checks to be made when measuring chemicals for blending

explain the factors that determine the position of the mixing head when blending

list and describe problems that may occur in the tinting process and how these may be overcome.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the ink manufacture field of work and include access to:

enterprise documents and policies and procedures

materials and equipment used in the blending process

cleaning chemicals, materials and equipment.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPINK251 Filter and pack product

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to filter and pack ink and varnish products.

It applies to individuals who typically perform routine tasks under direct supervision to ensure quality standards are maintained. Individuals identify and select equipment and materials for the job and complete tasks according to defined procedures.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Ink Manufacture

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1 Read and interpret job requirements from documentation	1.1 Product to be filtered is identified from job specifications 1.2 Type/size of packing container is identified from job specifications
2 Set up for filtering and packing	2.1 Filtering requirements are identified from job specifications 2.2 Correct filter is selected and fitted according to enterprise procedures 2.3 Appropriate packaging containers are identified and selected according to job specifications 2.4. Containers are checked to ensure they are free from contamination
3 Filter and pack product	3.1 Product is filtered according to enterprise procedures and work health and safety (WHS) requirements 3.2 Product is sampled and tested according to enterprise procedures 3.3 Correct amount of approved product is tinned off according to enterprise procedures 3.4 Container is correctly labelled according to enterprise procedures 3.5 Packed product is stored or despatched according to job specifications
4 Complete documentation	4.1 Documentation is completed according to enterprise procedures

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 1.2, 2.1-2.3, 3.1-3.3, 3.5, 4.1	Establishes job requirements from documentation
Writing	3.4, 4.1	Records required information on labels Completes information related to job outcomes in required format
Numeracy	3.3	Uses basic mathematical processes to calculate and determine quantities of product
Navigate the world of work	2.2, 2.3, 3.1-3.4, 4.1	Complies with legislative requirements and organisational policies and procedures relevant to own role
Get the work done	1.1, 1.2, 2.1-2.4, 3.2, 3.5	Follows clearly defined instructions and monitors own progress on tasks Makes routine decisions relevant to the immediate task in accordance with job requirements Responds to problems by referring to procedures and implementing required solutions

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPINK251 Filter and pack product	ICPIM251C Filter and pack product	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPINK251 Filter and pack product

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

find, interpret and use information required to carry out tasks from various information sources

filter and pack ink/chemical products into TWO types of packaging container according to manufacturer’s and job specifications, health and safety requirements and enterprise procedures including:

selecting, checking and fitting filters and containers

carrying out quality checks during the filtering process

labelling and storing (or despatching) containers

completing required records.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

list relevant information sources and for each source briefly outline why it is needed

describe potential health hazards involved in the filtering and packing of products

list and briefly describe the enterprise policies and procedures for addressing health and environmental hazards

explain the safety equipment used during filtering and packing, and the purpose of each item

list and briefly describe the purpose of each of the listed used in the filtering and packing process:

pumps

filters

weighing scales

spatulas

cardboard

wax paper

vacuum pack systems

lifting/shifting devices

describe the requirements for:

the selection of packaging and storage containers including pails, tins, drums and bins

the selection of filter(s)

checks to be made when fitting the filter

checking the quality of the product (viscosity, skin forming) throughout the filter/pack process

the weighing methods that are used in the work area

outline problems and possible solutions for:

contaminants that can be present and how to eliminate these

extruding the product

describe the enterprise systems and processes for:

sampling/testing

labelling and storing the packed product.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the ink manufacture field of work and include access to:

enterprise documents and policies and procedures

raw materials and consumables

filters and packaging containers

machines or equipment used to filter, pack and move materials or containers.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPINK331 Manufacture inks and coatings

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to manufacture inks and coatings.

It applies to individuals who generally work under limited supervision to identify process and job requirements, set up machinery or equipment and complete the manufacturing process according to defined procedures. They also have some accountability for monitoring output and preventing or addressing production problems.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Ink manufacture

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1 Read and interpret job requirements from documentation	1.1 Appropriate processes are identified and confirmed 1.2 Appropriate materials and/or equipment are selected according to job specifications
2 Set up machines or equipment	2.1 Pre-startup checks are completed and documented according to enterprise procedures 2.2 Raw materials or feed lines are checked to ensure availability 2.3 Stirrer, mixer, pots and vats are checked to ensure they are free from contamination 2.4 Machine or equipment operation is verified according to enterprise procedures
3 Maintain blending process	3.1 Mix is completed in association with fellow workers according to enterprise procedures and work health and safety (WHS) requirements 3.2 Materials are added to the process according to job specifications 3.3 Quality inspection and sampling is carried out according to enterprise procedures 3.4 Adjustments to mix or equipment are made to correct identified quality problems
4 Maintain ink or coating milling process	4.1 Production process is operated in association with fellow workers and according to enterprise procedures and planned daily schedule 4.2 Production is maintained according to WHS requirements and enterprise procedures 4.3 Milling process and equipment are monitored during batch manufacture to ensure operation is maintained 4.4 Machines or equipment are inspected and adjusted as required, and readouts are recorded and interpreted 4.5 Quality inspections and sampling are undertaken according to enterprise procedures 4.6 Records, log or checklists are completed according to enterprise procedures
5 Maintain operation of equipment or process conditions	5.1 Variations or irregularities of equipment operation or process conditions are identified and reported 5.2 Production difficulties are anticipated and action is taken to prevent occurrence by timely intervention according to enterprise procedures 5.3 Corrective action is documented and reported according to enterprise procedures
6 Shut down liquid ink or coating blend or milling process	6.1 Pre-shutdown checks are carried out and documented according to enterprise procedures 6.2 Correct shutdown sequence is followed according to manufacturer’s specifications and enterprise procedures 6.3 Shutdown is conducted in association with fellow workers and in compliance with WHS requirements 6.4 Product or materials used in manufacture are removed from operating area where appropriate 6.5 Solid and liquid waste is removed from operating area and recycled or disposed of, where required, according to regulatory requirements and enterprise procedures
7 Clean up	7.1 Equipment cleaning requirements are identified 7.2 Correct equipment or materials for manual or mechanical cleaning are selected 7.3 Cleaning is undertaken according to enterprise procedures and WHS requirements

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 1.2, 2.1, 3.2, 6.2	Identifies and interprets information from job and manufacturer’s specifications and enterprise procedures
Writing	1.1, 2.1, 4.6, 5.1, 5.3, 6.1	Documents actions and outcomes in accordance with enterprise procedures
Oral communication	5.1, 5.3	Provides information regarding issues encountered and actions undertaken
Numeracy	3.2, 4.4	Measures and records quantities of materials Checks machine readouts and measuring devices for accuracy and resets as required
Navigate the world of work	2.1, 2.4, 3.1, 3.3, 4.1, 4.2, 4.5, 4.6, 5.2, 5.3, 6.1-6.5, 7.3	Complies with legislative requirements and organisational policies and procedures relevant to own role
Interact with others	3.1, 4.1, 6.3	Cooperates with others as part of familiar routine activities and contributes to specific activities requiring joint responsibility
Get the work done	1.1, 1.2, 2.1-2.3, 3.4, 4.1, 4.3, 4.4, 5.2, 7.1, 7.2	Follows clearly defined instructions and monitors own progress on tasks Implements standard procedures when required to make routine decisions relevant to immediate tasks Initiates standard procedures when responding to anticipated or actual problems directly related to own role

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPINK331 Manufacture inks and coatings	ICPIM331C Manufacture inks and coatings	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPINK331 Manufacture inks and coatings

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

find, interpret and use information from various sources to carry out tasks according to requirements

use a mixer disperser and EITHER a bead mill OR a three-roll mill to manufacture TWO batches of ink or coating according to manufacturer’s and job specifications, health and safety requirements and enterprise procedures including:

selecting, checking and setting up chemicals, ink, materials and equipment

carrying out quality checks during blending and making required adjustments to process or equipment

completing required records

shutting down equipment

cleaning and removal of waste.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

identify and briefly describe the enterprise procedures for:

using the batch coding system in the work area

potting off the mill

labelling ink containers

identify health and safety requirements and environmental issues in relation to:

adding powders during the mixing stage of ink manufacture

cleaning bowls, vats and pots

the manufacture of ink or coating

the fitting and use of safety equipment

specify the checks, tests and/or monitoring required during the process including:

when preparing containers and equipment for ink or coating manufacture

when measuring raw materials for ink production

at each stage of the ink or coating manufacture process

how the grind of the ink is determined

the ink texture and viscosity during the milling process

explain the technical aspects of the ink or coating manufacturing process including:

the purpose of using low speed early in the mixing process

the function of antioxidants in the mixing process

the factors that determine the position of the mixing head

the action taken when the mixture has a skin on it

the particular requirements for coating manufacture

the characteristics of the end product of the mixing phase of ink manufacture

the purpose of and ideal conditions for milling ink

the adjustment of the mill for low or high grind values.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the ink manufacture field of work and include access to:

enterprise documents and procedures

raw materials and consumables

machines and equipment

cleaning chemicals.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPINK335 Manufacture varnish and resin

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to manufacture varnishes and resins.

It applies to individuals who generally work under limited supervision to identify process and job requirements, set up machinery or equipment and complete the manufacturing process according to defined procedures. They also have some accountability for monitoring output and preventing or addressing production problems.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Ink manufacture

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1 Read and interpret job requirements from documentation	1.1 Appropriate processes are identified and confirmed 1.2 Appropriate materials and/or equipment are selected according to job specifications
2 Startup machines or equipment	2.1 Pre-startup checks are completed and documented according to enterprise procedures 2.2 Utilities are checked 2.3 Raw materials or feed lines are checked to ensure availability 2.4 Pre-startup conditions are reported according to enterprise procedures 2.5 Startup is conducted according to enterprise procedures 2.6 Machine or equipment operation is verified according to enterprise procedures
3 Maintain varnish/resin production process	3.1 Production process is operated in association with fellow workers and according to enterprise procedures and planned daily schedule 3.2 Production is maintained according to work health and safety (WHS) requirements and enterprise procedures 3.3 Process and equipment are monitored during batch manufacture to ensure operation is maintained 3.4 Records, log or checklists are completed according to enterprise procedures 3.5 Machines or equipment are inspected and readouts recorded and interpreted 3.6 Quality inspections and sampling are undertaken according to enterprise procedures 3.7 Consumables are monitored and added to the process according to job specifications
4 Maintain operation of equipment/process conditions	4.1 Variations or irregularities of equipment operation or process conditions are identified and reported 4.2 Production difficulties are anticipated and action is taken to prevent occurrence by timely intervention according to enterprise procedures 4.3 Corrective action is documented and reported according to enterprise procedures
5 Shut down varnish or resin manufacture process	5.1 Pre-shutdown checks are carried out and documented according to enterprise procedures 5.2 Correct shutdown sequence is followed according to manufacturer’s specifications and enterprise procedures 5.3 Shutdown is conducted in association with fellow workers and in compliance with WHS requirements 5.4 Product or materials used in manufacture are removed from operating area where appropriate 5.5 Solid and liquid waste is removed from operating area and recycled or disposed of, where required, according to regulatory requirements and enterprise procedures
6 Clean up	6.1 Equipment cleaning requirements are identified 6.2 Correct equipment or materials for manual or mechanical cleaning are selected 6.3 Cleaning is undertaken according to enterprise procedures

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 1.2, 2.1, 2.5, 2.6, 3.1, 3.2, 3.4-3.7, 4.3, 5.1-5.3, 5.5, 6.3	Identifies and interprets information from job and manufacturer’s specifications and enterprise procedures
Writing	2.1, 2.4, 3.4, 3.5, 4.1, 4.3, 5.1	Documents actions and outcomes in accordance with enterprise procedures
Oral communication	1.1, 2.4, 3.1, 4.1, 4.3, 5.3	Provides information regarding issues encountered and actions undertaken
Navigate the world of work	2.1, 2.4-2.6, 3.1, 3.2, 3.6, 4.2, 4.3, 5.1-5.5, 6.3	Complies with legislative requirements and organisational policies and procedures relevant to own role
Interact with others	3.1, 5.3	Cooperates with others as part of familiar routine activities and contributes to specific activities requiring joint responsibility
Get the work done	1.1, 1.2, 2.2, 2.3, 3.1, 3.3, 3.7, 4.1, 4.2, 5.1, 6.1, 6.2	Follows clearly defined instructions and monitors own progress on tasks Implements standard procedures when required to make routine decisions relevant to immediate tasks Initiates standard procedures when responding to anticipated or actual problems directly related to own role

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPINK335 Manufacture varnish and resin	ICPIM335C Manufacture varnish and resin	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPINK335 Manufacture varnish and resin

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

find, interpret and use information from various sources to carry out tasks according to requirements

manufacture TWO batches of varnish or resin to specifications, using EITHER fusion cooking OR reaction, including in-process testing according to manufacturer’s and job specifications, health and safety requirements and enterprise procedures including:

selecting and checking materials and equipment prior to processing

carrying out quality checks during processing and making required adjustments to process or equipment

completing required records

shutting down equipment

cleaning of equipment and removal of product and waste

complete a planned shutdown.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

identify the name and location of the enterprise document that contains information about:

batch coding system used in the work area

system for labelling containers

system for disposal of waste

identify health and safety requirements and environmental issues in relation to:

production of varnish or resin

manual handling issues that arise in the manufacture of varnish or resin

safety equipment that is required and how to check when fitting and using

chemicals used in the clean-up stage of the process

specify the checks, tests and/or monitoring required during all stages of the process including:

when measuring materials

when preparing for filtration

pre-startup checks that are required for TWO processes in varnish or resin manufacture

procedures for adding liquids or solids to a varnish or resin mix

quality checks that are required during the filtration process

explain the technical aspects of the varnish or resin manufacture process including:

equipment that is required for the manufacture of varnish or resin

properties that ink gains from the two basic components of varnish, resins and solvents

characteristics and end use of gelled and non-gelled varnishes

ideal conditions for filtration of varnish or resin product

effect that water contamination has on the manufacture of varnish or resin and what steps should be taken to avoid it

methods that are available for testing viscosity of varnish or resin

manner in which the viscosity of a batch of varnish or resin is increased

actions required if the viscosity is too low

procedures for recording details about the formulations, and in-process testing where required

outline inspections and monitoring that is carried out during varnish or resin production.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the ink manufacture field of work and include access to:

enterprise documents and procedures

raw materials and consumables

machines and equipment

cleaning chemicals.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPKNW311 Apply knowledge of the graphic pre-press sector

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to work in or deal with individuals in the pre-press sector of the printing industry.

It applies to individuals who require a detailed technical knowledge of pre-press activities and a working knowledge of related areas. They should have skills to facilitate technical communication and be able to work as a member of a team.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Holistic knowledge

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Apply knowledge of printing industry	1.1 Printing industry terminology and vocabulary are used correctly and accurately 1.2 New technology and new work processes are monitored and implemented when required 1.3 Trends within printing industry are monitored, on an ongoing basis, to inform personal work practices
2. Apply knowledge of government Acts and regulations	2.1 Basic principles and obligations involved in copyright, work health and safety (WHS), environmental protection, access and equity, and industrial awards are understood and followed within workplace and in personal work practices
3. Apply detailed knowledge of pre-press processes	3.1 Principles behind pre-press functions such as image production (typesetting, scanning, graphic arts camera), image combining (manual and electronic), image output (film, plates, direct to press) and digital workflow are understood and applied 3.2 Different types of images (line, half-tone, digital) and their uses are assessed to identify most appropriate image for given job 3.3 Different output settings (screen rulings, angles, shapes), are researched and their effects on final product are evaluated 3.4 Different types of output required for different printing processes are researched and evaluated for different jobs 3.5 Different output devices (film setters, plate setters, analogue proofs, digital proofs) are researched and evaluated for different jobs
4. Apply knowledge of printing processes	4.1 Basic principles of printing processes (lithography, relief, flexography, gravure, pad printing, screen printing, digital and electronic printing) are appraised to inform decisions made for different jobs 4.2 Types of jobs and products for each process are considered to ensure appropriate choices are made to meet client needs 4.3 Capabilities and limitations of each process are reviewed for different jobs
5. Apply knowledge of converting and finishing processes	5.1 Basic characteristics of converting and finishing processes (guillotining, flat-bed and rotary cutting, collating, folding, adhesive, mechanical and thermal fastening) are considered for different jobs 5.2 Types of processes are appraised to inform decisions made for different jobs
6. Apply knowledge of substrates and inks	6.1 Range of substrates used for each printing process is researched and evaluated for different jobs 6.2 Relationship of different paper sizes is considered for different jobs 6.3 Effects of different weights and callipers of substrates on pre-press operations are researched for different jobs 6.4 Effects of paper grain on pre-press, printing and finishing operations are researched for different jobs 6.5 Effects of different properties of ink (drying properties, fastness, gloss) on pre-press operations are researched for different jobs
7. Apply detailed knowledge of pre-press requirements for printing and finishing processes	7.1 Designs that are appropriate for different printing processes are explored according to different jobs 7.2 Dot gain and trapping requirements for different printing processes, inks and substrates are evaluated for different jobs 7.3 Effects of different substrates on use and positioning of trimming and folding marks are evaluated for different jobs 7.4 Criteria for evaluating suitability of pre-press outputs for printing processes are explored and implemented 7.5 Criteria for producing folding impositions are evaluated for different jobs
8. Apply knowledge of colour theory	8.1 Colour theory of additive colours (light), Red, Green, Blue (RGB), is used to inform pre-press and/or design decisions 8.2 Colour theory of subtractive colours (pigments), Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Key (black) (CMYK), is used to inform pre-press and/or design decisions 8.3 Relationship between ranges of visual colour RGB and CMYK is used to inform pre-press and/or design decisions 8.4 Relationship between hue, greyness and substrate for tone and colour correction is used to inform pre-press and/or design decisions 8.5 Colour matching conditions and colour matching systems are used to inform pre-press and/or design decisions 8.6 Procedures that ensure effective colour management are implemented
9. Apply basic knowledge of costs of production	9.1 Main cost elements (fixed, capital, variable) in pre-press production are considered during different jobs 9.2 Information required to accurately cost jobs and means of collecting it (manual and computerised) are considered and implemented, where required, during different jobs 9.3 Ways of minimising use of materials without affecting quality of output are considered and implemented during different jobs 9.4 Ways of maximising efficiency of capital and human resources are considered and implemented during different jobs
10. Apply basic knowledge of production management requirements and systems	10.1 Types of information that need to be exchanged between different stages of production to facilitate production efficiency are identified and implementation strategies are developed 10.2 Systems (manual and computerised) that can be used to exchange information are considered and implemented during different jobs 10.3 Basic principles of efficient production management are applied during different jobs 10.4 Principles of effective quality management are considered and implemented during different jobs

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.3, 10.1	Researches and comprehends information in a range of text types from various sources
Oral Communication	1.1	Uses appropriate vocabulary, including technical language relevant to role and context
Numeracy	9.1, 9.2	Uses estimation and other assessment skills to check the outcomes and decide on the appropriate accuracy for the outcomes Interprets and analyses a range of mathematical information that is used in familiar and routine tasks Represents the mathematical information in a form that is personally useful as an aid to problem solving
Navigate the world of work	1.2, 1.3, 2.1, 8.6	Maintains knowledge of the printing industry required for current role Complies with legislative requirements and follows organisational policies and procedures relevant to own role
Get the work done	1.2, 1.3, 3.1-3.5, 4.1-4.3, 5.1, 5.2, 6.1-6.5, 7.1-7.5, 8.1-8.6, 9.2-9.4, 10.1-10.4	Takes responsibility for planning and organising own workload using analytical processes to decide on a course of action, and assembles the resources required Recognises the potential of new approaches to enhance work practices and outcomes, and generates new ideas while regularly reviewing priorities and performance during implementation Monitors trends and identifies concepts, principles and features of approaches in use in other contexts, and redesigns these to suit own situation Applies formal problem-solving processes when tackling an unfamiliar problem Uses a range of digitally based technology and applications to access and filter data, and extract, organise, integrate and share relevant information in increasingly effective ways

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPKNW311 Apply knowledge of the graphic pre-press sector	ICPKN311C Apply knowledge of the graphic pre-press sector	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPKNW311 Apply knowledge of the graphic pre-press sector

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

use appropriate vocabulary and terminology in written and oral communications with tradespeople, colleagues, management or clients

keep up to date with trends in the printing industry

apply relevant legislative and workplace requirements when completing tasks

conduct research to determine image type, output settings, output requirements and output devices for different jobs

apply the correct process for a print job

apply the correct process for a converting or finishing job

use a colour management system to determine colour requirements for a print job

conduct research to determine appropriate substrate and ink for different print jobs

accurately plan, cost and document a print job.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

describe legislative and enterprise requirements that affect work practice

describe the basic principles behind the following pre-press functions:

image production (typesetting, scanning, graphic arts camera)

image combining (manual and electronic)

image output (film, plates, direct to press)

describe the basic principles of the following printing processes:

lithography

relief

flexography

gravure

pad printing

screen printing

digital and electronic printing

describe the range of substrates used for each printing process

describe designs that are appropriate for different printing processes

describe the basic characteristics of the following converting and finishing processes:

guillotining

flat-bed and rotary cutting

collating

folding

adhesive

mechanical and thermal fastening

describe the relationship between ranges of visual colour Red, Green, Blue (RGB) and Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Key (black) (CMYK)

explain the main cost elements in pre-press production

explain the basic principles of efficient production management.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the printing industry and include access to:

special purpose tools, equipment and materials

industry software packages.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPKNW312 Apply knowledge of printing machining

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to work in or deal with individuals in the printing sector of the printing industry.

It applies to individuals who require a detailed technical knowledge of printing activities and a working knowledge of related areas. They should have skills to facilitate technical communication and be able to work as a member of a team.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Holistic knowledge

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Apply knowledge of printing industry	1.1 Printing industry terminology and vocabulary are used correctly and accurately 1.2 New technology and new work processes are monitored and implemented when required 1.3 Trends within printing industry are monitored, on an ongoing basis, to inform personal work practices
2. Apply knowledge of government Acts and regulations	2.1 Basic principles and obligations involved in copyright, work health and safety (WHS), environmental protection, access and equity, and industrial awards are applied
3. Apply detailed knowledge of pre-press processes	3.1 Principles behind pre-press functions such as image production (typesetting, scanning, graphic arts camera), image combining (manual and electronic), image output (film, plates, direct to press) and digital workflow are applied where possible in workplace 3.2 Understanding of different types of images (line, half-tone, digital) is used in development of general strategies for printing 3.3 Understanding of different output settings (screen rulings, angles, shapes) and how they affect final product is used in development of general strategies for printing 3.4 Understanding of different types of output required for different printing processes is used in development of general processes for printing 3.5 Understanding of different output devices (film setters, plate setters, analogue proofs, digital proofs) is used in development of general processes for printing
4. Apply knowledge of printing processes	4.1 Principles of printing processes (lithography, relief, flexography, gravure, pad printing, screen printing, digital and electronic printing) are applied when using selected printing processes 4.2 Types of jobs and products for each process are considered to ensure appropriate choices are made to meet client needs 4.3 Capabilities and limitations of each process are considered when using selected printing processes
5. Apply knowledge of converting and finishing processes	5.1 Types of jobs and products for each process are considered to ensure appropriate choices are made to meet client needs
6. Apply knowledge of substrates and inks	6.1 Range of substrates used for each printing process are considered when making print set up decisions 6.2 Relationship of different paper sizes is considered when making print set up decisions 6.3 Effects of different weights and callipers of substrates on printing operations are considered when making print set up decisions 6.4 Effects of paper grain on pre-press, printing and finishing operations are considered when making print set up decisions 6.5 Effects of different properties of ink (drying properties, fastness, gloss) on printing and finishing operations are considered when making print set up decisions 6.6 Suitability of inks and coatings for particular finishing processes is considered when making print set up decisions
7. Apply detailed knowledge of printing requirements for pre-press and finishing processes	7.1 Selection of appropriate designs for different printing processes is considered in development of general strategies for printing 7.2 Criteria for evaluating suitability of pre-press outputs for printing processes are used in development of general strategies for printing 7.3 Mechanisms and techniques for adjusting image registration and position are used in development of general strategies for printing 7.4 Procedures for determining colour sequence are used in development of strategies for printing 7.5 Adjustments that can be made so that product matches approved proof are understood and used in development of general strategies for printing 7.6 Criteria for determining impositions and image placements for converting, binding and finishing operations are used in development of general strategies for printing
8. Apply knowledge of colour theory	8.1 Colour theory of additive colours (light), Red, Green Blue (RGB), is used to inform printing decisions 8.2 Colour theory of subtractive colours (pigments), Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Key (black) (CMYK), is used to inform printing decisions 8.3 Relationship between ranges of visual colour RGB and CMYK is used to inform printing decisions 8.4 Relationship between hue, greyness and substrate for tone and colour correction is used to inform printing decisions 8.5 Colour matching conditions and colour matching systems are used to inform printing decisions
9. Apply basic knowledge of costs of production	9.1 Main cost elements (fixed, capital, variable) in printing production are considered in printing decisions 9.2 Information required to accurately cost jobs and means of collecting it (manual and computerised) are applied to work practices 9.3 Ways of minimising use of materials without affecting quality of output are considered and used to inform printing processes 9.4 Ways of maximising efficiency of capital and human resources are considered and used to inform printing processes
10. Apply basic knowledge of production management requirements and systems	10.1 Types of information that need to be exchanged between different stages of production to facilitate production efficiency are used to inform personal work practices 10.2 Systems (manual and computerised) that can be used to exchange information are used in workplace 10.3 Basic principles of efficient production management are used to inform personal work practices 10.4 Consider and implement principles of effective quality management where required during different jobs

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.3	Researches and comprehends information in a range of text types from various sources
Oral Communication	1.1	Uses appropriate vocabulary, including technical language relevant to role and context
Numeracy	9.1, 9.2	Uses estimation and other assessment skills to check the outcomes and decide on the appropriate accuracy for the outcomes Interprets and analyses a range of mathematical information that is used in familiar and routine tasks Represents the mathematical information in a form that is personally useful as an aid to problem solving
Navigate the world of work	1.2, 1.3, 2.1	Maintains knowledge of the printing industry required for current role Complies with legislative requirements and follows organisational policies and procedures relevant to own role
Get the work done	1.2, 1.3, 3.1-3.5, 4.1-4.3, 5.2, 6.1-6.6, 7.1-7.6, 8.1-8.5, 9.2-9.4, 10.1-10.3	Takes responsibility for planning and organising own workload using analytical processes to decide on a course of action, and assembles the resources required Recognises the potential of new approaches to enhance work practices and outcomes, and generates new ideas while regularly reviewing priorities and performance during implementation Monitors trends and identifies concepts, principles and features of approaches in use in other contexts, and redesigns these to suit own situation Applies formal problem-solving processes when tackling an unfamiliar problem Uses a range of digitally based technology and applications to access and filter data, and extract, organise, integrate and share relevant information in increasingly effective ways

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPKNW312 Apply knowledge of printing machining	ICPKN312C Apply knowledge of printing machining	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPKNW312 Apply knowledge of printing machining

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

use appropriate vocabulary and terminology in written and oral communications with tradespeople, colleagues, management or clients

apply relevant legislative and workplace requirements when completing tasks

keep up to date with trends in the printing industry

develop general processes and strategies for printing that consider image type and placement, colour, output devices and settings, and output requirements

apply the correct process for a print job

choose the correct products for a converting or finishing job

choose appropriate substrate, colour and ink for different print jobs

use a colour management system to determine colour requirements for a print job

accurately plan, cost and document a print job.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

describe legislative and enterprise requirements that affect work practice

describe the basic principles of the following printing processes:

lithography

relief

flexography

gravure

pad printing

screen printing

digital and electronic printing

describe the range of substrates used for each printing process

describe designs that are appropriate for different printing processes

describe the basic principles behind the following pre-press functions:

image production (typesetting, scanning, graphic arts camera)

image combining (manual and electronic)

image output (film, plates, direct to press)

describe the basic characteristics of the following converting and finishing processes:

guillotining

flat-bed and rotary cutting

collating

folding

adhesive

mechanical and thermal fastening

describe the relationship between ranges of visual colour: Red, Green, Blue (RGB) and Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Key (black) (CMYK)

explain the main cost elements in pre-press production

explain the basic principles of efficient production management.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the printing industry and include access to:

special purpose tools, equipment and materials

industry software packages.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPKNW313 Apply knowledge and requirements of the converting, binding and finishing sector

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to comprehend elements of processes, regulations, production costs and management systems.

It applies to individuals who work as a member of a team and may facilitate technical communication.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Holistic knowledge

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Apply knowledge of printing industry	1.1 Printing industry terminology and vocabulary are used correctly and accurately 1.2 New technology and new work processes are monitored and implemented when required 1.3 Trends within printing industry are monitored on an ongoing basis to inform personal work practices
2. Apply knowledge of government Acts and regulations	2.1 Basic principles and obligations involved in copyright, work health and safety (WHS), environmental protection, access and equity, and industrial awards are observed within workplace and in personal work practices
3. Apply detailed knowledge of pre-press processes	3.1 Basic principles behind pre-press functions such as image production (typesetting, scanning, graphic arts camera), image combining (manual and electronic), image output (film, plates, direct to press) and digital workflow are used in production processes 3.2 Appropriate use of different types of images (line, half-tone, digital) is investigated and used to determine job requirements 3.3 Different output settings (screen rulings, angles, shapes) and their effects on final printed product are described and used 3.4 Different types of output required for different media and printing processes are determined and used in production process 3.5 Different output devices (film setters, plate setters, analogue proofs, digital proofs) are identified, evaluated and built into production processes
4. Apply knowledge of printing processes	4.1 Basic principles of printing processes (lithography, relief, flexography, gravure, pad printing, screen printing, digital and electronic printing) are used to inform production processes 4.2 Understanding of types of jobs and products for which each process is appropriate is used to inform production decisions 4.3 Capabilities and limitations of each process are reviewed and used to inform production decisions
5. Apply knowledge of converting and finishing processes	5.1 Basic characteristics of converting and finishing processes (guillotining, flat-bed and rotary cutting, collating, folding, adhesive, mechanical and thermal fastening) are understood and used to inform production processes 5.2 Types of jobs and products for which each process is appropriate are assessed and used to inform production processes
6. Apply detailed knowledge of substrates	6.1 Relationship of different substrate sizes is used to inform production processes 6.2 Effects of different weights, callipers, bulk, density and opacity of substrates on pre-press, printing and finishing operations and end uses are researched and information used to inform production processes 6.3 Effects of paper grain on pre-press, printing and finishing operations are researched and information used to inform production processes 6.4 Impact of moisture content, porosity and ink absorbency on pre-press, printing and finishing operations is determined and used to inform production processes 6.5 Effects of gloss, smoothness and surface strength on press, printing and finishing operations are determined and used to inform production processes 6.6 Effects of permanence, durability, and acidity and alkalinity of paper on pre-press, printing and finishing operations and end uses are determined and used to inform production processes 6.7 Bursting strength, folding endurance, tensile strength and tearing resistance are examined to determine effects on printing and finishing operations, end uses and production processes
7. Apply knowledge of converting and finishing requirements for pre-press and printing processes	7.1 Use and positioning of trimming and folding marks and how these are affected by different substrates are considered and used to inform production processes 7.2 Principles of effective quality management are considered and implemented where required during different jobs 7.3 Effects of different substrates on use and positioning of trimming and folding marks are researched to inform production processes 7.4 Criteria for producing folding impositions are identified and used to inform production processes 7.5 Procedures for determining appropriate packing techniques are accessed and used to inform production processes
8. Apply basic knowledge of costs of production	8.1 Main cost elements (fixed, capital, variable) in printing production are identified and used to inform converting and finishing decisions 8.2 Information required to accurately cost jobs and means of collecting it (manual and computerised) are applied to work practices 8.3 Ways of minimising use of materials without affecting quality of output are identified and used to inform converting and finishing processes 8.4 Ways of maximising efficiency of capital and human resources are identified and used to inform converting and finishing processes
9. Apply basic knowledge of production management requirements and systems	9.1 Types of information that need to be exchanged during different production stages to facilitate efficient production are used to inform personal work practice 9.2 Systems (manual and computerised) that can be used to exchange information are selected and used in workplace 9.3 Basic principles of efficient production management are used to inform personal work practices

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.3	Researches and comprehends information in a range of text types from various sources
Oral Communication	1.1	Uses appropriate vocabulary, including technical language relevant to role and context
Numeracy	8.1, 8.2	Uses estimation and other assessment skills to check the outcomes and decide on the appropriate accuracy for the outcomes Interprets and analyses a range of mathematical information that is used in familiar and routine tasks Represents the mathematical information in a form that is personally useful as an aid to problem solving
Navigate the world of work	1.2, 1.3, 2.1, 2.2	Maintains knowledge of the printing industry required for current role Complies with legislative requirements and follows organisational policies and procedures relevant to own role
Get the work done	1.2, 1.3, 2.1, 3.1-3.5, 4.1-4.3, 5.1, 5.2, 6.1- 6.7, 7.1-7.3, 7.5, 8.2-8.4, 9.1-9.3	Takes responsibility for planning and organising own workload using analytical processes to decide on a course of action Plans, identifies and assembles resources required to complete tasks Applies formal problem-solving processes when tackling an unfamiliar problem Understands the purposes, specific functions and key features of common digital systems and tools, and operates them effectively

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPKNW313 Apply knowledge and requirements of the converting, binding and finishing sector	ICPKN313C Apply knowledge and requirements of the converting, binding and finishing sector	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPKNW313 Apply knowledge and requirements of the converting, binding and finishing sector

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

use appropriate vocabulary and terminology in written and oral communications with tradespeople, colleagues, management or clients

keep up to date with trends in the printing industry

apply relevant legislative and workplace requirements when completing tasks

determine image type, output settings, output requirements and output devices for different jobs

apply the correct process for a converting or finishing job

use a colour management system to determine colour requirements for a print job

research appropriate substrates and inks for different print jobs

accurately plan, cost and document a print job.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

describe legislative and enterprise requirements that affect work practice

describe the basic characteristics of the following converting and finishing processes:

guillotining

flat-bed and rotary cutting

collating

folding

adhesive

mechanical and thermal fastening

describe the basic principles of the following printing processes:

lithography

relief

flexography

gravure

pad printing

screen printing

digital and electronic printing

describe the range of substrates used for each printing process

describe designs that are appropriate for different printing processes

describe the basic principles behind the following pre-press functions:

image production (typesetting, scanning, graphic arts camera)

image combining (manual and electronic)

image output (film, plates, direct to press)

describe the relationship between ranges of visual colour Red, Green, Blue (RGB) and Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Key (black) (CMYK)

explain the main cost elements in pre-press production

explain the basic principles of efficient production management.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the printing industry and include access to:

special purpose tools, equipment and materials

industry software packages.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPKNW314 Apply knowledge and requirements of the screen printing sector

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the performance outcomes, skills and knowledge required to work in or deal with the screen printing sector of the printing industry; that is, a working knowledge of related areas and a detailed knowledge of specific screen printing operations.

It applies to individuals who may facilitate technical communication and who work as a member of a team.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Holistic knowledge

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Apply knowledge of printing industry	1.1 Printing industry terminology and vocabulary are used correctly and accurately 1.2 New technology and new work processes are monitored and implemented when required 1.3 Trends within printing industry are monitored, on an ongoing basis, to inform personal work practices
2. Apply knowledge of government Acts and regulations	2.1 Basic principles and obligations involved in copyright, work health and safety (WHS), environmental protection, access and equity, and industrial awards are observed within workplace and in personal work practices
3. Apply knowledge of pre-press processes	3.1 Basic principles behind pre-press functions such as image production (typesetting, scanning, graphic arts camera), image combining (manual and electronic), image output (film, plates, direct to press) and digital workflow are used in production processes where applicable 3.2 Appropriate use of different types of images (line, half-tone) is investigated and general methods developed for printing 3.3 Different output settings (screen rulings, angles, shapes) and how they affect final product are researched to develop general methods for printing 3.4 Different types of output required for different printing processes are determined and general methods developed for printing 3.5 Different output devices (film setters, plate setters, analogue proofs, digital proofs) are identified and general processes developed for printing
4. Apply knowledge of printing processes	4.1 Basic principles of printing processes (lithography, relief, flexography, gravure, pad printing, screen printing, digital and electronic printing) are researched 4.2 Types of jobs and products for which each process is appropriate are identified 4.3 Capabilities and limitations of each process are investigated and general strategies developed to address client need
5. Apply knowledge of converting and finishing processes	5.1 Basic characteristics of converting and finishing processes (guillotining, flat-bed and rotary cutting, collating, folding, adhesive, mechanical and thermal fastening) are used to inform printing decisions 5.2 Types of jobs and products for which each process is appropriate are researched and used to inform printing decisions
6. Apply detailed knowledge of substrates and inks	6.1 Range of substrates for each printing process is used to inform printing decisions 6.2 Relationship of different paper sizes is used to inform printing decisions 6.3 Information about effects of different weights and callipers of substrates on screen printing operations is used to inform printing decisions 6.4 Effects of paper grain on pre-press, printing and finishing operations are researched and results used to inform production processes 6.5 Differences in printing on different substrates (paper, plastic, glass) are investigated to inform printing decisions 6.6 Effects of different properties of ink (drying properties, fastness, gloss) on screen printing operations are observed and results used to inform printing decisions 6.7 Inks and coatings that are appropriate and inappropriate for particular finishing processes are identified and considered in printing decisions
7. Apply detailed knowledge of screen printing and stencil preparation techniques and requirements	7.1 Designs that are appropriate for screen printing on particular substrates are identified and used to inform printing decisions 7.2 Criteria for selecting mesh count and stencil type are determined and used to inform printing decisions 7.3 Dot gain, trapping and minimising moire requirements for different meshes, stencils, inks and substrates are identified and used to inform printing decisions 7.4 Effects of different substrates on use and positioning of trimming and folding marks are investigated to inform printing decisions 7.5 Mechanisms and techniques for adjusting image registration and position are determined and used to inform printing decisions 7.6 Procedure for determining colour sequence is used to inform printing decisions 7.7 Adjustments that can be made so that product matches approved proof are determined and used to inform printing decisions
8. Apply knowledge of colour theory	8.1 Colour theory of additive colours (light), Red, Green, Blue (RGB), is used to inform printing decisions 8.2 Colour theory of subtractive colours (pigments), Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Key (black) (CMYK), is used to inform printing decisions 8.3 Relationship between ranges of visual colour RGB and CMYK is used to inform printing decisions 8.4 Relationship between hue, greyness and substrate for tone and colour correction is used to inform printing decisions 8.5 Colour matching conditions and colour matching systems are used to inform printing decisions 8.6 Procedures that ensure effective colour management are implemented
9. Apply basic knowledge of costs of production	9.1 Types of information that need to be exchanged between different stages of production to facilitate production efficiency are used in personal work practices 9.2 Systems (manual and computerised) that can be used to exchange information are considered and used in workplace 9.3 Basic principles of efficient production management are used in personal work practices
10. Apply basic knowledge of production management requirements and systems	10.1 Types of information that need to be exchanged between different stages of production to facilitate production efficiency are identified and used to inform production decisions 10.2 Systems (manual and computerised) that can be used to exchange information are used in workplace 10.3 Basic principles of efficient production management are applied in workplace

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.3	Researches and comprehends information in a range of text types from various sources
Oral Communication	1.1	Uses appropriate vocabulary, including technical language relevant to role and context
Numeracy	6.2, 6.3	Uses estimation and other assessment skills to check the outcomes and decide on the appropriate accuracy for the outcomes Interprets and analyses a range of mathematical information that is used in familiar and routine tasks Represents the mathematical information in a form that is personally useful as an aid to problem solving
Navigate the world of work	1.2, 1.3, 2.1	Maintains knowledge of the printing industry required for current role Complies with legislative requirements and follows organisational policies and procedures relevant to own role
Get the work done	1.2, 1.3, 3.1-3.5, 4.1-4.3, 6.1-6.7, 7.1-7.7, 8.1-8.6, 9.1-9.3, 10.1-10.3	Takes responsibility for planning and organising own workload using analytical processes to decide on a course of action, and assembles the resources required Recognises the potential of new approaches to enhance work practices and outcomes, and generates new ideas while regularly reviewing priorities and performance during implementation Monitors trends and identifies concepts, principles and features of approaches in use in other contexts, and redesigns these to suit own situation Applies formal problem-solving processes when tackling an unfamiliar problem Uses a range of digitally based technology and applications to access and filter data, and extract, organise, integrate and share relevant information in increasingly effective ways

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPKNW314 Apply knowledge and requirements of the screen printing sector	ICPKN314C Apply knowledge and requirements of the screen printing sector	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPKNW314 Apply knowledge and requirements of the screen printing sector

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

use appropriate vocabulary and terminology in written and oral communications with tradespeople, colleagues, management or clients

apply relevant legislative and workplace requirements when completing tasks

keep up to date with trends in the screen printing industry

develop general methods for screen printing that consider image type and placement, colour, output devices and settings, and output requirements

choose appropriate products and processes for a converting or finishing job

choose appropriate substrate, mesh count, stencil and ink for different print jobs

use a colour management system to determine colour requirements for a print job

accurately plan, cost and document a print job.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

describe legislative and enterprise requirements that affect work practice

describe designs that are appropriate for screen printing

describe the procedure for determining colour sequence

describe the basic principles of the following printing processes:

lithography

relief

flexography

gravure

pad printing

screen printing

digital and electronic printing

describe the basic characteristics of the following converting and finishing processes:

guillotining

flat-bed and rotary cutting

collating

folding

adhesive

mechanical and thermal fastening

describe the range of substrates used for each printing process

describe the basic principles behind the following pre-press functions:

image production (typesetting, scanning, graphic arts camera)

image combining (manual and electronic)

image output (film, plates, direct to press)

describe the relationship between ranges of visual colour Red, Green, Blue (RGB) and Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Key (black) (CMYK)

explain the main cost elements in pre-press production

explain the basic principles of efficient production management.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the printing industry and include access to:

special purpose tools, equipment and materials

industry software packages.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPKNW315 Apply knowledge and requirements of the multimedia sector

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to work in or deal with the multimedia sector of the printing industry, including having a working knowledge of related areas and a detailed knowledge of specific multimedia areas.

It applies to individuals who are working in or dealing with the multimedia sector of the printing industry and who are able to work as part of a team.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Holistic knowledge

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Apply knowledge of multimedia and printing industry	1.1 Printing industry terminology and vocabulary are used correctly 1.2 New technology and new work processes are monitored and implemented when required 1.3 Trends within printing industry are monitored, on an ongoing basis, to inform personal work practices 1.4 International standards and open source standards are monitored for new developments and applied where appropriate
2. Apply knowledge of government Acts and regulations	2.1 Basic principles and obligations involved in copyright, work health and safety (WHS), environmental protection, access and equity, and industrial awards are applied
3. Apply knowledge of pre-press processes	3.1 Basic principles behind pre-press functions such as image production (typesetting, scanning, graphic arts camera), image combining (manual and electronic), image output (film, plates, direct to press) and digital workflow are understood and used in the production process where applicable 3.2 Appropriate use of different types of images (line, half-tone) is investigated as required 3.3 Different output settings (screen rulings, angles, shapes) and how they affect final printed product are researched and used as required 3.4 Different types of output required for different media and printing processes are determined and used in production process where applicable 3.5 Different output devices (film setters, plate, analogue proofs, digital proofs) are determined and used in production process where applicable
4. Apply detailed knowledge of multimedia techniques and requirements	4.1 Designs that are appropriate or inappropriate for multimedia are determined and applied to development process where applicable 4.2 Criteria for choosing visual, audio or text delivery for presenting information in both passive and interactive products are applied to development process where applicable 4.3 Differences between various markup languages and their application are applied to a range of suitable development work 4.4 Differences between various scripting languages and their application are identified and applied to a range of suitable development work 4.5 Criteria for selecting graphic resolution and formats, and advantages and limitations of different formats, are applied to development process where applicable 4.6 Criteria for selecting audio formats for multimedia, and advantages and limitations of different formats, are applied to development process where applicable 4.7 Criteria for selecting video formats for multimedia, and advantages and limitations of different formats, are applied to development process where applicable 4.8 Criteria for selecting animation formats for multimedia, and advantages and limitations of different formats, are applied to development process where applicable 4.9 Multimedia platforms and computer systems requirements for different multimedia products are investigated and applied to development process where applicable 4.10 Different software and operating systems for producing multimedia products are evaluated for different jobs 4.11 Features of an effective navigation system for both passive and interactive products are analysed and applied to development process where applicable 4.12 Effect of rapidly changing technology and how multimedia production needs to respond to it is investigated
5. Apply knowledge of colour theory	5.1 Colour theory of additive colours (light), Red Green Blue (RGB), is used to inform design decisions 5.2 Colour theory of subtractive colours (pigments), Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Key (black) (CMYK), is used to inform design decisions 5.3 Relationship between ranges of visual colour RGB and CMYK is used to inform design decisions 5.4 Relationship between hue and greyness for tone and colour correction is used to inform design decisions
6. Apply basic knowledge of costs of production	6.1 Main cost elements (fixed, capital, variable) in multimedia production are used to inform development decisions 6.2 Information required to accurately cost jobs and means of collecting it (manual and computerised) are used to inform development decisions 6.3 Ways of minimising use of materials without affecting quality of output are used to inform development decisions 6.4 Ways of maximising efficiency of capital and human resources are used to inform development decisions
7. Demonstrate basic knowledge of production management requirements and systems	7.1 Types of information that need to be exchanged between different stages of production to facilitate production efficiency are identified and used to inform development decisions 7.2 Systems (manual and computerised) that can be used to exchange information are used in workplace 7.3 Basic principles of efficient production management are used to inform development decisions

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.3, 1.4, 4.2-4.4	Researches and comprehends information in a range of text types from various sources
Oral Communication	1.1	Uses appropriate vocabulary, including technical language relevant to role and context
Numeracy	6.1, 6.2	Uses estimation and other assessment skills to check the outcomes and decide on the appropriate accuracy for the outcomes Interprets and analyses a range of mathematical information that is used in familiar and routine tasks Represents the mathematical information in a form that is personally useful as an aid to problem solving
Navigate the world of work	1.2-1.4, 2.1	Maintains knowledge of the printing industry required for current role Complies with legislative requirements and follows organisational policies and procedures relevant to own role
Get the work done	1.2-1.4, 3.1-3.5, 4.1-4.12, 5.1-5.4, 6.2-6.4, 7.1-7.3	Takes responsibility for planning and organising own workload using analytical processes to decide on a course of action, and assembles the resources required Recognises the potential of new approaches to enhance work practices and outcomes, and generates new ideas while regularly reviewing priorities and performance during implementation Monitors trends and identifies concepts, principles and features of approaches in use in other contexts, and redesigns these to suit own situation Applies formal problem-solving processes when tackling an unfamiliar problem Understands the purposes, specific functions and key features of common digital systems and tools, and operates them effectively

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPKNW315 Apply knowledge and requirements of the multimedia sector	ICPKN315C Apply knowledge and requirements of the multimedia sector	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPKNW315 Apply knowledge and requirements of the multimedia sector

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

use appropriate vocabulary and terminology in written and oral communications with tradespeople, colleagues, management or clients

apply relevant legislative and workplace requirements when completing tasks

keep up to date with trends and standards in the multimedia and printing industry

investigate and use different types of images, output devices and settings, and output types

identify and use markup or scripting languages in development work

select appropriate graphic, audio, video and animation formats in development work

investigate and use a range of computer systems and software to produce multimedia products

use relationships between additive colours, subtractive colours, hue and greyness to inform design decisions

accurately plan, cost and document a print job.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

describe legislative and enterprise requirements that affect work practice

describe designs that are appropriate for multimedia

describe the criteria for choosing visual, audio or text delivery

describe the criteria for selecting graphic resolution and formats

describe the criteria for selecting applicable audio formats

describe the criteria for selecting video formats

explain the different software and operating systems for producing multimedia products

explain the effect of rapidly changing technology on multimedia production

describe the basic principles behind the following pre-press functions:

image production (typesetting, scanning, graphic arts camera)

image combining (manual and electronic)

image output (film, plates, direct to press)

describe the relationship between ranges of visual colour Red, Green, Blue (RGB) and Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Key (black) (CMYK)

explain the main cost elements in pre-press production

explain the basic principles of efficient production management.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the printing industry and include access to:

special purpose tools, equipment and materials

industry software packages.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPKNW316 Apply knowledge and requirements of paper and printing processes

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to work or deal with the paper merchants in the printing industry.

It applies to individuals who are working in or dealing with the paper merchants and who can work as part of a team.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Holistic knowledge

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Apply knowledge of printing industry	1.1 Printing industry terminology and vocabulary are used correctly 1.2 New technology and new work processes are monitored and implemented when required 1.3 Trends within printing industry are monitored, on an ongoing basis, to inform personal work practices
2. Apply knowledge of government Acts and regulations	2.1 Basic principles and obligations involved in copyright, work health and safety (WHS), environmental protection, access and equity, and industrial awards are applied
3. Apply knowledge of pre-press processes	3.1 Basic principles behind pre-press functions such as image production (typesetting, scanning, graphic arts camera), image combining (manual and electronic), image output (film, plates, direct to press) and digital workflow are used in production process where applicable 3.2 Appropriate use of different types of images (line, half-tone) are investigated 3.3 Different output settings (screen rulings, angles, shapes) and how they affect final product are understood 3.4 Different types of output required for different printing processes are applied 3.5 Different output devices (film setters, plate setters, analogue proofs, digital proofs) are determined
4. Apply knowledge of printing processes	4.1 Basic principles of printing processes (lithography, relief, flexography, gravure, pad printing, screen printing, digital and electronic printing) are used to inform production processes 4.2 Types of jobs and products for which each process is appropriate are used to inform production decisions 4.3 Capabilities and limitations of each process are used to inform production decisions
5. Apply knowledge of converting and finishing processes	5.1 Basic characteristics of converting and finishing processes (guillotining, flat-bed and rotary cutting, collating, folding, adhesive, mechanical and thermal fastening) are used to inform production processes 5.2 Types of jobs and products for which each process is appropriate are used to inform production processes
6. Apply detailed knowledge of paper and printing processes	6.1 Relationship of different paper sizes is identified and used to inform production processes 6.2 Different weights, callipers, bulk, density and opacity of paper and how they affect pre-press, printing and finishing operations and end uses are identified and used to inform production processes 6.3 Paper grain and how it affects pre-press, printing and finishing operations are determined and used to inform production processes 6.4 Moisture content, porosity and ink absorbency and how they affect pre-press, printing and finishing operations are identified and used to inform production processes 6.5 Gloss, smoothness and surface strength and how they affect pre-press, printing and finishing operations are identified and used to inform production processes 6.6 Permanence, durability, and acidity and alkalinity of paper and how they affect pre-press, printing and finishing operations and end uses are investigated and used to inform production processes 6.7 Bursting strength, folding endurance, tensile strength and tearing resistance and how they affect printing and finishing operations and end uses are investigated and used to inform production processes
7. Apply detailed knowledge of paper grades and colours	7.1 Paper types and grades and end uses for each type and grade are determined and used to inform production processes 7.2 Differences between wood pulp, rag and recycled papers and appropriate end uses are identified and used to inform production processes 7.3 Colour matching processes are identified and used to inform production processes 7.4 Effect of different paper colours on printing operations is investigated and used to inform production processes
8. Apply detailed knowledge of paper handling and storage procedures	8.1 Ideal storage conditions for different types and grades of paper are investigated and used to inform production procedures 8.2 Advantages and disadvantages of different packing and delivery systems are identified and used to inform production procedures
9. Apply basic knowledge of costs of production	9.1 Main cost elements (fixed, capital, variable) in production are identified and applied in workplace 9.2 Information required to accurately cost jobs and means of collecting it (manual and computerised) are identified and applied in workplace 9.3 Ways of minimising use of materials without affecting quality of output are investigated and applied in workplace 9.4 Ways of maximising efficiency of capital and human resources are investigated and applied in workplace

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.3	Researches and comprehends information in a range of text types from various sources
Oral Communication	1.1	Uses appropriate vocabulary, including technical language relevant to role and context
Numeracy	9.1, 9.2	Uses estimation and other assessment skills to check the outcomes and decide on the appropriate accuracy for the outcomes Interprets and analyses a range of mathematical information that is used in familiar and routine tasks Represents the mathematical information in a form that is personally useful as an aid to problem solving
Navigate the world of work	1.2, 1.3, 2.1	Maintains knowledge of the printing industry required for current role Complies with legislative requirements and follows organisational policies and procedures relevant to own role
Get the work done	1.2, 1.3, 2.1, 3.1-3.5, 4.1-4.3, 5.1, 5.2, 6.1-6.7, 7.1-7.4, 8.1, 8.2, 9.2-9.4	Takes responsibility for planning and organising own workload using analytical processes to decide on a course of action Plans, identifies and assembles resources required to complete tasks Applies formal problem-solving processes when tackling an unfamiliar problem Understands the purposes, specific functions and key features of common digital systems and tools and operates them effectively

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPKNW316 Apply knowledge and requirements of paper and printing processes	ICPKN316C Apply knowledge and requirements of paper and printing processes	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPKNW316 Apply knowledge and requirements of paper and printing processes

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

use appropriate vocabulary and terminology in written and oral communications with tradespeople, colleagues, management or clients

keep up to date with trends in the printing industry

apply relevant legislative and workplace requirements when completing tasks

consider image type, output settings, output requirements and output devices for different jobs

use the correct process and product for a printing, converting or finishing job

conduct research to determine appropriate substrate and ink for different print jobs

use a colour matching process in a production process

apply a packing and delivery stems based on requirements of paper

accurately plan, cost and document a print job.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

describe legislative and enterprise requirements that affect work practice

describe the basic principles of the following printing processes:

lithography

relief

flexography

gravure

pad printing

screen printing

digital and electronic printing

describe the range of substrates used for each printing process

describe the relationship of different paper sizes

explain paper grain and how it affects pre-press, printing and finishing operations

describe designs that are appropriate for different printing processes

explain the advantages and disadvantages of different packing and delivery systems

describe the basic principles behind the following pre-press functions:

image production (typesetting, scanning, graphic arts camera)

image combining (manual and electronic)

image output (film, plates, direct to press)

describe the basic characteristics of the following converting and finishing processes:

guillotining

flat-bed and rotary cutting

collating

folding

adhesive

mechanical and thermal fastening

describe the relationship between ranges of visual colour Red, Green, Blue (RGB) and Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Key (black) (CMYK)

explain the main cost elements in pre-press production.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the printing industry and include access to:

special purpose tools, equipment and materials

industry software packages.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPKNW317 Apply knowledge and requirements of the ink manufacturing sector

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to work in the ink manufacturing sector of the printing industry.

It applies to individuals working as production staff, chemists, laboratory technicians, in quality testing and in other research and development roles who can work as a part of a team.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Holistic knowledge

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Apply knowledge of printing industry	1.1 Printing industry terminology and vocabulary are used correctly 1.2 New technology and new work processes are monitored and implemented when required 1.3 Trends within printing industry are monitored, on an ongoing basis, to inform personal work practices
2. Apply knowledge of government Acts and regulations	2.1 Basic principles and obligations involved in copyright, work health and safety (WHS), environmental protection, access and equity, and industrial awards are applied
3. Identify categories of ink manufacturing sector and enterprise products and services	3.1 Scope of ink manufacturing sector, its products, services and client or supplier profile are identified 3.2 Enterprise products and services, their characteristics and their end use, specifically with regard to printing industry, are identified 3.3 Printing processes and procedures and their implication for ink manufacture are used to inform decisions about ink usage
4. Identify enterprise processes and procedures	4.1 Manufacturing processes and quality control procedures for ink, coating, varnish, resin, or chemical production are identified and used to inform decisions about ink usage 4.2 Raw material, intermediate and final product testing and recording procedures within enterprise are identified and applied in personal work practices 4.3 Product research and development capacity and opportunities are identified and explored for professional development and enterprise purposes
5. Apply knowledge of testing procedures	5.1 Appropriate testing procedures for each stage of product manufacture are described and evaluated, and improvements applied where required 5.2 Workplace quality assurance procedures are applied in workplace 5.3 Procedures for developing and testing formulae for new product, with reference to end use and capability and suitability of manufacturing processes, are described and applied in workplace

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.3, 4.2, 4.3	Researches and comprehends information in a range of text types from various sources Recognises and interprets text to establish the job requirements from information in procedures and specifications
Writing	4.2	Completes workplace documents accurately
Oral Communication	1.1, 5.1, 5.3	Uses appropriate vocabulary, including technical language relevant to role and context
Numeracy	3.3	Interprets and analyses a range of mathematical information that is used in familiar and routine tasks
Navigate the world of work	1.2, 1.3, 2.1, 4.1-4.3, 5.1-5.3	Maintains knowledge of the printing industry required for current role Complies with legislative requirements and follows organisational policies and procedures relevant to own role
Get the work done	1.2, 1.3, 2.1, 3.1-3.3, 4.1-4.3, 5.1-5.3	Determines priorities and sequences the steps involved in clearly defined, familiar tasks, and identifies and assembles the resources required Makes decisions by evaluating benefits, costs, risks and feasibility from a broad range of perspectives Recognises the potential of new approaches to enhance work practices Responds to predictable problems and implements standard or logical solutions related to the role in the immediate work environment Demonstrates a sophisticated understanding of principles, concepts, language and practices associated with the digital world

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPKNW317 Apply knowledge and requirements of the ink manufacturing sector	ICPKN317C Apply knowledge and requirements of the ink manufacturing sector	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPKNW317 Apply knowledge and requirements of the ink manufacturing sector

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

use appropriate vocabulary and terminology in written and oral communications with tradespeople, colleagues, management or clients

apply relevant legislative and workplace requirements when completing tasks

keep up to date with trends in the printing industry

apply required processes and procedures for ink usage, testing or manufacturing.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

describe legislative and enterprise requirements that affect work practice

describe enterprise products and services, their characteristics and their end use

describe manufacturing processes and quality control procedures for ink, coating, varnish, resin or chemical production

describe testing procedures for each stage of product manufacture.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the printing industry and include access to special purpose tools, equipment and materials.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPKNW318 Apply knowledge and requirements of mail house operations

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the, skills and knowledge required to work in or deal with a mail house, including a detailed knowledge of specific mailing, labelling and dispatching areas.

It applies to individuals working in or dealing with a mail house and who can work as part of a team.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Holistic knowledge

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Apply knowledge of printing industry	1.1 Printing industry terminology and vocabulary are used correctly 1.2 New technology and new work processes are monitored and implemented when required 1.3 Trends within printing industry are monitored, on an ongoing basis, to inform personal work practices 1.4 Job requirements and alterations are discussed with and applied by tradespersons, supervisors, production managers and clients
2. Apply knowledge of government Acts, regulations and codes of practice	2.1 Basic principles and obligations involved in copyright, work health and safety (WHS), environmental protection, access and equity, and industrial awards are applied 2.2 Codes of practice and responsibilities regarding both paper and electronic-based products and services, and direct marketing, are applied in personal work practices 2.3 Legislative requirements regarding storage of data, addressing, ownership of lists, intellectual copyright, privacy and confidentiality of information are applied in personal work practices 2.4 Mail house responsibilities in regard to public, clients, suppliers and employees are adhered to in personal work practices
3. Apply knowledge of postal standards and requirements	3.1 Limitations on size, weight and content of postal items are applied in processing mail and/or parcels 3.2 Australia Post, Post Standards and Letter Pre-Sorting Standards are used to inform workflow processes 3.3 Packaging requirements for a range of products are adhered to
4. Identify enterprise processes and procedures	4.1 Importance of digital printing systems including inkjet, laser and offset technologies in mail house centre are investigated 4.2 Digital data customisation is used to inform quality checks 4.3 Advantages and applications of digital printing within mail house are analysed 4.4 In-line processes associated with digital printing systems are identified and used to inform work processes 4.5 Process and applications of bar coding as applied to mail house operations and services are identified
5. Apply knowledge of computerised systems and associated software as used in mail house sector	5.1 Variety of computer driven equipment typical in mail house operations is used where appropriate 5.2 Computer driven bar code, sorting, tagging and reading systems are applied in workplace where appropriate 5.3 Data management and processing systems and software are used where appropriate 5.4 Computerised document management, design and reading systems and software are used where appropriate 5.5 Computerised market research and listing services and associated software are used where appropriate 5.6 Recent developments in electronic mailing and new applications of this technology are investigated
6. Apply knowledge of pre-press, printing, converting and finishing sectors and processes	6.1 Principles and functions of image production (typesetting, scanning, camera), image combining (manual and electronic), image output (film, plates, direct to press) and digital workflow are used to inform production processes where appropriate 6.2 Pre-press functions including image classification (type, line, tone), output settings (screen rulings, angles) and output devices (film setter, plate maker, proofer) are identified and used to inform production processes where appropriate 6.3 Conventional printing processes are used to inform production processes where appropriate 6.4 Most suitable printing process for variety of jobs and products, taking into account cost, quality and end user requirements, is identified and used to inform decisions about printing processes where appropriate 6.5 Capabilities and limitations of each printing process are investigated and used to inform decisions about printing processes where appropriate 6.6 Basic principles and characteristics of a variety of converting and finishing operations (guillotining, collating, folding, inserting, fastening) are understood and used to inform production processes where appropriate 6.7 Terminology suited to those working in mail house, printing and related industries is applied in workplace
7. Apply knowledge of substrates, inks, toners and coatings	7.1 Substrates used for each printing process and properties that make them suitable are identified and used to inform production processes where appropriate 7.2 International paper sizes (IPS) system, its basis and relationship of different paper sizes are used to inform production processes where appropriate 7.3 Different weights, callipers and finishes of substrates and how they affect mailing and converting and finishing operations are identified and used to inform production processes where appropriate 7.4 Paper grain and how it affects pre-press, printing, finishing and mailing operations are investigated and used to inform production processes where appropriate 7.5 Ink characteristics (drying properties, fastness, gloss, opacity, tack, scuff resistance) and their effect on printing, finishing and end user requirements are investigated and used to inform production processes where appropriate 7.6 Desirable qualities for inks, toners and coatings to ensure suitability for substrate, finishing operations and end user requirements are investigated and used to inform production processes where appropriate
8. Apply knowledge of costs of production	8.1 Main cost elements (fixed, capital, variable) in converting and finishing production are applied in workplace 8.2 Information required to accurately cost jobs and means of collecting it (manual and computerised) are investigated and applied in workplace 8.3 Ways of minimising use of materials without affecting quality of output are researched and applied in workplace 8.4 Ways of maximising efficiency of capital and human resources are researched and applied in workplace
9. Apply knowledge of production management requirements and systems	9.1 Types of information that need to be exchanged between different stages of production to facilitate production efficiency are investigated and applied in workplace 9.2 Systems (manual and computerised) that can be used to exchange information are investigated and applied in workplace 9.3 Basic principles of efficient production management are applied in workplace

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.3, 7.2	Researches and comprehends information in a range of text types from various sources Recognises and interprets text to establish the job requirements from information contained within relevant procedures and specifications
Oral Communication	1.1, 1.4, 6.7	Participates effectively in spoken interactions using correct technical and enterprise specific vocabulary
Numeracy	8.1-8.4	Interprets and analyses a range of mathematical information that is used in familiar and routine tasks
Navigate the world of work	1.2, 1.3, 2.1-2.5, 3.1-3.3, 5.6, 7.2	Maintains knowledge of the printing industry required for current role Complies with standards and legislative requirements Follows organisational policies and procedures relevant to own role
Interact with others	1.4	Collaborates and cooperates with others to achieve results in immediate work context
Get the work done	1.2-1.4, 2.1-2.4, 3.1-3.3, 4.1-4.5, 5.1-5.6, 6.1-6.6, 7.1-7.6, 8.1-8.4, 9.1-9.3	Determines priorities and sequences the steps involved in clearly defined, familiar tasks, and identifies and assembles the resources required Makes decisions by considering benefits, costs, risks and feasibility from a broad range of perspectives Recognises the potential of new approaches to enhance work practices Responds to predictable problems and implements standard or logical solutions related to the role in the immediate work environment Demonstrates a sophisticated understanding of principles, concepts, language and practices associated with the digital world

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPKNW318 Apply knowledge and requirements of mail house operations	ICPKN318C Apply knowledge and requirements of mail house operations	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPKNW318 Apply knowledge and requirements of mail house operations

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

use appropriate vocabulary and terminology in written and oral communications with tradespeople, colleagues, management or clients

apply relevant legislative and workplace requirements when completing tasks

keep up to date with industry trends

process and package mail and/or parcels correctly

investigate and analyse the use of digital printing systems in mail house operations

investigate and use computer driven equipment and software in a mail house environment

apply the correct process for a mail house job

choose appropriate substrate, colour and ink for different jobs

accurately plan, cost and document a job.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

describe legislative and enterprise requirements that affect work practice

explain data management and processing systems and software used

explain computerised document management, design and reading systems and software used

explain the limitations on size, weight and content of postal items

describe the basic principles behind the following pre-press functions:

image production (typesetting, scanning, graphic arts camera)

image combining (manual and electronic)

image output (film, plates, direct to press)

describe the basic principles of the following printing processes:

lithography

relief

flexography

gravure

pad printing

screen printing

digital and electronic printing

explain the importance of digital printing systems including inkjet, laser and offset technologies in the mail house

describe the substrates used for each printing process and their properties

explain the international paper sizes (IPS) system, its basis and the relationship of different paper sizes

describe the basic characteristics of the following converting and finishing processes:

guillotining

flat-bed and rotary cutting

collating

folding

adhesive

mechanical and thermal fastening

explain the main cost elements in pre-press production

explain the basic principles of efficient production management.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the printing industry and include access to:

special purpose tools, equipment and materials

industry software packages.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPKNW319 Apply knowledge and processes of converting paper-based products

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to work in or deal with the sacks and bags area or other similar paper converting areas of the printing industry.

It applies to individuals working in or dealing with the paper converting area of the printing industry, such as sack and bag making and cartons, who have the ability to work as part of a team.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Holistic knowledge

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Apply knowledge of printing industry	1.1 Printing industry terminology and vocabulary are used correctly 1.2 New technology and new work processes are monitored and implemented when required 1.3 Trends within printing industry are monitored, on an ongoing basis, to inform personal work practices
2. Apply knowledge of government Acts and regulations	2.1 Basic principles and obligations involved in copyright, work health and safety (WHS), environmental protection, access and equity, and industrial awards are applied
3. Apply knowledge of pre-press processes	3.1 Principles behind pre-press functions such as image production (typesetting, scanning, graphic arts camera), image combining (manual and electronic), image output (film, plates, direct to press) and digital workflow are identified and used in production process where applicable 3.2 Different types of images (line, half-tone) and their uses are investigated 3.3 Qualities of main material types of paper, ink, adhesive, wax and plastic films and extrusion are investigated and used to inform product development choices 3.4 Different output settings (screen rulings, angles, shapes) and how they affect final product are identified 3.5 Different types of output required for different printing processes are identified 3.6 Different output devices (film setters, plate setters, analogue proofs, digital proofs) are identified
4. Apply knowledge of printing processes	4.1 Basic principles of printing processes (lithography, relief, flexography, gravure, pad printing, screen printing, digital and electronic printing) are used to inform production processes 4.2 Types of jobs and products for which each process is appropriate are identified and used to inform production decisions 4.3 Capabilities and limitations of each process are investigated and used to inform production decisions
5. Apply knowledge of converting and finishing processes	5.1 Basic characteristics of converting and finishing processes (guillotining, flat-bed and rotary cutting, collating, folding, adhesive, mechanical and thermal fastening) are identified and used to inform production processes 5.2 Types of jobs and products for which each process is appropriate are identified and used to inform production processes
6. Apply detailed knowledge of paper and printing processes	6.1 Relationship of different paper sizes is used to inform production processes 6.2 Different weights, callipers, bulk, density and opacity of paper and how they affect pre-press, printing and finishing operations and end uses are investigated and used to inform production processes 6.3 Paper grain and how it affects pre-press, printing and finishing operations is used to inform production processes 6.4 Moisture content, porosity and ink absorbency and how they affect pre-press, printing and finishing operations are investigated and used to inform production processes 6.5 Gloss, smoothness and surface strength and how they affect pre-press, printing and finishing operations are investigated and used to inform production processes 6.6 Permanence, durability and acidity and alkalinity of paper and how they affect pre-press, printing and finishing operations and end uses are investigated and used to inform production processes 6.7 Bursting strength, folding endurance, tensile strength and tearing resistance and how they affect printing and finishing operations and end uses are investigated and used to inform production processes 6.8 Paper behaviour and how it affects different production processes is investigated and used to inform production decisions 6.9 Effect of combining paper with adhesive, wax and plastic films on production processes is investigated and used to inform production decisions
7. Apply detailed knowledge of paper grades and colours	7.1 Paper types and grades and end uses for each type and grade are used to inform production processes 7.2 International paper sizes (IPS) system, its basis and relationship of different paper sizes are used to inform production processes where appropriate 7.3 Differences between wood pulp, rag and recycled papers and appropriate end uses are identified and used to inform production processes 7.4 Colour matching processes are used to inform production processes 7.5 Effect of different paper colours on printing operations is used to inform production processes
8. Apply detailed knowledge of paper handling and storage procedures	8.1 Ideal storage conditions for different types and grades of paper are investigated and used to inform production procedures 8.2 Advantages and disadvantages of different packing and delivery systems are investigated and used to inform production procedures
9. Apply basic knowledge of costs of production	9.1 Main cost elements (fixed, capital, variable) in production are investigated and applied in workplace 9.2 Information required to accurately cost jobs and means of collecting it (manual and computerised) are identified and applied in workplace 9.3 Ways of minimising use of materials without affecting quality of output are identified and applied in workplace 9.4 Ways of maximising efficiency of capital and human resources are investigated and applied in workplace
10. Apply knowledge of production management requirements and systems	10.1 Types of information that need to be exchanged between different stages of production to facilitate production efficiency are identified and applied in workplace 10.2 Systems (manual and computerised) that can be used to exchange information are identified and applied in workplace 10.3 Basic principles of efficient production management are applied in workplace

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.3	Researches and comprehends information in a range of text types from various sources
Oral Communication	1.1	Participates effectively in spoken interactions using correct technical and enterprise specific vocabulary
Numeracy	6.1, 6.2, 9.1-9.4	Interprets and analyses a range of mathematical information that is used in familiar and routine tasks
Navigate the world of work	1.2, 1.3, 2.1, 7.2, 8.1, 8.2	Maintains knowledge of the printing industry required for current role Complies with standards and legislative requirements Follows organisational policies and procedures relevant to own role
Get the work done	1.2, 1.3, 2.1, 2.2, 3.1-3.6, 4.1-4.3, 5.1, 5.2, 6.1-6.9, 7.1-7.5, 8.1, 8.2, 9.1-9.4, 10.1-10.3	Determines priorities and sequences the steps involved in clearly defined, familiar tasks and identifies and assembles the resources required Makes decisions by considering benefits, costs, risks and feasibility from a broad range of perspectives Recognises the potential of new approaches to enhance work practices Responds to predictable problems and implements standard or logical solutions related to the role in the immediate work environment Demonstrates a sophisticated understanding of principles, concepts, language and practices associated with the digital world

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPKNW319 Apply knowledge and processes of converting paper-based products	ICPKN319C Apply knowledge and processes of converting paper-based products	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPKNW319 Apply knowledge and processes of converting paper-based products

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

use appropriate vocabulary and terminology in written and oral communications with tradespeople, colleagues, management or clients

apply relevant legislative and workplace requirements when completing tasks

keep up to date with trends in the printing industry

identify image types, output settings, output requirements and output devices for different jobs

make product development and production choices by considering qualities of main material types, job and product requirements

apply the correct process for a converting or finishing job

use a colour management system to determine colour requirements for a print job

research and use appropriate substrates for different print jobs

accurately plan, cost and document a print job.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

describe legislative and enterprise requirements that affect work practice

describe the relationship of different paper sizes

explain paper grain and how it affects pre-press, printing and finishing operations

describe ideal storage conditions for different types and grades of paper

describe the basic characteristics of the following converting and finishing processes:

guillotining

flat-bed and rotary cutting

collating

folding

adhesive

mechanical and thermal fastening

describe the basic principles of the following printing processes:

lithography

relief

flexography

gravure

pad printing

screen printing

digital and electronic printing

describe the range of substrates used for each printing process

describe the basic principles behind the following pre-press functions:

image production (typesetting, scanning, graphic arts camera)

image combining (manual and electronic)

image output (film, plates, direct to press)

explain the main cost elements in pre-press production

explain the basic principles of efficient production management.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the printing industry and include access to:

special purpose tools, equipment and materials

industry software packages.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPKNW320 Apply knowledge and requirements of information technology systems in the printing industry

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to work in or deal with information technology systems in the printing industry.

It applies to individuals working in or dealing with information technology systems in the printing industry who have the ability to work as part of a team.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Holistic knowledge

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Apply knowledge of information technology in printing industry	1.1 Information technology terminology and vocabulary are used correctly 1.2 New technology and new work processes are monitored and implemented when required 1.3 Information technology trends within printing industry are monitored, on an ongoing basis, to inform personal work practices 1.4 International standards and open source standards are monitored for new developments and applied where appropriate 1.5 Issues involved in producing related print products with new technology are reflected in work practice 1.6 Understanding of issues such as security, archiving, backup and storage is used to inform work practice
2. Apply knowledge of government Acts and regulations	2.1 Basic principles and obligations involved in copyright, work health and safety (WHS), environmental protection, access and equity, and industrial awards are understood in relation to workplace
3. Apply knowledge of pre-press information technology systems	3.1 Basic principles and capabilities behind digital workflows and computer networks are used to inform work practices 3.2 Database and file management are considered as required 3.3 Different output settings and how they affect final printed product are reviewed as required 3.4 Different types of output required for different media and printing processes are reviewed and evaluated in production process where applicable 3.5 Server and server administration systems are reviewed and evaluated to inform work practices
4. Apply detailed knowledge of information technology in multimedia	4.1 Designs that are appropriate or inappropriate for multimedia are applied to development processes where applicable 4.2 Criteria for choosing visual, audio or text delivery for presenting information in both passive and interactive products are applied to development process where applicable 4.3 Differences between various markup languages and their application are investigated and applied to a range of suitable development work 4.4 Differences between various scripting languages and their application are investigated and applied to a range of suitable development work 4.5 Criteria for selecting graphic resolution and formats, and advantages and limitations of different formats, are applied to development process where applicable 4.6 Criteria for selecting audio formats for multimedia, and advantages and limitations of different formats, are applied to development process where applicable 4.7 Criteria for selecting video formats for multimedia, and advantages and limitations of different formats, are applied to development process where applicable 4.8 Criteria for selecting animation formats for multimedia, and advantages and limitations of different formats, are applied to development process where applicable 4.9 Multimedia platforms and computer systems requirements for different multimedia products are investigated and applied to development process where applicable 4.10 Different software and operating systems for producing multimedia products are evaluated for different jobs 4.11 Features of effective navigation system for both passive and interactive products are identified and applied to development process where applicable 4.12 Effect of rapidly changing technology and how multimedia production needs to respond to it are explored
5. Apply knowledge of printing information technology systems	5.1 Types of information technology systems used in printing sector are identified and used to inform personal work practice 5.2 Database and file management are used as required 5.3 Automated workflow systems are used to inform work practice 5.4 Different output systems and technology are used to inform work practice
6. Apply knowledge of converting and finishing information technology systems	6.1 Types of information technology systems used in converting and finishing sector are identified and used to inform personal work practice 6.2 Automated workflow systems are used to inform work practice 6.3 Different dispatch and distribution systems are evaluated and used to inform work practice
7. Demonstrate knowledge of production management systems	7.1 Types of information that need to be exchanged between different stages of production to facilitate production efficiency are identified and used to inform development decisions 7.2 Information technology systems that can be used to exchange information between companies and within companies are evaluated and used 7.3 Basic principles of efficient production management information systems are used to inform development decisions

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.3, 1.4, 4.2, 4.5-4.8, 5.2	Recognises and interprets text to establish the job requirements from information contained within relevant procedures and specifications
Oral Communication	1.1	Participates effectively in spoken interactions using correct technical and enterprise specific vocabulary
Navigate the world of work	1.2-1.5, 2.1	Maintains knowledge of the printing industry required for current role Complies with standards and legislative requirements Follows organisational policies and procedures relevant to own role
Get the work done	1.2-1.6, 2.1, 2.2, 3.1-3.5, 4.1-4.12, 5.1-5.4, 6.1-6.3, 7.1-7.3	Determines priorities and sequences the steps involved in clearly defined, familiar tasks and aims to achieve them efficiently Identifies and assembles the resources required Makes decisions by considering benefits, costs, risks and feasibility from a broad range of perspectives Recognises the potential of new approaches to inform personal work practices Responds to predictable problems and implements standard or logical solutions related to the role in the immediate work environment Considers the strategic and operational potential of digital trends to achieve work goals and enhance work processes, and evaluates software functions for specific purposes

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPKNW320 Apply knowledge and requirements of information technology systems in the printing industry	ICPKN320C Apply knowledge and requirements of information technology systems in the printing industry	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPKNW320 Apply knowledge and requirements of information technology systems in the printing industry

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

use appropriate information technology vocabulary and terminology in written and oral communications with tradespeople, colleagues, management or clients

keep up to date with information technology trends and standards in the printing industry

apply relevant legislative and workplace requirements when completing tasks

evaluate and review output settings, output requirements and server and server administration systems

identify and use markup or scripting languages in development work

select appropriate visual graphic, audio, video and animation formats in development work

investigate and use information technology systems and software for different jobs.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

describe legislative and enterprise requirements that affect work practice

describe the basic principles behind the following pre-press functions:

image production (typesetting, scanning, graphic arts camera)

image combining (manual and electronic)

image output (film, plates, direct to press)

describe the basic principles and capabilities behind digital workflows and computer networks

describe the type of information technology systems used in the:

printing sector

converting, binding and finishing sector

describe the relationship between ranges of visual colour Red, Green, Blue (RGB) and Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Key (black) (CMYK)

explain the main cost elements in pre-press production

explain the basic principles of efficient production management

describe the types of information that need to be exchanged between different stages of production.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the printing industry and include access to:

special purpose tools, equipment and materials

industry software packages.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPKNW321 Apply knowledge and requirements of digital production

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to work in or deal with digital printing systems in the printing industry.

It applies to individuals who are responsible for assisting and dealing with digital production workflow, such as job creation, printing and finishing, and who have the ability to work as part of a team.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Holistic knowledge

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Apply knowledge of printing industry	1.1 Printing industry terminology and vocabulary are used correctly 1.2 New technology and new work processes are monitored and implemented when required 1.3 Trends within printing industry are monitored, on an ongoing basis, to inform personal work practices
2. Apply knowledge of government Acts and regulations	2.1 Basic principles and obligations for copyright, work health and safety (WHS), environmental protection, access and equity, and industrial awards are researched and evaluated 2.2 Basic principles and obligations for copyright, WHS, environmental protection, access and equity, and industrial awards are applied in workplace
3. Apply knowledge of digital production processes	3.1 Principles behind basic layout production, image manipulation, digital output and workflow are identified and applied where possible in workplace 3.2 Proofing processes and principles are applied to meet client needs 3.3 Raster image processor (RIP) and front-end processer functions are applied to meet job specifications 3.4 Effective use of software applications for producing digital products is evaluated
4. Apply knowledge of digital printing processes	4.1 Basic principles of toner, inkjet or liquid toner-based printers are evaluated to inform decisions made for different jobs 4.2 Types of jobs and products for each process are considered to ensure appropriate choices are made to meet client needs 4.3 Capabilities and limitations of each process are reviewed for different jobs
5. Apply knowledge of substrates and consumables	5.1 Range of substrates used for each printing process are researched and evaluated for different jobs 5.2 Different weights and callipers of substrates and how they affect digital production operations are researched and evaluated for different jobs 5.3 Paper grain and how it affects digital production and finishing operations are researched for different jobs 5.4 Different properties of digital consumables, and how they affect digital production operations, are researched for different jobs
6. Apply knowledge of colour theory	6.1 Colour theory is used to inform digital production and/or design decisions 6.2 Colour matching systems are used to inform digital production and/or design decisions 6.3 Procedures that ensure effective colour management are implemented
7. Apply knowledge of converting and finishing processes	7.1 Basic characteristics of converting and finishing processes are identified and considered for different jobs 7.2 Types of processes are evaluated and used to inform decisions made for different jobs
8. Demonstrate knowledge of production management systems	8.1 Types of information that need to be exchanged between different stages of production to facilitate production efficiency are identified and used to inform development decisions 8.2 Information technology systems that can be used to exchange information between and within companies are identified and used 8.3 Efficient production management information systems are established and applied to inform development decisions

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.3, 2.1, 3.3, 8.1	Researches and comprehends information in a range of text types from various sources Recognises and interprets text to establish the job requirements from information contained within relevant procedures and specifications
Oral Communication	1.1	Participates effectively in spoken interactions using correct technical and enterprise specific vocabulary
Numeracy	5.2	Interprets and analyses a range of mathematical information that is used in familiar and routine tasks
Navigate the world of work	1.2, 1.3, 2.1, 2.2	Maintains knowledge of the printing industry required for current role Complies with legislative requirements and follows organisational policies and procedures relevant to own role
Get the work done	1.2, 1.3, 2.1, 2.2, 3.1-3.4, 4.1-4.3, 5.1-5.4, 6.1-6.3, 7.1, 7.2, 8.1-8.3	Determines priorities and sequences the steps involved in clearly defined, familiar tasks and aims to achieve them efficiently Identifies and assembles the resources required Makes decision by considering benefits, costs, risks and feasibility from a broad range of perspectives Recognises the potential of new approaches to inform personal work practices Responds to predictable problems and implements standard or logical solutions related to the role in the immediate work environment Considers the strategic and operational potential of digital trends to achieve work goals, enhance work processes and evaluate software functions for specific purposes

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPKNW321 Apply knowledge and requirements of digital production	ICPKN321A Apply knowledge and requirements of digital production	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPKNW321 Apply knowledge and requirements of digital production

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

use appropriate industry vocabulary and terminology in written and oral communications with tradespeople, colleagues, management or clients

keep up to date with information technology trends and standards in the printing industry

apply relevant legislative and workplace requirements when completing tasks

use layout, image manipulation, digital output and workflow, and proofing processes and principles in digital production jobs

use toner, inkjet or liquid toner-based for different jobs

evaluate and review output settings, output requirements and server and server administration systems

identify and use markup or scripting languages in development work

select appropriate visual graphic, audio, video and animation formats in development work

investigate and use information technology systems and software for different jobs.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

describe legislative and enterprise requirements that affect work practice

define colour theory

describe the basic characteristics of the following converting and finishing processes:

guillotining

flat-bed and rotary cutting

collating

folding

adhesive

mechanical and thermal fastening

outline digital production processes

describe the basic principles of toner, inkjet or liquid toner-based printers

describe the range of substrates used

explain the basic principles of efficient production management.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the printing industry and include access to:

special purpose tools, equipment and materials

industry software packages.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPPRN211 Mount and proof flexographic plates for basic printing

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to prepare and mount flexographic plates and plate cylinders for routine printing including proofing plates and checking cylinders for registration.

It applies to individuals who work under direct supervision and perform a range of routine printing tasks in a defined context. The practical skills and operational knowledge required to perform these tasks is at a fundamental level.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Printing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Confirm routine job specifications	1.1 Job requirements are read and interpreted from job documentation or production control system 1.2 Set up is carried out correctly in minimum time with minimum wastage 1.3 Prior inspections are completed and signed off
2. Prepare flexographic plates	2.1 Plate height and relief are measured 2.2 Plates are trimmed and prepared according to mounting system requirements 2.3 Mounting adhesive is selected to achieve correct pitch circle diameter (PCD) of specified plate cylinders and gears
3. Prepare plate cylinders	3.1 Plate cylinders/seamless sleeves are selected, cleaned and prepared 3.2 Sleeves and correct gears on mandrels are selected, cleaned, prepared and mounted to meet routine job specifications 3.3 Total indicated run-out (TIR) is checked as within specified tolerances on plate cylinders 3.4 Selected mounting adhesive is applied to plate cylinders
4. Mount and proof flexographic plates on mounting/proofing machine	4.1 Plates are prepared and mounted on cylinders using pin mount or microdot systems or sleeves according to chart number/print direction 4.2 Plate mounting sheet is prepared to meet routine job specifications 4.3 Plates are mounted to position on plate mounting sheet or camera targets 4.4 Plate mounting sheet is installed and tensioned onto plate cylinder to specified chart number/print direction 4.5 Plates are proofed and each plate cylinder is checked for register 4.6 Flexographic plates are trimmed and taped down according to printing press requirements

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 2.2, 3.2, 3.3, 4.2, 4.4	Recognises and interprets text to establish job requirements from information contained within relevant procedures and specifications
Writing	1.3	Completes workplace forms accurately
Oral Communication	1.1, 1.3, 3.2, 3.3, 4.2, 4.4, 4.6	Participates effectively in spoken interactions by using strategies to confirm, clarify or repair understanding
Numeracy	2.1	Interprets and analyses a range of mathematical information used in familiar and routine tasks
Navigate the world of work	1.1-1.3, 2.2, 2.3, 3.1-3.3, 4.1, 4.2, 4.4, 4.6	Recognises and follows explicit and implicit protocols and meets expectations associated with own role Complies with legislative requirements, and follows organisational policies and procedures relevant to own role
Interact with others	1.1, 3.2, 3.3, 4.2, 4.4, 4.6	Seeks to cooperate with others to achieve results in immediate work context
Get the work done	1.2, 2.2, 2.3, 3.1, 3.2, 3.4, 4.1-4.6	With assistance, determines priorities and sequences steps involved in clearly defined, familiar tasks and identifies and assembles required resources Responds to predictable problems and implements standard or logical solutions related to role in immediate work environment Reads data from electronic monitoring and control systems

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPPRN211 Mount and proof flexographic plates for basic printing	ICPPR211C Mount and proof flexographic plates for basic printing	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRN211 Mount and proof flexographic plates for basic printing

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

prepare flexographic plates and plate cylinders on TWO occasions for basic jobs and mount these according to the selected mounting system (as specified on job documentation or production control system) according to enterprise procedures (mounting can be on either proofing machine or printing press)

proof plates and check plate cylinder registration of the flexographic plates mounted on the proofing machine for this purpose on TWO occasions for basic jobs

find and use information relevant to the task from a variety of information sources

safely operate tools and machinery (such as safely switching off machinery before cleaning is started and using of any cleaning chemicals safely).

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

determine job requirements

identify vital information on the job ticket

list checks to be done prior to set up (availability of materials etc.)

identify flexographic printing plates and mounting systems

identify health and safety concerns for safely mounting and proofing plates

identify how to ensure the correct plates for the job is chosen

describe when cushion type mounting material is used

identify how to handle plates when mounting to avoid damage to plates

list options to seal edges of plates when mounting

explain importance of measuring plate height

identify TIR (total indicated run-out) effect on press performance

define and describe procedure for V-block mounting

proofing and adjustment

identify quality control measurements to apply to the proof to test against known standards

identify checks to be made on initial print prior to running

identify how to minimise registration errors

Information sources

identify relevant information sources (including machine manuals, safety documentation and other information) relevant to this task and their location and the information included in them.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the printing field of work and include access to:

flexographic printing machine

mounting systems

print direction chart.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPPRN214 Produce basic flexographic printed product

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to safely operate either a reel- or sheet-fed flexographic print, ensuring efficient production flow and quality standards.

It applies to individuals working in the printing and graphic arts industry who perform a range of mainly routine tasks, work under direct supervision and use limited practical skills and knowledge in a defined context.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Printing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Maintain operation of delivery systems	1.1 Delivery systems are monitored and adjusted to ensure efficient and continuous operation and ensure no damage to finished product 1.2 Substrate is added to and removed from process according to job instructions
2. Maintain basic flexographic printing process	2.1 Flexographic plate and plate cylinder or sleeve condition is monitored and adjusted to ensure quality of printed product meets the approved proof standard 2.2 Flexographic impression roller condition is monitored to ensure quality of printed product meets the approved proof standard 2.3 Flexographic inking system and doctor blade are monitored and adjusted to ensure quality of printed product meets the approved proof standard 2.4 Drying systems are monitored and adjusted to ensure quality of printed product meets the approved proof standard 2.5 Basic in-line printing/converting/binding/finishing process(es) are monitored and adjusted to ensure quality of printed product meets the approved proof standard
3. Maintain routine production process	3.1 Production process is operated in association with fellow workers and according to enterprise procedures and planned daily schedule 3.2 Production is maintained according to work health and safety (WHS) requirements, manufacturer’s specifications and enterprise procedures 3.3 Manual and/or automatic control is used according to job specifications 3.4 Performance is monitored and verified using the process control system according to enterprise procedures 3.5 Ink performance, colour, register and position of print are monitored and adjusted throughout production run 3.6 Production difficulties are anticipated and preventive action is taken to prevent occurrence by timely intervention 3.7 Faulty performance of equipment is identified and reported according to enterprise procedures 3.8 Waste is sorted according to enterprise procedures
4. Identify and rectify faults	4.1 Problem in flexographic machine operation is identified and reported according to enterprise procedures 4.2 Adjustments or corrections are carried out according to specified procedures and consistent with operator’s skill level 4.3 Flexographic machine operation is checked to ensure efficient operation 4.4 Machine faults requiring repair are identified and reported to designated person according to enterprise procedures
5. Conduct shutdown of production process	5.1 Correct shutdown sequence is followed according to manufacturer’s specifications and enterprise procedures 5.2 Shutdown is conducted in association with fellow workers and in compliance with WHS requirements 5.3 Reels and cores are removed from press if web-fed 5.4 Unused ink is drained back into containers and correctly labelled and stored according to manufacturer’s/supplier’s specifications and enterprise procedures 5.5 Solid and liquid waste is removed from operating area and recycled or disposed of, where required, according to regulatory requirements and enterprise procedures 5.6 Product is removed from operating area
6. Clean and wash printing machine	6.1 Cylinders or sleeves, plate and roller surfaces are cleaned ready for next run 6.2 Inking rollers and doctor blades or chamber blade systems are cleaned with correct solvents according to WHS guidelines 6.3 Ink pumps, tanks and hoses are cleaned correctly 6.4 Impression rollers/central impression and press rollers are cleaned 6.5 In-line printing/converting/binding/finishing units are cleaned ready for next run 6.6 Reel or sheet-feed transportation and delivery systems are disengaged and cleaned ready for next run 6.7 Press is lubricated and protected according to duration of shutdown 6.8 Production records or other documentation are accurately completed where required by enterprise procedures

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	3.2, 3.3, 4.2, 5.1, 5.4	Recognises and interprets text to establish job requirements from information contained within relevant procedures and specifications
Writing	3.7, 4.1, 4.4, 6.8	Enters routine data associated with production processes and enterprise procedures
Oral Communication	3.1-3.3, 3.7, 4.1, 4.2, 4.4, 5.1, 5.2, 5.4	Speaks clearly using appropriate vocabulary, tone and pace to report faults and discrepancies
Numeracy	1.2,	Interprets and analyses a range of mathematical information used in familiar and routine tasks
Navigate the world of work	2.1-2.5, 3.1-3.4, 3.7, 3.8, 4.1-4.4, 5.1, 5.2, 5.4, 5.5, 6.1-6.8	Recognises and follows explicit and implicit protocols and meets expectations associated with own role Recognises and follows all procedures for cleaning and maintenance of equipment incorporating regulatory requirements and enterprise procedures
Interact with others	3.1-3.3, 3.7, 4.1, 4.2, 4.4, 5.1, 5.2, 5.4	Cooperates with others as part of familiar routine activities, and contributes to specific activities requiring joint responsibility and accountability Understands what to communicate, with whom and how, in routine work situations
Get the work done	1.1-1.5, 2.1-2.5, 3.1, 3.4-3.8, 4.1-4.4, 5.1-5.6, 6.1-6.7	Determines priorities and sequences steps involved in clearly defined, familiar tasks Recognises and anticipates an increasing range of familiar problems, their symptoms and causes, actively looking for early warning signs and implementing contingency plans Follows routine procedures for using digital technology by reading data from electronic monitoring and control systems

Range of Conditions

This section specifies different work environments and conditions that may affect performance. Essential operating conditions that may be present (depending on the work situation, needs of the candidate, accessibility of the item, and local industry and regional contexts) are included.

Delivery systems MUST include EITHER:	reel OR sheet
Monitoring and adjusting MUST include EITHER:	reel stand and rewind sections web control system sheeting action set off / marking prevention system OR feeder and delivery system sheet pick-up and transportation system transfer system

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPPRN214 Produce basic flexographic printed product	ICPPR214C Produce basic flexographic printed product	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRN214 Produce basic flexographic printed product

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

accurately produce TWO basic flexographic printing jobs (if possible including at least ONE in-line process) according to job specifications, enterprise procedures and work health and safety (WHS) requirements

correctly shut down and clean flexographic press and, if possible, rectify any production problems with minimum downtime.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

outline process for transportation and delivery

describe process for determining the substrate printing side

For reel systems only

outline WHS concerns when loading and handling heavy reels

describe effect on the print of excessive tension on the unwinding reel

describe process for correct web splicing and implications if web is not spliced correctly

For sheet systems only

outline WHS concerns when operating sheet transportation and delivery systems

identify reasons for fanning sheets before loading into the press

describe the process for setting, and the check to be made to the double sheet detector during the print run, and components that can be adjusted to ensure correct delivery

describe effect excessive suction can have on slow-down wheels

state how often product quality should be assessed, and what action taken if print fills in when printing

describe effect of dirt under the doctor blade on the print and the motion of doctor blade oscillation

describe action taken if ink in duct is foaming

name signs of wear in the plate image area

outline WHS concerns for the in-line component of the press and how often in-line components of the job should be examined

describe the process of monitoring to ensure quality

outline precautions to ensure the rewound product is consistent, acceptable quality and how to identify if printed material is not of an acceptable standard

outline marking of product deemed unacceptable by the operator

describe the process of consultation needed when there is a problem with the print that cannot be fixed by the operator

identify location of information concerning correct operation of the machine

outline dangers from solvents and solutions used to clean the inking system, plate and press

describe methods used to ensure proper storage of plates following printing

list parts of the machine that should be thoroughly cleaned following the print run and components to be inspected for wear following the print run

identify records important for following or repeat prints

identify machine manuals and safety documentation relevant to this task, where they are kept, and information included in these documents.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the printing field of work and include access to:

special purpose tools, equipment and materials

a reel or sheet-fed flexographic press.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPPRN222 Produce basic gravure printed product

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to produce routine gravure printed product. This requires operation of a gravure press in a way that supports efficient production flow while maintaining product quality standards. It includes requirements applicable to routine operation, shut down and cleaning.

It applies to individuals who work under direct supervision and perform a range of routine printing tasks in a defined context.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Printing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Maintain routine operation of reel system	1.1 Reel stand and rewind section are monitored and adjusted to ensure efficient continuous operation and maintain correct tension, without marks, blemishes or damage to finished product 1.2 Web control system is monitored and adjusted to ensure correct tension and accurate continuous positioning of the web for efficient operation 1.3 Substrate is added to and removed from process according to job instructions 1.4 Sheeting section is monitored and adjusted to ensure quality and efficient product delivery 1.5 Set-off / marking prevention system is monitored and adjusted to ensure quality of printed product, without set-off or marking, meeting the approved proof standard
2. Maintain basic gravure printing process	2.1 Gravure cylinder condition is monitored and adjusted to ensure quality of printed product meets the approved proof standard 2.2 Gravure impression roller condition is monitored and maintained to ensure quality of printed product meets the approved proof standard 2.3 Gravure inking system and doctor blade are monitored and adjusted to ensure quality of printed product meets the approved proof standard 2.4 Drying systems are monitored and adjusted to ensure quality of printed product meets the approved proof standard 2.5 Basic in-line printing/converting/binding/finishing process(es) are monitored and adjusted to ensure quality of product meets the approved proof standard
3. Maintain routine production process	3.1 Production process is operated in association with fellow workers and according to company specifications and planned daily schedule 3.2 Production is maintained within work health and safety (WHS) requirements and company and manufacturer’s specifications 3.3 Manual and/or automatic control is used as per specification 3.4 Performance is monitored and verified using the process control system according to enterprise procedures 3.5 Ink performance, colour, register and position of print are monitored and adjusted throughout production run 3.6 Production difficulties are anticipated and preventive action is taken to prevent occurrence by timely intervention 3.7 Process adjustments to eliminate problems are reported according to enterprise procedures 3.8 Waste is sorted according to enterprise procedures
4. Identify and rectify faults	4.1 Problems in gravure machine operation are identified and reported according to enterprise procedures 4.2 Adjustments or corrections are carried out according to specified procedures and consistent with operator’s skill level 4.3 Gravure machine operation is checked to ensure correct operation 4.4 Faulty performance of equipment is identified and reported according to enterprise procedures
5. Conduct shutdown of production process	5.1 Correct shutdown sequence is followed according to manufacturer’s specifications and enterprise procedures 5.2 Shutdown is conducted in association with fellow workers and in compliance with WHS requirements 5.3 Unused ink is correctly labelled and stored according to manufacturer/supplier specifications and enterprise procedures 5.4 Solid and liquid waste is removed from operating area and recycled or disposed of, where required, according to regulatory requirements and enterprise procedures 5.5 All product is removed from operating area 5.6 Machine faults requiring repair are identified and reported to designated person according to enterprise procedures 5.7 Repair/adjustment is verified prior to resumption of operations
6. Clean and wash up printing machine at end of print run	6.1 Cylinders and roller surfaces are cleaned ready for next run 6.2 Inking system is washed up ready for next run, and liquid waste is disposed of according to company and regulatory requirements 6.3 In-line printing/converting/binding/finishing units are cleaned ready for next run 6.4 Reel feed, transportation and delivery systems are disengaged and cleaned ready for next run 6.5 Production records or other documentation are accurately completed where required by enterprise procedures

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.2, 3.2, 3.3, 4.2, 5.1, 5.3	Recognises and interprets text to establish job requirements from information contained within relevant procedures and specifications
Writing	3.7, 4.1, 4.4, 5.6, 6.5	Enters routine data associated with production processes and enterprise procedures
Oral Communication	3.1-3.3, 3.7, 4.1, 4.2, 4.4, 5.1-5.6	Speaks clearly using appropriate vocabulary, tone and pace to report faults and discrepancies
Navigate the world of work	1.1-1.5, 2.1-2.5, 3.1-3.4, 3.7, 3.8, 4.1-4.4, 5.1-5.4, 5.6, 6.1-6.5	Recognises and follows explicit and implicit protocols and meets expectations associated with own role Recognises and follows all procedures for cleaning and maintenance of equipment Incorporating regulatory requirements and enterprise procedures
Interact with others	3.1-3.3, 3.7, 4.1, 4.2, 4.4, 5.1-5.3, 5.6	Cooperates with others as part of familiar routine activities, and contributes to specific activities requiring joint responsibility and accountability Understands what to communicate, with whom and how in routine work situations
Get the work done	1.1-1.5, 2.1-2.5, 3.1, 3.4-3.8, 4.1-4.4, 5.1-5.7, 6.1-6.4	Determines priorities and sequences steps involved in clearly defined, familiar tasks Recognises and anticipates an increasing range of familiar problems, their symptoms and causes, actively looking for early warning signs and implementing contingency plans Follows routine procedures for using digital technology by reading data from electronic monitoring and control systems

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPPRN222 Produce basic gravure printed product	ICPPR222C Produce basic gravure printed product	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRN222 Produce basic gravure printed product

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

safely operate a gravure press consistent with efficient routine production flow that maintains product quality standards; ensuring any production problems are rectified with minimum downtime

correctly shutdown production process and clean and wash printing machine according to work health and safety (WHS) guidelines

demonstrate use of control, monitoring and data entry systems

find and use information relevant to the task from a variety of information sources

produce TWO basic gravure printing jobs (if possible including at least one in-line process) according to job specifications and enterprise procedures.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

Reel transportation and delivery

identify WHS concerns applicable to loading and handling heavy reels

identify how to determine printing side of the substrate

describe effect on the print of excessive tension on the unwinding reel

identify implication if the web is not spliced correctly

Gravure printing operations

identify how frequently product quality should be assessed

identify appropriate action/s if print is filling in when printing

describe effect of dirt under the doctor blade has on the print and the cylinder

identify importance of oscillation of the doctor blade

describe how to address a nick in the doctor blade

identify appropriate action/s if ink in the duct is foaming

describe how to identify signs of wear in the plate image area

identify level ink should be maintained at

In-line processes

identify WHS concerns for in-line component of the press

identify how often in-line components of the job should be examined

Quality control and problem-solving

identify what needs to be monitored to ensure quality

identify precautions required to ensure the rewound product is of consistent, acceptable quality

describe how to identify printed material below acceptable standard

identify how to mark product deemed unacceptable by the operator

identify the appropriate person to consult if the operator is unable to fix a problem with the print

Shut down and wash up the press

identify dangers from solvents and solutions used to clean the inking system, plate and press

identify methods used to ensure proper storage of plates following printing

list parts of the machine to be thoroughly cleaned following the print run

list components to be inspected for wear following the print run

describe record keeping requirements important for following or repeat prints

Information sources

identify relevant information sources (including machine manuals, safety documentation and other information) relevant to these tasks including where they are located and what they cover.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the printing field of work and include access to:

gravure printing machine with in-line processes

industry software packages

special purpose tools, equipment and materials

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPPRN232 Produce basic lithographic printed product

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to produce basic lithographic printing, including small offset product. This requires operation of a lithographic press in a way that supports efficient routine production flow while maintaining product quality standards. It includes requirements related to shutdown and cleaning of the printing press.

It applies to individuals who work under direct supervision and perform a range of routine printing tasks in a defined context. The practical skills and operational knowledge required to perform these tasks is at a fundamental level.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Printing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Maintain routine operation of delivery systems	1.1 Delivery systems are monitored and adjusted to ensure efficient and continuous operation and ensure finished product is undamaged 1.2 Substrate is added and removed from process according to job instructions
2. Maintain basic routine lithographic printing process	2.1 Lithographic plate and plate cylinder condition is monitored and adjusted to ensure quality of printed product meets the approved proof standard 2.2 Lithographic blanket and blanket cylinder condition is monitored and adjusted to ensure quality of printed product meets the approved proof standard 2.3 Lithographic impression cylinder condition is monitored and adjusted to ensure quality of printed product meets the approved proof standard 2.4 Lithographic inking condition is checked and maintained to ensure quality of printed product meets the approved proof standard 2.5 Lithographic dampening system condition is monitored and adjusted to ensure quality of printed product meets the approved proof standard
3. Maintain routine production process	3.1 Production process is operated in association with fellow workers and according to company specifications and planned daily schedule 3.2 Production is maintained within work health and safety (WHS) requirements and company and manufacturer’s specifications 3.3 Manual and/or automatic control is used as per specification 3.4 Performance is monitored and verified according to enterprise procedures 3.5 Ink performance, colour, register and position of print are monitored, adjusted and maintained throughout production run 3.6 Faulty performance of equipment is identified and reported according to enterprise procedures 3.7 Waste is sorted according to enterprise procedures
4. Rectify minor lithographic machine faults	4.1 Adjustments or corrections are carried out according to specified procedures and consistent with operator’s skill level 4.2 Problems with lithographic machine operation are identified and reported according to enterprise procedures 4.3 Lithographic machine operation is checked to ensure correct operation
5. Conduct shutdown of production process	5.1 Correct shutdown sequence is followed according to manufacturer’s specifications and enterprise procedures 5.2 Shutdown is conducted in association with fellow workers and in compliance with WHS requirements 5.3 Unused ink is correctly labelled and stored according to manufacturer/supplier specifications and enterprise procedures 5.4 Solid and liquid waste is removed from operating area and recycled or disposed of, where required, according to regulatory requirements and enterprise procedures 5.5 All product is removed from operating area 5.6 Machine faults requiring repair are identified and reported to designated person according to enterprise procedures 5.7 Repair/adjustment is verified prior to resumption of operations
6. Clean and wash up printing machine at end of print run	6.1 Cylinders, plate and roller surfaces are cleaned ready for next run 6.2 Inking system and dampening system are washed up ready for next run, and liquid waste is disposed of according to company and regulatory requirements 6.3 In-line printing/converting/binding/finishing units are cleaned ready for next run 6.4 Transportation and delivery systems are disengaged and cleaned ready for next run 6.5 Production records or other documentation are accurately completed where required by enterprise procedures

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	3.2, 3.3, 4.1, 51, 5.3	Recognises and interprets text to establish job requirements from information contained within relevant procedures and specifications
Writing	3.6, 4.2, 5.3, 5.6, 6.6	Enters routine data associated with production processes and enterprise procedures
Oral Communication	3.1-3.3, 3.6, 4.1, 42, 5.1-5.3, 5.6	Speaks clearly using appropriate vocabulary, tone and pace to report faults and discrepancies
Numeracy	6.5	Interprets and analyses a range of mathematical information used in familiar and routine tasks
Navigate the world of work	2.1-2.5, 3.1-3.4, 3.6, 3.7, 4.1-4.3, 5.1-5.4, 5.6, 6.1-6.6	Recognises and follows explicit and implicit protocols and meets expectations associated with own role Recognises and follows all procedures for cleaning and maintenance of equipment, incorporating regulatory requirements and enterprise procedures
Interact with others	3.1-3.3, 3.6, 4.1, 4.2, 5.1-5.3, 5.6	Cooperates with others as part of familiar routine activities, and contributes to specific activities requiring joint responsibility and accountability Understands what to communicate, with whom and how, in routine work situations
Get the work done	1.1, 1.2, 2.1-2.5, 3.1, 3.4-3.7, 4.1-4.3, 5.1-57, 6.1-6.5	Determines priorities and sequences steps involved in clearly defined, familiar tasks Recognises and anticipates an increasing range of familiar problems, their symptoms and causes, actively looking for early warning signs and implementing contingency plans Follows routine procedures for using digital technology by reading data from electronic monitoring and control systems

Range of Conditions

This section specifies different work environments and conditions that may affect performance. Essential operating conditions that may be present (depending on the work situation, needs of the candidate, accessibility of the item, and local industry and regional contexts) are included.

Delivery systems MUST include EITHER:	reel OR sheet
Setting up and adjusting MUST include EITHER:	unwind and rewind reels webbing procedures splicing/joining reels printed web viewing devices folder and sheeter systems set off / marking prevention devices OR feeder and delivery systems sheet pick-up and transportation systems transfer and control systems set off / marking prevention devices

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPPRN232 Produce basic lithographic printed product	ICPPR232C Produce basic lithographic printed product	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRN232 Produce basic lithographic printed product

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

safely operate a lithographic printing press consistent with efficient routine production flow that maintains product quality standards; ensuring any production problems are rectified with minimum downtime

correctly shutdown production and clean and/or wash printing machine according to work health and safety (WHS) guidelines

use control, monitoring and data entry systems

find and use information relevant to the task from a variety of information sources

produce TWO basic lithographic printing jobs (if possible, including at least one in-line process) according to job specifications and enterprise procedures.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

For reel systems only

identify WHS concerns applicable to loading and handling heavy reels

describe effect on the print of excessive tension on the rewinding reel

identify implications if web is not spliced correctly

For sheet systems only

explain why sheets are fanned before loading into the press

identify that the double sheet detector must be set and checked during the print run

identify components that can be adjusted to ensure correct delivery

describe effect of excessive suction on the slow-down wheels

Lithographic printing operations

describe required action if non-image area of the print was scumming during printing

identify causes of emulsification while printing on a lithographic printing press

describe how to identify signs of wear in image area of the plate

identify level the ink should be maintained at

In-line processes

identify WHS concerns for in-line components of the press

identify frequency in-line components of the job should be examined

Quality control and problem-solving

identify precautions to ensure the rewound product is of consistent, acceptable quality

describe how to identify material below acceptable standard

identify how often product quality should be assessed

identify how to mark product deemed unacceptable by the operator

Shutdown and wash press

identify dangers of solvents and solutions used to clean the inking system, plates, cylinders and press

describe effect of excessive gum on the plate image

list parts of the machine to be thoroughly cleaned following the print run

list components to be inspected for wear following the print run

describe record-keeping requirements important for following or repeat prints

Information sources

identify information sources (including machine manuals, safety documentation and other information) relevant to these tasks including where they are located and what they cover.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the printing field of work and include access to:

a lithographic printing machine with in-line processes

industry software packages

special purpose tools, equipment and materials.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPPRN242 Produce basic pad printed product

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to safely operate a pad printing machine ensuring efficient routing production flow that maintains product quality standards.

It applies to individuals working in the printing and graphic arts industry who perform a range of mainly routine tasks, work under direct supervision and use limited practical skills and knowledge in a defined context.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Printing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Maintain routine pad printing process	1.1 Location of objects into fixtures is monitored and adjusted if necessary 1.2 Printing plate condition is monitored to ensure quality of printed product meets the approved proof standard 1.3 Printing pad condition is monitored and maintained to ensure quality of printed product meets the approved proof standard 1.4 Spatula and doctor blade are monitored and adjusted to ensure quality of printed product meets the approved proof standard OR 1.5 Ink cup is monitored and adjusted to ensure quality of printed product meets the approved proof standard 1.6 Printing ink viscosity is monitored and adjusted to ensure quality of printed product meets the approved proof standard
2. Maintain manual pre- and post-treatments	2.1 Manual loading is monitored and adjusted to ensure quality of printed product meets the approved proof standard 2.2 Manual pre-treatment is monitored and adjusted to ensure quality of printed product meets the approved proof standard 2.3 Drying racks are monitored and adjusted to ensure quality of printed product meets the approved proof standard
3. Maintain routine production process	3.1 Production process is operated in association with fellow workers and according to company specifications and planned daily schedule 3.2 Production is maintained within work health and safety (WHS) requirements, and company and manufacturer’s specifications 3.3 Manual and/or automatic control is used as per specification 3.4 Performance is monitored and verified using the process control system according to enterprise procedures 3.5 Ink performance, colour, register and position of print are monitored and adjusted throughout production run 3.6 Production difficulties are anticipated and preventive action is taken to avoid disruption 3.7 Process adjustments to eliminate problems are reported according to enterprise procedures 3.8 Waste is sorted according to enterprise procedures
4. Identify and rectify faults	4.1 Problems in pad printing machine operation are identified and reported according to enterprise procedures 4.2 Adjustments or corrections are carried out according to specified procedures and consistent with operator’s skill level 4.3 Pad printing machine operation is checked to ensure correct operation 4.4 Faulty performance of equipment is identified and reported according to enterprise procedures
5. Conduct shutdown	5.1 Correct shutdown sequence is followed according to manufacturer’s specifications and enterprise procedures 5.2 Shutdown is conducted in association with fellow workers and in compliance with WHS requirements 5.3 Unused ink is correctly labelled and stored according to manufacturer/supplier specifications and enterprise procedures 5.4 Solid and liquid waste is removed from operating area and recycled or disposed of, where required, according to regulatory requirements and enterprise procedures 5.5 Product is removed from operating area 5.6 Machine faults requiring repair are identified and reported to designated person according to enterprise procedures 5.7 Repair/adjustment is verified prior to resumption of operations
6. Clean and wash printing machine at end of print run	6.1 Plates and pads are cleaned ready for next run 6.2 Inking system is washed up ready for next run, and liquid waste is disposed of according to company and regulatory requirements 6.3 Pre- and post-treatment units are cleaned ready for next run 6.4 Production records or other documentation are accurately completed, where required by enterprise procedures

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	3.1-3.3, 5.1, 5.3	Recognises and interprets text to establish job requirements from information contained within relevant procedures and specifications
Writing	3.7, 4.1, 4.4, 5.3, 5.6, 6.4	Enters routine data associated with production processes and enterprise procedures
Oral Communication	3.1-3.3, 3.7, 4.1, 4.4, 5.1-5.3, 5.6	Speaks clearly using appropriate vocabulary, tone and pace to report faults and discrepancies
Numeracy	6.4	Interprets and analyses a range of mathematical information used in familiar and routine tasks
Navigate the world of work	1.2-1.6, 2.1-2.3, 3.1-3.4, 3.7, 3.8, 4.1, 4.2, 4.4, 5.1-5.4, 5.6, 6.1-6.2, 6.4	Recognises and follows explicit and implicit protocols and meets expectations associated with own role Recognises and follows all procedures for cleaning and maintenance of equipment incorporating regulatory requirements and enterprise procedures
Interact with others	3.1-3.3, 3.7, 4.1, 4.4, 5.1-5.3, 5.6	Cooperates with others as part of familiar routine activities, and contributes to specific activities requiring joint responsibility and accountability Understands what to communicate, with whom and how, in routine work situations
Get the work done	1.1-1.6, 2.1-2.3, 3.1-3.6, 3.8, 4.1-4.4, 5.1-5.7	Determines priorities and sequences steps involved in clearly defined, familiar tasks Recognises and anticipates an increasing range of familiar problems, their symptoms and causes, actively looking for early warning signs and implementing contingency plans Follows routine procedures for using digital technology by reading data from electronic monitoring and control systems

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPPRN242 Produce basic pad printed product	ICPPR242C Produce basic pad printed product	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRN242 Produce basic pad printed product

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

safely produce TWO basic pad printing jobs (if possible on different substrates) to meet job specifications, enterprise procedures and work health and safety (WHS) requirements

correctly shut down and clean pad printing machine and, if possible, rectify any production problems with minimum downtime.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

outline major WHS concerns of operating this machine

identify where the Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) are stored and what information they contain

explain different machine cycle modes and how colour density of a light image on a dark substrate can be improved

outline process for selecting the appropriate machine cycle mode to provide the highest production output for a particular product

explain correct ink viscosity during production

explain causes of unreleased ink remaining on the printing pad and how this issue is identified

explain the correct process for recognising a damaged pad and the correct method of cleaning a pad during production

outline pre- and post-treatment requirements and the simple pre-treatment commonly required for injection-moulded objects

identify how long ink on the job takes to cure before scratch and adhesion tests can be performed

describe common print problems, how they are identified, and how they can be rectified

describe visible effects in the image if ink viscosity is incorrect

outline the process for adjusting the machine to correct a shift in image position on the product

identify machine manuals, safety and other documentation relevant to this task, where they are kept and information they contain.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the printing field of work and include access to:

pad printing machine

special purpose tools, equipment and materials.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPPRN261 Set up for foil stamping

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to set up and adjust a dye or block as well as a reel or sheet system for gold blocking and hot foil stamping.

It applies to individuals who work under direct supervision and typically prepare material, and monitor and run equipment and machinery.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Printing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Confirm job specifications	1.1 Job requirements are read and interpreted from job documentation or production control system 1.2 Set up is carried out correctly in minimum time with minimum wastage 1.3 Availability of all job related components is checked
2. Set up machine	2.1 Dye or block is selected and checked against job ticket 2.2 Dye or block is locked into chase and checked for correct positioning 2.3 Chase is mounted in press 2.4 Foil transfer or feed system is set up and adjusted according to image size and job specifications 2.5 If required, in-line loading and ejection units are set up for basic processes and adjusted according to machine requirements and job specifications
3. Set up delivery systems	3.1 Delivery systems are set up and adjusted according to job specifications
4. Select foils	4.1 Foils are selected according to job specifications and end-user requirements 4.2 Quality and suitability of foils are checked and appropriate action taken 4.3 Foils are selected according to suitability of substrate, physical and chemical performance and properties 4.4 Foils are prepared according to work health and safety (WHS) requirements, and manufacturer’s/supplier’s instructions with suitable precautions to minimise waste 4.5 Foils are appropriately labelled, handled and stored according to manufacturer’s/supplier’s instructions to prevent damage and hazards to personnel and to prolong shelf life
5. Conduct proof run	5.1 Material to be used for proof is organised correctly 5.2 Machine is operated according to manufacturer’s and enterprise procedures to produce a specified proof 5.3 Proof is visually inspected and/or tested or laboratory testing organised according to enterprise procedures 5.4 Production does not commence without client authority where appropriate 5.5 Results are interpreted and adjusts made according to product and machine specifications to determine adjustment requirements

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 2.1, 2.4, 2.5, 4.1, 4.4, 4.5, 5.4, 5.5	Recognises and evaluates text to establish job requirements from information contained within relevant systems
Writing	4.5	Completes workplace forms accurately
Oral Communication	2.4, 2.5, 4.1, 4.4, 4.5, 5.3-5.5	Participates effectively in spoken interactions to confirm or clarify understandings
Numeracy	Interprets and analyses a range of mathematical information used in familiar and routine tasks
Navigate the world of work	1.1, 1.2, 2.1, 2.2, 2.4, 2.5, 4.1, 4.2, 4.4, 4.5, 5.2-5.5	Complies with legislative requirements and follows organisational policies and procedures relevant to own role Understands roles and responsibilities for task and makes basic decisions on work completion requirements, seeking assistance when required.
Interact with others	2.4, 2.5, 4.1, 4.4, 4.5, 6.3-6.5	Cooperates with others as part of familiar routine activities, and contributes to specific activities requiring joint responsibility and accountability
Get the work done	1.2, 1.3, 2.1-2.5, 3.1, 4.2-4.5, 5.1-5.3, 5.5	Determines priorities and sequences steps involved in clearly defined tasks Implements actions as per instructions, making slight adjustments if necessary Plans, identifies and assembles resources required to complete tasks Follows routine procedures for using digital technology by reading data from electronic monitoring and control systems

Range of Conditions

This section specifies different work environments and conditions that may affect performance. Essential operating conditions that may be present (depending on the work situation, needs of the candidate, accessibility of the item, and local industry and regional contexts) are included.

Delivery systems MUST include Either:	reel OR sheet OR product jigs
Setting up and adjusting MUST include EITHER:	unwind and rewind reels webbing procedures splicing/joining reels printed web viewing devices folder and sheeter set off / marking prevention devices OR feeder and delivery systems sheet pick-up and transportation system transfer and control system set off / marking prevention devices OR selecting jigs to suit product fitting jigs to machine table adjusting table height to suit product

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPPRN261 Set up for foil stamping	ICPPR261C Set up for foil stamping	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRN261 Set up for foil stamping

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

safely set up a dye or block and the reel or sheet systems or jigs for gold blocking or hot foil stamping and conduct a proof run and adjust settings to ensure production speeds are attained

demonstrate the use of control, monitoring and data entry systems

find and use information relevant to the task from a variety of information sources

demonstrate all safety devices on the machine

correctly set up for foil stamping on TWO occasions (if possible including at least one in-line process if relevant) according to manufacturer’s and job specifications and enterprise procedures.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

Interpreting job specifications

explain actions undertaken if vital information is missing from the job ticket

list checks undertaken prior to set up (availability of materials etc.)

Web systems only

describe purpose of nip rollers

outline how sheet position is determined for the job

discuss why the same side lay is used in both print and foil stamping

identify how appropriate front lays are selected

Sheet or product delivery system (as relevant)

list major work health and safety (WHS) concerns of setting up delivery systems

explain how to determine the printing side of material

explain how high side and front lays should be set

explain why a register check should be carried out

identify how to determine appropriate product jigs

explain how to determine correct table height

outline characteristics to consider when selecting foil for foil stamped product

identify type of foil required for foiling on plastic films

list THREE products and the foils appropriate for them

list WHS concerns related to set up

describe effect of soft packing on the foil stamped product

identify methods to create harder packing

explain the effect higher dwell time has on the foil stamped product

identify the temperature that is the starting point when setting up

explain implications if the temperature is set too high

discuss the height dye should be mounted at

explain how required pressure is determined

identify precautions to protect from burns

explain why not to use the first sheet or object printed as a proof during set up

discuss what causes an uneven print (top to bottom)

discuss how long it takes for temperature adjustments to come into effect

identify signs a temperature setting is too high

explain how much the foil should draw through the press on each pass

identify machine manuals, safety and other documentation relevant to this task, where are they kept and the information contained.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the printing field of work and include access to:

a hot foil stamping or gold blocking machine

special purpose tools, equipment and materials.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPPRN262 Produce foil stamped product

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to produce a foil stamped product using a gold blocking or hot foil machine in accordance with product quality standards.

It applies to individuals who work under direct supervision but are responsible for preparing materials, monitoring and cleaning equipment and machinery and ensuring the production process is maintained.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Printing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Maintain operation of delivery systems	1.1 Delivery systems are monitored and adjusted to ensure efficient and continuous operation, without damage to finished product 1.2 Substrate is added to and removed from process according to job instructions
2. Maintain production process	2.1 Production process is operated in association with fellow workers and according to company specifications and planned daily schedule 2.2 If necessary, location of objects into fixtures/jigs is monitored and adjusted 2.3 Foil transfer system is monitored and adjusted to ensure quality of printed product meets the approved proof standard 2.4 Basic in-line printing/converting/binding/finishing process(es) are monitored and adjusted to ensure quality of product meets the approved proof standard 2.5 Production is maintained within work health and safety (WHS) requirements and company and manufacturer’s specifications 2.6 Manual and/or automatic control is used as per specification 2.7 Performance is monitored and verified using the process control system according to enterprise procedures 2.8 Foil performance and position of print are monitored and adjusted throughout production run 2.9 Waste is sorted according to enterprise procedures
3. Identify and rectify problems	3.1 Production difficulties are anticipated and preventive action is taken to prevent occurrence by timely intervention 3.2 Process adjustments to eliminate problems are reported according to enterprise procedures 3.3 Faulty performance of equipment is identified and reported according to enterprise procedures 3.4 Problems in foil stamping machine operation are identified and reported according to enterprise procedures 3.5 Adjustments or corrections are carried out according to specified procedures and consistent with operator’s skill level 3.6 Foil stamping machine operation is checked to ensure correct operation
4. Conduct shutdown of production process	4.1 Correct shutdown sequence is followed according to manufacturer’s specifications and enterprise procedures 4.2 Shutdown is conducted in association with fellow workers and in compliance with WHS requirements 4.3 Unused foil is correctly labelled and stored according to manufacturer/supplier specifications and enterprise procedures 4.4 Waste is removed from operating area and recycled or disposed of, where required, according to regulatory requirements and enterprise procedures 4.5 All product is removed from operating area 4.6 Machine faults requiring repair are identified and reported to designated person according to enterprise procedures 4.7 Repair/adjustment is verified prior to resumption of operations
5. Clean printing machine at end of print run	5.1 Units are cleaned ready for next run 5.2 Transportation and delivery systems are disengaged and cleaned ready for next run 5.3 Production records or other documentation are accurately completed, where required by enterprise procedures

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	4.1	Recognises and interprets text to establish job requirements from information contained within relevant procedures and specifications
Writing	4.3, 4.6, 53	Enters routine data associated with production processes and enterprise procedures
Oral Communication	4.1, 4.2, 4.6	Speaks clearly using appropriate vocabulary, tone and pace to report faults and discrepancies
Navigate the world of work	4.1, 4.2, 4.4, 4.6, 5.1-5.5	Recognises and follows explicit and implicit protocols and meets expectations associated with own role including achieving outcomes more efficiently and effectively Recognises and follows all procedures for cleaning and maintenance of equipment Incorporating regulatory requirements and enterprise procedures
Interact with others	4.1, 4.2, 4.6	Cooperates with others as part of familiar routine activities, and contributes to specific activities requiring joint responsibility and accountability Understands what to communicate, with whom and how, in routine work situations, identifying relevant information and ideas
Get the work done	4.1, 4.2, 4.4-4.7	Determines priorities and sequences steps involved in clearly defined, familiar tasks Recognises and anticipates an increasing range of familiar problems, their symptoms and causes, actively looking for early warning signs and implementing contingency plans Follows routine procedures for using digital technology by reading data from electronic monitoring and control systems

Range of Conditions

This section specifies different work environments and conditions that may affect performance. Essential operating conditions that may be present (depending on the work situation, needs of the candidate, accessibility of the item, and local industry and regional contexts) are included.

Delivery systems MUST include EITHER:	reel OR sheet
Monitoring and adjusting MUST include EITHER:	reel stand and rewind section web control system sheeting section set off / marking prevention system in-line loading in-line injection OR feeder and delivery sheet pick-up and transport system transfer systems set off / marking prevention system

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPPRN262 Produce foil stamped product	ICPPR262C Produce foil stamped product	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRN262 Produce foil stamped product

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

operate a gold blocking or hot foil stamping machine ensuring an efficient production flow that maintains product quality standards. Any production problems are anticipated and rectified with minimum downtime. The machine is correctly shut down and cleaned according to work health and safety (WHS) guidelines

demonstrate use of control, monitoring and data entry systems

demonstrate an ability to find and use information relevant to the task from a variety of information sources

produce TWO foil stamped products (if possible including at least one in-line process if relevant) according to job specifications and enterprise procedures.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

Maintaining in-feed and delivery of reel or sheet or 3D object transportation section

identify WHS concerns when operating a transportation system

For reel systems only

explain why tracking the web is important to position and register

identify implications if web is not spliced correctly

list identification used for web splices

describe precautions to ensure rewound product is of consistent, acceptable quality

For sheet systems only

explain why sheets are fanned before loading into the press

describe impact printing double sheets has on the foil stamped product

list components which, if sheeted, can be adjusted to ensure correct delivery

explain how printed material below acceptable standard is identified

describe aspects of loading and ejection that need to be monitored

Maintaining the foil stamping process

identify major WHS concerns when foil stamping

describe considerations that contribute to determining the ideal press speed

explain at what interval the product should be checked for consistency

identify the cause of non-image areas of the print filling in

describe remedial action if the edges of the print are jagged

explain why the use of anti-set off spray is not recommended when foil stamping

describe how to adjust the machine to correct a shift in image position on the object

Shutdown and cleaning of the press

identify dangers of solvents and solutions used to clean the press and printing dyes

describe how dyes should be stored following printing

list the effect of poorly stored dyes

identify parts of the machine to be thoroughly cleaned following the print run

list components to be inspected for wear following the print run

identify records important for following or repeat prints

Information sources

locate machine manuals, safety and other documentation relevant to this task and outline information included.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the printing field of work and include access to special purpose tools, equipment and materials.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPPRN271 Set up for basic coating

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to set up and adjust rollers and the reel or sheet systems for coating a range of aqueous coatings, UV varnishes and machine varnishes.

It applies to individuals who work under direct supervision and prepare material, and monitor and run equipment and machinery.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Printing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Confirm job specifications	1.1 Job requirements are read and interpreted from job documentation or production control system 1.2 Set up is carried out correctly in minimum time with minimum wastage 1.3 Availability of all job related components is checked
2. Set up delivery systems	2.1 Delivery systems and are set up and adjusted according to job specifications 2.2 Substrate is removed from process according to job instructions
3. Select and prepare coating	3.1 Coating is selected according to job specifications and end-user requirements 3.2 Quality and suitability of coating is checked and appropriate action is taken 3.3 Coatings and additives are prepared according to work health and safety (WHS) requirements, and manufacturer’s/supplier’s instructions with suitable precautions to minimise waste 3.4 Correct weight/volume of coating is prepared to match requirements of the job specification and coating process 3.5 Check the viscosity of coating is correct for the job 3.6 Coating formulation is appropriately recorded
4. Set up machine for coating	4.1 Appropriate rollers/cylinders are selected and secured to the machine and set 4.2 Application system is set up and adjusted according to job specifications 4.3 Coating delivery system is set up with correct flow and return flow determined by air pressure or pump speeds, and adjusted according to job specifications 4.4 Coating blanket is cut or a plate installed for non-image areas 4.5 Blanket or plate packing is checked for job suitability 4.6 Coating temperature is checked for job suitability 4.7 Drying system is set up and adjusted according to job specifications
5. Conduct proof run	5.1 Material to be used for proof is organised correctly 5.2 Machine is set up and operated to produce a specified proof according to work health and safety (WHS) requirements, manufacturer’s specifications and enterprise procedures 5.3 Proof is visually inspected and/or tested or laboratory testing organised according to enterprise procedures 5.4 Production does not commence without client authority, where appropriate 5.5 Results are interpreted and adjustment changes are carried out according to product and machine specifications 5.6 Adjustments are carried out according to product and machine specifications

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 3.1, 3.3, 3.4, 4.2, 4.3, 4.7, 5.2, 5.4-5.6	Recognises and evaluates text to establish job requirements from information contained within relevant systems
Writing	3.6	Completes workplace forms accurately
Oral Communication	2.1-2.5, 3.1-3.5, 4.1, 4.3, 4.4, 5.2, 5.3, 5.7, 6.2-6.6	Participates effectively in spoken interactions to confirm or clarify understandings
Numeracy	4.4	Interprets and analyses a range of mathematical information used in familiar and routine tasks
Navigate the world of work	3.1-3.5, 4.1-4.3, 4.5-4.7, 5.1-6.6	Complies with legislative requirements and follows organisational policies and procedures relevant to own role Understands roles and responsibilities for task and makes basic decisions on work completion requirements, seeking assistance when needed
Interact with others	3.1, 3.3, 3.4, 4.2, 4.3, 4.7, 5.2, 5.3, 5.5, 5.6	Cooperates with others as part of familiar routine activities, and contributes to specific activities requiring joint responsibility and accountability
Get the work done.	1.1-1.3, 3.1-3.5, 4.1-4.7, 5.1-5.3, 5.5, 5.6	Determines priorities and sequences steps involved in clearly defined tasks Implements actions as per instructions, making slight adjustments if necessary Plans, identifies and assembles resources required to complete tasks Follows routine procedures for using digital technology by reading data from electronic monitoring and control systems

Range of Conditions

This section specifies different work environments and conditions that may affect performance. Essential operating conditions that may be present (depending on the work situation, needs of the candidate, accessibility of the item, and local industry and regional contexts) are included.

Delivery systems must include EITHER:	reel OR sheet
Monitoring and adjusting MUST include EITHER:	unwind and rewind reels web control system print web viewing devices set off / marking prevention devices OR feeder and delivery sheet pick up and transportation system transfer and control systems set off / marking prevention devices

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPPRN271 Set up for basic coating	ICPPR271C Set up for basic coating	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRN271 Set up for basic coating

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

set up rollers and reel or sheet systems for coating a range of aqueous coatings, UV varnishes and machine varnishes and conduct a proof run and adjust settings to ensure production speeds are attained

demonstrate use of control, monitoring and data entry systems

demonstrate all safety devices on the machine

set up for TWO basic coating operations (one spot coating and one overall coating and, if possible, including at least one in-line process) according to manufacturer’s and job specifications, and enterprise procedures.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

Interpret job specifications

identify where information about the type of required coating is located on the work ticket

explain actions to be taken if vital information is missing from the job ticket

outline checks to be done prior to set up (availability of materials etc.)

For reel systems only

list major work health and safety (WHS) concerns when setting up the reel transportation system

outline safety risks associated with the machine’s rewind section

explain how low web tension and inefficient web splices impacts the print

identify how the machine recognises if there has been a web break

describe effect of excessive web tension at the rewind section of the machine

discuss how to determine reel position for the job

For sheet systems only

list major WHS concerns when setting up the sheet transportation system

discuss how to determine sheet position for the job

explain how appropriate front lays are selected

list reasons for a two-sheet cut-out on most feeders

identify how the machine recognises if a sheet is missing or late

identify how the coating side of the material is chosen

identify why a register check is carried out

Delivery system

identify impact of too much vacuum on slow-down wheels has on the job

describe what determines position of register or bustle wheels

outline impact of excessive jogging on the stack

Coating preparation

list WHS concerns relevant to use of coatings

list THREE types of coating

describe how suitability of coating for the job is determined

outline how ability of the coat to adhere to the product is determined

explain how to determine how much coating is required

describe range of viscosities to be run with on aqueous coatings

outline the impact of incorrect viscosity

explain how to adjust viscosity of a coating

Machine set-up

explain methods the coating uses to solidify

explain what is required to dry UV coating

explain printing principles used to apply aqueous coating

describe what temperature the drier should be set at to dry aqueous coating

outline how to determine which image carrier (plate or blanket) to use

Proofing and adjustments

describe how position of the coating is checked against the print

discuss the impact skeleton wheels have on the coating surface

outline how the amount of gloss on the surface can be measured

identify who is responsible for the final OK on the job

describe the impact of not enough coating on a sheet

describe the impact a UV coating has on a wet print

Information sources

identify machine manuals, safety and other documentation relevant to this task, where are they kept and the information contained.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the printing field of work and include access to:

special purpose tools, equipment and materials

a printing machine or dedicated coating machines with manual, semi-automated, fully automated or computerised process control.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPPRN272 Produce basic coated product

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to safely operate a reel or sheet-fed machine, ensuring efficient production and maintaining quality standards.

It applies to individuals working in the printing and graphic arts industry performing a range of mainly routine tasks, who work under direct supervision and use limited practical skills and knowledge in a defined context.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Printing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Maintain operation of delivery systems	1.1 Delivery systems are monitored and adjusted to ensure efficient and continuous operation and ensure no damage to finished product 1.2 Substrate is added to and removed from process according to job instructions
2. Maintain coating process	2.1 Roller condition is monitored and adjusted to ensure quality of printed product meets the approved proof standard 2.2 Coating system is monitored and adjusted to ensure quality of product meets the approved proof standard 2.3 Drying systems are monitored and adjusted to ensure quality of product meets the approved proof standard 2.4 Quality and viscosity of varnish are monitored and adjusted as necessary to ensure quality of product
3. Maintain production process	3.1 Basic or complex in-line printing/converting/binding/finishing processes are monitored and adjusted to ensure quality of product meets the approved proof standard if required 3.2 Delivery is monitored and adjusted to ensure quality and efficient product delivery if required 3.3 Production process is operated in association with fellow workers and according to company specifications and planned daily schedule 3.4 Production is maintained within work health and safety (WHS) requirements and company and manufacturer’s specifications 3.5 Manual and/or automatic control is used as per specification 3.6 Performance is monitored and verified using the process control system according to enterprise procedures 3.7 Coating performance, register and position of coating are monitored and adjusted throughout production run 3.8 Production difficulties are anticipated and preventive action is taken to prevent occurrence by timely intervention 3.9 Process adjustments to eliminate problems are reported according to enterprise procedures 3.10 Waste is sorted according to enterprise procedures
4. Identify and rectify problems	4.1 Faulty performance of equipment is identified and reported according to enterprise procedures 4.2 Problems in coating machine are identified and reported according to enterprise procedures 4.3 Adjustments or corrections are carried out according to specified procedures and consistent with operator’s skill level 4.4 Coating machine operation is checked to ensure correct operation
5. Conduct shutdown of production process	5.1 Correct shutdown sequence is followed according to manufacturer’s specifications and enterprise procedures 5.2 Shutdown is conducted in association with fellow workers and in compliance with WHS requirements 5.3 Solid and liquid waste is removed from operating area and recycled or disposed of, where required, according to regulatory requirements and enterprise procedures 5.4 Product is removed from operating area 5.5 Machine faults requiring repair are identified and reported to designated person according to enterprise procedures 5.6 Repair/adjustment is verified prior to resumption of operations
6. Clean and wash coating machine	6.1 Cylinders, plate and roller surfaces are cleaned ready for next run 6.2 Coating delivery system is washed ready for next run, and liquid waste is disposed of according to company and regulatory requirements 6.3 In-line slitting units are cleaned ready for next run 6.4 Transportation and delivery systems are disengaged and cleaned ready for next run 6.5 Production records or other documentation are accurately completed where required by enterprise procedures

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	3.3-3.5, 4.3, 5.1	Recognises and interprets text to establish job requirements from information contained within relevant procedures and specifications
Writing	3.3, 3.9, 4.1, 4.2, 65.5, 6.5	Enters routine data associated with production processes and enterprise procedures
Oral Communication	3.3-3.5, 3.9, 4.1-4.3, 5.1,5.2, 5.5	Speaks clearly using appropriate vocabulary, tone and pace to report faults and discrepancies
Numeracy	6.5	Interprets and analyses a range of mathematical information used in familiar and routine tasks
Navigate the world of work	2.1-2.4, 3.1-3.4, 3.6, 3.9, 3.10, 4.1-4.4, 5.1-5.3, 5.5, 6.1-6.5	Recognises and follows explicit and implicit protocols and meets expectations associated with own role Recognises and follows all procedures for cleaning and maintenance of equipment Incorporating regulatory requirements and enterprise procedures
Interact with others	3.3-3.5, 4.1-4.3, 5.1, 5.2, 5.5	Cooperates with others as part of familiar routine activities, and contributes to specific activities requiring joint responsibility and accountability Understands what to communicate, with whom and how, in routine work situations
Get the work done	1.1, 1.2, 2.1-2.4, 3.3-3.8, 3.10, 4.1-4.4, 5.1-5.6, 6.1-6.4	Determines priorities and sequences steps involved in clearly defined, familiar tasks Recognises and anticipates an increasing range of familiar problems, their symptoms and causes, actively looking for early warning signs and implementing contingency plans Follows routine procedures for using digital technology by reading data from electronic monitoring and control systems

Range of Conditions

This section specifies different work environments and conditions that may affect performance. Essential operating conditions that may be present (depending on the work situation, needs of the candidate, accessibility of the item, and local industry and regional contexts) are included.

Delivery systems MUST include EITHER:	reel OR sheet
Monitoring and adjusting MUST include EITHER:	reel stand and rewind section web control system sheeting section OR feeder and delivery sheet pick-up and transport system transfer system

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPPRN272 Produce basic coated product	ICPPR272C Produce basic coated product	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRN272 Produce basic coated product

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

correctly produce TWO basic coating jobs (one spot coating and one overall coating and, if possible, including at least one in-line process) according to job specifications, enterprise procedures and work health and safety (WHS) requirements

safely shut down and clean either reel- or sheet-fed machine and, if possible, rectify any problems with minimum downtime.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

outline required action if vital information is missing from the job ticket

list checks undertaken prior to set-up

For reel systems only

identify WHS concerns related to loading and handling heavy reels

describe effect on the print of excessive tension on the rewinding reel

outline the result if the web is not spliced correctly

outline precautions to ensure rewound product is consistent, acceptable quality

For sheet systems only

identify importance of sheets being fanned before loading into the press

explain importance of setting and checking the double sheet detector during the print run

describe components that can be adjusted to ensure correct delivery if sheeted

explain the effects of anti-set-off spray on the finished job, and level the coating should be maintained at in the pan

outline the process if printed material is below acceptable standard

explain major WHS concerns when coating and action taken if the aqueous coating is smudged in the machine delivery section

outline effect the UV lamp has on UV coating

explain dangers of solvents and solutions used to clean the coating system, plates, cylinders and press

identify parts of the machine to be thoroughly cleaned following coating of the job

identify components to be inspected for wear following the print run

explain records important for following or repeat prints

identify machine manuals, safety and other documentation relevant to this task, where are they kept, and the information contained.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the printing field of work and include access to:

reel- or sheet-fed machine.

special purpose tools, equipment and materials

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPPRN282 Produce and manage basic digital print

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to construct a range of electronic data files, perform basic colour management techniques and produce and manage a print runt to achieve maximum productivity.

It applies to individuals working in the printing and graphic arts industry who perform a range of mainly routine tasks, work under direct supervision and use limited practical skills and knowledge in a defined context.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Printing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Troubleshoot and maintain operations of digital print system	1.1 Errors in operation of hardware and consumable components in the printing module of a digital printing system are identified and rectified 1.2 Source of errors related to electronic data file, digital front-end, workstation or industry software or hardware printing systems is located and rectified and/or technical assistance is coordinated according to manufacturer’s specifications 1.3 Preventive maintenance is performed according to manufacturer’s specifications to ensure digital print system functions at optimum productivity with minimum downtime and wastage 1.4 Incompatibilities between versions of hardware and software used in digital printing are identified and rectified
2. Liaise with clients	2.1 Print service and quality expectations are clearly communicated to client according to enterprise procedures 2.2 Advice is provided to clients on how to set up electronic data files for digital printing according to enterprise procedures, manufacturer’s specifications and digital print equipment capabilities 2.3 Advice is provided to clients on appropriate substrates and document finishing methods for digital printing jobs, according to client’s budget and job specifications
3. Perform basic electronic document impositions	3.1 Electronic file imposition using a range of industry software is completed according to job specifications 3.2 Document finishing requirements for an imposed digital print job are finalised with co-workers or external services, if required, according to equipment availability and enterprise procedures
4. Perform basic digital colour management	4.1 Red Green Blue (RGB), Cyan Magenta Yellow Black (CMYK) and PMS colour charts are outputted and differences between computer monitor colour and digitally printed colour are adjusted 4.2 Common problems of colour digital printing are rectified and communicated to clients according to job specifications
5. Access and verify electronic data files	5.1 Workstation computer and industry software are used to locate and retrieve electronic data files according to job specifications 5.2 Digital front-end processor is used to locate and retrieve electronic data files according to job specifications 5.3 Preview or pre-flight check of electronic data files is performed to verify correct job set-up according to job specifications 5.4 Basic troubleshooting methods are applied to identify unverified data files, file errors and job requirement inconsistencies according to manufacturer’s specifications
6. Submit data files to digital print system	6.1 Job priority is determined according to job specifications and production schedules 6.2 Data files are submitted to print and image quality checks, and machine productivity checks are performed
7. Produce digital proof and run print job	7.1 Proof run is conducted to confirm proof conforms to job specifications and/or for client approval 7.2 Print run is conducted according to job specifications ensuring machine productivity and quality are monitored and rectified throughout the print job
8. Coordinate and/or perform document finishing and client delivery	8.1 Steps required for document finishing are determined, if not performed on in-line finishing units, on a web or sheet-fed system according to enterprise procedures 8.2 Finished print work is packaged to prevent damage and to conform to delivery requirements according to job specifications

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.2, 1.3, 3.1, 4.2, 5.1-5.4, 6.1, 7.1, 7.2, 8.2	Recognises and interprets text to establish job requirements from information contained within relevant procedures and specifications
Writing	2.1-2.3	Communicates relationships between ideas and information in a style appropriate to audience and purpose
Oral Communication	1.2, 1.3, 2.1-2.3, 3.1, 3.2, 4.2, 5.1-5.3, 6.1, 7.1, 7.2, 8.2	Speaks clearly using appropriate vocabulary, tone and pace to report faults and discrepancies Determines client and stakeholder requirements to inform a design or technical brief
Numeracy	2.2	Interprets and analyses a range of mathematical information used in familiar and routine tasks
Navigate the world of work	1.2, 1.3, 2.1-2.3, 3.1, 3.2, 4.2, 5.1-5.4, 6.1, 6.2, 7.1, 7.2, 8.1, 8.2	Recognises and follows explicit and implicit protocols and meets expectations associated with own role Complies with work health and safety (WHS), legislative requirements and follows organisational policies and procedures relevant to own role
Interact with others	1.2, 1.3, 2.1-2.3, 3.1, 3.2, 4.2, 5.1-5.3, 6.1, 7.1, 7.2, 8.2	Cooperates with others as part of familiar routine activities, and contributes to specific activities requiring joint responsibility and accountability Understands what to communicate, with whom and how in routine work situations, identifying relevant information and ideas
Get the work done	1.1-1.4, 3.1, 3.2, 4.1, 4.2, 5.1-5.4, 6.1, 6.2, 7.1, 7.2, 8.1, 8.2	Takes responsibility for planning and organising own workload, identifying ways of sequencing and combining elements for greater efficiency Recognises and anticipates an increasing range of familiar problems, actively looking for early warning signs and implementing contingency plans Plans, identifies and assembles resources required to complete tasks Follows routine procedures for using digital technology by reading data from electronic monitoring and control systems

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPPRN282 Produce and manage basic digital print	ICPPR282C Produce and manage basic digital print	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRN282 Produce and manage basic digital print

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

accurately produce a flowchart that demonstrates FOUR examples of digital print workflows for digital printing (one basic document file, one variable data document file, one colour document file and one electronically imposed document file)

conduct and manage a digital print run according to client specifications and work health and safety (WHS) requirements.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

name safety devices that need to be in place when working on the machine

explain a paper misfeed, how to access and clear it

explain potential problems with front to back registration, and if substrate weight and machine specifications do not match

outline problems that can occur when downloading files from a digital front-end and how can they be solved, including distinguishing between problems with downloading from a digital front-end, and with the printing module

describe action if a digital front-end loses communication with the printing module

outline precautions to maintain fit, proportion and position of printed images, and how to ensure the machine has been calibrated to manufacturer’s specifications

outline the process if image colour is not consistent

outline the process for ensuring correct dimensions and measurements have been set up in the pre-press stage

identify quality issues if improper substrate handling procedures are not performed

identify machine manuals, safety and other documentation relevant to machine operation and maintenance, where they are kept, and how to find information relating to industry software applications and other relevant sources of information

describe the process if the incorrect version of software is loaded or needs an update

outline actions if vital information is missing from the job ticket (manual or electronic)

outline checks undertaken prior to set-up (availability of material, maintenance)

outline the process if a file does not transfer correctly and what to do to correct the problem

outline checks to ensure data is in a format that can be used in digital printing, and benefits of using electronic data rather than scanning hardcopy

describe ways to submit a PDF file to the digital printer

describe the process to ensure clients have correct procedures for providing electronic files

describe the process of explaining to a client differences in colour displayed on a computer monitor compared to printed output

outline recommendations to a client who has created an electronic file in an incompatible software application

describe the process for estimating turnaround time for a client with a tight deadline

describe steps for client approval of the print

proofing and adjustment and circumstances where a job would be modified before printing

outline situations where margins would be changed when the job reaches the printer

name what the proof is checked against

describe the final approval process for basic jobs

describe the process for adjusting colour, toner/ink coverage or dealing with density problems

outline the process if required substrate were unavailable

name the maximum and minimum weight of substrate that can be printed on a specific machine, and maximum feeding and delivery quantities for the machine

explain possible problems with incorrect feeding and delivery

explain OHS procedures to follow when setting up in-line processes

outline in-line options and on-line finishing options available on the machine

describe the process for document finishing and client delivery

describe various types of binding, and procedures, if the binding method required by the client is not available at your site

outline options if the document size is too thick to staple

describe importance of packaging of finished print work.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the printing field of work and include access to special purpose tools, equipment and materials.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPPRN283 Use digital media consumables

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to select, use and load digital media consumables such as printing substrates, inks and toners.

It applies to individuals who generally work under direct supervision and assist with digital production workflow including monitoring stock levels.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Printing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Identify and select consumables	1.1 Required consumables are identified in consultation with appropriate personnel and in accordance with both job specifications and manufacturer’s guidelines 1.2 Consumables are appropriately selected for each individual job
2. Use consumables	2.1 Consumables are prepared and loaded according to work health and safety (WHS) requirements and manufacturer's and enterprise procedures and specifications 2.2 Identify and remove faulty products 2.3 Identify and rectify incorrect substrate usage
3. Monitor storage of consumables and stock levels	3.1 Monitor stock levels to enterprise requirements 3.2 Store consumables according to manufacturer’s specifications 3.3 Inform appropriate personnel of low stock levels and new orders placed

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 2.1, 3.1, 3.2,	Recognises and interprets text to establish job requirements from information contained within relevant procedures and specifications
Writing	3.2, 3.3	Completes job documentation in a style appropriate to audience and purpose
Oral Communication	1.1, 2.1, 3.3	Receives and passes on straightforward messages
Navigate the world of work	1.1, 1.2, 2.1, 3.1, 3.2,	Recognises and follows explicit and implicit protocols including WHS requirements associated with own role
Interact with others	1.1, 2.1, 3.3	Cooperates with others as part of familiar routine activities, and contributes to specific activities requiring joint responsibility and accountability
Get the work done	1.1, 1.2, 2.1-2.3, 3.1-3.3	Takes responsibility for planning and organising own workload including identifying and rectifying familiar problems Plans, identifies and assembles resources required to complete tasks

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPPRN283 Use digital media consumables	ICPPR283A Use digital media consumables	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRN283 Use digital media consumables

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

identify, use and store consumables used in a digital workflow

rectify incorrect substrate usage where applicable

remove faulty products

monitor stock levels of consumables within the workplace

safely prepare and load consumables

locate and use information relevant to the task from a variety of sources.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

explain all WHS factors to be addressed when using and loading consumables

identify all relevant manuals and safety documentation relevant to digital media consumables, including material safety data sheets (MSDS)

identify various consumables used in the digital sector and appropriately select correct product for each printing and/or finishing device

understand cause of printing faults which can occur due to poor storage of consumables and substrate misuse.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the printing field of work and include access to:

special purpose tools, equipment and materials

digital media consumables

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPPRN284 Use colour management systems

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to identify and apply fundamental theory of colour including terminology, colour modes and analysis of light and colour.

It applies to individuals who generally work under direct supervision and assist with digital production workflow.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Printing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Identify need for colour management	1.1 Varied colour representations across devices are recognised and recorded according to job requirements 1.2 Colour inconsistencies between input, display and output devices, and printed products are identified and addressed 1.3 Components of colour management systems are identified and correctly used
2. Use colour modes and libraries	2.1 Colour modes and libraries are used according to job specifications 2.2 Images are converted between colour modes using processes that ensure best reproduction according to job specifications 2.3 Colour libraries are selected and used within software applications according to job specifications

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	2.1-2.3	Recognises and interprets text to establish job requirements from information contained within relevant procedures and specifications
Writing	1.1, 1.3	Completes job documentation in a style appropriate to audience and purpose
Oral Communication	1.3, 2.1-2.3	Receives and passes on straightforward messages
Navigate the world of work	1.3, 2.1-2.3	Recognises and follows explicit and implicit protocols associated with own role including appropriate work health and safety (WHS) requirements associated with immediate role
Interact with others	1.3, 2.1-2.3	Cooperates with others as part of familiar routine activities, and contributes to specific activities requiring joint responsibility and accountability
Get the work done	1.1-1.3, 2.1-2.3	Takes responsibility for planning and organising own workload including identifying and rectifying familiar problems

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPPRN284 Use colour management systems	ICPPR284A Introduction to colour management	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages Renamed to reflect industry practice	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRN284 Use colour management systems

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

recognise variations and inconsistencies in colour representation across devices

identify and use components of a colour management system

select and convert images to appropriate colour modes

select colour libraries that comply with specific job specifications

locate and use information relevant to the task from a variety of information sources.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

identify components of a colour management system and their application

explain terminology associated with colour management

identify standard lighting conditions for matching colour

describe effects of different lighting conditions on monitors, proofing and printing

explain measurement of light intensity and colour temperature

identify differences between red, blue, green (RGB), cyan, magenta, yellow, black (CMYK), lab colour and spot colour

list different rendering intents and their application

describe under-colour removal (UCR) and grey component replacement (GCR) and the effect they have on an image

explain different pantone libraries and their application

identify work health and safety (WHS) issues to consider when managing colour for digital production.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the printing field of work and include access to:

special purpose tools, equipment and materials

industry software packages used for colour management production.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPPRN285 Use digital workflow

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to apply digital workflow from concept stage to completion and delivery. It focuses on a basic knowledge and application of digital work processes, where another person is responsible for overall planning.

It applies to individuals working under supervision in any type of digital production area.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Printing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Prepare for digital workflow	1.1 Job requirements are obtained, correctly interpreted and confirmed 1.2 Digital work processes required for completing the job are identified and recorded 1.3 Equipment and materials are selected to meet job requirements 1.4 Software appropriate to the work application is selected 1.5 Safety requirements are followed according to safety plans and policies
2. Follow digital workflow	2.1 Work is performed in a logical and efficient sequence 2.2 Problems are identified and solutions found within scope of role based on knowledge of digital process 2.3 Tasks are completed and checked for compliance against work instructions
3. Maintain the workplace	3.1 Work area is cleared and materials disposed of or recycled in accordance with environmental management plan 3.2 Equipment is cleaned, checked, maintained and stored according to manufacturer's recommendations and standard work practices

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 1.5, 3.1	Recognises and interprets text to establish job requirements from information contained within relevant procedures and specifications
Writing	1.2	Completes job documentation in a style appropriate to audience and purpose
Oral Communication	1.1, 1.3, 1.5, 3.1, 3.2	Receives and passes on straightforward messages
Numeracy	1.5	Interprets and analyses a range of mathematical information used in familiar and routine tasks
Navigate the world of work	1.1-1.5, 2.1, 2.2, 3.1, 3.2	Recognises and follows explicit and implicit protocols including work health and safety (WHS) requirements associated with own role
Interact with others	1.1, 2.2	Cooperates with others as part of familiar routine activities, and contributes to specific activities requiring joint responsibility and accountability
Get the work done	1.1-1.4, 2.1-2.3, 3.1, 3.2	Takes responsibility for planning and organising own workload including identifying and rectifying familiar problems Plans, identifies and assembles resources required to complete tasks

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPPRN285 Use digital workflow	ICPPR285A Use digital workflow	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRN285 Use digital workflow

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

produce at least TWO products by following correct processes in a digital workflow:

correctly interpret requirements

select appropriate equipment and software

complete tasks according to job requirements

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

describe the different aspects of a digital workflow:

content confirmation

scheduling

communication processes

file management – naming, storage, saving, archiving

editing processes

distribution

discuss the order procedures are undertaken within a digital workflow

discuss different problems that may occur in a digital workflow and ways these may be avoided or addressed

identify types of equipment used in a digital workflow

explain types of software used in a digital workflow, their key features and purpose

describe printing and other publication processes used within a digital workflow

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the printing field of work and include access to:

special purpose tools, equipment and materials

high-end graphics and layout software

digital output devices.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPPRN286 Finish a digital product

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes skills and knowledge required to finish a digital print product. This could include trimming, folding, padding, stapling, comb and wire binding.

It applies to individuals who generally work under direct supervision, converting and finishing off digitally printed products in a digital environment.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Printing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Prepare for job	1.1 Job specifications are read and interpreted from job documentation or production control system 1.2 Set up is carried out correctly in minimum time with minimum wastage 1.3 Availability of all job related materials is checked and recorded
2. Produce test copy	2.1 Materials to be used for the job are identified and organised correctly 2.2 Equipment is set up and operated to produce a specified sample according to work health and safety (WHS) requirements, manufacturer's specifications and enterprise procedures 2.3 Sample is inspected and/or tested to ensure it meets job specifications and enterprise standards 2.4 Results are interpreted to determine adjustment requirements 2.5 Adjustments are carried out according to product and equipment specifications
3. Maintain finishing process	3.1 Finishing is maintained according to WHS requirements, manufacturer's specifications and enterprise procedures 3.2 Performance is monitored and verified using the process control system according to enterprise procedures 3.3 Finishing difficulties are anticipated and action is taken to prevent occurrence by timely intervention 3.4 Process adjustments to eliminate problems are reported according to enterprise procedures 3.5 Faulty performance of equipment is identified and reported according to enterprise procedures 3.6 Waste is sorted according to enterprise procedures 3.7 Production records or other documentation are accurately completed where required by enterprise procedures
4. Identify and rectify problems and faults	4.1 Problems with finishing equipment are identified and reported according to enterprise procedures 4.2 Adjustments or corrections are carried out according to specified procedures and are consistent with operator's skill level 4.3 Finishing equipment operation is checked to ensure correct operation

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 2.2, 2.3, 2.5, 3.1	Recognises and interprets text to establish job requirements from information contained within relevant procedures and specifications
Writing	1.3, 3.7, 4.1	Completes workplace forms accurately
Oral Communication	1.1, 2.2, 2.3, 2.5, 3.4, 3.5, 4.1	Participates effectively in spoken interactions by using strategies to confirm, clarify or repair understanding
Navigate the world of work	1.1, 1.2, 2.1-2.3, 2.5, 3.1, 3.2, 3.4-3.7, 4.1-4.3	Recognises and follows explicit and implicit protocols and meets expectations associated with own role Complies with WHS, legislative requirements and follows organisational policies and procedures relevant to own role
Interact with others	1.1, 2.2, 2.3, 2.5, 3.4, 3.5, 4.1	Seeks to cooperate with others to achieve results in immediate work context
Get the work done	1.2, 1.3, 2.1-2.5, 3.1-3.6, 4.1-4.3	With assistance, determines priorities and sequences steps involved in clearly defined, familiar tasks and identifies and assembles required resources Responds to predictable problems and implements standard or logical solutions related to own role in immediate work environment Reads data from electronic monitoring and control systems

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPPRN286 Finish a digital product	ICPPR286A Finish a digital product	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRN286 Finish a digital product

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

correctly set up and use binding and finishing equipment to produce finished, digitally printed products according to job specifications and within production timeframe

find and use information relevant to the task from a variety of information sources

demonstrate all safety devices on the machine

finish a digital product using TWO different types of binding and/or finishing

set up equipment and produce TWO bound and/or finished, digitally printed products (for each type of binding and/or finishing), according to manufacturer's and job specifications and enterprise procedures.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

describe work health and safety (WHS) factors to be addressed when adjusting machinery

name safety measures for setting up and operating finishing equipment

outline information about binding found in the job documentation or production control system

describe circumstances in which a machine needs to be adjusted

list factors that determine the correct binding technique for a job

discuss advantages and disadvantages of wire and comb binding

describe advantages and disadvantages of saddle and side stitching

nominate problems that may occur when folding a digitally printed job

describe effect heat may have on a digitally printed product

demonstrate correct cutting sequence and lay edges when trimming a job

identify grain direction and the effects of grain direction on finishing processes

discuss different types of finishing adhesives and their applications

list likely problems if equipment is not properly cleaned and maintained

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the printing field of work and include access to:

special purpose tools, and materials

industry software packages

trimmers

small guillotines

electronic staple machines

wire binding units.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPPRN287 Use digital processes

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to apply various digital printing processes and select an appropriate method for a particular job.

It applies to individuals who generally work under direct supervision and use various digital printing processes working in the digital, commercial print, pre-press, bureau, high-end print or a combination of these business environments.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Printing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Identify digital processes	1.1 Various digital processes used within the workplace are identified and documented 1.2 Advantages or disadvantages of one process over another for a particular job are identified and a suitable option recommended
2. Assess job requirements	2.1 Printing requirements of the job are determined 2.2 Layout design of the job is reviewed to determine possible printing problems of using a particular process 2.3 End application of the digital product is reviewed to ensure digital process will meet job specifications and enterprise standards
3. Apply digital process	3.1 Digital process is selected that ensures job specifications can be met 3.2 Digital process is completed in accordance job specifications and enterprise standards 3.3 Job is reviewed to ensure appropriate digital process was selected based on job specifications

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	2.3, 3.1-3.3	Recognises and interprets text to establish job requirements from information contained within relevant procedures and specifications
Writing	1.1	Conveys intended meaning on familiar topics for a limited range of purposes and audiences
Oral Communication	2.3, 3.1-3.3	Participates effectively in spoken interactions by using strategies to confirm, clarify or repair understanding
Navigate the world of work	2.1, 2.3, 3.1-3.3	Complies with WHS, legislative requirements and follows organisational policies and procedures relevant to own role
Interact with others	2.3, 3.1-3.3	Seeks to cooperate with others to achieve and analyse results in immediate work context
Get the work done	1.1, 1.2, 2.2, 2.3, 3.1-3.3	Plans, identifies and assembles resources required to complete tasks Responds to predictable problems and implements standard or logical solutions related to own role in immediate work environment

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPPRN287 Use digital processes	ICPPR287A Use digital processes	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRN287 Use digital processes

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

identify various digital printing processes used within the organisation

select the most appropriate digital printing process for a particular job

find and use information relevant to the task from a variety of information sources.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

outline various digital printing processes used within the digital sector

explain advantages and disadvantages of each process

describe types of substrates that best suit a particular process

explain cost differences between each process

list advantages and disadvantages digital processes have compared to traditional printing methods

identify different applications digital products may be used for

describe the effect heat can have on certain processes

explain the effect light can have of certain processes

describe how folding may affect appearance of a digitally printed job

describe the layout design considerations when using a particular process

identify which colours and combinations are not effective for certain processes

identify work health and safety (WHS) issues in relation to each digital process

identify the location of documentation or other information regarding digital processes.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the printing field of work and include access to special purpose tools, equipment and materials used for colour management production.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPPRN288 Produce basic relief printed product

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to produce basic relief printed product through operation of a platen, cylinder or rotary printing machine.

It applies to individuals who generally work under direct supervision and assist in the production process by maintaining equipment, materials and quality standards.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Printing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Maintain operation of reel system	1.1 Reel stand and rewind sections are monitored to ensure efficient continuous operation, correct tension and avoid marks or blemishes to finished product 1.2 Web control system is monitored and adjusted to ensure correct tension and accurate continuous positioning of web for efficient operation 1.3 Substrate is added to and removed from process according to job instructions 1.4 Sheeting section is monitored and adjusted to ensure quality and efficient product delivery 1.5 Set-off / marking prevention system is monitored and adjusted to ensure quality of the printed product meets the approved proof standard
2. Maintain operation of sheet system	2.1 Feeder and delivery sections are monitored and adjusted to ensure continuous and efficient feeding to machine 2.2 Sheet pick-up and transport system is monitored and adjusted to ensure accurate and continuous sheet handling and efficient operation 2.3 Transfer system is monitored and adjusted to ensure correct and continuous sheet handling and efficient operation 2.4 Substrate is added to and removed from the process according to job instructions 2.5 Set-off / marking prevention system is monitored and adjusted to ensure quality of the printed product meets the approved proof standard
3. Maintain basic routine relief printing process	3.1 Relief form or plate cylinder condition is monitored and adjusted to ensure quality of the printed product meets the approved proof standard 3.2 Relief impression surface condition is monitored and adjusted to ensure quality of the printed product meets the approved proof standard 3.3 Relief inking system is monitored and adjusted to ensure quality of the printed product meets the approved proof standard
4. Maintain routine production process	4.1 Production process is implemented in association with fellow workers and according to company specifications and planned daily schedule 4.2 Production is maintained within work health and safety (WHS) requirements and company and manufacturer’s specifications 4.3 Manual and/or automatic control is used according to specification 4.4 Performance is monitored and verified using the process control system according to enterprise procedures 4.5 Ink performance, colour, register and position already included in line embellishments of print are monitored and adjusted throughout production run 4.6 Production difficulties are anticipated and action is taken to prevent occurrence by timely intervention 4.7 Process adjustments to eliminate problems are reported according to enterprise procedures 4.8 Waste is sorted according to enterprise procedures
5. Identify and rectify problems	5.1 Problems in relief machine operation are identified and reported according to enterprise procedures 5.2 Adjustments or corrections are carried out according to specified procedures 5.3 Relief machine operation is checked to ensure correct operation
6. Conduct shutdown of production process	6.1 Shutdown is conducted in association with fellow workers and in compliance with WHS requirements 6.2 Unused ink is correctly labelled and stored according to manufacturer/supplier specifications and enterprise procedures 6.3 Solid and liquid waste is removed from operating area and recycled or disposed of, where required, according to regulatory requirements and enterprise procedures 6.4 Embellishment equipment is correctly labelled and stored according to manufacturer’s/supplier’s specifications and enterprise procedures 6.5 All product is removed from operating area 6.6 Machine faults requiring repair are identified and reported to designated person according to enterprise procedures 6.7 Repair/adjustment are verified prior to resumption of operations
7. Clean and wash up printing machine at end of print run	7.1 Cylinders, plate and roller surfaces are cleaned ready for next run 7.2 Inking system is washed up ready for next run, and liquid waste is disposed of according to company and regulatory requirements 7.3 In-line printing/converting/binding/finishing units are cleaned ready for next run 7.4 Reel feed, transportation and delivery systems are disengaged and cleaned ready for next run 7.5 Sheet feed, transport and delivery systems are disengaged and cleaned ready for next run 7.6 Production records or other documentation are accurately completed where required by enterprise procedures

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.3, 2.4, 4.1-4.3, 5.2, 6.2, 6.4	Recognises and interprets text to establish job requirements from information contained within relevant procedures and specifications
Writing	4.7, 5.1, 6.6, 7.6	Enters routine data associated with production processes and enterprise procedures
Oral Communication	1.3, 2.4, 4.1-4.3, 4.7, 5.1, 5.2, 6.1, 6.2, 6.6	Speaks clearly using appropriate vocabulary, tone and pace to report faults and discrepancies
Numeracy	1.3, 2.4	Interprets and analyses a range of mathematical information used in familiar and routine tasks
Navigate the world of work	1.1-1.5, 2.1-2.5, 3.1-3.3, 4.1-4.4, 4.7, 4.8, 5.1-5.3, 6.1-6.4, 6.6, 7.1-7.6	Recognises and follows explicit and implicit protocols and meets expectations associated with own role Recognises and follows all procedures for cleaning and maintenance of equipment, incorporating regulatory requirements and enterprise procedures
Interact with others	1.3, 2.4, 4.1-4.3, 4.7, 5.1, 5.2, 6.1, 6.2, 6.6	Cooperates with others as part of familiar routine activities, and contributes to specific activities requiring joint responsibility and accountability Understands what to communicate, with whom and how, in routine work situations
Get the work done	1.1-1.5, 2.1-2.5, 3.1-3.3, 4.1-4.8, 5.1-5.3, 6.1-6.7, 7.1-7.5	Determines priorities and sequences steps involved in clearly defined, familiar tasks Recognises and anticipates an increasing range of familiar problems, their symptoms and causes, actively looking for early warning signs and implementing contingency plans Follows routine procedures for using digital technology by reading data from electronic monitoring and control systems

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPPRN288 Produce basic relief printed product	ICPPR288A Produce basic relief printed product	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRN288 Produce basic relief printed product

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

produce TWO basic relief printing jobs (if possible, including at least one in-line process) according to manufacturer’s and job specifications and enterprise procedures using either a platen, cylinder or rotary printing machine (jobs should be completed while maintaining product quality standards, and production problems should be rectified with minimum downtime)

correctly shut down machine and clean according to work health and safety (WHS) guidelines

use control, monitoring and data entry systems

manipulate embellishment tools and operations

provide an example of printed material below acceptable standard.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

explain reel or sheet transportation and delivery systems

explain WHS requirements when loading and handling heavy reel sheets fanned before loading into the press

explain web tracking and importance to position and register

describe consequences of not splicing web correctly

list components to be adjusted to ensure correct delivery

explain effect of excessive suction on the slow-down wheels

identify frequency product quality should be assessed

explain causes of a halo effect on the relief print

identify signs of wear in the image area of the plate marking product deemed unacceptable by operator

identify monitoring systems

explain how to maintain ink levels

explain WHS concerns for in-line components of the press

discuss examination frequency of in-line components

list quality control and problem-solving techniques

describe precautions to ensure rewound product is of consistent, acceptable quality

identify quality assurance processes

describe appropriate actions if mild set-off was found on the back of the print

explain who to consult if there are problems with the print that cannot be fixed by the operator

show location of information concerning correct operation of the machine

describe shutdown and wash procedures to clean machinery and equipment

list dangers associated with solvents and solutions used to clean the inking system, plates, cylinders and press

identify procedures for correctly storing plates following printing

list parts of the machine to be thoroughly cleaned following the print run

identify components to be inspected for wear following the print run

explain important records to be kept for repeat prints

identify machine manuals, safety and other documentation relevant to this task, where are they kept and the information contained.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the printing field of work and include access to:

special purpose tools, and materials

platen, cylinder or rotary printing machines.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPPRN313 Set up for basic flexographic printing

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to set up machines for routine flexographic printing.

It applies to individuals who work as print machinists and prepare material, and monitor and run equipment and machinery, and apply solutions to printing difficulties as they arise.

Mounting and proofing plates is covered in ICPPR211 Mount and proof flexographic plates for basic printing.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Printing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Confirm routine job specifications	1.1 Job requirements are read and interpreted from job documentation or production control system 1.2 Set up is carried out correctly in minimum time with minimum wastage 1.3 Availability of all job-related components are checked 1.4 Proofed job is checked for conformance with job specifications
2. Set up delivery systems	2.1 Delivery systems are correctly set up and adjusted according to job specifications 2.2 Substrate is added to and removed from process according to job specifications
3. Select and prepare inks and solvents	3.1 Inks and solvents are selected according to routine job specifications and end-user requirements 3.2 Quality and suitability of inks and solvents are checked and appropriate action taken 3.3 Inks and solvents are prepared according to work health and safety (WHS) requirements, and manufacturer’s/supplier’s instructions with suitable precautions to minimise waste 3.4 Correct colour and weight/volume of ink are mixed and viscosities checked and modified according to press requirements and routine job specifications 3.5 Ink formula and approved colour drawdowns are appropriately recorded 3.6 Inks and solvents are appropriately labelled, handled and stored according to manufacturer’s/supplier’s instructions and relevant hazardous liquids storage regulations
4. Set up machine for basic flexographic printing	4.1 Flexographic plate cylinders are installed and register adjustments centred OR 4.2 Sleeves are installed in press and register adjustments made OR 4.3 Plate mounting sheets are mounted on cylinders in press and register adjustments made 4.4 Plate cylinders are gauged up or pre-set to impression 4.5 Inking system is set up and roller nips/blades are set correctly 4.6 Ink circulation is maintained at correct level and flow for machine requirements 4.7 Viscosities are adjusted according to job specifications 4.8 Air volume and drier temperatures or curing systems are selected to suit inks, substrate, solvents and according to job specifications 4.9 Air volume is adjusted between colours to maximise drying and minimise air overspill
5. Set up in-line units for basic process(es)	5.1 Minor in-line printing/converting/binding units are set up for basic process(es) and adjusted to suit machine requirements and job specifications 5.2 Assistance is given in set-up of major in-line printing/converting/binding units.
6. Conduct print run	6.1 Material to be used for print is organised correctly 6.2 Press is set up and operated according to WHS guidelines 6.3 Print impressions are set to minimum kiss impression 6.4 Web tensions are correctly set at unwind, between stations and rewind 6.5 Print is checked for register 6.6 Drying is checked as sufficient to key ink to the substrate 6.7 Viscosities are adjusted to obtain correct colour at proof speed and checked against colour matching system 6.8 Substrate is checked against job specifications
7. Organise print inspection and/or testing	7.1 Print is visually inspected and/or tested, or laboratory testing is organised according to enterprise procedures 7.2 Production does not commence without client OK where appropriate
8. Readjust settings to production speed	8.1 Production speed print results are interpreted and appropriate adjustments are made to press, ink and substrate settings 8.2 Adjustments are made according to product specifications and press performance 8.3 Web is spliced at production speed and further samples are obtained for quality inspections at appropriate intervals where applicable 8.4 Press setting is documented and samples are retained

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 1.4, 3.1, 3.3, 3.4, 3.6, 4.7, 4.8, 5.1, 6.8, 8.2	Recognises and interprets text to establish job requirements from information contained within relevant procedures and specifications
Writing	3.5, 3.6, 8.4	Enters routine data associated with production processes and enterprise procedures
Oral Communication	1.4, 3.4, 4.7, 4.8, 5.1, 5.2, 6.8, 7.1, 7.2, 8.3	Speaks clearly using appropriate vocabulary, tone and pace to report faults and discrepancies
Numeracy	3.4, 4.6, 4.8, 6.8, 8.1	Interprets and analyses a range of mathematical information used in familiar and routine tasks
Navigate the world of work	1.1, 1.2, 1.4, 3.1-3.6, 4.1-4.8, 5.1, 6.1-6.8, 7.1, 8.1-8.3	Recognises and follows explicit and implicit protocols and meets expectations associated with own role Recognises and follows all procedures for cleaning and maintenance of equipment, incorporating regulatory requirements and enterprise procedures
Interact with others	1.4, 3.4, 4.7, 4.8, 5.1, 5.2, 6.8, 7.1, 7.2, 8.3, 8.4	Cooperates with others as part of familiar routine activities, and contributes to specific activities requiring joint responsibility and accountability Understands what to communicate, with whom and how, in routine work situations
Get the work done	1.1-1.4, 2.1, 2.2, 3.1-3.4, 3.6, 4.1-4.9, 5.1, 5.2, 6.1-6.8, 7.1, 7.2, 8.1-8.4	Determines priorities and sequences steps involved in clearly defined, familiar tasks Recognises and takes responsibility for addressing predictable, and some less predictable, problems in familiar work contexts Follows routine procedures for using digital technology by reading data from electronic monitoring and control systems

Range of Conditions

This section specifies different work environments and conditions that may affect performance. Essential operating conditions that may be present (depending on the work situation, needs of the candidate, accessibility of the item, and local industry and regional contexts) are included.

Delivery systems MUST include EITHER:	reel OR sheet
Setting up and adjusting MUST include EITHER:	checking reels for treatment levels, coatings, printing side and age of product securing reels on reel shaft correctly positioning reels on unwind stand positioning and mounting correctly cut cores on rewind shafts centring and setting edge guide setting unwind and rewind tension to suit substrate setting nip rollers OR feeder sheet pick-up and transportation system transfer system delivery sheet transfer and control system set off / marking prevention devices

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPPRN313 Set up for basic flexographic printing	ICPPR313C Set up for basic flexographic printing product	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRN313 Set up for basic flexographic printing

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

demonstrate all safety devices on the machine

demonstrate use of control, monitoring and data entry systems

set up a press on TWO occasions for basic flexographic printing (if possible including at least ONE in-line process), according to manufacturer’s specifications and enterprise procedures. The individual will also conduct a proof run and adjust settings to ensure production speeds are attained.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

Job requirements

describe what to do if vital information is missing from the job ticket

ensure all required materials are available prior to set up

Flexographic printing plates and cylinders or sleeves OR plate mounting sheets

identify precautions to avoid damaging plates and cylinders

For reel systems only

Reel in-feed

explain work health and safety (WHS) factors to consider when operating the reel in-feed and delivery system

explain how to correctly select printing side of the material

describe the effect of low web tension on the print

name types of web splices that could be used appropriately for the job

Reel delivery system

describe effect of excessive web tension at the rewind of the machine

discuss how to minimise three risks associated with the rewind

For sheet systems only

Sheet in-feed

explain WHS factors to consider when operating the sheet in-feed and delivery system

describe why the sheet is normally set up in the middle of the machine

describe effect side-lay selection has on the job

describe how appropriate front lays should be selected

describe what determines position of the sheet before it is transported to the printing unit

explain how a register check is carried out

discuss why a two-sheet cut is used on most feeders

discuss how the machine recognises if a sheet is missing or late

Sheet delivery system

describe why application of spray powder is sometimes advisable

discuss effects of too much spray powder

show how slowdown devices may be used in delivery

identify effect of excessive jogging on the stack

Selection and preparation of inks and additives

name major environmental and WHS concerns with regard to inks and additives

describe how ink suitability is matched to a particular job

describe implications if ink is too viscose

describe how an ink that is slightly light can be modified to meet the job needs

identify methods to check ink for correct colour

name the person who passes the colour prior to running the job

Machine set-up

discuss all WHS factors to consider when setting up the machine

show how machine specifications are determined, relating to a specific job

discuss steps to ensure the inking system is adjusted correctly

describe why inking system ink level is maintained at a certain level

list necessary precautions when handling doctor/chamber blades

identify optimum make-ready-speed for the job

explain basic in-line processes

list steps to incorporate the in-line processes into the make-ready

describe how equipment used in in-line processing is protected against damage during set-up

list precautions to take if uv drying is utilised to dry the ink film

Proofing and adjustment

identify methods to minimise waste during make-ready

list procedures required to have the print approved

describe quality control measurements to apply to the proof to test against known standards

outline how to check on initial print prior to running

describe how setting adjustments are determined

identify processes to plot success of the machine adjustment

describe how final results are recorded for future reference

Relevant test procedures

identify and describe tests for scuffing and coefficient of friction

show circumstances in which these tests should be applied

Leaching

discuss leaching

Information sources

identify machine manuals, safety and other documentation relevant to this task and where are they kept, and information contained.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the printing field of work and include access to:

special purpose tools, equipment and materials

a range of standard inks and substrates

a variety of stack, in-line and central impression flexographic printing machines.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPPRN314 Produce complex flexographic printed product

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to set up machines for non-routine flexographic printing.

It applies to individuals who work as print machinists who prepare material, and monitor and run equipment and machinery and apply solutions to printing difficulties as they arise.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Printing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Maintain non-routine operation of reel transportation system	1.1 Reel stand is monitored and adjusted to ensure efficient, continuous operation 1.2 Web control system is monitored and adjusted to ensure correct tension and accurate continuous web positioning for efficient operation 1.3 Substrate is added to process according to job instructions
2. Maintain non-routine operation of reel delivery system on web-fed machine	2.1 Reel rewind section is monitored and adjusted to maintain correct tension and avoid marks, blemishes or damage to finished product 2.2 Substrate is removed from process according to non-routine job instructions 2.3 Sheeting section is monitored and adjusted to ensure quality and efficient product delivery 2.4 Set-off / marking prevention system is monitored and adjusted to ensure quality of printed product without set-off or marking meets the approved proof standard
3. Maintain complex flexographic printing process	3.1 Flexographic plate and plate cylinder or sleeve condition is monitored and adjusted to ensure quality of printed product meets the approved proof standard 3.2 Flexographic impression roller condition is monitored to ensure the quality of printed product meets the approved proof standard 3.3 Flexographic inking system and doctor blade condition are monitored and adjusted to ensure quality of printed product meets the approved proof standard 3.4 Drying systems are monitored and adjusted to ensure quality of printed product meets the approved proof standard 3.5 In-line printing/converting/binding/finishing processes are monitored and adjusted to ensure quality of product meets the approved proof standard
4. Maintain non-routine production process	4.1 Production process is operated in association with fellow workers and according to company specifications and planned daily schedule 4.2 Production is maintained within work health and safety (WHS) requirements and company and manufacturer’s specifications 4.3 Automatic control is used as per specification 4.4 Manual control is used as per specification 4.5 Ink performance, colour, register and position of print are monitored and adjusted throughout production run 4.6 Production difficulties are anticipated and preventive action is taken to prevent occurrence by timely intervention 4.7 Process adjustments to eliminate problems are reported according to enterprise procedures 4.8 Faulty performance of equipment is identified and reported according to enterprise procedures 4.9 Waste is sorted according to enterprise procedures
5. Identify and rectify faults	5.1 Problems in flexographic machine are identified and reported according to enterprise procedures 5.2 Adjustments or corrections are carried out according to specified procedures and consistent with operator’s skill level 5.3 Flexographic machine operation is checked to ensure correct operation 5.4 Machine faults requiring repair are identified and reported to designated person according to enterprise procedures
6. Conduct shutdown of production process	6.1 Correct shutdown sequence is followed according to manufacturer’s specifications and enterprise procedures 6.2 Shutdown is conducted in association with fellow workers and in compliance with WHS requirements 6.3 Reels and cores are removed from press 6.4 Unused ink is drained back into containers and correctly labelled and stored according to manufacturer’s/supplier’s specifications and enterprise procedures 6.5 Solid and liquid waste is removed from operating area and recycled or disposed of, where required, according to regulatory requirements and enterprise procedures 6.6 All product is removed from operating area
7. Clean and wash up printing machine at end of print run	7.1 Cylinders or sleeves, plate and roller surfaces are cleaned ready for next run 7.2 Inking rollers and doctor blades or chamber blade systems are cleaned with correct solvents according to WHS guidelines 7.3 Ink pumps, tanks and hoses are cleaned correctly 7.4 Impression rollers/central impression and press rollers are cleaned 7.5 In-line printing/converting/binding/finishing units are cleaned ready for next run 7.6 Reel feed, transportation and delivery systems are disengaged and cleaned ready for next run 7.7 Press is lubricated and protected according to duration of shutdown 7.8 Production records or other documentation are accurately completed where required by enterprise procedures

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.3, 2.2, 4.1-4.4, 5.2, 6.1, 6.4	Recognises and interprets text to establish job requirements from information contained within relevant procedures and specifications
Writing	4.7, 4.8, 5.1, 5.4, 6.4, 7.8	Enters routine data associated with production processes and enterprise procedures
Oral Communication	1.3, 2.2, 4.1-4.4, 4.7, 4.8, 5.1, 5.2, 5.4, 6.1, 6.2	Speaks clearly using appropriate vocabulary, tone and pace to report faults and discrepancies
Numeracy	1.3	Interprets and analyses a range of mathematical information used in familiar and routine tasks
Navigate the world of work	1.1-1.3, 2.1-2.4, 3.1-3.5, 4.1-4.4, 4.7-4.9, 5.1-5.4, 6.1, 6.2, 7.1-7.6, 7.8	Recognises and follows explicit and implicit protocols and meets expectations associated with own role Recognises and follows all procedures for cleaning and maintenance of equipment, incorporating regulatory requirements and enterprise procedures
Interact with others	1.3, 2.2, 4.1-4.4, 4.7, 4.8, 5.1, 5.2, 5.4, 6.1, 6.2	Cooperates with others as part of familiar routine activities, and contributes to specific activities requiring joint responsibility and accountability Understands what to communicate, with whom and how, in routine work situations
Get the work done	1.1-1.3, 2.1-2.4, 3.1-3.5, 4.1-4.6, 4.8, 4.9, 5.1-5.4, 6.1-6.3, 6.6, 7.1-7.7	Determines priorities and sequences steps involved in clearly defined, familiar tasks Recognises and anticipates an increasing range of familiar problems, their symptoms and causes, actively looking for early warning signs and implementing contingency plans Follows routine procedures for using digital technology by reading data from electronic monitoring and control systems

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPPRN314 Produce complex flexographic printed product	ICPPR314C Produce complex flexographic printed product	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRN314 Produce complex flexographic printed product

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

operate a reel-fed flexographic press ensuring an efficient THREE or more colour production flow that maintains product quality standards. Any production problems are anticipated and rectified with minimum downtime. The machine is correctly shut down and cleaned according to work health and safety (WHS) guidelines

demonstrate use of control, monitoring and data entry systems

monitor production output and make necessary adjustments to maintain print quality on a flexographic machine while producing a complex print on TWO occasions (if possible using different substrates, and if possible including at least TWO in-line processes) according to job specifications and enterprise procedures.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

Reel transportation and web control

explain what causes the reel to wander

explain what causes web to break at the unwind unit

describe the difference between a ‘flying paster’ and ‘zero speed’ type reel-stand

explain what print fault results from the reel being run out of centre

identify possible faults in the unwind section that could cause a web break

Reel delivery for rewinding and sheeting

identify WHS risks associated with rewinding and sheeting

identify the safety feature in the delivery system that helps if the web jams up

explain why the sheet cut-off might wander

describe the effect of poorly adjusted nip rollers when rewinding and sheeting

Printing and drying units

explain what happens if the plate lifts on the leading edge during a print run

explain how a build-up of ink on the impression cylinder affects the printed product

explain what causes ink to foam in the ink tray

explain the effect of too much reducer in the ink

list actions that reduce wear of the doctor blade

explain why it is necessary that all solvents be removed from the final ink film

describe the link between driers and set off and marking

explain what causes UV ink to dry

explain what causes substrate to distort

list the effect in the chillers if the drying temperature was too low

explain the effect of incorrect drying temperature on the finished product

discuss why it is advisable not to eat or drink near the machine when using UV inks

In-line processes

explain why it is necessary to frequently examine in-line components of the job

describe how consistency of the punching unit is checked

explain the outcome of excessive pressure on the slitters

Maintaining production process

describe safety features within the organisation that aid in maintaining effective production

identify who is legally responsible if removal of machine guards and/or disconnection of micro switches occurs

describe the effect of inadequate communication within the work team

explain ramifications if machine guards are removed and/or micro switches are disconnected on a machine

explain what other measurements besides optimum solid ink density can be measured to assess print quality

determine the accurate method of checking register during a production run

describe why it is necessary to take immediate action when anticipating production problems

explain actions to eliminate further processing of unacceptable printed product

determine result to the substrate if relative humidity is increased in the press room

explain the procedure to care for a newly delivered substrate to the press room

describe why waste should be sorted and the advantage of keeping reusable waste

Client liaison

identify what industry standards that can be applied to enhance client communication

describe necessary procedures clients should follow to OK a printed product

Flexographic machine operating problems

explain when it is necessary to call service personnel to correct a machine problem

describe enterprise procedures in place to report any machine operating problems

Shutdown procedures

explain what happens if correct shutdown procedures are not followed

explain why it is necessary that correct shutdown procedures are conducted with fellow workers

list advantages of proper labelling and storage of excess inks and materials

identify why printed product needs to be clearly labelled prior to removal from the press room

determine what further operations are required for printed reels once they are removed from the printing machine

explain how the printed job should be stored after removal from the printing machine

detail cleaning and washing the printing unit

explain what WHS concerns should be observed when handling ink

identify safety precautions for cleaning the printing cylinders

explain why it is necessary to thoroughly clean and wash the printing unit prior to the next print run

explain why anilox cells should be thoroughly cleaned

describe how plates can be stored to minimise damage

Cleaning feed, transportation, delivery and in-line sections

explain work health and safety (WHS) precautions for cleaning these sections of the machine

explain why it is necessary to maintain a clean substrate handling section of the machine

Completing production records

identify what completed records are used in the final analysis of the job

explain benefits of comprehensive records when considering production of future jobs

identify machine manuals, safety and other documentation relevant to this task, where are they kept and information contained.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the printing field of work and include access to:

special purpose tools, equipment and materials

a range of standard inks and substrates

a variety of stack, in-line and central impression flexographic printing machines.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPPRN321 Set up for basic gravure printing

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to set up routine gravure printing for routine print jobs.

It applies to individuals who prepare material, and monitor and run equipment and machinery, and apply solutions to a defined range of unpredictable problems. Individuals may also provide leadership and guidance to members of their team.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Printing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Confirm routine job specifications	1.1 Job requirements are read and interpreted from job documentation or production control system 1.2 Set up is carried out correctly in minimum time with minimum wastage 1.3 Availability of all job related components is checked
2. Set up reels	2.1 Unwind and rewind reels are set up and adjusted according to job specifications 2.2 Webbing procedures are carried out according to job specifications 2.3 Web-control system is set up and adjusted according to job specifications 2.4 Reels are spliced/joined according to job specifications 2.5 Printed web viewing devices are set up and adjusted according to job specifications 2.6 Folder and sheeter are set up and adjusted according to job specifications 2.7 Set off / marking prevention devices are set up and adjusted according to job specifications
3. Select and prepare inks and additives (basic)	3.1 Inks, dyes or additives are selected according to job specifications and end-user requirements 3.2 Quality and suitability of inks, dyes or additives are checked and appropriate action is taken 3.3 Inks, dyes and additives are prepared according to work health and safety (WHS) requirements, and manufacturer’s/supplier’s instructions with suitable precautions to minimise waste 3.4 Correct colour and weight/volume of ink are mixed and prepared to match requirements of the printing process and job specifications 3.5 Formulation of ink, colour match and approved colour are appropriately recorded 3.6 Inks, dyes and additives are appropriately labelled, handled and stored according to manufacturer’s/ supplier’s instructions to prevent damage and hazards to personnel and to prolong shelf life
4. Set up machine for basic gravure printing	4.1 Gravure cylinders are selected, installed, set up and adjusted according to job specifications 4.2 Impression roller is set up and adjusted according to job specifications 4.3 Inking system / doctor blade is set up and adjusted according to the gravure process and job specifications 4.4 Drying system is set up and adjusted according to job specifications
5. Conduct proof run	5.1 Material to be used for proof is organised correctly 5.2 Machine is operated according to manufacturer’s and enterprise procedures to produce a specified proof 5.3 Proof is visually inspected and/or tested or laboratory testing is organised according to enterprise procedures 5.4 Production does not commence without client OK or authority where appropriate 5.5 If necessary, results are interpreted and adjustments made according to product and machine specifications

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 2.1-2.7, 3.1, 3.3, 3.4, 3.6, 4.1-4.4, 5.5	Recognises and interprets text to establish job requirements from information contained within relevant procedures and specifications
Writing	3.5, 5.4	Enters routine data associated with production processes and enterprise procedures
Oral Communication	2.1-2.7, 3.1, 3.3, 3.4, 3.6, 4.1-4.4, 5.3-5.5	Participates effectively in spoken interactions by using strategies to confirm, clarify or repair understanding
Numeracy	3.4	Interprets and analyses a range of mathematical information used in familiar and routine tasks
Navigate the world of work	1.1, 1.2, 2.1-2.7, 3.1-3.4, 3.6, 4.1-4.4, 5.2-5.5	Recognises and follows explicit and implicit protocols and meets expectations associated with own role Complies with WHS, legislative requirements and follows organisational policies and procedures relevant to own role
Interact with others	2.1-2.7, 3.1, 3.3, 3.4, 3.6, 4.1-4.4, 5.3-5.5	Cooperates with others as part of familiar routine activities, and contributes to specific activities requiring joint responsibility and accountability Understands what to communicate, with whom and how, in routine work situations
Get the work done	1.2, 1.3, 2.1-2.7, 3.1-3.4, 3.6, 4.1-4.4, 5.1, 5.2, 5.5	Takes responsibility for planning and organising own workload, identifying ways of sequencing and combining elements for greater efficiency Plans, identifies and assembles resources required to complete tasks Responds to predictable problems and implements standard or logical solutions Follows routine procedures for using digital technology by reading data from electronic monitoring and control systems

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPPRN321 Set up for basic gravure printing	ICPPR321C Set up for basic gravure printing	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRN321 Set up for basic gravure printing

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

correctly demonstrate all safety devices on the machine

set up a press on TWO occasions for basic gravure printing (if possible including at least one in-line process) according to manufacturer’s specifications and enterprise procedures, conduct a proof run and adjust settings to ensure production speeds are attained.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

Job requirements

describe what to do if vital information is missing from the job ticket

explain materials required prior to set up

Cylinders

identify correct cylinders for each job

identify important considerations when handling gravure cylinders

describe what parts of the unit to check to ensure cylinder is installed correctly

Reel in-feed on the machine

list work health and safety (WHS) considerations of operating reel in-feed and delivery systems

identify how the material printing side is selected

describe the effect of low web tension on the print

identify other types of web-splices that could be used for the job

Delivery system on the machine

list risks linked with the rewind of the machine

explain the effect of excessive web tension at the rewind of the machine

Selection and preparation of inks and additives

explain environmental and WHS risks related to inks and additives

describe how ink suitability is matched to a particular job

describe what happens if the ink is too viscose

explain how an ink that is slightly light can be modified to meet the needs of the job

identify available methods to check for correct ink colour

identify who passes the colour prior to running the job

Machine set-up

identify necessary precautions when handling doctor blades

explain how machine specifications are determined for each individual job

list steps to ensure ink levels in the inking system are maintained at an appropriate level

outline how to determine if the inking system has been adjusted appropriately

Basic in-line processes

list steps to incorporate in-line process into the make ready

explain how equipment used in in-line processing is protected against damage during set-up

Proofing and adjustment

explain procedures to have the print approved

describe quality control measurements to apply to the proof to test against known standards

identify what to check on the initial print prior to running

explain how to determine settings adjustments

describe what process is used to plot success of the machine adjustment

outline how final results are recorded for future reference

Information sources

identify what machine manuals, safety and other documentation are relevant to this task and where they are kept.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the printing field of work and include access to:

special purpose tools, equipment and materials

a gravure printing machine with in line units.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPPRN322 Produce complex gravure printed product

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to produce non-routine gravure printed product.

It applies to individuals who operate a gravure press and maintain product quality standards. Individuals may also provide leadership and guidance to members of their team.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Printing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Maintain non-routine operation of reel transportation system	1.1 Reel stand is monitored and adjusted to ensure efficient continuous operation 1.2 Web control system is monitored and adjusted to ensure correct tension and accurate continuous positioning of web for efficient operation 1.3 Substrate is added to process according to job instructions
2. Maintain non-routine operation of reel delivery system	2.1 Reel rewind section is monitored and adjusted to maintain correct tension and to avoid marks, blemishes or damage to finished product 2.2 Substrate is removed from process according to job instructions 2.3 Sheeting section is monitored and adjusted to ensure quality and efficient product delivery 2.4 Set-off / marking prevention system is monitored and adjusted to ensure quality of printed product without set-off or marking meets the approved proof standard
3. Maintain complex gravure printing process	3.1 Gravure cylinder condition is monitored and adjusted to ensure quality of printed product meets the sample sheet standard 3.2 Gravure impression roller condition is monitored and maintained to ensure quality of printed product meets the sample sheet standard 3.3 Gravure inking system and doctor blade are monitored and adjusted to ensure quality of printed product meets the sample sheet standard 3.4 Drying systems are monitored and adjusted to ensure quality of printed product meets the approved proof standard
4. Maintain operation of in-line processes	4.1 In-line printing/converting/binding/finishing processes are monitored 4.2 In-line printing/converting/binding/finishing process are adjusted to ensure quality of product meets the approved proof standard
5. Maintain non-routine production process	5.1 Production process is operated in association with fellow workers and according to company specifications and planned daily schedule 5.2 Production is maintained within work health and safety (WHS) requirements and company and manufacturer’s specifications 5.3 Manual and/or automatic control is used as per specification 5.4 Performance is monitored and verified using the process control system according to enterprise procedures 5.5 Ink performance, colour, register and position of print are monitored and adjusted throughout production run 5.6 Production difficulties are anticipated and preventive action is taken to prevent occurrence by timely intervention 5.7 Process adjustments to eliminate problems are reported according to enterprise procedures 5.8 Waste is sorted according to enterprise procedures
6. Identify and rectify faults	6.1 Problems in gravure machine are identified and reported according to enterprise procedures 6.2 Adjustments or corrections are carried out according to specified procedures and consistent with operator’s skill level 6.3 Gravure machine operation is checked to ensure correct operation 6.4 Faulty performance of equipment is identified and reported according to enterprise procedures
7. Conduct shutdown of production process	7.1 Correct shutdown sequence is followed according to manufacturer’s specifications and enterprise procedures 7.2 Shutdown is conducted in association with fellow workers and in compliance with WHS requirements 7.3 Unused ink is correctly labelled and stored according to manufacturer/supplier specifications and enterprise procedures 7.4 Solid and liquid waste is removed from operating area and recycled or disposed of, where required, according to regulatory requirements and enterprise procedures 7.5 All product is removed from operating area 7.6 Machine faults requiring repair are identified and reported to designated person according to enterprise procedures 7.7 Repair/adjustment is verified prior to resumption of operations
8. Clean and wash up printing machine at end of print run	8.1 Cylinders, plate and roller surfaces are cleaned ready for next run 8.2 Inking system is washed ready for next run, and liquid waste is disposed of according to company and regulatory requirements 8.3 In-line printing/converting/binding/finishing units are cleaned ready for next run 8.4 Reel feed, transportation and delivery systems are disengaged and cleaned ready for next run 8.5 Sheet feed, transport and delivery systems are disengaged and cleaned ready for next run 8.6 Production records or other documentation are accurately completed where required by enterprise procedures

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.3, 2.2, 5.1-5.3, 6.2, 7.1, 7.3	Recognises and interprets text to establish job requirements from information contained within relevant procedures and specifications
Writing	5.7, 6.1, 6.4, 7.3, 7.6, 8.6	Enters routine data associated with production processes and enterprise procedures
Oral Communication	1.3, 2.2, 5.1, 5.2, 5.7, 6.1, 6.2, 6.4, 7.1-7.3, 7.6	Speaks clearly using appropriate vocabulary, tone and pace to report faults and discrepancies
Numeracy	1.3	Interprets and analyses a range of mathematical information used in familiar and routine tasks
Navigate the world of work	1.1-1.3, 2.1-2.4, 3.1-3.4, 4.2, 5.1-5.4, 5.7, 5.8, 6.1-6.4, 7.1-7.4, 7.6, 8.1-8.6	Recognises and follows explicit and implicit protocols and meets expectations associated with own role Recognises and follows all procedures for cleaning and maintenance of equipment, incorporating regulatory requirements and enterprise procedures
Interact with others	1.3, 2.2, 5.1-5.3, 5.7, 6.1, 6.2, 6.4, 7.1-7.3, 7.6	Cooperates with others as part of familiar routine activities, and contributes to specific activities requiring joint responsibility and accountability Understands what to communicate, with whom and how, in routine work situations
Get the work done	1.1-1.3, 2.1-2.4, 3.1-3.4, 4.1, 4.2, 5.1-5.8, 6.1-6.4, 7.1-7.7, 8.1-8.6	Determines priorities and sequences steps involved in clearly defined, familiar tasks Recognises and anticipates an increasing range of familiar problems, their symptoms and causes, actively looking for early warning signs and implementing contingency plans Follows routine procedures for using digital technology by reading data from electronic monitoring and control systems

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPPRN322 Produce complex gravure printed product	ICPPR322C Produce complex gravure printed product	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRN322 Produce complex gravure printed product

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

operate a gravure press ensuring an efficient non-routine production flow that maintains product quality standards; any production problems are rectified with minimum downtime; and the machine is correctly shut down and cleaned according to work health and safety (WHS) guidelines

monitor production output and make necessary adjustments to maintain print quality on a gravure machine while producing a complex print on TWO occasions (if possible using different substrates and, if possible, including at least two in-line processes) according to job specifications and enterprise procedures.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

Reel transportation and web control

identify what can cause the reel to wander

describe what can cause the web to break at the unwind unit

outline the difference between a "flying paster" and "zero speed" type reel-stand

discuss what print fault results from the reel being run out of centre

describe types of faults in the unwind section which can cause a web break

Reel delivery for rewinding and sheeting

discuss WHS risks associated with rewinding and sheeting

describe the safety feature in the delivery system for when the web jams

discuss the cause of sheet cut-off wander

outline effects of poorly adjusted nip rollers when rewinding and sheeting

Printing and drying unit

discuss how a build-up of ink on the impression cylinder can affect printed product

outline the cause of ink foaming in the ink tray

describe the effect of too much reducer in the ink

identify how to reduce doctor blade wear

describe why it is necessary to remove all solvents from the final ink film

discuss the link between driers and set-off and marking

identify what causes the substrate to distort

discuss what happens in the chillers if the drying temperature is too low

outline the effect of incorrect drying temperature on finished product

In-line processes

discuss why it is necessary to frequently examine in-line components of the job

outline how consistency of the punching unit is checked

describe the impact of excessive pressure on the slitters

discuss the benefit of identification numbers on jobs with multiple similar images

describe how the ratio of print to in-line speed is controlled

Maintaining production process

discuss possible effects of inadequate communication within the work team on a gravure printing machine

describe safety features within the organisation which aid in maintaining effective production

identify ramifications if machine guards are removed and/or micro switches are disconnected on a machine

name the person held legally responsible for the removal of machine guards and/or disconnection of micro switches

discuss the most accurate method of checking register during a production run

outline why it is necessary to take immediate action when production problems are anticipated

describe what to do to eliminate further processing of unacceptable printed product

discuss what happens to the substrate if the relative humidity increases in the press room

outline the correct procedure to care for a newly delivered substrate to the press room

discuss why waste should be sorted

describe advantages of keeping reusable waste

outline industry standards to enhance effective communication with clients

discuss procedures a client should follow to OK a printed product

Gravure machine operating problems

describe when it is necessary to call service personnel to correct a machine problem

identify enterprise procedures to report machine operating problems

Shutdown procedures

discuss what happens if correct shutdown procedures are not followed

describe why it is necessary that correct shutdown procedures are conducted with fellow workers

outline advantages of proper labelling and storage of excess inks and materials

discuss why printed product should be clearly labelled prior to removal from the press room

outline further operations required for printed reels after removal from the printing machine

describe how printed jobs should be stored after removal from the printing machine

Cleaning and washing the printing unit

list WHS concerns of handling ink

outline safety precautions for cleaning the printing cylinders

discuss why it is necessary to thoroughly clean and wash the printing unit prior to the next print run

describe why the doctor blades should be thoroughly cleaned

explain why doctor blades should be handled with extreme care

describe how to store printing cylinders to minimise damage

Cleaning feed, transportation, delivery and in-line sections

list WHS precautions for cleaning these sections of the machine

discuss why it is necessary to maintain a clean substrate handling section of the machine

Completing production records

outline how completed records are used in the final analysis of the job

describe benefits of comprehensive records when considering production of future jobs

identify what machine manuals, safety and other documentation are relevant to this task, where they are they kept and describe the information contained.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the printing field of work and include access to:

special purpose tools, equipment and materials

gravure printing machines and in-line units.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPPRN331 Set up for basic lithographic printing

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to set up basic lithographic printing sheet-fed and web-fed machines, including small offset for routine print jobs.

It applies to individuals working under direct supervision who prepare material, monitor and run equipment and machinery, and maintain the production process.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Printing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Confirm job specifications	1.1 Job requirements are read and interpreted from job documentation or production control system 1.2 Standard set-up is carried out correctly in minimum time with minimum wastage 1.3 Availability of all job-related components are checked
2. Set up delivery systems	2.1 Delivery systems are set up and adjusted according to job specifications 2.2 Substrate is added to and removed from the process according to job specifications
3. Select and prepare inks and additives (basic)	3.1 Inks, dyes or additives are checked and appropriate action is taken for end-user requirements 3.2 Quality and suitability of inks, dyes or additives are selected according to job specifications and end-user requirements 3.3 Inks, dyes and additives are prepared according to work health and safety (WHS) requirements, and manufacturer’s/supplier’s instructions with suitable precautions taken to minimise waste 3.4 Correct colour and weight/volume of ink are mixed and prepared to match requirements of the printing process and job specifications 3.5 Formulation of ink, colour match and approved colour are appropriately recorded 3.6 Inks, dyes and additives are appropriately labelled, handled and stored according to manufacturer’s/supplier’s instructions to prevent damage and hazards to personnel and prolong shelf life
4. Set up machine for basic offset lithographic printing	4.1 Plate cylinder is set up and adjusted and lithographic plates are selected and installed according to job specifications 4.2 Blanket and blanket cylinder are set up and adjusted according to job specifications 4.3 Impression cylinder is set up and adjusted according to job specifications 4.4 Inking system is set up and adjusted according to the lithographic process and job specifications 4.5 Dampening system is set up and adjusted according to job specifications
5. Conduct ok print run	5.1 Material to be used for proof ok sheet/section is organised correctly 5.2 Machine is operated according to manufacturer’s and enterprise procedures to produce a specified proof ok/section 5.3 Ok/section is visually inspected and/or tested or laboratory testing organised according to enterprise procedures 5.4 Production does not commence without client OK or authority where appropriate 5.5 If necessary, results are interpreted and adjustment are carried out according to product and machine specifications

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 3.1, 3.3, 3.4, 3.6, 4.1-4.5, 5.5	Recognises and interprets text to establish job requirements from information contained within relevant procedures and specifications
Writing	3.5, 5.4	Enters routine data associated with production processes and enterprise procedures
Oral Communication	4.1-4.5, 5.3-5.5	Participates effectively in spoken interactions by using strategies to confirm, clarify or repair understanding
Numeracy	3.4	Interprets and analyses a range of mathematical information used in familiar and routine tasks
Navigate the world of work	1.1, 1.2, 3.1-3.4, 3.6, 4.1-4.5, 5.2-5.5	Recognises and follows explicit and implicit protocols and meets expectations associated with own role Complies with WHS, legislative requirements and follows organisational policies and procedures relevant to own role
Interact with others	3.1, 3.3, 3.4, 3.6, 4.1-4.5, 5.3-5.5	Cooperates with others as part of familiar routine activities, and contributes to specific activities requiring joint responsibility and accountability Understands what to communicate, with whom and how, in routine work situations
Get the work done	1.2, 1.3, 3.1-3.4, 3.6, 4.1-4.5, 5.1, 5.2, 5.5	Takes responsibility for planning and organising own workload, identifying ways of sequencing and combining elements for greater efficiency Plans, identifies and assembles resources required to complete tasks Responds to predictable problems and implements standard or logical solutions Follows routine procedures for using digital technology by reading data from electronic monitoring and control systems

Range of Conditions

This section specifies different work environments and conditions that may affect performance. Essential operating conditions that may be present (depending on the work situation, needs of the candidate, accessibility of the item, and local industry and regional contexts) are included.

Delivery systems MUST include EITHER:	reel OR sheet
Setting up and adjusting MUST include EITHER:	unwind and rewind reels webbing procedures and web control systems splicing reels folder and sheeter OR feeder and delivery registration systems sheet pick-up and transportation, control and transfer systems

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPPRN331 Set up for basic lithographic printing	ICPPR331C Set up for basic lithographic printing	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRN331 Set up for basic lithographic printing

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

demonstrate use of control, monitoring and data entry systems

demonstrate all safety devices on the machine

set up for TWO basic lithographic printing jobs using either a wide or narrow reel or sheet-fed lithographic machine according to manufacturer’s specifications and enterprise procedures and conduct a proof run and adjust settings to ensure production speeds are attained.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

Interpreting job specifications

explain what to do if vital information is missing from the job ticket

explain checks to be done prior to set-up e.g. availability of materials

Preparing and fitting plates

list problems that can result if the cylinder is not cleaned prior to plate fitting

explain how the grip edge of the plate is identified

describe the effect of over packing the printing plate cylinder

discuss how pitch lines can be used to assist in plate installation

name tools or actions likely to damage the plate

explain why plates should be consistently tensioned

For reel systems only

Reel in-feed

identify work health and safety (WHS) precautions for webbing up the machine

discuss how to determine the printing side of the material

explain the effect of low web tension on the print

explain the purpose of nip rollers

identify types of web splices appropriate for the job

Reel delivery system

describe the effect of excessive web tension at the rewind of the machine

list risks associated with the rewind of the machine

For sheet systems only

Sheet in-feed and transfer

identify WHS factors to be considered when setting up sheet in-feed and transfer systems

explain why the sheet is normally set up in the middle of the machine

describe the effect of side lay selection on the job

explain how to determine the position of the sheet before it is transported to the printing unit

outline how a register check is carried out

describe why a two-sheet cut is used on most feeders

explain how the machine knows if a sheet is missing or late

explain why the application of spray powder is sometimes advisable

explain the effects of too much spray powder

explain why slowdown devices might be used in delivery

outline the effect of excessive jogging on the stack

Preparation of inks and additives

identify all WHS and environmental concerns associated with inks and additives

explain what details to check for suitability of an ink for a job

describe how to modify ink that is slightly light

outline methods available to check ink for correct colour

identify who passes the colour prior to running the job

Machine set-up

list all work health and safety (WHS) factors to consider when setting up the machine

explain how cylinder (plate, blanket and impression) specifications are determined for the specific job

explain effects an incorrectly set dampening system may have on the job

explain why ink profile varies across the machine

explain what optimum ink duct sweep is

Basic in-line processes

explain the correct machine position to engage in-line processing units

list essential precautions required when setting up in-line processing units

outline necessary precautions if UV drying is utilised to dry the ink film

Proofing and adjustment

identify methods to minimise waste during make ready

describe what to check on the initial print prior to running

explain how the machine is proof tested

outline ideal conditions for inspecting the proof

describe methods to check and adjust ink colour and consistency

identify adjustments that may cause mis-register

list adjustments to position the image laterally

identify adjustments to position the image circumferentially

identify who has the final say in the approval of the job

Information sources

identify machine manuals, safety and other documentation relevant to this task, where are they kept and the information contained.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the printing field of work and include access to:

special purpose tools, equipment and materials

lithographic machine.

Assessment processes and techniques must be able to be modified for distance-based learners and be culturally appropriate and suitable to the communication skill level, language, literacy and numeracy capacity of the candidate and the work being performed.

Additional support may be needed for the Indigenous community and others from a non-English speaking background.

Where applicable, physical resources should include equipment modified for people with special needs as well as assistance to support their participation in the assessment process.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPPRN332 Produce complex lithographic printed product

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to produce complex lithographic printed product, ensuring an efficient non-routine production flow that maintains product quality standards.

It applies to individuals who work under direct supervision and have some responsibility in ensuring production process is maintained by anticipating production problems and monitoring equipment and machinery.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Printing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Maintain non-routine operation of delivery system	1.1 Delivery systems are monitored and adjusted to ensure efficient and continuous operation and ensure no damage to finished product 1.2 Substrate is added to and removed from process according to job specifications
2. Maintain complex lithographic printing process	2.1 Non-routine lithographic plate and plate cylinder condition are monitored and adjusted to ensure quality of printed product meets the sample sheet standard 2.2 Non-routine lithographic blanket and blanket cylinder condition are monitored and adjusted to ensure quality of printed product meets the sample sheet standard 2.3 Non-routine lithographic impression cylinder condition is monitored and adjusted to ensure quality of printed product meets the sample sheet standard 2.4 Non-routine lithographic inking system is checked and maintained to ensure quality of printed product meets the sample sheet standard 2.5 Non-routine lithographic dampening system condition is monitored and adjusted to ensure quality of printed product meets the sample sheet standard 2.6 Set off / marking prevention and drying system is monitored and adjusted to ensure quality of printed product meets the sample sheet standard 2.7 Drying systems are monitored and adjusted to ensure quality of printed product meets the approved proof standard
3. Maintain production process	3.1 Production process is operated in association with fellow workers and according to company specifications and planned daily schedule 3.2 Production is maintained within work health and safety (WHS) requirements and company and manufacturer’s specifications 3.3 Manual and/or automatic control is used as per specification 3.4 Performance is monitored and verified using the process control system according to enterprise procedures 3.5 Ink performance, colour, register and position of print are monitored and adjusted throughout production run 3.6 Production difficulties are anticipated and preventive action is taken to prevent occurrence by timely intervention 3.7 Process adjustments to eliminate problems are reported according to enterprise procedures 3.8 Faulty performance of equipment is identified and reported according to enterprise procedures 3.9 Waste is sorted according to enterprise procedures
4. Identify and investigate lithographic machine operating problem	4.1 Problem in lithographic machine operation is investigated 4.2 Problem in lithographic machine is identified and reported according to enterprise procedures
5. Rectify minor lithographic machine faults	5.1 Adjustments or corrections are carried out according to specified procedures and consistent with operator’s skill level 5.2 Lithographic machine operation is checked to ensure correct operation
6. Conduct shutdown of production process	6.1 Correct shutdown sequence is followed according to manufacturer’s specifications and enterprise procedures 6.2 Shutdown is conducted in association with fellow workers and in compliance with WHS requirements 6.3 Unused ink is correctly labelled and stored according to manufacturer’s/supplier’s specifications and enterprise procedures 6.4 Solid and liquid waste is removed from operating area and recycled or disposed of, where required, according to regulatory requirements and enterprise procedures 6.5 All product is removed from operating area 6.6 Machine faults requiring repair are identified and reported to designated person according to enterprise procedures 6.7 Repair/adjustment is verified prior to resumption of operations
7. Clean and wash up printing machine at end of print run	7.1 Cylinders, plate and roller surfaces are cleaned ready for next run 7.2 Inking system and dampening system are washed ready for next run, and liquid waste is disposed of according to company and regulatory requirements 7.3 In-line printing/converting/binding/finishing units are cleaned ready for next run 7.4 Transportation and delivery systems are disengaged and cleaned ready for next run
8. Complete records	8.1 Production records or other documentation are accurately completed where required by enterprise procedures

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	3.1-3.4, 6.1, 6.3	Recognises and interprets text to establish job requirements from information contained within relevant procedures and specifications
Writing	3.7, 3.8, 4.2, 6.3, 6.6, 6.7, 8.1	Enters routine data associated with production processes and enterprise procedures
Oral Communication	3.1-3.3, 3.7, 3.8, 4.2, 6.1-6.3, 6.6, 6.7	Speaks clearly using appropriate vocabulary, tone and pace to report faults and discrepancies
Numeracy	1.2	Interprets and analyses a range of mathematical information that is used in familiar and routine tasks
Navigate the world of work	1.1, 1.2, 2.1-2.7, 3.1-3.5, 3.7-3.9, 4.1, 4.2, 5.1, 5.2, 6.1-6.4, 6.6, 7.1-7.5, 8.1	Recognises and follows explicit and implicit protocols and meets expectations associated with own role Recognises and follows all procedures for cleaning and maintenance of equipment, incorporating regulatory requirements and enterprise procedures
Interact with others	3.1-3.3, 3.7, 3.8, 4.2, 6.1-6.3, 6.6, 6.7	Cooperates with others as part of familiar routine activities, and contributes to specific activities requiring joint responsibility and accountability Understands what to communicate, with whom and how, in routine work situations
Get the work done	1.1, 1.2, 2.1-2.7, 3.1-3.9, 4.1, 4.2, 5.1, 5.2, 6.1-6.7, 7.1-7.5	Determines priorities and sequences steps involved in clearly defined, familiar tasks Recognises and anticipates an increasing range of familiar problems, their symptoms and causes, actively looking for early warning signs and implementing contingency plans Follows routine procedures for using digital technology by reading data from electronic monitoring and control systems

Range of Conditions

This section specifies different work environments and conditions that may affect performance. Essential operating conditions that may be present (depending on the work situation, needs of the candidate, accessibility of the item, and local industry and regional contexts) are included.

Delivery systems MUST include EITHER:	reel OR sheet
Monitoring and adjusting MUST include EITHER:	reel stand and rewind sections web control system sheeting section set off / marking prevention systems OR feeder and delivery systems sheet pick-up and transportation system transfer systems set/ off/marking prevention system

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPPRN332 Produce complex lithographic printed product	ICPPR332C Produce complex lithographic printed product	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRN332 Produce complex lithographic printed product

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

operate a lithographic press ensuring an efficient non-routine production flow that maintains product quality standards; production problems are anticipated and rectified with minimum downtime; and the machine is correctly shut down and cleaned according to work health and safety (WHS) guidelines

demonstrate use of control, monitoring and data entry systems

monitor production output and make necessary adjustments to maintain print quality on a lithographic machine while producing a complex print on TWO occasions (if possible using different types and sizes of substrates and, if possible, including at least two in-line processes) according to job specifications and enterprise procedures.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

For reel systems only

Reel transportation and web control

explain WHS requirements for operating the reel transportation system

explain what can cause the reel to wander

describe what can cause the web to break at the unwind unit

explain the difference between a "flying paster" and "zero speed" type reel-stand

identify the print fault that results from the reel being run out of centre

list faults in the unwind section that can cause a web break

Reel delivery for rewinding and sheeting

explain WHS risks associated with rewinding

identify what safety feature is in the delivery system for when the web jams

explain why the sheet cut-off wanders

describe the effect of poorly adjusted nip rollers when rewinding and sheeting

outline further operations required for printed reels after removal from the printing machine

explain how to store the printed job after removal from the printing machine

explain why it is necessary to label each printed reel

For Sheet Systems Only

Sheet transportation and transfer system

explain WHS requirements associated with operating the sheet transportation system

explain the result of worn suckers at the feeder suction head

identify the type of two sheet detection on this machine

discuss how much movement the sheet should have when being registered by the side lay

explain possible causes of mis-register of the sheet at the feeder

explain visible signs of the sheet being registered in the feeder

explain how gripper malfunction can affect sheet control and transfer

explain when to adjust sheet transfer mechanisms

list causes of the feeder stack becoming uneven

explain what happens if the feeder stack is not loaded levelly

explain how unevenness of the feeder stack can be rectified

In-line processes

explain how consistency of the punching unit is checked

describe the outcome of excessive pressure on the slitters

describe the outcome of a dirty former

describe the outcome of defective pins in the folder

describe the outcome of adjusting rollers at the base of the former

list causes of the web jamming up in the folder

Sheet delivery

explain WHS risks associated with sheeting

describe the effect machine speed has on sheet delivery

explain advantages of spraying moving sheets with anti-set-off powder in the delivery

name items in the delivery that can mark the printed image

outline remedial steps that may be necessary to eliminate marking on the printed image

explain the function of a sheet decurler fitted to the delivery of some machines

list faults that can result from incorrectly set grippers in the transfer section of a machine

describe how the printed job should be stored after removal from the printing machine

Printing unit

explain the result if the plate develops a crack at the grip edge during a print run

explain the effect of a sticky blanket surface

list print faults that result from the blanket not being tensioned correctly

outline causes of blanket packing-creep during printing

explain how a build-up of ink on the impression cylinder can affect the printed product

describe the cause of ink lying back in the duct

list causes of ink stripping on the inking rollers

explain print faults that result from excessive use of fountain solution on the plate

describe the recommended pH range for fountain solutions

list causes of conductivity of the fountain solution changing over an eight-hour shift

outline problems caused by excessive conductivity of the fountain solutions

Drying unit

explain the link between driers and set-off and marking

identify what causes UV ink to dry

identify what causes the substrate to blister

describe what happens in the chillers if the drying temperature was too low

outline the effect of incorrect drying temperature on the finished product

Maintaining production process

explain the effect of inadequate communication within the work team

identify safety features within the organisation that help maintain effective production

explain ramifications of machine guards being removed and/or micro switches being disconnected on a machine

identify who is held legally responsible for the removal of machine guards and/or disconnection of micro switches

explain disadvantages of using a closed looped system for automatic control of the printed product

describe what other measurements besides optimum solid ink density can be measured to assess print quality

outline the most accurate method of checking register during a production run

explain why it is important to take immediate action when production problems are anticipated

explain what action is taken to eliminate further processing of unacceptable printed product

outline the effect of increases in relative humidity in the press room

explain the procedure to care for a newly delivered skid of paper to the press room

explain why waste should be sorted and the advantages of keeping reusable waste

explain industry standards to enhance effective communication with the client

discuss necessary procedures the client should follow to OK a printed product

Lithographic machine operating problems

explain when it is necessary to call service personnel to correct a machine problem

identify enterprise procedures in place to report any machine operating problems

Shutdown procedures

list advantages of proper labelling and storage of excess inks and materials

explain why printed product must be clearly labelled prior to removal from the press room

Cleaning and washing the printing unit

explain work health and safety (WHS) requirements for handling ink

explain safety precautions for cleaning the printing cylinders

describe the washing procedure for offset rubber blanket

determine how plates can be stored to minimise damage

Cleaning feed, transportation, delivery and in line sections

explain WHS precautions for cleaning these sections of the machine

Completing production records

explain how completed records are used in the final analysis of the job

outline benefits of comprehensive records when considering the production of future jobs

Information sources

identify machine manuals, safety and other documentation relevant to this task, where they are kept and the information contained.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the printing field of work and include access to:

special purpose tools, equipment and materials

lithographic printing machine.

Assessment processes and techniques must be able to be modified for distance-based learners and be culturally appropriate and suitable to the communication skill level, language, literacy and numeracy capacity of the candidate and the work being performed.

Additional support may be needed for the Indigenous community and others from a non-English speaking background.

Where applicable, physical resources should include equipment modified for people with special needs as well as assistance to support their participation in the assessment process.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPPRN341 Set up for basic pad printing

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to set up basic pad printing for routine print jobs and includes setting up and adjusting manual pre- and post-treatment processes and conducting a proof.

It applies to individuals who work under direct supervision, and have responsibility to prepare materials and monitor and run equipment and machinery to ensure the production process is maintained

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Printing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Confirm job specifications	1.1 Job requirements are read and interpreted from job documentation or production control system 1.2 Set up is carried out correctly in minimum time with minimum wastage 1.3 Availability of all job related components is checked
2. Install tampons (printing pads) into machine	2.1 Appropriate tampons are selected according to job specifications 2.2 Tampons are secured into machine
3. Set up fixtures onto machine bed	3.1 Appropriate fixtures are selected and secured to xy table 3.2 Height of machine bed is adjusted to suit size of object to be printed 3.3 Xy table of machine bed is adjusted to suit position of image on object
4. Select and prepare inks and additives	4.1 Inks and additives are selected according to job specifications and end-user requirements 4.2 Quality and suitability of inks and additives are checked and appropriate action is taken 4.3 Inks and additives are prepared according to work health and safety (WHS) requirements and manufacturer’s/supplier’s instructions with suitable precautions to minimise waste 4.4 Correct colour and weight/volume of ink are mixed and prepared to match requirements of the printing process and routine job specifications 4.5 Formulation of ink, colour match and approved colour are appropriately recorded 4.6 Inks and additives are appropriately labelled, handled and stored according to manufacturer’s/supplier’s instructions to prevent damage and hazards to personnel and prolong shelf life
5. Set up machine for basic pad printing	5.1 Plate holder is set up and adjusted according to job specifications 5.2 Appropriate plate and plate holder are selected and plate is secured into plate holder 5.3 Tampons are set up and adjusted according to job specifications 5.4 Spatula and doctor blade are set up and adjusted according to requirements of the pad printing process and routine job specifications OR 5.5 Ink cup is set up and adjusted according to job specifications
6. Set up manual pre- and post-treatment processes	6.1 Manual loading is set up according to routine object requirements and job specifications 6.2 Manual pre-treatment is set up to suit routine object and according to job specifications 6.3 Drying racks are set up to suit object and according to job specifications
7. Conduct proof run	7.1 Material to be used for proof is organised correctly 7.2 Machine is operated according to manufacturer’s requirements and enterprise procedures to produce a specified proof 7.3 Proof is visually inspected and/or tested or laboratory testing is organised according to enterprise procedures 7.4 Production does not commence without client approval or authority where appropriate 7.5 Results are interpreted and adjustments are carried out according to product and machine specifications

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 2.1, 4.1, 4.3, 4.4, 4.6, 5.1, 5.3-5.5, 6.1-6.3, 7.5	Recognises and interprets text to establish job requirements from information contained within relevant procedures and specifications
Writing	4.5, 7.4	Enters routine data associated with production processes and enterprise procedures
Oral Communication	2.1, 4.1, 4.3, 4.4, 4.6, 5.1, 5.3-5.5, 6.1-6.3, 7.3-7.5	Participates effectively in spoken interactions by using strategies to confirm, clarify or repair understanding
Numeracy	4.4	Interprets and analyses a range of mathematical information used in familiar and routine tasks
Navigate the world of work	1.1, 1.2, 2.1, 4.1-4.4, 4.6, 5.1-5.5, 6.1-6.3, 7.2-7.5	Recognises and follows explicit and implicit protocols and meets expectations associated with own role Complies with WHS, legislative requirements and follows organisational policies and procedures relevant to own role
Interact with others	2.1, 4.1, 4.3, 4.4, 4.6, 5.1, 5.3-5.5, 6.1-6.3, 7.3-7.5	Cooperates with others as part of familiar routine activities, and contributes to specific activities requiring joint responsibility and accountability Understands what to communicate, with whom and how, in routine work situations
Get the work done	1.2, 1.3, 2.1, 2.2, 3.1-3.3, 4.1-4.4, 4.6, 5.1-5.5, 6.1-6.3, 7.1-7.3, 7.5	Takes responsibility for planning and organising own workload, identifying ways of sequencing and combining elements for greater efficiency Plans, identifies and assembles resources required to complete tasks Responds to predictable problems and implements standard or logical solutions Follows routine procedures for using digital technology by reading data from electronic monitoring and control systems

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPPRN341 Set up for basic pad printing	ICPPR341C Set up for basic pad printing	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRN341 Set up for basic pad printing

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

correctly set up a pad printing machine on TWO occasions (if possible on different substrates) for routine print jobs to meet enterprise procedures, manufacturer’s and job specifications; including setting up manual pre- and post-treatment processes and completing a proof run.

demonstrate all safety devices on the machine.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

Substrate identification

identify what class of substrate the (given) object came from

Ink selection

explain how to determine if an ink is appropriate to use with a particular substrate

explain how to determine if an ink is mixed to the correct viscosity

explain the pot life of a two-component ink

Pad selection

explain how to determine the correct pad shape for applications

describe what effect pad shape and hardness has on print quality

outline the ideal storage conditions for pads

Plate selection

explain how to determine the correct plate type for given applications

Doctor blades

explain work health and safety (WHS) concerns of setting presses and doctor blades

describe how to adjust the machine so the doctor blade operates correctly

describe the effect of a damaged doctor blade

Pre- and post-treatment requirements

explain WHS concerns of using pre- and post-treating substrates

explain how to pre-treat an oily surface to ensure it is ready for printing

Print problem identification and correction

identify causes of and solutions for common print problems (eg hairlines around image, loss of density in the centre of a solid image, fine lines of ink running through image, distortion of image)

Information sources

identify machine manuals, safety and other documentation relevant to this task, where are they kept and the information contained.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the printing field of work and include access to:

relevant facilities, materials and equipment

pad printing machine.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPPRN342 Produce complex pad printed product

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to produce complex pad printed product ensuring an efficient non-routine production flow that maintains product quality standards.

It applies to individuals who work under supervision, and are responsibility for ensuring the production process is maintained in accordance with the requirements of the proof, and any equipment issues and production problems are identified and resolved with minimum downtime.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Printing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Maintain non-routine pad printing process	1.1 Location of objects into fixtures is monitored and adjusted if necessary 1.2 Printing plates condition is monitored to ensure quality of printed product meets the approved proof standard 1.3 Printing pads condition is monitored and maintained to ensure quality of printed product meets the approved proof standard 1.4 Spatulas and doctor blades are monitored and adjusted to ensure quality of printed product meets the approved proof standard OR 1.5 Ink cups are monitored and adjusted to ensure quality of printed product meets the approved proof standard 1.6 Printing ink viscosity is monitored and adjusted to ensure quality of printed product meets the approved proof standard
2. Maintain in-line systems	2.1 In-line loading is monitored and adjusted to ensure quality of printed product meets the approved proof standard 2.2 In-line pre-treatment is monitored and adjusted to ensure quality of printed product meets the approved proof standard 2.3 In-line drying is monitored and adjusted to ensure quality of printed product meets the approved proof standard 2.4 In-line ejection is monitored and adjusted to ensure quality of printed product meets the approved proof standard
3. Maintain non-routine production process	3.1 Production process is operated in association with fellow workers and according to company specifications and planned daily schedule 3.2 Production is maintained within work health and safety (WHS) requirements and company and manufacturer’s specifications 3.3 Manual and/or automatic control is used as per specification 3.4 Performance is monitored and verified using the process control system according to enterprise procedures 3.5 Ink performance, colour, register and position of print are monitored and adjusted throughout production run 3.6 Production difficulties are anticipated and preventive action is taken to prevent occurrence by timely intervention 3.7 Process adjustments to eliminate problems are reported according to enterprise procedures 3.8 Waste is sorted according to enterprise procedures
4. Identify and rectify faults	4.1 Problems in pad printing machine operation are identified and reported according to enterprise procedures 4.2 Adjustments or corrections are carried out according to specified procedures and consistent with operator’s skill level 4.3 Pad printing machine operation is checked to ensure correct operation 4.4 Faulty performance of equipment is identified and reported according to enterprise procedures
5. Conduct shutdown of production process	5.1 Correct shutdown sequence is followed according to manufacturer’s specifications and enterprise procedures 5.2 Shutdown is conducted in association with fellow workers and in compliance with WHS requirements 5.3 Unused ink is correctly labelled and stored according to manufacturer/supplier specifications and enterprise procedures 5.4 Solid and liquid waste is removed from operating area and recycled or disposed of, where required, according to regulatory requirements and enterprise procedures 5.5 All product is removed from operating area 5.6 Machine faults requiring repair are identified and reported to designated person according to enterprise procedures 5.7 Repair/adjustment is verified prior to resumption of operations
6. Clean and wash up printing machine at end of print run	6.1 Plates and pads are cleaned ready for next run 6.2 Inking system is washed up ready for next run, and liquid waste is disposed of according to company and regulatory requirements 6.3 Pre- and post-treatment units are cleaned ready for next run 6.4 Production records or other documentation are accurately completed where required by enterprise procedures

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	3.1-3.3, 5.1, 5.3	Recognises and interprets text to establish job requirements from information contained within relevant procedures and specifications
Writing	3.7, 4.1, 4.4, 5.3, 5.6, 6.4	Enters routine data associated with production processes and enterprise procedures
Oral Communication	3.1-3.3, 3.7, 4.1, 4.4, 5.1-5.3, 5.6	Speaks clearly using appropriate vocabulary, tone and pace to report faults and discrepancies
Numeracy	3.5	Interprets and analyses a range of mathematical information used in familiar and routine tasks
Navigate the world of work	1.1-1.6, 2.1-2.4, 3.1-3.4, 3.7, 3.8, 4.1-4.4, 5.1-5.4, 5.6, 6.1, 6.3, 6.4	Recognises and follows explicit and implicit protocols and meets expectations associated with own role Recognises and follows all procedures for cleaning and maintenance of equipment, incorporating regulatory requirements and enterprise procedures
Interact with others	3.1-3.3, 3.7, 4.1, 4.4, 5.1-5.3, 5.6	Cooperates with others as part of familiar routine activities, and contributes to specific activities requiring joint responsibility and accountability Understands what to communicate, with whom and how, in routine work situations
Get the work done	1.1-1.6, 2.1-2.4, 3.1-3.8, 4.1-4.4, 5.1-5.7, 6.1, 6.3	Takes responsibility for planning and organising own workload, identifying ways of sequencing and combining elements for greater efficiency Plans, identifies and assembles resources required to complete tasks Responds to problems and applies formal problem solving processes when tackling unfamiliar problems Follows routine procedures for using digital technology by reading data from electronic monitoring and control systems

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPPRN342 Produce complex pad printed product	ICPPR342C Produce complex pad printed product	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRN342 Produce complex pad printed product

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

operate a pad printing machine and produce TWO jobs (if possible on different substrates) ensuring an efficient non-routine production flow that maintains product quality standards in accordance with job specifications and enterprise procedures

safely shut down and clean a pad printing machine according to work health and safety (WHS) guidelines

demonstrate use of control, monitoring and data entry systems

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

explain the major WHS concerns when operating the pad printing machine

identify where Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) are stored and what information they contain

explain how colour density of a light image on a dark substrate can be improved by selecting a different machine cycle mode

describe special cycle modes available on the machine and their application

explain how to determine if an ink has been mixed to the correct viscosity

describe how to correct ink viscosity during production

explain causes of unreleased ink remaining on the printing pad and how to identify them

discuss how adding a catalyst affects the pot life of ink, and list other factors affecting pot life

describe how to recognise a damaged pad

outline the correct method of cleaning a pad during production

discuss the effect of different pad shapes in multi-coloured printing for different colours

explain how to determine time the ink should take to cure before scratch and adhesion tests can be performed

outline how to check for correct pre-treatment of polypropylene during production

describe how to ensure drying conditions are correct for the product

describe visible effects on the image if ink viscosity is incorrect

describe how to identify the cause of incorrect registration and prevent its recurrence

explain what causes a fine coating of ink over the whole cliché surface

identify machine manuals, safety and other documentation relevant to this task, where are they kept and the information contained.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the printing field of work and include access to:

special purpose tools, equipment and materials

pad printing machine.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPPRN382 Produce and manage complex digital print

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to produce and manage digital print in a complex print production environment by constructing and accessing complex electronic data, performing colour digital management and adjusting machine settings to ensure production and print quality are maintained.

It applies to individuals who possess a sound theoretical knowledge base, who typically provide leadership and use a range of specialised and technical skills in the commercial print, pre-press, bureau, high-end digital print or a combination of these business environments.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Printing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Troubleshoot and correct production workflows for digital printing	1.1 Productivity analysis on a digital production system is undertaken to determine the most productive approach according to job specifications 1.2 Workflow procedures for digital printing are developed according to equipment availability and production environment, for a range of job specifications 1.3 Possible causes of problems in workflow procedures are identified and rectified, and strategies to improve productivity with minimum resource waste and according to job specifications are developed 1.4 Preventive maintenance on a digital printing system is undertaken according to manufacturer’s specifications to ensure maximum productivity, and minimum downtime and wastage
2. Liaise with clients	2.1 Print services, quality expectations and print costing for digital printing are communicated to client according to enterprise procedures 2.2 Productivity advantages and disadvantages of different digital print options are communicated according to manufacturer’s specifications and enterprise procedures 2.3 Turnaround times are calculated and communicated to client according to enterprise procedures
3. Confirm job specifications	3.1 Print job specifications are correctly interpreted from job documentation or production control system 3.2 Availability of all job components are checked according to enterprise procedures 3.3 Scanning, proofing and finishing requirements of each job are checked and internal workflow and/or outsource arrangements are coordinated 3.4 Run time of job is determined and completion time correctly estimated
4. Access, verify and submit electronic data files to a digital printer	4.1 Workstation computer and industry software are used to locate and retrieve electronic data files according to job specifications 4.2 Preview or pre-flight check is performed on electronic data files to verify correct job set-up according to job specifications 4.3 Job priority is determined according to job specifications and production schedules 4.4 Data file is submitted to print and image quality and machine productivity checks are performed and adjustments made to correct any problems
5. Perform complex digital colour management	5.1 Appropriate digital colour management solutions are used to minimise variation in colour selection, lighting conditions and surrounding colour, machine calibration, screen angle, machine resolution, conversion algorithms from red, green, blue (RGB) to cyan, magenta, yellow and key black (CMYK), substrate type and condition 5.2 Printed RGB, CMYK and PMS colour charts are used to perform colour matching with client proof 5.3 Accurate recommendations on colours to use when producing electronic data files are made according to job specifications 5.4 Colour matching of an electronic data file created using RGB colour model is performed by using machine calibration procedures and customising an output profile
6. Perform and/or coordinate document proofing	6.1 Digital proof run is conducted for client approval and to confirm proof meets job specifications 6.2 Internal or external pre-press proofing systems operators are consulted to conduct the proof run and provide job specifications according to enterprise procedures 6.3 Communication between client and proofing provider occurs to ensure proof conforms to job specifications
7. Run digital print job and/or coordinate press print run	7.1 Production schedules, enterprise procedures and job specifications are observed and liaison with internal and/or external production operators is maintained to determine print run start and duration time 7.2 Digital print run is conducted according to job specifications ensuring machine productivity and quality are monitored and adjusted throughout the print job
8. Perform and/or coordinate document finishing and client delivery	8.1 Finishing method is determined according to job specifications 8.2 Steps required for document finishing are identified and if necessary performed on in-line finishing units on a web or a sheet-fed system according to enterprise procedures 8.3 Packaging and presentation of finished print work is completed with co-workers and/or external source, if necessary, to avoid damage and conform to delivery requirements according to job specifications

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1-1.4, 2.2, 3.1, 4.1-4.3, 5.3, 5.4, 6.1-6.3, 7.1, 7.2, 8.1-8.3	Recognises and interprets text to establish job requirements from information contained within relevant procedures and specifications
Writing	2.1-2.3, 6.3, 8.3	Enters routine data associated with production processes and enterprise procedures
Oral Communication	1.1-1.4, 2.1-2.3, 4.1-4.3, 5.3, 6.1-6.3, 7.1, 7.2, 8.1, 8.3	Speaks clearly using appropriate vocabulary, tone and pace to report faults and discrepancies
Numeracy	2.3, 3.4	Interprets and analyses a range of mathematical information used in familiar and routine tasks
Navigate the world of work	1.1-1.4, 2.1-2.3, 3.1, 3.3, 4.1-4.4, 5.1-5.4, 6.1-6.3, 7.1, 7.2, 8.1-8.3	Works independently and collectively within broad parameters, with a strong sense of responsibility and ownership of goals, plans, decisions and outcomes May seek to make implicit protocols and expectations more explicit, and may challenge those who appear to work against effective outcomes, or do not reflect stated values, decisions and outcomes
Interact with others	1.1-1.4, 2.1-2.3, 4.1-4.3, 5.3, 6.1-6.3, 7.1, 7.2, 8.1, 8.3	Collaborates with others to achieve joint outcomes, playing an active role in facilitating effective group interaction, influencing direction and taking a leadership role on occasion
Get the work done	1.1-1.4, 3.3, 3.4, 4.1-4.4, 5.1, 5.2, 5.4, 6.1-6.3, 7.1, 7.2, 8.2, 8.3	Determines priorities and sequences steps involved in clearly defined, familiar tasks Takes responsibility for planning and organising own workload using analytical processes to decide on a course of action, and assembles required resources Recognises and anticipates an increasing range of complex problems, their symptoms and causes, actively looking for early warning signs and implementing contingency plans Reflects on the ways digital systems and tools are used, or could be used, to achieve work goals, and begins to recognise strategic, as well as operational, applications Utilises a broad range of features within applications to improve personal productivity, optimising software functions for specific purposes

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPPRN382 Produce and manage complex digital print	ICPPR382C Produce and manage complex digital print	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRN382 Produce and manage complex digital print

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

demonstrate appropriate organisation skills to coordinate pre-press, print run, finishing and delivery production workflows

produce and access complex electronic data

conduct a digital proof run

perform digital colour management

adjust settings and ensure productivity

perform preventive maintenance on digital printer

demonstrate use of computerised control and monitoring systems if available and appropriate

perform preventive maintenance tasks on a digital printer according to manufacturer’s specifications

prepare a written document outlining production workflow and giving reasons for production methods selected for a print job using the following job specifications within a specified production environment for:

4-colour advertising brochure

quantity: 2000

substrate: 120gsm coated

text: supplied electronically

images: continuous tone photographs supplied

logos and line art: supplied electronically

layout: hand drawn thumbnails supplied

finished size: A3 bleed

finishing: guillotined, folded and saddle

packaging: boxed

demonstrate turnaround time: 100 in 48 hours and remainder in 14 days

produce a digital colour proof of a supplied electronic file

use a digital colour management system to perform colour matching to a supplied proof.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

Troubleshooting and problem-solving

identify problem-solving strategies to use if a key piece of equipment in the production workflow is temporarily unavailable

describe actions required if the substrate type required is unavailable

discuss workarounds to use if a data file error is received while accessing a PDF file

outline what to do if a busy production schedule with tight deadlines and a power failure coincides and appears to be for an indefinite period of time

Analyse and recommend printing solutions

explain factors that influence a decision on using a particular printing solution (run length, substrate type, application)

explain cost differences between a specified job printed on a digital system and a specified traditional system (eg digital vs lithographic)

describe quality differences between a specified job printed on a digital system and a specified traditional system (e.g. digital vs lithographic)

explain the difference in turnaround time between a specified job printed on a digital system and a specified traditional system (e.g. digital vs lithographic)

discuss the most appropriate print method for the specified print job

Communication and client interaction

outline main differences between digital printing and traditional printing methods

discuss recommendations to make to a client who has created an electronic file in an incompatible software application

discuss suggestions to make to a client who requires a high-volume print run but needs a portion of the print job immediately

list steps to follow for client approval of a proof

Job requirements and processing systems

name actions required if vital information is missing from the job ticket (manual or electronic)

outline checks needed prior to set-up (availability of material, maintenance)

discuss what action to take if a file does not transfer correctly

describe main points to be checked before submitting file to print

Data access and manipulation

list checks to ensure data is in a format that can be used in digital print

outline suggestions to make to a client who has an incompatible version of software

list ways to submit a PDF file to the digital printer

explain OCR scanning

discuss how scan resolution affects document size and quality

describe what action is required if a scanned image is too dark

outline the sort of scanner hardware and software configuration that can be used to digitally scan a hardcopy multi-page document with text and images

Digital colour management

outline the difference between colours displayed on a computer monitor and printed colour

describe how machine calibration affects colour consistency

explain how to use printed colour charts to perform colour matching to a proof

explain what the acronym ICC stands for, and its significance

describe how a simulation profile affects colour output

Proofing and adjustment

explain circumstances in which a job can be modified before printing

discuss why margins should be changed when the job reaches the printer

outline steps to get client approval of the print

identify what the proof is checked against

describe the type of proofing system available in the traditional pre-press

explain recommendations that can be made regarding an appropriate proofing system for a specified print job

Document finishing and client delivery

discuss various types of binding

list procedures to be followed if the binding method required by the client is not available at own site

describe why packaging finished print work is important.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the printing field of work and include access to:

special purpose tools, equipment and materials

digital printing machine

digital front end.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPPRN383 Prepare for personalised digital printing

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to set up a digital printing press for personalised data printing.

This unit applies to individuals who possess a sound theoretical knowledge base and who typically provide leadership in the production of personalised digital print runs that involve setting data files and ensuring correct sequence.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Printing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Identify job specifications	1.1 Job details are checked and confirmed against job specifications 1.2 Correct materials are checked and are available for the job 1.3 Printing equipment is checked for efficiency and safely 1.4 Post-printing requirements are accurately identified according to job specifications 1.5 Correct data files are accessed and data conforms to job specifications
2. Set data requirements	2.1 Data files are set up to ensure required dynamic links operate correctly and settings conform to job specifications 2.2 Data is in correct sequence required for the run 2.3 Data is checked to ensure it is uncorrupted
3. Set machine quality	3.1 Work area is safe and ready for production 3.2 Digital printing machine is set to run efficiently and safely 3.3 Image is complete, sharp, of the required strength, free from contamination and in register 3.4 Output can be achieved at required quality standard and at required speed 3.5 Sample from the machine is produced and checked for conformance to job specifications 3.6 Adjustments are made where specifications are not met 3.7 If adjustments involve changes to materials, costs or time, supervisor or client are informed and approval secured 3.8 Set up is complete before deadline for the start of production

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 1.5, 2.1-2.3, 3.5, 3.6	Recognises and interprets text to establish job requirements from information contained within relevant procedures and specifications
Writing	3.7	Enters routine data associated with production processes and enterprise procedures
Oral Communication	1.1, 1.5, 2.1, 2.2, 3.5-3.7	Speaks clearly using appropriate vocabulary, tone and pace to report faults and discrepancies
Navigate the world of work	1.1-1.5, 2.1, 2.2, 3.1-3.8	Recognises and follows explicit and implicit protocols and meets expectations associated with own role Recognises and follows all procedures for set-up, cleaning and maintenance of equipment, incorporating regulatory requirements and enterprise procedures
Interact with others	1.1, 1.5, 2.1, 2.2, 3.5-3.7	Cooperates with others as part of familiar routine activities, and contributes to specific activities requiring joint responsibility and accountability Understands what to communicate, with whom and how, in routine work situations
Get the work done	1.1-1.5, 2.1-2.3, 3.2, 3.3, 3.5-3.8	Determines priorities and sequences steps involved in clearly defined, familiar tasks Recognises and takes responsibility for addressing predictable, and some less predictable problems in familiar work contexts Follows routine procedures for using digital technology by reading data from electronic monitoring and control systems

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPPRN383 Prepare for personalised digital printing	ICPPR383C Prepare for personalised digital printing	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRN383 Prepare for personalised digital printing

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

manage and adjust digital data to conform to print requirements prior to digital printing and produce personalised digital print runs that involve setting data files and ensuring correct sequence.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

discuss how job requirements are established

identify various information sources

discuss appropriate set up required to run the printing machines safely and efficiently

describe result prediction

explain data interpretation

outline data retrieval.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the printing field of work and include access to:

special purpose tools, equipment and materials

digital printer.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPPRN384 Set up and produce basic digital print

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to set up for and produce basic digitally printed product incorporating the use of raster image processor (RIP) technology when outputting to digital devices including wide format.

It applies to individuals working as print machinists in the printing and graphic arts industry who may set up, operate and monitor equipment and machinery and who may have to prepare material and apply solutions to problems. They may also provide leadership and guidance to others with some limited responsibility for the output of others.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Printing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Check components and functions of digital print system	1.1 Areas of user-replaceable consumables are checked and replacements made 1.2 Substrate feeding mechanisms and transport units are checked and cleared of any misfeeds 1.3 Correct set-up for data and electrical power is completed 1.4 Shutdown and restart procedures are performed according to manufacturer's specifications 1.5 Print driver and/or job download software are correctly installed and set-up on workstation computer and/or digital front-end processor
2. Maintain digital printing system to maximise productivity and quality	2.1 Routine maintenance tasks are performed according to manufacturer's specifications 2.2 Substrate transport and inking systems are cleaned to ensure optimum productivity and quality 2.3 Temperature and humidity conditions are checked to ensure even flow of substrate 2.4 Substrate registration mechanisms are checked to ensure alignment of printed images 2.5 Ink density calibration is performed on a digital print system to meet job specifications 2.6 Basic maintenance solutions to minimise ink residue, substrate misfeed, paper particle dust, uncalibrated systems and ink coverage are implemented
3. Maintain and perform optimum substrate handling procedures	3.1 Paper handling and storage system for a digital print environment are developed to maintain substrate integrity and digital image quality 3.2 Machine status is checked, print counters and consumable levels are reviewed and time estimated for reordering, servicing and reporting purpose
4. Confirm job specifications	4.1 Print job specifications are read and interpreted from job documentation or production control system 4.2 Availability of all job components are checked according to enterprise procedures 4.3 Finishing requirements of job are checked and internal workflow and/or outsource arrangements are coordinated according to enterprise procedures 4.4 Run time of job is calculated and completion time estimated, allowing consideration for other production demands
5. Set up reel system	5.1 Unwind reel is adjusted according to job specifications 5.2 Rewind reel is set up and adjusted according to job specifications 5.3 Minor in-line processes are set up and adjusted according to job specifications
6. Set up sheet transportation system on sheet-fed machine	6.1 Substrate is loaded into correct feeding mechanism and all substrate properties are correctly specified in the user control interface 6.2 Adjustments to the delivery unit are identified and made using the user control interface according to job specifications 6.3 On-line finishing unit is adjusted using the user control interface according to job specifications
7. Use RIP or front-end processor to set up job	7.1 Electronic data files are located and retrieved according to job specifications 7.2 RIP or front-end processor parameters are set according to job specifications 7.3 Preview or preflight check of electronic data files is performed to verify correct job set-up according to job specifications 7.4 Basic troubleshooting methods are applied to identify and rectify unverified data files, file errors and job requirement inconsistencies according to manufacturer's specifications
8. Submit data files to digital print machine	8.1 Job priority is determined according to job specifications and production schedules 8.2 Data file is submitted to print and image quality, and machine productivity checks are performed
9. Produce digital proof and run digital print job	9.1 Proof run is conducted to confirm proof conforms to job specifications and/or for client approval if required 9.2 Entire print run is conducted according to job specifications ensuring machine productivity and quality are monitored and rectified throughout the print job
10. Coordinate and/or perform document finishing and client delivery	10.1 Steps required for document finishing are identified if not performed on in-line finishing units on a reel or sheet-fed system according to job specifications 10.2 Finished print work is packaged to prevent damage and to conform to delivery requirements according to job specifications

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.4, 2.1, 2.5, 4.1, 4.3, 5.1-5.3, 6.1-6.3, 7.1-7.4, 8.1, 9.1, 9.2, 10.1, 10.2	Recognises and interprets text to establish job requirements from information contained within relevant procedures and specifications
Writing	6.1, 9.1	Enters routine data associated with production processes and enterprise procedures
Oral Communication	1.4, 2.1, 2.5, 4.1, 4.3, 5.1-5.3, 6.2, 6.3, 7.1-7.4, 8.1, 9.1, 9.2, 10.1, 10.2	Applies appropriate strategies to extract main ideas from oral texts across a range of contexts
Numeracy	2.5, 3.2, 4.4, 7.2	Interprets and analyses a range of mathematical information used in familiar and routine tasks
Navigate the world of work	1.3-1.5, 2.1, 2.2, 2.5, 2.6, 3.1, 4.2, 4.3, 5.1-5.3, 6.1-6.3, 7.1-7.4, 8.1, 8.2, 9.1, 9.2, 10.1, 10.2	Recognises and follows explicit and implicit protocols and meets expectations associated with own role, taking some responsibility for decisions regarding when and how to complete tasks, co-ordinate with, or delegate to others Complies with OHS, legislative requirements and follows organisational policies and procedures relevant to own role Recognises and follows all procedures for cleaning and maintenance of equipment, incorporating regulatory and OHS requirements and enterprise procedures
Interact with others	1.4, 2.1, 2.5, 4.1, 5.1-5.3, 6.2, 6.3, 7.1-7.4, 8.1, 9.1, 9.2, 10.1, 10.2	Cooperates with others as part of familiar routine activities, and contributes to specific activities requiring joint responsibility and accountability Understands what to communicate, with whom and how, in routine work situations
Get the work done	1.1-1.5, 2.1-2.6, 3.1, 3.2, 4.2, 4.4, 5.1-5.3, 6.1-6.3, 7.1-7.4, 8.1, 8.2, 9.1, 9.2, 10.1, 10.2	Determines priorities and sequences steps involved in clearly defined, familiar tasks Responds to predictable problems and implements standard or logical solutions related to role in immediate work environment Follows routine procedures for using digital technology by reading data from electronic monitoring and control systems

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPPRN384 Set up and produce basic digital print	ICPPR384A Set up and produce basic digital print	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRN384 Set up and produce basic digital print

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

safely set up and print FOUR basic digital printing jobs according to manufacturer's specifications, enterprise procedures and work health and safety (WHS) requirements

correctly access data, adjust settings and ensure production speeds are attained using a RIP or front-end processor

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

identify workplace job ticket procedures and pre-printing set-up checks and procedures

outline the process for file transfer actions, problems and solutions

outline the process for determining selection of specific ink/toner for varied printed products and how to ensure ink/toner quality

describe the process if required substrate is unavailable

identify the maximum and minimum weight of a substrate that can be printed on a specific machine

describe possible faults likely if printing on lightweight paper

identify the availability of pre-prepared substrates for a specific machine

identify the maximum delivery quantity for a specific machine

outline possible problems encountered if incorrect feeding and delivery occurs

name data formats used in digital print

list benefits of using electronic data rather than scanning hardcopy, and various ways to submit a PDF file to a digital printer

outline WHS procedures for setting up in-line processes

describe in-line options available on a specific machine, and the on-line finishing options available

outline processes for setting up in-line/on-line

describe circumstances where a job would be modified before printing

list steps involved for client approval of the print

outline the proof check procedures

outline processes involved for gaining final approval of a basic job

list various types of binding and procedures followed if the binding method required by client is not available at this workplace

outline alternative options if document size is too thick to staple

identify importance of packing finished print work

identify location of machine manuals, safety and other documentation relevant to set up and production of digitally printed products.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the printing field of work and include access to:

special purpose tools, equipment and materials

RIP or front-end processor.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPPRN385 Apply software applications to digital production

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to correctly select and use a variety of software applications to efficiently produce a standard job.

It applies to skilled individuals working in digital production who are responsible for digital production workflow and who apply a broad range of competencies in a varied work context. They use some discretion and judgement, and relevant technical knowledge, and provide technical advice and support to others.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Pre-requisite Unit

ICPSUP281	Use computer systems

Unit Sector

Printing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Select and assess software	1.1 Publication requirements of layout brief are determined to align with digital production processes and feasibility 1.2 Range of software applications is selected according to job specifications 1.3 Appropriate software applications are used to complete components of the job according to manufacturer's specifications and enterprise standards
2. Arrange elements on page	2.1 Client copy and images are assembled to conform to the design brief 2.2 Text is prepared and required fonts and font size are applied 2.3 Basic elements and images are created and arranged on the page to conform to the design brief 2.4 Image resolution and colour mode are determined according to job specifications, help function is accessed, if required, and solutions to queries found 2.5 Document set-up is completed to conform to the design brief and job specifications
3. Check quality	3.1 Text is reviewed for possible errors and omissions, and errors are discussed with client or supervisor 3.2 Basic elements are arranged to adhere with design principles 3.3 Copy is proofed and rechecked for errors, omissions and overall layout design 3.4 Necessary changes are made and reviewed and re-proofed as required 3.5 Job is saved according to enterprise procedures
4. Use RIP to output job	4.1 Layout is imported into a raster image processor (RIP) or front-end processor according to workplace procedures 4.2 Layout is produced according to job specifications and enterprise standards

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1-1.3, 2.1, 2.3-2.5, 3.1, 4.2	Recognises and interprets text to establish job requirements from information contained within relevant procedures and specifications
Writing	2.2, 3.1	Enters routine data associated with production processes and enterprise procedures
Oral Communication	3.1	Speaks clearly using appropriate vocabulary, tone and pace to report faults and discrepancies
Navigate the world of work	1.1-1.3, 2.1-2.5, 3.5, 4.1, 4.2	Recognises and follows explicit and implicit protocols and meets expectations associated with own role
Interact with others	1.1-1.3, 2.4, 2.5, 3.1, 4.2	Understands what to communicate, with whom and how, in routine work situations
Get the work done	1.2, 1.3, 2.1-2.5, 3.2-3.5, 4.1, 4.2	Takes responsibility for planning and organising own workload making design choices as appropriate Recognises and takes responsibility for addressing predictable, and some less predictable, problems in familiar work contexts Utilises a broad range of features within applications to improve personal productivity, optimising software functions for specific purposes

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPPRN385 Apply software applications to digital production	ICPPR385A Apply software applications to digital production	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRN385 Apply software applications to digital production

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

correctly use TWO software applications to prepare and produce two different sets of layouts according to enterprise standards and job specifications.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

list different processes used in digital production

describe colour modes and how they affect output

outline how image resolution is governed by output resolution and/or viewing distance

describe various software applications and their usages in relation to digital production

identify how job specifications determine typeface selection and the effect typefaces have on readability

explain design principles, such as hierarchy, emphasis, contrast, alignment, repetition and flow

describe how to select and manipulate type within a layout application, and image manipulation techniques including basic colour correction

describe how to create basic vector shapes with an application

outline different colour modes and their uses

outline preflighting procedures and various ways to import a job into a RIP

identify location of manuals, safety and other documentation relevant to high-end software applications for digital production.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the printing field of work and include access to:

special purpose tools, equipment and materials

RIP or front-end processor.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPPRN386 Troubleshoot digital media

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to problem-solve failed digital media processes and products, involving logical systematic analysis to determine the source of a problem.

It applies to skilled individuals who may set up, operate and monitor equipment and machinery and who may have to prepare material and apply solutions to problems. They may also provide leadership and guidance to others, with some limited responsibility for the output of others.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Printing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Identify substandard process performance	1.1 Operation of printing device is determined to manufacturer’s specifications 1.2 Outputs are identified as consistent with normal operation by comparison to proofs, dummy copies or samples 1.3 Signs of equipment degradation and impending failure are identified and appropriate follow-up action is taken according to workplace procedures 1.4 Equipment outputs are inspected to determine nature of the problem 1.5 Nature of substandard performance is defined and reported
2. Identify causes of substandard performance	2.1 Causes of substandard performance are identified using a process for investigation 2.2 Records are reviewed to ensure the device had been maintained according to manufacturer’s specifications 2.3 Calibration records are reviewed to ensure system is within calibration 2.4 Appropriate test procedure, materials and equipment are verified 2.5 Performance tests are conducted as appropriate to investigation 2.6 Equipment and/or testing variables are analysed to develop list of possible causes of substandard performance 2.7 Causes or substandard performance are isolated using the process for investigation
3. Propose corrective action	3.1 Corrective action is proposed and trialled based on investigation 3.2 Trial data is monitored to ensure outputs are consistent with normal operation 3.3 Trial results are reviewed to confirm validity of corrective action 3.4 Workplace records are maintained as required

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 2.2, 2.3, 3.3	Recognises and interprets text to establish job requirements from information contained within relevant procedures and specifications
Writing	1.5, 2.4, 3.4	Enters routine data associated with production processes and enterprise procedures
Oral Communication	1.1, 1.5, 2.2-2.5, 3.3	Speaks clearly using appropriate vocabulary, tone and pace to report faults and discrepancies
Numeracy	2.3, 3.2, 3.3	Interprets and analyses a range of mathematical information that is used in familiar and routine tasks
Navigate the world of work	1.1-1.3, 2.2-2.6, 3.2-3.4	Recognises and follows explicit and implicit protocols and meets expectations associated with own role including knowledge of work health and safety (WHS) requirements
Interact with others	1.1, 1.5, 2.2-2.5, 3.3	Cooperates with others as part of familiar routine activities, and contributes to specific activities requiring joint responsibility and accountability Understands what to communicate, with whom and how, in routine work situations
Get the work done	1.1-1.5, 2.1, 2.2, 2.5-2.7, 3.1, 3.2	Determines priorities and sequences steps involved in clearly defined, familiar tasks Recognises and takes responsibility for addressing predictable, and some less predictable, problems in familiar work contexts Follows routine procedures for using digital technology by reading data from electronic monitoring and control systems

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPPRN386 Troubleshoot digital media	ICPPR386A Troubleshoot digital media	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRN386 Troubleshoot digital media

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

correctly identify substandard printing performance for TWO different jobs and apply corrective solutions according to enterprise procedures and job specifications.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

outline relevance and location of machine manuals, safety and other documentation, information included in these documents, and location of other sources of information

identify output devices expected for printing performance on a particular substrate and how the same substrate can perform differently on various output devices

explain how moisture can affect print quality and correct storage procedures for substrates

describe different printing defects that can cause mis-calibration

explain relevant problem-solving methodologies, including empirical, ishikawa and brainstorming

identify relevant research techniques and online forums and networks that may assist.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the printing field of work and include access to special purpose tools, equipment and materials.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPPRN387 Use colour management for production

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to obtain an acceptable match across colour devices, including the correct use of colour profiles and calibration of monitors and output devices.

It applies to skilled individuals who set up, operate and monitor equipment and machinery, and who may have to prepare material and apply solutions to problems. They may also provide leadership and guidance to others, with some limited responsibility for the output of others.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Pre-requisite Unit

ICPPR284	Introduction to colour management

Unit Sector

Printing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Identify colour requirements	1.1 Publication conditions are determined to identify colour management requirements 1.2 Requirements are established to guide provision and use of colour profiles
2. Calibrate digital devices	2.1 Digital devices in the workflow are calibrated to produce accurate colour reproductions 2.2 Device profiles created during calibration are correctly used and stored 2.3 Digital devices are checked regularly to ensure they are still within calibration 2.4 Profiles or equipment parameters are adjusted to bring devices back into calibration, when required 2.5 Records are stored to ensure calibration occurs regularly
3. Use colour profiles	3.1 Source and destination profiles are identified within the workflow 3.2 Profiles are used to ensure colour on monitors, proofs and final product match as closely as possible 3.3 Images are converted to correct profile if incorrect profile is embedded 3.4 Correct rendering intent is used to ensure accurate colour conversion
4. Configure software within workflow	4.1 Software applications in the workflow with colour management features are determined 4.2 Software applications with colour management features are configured to meet output condition 4.3 Range of colour management presets are configured, saved and correctly used for various output conditions
5. Maintain colour management workflow	5.1 Colour management system is checked regularly to ensure consistent colour match 5.2 Monitors are calibrated regularly to ensure accurate reproduction of colour 5.3 Digital devices are re-calibrated regularly or when conditions change from initial calibration

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	2.5	Recognises and interprets text to establish job requirements from information contained within relevant procedures and specifications
Writing	2.5	Enters routine data associated with production processes and enterprise procedures
Navigate the world of work	1.1, 1.2, 2.1-2.5, 3.1-3.4, 4.2, 4.3, 5.1-5.3	Recognises and follows explicit and implicit protocols and meets expectations associated with own role Complies with WHS, legislative requirements and follows organisational policies and procedures relevant to own role
Get the work done	1.1, 1.2, 2.1-2.4, 3.1-3.4, 4.1-4.3, 5.1-5.3	Takes responsibility for planning and organising own workload, and assembles required resources Recognises and takes responsibility for addressing predictable, and some less predictable, problems in familiar work contexts Utilises a broad range of features within applications to improve personal productivity, optimising software functions for specific purposes

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPPRN387 Use colour management for production	ICPPR387A Use colour management for production	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRN387 Use colour management for production

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

correctly produce THREE jobs with final product on varied media, including both print and digital platforms

apply colour management system maintenance procedures according to enterprise procedures and job specifications.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

identify work health and safety (WHS) issues related to managing colour for digital production

define densitometric and spectrophotometric measurement

define International Colour Consortium (ICC) profiles, their use and effects they can have on output

explain device independent colour and profile connection spaces

outline use of colour space conversions and rendering intents

describe factors that influence selection of highlight and shadow aim points

explain grey balance requirements in relation to colour correction and the process of determining grey balance requirements

describe ink/toner light errors – ‘ideal’ versus ‘actual’ inks/toners

explain viewing light conditions and metamerism

outline factors determining requirements for colour correction and how different stocks affect colour

describe effects different inks have on colour reproduction for proofing and final production, and how dot gain affects colour

identify type of press and what printing process is being used for final output

describe solutions to common problems of colour management

describe effects of using the wrong profile on output

identify sources of information on colour management.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the printing field of work and include access to special purpose tools, equipment and materials.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPPRN388 Preflight and import complex images for digital devices

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to confirm that digital files required for the printing process are all present, valid, correctly formatted and of the desired format to be imported into a digital device. It includes the application of preflight procedures and importation of files into raster image processors (RIPs).

It applies to individuals who use specialised knowledge and follow organisational processes to ensure product quality meets requirements.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Printing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Access and preflight electronic files	1.1 Electronic data files are located and retrieved using a workstation computer and industry software according to job specifications 1.2 Preflight check of electronic data files is performed to verify correct job set-up according to job specifications, and problems associated with files are identified 1.3 Troubleshooting methods are applied to identify file errors and job requirement inconsistencies 1.4 Solutions are implemented to rectify errors according to job specifications 1.5 Preflight presets are configured for various job specifications
2. Import file to RIP or job queue	2.1 Correct output profile is selected according to job specifications 2.2 Most productive submission workflow is selected and documented based on data file format, quantity and file size, and document finishing 2.3 Job priority is determined according to job specifications and production schedules 2.4 Print driver and/or job download software is correctly installed and set up on workstation computer and/or digital front-end processor 2.5 Manufacturer's installation instructions are located and/or software installation is coordinated according to enterprise procedures 2.6 Data file is submitted to output device, image quality and machine productivity checks are performed, and adjustments made to correct any problems

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 1.2, 1.4, 1.5, 2.1, 2.3, 2.5	Recognises and interprets text to establish job requirements from information contained within relevant procedures and specifications
Writing	2.2	Enters routine data associated with production processes and enterprise procedures
Oral Communication	1.1, 1.2, 1.4, 1.5, 2.1, 2.3, 2.5	Speaks clearly using appropriate vocabulary, tone and pace to report faults and discrepancies
Navigate the world of work	1.1-1.5, 2.1-2.6	Recognises and follows explicit and implicit protocols and meets expectations associated with own role
Interact with others	1.1, 1.2, 1.4, 1.5, 2.1, 2.3, 2.5	Cooperates with others as part of familiar routine activities, and contributes to specific activities requiring joint responsibility and accountability Understands what to communicate, with whom and how, in routine work situations
Get the work done	1.1-1.5, 2.1-2.6	Takes responsibility for planning and organising own workload, and assembles required resources Recognises and takes responsibility for addressing predictable, and some less predictable, problems in familiar work contexts Utilises a broad range of features within applications to improve personal productivity, optimising software functions for specific purposes

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPPRN388 Preflight and import complex images for digital devices	ICPPR388A Preflight and import complex images for digital devices	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRN388 Preflight and import complex images for digital devices

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

import electronic files that are error-free and meet job specifications into rips or output queues

find and use information relevant to the task from a variety of information sources

preflight and import TWO complex jobs according to manufacturer's specifications and enterprise procedures.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

identify and describe key digital printing processes

outline required resolution for various output conditions

describe different colour modes and how they affect output

explain trapping and overprint requirements

identify and describe different screen types and angles

outline bleed amounts required for various jobs

explain the impact font types and licensing can have on output

describe preflighting tools available in various applications

compare different file types and how they can affect output

outline factors that influence processing speed of a job during ripping

explain how the ripping speed of a job can be increased.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the printing field of work and include access to:

special purpose tools, equipment and materials

high-end computers

raster image processors (RIPs)

output devices

layout software.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPPRN389 Manage digital files

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to store and retrieve electronic files for efficient access.

It applies to individuals who work under limited supervision in the application of digital file management.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Printing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Save digital files	1.1 Logical digital file system of folders and sub-folders is created and files are named using enterprise format 1.2 Files are saved using appropriate format into digital file system 1.3 Version control is used to ensure the most recent files can be accessed
2. Retrieve and manage digital files	2.1 Required files are retrieved and opened from digital file system 2.2 Computer search functions are used to find incorrectly stored files 2.3 Files are sent to required location and any naming errors are amended
3. Archive digital files	3.1 Archive system is created according to enterprise protocols 3.2 Consistent, regular backup strategies are undertaken to allow for retrieval of files if there is a data loss event 3.3 Files are retrieved from archive system

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1-1.3, 2.1-2.3, 3.1-3.3	Uses a number of reading strategies to identify and interpret relevant information within familiar text types
Writing	1.1-1.3, 3.1	Enters routine data associated with production processes and enterprise procedures
Navigate the world of work	1.1, 1.2, 2.1, 2.3, 3.1, 3.2	Recognises and follows explicit and implicit protocols and meets expectations associated with own role evaluating effectiveness of decisions on how well they met stated goals
Get the work done	1.1-1.3, 2.1-2.3, 3.1-3.3	Determines priorities and sequences steps involved in clearly defined, familiar tasks Recognises and takes responsibility for addressing predictable, and some less predictable, problems in familiar work contexts Utilises a broad range of features within applications to improve personal productivity, optimising software functions for specific purposes Manages and maintains files securely in a variety of storage media and formats

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPPRN389 Manage digital files	ICPPR389A Manage digital files	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRN389 Manage digital files

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

store, retrieve and archive various file types

find and use information relevant to the task from a variety of information sources.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

list work health and safety (WHS) factors for using a computer

point out the location of manuals, safety and other documentation relevant to digital file management procedures and discuss the contained information

explain elementary computer operating system functions

discuss file hierarchy

outline advantages and disadvantages of different file systems

explain file size and how it impacts on hard drive space

identify different file types and how this relates to file size

explain how to rename a file

outline version control procedures

discuss operating systems’ search function

explain backup processes

outline how to achieve different formats.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the printing field of work and include access to:

special purpose tools, equipment and materials

high-end computers

network hard drives

external hard drives

DVDs

BluRay discs.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPPRN390 Generate a proof for digital production

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to generate a proof on the printing device to be used for final production.

It applies to individuals who generate and approve proof in the digital sector.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Printing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Produce proof on printing device	1.1 Printing device is calibrated according to manufacturer’s specifications 1.2 Appropriate colour profiles are selected to ensure consistent colour output 1.3 The same substrate or product is used to generate a proof for the final production run 1.4 Proof is produced according to job specifications and workflow procedures 1.5 Proof is used to make a mock-up to simulate the finishing of the final product according to job specifications
2. Assess proof against specifications	2.1 Proof is checked against job specifications to confirm validity and identify and rectify any defects 2.2 Proofing process is repeated if proof does not meet job specifications and enterprise standards
3. Communicate proof with client	3.1 Proof is labelled with appropriate information according to enterprise standards 3.2 Feedback is gained from client for sign off 3.3 Amendments are made if required, and resubmitted to client for sign off 3.4 Proof is stored according to workplace procedures

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 1.4, 1.5, 2.1, 2.2, 3.4	Recognises and interprets text to establish job requirements from information contained within relevant procedures and specifications
Writing	3.1-3.4	Enters routine data associated with production processes and enterprise procedures
Oral Communication	1.1, 1.4, 1.5, 2.1, 2.2,3.2	Speaks clearly using appropriate vocabulary, tone and pace to report faults and discrepancies
Navigate the world of work	1.1-1.5, 2.1, 2.2, 3.1-3.4	Recognises and follows explicit and implicit protocols and meets expectations associated with own role Recognises and follows all procedures for regulatory requirements including work health and safety (WHS) and enterprise procedures
Interact with others	1.1, 1.4, 1.5, 2.1, 2.2, 3.2	Cooperates with others as part of familiar routine activities, and contributes to specific activities requiring joint responsibility and accountability Understands what to communicate, with whom and how, in routine work situations
Get the work done	1.1-1.5, 2.1, 2.2, 3.1, 3.3, 3.4	Determines priorities and sequences steps involved in clearly defined, familiar tasks Recognises and takes responsibility for addressing predictable, and some less predictable, problems in familiar work contexts Follows routine procedures for using digital technology by reading data from electronic monitoring and control systems

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPPRN390 Generate a proof for digital production	ICPPR390A Generate a proof for digital production	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRN390 Generate a proof for digital production

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

safely calibrate a digital device to ensure consistent colour output

produce a proof that gains client approval and matches the final production run

find and use information relevant to the task from a variety of information sources.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

list work health and safety (WHS) issues related to digital proofing for digital production

explain colour theory, including additive and subtractive colours, red, green, blue (RGB) and cyan, magenta, yellow, black (CMYK)

outline varying colour gamuts between colour modes

discuss colour management workflow set-up procedures

describe use of output profiles in relation to simulation

explain how regular calibration helps ensure consistent colour output

describe quality control systems used in proofing

outline techniques used to control quality

explain how to use standard viewing conditions to assess colour output

describe how to use colour evaluation charts

outline criteria for evaluating a colour proof

explain differences between preliminary proofs and a contract proof

identify types of substrates used in proofing

name the inks, toners and coatings used in digital printing

describe how to handle and store materials to ensure quality

identify types of finishing techniques used in digital production

point out the location of relevant manuals, safety and other documentation relevant to digital printing, and discuss the information in these documents

discuss where other available sources of information are.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the printing field of work and include access to:

special purpose tools, equipment and materials

high-end colour output devices

raster image processors (RIPs) with colour management features.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPPRN392 Set up and produce specialised digital print

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to set up for and produce specialised, digitally printed products. This unit includes the use of non-standard substrates and raster image processor (RIP) settings.

It applies to individuals who evaluate job specifications, set up raster image processor (RIP) settings and produce specialised print jobs.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Printing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Confirm specialised job specifications	1.1 Job requirements are read and interpreted from job documentation or production control system 1.2 Availability of all job related components is checked and recorded
2. Plan and carry out specialised set-up	2.1 Specialised job specifications are identified and analysed 2.2 Specialised set-up requirements are determined 2.3 Specialised set-up is completed in minimum time and with minimum wastage
3. Set up RIP for specialised digital printing	3.1 RIP functions are analysed to determine appropriate settings according to specialised job requirements 3.2 Experimentation is undertaken with RIP functions to determine settings according to specialised job requirements 3.3 Problems are solved effectively to minimise waste and excess costs 3.4 Documentation and other forms of information are accessed to determine source of any problems 3.5 Most productive way to complete the job is determined
4. Test and select substrate	4.1 Substrate specifications are investigated to determine print feasibility 4.2 Test print run is conducted to confirm substrates appropriateness with job requirements 4.3 Appropriate substrate is selected based on print feasibility and job requirements
5. Conduct specialised proof run	5.1 Material to be used for specialised proof is organised correctly 5.2 Machine is operated according to manufacturer's specifications and enterprise procedures to produce a specialised proof 5.3 Specialised proof is visually inspected to enterprise procedures 5.4 Client approval or authority is sought prior to production run where appropriate 5.5 Results are interpreted and adjustments are carried out according to product and machine specifications
6. Refine and document specialised print process	6.1 Corrective or preventive action is recommended and implemented where appropriate 6.2 Changes are communicated to relevant personnel in a logical and easily understood manner 6.3 Changes are monitored to confirm improvement to production efficiency 6.4 Ongoing problems are reported according to enterprise procedures, and process is documented according to enterprise standards 6.5 Documentation is filed so it can be easily retrieved and used as a reference for future, similar jobs

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 2.1, 2.2, 3.1, 3.2, 4.1, 5.2, 5.5, 6.5	Recognises and interprets text to establish job requirements from information contained within relevant procedures and specifications
Writing	1.2, 5.4, 6.4	Enters routine data associated with production processes and enterprise procedures
Oral Communication	1.1, 2.1, 2.2, 3.1, 3.2, 4.1, 5.2, 5.4, 5.5, 6.2, 6.4	Speaks clearly using appropriate vocabulary, tone and pace to communicate
Numeracy	4.1	Interprets and analyses a range of mathematical information used in familiar and routine tasks
Navigate the world of work	1.1, 2.1-2.3, 3.1-3.3, 4.1-4.3, 5.2-5.5, 6.3, 6.4	Recognises and follows explicit and implicit protocols and meets expectations associated with own role Complies with WHS, legislative requirements and follows organisational policies and procedures relevant to own role
Interact with others	1.1, 2.1, 2.2, 3.1, 3.2, 4.1, 5.2, 5.4, 5.5, 6.2, 6.4	Cooperates with others as part of familiar routine activities, and contributes to specific activities requiring joint responsibility and accountability Understands what to communicate, with whom and how, in routine work situations
Get the work done	1.2, 2.3, 3.1-3.5, 4.2, 4.3, 5.1-5.3, 5.5, 6.1, 6.3	Determines priorities and sequences steps involved in clearly defined, familiar tasks Recognises and anticipates an increasing range of familiar problems, their symptoms and causes, actively looking for early warning signs and implementing contingency plans Follows routine procedures for using digital technology by reading data from electronic monitoring and control systems Enters key words into a search engine to find information

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPPRN392 Set up and produce specialised digital print	ICPPR392A Set up and produce specialised digital print	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRN392 Set up and produce specialised digital print

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

analyse job specifications and develop practical solutions to printing a non-standard product

safely set up and use a raster image processor (RIP) and digital printing machine for a specialised job on TWO occasions according to manufacturer's and job specifications and enterprise procedures.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

name who to discuss any production problems with

describe all functions and settings available on a particular RIP or front-end processor

explain advanced RIP settings, such as dynamic variables to select stock

explain where to source information on complex raster image processor RIP usage

discuss types of substrates suitable for various digital processes

explain the theory behind several digital processes and how this impacts substrate usage

outline problem-solving methodologies, including empirical, ishikawa and brainstorming

name online forums and networks which might be useful points of reference for this role

list work health and safety (WHS) issues in relation to each digital process

show where documentation or other information can be found on specialised digital processes.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the printing field of work and include access to:

special purpose tools, equipment and materials

full colour production digital presses or specialised wide format printers.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPPRN393 Set up for basic relief printing

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to safely set up reel-fed or sheet-fed platen, cylinder or rotary printing machines, and conduct a proof run for basic relief printing.

It applies to individuals who prepare material, monitor and run equipment and machinery, and apply solutions to a defined range of unpredictable problems. They may also provide leadership and guidance to others with some limited responsibility for the output of others.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Printing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Confirm job specifications	1.1 Job requirements are read and interpreted from job documentation or production control system 1.2 Set-up is carried out correctly in minimum time with minimum wastage, and availability of all job related components is checked
2. Set up reel system	2.1 Unwind and rewind reels are set up and adjusted according to job specifications 2.2 Webbing procedures are carried out and web-control system is set up and adjusted according to job specifications 2.3 Reels are spliced/joined according to job specifications 2.4 Printed web viewing devices are set up and adjusted according to job specifications 2.5 Folder and sheets are set up and adjusted according to job specifications 2.6 Set off / marking prevention devices are set up and adjusted according to job specifications
3. Set up sheet transportation system on sheet-fed machine	3.1 Feeder and delivery sections are set up and adjusted according to job specifications 3.2 Sheet pick-up and transportation systems are set up and adjusted according to job specifications 3.3 Transfer and control systems are set up and adjusted according to job specifications 3.4 Set-off / marking prevention devices are set up and adjusted according to job specifications 3.5 Substrate is added to and removed from process according to job instructions
4. Select and prepare inks and additives	4.1 Quality and suitability of inks, dyes or additives are selected according to job specifications and end-user requirements 4.2 Quality and suitability of inks, dyes or additives are checked and appropriate action is taken 4.3 Inks, dyes and additives are prepared according to work health and safety (WHS) requirements, and manufacturer’s/supplier’s instructions with suitable precautions to minimise waste 4.4 Correct colour and weight/volume of ink are mixed and prepared to match requirements of the printing process and job specifications 4.5 Formulation of ink, colour match and approved colour are appropriately recorded 4.6 Inks, dyes and additives are appropriately labelled, handled and stored according to manufacturer’s/supplier’s instructions to prevent damage and hazards to personnel and to prolong shelf life
5. Select and prepare embellishment dyes	5.1 Quality and suitability of dyes are selected according to job specifications and end-user requirements 5.2 Dyes are prepared according to WHS requirements and manufacturer's/supplier's instructions, with suitable precautions to minimise waste 5.3 Dyes are appropriately labelled, handled and stored according to manufacturer's/suppliers instructions to prevent damage and hazards to personnel and to prolong shelf life 5.4 Impression is set up and adjusted according to job specifications (platen and rotary) 5.5 Inking system is set up and adjusted according to the relief process and job specifications (platen and rotary) 5.6 Drying system is set up and adjusted according to job specifications
6. Set up machine for basic relief printing	6.1 Appropriate relief plates are selected and secured to the machine 6.2 Relief plates, formes or cylinders are positioned, set up and adjusted according to job specifications (platen and rotary) 6.3 Impression is set up and adjusted according to job specifications (platen and rotary) 6.4 Inking system is set up and adjusted according to relief process and job specifications (platen and rotary) 6.5 Drying system is set up and adjusted according to job specifications
7. Set up machine for basic embellishment	7.1 Appropriate dyes are selected and secured to the machine 7.2 Dyes are positioned and set up and adjusted according to job specifications (platen and rotary) 7.3 Impression is set up and adjusted according to job specifications (platen and rotary)
8. Conduct proof run	8.1 Material to be used for proof is organised correctly 8.2 Machine is operated according to manufacturer's and enterprise procedures to produce specified proof 8.3 Proof is visually inspected and/or tested or laboratory testing organised according to enterprise procedures 8.4 Client approval or authority is sought prior to the production run where appropriate 8.5 Results are interpreted and adjustments are carried out according to product and machine specifications to determine adjustment requirements

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 2.1-2.6, 3.1-3.5, 4.1, 4.3, 4.4, 4.6, 5.1-5.6, 7.2, 7.3, 8.3, 8.5	Recognises and interprets text to establish job requirements from information contained within relevant procedures and specifications
Writing	4.5, 4.6, 8.4	Enters routine data associated with production processes and enterprise procedures
Oral Communication	2.1-2.6, 3.1-3.5, 4.1, 4.3, 4.4, 5.1, 5.4-5.6, 7.2, 7.3, 8.3, 8.4	Speaks clearly using appropriate vocabulary, tone and pace to report faults and discrepancies
Numeracy	3.5, 4.4	Interprets and analyses a range of mathematical information used in familiar and routine tasks
Navigate the world of work	1.1, 1.2, 2.1-2.6, 3.1-3.5, 4.1-4.6, 5.1-5.6, 6.1, 6.2-6.5, 7.1-7.3, 8.1-8.5	Recognises and follows explicit and implicit protocols and meets expectations associated with own role
Interact with others	2.1-2.6, 3.1-3.5, 4.1, 4.3, 4.4, 5.1, 5.4-5.6, 7.2, 7.3, 8.2-8.4	Cooperates with others as part of familiar routine activities, and contributes to specific activities requiring joint responsibility and accountability Understands what to communicate, with whom and how, in routine work situations
Get the work done	1.1, 1.2, 2.1-2.6, 3.1-3.5, 4.1-4.4, 4.6, 5.1-5.6, 6.1, 6.2-6.5, 7.1-7.3, 8.1-8.3, 8.5	Takes responsibility for planning and organising own workload and assembles required resources Recognises and takes responsibility for addressing predictable, problems in familiar work contexts, adjusting resources and equipment as required Follows routine procedures for using digital technology by reading data from electronic monitoring and control systems

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPPRN393 Set up for basic relief printing	ICPPR393A Set up for basic relief printing	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRN393 Set up for basic relief printing

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

set up reel- or sheet-fed platen, cylinder or rotary printing machines for routine print jobs

conduct proof run and adjust settings to ensure production speeds are attained

use computerised control, monitoring and data entry systems if available and appropriate

find and use information relevant to the task from a variety of information sources

demonstrate all safety devices on the machine

manipulate embellishment tools and operations

set up for TWO basic relief printing jobs (if possible including at least one in-line process) according to manufacturer’s specifications and enterprise procedures.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

Job specifications

explain what to do if vital information is missing from the job ticket

outline checks to do prior to set-up

Relief plates

explain effect of plates with poor relief

explain importance of calliper of mounting material

explain how to position plate on the mount ensuring plate edges do not lift

Reel in-feed

outline major work health and safety (WHS) concerns when setting up the reel in-feed

explain how to determine printing side of the material

outline effects of low web tension on the print

explain other types of web splices that can be used appropriately for the job

Sheet in-feed

outline major WHS concerns of setting up the sheet in-feed

explain how sheet position is determined for the job

outline effects that side lay selection has on the job

explain how to appropriately select front lays

list procedures for a register check

explain why a two-sheet cut is used on most feeders

explain how the machine knows if the sheet is missing or late

Reel only delivery system

explain effects of excessive web tension at rewind of the machine

outline major risks associated with rewind of the machine

Sheet only delivery system

explain why application of spray powder is sometimes advisable

list effects of too much spray powder

explain the use of slowdown devices in the delivery

outline effects of excessive jogging on the stack

Preparation of inks and additives

outline main environmental and WHS concerns about inks and additives

explain how to match ink to a particular job

outline results of ink being too tacky

explain the process for changing ink that is too light

outline methods available to check ink for correct colour

explain responsibility for passing the colour prior to running the job

Machine set-up

outline WHS concerns of setting up the machine

explain how to determine specifications relating to the specific job

explain effects incorrectly set inking rollers have on the print

outline ways the ink profile may vary across the machine

explain what ‘optimum ink duct sweep’ refers to

Basic in-line processes

outline precautions to take if UV drying is to be utilised to dry the ink film

list steps to incorporate in-line processes into the make ready

explain how equipment used in in-line processing can be protected against damage during set-up

Proofing and adjustment

outline methods to minimise waste during make ready

list procedures to be adopted to have the print approved

list quality control measurements applied to the print to test against known standards

outline checks on the initial print prior to running

explain how settings to be adjusted are determined

summarise the process to plot success of the machine adjustment

summarise how to record final results for future reference

Source information

outline a range of information sources relevant to basic relief printing.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the printing field of work and include access to:

special purpose tools, equipment and materials

reel- or sheet-fed platen

cylinder or rotary printing machines

machine manuals, safety and other documentation relevant to basic relief printing.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPPRN394 Produce complex relief printed product

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to safely operate, monitor and clean a platen, cylinder or rotary printing machine using an efficient non-routine production flow.

It applies to skilled individuals working as print machinists in the printing and graphic arts industry who set up, operate and monitor equipment and machinery, and who may have to prepare material and apply solutions to problems. They may also provide leadership and guidance to others with some limited responsibility for the output of others.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Printing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Maintain non-routine operation of reel system	1.1 Reel stand and rewind section are monitored and adjusted to maintain correct tension, avoid marks, blemishes or damage to finished product, and to ensure efficient continuous operation 1.2 Web control system is monitored and adjusted to ensure correct tension and accurate continuous positioning of the web for efficient operation 1.3 Substrate is added to and removed from the process according to job instructions 1.4 Sheeting section is monitored and adjusted to ensure quality and efficient product delivery 1.5 Set-off / marking prevention system is monitored and adjusted to ensure quality of the printed product meets the approved proof standard
2. Maintain operation of sheet system	2.1 Feeder and delivery are monitored and adjusted to ensure continuous and efficient feed to machine 2.2 Sheet pick-up and transport system is monitored and adjusted to ensure accurate and continuous sheet handling and efficient operation 2.3 Transfer systems are monitored and adjusted to ensure correct and continuous sheet handling and efficient operation 2.4 Substrate is added to and removed from process according to job instructions
3. Maintain complex relief printing process	3.1 Relief polymer forme or plate cylinder condition is monitored and adjusted to ensure quality of the printed product meets the sample sheet standard 3.2 Relief polymer impression surface condition is monitored and adjusted to ensure quality of the printed product meets the sample sheet standard 3.3 Relief polymer inking system is monitored and adjusted to ensure quality of the printed product meets the sample sheet standard 3.4 Drying systems are monitored and adjusted to ensure quality of the printed product meets the approved proof standard
4. Maintain production process	4.1 Production process is operated in association with fellow workers and according to company specifications and planned daily schedule 4.2 In-line printing/converting/binding/finishing processes are monitored and adjusted to ensure quality of the product meets the approved proof standard 4.3 Production is maintained within work health and safety (WHS) requirements and company and manufacturer’s specifications 4.4 Manual and/or automatic control is used according to specification 4.5 Performance is monitored and verified using the process control system according to enterprise procedures 4.6 Ink performance, colour, register and embellishment of print are monitored and adjusted throughout production run 4.7 Production difficulties are anticipated and preventive action is taken to prevent occurrence by timely intervention 4.8 Process adjustments to eliminate problems are reported according to enterprise procedures 4.9 Faulty performance of equipment is identified and reported according to enterprise procedures 4.10 Waste is sorted according to enterprise procedures
5. Identify and rectify problems	5.1 Problems in relief machine operation are identified and reported according to enterprise procedures 5.2 Faulty performance of equipment is identified and reported according to enterprise procedures 5.3 Adjustments or corrections are carried out according to specified procedures 5.4 Relief machine operation is checked to ensure correct operation
6. Conduct shutdown of production process	6.1 Correct shutdown sequence is followed according to manufacturer’s specifications and enterprise procedures 6.2 Shutdown is conducted in association with fellow workers and in compliance with WHS requirements 6.3 Unused ink is correctly labelled and stored according to manufacturer’s/supplier’s specifications and enterprise procedures 6.4 Solid and liquid waste is removed from operating area and recycled or disposed of, where required, according to regulatory requirements and enterprise procedures 6.5 Machine faults requiring repair are identified and reported to designated person according to enterprise procedures 6.6 Repair/adjustment is verified prior to resumption of operations
7. Clean and wash up printing machine at end of print run	7.1 Cylinders, plate and roller surfaces are cleaned ready for next run 7.2 Inking system is washed ready for next run, and liquid waste is disposed of according to company and regulatory requirements 7.3 In-line printing/converting/binding/finishing units are cleaned ready for next run 7.4 Reel feed, transportation and delivery systems are disengaged and cleaned ready for next run 7.5 Sheet feed, transport and delivery systems are disengaged and cleaned ready for next run 7.6 Production records or other documentation are accurately completed where required by enterprise procedures

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.3, 2.4, 4.1, 4.3, 4.4, 6.1, 6.3	Recognises and interprets text to establish job requirements from information contained within relevant procedures and specifications
Writing	4.8, 4.9, 5.1, 5.2, 6.3, 6.5, 6.6, 7.6	Enters routine data associated with production processes and enterprise procedures
Oral Communication	1.3, 4.1, 4.3, 4.4, 4.8, 4.9, 5.1, 5.2, 6.1-6.3, 6.5, 6.6	Speaks clearly using appropriate vocabulary, tone and pace to report faults and discrepancies
Numeracy	1.3, 2.4	Interprets and analyses a range of mathematical information used in familiar and routine tasks
Navigate the world of work	1.4, 1.5, 2.1-2.4, 3.1-3.4, 4.1-4.10, 5.1-5.4, 6.1-6.5, 7.1-7.6	Recognises and follows explicit and implicit protocols and meets expectations associated with own role Recognises and follows all procedures for cleaning and maintenance of equipment, incorporating regulatory requirements and enterprise procedures
Interact with others	1.3, 4.1, 4.3, 4.4, 4.8, 4.9, 5.1, 5.2, 6.1-6.3, 6.5, 6.6	Cooperates with others as part of familiar routine activities, and contributes to specific activities requiring joint responsibility and accountability Understands what to communicate, with whom and how, in routine work situations
Get the work done	1.1-1.5, 2.1-2.4, 3.1-3.4, 4.1-4.10, 5.1-5.4, 6.1-6.6, 7.1-7.5	Determines priorities and sequences steps involved in clearly defined, familiar tasks Recognises and anticipates an increasing range of familiar problems, their symptoms and causes, actively looking for early warning signs and implementing contingency plans Follows routine procedures for using digital technology by reading data from electronic monitoring and control systems

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPPRN394 Produce complex relief printed product	ICPPR394A Produce complex relief printed product	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRN394 Produce complex relief printed product

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

accurately monitor production output and make necessary adjustments to maintain print quality on a relief printing machine while producing a complex print on TWO occasions (if possible using different substrates and at least two in-line processes) according to job specifications, enterprise procedures and work health and safety (WHS) requirements.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

outline major WHS concerns of setting up the reel transportation system

describe possible causes of reel wandering and web breaks at the unwind unit

outline print faults resulting from the reel being run out of centre

outline major WHS concerns of setting up the sheet transportation system

identify the result of worn suckers at the feeder suction head

describe the two-sheet detection on the machine, and the amount of movement the sheet should have when being registered by the side lay

outline possible causes of mis-register of the sheet feeder and visible signs of the sheet being registered in the feeder

describe a gripper malfunction of sheet control and transfer, and the sheet transfer mechanisms that require adjusting

identify causes of the feeder stack becoming uneven, and the result if the feeder stack not loaded level

describe the process of reel delivery for rewinding and sheeting and the associated WHS risks

list the safety feature in the delivery system if the web jams up, and reasons for sheet cut-off wander

describe the effect of poorly adjusted nip rollers when rewinding and sheeting

outline the effect machine speed has on sheet delivery, and the advantage of spraying moving sheets with anti-set-off powder in delivery

outline items in the delivery that can cause marking on the printed image, and remedial steps necessary to eliminate marking

outline faults from incorrectly set grippers in the transfer section of a machine, and devices to adjust to maintain sheet control in the delivery

identify the result if the plate lifts at the grip edge during a print run, and build-up of ink on the impression cylinder affecting printed product

list possible causes of ink leaking back in the duct

outline the problem of paper surface picking being rectified

identify causes of diminished impression during the print run

identify causes of plate surface prematurely wearing during production

describe possible issues if eating or drinking near the machine when using UV inks

identify link between driers and set-off and marking, and what causes UV ink to dry

identify causes of substrate blistering and the effect of incorrect drying temperature on finished product

outline major WHS concerns when operating cutting devices, and importance of checking consistency of the cutting and creasing unit

identify the result of excessive pressure on the slitters, and the benefit of die cutting using a rotary die

outline advantages of using a perforation wheel to perforate

describe the effect of inadequate communication within the work team on a relief printing machine

describe importance of safety features within organisation and in maintaining effective production

identify ramifications if machine guards are removed and/or micro switches are disconnected on a machine

explain legal responsibility for removal of machine guards and/or disconnection of micro switches

identify measurement other than optimum solid ink density that can be used to assess print quality

identify the most accurate method of checking register during a production run

explain actions to take when production problems are anticipated and to eliminate further processing of unacceptable printed product

describe the effect on a stack of paper if relative humidity is increased in the press room, and the procedure to care for a newly delivered skid of paper to the press room

explain reasons for sorting waste and advantages of keeping reusable waste

explain industry standards to enhance effective communication with clients and necessary procedures clients should follow to approve a printed product

explain when it is necessary to call service personnel to correct a machine problem

outline enterprise procedures to report any machine operating problems

describe the result if correct shutdown procedures are not followed, and correct shutdown procedures to be followed with fellow workers

explain advantages of proper labelling and storage of excess inks and materials

explain importance of clearly labelling printed product prior to removal from the press room

explain WHS requirements for handling ink and cleaning printing cylinders

explain cleaning and washing techniques for the printing unit prior to the next print run and procedures for storing plates so as to minimise damage

outline WHS precautions for cleaning the feed, transportation, delivery and in-line sections of the machine

explain importance of maintaining a clean substrate handling section of the machine

explain importance of completing records used in final analysis of the job, and benefits for future jobs

identify machine manuals, safety and other documentation relevant to the production of complex relief printed products and other sources of relevant information.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the printing field of work and include access to special purpose tools, equipment and materials.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPPRN411 Mount and demount flexographic plates for complex printing

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to mount and demount flexographic plates for non-routine printing.

It applies to individuals working in the printing and graphic pre-press sector of the printing and graphic arts industry. They design layouts and assemble text and graphics into page formats for printing, and set up, monitor and operate equipment and machinery as well as apply solutions to a defined range of problems associated with the print medium, and analyse and evaluate information from a variety of sources. They may also provide leadership and guidance to others with some limited responsibility for the output of others.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Printing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Confirm non-routine job specifications	1.1 Job requirements are read and interpreted from job documentation or production control system 1.2 Set up is planned and carried out correctly in minimum time with minimum wastage 1.3 Prior inspections are completed and signed off
2. Prepare flexographic plates	2.1 Plate height is measured according to non-routine job specifications 2.2 Plates are trimmed and prepared according to mounting system requirements 2.3 Mounting adhesive is selected to achieve correct Pitch Circle Diameter (PCD) of specified plate cylinders and gears
3. Prepare plate cylinder	3.1 Plate cylinders/seamless sleeves are selected, cleaned and prepared and correct gears are mounted OR 3.2 Sleeves and correct gears on mandrels are selected, cleaned, prepared and mounted to meet non-routine job specifications 3.3 Total Indicated Runout (TIR) is checked to be within specified tolerances on plate cylinders 3.4 Selected mounting adhesive is applied to plate cylinders
4. Mount and demount flexographic plates on mounting/proofing machine	4.1 Plates are prepared and mounted on cylinders using pin mounts or microdot systems or sleeves according to chart number/print direction OR 4.2 Plate mounting sheet is prepared to meet non-routine job specifications 4.3 Plates are mounted to position on plate mounting sheet or camera targets 4.4 Plate mounting sheet is installed and tensioned onto plate cylinder to specified chart number/print direction 4.5 Correct cleaning solution and brush is used to clean plate 4.6 Correct tools are used to demount plate without damaging plate 4.7 Plate is visually checked for damage 4.8 Plate is prepared for storage and then stored correctly according to enterprise procedures

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 2.1, 3.2, 4.2	Recognises and interprets text to establish job requirements from information contained within relevant procedures and specifications
Writing	1.3	Completes workplace forms accurately
Numeracy	2.1, 2.2, 2.3, 3.3, 4.1, 4.4	Uses simple mathematical calculations and arranges sequential numerical information
Navigate the world of work	4.8	Complies with legislative requirements and follows organisational policies and procedures relevant to own role
Get the work done	1.1-1.3, 2.1-2.3, 3.1-3.4, 4.1-4.8	Takes responsibility for planning and organising own workload, identifying ways of sequencing and combining elements for greater efficiency and assembles required resources Responds to predictable problems and implements standard or logical solutions related to role in immediate work environment Reads data from electronic monitoring and control systems

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPPRN411 Mount and demount flexographic plates for complex printing	ICPPR411C Mount and demount flexographic plates for complex printing	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRN411 Mount and demount flexographic plates for complex printing

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

prepare and mount flexographic plates and plate cylinders for complex printing to meet job specifications, including checking registration if necessary

mount and demount plates and install in a flexographic printing machine for a variety of different complex print jobs on TWO occasions according to job specifications.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

explain the need to ensure job specifications are read and properly understood

describe production problems that could be created by not reading or understanding the job specifications

identify who to discuss any production problems with

list work health and safety (WHS) concerns of mounting and demounting plates

describe the most common cause of photopolymer plates crazing on the image side

explain the importance of printing plate resiliency

list the main advantage of using thin photopolymer plates in process printing

outline faults that may be detected on new plates

identify type of solvents used on photopolymer plates

describe benefits of optical mounting

explain the purpose of binding plates after mounting

outline possible print faults that could be eliminated by using cushion mount

describe the result of air being trapped under plates

explain how to select the correct cushion mount for a particular job

explain how to eliminate low spots

explain how to minimise press bounce in jobs that are mounted more than one across

list some possible causes of print slur

explain how to prevent or minimise plate lifting

explain the method used to make registering the job easier on the press

locate machine manuals, safety and other documentation relevant to this task, and explain the information contained in them

identify other sources of available information.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the printing field of work and include access to special purpose tools, equipment and materials.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPPRN413 Set up for complex flexographic printing

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to set up machines for non-routine flexographic printing. It includes the ability to conduct a proof run and adjust settings to ensure production speeds are attained.

It applies to individuals working as print machinists in the printing and graphic arts industry. They prepare material, set up, monitor and operate equipment and machinery, apply solutions to a defined range of problems associated with the print medium, and analyse and evaluate information from a variety of sources. They may also provide leadership and guidance to others with some limited responsibility for the output of others.

Mounting and demounting plates is covered in ICPPRN411 Mount and demount flexographic plates for complex printing.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Printing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Confirm non-routine job specifications	1.1 Job requirements are read and interpreted from job documentation or production control system 1.2 Set up is planned and carried out correctly in minimum time with minimum wastage 1.3 Availability of all job related components is checked 1.4 Proofed job is checked for conformance with job specifications
2. Set up reel transportation and delivery system on web-fed machine	2.1 Reels are checked for treatment levels, coatings and printing side, and age of product 2.2 Unwind reels are secured on reel shaft 2.3 Reels are correctly positioned on unwind stand 2.4 Press is webbed for surface or reverse or perfecting printing according to non-routine job specifications 2.5 Edge guide is centred and set to non-routine job specifications 2.6 Unwind tension is set to suit substrate 2.7 Rewind tension is set to suit substrate 2.8 Positively Infinitely Variable (PIV) drive is set for appropriate tensioning of substrate
3. Select and prepare inks and solvents	3.1 Inks and solvents are selected according to job specifications and end-user requirements 3.2 Quality and suitability of inks and solvents are checked and appropriate action is taken 3.3 Inks and solvents are prepared according to work health and safety (WHS) requirements, and manufacturer’s/supplier’s instructions with suitable precautions to minimise waste 3.4 Correct colour and weight/volume of ink are mixed and viscosities checked and modified according to press requirements and non-routine job specifications 3.5 Ink formula and approved colour draw-downs are appropriately recorded 3.6 Inks and solvents are appropriately labelled, handled and stored according to manufacturer’s/supplier’s instructions and relevant hazardous liquids storage regulations
4. Set up machine for complex flexographic printing	4.1 Flexographic plate cylinders are installed, and register adjustments centred OR 4.2 Sleeves are installed in press and register adjustments made OR 4.3 Plate mounting sheets are mounted on cylinders in press and register adjustments made 4.4 Plate cylinders are gauged up or pre-set to impression 4.5 Anilox rollers are selected to suit individual colour and plate reproduction requirements for each unit 4.6 Appropriate ink metering system is selected for each unit 4.7 Inking system is set up and roller nips/blades are set correctly 4.8 Ink circulation is maintained at correct level and flow for machine 4.9 Viscosities are adjusted according to job specifications 4.10 Air volume and drier temperatures curing units are selected to suit inks, substrate, solvents and, according to job specifications 4.11 Air volume is adjusted between colours to maximise drying and minimise air overspill
5. Set up in-line units for basic process/es	5.1 Minor in-line printing/converting/binding units are set up for basic process/es and adjusted according to machine requirements and job specifications 5.2 Assistance is given in set-up of major in-line printing/converting/binding units
6. Conduct proof run	6.1 Material to be used for proof is organised correctly 6.2 Press is set up and operated according to WHS guidelines 6.3 Print impressions are set to minimum kiss impression 6.4 Web tensions are correctly set at unwind, between stations and rewind 6.5 Drying is checked as sufficient to key ink to the substrate 6.6 Viscosities are adjusted to obtain correct colour at proof speed and checked against colour matching system 6.7 Substrate is checked against job specifications
7. Organise proof inspection and/or testing	7.1 Proof is visually inspected and/or tested or laboratory testing is organised according to enterprise procedures 7.2 Production does not commence without client approval or authority where appropriate
8. Readjust settings to production speed	8.1 Production speed print results are interpreted and appropriate adjustments are made to press, ink and substrate settings 8.2 Adjustments are made according to product specifications and press performance 8.3 Web is spliced at production speed and further samples are obtained for quality inspections at appropriate intervals 8.4 Press settings are documented and samples are retained

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 1.4, 2.4, 2.5, 3.1, 3.3, 3.4, 3.6, 4.9, 4.10, 5.1, 6.7, 8.1, 8.2	Recognises and interprets text to establish job requirements from information contained within relevant instructions, procedures and specifications
Writing	3.5, 3.6, 7.2, 8.4	Completes records accurately and according to workplace requirements
Oral Communication	7.2	Participates effectively in spoken interactions using appropriate vocabulary, and employing questioning and listening techniques to gain approvals
Numeracy	3.4, 8.1	Interprets and analyses a range of mathematical information used in familiar and routine tasks
Navigate the world of work	6.2, 7.1, 7.2	Complies with legislative requirements and follows organisational policies and procedures relevant to own role Recognises boundaries of own role responsibilities
Interact with others	5.2, 7.2	Collaborates with others to complete tasks according to requirements Follows accepted communication practices and protocols when seeking approval
Get the work done	1.1-1.4, 2.1-2.9, 3.1, 3.2, 3.4, 4.1-4.11, 5.1, 5.2, 6.1-6.7, 7.1, 8.1-8.4	Takes responsibility for planning and organising own workload using analytical processes to decide on a course of action, and assembles resources required Implements actions as per instructions, making adjustments if necessary Recognises and takes responsibility for addressing predictable, and some less predictable, problems in familiar work contexts Reads data from electronic monitoring and control systems

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPPRN413 Set up for complex flexographic printing	ICPPR413C Set up for complex flexographic printing	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRN413 Set up for complex flexographic printing

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

set up flexographic printing machines for non-routine print jobs, conduct a proof run and adjust settings to ensure production speeds are attained

demonstrate use of computerised control, monitoring and data entry systems if available and appropriate

set up a flexographic printing machine for a complex job on TWO occasions (if possible using different substrates and if possible including at least two in-line processes) according to manufacturer’s and job specifications, and enterprise procedures.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

describe production problems that could be created by not reading or understanding the job specifications

list work health and safety (WHS) factors to consider when mounting and proofing flexographic plates

describe the most common cause of photopolymer plates crazing on the image side

explain the importance of printing plate resiliency

list main advantages of using thin photopolymer plates in process printing

outline faults that may be detected on new plates

identify types of solvents used on photopolymer plates

describe benefits of optical mounting

explain the purpose of binding plates after mounting

outline possible print faults that could be eliminated by using a cushion mount

list WHS factors to consider when installing printing cylinders or sleeves

describe precautions to ensure the plates and cylinders or sleeves are not damaged during installation

explain what to check to ensure plates and cylinders or sleeves have been installed correctly

list WHS precautions to be observed when webbing up the machine

explain how to determine position of the reel

demonstrate how the substrate is pulled into the machine

outline consequences of insufficient unwind tension

describe consequences of excessive unwind tens

outline the function of the ‘Dancer’ roller on a web machine

explain the function of the PIV unit

demonstrate knowledge of how to make adjustments to the PIV

describe the function of the lay-on roller

outline effects of excessive lay-on roller pressure

describe what can happen if the web is not spliced correctly

explain how the particular web viewing device works

list WHS precautions for setting up the delivery

explain how the web is controlled in the rewind unit

describe the result of incorrect rewind tension

outline remedial steps if there is a possibility of ink marking in the rewind

explain the function the air blast plays in the delivery of sheets

list WHS precautions for preparing inks and additives

identify details to check an ink’s suitability for the printing process

outline special end-use requirements that may be necessary

describe the main functions of a pigmented extender used in flexographic printing

explain the purpose of adding plasticisers to flexographic inks

list additives used in flexographic inks

outline the range, in seconds, for zahn cup measurements

describe the effect foaming has in a zahn cup when measuring ink viscosity

identify recommended pH range when printing with aqueous inks

list precautions to observe to minimise waste when preparing ink

describe how to determine shelf life of most inks

outline conditions relevant to storing inks and additives

list conventions for labelling mixed ink

list WHS factors to consider when setting up the machine

identify advantages of centring all machine controls

describe checks to be made on cylinders and gears

outline checks to do prior to cylinder or sleeve installation

identify the angle chamber blades should be set at

outline the main advantage of gauging up and dry register prior to printing a job

describe the cell count of the anilox roller used when printing solids

explain why water treatment additives should be used in a central impression drum and chill roller coolant system

list advantages of laser engraved ceramic anilox rollers

demonstrate knowledge of the anilox roller and what it measures

list possible reasons for anilox wear

describe the type of job printed using a hexagonal cell configuration

identify the recommended web temperature when printing polypropylene film

explain the method of drying used when printing on polythene by the flexographic process

list factors affecting drying rate of liquid inks

list factors affecting drying of aqueous inks

identify the operating range of UV lamps

list WHS precautions to be observed when slitting on the machine

explain how a cold seal is formed

outline reasons for a printed product to be punched

describe what to consider when setting hole punching in relation to repeat length

outline consequences of excessive pressure on the slitters

describe why is it necessary to graduate drying speeds of each progressive colour, so first-down colours dry faster the subsequent colours

explain why, in flexographic printing, that as press speed increases so does colour strength

list causes of a decrease in web tension

outline consequences of increasing rewind tension after the roll has been partially rewound

identify the major cause of a telescopic roll

describe print characteristics related to excessive printing pressure

list causes of picking when printing multicoloured work

identify print faults from using an over-reduced ink

outline problems that can cause lateral streaks in uneven printing

describe causes of moire patterns when printing by the flexographic process

outline consequences of air being trapped under mounted plates

name the instrument used to identify retained solvent trapped in the print

explain the purpose of taking Dyne readings

explain the purpose of the crinkle test when testing an ink

outline consequences if an excessive final drying temperature was used when printing polypropylene film

identify the ink property that can be adjusted to reduce dot gain

demonstrate understanding of correctly checking ink viscosity while using ink pumps

identify problems resulting from excessive use of slow solvents

explain why laminating inks, once printed, appear dull and become easy to scratch

outline the result of excessive print area tension

list some of the problems the printer may associate with cold seals

locate machine manuals, safety and other documentation relevant to this task, and outline information included in these documents.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the printing field of work and include access to special purpose tools, equipment and materials, including a narrow flexographic press.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPPRN414 Produce specialised flexographic printed product

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to produce specialised flexographic printing that needs a certain amount of problem-solving and experimentation with the substrate and press settings.

It applies to skilled individuals working as print machinists in the printing and graphic arts industry who prepare material, set up, monitor, operate and clean equipment and machinery, problem-solve, analyse and evaluate information from a variety of sources. They may also provide leadership and guidance to others with some limited responsibility for the output of others.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Printing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Maintain specialised flexographic printing process	1.1 Flexographic plate and plate cylinder or sleeve condition is monitored, evaluated and adjusted to ensure quality of printed product meets the approved proof standard 1.2 Flexographic impression roller condition is monitored and evaluated to ensure the quality of printed product meets the approved proof standard 1.3 Flexographic inking system and doctor blade condition is monitored, evaluated and adjusted to ensure quality of specialised printed product meets the approved proof standard 1.4 Drying systems are monitored, evaluated and adjusted to ensure quality of the specialised printed product meets the approved proof standard
2. Maintain specialised production process	2.1 Production process is maintained in association with fellow workers and according to enterprise procedures and planned daily schedule 2.2 Production is maintained according to work health and safety (WHS) requirements, manufacturer’s specifications and enterprise procedures 2.3 Manual and/or automatic control is used according to job specifications 2.4 Performance is monitored, adjusted and verified using the process control system according to enterprise procedures 2.5 Ink performance, colour, register and position of print are monitored, evaluated and adjusted throughout production run
3. Tune and adjust machinery	3.1 Idiosyncrasies of machines are reviewed and adjustments or tuning undertaken to compensate, or exploit the idiosyncrasy, within manufacturer’s specifications 3.2 Options are assessed to determine most effective/efficient method of production, ensuring highest quality and yield from machinery 3.3 Test run confirms correct options and settings or the need for further adjustment or tuning to meet quality standards 3.4 Options and recommendations are documented for future reference according to enterprise procedures 3.5 Instruction on new practices is provided to machine operator or finisher, if required
4. Troubleshoot machinery and material problems	4.1 Corrective or preventive action is recommended and implemented where appropriate 4.2 Changes are communicated to relevant personnel in a logical and easily understood manner 4.3 Changes are monitored to confirm improvement to production efficiency 4.4 Ongoing problems are reported according to enterprise procedures
5. Conduct shutdown of production process	5.1 Correct shutdown sequence is followed according to manufacturer’s specifications and enterprise procedures 5.2 Shutdown is conducted in association with fellow workers and in compliance with WHS requirements 5.3 Reels and cores are removed from press 5.4 Unused ink is drained back into containers and correctly labelled and stored according to manufacturer’s/supplier’s specifications and enterprise procedures 5.5 Solid and liquid waste is removed from operating area and recycled or disposed of, where required, according to regulatory requirements and enterprise procedures 5.6 Product is removed from operating area

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	2.2, 2.3, 3.1, 5.1, 5.4	Recognises and interprets text to establish job requirements from information contained within relevant instructions, procedures and specifications
Writing	3.4, 3.5, 4.1, 4.4, 5.4	Completes records, forms and other documents accurately and according to workplace requirements
Oral Communication	2.1, 3.5, 4.1, 4.2, 4.4, 5.2	Participates effectively in discussions using appropriate vocabulary, questioning and listening skills
Navigate the world of work	2.1, 2.2, 3.4, 4.4, 5.1, 5.2, 5.4, 5.5	Complies with legislative requirements and follows organisational policies and procedures relevant to own role
Interact with others	2.1, 3.5, 4.1, 4.2, 4.4, 5.2	Collaborates and cooperates with others to achieve joint outcomes Contributes to workgroup discussions using accepted conventions Selects and uses appropriate communication practices when reporting issues
Get the work done	1.1-1.4, 2.1-2.5, 3.1, 3.4, 4.1-4.4, 5.1-5.6	Determines priorities and sequences steps involved in clearly defined, familiar tasks and identifies and assembles required resources Makes rapid decisions when required, drawing on in-depth understanding of a situation and experience of decision-making Responds to predictable problems and implements standard or logical solutions related to role in the immediate work environment Reads data from electronic monitoring and control systems

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPPRN414 Produce specialised flexographic printed product	ICPPR414C Produce specialised flexographic printed product	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRN414 Produce specialised flexographic printed product

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

safely monitor production output and make necessary adjustments to maintain print quality on a flexographic machine while producing a complex print on TWO occasions (if possible using different substrates and, if possible, including at least two in-line processes) according to job specifications, enterprise procedures and work health and safety (WHS) guidelines.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

identify causes of reel wander and the print fault that results from the reel being run out of centre

identify causes of web breaking at the unwind unit, and possible faults in the unwind section that cause a web break

outline the difference between a ‘flying paster’ and ‘zero speed’ type reel-stand

outline WHS risks associated with rewinding and sheeting, and identify the safety feature in the delivery system for when the web jams up

identify causes of sheet cut-off wander

outline the effect of poorly adjusted nip rollers when rewinding and sheeting, and what happens if the plate lifts on the leading edge during a print run

describe the effect on printed product of a build-up of ink on the impression cylinder, and the cause of ink foaming in the ink tray

identify the effect of too much reducer in the ink

name the action that reduces doctor blade wear

describe why all solvents need to be removed from the final ink film

identify link between driers and set off and marking and the causes of UV ink drying

describe faults that cause substrate distortion

outline the effect in the chillers if the drying temperature is too low, and the effect of incorrect drying temperature on the finished product

describe the effect of eating or drinking near the machine when using UV inks

describe the need to frequently examine in-line components of the job

outline consistency checks for the punching unit

describe the result of excessive pressure on the slitters

outline safety features within the organisation that aid in maintaining effective production

outline the legal responsibility for removal of machine guards and/or disconnection of micro switches

describe the effect of inadequate communication within the work team on a flexographic printing machine

describe ramifications if machine guards are removed and/or micro switches are disconnected on a machine

outline other measurement, besides optimum solid ink density, to assess print quality

describe the most accurate method of checking register during a production run

outline the need to take immediate action when production problems are anticipated, and action taken to eliminate further processing of unacceptable printed product

outline the result to the substrate if relative humidity is increased in the press room, and how to care for a newly delivered substrate to the press room

describe the process for waste sorting and the advantage of keeping reusable waste

list industry standards to enhance effective communication with clients, and procedures clients should follow to approve a printed product

identify times when it is necessary to call service personnel to correct a machine problem

outline enterprise procedures in place to report any machine operating problems, and what happens if correct shutdown procedures are not followed with fellow workers

describe advantages of proper labelling and storage of excess inks and materials

describe the process for clear labelling of printed product prior to removal from the press room

outline operations required for printed reels after they are removed from the printing machine, and how to store printed jobs after they are removed from the printing machine

outline use of completed records in the final analysis of the job, and benefits of comprehensive records when considering production of future jobs

identify machine manuals, safety and other documentation relevant to this task, where are they kept and information included in these documents.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the printing field of work and include access to special purpose tools, equipment and materials, including a reel-fed flexographic press.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPPRN421 Set up for complex gravure printing

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to set up non-routine gravure printing machines for non-routine print jobs. It includes the ability to conduct a proof run and adjust settings to ensure production speeds are attained.

It applies to individuals working as print machinists in the printing and graphic arts industry. They prepare material, set up, monitor and operate equipment and machinery, apply solutions to a defined range of problems associated with the print medium and analyse and evaluate information from a variety of sources. They may also provide leadership and guidance to others with some limited responsibility for the output of others.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Printing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Confirm non-routine job specifications	1.1 Job requirements are read and interpreted from job documentation or production control system 1.2 Set up is planned and carried out correctly in minimum time with minimum wastage 1.3 Availability of all job related components is checked
2. Set up reels	2.1 Unwind and rewind reels are set up and adjusted according to job specifications 2.2 Webbing procedures are carried out according to non-routine job specifications 2.3 Web-control system is set up and adjusted according to job specifications 2.4 Reels are spliced/joined according to job specifications 2.5 Printed web viewing devices are set up and adjusted according to job specifications 2.6 Folder and sheeter are set up and adjusted according to job specifications 2.7 Set off / marking prevention devices are set up and adjusted according to job specifications
3. Select and prepare inks and additives	3.1 Inks, dyes or additives are selected according to job specifications and end-user requirements 3.2 Quality and suitability of inks, dyes or additives are checked and appropriate action is taken 3.3 Inks, dyes and additives are prepared according to WHS requirements, and manufacturer’s/supplier’s instructions with suitable precautions to minimise waste 3.4 Correct colour and weight/volume of ink are mixed and prepared to match requirements of the printing process and job specifications 3.5 Formulation of ink, colour match and approved colour are appropriately recorded 3.6 Inks, dyes and additives are appropriately labelled, handled and stored according to manufacturer’s/supplier’s instructions to prevent damage and hazards to personnel, and to prolong shelf life
4. Set up machine for complex gravure printing	4.1 Gravure cylinders are selected, installed, set up and adjusted according to job specifications 4.2 Impression roller is set up and adjusted according to job specifications 4.3 Inking system / doctor blade is set up and adjusted according to the gravure process and job specifications 4.4 Drying system is set up and adjusted according to job specifications
5. Conduct proof run	5.1 Material to be used for proof is organised correctly 5.2 Machine is operated according to manufacturer’s and enterprise procedures to produce a specified proof 5.3 Machine is operated according to manufacturer’s and enterprise procedures to produce a specified proof 5.4 Production does not commence without client approval or authority where appropriate 5.5 Results are interpreted and adjustments are carried out according to product and machine specifications to determine adjustment requirements

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 2.1-2.7, 3.1, 3.3, 3.4, 3.6, 4.1-4.4, 5.5	Recognises and interprets text to establish job requirements from information contained within relevant instructions, procedures and specifications
Writing	3.5, 3.6, 5.4	Completes records and documents accurately and according to workplace requirements
Oral Communication	5.4	Participates effectively in spoken interactions using appropriate vocabulary, questioning and listening techniques to gain approvals
Navigate the world of work	3.3, 3.5, 3.6, 5.2-5.4	Complies with legislative requirements and follows organisational policies and procedures relevant to own role
Interact with others	5.4	Follows accepted communication practices and protocols when seeking approval to commence production
Get the work done	1.1-1.3, 2.1-2.7, 3.1-3.4, 3.6, 4.1-4.4, 5.1-5.3, 5.5	Takes responsibility for planning and organising own workload using analytical processes to decide on a course of action, and assembles required resources Implements actions as per instructions, making adjustments if necessary Responds to predictable problems and implements standard or logical solutions related to role in immediate work environment Reads data from electronic monitoring and control systems

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPPRN421 Set up for complex gravure printing	ICPPR421C Set up for complex gravure printing	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRN421 Set up for complex gravure printing

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

set up a gravure printing machine for a complex job on TWO occasions (if possible using different substrates and, if possible, including at least two in-line processes) according to manufacturer’s specifications and enterprise procedures

conduct proof run and adjust settings to ensure production speeds are attained

demonstrate use of control, monitoring and data entry systems.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

explain why it is necessary to ensure job specifications are read and properly understood

identify production problems that could eventuate if job specifications are not read and properly understood

identify who production problems should be discussed with

list work health and safety (WHS) precautions for installing printing cylinders on the machine

demonstrate knowledge to determine the optimum print sequence

identify the visual aid on the cylinder that identifies colour of ink to be used

outline precautions to ensure the cylinders are not damaged during installation

list WHS precautions for webbing up the machine

explain how to determine position of the reel

explain what can happen if brake tension is not set correctly

outline the function of the ‘Dancer’ roller on a web machine

describe consequences if the web is not spliced correctly

demonstrate knowledge of how the particular web viewing device works

explain the principle of ESA roller operation on the gravure printing machine

name the type of substrate used on the ESA roller

list WHS precautions for setting up the delivery

explain how the web is controlled in the rewind unit

describe the result of incorrect rewind tension

outline remedial steps if there is a possibility of the ink marking in the rewind

describe problems that could be attributed to a blunt knife when sheeting

explain the function air blast plays in the delivery of sheets

list WHS precautions for preparing inks and additives

identify details to check an ink’s suitability for the printing process

outline special end-use requirements that may be necessary

explain why additives are used in gravure inks

outline the range, in seconds, for zahn cup measurements

describe the effect foaming has in a zahn cup when measuring ink viscosity

demonstrate knowledge of why pigmented ink should be brought to operating temperature before correcting viscosity

identify essential checks to be made

list advantages of using automatic viscosity controllers

outline precautions to minimise waste when preparing ink

describe how to determine shelf life of most inks

outline conditions relevant to storage of inks and additives

list conventions to adhere to when labelling mixed inks

identify advantages of using automatic viscosity controllers

describe precautions to minimise waste when preparing ink

describe how to determine shelf life of most inks

outline conditions relevant to storage of inks and additives

list conventions to adhere to when labelling mixed inks

list WHS factors for setting up the machine

describe the function of chill rollers on a machine

outline main advantages of gauging up and dry register prior to printing a job

identify the consequence of excess printing pressure

explain how pressure applied to the doctor blade is determined

describe print faults that can be caused by excessive overspill of air from the inter-colour drier

identify the recommended air ratio for efficient inter-colour drying

outline advantages of using high-velocity air in the drying system

list WHS precautions for slitting on the machine

identify the pre-heat web temperature required for lamination

outline reasons for a printed product to be punched

describe what should be considered when setting hole punching in relation to repeat length

explain the purpose of the dwell when cutting and creasing in-line

demonstrate knowledge of how to control the ratio of print to in-line speed

describe the consequence of excessive pressure on the slitters

outline what causes doctor blade wear on a gravure printing unit

explain how to reduce doctor blade wear

demonstrate how to determine optimum make ready speed for the job

explain how the steps involved in the make ready are communicated to other team members

describe why it is necessary to grade drying speeds of each progressive colour, so first-down colours dry faster the subsequent colours

list causes of a decrease in web tension

outline consequences of increasing rewind tension after the roll has been partially rewound

identify the major cause of a telescopic roll

explain how to test metallised film to find out which is the correct side to print on

describe how metallised surface is measured for coating thickness

outline the effect of annealing on aluminium foil

explain purpose of using thermal imaging face stocks

describe how substrates are metallised

identify client requirements for bar codes

describe print characteristics related to excessive printing pressure

explain what causes picking when printing multicoloured work

outline print faults that can result from using an over-reduced ink

describe causes of moire patterns when printing by the gravure process

name the instrument used to identify retained solvent trapped in the print

explain the purpose of taking Dyne readings

explain the purpose of the crinkle test when testing an ink

describe print faults resulting from a worn doctor blade

demonstrate knowledge of correct checks for ink viscosity while using ink pumps

identify problems that result from excessive use of slow solvents

explain why laminating inks, once printed, appear dull and easy to scratch

outline the result of excessive print area tension

list some of the problems the printer may associate with cold seals

identify who has responsibility for the final say regarding job approval

locate machine manuals, safety and other documentation relevant to this task, and outline the information included in these documents.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the printing field of work and include access to special purpose tools, equipment and materials, including a gravure printing machine.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPPRN422 Produce specialised gravure printed product

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to operate a gravure press, ensuring an efficient production flow for specialised jobs while maintaining product quality standards. Any production problems are anticipated and rectified with minimum downtime. The machine is correctly shut down and cleaned according to work health and safety (WHS) guidelines.

It applies to individuals working as print machinists in the printing and graphic arts industry. They prepare material, set up, monitor and operate equipment and machinery, apply solutions to a defined range of problems associated with the print medium, and analyse and evaluate information from a variety of sources. They may also provide leadership and guidance to others with some limited responsibility for the output of others.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Printing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Maintain specialised gravure printing process	1.1 Gravure cylinder condition is monitored, evaluated and adjusted to ensure quality of printed product meets the sample sheet standard 1.2 Gravure impression roller condition is monitored, evaluated and maintained to ensure quality of the specialised printed product meets the sample sheet standard 1.3 Gravure inking system and doctor blade are monitored, evaluated and adjusted to ensure quality of specialised printed product meets the sample sheet standard 1.4 Drying systems are monitored, evaluated and adjusted to ensure quality of specialised printed product meets the approved proof standard 1.5 In-line printing/converting/binding/finishing processes are monitored, evaluated and adjusted to ensure quality of specialised product meets the approved proof standard
2. Maintain specialised production process	2.1 Production process is operated in association with fellow workers and according to enterprise procedures and planned daily schedule 2.2 Production is maintained according to WHS requirements, manufacturer’s specifications and enterprise procedures 2.3 Manual and/or automatic control is used according to job specifications 2.4 Performance is monitored and verified using the process control system according to enterprise procedures 2.5 Ink performance, colour, register and position of print are monitored, evaluated and adjusted throughout production run 2.6 Production difficulties are anticipated and preventive action is taken to prevent occurrence by timely intervention 2.7 Process adjustments to eliminate problems are reported according to enterprise procedures 2.8 Waste is sorted according to enterprise procedures
3. Tune and adjust machinery	3.1 Idiosyncrasies of machines are reviewed and adjustments or tuning undertaken to compensate, or exploit the idiosyncrasy within manufacturer’s specifications 3.2 Test run confirms correct options and settings or need for further adjustment or tuning to meet quality standards 3.3 Options and recommendations are documented for future reference according to enterprise procedures 3.4 Instruction on new practices is provided to machine operator or finisher, if required
4. Troubleshoot machinery and material problems	4.1 Corrective or preventive action is recommended and implemented where appropriate 4.2 Changes are communicated to relevant personnel in a logical and easily understood manner 4.3 Changes are monitored to confirm improvement to production efficiency 4.4 Ongoing problems are reported according to enterprise procedures
5. Conduct shutdown of production process	5.1 Correct shutdown sequence is followed according to manufacturer’s specifications and enterprise procedures 5.2 Shutdown is conducted in association with fellow workers and in compliance with WHS requirements 5.3 Unused ink is correctly labelled and stored according to manufacturer’s/supplier’s specifications and enterprise procedures 5.4 Solid and liquid waste is removed from operating area and recycled or disposed of, where required, according to regulatory requirements and enterprise procedures 5.5 All product is removed from operating area 5.6 Machine faults requiring repair are identified and reported to designated person according to enterprise procedures

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	2.2, 2.3, 3.1, 3.2, 5.1, 5.3	Recognises and interprets text to establish job requirements from information contained within relevant procedures and specifications
Writing	2.7, 3.3, 4.4, 5.3, 5.6,	Completes records, forms and other documents accurately and according to workplace requirements
Oral Communication	2.1, 2.7, 3.4, 4.1, 4.2, 4.4, 5.2, 5.6,	Participates effectively in discussions using appropriate vocabulary, and questioning and listening skills
Navigate the world of work	2.1, 2.2, 2.4, 2.5, 2.7, 2.8, 3.3, 4.4, 5.1-5.4, 5.6,	Complies with legislative requirements and follows organisational policies and procedures relevant to own role
Interact with others	2.1, 2.7, 3.4, 4.1, 4.4, 5.2, 5.6,	Collaborates and cooperates with others to achieve joint outcomes Contributes to work group discussions using accepted conventions
Get the work done	1.1-1.5, 2.-2.8, 3.1, 3.2, 5.1-	Determines priorities and sequences steps involved in clearly defined, familiar tasks; and identifies and assembles required resources Makes rapid decisions when required, drawing on in-depth understanding of a situation and decision-making experience Responds to predictable problems and implements standard or logical solutions related to role in immediate work environment Reads data from electronic monitoring and control systems

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPPRN422 Produce specialised gravure printed product	ICPPR422C Produce specialised gravure printed product	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRN422 Produce specialised gravure printed product

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

operate a gravure press ensuring production flow that maintains product quality standards and minimises downtime from production problems

shut down and clean a gravure press according to work health and safety (WHS) guidelines

monitor production output and make necessary adjustments to maintain print quality on a gravure machine while producing a complex print on TWO occasions (if possible using different substrates and, if possible, including at least two in-line processes) according to job specifications, enterprise procedures.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

describe what can cause reel to wander

outline what can cause the web to break at the unwind unit

explain the difference between a ‘flying paster’ and ‘zero speed’ type reel-stand

outline the print fault that results from the reel being run out of centre

list possible faults in the unwind section that can cause a web break

identify WHS risks associated with rewinding and sheeting

identify the safety feature in the delivery system for when the web jams up

explain why the sheet cut-off might wander

describe the effect of poorly adjusted nip rollers when rewinding and sheeting

explain the effect of a build-up of ink on the impression cylinder on printed product

list causes of ink foaming in the ink tray

outline the effect of too much reducer in ink

describe what action can reduce wear of the doctor blade

explain why all solvents need to be removed from the final ink film

describe link between driers and set off and marking

explain the cause of substrate distortion

describe the effect in the chillers, if the drying temperature was too low

identify the effect of incorrect drying temperature on the finished product

outline the effect of inadequate communication within the work team on a gravure printing machine

list safety features within the organisation that aid in maintaining effective production

describe ramifications if machine guards are removed and/or micro switches are disconnected on a machine

identify who is legally responsibility for the removal of machine guards and/or disconnection of micro switches

demonstrate knowledge of the most accurate method of checking register during a production run

explain why it is necessary to take immediate action when production problems are anticipated

describe what to do to eliminate further processing of unacceptable printed product

explain what happens to the substrate if relative humidity is increased in the press room

list procedures to care for a newly delivered substrate to the press room

demonstrate knowledge of how to correctly sort waste

outline advantages of keeping reusable waste

identify industry standards to enhance effective communication with clients

list necessary procedures clients should follow to approve a printed product

explain when to call service personnel to correct a machine problem

outline enterprise procedures to report any machine operating problems

describe consequences if correct shutdown procedures are not followed

explain why it is necessary for correct shutdown procedures to be conducted with fellow workers

list advantages of proper labelling and storage of excess inks and materials

explain why printed product should be clearly labelled prior to removal from the press room

outline any additional operations required for printed reels after they are removed from the printing machine

describe how the printed job should be stored after it is removed from the printing machine

explain how completed records are used in final analysis of the job

describe benefits of comprehensive records when considering production of future jobs

locate machine manuals, safety and other documentation relevant to this task and outline information included in these documents.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the printing field of work and include access to special purpose tools, equipment and materials including a gravure printing machine.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPPRN431 Set up for complex lithographic printing

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to set up options, and then set up either wide or narrow reel or sheet-fed lithographic printing machines for non-routine print jobs. It includes the ability to conduct a proof run and adjust settings to ensure production speeds are attained in minimum time with minimum wastage.

It applies to individuals working as print machinists in the printing and graphic arts industry. They prepare material, set up, monitor and operate equipment and machinery, apply solutions to a defined range of problems associated with the print medium, and analyse and evaluate information from a variety of sources. They may also provide leadership and guidance to others with some limited responsibility for the output of others.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Printing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Confirm complex job specifications	1.1 Job requirements are read and interpreted from job documentation or production control system 1.2 Non-routine set up is planned and carried out correctly in minimum time with minimum wastage 1.3 Availability of all job related components is checked
2. Set up delivery systems	2.1 Delivery systems are set up and adjusted according to job specifications 2.2 Substrate is added to and removed from process according to job specifications
3. Select and prepare inks and additives	3.1 Colour sequence for job is considered and confirmed 3.2 Inks, dyes or additives are selected according to non-routine job specifications and end-user requirements 3.3 Quality and suitability of inks, dyes or additives are checked and appropriate action is taken 3.4 Inks, dyes and additives are prepared according to work health and safety (WHS) requirements, and manufacturer’s/supplier’s instructions, with suitable precautions to minimise waste 3.5 Correct colour and weight/volume of ink is mixed and prepared to match requirements of the job specification and the non-routine printing process 3.6 Formulation of ink, colour match and approved colour are appropriately recorded 3.7 Inks, dyes and additives are appropriately labelled, handled and stored according to manufacturer’s/ supplier’s instructions to prevent damage and hazards to personnel and to prolong shelf life
4. Set up machine for complex lithographic printing	4.1 Plate cylinder is set up and adjusted according to job specifications 4.2 Plates are correctly mounted according to machine specification and in a safe manner 4.3 Blanket and blanket cylinder are set up and adjusted according to job specifications 4.4 Impression cylinder is set up and adjusted according to job specifications 4.5 Inking system is set up and adjusted according to the lithographic process and job specifications 4.6 Dampening system is set up and adjusted according to job specifications 4.7 Drying system is set up and adjusted according to job specifications
5. Conduct proof run	5.1 Material to be used for proof is organised correctly 5.2 Machine is operated according to manufacturer’s and enterprise procedures to produce a specified proof 5.3 Production does not commence without client approval or authority where appropriate 5.4 Results are interpreted and adjustments are carried out according to product and machine specifications

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 3.2, 3.4, 3.7, 4.1-4.8, 5.4	Recognises and interprets text to establish job requirements from information contained within relevant instructions, procedures and specifications
Writing	5.7, 5.3	Completes forms and labels accurately and according to workplace requirements
Oral Communication	5.3	Participates effectively in spoken interactions using appropriate vocabulary, and employs questioning and listening techniques to gain approvals
Navigate the world of work	3.4, 3.6, 3.7, 4.3, 5.2, 5.3,	Complies with legislative requirements and follows organisational policies and procedures relevant to own role
Interact with others	5.3	Follows accepted communication practices and protocols when seeking approval
Get the work done	1.1-1.3, 2.1, 2.2, 3.1, 3.2-3.5, 3.7, 4.1-4.8, 5,1, 52, 5.4	With assistance, determines priorities and sequences steps involved in clearly defined, familiar tasks and identifies and assembles required resources Responds to predictable problems and implements standard or logical solutions related to role in immediate work environment Reads data from electronic monitoring and control systems

Range of Conditions

This section specifies different work environments and conditions that may affect performance. Essential operating conditions that may be present (depending on the work situation, needs of the candidate, accessibility of the item, and local industry and regional contexts) are included.

Delivery systems MUST include EITHER:	reel OR sheet
Setting and adjusting MUST include EITHER:	set up options for unwind and rewind reels webbing procedures and web control system splicing/joining reels printed web viewing devices folder and sheeter set off / marking prevention devices OR feeder and delivery sections sheet pick-up, transportation and control and transfer systems set off / marking prevention devices

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPPRN431 Set up for complex lithographic printing	ICPPR431C Set up for complex lithographic printing	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRN431 Set up for complex lithographic printing

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

set up a lithographic printing machine for a complex job on TWO occasions (if possible using different substrates and sheet sizes if sheet-fed and, if possible, including at least two in-line processes) according to job and manufacturer’s specifications, and enterprise procedures

set up either wide or narrow reel or sheet-fed lithographic printing machines for non-routine print jobs

conduct proof run and adjust settings to ensure production speeds are attained in minimum time with minimum wastage

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

explain why it is necessary to ensure the job specifications are read and properly understood

describe production problems that can eventuate from not reading and understanding the job specifications

identify who to discuss any production problems with

describe problems that can result from the plate cylinder not being cleaned prior to plate fitting

explain what can happen if the plate is over-tensioned during fitting

explain faults that can result from a plate being under-tensioned

describe why accurate plate bending is necessary on a web-fed machine

outline considerations for deciding the colour sequence

describe the visual aid on the plate that identifies colour of ink to be used

For reel systems only

list work health and safety (WHS) precautions for webbing up the machine

explain how to determine position of the reel

describe what can happen if the brake tension is not set correctly

outline the function of the ‘Dancer’ roller on a web machine

demonstrate knowledge of how to determine the position of bustle wheels

explain what can happen if the web is not spliced correctly

demonstrate knowledge of how the particular web viewing device works

explain how to control the web in the rewind unit

describe the function of a slitter on a web machine

list possible causes of the web to jam up in the folder

explain the need to disengage folder if sheeting

describe problems that can be attributed to a blunt knife when sheeting

name a safety feature in the delivery system for when the web jams up

describe which fold is always made with the grain of the web

identify the type of folder that folds the web in half in the direction of the web grain

list remedial steps if there is a possibility of the ink marking in the folder

outline main reasons for having a silicone applicator on a web machine

list main reasons for blistering on a heat-set machine

identify substances that evaporate after ink is placed in the oven

describe the function of chill rollers on a web machine

For sheet systems only

list WHS factors to consider when setting up sheet transportation and delivery systems

explain what can cause more than one sheet to be picked up in the feeder

outline the need for accurate feeder set up

identify what determines position of the sheet prior to being transferred to the printing unit

explain how to decide which front lays to use

describe the type of substrate that requires additional front lays to be engaged

explain the need for additional front lays when printing this type of substrate

list WHS precautions for setting up the delivery

list WHS precautions for removing sheets from the delivery

explain the cause of sheets being delivered incorrectly

describe necessary adjustments if changing from lightweight to heavyweight stocks

explain what determines sheet release into the delivery

outline problems from excessive use of anti-set off spray powder

list possible causes of printed sheets to set off in the delivery

explain how to reduce possibility of set off in the delivery

identify faults that may be created by excess vacuum on the slow-down wheels

outline the procedure to lengthen print length on this type of press

outline the procedure to shorten print length on this type of press

list WHS concerns for preparation of inks and additives

identify details to check an ink’s suitability for the printing process

outline special end-use requirements that may be necessary

explain why it may be necessary to mix an additive into the ink

explain how a spectrophotometer can be used to assess colour of an ink

describe the formula for calculating correct quantity of lithographic ink

name a print fault likely if excessive driers are mixed into ink

describe precautions to minimise waste when preparing ink

describe how to determine shelf life of most inks

outline conditions relevant to storage of inks and additives

list conventions to follow when labelling mixed inks

list WHS factors to consider when setting up the machine

describe checks to be made on the plate prior to fitting

outline how much plate packing is required

explain normal printing pressure required between plate and blanket

explain how to determine correct printing pressure between blanket and stock

outline ideal blanket surface condition

explain how to achieve correct blanket tension when fitting a new blanket

identify print faults likely if the impression cylinder is not maintained

describe the order eccentric or concentric roller adjustments should be made in

list the contact stripe width required between two rollers when setting the rollers

demonstrate how to determine ink duct setting

explain the ideal ink duct sweep setting

describe recommended degrees of shore hardness for bare back and conventional dampeners

describe the best conductivity of fountain solution

explain why it is necessary to constantly check conductivity of fountain solution

demonstrate knowledge of how to change the amount of fountain solution across the plate surface

explain why it may be necessary to adjust fountain solution laterally

explain the effect of engaging the perfecting unit on the run

list WHS precautions for slitting on the machine

describe operations performed with in-line units

demonstrate knowledge of machine position used to engage in-line processing units

identify precautions for setting up in-line processing units

list reasons for a printed product to be punched

outline what to consider when setting hole punching in relation to repeat length

describe the result of excessive pressure on the slitters

describe the operation of the true inch function fitted to some machines

describe problems that may cause the machine to keep stopping

list necessary checks prior to engaging the impression

list checks performed when running the machine

explain the effect the position of certain guards have on machine operation

outline how steps involved in operating the machine are communicated to other team members

name various aids available for testing the machine proof

identify where testing should take place

explain the function of a polarisation filter in a densitometer

describe the ideal conditions for inspecting the proof

outline the need to use visual aids on the printed sheets

identify the acceptable wet trap value range for lithographic inks

explain what indicates optimum solid ink density, in the absence of a proof

describe the result of low solid ink density and excessive dot gain

list methods to check and adjust ink colour and consistency

explain adjustments that may cause mis-register

explain adjustments required to position the image laterally

list adjustments made to position the image circumferentially

list adjustments made to position the image diagonally

describe the effect of changing colour sequence on the wet trap value

explain the difference between mechanical and optical dot gain

describe factors that can cause excessive mechanical dot gain

identify who has responsibility for the final approval of the job

locate machine manuals, safety and other documentation relevant to this task and outline the information included in these documents.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the printing field of work and include access to special purpose tools, equipment and materials, including a lithographic printing machine with in-line units

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPPRN432 Produce specialised lithographic printed product

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to operate a lithographic press, ensuring an efficient, specialised production flow that maintains product quality standards. Any production problems are anticipated and rectified with minimum downtime. The machine is correctly shut down and cleaned according to work health and safety (WHS) guidelines.

It applies to individuals working as print machinists in the printing and graphic arts industry. They prepare material, set up, monitor and operate equipment and machinery, apply solutions to a defined range of problems associated with the print medium, and analyse and evaluate information from a variety of sources. They may also provide leadership and guidance to others, with some limited responsibility for the output of others.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Printing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Maintain specialised lithographic printing process	1.1 Lithographic plate and plate cylinder conditions are monitored, evaluated and adjusted to ensure quality of specialised printed product meets the sample sheet standard 1.2 Lithographic blanket and blanket cylinder conditions are monitored, evaluated and adjusted to ensure quality of specialised printed product meets the sample sheet standard 1.3 Lithographic impression cylinder condition is monitored, evaluated and adjusted to ensure quality of specialised printed product meets the sample sheet standard 1.4 Lithographic inking system is checked and maintained to ensure quality of specialised printed product meets the sample sheet standard 1.5 Lithographic dampening system condition is monitored, evaluated and adjusted to ensure quality of specialised printed product meets the sample sheet standard 1.6 Set off / marking prevention and drying system is monitored, evaluated and adjusted to ensure quality of specialised printed product meets the sample sheet standard 1.7 Drying systems are monitored, evaluated and adjusted to ensure quality of specialised printed product meets the approved proof standard
2. Maintain specialised production process	2.1 Production process is operated in association with fellow workers and according to enterprise procedures and planned daily schedule 2.2 Production is maintained according to WHS requirements, manufacturer’s specifications and enterprise procedures 2.3 Manual and/or automatic control is used according to job specifications 2.4 Performance is monitored, evaluated and verified using the process control system according to enterprise procedures 2.5 Ink performance, colour, register and position of print are monitored, evaluated and adjusted throughout production run 2.6 Production difficulties are anticipated and preventive action is taken to prevent occurrence by timely intervention 2.7 Process adjustments to eliminate problems are reported according to enterprise procedures 2.8 Faulty performance of equipment is identified and reported according to enterprise procedures 2.9 Waste is sorted according to enterprise procedures
3. Tune and adjust machinery	3.1 Idiosyncrasies of machines are reviewed and adjustments or tuning undertaken to compensate, or to exploit the idiosyncrasy, within manufacturer’s specifications 3.2 Options are assessed to determine most effective/efficient method of production, ensuring highest quality and yield from machinery 3.3 Test run confirms correct options and settings or need for further adjustment or tuning to meet quality standards 3.4 Options and recommendations are documented for future reference according to enterprise procedures 3.5 Instruction on new practices is provided to machine operator or finisher, if required
4. Troubleshoot machinery and material problems	4.1 Corrective or preventive action is recommended and implemented where appropriate 4.2 Changes are communicated to relevant personnel in a logical and easily understood manner 4.3 Changes are monitored to confirm improvement to production efficiency 4.4 Ongoing problems are reported according to enterprise procedures
5. Conduct shutdown of production process	5.1 Correct shutdown sequence is followed according to manufacturer’s specifications and enterprise procedures 5.2 Plate cylinder is set up and adjusted according to job specifications 5.3 Unused ink is correctly labelled and stored according to manufacturer’s/supplier’s specifications and enterprise procedures 5.4 Solid and liquid waste is removed from operating area and recycled or disposed of, where required, according to regulatory requirements and enterprise procedures 5.5 All product is removed from operating area 5.6 Machine faults requiring repair are identified and reported to designated person according to enterprise procedures 5.7 Repair/adjustment is verified prior to resumption of operations

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	2.2, 2.3, 3.1, 5.1-5.3	Recognises and interprets text to establish job requirements from information contained within relevant procedures and specifications
Writing	2.7, 2.8, 3.1, 3.4, 4.4, 5.3, 5.6, 5.7	Completes records, forms and other documents accurately and according to workplace requirements
Oral Communication	2.1, 2.7, 2.8, 4.1, 4.2, 4.4, 5.6, 5.7	Participates effectively in discussions using appropriate vocabulary, questioning and listening skills
Navigate the world of work	2.1, 2.2, 2.4, 2.7-2.9, 3.4, 4.4, 5.1, 5.3, 5.4, 5.6	Works independently and collectively within broad parameters, with a strong sense of responsibility and ownership of goals, plans, decisions and outcomes, as well as recognising and following explicit and implicit protocols Complies with WHS, legislative requirements and follows organisational policies and procedures relevant to own role
Interact with others	2.1, 2.7, 2.8, 3.5, 4.1, 4.2, 4.4, 5.6, 5.7	Collaborates and cooperates with others to achieve joint outcomes Contributes to work group discussions using accepted conventions
Get the work done	1.1-1.7, 2.1-2.6, 2.8, 2.9, 3.1, 3.4, 3.5, 4.1-4.4, 5.1-5.7	Determines priorities and sequences steps involved in clearly defined, familiar tasks and identifies and assembles required resources Makes rapid decisions when required, drawing on in-depth understanding of a situation and decision-making experience Responds to predictable problems and implements standard or logical solutions related to role in immediate work environment Reads data from electronic monitoring and control systems

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPPRN432 Produce specialised lithographic printed product	ICPPR432C Produce specialised lithographic printed product	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRN432 Produce specialised lithographic printed product

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

operate a lithographic press using an efficient, specialised production flow that maintains product quality standards, including rectifying production problems with minimum downtime, and cleaning and shutting down the machine according to work health and safety (WHS) guidelines

monitor production output and make necessary adjustments to maintain print quality on a lithographic machine while producing a specialised print on TWO occasions (if possible using different types and sizes of substrates) according to job specifications, enterprise procedures and the performance criteria.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

identify WHS concerns when operating the reel transportation system

explain what can cause the reel to wander

explain what can cause the web to break at the unwind unit

describe the difference between a ‘lying paster’ and ‘zero speed’ type reel-stand

list print faults that can result from the reel being run out of centre

outline possible faults in the unwind section that can cause a web break

identify WHS concerns of operating the sheet transportation system

describe the result of worn suckers at the feeder suction head

describe sheet detection types on this machine

describe the amount of movement the sheet should have when being registered by the side lay

explain what causes a miss-register of the sheet at the feeder

outline visible signs of the sheet being registered in the feeder

explain how gripper malfunction can affect sheet control and transfer

describe when sheet transfer mechanisms require adjusting

outline what can cause the feeder stack to become uneven

describe the result of the feeder stack being loaded unevenly

explain how unevenness of the feeder stack can be rectified

identify WHS risks associated with rewinding and sheeting

describe a safety feature in the delivery system for when the web jams up

explain why a sheet cut-off might wander

outline the effect of poorly adjusted nip rollers when rewinding and sheeting

describe further operations required for printed reels on removal from the printing machine

explain how the printed job should be stored after removal from the printing machine

explain the need to label each printed reel

outline the effect machine speed has on sheet delivery

explain the advantage of spraying moving sheets with anti-set off powder in delivery

identify items in delivery that cause marking of the printed image

describe remedial steps to eliminate marking of the printed image

describe the function of a sheet de-curler fitted to the delivery of some machines

provide a list of faults from incorrectly set grippers in the transfer section of a machine

describe what can happen if the plate develops a crack at the grip edge during a print run

outline the effect of a sticky blanket surface

list print faults from the blanket not being tensioned correctly

explain the cause of blanket packing creep during printing

describe the effect of ink build-up on the impression cylinder on the printed product

explain what can cause ink to lie back in the duct

explain what can cause ink stripping on the inking rollers

describe print faults that result from excessive use of fountain solution on the plate

demonstrate knowledge of the recommended pH range for fountain solutions

explain what can cause conductivity of the fountain solution to change over an eight-hour shift

identify problems that can be caused by excessive conductivity of the fountain solutions

explain risks of eating or drinking near the machine when using UV inks

describe link between driers and set off and marking

explain what causes UV ink to dry

explain what can cause the substrate to blister

outline the effect in the chillers if the drying temperature is too low

describe the effect of incorrect drying temperature on the finished product

describe the effect of inadequate communication within the work team on a lithographic printing machine

identify safety features within the organisation that aid in maintaining effective production

outline the ramifications if machine guards are removed and/or micro switches are disconnected on a machine

identify who is held legally responsible for removal of machine guards and/or disconnection of micro switches

describe the disadvantage of using a closed looped system for automatic control of the printed product

list alternative measurement, besides optimum solid ink density, to assess print quality

explain the most accurate method of checking register during a production run

explain the need to take immediate action when production problems are anticipated

outline what to do to eliminate further processing of unacceptable printed product

explain how a stack of paper is affected if the relative humidity is increased in the press room

explain the procedure to care for a newly delivered skid of paper to the press room

explain why waste should be sorted

list advantages of keeping reusable waste

list industry standards to enhance effective communication with clients

describe the necessary procedures clients should follow to approve a printed product

outline when to call service personnel to correct a machine problem

describe enterprise procedures in place to report any machine operating problems

outline the result if correct shutdown procedures are not followed

explain the need for correct shutdown procedures conducted with fellow workers

describe the advantages of proper labelling and storage of excess inks and materials

explain the use of completed records in final analysis of the job

outline the benefits of comprehensive records when considering production of future jobs

locate machine manuals, safety and other documentation relevant to this task, and outline included information.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the printing field of work and include access to:

special purpose tools, equipment and materials

lithographic printing machine with in-line units.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPPRN441 Set up for complex pad printing

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to set up complex pad printing machines for multi-coloured or non-routine print jobs. It includes the ability to set up manual pre- and post-treatment processes, conduct a proof run and adjust settings to ensure production speeds are attained.

It applies to individuals working as print machinists in the printing and graphic arts industry. They prepare material, set up, monitor and operate equipment and machinery, apply solutions to a defined range of problems associated with the print medium, and analyse and evaluate information from a variety of sources. They may also provide leadership and guidance to others with some limited responsibility for the output of others.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Printing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Confirm non-routine job specifications	1.1 Job requirements are read and interpreted from job documentation or production control system 1.2 Set up is planned and carried out correctly in minimum time with minimum wastage 1.3 Availability of all job related components is checked
2. Install tampons (printing pads) into machine	2.1 Appropriate tampons are selected according to non-routine job specifications/requirements 2.2 Tampons are secured into machine
3. Set up fixtures onto machine bed or conveyor	3.1 Appropriate fixtures are selected and secured to X-Y table or conveyor jig plates 3.2 Adjustments are made to height of machine bed to suit size of object to be printed 3.3 Adjustments are made to X-Y table of machine bed to suit position of image on object
4. Select and prepare inks and additives	4.1 Inks, and additives are selected according to non-routine job specifications and end-user requirements 4.2 Quality and suitability of inks and additives are checked and appropriate action is taken 4.3 Inks and additives are prepared according to work health and safety (WHS) requirements, and manufacturer’s/supplier’s instructions with suitable precautions to minimise waste 4.4 Correct colour and weight/volume of ink is mixed and prepared to match requirements of the non-routine job specification and the printing process 4.5 Formulation of ink, colour match and approved colour are appropriately recorded 4.6 Inks and additives are appropriately labelled, handled and stored according to manufacturer’s/supplier’s instructions to prevent damage and hazards to personnel and to prolong shelf life
5. Set up machine for complex pad printing	5.1 Plate holders are set up and adjusted for register according to job specifications 5.2 Appropriate plates and plate holders are selected and plates are secured into plate holders 5.3 Tampons are set up and adjusted according to job specifications 5.4 Spatula and doctor blade or ink cups are set up and adjusted according to printing process and job specifications
6. Set up pre- and post-treatment in-line processes	6.1 In-line loading is set up to suit non-routine object and according to job specifications 6.2 In-line pre-treatment is set up to suit non-routine object and according to job specifications 6.3 In-line drying is set up to suit non-routine object and according to job specifications 6.4 In-line ejection is set up to suit non-routine object and according to job specifications
7. Conduct proof run	7.1 Material to be used for proof is organised correctly 7.2 Machine is operated according to manufacturer’s and enterprise procedures to produce a specified proof 7.3 Proof is visually inspected and/or tested or laboratory testing organised according to enterprise procedures 7.4 Production does not commence without client approval or authority, where appropriate 7.5 Results are interpreted and adjustments are carried out according to product and machine specifications to determine adjustment requirements

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 2.1, 4.1, 4.3, 4.4, 4.6, 5.1, 5.3, 5.4, 6.1-6.4, 7.5	Recognises and interprets text to establish job requirements from information contained within relevant instructions, procedures and specifications
Writing	4.5, 4.6, 7.4	Completes records accurately and according to workplace requirements
Oral Communication	7.4	Participates effectively in spoken interactions using appropriate vocabulary, questioning and listening techniques to gain approvals
Numeracy	4.4	Uses basic mathematical calculations to calculate weight, volume and formula ratios
Navigate the world of work	4.3, 4.6, 7.2-7.4	Complies with legislative requirements and follows organisational policies and procedures relevant to own role
Interact with others	7.4	Follows accepted communication practices and protocols when seeking approval
Get the work done	1.1-1.3, 2.1, 2.2, 3.1-3.3, 4.1-4.6, 5.1-5.4, 6.1-6.4, 7.1-7.3, 7.5	Takes responsibility for planning and organising own workload using analytical processes to decide on a course of action, and assembles required resources Recognises and addresses some unfamiliar problems of increasing complexity within own scope, Reads data from electronic monitoring and control systems

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPPRN441 Set up for complex pad printing	ICPPR441C Set up for complex pad printing	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRN441 Set up for complex pad printing

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

set up a machine for complex pad printing on TWO occasions (if possible, on different substrates) according to manufacturer’s and job specifications, enterprise procedures and the performance criteria.

set up pad printing machines for non-routine print jobs, including for manual pre- and post-treatment processes

conduct a proof run and adjust settings to ensure production speeds are attained

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

identify different substrate groups and suggest correct ink type for each group

identify plastic subgroups for purpose of ink selection

explain how adjustments are made to process colour inks for correct colour balance

describe methods of improving opacity of a light coloured ink on a dark substrate

determine correct pad shape for (given) applications

describe the effect pad shape and hardness have on print quality

describe the effect commonly seen at the contact point of the nipple of a pad in a large solid print, and how can it be avoided

explain how to prepare a new pad for its first printing

determine the correct plate type for (given) applications

outline the difference between steel and photopolymer plates for process printing

provide reasons for mis-registered images and how can they be corrected

identify work health and safety (WHS) concerns of setting presses and doctor blades

describe adjustments made to the machine so the doctor blade operates correctly

outline consequences of a damaged doctor blade

identify different types of doctor blades and explain their applications

identify WHS concerns of pre- and post-treating substrates

describe common pre- and post-treatment methods for different substrates and their importance

identify causes of, and solutions for, common print problems (e.g. hairlines around image, loss of density in the centre of a solid image, fine lines of ink running through image, distortion of image, picking up ink from substrate by subsequent pads, washed out images, loss of fine lines in images, inconsistent colour)

locate machine manuals, safety and other documentation relevant to this task and outline the information included in them.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the printing field of work and include access to special purpose tools, equipment and materials, including a pad printing machine.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPPRN442 Produce specialised pad printed product

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to operate a pad printing machine to produce specialised printed products that meet required quality standards. Any production problems are rectified with minimum downtime, and the machine is correctly shut down and cleaned according to work health and safety (WHS) guidelines.

It applies to individuals working as print machinists in the printing and graphic arts industry. They prepare material, set up, monitor and operate equipment and machinery, apply solutions to a defined range of problems associated with the print medium, and analyse and evaluate information from a variety of sources. They may also provide leadership and guidance to others with some limited responsibility for the output of others.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Printing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Maintain specialised pad printing process	1.1 Location of objects into fixtures is monitored, evaluated and adjusted if necessary 1.2 Printing plates condition is monitored and evaluated to ensure quality of printed product meets the approved proof standard 1.3 Printing pads condition is monitored, evaluated and maintained to ensure quality of printed product meets the approved proof standard 1.4 Spatulas and doctor blades are monitored, evaluated and adjusted to ensure quality of printed product meets the approved proof standard OR 1.5 Ink cups are monitored, evaluated and adjusted to ensure quality of printed product meets the approved proof standard 1.6 Printing ink viscosity is monitored, evaluated and adjusted to ensure quality of printed product meets the approved proof standard
2. Maintain in-line systems	2.1 In-line loading is monitored, evaluated and adjusted to ensure quality of printed product meets the approved proof standard 2.2 In-line pre-treatment is monitored, evaluated and adjusted to ensure quality of printed product meets the approved proof standard 2.3 In-line drying is monitored, evaluated and adjusted to ensure quality of printed product meets the approved proof standard
3. Maintain production process	3.1 Production process is operated in association with fellow workers and according to enterprise procedures and planned daily schedule 3.2 Production is maintained according to work health and safety (WHS) requirements, manufacturer’s specifications and enterprise procedures 3.3 Manual and/or automatic control is used as required according to job specifications 3.4 Performance is monitored and verified using the process control system according to enterprise procedures 3.5 Ink performance, colour, register and position of print are monitored and adjusted throughout production run 3.6 Production difficulties are anticipated and preventive action is taken to prevent occurrence by timely intervention 3.7 Process adjustments to eliminate problems are reported according to enterprise procedures 3.8 Waste is sorted according to enterprise procedures
4. Tune and adjust machinery	4.1 Idiosyncrasies of machines are reviewed and adjustments or tuning undertaken to compensate, or to exploit the idiosyncrasy, within manufacturer’s specifications 4.2 Options are assessed to determine most effective/efficient method of production, ensuring highest quality and yield from machinery 4.3 Test run confirms correct options and settings, or need for further adjustment or tuning to meet quality standards 4.4 Options and recommendations are documented for future reference according to enterprise procedures 4.5 Instruction on new practices is provided to machine operator or finisher, if required
5. Troubleshoot machinery and material problems	5.1 Corrective or preventive action is recommended and implemented where appropriate 5.2 Changes are communicated to relevant personnel in a logical and easily understood manner 5.3 Changes are monitored to confirm improvement to production efficiency 5.4 Ongoing problems are reported according to enterprise procedures
6. Conduct shutdown of production process	6.1 Correct shutdown sequence is followed according to manufacturer’s specifications and enterprise procedures 6.2 Shutdown is conducted in association with fellow workers and in compliance with WHS requirements 6.3 Unused ink is correctly labelled and stored according to manufacturer’s/supplier’s specifications and enterprise procedures 6.4 Solid and liquid waste is removed from operating area and recycled or disposed of, where required, according to regulatory requirements and enterprise procedures 6.5 All product is removed from operating area 6.6 Machine faults requiring repair are identified and reported, according to enterprise procedures 6.7 Repair/adjustment is verified prior to resumption of operations

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	3.2, 3.3, 4.1, 6.1, 6.3	Recognises and interprets text to establish job requirements from information contained in instructions, relevant procedures and specifications
Writing	3.7, 4.4, 4.5, 5.1, 5.2, 5.4, 6.3, 6.6	Completes records, forms and other documents accurately, and according to workplace requirements
Oral Communication	3.1, 3.7, 4.2, 4.5, 5.1, 5.2, 5.4, 6.2, 6.6	Participates effectively in discussions using appropriate vocabulary, and questioning and listening skills
Navigate the world of work	3.1, 3.2, 3.4, 3.7, 3.8, 4.4, 5.4, 6.1-6.4, 6.6	Complies with legislative requirements and follows organisational policies and procedures relevant to own role
Interact with others	3.1, 3.7, 4.2, 4.5, 5.1, 5.2, 5.4, 6.2, 6.6	Collaborates and cooperates with others to achieve joint outcomes Contributes to workgroup discussions using accepted conventions Selects and uses appropriate communication practices when reporting issues
Get the work done	1.1-1.6, 2.1-2.3, 3.1-3.6, 3.8, 4.1-4.3, 5.1-5.4, 6.1-6.7	Determines priorities and sequences steps involved in familiar tasks and identifies, and assembles required resources Recognises and anticipates an increasing range of familiar problems, their symptoms and causes, actively looking for early warning signs and implementing contingency plans May invest time in developing and evaluating several options before making a final choice, identifying some key principles that may be relevant in future situations Reads data from electronic monitoring and control systems

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPPRN442 Produce specialised pad printed product	ICPPR442C Produce specialised pad printed product	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRN442 Produce specialised pad printed product

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

operate a pad printing machine ensuring an efficient specialised production flow that maintains product quality standards, including rectifying production problems with minimum downtime, and shutting down and cleaning the machine according to work health and safety (WHS) guidelines

produce TWO complex pad printing jobs (if possible on different substrates) according to job specifications, enterprise procedures and performance criteria.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

identify major WHS concerns when operating this machine

locate where Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS)s are stored and describe the information they contain

explain how colour density of a light image on a dark substrate can be improved by selecting a different machine cycle mode

explain how to select appropriate machine cycle mode to provide the highest production output for a particular product

describe special cycle modes available on the machine and their application

describe how to determine that ink has been mixed to the correct viscosity

explain how to correct ink viscosity during production

list causes of unreleased ink remaining on the printing pad, and how to identify them

describe the effect of adding a catalyst on the pot life of ink and other factors that affect pot life

explain how to recognise a damaged pad

demonstrate the correct method of cleaning a pad during production

describe the effect of different pad shapes for different colours In multi-coloured printing

determine the time ink should take to cure before scratch and adhesion tests can be performed

describe the method used to check for correct pre-treatment of polypropylene during production

explain how to ensure correct drying conditions for the product

describe the visible effects on the image if ink viscosity is incorrect

identify the cause of incorrect registration and how to prevent its recurrence

explain what can cause a fine coating of ink over the whole cliché surface

locate machine manuals, safety and other documentation relevant to this task, and outline the information in them.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the printing field of work and include access to special purpose tools, equipment and materials, including a pad printing machine.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPPRN451 Set up for complex relief printing

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to set up reel – sheet-fed platen, cylinder or rotary printing machines for non-routine relief printing jobs.

It applies to skilled individuals working as a print machinist in the printing and graphic arts industry who may prepare material, setup, monitor and operate equipment and machinery, analyse and evaluate information applying solutions to a defined range of problems and who may also provide leadership and guidance to others with some limited responsibility for the output of others.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Printing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Confirm non-routine job specifications	1.1 Job requirements are read and interpreted from job documentation or production control system 1.2 Set up is planned and carried out correctly in minimum time with minimum waste 1.3 Availability of all job related components is checked
2. Set up delivery systems	2.1 Delivery systems are set up and adjusted according to job specifications 2.2 Substrate is added to and removed from process according to job specifications
3. Select and prepare inks and additives	3.1 Inks, dyes or additives are selected according to job specifications and end-user requirements 3.2 Quality and suitability of inks, dyes or additives are checked and appropriate action is taken 3.3 Inks, dyes and additives are prepared according to work health and safety (WHS) requirements, and manufacturer’s/supplier’s instructions with suitable precautions to minimise waste 3.4 Correct colour and weight/volume of ink are mixed and prepared to match the requirements of the printing process and job specifications 3.5 Formulation of the ink, colour match and the approved colour are appropriately recorded 3.6 Inks, dyes and additives are appropriately labelled, handled and stored according to manufacturer’s/supplier’s instructions to prevent damage and hazards to personnel and prolong shelf life
4. Set up machine for complex relief printing	4.1 Appropriate relief plates are selected and secured to the machine 4.2 Relief polymer plates/forme are set up and adjusted according to job specifications (platen) 4.3 Relief polymer cylinders are set up and adjusted according to job specifications (platen) 4.4 Impression is set up and adjusted according to job specifications (platen and rotary) 4.5 Inking system is set up and adjusted according to the relief process and job specifications (platen and rotary) 4.6 Drying system is set up and adjusted according to job specifications
5. Conduct proof run	5.1 Material to be used for proof is organised correctly 5.2 Machine is operated according to manufacturer’s and enterprise procedures to produce a specified proof 5.3 Proof is visually inspected and/or tested or laboratory testing organised according to enterprise procedures 5.4 Production does not commence without client or relevant authority approval where appropriate 5.5 Results are interpreted and adjustment changes are carried out according to product and machine specifications

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 3.1, 33, 3.4, 3.6, 54.2-4.6, 65.5	Recognises and interprets text to establish the job requirements from information contained within relevant instructions, procedures and specifications
Writing	3.5, 3.6, 56.4	Completes records and labels accurately and according to workplace requirements
Oral communication	5.4	Participates effectively in spoken interactions using appropriate vocabulary, questioning and listening techniques to gain approvals
Numeracy	3.4, 65.5	Uses simple mathematical calculations to select weight and volume of ink and ensure optimum output
Navigate the world of work	3.3, 3.5, 3.6, 5.2-5.4	Complies with legislative requirements and follows organisational policies and procedures relevant to own role
Interact with others	5.4	Follows accepted communication practices and protocols when seeking approval
Get the work done	1.1-1.3, 3.1-3.6, 4.1-4.6, 5.1-5.3, 5.5	Determines priorities and sequences the steps involved in clearly defined, familiar tasks and identifies and assembles the resources required Responds to predictable problems and implements standard or logical solutions related to the role in the immediate work environment Reads data from electronic monitoring and control systems

Range of Conditions

This section specifies different work environments and conditions that may affect performance. Essential operating conditions that may be present (depending on the work situation, needs of the candidate, accessibility of the item, and local industry and regional contexts) are included.

Delivery systems MUST include EITHER:	Reel OR Sheet
Setting up and adjusting MUST include EITHER:	Unwind and rewind reels Webbing procedures and web control system Splicing/joining reels Printed web viewing devices Folder and sheeter Set off/marking prevention devices OR Feeder and delivery systems Sheet pick-up and transportation systems Transfer and control systems Set off/marking prevention devices

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPPRN451 Set up for complex relief printing	ICPPR451C Set up for complex relief printing	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRN451 Set up for complex relief printing

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

set up reel or sheet-fed platen, cylinder or rotary printing machines for non-routine print jobs

conduct a proof run and adjust settings to ensure production speeds are attained

correctly set up a relief printing machine for complex printing on TWO occasions (if possible using different substrates and including at least two in-line processes) according to manufacturer’s and job specifications, enterprise procedures and work health and safety (WHS) requirements.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

identify job requirements, and production problems that could eventuate by not reading and understanding job specifications

identify who to discuss any production problems with to

identify importance of relief plates, why hardness of the printing plate is important, and faults that may be detected on new plates

identify type of solvents to use on photopolymer plates

outline the purpose of binding plates after mounting, and explain V-block mounting

list checks to perform prior to cylinder installation

outline importance of machine frames, and why unit slides need to be kept clean

identify the optimum print sequence

name the visual aid on the plate that identifies the colour of ink to be used

For reel systems only

outline WHS precautions for installing printing cylinders in the machine

identify precautions to ensure plate/cylinders are not damaged during installation

outline the reel transportation system used on a web-fed machine, and the WHS precautions for when webbing up the machine

identify implications if the web is not spiced correctly

describe the process of determining position of the reel

outline implications if the brake tension is not set correctly

describe the function of the ‘dancer’ roller on a web machine and the function of nip rollers

outline the reel delivery system on a web-fed machine, and the WHS precautions for when setting up the reel delivery system

identify the function of web control in the rewind unit, and the slitter on a web machine

identify problems attributable to a blunt knife when sheeting

describe remedial steps if there is a possibility of ink marking in the rewind

list the main reason for blistering on a heat set machine

outline WHS precautions when slitting on the machine, and other operations that can be performed with in-line units

describe the machine position for in-line processing units and \ precautions for setting up in-line processing units

list reasons to top cut a printed product, and benefits of embossing in-line

For sheet systems only

outline the sheet transportation system on a sheet-fed machine, and WHS precautions for setting up the sheet transportation system

identify what causes more than one sheet to pick up in the feeder and describe why accurate feeder set up is essential

outline the process for determining position of the sheet prior to being transferred to the printing unit

outline the process for determining which front lays to use and the types of substrate that require additional front lays to be engaged, and why they are required

describe the sheet delivery system on a sheet-fed machine, what causes sheets to be delivered incorrectly, and WHS precautions for removing sheets from the delivery

describe adjustments needed if changing from lightweight to heavyweight stocks

identify the process for determining sheet release into the delivery

outline problems from excessive use of anti-set off spray powder

identify what causes printed sheets to set off in the delivery

identify how the possibility of set off in delivery can be reduced and how air blast assists sheet delivery

outline packing required in the tympan, and the ideal condition of the tympan

identify the process for determining printing pressure

outline how the correct top sheet tension is achieved when fitting a new tympan, and print faults that can occur if the tympan is not tensioned correctly

identify how to lengthen print length on this type of press, and to shorten the print length

outline WHS concerns related to preparation of inks and additives, and details required to check inks’ suitability for the printing process

outline why it might be necessary to mix an additive into ink and any special end-use requirements that may be necessary

outline how a spectrophotometer can be used to assess ink colour, and formula for calculating the correct quantity of ink in relief printing

identify print faults if excessive driers are mixed into ink, and precautions to minimise waste when preparing ink

identify the shelf life of most ink and the conditions relevant to storage of inks and additives

list conventions for labelling mixed inks

identify the process for setting up the printing machine and major WHS concerns

name the order eccentric or concentric roller adjustments should be made and the width of the contact stripe between two rollers

outline the process for determining ink duct setting, and the ideal setting

name recommended degrees shore hardness for forme rollers

describe types of ink drying/curing systems and how the drying unit cures ink

state what happens if there is excessive pressure when top cutting and excessive pressure when cutting and creasing

describe the effect of differing tooth counts on perforated products

outline problems of solving proofing and adjustment

outline the operation of the true inch function fitted to some machines, and problems that may cause the machine to keep stopping

outline checks necessary prior to engaging the impression, and checks to be performed when running the machine

describe the effect position of certain guards has on operation of the machine

outline steps involved in operating the machine communicated to other team members

name aids available for testing the machine proof, where testing should take place, and tests necessary for each job

name the function of a polarisation filter in a densitometer

describe ideal conditions for inspecting the proof

explain why it is necessary to use visual aids on the printed substrate

describe causes of a halo effect on the image

outline methods to check and adjust ink colour and consistency

describe adjustments that may cause mis-register

describe adjustments to position the image laterally and circumferentially

explain how changing colour sequence can effect the final colour cast

identify causes of excessive mechanical dot gain and the difference between mechanical and optical dot gain

describe the process for final approval before a print run

identify machine manuals, safety and other documentation relevant to this task, where are they kept, information included in these documents, and other sources of available information.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the printing field of work and include access to:

special purpose tools, equipment and materials

reel or sheet-fed platen, cylinder or rotary printing machine.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPPRN452 Produce specialised relief printed product

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to produce a specialised relief printed product operating a platen, cylinder or rotary printing machine.

It applies to individuals who use specialised knowledge to problem-solve and experiment to obtain optimal results and a quality product with minimum production problems or downtime.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Printing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Maintain specialised relief printing process	1.1 Relief polymer forme or plate cylinder condition is monitored, evaluated and adjusted to ensure quality of the specialised printed product meets the sample sheet standard 1.2 Relief polymer impression surface condition is monitored, evaluated and adjusted to ensure quality of specialised printed product meets the sample sheet standard 1.3 Relief polymer inking system is monitored, evaluated and adjusted to ensure quality of specialised printed product meets the sample sheet standard 1.4 Drying systems are monitored, evaluated and adjusted to ensure quality of specialised printed product meets the approved proof standard
2. Maintain production process	2.1 Production process is operated in association with fellow workers and according to enterprise procedures and planned daily schedule 2.2 If required, in-line printing/converting/binding/finishing processes are monitored and adjusted to ensure quality of product meets the approved proof standard 2.3 Production is maintained according to work health and safety (WHS) requirements, manufacturer’s specifications and enterprise procedures 2.4 Manual and/or automatic control is used as required according to job specifications 2.5 Performance is monitored and verified using the process control system according to enterprise procedures 2.6 Ink performance, colour, register and position of print are monitored and adjusted throughout production run 2.7 Production difficulties are anticipated and preventive action is taken to prevent occurrence by timely intervention 2.8 Process adjustments to eliminate problems are reported according to enterprise procedures 2.9 Waste is sorted according to enterprise procedures
3. Tune and adjust machinery	3.1 Idiosyncrasies of machines are reviewed and adjustments or tuning undertaken to compensate, or to exploit the idiosyncrasy, within manufacturer’s specifications 3.2 Options are assessed to determine most effective/efficient method of production, ensuring highest quality and yield from machinery 3.3 Test run confirms correct options and settings, or need for further adjustment or tuning to meet quality standards 3.4 Options and recommendations are documented for future reference according to enterprise procedures 3.5 Instruction on new practices is provided to machine operator or finisher, if required
4. Troubleshoot machinery and material problems	4.1 Corrective or preventive action is recommended and implemented where appropriate 4.2 Changes are communicated to relevant personnel in a logical and easily understood manner 4.3 Changes are monitored to confirm improvement to production efficiency 4.4 Ongoing problems are reported according to enterprise procedures
5. Conduct shutdown of production process	5.1 Correct shutdown sequence is followed according to manufacturer’s specifications and enterprise procedures 5.2 Shutdown is conducted in association with fellow workers and in compliance with WHS requirements 5.3 Unused ink is correctly labelled and stored according to manufacturer’s/supplier’s specifications and enterprise procedures 5.4 Solid and liquid waste is removed from operating area, and recycled or disposed of, where required, according to regulatory requirements and enterprise procedures 5.5 All product is removed from operating area 5.6 Machine faults requiring repair are identified and reported, according to enterprise procedures 5.7 Repair/adjustment is verified prior to resumption of operations

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	2.2, 2.4, 2.5. 3.1, 5.1-5.3	Recognises and interprets text to establish job requirements from information contained within relevant instructions, procedures and specifications
Writing	2.8, 3.4, 4.1, 4.4, 5.3, 5.6, 5.7	Completes records, forms and other documents accurately and according to workplace requirements
Oral Communication	2.1, 2.8, 3.5, 4.1, 4.2, 4.4, 5.2, 5.6	Participates effectively in discussions using appropriate vocabulary, questioning and listening skills
Navigate the world of work	2.1, 2.3, 2.5, 2.8, 2.9, 3.4, 4.4, 5.1-5.4, 5.6	Complies with legislative requirements and follows organisational policies and procedures relevant to own role
Interact with others	2.1, 2.8, 3.5, 4.1, 4.2, 4.4, 5.2, 5.6	Collaborates and cooperates with others to achieve joint outcomes Contributes to workgroup discussions using accepted conventions Selects and uses appropriate communication practices when reporting issues
Get the work done	1.1-1.4, 2.1-2.7, 2.9, 3.1-3.5, 4.1, 4.3, 5.1-5.7	Determines priorities and sequences steps involved in complex tasks and identifies and assembles required resources Recognises and anticipates an increasing range of familiar problems, their symptoms and causes, actively looking for early warning signs and implementing contingency plans, and begins to look behind obvious symptoms to redefine problems and identify underlying causes Recognises potential of new approaches to enhance work practices Understands purposes, specific functions and key features of digital systems and tools and operates them effectively

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPPRN452 Produce specialised relief printed product	ICPPR452C Produce specialised relief printed product	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRN452 Produce specialised relief printed product

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

operate a platen, cylinder or rotary printing machine to produce a specialised printed product that maintains product quality standards, including anticipating and rectifying production problems, minimum downtime, and cleaning and shutting down the machine according to work health and safety (WHS) guidelines

access and use information relevant to the task from a variety of information sources

monitor production output and make necessary adjustments to maintain print quality on a relief printing machine while producing a specialised print on TWO occasions (if possible using different substrates and if possible including at least two in-line processes) according to job specifications, enterprise procedures and the performance criteria.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

outline major WHS concerns of setting up the reel transportation system

identify reel wander cause

explain cause of web break at the unwind unit

identify a print fault resulting from the reel being run out of centre

describe possible faults in the unwind section that can cause a web break

outline WHS concerns of operating the sheet transportation system

describe the result of worn suckers at the feeder suction head

describe sheet detection types for particular machines

describe how much movement the sheet should have when being registered by the side lay

explain the cause of mis-register of the sheet at the feeder

identify visible signs of the sheet being registered in the feeder

explain the gripper malfunction effect on sheet control and transfer

describe adjustment of the sheet transfer mechanisms

describe what causes the feeder stack to become uneven

describe what happens if the feeder stack loaded unevenly

explain how to rectify unevenness of the feeder stack

outline WHS risks associated with rewinding and sheeting

identify a safety feature in the delivery system for when the web jams up

explain sheet cut-off wander

describe the effect of poorly adjusted nip rollers when rewinding and sheeting

describe the effect machine speed has on sheet delivery

explain the advantage of spraying moving sheets with anti-set off powder in the delivery

identify items in the delivery that can cause marking of the printed image

outline remedial steps to eliminate marking of the printed image

explain faults caused by from incorrectly set grippers in the transfer section of a machine

describe adjustments to devices to maintain sheet control in the delivery

describe what happens if the plate lifts at the grip edge during a print run

describe the effect on the printed product of build-up of ink on the impression cylinder

explain what causes ink to lie back in the duct

describe how to rectify the problem of paper surface picking

explain the cause of diminished impression during the print run

explain what causes the plate surface to prematurely wear during production

describe the effect of eating or drinking near the machine when using UV inks

explain the link between driers and set off and marking

explain what causes UV ink to dry

explain the cause of substrate blistering

describe the effect of incorrect drying temperature on the finished product

describe the effect of inadequate communication within the work team on a lithographic printing machine

outline safety features within the organisation that aid in maintaining effective production

outline ramifications if machine guards are removed and/or micro switches are disconnected on a machine

explain legal responsibilities relating to removal of machine guards and/or disconnection of micro switches

identify other measurement, besides optimum solid ink density, to assess print quality

describe the most accurate method of checking register during a production run

explain reasons to take immediate action when production problems are anticipated

identify actions taken to eliminate further processing of unacceptable printed product

describe the effect on a stack of paper if relative humidity is increased in the press room

outline the procedure to care for a newly delivered skid of paper to the press room

explain steps involved in waste sorting

identify advantages of keeping reusable waste

outline industry standards to enhance effective communication with clients

identify necessary procedures clients should follow to approve a printed product

identify situations when it is necessary to call service personnel to correct a machine problem

identify enterprise procedures in place to report any machine operating problems

explain the result if correct shutdown procedures were not followed

explain the need for correct shutdown procedures conducted with fellow workers

identify advantages of proper labelling and storage of excess inks and materials

explain reasons for clear labelling of printed product prior to removal from the press room

describe the use of completed records in final analysis of the job

outline benefits of comprehensive records when considering production of future jobs

identify machine manuals, safety and other documentation relevant to this task, where they are kept, and information included in these documents.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the printing field of work and include access to:

special purpose tools, equipment and materials

platen, cylinder or rotary printing machine.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPPRN471 Set up for complex coating

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to set up non-routine coating that includes set up of rollers and the reel or sheet systems for coating a range of carbon, carbonless, latex, wax, resin and metallic coatings, aqueous and UV varnishes and machine varnishes.

It applies to individuals who use specialised knowledge and planning, organising and problem-solving skills to ensure production speeds are attained and quality standards are met.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Printing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Confirm job specifications	1.1 Job requirements are read and interpreted from job documentation or production control system 1.2 Set up is planned and carried out correctly and in minimum time 1.3 Availability of all job related components is checked
2. Set up delivery systems	2.1 Delivery systems are set up and adjusted according to job specifications 2.2 Substrate is added to and removed from process according to job instructions
3. Select and prepare coating	3.1 Coating is selected according to job specifications and end-user requirements 3.2 Quality and suitability of coating is checked and appropriate action taken 3.3 Coatings and additives are prepared according to work health and safety (WHS) requirements, and manufacturer’s/supplier’s instructions with suitable precautions to minimise waste 3.4 Correct weight/volume of coating is prepared to match requirements of the job specification and coating process 3.5 Coating viscosity is confirmed as correct for the job 3.6 Formulation of coating is appropriately recorded
4. Set up machine for coating	4.1 Appropriate rollers/cylinders are selected and secured to the machine and set 4.2 Application system is set up and adjusted according to job specifications 4.3 Appropriate anilox roller is chosen, and installed to manufacturer’s specifications 4.4 Set doctor blades to manufacturer’s specifications 4.5 Coating delivery system is set up with correct flow and return flow determined by air pressure or pump speeds and adjusted according to job specifications 4.6 Coating blanket is cut or a plate installed for non-image areas 4.7 Blanket or plate packing is checked as suitable to the job 4.8 Coating temperature is checked and deemed suitable for the job 4.9 Drying system is set up and adjusted according to job specifications
5. Conduct proof run	5.1 Material to be used for proof is organised correctly 5.2 Machine is set up and operated, and roller and pressure settings are checked, to produce a specified proof according to WHS requirements, manufacturer’s specifications and enterprise procedures 5.3 Proof is visually inspected and/or tested or laboratory testing organised according to enterprise procedures 5.4 Production does not commence without client approval or authority where appropriate 5.5 Results are interpreted and adjustments are carried out according to product and machine specifications to determine adjustment requirements

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 3.1, 3.3, 3.4, 4.2-4.5, 4.9, 5.5	Recognises and interprets text to establish job requirements from information contained within relevant procedures and specifications
Writing	3.6, 5.4	Completes records accurately and according to workplace requirements
Oral Communication	5.4	Participates effectively in spoken interactions using appropriate vocabulary, questioning and listening techniques to gain approvals
Numeracy	34, 4.5	Interprets and analyses a range of mathematical information used in familiar and routine tasks
Navigate the world of work	3.3, 5.2-5.4	Recognises and follows explicit and implicit protocols and meets expectations associated with own role Complies with legislative requirements and follows organisational policies and procedures relevant to own role
Interact with others	5.4	Follows accepted communication practices and protocols when seeking approval
Get the work done	1.1-1.3, 3.1-3.5, 4.1-4.6, 4.9, 5.1-5.3, 5.5	Plans, identifies and assembles resources required to complete tasks Determines priorities and sequences steps involved in clearly defined, familiar tasks Responds to predictable problems and implements standard or logical solutions related to role in immediate work environment Reads data from electronic monitoring and control systems

Range of Conditions

This section specifies different work environments and conditions that may affect performance. Essential operating conditions that may be present (depending on the work situation, needs of the candidate, accessibility of the item, and local industry and regional contexts) are included.

Delivery systems MUST include EITHER:	reel OR sheet
Setting up and adjusting MUST include EITHER:	unwind webbing procedures splicing/joining reels print web viewing devices set off / marking prevention devices OR feeder and delivery sheet pick-up and transportation system transfer and control systems set off / marking prevention devices

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPPRN471 Set up for complex coating	ICPPR471C Set up for complex coating	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRN471 Set up for complex coating

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

set up for THREE complex coating operations (one spot coating, one overall coating and one fine detail, using three different coatings of which one must be metallic, and include at least one in-line process), including:

setting up rollers and reel or sheet systems for coating a range of carbon, carbonless, latex, wax, resin and metallic coatings, aqueous and UV varnishes and machine varnishes

conduct a proof run and adjusting settings to ensure production speeds are attained

find and use information relevant to the task from a variety of information sources.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

describe key information on the work ticket listing type of coating required

describe what to do if vital information is missing from the job ticket

list checks to do prior to set up (availability of materials etc.)

describe how to choose the coating side of material

describe the effect of offside lay selection on the job

explain how to carry out a register check

For reel systems only

describe the effect of:

low web tension on the print

inefficient web splices

explain how to:

determine reel position for the job

check for a web break

identify safety risks associated with rewind of the machine

outline the effect of excessive web tension at rewind of the machine

For sheet systems only

explain how to:

determine sheet position for the job

select appropriate front lays

check a missing or late sheet

explain use of a two-sheet cut out on most feeders (sheet)

describe the effect of:

not enough coating on a sheet

excessive temperature on the sheet

describe the effect too much vacuum on the slow-down wheels has on the job

describe how to determine position of register or bustle wheels

describe the effect excessive jogging has on the stack

identify major WHS concerns when setting up the sheet or reel transportation system

identify WHS concerns relevant to the use of coatings

list types of coatings and their applications

explain suitability of the coating for the job

explain how the coat adheres to the product

identify the amount of coating required

describe the range of viscosities to run with on an aqueous coating

describe the effect of incorrect viscosity on coating

explain how to adjust viscosity of a coating

describe methods to solidify coating

explain drying UV coating

describe the printing principle being utilised to apply aqueous coating

explain why gluing tabs are not coated

identify the temperature the drier is set at to dry aqueous coating

explain when to use different image carriers (plate or blanket)

outline the effect skeleton wheels can have on the coating surface

describe how to measure the amount of gloss on the surface

outline organisational responsibility for the final approval on the job

describe the effect in the following scenarios:

UV coating on a wet print

viscosity is too high or too low

ink coverage is excessive, i.e. over 250%

identify key types of information in, and the location of, machine manuals, safety and other documentation relevant to this task.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the printing field of work and include access to special purpose tools, equipment, and materials, including a dedicated coating machine.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPPRN472 Produce complex coated product

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to produce complex, coated product on either a reel- or sheet-fed machine.

It applies to individuals who use specialised knowledge and organising and problem-solving skills to ensure efficient production flow and product quality standards are met.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Printing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Maintain operations of delivery systems	1.1 Delivery systems are monitored and adjusted to ensure efficient and continuous operation and avoid damage to finished product 1.2 Substrate is added to and removed from process according to job instructions
2. Maintain coating process	2.1 Roller condition is monitored and adjusted to ensure quality of printed product meets the approved proof standard 2.2 Coating system and doctor blade condition (if appropriate) are monitored and adjusted to ensure quality of product meets the approved proof standard 2.3 Drying systems are monitored and adjusted to ensure quality of product meets the approved proof standard 2.4 Quality and viscosity of varnish coatings are monitored and adjusted as necessary to ensure product quality
3. Maintain production process	3.1 Basic or complex in-line printing/converting/binding/finishing processes are monitored and adjusted to ensure quality of product meets the approved proof standard 3.2 Production process is operated in association with fellow workers and according to company specifications and planned daily schedule 3.3 Production is maintained within work health and safety (WHS) requirements, and company and manufacturer’s specifications 3.4 Manual and/or automatic control is used as per specification 3.5 Performance is monitored and verified using the process control system according to enterprise procedures 3.6 Coating performance, register and position are monitored and adjusted throughout production run 3.7 Production difficulties are anticipated and preventive action is taken to prevent occurrence by timely intervention 3.8 Process adjustments to eliminate problems are reported according to enterprise procedures 3.9 Waste is sorted according to enterprise procedures
4. Identify and rectify problems	4.1 Faulty performance of equipment is identified and reported according to enterprise procedures 4.2 Problems in coating machine are identified and reported according to enterprise procedures 4.3 Adjustments or corrections are carried out according to specified procedures and consistent with operator’s skill level 4.4 Coating machine operation is checked to ensure correct operation
5. Conduct shutdown of production process	5.1 Correct shutdown sequence is followed according to manufacturer’s specifications and enterprise procedures 5.2 Shutdown is conducted in association with fellow workers and in compliance with WHS requirements 5.3 Solid and liquid waste is removed from operating area and recycled or disposed of, where required, according to regulatory requirements and enterprise procedures 5.4 All product is removed from operating area 5.5 Machine faults requiring repair are identified and reported to designated person according to enterprise procedures 5.6 Repair/adjustment is verified prior to resumption of operations
6. Clean and wash up coating machine at end of print run	6.1 Cylinders, plate and roller surfaces are cleaned ready for next run 6.2 Coating delivery system is washed ready for next run, and liquid waste is disposed of according to company and regulatory requirements 6.3 In-line slitting units are cleaned ready for next run 6.4 Reef feed, transportation and delivery systems are disengaged and cleaned ready for next run 6.5 Production records or other documentation are accurately completed where required by enterprise procedures

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	3.2-3.4, 4.3, 5.1	Recognises and interprets text to establish job requirements from information contained within relevant instructions, procedures and specifications
Writing	3.8, 4.1, 4.2, 5.5, 6.5	Completes records, forms and other documents accurately and according to workplace requirements
Oral Communication	3.2, 3.8, 4.1, 4.2, 5.2, 5.5	Participates effectively in discussions using appropriate vocabulary, questioning and listening skills Speaks clearly using appropriate vocabulary, tone and pace to report faults and discrepancies
Navigate the world of work	1.1, 1.2, 3.2, 3.3, 3.5, 3.8, 3.9, 4.1-4.4, 5.1-5.3, 5.5, 76.1-6.5	Complies with legislative requirements and follows organisational policies and procedures relevant to own role Recognises and follows all procedures for cleaning and maintenance of equipment, incorporating regulatory requirements and enterprise procedures
Interact with others	3.2, 3.8, 4.1, 4.2, 5.2, 5.5	Collaborates and cooperates with others to achieve joint outcomes Contributes to workgroup discussions using accepted conventions Selects and uses appropriate communication practices when reporting issues
Get the work done	1.1-1.2, 2.1-3.4, 3.1-3.7, 3.9, 4.1-4.4, 5.1-5.4, 6.5, 6.1-6.4	Determines priorities and sequences steps involved in clearly defined, familiar tasks Recognises and anticipates an increasing range of familiar problems, their symptoms and causes, actively looking for early warning signs and implementing contingency plans Follows routine procedures for using digital technology by reading data from electronic monitoring and control systems

Range of Conditions

This section specifies different work environments and conditions that may affect performance. Essential operating conditions that may be present (depending on the work situation, needs of the candidate, accessibility of the item, and local industry and regional contexts) are included.

Delivery systems MUST include EITHER:	reel OR sheet
Monitoring and adjusting MUST include EITHER:	reel stand and rewind section web control system sheeting section OR feeder and delivery sheet pick-up and transport system transfer and control system

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPPRN472 Produce complex coated product	ICPPR472C Produce complex coated product	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRN472 Produce complex coated product

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

complete THREE complex coating jobs (one spot coating, one overall coating and one fine detail, using three different coatings – one of which must be metallic, and include at least one in-line process) including:

producing a complex coated product on either a reel- or sheet-fed machine ensuring an efficient production flow maintaining product quality standards

anticipate and rectify production problems with minimum downtime

shutdown and clean the machine according to work health and safety (WHS) guidelines

use control, monitoring and data entry systems

find and use information relevant to the task from a variety of information sources.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

outline what to do if vital information is missing from the job ticket

outline checks to do prior to set up (availability of materials etc.)

identify major WHS concerns of:

setting up the sheet or reel transportation system

coating

For reel systems only

describe the effect:

on the print of excessive tension on the rewinding reel

if the web is not spliced correctly

outline precautions to ensure the rewound product is of consistent, acceptable quality

For sheet systems only

describe the effect of:

fanning sheets before loading into the press

anti-set off spray on finished job

explain how to set and check the double sheet detector during the print run

identify components that can be adjusted to ensure correct delivery in sheet systems

identify printed material below acceptable standard

outline what to do if the aqueous coating is smudging on the delivery section of the machine

explain the effects of :

UV lamp on the UV coating

varying temperature and volume of hot and cold air knives

using IR radiation (including choice of medium or short wave lamps) on coatings

identify the coating level to maintain in the pan

explain dangers of solvents and solutions used to clean the coating system, plates, cylinders and press

identify machine parts to be thoroughly cleaned following the coating of the job

identify components to be inspected for wear following the print run

identify records important for following or repeat prints

identify key types of information in, and the location of, machine manuals, safety and other documentation relevant to this task.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the printing field of work and include access to:

special purpose tools, equipment and materials

print machine or a dedicated coating machine.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPPRN484 Prepare for variable data printing

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to confirm data requirements and prepare and link data to a template ready for printing.

It applies to individuals who use analytical and technical skills to access complex information from databases to produce customised print runs.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Printing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Confirm data requirements	1.1 Job specifications are reviewed to identify document purpose 1.2 Materials required for page design, layout and content are identified from job specifications 1.3 Source and format of data is determined and confirmed 1.4 Page design template is evaluated for printing purposes, and static and variable fields are correctly understood and labelled 1.5 Responsibility for data accuracy and other tests such as spell checks and postal software is agreed with client and in accordance with privacy legislation
2. Prepare data	2.1 Data required to populate copy holes in the variable-data template is established 2.2 Fields to be populated are confirmed and linked to data required to mark up copy holes in the variable-data template 2.3 Composition engine is used to achieve required data format and page layout requirements for merging variable data and static elements 2.4 Business rules are developed to reduce data errors and discrepancies (If possible, a data sample is obtained and preliminary checks run, making sure data and format is correct) 2.5 Soft proof is performed to ensure quality of all static and variable elements If high variability, RIPped data is spooled prior to printing to maintain higher engine speeds 2.6 Sample from the machine is produced and checked for conformance to job specifications

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 1.2, 2.1-2.3, 2.6	Recognises and interprets text to establish job requirements from information contained within relevant instructions, procedures and specifications
Writing	1.4, 1.5, 2.1, 2.4	Completes workplace forms and labels accurately
Oral Communication	1.5	Participates effectively in spoken interactions using appropriate vocabulary, and questioning and listening techniques to gain approvals
Navigate the world of work	1.5	Understands implications of legislative requirements for completion of tasks
Interact with others	1.5	Follows accepted communication practices and protocols when liaising with clients to seek agreement
Get the work done	1.3, 1.4, 2.2-2.6	Takes responsibility for planning and organising own workload, identifying ways of sequencing and combining elements for greater efficiency and assembles required resources Responds to predictable problems and implements standard or logical solutions related to role in immediate work environment Uses digital equipment and reads data from electronic monitoring and control systems

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPPRN484 Prepare for variable data printing	ICPPR484C Prepare for variable data printing	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRN484 Prepare for variable data printing

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

use a database requiring sophisticated variable data fields and a complex page layout with multiple static and variable elements, both text and graphics, with flexible placement

confirm data requirements and prepare data and link it to a template ready for printing on TWO different jobs.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

describe requirements for PPML/VDX, XML

outline key aspects of privacy legislation relating to printing data

explain key processes involved in database operation

explain key concepts relating to data mining.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the printing field of work and include access to relevant computer hardware and software.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPPRN491 Use on-press monitoring of print quality

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to use computerised print quality monitoring devices, involving selection of computerised settings to set up and run a press to acceptable tolerances.

It applies to individuals who use specialised knowledge and analytical skills to monitor quality, both electronically and visually, and to make adjustments to maintain print quality.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Printing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Set up print control devices	1.1 CIP3/CIP4 data, or equivalent, is used to create a profile 1.2 Job is made ready to achieve position, register and fit to specified standards 1.3 Colour is made ready to match appropriate colour standards 1.4 Data is interpreted and appropriate adjustments made to gain supervisor’s approval to run press
2. Maintain print quality throughout run	2.1 Print is inspected visually to meet specified standards during run 2.2 Data is analysed against required standards 2.3 Appropriate adjustments are made to maintain consistency throughout run 2.4 Job is monitored and maintained at regular intervals to ensure quality

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 1.4, 2.1, 2.2	Checks printed texts against standards
Navigate the world of work	1.2, 1.3, 2.1, 2.2, 2.4	Complies with specific industry standards relevant to own role
Get the work done	1.1-1.4, 2.2-2.4	Takes responsibility for planning and organising own workload, identifying ways of sequencing and combining elements for greater efficiency and assembles required resources Responds to predictable problems and implements standard or logical solutions related to role in immediate work environment Demonstrates a sophisticated understanding of principles, concepts, language and practices associated with the digital world

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPPRN491 Use on-press monitoring of print quality	ICPPR491C Use on-press monitoring of print quality	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRN491 Use on-press monitoring of print quality

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

find and use information relevant to the task from a variety of information sources

set up and align monitoring device to appropriate standards on THREE occasions – standards may be defined by enterprise/operator or default tolerances, client requirements, colour tolerances, and/or industry standards

produce profiles of samples taken during THREE different print runs that show print production is within agreed tolerances, if possible, using different variables.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

explain colour theory of:

additive colours (light), red, green, blue (RGB)

subtractive colours (pigments), cyan, magenta, yellow, black (CMYK)

discuss the relationship between ranges of visual colour RGB and CMYK

outline International Colour Consortium (ICC) profiling

describe underlying principles of densitometry and spectrophotometry

explain how to determine tolerance in densitometry and spectrophotometry

describe original colour control bar determinates

outline how to determine accuracy of elements in a colour bar

explain how to ensure consistent print quality output

explain how to recognise colour contamination

describe how to set alarm limits for colour contamination

describe the process for accessing data and determining that data is appropriate

explain the purpose of sampling to ensure consistency

describe processes to put in place if sample varies from standard

discuss ways quality can vary and how it can be fixed

outline computerised functions, common faults and electronic registration systems

describe information needed:

from pre-press to ensure quality product

to give to pre-press to ensure quality product

define these terms: registration, fit, position and alignment

explain the importance of registration marks.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the printing field of work including access to a computerised printing machine.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPPRN492 Use on-press print control devices

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to use computerised on-press print control devices.

It applies to press operators who access or input print quality data and perform adjustments to match the proof and maintain print quality throughout the run.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Printing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Set up print control devices	1.1 CIP3/CIP4 data is accessed for the next print run 1.2 Data is pre-set and options/parameters selected according to the next job specifications 1.3 Data is released to press according to manufacturer’s recommended procedure 1.4 Accurate position and fit are attained 1.5 Approximate colour, density and ink/water balance, if applicable, are attained 1.6 Make ready sheets are scanned or corrections are inputted until print matches the proof or client’s requirements 1.7 Client or supervisor’s approval is obtained prior to running the job
2. Maintain print quality throughout run	2.1 Print quality is continuously monitored visually 2.2 Sheets are scanned to verify visual assessment 2.3 Any correctional data is released to maintain print quality
3. Maintain equipment	3.1 Maintenance tasks are performed according to the operator’s manual 3.2 Equipment is calibrated according to the operator’s manual

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 1.2, 1.6, 2.1	Recognises and interprets text to establish job requirements from information contained within relevant manufacturer’s instructions and manuals and job specifications Checks printed texts against standards
Writing	1.7	Completes required documents accurately and according to workplace requirements
Oral Communication	1.7	Participates effectively in spoken interactions using appropriate vocabulary, questioning and listening to gain approvals
Interact with others	1.7	Follows accepted communication practices and protocols when seeking approval
Get the work done	1.1-1.6, 2.1-2.3, 3.1, 3.2	Determines priorities and sequences steps involved in clearly defined, familiar tasks Recognises and takes responsibility for addressing predictable, and some less predictable problems, in familiar work contexts Demonstrates a sophisticated understanding of principles, concepts, language and practices associated with the digital world

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPPRN492 Use on-press print control devices	ICPPR492C Use on-press print control devices	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRN492 Use on-press print control devices

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

find and use information relevant to the task from a variety of information sources

set up and align monitoring device to appropriate standards on THREE occasions –standards may be defined by enterprise/operator or default tolerances, client requirements, colour tolerances and/or industry standards

produce profiles of samples taken during THREE different print runs that show print production is within agreed tolerances, if possible, using different variables.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

describe International Colour Consortium (ICC) profiling

describe underlying principles of densitometry and spectrophotometry

explain how to determine tolerance in densitometry and spectrophotometry

describe original colour control strip determinates

outline how to determine accuracy of elements in a colour strip

explain how to ensure consistent print quality output

explain how to recognise colour contamination

describe how to set alarm limits for colour contamination

explain the purpose of sampling to ensure consistency

describe processes to put in place if sample varies from standard

discuss ways quality can vary and how it can be fixed

outline computerised functions, common faults and electronic registration systems

describe information needed:

from pre-press to ensure quality product

to give to pre-press to ensure quality product

define these terms: registration, fit, position and alignment

explain the importance of registration marks.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the printing field of work and include access to a computerised printing machine.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPPRN493 Set up and monitor in-line printing operations

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to set up and monitor either a reel- or sheet-fed machine

It applies to individuals who possess a sound theoretical knowledge of in-line printing operations and who are responsible for digital production workflow.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication

Unit Sector

Printing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Confirm job specifications	1.1 Job requirements are read and interpreted from job documentation or production control system 1.2 Set up is planned and carried out correctly in minimum time and with minimum wastage 1.3 Availability of all job related components is checked
2. Set up machine for in-line operation	2.1 Substrate transportation system is set up according to job specifications 2.2 Set off / marking prevention devices are set up and adjusted according to job specifications 2.3 Appropriate image carrier/cutting device is selected and secured to the unit 2.4 Impression is adjusted and set according to job specifications 2.5 Image transfer or inking devices are adjusted and set according to job specifications
3. Conduct proof run	3.1 Material to be used for proof is organised correctly 3.2 Machine is operated according to manufacturer’s specifications and enterprise procedures to produce a specific proof 3.3 Proof is visually inspected and/or tested or laboratory testing is organised according to enterprise procedures 3.4 Production does not commence without client approval or authority where appropriate 3.5 Results are interpreted and adjustments made according to product and machine specifications
4. Maintain and monitor production process	4.1 Production process is operated and monitored in association with fellow workers and according to enterprise procedures and planned daily schedule 4.2 Product is monitored and minor adjustments made to ensure quality of output is maintained 4.3 Major adjustments to process are identified and reported to designated personnel according to enterprise procedures 4.4 Faulty performance of equipment is identified and reported to designated person according to enterprise procedures 4.5 Waste is sorted according to enterprise procedures
5. Conduct shutdown of production process	5.1 Correct shutdown sequence is followed according to manufacturer’s specifications and enterprise procedures 5.2 Shutdown is conducted in association with fellow workers and in compliance with work health and safety (WHS) requirements 5.3 Unused ink/coating, if used in process, is correctly labelled and stored according to manufacturer’s/supplier’s specifications and enterprise procedures 5.4 All product is removed from operating area 5.5 Machine faults requiring repair are identified and reported to designated person according to enterprise procedures 5.6 Repair/adjustment is verified prior to resumption of operations
6. Clean and wash up	6.1 Cylinders, image carriers/cutting devices and roller surfaces are cleaned ready for next run 6.2 Image carriers/cutting devices are removed and stored according to manufacturer’s/supplier’s specifications and enterprise procedures 6.3 Inking system and additional units are washed ready for next run 6.4 Liquid waste is disposed of according to enterprise procedures and regulatory requirements 6.5 In-line units are cleaned ready for next run 6.6 Substrate feed, transportation and delivery systems are disengaged and cleaned ready for next run 6.7 Production records or other documentation are accurately completed where required by enterprise procedures

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 2.1, 2.2, 2.4, 2.5, 3.2, 3.5, 5.1, 5.3, 6.2	Recognises and interprets text to establish job requirements from information contained within relevant instructions, procedures and specifications
Writing	3.4, 4.3, 4.4, 5.3, 5.5, 5.6, 6.7	Completes records, labels and other required documents accurately and according to workplace requirements
Oral Communication	3.4, 4.4, 5.2, 5.5	Participates effectively in discussions using appropriate vocabulary, questioning and listening
Navigate the world of work	3.2-3.4, 4.1, 4.3-4.5, 5.1-5.3, 5.5, 6.1-6.7	Complies with legislative requirements and follows organisational policies and procedures relevant to own role
Interact with others	3.4, 4.4, 5.2, 5.5	Collaborates and cooperates with others to achieve joint outcomes Contributes to workgroup discussions using accepted conventions Selects and uses appropriate communication practices when reporting issues
Get the work done	1.1-1.3, 2.1-2.5, 3.1-3.3, 3.5, 4.1-4.5, 5.1-5.6, 6.1-6.6	Takes responsibility for planning and organising own workload, identifying ways of sequencing and combining elements for greater efficiency Assembles and organises required resources Recognises and takes responsibility for addressing predictable problems in familiar work contexts Reads data from electronic monitoring and control systems

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPPRN493 Set up and monitor in-line printing operations	ICPPR493C Set up and monitor in-line printing operations	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRN493 Set up and monitor in-line printing operations

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

set up and monitor in-line printing operations that tend to be complex in nature and incorporated into other printing processes

set up and monitor one or more in-line processes on TWO occasions according to job specifications, enterprise procedures and performance criteria.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

identify important information from the job ticket

explain what to do if vital information is missing from the job ticket

describe devices to control the substrate in the in-line unit

list problems typically caused by an incorrectly set transportation section

discuss any work health and safety (WHS) concerns of setting up the in-line unit

identify what other parts of the machine need to be set up prior to the in-line unit

name parts of the in-line unit responsible for position

outline precautions to be observed when setting the impression

list checks to perform after a proof run on any in-line operation or process

name the person to notify if there is a problem with any aspect of the job during make ready

describe methods used to minimise waste during make ready

describe signs of wear of the image carrier

describe how printed material should be marked by the operator if it is below acceptable standard

list print faults the operator identifies during the print run

describe how frequently product quality should be assessed

list WHS requirements to be observed during machine shutdown

discuss what areas of the in-line unit may require repair

explain how to determine workflow of the product

name the person responsible for the repair of the machine

outline procedures to be observed when storing image carriers or cutting devices

discuss WHS concerns of storing cutting devices

discuss procedures for disposal of liquid waste

describe specific components of the in-line unit to be cleaned thoroughly

discuss the effect on machine production if components are not cleaned thoroughly following print run

outline what can happen if production information is not completed on the job ticket

identify records to be completed in the event of a reprint or repeat print run.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the printing field of work and include access to:

special purpose tools, equipment and materials

reel or sheet-fed machine.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPPRN494 Apply advanced software applications to digital production

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to correctly select and use a variety of high-end software applications to efficiently produce a standard job.

It applies to individuals who create standard jobs that require the use of multiple applications in the digital production sector.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Pre-requisite Unit

ICPPRN385	Apply software applications to digital production

Unit Sector

Printing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Confirm client brief and job specifications	1.1 Details of client design brief and job specifications are reviewed and clarified with client or supervisor 1.2 Type of documents are determined and production requirements are assessed 1.3 Client copy and images are assembled to conform to design brief 1.4 Software applications are assessed and selected to produce the job
2. Arrange elements on page	2.1 Guides are set and grid is displayed to ensure artwork meets job specifications 2.2 Elements are created and arranged on page with precise alignment 2.3 Elements are arranged in layers to allow for effective selection and re-arrangement 2.4 Imported text or data from other applications is correctly formatted and any cross-application formatting issues resolved 2.5 Text is formatted and flowed into document using most productive technique 2.6 Graphics and other elements are imported from other applications and are arranged according to design brief
3. Produce objects	3.1 Tools are used to produce objects and required attributes are entered and shapes manipulated, continuing until graphic framework is finalised 3.2 Lines and curves are adjusted and edited to fit design specifications 3.3 Objects are painted, transposed and strokes and effects are scaled according to design brief 3.4 Colours are created, edited and saved to colour palette and saturation of colour is adjusted 3.5 Colour and appearance attributes are selected and copied as required 3.6 Gradients, fills and patterns are used to paint and blend as required by layout and design brief
4. Edit images	4.1 Image is retouched to conform with job specifications 4.2 Colour and tone corrections are employed to conform to job specifications 4.3 An appropriate contouring technique is applied to produce the best result depending on the image 4.4 Edited image is saved in appropriate format to allow for import into other applications and to conform to job specifications 4.5 Image storage requirements are identified and employed
5. Produce publication-ready file	5.1 File is checked for errors in accordance with client brief and job specifications 5.2 Correct colour modes and libraries are used according to job specifications 5.3 Sufficient image resolution is applied according to output specifications 5.4 Bleeds and printer marks are applied as required 5.5 Completed file is sent to be ripped according to enterprise procedures

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 1.3, 2.1, 2.6, 3.2, 3.3, 4.1, 4.2, 4.4, 5.1-5.3	Recognises and interprets text to establish job requirements from information contained within relevant instructions, procedures and specifications Checks for errors by comparing text in prepared files against requirements
Oral Communication	1.1	Participates effectively in discussions using appropriate vocabulary, questioning and listening
Numeracy	3.4, 3.6, 4.2	Uses mathematical skills to determine image resolution
Navigate the world of work	5.5	Follows organisational policies and procedures relevant to own role
Interact with others	1.1	Selects and uses appropriate communication practices when liaising with others to gain approvals
Get the work done	1.1-1.4, 2.1-2.5, 3.1-3.6, 4.1-4.5, 5.1-5.5	Takes responsibility for planning and organising own workload, identifying ways of sequencing and combining elements for greater efficiency and assembles required resources Responds to predictable problems and implements standard or logical solutions related to role in immediate work environment Reads data from electronic monitoring and control systems

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPPRN494 Apply advanced software applications to digital production	ICPPR494A Apply advanced software applications to digital production	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRN494 Apply advanced software applications to digital production

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

correctly use a variety of software applications to produce a standard layout

identify and use information relevant to the task from a variety of information sources

use at least TWO software applications to prepare two different sets of layouts according to enterprise standards.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

explain different qualities between file formats

describe when to use one file format as opposed to another

discuss type of file formats unsuitable for print-based jobs and other methods of publication

identify different colour modes, and advantages and disadvantages of each

list various colour libraries and how to select them within a software application

outline printing and other publication processes used in digital production

discuss the importance of considering printing and other publication processes during the design phase

list types of problems that can occur if the printing and publications process isn't considered during design

discuss different techniques to style text productively

discuss different ways text can be flowed throughout a document

describe how guides and rulers can be adjusted

outline circumstances in which images are required to be edited or manipulated

discuss why using colour profiles is required when preparing an image for publication

outline image storage capabilities

describe factors that may influence grey balance of an image.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the printing field of work and include access to:

high-end computers

output devices

layout software.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPPRN495 Set up and use complex colour management for production

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to create profiles and finger-print presses to obtain the best match across colour devices.

It applies to individuals who undertake complex colour management techniques to customise a workflow in their particular workplace.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Pre-requisite Unit

ICPPRN387	Use colour management for production

Unit Sector

Printing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Finger-print press	1.1 Suitable test charts are selected or produced 1.2 Press is optimised to workplace standard, in collaboration with press operator 1.3 Test chart is printed with standard ink densities on any one of a range of stocks
2. Measure press test charts	2.1 Colour measurement devices are calibrated and used to measure printed test charts 2.2 Multiple charts are measured and results recorded 2.3 Software is used to average multiple measurements
3. Create and use custom press profiles	3.1 Appropriate reference file is selected to match printed chart 3.2 Profiling software is used to create an output press profile from the averaged measurement file and profile is tested and edited if required 3.3 Profile is inserted into colour workflow
4. Create and use digital device profiles	4.1 Suitable test charts are selected 4.2 Device is calibrated and test chart is output or digitised 4.3 Test chart is measured using a colour measurement device 4.4 Appropriate reference file is selected to match test chart 4.5 Software is used to create a profile 4.6 Device profile is inserted into the colour workflow
5. Maintain custom colour management workflow	5.1 Printing conditions are monitored and recorded to ensure adherence to workplace standard 5.2 Digital devices are regularly calibrated

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Writing	2.2, 5.1	Completes records accurately and according to workplace requirements
Numeracy	2.1-2.3, 4.3	Uses colour measurement devices to perform calculations in relation to colour profiles
Navigate the world of work	1.2, 1.5	Complies with organisational policies and procedures relevant to own role
Get the work done	1.1-1.3, 2.1-2.3, 3.1-3.3, 4.1-4.6, 5.1, 5.2	Takes responsibility for planning and organising own workload, identifying ways of sequencing and combining elements for greater efficiency and assembles required resources Responds to predictable problems and implements standard or logical solutions related to role in immediate work environment Utilises a broad range of digital features optimising software functions for specific purposes

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPPRN495 Set up and use complex colour management for production	ICPPR495A Set up and use complex colour management for production	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRN495 Set up and use complex colour management for production

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

create custom device profiles in a digital production workflow to enhance the match across proofs, monitors and final products

identify and use information relevant to the task from a variety of information sources

complete THREE custom device profiles that have been used within a colour workflow

produce a final product from the colour workflow.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

list work health and safety (WHS) issues to be considered when managing colour for digital production

discuss importance of bringing a device into a known state

explain how often to calibrate devices

outline what condition changes result in the need for re-calibration

describe colour measurement devices and usage

list various types of proprietary software used for colour measurement

discuss comparison of test charts, their advantages and disadvantages

describe the process of determining grey balance and white points

identify colour profiles and their use

describe the effect colour profiles have on output

explain the difference between input, output and display profiles

outline various colour management systems

describe components of a colour management system

outline components of a colour-managed workflow

discuss red, green blue (RGB) versus cyan, magenta, yellow, black (CMYK), spot colour versus mixed colour workflows

describe how to implement colour management on a system

identify workplace and international publication and printing standards

explain effects different substrates have on colour reproduction for proofing and final production

describe how dot gain effects colour

discuss under colour removal (UCR) and grey component replacement (GCR).

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the printing field of work and include access to:

printing presses

raster image processors (RIPs) with colour management features

profiling software

colour output devices

densitometers and spectrometers.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPPRN496 Set up and produce complex digital print

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to set up and produce complex digitally printed product. This unit incorporates the use of raster image processor (RIP) technology when outputting to digital devices including wide format.

It applies to individuals who produce complex digitally printed products in the commercial print, pre-press, bureau, high-end digital print or a combination of these business environments.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Pre-requisite Unit

ICPPRN384	Set up and produce basic digital print

Unit Sector

Printing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Liaise with clients	1.1 A productivity analysis on a digital print system is performed to determine guidelines for most productive print method for a range of print applications 1.2 Print services, quality expectations and print costings are communicated to clients according to enterprise procedures 1.3 Productivity advantages and disadvantages of different digital print options are presented to clients according to enterprise procedures 1.4 Advice is provided to clients on appropriate substrates and document finishing methods for digital print jobs according to client budget and job specifications
2. Confirm job specifications	2.1 Print job specifications are read and correctly interpreted from job documentation or production control system 2.2 Availability of all job components is checked according to enterprise procedures 2.3 Finishing requirements of job are confirmed and coordination with internal workflow and/or outsource arrangements is maintained 2.4 Run time of job is determined and completion time is correctly estimated demonstrating consideration of other production demands
3. Set up and maintain digital print system	3.1 Substrate is loaded to correct reel or sheet feeding mechanism and all substrate properties are correctly specified in the user control interface 3.2 Delivery unit is set up on a machine and adjustments made to minor in-line processes on reel-fed machine or on-line finishing settings on sheet-fed machine 3.3 Preventive maintenance is performed on a digital printing system to ensure optimum quality and productivity are achieved 3.4 Common factors affecting print quality and productivity of a digital printing machine are identified and solutions implemented to minimise and/or eliminate these
4. Use complex features of RIP or front-end processor	4.1 Colour adjustments are made to ensure optimum image quality and/or to match sample 4.2 Output profiles are selected according to job specifications 4.3 An imposition method is selected to make best use of stock 4.4 Screen ruling is adjusted to ensure optimal output of job 4.5 Overprints and trapping are adjusted to achieve optimum output 4.6 Finishing options are set up according to job specifications
5. Perform and/or coordinate document proofing	5.1 The type of proofing method is determined according to job specifications 5.2 A digital proof run is conducted for client approval and conformance of proof to job specifications is confirmed 5.3 Internal or external pre-press proofing systems operators are consulted to conduct the proof run and provide job requirement information according to enterprise procedures 5.4 Communication between the client and proofing provider is demonstrated to ensure proof meets job specifications
6. Run digital print job and/or coordinate press print run	6.1 Production schedules, job specifications and enterprise procedures are observed and liaison occurs with internal and/or external production operators to determine start and duration time for the print run 6.2 Completion time for the print run is estimated and communicated to the client and co-workers according to job specifications and enterprise procedures 6.3 An entire digital print run is conducted according to job specifications ensuring that machine productivity and quality are monitored and rectified throughout the duration of the print job

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 1.4, 2.1, 4.2, 4.6, 5.1, 5.2, 6.2	Comprehends and analyses information from a range of sources including instructions, procedures, specifications and reference material Recognises and interprets text to establish job requirements or provide advice
Writing	1.2-1.4, 5.2-5.3, 6.2	Completes required workplace documents accurately considering context, purpose and audience when preparing texts
Oral Communication	1.2-1.4, 5.2, 5.3, 6.2	Uses appropriate vocabulary including industry specific terms to provide explanations and information Uses listening and questioning techniques to check and confirm understanding of requirements
Numeracy	1.1, 2.4, 6.1, 6.2	Accurately measures and calculates quantities Interprets and analyses mathematical information to estimate timeframes
Navigate the world of work	1.2, 1.3, 2.2, 5.3, 6.1, 6.2	Follows organisational policies and procedures relevant to own role
Interact with others	1.2-1.4, 5.2-5.4, 6.2	Selects and uses appropriate communication practices when providing information to clients and co-workers Collaborates and cooperates with others to achieve joint outcomes
Get the work done	1.1, 2.1-2.4, 3.1-3.4, 4.1-4.6, 5.2, 6.3	Takes responsibility for planning and organising own workload, identifying ways of sequencing and combining elements for greater efficiency and assembles required resources Responds intuitively to problems in familiar contexts, quickly drawing on past experience to devise solutions Fully utilises features of digital tools to complete complex tasks

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPPRN496 Set up and produce complex digital print	ICPPR496A Set up and produce complex digital print	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRN496 Set up and produce complex digital print

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

communicate a range of digital and traditional printing solutions

coordinate a print run that uses a combination of digital and traditional printing solutions

conduct a digital proof run, adjust settings and ensure production speeds are attained on a digital printer

perform preventive maintenance tasks on a digital printer according to manufacturer’s specifications and to maintain machine productivity

use advanced raster image processor (RIP) or front-end processor features

identify and use information relevant to the task from a variety of information sources

set up and print FOUR complex colour digital printing jobs according to manufacturer's specifications and enterprise procedures.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

list factors that influence decision-making about using a particular printing solution (run length, substrate type and application)

explain cost differences between a specified job printed on a digital system and a specified traditional system, e.g. digital vs. lithographic

discuss quality differences between a specified job printed on a digital system and a specified traditional system, e.g. digital vs. lithographic

outline differences in turnaround time of a specified job printed on a digital system and a specified traditional system, e.g. digital vs. lithographic

explain what print method is most appropriate for the specified print job

discuss measures to ensure clients have the correct procedures for providing electronic files

outline the main differences between digital printing and traditional printing methods

describe recommendations to make to clients who have created an electronic file in an incompatible software application

list possible suggestions to make to clients who require a high-volume print run but need a portion of the print job immediately

outline steps for client approval of a proof

describe circumstances in which a job would be modified before printing

list steps involved for client approval of the print

explain all proof checking procedures

describe processes involved for gaining final approval of a basic job

discuss adjusting colour, toner/ink coverage or density to solve problems

explain the need for using correct output profiles

discuss screen ruling shapes and sizes

describe various types of binding

identify advantages and disadvantages of various binding methods

explain which procedures should be followed if the binding method required by the client is not available at the workplace

explain alternative options if document size is too thick to staple

discuss importance of packing finished print work.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the printing field of work and include access to equipment and materials used for digital printing.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPPRN497 Work with digital information

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to determine the scope and level of engagement with digital information needed in the job role, work with digital information effectively, solve problems with digital information, and maintain currency of own digital knowledge.

It applies to any individual working with digital information.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Printing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Determine requirement to work with digital information	1.1 Scope and level of requirement to work with digital information within own work role is correctly identified 1.2 Specific aspects of work tasks that require digital literacy are recognised
2. Engage with digital information	2.1 Digital information is used and shared responsibly according to established standards and protocols 2.2 Correct work processes are selected based on knowledge of digital work processes and general features of digital devices 2.3 Different digital formats and their associated requirements are correctly recognised and acted on
3. Solve problems with digital information	3.1 Problems with digital information are promptly identified, and possible reasons are explored 3.2 Nature of problem is identified based on knowledge of digital formats 3.3 Questions that need to be asked, and steps needed to solve the problem are correctly identified 3.4 Sources of information and assistance that could assist in resolving the problem are correctly identified 3.5 Information is accessed, correctly interpreted and used to resolve the problem
4. Maintain currency of digital knowledge	4.1 Opportunities to update knowledge about working digital information are correctly identified 4.2 Opportunities are accessed and used to improve quality of own work 4.3 Updated information is shared with others

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	3.4, 3.5	Recognises and interprets text to establish job requirements from information
Oral Communication	1.1-2.5, 3.1, 4.2	Speaks clearly using appropriate vocabulary, tone and pace to report faults and discrepancies
Navigate the world of work	1.1, 1.2, 2.1,	Recognises and follows explicit and implicit protocols and meets expectations associated with own role
Interact with others	4.3	Understands what to communicate, with whom and how, in routine work situations
Get the work done	2.1-2.3, 3.1-3.5	Takes responsibility for identifying own work requirements Recognises and takes responsibility for addressing predictable, and some less predictable, problems in familiar work contexts Utilises information technology and software to work with digital information

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPPRN497 Work with digital information	Not applicable	New Unit	No equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRN497 Work with digital information

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

correctly identify scope and level of engagement with digital information required by the job role

complete at least THREE different work projects involving the appropriate and correct use and manipulation of digital information as required by the job role

follow a structured process to solve at least THREE different types of problems with digital information.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

explain fundamentals of digital information:

what it is

how it is created

the language of digital information

how it is shared (including basic networking principles and the cloud)

security considerations

archiving and storage requirements

explain different levels of engaging with digital information, the scope of each level and requirements of different job roles:

accessing

using

understanding

creating

explain general purpose and current use of different types of digital devices

outline nature and key features of different types of digital media, including components, and opportunities and constraints of each:

text

images

video

sound

databases

multimedia

interactive media

social media

outline different types of digital file formats, what they are used for, and how they might need to be adapted for different purposes

outline national and international standards and protocols governing creation and use of digital information

outline key features of being an effective digital citizen in and outside the workplace:

rights and responsibilities

ethical considerations

copyright

privacy

safety and risk management

outline trends in creation and use of digital information and digital processes in context of own work role and industry sector

describe steps in a logical and deliberate problem-solving process that can be used when working with digital information

list sources of information and assistance when working with digital information

discuss ways to maintain currency of knowledge around use and management of digital information.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the printing field of work and include access to:

special purpose tools, equipment and materials

industry software packages.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPPRN498 Adapt digital content for publication on different devices

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to confirm digital publication end-user needs, determine technical requirements for publication on different devices (including portable devices) and manipulate digital content to suit the selected device.

It applies to skilled individuals working in any type of digital publishing role.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Printing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Confirm end requirements	1.1 Objectives, context and key purpose of the communication are clarified with relevant people 1.2 Nature of target audience and special user-requirements are confirmed 1.3 Output format and delivery platform are confirmed based on review of job or design specifications
2. Determine requirements for publication on different devices	2.1 Existing format and content is reviewed for its suitability and compatibility with intended delivery platform 2.2 Ways people will interact with the content are considered to establish technical publication requirements 2.3 Technical requirements and constraints of output device are identified, including size and capacity issues 2.4 Information navigation and user accessibility issues are identified and reviewed 2.5 Functionality and aesthetics, and relationships between them are considered 2.6 Feasibility of publication on intended output device is confirmed based on review of requirements 2.7 Situations where content may need to be changed are recognised and acted on
3. Manipulate content to suit device	3.1 Software applications are selected based on identified requirements and job specifications 3.2 Content, formats and structures are adapted using software tools to achieve desired result, both functional and aesthetic 3.3 Technical challenges are identified and addressed through use of critical thinking and problem-solving processes
4. Finalise content	4.1 Work is reviewed and checked for accuracy, functionality and aesthetic quality at key stages 4.2 Drafts are presented to relevant people and feedback integrated into finalisation processes 4.3 Content is finalised and approved according to job requirements

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	2.1, 2.3, 4.1	Recognises and interprets text to establish project parameters and technical requirements
Writing	3.2	Enters data associated with technical procedures
Navigate the world of work	1.1-1.3, 2.1-2.5, 3.3, 4.1- 4.3	Recognises and follows explicit and implicit protocols and meets expectations associated with own role
Interact with others	1.1, 1.2, 4.2, 4.3	Understands what to communicate, with whom and how, in routine work situations
Get the work done	1.1-1.3, 2.1-2.7, 3.1-3.3, 4.1-4.3	Takes responsibility for planning and organising own workload making choices as appropriate Recognises and takes responsibility for addressing predictable, and some less predictable, problems in familiar work contexts Utilises a broad range of features within applications to improve personal productivity, optimising software functions for specific purposes

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPPRN498 Adapt digital content for publication on different devices	Not applicable	New Unit	No equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRN498 Adapt digital content for publication on different devices

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

adapt at least THREE different lots of digital content for publication, on at least TWO different types of device:

determine appropriate technical, functional and aesthetic requirements of the job

correctly use features of software applications to adapt content according to requirements

produce work that meets all technical, functional and aesthetic requirements.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

outline potential different purposes of digital communication:

business

community

education

entertainment

social

outline how context of how people interact with digital communication affects its technical construction

outline key user accessibility issues to be considered in any type of digital publication

outline features of different output formats, why and how they are used

outline general features and functions of different output devices / delivery platforms, including portable devices

outline current technical requirements of different output devices, including portable devices, including limitations and opportunities

discuss issues to be reviewed in determining whether content is suitable for publication on a particular device

detail types of software applications and their key purpose and suitability for different types of digital publication purposes

discuss processes and technical procedures to adapt content for publication on different types of devices

discuss types of technical problems that arise when adapting content for different devices, and processes and problem-solving steps that can be taken to overcome them

identify national and international standards that impact publication of digital information.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the printing field of work and include access to:

computer hardware

current industry software packages

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPPRN513 Set up for specialised flexographic printing

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to set up machines for specialised flexographic printing.

It applies to individuals required to set up for specialised colour jobs and who have a good knowledge of substrates and press settings.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Printing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Confirm non-routine job specifications	1.1 Job requirements are read and interpreted from job documentation or production control system 1.2 Set up is planned and carried out correctly in minimum time, with minimum wastage 1.3 Availability of all job related components is checked 1.4 Proofed job is checked for conformance with job specifications
2. Select and prepare inks and solvents for non-routine job	2.1 Inks and solvents are selected according to job specifications and end-user requirements 2.2 Quality and suitability of inks and solvents are checked and appropriate action is taken 2.3 Inks and solvents are prepared according to work health and safety (WHS) requirements, and manufacturer’s/supplier’s instructions with suitable precautions to minimise waste 2.4 Correct colour and weight/volume of ink are mixed and viscosities checked and modified according to press requirements and non-routine job specifications 2.5 Ink formula and approved colour draw downs are appropriately recorded 2.6 Inks and solvents are appropriately labelled, handled and stored according to manufacturer’s/supplier’s instructions and relevant hazardous liquids storage regulations
3. Set up machine for specialised flexographic printing	3.1 Flexographic plate cylinders are installed and register adjustments centred OR 3.2 Sleeves are installed in press and register adjustments made OR 3.3 Plate mounting sheets are mounted on cylinders in press, and register adjustments made 3.4 Plate cylinders are gauged up or pre-set to impression 3.5 Anilox rollers are selected to suit individual colour and plate reproduction requirements for each unit 3.6 Appropriate ink metering system is selected for each unit 3.7 Inking system is set up and roller nips/blades are set correctly 3.8 Ink circulation is maintained at correct level 3.9 Viscosities are adjusted according to job specifications 3.10 Air volume and drier temperatures are selected to suit inks, substrate, solvents, and according to job specifications 3.11 Air volume is adjusted between colours to maximise drying and minimise air overspill
4. Conduct proof run	4.1 Material to be used for proof is organised correctly 4.2 Press is set up and operated according to WHS guidelines 4.3 Print impressions are set to minimum kiss impression 4.4 Web tensions are correctly set at unwind, between stations and rewind 4.5 Print is checked for register 4.6 Drying is checked as sufficient to key ink to the substrate 4.7 Viscosities are adjusted to obtain the correct colour at proof speed
5. Organise proof inspection and/or testing	5.1 Proof is visually inspected and/or tested or laboratory testing is organised according to enterprise procedures 5.2 Production does not commence without client approval or authority where appropriate
6. Troubleshoot machinery and material problems	6.1 Corrective or preventive action is recommended and implemented where appropriate 6.2 Changes are communicated to relevant personnel in a logical and easily understood manner 6.3 Changes are monitored to confirm improvement to production efficiency

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 1.4, 2.1-2.4, 2.6, 3.9, 3.10	Recognises and interprets text to establish job requirements from information contained within relevant instructions, procedures and specifications
Writing	2.5, 2.6, 5.2	Completes workplace records and labels accurately and according to requirements Considers context and audience when composing texts
Oral Communication	5.2, 6.2	Participates effectively in spoken interactions using appropriate vocabulary, questioning and listening techniques to gain approvals or provide information
Numeracy	2.4, 3.8-3.11	Interprets and analyses a range of mathematical information used in familiar and routine tasks
Navigate the world of work	2.3, 2.6, 4.2, 5.1, 5.2	Complies with legislative requirements and follows organisational policies and procedures relevant to own role Recognises boundaries of own role responsibilities
Interact with others	5.2, 6.2	Collaborates with others to complete tasks according to requirements Follows accepted communication practices and protocols when seeking approval
Get the work done	1.2-1.4, 2.1-2.6, 3.1-3.11, 4.1-4.7, 5.1, 6.1, 6.3	Plans, evaluates, identifies and assembles resources required to complete tasks Determines priorities and sequences steps involved in complex tasks Takes responsibility for addressing predictable and unpredictable problems in familiar work contexts Evaluates effectiveness of decisions to identify opportunities for improvement Reads data from electronic monitoring and control systems

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPPRN513 Set up for specialised flexographic printing	ICPPR513A Set up for specialised flexographic printing	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRN513 Set up for specialised flexographic printing

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

correctly set up a flexographic printing machine for a specialised job on TWO occasions using different substrates and including at least two in-line processes) according to the manufacturer’s and job specifications, enterprise procedures and performance criteria

safely conduct a proof run and adjust settings to ensure production speeds are attained

find and use information relevant to the task from a variety of information sources.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

outline production problems that can eventuate if job specifications are not read and/or understood

identify the person to discuss production problems with

list work health and safety (WHS) factors to consider when mounting and proofing flexographic plates

discuss the most common cause of photopolymer plates crazing on the image side

explain the importance of printing plate resiliency

describe the main advantage of using thin photopolymer plates in process printing

list faults that may be found on new plates

describe the type of solvents to use on photopolymer plates

explain what V-block mounting is

describe how V-block mounting is achieved

list benefits of optical mounting

outline the purpose of binding plates after mounting

explain possible print faults that can be eliminated by using cushion mount

explain any WHS factors to be considered when installing printing cylinders or sleeves

describe precautions to ensure plates and cylinders or sleeves are not damaged during installation

outline checks to ensure plates and cylinders or sleeves have been installed correctly

discuss WHS precautions for webbing up the machine

explain how to determine position of the reel

describe how the substrate is pulled into the machine

explain the result of insufficient unwind tension

discuss the result of excessive unwind tension

describe the function of the ‘dancer’ roller on a web machine

explain the function of the positive input ventilation (PIV) unit

discuss the result of adjustments to the positive input ventilation (PIV) unit

describe the function of the lay-on roller

discuss the effect of excessive lay-on roller pressure

describe the effect of the web not being spliced correctly

explain how the particular web viewing device functions

outline WHS precautions for setting up the delivery

explain how the web is controlled in the rewind unit

outline the result of incorrect rewind tension

discuss remedial steps to take if there is a possibility of the ink marking in the rewind

explain the use of air blast play in the delivery of sheets

discuss WHS precautions for preparing inks and additives

outline how to determine an ink’s suitability for the printing process

explain special end-use requirements that may be necessary

outline the main function of a pigmented extender used in flexographic printing

describe the effect of adding plasticisers to flexographic inks

explain why other additives are used in flexographic inks

explain the range, in seconds, for zahn cup measurements

describe the effect foaming has in a zahn cup when measuring ink viscosity

explain the recommended ph range when printing with aqueous inks

outline precautions to minimise waste when preparing ink

explain the shelf life of most inks

identify conditions relevant to storage of inks and additives

describe conventions for labelling mixed inks

list WHS factors to consider when setting up the machine

explain the advantage of centring all machine controls

list checks to make on cylinders and gears

outline checks to perform prior to cylinder or sleeve installation

explain the angle chamber blades should be set at

discuss the main advantage of gauging up and dry register prior to printing a job

discuss cell count of the anilox roller for printing solids

outline why water treatment additives should be used in a central impression drum and chill roller coolant system

list advantages of laser engraved ceramic anilox rollers

describe three things relating to the anilox roller that a roller scope measures

explain possible reasons for anilox wear

outline the type of job that is printed using a hexagonal cell configuration

describe the recommended web temperature when printing polypropylene film

explain the method of drying used when printing on polythene by the flexographic process

list factors affecting the drying rate of liquid inks

identify factors that affect drying of aqueous inks

explain the operating range of UV lamps

explain why it is necessary to graduate drying speeds of each progressive colour, so that first-down colours dry faster than subsequent colours

explain why in flexographic printing, the colour strength increases as the press speed increases

identify possible causes of a decrease in web tension

describe the result of increasing rewind tension after the roll has been partially rewound

explain the major cause of a telescopic roll

list print characteristics related to excessive printing pressure

outline causes of picking when printing multicoloured work

explain print faults from using an over-reduced ink

discuss problems that can cause lateral streaks showing up in uneven printing

describe causes of moire patterns when printing by the flexographic process

explain what happens when air is trapped under mounted plates

describe which instrument is used to identify retained solvent trapped in the print

explain the purpose of taking dyne readings

explain the purpose of the crinkle test when testing an ink

outline the result if an excessive final drying temperature was used when printing polypropylene film

explain what ink property can be adjusted to reduce dot gain

discuss the effect of using the ink returning from the ink fountain when checking viscosity for ink while using ink pumps

list problems that result from excessive use of slow solvents

explain the effect of the ‘yield value’ of ink on the ink transfer of halftone dots

discuss why laminating inks, once printed, appear dull and easy to scratch

explain the result of excessive print area tension

identify some of the problems associated with cold seals

identify the location of machine manuals, safety and other documentation that are relevant to this task, where they are kept, and describe the information included in them.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the printing field of work and include access to a flexographic press.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPPRN521 Set up for specialised gravure printing

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to set up for specialised gravure printing.

It applies to individuals who work outside standard job routines and who have the skills to experiment and make on-the-job adjustments to substrates and press settings.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Printing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Confirm specialised job specifications	1.1 Job requirements are read and interpreted from job documentation or production control system 1.2 Set up is planned and carried out correctly in minimum time with minimum wastage 1.3 Availability of all job related components is checked
2. Plan and carry out specialised set up	2.1 Specialised job specifications are identified and analysed 2.2 Special set up requirements are determined 2.3 Specialised set up is completed in minimum time with minimum wastage
3. Set up reels	3.1 Unwind and rewind reels are set up and adjusted according to job specifications 3.2 Webbing procedures are carried out according to job specifications 3.3 Web-control system is set up, evaluated and adjusted according to job specifications 3.4 Reels are spliced/joined according to job specifications 3.5 Printed web viewing devices are set up, evaluated and adjusted according to job specifications 3.6 Folder and sheeter are set up, evaluated and adjusted according to job specifications 3.7 Set off / marking prevention devices are set up, evaluated and adjusted according to job specifications
4. Select and prepare inks and additives	4.1 Inks, dyes or additives are evaluated with reference to specialised requirements 4.2 Inks, dyes or additives are selected according to job specifications 4.3 Inks, dyes and additives are prepared according to work health and safety (WHS) requirements, and manufacturer’s/supplier’s instructions with suitable precautions to minimise waste 4.4 Correct colour and weight/volume of ink are mixed and prepared according to job specifications and the printing process 4.5 Formulation of ink, colour match and approved colour are appropriately recorded 4.6 Inks, dyes and additives are appropriately labelled, handled and stored according to manufacturer’s/supplier’s instructions to prevent damage and hazards to personnel and to prolong shelf life
5. Set up machine for specialised gravure printing	5.1 Gravure cylinders are selected, installed, set up and adjusted according to job specifications 5.2 Impression roller is set up and adjusted according to job specifications 5.3 Inking system/doctor blade is set up and adjusted according to the gravure process and job specifications 5.4 Drying system is set up and adjusted according to job specifications
6. Conduct specialised proof run	6.1 Material to be used for proof is organised correctly 6.2 Machine is operated according to manufacturer’s specifications and enterprise procedures to produce a specified proof 6.3 Proof is visually inspected and/or tested or laboratory testing is organised according to enterprise procedures 6.4 Production does not commence without client approval or authority where appropriate 6.5 Results are interpreted and evaluated with adjustments carried out according to product and machine specifications
7. Troubleshoot machinery and material problems	7.1 Corrective or preventive action is recommended and implemented where appropriate 7.2 Changes are communicated to relevant personnel in a logical and easily understood manner 7.3 Changes are monitored to confirm improvement in production efficiency 7.4 Ongoing problems are reported according to enterprise procedures

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 2.1, 3.1-3.7, 4.2-4.4, 4.6, 5.2-5.4, 6.2, 6.5	Recognises and interprets text to establish job requirements from information contained within relevant instructions, procedures and specifications
Writing	4.5, 4.6, 6.4, 7.2, 7.4	Completes workplace records and labels accurately and according to requirements Considers context and audience when composing texts
Oral Communication	6.4, 7.2, 7.4	Participates effectively in spoken interactions using appropriate vocabulary, questioning and listening to gain approvals, report problems or provide information
Numeracy	2.3, 4.4	Interprets and analyses a range of mathematical information used in familiar and routine tasks
Navigate the world of work	4.3, 4.5, 4.6, 5.1-5.4, 6.2-6.4, 7.4	Complies with legislative requirements and follows organisational policies and procedures relevant to own role Recognises boundaries of own role responsibilities
Interact with others	6.4, 7.2, 7.4	Collaborates with others to complete tasks according to requirements Follows accepted communication practices and protocols when seeking approvals or reporting problems
Get the work done	1.2, 1.3, 2.1-2.3, 3.1-3.7, 4.1-4.4, 4.6, 5.1-5.4, 6.1-6.3, 6.5, 7.3, 7.4	Plans, evaluates, identifies and assembles resources required to complete tasks Determines priorities and sequences steps involved in complex tasks with a focus on production efficiency Monitors results to determine whether requirements are met and to identify opportunities for improvement Takes responsibility for addressing predictable and unpredictable problems in familiar work contexts Uses familiar digital systems and tools to access, organise, analyse and display information relevant to role Reads data from electronic monitoring and control systems

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPPRN521 Set up for specialised gravure printing	ICPPR521C Set up for specialised gravure printing	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRN521 Set up for specialised gravure printing

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

safely set up a gravure printing machine for a specialised job on TWO occasions using different substrates according to manufacturer’s specifications, enterprise procedures and the performance criteria

complete a proof run and adjust settings to ensure production speeds are attained

find and use information relevant to the task from a variety of information sources.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

explain why it is important that job specifications are read and properly understood

discuss production problems that could eventuate if job specifications are not read and properly understood

identify who to discuss any production problems with

list work health and safety (WHS) precautions for installing printing cylinders on the machine

explain how to determine the optimum print sequence

identify the visual aid on the cylinder that shows the colour of ink to be used

list precautions to ensure cylinders are not damaged during installation

discuss WHS precautions for webbing up the machine

describe how to determine the position of the reel

explain what happens if brake tension is not set correctly

outline the function of the ‘dancer’ roller on a web machine

explain what happens if the web is not spliced correctly

describe how the particular web viewing device works

explain the principle of electrostatic assist (ESA) roller operation on the gravure printing machine

identify the type of substrate to use on the ESA roller

list WHS precautions for setting up delivery

explain how the web is controlled in the rewind unit

describe the outcome of incorrect rewind tension

describe remedial steps to take if there is a possibility of ink marking in the rewind

list problems attributable to a blunt knife when sheeting

explain the function of air blast play in the delivery of sheets

list WHS precautions for preparing inks and additives

outline details to check for an ink’s suitability for the printing process

explain why additives are used in gravure inks

discuss the range, in seconds, for zahn cup measurements

describe the effect foaming has in a zahn cup when measuring ink viscosity

explain why pigmented ink is brought to operating temperature before correcting viscosity

list advantages of using automatic viscosity controllers

explain precautions to minimise waste when preparing ink

discuss shelf life of most inks

describe conditions relevant to storage of inks and additives

explain conventions for labelling mixed inks

list WHS factors for setting up the machine

describe the function of chill rollers on a machine

explain the main advantage of gauging up and dry register prior to printing a job

discuss the result of excess printing pressure

explain how to determine pressure to be applied to the doctor blade

outline possible print faults that caused by excessive overspill of air from the inter-colour drier

discuss the recommended air ratio for efficient inter-colour drying

list advantages of using high-velocity air in the drying system

explain the cause of doctor blade wear on a gravure printing unit

outline possible options for reducing doctor blade wear

describe how to determine optimum make ready speed for the job

explain how to communicate steps involved in make ready to other team members

discuss the need to grade drying speeds of each progressive colour, so that first-down colours dry faster than subsequent colours

explain the cause of a decrease in web tension

outline results of increasing rewind tension after the roll has been partially rewound

discuss the major cause of a telescopic roll

explain how to test metallised film to find out the correct side to print on

describe how to measure the metallised surface for coating thickness

explain the effect of annealing on aluminium foil

discuss the purpose of using thermal imaging face stocks

explain how substrates are metallised

list client requirements for bar codes

describe print characteristics related to excessive printing pressure

explain what causes picking when printing multi-coloured work

describe possible print faults that result from using an over-reduced ink

list causes of moire patterns when printing by the gravure process

describe the instrument to be used to identify retained solvent trapped in the print

explain the purpose of taking dyne readings

explain the purpose of the crinkle test when testing an ink

describe print faults that result from a worn doctor blade

discuss the effect of using ink returning from the ink fountain when checking viscosity for ink while using ink pumps

outline problems that result from excessive use of slow solvents

discuss why laminating inks, once printed, appear dull and easy to scratch

describe the result of excessive print area tension

identify problems the printer may associate with cold seals

identify who has responsibility for the final say in the OK of the job

identify machine manuals, safety and other documentation relevant to this task, and where they are kept and discuss the information in them.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the printing field of work and include access to a gravure printing machine.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPPRN531 Set up for specialised lithographic printing

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to set up for specialised lithographic printing.

It applies to individuals who can problem-solve and experiment with substrate and press settings for either wide or narrow reel- or sheet-fed lithographic printing machines for specialised print jobs.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Printing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Confirm specialised job specifications	1.1 Job requirements are read and interpreted from job documentation or production control system 1.2 Availability of all job related components is checked
2. Plan and carry out specialised set-up	2.1 Specialised job specifications are identified and analysed 2.2 Special set-up requirements are determined 2.3 Specialised set-up is completed in minimum time with minimum wastage
3. Set up delivery systems	3.1 Delivery systems are set up and adjusted according to job specifications 3.2 Substrate is added to and removed from process according to job specifications
4. Select and prepare inks and additives	4.1 Colour sequence for the job is considered and confirmed 4.2 Inks, dyes or additives are evaluated with reference to specialised requirements 4.3 Inks, dyes or additives are selected according to job specifications 4.4 Inks, dyes and additives are prepared according to work health and safety (WHS) requirements, and manufacturer’s/supplier’s instructions with suitable precautions to minimise waste 4.5 Correct colour and weight/volume of ink are mixed and prepared to match requirements of the printing process and job specifications 4.6 Formulation of ink, colour match and approved colour are appropriately recorded 4.7 Inks, dyes and additives are appropriately labelled, handled and stored according to manufacturer’s/supplier’s instructions to prevent damage and hazards to personnel and to prolong shelf life
5. Set up machine for specialised lithographic printing	5.1 Plate cylinder is set up, evaluated and adjusted according to job specifications 5.2 Lithographic plate is selected and prepared for installation 5.3 Plates are correctly mounted safely and according to job specifications 5.4 Blanket and blanket cylinder are set up, evaluated and adjusted according to job specifications 5.5 Impression cylinder is set up, evaluated and adjusted according to job specifications 5.6 Inking system is set up, evaluated and adjusted according to the lithographic process and job specifications 5.7 Dampening system is set up, evaluated and adjusted according to job specifications 5.8 Drying system is set up, evaluated and adjusted according to job specifications
6. Conduct specialised proof run	6.1 Material to be used for proof is organised correctly 6.2 Machine is operated according to manufacturer’s specifications and enterprise procedures to produce a specified proof 6.3 Specialised proof is visually inspected and/or tested or laboratory testing is organised according to enterprise procedures 6.4 Production does not commence without client approval or authority where appropriate 6.5 Results are interpreted and evaluated with adjustments carried out according to product and machine specifications
7. Troubleshoot machinery and material problems	7.1 Corrective or preventive action is recommended and implemented where appropriate 7.2 Changes are communicated to relevant personnel in a logical and easily understood manner 7.3 Changes are monitored to confirm improvement to production efficiency 7.4 Ongoing problems are reported according to enterprise procedures

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 2.1, 4.3-4.5, 4.7, 5.1, 5.3-5.8, 6.5,	Recognises and interprets text to establish job requirements from information contained within relevant procedures and specifications
Writing	4.6, 4.7, 6.4, 7.2, 7.4	Completes workplace recording accurately Demonstrates sophisticated control of a broad range of text types
Oral Communication	1.1, 2.1, 4.3, 4.5, 5.1, 5.3-5.8, 6.4, 7.2, 7.4	Participates effectively in spoken interactions by using strategies to confirm, clarify or repair understanding
Numeracy	4.5	Interprets and analyses a range of mathematical information used in familiar and routine tasks
Navigate the world of work	1.2, 2.1, 2.3, 4.2-4.7, 5.1, 5.3-5.8, 6.2-6.5, 7.3, 7.4	Recognises and follows explicit and implicit protocols and meets expectations associated with own role Complies with WHS, legislative requirements and follows organisational policies and procedures relevant to own role
Interact with others	1.1, 2.1, 5.3, 5.5, 6.1, 6.3-6.8, 7.4, 8.2, 8.4	Seeks to cooperate with others to achieve results in immediate work context
Get the work done	1.2, 1.3, 2.1-2.3, 4.1-4.5, 4.7, 5.1, 5.3-5.8, 6.1-6.3, 6.5, 7.3, 7.4	Plans, evaluates, identifies and assembles resources required to complete tasks Determines priorities and sequences steps involved in complex tasks with a focus on production efficiency May use formal analytical and lateral thinking techniques to identify issues, generate and evaluate possible solutions Is acutely aware of the importance of understanding, monitoring and controlling access to digitally stored and transmitted information Uses familiar digital systems and tools to access, organise, analyse and display information relevant to role Reads data from electronic monitoring and control systems

Range of Conditions

This section specifies different work environments and conditions that may affect performance. Essential operating conditions that may be present (depending on the work situation, needs of the candidate, accessibility of the item, and local industry and regional contexts) are included.

Delivery systems MUST include EITHER:	reel OR sheet
Setting up and adjusting MUST include EITHER:	set-up options for unwind and rewind reels webbing procedures and web control system splicing/joining reels printed web viewing devices folder and sheeter set off / marking prevention devices OR feeder and delivery sections sheet pick-up, transportation, control and transfer systems set off / marking prevention devices

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPPRN531 Set up for specialised lithographic printing	ICPPR531C Set up for specialised lithographic printing	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRN531 Set up for specialised lithographic printing

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

set up either wide or narrow reel or sheet-fed lithographic printing machines for specialised print jobs; conduct a proof run and adjust settings to ensure production speeds are attained in minimum time with minimum wastage

set up a lithographic printing machine for a specialised job on TWO occasions using different substrates and sheet sizes if sheet-fed and including at least two in-line processes according to manufacturer’s and job specifications, enterprise procedures and the performance criteria.

find and use information relevant to the task from a variety of information sources

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

explain why it is necessary that job specifications are read and properly understood

discuss production problems that could eventuate if job specifications are not read and properly understood

identify who to discuss any production problems with

outline the problem that can result from the plate cylinder not being cleaned prior to plate fitting

describe what happens if the plate is over tensioned during fitting

list faults that can result from a plate being under tensioned

For reel systems only

describe the need for accurate plate bending on a web-fed machine

explain how to determine position of the reel

describe the effect if brake tension is not set correctly

discuss the function of the ‘dancer’ roller on a web machine

outline how to determine position of the bustle wheels

explain what happens if the web is not spliced correctly

describe the operation of the particular web viewing device

explain how the web is controlled in the rewind unit

outline the function of a slitter on a web machine

discuss what causes the web to jam up in the folder

explain the need to disengage the folder if sheeting

list problems that attributable to a blunt knife when sheeting

outline the safety feature in the delivery system for when the web jams up

describe which fold is always made with the grain of the web

explain the type of folder that folds the web in half in the direction of the web grain

outline remedial steps to take if there is a possibility of ink marking in the folder

describe the main reason for having a silicone applicator on a web machine

explain the main reason for blistering on a heat set machine

explain what the oven evaporates from the ink

discuss the function of chill rollers on a web machine

For sheet systems only

describe work health and safety (WHS) factors to consider when setting up the sheet transportation and delivery systems

explain what causes more than one sheet to be picked up in the feeder

discuss the need for accurate feeder set up

describe how to determine position of the sheet prior to transfer to the printing unit

discuss how to determine which front lays to use

explain the type of substrate that requires additional front lays to be engaged

explain the need for additional front lays when printing this type of substrate

list the WHS precaution to observe when setting up the delivery

list WHS precautions for removing sheets from the delivery

explain what causes incorrect sheets delivery

outline necessary adjustments when changing from lightweight to heavyweight stocks

explain what determines sheet release into the delivery

list problems caused by excessive use of anti-set off spray powder

describe what might cause printed sheets to set off in the delivery

discuss how the possibility of set off in the delivery might be reduced

explain what can happen if there is excess vacuum on the slow-down wheels

list WHS precautions that must be observed when preparing inks and additives

describe the procedure used to lengthen print length on this type of press

discuss the procedure used to shorten print length on this type of press

outline considerations of deciding colour sequence

point out the visual aid on the plate that identifies ink colour to be used

discuss all WHS precautions for webbing up the machine

outline details to check to determine an ink’s suitability for the printing process

describe what special end-use requirements might be necessary

explain the reason for mixing additives in the ink

explain how a spectrophotometer can help assess ink colour

describe the formula for calculating correct quantity of lithographic ink

discuss the print fault that occurs if excessive driers are mixed into the ink

outline precautions to minimise waste when preparing ink

explain shelf life of most inks

discuss conditions relevant to storage of inks and additives

explain conventions for labelling mixed inks

list WHS factors for setting up the machine

describe checks made on the plate prior to fitting

explain how much plate packing is required

describe normal printing pressure required between plate and blanket

explain how to determine correct printing pressure between blanket and stock

explain the ideal blanket surface condition

describe how to achieve correct blanket tension when fitting a new blanket

describe print faults likely if the impression cylinder is not maintained

explain the order eccentric or concentric roller adjustments should be made in

explain what the width of the contact stripe between two rollers should be when setting the rollers

describe how to determine the ink duct setting

explain the ideal ink duct sweep setting

discuss recommended degrees shore hardness for bare back and conventional dampeners

describe what conductivity of the fountain solution should be

explain why it is important to constantly check conductivity of the fountain solution

explain how to change the amount of fountain solution across the plate surface

outline the need to adjust the fountain solution laterally

list reasons it might be difficult to engage the perfecting unit

list types of ink drying/curing systems

describe what the true inch function feature fitted to some machines does

list what may cause the machine to keep stopping

outline necessary checks prior to engaging the impression

describe checks performed when running the machine

describe the effect position of certain guards has on operation of the machine

explain how steps involved in operating the machine should be communicated to other team members

describe aids available for the testing of the machine proof

discuss where testing should take place

explain the function of a polarisation filter in a densitometer

describe ideal conditions for inspecting the proof

discuss why it is necessary to use visual aids on the printed sheets

describe the acceptable wet trap value range for lithographic inks

outline an indication of optimum solid ink density in the absence of a proof

explain the result of low solid ink density and excessive dot gain

describe available methods to check and adjust ink colour and consistency

list adjustments that may cause mis-register

list adjustments made to position the image laterally

list adjustments made to position the image circumferentially

list adjustments made to position the image diagonally

discuss the effect of changing colour sequence on the wet trap value

explain the difference between mechanical and optical dot gain

outline the cause of excessive mechanical dot gain

explain who has responsibility for the final say in the OK of the job

identify machine manuals, safety and other documentation relevant to this task, where they are kept, and discuss information included in these documents.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the printing field of work and include access to a lithographic printing machine.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPPRN541 Set up for specialised pad printing

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to set up for specialised pad printing.

It applies to individuals who set up pad printing machines for multi-coloured or specialised print jobs, which usually require problem-solving and experimentation with the substrate and press settings.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Printing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Confirm specialised job specifications	1.1 Job requirements are read and interpreted from job documentation or production control system 1.2 Availability of all job related components is checked
2. Plan and carry out specialised set-up	2.1 Specialised job specifications are identified and analysed 2.2 Specialised set-up requirements are determined 2.3 Specialised set-up is completed in minimum time with minimum wastage 2.4 Appropriate tampons are selected according to job specifications 2.5 Tampons are secured into machine
3. Conduct specialised set-up of fixtures onto machine bed or conveyor	3.1 Appropriate fixtures are selected and secured to xy table or conveyor jig plates 3.2 Height of machine bed is adjusted to suit size of object to be printed 3.3 Xy table of machine bed is adjusted to suit position of image on object
4. Select and prepare inks and additives	4.1 Inks and additives are evaluated according to job specifications 4.2 Inks and additives are selected according to job specifications 4.3 Inks and additives are prepared according to work health and safety (WHS) requirements and manufacturer’s/supplier’s instructions with suitable precautions to minimise waste 4.4 Correct colour and weight/volume of ink are mixed and prepared according to requirements of the printing process and job specifications 4.5 Formulation of ink, colour match and approved colour are appropriately recorded 4.6 Inks and additives are appropriately labelled, handled and stored according to manufacturer’s/supplier’s instructions to prevent damage and hazards to personnel and to prolong shelf life
5. Set up machine for specialised pad printing	5.1 Plate holders are set up and adjusted for register according to job specifications 5.2 Appropriate plates and plate holders are selected and plates are secured into plate holders 5.3 Tampons are set up, evaluated and adjusted according to job specifications 5.4 Spatula and doctor blade are set up, evaluated and adjusted according to requirements of the pad printing process and job specifications OR 5.5 Ink cups are set up, evaluated and adjusted according to job specifications
6. Set up pre- and post-treatment processes	6.1 In-line loading is set up according to specialised object requirements and job specifications 6.2 In-line drying is set up according to specialised object requirements and job specifications 6.3 In-line ejection is set up according to specialised object requirements and job specifications
7. Conduct specialised proof run	7.1 Material to be used for proof is organised correctly 7.2 Machine is operated according to manufacturer’s specifications and enterprise procedures to produce a specified proof 7.3 Proof is visually inspected and/or tested or laboratory testing is organised according to enterprise procedures 7.4 Production does not commence without client approval or authority where appropriate 7.5 Results are interpreted and evaluated with adjustments carried out according to product and machine specifications
8. Troubleshoot machinery and material problems	8.1 Corrective or preventive action is recommended and implemented where appropriate 8.2 Changes are communicated to relevant personnel in a logical and easily understood manner 8.3 Changes are monitored to confirm improvement to production efficiency 8.4 Ongoing problems are reported according to enterprise procedures

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 2.1, 2.4, 4.1-4.3, 4.6, 5.1, 5.3-5.5, 6.1-6.3, 7.2, 7.5	Recognises and interprets text to establish job requirements from information contained within relevant instructions, procedures and specialised specifications
Writing	4.5, 4.6, 7.4, 8.2, 8.4	Completes workplace records and labels accurately and according to requirements Considers context and audience when composing texts
Oral Communication	7.4, 8.2, 8.4	Participates effectively in spoken interactions using appropriate vocabulary, questioning and listening techniques to gain approvals, report problems or provide information
Numeracy	2.3, 4.4	Interprets and analyses a range of mathematical information used in familiar and routine tasks
Navigate the world of work	4.3, 4.5, 4.6, 7.2-7.4, 8.4	Complies with legislative requirements and follows organisational policies and procedures relevant to own role Recognises boundaries of own role responsibilities
Interact with others	7.4, 8.2, 8.4	Collaborates with others to complete tasks according to requirements Follows accepted communication practices and protocols when seeking approvals or reporting problems
Get the work done	1.2, 2.2-2.5, 3.1-3.3, 4.1-4.3, 4.6, 5.1-5.5, 6.1-6.3, 7.1-7.3, 7.5, 8.1, 8.3	Plans, evaluates, identifies and assembles resources required to complete tasks Determines priorities and sequences steps involved in complex tasks with a focus on production efficiency Monitors results to determine whether requirements are met and identify opportunities for improvement Takes responsibility for addressing predictable and unpredictable problems in familiar work contexts Uses familiar digital systems and tools to access, organise, analyse and display information relevant to role Reads data from electronic monitoring and control systems

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPPRN541 Set up for specialised pad printing	ICPPR541C Set up for specialised pad printing	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRN541 Set up for specialised pad printing

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

safely set up a machine for specialised pad printing on TWO occasions, on different substrates, to meet manufacturer’s and job specifications, enterprise procedures and the performance criteria

set up manual pre- and post-treatment processes and conduct a proof run including adjusting settings to ensure production speeds are attained

find and use information relevant to the task from a variety of information sources.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

identify FOUR different substrate groups and suggest correct ink type for each group

explain THREE possible sub-groups of plastic in relation to ink selection

explain how to adjust process colour inks for correct colour balance

describe TWO methods of improving opacity of a light coloured ink on a dark substrate

outline how to determine correct pad shape for the FOUR applications

explain the effect that pad shape and hardness have on print quality

describe the effect commonly seen at the contact point of the nipple of a pad in a large solid print and how can it be avoided

outline how to prepare a new pad before its first printing

describe the correct plate type for these (given) applications

explain the difference between steel and photopolymer plates for process printing

discuss reasons for mis-registered images, and how they can be corrected

list work health and safety (WHS) concerns of setting presses and doctor blades

discuss possible machine adjustments so the doctor blade operates correctly

describe the effect of a damaged doctor blade

list various types of doctor blades and explain their applications

list WHS concerns when using pre- and post-treating substrates

outline common pre- and post-treatment methods for different substrates

explain the importance of pre- and post-treatments for different substrates

list causes and solutions for SIX common print problems (eg hairlines around image, loss of density in the centre of a solid image, fine lines of ink running through image, distortion of image, picking up ink from substrate by subsequent pads, washed out images, loss of fine lines in images, inconsistent colour)

identify where machine manuals, safety and other documentation relevant to this task are kept, and describe the information in them.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the printing field of work and include access to special purpose tools, equipment and materials, including a pad printing machine.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPPRN551 Set up for specialised relief printing

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to set up for specialised relief printing.

It applies to individuals who can problem-solve and experiment with substrate and press settings when operating reel- or sheet-fed plate, cylinder or rotary printing machines for specialised print jobs.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Printing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Confirm specialised job specifications	1.1 Job requirements are read and interpreted from job documentation or production control system 1.2 Availability of all job related components is checked
2. Plan and carry out specialised set-up	2.1 Specialised job specifications are identified and analysed 2.2 Specialised set-up requirements are determined 2.3 Specialised set-up is completed in minimum time with minimum wastage
3. Set up delivery systems	3.1 Delivery systems are set up, evaluated and adjusted according to job specifications 3.2 Substrate is added to and removed from process according to job specifications
4. Evaluate, select and prepare inks and additives	4.1 Inks, dyes or additives are evaluated according to end-user requirements and job specifications 4.2 Inks, dyes and additives are selected according to end-user requirements and job specifications 4.3 Inks, dyes and additives are prepared according to work health and safety (WHS) requirements, and manufacturer’s/supplier’s instructions with suitable precautions to minimise waste 4.4 Correct colour and weight/volume of ink are mixed and prepared according to requirements of the printing process and job specifications 4.5 Formulation of ink, colour match and approved colour are appropriately recorded 4.6 Inks, dyes and additives are appropriately labelled, handled and stored according to manufacturer’s/supplier’s instructions to prevent damage and hazards to personnel and to prolong shelf life
5. Set up machine for specialised relief printing	5.1 Appropriate relief plates are selected and secured to the machine 5.2 Relief polymer plates/forme are set up and adjusted according to job specifications (platen) 5.3 Relief polymer cylinders are set up and adjusted according to job specifications (platen) 5.4 Impression is set up and adjusted according to job specifications (platen and rotary) 5.5 Inking system is set up and adjusted according to requirements of the relief process and job specifications (platen and rotary) 5.6 Drying system is set up and adjusted according to job specifications
6. Conduct specialised proof run	6.1 Material to be used for specialised proof is organised correctly 6.2 Machine is operated according to manufacturer’s specifications and enterprise procedures to produce a specialised proof 6.3 Specialised proof is visually inspected and/or tested or laboratory testing is organised according to enterprise procedures 6.4 Production does not commence without client approval or authority where appropriate 6.5 Results are interpreted and adjustments are carried out according to product and machine specifications
7. Troubleshoot machinery and material problems	7.1 Corrective or preventive action is recommended and implemented where appropriate 7.2 Changes are communicated to relevant personnel in a logical and easily understood manner 7.3 Changes are monitored to confirm improvement to production efficiency 7.4 Ongoing problems are reported according to enterprise procedures

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 2.1, 4.1-4.4, 4.6, 5.2-5.6, 6.2, 6.5	Recognises and interprets text to establish job requirements from information contained within relevant instructions, procedures and specifications
Writing	4.5, 4.6, 6.4, 7.2, 7.4	Completes workplace records and labels accurately and according to requirements Considers context and audience when composing texts
Oral Communication	6.4, 7.2, 7.4	Participates effectively in spoken interactions using appropriate vocabulary, questioning and listening techniques to gain approvals, report problems or provide information
Numeracy	2.3, 4.4	Interprets and analyses a range of mathematical information used in familiar and routine tasks
Navigate the world of work	4.3, 4.5, 4.6, 6.2-6.4, 7.4	Complies with legislative requirements and follows organisational policies and procedures relevant to own role Recognises boundaries of own role and responsibilities
Interact with others	6.4, 7.2, 7.4	Complies with legislative requirements and follows organisational policies and procedures relevant to own role Recognises boundaries of own role and responsibilities
Get the work done	1.2, 2.2, 2.3, 4.3, 4.4, 4.6, 5.1-5.6, 6.1-6.5, 7.1-7.4	Plans, evaluates, identifies and assembles resources required to complete tasks Determines priorities and sequences steps involved in complex tasks Monitors results to determine whether requirements are met and to identify opportunities for improvement Takes responsibility for addressing predictable and unpredictable problems in familiar work contexts Uses familiar digital systems and tools to access, organise, analyse and display information relevant to role Reads data from electronic monitoring and control systems

Range of Conditions

This section specifies different work environments and conditions that may affect performance. Essential operating conditions that may be present (depending on the work situation, needs of the candidate, accessibility of the item, and local industry and regional contexts) are included.

Delivery systems MUST include EITHER:	reel OR sheet
Setting up, evaluating and adjusting MUST include EITHER:	unwind and rewind reels webbing procedure and web control systems splicing/joining reels print web viewing devices folders and sheeters set off / marking prevention devices OR feeder and delivery sections sheet pick-up and transportation system transfer and control system set off / marking prevention devices

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPPRN551 Set up for specialised relief printing	ICPPR551C Set up for specialised relief printing	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRN551 Set up for specialised relief printing

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

safely set up a relief printing machine for specialised printing on TWO occasions, using different substrates and including at least two in-line processes, according to manufacturer’s and job specifications, enterprise procedures and the performance criteria

set up reel- or sheet-fed platen, cylinder or rotary printing machines for specialised print jobs including conducting a proof run and adjusting settings to ensure production speeds are attained

find and use information relevant to the task from a variety of information sources.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

explain why it is important that job specifications are read and properly understood

discuss production problems that might occur if job specifications are not read and properly understood

name the person to discuss any production problems with

outline the importance of printing plate hardness

list faults that may be detected on new plates

identify type of solvents used on photopolymer plates

define V-block mounting

explain how V-block mounting is achieved

discuss the purpose of binding plates after mounting

list checks to perform prior to cylinder installation

explain precautions to ensure plate/cylinders are not damaged during installation

list WHS precautions for preparing inks and additives

list details to check for an ink’s suitability for the printing process

describe any special end-use requirements that may be necessary

discuss additives and their use in inks

explain the use of a spectrophotometer to assess colour of an ink

outline the formula for calculating correct quantity of lithographic ink

describe the print fault likely if excessive driers are mixed into the ink

identify precautions to minimise waste when preparing the ink

explain shelf life of most inks

discuss conditions relevant to storage of inks and additives

describe conventions for labelling mixed inks

list major WHS concerns of setting up the machine

list the order eccentric or concentric roller adjustments should be made in

discuss the width of the contact stripe between two rollers when setting rollers

discuss how to determine the ink duct setting

explain the ideal ink duct sweep setting

outline recommended degrees shore hardness for forme rollers

name various types of ink drying/curing systems

explain the operation of the true inch function fitted to some machines

identify problems that may cause the machine to keep stopping

list necessary checks prior to engaging the impression

outline checks performed when running the machine

describe the effect of the position of certain guards on the operation of the machine

explain importance of communicating steps involved in operating the machine to other team members

identify aids available for testing the machine proof

explain what tests are necessary for an individual job

identify where testing should take place

describe the function of a polarisation filter in a densitometer

explain ideal conditions for inspecting the proof

explain the cause of a halo effect on the image

identify methods available to check and adjust ink colour and consistency

discuss adjustments that may cause mis-register

outline adjustments made to position the image laterally

outline adjustments made to position the image circumferentially

describe the effect of changing the colour sequence on the final colour cast

explain the difference between mechanical and optical dot gain

explain the cause of excessive mechanical dot gain

name who has responsibility for the final say in the OK of the job

discuss in-line processes used in specialised pad printing

identify machine manuals, safety and other documentation relevant to this task and where they are kept, and describe the information in them.

For reel systems only

describe how to determine position of the reel

discuss what happens if brake tension is not set correctly

explain the function of the ‘dancer’ roller on a web machine

outline the function of nip rollers

discuss what happens if the web is not spliced correctly

explain how the web is controlled in the rewind unit

outline the function of a slitter on a web machine

list problems attributable to a blunt knife when sheeting

list the main reason for blistering on a heatset machine

explain how the drying unit cures the ink

For sheet systems only

list the major work health and safety (WHS) concerns of setting up the sheet transportation system

explain the cause of more than one sheet being picked up in the feeder

explain why accurate feeder set up is essential

describe what determines position of the sheet prior to being transferred to the printing unit

outline how to determine which front lays to use

identify the type of substrate that requires additional front lays to be engaged

explain the need for additional front lays when printing this type of substrate

identify the most important WHS precaution to observe when setting up the delivery

List WHS precautions for removing sheets from the delivery

explain the cause of sheets being delivered incorrectly

outline necessary adjustments if changing from lightweight to heavyweight stocks

explain what determines sheet release into the delivery

identify problems from excessive use of anti-set off spray powder

explain what causes printed sheets to set off in the delivery

describe how to reduce the possibility of set off in the delivery

explain how air blast can assist sheet delivery

explain how much packing is required in the tympan

explain how the level of printing pressure is determined

explain the ideal condition of the tympan

discuss how to achieve the correct top sheet tension when fitting a new tympan

identify print faults that can occur if the tympan is not tensioned correctly

discuss the need to use visual aids on the printed sheets

explain the procedure to lengthen print length on this type of press

explain the procedure to shorten print length on this type of press

explain the importance of keeping machine frames and unit slides clean

list WHS precautions for installing printing cylinders in the machine

explain how to determine the optimum print sequence

point out the visual aid on the plate that identifies the colour of ink to be used

list WHS precautions for webbing up the machine

discuss remedial steps to take if there is a possibility of the ink marking in the rewind sheet delivery system on a sheet-fed machine

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the printing field of work and include access to a reel- or sheet-fed platen, cylinder or rotary printing machine.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPPRN552 Manage digital workflow

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to manage digital workflow from concept stage to completion and delivery of a final product for publication. The final product may be paper based or electronic.

This unit applies to individuals responsible for managing and optimising a digital workflow in a range of commercial environments.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Printing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Determine job resource requirements	1.1 Job requirements are correctly interpreted from client brief or job information 1.2 Scope of required human, financial and physical resources is identified based on job information 1.3 Costs are estimated according to chosen pricing models and estimating practices 1.4 Budget plans are established and checked against estimations to deliver accurate, documented costing 1.5 Scheduling and time management is integrated into project planning and monitoring 1.6 Human resources are incorporated within project framework 1.7 Business transactions are undertaken ethically and according to law
2. Plan digital production workflow	2.1 Workflow stages are identified to determine sequencing 2.2 Workflow is sequenced for optimum production efficiency and job quality 2.3 Technical processes and protocols are integrated into the workflow 2.4 Need for new sequences is evaluated according to job requirements and feasibility tests 2.5 Evaluation mechanisms are incorporated at key stages of work 2.6 Workflow is documented according to project needs and enterprise requirements
3. Monitor workflow and resources	3.1 Work processes and progress are monitored against plans 3.2 Colleagues are assisted to achieve outcomes with technical and other support 3.3 Actual job costs are documented and monitored against budgets, and variations are communicated to appropriate people 3.4 Need for variations is identified and adjustments made as required
4. Finalise job	4.1 Job is completed with required outcome achieved within designated timeframes and costs 4.2 Estimated and actual costs are reviewed and used to inform future planning 4.3 Efficiency and quality of outcomes are evaluated and findings incorporated for future planning

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1-1.4	Comprehends and analyses information from a range of sources to establish scheduling requirements
Writing	1.4, 2.6, 3.3	Drafts, develops and documents plans and work documents using appropriate formats
Numeracy	1.3, 1.4, 1.7, 2.2, 3.1, 3.2, 4.2	Performs calculations needed to create and manage schedules and budgets Compares estimated against actual costs
Navigate the world of work	1.3, 1.4, 1.7	Understands and complies with legislative and ethical requirements
Interact with others	3.3	Collaborates with others to achieve joint outcomes, playing an active role in facilitating effective group interaction
Get the work done	1.1-1.6, 2.1-2.5, 3.1-3.3, 4.1-4.3	Develops plans to manage relatively complex tasks with an awareness of how they contribute to broader goals Monitors and evaluates results against stated goals, adjusting plans where necessary Systematically gathers and analyses all relevant information and evaluates options to make decisions about production processes Identifies and addresses problems that may impact on successful adoption of production processes

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPPRN552 Manage digital workflow	ICPPR552A Manage digital production workflow	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages Content re-ordered and re-worked for clarity Renamed to reflect industry practice	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRN552 Manage digital workflow

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

manage digital production workflow for at least THREE different publications, including print and electronic:

determine required level of resource from client requirements

accurately cost the work

complete workflow planning

monitor workflow

manage resources

finalise jobs with required outcome and within required timeframe and budget.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

explain key considerations for management of a digital workflow process:

project planning and scheduling requirements

costing and resources issues

communication and approvals processes

work sequencing

work monitoring processes

content management

file management – naming, storage, saving, archiving

editing processes

distribution

outline costing/estimating methods for digital work

identify elements that can be adjusted in estimations if they consistently do not match costs

identify work health and safety (WHS) concerns to consider when planning production

describe key aspects of monitoring workflow and resources:

what needs to be monitored to maintain standards

who is involved in monitoring

role of keeping accurate production records

review of production records and actual costs

outline common causes of failure in each area of work monitored, and procedures to minimise the effects of these

discuss processes to make improvements that impact quality standards

outline evaluation and review processes for digital work

describe features of computerised production monitoring systems used to accurately assess costs.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the printing field of work and include access to relevant facilities, equipment and materials used for digital publication.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPPRP211 Develop a basic design concept

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to produce a basic graphic design concept for a client, from assessment of the brief, to production of roughs and finished art.

It applies to individuals who work under direct supervision and in consultation with others to design and prepare layouts, artwork and manipulate images and texts to meet work and production requirements.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Pre-Press

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1 Assess brief requirements	1.1 Printing requirements of layout brief are determined to align pre-press processes with printing feasibility 1.2 Brief is broken down into stages of production to determine a plan 1.3 A plan of action is designed to meet time requirements of each stage so deadlines are identified and adhered to 1.4 Correct industry-standard terms of design and typography are used to facilitate communication
2 Assemble layout	2.1 Client copy and images are assembled according to brief requirements 2.2 Library files are accessed for relevant data to conform to brief requirements 2.3 Appropriate equipment and materials to complete the layout are assembled so brief is undertaken efficiently 2.4 Design area is cleaned and prepared, ready for use
3 Render simple graphic design	3.1 Client requirements are checked to ensure design concept matches the brief 3.2 Preliminary graphic design ideas are constructed according to the brief 3.3 Simple graphic design concept is rendered electronically to conform to client brief 3.4 Rendered graphic design is checked for conformance with client brief
4 Produce finished artwork	4.1 Layout grid is created to meet client brief specifications 4.2 Type is selected for readability and style, and fitted into grid space allocated to conform to client brief 4.3 Photographs and illustrations are selected, scaled and cropped appropriately to fit allocated grid space 4.4 Overlays/colour roughs are created to conform to brief specifications 4.5 Components of layout are positioned accurately using keylines to conform to grid framework
5 Check for suitability	5.1 Layout is checked to eliminate omissions and errors 5.2 Layout design is checked against brief requirements to conform to critical requirements of proposed medium 5.3 Layout is rendered ready to present to client
6 Tidy materials and store data	6.1 Equipment and materials are returned to storage according to enterprise procedures 6.2 Design data and materials are saved and/or filed ready for future retrieval according to enterprise procedures 6.3 Design area is cleaned according to enterprise procedures ready for reuse

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 3.1, 3.4, 4.4, 5.2	Recognises and interprets text to establish job requirements from information contained within relevant procedures and specifications
Writing	1.2, 1.3, 3.2	Produces documents using headings, instructions and layout that meet needs of audience and purpose of text
Oral Communication	1.4, 3.1	Uses appropriate vocabulary, including technical language relevant to role and context
Navigate the world of work	1.1, 1.4, 2.4, 6.1-6.3	Recognises and follows organisational and legislative requirements associated with own role
Interact with others	1.4, 3.1	Uses appropriate communication protocols and conventions to confirm or clarify client requirements
Get the work done	1.1-1.4, 2.1-2.3, 3.2-3.4, 4.1-4.5, 5.1-5.3, 6.1-6.3	Organises and prioritises work and personal commitments, with some sense of what is achievable in a timeframe Plans, identifies and assembles resources required to complete tasks Takes responsibility for routine decisions related directly to own role Understands purposes, specific functions and key features of common digital systems and tools and operates them effectively to design and save files in required format

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPPPR211 Develop a basic design concept	ICPPP211C Develop a basic design concept	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRP211 Develop a basic design concept

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

correctly prepare TWO sets of colour roughs and artwork containing line and tone work according to specifications of client brief, ensuring rendered design meets design brief requirements, conforms to commercial design standards, and meets reproduction final use requirements.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

identify purpose of artwork being prepared

identify number and specific colours of the job

name scale of artwork to finished job

explain difference between reflective and transparent originals

name three essential elements to consider when preparing art for printing/publication

outline different requirements for TWO printing or electronic output processes

outline types of halftone dot structures and maximum and minimum tonal ranges that could be used to reproduce this artwork

outline work health and safety (WHS) requirements when using cameras or computers

name colour sequence and overlap for transparent/opaque colours

explain affect (influence) of selection of different typefaces

describe method used for registration and trim marks

evaluate artwork for density, definition and resolution, and explain how can this be corrected

name characteristics of properly prepared line artwork

identify location of manuals, safety and other documentation that are relevant to this task and information that is included in these documents.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the Pre-Press field of work and include access to special purpose tools, equipment and materials.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPPRP221 Select and apply type

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to undertake basic typesetting tasks, including selecting required fonts, fitting, and proofing final type.

It applies to individuals in the printing and graphic art industry. Typically they design and prepare layouts and artwork, and manipulate images and texts to meet production requirements. They generally work under direct supervision.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Pre-Press

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1 Identify fonts	1.1 A range of fonts is identified to meet diverse client requirements and final output media 1.2 Point sizes and leading of type are identified to meet diverse client requirements and final output media
2 Select, fit and produce type for a basic brief	2.1 Appropriate type is selected to meet brief specifications 2.2 Type is fitted into copy space allocated according to design layout 2.3 Type is set and produced using rules and boxes according to design layout
3 Proofread and correct type	3.1 Type is checked for accuracy, omissions and errors according to job specifications 3.2 Proofs are marked-up with correct proofreading marks 3.3 Type is corrected in accordance with job specifications

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 1.2, 2.1, 2.2, 3.1, 3.3	Recognises and interprets text to establish job requirements from information contained within relevant procedures and specifications Proofreads documents to ensure accuracy and consistency of information and clarity of meaning
Writing	3.2	Uses a variety of strategies for planning, drafting, reviewing and proofreading
Numeracy	1.2, 2.2	Selects and uses appropriate familiar mathematical problem-solving strategies to solve problems in familiar contexts
Get the work done	1.1, 1.2, 2.1-2.3, 3.1-3.3	Determines job priorities, resources and equipment, and works logically and systematically to undertake clearly defined and familiar tasks Automatically implements standard procedures for routine decisions in response to familiar problems Uses digital systems and tools and operates them effectively to design and apply type

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPPRP221 Select and apply type	ICPPP221C Select and apply type	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRP221 Select and apply type

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

correctly prepare TWO different typesetting jobs using manual or electronic equipment and suitable software to select, set, arrange and modify type according to job specifications and listed performance criteria

find and use information relevant to task from a variety of information sources.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

identify different printing processes and/or electronic media and explain effects of each on type selection and design

define aspects of typography that influence design of the brief

outline limitations with type reproduction in printing processes

explain characteristics of and differences between serif and sans serif categories

explain type atmosphere

identify elements of a dynamic arrangement

identify and explain text and margin proof-reader marks

identify and use correct grammar and punctuation, including apostrophes

list manuals, safety and other documentation relevant to this task and identify where are they kept and what information is included.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the Pre-Press field of work and include access to special purpose tools, industry software packages, equipment and materials.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPPRP223 Photograph a line image

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to undertake graphic arts camera work, including preparing a camera and equipment to photograph a line image that meets design and production quality standards.

It applies to individuals who design and prepare layouts and artwork, and manipulate images and texts to meet production requirements, and who generally work under direct supervision.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Pre-Press

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1 Prepare camera	1.1 Camera is prepared to ensure appropriate size and focus for the job 1.2 Correct exposure for line reproduction is established according to manufacturer’s specifications
2 Prepare and operate processor	2.1 Processor is prepared to ensure correct chemical balance, temperature and maintenance 2.2 Processor is operated in line with established procedures
3 Operate camera	3.1 Appropriate photographic material and processing chemical combination is selected for line image 3.2 Line images are photographed using correct camera settings 3.3 Quality of photographic output is evaluated to ensure suitability for design purpose and final media or reproduction process

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 1.2	Recognises and interprets text to establish job requirements from information contained within relevant procedures and specifications
Get the work done	1.1, 2.1, 2.2, 3-1-3.3	Determines priorities and sequences steps involved in clearly defined, familiar tasks and identifies and assembles resources required Applies analytical processes to resolve technical problems Initiates standard procedures when responding to familiar problems within immediate context

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPPRP223 Photograph a line image	ICPPP223C Photograph a line image	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRP223 Photograph a line image

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

prepare, set up and use a graphic arts camera to photograph and process TWO different line originals according to listed performance criteria

evaluate quality of photographic output to ensure suitability for design purpose and final media or reproduction process

ensure underlying quality of photographic images is transferable across different camera designs and processing systems; identifying the substrate for reproduction, and quality of photographic image, is suitable for the identified printing process

demonstrate an ability to find and use task relevant information from a variety of information sources.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

describe effect of different printing processes on line images

perform enlargement factor calculation

identify base exposure data

identify factors that cause base exposure to change

correctly process an image

identify factors that control quality of output through the processor

explain copy characteristics that require a change to base exposure

explain relationship between magnification and exposure

list characteristics of a correctly exposed line negative

outline image requirements for various printing processes

list work health and safety (WHS) requirement for operating a processor

explain how to maintain consistent output from the processor

list manuals, safety and other documentation relevant to this task and identify where are they kept and what information is included.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the Pre-Press field of work and include access to special purpose tools, equipment and materials.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPPRP224 Produce pages using a page layout application

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to compose pages based on a client brief using a high-end application, and covers how to arrange basic elements on a page, finalise artwork and check quality.

It applies to individuals in the printing and graphic art industry who design and prepare layouts and artwork, and manipulate images and texts to meet production requirements. They generally work under direct supervision.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Pre-Press

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1 Arrange elements on page	1.1 Client copy and images are assembled to conform to design brief 1.2 Text is prepared and required fonts and font sizes are used 1.3 Basic elements are created and arranged on page to conform to design brief 1.4 Elements are copied and pasted according to design brief 1.5 ‘Help’ function is accessed if required and solution to queries found 1.6 Document set-up is completed to conform to design brief
2 Finalise artwork	2.1 Pages and combined elements are composed correctly to suit specified page size 2.2 Margins and borders incorporate a bleed allowance
3 Check quality	3.1 Text is reviewed for possible errors and omissions, and errors are discussed with client or supervisor 3.2 Basic elements are arranged maintaining overall layout balance and correct tonal quality 3.3 Hardcopy proof is printed and rechecked for errors, omissions and overall layout balance 3.4 Trim marks and margins are correctly placed 3.5 Necessary changes are made and reviewed on screen and re-proofed as required 3.6 Job is saved according to enterprise procedures 3.7 Proof or PDF is created to present to client

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1-1.6, 3.1, 3.3, 3.5	Recognises and interprets text to establish job requirements from information contained within relevant procedures and specifications
Writing	1.2	Gathers information from range of sources to record using headings, instructions and layout that meet audience needs and text purpose
Oral Communication	3.1	Uses appropriate vocabulary, including technical language relevant to role and context
Numeracy	1.3, 2.1, 2.2, 3.4	Selects and uses appropriate familiar mathematical problem-solving strategies to solve problems in familiar contexts
Navigate the world of work	3.6	Recognises and follows organisational and legislative requirements associated with own role
Interact with others	3.1	Uses appropriate communication protocols and conventions to confirm or clarify client requirements
Get the work done	1.1-1.5, 2.1, 2.2, 3.1-3.4, 3.7	Determines priorities and sequences steps involved in clearly defined, familiar tasks Applies analytical processes to resolve problems Initiates standard procedures when responding to familiar problems within immediate context Understands purposes, specific functions and key features of common digital systems and tools and operates them effectively to create and save files in required format

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPPRP224 Produce pages using a page layout application	ICPPP224C Produce pages using a page layout application	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRP224 Produce pages using a page layout application

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

prepare TWO different sets of page layouts according to a client’s design brief and the listed performance criteria

demonstrate ability to find and use information relevant to task from a variety of information sources

demonstrate ability to communicate ideas and information, and clarify information with client or supervisor.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

outline consideration given to the printing process during design phase

identify problems that can occur if printing process isn’t considered during design stage

define substrate size consideration during imposition

outline how planning occurs for multiple colours and graphics during imposition

describe considerations given to ensuring own health and safety when using a keyboard

discuss importance of saving documents in particular areas of a computer or network

outline how to find a document on a computer or network

list steps involved in changing and saving templates

explain value of style guides and style sheets.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the Pre-Press field of work and include access to:

special purpose tools, equipment and materials

industry software packages.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPPRP225 Produce graphics using a graphics application

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to develop computer-generated graphics based on a client brief, using a high-end application; and focuses on techniques required to create and manipulate visual objects on a page.

It applies to individuals who assist in the production of professionally designed and presented print and electronic media using desktop publishing software. They generally work under direct supervision with some responsibility for the production process and ensuring output meets the requirements of the design brief.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Pre-Press

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1 Prepare work environment	1.1 Details of brief are reviewed to identify preference setting requirements 1.2 Monitor is calibrated using an International Colour Consortium (ICC) profile to ensure closest possible colour match 1.3 Palettes are arranged to suit job and personal preferences 1.4 View magnification is set for ease of working with graphics
2 Produce objects	2.1 Ruler units are set and grid is displayed to ensure artwork meets design specifications 2.2 Tools are used to produce objects, required attributes are entered and shapes manipulated, until graphic framework is finalised 2.3 Lines and curves are adjusted and edited to fit design specifications 2.4 Objects are painted and transposed, and strokes and effects are scaled according to design brief 2.5 Colours are created, edited and saved to colour palette and saturation of colour is adjusted 2.6 Colour and appearance attributes are selected and copied, as required 2.7 Gradients fills, mesh and patterns are used to paint and blend according to layout and design brief
3 Alter objects	3.1 Objects are grouped or individually selected, moved, scaled or rotated using a variety of methods 3.2 Objects are reflected, sheared and distorted according to design brief 3.3 Three dimensional objects are formed and edited and gradient colour added to create depth 3.4 Perspective of objects is adjusted, as required 3.5 Transformations are repeated according to design brief 3.6 Smooth colour blends are created between objects, and blends are modified as required to meet design brief
4 Add type as a graphic element	4.1 Required type is added to type containers, and type attributes and formatting are set to reflect design brief 4.2 Type is wrapped or placed along a path to complement graphics 4.3 Type is converted to type outlines or letterforms, and shapes are modified
5 Set appearance attributes and styles	5.1 Properties of graphic are set to meet the design brief 5.2 Effects are added to a graphic and edited to make appearance fit design brief 5.3 Appearances required for further use are saved as styles
6 Set up layers	6.1 Objects are organised in layers and stacking order is controlled 6.2 Layers are locked and/or nested and grouped according to design brief 6.3 Styles are added or removed from layers when layer consistency is or is not required
7 Finalise document	7.1 Appropriate format for saving graphic is identified given various elements in the graphic 7.2 Resolution for effects and any filters are set based on image quality 7.3 Document is checked to ensure correct layout file and that all elements are printable 7.4 Portable Document Format (PDF) or other export options are fixed to best settings for final medium and file is exported and saved

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 2.1, 2.3, 2.7, 3.2, 3.5, 3.6, 4.1, 5.1, 5.2, 6.2	Recognises and interprets text to establish job requirements from information contained within relevant procedures and specifications
Writing	4.2, 7.2	Gathers information from a range of sources to record using headings, instructions and layout that meet audience needs and text purpose
Numeracy	3.4	Selects and uses appropriate familiar mathematical problem-solving strategies to solve problems in familiar contexts
Get the work done	1.1-1.4, 2.1-2.7, 3.2-3.6, 4.1-4.3, 5.1-5.3, 6.1-6.3, 7.1-7.4	Determines job priorities, resources and equipment, and works logically and systematically to undertake clearly defined and familiar tasks Initiates standard procedures when responding to familiar problems within immediate context Understands purposes, specific functions and key features of common digital systems and tools and operates them effectively to complete routine tasks

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPPRP225 Produce graphics using a graphics application	ICPPP225C Produce graphics using a graphics application	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRP225 Produce graphics using a graphics application

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

develop graphics based on a client brief using a high-end application

demonstrate ability to find and use information relevant to the task from a variety of information sources.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

correctly identify image formats

identify correct application to be used

explain how graphics can be manipulated

identify different colour models

identify attributes of appearance

list different effects that may be applied to an object

explain use of filters

list text and formatting features used in graphics

outline key requirements when interpreting a brief.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the Pre-Press field of work and include access to:

special purpose tools, equipment and material

industry standard computer

current software applications used to produce graphics.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPPRP231 Manually combine spot colour and basic four-colour images

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to manually prepare images and film and combine elements and prepare registration and artwork for the next production stage.

It applies to individuals in the printing industry who design and prepare layouts and artwork and manipulate images and texts to meet production requirements. They generally work under direct supervision.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Pre-Press

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1 Evaluate images for combining	1.1 Screen rulings are checked according to job specifications and enterprise procedures 1.2 Dot percentages are checked according to job specifications and enterprise procedure 1.3 Image orientation is checked according to job specifications
2 Contact film	2.1 Frame is prepared for contacting according to enterprise procedures 2.2 Film is contacted using a vacuum frame and using predetermined exposures according to job specifications
3 Combine film manually	3.1 A range of basic combining techniques is identified to meet diverse client requirements and film substrates 3.2 Film is combined employing brush skills to achieve opaquing according to job specifications 3.3 Film is combined adding masks according to design specifications 3.4 Film is combined adding tints and stipples according to design specifications
4 Combine paste-up elements manually	4.1 Film is combined adding tints and stipples according to design specifications 4.2 Screen, line and type images are combined on base sheet according to job specifications 4.3 Masks are produced and positioned on base sheet to add tints, stipples and colour according to design specifications 4.4 Rules, keylines and cut marks are drawn according to job specifications 4.5 Assembled paste-up is checked for squareness, accuracy in positioning of elements and cleanliness of work
5 Maintain register of combined images	5.1 Punch register systems are applied to combine images 5.2 Registration of combined images is accurately placed to ensure alignment of film 5.3 Registration of combined images is accurately secured to ensure alignment of all components
6 Prepare finished film and artwork for next production stage	6.1 Finished film and artwork are laid-down and spaced according to specified paper size identified in job specifications 6.2 Pages and film are pasted up to suit given imposition

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1-1.3, 2.2, 3.1, 3.2, 3.4, 4.1-4.4, 6.1	Recognises and interprets text to establish job requirements from information contained within relevant procedures and specifications
Navigate the world of work	1.1, 1.2, 2.1	Complies with legislative requirements and follows organisational policies and procedures relevant to own role
Get the work done	1.1-1.3, 2.1, 2.2, 3.1, 3.2, 3.4, 4.1-4.4, 5.1-5.3, 6.1, 6.2	Plans, identifies and assembles resources required to complete tasks in logical sequence Responds to predictable problems and implements standard or logical solutions related to role in immediate work environment

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPPRP231 Manually combine spot colour and basic four-colour images	ICPPP231C Manually combine spot colour and basic four-colour images	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRP231 Manually combine spot colour and basic four-colour images

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

prepare and assemble TWO designated layouts, using a variety of selected image elements, following job brief and according to listed performance criteria (finished film and artwork must be laid-down and spaced according to printer’s imposition identified in job specifications and registration of combined images accurately secured)

find and use information relevant to the task from a variety of information sources

demonstrate skill of combining safe light and room light environments using various light sensitive materials, exposure and processing systems.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

explain how printing processes affect requirements for combining

list appropriate films used for contacting and duplicating

outline procedure for establishing basic exposure data for contact emulsions

describe spreading and choking requirements for preparation of a mask

identify techniques used to control degree of spread and choke

detail requirements of an effective pin registration system

name main types of pin register systems and outline their applications\

list manuals, safety and other documentation relevant to this task and identify where are they kept and what information is included.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the Pre-Press field of work and include access to special purpose tools, equipment and industry software packages.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPPRP232 Electronically combine and assemble data

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to electronically combine and assemble data to produce a page layout.

It applies to individuals in the printing and graphic art industry who design and prepare layouts and artwork, and manipulate images and texts to meet production requirements. They generally work under direct supervision.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Pre-Press

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1 Plan and prepare the work	1.1 Computer functions are undertaken to access required data from electronic files 1.2 Required data is checked to ensure correct format for software application and output 1.3 System is checked for required fonts to fulfil job specifications 1.4 Storage capacity of system is checked for sufficiency
2 Combine data	2.1 Pages are composed according to job specifications 2.2 Elements are placed on page according to job specifications 2.3 Trapping is applied according to job specifications 2.4 Image output is prepared and appropriate colour profiles are applied according to media output
3 Create multiple images	3.1 Basic step and repeat layout is prepared according to job specifications 3.2 Appropriate software for step and repeat is accessed according to job specifications 3.3 Images are stepped according to job specifications

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.3, 2.1-2.3, 3.1-3.3	Recognises and interprets text to establish job requirements from information contained within relevant procedures and specifications
Get the work done	1.1-1.4, 2.1-2.4, 3.1-3.3	Determines priorities and sequences steps involved in clearly defined, familiar tasks Applies analytical processes to resolve problems Initiates standard procedures when responding to familiar problems within immediate context Understands purposes, specific functions and key features of common digital systems and tools and operates them effectively to create and save files in required format

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPPRP232 Electronically combine and assemble data	ICPPP232C Electronically combine and assemble data	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRP232 Electronically combine and assemble data

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

use a desktop platform (or high-end system) with appropriate layout, design and drafting software, to combine and assemble TWO jobs following the job brief and according to the listed performance criteria. (Since underlying skills associated with combining and assembling should be transferable across the design and pre-press sectors, it is important that substrates be identified along with the associated printing process that is being simulated.)

find and use information relevant to task from a variety of information sources.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

explain how to create a page layout according to job specifications

describe function of electronic trapping of image elements as applied to image assembly

explain how trapping relates to job specification

outline how step and repeat layout is prepared to suit a job specification

list main criteria for evaluating final output

outline requirements of a contract proof as compared to an in-house check proof

list manuals, safety and other documentation relevant to this task and identify where are they kept and what information is included.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the Pre-Press field of work and include access to special purpose tools, equipment and industry software packages.

In a pre-press environment many individuals are required to be competent in the use of more than one page layout application.

If this unit is to be used to assess competency with page layout applications, it should be used as a secondary unit to ICPPP224 Produce pages using a page layout application. It should be used when an additional page layout application is being assessed or taught.

It is not to be used to assess an individual on the same page layout application as ICPPP224 Produce pages using a page layout application. In other words, the individual should not receive two units of competency for one page layout application.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPPRP252 Output images

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to prepare an output device for outputting images. Devices may include, but are not limited to, plate setters, image setters and commercial digital printers.

It applies to individuals in the printing and graphic art industry.

Typically these individuals design and prepare layouts and artwork, and manipulate images and texts to meet production requirements. They generally work under direct supervision.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Pre-Press

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1 Prepare output device	1.1 Output devices are prepared according to manufacturer’s and job specifications 1.2 All required proofs and checks are completed prior to outputting images
2 Output image	2.1 System is activated to initiate output according to job specifications 2.2 Print queues are managed to ensure efficient production 2.3 Image output is evaluated to ensure it conforms to job specifications 2.4 Image is prepared for next stage of production process according to job specifications

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 2.1, 2.3, 2.4	Recognises and interprets text to establish job requirements from information contained within relevant procedures and specifications
Get the work done	1.1, 1.2, 2.1-2.4	Determines priorities and sequences steps involved in clearly defined, familiar tasks and identifies and assembles resources required Applies analytical processes to resolve technical problems Initiates standard procedures when responding to familiar problems within immediate context Understands purposes, specific functions and key features of common digital systems and tools and operates them effectively to create and save files in required format

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPPRP252 Output images	ICPPP252C Output images	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRP252 Output images

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

calibrate and use at least TWO devices to output electronic images to film, paper or plate, according to listed performance criteria

find and use information relevant to the task from a variety of information sources

provide proofed, error-free final output to digital printer/plotter that conforms to the job specifications

identify substrate for reproduction

demonstrate a clear understanding of printing processes.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

describe types of output devices used in pre-press

outline considerations that determine application of these devices

explain function of calibration software

describe procedure for downloading a file to output device

outline main considerations to ensure accurate transfer of files

describe correct handling and material loading of the output device

explain how to identify a correctly processed image

list factors that control image quality through a processor

list criteria for identifying a correctly transferred file

detail requirement of image to meet job specifications

outline criteria to ensure final image meets job specifications

list criteria for evaluating a final film

list manuals, safety and other documentation relevant to this task and identify where they are kept and what information is included.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the Pre-Press field of work and include access to special purpose tools, equipment and industry software packages.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPPRP260 Proof images

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to proof images, including chemical or digital, and prepare the proof for the next stage of production.

It applies to individuals in the printing and graphic art industry who design and prepare layouts and artwork, and manipulate images and texts to meet production requirements. They generally work under direct supervision.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Pre-Press

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1 Set up and maintain proofing equipment	1.1 Proofing equipment is set up and maintained according to manufacturer’s specifications and enterprise standards 1.2 The working environment is cleaned and maintained to ensure proof quality 1.3 Proofing materials are used cost efficiently according to job contract costs
2 Expose and process proof	2.1 Quality control of proof is maintained according to job specifications 2.2 Images are positioned accurately on proof according to job specifications 2.3 Work Health and Safety (WHS) requirements are observed to ensure safe use of equipment 2.4 Proof is prepared for presentation ready for next stage of the process

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 2.1, 2.2	Recognises and interprets text to establish job requirements from information contained within relevant procedures and specifications
Navigate the world of work	1.1, 1.2, 2.3	Recognises and follows explicit and implicit protocols and meets expectations associated with own role
Get the work done	1.1-1.3, 2.1, 2.2, 2.4	Determines priorities and sequences steps involved in clearly defined, familiar tasks and identifies and assembles required resources Applies analytical processes to resolve technical problems Initiates standard procedures when responding to familiar problems within immediate context Understands purposes, specific functions and key features of common digital systems and tools and operates them effectively to design and save files in required format

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPPRP260 Proof images	ICPPP260C Proof images	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRP260 Proof images

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

prepare and set up proofing area to produce digital or chemical proofs of TWO four-colour separated images according to listed performance criteria. (Since underlying skills associated with digital or chemical proofing should be transferable across a range of systems, it is important to identify substrates along with the associated printing process that is being simulated.)

position images accurately on proof according to job specifications so proof is ready for the next stage

find and use information relevant to the task from a variety of information sources.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

describe work health and safety (WHS) issues in proofing area

outline main considerations for setting up the proofing environment

explain how correct exposure levels for the proofing system are chosen

identify actinic light requirements

name aids used to control and ensure repeatability in proofing

describe considerations when matching a proof to output requirements

identify correct stock for output device

explain how incorrect processing of chemical proof is identified

outline corrective action to take if incorrect processing occurs

list main criteria for proof evaluation

describe lighting conditions required for evaluating proofs

list special requirements for Pantone Matching System (PMS) proofs

list manuals, safety and other documentation relevant to this task and identify where they are kept and what information is included.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the Pre-Press field of work and include access to special purpose tools, equipment and industry software packages.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPPRP266 Produce relief plates

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to make and proof relief plates from film input for letterpress or label printing. It requires the individual to correctly prepare and evaluate film, and expose and process a relief plate suitable for letterpress and label printing.

It applies to individuals in the printing and graphic art industry who design and prepare layouts, artwork, manipulate images and texts to meet production requirements. They generally work under direct supervision.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Pre-Press

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1 Produce plates	1.1 The plate processor is prepared and maintained according to manufacturer’s specifications and enterprise standards 1.2 Exposure control is established and maintained utilising vacuum frames and plate processors according to job specifications 1.3 Plates are produced that conform to job specifications
2 Proof relief plates	2.1 Relief plates are proofed according to job specifications 2.2 Relief plates are proofed according to enterprise and manufacturer’s specifications

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1-1.3, 2.1, 2.2	Recognises and interprets text to establish job requirements from information contained within relevant procedures and specifications
Navigate the world of work	1.1, 2.2	Recognises and follows organisational policies and procedures
Get the work done	1.1-1.3, 2.1, 2.2	Determines priorities and sequences steps involved in clearly defined, familiar tasks Applies analytical processes to resolve problems Initiates standard procedures when responding to familiar problems within immediate context

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPPRP266 Produce relief plates	ICPPP266C Produce relief plates	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRP266 Produce relief plates

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

produce TWO printing plates using plate-making facilities and according to job specifications and the listed performance criteria. (Since the underlying skills of plate production should be transferable across a range of systems, it is important that substrates be identified along with the associated printing process that is being simulated.)

ensure plate(s) meets job specifications and is accurately proofed

find and use information relevant to the task from a variety of information sources.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

list main factors to be considered when preparing to lay a plate

list aids that can be used to ensure accuracy and repeatability

name quality control or problem-solving devices that can be included

outline essential criteria for evaluating a film to be used in plate production

describe process when testing exposure for plate making

outline main considerations with a plate exposure system

explain how to ensure continuity and control with plate exposure

describe plate processing operation

outline key factors of poor processing operation

list main criteria for evaluating a correctly prepared plate

outline work health and safety (WHS) concerns when processing and proofing printing plates

explain main advantages of plate proofing

outline criteria for plate proof evaluation

explain different requirements for plates for litho printing, and relief printing

list manuals, safety and other documentation relevant to this task and identify where they are kept and what information is included.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the Pre-Press field of work and include access to special purpose tools, equipment and industry software packages.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPPRP267 Produce offset lithographic plates

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to make lithographic plates from film input. For plates with electronic input see ICPPRP452 Output complex images direct to plate or press.

It requires the individual to correctly prepare, expose and process a lithographic plate, and post-treat the plate to satisfy job specifications.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Pre-Press

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1 Select and prepare plate	1.1 Job specifications are interpreted to determine appropriate type and size of plate for the job 1.2 Plate is selected to deliver quality of output required by the job brief 1.3 Plate is prepared to accommodate printing machine plate positioning requirements
2 Expose plate	2.1 Work area is tidied and cleaned to ensure quality of output 2.2 Film is correctly positioned on plate according to job specification 2.3 Correct exposure unit is selected to deliver required output 2.4 Exposure control is correctly established utilising a quality-control step wedge 2.5 Exposure and vacuum frame are maintained according to manufacturer’s specifications
3 Process plate	3.1 Plate processing unit is maintained according to manufacturer’s specifications 3.2 Plate is processed according to plate manufacturer’s specifications
4 Post-treat plate	4.1 Plate is checked for quality of outcome and analysed for conformance to job specifications 4.2 Changes to plate image are carried out correctly to ensure standard of output required by the job brief 4.3 Plate is chemically treated and/or baked according to job specifications 4.4 Plate is prepared for storage prior to printing according to manufacturer’s specifications

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 1.2, 2.2, 2.5, 3.1, 3.2, 4.1-4.4	Recognises and interprets text to establish job requirements from information contained within relevant procedures and specifications
Navigate the world of work	2.1	Recognises and follows organisational and legislative requirements associated with own role
Get the work done	1.1-1.3, 2.2-2.5, 3.1, 3.2, 4.1-4.4	Determines priorities and sequences steps involved in clearly defined, familiar tasks and identifies and assembles required resources Applies analytical processes to resolve technical problems Initiates standard procedures when responding to familiar problems within immediate context

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPPRP267 Produce offset lithographic plates	ICPPP267C Produce offset lithographic plates	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRP267 Produce offset lithographic plates

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

prepare, set up and use lithographic plate exposure and plate processing equipment to produce a lithographic plate manually, and another using a machine according to listed performance criteria

process plate according to plate manufacturer’s specifications

carry out changes to plate image correctly, to deliver standard of output required by the job brief

identify substrate for reproduction and ensure plate quality is suitable for the identified printing processes; this ensures skills of plate making are transferable across the design and pre-press sectors

find and use information relevant to task from a variety of information sources.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

list types of lithographic plates

define criteria for selection of plates

outline advantages and disadvantages of negative and positive plates

explain plate exposure techniques and control, including:

why images should be centred and square

importance of colour bars and control strips

light sources used in plate exposing frames

explain plate processing

list work health and safety (WHS) concerns when processing printing plates

name baths and solutions used in a plate processing machine

explain impact of a change in processor time on the final plate

explain plate finishing and correction

explain purpose of gumming a plate

outline post-exposure techniques

list criteria used to evaluate accuracy of the plate

discuss dot gain issues

explain difference between physical and optical dot gain

outline steps to overcome dot gain

explain plate punching and registration

detail care needed to ensure accurate punching and registration

list manuals, safety and other documentation relevant to this task and identify where are they kept and what information is included.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the Pre-Press field of work and include access to special purpose tools, equipment and industry software packages.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPPRP268 Make photopolymer plates (flexographic)

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to make flexographic plates from film inputs. It requires the individual to correctly select, prepare, process and finish photopolymer plates to meet the job specifications.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Pre-Press

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1 Select plate	1.1 Job specifications are interpreted to ensure appropriate plate selection 1.2 Correct plate is selected according to printing requirements and job specifications
2 Pre-plan process	2.1 Film negatives are checked for conformance with job specifications 2.2 Extra exposure masking is planned by examining film 2.3 Appropriate exposure masks are cut 2.4 Appropriate amount of plate material is calculated to ensure economical use
3 Expose plate	3.1 Exposure is determined by using step wedges and depth gauge to establish correct front and back exposure time 3.2 Plate is exposed according to job specifications 3.3 Exposure unit and vacuum frame are maintained according to manufacturer’s specifications
4 Develop plate	4.1 Chemistry balance is maintained according to manufacturer’s specifications 4.2 Washout unit is maintained according to manufacturer’s specifications 4.3 Plate is washed out to pre-determined depth pre-set by front and back exposures
5 Finish plate	5.1 Plate is dried in a drying oven at a temperature and time according to manufacturer’s specifications 5.2 Back of the plate is cleaned 5.3 Plate is post-exposed according to manufacturer’s specifications 5.4 Plate is light finished according to manufacturer’s specifications 5.5 Work Health and Safety (WHS) procedures are observed to ensure a safe working environment when making plates
6 Establish and maintain a chemical register	6.1 Chemical register is established to identify and describe purpose of each chemical and ensure finished plates meet set specifications 6.2 All chemicals used in the workplace are identified and registered correctly according to safe working practices

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 1.2, 2.1, 3.2, 3.3, 4.1, 4.2, 5.1, 5.3, 5.4, 6.1	Recognises and interprets text to establish job requirements from information contained within relevant procedures and specifications
Numeracy	2.4, 3.1	Interprets and comprehends a range of everyday mathematical information used in familiar and routine tasks
Navigate the world of work	5.5, 6.1, 6.2	Complies with legislative requirements and follows organisational policies and procedures relevant to own role
Get the work done	1.1, 1.2, 2.1-2.4, 3.1-3.3, 4.1-4.3, 5.1, 5.3, 5.4	Determines priorities and sequences steps involved in clearly defined, familiar tasks and identifies and assembles resources required Takes responsibility for planning and organising own workload, identifying ways of sequencing and combining elements for greater efficiency Applies analytical processes to resolve technical problems and initiates standard procedures when responding to familiar problems within immediate context

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPPRP268 Make photopolymer plates (flexographic)	ICPPP268C Make photopolymer plates (flexographic)	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRP268 Make photopolymer plates (flexographic)

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

produce TWO flexographic plates, with different characteristics

correctly finish plates to meet the job brief, according to manufacturer’s specifications.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

explain effect flexographic ink has on selection of plate material

describe effect of ‘shoulder’ on the printing process

outline ways to overcome ‘orange peel effect’

describe effects of chemicals used in detaching

name methods to counteract image elongation

list manuals, safety and other documentation relevant to this task and identify where are they kept and what information is included.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the Pre-Press field of work and include access to special purpose tools, equipment and industry software packages.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPPRP269 Produce photopolymer plates for pad printing

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to make plates (cliches) from film inputs for pad printing.

It requires the individual to correctly select, prepare, process and finish photopolymer plates for pad printing according to the job specifications.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Pre-Press

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1 Select plate	1.1 Job specifications are interpreted to ensure appropriate plate selection 1.2 Correct plate is selected according to printing requirements and job specifications
2 Pre-plan process	2.1 Film positives are flattened to prevent air entrapment 2.2 Any exposure unit is energised for one cycle to warm up UV elements where necessary 2.3 Appropriate screen film positive is selected and checked according to printing requirements
3 Expose plate	3.1 Exposure is determined by using a quality control step wedge to establish correct exposure time 3.2 Plate is exposed to standard/established exposure time 3.3 Plate is exposed with screen film positive according to job specifications 3.4 Exposure unit and vacuum frame are maintained according to manufacturer’s specifications
4 Develop plate	4.1 Chemistry balance is maintained according to manufacturer’s specifications 4.2 Washout tools are maintained according to manufacturer’s specifications 4.3 Plate is washed out for pre-determined time established by manufacturer and in-house tests
5 Finish plate	5.1 Plate is blown-dry by compressed air 5.2 Plate is dried in a drying oven at a temperature and time according to manufacturer’s specifications 5.3 Plate is post-exposed according to manufacturer’s specifications 5.4 Work health and safety (WHS) procedures are observed to ensure a safe working environment when making plates
6 Establish and maintain a chemical register	6.1 A chemical register is established to identify and describe purpose of each chemical and to ensure finished plates meet set specifications 6.2 All chemicals used in work place are identified and registered correctly according to safe working practices

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 1.2, 3.3, 3.4, 4.1, 4.2, 5.2, 5.3, 6.1	Recognises and interprets text to establish job requirements from information contained within relevant procedures and specifications
Writing	6.1, 6.2	Completes workplace records and forms accurately and legibly using correct technical and enterprise specific vocabulary
Numeracy	3.1, 3.2	Interprets and comprehends a range of everyday mathematical information used in familiar and routine tasks
Navigate the world of work	5.4, 6.1, 6.2	Complies with legislative requirements and follows organisational policies and procedures relevant to own role
Interact with others	1.1, 1.2, 3.3, 3.4, 4.1, 4.2, 5.2, 5.3, 6.1	Cooperates with others as part of familiar routine activities, and contributes to specific activities requiring joint responsibility and accountability
Get the work done	1.2, 2.1, 2.3, 3.1, 3.3, 3.4, 4.1-4.3, 5.2, 5.3	Determines priorities and sequences steps involved in clearly defined, familiar tasks and identifies and assembles resources required Takes responsibility for planning and organising own workload, identifying ways of sequencing and combining elements for greater efficiency and responding to familiar problems within immediate context

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPPRP269 Produce photopolymer plates for pad printing	ICPPP269C Produce photopolymer plates for pad printing	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRP269 Produce photopolymer plates for pad printing

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

produce TWO photopolymer plates with different characteristics according to the listed performance criteria

transfer underlying skills of plate making across the design and pre-press sectors (it is important the substrate for reproduction is identified and the quality of the plate is fit for the identified printing processes)

correctly prepare plate to meet the job brief and manufacturer’s specifications

find and use information relevant to the task from a variety of information sources.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

explain effect of print life requirement on selection of plate material

explain effect screen dot has on the printing process

outline work health and safety (WHS) requirements for photopolymer plate chemicals

explain how to overcome undercutting of screens

outline methods to counteract air entrapments between film and plate

list manuals, safety and other documentation relevant to this task and identify where are they kept and what information is included.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the Pre-Press field of work and include access to special purpose tools, equipment and industry software packages.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPPRP272 Produce gravure cylinders manually

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to manually make gravure cylinders.

It requires the individual to manually make gravure cylinders by planning, selecting, exposing and developing the plate, and establishing and maintaining a chemical register.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Pre-Press

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1 Select plate	1.1 Job specifications are interpreted to determine the appropriate type of cylinder base and/or shell for the job 1.2 Cylinder and/or shell is selected to deliver output quality required by the job brief
2 Pre-plan process	2.1 Work area is tidied and cleaned to ensure output quality and a safe worksite 2.2 Exposure and coating equipment is maintained according to manufacturer’s specifications and safety requirements 2.3 Exposure is controlled using step wedges and densitometry 2.4 Cylinder is coated according to manufacturer’s specifications 2.5 Cylinder is exposed making sure image direction, autotrons and tracker lines are correctly positioned according to job specifications 2.6 Work health and safety (WHS) requirements are observed when handling chemicals
3 Expose plate	3.1 Chemical balance is checked and maintained in developing tank 3.2 Cylinder is developed according to manufacturer’s specifications, enterprise procedures and safety requirements
4 Develop plate	4.1 Etching bath is maintained to correct activity level according to manufacturer’s specifications and enterprise procedures 4.2 Cylinder is etched according to the job specifications (cell depth)
5 Finish plate	5.1 Establish a chemical register to identify and describe purpose of each chemical and ensure finished cylinders meet set specifications 5.2 All chemicals used in the workplace are identified and registered correctly according to safe working practices

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 2.2, 2.4, 2.5, 3.2, 4.1, 4.2, 5.1	Recognises and interprets text to establish job requirements from information contained within relevant procedures and specifications
Writing	5.1, 5.2	Completes workplace records and forms accurately and legibly using correct technical and enterprise specific vocabulary
Navigate the world of work	2.1, 2.2, 2.6, 3.2, 4.1, 5.1, 5.2	Complies with legislative requirements and follows organisational policies and procedures relevant to own role
Get the work done	1.1, 1.2, 2.2, 2.4, 2.5, 3.1, 3.2, 4.1, 4.2	Determines priorities and sequences steps involved in clearly defined, familiar tasks and identifies and assembles required resources Takes responsibility for planning and organising own workload, identifying ways of sequencing and combining elements for greater efficiency Initiates standard procedures when responding to familiar problems within immediate context

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPPRP272 Produce gravure cylinders manually	ICPPP272C Produce gravure cylinders manually	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRP272 Produce gravure cylinders manually

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

manually produce TWO gravure cylinders and establish and maintain a chemical register according to the listed performance criteria

safely and correctly process the cylinder to ensure etching produces a quality print

find and use information relevant to the task from a variety of information sources.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

state chemical names and symbols for three chemicals used in cylinder production

describe standard safety procedures used when handling gravure chemicals

describe two methods of manual gravure cylinder production

explain cylinder balancing and how it is achieved

outline preparation processes for both steel and aluminium cylinder bases

explain Blue Print and how it is produced

outline Direct Transfer method of cylinder production

explain how cell depth is determined

identify etching solution chemical

state thickness of chrome coating on the etched surface

outline factors that govern rate of etch

list manuals, safety and other documentation relevant to this task, identify where are they kept and what information is included.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the Pre-Press field of work and include access to special purpose tools, equipment and industry software packages.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPPRP281 Design basic carton

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to design cartons using and adapting existing templates.

It requires the individual to design a basic carton using known templates that meet the job specifications and then produce an accurate sample before the final design is sent for output.

It applies to individuals who perform a range of mainly routine tasks in various sectors of the printing and graphic arts industry. They generally work under direct supervision, and use limited practical skills and fundamental knowledge in a defined context.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Pre-Press

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1 Assess brief requirements	1.1 All relevant information in the brief is checked, e.g. carton type, dimensions, material 1.2 All relevant requirements of the brief are assessed in line with enterprise specifications
2 Select and modify template	2.1 Appropriate template is selected on the Computer Aided Design (CAD) system 2.2 Height, width and depth and gluing flap dimensions are adjusted according to the client brief 2.3 Requirements for knife setting and stripping in production are checked and position is designed to have correct grain direction and maximise use of material
3 Use plotter to cut sample	3.1 Plotter is set up ready for downloading design 3.2 Cutting and creasing depths are set 3.3 Material is positioned correctly 3.4 Plotter is operated safely according to manufacturer’s specifications and enterprise procedures 3.5 Routine machine maintenance is carried out as required
4 Assemble sample	4.1 Sample is cut by hand 4.2 Cut sample is folded and glued by hand ensuring angles and construction are correct 4.3 Originals and elements are selected, scaled and cropped appropriately to fit allocated grid space
5 Check and adjust design	5.1 Sample is checked to ensure conformance to the client brief 5.2 Design is adjusted if necessary to meet job specifications
6 Output design	6.1 Design is saved ready for downloading to forme cutter 6.2 Design is outputted as keyline for artwork or as film 6.3 Relevant paperwork is completed according to enterprise procedures

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 1.2, 2.2, 3.4, 5.1, 5.2	Recognises and interprets text to establish job requirements from information contained within relevant procedures and specifications
Writing	6.3	Completes workplace records and forms accurately and legibly using correct technical and enterprise specific vocabulary
Numeracy	1.1, 2.2, 3.2, 4.2, 4.3	Interprets and analyses a range of mathematical information used in familiar and routine tasks
Navigate the world of work	1.2, 3.4, 6.3	Complies with legislative requirements and follows organisational policies and procedures relevant to own role
Get the work done	1.1, 2.1-2.3, 3.1-3.3, 3.5, 4.1-4.3, 5.1, 5.2, 6.1, 6.2	Determines priorities and sequences steps involved in clearly defined, familiar tasks and identifies and assembles resources required Takes responsibility for planning and organising own workload, and Initiates standard procedures when responding to familiar problems within immediate context Follows routine procedures for using digital technology by reading data from electronic monitoring and control systems

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPPRP281 Design basic carton	ICPPP281C Design basic carton	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRP281 Design basic carton

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

produce TWO different carton designs and samples using existing templates to meet job brief and client specifications

find and use information relevant to the task from a variety of information sources.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

outline work health and safety (WHS) concerns of using computers and plotters

list Computer Aided Design (CAD) programs available for carton design

outline the process to correctly align a cut out positioned in a design

list products these cartons can be used for (sleeves, full flap, auto lock, crash lock, trays)

explain how to determine if the design is appropriate for its end use

outline aspects of product sizing and tolerances that should be rechecked

list carton designs suitable for machine and hand-packing

outline constraints on design and positioning on the forme caused by knife making and production

list manuals, safety and other documentation relevant to this task, identify where they are kept and what information is included.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the Pre-Press field of work and include access to special purpose tools, equipment and industry software packages.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPPRP283 Prepare artwork for screen printing

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to prepare artwork for screen printing. It requires the individual to apply fundamental principles when combining elements and colour, and selecting appropriate type for manual and electronic design artwork.

It applies to individuals working under direct supervision, who have some accountability for the quality of output and ensuring the production process is maintained.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Pre-Press

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1 Assess brief requirements	1.1 Printing requirements of layout brief are determined for printing feasibility 1.2 Brief is broken down into stages of production to determine a plan of procedure 1.3 Plan of action is determined to meet time requirements of each stage so deadlines are identified and adhered to 1.4 Correct design and typographic terms are used to facilitate communication
2 Assemble layout materials	2.1 Client copy and images are assembled to conform to the client brief 2.2 Library files are accessed for relevant data to conform to the brief 2.3 Appropriate equipment and materials to complete layout are assembled to enable the brief to be undertaken efficiently
3 Construct a simple graphic design	3.1 Client requirements are checked to ensure design concept matches the brief 3.2 Preliminary graphic design ideas are sketched according to the brief 3.3 Simple graphic design concept is rendered, electronically or manually, to conform to the brief 3.4 Rendered graphic design is checked for conformance to the brief
4 Produce finished artwork	4.1 Layout grid is ruled up according to the brief 4.2 Type selection, style and size are selected for theme and readability and fitted into allocated grid space to conform to the brief 4.3 Originals and elements are selected, scaled and cropped appropriately to fit the allocated grid space 4.4 Layout components are accurately positioned using keylines to conform to the grid framework 4.5 Overlays/colour roughs are created to conform to the brief
5 Check for suitability	5.1 Layout is checked to eliminate omissions and errors 5.2 Layout design is checked for conformance to the brief 5.3 Proofs are produced for hardcopy checking 5.4 Layout is rendered ready for client presentation
6 Tidy materials and store data	6.1 Equipment and materials are returned to storage according to enterprise procedures 6.2 Design data and materials are filed ready for future retrieval according to enterprise procedures 6.3 Design area is cleaned to enterprise procedures ready for re-use

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 2.1-2.3, 3.1-3.4, 4.1, 4.2, 4.5, 6.2	Recognises and interprets text to establish job requirements from information contained within relevant procedures and specifications
Writing	1.2, 1.3, 3.2	Completes workplace records and forms accurately and legibly using correct technical and enterprise specific vocabulary
Oral Communication	1.4	Uses detailed and clear language to contribute information and express requirements
Numeracy	1.3, 4.1-4.4	Interprets and analyses a range of mathematical information used in familiar and routine tasks
Navigate the world of work	6.1-6.3	Complies with legislative requirements and follows organisational policies and procedures relevant to own role
Interact with others	1.4	Uses appropriate communication protocols and conventions to confirm or clarify client requirements
Get the work done	1.1-1.3, 2.1-2.3, 3.1-3.4, 4.1-4.5, 5.1, 6.1, 6.2	Determines priorities and sequences steps involved in clearly defined, familiar tasks and identifies and assembles required resources Takes responsibility for planning and organising own workload, and initiates standard procedures when responding to familiar problems within immediate context Follows routine procedures for using digital technology to enter, store and retrieve information directly relevant to role

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPPRP283 Prepare artwork for screen printing	ICPPP283C Prepare artwork for screen printing	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRP283 Prepare artwork for screen printing

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

prepare TWO manual and electronic artworks for screen printing, according to client specifications

apply design principles when combining elements and colour to prepare artwork, both manually and electronically, to the satisfaction of the client

find and use task-relevant information from a variety of information sources.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

outline considerations of layout for this brief

describe first stage of production brief

identify most time-consuming function

state purpose of a thumbnail

state importance placed on detail in the first stage of the brief

name equipment that may be used for construction of the layout

name guides used in the design area

outline graphic requirements included in the brief

define how many graphic design ideas are sketched or illustrated as preliminary ideas

list additional constraints that can be included in the concept

explain purpose of ruling up a layout

outline limitations of type selection on the chosen substrates

list considerations given to elements to fit a given space

explain use of keylines when used as element identification

explain importance of identifying all colour(s) on rough

outline techniques used to check for mistakes

outline proof checks made to ensure proof conforms to the brief

state conditions in which materials should be stored

identify storage system used for electronic data

identify materials that could be recycled.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the Pre-Press field of work and include access to special purpose tools, equipment and industry software packages.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPPRP284 Produce PDF files for online or screen display

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 2	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.1. Version created to correct mapping table information
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to produce both passive and interactive Portable Document Format (PDF) files for online or screen display. It requires individuals to prepare, create and edit PDF files and include navigation features, and manage and finalise the document.

It applies to individuals who produce both passive and interactive PDF files for use online or screen display. Individuals generally work within defined procedures, respond to clearly defined briefs, and work under limited supervision.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Pre-Press

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1 Prepare file	1.1 Document use is identified according to brief specifications 1.2 Purpose and audience are established and cultural, equity or gender requirements determined from brief or client 1.3 Changes required in media size and format are chosen from predefined settings 1.4 Relevant fonts for online readability are selected, text is formatted, chunked and article threads added as required for ease of online reading 1.5 Navigation plan or display timing is developed, and required elements or areas allocated on document 1.6 Document is checked to ensure correct layout and that all elements are printable 1.7 Unnecessary elements and blank pages are deleted, if not required 1.8 Document is proofed for colour, positioning, bleed allowance, grammar and text
2 Create PDF	2.1 Final file media is identified, and correct Distiller pre-set job options and colour management settings are chosen 2.2 Document is opened and exported to PDF or postscript file for conversion in Distiller 2.3 PDF file is exported to correct folder, opened and checked against requirements of the brief
3 Edit file	3.1 Text corrections are made using text touch-up tool, as required 3.2 Images are edited using touch-up object tool, as required 3.3 Page orientation is changed, pages inserted and deleted, as required 3.4 Bookmarks are added and named or edited with magnification added, as required
4 Perform navigation	4.1 Menus are created for major themes, with buttons and graphics consistently placed and easily identifiable by users 4.2 Internal and external links with actions are added according to the brief requirements 4.3 Navigation is consistent and traceable to ensure maximum usability and user confidence 4.4 Users are given more than one navigational option for moving through the document
5 Perform file management	5.1 Fonts and graphics are embedded where possible for greater portability 5.2 All additional files are saved in correct folder and in appropriate format 5.3 All unused elements or pages are removed to reduce file size
6 Display settings	6.1 Screen display preferences are set as required to fit brief 6.2 Magnification is set for consistency of display 6.3 Transactions are applied as desired to fit brief 6.4 Actions and preferences for multimedia elements are applied to suit final media
7 Finalise document	7.1 Final file is saved to correct folder and opened to check for correct screen display and magnification 7.2 All links, bookmarks and actions are tested for functionality 7.3 Navigation is assessed for intuitive usability 7.4 Document is tested in a range of environments and platforms for consistency and predictable display 7.5 File naming conventions are logical and comparable for cross-platform use

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 1.2, 1.4, 2.1, 2.3, 3.1, 4.2	Recognises and interprets text to establish job requirements from information contained within relevant procedures and specifications
Writing	3.1	Completes workplace records and forms accurately and legibly using correct technical and enterprise-specific vocabulary
Oral Communication	1.2	Participates effectively in spoken interactions by using strategies to confirm, clarify or repair understanding
Numeracy	1.3	Interprets and analyses range of mathematical information used in familiar and routine tasks
Interact with others	1.2	Uses appropriate communication protocols and conventions to confirm or clarify client requirements
Get the work done	1.1-1.8, 2.1-2.3, 3.1-3.4, 4.1-4.4, 5.1	Takes responsibility for planning and organising own workload and assembles required resources Evaluates effectiveness of decisions in terms of how well they meet stated design specifications Utilises a broad range of features within applications to improve personal productivity, optimising software functions for specific purposes Recognises and takes responsibility for addressing predictable, and some less predictable, problems in familiar work contexts Understands purposes, specific functions and key features of common digital systems and tools and operates them effectively to create and save files in required format

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPPRP284 Produce PDF files for online or screen display	ICPPP284B Produce PDF files for online or screen display	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRP284 Produce PDF files for online or screen display

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 2	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.1. Version created to correct mapping table information
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

produce both passive and interactive online and screen display Portable Document Format (PDF) files

locate and use information relevant to the task from a variety of information sources.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

identify different file types and their use

identify page sizes and formats for online print

outline use of different fonts in online documents

explain reformatting text in an online document

identify work health and safety (WHS) standards that relate to working for long periods on computers

name various document types.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the Pre-Press field of work and include access to special purpose tools, equipment and industry software packages.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPPRP285 Scan a mono image

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to prepare line or tone copy, set up a scanner and reproduce the image to meet the technical specifications suitable for print media production.

It applies to individuals who prepare images for scanning and set up the scanner to ensure the image output will meet the technical standards required for the specifications of the job and print media requirements.

Individuals generally work under supervision and within defined procedures.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Pre-Press

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1 Prepare line and/or tone original for scanning	1.1 Line or tone image/copy is scaled to conform to production specifications or quality standards 1.2 Quality of line or tone image input is assessed to determine scanner settings 1.3 Line or tone image is prepared for mounting to scanner ready for scanning
2 Prepare scanner	2.1 Scanner is selected and set correctly for the mono image to be scanned 2.2 Appropriate software is selected for scanning line and/or tone images
3 Scan image	3.1 Original image is scanned for reproduction 3.2 Quality of scanned image is checked against job/design specifications and printing reproduction requirements 3.3 Appropriate software is applied to scan and process the image 3.4 Image is checked for compliance with design specifications

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 3.2, 3.4	Recognises and interprets text to establish job requirements from information contained within relevant procedures and specifications
Numeracy	1.1	Interprets and analyses a range of mathematical information used in familiar and routine tasks
Navigate the world of work	1.1	Recognises and follows organisational requirements associated with own role
Get the work done	1.1-1.3, 2.1, 2.2, 3.1-3.4	Determines priorities and sequences steps involved in clearly defined, familiar tasks and identifies and assembles required resources Takes responsibility for planning and organising own workload, and initiates standard procedures when responding to familiar problems within immediate context Understands purposes, specific functions and key features of common digital systems and tools, and operates them effectively to complete routine tasks

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPPRP285 Scan a mono image	ICPPP285A Scan a mono image	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRP285 Scan a mono image

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

use flat-bed or drum scanner and reproduce THREE examples of line and tone reproductions with supporting comments on set-up criteria and job specifications

access task-relevant information from a variety of information sources

determine capability of scanner hardware and software to meet reproduction requirements for print media

scan images to meet requirements, ensuring they are transferrable across design, pre-press and print sectors.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

describe characteristics of a line or tone image

describe printing processes and type of substrates used for printing processes

outline work health and safety (WHS) issues associated with scanner/computer operations

determine scanner resolution

explain correct controls for scanner operation

explain hardware and software requirements for line and tone scanning

explain scanners and relevant specifications

outline software requirements and specifications to process and output the image

list sources of information and other documentation related to safety and scanner operation

describe how manuals and documentation are correctly stored

demonstrate correct use of hardware and software

describe how reproduction requirements are matched to resolution factors and job brief.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the Pre-Press field of work and include access to special purpose tools, equipment and industry software packages.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPPRP286 Scan images for reproduction

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to scan line images.

It applies to individuals who prepare a line copy or original for scanning, set up the scanner and ensure the quality of the scanned image meets the technical specifications of the job and final media requirements.

These individuals work under limited supervision and with defined procedures.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Pre-Press

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1 Prepare line image for scanning	1.1 Line image for scanning is scaled to conform to production specifications 1.2 Quality of line image for scanning is assessed to determine scanner settings 1.3 Line image is cleaned and mounted ready for scanning
2 Prepare scanner	2.1 Scanner is set correctly for line images to be scanned 2.2 Appropriate software is selected for scanning and processing line images 2.3 Adjustments are made to ensure quality of scanned image
3 Scan and check image	3.1 Appropriate software is applied to scan and process line images 3.2 Original line image is scanned for reproduction according to design specifications 3.3 Quality of scanned image is checked against job specifications and printing or reproduction requirements

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 3.2	Recognises and interprets text to establish job requirements from information contained within relevant procedures and specifications
Numeracy	1.1	Interprets and analyses a range of mathematical information used in familiar and routine tasks
Get the work done	1.1, 1.2, 2.2, 2.3, 3.1-3.3	Takes responsibility for planning and organising own workload, and initiates standard procedures when responding to familiar problems within immediate context Understands purposes, specific functions and key features of common digital systems and tools and operates them effectively to create and save files in required format

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPPRP286 Scan images for reproduction	ICPPP286A Scan images for reproduction	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRP286 Scan images for reproduction

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

use desktop flat-bed scanner and reproduce THREE line originals, ensuring quality of scanned image meets specified quality standards and final media requirements

locate and use task-relevant information from a variety of information sources

ensure underlying skill of scanning images are transferable across design and pre-press sectors

identify substrate for reproduction and ensure quality of scanned image is suitable for the identified printing processes.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

describe relevant printing processes and electronic media

identify scanning requirements

describe characteristics of a line original

outline factors that determine line scanning resolution

name controls that exist within the software for line scanning

name essential hardware specifications and software requirements for line scanning

outline specific software requirements to process and output the image

outline work health and safety (WHS) concerns of operating a scanner and standards that relate to working for periods of time on computers

list manuals, safety and other documentation relevant to this task, and identify where are they kept and what information is included in these documents.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the Pre-Press field of work and include access to special purpose tools, equipment and industry software packages.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPPRP311 Develop a detailed design concept

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to produce a complex graphic design from a design brief.

It applies to skilled individuals working as pre-press tradespeople in the printing and graphic arts industry who design and prepare layouts and artwork, manipulate images and text, and apply solutions to a defined range of problems. They may also provide some leadership and guidance to others with some limited responsibility for the output of others.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Pre-Press

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1 Determine brief specifications	1.1 Confirm brief requirements with client as required 1.2 Job details are accurately documented according to enterprise policies and procedures
2 Render graphic design	2.1 Client’s requirements are translated into a design concept that accords with the brief 2.2 Different graphic design ideas/concepts are detailed, and potential of each assessed according to the brief 2.3 Unique graphic design concept is rendered, electronically or manually, to conform to the brief 2.4 Rendered graphic design is assessed for printing feasibility according to the brief requirements 2.5 Visual is produced showing position and fit of design elements to document design layout
3 Produce dummy	3.1 Range of visual interpretations of the brief are made to present options to client 3.2 Text and images are graphically presented to conform to grid layout 3.3 Basic imposition is calculated to suit printing and binding processes 3.4 Dummy is produced for copy mark-up and to obtain client feedback on design suitability
4 Produce complex finished artwork	4.1 Design concept is structured step-by-step to conform to the brief and fit grid format 4.2 Appropriate type styles are selected to conform to the client brief and printing substrate 4.3 Line reproduction quality is assessed to effect the standard of print reproduction required by client brief 4.4 Images are selected to conform to client brief and end use 4.5 Colours are selected and combined effectively using overlays to conform to client brief and end use

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 2.1-2.4, 4.1-4.5	Recognises and evaluates text to establish job requirements from information contained within relevant systems
Writing	1.2, 2.1, 2.2	Writes a technical/design brief or a complex work instruction based on client and stakeholder requirements
Oral Communication	1.1	Participates effectively in spoken interactions to confirm or clarify understanding
Numeracy	2.5, 3.3	Interprets and analyses a range of mathematical information used in familiar and routine tasks
Navigate the world of work	1.2	Follows organisational policies and procedures relevant to own role
Interact with others	1.1	Uses appropriate communication protocols and conventions to confirm or clarify client requirements
Get the work done	2.1-2.5, 3.1-3.3, 4.1-4.5	Takes responsibility for planning and organising own workload, identifying ways of sequencing and combining elements for greater efficiency Plans, identifies and assembles resources required to complete tasks Responds to predictable problems and implements standard or logical solutions Recognises importance of ongoing generation of new ideas for viability and effectiveness of a work project Understands purposes, specific functions and key features of common digital systems and tools and operates them effectively to create and save files in required format

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPPRP311 Develop a detailed design concept	ICPPP311C Develop a detailed design concept	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRP311 Develop a detailed design concept

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

correctly prepare TWO sets of design, colour roughs and finished artwork which incorporate line and tone work according to specifications of client brief and enterprise standards

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

describe parameters of the brief for which this artwork is being prepared

list instruments, materials and computer equipment that will be used in producing this artwork

outline use of colour for effect and harmony and colour composition of white light

outline colour wheel elements and use of the Pantone Matching System

describe effect of selecting a print or electronic output system on artwork preparation

describe basic design principles used in preparation of layouts and revision process

outline process for formatting, size, style and preparation of artwork when using computer equipment for layouts/colour roughs

describe use of a Computer Aided Design (CAD) program and how it helps the work of a designer

outline work health and safety (WHS) concerns when using cameras or computers

describe production of bromides using a process camera and contact frame

describe the diffusion transfer process for producing bromides

outline operation of mono laser printers and resolution output including proportional enlargement and reduction calculations

outline process of drawing lines, borders and corners using drawing instruments or a computer or digitiser

outline process for dealing with faults on client supplied artwork

describe effect of colour breakdown and sequence on printing operations and printed jobs

describe method used for checking size and scale of reproduction

outline process for matching artwork to customer’s specifications as outlined on the job sheet

describe methods used for assessing quality and suitability of externally produced artwork

describe problems that can be caused by using sub-standard and unsuitable artwork.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the Pre-Press field of work and include access to special purpose tools, equipment and material.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPPRP321 Produce a typographic image

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to typeset text in various sizes and shapes and images, position typographic images correctly, and proof them for errors.

It applies to skilled individuals working as pre-press tradespeople in the printing and graphic arts industry who design and prepare layouts and artwork, manipulate images and text, and apply solutions to a defined range of problems. They may also provide some leadership and guidance to others with some limited responsibility for the output of others.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Pre-requisite Unit

ICPRP221	Select and apply type

Unit Sector

Pre-Press

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1 Select and evaluate typography	1.1 Typeface, type-size, letter and word, and line spacing are selected according to design setting requirements 1.2 Typeface and type-size are evaluated for suitability to retain required characteristics through the set of reproduction stages according to design brief and printing process
2 Position images	2.1 Images are positioned accurately according to design specifications 2.2 Overall balance and emphasis of composition conform to the brief
3 Produce and proof type	3.1 Type is produced either on a keyboard from copy using appropriate layout and design and typesetting technology, or by transferring information electronically into the typesetting program 3.2 Typographic quality is checked and adjusted to meet job specifications 3.3 Proofreading is carried out to ensure typesetting meets job specifications 3.4 Proofs are marked-up with correct proofreading marks and changes made
4 Assess text for punctuation and grammar	4.1 Text is read and errors in grammar, punctuation and word-breaks are identified 4.2 Errors and omissions are corrected in consultation with client

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 1.2, 2.1, 2.2, 3.1-3.4, 4.1, 4.2	Recognises and interprets text to establish job requirements from information contained within relevant procedures and specifications
Writing	3.1, 3.4, 4.2	Completes workplace records and forms accurately and legibly using correct technical and enterprise-specific vocabulary
Oral Communication	4.2	Uses appropriate vocabulary, including technical language relevant to role and context
Numeracy	1.2, 2.1	Interprets and analyses a range of mathematical information used in familiar and routine tasks
Navigate the world of work	1.1, 1.2, 2.1, 2.2, 3.1-3.4	Recognises and follows explicit and implicit protocols and meets expectations associated with own role
Interact with others	4.2	Uses appropriate communication protocols and conventions to confirm or clarify client requirements
Get the work done	1.2, 2.1, 2.2, 3.1-3.4, 4.1, 4,2	Takes responsibility for planning and organising own workload and assembles required resources Evaluates effectiveness of decisions in terms of how well they meet stated design specifications Recognises and takes responsibility for addressing predictable, and some less predictable problems in familiar work contexts Understands purposes, specific functions and key features of common digital systems and tools and operates them effectively to create and save files in required format

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPPRP321 Produce a typographic image	ICPPP321C Produce a typographic image	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRP321 Produce a typographic image

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

correctly use manual or electronic equipment and suitable software to select, set, arrange, evaluate and modify type for TWO different design briefs according to the job specification.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

describe how choice of typeface selected is influenced by the printing process, or the electronic medium influence on choice of selected typeface

name appropriate number of characters generally accepted in a line of text type

describe relationship between point size and column width

describe how viewing distance of the final product effects point size selection

describe kerning use and why it might be applicable

outline considerations of selecting a type face to be used on a particular product

list ten proofreading marks and their meanings

list three different ways of writing ‘there’ and explain meaning of each

outline uses of an apostrophe and describe how apostrophes are often misused

identify manuals, safety and other documentation relevant to this task, where are they kept, information that is included in these documents, and other sources of available information.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the Pre-Press field of work and include access to special purpose tools, equipment and materials.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPPRP322 Digitise images for reproduction

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to scan images, including line-art, greyscale and colour originals.

It applies to skilled individuals working as pre-press tradespeople in the printing and graphic arts industry who design and prepare layouts and artwork, manipulate images and text, and apply solutions to a defined range of problems. They may also provide some leadership and guidance to others with some limited responsibility for the output of others.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Pre-Press

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1 Mount original copy	1.1 Original image is scaled and identified according to job specifications 1.2 Work surfaces are cleaned and prepared to ensure images are dust free 1.3 Original image is mounted according to enterprise procedures 1.4 Work health and safety (WHS) issues are identified and correct practices are used if solvents are applied
2 Set up scanner	2.1 Scanner is set up and calibrated according to specifications 2.2 Data from copy evaluation and aim points to suit original are entered correctly onto scanner according to specifications 2.3 Scanner software or plug-in is selected
3 Produce images	3.1 Medium being scanned is selected according to job specifications 3.2 Disk capacity is checked, where appropriate, to ensure sufficiency for the job 3.3 Processor is set and checked according to job specifications 3.4 Images are scanned as required according to job specifications 3.5 Scanned images are checked against technical specifications of job and adjustments made if necessary

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 2.1, 2.2, 3.1, 3.3-3.5	Recognises and interprets text to establish job requirements from information contained within relevant procedures and specifications
Numeracy	2.1	Interprets and analyses a range of mathematical information used in familiar and routine tasks
Navigate the world of work	1.2, 1.4	Complies with legislative requirements and follows organisational policies and procedures relevant to own role
Get the work done	1.1-1.3, 2.1-2.3, 3.1-3.5	Determines priorities and sequences steps involved in clearly defined, familiar tasks; and identifies and assembles required resources Takes responsibility for planning and organising own workload, and initiates standard procedures when responding to familiar problems within immediate context Understands purposes, specific functions and key features of common digital systems and tools and operates them effectively to prepare and save files in required format

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPPRP322 Digitise images for reproduction	ICPPP322C Digitise images for reproduction	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRP322 Digitise images for reproduction

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

correctly use a medium to high-end full colour digital device to reproduce:

one line-art

one greyscale

one colour transparency (positive)

one colour reflective

one negative

one re-screen

ensure job specifications and work health and safety (WHS) requirements are met.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

identify scanner settings for various printing processes or electronic media and correctly calibrate scanner

name primary colours and colour mixing principles

outline variables influencing colour separation requirements

describe importance of tone gradation and grey balance

discuss need to apply colour correction

describe factors influencing selection of screen ruling and dot percentage

outline impact output resolution has on final screen ruling

outline WHS standards for operating a scanner

identify manuals, safety and other documentation relevant to the task, where they are kept, the information included in these documents, and where other sources of information may be found

identify WHS standards that relate to working for periods of time on computers.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the Pre-Press field of work and include access to special purpose tools, equipment and materials.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPPRP323 Photograph and produce halftone images

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to undertake advanced graphic arts camera work and evaluate output to ensure it meets design and production quality standards

It applies to skilled individuals working as pre-press tradespeople in the printing and graphic arts industry who design and prepare layouts and artwork, manipulate images and text, and apply solutions to a defined range of problems. They may also provide some leadership and guidance to others with some limited responsibility for the output of others.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Pre-Press

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1 Evaluate copy	1.1 Copy is scaled and gradation aim points selected to produce required output 1.2 Screen rulings, angles, tone gradation, dot percentages, and dot shapes are selected according to job specifications 1.3 Rescreens and mono conversions from colour originals are evaluated for reproduction requirements
2 Prepare for exposure	2.1 Camera is cleaned and prepared and lights are set to deliver an even distribution of light 2.2 Exposure program is set according to stock and print conditions 2.3 Densities are measured on copy according to evaluation 2.4 Exposure programs for special effects and duotones are calculated to deliver job requirements
3 Process and evaluate image	3.1 Processor is checked and maintained within tolerances 3.2 Film is processed according to job specifications 3.3 Image is checked for size, gradation, cleanliness and dot percentages according to job specifications
4 Solve technical photographic problems	4.1 Technical problems relevant to tone and reproduction of photographic images are resolved by reassessing elements for photography, camera operations or brief amendment in consultation with client 4.2 Images are photographed with potential to be reproduced according to the brief

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.2, 3.2, 3.3, 4.1, 4.2	Recognises and interprets text to establish job requirements from information contained within relevant procedures and specifications
Oral Communication	4.1	Participates effectively in spoken interactions using vocabulary relevant to role and context
Numeracy	2.2-2.4	Interprets and analyses a range of mathematical information used in familiar and routine tasks
Interact with others	4.1	Uses appropriate communication protocols and conventions to confirm or clarify client requirements
Get the work done	1.1-1.3, 2.1-2.4, 3.1, 3.3, 4.1, 4.2	Takes responsibility for planning and organising own workload and assembles required resources Recognises and takes responsibility for addressing predictable, and some less predictable, problems in familiar work contexts Understands purposes, specific functions and key features of common digital systems and tools and operates them effectively to prepare and save files in required format

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPPRP323 Photograph and produce halftone images	ICPPP323C Photograph and produce halftone images	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRP323 Photograph and produce halftone images

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

correctly use a graphic arts camera to photograph and process at least THREE continuous tone originals with different contrast characteristics according to the specific job requirements.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

describe how halftone images are varied to suit different printing processes

describe main characteristics of a halftone image and factors that influence selection of highlight and shadow points (first and last printing tones)

outline process of overcoming problems associated with reproduction of screened copy

describe method of calibrating densitometer and copy measurement

outline preparation of a basic exposure program and factors that influence basic exposure data

describe process for applying exposure data to selected copy and factors that could cause a change of exposure, including use of a grey scale to assist in exposure control

outline criteria for evaluation of a halftone image and affect a change to processing conditions may have on the final result

describe image requirements for various printing processes

outline evaluation criteria for a duotone

identify manuals, safety and other documentation relevant to this task, where are they kept and information included in these documents.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the Pre-Press field of work and include access to a graphic arts camera, special purpose tools, equipment and material.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPPRP324 Create pages using a page layout application

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to compose pages according to a client design brief, using a high-end application.

It applies to skilled individuals who design and prepare layouts and artwork, manipulate images and text, and apply solutions to a defined range of problems. They may also provide some leadership and guidance to others with some limited responsibility for the output of others.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Pre-Press

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1 Confirm client design brief	1.1 Details of client design brief are reviewed and clarified with client or supervisor 1.2 Type of document is determined and production requirements are assessed 1.3 Client copy and images are assembled to conform to design brief 1.4 Library files are accessed for relevant data to conform to design brief
2 Set up document	2.1 Master page for multiple pages and with multiple columns is set up 2.2 Required text is prepared and formatted and appropriate fonts and size are selected 2.3 Master pages, templates and style sheets, as appropriate, are used consistently to ensure data is the same after exchange or transfer 2.4 Text boxes and columns are correctly linked for text flow, and chapter heading hierarchies are selected 2.5 Colour palettes are set up according to design brief 2.6 Document set-up is completed to conform to requirements of the final media and design brief
3 Arrange elements on page	3.1 Imported text or data from other applications is correctly formatted and any cross-application formatting issues are resolved 3.2 Elements are created and arranged on page to conform to design brief 3.3 Graphics and other elements are imported from other applications and correctly formatted and arranged 3.4 Elements are arranged in layers according to design brief
4 Finalise artwork	4.1 Pages and combined elements are composed correctly to suit specified sheet size 4.2 Numerical sequence and laydown of product or mock-up is correctly identified to meet binding and finishing requirements 4.3 Bleed allowance is incorporated in margins and borders
5 Check quality	5.1 Text is reviewed for possible errors and omissions and errors are discussed with client or supervisor 5.2 Overall balance of layout and correct colour blends and gradients are maintained in arrangement of elements 5.3 Completed file is sent to be ripped 5.4 Proof is created and rechecked for errors, omissions and overall layout balance 5.5 Necessary changes are made, reviewed on screen and reproofed as required 5.6 Job is saved according to enterprise procedures 5.7 Digital proof or PDF is created to present to client

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 1.3, 1.4, 2.2, 2.5, 2.6, 3.1, 3.2, 3.4, 5.1, 5.4, 5.5	Recognises and interprets text to establish job requirements from information contained within relevant procedures and specifications Uses explicit strategies to make connections between information and ideas
Writing	2.2, 3.1, 5.5	Uses a variety of strategies for planning, drafting, reviewing and proofreading own writing Chooses appropriate text type to communicate relevant information and/or ideas effectively
Oral Communication	1.1, 5.1, 5.7	Participates effectively in spoken interactions by using vocabulary, including technical language, relevant to role and context
Numeracy	4.2, 4.3	Selects and uses appropriate familiar mathematical problem-solving strategies to solve problems in familiar contexts
Navigate the world of work	1.1, 1.3, 1.4, 2.1-2.6, 3.1, 3.2, 3.4, 4.1, 4.2, 5.6	Recognises and follows explicit and implicit protocols and meets expectations associated with own role Takes responsibility for decisions about when and how to complete tasks and coordinate with others
Interact with others	1.1, 5.1, 5.7	Collaborates with others to achieve joint outcomes, playing an active role in facilitating effective interaction
Get the work done	1.2, 1.3, 2.2-2.6, 3.1-3.4, 4.1-4.3, 5.1-5.5, 5.7	May operate from a broad conceptual plan, developing operational detail in stages, regularly reviewing priorities and performance during implementation, identifying and addressing issues Takes responsibility for planning and organising own workload, identifying ways of sequencing and combining elements for greater efficiency Understands purposes, specific functions and key features of common digital systems and tools and operates them effectively to complete tasks

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPPRP324 Create pages using a page layout application	ICPPP324C Create pages using a page layout application	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRP324 Create pages using a page layout application

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

correctly prepare THREE different sets of page layouts according to the client’s design brief.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

outline selection of colour qualities and behaviour for trapping during the design phase

explain different qualities of Tagged Image File Format (TIFF) and Encapsulated PostScript (EPS) and their use

describe process for distinguishing unmarked colours and principles of additive and subtractive colour mixing

outline considerations given to the printing process during the design phase; and problems that can occur if the printing process is overlooked during the design stage

describe media size to be considered during imposition, and planning for multiple colours during imposition

identify difference between computer type versus print type

outline importance of type to overall design and factors to be considered to ensure readability

describe importance of design and layout when arranging artwork and typography use in design

explain purposeful design, market segmentation and importance of understanding the target audience

outline factors to be considered when targeting equity groups

describe the process for creating and saving templates and creating style guides and sheets.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the Pre-Press field of work and include access to applicable page layout applications.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPPRP325 Create graphics using a graphics application

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to develop graphics incorporating a range of features for cross-media publishing based on a client brief, using a high-end application.

For this unit, the knowledge and skills cover selecting, adapting and transferring skills and knowledge to new environments, and providing technical advice and some leadership in resolution of specific problems.

It applies to individuals who perform a range of roles in a variety of contexts with some complexity in the extent and choice of options available.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Pre-Press

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1 Balance image quality and file size	1.1 Graphics files are opened and design brief requirements are confirmed 1.2 Graphics are repeated efficiently using a symbol or stamp to reduce file size 1.3 Slices are created from objects, layers or groups and updated as required 1.4 Type anti-aliasing is applied selectively to keep small text easy to read 1.5 Tasks are automated wherever possible and, where necessary, scripts are used for automation
2 Manipulate objects	2.1 Objects and text are manipulated and edited as required 2.2 Elements are defined for repetition, repetition tools are used to create duplicates and then are manipulated as a group 2.3 Complex shapes are created by combining shapes into compounds and, if required, compounds are edited
3 Import images	3.1 Bitmap images are embedded and/or linked in the file 3.2 Placed Bitmaps are modified and/or duplicated depending on design requirements 3.3 Bitmaps are masked and/or an opacity mask is added 3.4 Layered file is exported to image editing program for editing
4 Develop variable templates	4.1. Based on the design brief, objects are defined within the template as variables 4.2 Automated script or image server is used to ensure variations, using data stored in any Open Database Connectivity (ODBC) compliant source 4.3 Template variables are tested to ensure correct operation
5 Colour separate artwork	5.1 Correct colour separation format is determined by requirements of the pre-press workflow system 5.2 Command preferences are set correctly for print quality and process 5.3 Based on printer feedback, colour separation options are set according to print requirements of the design brief 5.4 Process and spot colours are combined, if required 5.5 Screen frequency value appropriate for the print quality is selected and colour separation preferences are saved 5.6 Spreads and chokes traps are created to avoid mis-registration 5.7 Overlapping and overprint of objects are defined 5.8 Proof is created and separations checked, any required editing is completed and file is saved
6 Prepare for final media	6.1 Metadata tags are embedded to catalogue, organise and retrieve artwork 6.2 For cross-media publishing purposes, web-safe colours are selected 6.3 File formats are chosen to best represent artwork styles 6.4 Objects are linked to create an image map meeting design requirements 6.5 Objects are layered to create animation frames and exported for animation set-up 6.6 Compression options are selected to keep image quality high and file size low 6.7 Export options are set for the final media and the file is saved and exported

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 2.1, 4.1, 5.3, 6.4	Recognises and interprets text to establish job requirements from information contained within relevant procedures and specifications
Numeracy	5.5	Interprets and analyses a range of mathematical information used in familiar and routine tasks
Get the work done	1.1-1.5, 2.1-2.3, 3.1-3.4, 4.1-4.3, 5.1, 5.3-5.8, 6.1-6.7	Takes responsibility for planning and organising own workload and assembles resources required Recognises and takes responsibility for addressing predictable, and some less predictable, problems in familiar work contexts Follows routine procedures for using digital technology by reading data from electronic monitoring and control systems Utilises a broad range of features within digital applications optimising software functions to achieve requirements

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPPRP325 Create graphics using a graphics application	ICPPP325C Create graphics using a graphics application	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRP325 Create graphics using a graphics application

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

develop graphics incorporating a range of features for cross-media publishing based on a client brief using a high-end application

find and use information relevant to the task from a variety of information sources.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

describe image formats

explain use of scripting languages

explain how to manipulate text and apply formatting

describe how to draw shapes

explain how to manipulate images

explain design principles which should be applied when creating graphics

explain profiles

outline considerations of colour management.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the Pre-Press field of work and include access to special purpose tools, equipment and industry software packages.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPPRP331 Manually combine complex four-colour images

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to undertake advanced manual combining of colour images.

It requires the individual to prepare images and equipment and to combine elements, separate colours and prepare registration and complex artwork for the next production stage.

It applies to individuals who work in consultation with others to ensure production and final user requirements have been met.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Pre-Press

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1 Plan combining strategy and prepare the work	1.1 Job components are gathered and checked according to job specifications 1.2 Dot shapes and percentages are checked according to job specifications 1.3 Correct masking technique is used to combine job economically 1.4 Screen rulings and angles are checked according to job specifications 1.5 Spotting techniques are performed accurately to achieve required combining effect 1.6 Exposures and processing equipment are set up to manufacturer’s specifications 1.7 Stipples and vignettes are laid at correct angles and using correct percentages
2 Combine film	2.1 Spreads, chokes, reverses, deep etchings and line and tone combinations are created according to job specifications 2.2 Colours are separated correctly according to job specifications
3 Ensure accurate registration	3.1 Register marks, register punch holes, centre lines and trim lines are calculated and aligned accurately according to job specifications 3.2 All elements are registered accurately according to design specifications
4 Apply photographic contacting	4.1 Basic exposures for contact, duplication and spreads and chokes are determined 4.2 Contact frames for contact, duplication and spreads and chokes are used correctly

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 1.2, 1.4, 1.6, 2.1, 2.2, 3.1, 3.2	Recognises and interprets text to establish job requirements from information contained within relevant procedures and specifications
Numeracy	1.4, 1.7, 3.1, 4.1	Selects and uses appropriate familiar mathematical problem-solving strategies to solve problems in familiar contexts
Get the work done	1.1-1.7, 2.1, 2.2, 3.1, 3.2, 4.1	Takes responsibility for planning and organising own workload, identifying ways of sequencing and combining elements for greater efficiency Responds to predictable problems and implements standard or logical solutions related to role in immediate work environment Understands purposes, specific functions and key features of common digital systems and tools and operates them effectively to complete tasks

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPPRP331 Manually combine complex four-colour images	ICPPP331C Manually combine complex four-colour images	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRP331 Manually combine complex four-colour images

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

prepare and assemble at least TWO layouts with a variety of selected image elements following the job brief; ensuring spreads, chokes, reverses, deep etchings and line and tone combinations meet the job specification; colours are separated correctly, all elements are registered accurately and contact, duplication and spreads and chokes have correct exposure

transfer underlying skill of combining across safelight and roomlight environments (it is important substrate for reproduction is identified and competencies demonstrated with a clear identification of printing processes)

find and use information relevant to the task from a variety of information sources.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

explain how choice of printing process affects combining strategy and settings

outline steps required to produce combined image

identify image elements unique to this job specification

state criteria to ensure colour separated images meet job specification/printing process

describe masking technique which ensures accuracy and economy

outline equipment considerations essential for accuracy

explain method of producing spreads and chokes (trapping)

describe how basic exposure data for contacting and duplicating emulsions is determined

list aids to ensure quality control

name factors that ensure quality of output through a processor

describe procedures that ensure accuracy of registration

list factors that ensure screen elements are assembled correctly

explain how the correct percentage of tints is ensured

discuss how to ensure all job specifications are met

explain the care that must be taken when matching to Pantone Matching System (PMS) colours

outline content and state the location of manuals, safety and other documentation relevant to this task.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the Pre-Press field of work and include access to special purpose tools, equipment and industry software packages.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPPRP333 Electronically combine complex images

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to undertake complex electronic combining of images. It requires the individual to assess and combine complex images, perform edits to ensure they conform to job specifications, solve technical problems and prepare the final output.

It applies to individuals working in a pre-press environment, who are required to be competent in more than one graphics application.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Pre-Press

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1 Assess and combine complex images	1.1 Components of complex images for reproduction are electronically evaluated for combining 1.2 Operations are planned for combining digital information from any electronic source to effect job specifications 1.3 Correct masking technique is used to combine the job economically 1.4 Combined images are manipulated, retouched and corrected electronically to conform to job specifications
2 Edit complex image	2.1 Images are retouched to conform to job specifications 2.2 Images are contoured to conform to job specifications 2.3 Colour correction is undertaken to conform to job specifications 2.4 Tonal correction is undertaken to conform to job specifications
3 Solve technical combining problems	3.1 Technical problems relevant to combining images are resolved by reassessing elements for combining or amendment of the design 3.2 Complex images are combined with potential to be reproduced according to the job brief
4 Prepare information for output devices	4.1 Disk capacity is checked for space before final assembly 4.2 Limitations of system to achieve required output are assessed 4.3 Appropriate colour profiles are applied according to job specifications
5 Manage combining system	5.1 Electronic combining system is managed effectively to facilitate storage, retrieval and outputting of data 5.2 Combining software and files are maintained to ensure an operative system

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.2, 1.4, 2.1-2.4, 3.2, 4.3	Recognises and interprets text to establish job requirements from information contained within relevant procedures and specifications
Get the work done	1.1-1.4, 2.1-2.4, 3.1, 3.2, 4.1-4.3, 5.1, 5.2	Takes responsibility for planning and organising own workload, identifying ways of sequencing and combining elements for greater efficiency Responds to predictable problems and implements standard or logical solutions related to role in immediate work environment Understands purposes, specific functions and key features of common digital systems and tools and operates them effectively to complete tasks

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPPRP333 Electronically combine complex images	ICPPP333C Electronically combine complex images	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRP333 Electronically combine complex images

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

produce TWO jobs that combine and manipulate complex elements to be reproduced following job brief, and according to the listed performance criteria

transfer underlying skill of combining across the design and pre-press sectors (it is important the substrate for reproduction is identified and competencies demonstrated with a clear identification of printing processes)

find and use information relevant to the task from a variety of information sources.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

explain why settings need to be varied to suit subsequent printing processes or electronic output

list factors used in determining scan resolution

outline limitations of a Charge-Coupled Device (CCD) scanner when compared to a Photo Multiplier scanner

list factors involved in calibrating the monitor

outline the process of converting from an Red Green Blue (RGB) colour model to a stet colour model

explain meaning of Native format

list characteristics of EPS and TIFF formats

explain meaning of Raster Image Processing (RIP)

explain the process of RIP calibration

name two advantages of Open Prepress Interface (OPI)

explain difference between a bitmapped and a vector image

state purpose of calculation menu [or equivalent] in systems work

outline specific limitations of digital cameras

locate manuals, safety and other documentation relevant to this task and outline information included in these documents.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the Pre-Press field of work and include access to special purpose tools, equipment and industry software packages.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPPRP334 Prepare an imposition format for printing processes

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to create layouts and impositions for printing. It requires an individual to manually develop a lay-down sheet and imposition scheme, combine components and meet production and finishing requirements.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Pre-Press

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1 Generate lay-down sheet and imposition scheme	1.1 Printing processes, sheet sizes and binding and finishing instructions are applied to finished artwork to generate an imposition scheme 1.2 A lay-down sheet and imposition scheme are generated according to folding and binding machine requirements and special printing requirements
2 Impose pages and combine components to final machine-sized worksheets	2.1 Pages and combined components are imposed correctly to suit specified sheet size 2.2 Numerical sequence and lay-down of product or mock-up are correctly identified to meet binding and finishing requirements

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 1.2	Recognises and interprets text to establish job requirements from information contained within relevant procedures and specifications
Get the work done	1.1, 1.2, 2.1, 2.2	Takes responsibility for planning and organising own workload, identifying ways of sequencing and combining elements for greater efficiency Responds to predictable problems and implements standard or logical solutions related to role in immediate work environment Understands purposes, specific functions and key features of common digital systems and tools and operates them effectively to complete tasks

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPPRP334 Prepare an imposition format for printing processes	ICPPP334C Prepare an imposition format for printing processes	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRP334 Prepare an imposition format for printing processes

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

prepare, set up and use a manual or software system to produce TWO layouts according to listed performance criteria and job requirements

choose printing processes, sheet sizes, binding and finishing instructions, and numerical sequence and lay-down of the product meet job, and binding and finishing requirements

find and use information relevant to the task from a variety of information sources.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

list main considerations of preparing a layout for a printing press

outline different working methods for sheet-fed presses

identify image control marks important for press operation, and at binding finishing stage

explain calculations to ensure layout size correct

describe impact of paper considerations on type of imposition used

outline factors that influence imposition choices

locate manuals, safety and other documentation relevant to this task and identify included information.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the Pre-Press field of work and include access to special purpose tools, equipment and industry software packages.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPPRP352 Output complex images

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to output complex images. It requires the individual to set up an output device, and adjust and manipulate complex images or files that meet the job specifications and are free of errors.

It applies to individuals working in the printing and graphic arts industries who work under some supervision using practical skills and equipment to output complex images.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Pre-Press

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1 Set up and maintain output device	1.1 Devices are set up to manufacturer’s specifications and enterprise standards 1.2 Output medium is calibrated by conducting exposure tests using appropriate software and hardware 1.3 Calibration is evaluated and necessary adjustments made to output device
2 Adjust and manipulate images/files	2.1 Electronic files are evaluated as to suitability for output 2.2 Appropriate output resolution is set 2.3 Appropriate screen angle and dot type are set according to job specifications 2.4 Appropriate colour profiles are applied where necessary 2.5 Availability of high resolution images is assessed for Open Prepress Interface (OPI) process 2.6 Appropriate fonts availability is checked 2.7 All support files are included with the job
3 Output image	3.1 File is prepared for output to imaging device 3.2 Job queuing is managed to ensure efficient production 3.3 Images are outputted to appropriate medium 3.4 Output is processed according to job specifications
4 Evaluate result	4.1 Output is checked for correct dot size, screen angles and film density 4.2 Image elements are checked according to original job specifications 4.3 Technical problems are solved and appropriate corrections are made 4.4 Job is prepared for next stage of production

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 2.3, 3.4, 4.2	Recognises and interprets text to establish job requirements from information contained within relevant procedures and specifications
Navigate the world of work	1.1	Recognises and follows organisational policies and procedures
Get the work done	1.1-1.3, 2.1-2.5, 3.1-3.3, 4.2-4.4	Takes responsibility for planning and organising own workload, identifying ways of sequencing and combining elements for greater efficiency Responds to predictable problems and implements standard or logical solutions related to role in immediate work environment Understands purposes, specific functions and key features of common digital systems and tools and operates them effectively to complete tasks

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPPRP352 Output complex images	ICPPP352C Output complex images	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRP352 Output complex images

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

produce TWO complex images in which appropriate resolution, screen angle and dot type and colour profiles are applied as required to meet job specifications

find and use information relevant to the task from a variety of information sources.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

explain the effect selection of printing process has on output settings for final films

outline methods/procedures available for calibrating an output device

list consequences of incorrect calibration

outline corrective action to take when a file does not transfer correctly

list main points to be checked before sending a job to the Raster Image Processor (RIP)

explain how selection of image resolution is affected by screen ruling

list conditions that cause variations from conventional screen angles

outline checks needed when preparing a job for Open Prepress Interface (OPI)

list consequences for image quality if OPI files are not placed in their correct folders

explain function of the low resolution file in the OPI process

outline main factors that influence processing speed of a job when being RIPped

explain how RIPping speed of a job can be increased

name setting changes needed on the output device when outputting a stochastic screen

outline factors that influence selection of the micron rating of the screen

name main types of file formats and affects selection of a format has on processing of a job

locate manuals, safety and other documentation relevant to this task, and identify included information.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the Pre-Press field of work and include access to special purpose tools, equipment and industry software packages.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPPRP360 Undertake special colour proofing

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to undertake special colour proofing. It requires the individual to evaluate artwork and produce colour proofs according to the job specifications.

It applies to individuals working in the printing and graphic arts industries who work under some supervision using practical skills and equipment to undertake special colour proofing.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Pre-Press

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1 Evaluate artwork and separations	1.1 Job is evaluated to identify required process 1.2 Job is evaluated to identify special colours
2 Produce special colour proofs	2.1 Colours are formulated according to job specifications 2.2 Film separations are exposed to appropriate medium 2.3 Colours are checked against job specifications using densitometers, spectrophotometers or visual matching to a supplied sample or Pantone Matching System (PMS) book 2.4 Colours are proofed in correct sequence according to job specifications

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	2.1, 2.3, 2.4	Recognises and interprets text to establish job requirements from information contained within relevant procedures and specifications
Numeracy	2.3	Interprets and analyses a range of mathematical information used in familiar and routine tasks
Get the work done	1.1, 1.2, 2.1-2.4	Takes responsibility for planning and organising own workload, identifying ways of sequencing and combining elements for greater efficiency Responds to predictable problems and implements standard or logical solutions related to role in immediate work environment Understands purposes, specific functions and key features of common digital systems and tools and operates them effectively to complete tasks

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPPRP360 Undertake special colour proofing	ICPPP360C Undertake special colour proofing	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRP360 Undertake special colour proofing

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

produce TWO sets of special colour proofs that match original artwork and meet client and industry requirements

find and use information relevant to the task from a variety of information sources

transfer underlying skills of proofing across the design and pre-press sectors (it is important that the substrate for reproduction is identified and the quality of the image is suitable for the printing process).

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

name systems used for matching colours

identify lighting conditions that should be used when matching colours

list effects of humidity on special colour proofing

outline factors to be considered when producing special colour for proofing

explain what determines correct colour sequence

explain how a densitometer is used for proof evaluation

explain how colour evaluation charts are used

list criteria for evaluating a colour proof

explain the manuals, safety and other documentation relevant to this task and briefly outline the relevant information.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the Pre-Press field of work and include access to special purpose tools, equipment and industry software packages.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPPRP370 Produce multiple image plates

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to make plates for any printing process with repeated images from film inputs. It requires the individual to produce step and repeat layouts and set up step and repeat machines according to job specifications.

It applies to individuals working in the printing and graphic arts industries who work under some supervision using practical skills and equipment to produce multiple image plates.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Pre-Press

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1 Produce step and repeat layout	1.1 Client information is gathered to enable step and repeat layout 1.2 Layout is produced according to client information 1.3 Data is stored for future retrieval using industry software package 1.4 Register of stock levels is maintained, and advice about depletion of stock is recorded according to enterprise procedures
2 Set up step and repeat machine	2.1 Film is mounted squarely to produce an accurate image 2.2 Accurate masks are cut for image protection/bleeds 2.3 Mounting foils are positioned in a chase to ensure a quality output 2.4 Film or plate is punched, loaded, exposed and processed according to job specifications

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 1.2, 2.4	Recognises and interprets text to establish job requirements from information contained within own notes, relevant procedures and specifications
Writing	1.1, 1.4	Completes workplace records and forms accurately and legibly using correct technical and enterprise specific vocabulary
Oral Communication	1.1	Participates effectively in spoken interactions using appropriate vocabulary to confirm or clarify understanding
Numeracy	2.2	Performs calculations required for accurate mounting and masking
Navigate the world of work	1.4	Recognises and follows organisational policies and procedures associated with own role Takes responsibility for decisions about when and how to complete tasks and coordinate with others
Interact with others	1.1	Uses appropriate communication protocols and conventions to gather client information
Get the work done	1.3, 1.4, 2.1-2.4	Takes responsibility for planning and organising own workload, identifying ways of sequencing and combining elements for greater efficiency Responds to predictable problems and implements standard or logical solutions related to role in immediate work environment Understands purposes, specific functions and key features of common digital systems and tools and operates them effectively to complete tasks

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPPRP370 Produce multiple image plates	ICPPP370C Produce multiple image plates	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent units

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRP370 Produce multiple image plates

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

prepare and set up of at least TWO step and repeat layouts for production of multiple repeated images according to listed performance criteria and job specifications

transfer underlying skills of step and repeat across different pre-press systems and printing processes

find and use information relevant to the task from a variety of information sources.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

explain relationship between image of the original and the final substrate

describe calculation required to produce final layout

explain necessary steps to ensure correct and safe operation of the step and repeat machine

outline work health and safety (WHS) concerns when processing printing plates

explain how to prepare and use a mask to suit the job

outline procedures to ensure correct registration and accuracy/repeatability of exposure

identify manuals, safety and other documentation relevant to this task, where they are kept, and information included in them.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the Pre-Press field of work and include access to special purpose tools, equipment and industry software packages.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPPRP372 Produce gravure cylinders electronically

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge needed to undertake electronic processes and procedures used to make gravure cylinders. It requires the individual to prepare and electronically engrave a blank cylinder to be used for gravure printing according to job specifications.

It applies to individuals working in the printing and graphic arts industries who work under some supervision using practical skills and equipment to produce gravure cylinders electronically.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Pre-Press

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1 Select cylinder	1.1 Job specifications are interpreted to select an appropriate cylinder and/or core 1.2 Base cylinder is selected according to job specifications
2 Pre-plan for engraving	2.1 Opels are analysed against job specifications and technical requirements of the equipment 2.2 Opels are masked manually for any uneven start positioning
3 Engrave cylinder electronically	3.1 A clean work environment is maintained to ensure quality of output 3.2 Equipment is maintained according to manufacturer’s specifications 3.3 Cylinder is engraved according to job specifications and enterprise procedures
4 Adjust finished cylinder	4.1 Additions and deletions are made to cylinder according to job specifications and enterprise procedures 4.2 Required changes are pre-planned

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 1.2, 2.1, 3.2, 3.3, 4.1	Recognises and interprets text to establish job requirements from information contained within relevant procedures and specifications
Numeracy	1.1	Interprets and analyses a range of mathematical information used in familiar and routine tasks
Navigate the world of work	3.3, 4.1	Recognises and follows organisational policies and procedures associated with own role
Get the work done	1.1, 2.1, 2.2, 3.2, 3.3, 4.1 - 4.2	Takes responsibility for planning and organising own workload and assembles resources required Evaluates effectiveness of decisions on how well they meet stated design specifications Recognises and takes responsibility for addressing predictable, and some less predictable problems in familiar work contexts Utilises a broad range of features within applications to improve personal productivity, optimising software functions for specific purposes

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPPRP372 Produce gravure cylinders electronically	ICPPP372C Produce gravure cylinders electronically	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages Minor edit to Performance Criteria to clarify intent	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRP372 Produce gravure cylinders electronically

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

prepare, set up and use an electronic engraving system to produce BOTH stylus and laser gravure cylinders, according to job specifications, and ensuring the cylinder is correctly etched to ensure quality reproduction, and meets print requirements

find and use information relevant to the task from a variety of information sources

transfer underlying skills of cylinder making across the pre-press sector (it is important the substrate for reproduction is identified and the quality of the cylinder is suitable for the identified printing processes).

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

outline work health and safety (WHS) concerns when engraving cylinders

state production parameters that should exist on the job ticket

calculate a change in screen angle

identify screen line ratio for fine rulings

describe specific features of the laser engraving process

explain how the cutting stylus can affect print quality

outline characteristics of the diamond stylus used for colour work

explain techniques of deleting errors on the finished cylinder

identify manuals, safety and other documentation relevant to this task, where they are kept, and information included in them.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the Pre-Press field of work and include access to special purpose tools, equipment and industry software packages.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPPRP382 Produce computer image for screen printing

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to produce a computer image for screen printing. It requires the individual to generate electronic art to a supplied layout film positive or computer cut stencil.

It applies to individuals working in the printing and graphic arts industries who work under some supervision using practical skills and equipment to produce computer images for screen printing.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Pre-Press

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1 Prepare for scanning	1.1 Original is scaled to conform to production specifications 1.2 Original is assessed to determine scanner settings 1.3 Original is cleaned and correctly mounted according to production specifications 1.4 Correct settings are selected for original to be scanned
2 Scan and check image	2.1 Original is scanned according to quality requirements 2.2 Quality of scanned image is checked for conformance to job specifications 2.3 Appropriate software is applied for any processing of text if necessary
3 Prepare combining strategy	3.1 Required data from electronic files is accessed 3.2 Appropriate application is opened to undertake combining tasks 3.3 Required fonts are accessed according to job specifications
4 Combine data	4.1 Page layout size is created according to job specifications 4.2 Elements are placed in page according to job specifications 4.3 Trapping (spread and chokes) is applied according to job specifications 4.4 Step and repeat function is accessed according to job specifications 4.5 Elements are stepped according to job specifications 4.6 Output menu is configured according to job specifications
5 Access and maintain output device	5.1 Output devices are set up and maintained according to manufacturer’s specifications and enterprise procedures 5.2 Suitable material is identified and loaded into the output device
6 Output image	6.1 System is activated to initiate output according to job specifications 6.2 Quality is monitored according to enterprise procedures

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 1.3, 2.2, 3.3, 4.1-4.6, 5.1, 6.1	Recognises and interprets text to establish job requirements from information contained within relevant procedures and specifications
Navigate the world of work	6.2	Recognises and follows organisational policies and procedures relevant to own role
Get the work done	1.1-1.4, 2.1-2.3, 3.1-3.3, 4.1-4.6, 5.1, 5.2, 6.1, 6.2	Takes responsibility for planning and organising own workload and assembles resources required Utilises a broad range of features of digital tools optimising software functions for specific purposes Recognises and takes responsibility for addressing predictable, and some less predictable, problems in familiar work contexts

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPPRP382 Produce computer image for screen printing	ICPPP382C Produce computer image for screen printing	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRP382 Produce computer image for screen printing

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

correctly scan, electronically combine and output to designated devices, TWO separate images on film and/or stencil according to job specification and client standards

find and use information relevant to the task from a variety of information sources.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

identify tolerance allowed when scaling original

identify common scanner Dots Per Inch (DPI) for graphic line images

explain when original angling is used

state resolution for optical character recognition in scanning

identify format in which the scan is saved

name formatting retained in Optical Character Recognition (OCR) scanning

explain how external files are accessed

identify most appropriate software for this combining task

identify who is responsible for page layout size

outline type of elements that can be used

explain when trapping is applied

explain what determines the number of step and repeats in a job

name the first step in configuring the output menu

list types of output devices used in screen printing

name range of substrates used in output devices

explain where the file is located prior to the output device

identify and use checking techniques that maintain quality standards.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the Pre-Press field of work and include access to special purpose tools, equipment and industry software packages.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPPRP385 Operate a database for digital printing

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to enter, retrieve and prepare data for personalised printing by integrating a database with a layout.

It applies to skilled individuals who design and prepare layouts and artwork, manipulate images and text, and apply solutions to a defined range of problems. They may also provide some leadership and guidance to others with some limited responsibility for the output of others.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Pre-Press

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1 Enter and retrieve data	1.1 Data required for the job is checked and confirmed against job specifications 1.2 Data is accurately entered and completed to meet job specifications 1.3 Fields are created or modified to effectively meet job specifications while maintaining integrity of existing data 1.4 Data structure is maintained according to job specifications 1.5 Automated facilities for data checking are used effectively 1.6 Data is located and retrieved as required by the job 1.7 Help function is used to find solutions to queries, if required 1.8 Files are saved to preserve data integrity and comply with organisational requirements
2 Set extraction requirements	2.1 Database fields meet placement requirements for the document format 2.2 Client data requirements are prepared by interrogating the database 2.3 Information extracted to the template is correctly processed and saved according to job specifications 2.4 Composition engine is used to achieve required data format and page layout requirements for merging variable data and static elements
3 Test data	3.1 Data is checked to ensure it is uncorrupted 3.2 Data is in correct sequence required for the run 3.3 Required dynamic links operate correctly and settings conform to job specifications 3.4 Any adjustments required are made and retested
4 Output data	4.1 Database is configured to the printer and printer output parameters are set to meet output requirements 4.2 Quality standards for data output are confirmed according to job specifications 4.3 Run is monitored to identify improvement opportunities and maintain quality

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1-1.4, 1.7, 2.2, 2.3, 3.2, 3.3, 4.2	Recognises and interprets text to establish job requirements from information contained within relevant procedures and specifications
Writing	1.2	Completes workplace records and forms accurately and legibly using correct technical and enterprise specific vocabulary
Numeracy	2.1, 2.4, 4.1	Interprets and analyses a range of mathematical information used in familiar and routine tasks
Navigate the world of work	1.8	Recognises and follows organisational policies and procedures associated with own role
Get the work done	1.1-1.8, 2.1-2.4, 3.1-3.4, 4.1-4.3	Takes responsibility for planning and organising own workload and assembles resources required Utilises a broad range of features within digital applications to complete tasks and improve personal productivity, optimising software functions for specific purposes Recognises and takes responsibility for addressing predictable, and some less predictable problems in familiar work contexts

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPPRP385 Operate a database for digital printing	ICPPP385C Operate a database for digital printing	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRP385 Operate a database for digital printing

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

correctly complete TWO different jobs, entering, retrieving and preparing data for personalised printing using both text and graphics with fixed placement.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

identify appropriate computer-specific applications and the process of using them

list information found on job sheets and the process followed to ensure job requirements are met

identify different fonts used and how they may influence database composition

outline issues involved in deciding on image parameters

discuss the process of storing and retrieving digital information

outline expected production standards and any common issues that may arise.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the Pre-Press field of work and include use of a composition engine.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPPRP386 Undertake digital proofing

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to undertake digital proofing.

It applies to individuals working as pre-press tradespeople in the printing and graphic arts industry. They typically apply solutions to a range of problems associated with the print medium. They may provide some leadership and guidance to others with some limited responsibility for the output of others.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Pre-Press

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1 Calibrate proofing device	1.1 Machine calibration is checked for conformance to job specifications 1.2 Appropriate International Colour Consortium (ICC) profiles are applied to meet colour requirements 1.3 Paper for output is matched to profile
2 Produce proofs from digital data	2.1 Image is retrieved from the database using industry software 2.2 Data file is checked for structural compatibility with capability of the Raster Image Processor (RIP) 2.3 Special colours are sent to the RIP where appropriate 2.4 Proof is produced according to job specifications and workflow procedures 2.5 Proof is evaluated against job specifications using a densitometer, and checked against changes and original working data 2.6 Proof is prepared for client submission 2.7 Proof is used as a contract proof only if RIP is the same for both proof and film, and if client accepts it as such

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 2.4, 2.5	Recognises and interprets text to establish job requirements from information contained within relevant procedures and specifications
Oral Communication	2.7	Participates effectively in spoken interactions to confirm client acceptance
Numeracy	2.5	Interprets and analyses a range of mathematical information used in familiar and routine tasks
Navigate the world of work	2.4	Follows organisational policies and procedures relevant to own role
Interact with others	2.7	Uses appropriate communication protocols and conventions to confirm client acceptance
Get the work done	1.2, 1.3, 2.1-2.6	Takes responsibility for planning and organising own workload and assembles resources required Utilises a broad range of features within digital applications to improve personal productivity, optimising software functions for specific purposes Recognises and takes responsibility for addressing predictable, and some less predictable, problems in familiar work contexts

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPPRP386 Undertake digital proofing	ICPPP386C Undertake digital proofing	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRP386 Undertake digital proofing

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

transfer underlying skills of proofing across the design and pre-press sectors

identify the substrate for reproduction and ensure quality of image is suitable for the printing process

produce image file(s) compatible with a Raster Image Processor (RIP) including an example with special colours

produce proofs to job specifications and client submission using quality control devices and colour evaluation charts.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

identify types of digital colour proofing systems

describe method of producing the colour image and

variations that may occur when different imaging methods are used

Production of colour proofs

explain the procedure for outputting the image and production of a colour proof, i.e. transfer of files and use of specific assembly software

list constraints on file structure imposed by RIP

describe the function of an International Colour Consortium (ICC) profile

list differences that various RIPs can have on output

Use of quality control devices for colour appraisal

describe how a densitometer is used for proof evaluation

explain the function of calibration software for the output device

explain the purpose of colour evaluation charts and how they are used

Evaluation of the proof

list criteria for evaluating a colour proof

explain differences that can occur between preliminary proofs and a contract proof

Information sources

identify manuals, safety and other documentation relevant to this task, their location; and describe the information included

identify other available sources of information.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the Pre-Press field of work and include access to special purpose tools, equipment and industry software packages.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPPRP396 Generate high-end PDF files

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to generate a high-end Portable Document Format (PDF) file.

It applies to individuals required to check, set and create high-end PDF files ready to be sent to an imaging centre. Individuals respond to clearly defined briefs and work under limited supervision.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Pre-requisite Unit

ICPPRP284	Produce PDF files for online or screen display

Unit Sector

Pre-Press

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1 Check file	1.1 Document is checked to ensure correct layout file and that all elements are printable 1.2 Scanned images are checked for correct resolution and electronic font modification is avoided 1.3 Images requiring cropping and compression are edited in an image editing environment to maintain quality of image 1.4 Tint areas are checked to ensure correct percentage for printing 1.5 Unnecessary elements and blank pages are deleted if not required 1.6 Bleed allowance is incorporated in margins and borders
2 Set PDF Distiller	2.1 Correct paper size is set and fonts are chosen and embedded to meet quality print requirements under copyright regulations 2.2 Appropriate PDF standard is established and selected 2.3 All job options, compression, colour management, colour separation and font options are selected and checked according to requirements of the data recipient 2.4 Process colour separations or spot colour jobs are checked and any problems resolved 2.5 Job ticket is set up according to enterprise procedures, if required 2.6 Advanced job options are selected depending on compatibility and system requirements 2.7 Job options set is named and saved to the correct folder
3 Create PDF	3.1 Printer description file or postscript language file is created and all relevant options are selected, or export file settings selected 3.2 Saved postscript file is opened and job option file is opened through the Distiller as required 3.3 Distiller/PDF export options are checked and set so they do not override the postscript file preferences 3.4 File is distilled and, when processing is finished, opened to view 3.5 File is printed to postscript device and quality of all elements are checked 3.6 Changes to the file are made in the layout program and pages inserted into multiple page documents 3.7 Additional files are converted or exported using the saved job option set

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 2.3	Recognises and interprets text to establish job requirements from information contained within relevant procedures and specifications Proofreads texts to check for accuracy
Writing	2.5	Completes workplace forms accurately and legibly using correct technical and enterprise specific vocabulary
Numeracy	1.6	Performs calculations necessary to determine bleed allowances in pages and borders
Navigate the world of work	2.1, 2.5	Follows legislative requirements and organisational policies and procedures relevant to own role
Interact with others	2.3	Uses appropriate communication protocols and conventions to confirm or clarify recipient requirements
Get the work done	1.1-1.6, 2.1-2.7, 3.1-3.7	Takes responsibility for planning and organising own workload, identifying ways of sequencing and combining elements for greater efficiency and uses analytical processes to decide on a course of action Plans, identifies and assembles resources required to complete tasks Responds to predictable problems and implements standard or logical solutions Understands purposes, specific functions and key features of common digital systems and tools and operates them effectively to create, edit and save files in required format Follows routine procedures for using digital technology by reading data from electronic monitoring and control systems

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPPRP396 Generate high-end PDF files	ICPPP396A Generate high-end PDF files	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRP396 Generate high-end PDF files

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

prepare a high-end Portable Document Format (PDF) file for pre-press

locate and use information relevant to the task from a variety of information sources.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

outline work health and safety (WHS) standards that relate to working for periods of time on computers

identify PDF printer driver options

list driver types and preferred application

explain suitability of a PDF writer for high-end printing

describe true base 13 fonts

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the Pre-Press field of work and include access to special purpose tools, equipment and industry software packages.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPPRP397 Transfer digital files

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge needed to manipulate, delete and transfer digital files.

It requires the individual to accept, document, name, delete, archive and transfer digital files by using enterprise relevant processes. Individuals work under limited supervision and with defined procedures.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Pre-Press

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1 Save digital files	1.1 Files are named using enterprise format 1.2 File is checked for use of appropriate formats required for enterprise processing 1.3 Version control is used to ensure most recent file can be accessed
2 Transfer digital files	2.1 Files to be transferred (sent or received) are selected and the correct method of transfer is chosen 2.2 Locations where files are to be saved or downloaded are accurately located and navigated 2.3 Files are transferred to required location for processing 2.4 Transferred (sent or received) files are checked to ensure correct transfer has occurred 2.5 Files are documented, moved, renamed, copied, archived and deleted as necessary according to enterprise standards
3 Retrieve and manage digital files	3.1 Required files are retrieved and opened from digital file system 3.2 Computer search functions are used to locate and retrieve files 3.3 File is sent to required location
4 Archive digital files	4.1 Archive system is created according to enterprise protocol 4.2 Consistent, regular backup strategies are undertaken to allow for retrieval of files if there is a data loss event 4.3 Files are retrieved from archive system

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.2, 2.5, 3.2, 4.3	Recognises and interprets texts from a range of sources
Writing	1.1, 1.3, 2.5, 4.1	Chooses appropriate text type to document relevant information
Navigate the world of work	1.1, 1.2, 4.1	Interprets and follows organisational policies and procedures relevant to own role
Get the work done	1.2, 1.3, 2.1-2.5, 3.1-3.3, 4.1-4.3	Takes responsibility for planning and organising own workload, identifying ways of sequencing and combining elements for greater efficiency and uses analytical processes to decide on a course of action Plans, identifies and assembles resources required to complete tasks Responds to predictable problems and implements standard or logical solutions Understands purposes, specific functions and key features of common digital systems and tools and operates them effectively to create and save files in required format

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPPRP397 Transfer digital files	ICPPP397A Transfer digital files	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRP397 Transfer digital files

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

manipulate, delete and transfer digital files by using enterprise-determined protocols

locate and use information relevant to the task from a variety of information sources.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

name enterprise file format standards

explain differences in storage media, specifically:

optical

flash

magnetic

explain file transfer protocols for:

Universal Serial Bus (USB)

FireWire

Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Line (ADSL) wireless

email attachment

ethernet

outline file compression methods and explain the effect on file type required for enterprise processing

identify file formats and sizes, and their effect on Random Access Memory (RAM) requirements, storage, processing and transfer protocols

describe work health and safety (WHS) standards that relate to working for periods of time on computers.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the Pre-Press field of work and include access to special purpose tools, equipment and industry software packages.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPPRP411 Undertake a complex design brief

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to produce advanced graphic design from negotiated design briefs to production of complex finished artwork.

It applies to individuals who work in the graphic pre-press sector of the printing and graphic arts industry. They may take responsibility for production flow and provide leadership to others to ensure completion of the brief.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Pre-requisite Unit

ICPPRP311	Develop a detailed design concept.

Unit Sector

Pre-Press

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1 Negotiate a complex design contract	1.1 Communication with client results in development of a complex design brief, and client agreement is secured 1.2 Job analysis and research are undertaken to source cost-efficient design production procedures 1.3 Possible design options are analysed to meet optional printing processes and substrates 1.4 Individual design stages of brief are timed and costed to determine accurate parameters of cost 1.5 Quotation is prepared using accurate estimates to communicate fees required to undertake brief to client 1.6 Client approval to proceed is obtained
2 Plan design process	2.1 Appropriate production processes are planned and scheduled to meet brief specifications for the printing substrate 2.2 Materials are sourced and ordered to conform to brief requirements 2.3 Design team members are briefed and work roles allocated to keep design process organised and on time
3 Render a complex graphic design	3.1 Complex graphic design concept is rendered electronically or manually to conform to the brief 3.2 Adjustments or recommendations are made to enhance the design according to brief in consultation with client 3.3 Production processes of the design concept for colour, production run, substrates and costs are assessed according to requirements of the brief 3.4 Specifications for reproducing the finished artwork are annotated to define specified printing processes and substrates
4 Ensure feasibility of production	4.1 Type options are checked to meet specified printing processes and substrates 4.2 Reproduction feasibility of multiple colour vignettes is analysed to meet specified printing processes and substrates 4.3 Line and tone are combined and dot complexity of photography is analysed to meet specified printing processes and substrates 4.4 Feasibility of complex imposition and folds are calculated to meet specified printing processes and substrates 4.5 Foils and embossing are checked to meet specified printing processes and substrates
5 Solve technical problems	5.1 Materials and/or format are reviewed to ensure most suitable are selected to prevent design and production problems 5.2 Technical problems are resolved by re-design or amendment of the brief in consultation with client to acceptable standards
6 Ensure quality output	6.1 Standards for reproduction are documented to form a reference bank for the design process 6.2 Design solutions are filed and stored ready for retrieval according to enterprise procedures 6.3 Internal performance standards are evaluated to identify potential reforms for future enterprise procedures 6.4 Future actions are determined to incorporate accurate cost and time analyses into future briefs

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.2, 2.1, 2.2, 3.1-3.4	Recognises, interprets and evaluates information from range of sources to establish job requirements
Writing	1.1, 1.5, 1.6, 3.4, 5.2, 6.1	Writes technical/design briefs or complex work instructions based on client and stakeholder requirements
Oral Communication	1.1, 1.5, 1.6, 2.3, 3.2, 5.2	Uses appropriate vocabulary, including technical language relevant to role and context in team briefings Participates effectively in spoken interactions with clients to confirm or clarify understanding
Numeracy	1.4, 1.5, 4.4	Interprets and analyses a range of mathematical information used in familiar and routine tasks
Navigate the world of work	6.1-6.3	Follows organisational policies and procedures relevant to own role
Interact with others	1.1, 1.5, 1.6, 2.3, 3.2, 5.2	Uses appropriate communication protocols and conventions to confirm or clarify client requirements Shares knowledge, experience information and resources with others as an integral part of work relationships
Get the work done	1.1-1.3, 1.5, 2.1, 2.2, 3.1-3.4, 4.1-4.5, 5.1, 5.2, 6.1-6.4	Sequences and schedules complex activities, monitors implementation and manages relevant communication Plans, identifies and assembles resources required to complete tasks Analyses benefits, costs, risks and feasibility from a broad range of perspectives, and may think laterally to redesign aspects to address potential issues Responds to predictable problems and implements standard or logical solutions Draws on a broad understanding of context, and uses a combination of analysis and intuition to decide whether an idea is feasible Reflects on outcomes of decisions to identify changes to improve future outcomes

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPPRP411 Undertake a complex design brief	ICPPP411C Undertake a complex design brief	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRP411 Undertake a complex design brief

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

develop a clear design brief by agreement, and prepare a quotation

produce a complex design which meets reproduction and client requirements

produce finished art from complex design briefs that use different printing processes

provide evidence that each stage, from initial negotiation of the brief to final print production, has been carried out satisfactorily.

use computer hardware and software to produce concepts and pre-press artwork.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

describe how design requirements influence selection of THREE printing processes, operations or electronic media

explain how design factors influence cost of printed job

identify how printing substrates are selected and affects inks and printing substrates have on design

explain how colour and typeface selection impact design

explain how colour breakdown and sequence is managed in print to meet production and budget requirements

identify how substandard or unsuitable artwork from external sources affects print quality and how faulty artwork is rectified

describe common technical problems when a design is printed and how they are resolved, such as image on double page spread or finger marks on dark solids

describe procedures for special effects printing

explain how artwork is matched to customer’s specifications as outlined on the job sheet

list manuals, safety and other documentation relevant to this task, and where they are kept, and what sort of information is included

list other sources of available information.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the Pre-Press field of work and include access to special purpose tools, equipment and industry software packages.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPPRP421 Compose and evaluate typography

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to undertake advanced typesetting and typography involving contingencies and problem-solving beyond routine requirements.

It applies to individuals who compose type, and manage storage and retrieval in the graphic pre-press sector of the printing and graphic arts industry. The individual works independently and is able to cope with the unexpected challenges related to the job.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Pre-requisite Unit

ICPPRP221	Select and apply type

Unit Sector

Pre-Press

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1 Compose type	1.1 Type is composed according to job specifications 1.2 Allowance is made for type run-arounds, stipples, spot colour and complex shapes 1.3 Kerning is applied to type according to job specifications
2 Solve typographic technical problems	2.1 Capabilities of equipment to produce type are assessed correctly 2.2 Technical problems relevant to colour and reproduction of type are resolved by re-evaluation of typographic elements or amendment of the brief in consultation with client
3 Ensure quality of typographic output	3.1 Finished typography is checked for conformance to client specifications, including correct grammar and punctuation, and printing requirements 3.2 Quality of typographic reproduction is monitored to ensure required standards of output
4 Manage type system	4.1 Electronic type system is managed to facilitate storage, retrieval and outputting of data 4.2 Type software and fonts have current user licences that allow type to be used for the job 4.3 Type software and files are stored in appropriate locations for future access

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 1.3, 2.2, 3.1	Recognises and interprets text to establish job requirements from information contained within relevant procedures and specifications Checks texts for compliance with punctuation and grammatical conventions
Oral Communication	2.2	Participates effectively in spoken interactions with clients to confirm or clarify understanding
Numeracy	1.1	Interprets and analyses a range of mathematical information used in familiar and routine tasks
Navigate the world of work	4.2	Understands and complies with legislative requirements and follows organisational policies and procedures
Interact with others	2.2	Uses appropriate communication protocols and conventions to confirm or clarify client requirements
Get the work done	1.1-1.3, 2.1, 2.2, 3.1, 3.2, 4.1, 4.3	Takes responsibility for planning and organising own workload and assembles required resources Recognises and takes responsibility for addressing predictable, and some less predictable, problems in familiar work contexts Uses a range of digitally based technology and applications to access and filter data, extract, organise, integrate and share relevant information

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPPRP421 Compose and evaluate typography	ICPPP421C Compose and evaluate typography	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRP421 Compose and evaluate typography

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

produce and evaluate TWO complex typographic jobs

compose type using overlays, tints and kerning to meet specifications

resolve any technical problems to ensure type reproduction meets quality standards defined in job specifications

identify substrate for reproduction and the printing process in the typographic solutions

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

list typographic considerations that must be taken into account when making typeface selections for various printing processes or electronic media

describe effects that type alignment and justification have on a job

describe how dynamic design layouts affect type selection

define the difference between text point size and display point size

define basic classifications of text typefaces

list problems of using fine type in reverse print

describe typographic principles to consider when stippling type

describe colour considerations when using text type

list references utilised to evaluate if appropriate grammar and punctuation has been used in this job

list manuals, safety and other documentation relevant to this task, where they are kept, and the information in them

list other sources of available information.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the Pre-Press field of work and include access to special purpose tools, equipment and industry software packages.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPPRP422 Digitise complex images for reproduction

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to undertake advanced, complex colour scanning or digital capture.

It applies to individuals who work in the graphic pre-press sector of the printing and graphic arts industry. They are responsible for image production that meets the technical specifications of the job.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Pre-Press

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1 Mount and prepare original copy	1.1 Copy is mounted and positioned according to scanner/artwork specifications 1.2 Crops are marked to minimise use of disk space 1.3 Multiple copy units are correctly identified and assigned according to technical specifications
2 Set up and adjust scanner	2.1 Scanner is calibrated and program set according to job specifications 2.2 Colourcast and catch lights are assessed to ensure image is scanned according to job specifications 2.3 Adjustments are made to tone and colour correction requirements 2.4 End points are set 2.5 Scanner settings are utilised to achieve required results for varied print processes
3 Produce and evaluate complex images	3.1 Images are scanned using appropriate software commands and scanner controls 3.2 Scanned images are evaluated for colour and grey balance, tone reproduction, cast removal and end-point accuracy 3.3 Images are stored on file and displayed on a monitor or output device according to job specifications

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 1.3, 2.1, 2.2, 3.3	Recognises and interprets text to establish job requirements from information contained within relevant procedures and specifications
Get the work done	1.1-1.3, 2.1-2.5, 3.1-3.3	Takes responsibility for planning and organising own workload using analytical processes to decide a course of action, and assembles required resources Recognises and takes responsibility for addressing predictable, and some less predictable, problems in familiar work contexts Utilises a broad range of digital software features for specific purposes

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPPRP422 Digitise complex images for reproduction	ICPPP422C Digitise complex images for reproduction	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRP422 Digitise complex images for reproduction

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

safely use a medium to high-end full colour scanner (with full software capabilities) to reproduce at least TWO colour continuous tone originals with different contrast characteristics and ONE rescreen

provide high-quality colour, grey balance, tone reproduction and cast removal in scanned images

match technical aspects of scanned image to selected printing process and substrate

safely operate and monitor production on a flat-bed or drum scanner with full colour capabilities

find and use information relevant to the task from a variety of information sources.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

explain why scanner settings need to be varied to suit subsequent printing processes or electronic output

list factors that influence selection of highlight and shadow aim points

describe critical qualities of a copy that need evaluation prior to reproduction

explain main points to be considered when preparing a copy for scanning

describe how grey balance requirements are determined prior to applying colour correction

describe factors that determine requirement for colour correction

describe purpose of catchlight controls and how they are applied

describe considerations necessary to ensure predictability and repeatability at the output stage

list methods of storage and filing of images for retrieval

explain criteria used for evaluating scanned images

explain how common file formats relate to the scan saving process

identify other file formats available for saving scans and when they are used

identify manuals, safety and other documentation relevant to this task and where are they kept, and information included in them

identify other sources of available information.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the Pre-Press field of work and include access to:

a flat-bed or drum scanner with full colour capabilities

industry software packages.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPPRP423 Apply colour to design brief

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to effectively apply colour to enhance artwork and meet the requirements of a design brief.

It applies to individuals who work in the graphic pre-press sector of the printing and graphic arts industry.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Pre-Press

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1 Prepare colour options	1.1 Colour requirements of the brief are identified and clarified if necessary 1.2 Effectiveness of different colour schemes used previously by self and others are compared to influence current artwork 1.3 Colour tools are used to inform choice of colours 1.4 Overall colour composition is developed, taking into account target audience, balance and relationships
2 Apply colour to artwork	2.1 Colours are applied to artwork according to brief specifications 2.2 Colour and objects are appraised to ensure overall balance and emphasis, and adjustments made as required 2.3 Any halftones are matched with similar colours according to brief specifications 2.4 Overall artwork is appraised to ensure best possible colour options are used, given the brief and other elements of the artwork, and changes are made if necessary 2.5 Artwork samples that effectively meet the brief are produced 2.6 Artwork is saved and prepared for presentation to client

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 2.1, 2.3-2.5	Recognises and interprets information contained in a range of texts to establish job requirements
Oral Communication	1.1	Participates effectively in spoken interactions with others to confirm or clarify understanding
Numeracy	2.2	Uses percentages and proportions to adjust colour balance to achieve desired results
Get the work done	1.2-1.4, 2.1-2.6	Takes responsibility for planning and organising own workload and assembles required resources Recognises and takes responsibility for addressing predictable, and some less predictable, problems in familiar work contexts Evaluates outcomes of design decisions to identify improvement opportunities Utilises a broad range of features within applications optimising software functions for specific purposes

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPPRP423 Apply colour to design brief	ICPPP423C Apply colour to design brief	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRP423 Apply colour to design brief

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

produce artwork with a sophisticated use of colour demonstrating a fundamental understanding of colour theory

find and use information relevant to the task from a variety of information sources.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

explain reducing colour for compression process

describe influence of target audience responses to colour

describe colour attributes and their application to design briefs

identify browser safe colours

list colour models applied to design briefs.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the Pre-Press field of work and include access to special purpose tools, equipment and industry software packages.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPPRP430 Manage colour

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to manage colour in pre-press operations to ensure proofs, monitors and final products match.

It applies to individuals who work in the graphic pre-press sector of the printing and graphic arts industry.

They may also take responsibility for production flow and provide leadership and guidance to others with some limited responsibility for the output of others.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Pre-Press

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1 Identify colour requirements	1.1 Printing conditions are determined to identify colour management requirements 1.2 Printer’s requirements are established to guide provision and use of International Colour Consortium (ICC) colour profiles
2 Fingerprint press if printing in a controlled environment	2.1 Suitable test charts are selected 2.2 Test chart is printed with standard ink densities on a range of stock, including non-standard types such as yellow parchment 2.3 Densitometer and/or spectrophotometer is used to examine printed test charts and generate colour profile for that press and that stock
3 Calibrate digital proofing device	3.1 Proofer is linearised for required stock 3.2 Digital test file (eg. IT8 chart) is produced 3.3 Test file is printed on a proofing device and on the type of press that will be used to obtain a proof for both film and direct-to-plate technologies 3.4 Results are measured with a spectrophotometer 3.5 Results are used to generate output profile that allows for dot gain, Grey Component Replacement (GCR), Under Colour Removal (UCR), total gradients and black values
4 Create different monitor profiles using colour tuning package	4.1 A densitometer with screen suction device, if available, and/or appropriate software (OR) are used 4.2 Contrast (white level) and brightness are set 4.3 Red, Green, Blue (RGB) and Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Key/black (CMYK) and ICC profiles are applied 4.4 Jobs on screen are viewed through appropriate profiles
5 Calibrate scanner	5.1 Test chart (eg. IT8) is loaded 5.2 Scanner input profiling software is used to calibrate scanner (OR) 5.3 All settings are put to zero (0) 5.4 Test chart is scanned and digital proof is outputted 5.5 Spectrophotometer is used to measure proof and ICC profile is generated and loaded into scanning software
6 Calibrate digital camera	6.1 Standard lighting conditions are set up 6.2 ICC target is photographed and digital proof is outputted 6.3 Spectrophotometer is used to measure proof and ICC profile as generated 6.4 ICC profile is loaded into digital camera software
7 Carry out maintenance	7.1 Whole system is checked every two to three months 7.2 Monitor calibrations are checked monthly 7.3 Digital proofing devices are checked at least every time ink or paper stock is changed
8 Use colour profiles	8.1 Appropriate profiles are used to ensure colour on monitors, proofs and final product match as closely as possible 8.2 In a controlled environment press fingerprint for final output is used, otherwise digital proofer profile is used 8.3 Colour wedges are included in all files and outputs

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	2.3, 3.4, 3.5, 4.1, 4.2	Recognises and interprets text to establish job requirements from information contained within relevant procedures
Numeracy	2.3, 3.4, 3.5, 4.2, 5.2, 5.3, 5.5, 6.3, 7.1, 7.2	Uses technological devices to measure and record data and act on results/performance Interprets numerical measurements of specialised equipment
Interact with others	1.2	Uses appropriate communication protocols and conventions to confirm or clarify printer requirements
Get the work done	1.1, 1.2, 2.1-2.3, 3.1-3.5, 4.1-4.4, 5.1-5.5, 6.1-6.4, 7.1-7.3. 8.1-8.3	Takes responsibility for planning and organising own workload and assembles required resources Recognises and takes responsibility for addressing predictable, and some less predictable, problems in familiar work contexts Analyses results from technical instruments and test samples to diagnose problems or ensure satisfactory completion Understands purposes, specific functions and key features of complex digital systems and tools and analyses multiple sources of information

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPPRP430 Manage colour	ICPPP430C Manage colour	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRP430 Manage colour

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

manage colour in pre-press operations to ensure proofs, monitors and final products match

find and use information relevant to the task from a variety of information sources

produce a portfolio of THREE jobs that demonstrates and provides evidence of:

final product printed on various stocks and matching digital proofs on simulated stock

monitors are checked to ensure they have different loaded profiles that match the portfolio jobs

colour management system maintenance procedures.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

describe WHS issues encountered during colour management for pre-press

Light

describe how light intensity and colour temperature are measured

identify standard lighting conditions for matching colour

list effects different lighting conditions have on: using a monitor, proofing and printing

Colour theory

describe the difference between Red, Green, Blue (RGB) and Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Key/black (CMYK) colour

explain Under Colour Removal (UCR) theory and the effect it has on an image

explain Grey Component Replacement (GCR) theory and the effect it has on an image

Densitometry and spectrophotometry

explain densitometry and spectrophotometry measurement

describe use of International Colour Consortium (ICC) profiles and how they affect output

Scanning theory

list factors that influence selection of highlight and shadow aim points

explain why grey balance requirements are determined prior to applying colour correction, and how they are determined

list factors that determine colour correction requirements

Printing process

explain why different ink densities are used for different stocks

describe standard ink densities for different types of jobs

list affects different stocks have on colour reproduction

list affects different inks have on colour reproduction for proofing and final production

describe affects age and configuration of the press (eg. 2-colour vs. 4-colour) have on colour reproduction

define dot gain and how it affects colour

explain why final output is affected by the type of press and printing process used

describe strengths and limitations of different printing processes in colour reproduction

Problem solving

describe common colour management problems and appropriate solutions

explain when an ICC profile is included in a Portable Document Format (PDF) file

describe how using the wrong profile affects output

Information sources

identify sources of information about colour management.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the Pre-Press field of work and include access to special purpose tools, equipment and industry software packages.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPPRP435 Generate complex imposition

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to undertake complex electronic imposition.

It applies to individuals who work in the graphic pre-press sector of the printing and graphic arts industry. The individual takes responsibility for meeting job specifications with a minimum delay in workflow.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Pre-Press

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1 Impose images electronically	1.1 Industry designated software is applied to imposition of images according to job specifications 1.2 Imposition options are reviewed to ensure best fit for final substrate size 1.3 Trapping variables are taken into account 1.4 Particularities of press are considered
2 Solve technical problems of imposition	2.1 Technical problems relevant to imposition are considered in imposition scheme 2.2 A lay-down sheet is prepared according to cutting and creasing and folding requirements 2.3 Binding and finishing requirements are considered according to job specifications

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 2.3	Recognises and interprets text to establish job requirements from information contained in specifications
Numeracy	1.1, 1.2, 2.2	Interprets and analyses a range of mathematical information used in familiar and routine tasks
Get the work done	1.1-1.4, 2.1, 2.2	Takes responsibility for planning and organising own workload and assembles required resources Recognises and takes responsibility for addressing predictable, and some less predictable, problems in familiar work contexts Ensures technical and production issues are taken into account in decision-making Utilises a broad range of features within applications, optimising software functions for specific purposes

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPPRP435 Generate complex imposition	ICPPP435C Generate complex imposition	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRP435 Generate complex imposition

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

produce TWO complex impositions that best meet job specifications including identification of printing process, substrate surface and size

transfer the underlying skill of solving complex technical problems of imposition across the design and pre-press sectors to conform to brief specifications

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

identify using examples of how subsequent printing processes or electronic output affect imposition

Purpose of imposition marks principles of imposition

describe the difference between saddle stitch and perfect binding

explain the purpose of head margins

explain the difference between sheetwise and work and turn

Preparation of data

explain trapping requirements that apply to specific jobs

list considerations when saving a PostScript file

name requirements of an imposition set up document

Use of imposition program

describe installation of fold and cut marks

explain how creep settings are nominated

explain creep and bottling

Output techniques

explain the need for a server signature to be available to the output station

identify the technique used to verify pictures and fonts are available

explain the purpose of a mock-up

Information sources

identify manuals, safety and other documentation relevant to this task, their location and the information included in them

identify other sources of available information.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the Pre-Press field of work and include access to special purpose tools, equipment and industry software packages.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPPRP452 Output complex images direct to plate or press

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to output complex images direct to plate or direct to press.

It requires the individual to set up and calibrate the output device, align, adjust and manipulate files, and output error-free data to plate or press according to the press and job requirements.

It applies to individuals who produce complex images for both plate and digital printing press and who work in the printing or graphic arts industries. Individuals generally work within defined procedures, respond to clearly defined briefs, and work under limited supervision.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Pre-requisite Unit

ICPPRP352	Output complex images

Unit Sector

Pre-Press

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1 Set up and maintain output device	1.1 Output device is set up to manufacturer’s specifications and enterprise standards 1.2 Output device is calibrated for profiles, stock and ink types through use of calibration pages and densitometry 1.3 Calibration is evaluated regularly and necessary adjustments are made to output device
2 Adjust and manipulate images/files	2.1 Files on electronic media are evaluated as to suitability for output 2.2 Appropriate output resolution and data are set 2.3 Appropriate screen angle and dot type are set according to job specifications 2.4 Colour profiles appropriate to the job specifications are applied as required 2.5 Availability of high resolution images for Open Prepress Interface (OPI) process is assessed 2.6 Appropriate fonts are made available 2.7 All support files are included with the job
3 Output image	3.1 File is prepared for output to plate setter or digital printing press using industry designated software 3.2 If outputting to plate, plate material is selected according to press requirements and job specifications 3.3 If outputting to plate, plate size is selected according to press requirements 3.4 Image is positioned on plate/press with correct orientation for grip 3.5 Job queuing is managed to ensure efficient production 3.6 Images are outputted to appropriate medium 3.7 Output is processed according to job specifications
4 Evaluate result	4.1 Output is checked for correct dot size and screen angles 4.2 Image elements are checked according to original job specifications 4.3 Technical problems are solved and appropriate corrections are made 4.4 Job is prepared for next stage of production (eg. plates are processed)

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 2.3, 2.4, 3.2, 3.7, 4.2	Recognises and interprets text to establish job requirements from information contained within relevant procedures and specifications
Numeracy	1.2, 2.4, 3.3	Uses mathematical processes to calibrate equipment for file formats and outputs
Navigate the world of work	1.1	Understands and follows policies and procedures associated with own role
Get the work done	1.1-1.3, 2.1-2.7, 3.1-3.7, 4.1-4.4	Takes responsibility for planning and organising own workload and assembles required resources Recognises and takes responsibility for addressing predictable, and some less predictable, problems in familiar work contexts Utilises a broad range of features within applications, optimising software functions for specific purposes

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPPRP452 Output complex images direct to plate or press	ICPPP452C Output complex images direct to plate or press	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRP452 Output complex images direct to plate or press

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

output TWO complex images direct to plate or press, and proof and check to ensure press requirements and job specifications are met

find and use information relevant to the task from a variety of information sources.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

describe how printing process selection impacts output settings

outline methods/procedures available for calibrating an output device

list consequences of incorrect calibration

explain how differences in stock affect calibration

state how often calibration should be checked

explain how to rectify files that do not transfer correctly

list main points to be checked before sending a job to the Raster Image Processor (RIP)

explain the relationship between screen ruling and selection of image resolution

identify conditions that cause a variation from conventional screen angles

outline checks needed while preparing a job for Open Prepress Interface (OPI)

outline consequences for image quality if OPI files are not placed in their correct folders

explain what the low resolution file does in the OPI process

list main factors influencing processing speed of a job when being RIPped

explain how RIPping speed of a job can be increased

name setting changes required to the output device/software when outputting a Frequency Modulation (FM) screen

outline factors that influence selection of the screen micron rating

list main file formats and effects selection of a format has on processing of a job

identify manuals, safety and other documentation relevant to this task, where they are kept, and information included in them.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the Pre-Press field of work and include access to special purpose tools, equipment and industry software packages.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPPRP481 Design complex carton

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to design cartons for which no templates exist.

It requires the individual to design an original complex carton that meets job specifications and substrate characteristics, and then produce an accurate prototype.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Pre-Press

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1 Assess brief requirements	1.1 Discuss brief with client to ensure requirements are understood 1.2 Check that all relevant information is in the brief, i.e. end use, dimensions and product characteristics
2 Design carton to suit brief requirements	2.1 Determine appropriate carton style, size, material and calliper to meet the client brief 2.2 Use scanners or digitisers to import design material into computer program 2.3 Draw design using computer program 2.4 Set height, width and depth and gluing flap dimensions to meet requirements of the client brief 2.5 Requirements for knife setting, stripping and gluing in production are checked and position is designed so grain direction is correct and use of material is maximised
3 Use plotter to cut sample	3.1 Output device (e.g. plotter) is set up ready for downloading design 3.2 Cutting and creasing depths are set 3.3 Calliper of material is checked 3.4 Material is positioned correctly 3.5 Output device is operated safely according to manufacturer’s specifications and enterprise procedures 3.6 Routine machine maintenance is carried out
4 Assemble sample	4.1 Sample is cut by hand adopting safe practices 4.2 Cut sample is folded and glued by hand ensuring angles and construction are correct
5 Check and adjust design	5.1 Sample is checked for conformance to the client brief 5.2 Design is adjusted if necessary to meet job specifications
6 Output design	6.1 Design is saved ready for downloading to forme cutter 6.2 Design is outputted as keyline for artwork or as film, as required 6.3 Relevant paperwork is completed

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 1.2, 2.1, 2.4, 3.5, 5.1, 5.2	Recognises and interprets text to establish job requirements from information contained in procedures and specifications
Writing	6.3	Completes workplace forms accurately and legibly using correct technical and enterprise-specific vocabulary
Oral Communication	1.1	Participates effectively in spoken interactions with clients to confirm or clarify requirements
Numeracy	2.4, 2.5, 3.2, 3.3, 4.2	Calculates sizes, callipers and efficient use of materials
Navigate the world of work	3.5	Understands and complies with legislative requirements associated with own role
Interact with others	1.1	Uses appropriate communication protocols and conventions to confirm or clarify client requirements
Get the work done	2.1-2.5, 3.1-3.4, 3.6, 4.1, 4.2, 5.2, 6.1, 6.2	Takes responsibility for planning and organising own workload and assembles required resources Recognises and takes responsibility for addressing predictable, and some less predictable, problems in familiar work contexts Utilises a broad range of features within applications, optimising software functions for specific purposes

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPPRP481 Design complex carton	ICPPP481C Design complex carton	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRP481 Design complex carton

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

produce TWO different complex carton designs which accurately meet the client brief and substrate characteristics

find and use information relevant to the task from a variety of information sources.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

outline health and safety concerns when using computers, plotters and scanners

explain effect of board grain and calliper on carton design

outline correct use of a micrometer

explain how appropriate board for a product is selected

explain how scuff, heat and moisture resistance are determined

explain effect inks and sealants have on board characteristics and selection

name computer programs for carton design

outline checks to perform when programming a new design on the computer system

discuss uses and limitations of digitisers and scanners

outline checks to perform when using digitisers and scanners

identify types of products cartons are used for

explain how to determine if a design is appropriate for its end use

explain how refrigeration affects design and materials

list aspects of product sizing and tolerances that should be rechecked

explain how tolerances are set in a design

explain how stability in a display carton is ensured

explain how to determine appropriate strength, size and placing of glue lines and nips

identify carton designs suitable for machine packing

identify carton designs suitable for hand packing

outline constraints on design and positioning on the forme caused by knife making and production

explain how manufacturing requirements of cutting and gluing affect carton design

explain how appropriate angles and cornering of flaps are determined

list main features of, and differences between, different graphic design software programs that need to be considered when outputting carton designs

outline ways to ensure output is appropriate for the graphic design software used by the customer

identify manuals, safety and other documentation relevant to this task, where they are kept, and information included in them

identify other sources of available information.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the Pre-Press field of work and include access to special purpose tools, equipment and industry software packages.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPPRP484 Set up and operate automated workflow

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to set up and operate an automated workflow to produce a print-ready file.

It requires the individual to set up and operate an automated workflow to produce a print-ready file.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Pre-Press

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1 Check job files and perform pre-flight	1.1 All details required for the job are checked and confirmed against job specifications 1.2 Files are loaded and all file resources are checked to determine if file is ready for production 1.3 File format is identified and best method of submission is chosen 1.4 Missing fonts are, where available, embedded and image data optimised, cropped and/or compressed, if necessary 1.5 Hairlines are thickened to a minimum width, if necessary 1.6 Layout images are assigned as high resolution data and down sampled 1.7 Thumbnails are generated for viewing pages
2 Create portable job ticket format processors	2.1 Parameters for individual elements or steps for all phases of the job are defined 2.2 All job phases are sequenced according to workflow and enterprise processes 2.3 If necessary, access levels are set for operators 2.4 Workflow definition is reviewed and saved
3 Transform colours	3.1 Assigned colour libraries are checked for consistency and colour names are converted if inconsistency is present 3.2 Spot colours are converted to process colours where necessary 3.3 Output colours are matched to colours input using selected International Colour Consortium (ICC) profile 3.4 Colours are set for final proof output
4 Set trapping parameters	4.1 Portable job ticket format trapping settings are used and additional trapping requirements added where appropriate 4.2 Traps are viewed and checked in file 4.3 If necessary traps are edited, removed or replaced 4.4 An appropriate separation-capable proof is viewed to ensure separations will output as expected
5 Proof pages	5.1 Imposition plan is assigned to the job 5.2 Form proof from plotter is printed containing all printer marks, and signature marks are viewed for final checking 5.3 Pages are outputted on a page proofer and checked 5.4 Any required changes are made and proof is approved by client
6 Prepare for output	6.1 Jobs to be imaged are outputted to film or plate 6.2 CIP3/CIP4 data is captured and dealt with according to enterprise procedures 6.3 Information for presetting of cutting and folding machines is generated if required and plug-ins are available 6.4 Print Production Format files are exported to or saved for the print console and outputted for plate or film imaging 6.5 Job data is saved and archived as required 6.6 Documentation is signed-off according to enterprise procedures

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 2.4, 5.2, 5.3	Recognises and interprets text to establish job requirements from information contained within relevant procedures and specifications Checks texts for accuracy
Writing	2.1, 2.4, 6.6	Completes workplace documents accurately and legibly using correct technical and enterprise-specific vocabulary
Oral Communication	5.4	Participates effectively in spoken interactions with clients to confirm or clarify understanding
Navigate the world of work	2.2, 6.2, 6.5, 6.6	Follows organisational policies and procedures relevant to own role
Interact with others	5.4	Uses appropriate communication protocols and conventions to gain client approval
Get the work done	1.2-1.7, 2.1, 2.2, 2.4, 3.1-3.4, 4.1-4.4, 5.1-5.4, 6.1-6.5	Takes responsibility for planning and organising own workload and assembles required resources Recognises and takes responsibility for addressing predictable, and some less predictable, problems in familiar work contexts Utilises a broad range of features within applications, optimising software functions for specific purposes

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPPRP484 Set up and operate automated workflow	ICPPP484C Set up and operate automated workflow	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRP484 Set up and operate automated workflow

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

set up and operate an automated workflow to produce TWO different print-ready files according to the client brief and performance criteria

find and use information relevant to the task from a variety of information sources.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

list and describe the file resources to check during pre-flight

explain why different submission methods would be chosen for different file formats

explain why and when it might be important to change hairline effects

outline the enterprise process for sequencing all phases of a job

outline the importance of the colour space

define trapping

explain how to check that separations will output correctly

outline the enterprise procedures for dealing with CIP3/CIP4 data.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the Pre-Press field of work and include access to special purpose tools, equipment and industry software packages.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPPRP485 Develop a digital data template

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to document content and structure for digital print equipment.

It requires the individual to identify data requirements, content and structure of a digital template for variable digital printing.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Pre-requisite Unit

ICPPRP385	Operate a database for digital printing.

Unit Sector

Pre-Press

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1 Identify content requirements	1.1 Data purpose is identified from job requirements and clarified with client 1.2 Data file format and type of database are identified 1.3 Layout is determined from job requirements and confirmed with client 1.4 Static and variable areas are identified according to job specifications 1.5 Accuracy of data is confirmed and signed off as such by client 1.6 Requirement for additional software integration is determined, such as postal software
2 Develop template	2.1 Fields are created and named consistently to reduce errors 2.2 Copy holes and data are marked-up to match job specifications 2.3 Report for the printer is developed which identifies relevant data assigned to each copy hole according to job specifications and business rules 2.4 Copy holes are assigned and related information documented for printer to understand the connection to the data 2.5 Correct number of fields is available for the job 2.6 Template is signed off as suitable by client
3 Finalise and test template	3.1 Business rules are tested and if possible a soft proof is reviewed 3.2 Final document is viewed with a markup language parser 3.3 Spot colours are converted to process colours where necessary 3.4 Template is well-formed, error-free and meets client needs 3.5 Template is extensible to meet future client needs 3.6 Template is finalised and made ready to send to the press

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 1.3, 1.4, 2.2, 2.3	Recognises and interprets text to establish job requirements from information contained within relevant procedures and specifications
Writing	2.1, 2.3, 2.4	Completes workplace documents accurately and legibly using correct technical and enterprise-specific vocabulary
Oral Communication	1.1, 1.3, 1.5, 2.6	Participates effectively in spoken interactions with clients to confirm or clarify understanding of requirements
Numeracy	2.5	Performs calculations to determine correct number of fields for task
Navigate the world of work	2.3	Recognises and follows organisational policies and associated with own role
Interact with others	1.1, 1.3, 1.5, 2.6	Uses appropriate communication protocols and conventions to clarify requirements or gain client approval
Get the work done	1.2, 1.5, 1.6, 2.1, 2.2, 2.4, 2.5, 3.1-3.3, 3.5, 3.6	Takes responsibility for planning and organising own workload and assembles required resources Recognises and takes responsibility for addressing predictable, and some less predictable problems in familiar work contexts Uses digital tools to access and organise complex data and analyse multiple sources of information

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPPRP485 Develop a digital data template	ICPPP485C Develop a digital data template	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRP485 Develop a digital data template

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

identify correct data requirements and develop and mark up the structure of a digital template for variable digital printing that is error-free in the soft proof and meets client requirements, job specifications and performance criteria

find and use information relevant to the task from a variety of information sources.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

explain Standard Generalised Markup Language (SGML) and why it is important

explain the relationship of SGML to Extensible Markup Language (XML) and Personalised Print Markup Language (PPML)

outline the difference between SGML, PPML and XML and the use of SGML
over XML

outline the difference between Cascading Style Sheets (CSS) and Extensible Stylesheet Language XSL

state the intended purpose of XSL

identify ways an extensible markup language can be used over HyperText Markup Language (HTML), and ways to use both with one set of data

outline purposes of meta data within markup language documents

explain why PRISM is important for content publishing

explain the PPML relationship to XML.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the Pre-Press field of work and include access to special purpose tools, equipment and industry software packages.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPPRP494 Develop document content and structure

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to develop the content meaning and document structure for markup for web page or electronic publishing purposes.

It requires the individual to create documents that have structure, content, readability and design appropriate for an online or print audience.

It applies to individuals who work in the printing and graphic arts industries who are responsible for creating and delivering a document/information to readers as electronic output or for-print format, and who work under limited supervision.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Pre-requisite Unit

ICPPRP396	Generate high-end PDF files

Unit Sector

Pre-Press

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1 Identify document requirements	1.1 Content meaning and information structure are developed based on document intent, final media and intended audiences 1.2 Information is identified and grouped according to the job brief 1.3 Target audience requirements and expectations are determined according to the brief
2 Plan content structure	2.1 Information is arranged in related topics and logical sequence 2.2 Content meaning is tested by simulating generation of new coherent documents based on the original content 2.3 A hierarchy of information is developed with data checked to confirm hierarchy sequence
3 Develop information architecture	3.1 An information hierarchy is prepared, catering for physical storage of files 3.2 Search and retrieval mechanisms are prepared for content discovery 3.3 Information hierarchy is designed, catering for navigation and access between files or groups of content
4 Develop navigation system	4.1 High level, local and document navigational systems are built based on information architecture 4.2 Design is consistent, intuitive and with a logical labelling system to provide access to various levels and type of content 4.3 Labels and indexes are clear, consistent, coherent and relatively intuitive to enable target audience access
5 Design information layout	5.1 Templates for textual and graphic elements are developed to facilitate consistent and uniform layout and visual design (technology) 5.2 An extensible template is linked to the document (technology)
6 Test document	6.1 Suite of prototypes for all document levels is developed 6.2 Rigour of information architecture at all levels is tested 6.3 Correct functioning and intuitive use of navigational features are tested for all levels 6.4 Visual design and layout are tested at all levels against standard onscreen design principles 6.5 Levels of accessibility for people with disabilities are deemed acceptable

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.2, 1.3, 2.1, 2.3, 3.1-3.3, 4.3, 6.4	Recognises and interprets text to establish job requirements from information contained within relevant procedures, specifications and reference material
Navigate the world of work	6.4, 6.5	Recognises and meets organisational and industry requirements associated with own role
Get the work done	1.2, 2.1-2.3, 3.1-3.3, 4.1-4.3, 5.1, 5.2, 6.1-6.5	Takes responsibility for planning and organising own workload using analytical processes to decide on a course of action Considers and assembles resources required Recognises and takes responsibility for addressing predictable, and some less predictable, problems in familiar work contexts Utilises a broad range of features within applications, optimising software and computer functions for specific purposes

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPPRP494 Develop document content and structure	ICPPP494C Develop document content and structure	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPPRP494 Develop document content and structure

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

create TWO different documents which include evidence of information structures for markup, web pages or long document assembly (documents must be intuitive for target audience navigation, and successfully tested)

find and use information relevant to the task from a variety of information sources.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

identify the difference between a data store document and a document layout application

name meta languages used for multiple audiences

explain metadata, and in particular Publishing Requirements for Industry Standard Metadata (PRISM)

explain personalised Print Markup Language (PPML)

outline principles of document navigation

explain content conversion and content management

identify and explain data mapping and content models.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the Pre-Press field of work and include access to special purpose tools, equipment and industry software packages.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPSCP211 Reclaim screen automatically

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to safely reclaim screens using automatic cleaning equipment.

It applies to individuals working under direct supervision and performing mainly routine tasks such as monitoring machinery operations and carrying out routine maintenance.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Screen printing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1 Select and prepare chemicals	1.1 Ink and stencil type are correctly identified and screen is assessed for suitability to be reclaimed 1.2 Screen reclamation chemicals are selected and prepared according to manufacturer or supplier specifications 1.3 Appropriate safety gear is selected and worn according to manufacturer or supplier specifications and work health and safety (WHS) requirements
2 Maintain and adjust equipment	2.1 Automatic cleaning equipment is inspected and routine user maintenance is carried out according to manufacturer or supplier specifications and enterprise procedures 2.2 Automatic cleaning equipment is adjusted to suit ink system, mesh type and frame size
3 Wash screen	3.1 Screens are washed using pressure gun or automatic machine in suitably ventilated area with required extraction system 3.2 Stains and hazes are removed using appropriate chemicals according to manufacturer or supplier specifications and WHS requirements 3.3 Screens are checked for damage and any defects are reported and/or rectified according to enterprise procedures
4 Store screen	4.1 Screens are correctly identified and labelled 4.2 Screens are stored in clean, dry environment according to manufacturer or supplier specifications
5 Carry out routine maintenance	5.1 Cleaning equipment is lubricated, cleaned and adjusted according to manufacturer or supplier specifications 5.2 Faults are identified, reported and/or rectified according to manufacturer or supplier specifications

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.2, 1.3, 2.1, 3.2, 4.2, 5.1, 5.2	Recognises and interprets textual information to follow and adhere to requirements
Writing	3.3, 4.1, 5.2	Completes required documentation accurately using correct technical and enterprise language
Oral Communication	3.3, 5.2	Articulates clearly using specific and factual information Uses listening and questioning techniques to clarify and confirm understanding
Numeracy	1.2, 2.2, 3.2, 5.1	Recognises numerical information and uses mathematical formulae to calculate measurements and adjustments
Navigate the world of work	1.2, 1.3, 2.1, 3.1-3.3, 4.2, 5.1, 5.2	Takes personal responsibility for adherence to legal and regulatory requirements with specific reference to safety Complies with organisational policies and procedures relevant to own role
Get the work done	1.1-1.3, 2.1, 2.2, 3.2, 3.3, 4.1, 5.2	Follows clearly defined instructions and sequencing and monitors own progress for the task Responds to predictable problems and implements standard or logical solutions Takes responsibility for routine low-impact decisions within familiar situations Understands the purpose and specific functions of some common digital tools used in work contexts

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPSCP211 Reclaim screen automatically	ICPSP211C Reclaim screen automatically	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPSCP211 Reclaim screen automatically

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

use automatic cleaning equipment to reclaim THREE screens, with various grades of meshes and ink types, according to manufacturer guidelines and enterprise procedures, including:

selecting and using chemicals and associated safety gear

checking and adjusting automatic cleaning equipment prior to use

washing and checking screens for defects

storing screens

maintain automatic cleaning equipment, including identifying faults and taking action according to manufacturer guidelines.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

identify the types of stencil that are used

explain the significance of mesh counts

explain the handling technique used for frames with various mesh counts

describe the personal protective equipment items used for screen reclamation

identify the health and safety concerns associated with chemical handling

explain why various ink types are treated differently when reclaiming

determine what pollution controls are in operation with regards to environmental issues

explain where to find information on the application of each chemical

list the ventilation and extraction systems that should be in operation

outline the maintenance procedures that are necessary for equipment or machinery used

describe the properties of different reclamation chemicals

describe how chemicals are applied for stencil removal

list the chemicals that are used to remove stains or haze

explain the method used to identify the reclamation status of screens

outline the key points to consider when storing reclaimed screens

identify machine manuals, safety and other documentation relevant to this task and for each one:

state its location

explain what type of information is included.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the screen printing field of work and include access to:

chemicals and lubricants

appropriate safety gear

automatic cleaning equipment

screens.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPSCP215 Prepare screen

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to safely select and prepare screens for printing using appropriate equipment and procedures.

It applies to individuals working under direct supervision and performing mainly routine tasks.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Screen printing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1 Select frame	1.1 Frame is selected according to job specifications 1.2 Quality, type and finish of frame are specified
2 Prepare frame	2.1 Frame surface is appropriately prepared free of imperfections to receive mesh 2.2 Tools and equipment used in frame preparation are suitable to achieve standard indicated in job specifications
3 Select mesh	3.1 Required mesh type is selected according to job specifications 3.2 Imperfections and flaws are identified and appropriate remedial action is taken 3.3 Mesh is measured and cut from bulk supply to meet screen specifications with minimum wastage
4 Stretch and fix mesh	4.1 Mesh is positioned in tensioning equipment at correct angle according to job specifications 4.2 Tension is set and applied according to job specifications 4.3 Tension is checked according to manufacturer or supplier specifications 4.4 Mesh is pre-stretched prior to fixing and mesh is fixed to frame according to frame construction requirements 4.5 Chemicals are mixed for application according to manufacturer specifications 4.6 Screen is removed from apparatus after appropriate curing
5 Convert mesh	5.1 Chemicals are selected for conversion of mesh according to manufacturer or supplier specifications 5.2 Chemicals are applied to effect conversion according to manufacturer or supplier specifications and to work health and safety (WHS) requirements
6 Store screen	6.1 Screens are identified and labelled 6.2 Screens are stored in safe, clean and dry environment in subdued light

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 2.2, 3.1, 4.1-4.5, 5.1, 6.1	Recognises and interprets textual information to determine and adhere to requirements
Writing	1.2, 6.1	Uses clear, specific and industry related terminology to legibly and correctly complete workplace documentation
Numeracy	3.3, 4.1, 4.5	Uses mathematical formulae to calculate measurements, ratios, scale and angles
Navigate the world of work	5.2, 6.2	Takes some personal responsibility for adherence to legal and regulatory requirements with specific reference to safety Complies with all organisational policies and procedures relevant to own role
Get the work done	1.1, 2.1, 2.2, 3.1-3.3, 4.2-4.4, 4.6, 5.1, 6.1, 6.2	Follows clearly defined instructions and sequencing and monitors own progress for the task Responds to predictable problems and implements standard or logical solutions Takes responsibility for routine low-impact decisions within familiar situations Understands the purpose and some specific functions of common digital tools used in work contexts

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPSCP215 Prepare screen	ICPSP215C Prepare screen	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPSCP215 Prepare screen

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

select TWO different screen frame types, either fixed or microchase, stretch and fix mesh as appropriate and prepare screen for stencil application, according to manufacturer and job specifications, enterprise procedures and work health and safety (WHS) requirements.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

explain why a frame is needed and how a particular frame is selected

list the tools needed to prepare the frame surface

describe what to look for to achieve a good surface for mesh adhesion

list different mesh types and explain what type of job each mesh type would be suited to

describe common flaws or imperfections in screen mesh, how to identify them and what to do about them

explain techniques used to minimise wastage when cutting mesh

explain the position that the mesh is placed in before tensioning

explain the methods of pre-stretching the mesh prior to securing it

describe how tension is measured

describe the various methods of fixing mesh to frame

identify the pre-tensioning techniques that can be used

describe the methods for converting screen mesh chemically and mechanically

explain the method used to identify the mesh on a screen

describe the ideal conditions for storing screens

identify manuals, safety and other documentation relevant to this task, where they are kept and the information included in these documents.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the screen printing field of work and include access to:

chemicals

tools and equipment

mesh

frames.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPSCP221 Prepare substrate

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to select and safely prepare and store a wide range of substrates for screen printing.

It applies to individuals working under direct supervision and performing mainly routine tasks.

In some cases, there may be an overlap with ICPCBF221 Set up and produce basic guillotined product. If substrate preparation is mostly guillotining, then ICPCBF221 Set up and produce basic guillotined product should be delivered.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Screen printing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1 Select substrate	1.1 Substrates are selected according to job specifications 1.2 Substrates selected must be of suitable form and quality according to job specifications and end use of product
2 Process substrate	2.1 Processing of substrate is carried out according to job specifications 2.2 Necessary preventive action is taken to avoid wastage and to ensure best yield with respect to grain direction and type of substrate selected 2.3 User maintenance requirements are identified and implemented according to manufacturer or supplier instructions 2.4 Substrate is inspected and print capability assessed, including need for any special preparation requirements 2.5 Substrate is suitably pre-treated, where required 2.6 Substrate is appropriately labelled according to job specifications
3 Store and handle substrate	3.1 Materials are safely handled according to manufacturer or supplier specifications 3.2 Materials and substrate are appropriately handled and stored according to manufacturer or supplier specifications to prevent damage and hazards to personnel 3.3 Offcuts of materials are disposed of according to regulatory requirements and enterprise procedures

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 1.2, 2.1, 2.3, 2.6, 3.1-3.3	Recognises and evaluates textual information to determine and adhere to requirements
Writing	2.6	Completes required details legibly and accurately for reference details
Numeracy	1.1, 3.2	Recognises basic numerical data to determine volumes and dimensions of required substrate
Navigate the world of work	3.1-3.3	Takes personal responsibility for adherence to legal and regulatory requirements with specific reference to safety Complies with all organisational policies and procedures relevant to own role
Get the work done	1.1, 1.2, 2.2-2.5, 3.3	Follows clearly defined instructions and sequencing and monitors own progress for the task Responds to predictable problems and implements standard or logical solutions Takes responsibility for routine low-impact decisions within familiar situations Understands the purpose and some specific functions of common digital tools used in work contexts

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPSCP221 Prepare substrate	ICPSP221C Prepare substrate	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPSCP221 Prepare substrate

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

select, process and store TWO substrates according to manufacturer specifications, job specifications and enterprise procedures.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

describe the types of jobs that would suit different grades and thicknesses of substrate

explain how to identify defects and irregularities in the substrate

explain the pre-treatment of the surface required before printing

describe the tests that should be undertaken to determine the suitability of the substrate for printing

explain how to cut substrate to minimise wastage

identify the equipment used for preparing substrate

describe how to prepare substrate and the quality of preparation monitoring

explain the handling and storage procedures to prevent damage to substrate prior to printing

explain the correct procedures for the disposal of offcuts of substrate

identify manuals, safety information and other documentation relevant to this task, where they are located and the information included in these documents.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the screen printing field of work and include access to substrates.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPSCP222 Prepare and cut screen print substrate

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to safely select, inspect and cut substrate according to job specifications.

It applies to individuals working in the printing and graphic arts industry under direct supervision and performing mainly routine tasks such as matching materials with the job specifications and checking and monitoring output.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Screen printing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1 Prepare substrate	1.1 Substrates selected are of suitable quality according to job specifications and end use of product 1.2 Print capability of substrates is inspected and assessed, including need for any special preparation requirements 1.3 Preventive action is taken to avoid wastage and to ensure best yield with respect to grain direction and type of substrate selected 1.4 Substrate is pre-treated appropriately, where required
2 Cut substrate	2.1 Set-up is carried out correctly in minimum time with minimum wastage 2.2 Grip and lay edges of sheet are identified 2.3 Knives are checked for appropriate sharpness 2.4 Cutting sticks are replaced when necessary 2.5 Guillotine is manually set up and adjusted according to job specifications 2.6 Clamping pressures are set up and adjusted according to job specifications 2.7 Problems in cutting (guillotining) machine operation are identified and reported according to enterprise procedures 2.8 Quality of cuts is checked to ensure quality standards are met

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 2.5-2.7	Interprets textual information from relevant sources to identify equipment suitability and adhere to procedures and standards
Writing	2.7	Uses clear and specialised language to accurately document machinery faults
Numeracy	1.1, 2.5, 2.6	Uses simple mathematical equations to calculate measurements and make required adjustments to equipment and settings
Navigate the world of work	2.7	Takes some personal responsibility for adherence to organisational policies and procedures relevant to own role
Get the work done	1.1-1.4, 2.1-2.8	Follows clearly defined instructions and sequencing, and monitors own progress for the task Responds to predictable problems and implements standard or logical solutions Takes responsibility for routine low-impact decisions within familiar situations Understands the purpose and specific functions of some common digital tools used in work contexts

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPSCP222 Prepare and cut screen print substrate	ICPSP222C Prepare and cut screen print substrate	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPSCP222 Prepare and cut screen print substrate

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

inspect and cut substrates according to job specifications.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

explain the typical information contained in job specifications

describe the process for checking guillotine knives

outline the process for guillotine set-up and operation

describe safe guillotine handling and operation practices

explain the proper stacking and storage of processed substrate.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the screen printing field of work and include access to guillotining machines and substrates.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPSCP233 Manually prepare direct emulsion stencil

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to safely select, prepare and store direct emulsion stencils using manual techniques.

It applies to individuals working under direct supervision and performing mainly routine tasks such as monitoring equipment and ensuring set processes are followed.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Screen printing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1 Prepare work area and equipment	1.1 Work area is made clean and functional prior to commencement of work 1.2 All equipment is inspected to ensure it is functional and, where necessary, appropriate remedial action is taken prior to commencement of work 1.3 Appropriate coating trough is selected, ensuring it is free of nicks and burrs
2 Prepare screen	2.1 Screen is selected according to job specifications 2.2 Chemicals are applied and removed according to work health and safety (WHS) requirements and manufacturer or supplier specifications 2.3 Tension of screen mesh is checked for suitability according to job specifications
3 Select emulsion	3.1 Emulsion is selected according to requirements for ink type, print resolution, substrate, mesh type and machine type 3.2 Emulsion is checked for expiry date and appropriate action taken 3.3 Emulsion is prepared according to WHS requirements and manufacturer or supplier specifications 3.4 Emulsion is applied and dried according to manufacturer or supplier specifications
4 Process coated screen	4.1 Image films are appropriately positioned onto prepared screen and positioned in cleaned, prepared and appropriate exposure device 4.2 Light source is positioned according to manufacturer or supplier specifications 4.3 Exposure is calculated and stencil exposed according to manufacturer or supplier specifications 4.4 Exposed screen is removed from vacuum frame exposure device 4.5 Exposed screen is washed out after positive removal according to WHS requirements and manufacturer or supplier specifications 4.6 Processed stencil or screen is inspected for flaws and scum
5 Dry stencil	5.1 Processed stencil is dried according to manufacturer or supplier specifications 5.2 Backing sheet is carefully removed and stencil checked for full adhesion
6 Block out screen	6.1 Backing sheet is carefully removed and stencil checked for full adhesion 6.2 Stencil is inspected for flaws, scum and orientation 6.3 Pinholes are spotted out with suitable filler and taped according to ink type and job specifications
7 Store screen	7.1 Prepared screen is labelled according to enterprise procedures 7.2 Prepared screen is stored in clean, dry environment according to manufacturer or supplier specifications

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	2.1-2.3, 3.2-3.4, 4.2, 4.3, 4.5, 5.1, 6.3, 7.2	Recognises and evaluates textual information to determine and adhere to requirements
Writing	7.1	Completes required details legibly and accurately for reference details
Numeracy	2.3, 3.2, 4.3	Recognises basic numerical data and calculates whole numbers and decimals for exposure time and measurements
Navigate the world of work	2.2, 3.3, 4.5, 7.1, 7.2	Takes personal responsibility for adherence to organisational policies and procedures relevant to own role
Get the work done	1.1-1.3, 2.1-2.3, 3.1-3.3, 4.1-4.4, 4.6, 5.2, 6.1-6.3	Follows clearly defined instructions and sequencing and monitors own progress for the task Responds to predictable problems and implements standard or logical solutions Takes responsibility for routine low-impact decisions within familiar situations Understands the purpose and some specific functions of some common digital tools used in work contexts

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPSCP233 Manually prepare direct emulsion stencil	ICPSP233C Manually prepare direct emulsion stencil	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPSCP233 Manually prepare direct emulsion stencil

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

prepare TWO different direct screens and TWO direct emulsion stencils using manual coating and exposure techniques according to manufacturer and job specifications, enterprise procedures and work health and safety (WHS) requirements.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

explain the significance of the mesh count

explain the effect that screen tension has on emulsion coating

explain how to determine the emulsion suitable for the job

explain the significance of good housekeeping in the preparation of the work area and equipment

describe the effect that the coating trough edge has on emulsion coating

explain the requirements for choosing emulsion for a particular job

explain the reasons for checking the expiry date of emulsions

determine the maximum temperature at which the emulsion can be dried

explain the need to have good vacuum pressure in the vacuum frame

outline the process for selecting the light source position

explain the formula used to calculate exposure time

explain the effects of overexposure and underexposure

explain how the optimum exposure time is determined

describe the effect on exposure that a white or coloured mesh has

determine how the screen is washed out properly

identify the characteristics that determine a good and bad stencil

explain why the screen is dried before blocking out

explain what determines the type of filler used for blocking out

explain the reasons for spotting pinholes and taping the screen

determine the WHS requirements for UV exposure light

explain the means by which stored screens are able to be identified at a later date

identify required manuals, safety and other documentation and briefly outline the relevant information in each source.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the screen printing field of work and include access to chemicals and relevant equipment.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPSCP235 Prepare stencil using photographic indirect method

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to safely select, prepare, process and store stencils using the photographic indirect method.

It applies to individuals working under direct supervision and performing mainly routine tasks.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Screen printing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1 Prepare work area	1.1 Work area is made clean and functional prior to commencement of work 1.2 All equipment, tools and materials are inspected to ensure they are functional and, where necessary, appropriate remedial action is taken prior to commencement of work 1.3 Activating chemicals are prepared according to work health and safety (WHS) requirements and manufacturer or supplier specifications
2 Prepare screen	2.1 Screen is selected according to job specifications 2.2 Chemicals are applied and removed according to WHS requirements and manufacturer or supplier specifications 2.3 Tension of screen mesh is checked for suitability according to job specifications
3 Select indirect stencil material	3.1 Stencil material is selected according to requirements for ink type, print resolution, substrate and machine type 3.2 Stencil material is checked for faults and expiry date, and suitable action is taken
4 Process material	4.1 Selected material is cut to size according to job specifications with minimisation of waste 4.2 Material is placed in vacuum frame with positive positioned and intimate vacuum achieved according to manufacturer or supplier and job specifications 4.3 Exposure is calculated and stencil is exposed according to manufacturer or supplier specifications 4.4 Light source is positioned according to manufacturer or supplier specifications 4.5 Exposed stencil is removed from vacuum frame and treated with necessary activator, if required, according to WHS requirements and manufacturer or supplier specifications 4.6 Activated stencil is washed according to WHS requirements and manufacturer or supplier specifications 4.7 Exposed stencil is inspected for processing flaws
5 Apply stencil to screen	5.1 Prepared screen is re-wet and inspected for cleanliness and dust 5.2 Stencil is positioned and adhered accurately according to manufacturer or supplier specifications
6 Dry stencil	6.1 Processed stencil is dried according to manufacturer or supplier specifications 6.2 Backing sheet is carefully removed and stencil is checked for full adhesion
7 Block out screen	7.1 Stencil is inspected for flaws, scum and orientation 7.2 Non-image areas of prepared screen are blocked out with filler suitable for ink type and according to job specifications 7.3 Pinholes are spotted out with suitable filler and faulty or damaged images are retouched and are taped according to ink type and job specifications
8 Store screen	8.1 Prepared screen is labelled according to enterprise procedures 8.2 Prepared screen is stored in clean, dry environment according to manufacturer or supplier specifications

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.3, 2.1-2.3, 3.1, 3.2, 4.1-4.4, 5.2, 6.1, 7.2, 7.3, 8.1, 8.2	Interprets textual information from relevant sources to identify and adhere to procedures and standards
Writing	8.1	Completes required details legibly and accurately for future reference
Numeracy	1.3, 2.2, 2.3, 4.1, 4.3	Uses mathematical formulae to calculate measurements and adjust equipment and settings
Navigate the world of work	1.3, 2.2, 4.5, 4.6, 8.1	Takes personal responsibility for adherence to legal and regulatory requirements with specific reference to safety Complies with organisational policies and procedures relevant to own role
Get the work done	1.1, 1.2, 2.1, 2.3, 3.1, 3.2, 4.1, 4.2, 4.4-4.7, 5.1, 5.2, 6.1, 6.2, 7.1-7.3	Follows clearly defined instructions and sequencing and monitors own progress for the task Responds to predictable problems and implements standard or logical solutions Takes responsibility for routine low-impact decisions within familiar situations Understands the purpose and some specific functions of common digital tools used in work contexts

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPSCP235 Prepare stencil using photographic indirect method	ICPSP235C Prepare stencil using photographic indirect method	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPSCP235 Prepare stencil using photographic indirect method

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

correctly prepare TWO different indirect screens and TWO photographic indirect stencils using manual or mechanical techniques according to manufacturer and job specifications, enterprise procedures and work health and safety (WHS) requirements.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

explain the significance of mesh count

explain why the screen must be tensioned correctly

identify the chemicals that are used for pre-treating and degreasing

describe the method of preparing the activator according to WHS standards

explain the importance of a dust-free work area when working with indirect stencils

outline the inspection process of equipment to ensure good function

list the characteristics of indirect stencils relative to ink type, print resolution and substrate

explain the selection of indirect stencil material

identify the common faults associated with indirect film

explain the importance of vacuum pressure prior to exposing the stencil

explain the position of the light source and the calculation of exposure time

list the effects of overexposure and underexposure

describe the methods of activating film

determine the water temperature required for washing indirect stencils

explain how to recognise and rectify flaws

describe the main considerations before applying the stencil to the screen

describe the method of positioning and adhering the stencil to the screen

explain the process of drying the stencil and removing the backing sheet

describe the method of rectifying flaws and scum in the stencil

explain what determines the type of filler used for blocking out

explain why pinholes are spotted and the screen taped

explain by what means this screen is able to be identified at a later date

identify required manuals, safety and other documentation and briefly outline the relevant information in each source.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the screen printing field of work and include access to cleaning chemicals and relevant equipment.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPSCP270 Manually prepare and produce screen prints

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to manually prepare and produce screen prints using manual screening techniques for long print runs that involve a production process.

It applies to individuals working under direct supervision and performing mainly routine tasks.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Screen printing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1 Identify job requirements	1.1 Material safety data sheets (MSDS) are used to identify safe chemical handling procedures 1.2 Substrate is checked for conformance to job specifications with any irregularities reported and/or rectified 1.3 Ink is checked for conformance to job specifications 1.4 Stencil is checked for conformance to job specifications
2 Prepare machine to print	2.1 Substrate position and stencil registration are adjusted according to job specifications 2.2 Ink is applied to screen in quantity required for screen size 2.3 Equipment is kept clean and spillage is minimised
3 Produce proof print	3.1 Proof print is run off and checked for colour, strength, registration, adhesion, clarity, gloss level, drying and curing, artwork detail and other technical aspects according to job specifications 3.2 Adjustments are made according to product and machine specifications 3.3 Belt speed and energy required are set to achieve desired curing or drying properties 3.4 Appropriate approval to commence production is sought prior to commencement
4 Run job and monitor print quality	4.1 Printing speed production is adjusted to maximise quality and output 4.2 Print quality is continuously evaluated and adjusted as required 4.3 Effects of ink alterations during run are monitored and any discrepancy is notified according to enterprise procedures 4.4 Workplace documentation on job is completed as required 4.5 Curing and drying are constantly monitored and adjusted according to manufacturer or supplier and job specifications
5 Carry out routine user maintenance	5.1 Equipment is cleaned according to enterprise procedures 5.2 Fault conditions are identified and reported according to enterprise procedures
6 Stack production output	6.1 Output is checked for thorough drying and curing before stacking 6.2 Job status and progress are checked for conformance to job specifications and any necessary action is taken
7 Conduct shutdown	7.1 Material is transferred to correct destination in safe manner 7.2 Excess ink, screens, squeegees and flood coaters are removed and cleaned according to work health and safety (WHS) requirements and manufacturer or supplier specifications 7.3 Waste materials and chemicals are disposed of according to manufacturer or supplier specifications, regulatory requirements and enterprise procedures 7.4 Equipment and surrounding areas are cleaned according to manufacturer or supplier specifications 7.5 Tools and equipment are identified, stored and maintained according to manufacturer specifications to ensure ease of access and operator safety 7.6 Correct procedure for dealing with spilt chemicals is demonstrated according to WHS requirements

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1-1.4, 2.1, 3.1, 3.2, 4.3-4.5, 5.1, 5.2, 7.2-7.6	Interprets textual information from relevant sources to identify and adhere to procedures and standards
Writing	1.2, 4.3, 4.4, 5.2	Completes required details accurately using enterprise specific factual information
Oral Communication	1.2, 3.4, 4.3, 5.2	Reports issues or provides explanations using clear and specific language Uses listening and questioning techniques to confirm understanding
Numeracy	2.1, 3.3, 4.1, 4.5	Recognises numerical information and makes basic calculations to adjust production processes
Navigate the world of work	4.3, 5.1, 5.2, 7.1-7.6	Takes personal responsibility for adherence to legal and regulatory requirements with specific reference to safety Complies with organisational policies and procedures relevant to own role
Interact with others	3.4	Contributes to specific activities requiring joint responsibility and accountability
Get the work done	1.2-1.4, 2.1-2.3, 3.1-3.3, 4.1, 4.2, 4.5, 5.2, 6.1, 6.2, 7.5	Follows clearly defined instructions and sequencing and monitors own progress for the task Responds to predictable problems and implements standard or logical solutions Takes responsibility for routine low-impact decisions within familiar situations Understands the purpose and some specific functions of common digital tools used in work contexts

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPSCP270 Manually prepare and produce screen prints	ICPSP270C Manually prepare and produce screen prints	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPSCP270 Manually prepare and produce screen prints

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

set up screen printing machinery and produce a print that meets job specifications on a range of common substrates, using fundamental manual screening.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

outline the information that can be gained from material safety data sheets (MSDS)

explain why it is necessary to check the substrate for conformance to the job specifications

describe the action required if the ink did not comply with the job specifications

explain what compliance checks are made with the stencil

determine what limitations occur when setting the substrate position

describe the result if too much ink is applied to the screen

explain why it is necessary to keep equipment clean

outline the work health and safety (WHS) concerns when producing a manual print

explain what is checked on the printed sheet when the proof print has been run off

explain what determines the drying or curing system used for this application

explain where to obtain product and machine specifications

confirm what the result would be if the belt speed was too high

explain why it is necessary to obtain final approval before commencing the production run

identify aspects of the print that are evaluated during printing

explain why it is necessary to make ink alterations during the run

explain what happens to the workplace documentation when the print run is completed

determine what WHS concerns there are in relationship to drying or curing systems

explain what maintenance should be carried out on this machine

explain why it is important to report any faulty equipment

explain how to determine whether a print is dried or cured prior to stacking

explain what the result would be if stacking occurs while the ink film is still wet

describe the possible action needed if problems occur with the job progress

explain how to identify the job’s destination when the run has been completed

explain the result of not keeping screens and squeegees clean

describe the result of not following correct procedures when disposing of liquid waste

explain the result of not keeping equipment and surrounding areas clean

identify required manuals, safety and other documentation and briefly outline the relevant information in each source.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the screen printing field of work and include access to cleaning chemicals and manual screen printing machines.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPSCP271 Manually produce basic screen prints

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to manually produce one or two colour screen prints in short runs or limited art prints.

It applies to individuals working under direct supervision and performing mainly routine tasks such as monitoring equipment, selecting appropriate products and ensuring set processes are followed.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Screen printing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1 Load substrate	1.1 Substrate is checked against job specifications with any irregularities reported and, where possible, rectified 1.2 Substrate position and stencil registration are adjusted according to job specifications
2 Apply ink to screen	2.1 Ink is applied to screen in quantity required for screen size 2.2 Equipment is kept clean and spills are minimised 2.3 Ink is checked against job specifications
3 Produce proof print	3.1 Proof print is run off and checked for colour, strength, registration, adhesion, clarity, gloss level, drying or curing, artwork detail and other technical aspects according to job specifications 3.2 Adjustments are made as required 3.3 Appropriate approval to commence production is sought prior to commencement 3.4 Belt speed and energy required are set to achieve desired curing or drying properties
4 Run job and monitor print quality	4.1 Printing speed production is adjusted to maximise quality and output 4.2 Print quality is continuously evaluated and adjusted as required 4.3 Effects of ink alterations during run are monitored and any discrepancy is notified according to enterprise procedures 4.4 Workplace documentation is completed as required 4.5 Curing and drying are constantly monitored and adjusted according to manufacturer or supplier and job specifications
5 Carry out routine user maintenance	5.1 Equipment is cleaned according to enterprise procedures 5.2 Fault conditions are identified and reported according to enterprise procedures
6 Stack production output	6.1 Output is checked for thorough drying or curing before stacking 6.2 Job status and progress are checked against job specifications and any necessary action is taken
7 Finish operation	7.1 Excess ink, screens, squeegees and flood coaters are removed and cleaned according to work health and safety (WHS) requirements and manufacturer or supplier specifications 7.2 Waste materials are disposed of according to manufacturer or supplier specifications, regulatory requirements and enterprise procedures 7.3 Equipment and surrounding areas are cleaned according to manufacturer or supplier specifications and enterprise procedures

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 1.2, 2.3, 3.1, 4.4, 4.5, 5.1, 6.2, 7.1-7.3	Establishes job requirements from relevant information Identifies correct process from procedural documentation
Writing	1.1, 4.3, 4.4, 5.2	Completes required details accurately using enterprise specific and factual information
Oral Communication	1.1, 3.3, 4.3, 5.2	Discusses remedial action with supervisor Checks the progress and quality of the job with supervisor
Numeracy	2.1, 3.4, 4.1	Uses simple mathematical calculations to determine quantities and optimum output
Navigate the world of work	4.3, 5.1, 5.2, 7.1-7.3	Takes some personal responsibility for adherence to legal and regulatory requirements with specific reference to safety Complies with all organisational policies and procedures relevant to own role
Interact with others	1.1, 3.3	Contributes to specific activities requiring joint responsibility and accountability
Get the work done	1.1, 1.2, 2.1, 2.2, 3.1, 3.2, 3.4, 4.1, 4.2, 4.5, 5.2, 6.1, 6.2	Follows clearly defined instructions and sequencing and monitors own progress for the task Responds to predictable problems and implements standard or logical solutions Takes responsibility for routine low-impact decisions within familiar situations Understands the purpose and some specific functions of some common digital tools used in work contexts

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPSCP271 Manually produce basic screen prints	ICPSP271C Manually produce basic screen prints	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPSCP271 Manually produce basic screen prints

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

manually produce TWO different one or two colour print runs according to job specifications, enterprise procedures and work health and safety (WHS) requirements.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

identify health and safety issues that apply when producing a manual print

outline the procedure for setting up the frame relative to the position of the print image and base board

describe the checks to be made of the ink to determine its suitability for printing on a particular substrate

describe the checks to be made on the printed sheet when the proof print has been run off

describe the system used for drying or curing

explain how to determine whether a print is dried or cured prior to stacking

outline the maintenance requirements for equipment or machinery used to produce manual prints

explain how to clean up and dispose of waste materials used in the production of manual prints

identify required manuals, safety and other documentation and briefly outline the relevant information in each source.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the screen printing field of work and include access to cleaning chemicals and manual screen printing machines.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPSCP273 Semi-automatically produce basic screen prints

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to safely produce one or two colour semi-automatic screen prints.

It applies to individuals working under direct supervision in the printing and graphic arts industry. They perform mainly routine tasks such as monitoring, adjusting and cleaning equipment, selecting appropriate products and ensuring set processes are followed in the use of a semi-automatic printing machine.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Screen printing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1 Load substrate	1.1 Substrate is checked against job specifications with any irregularities reported and rectified 1.2 Substrate position and stencil registration are adjusted according to job specifications
2 Apply ink to screen	2.1 Ink is applied to screen in quantity required for screen size 2.2 Equipment is kept clean and spills are minimised 2.3 Colour is mixed and ink is checked against job specifications
3 Produce proof print	3.1 Proof print is run off and checked for colour, strength, registration, adhesion, clarity, gloss level, drying or curing, artwork detail and other technical aspects according to job specifications 3.2 Adjustments are made as required 3.3 Appropriate approval to commence production is sought prior to commencement 3.4 Belt speed and energy required are set to achieve desired properties and printing speeds are adjusted to suit
4 Run job and monitor print quality	4.1 Printing speed production is adjusted to maximise quality and output 4.2 Print quality is continuously evaluated and adjusted as required 4.3 Effects of ink alterations during run are monitored and appropriate action taken according to manufacturer and job specifications 4.4 Workplace documentation is completed as required 4.5 Curing and drying are constantly monitored and adjusted according to manufacturer and job specifications
5 Carry out routine user maintenance	5.1 Equipment is cleaned according to manufacturer specifications 5.2 Fault conditions are identified and reported according to enterprise procedures
6 Stack production output	6.1 Output is checked for thorough drying or curing before stacking 6.2 Job status and progress are checked against job specifications and any necessary action is taken
7 Shut down machine	7.1 Excess ink, screens, squeegees and flood coaters are removed and cleaned according to work health and safety (WHS) requirements and manufacturer specifications 7.2 Waste materials are disposed of according to manufacturer specifications, regulatory requirements and enterprise procedures 7.3 Equipment and surrounding areas are cleaned according to manufacturer specifications and enterprise procedures

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 1.2, 2.3, 2.4, 3.1, 4.3-4.5, 5.1, 5.2, 6.2, 7.1-7.3	Evaluates and establishes job requirements from relevant information Identifies correct process from enterprise procedures, manufacturers and suppliers
Writing	1.1, 4.4, 5.2	Completes required details accurately using enterprise specific and factual information
Oral Communication	1.1, 3.3, 5.2	Discusses faults and any remedial action with supervisor Checks the progress and quality of the job with supervisor
Numeracy	2.1, 3.4, 4.1, 4.5	Uses simple mathematical calculations to determine curing and drying times, required supplies and optimum belt speeds
Navigate the world of work	7.1-7.3	Takes personal responsibility for adherence to legal and regulatory requirements with specific reference to safety Complies with organisational policies and procedures relevant to own role
Interact with others	3.3	Contributes to specific activities requiring joint responsibility and accountability
Get the work done	1.1, 1.2, 2.2, 2.3, 3.1, 3.2, 3.4, 4.1-4.3, 4.5, 5.2, 6.1, 6.2	Follows clearly defined instructions and sequencing and monitors own progress for the task Responds to predictable problems and implements standard or logical solutions Takes responsibility for routine low-impact decisions within familiar situations Understands the purpose and specific functions of some common digital tools used in work contexts

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPSCP273 Semi-automatically produce basic screen prints	ICPSP273C Semi-automatically produce basic screen prints	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPSCP273 Semi-automatically produce basic screen prints

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

safely produce TWO different one or two colour print runs using a semi-automatic machine according to manufacturer, job and enterprise specifications

demonstrate use of control, monitoring and data entry systems.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

identify the appropriate substrate, finished size, length of run and order of colours from the job specifications

describe the correct placement of image on the sheet and the significance of substrate guides or lays in preparation for printing

describe the ink selection system

discuss the set parameters of belt speed and head units

outline health and safety concerns when using a semi-automatic printing machine

identify the type of squeegee or flood coater and squeegee angle used

outline the process of producing a proof print and what needs to be checked on the proof

explain the process of the continuous monitoring of print quality and the drying or curing of ink before stacking

explain the purpose of workplace documentation

outline the procedure required for disposing of unused ink and solvent rags

describe the frequency and type of maintenance that should be performed on the printing machine

identify required manuals, safety and other documentation and briefly outline the relevant information in each source.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the screen printing field of work and include access to a semi-automatic printing machine.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPSCP275 Automatically produce basic screen prints

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to safely produce one or two colour screen prints on an automatic printing machine

It applies to individuals working under direct supervision in the printing and graphic arts industry. They perform mainly routine tasks such as monitoring, adjusting and cleaning equipment, selecting appropriate products and ensuring set processes are followed in the use of an automatic printing machine.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Screen printing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1 Load substrate	1.1 Substrate is checked against job specifications, with any irregularities reported and rectified where possible 1.2 Substrate position and stencil registration are adjusted according to job specifications
2 Apply ink to screen	2.1 Ink is applied to screen in quantity required for screen size 2.2 Equipment is kept clean and spills are minimised 2.3 Ink is checked against job specifications 2.4 Feeder is set and adjusted to suit substrate
3 Produce proof print	3.1 Proof print is run off and checked for colour, strength, registration, adhesion, clarity, gloss level, drying or curing, artwork detail and other technical aspects according to job specifications 3.2 Adjustments are made as required 3.3 Appropriate approval to commence production is sought prior to commencement 3.4 Belt speed and energy required are set to achieve desired properties and then printing speeds are adjusted to suit
4 Run job and monitor print quality	4.1 Printing speed production is adjusted to maximise quality and output 4.2 Print quality and sheet feeder are continuously evaluated and adjusted as required 4.3 Effects of ink alterations during run are monitored and appropriate action taken according to manufacturer or supplier and job specifications 4.4 Workplace documentation is completed as required 4.5 Curing and drying are constantly monitored and adjusted according to manufacturer or supplier and job specifications
5 Carry out routine user maintenance	5.1 Equipment is cleaned according to manufacturer or supplier specifications 5.2 Fault conditions are identified, reported and/or rectified according to enterprise procedures
6 Handle production output	6.1 Output is checked for thorough drying or curing before handling 6.2 Job status and progress are checked against job specifications and any necessary action is taken
7 Shut down machine	7.1 Excess ink, screens, squeegees and flood coaters are removed and cleaned according to work health and safety (WHS) requirements and manufacturer or supplier specifications 7.2 Waste materials are disposed of according to manufacturer or supplier specifications, regulatory requirements and enterprise procedures 7.3 Equipment and surrounding areas are cleaned according to manufacturer or supplier specifications and enterprise procedures

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 1.2, 2.3, 3.1, 4.3-4.5, 5.1, 5.2, 6.2, 7.1-7.3	Evaluates and establishes job requirements from relevant information Identifies correct process from enterprise procedures and manufacturer or supplier specifications
Writing	1.1, 4.4, 5.2	Completes required details accurately using enterprise specific and factual information
Oral Communication	3.3, 5.2	Discusses faults and any remedial action with supervisor Checks the progress and quality of the job with supervisor
Numeracy	2.1, 3.4, 4.1, 4.5	Uses simple mathematical calculations to determine curing and drying times and optimum belt speed
Navigate the world of work	7.1-7.3	Takes personal responsibility for adherence to legal and regulatory requirements with specific reference to safety Complies with organisational policies and procedures relevant to own role
Interact with others	3.3	Contributes to specific activities requiring joint responsibility and accountability
Get the work done	1.1, 1.2, 2.2, 2.3, 3.1, 3.2, 3.4, 4.1-4.3, 4.5, 5.1, 5.2, 6.1, 6.2	Follows clearly defined instructions and sequencing Monitors own progress for the task Responds to predictable problems and implements standard or logical solutions Takes responsibility for routine low-impact decisions within familiar situations Understands the purpose of specific functions of some common digital tools used in work contexts

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPSCP275 Automatically produce basic screen prints	ICPSP275C Automatically produce basic screen prints	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPSCP275 Automatically produce basic screen prints

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

safely produce TWO complex prints of more than two colours containing line and tone using a semi-automatic machine according to manufacturer, job and enterprise specifications and procedures

demonstrate use of control, monitoring and data entry systems.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

describe the adjustments that are necessary to the machine prior to setting up, including the maintenance on the machine and feeder

identify the correct substrate to be used according to job specifications

outline the procedure for checking the screen sequence of colours, ink, substrate and squeegee or flood coater prior to printing

describe the system for setting the feed board and loading substrate, and the preparations needed prior to loading the feeder

describe how to correctly position, register and lock the screen in position

explain the need to adjust the off contact or peel-off requirements of the screen

outline the work health and safety (WHS) requirements when working with infra-red or UV curing units

explain the relationship between ink deposit, squeegee speed and belt speed and temperature of the drying or curing unit

outline the routine maintenance undertaken on this drying or curing unit and the WHS concerns when maintaining and using an automatic printing machine

describe the effect of humidity on the substrate

explain the correct viscosity of the ink prior to and during printing and the effect that ink conditions have on output capacity

outline the evaluation and maintenance of the print quality that takes place during the run

discuss the ideal printing rate for this substrate on this machine

outline the production output handling to prevent offsetting of the ink

explain the need to determine the exact count of the output and to record production details on the job sheet

describe the health hazards associated with ink or solvents

outline the correct procedure for removing the ink without damaging the screen and cleaning squeegees or flood coaters, machine and surrounding area

explain the maintenance that is required on this machine after printing

identify required manuals, safety and other documentation and briefly outline the relevant information in each source.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the screen printing field of work and include access to an automatic printing machine and more than two colours.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPSCP281 Finish screen print products

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to undertake finishing processes used on screen printed products not covered by converting, binding and finishing units. If the finishing is substantially guillotining, flat-bed cutting or folding, the relevant converting, binding and finishing units should be used.

It applies to individuals working under direct supervision in the printing and graphic arts industry. They perform mainly routine tasks such as monitoring, adjusting and cleaning equipment, selecting appropriate products and ensuring set processes are followed in the final stages of processing screen prints.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Screen printing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1 Receive printed product	1.1 Screen print job is collected or received and quality checks made according to job specifications 1.2 Defects or irregularities are identified, reported and rectified where possible
2 Carry out final processing	2.1 Final processing requirements of job are determined from job specifications 2.2 Equipment and materials for final processing are identified and prepared according to manufacturer or supplier and job specifications 2.3 Final processes are implemented according to job specifications and industry practice 2.4 Quality of product is monitored and maintained throughout final processing 2.5 Irregularities are identified, reported and rectified where possible 2.6 Job status and progress are checked against job specifications and any necessary action is taken
3 Handle final product	3.1 Final print is processed using appropriate handling, storage and dispatching techniques to ensure minimal wastage and prevent hazards to personnel 3.2 Waste materials are disposed of according to manufacturer or supplier specifications, regulatory requirements and enterprise procedures 3.3 Post-production cleaning and user maintenance are carried out according to manufacturer or supplier specifications
4 Store, pack and dispatch	4.1 Final quality checks are carried out and appropriate action is taken according to job specifications 4.2 Finished job is stored, packed and dispatched according to job specifications

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 2.1-2.3, 2.6, 3.2, 3.3, 4.1, 4.2	Evaluates and establishes job requirements from relevant information Identifies correct process from enterprise procedures and manufacturer or supplier specifications
Writing	1.2, 2.5	Completes required details accurately using enterprise specific and factual information
Oral Communication	1.2, 2.5	Reports faults and discusses any remedial action with supervisor
Navigate the world of work	2.3, 3.1-3.3	Takes personal responsibility for adherence to legal and regulatory requirements with specific reference to safety Complies with organisational policies and procedures relevant to own role
Get the work done	1.1, 1.2, 2.1-2.6, 4.1, 4.2	Follows clearly defined instructions and sequencing and monitors own progress for the task Responds to predictable problems and implements standard or logical solutions Takes responsibility for routine low-impact decisions within familiar situations Understands the purpose and some specific functions of common digital tools used in work contexts

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPSCP281 Finish screen print products	ICPSP281C Finish screen print products	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPSCP281 Finish screen print products

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

finish TWO different screen printed jobs and apply final processing requirements according to manufacturer and job specifications, and enterprise procedures.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

explain techniques that are used to determine defects and irregularities and how they can be rectified

outline the features of a quality screen printed job

describe the health and safety concerns when finishing print jobs and handling the printed product

list the equipment, tools and materials used for final processing and the processes that are undertaken as indicated in the job specifications

describe monitoring and maintaining the quality of the finished product throughout final processing

describe the handling techniques that are used to prevent damage to the processed product

outline the correct methods for disposing of waste material

explain the post-production cleaning methods that are used

name the type and frequency of maintenance that should be performed on equipment

outline the final quality checking methods

explain the method used for maintaining and recording job information

identify required manuals, safety and other documentation and briefly outline the relevant information in each source.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the screen printing field of work and include access to special purpose tools, equipment and materials.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPSCP282 Prepare film for basic screen printing

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to prepare film for basic screen printing using appropriate equipment and Raster Image Processor (RIP) software.

It applies to individuals who generally work under direct supervision and perform mainly routine tasks such as operating basic equipment and assessing the production requirements in accordance with job specifications.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Screen printing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1 Assess production requirements	1.1 Requirements of printing process and job specification are assessed 1.2 Quality of job elements, including resolution or dots per inch (DPI) are maintained according to client requirements 1.3 Films, dye cartridges, qualities and process requirements are determined 1.4 Stock levels are checked, recorded and maintained according to job specifications 1.5 Copy is checked and assessed according to job specifications
2 Prepare and operate equipment	2.1 Scanner and computer is selected and artwork or copy is placed squarely in scanner 2.2 Scanner software is selected and correct settings are made according to job requirements 2.3 Previews are made, images selected, finished scan completed and image adjusted as required 2.4 Image format is determined and saved to storage device
3 Select and use appropriate software	3.1 Imaging software is selected and scan opened 3.2 Separation is provided on individual layers according to job specifications 3.3 Colours are excluded as required on separation layers 3.4 Separation layers are coloured for specific RIP software requirements 3.5 Image or layers or separations are manually nested if required in accordance with film output device size 3.6 Image format is determined according to RIP software requirements 3.7 Supplied finished artwork or separation is checked for output suitability
4 Select and operate appropriate equipment	4.1 RIP software is selected and opened 4.2 Image setter or dye printer is selected and checked, and heads cleaned prior to outputting images 4.3 Nesting is checked to ensure non-wastage of film 4.4 Image is evaluated against job specifications and corrected if required 4.5 Film is handled and output device is closed down according to manufacturer recommendations

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 1.2, 1.4, 1.5, 2.2, 3.2, 4.4, 4.5	Evaluates and establishes job requirements from relevant information Identifies correct process from manufacturer or supplier instructions
Writing	1.4	Accurately records stock levels and information relating to job requirements
Navigate the world of work	4.5	Complies with organisational policies and procedures relevant to own role
Get the work done	1.1-1.5, 2.1-2.4, 3.1, 3.3-3.7, 4.1-4.4	Follows clearly defined instructions and sequencing and monitors own progress for the task Responds to predictable problems and implements standard or logical solutions Takes responsibility for routine low-impact decisions within familiar situations Understands the purpose and some specific functions of common digital tools

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPSCP282 Prepare film for basic screen printing	ICPSP282C Prepare film for basic screen printing	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPSCP282 Prepare film for basic screen printing

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

prepare film for TWO different products involving a variety of image effects according to job and manufacturer specifications

correctly select and use appropriate Raster Image Processor (RIP) software to meet the requirements of TWO jobs.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

identify image specifications and the resolutions or dots per inch (DPI) determination

explain the scanner settings, including the adjusting of the image brightness or contrast

identify the software used for scanning and the creation of vector graphics

discuss the exclusion of colours and bleed for a particular job and the purpose of colouring separation layers

explain the common file format when using RIP software and the settings that must be checked prior to ripping

outline the nesting requirements of particular jobs and the output suitability prior to producing separations

outline the correct output device and the regular checks and maintenance that must be performed on an image setter or dye printer

outline the procedures used for evaluating the output film to ensure it conforms to job specifications.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the screen printing field of work and include access to relevant facilities and equipment.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPSCP311 Reclaim screen manually

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to determine the suitability of screens to be reclaimed and the cleaning and storing of reclaimed screens.

It applies to individuals who may have to set up and operate power-driven or hand-operated screen printing machines. They may have to provide leadership and guidance to others and have some limited responsibility for the output of others.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Screen printing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1 Select and prepare chemicals	1.1 Ink and stencil type are correctly identified and screen is assessed for suitability to be reclaimed 1.2 Most appropriate reclamation method is selected 1.3 Screen reclamation chemicals are selected and prepared according to manufacturer or supplier specifications 1.4 Appropriate safety gear is selected and worn according to manufacturer or supplier specifications and work health and safety (WHS) requirements
2 Wash screen	2.1 Stencil is treated with appropriate chemical to manufacturer specifications 2.2 Screens are washed using pressure gun in suitably ventilated area with required extraction system 2.3 Stains and hazards are removed using appropriate chemicals according to manufacturer or supplier specifications and WHS requirements 2.4 Screens are checked for damage and any defects are reported and/or rectified according to enterprise procedures
3 Store screen	3.1 Screens are correctly identified and labelled 3.2 Screens are stored in clean, dry environment according to manufacturer or supplier specifications

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.3, 1.4, 2.1, 2.3, 2.4, 3.2	Interprets textual information from relevant sources to identify and adhere to procedures and standards
Writing	2.4, 3.1	Completes workplace documentation accurately and legibly using specific information
Oral Communication	2.4	Reports faults and discusses any remedial action with supervisor
Numeracy	1.3, 2.1	Recognises numerical information and makes basic calculations to determine measurements and timeframes
Navigate the world of work	1.4, 2.3, 2.4, 3.2	Understands and complies with legislative requirements and organisational policies and procedures relevant to own role
Get the work done	1.1-1.3, 2.2, 2.4, 3.1	Takes responsibility for planning and organising own workload, identifying ways of sequencing and combining elements for efficiency Automatically implements standard procedures for routine decisions Recognises and takes responsibility for addressing predictable problems in familiar work contexts

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPSCP311 Reclaim screen manually	ICPSP311C Reclaim screen manually	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPSCP311 Reclaim screen manually

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

safely reclaim THREE screens, preferably of different mesh and stencil types commonly used in the workplace, using manual techniques, according to manufacturer and job specifications, enterprise procedures and work health and safety (WHS) requirements.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

explain the significance of mesh count

explain how screens with different mesh counts should be treated

describe the common faults that could occur in meshes and frames

describe the ink removal procedures for three different inks

describe the stencil removal procedures for two stencil types

identify what chemicals are available for screen reclamation

explain the reasons for selecting chemicals and method for screen reclamation

explain the main considerations when handling and disposing of chemicals

explain the various screen reclamation techniques available in the industry

explain the reasons for selecting and applying a specific technique for screen reclamation

identify the hazards to be aware of in reclaiming screens

describe the enterprise policies on material handling

describe the enterprise policies on management of waste

name any personal protective clothing that should be worn when reclaiming screens

identify required manuals, safety and other documentation and briefly outline the relevant information in each source.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the screen printing field of work and include access to relevant tools, equipment, materials, resources and documentation.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPSCP333 Automatically prepare direct emulsion stencil

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to select, prepare, coat and store direct emulsion stencils using automatic coating equipment.

It applies to individuals working in the printing and graphic arts industry who may have to set up and operate power-driven or hand-operated screen printing machines. They may have to provide leadership and guidance to others and have some limited responsibility for the output of others.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Screen printing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1 Prepare work area and equipment	1.1 Work area is made clean and functional prior to commencement of work 1.2 Equipment is inspected to ensure it is functional and, where necessary, appropriate remedial action is taken prior to commencement of work 1.3 Appropriate coating troughs for automatic coaters are selected, ensuring they are free of nicks and burrs 1.4 Automatic coating equipment is inspected and routine user maintenance is carried out according to manufacturer instructions and enterprise procedures 1.5 Automatic coating equipment is adjusted to suit screen frame and mesh and emulsion
2 Prepare screen	2.1 Screen is selected according to job specifications 2.2 Chemicals are applied and removed according to work health and safety (WHS) requirements and manufacturer or supplier specifications 2.3 Tension of screen mesh is checked for suitability according to job specifications
3 Select emulsion	3.1 Emulsion is selected according to requirements for ink type, print resolution, substrate, mesh type and machine type 3.2 Emulsion is checked for expiry date and appropriate action taken 3.3 Emulsion is prepared according to WHS requirements and manufacturer or supplier specifications 3.4 Emulsion is used and dried according to manufacturer or supplier specifications
4 Process coated screen	4.1 Coated screen frame is placed in vacuum frame and adequately vacuumed with positive positioned according to manufacturer or supplier specifications 4.2 Light source is positioned according to manufacturer or supplier specifications 4.3 Exposure is calculated and stencil exposed according to manufacturer or supplier specifications 4.4 Exposed screen is removed from vacuum frame Exposed screen is washed after positive removal according to 4.5 WHS requirements and manufacturer or supplier specifications 4.6 Processed stencil or screen is inspected for flaws
5 Store screen	5.1 Prepared screen is labelled according to enterprise specifications 5.2 Prepared screen is stored in clean, dry environment according to manufacturer or supplier specifications

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.4, 2.1-2.3, 3.2-3.4, 4.1-4.3, 4.5, 5.1, 5.2	Establishes job requirements from relevant information Identifies correct process from procedural documentation
Writing	5.1	Completes routine labelling associated with production processes and enterprise procedures
Numeracy	4.3	Uses simple mathematical calculations to determine required exposure time
Navigate the world of work	1.4, 2.2, 3.3, 4.5, 5.2	Understands and complies with legislative requirements and organisational procedures relevant to own role
Get the work done	1.1-1.3, 1.5, 2.1, 2.3, 3.1, 3.2, 4.1, 4.2, 4.4, 4.6	Takes responsibility for planning and organising own workload, identifying ways of sequencing and combining elements for efficiency Automatically implements standard procedures for routine decisions Recognises and takes responsibility for addressing predictable problems in familiar work contexts Understands the purposes, specific functions and key features of common digital systems and tools, and operates them effectively to complete routine tasks, adapting some functions to improve efficiency

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPSCP333 Automatically prepare direct emulsion stencil	ICPSP333C Automatically prepare direct emulsion stencil	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPSCP333 Automatically prepare direct emulsion stencil

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

correctly prepare TWO different direct emulsion stencils using automatic coating equipment

expose, wash and dry the screen according to manufacturer and job specifications, enterprise procedures and occupational health and safety requirements.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

describe the influence that the mesh count has on the final printed product

outline the importance of correct screen tension

explain the different tensions required for screens of various mesh counts and grades

outline the degreasing or cleaning techniques that are employed prior to coating the screen

describe information that is contained in material safety data sheets (MSDS) for the emulsion being used

identify the work health and safety (WHS) requirements that need to be considered for exposure to UV light sources

identify the pollution and environmental issues that need to be considered when working with emulsions

outline the maintenance that is required for the automatic coating machine

describe two different emulsions used in screen printing and outline their characteristics, their shelf life and areas of use

discuss the preparation formula for one emulsion and its storage requirements

describe the need to have the correct illumination in the work area

discuss the influence that the length of run and ink or dye being used have on the coating technique, the number of coats of emulsion and the best method of coating the screen

outline the factors that are taken into consideration to determine the angle at which the coaters coat the screen

describe the appropriate position (horizontal or vertical) for drying the screen and the effect that each of these positions has on the way the emulsion dries

describe the effect of heat on the emulsion during the drying process and the function and use of a light integrator

describe the procedure for exposing the stencil and the effect that the position, angle and distance of the light source have on the exposure process

describe the importance of perfect contact between positive and screen during exposure

identify the effect that temperature, pressure and time taken have on the washing out process and wash-out completion

identify the ideal position of the screen for drying to prevent scum and streaking and the impact of post-curing on the stencil

describe information obtained from the MSDS for this particular blockout

identify the bearing of ink to be used on a particular stencil and the type of stencil on the type of blockout

name the preventive measures that can be taken to minimise pinholes

explain the importance of taping the edge of the frame and the squeegee edge, and the means used to identify the screen at a later date

identify required manuals, safety and other documentation and briefly outline the relevant information in each source

explain where you might find other relevant sources of information.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the screen printing field of work and include access to chemicals and relevant equipment.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPSCP337 Prepare stencil using photographic capillary method

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 2	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.1. Version created to correct mapping table information.
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to select, prepare, process and store photographic capillary stencils.

It applies to individuals working in the printing and graphic arts industry who may have to set up and operate power-driven or hand-operated screen printing machines. They may have to provide leadership and guidance to others and have some limited responsibility for the output of others.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Screen printing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1 Prepare work area	1.1 Work area is made clean and functional prior to commencement of work 1.2 Equipment is inspected to ensure it is functional and, where necessary, appropriate remedial action is taken prior to commencement of work 1.3 Chemicals are prepared, if necessary, according to work health and safety (WHS) requirements and manufacturer or supplier specifications
2 Prepare screen	2.1 Screen is selected according to job specifications 2.2 Chemicals are applied and removed according to WHS requirements and manufacturer or supplier specifications
3 Select and process capillary film	3.1 Capillary film is selected according to requirements for ink type, print resolution, substrate and machine type with minimisation of waste 3.2 Capillary film is cut to size according to WHS requirements and manufacturer or supplier specifications with minimisation of waste 3.3 Capillary film is mounted on screen according to manufacturer or supplier specifications 3.4 Screen is dried according to manufacturer or supplier specifications and enterprise procedures 3.5 Backing sheet is removed according to manufacturer or supplier specifications
4 Process material	4.1 Screen is placed in vacuum frame with positive positioned according to manufacturer or supplier specifications and job specifications 4.2 Exposure is calculated and stencil exposed according to manufacturer or supplier specifications 4.3 Light source is positioned according to manufacturer or supplier specifications 4.4 Exposed screen is removed from vacuum frame according to WHS requirements and manufacturer or supplier specifications 4.5 Exposed screen is washed out according to WHS requirements and manufacturer or supplier specifications
5 Dry stencil	5.1 Processed stencil is dried according to manufacturer or supplier specifications 5.2 Backing sheet is carefully removed and stencil checked for full adhesion
6 Block out screen	6.1 Stencil is inspected for flaws, scum and orientation 6.2 Non-image areas of prepared screen are blocked out with filler suitable for ink type and according to job specifications 6.3 Pinholes are spotted out with suitable filler and faulty or damaged images are retouched and taped according to ink type and job specifications
7 Store screen	7.1 Prepared screen is labelled according to enterprise specifications 7.2 Prepared screen is stored in clean, dry environment according to manufacturer or supplier specifications

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.3, 2.1, 2.2, 3.3-3.5, 4.1-4.5, 5.1, 6.2, 6.3, 7.1, 7.2	Establishes job requirements from relevant information Identifies correct process from procedural documentation
Writing	7.1	Completes routine labelling associated with production processes and enterprise procedures
Numeracy	3.2, 3.4, 4.2	Uses simple mathematical calculations to determine required exposure time for the screen and product sizes
Navigate the world of work	1.3, 2.1, 2.2, 3.2, 4.4, 4.5, 7.2	Understands and complies with legislative requirements and organisational policies and procedures relevant to own role
Get the work done	1.1-1.3, 2.1, 3.1, 3.3, 4.1, 4.3-4.5, 5.1, 5.2, 6.1-6.3	Takes responsibility for planning and organising own workload, identifying ways of sequencing and combining elements for efficiency Automatically implements standard procedures for routine decisions Recognises and takes responsibility for addressing predictable problems in familiar work contexts Understands the purposes, specific functions and key features of common digital systems and tools, and operates them effectively to complete routine tasks, adapting some functions to improve efficiency

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPSCP337 Prepare stencil using photographic capillary method	ICPSP337D Prepare stencil using photographic capillary method	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPSCP337 Prepare stencil using photographic capillary method

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 2	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.1. Version created to correct mapping table information.
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

correctly prepare TWO different direct screens using automatic coating equipment and expose, wash and dry the screen according to all manufacturer, job, enterprise and workplace safety requirements.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

outline work health and safety (WHS) requirements when degreasing screens

identify the significance of the mesh count and the selection of mesh count for the application of a capillary stencil

discuss the impact of correct tension on the screen

identify the chemicals that are used for degreasing screens

outline the maintenance procedures that are employed for equipment in the stencil preparation area

describe the peculiarities of photographic capillary stencils and the selection process

identify pollution and environmental concerns to be addressed when working with capillary films

identify wetting agents that are used to facilitate the application of the film to the screen

outline problems that are caused by dust on the surface of the mesh

discuss the importance of the position of film on the screen, the problems that can occur from poor or incorrect mounting techniques and how they can be rectified

outline WHS concerns related to exposing stencils

describe the correct drying distance and drying time, how these are calculated and the effects of incorrect drying temperatures

discuss the need to dry film under safelight conditions and the function and use of a light integrator

outline the removal of the backing sheet

describe the effect that the position, angle and distance of the light source has on the exposure process

outline the effect that temperature, pressure and time taken has on the washing out process

describe the importance of blotting up excess water from the stencil to prevent scum and streaking

outline how to determine when a stencil is dry

explain how the ink and stencil types affect the blockout

outline preventive measures that can be taken to prevent pinholes, and the importance of taping the edge of the frame

describe how a screen can be identified at a later date

identify maintenance that should be carried out on exposing, washing and drying equipment

identify required manuals, safety and other documentation and briefly outline the relevant information in each source.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the screen printing field of work and include access to chemicals and relevant equipment.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPSCP339 Prepare stencil using direct projection method

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to select, prepare, process and store photographic capillary stencils.

It applies to individuals working in the printing and graphic arts industry who may have to set up and operate power-driven or hand-operated screen printing machines, and who may have to provide leadership and guidance to others and have some limited responsibility for the output of others.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Screen printing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1 Prepare work area	1.1 Work area is made clean and functional prior to commencement of work 1.2 Equipment is inspected to ensure it is functional and, where necessary, appropriate remedial action is taken prior to commencement of work 1.3 Chemicals are prepared, if necessary, according to work health and safety (WHS) requirements and manufacturer or supplier specifications 1.4 Appropriate coating trough (or troughs for automatic coaters) is selected, ensuring it is free of nicks and burrs
2 Prepare screen	2.1 Screen is selected according to job specifications 2.2 Chemicals are applied and removed according to WHS requirements and manufacturer or supplier specifications
3 Select emulsion	3.1 Emulsion is selected according to requirements for ink type, print resolution, substrate, mesh type and machine type with minimisation of waste 3.2 Emulsion is checked for expiry date and appropriate action taken 3.3 Emulsion is prepared according to WHS requirements, and manufacturer or supplier specifications 3.4 Emulsion is used and dried according to manufacturer or supplier specifications
4 Process material	4.1 Coated screen is positioned on projection frame holder according to manufacturer or supplier specifications 4.2 Projection light source equipment is positioned according to manufacturer or supplier specifications 4.3 Positive is positioned into projection light source which is then set to desired enlargement according to manufacturer or supplier specifications 4.4 Exposed screen is removed from positioning frame according to WHS requirements and manufacturer or supplier specifications 4.5 Exposed screen is washed out according to WHS requirements and manufacturer or supplier specifications 4.6 Processed stencil or screen is inspected for processing flaws
5 Dry stencil	5.1 Processed stencil is dried according to manufacturer or supplier specifications 5.2 Backing sheet is carefully removed and stencil checked for full adhesion
6 Block out screen	6.1 Non-image areas of prepared screen are blocked out with filler suitable for ink type and according to job specifications 6.2 Stencil is inspected for flaws, scum and orientation 6.3 Pinholes are spotted out with suitable filler and taped according to ink type and job specifications
7 Store screen	7.1 Prepared screen is labelled according to enterprise specifications 7.2 Prepared screen is stored in clean, dry environment according to manufacturer or supplier specifications

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.3, 2.1, 2.2, 3.2-3.4, 4.1-4.5, 5.1, 6.1, 7.2	Establishes job requirements from relevant information Identifies correct process from procedural documentation
Writing	7.1	Completes routine labelling associated with production and enterprise processes
Numeracy	1.3, 4.3	Uses simple mathematical processes to calculate amounts of chemicals and coating times
Navigate the world of work	1.3, 2.2, 3.3, 4.4, 4.5, 7.1, 7.2	Complies with organisational, legal and regulatory requirements related to own work, with specific reference to safety
Get the work done	1.1, 1.2, 1.4, 2.1, 3.1, 3.2, 3.4, 4.1-4.6, 5.1, 5.2, 6.1-6.3	Takes responsibility for planning and organising own workload, identifying ways of sequencing and combining elements for efficiency Automatically implements standard procedures for routine decisions Recognises and takes responsibility for addressing predictable problems in familiar work contexts Understands the purposes, specific functions and key features of common digital systems and tools, and operates them effectively to complete routine tasks

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPSCP339 Prepare stencil using direct projection method	ICPSP339C Prepare stencil using direct projection method	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPSCP339 Prepare stencil using direct projection method

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

safely prepare TWO different screens using the direct projection method according to all job, manufacturer, enterprise and work health and safety (WHS) requirements.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

identify the influence that mesh count has on final printed product

explain the importance of correctly tensioned screen and describe the tension that is required on screens of various mesh count or grades

describe the degreasing or cleaning techniques that are employed prior to coating the screen

summarise the information contained in the material safety data sheet (MSDS) about emulsion

discuss the pollution and environmental issues that need to be considered when working with emulsions

identify the maintenance that is required on the direct projection camera

outline the importance of working in a safelight area when using the direct projection method

describe the kinds of high sensitivity emulsions that are available and explain their characteristics, lifespans and areas of use, including the preparation method for the emulsion being used

identify the influence that length of run and ink being used have on the coating technique

identify the number of coats of emulsion and the best method of coating the screen, as well as the best position (horizontal or vertical) for drying the screen to prevent scum and streaking

identify the effect of heat on the emulsion during the drying process

outline health and safety concerns when exposing the screen

describe the operating features of the direct projection camera

explain how to set the enlargement factor and take into account registration on the frame for the appropriate printing machine

describe the exposure techniques and procedures that are used and how to calculate exposure time

identify the effect of temperature, pressure and period of washing on the emulsion, including how to determine when washing out is complete

outline the post-curing effect on the stencil

summarise the information that is obtained from the MSDSs for a particular blockout

explain how ink and stencil type influence the choice of blockout

outline the preventive measures that can be taken to minimise pinholes and the importance of taping the edge of the frame

describe how a screen can be identified at a later date

identify required manuals, safety and other documentation and briefly outline the relevant information in each source.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the screen printing field of work and include access to direct electronic imaging equipment.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPSCP341 Prepare stencil using direct electronic imaging method

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to select, prepare, process and store direct electronically imaged stencils.

It applies to individuals working in the printing and graphic arts industry who may have to set up and operate power-driven or hand-operated screen printing machines. They may have to provide leadership and guidance to others and have some limited responsibility for the output of others.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Screen printing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1 Prepare work area	1.1 Work area is made clean and functional prior to commencement of work 1.2 Equipment is inspected to ensure it is functional and, where necessary, appropriate remedial action is taken prior to commencement of work 1.3 Chemicals are prepared, if necessary, according to work health and safety (WHS) requirements and manufacturer or supplier specifications 1.4 Appropriate coating trough (or troughs for automatic coaters) is selected, ensuring it is free of nicks and burrs
2 Prepare screen	2.1 Screen is selected according to job specifications 2.2 Chemicals are applied and removed according to WHS requirements and manufacturer or supplier specifications
3 Select direct emulsion	3.1 Emulsion is selected according to requirements for ink type, print resolution, substrate, mesh type and machine type with minimisation of waste 3.2 Emulsion is checked for expiry date and appropriate action taken 3.3 Emulsion is prepared according to WHS requirements and manufacturer or supplier specifications 3.4 Emulsion is used and dried according to manufacturer or supplier specifications
4 Process material	4.1 Coated screen is placed in direct imaging equipment according to manufacturer or supplier specifications 4.2 Direct imaging equipment is set up according to manufacturer or supplier and job specifications 4.3 Direct imaging equipment is operated according to WHS requirements, and manufacturer or supplier specifications 4.4 Exposed screen is removed and washed out according to WHS requirements and manufacturer or supplier specifications 4.5 Processed stencil or screen is inspected for processing flaws
5 Dry stencil	5.1 Processed stencil is dried according to manufacturer or supplier specifications 5.2 Backing sheet is carefully removed and stencil checked for full adhesion
6 Block out screen	6.1 Non-image areas of prepared screen are blocked out with filler suitable for ink type according to job specifications 6.2 Stencil is inspected for flaws, scum and orientation 6.3 Pinholes are spotted out with suitable filler and taped according to ink type and job specifications
7 Store screen	7.1 Prepared screen is labelled according to enterprise specifications 7.2 Prepared screen is stored in clean, dry environment according to manufacturer or supplier specifications

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.3, 2.1, 2.2, 3.1-3.4, 4.1-4.5, 5.1, 6.1, 7.2	Establishes job requirements from relevant information Identifies correct process from procedural documentation
Writing	7.1	Completes routine labelling associated with production processes and enterprise procedures
Numeracy	1.3, 4.3	Uses simple mathematical calculations to mix chemicals and calculate coating time
Navigate the world of work	1.3, 2.2, 3.3, 4.4, 4.5, 7.1, 7.2	Complies with organisational, legal and regulatory requirements related to own work, with specific reference to safety
Get the work done	1.1, 1.2, 1.4, 2.1, 3.1, 3.2, 3.4, 4.1-4.6, 5.1, 5.2, 6.1- 6.3	Takes responsibility for planning and organising own workload, identifying ways of sequencing and combining elements for efficiency Automatically implements standard procedures for routine decisions Recognises and takes responsibility for addressing predictable problems in familiar work contexts Understands the purposes, specific functions and key features of common digital systems and tools, and operates them effectively to complete routine tasks

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPSCP341 Prepare stencil using direct electronic imaging method	ICPSCP341C Prepare stencil using direct electronic imaging method	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPSCP341 Prepare stencil using direct electronic imaging method

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

safely prepare TWO different screens using direct electronic imaging techniques according to all manufacturer, job, enterprise and health and safety requirements.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

outline the influence that mesh count has on the final printed product

identify the need to have a correctly tensioned screen and the effect of screen tension on screens of various mesh count or grades

identify the degreasing or cleaning techniques that are employed prior to coating the screen

describe the information that is contained in the material safety data sheet (MSDS) for the emulsion

identify pollution and environmental issues that need to be considered when working with emulsions, including the need to work in a safelight area

describe maintenance that is required on the direct projection camera

discuss the kinds of high sensitivity emulsion that are available and state their characteristics, lifespans and areas of use

outline the preparation method for the emulsion used

describe the influence that the length of run and ink used have on the coating technique

discuss the number of coats of emulsion necessary and the best method of coating the screen

identify the best position (horizontal or vertical) for drying the screen to prevent scum and streaking

describe the effect of heat on the emulsion during the drying process

outline the health and safety concerns when exposing the screen

describe the operating features of the direct projection camera

describe the best position on the frame, the registration requirements and the scanning speed and exposure time

summarise inputting information into the computer, manipulation of the image and how to interpret output information

describe the effect of temperature, pressure and period of washing on the emulsion, as well as determining when washing out is complete

describe the post-curing effect on the stencil

outline the main information in the MSDS for a particular blockout

identify the correct ink and stencil for the type of blockout to be used

identify preventive measures required to minimise pinholes

describe the means by which a screen can be identified at a later date

identify required manuals, safety and other documentation and briefly outline the relevant information in each source.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the screen printing field of work and include access to direct electronic imaging equipment.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPSCP351 Prepare machine and drying/curing unit

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to prepare a manual, semi-automatic or automatic machine for printing and set up drying and/or curing units.

It applies to individuals working in the printing and graphic arts industry who may have to set up and operate power-driven or hand-operated screen printing machines. They may have to provide leadership and guidance to others and have some limited responsibility for the output of others.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Screen printing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1 Inspect screen	1.1 Screen frames are identified to determine colour sequence 1.2 Each screen frame is examined for defects and appropriate action taken 1.3 Each screen is taped as necessary 1.4 Screens are inspected against film positives, variations in centring, registration and alignment are noted, and appropriate action is taken 1.5 Screen frame, mesh and stencil are appropriately handled according to manufacturer or supplier specifications to prevent damage and hazards to personnel
2 Maintain and adjust machine	2.1 Machine is inspected and routine user maintenance is carried out according to manufacturer or supplier specifications and enterprise procedures 2.2 Required periodic adjustments and user maintenance items are made at correct times according to manufacturer or supplier specifications and enterprise procedures
3 Install screen frames and dry run machine	3.1 Laysheet is positioned in grippers and side-lay according to manufacturer or supplier specifications 3.2 Image position is established on laysheet 3.3 Screen frame is positioned in screen frame holder 3.4 Registration, alignment and centring are confirmed and screen clamps tightened to ensure no movement of the frame according to manufacturer or supplier specifications 3.5 Machine is run through printing cycle at same time, ensuring that substrate registers in lays and appropriate action is taken
4 Prepare and position flood bar and squeegees	4.1 Flood bar (for semi-automatic and automatic machines) and correct squeegee are assembled according to manufacturer or supplier specifications, ensuring that flood bar is free of nicks and burrs 4.2 Squeegee blade is sharpened according to manufacturer or supplier specifications and considering ink system to be used 4.3 Flood bar (for semi-automatic and automatic machines) and squeegee are positioned according to job specifications with squeegee at correct pre-determined angle 4.4 On and off contact (and peel-off if available) is adjusted to suit ink system and printing speed according to manufacturer or supplier specifications 4.5 Squeegee is correctly adjusted and brought into contact with substrate
5 Set up drying or curing unit	5.1 Belt speed and energy required are set to achieve desired properties and then printing speeds are adjusted accordingly 5.2 Stock is properly stacked at end of dryer

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.5, 2.1, 2.2, 3.1, 3.4, 4.1-4.4	Establishes job requirements from relevant information
Numeracy	4.3, 4.4, 5.1	Uses simple mathematical calculations to determine and adjust resources and equipment
Navigate the world of work	1.5, 2.1, 2.2	Complies with legislative requirements and organisational policies and procedures Considers own role in terms of its contribution to broader goals of the work environment
Get the work done	1.1-1.4, 2.2, 3.1-3.5, 4.1, 4.2, 4.5, 5.2	Understands the purposes, specific functions and key features of common digital systems and tools, and operates them effectively to complete routine tasks, adapting some functions to improve personal efficiency Takes responsibility for planning and organising own workload, identifying ways of sequencing and combining elements for efficiency Automatically implements standard procedures for routine decisions Recognises and takes responsibility for addressing predictable problems in familiar work contexts

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPSCP351 Prepare machine and drying/curing unit	ICPSP351C Prepare machine and drying/curing unit	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPSCP351 Prepare machine and drying/curing unit

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

correctly prepare a machine for printing TWO different jobs by installing the screen frame and squeegee or flood coater and setting up a drying or curing unit to achieve the desired properties, according to manufacturer, job, enterprise and health and safety requirements.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

identify the colour sequence of screens and defects identified when examining the screen and stencil

name the variation between the positive and stencil

outline the health and safety concerns when using drying or curing units

outline the maintenance that is required on this equipment, including the periodic adjustments that are made to the drying or curing units

identify different machine capabilities and characteristics

describe the function of the printing base

describe the position of the lay sheet on the printing base and the image position on the lay sheet

name the type of lay sheet being used

describe the position of the frame in the frame holder, and registering and alignment of the stencil with the image on the lay sheet

outline the checks that are required to maintain register

describe the characteristics of a good squeegee blade or flood coater

discuss the significance of shore hardness of squeegee material and the length of squeegee or flood coater

outline the positioning, fixing and adjustment of the squeegee or flood coater and the relationship of the squeegee to the flood coater

describe the adjustment of on and off contact distance and peel-off requirements of the screen frame

identify the relationship of the machine stroke to off contact or peel-off requirements

outline the adjustments that are required to the unit for and during drying or curing

discuss the effects of temperature on the substrate

identify required manuals, safety and other documentation and briefly outline the relevant information in each source.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the screen printing field of work and include access to special purpose tools, equipment and materials.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPSCP371 Manually produce complex screen prints

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to manually produce three or more colour screen prints.

It applies to individuals working in the printing and graphic arts industry who may have to set up and operate power-driven or hand-operated screen printing machines. They may have to provide leadership and guidance to others and have some limited responsibility for the output of others.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Screen printing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1 Load substrate	1.1 Substrate is checked against job specifications with any irregularities reported and rectified where possible 1.2 Substrate position and stencil registration are adjusted according to job specifications
2 Apply ink to screen	2.1 Ink is applied to screen in quantity required for screen size 2.2 Equipment is kept clean and spills are minimised 2.3 Colour is mixed and ink is checked against job specifications
3 Produce proof print	3.1 Proof print is run off and checked for colour, strength, registration, adhesion, clarity, gloss level, drying or curing, artwork detail and other technical aspects according to job specifications 3.2 Adjustments are made as required 3.3 Appropriate approval to commence production is sought prior to commencement 3.4 Belt speed and energy required are set to achieve desired properties
4 Run job and monitor print quality	4.1 Printing speed production is adjusted to maximise quality and output 4.2 Print quality is continuously evaluated and adjusted as required 4.3 Effects of ink alterations during run are monitored and appropriate action taken according to manufacturer or supplier and job specifications 4.4 Workplace documentation is completed as required 4.5 Curing and drying are constantly monitored and adjusted according to manufacturer or supplier and job specifications
5 Carry out routine user maintenance	5.1 Equipment is lubricated, cleaned and adjusted according to manufacturer or supplier specifications 5.2 Fault conditions are identified and reported according to enterprise procedures
6 Stack production output	6.1 Output is checked for thorough drying or curing before stacking 6.2 Job status and progress are checked against job specifications and any necessary action is taken
7 Finish operation	7.1 Excess ink, screens, squeegees and flood coaters are removed and cleaned according to work health and safety (WHS) requirements and manufacturer or supplier specifications 7.2 Waste materials are disposed of according to manufacturer or supplier specifications, regulatory requirements and enterprise procedures 7.3 Equipment and surrounding areas are cleaned according to manufacturer or supplier specifications and enterprise procedures

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 2.3, 4.3-4.5, 5.1, 6.2, 7.1-7.3	Establishes job requirements from relevant information Identifies correct processes from procedural documentation
Writing	1.1, 4.4, 5.2	Records information relating to outcomes of job requirements Records information relating to machinery problems
Oral Communication	1.1, 3.3	Checks the progress and quality of the job with supervisor
Numeracy	2.1, 3.4, 4.5	Uses simple mathematical calculations to determine and adjust resources and equipment
Navigate the world of work	5.2, 7.1-7.3	Complies with organisational, legal and regulatory requirements related to own work with specific reference to safety
Get the work done	1.1, 1.2, 2.2, 2.3, 3.1, 3.2, 4.1-4.3, 4.5, 5.1, 5.2, 6.1, 6.2	Understands the purposes, specific functions and key features of common digital systems and tools, and operates them effectively to complete routine tasks Takes responsibility for planning and organising own workload, identifying ways of sequencing and combining elements for efficiency Automatically implements standard procedures for routine decisions Recognises and takes responsibility for addressing predictable problems in familiar work contexts

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPSCP371 Manually produce complex screen prints	ICPSP371C Manually produce complex screen prints	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPSCP371 Manually produce complex screen prints

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

demonstrate an ability to find and use information relevant to the task from a variety of information sources

safely produce TWO different three or more colour screen prints manually according to job, manufacturer, enterprise and health and safety requirements.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

outline criteria for selecting the correct substrate for the job

summarise ink and substrate compatibility

describe the characteristics of solvents and ink additives and the best method to determine their compatibility

outline the method that is used for checking the screen, ink, substrate and selection of squeegee prior to printing

describe the routine maintenance that is required on the printing base

explain lay edge on the equipment

describe the correct position, register and process of locking the screen in position

explain off contact distance

describe the selection of a drying or curing system

describe the process for calculating the ideal belt speed for a print run

list the health and safety concerns when producing a manual print

explain the need to condition some substrates

outline the procedure for checking the correct viscosity of ink during the print run and ways of rectifying any problems

outline the evaluation process and maintenance of print quality during the run

describe the procedure for checking and stacking production output

describe the correct method of cleaning squeegees, equipment and the surrounding area

identify required manuals, safety and other documentation and briefly outline the relevant information in each source

describe other sources of available information that are relevant to the job.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the screen printing field of work and include use of cleaning chemicals and manual printing machines.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPSCP373 Semi-automatically produce complex screen prints

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to produce complex screen prints of two or more colours using semi-automatic machines.

It applies to individuals working in the printing and graphic arts industry who may have to set up and operate power-driven or hand-operated screen printing machines. They may have to provide leadership and guidance to others and have some limited responsibility for the output of others.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Screen printing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1 Load substrate	1.1 Substrate is checked against job specifications with any irregularities reported and rectified where possible 1.2 Substrate position and stencil registration are adjusted according to job specifications
2 Apply ink to screen	2.1 Ink is applied to screen in quantity required for screen size 2.2 Equipment is kept clean and spills are minimised 2.3 Colour is mixed and ink is checked against job specifications
3 Produce proof print	3.1 Proof print is run off and checked for colour, strength, registration, adhesion, clarity, gloss level, drying or curing, artwork detail and other technical aspects according to job specifications 3.2 Adjustments are made as required 3.3 Appropriate approval to commence production is sought prior to commencement 3.4 Belt speed and energy required are set to achieve desired properties
4 Run job and monitor print quality	4.1 Printing speed production is adjusted to maximise quality and output 4.2 Print quality is continuously evaluated and adjusted as required 4.3 Effects of ink alterations during run are monitored and appropriate action taken according to manufacturer or supplier and job specifications 4.4 Workplace documentation is completed as required 4.5 Curing and drying are constantly monitored and adjusted according to manufacturer or supplier and job specifications
5 Carry out routine user maintenance	5.1 Equipment is lubricated, cleaned and adjusted according to manufacturer or supplier specifications 5.2 Fault conditions are identified and reported according to enterprise procedures
6 Stack production output	6.1 Output is checked for thorough drying or curing before stacking 6.2 Job status and progress are checked against job specifications and any necessary action is taken
7 Shut down machine	7.1 Excess ink, screens, squeegees and flood coaters are removed and cleaned according to work health and safety (WHS) requirements and manufacturer or supplier specifications 7.2 Waste materials are disposed of according to manufacturer or supplier specifications, regulatory requirements and enterprise procedures 7.3 Equipment and surrounding areas are cleaned according to manufacturer or supplier specifications and enterprise procedures

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 2.3, 3.1, 4.3-4.5, 5.1, 6.2, 7.1-7.3	Establishes job requirements from relevant information Identifies correct process from procedural documentation
Writing	1.1, 4.4, 5.2	Records information relating to job outcomes and problems with machinery
Oral Communication	1.1, 3.3	Checks the progress and quality of the job with supervisor
Numeracy	2.1, 3.4, 4.5	Uses simple mathematical calculations to determine and adjust resources and equipment
Navigate the world of work	5.2, 7.1-7.3	Complies with organisational, legal and regulatory requirements related to own work with specific reference to safety
Get the work done	1.1, 1.2, 2.2-2.4, 3.1, 3.2, 4.1-4.3, 4.5, 5.1, 5.2, 6.1, 6.2	Understands the purposes, specific functions and key features of common digital systems and tools, and operates them effectively to complete routine tasks Takes responsibility for planning and organising own workload, identifying ways of sequencing and combining elements for efficiency Automatically implements standard procedures for routine decisions Recognises and takes responsibility for addressing predictable problems in familiar work contexts

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPSCP373 Semi-automatically produce complex screen prints	ICPSP373 Semi-automatically produce complex screen prints	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPSCP373 Semi-automatically produce complex screen prints

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

safely produce TWO complex prints of two or more colours containing line and tone using a semi-automatic machine according to job, manufacturer, enterprise and health and safety requirements.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

describe the criteria for selecting the correct substrate for the job

discuss the selection of ink and solvents and substrate compatibility

describe necessary machine adjustments prior to setting up and the maintenance required prior to the commencement of printing

outline the procedure for checking the screen sequence of colours, ink, substrate and squeegee or flood coater prior to printing

describe the function of the printing base and maintenance that is required

summarise how to determine the lay edge and gripper or take-off edge of the substrate

discuss the correct positioning, registering and process for locking the screen in position

describe the selection of the squeegee or shore hardness and flood coater to be used

explain the need to adjust the off contact or peel-off requirements of the screen

outline the choice of belt speed and the impact of environmental conditions on the unit and the output capacity

discuss health and safety concerns when using a semi-automatic machine, chemicals and infra-red or UV curing units

outline the process for monitoring and rectifying ink viscosity during a production run

describe the process of evaluation and maintenance of the print quality during the run

discuss the ideal printing rate for this substrate on this machine

describe the stacking and handling of production output

discuss the importance of determining the exact print count and recording production details on the job sheet

describe the health hazards associated with inks and solvents

outline the correct method of cleaning squeegees or flood coater machine and surrounding area and removing ink without damaging the screen

describe the maintenance that is required on the machine after printing

identify required manuals, safety and other documentation and briefly outline the relevant information in each source.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the screen printing field of work and include access to cleaning chemicals and semi-automatic printing machines.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPSCP374 Operate a semi-automatic screen printing machine

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to produce a print on a range of common substrates, using semi-automatic equipment and screening techniques.

It applies to individuals working in the printing and graphic arts industry who may have to set up and operate power-driven or hand-operated screen printing machines. They may have to provide leadership and guidance to others and have some limited responsibility for the output of others.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Screen printing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1 Identify job requirements	1.1 Substrate is checked against job specifications with any irregularities reported and rectified where possible 1.2 Ink is checked against job specifications 1.3 Stencil is checked against job specifications
2 Prepare machine to print	2.1 Substrate position and stencil registration are adjusted according to job specifications 2.2 Ink is applied to screen in quantity required for screen size 2.3 Equipment is kept clean and spills are minimised
3 Produce proof print	3.1 Proof print is run off and checked for colour, strength, registration, adhesion, clarity, gloss level, drying or curing, artwork detail and other technical aspects according to job specifications 3.2 Adjustments are made according to product and machine specifications 3.3 Belt speed and energy required are set to achieve desired curing or drying properties 3.4 Appropriate approval to commence production is sought prior to commencement
4 Run job and monitor print quality	4.1 Printing speed production is adjusted to maximise quality and output 4.2 Print quality is continuously evaluated and adjusted as required 4.3 Effects of ink alterations during run are monitored and any discrepancy is notified according to enterprise procedures 4.4 Workplace documentation is completed as required 4.5 Curing and drying are constantly monitored and adjusted according to manufacturer or supplier and job specifications
5 Carry out routine user maintenance	5.1 Equipment is cleaned according to enterprise procedures 5.2 Fault conditions are identified and reported according to enterprise procedures
6 Stack production output	6.1 Output is checked for thorough drying or curing before stacking 6.2 Job identification is labelled and recorded 6.3 Job status and progress are checked against job specifications and any necessary action is taken
7 Conduct shutdown of production process	7.1 Material is transferred to correct destination in safe manner 7.2 Excess ink, screens, squeegees and flood coaters are removed and cleaned according to work health and safety (WHS) requirements and manufacturer or supplier specifications 7.3 Waste materials and chemicals are disposed of according to manufacturer or supplier specifications, regulatory requirements and enterprise procedures 7.4 Equipment and surrounding areas are cleaned according to manufacturer or supplier specifications and enterprise procedures 7.5 Tools and equipment are stored and maintained according to manufacturer or supplier to ensure ease of access and operator safety 7.6 Correct procedure for dealing with spilt chemicals is demonstrated according to WHS requirements

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1-1.3, 4.4, 4.5, 6.2, 6.3, 7.3-7.5	Establishes job requirements and correct processes from relevant information
Writing	1.1, 4.3, 4.4, 5.2, 6.2	Records information relating to job outcomes and machinery problems
Oral Communication	1.1, 3.4	Checks the progress and quality of the job with supervisor
Numeracy	2.2, 3.3, 4.1, 4.5	Uses simple mathematical calculations to determine drying time and optimum belt speed
Navigate the world of work	4.5, 5.1, 5.3, 6.2, 7.1-7.6	Complies with organisational, legal and regulatory requirements related to own work with specific reference to safety
Get the work done	1.1-1.3, 2.1-2.4, 3.1, 3.2, 4.2, 4.3, 4.5, 5.1, 5.2, 6.1, 6.3	Understands the purposes, specific functions and key features of common digital systems and tools and operates them effectively to complete routine tasks Takes responsibility for planning and organising own workload, identifying ways of sequencing and combining elements for efficiency Automatically implements standard procedures for routine decisions Recognises and takes responsibility for addressing predictable problems in familiar work contexts

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPSCP374 Operate a semi-automatic screen printing machine	ICPSP374C Operate a semi-automatic screen printing machine	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPSCP374 Operate a semi-automatic screen printing machine

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

complete TWO different jobs on a semi- automatic machine according to relevant job, manufacturer, enterprise and health and safety requirements.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

outline the process for recording and reporting any substrate irregularities

describe the process for checking ink compatibility and stencil compatibility

discuss limitations when setting the substrate position and the precautions required when applying ink to the screen

describe the products and materials that are used to keep the equipment clean

describe health and safety concerns when producing a semi-automatic print

outline the quality control devices that are used to check the print standards and variables or tolerances to note when checking the print against the proof

describe the relationship between ink film thickness and ink density and acceptable maximum and minimum ink densities

discuss the properties that determine belt speed and heat unit settings for curing

identify the person responsible for final approval before commencing the production run

outline the process for quality inspection during printing and the frequency of inspection

discuss the importance of monitoring ink during the print run

discuss the purpose of workplace documentation

outline health and safety concerns in relationship to monitoring drying or curing systems

describe the maintenance that should be carried out on this machine and the importance of reporting faulty equipment

describe stacking, storing and handling processes and the importance of labelling and recording processes

describe the health and safety practices that must be adhered to when reclaiming screens

describe the importance of keeping equipment and surrounding areas clean, including the cleaning of screens and squeegees

describe the correct procedures for disposing of liquid waste

outline the processes for storing screens to minimise damage

identify required manuals, safety and other documentation and briefly outline the relevant information in each source.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the screen printing field of work and include access to cleaning chemicals and semi-automatic screen printing machines.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPSCP375 Automatically produce complex screen prints

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to produce complex screen prints of two or more colours using automatic printing machines.

It applies to individuals working in the printing and graphic arts industry who may have to set up and operate power-driven or hand-operated screen printing machines. They may have to provide leadership and guidance to others and have some limited responsibility for the output of others.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Screen printing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1 Load substrate	1.1 Substrate is checked against job specifications with any irregularities reported and rectified where possible 1.2 Substrate position and stencil registration are adjusted according to job specifications
2 Apply ink to screen	2.1 Ink is applied to screen in quantity required for screen size 2.2 Equipment is kept clean and spills are minimised 2.3 Colour is mixed and ink is checked against job specifications 2.4 Feeder is set and adjusted to suit substrate
3 Produce proof print	3.1 Proof print is run off and checked for colour, strength, registration, adhesion, clarity, gloss level, drying or curing, artwork detail and other technical aspects according to job specifications 3.2 Adjustments are made according to product and machine specifications 3.3 Appropriate approval to commence production is sought prior to commencement 3.4 Belt speed and energy required are set to achieve desired properties and printing speeds are adjusted to suit
4 Run job and monitor print quality	4.1 Printing speed production is adjusted to maximise quality and output 4.2 Print quality is continuously evaluated and adjusted as required 4.3 Effects of ink alterations during run are monitored and appropriate action taken according to manufacturer or supplier and job specifications 4.4 Workplace documentation is completed as required 4.5 Curing and drying are constantly monitored and adjusted according to manufacturer or supplier and job specifications
5 Carry out routine user maintenance	5.1 Equipment is lubricated, cleaned and adjusted according to manufacturer or supplier specifications 5.2 Faults are identified and reported according to enterprise procedures
6 Handle production output	6.1 Output is checked for thorough drying or curing before stacking 6.2 Job status and progress are checked against job specifications and any necessary action is taken
7 Shut down machine	7.1 Excess ink, screens, squeegees and flood coaters are removed and cleaned according to work health and safety (WHS) requirements and manufacturer or supplier specifications 7.2 Waste materials are disposed of according to manufacturer or supplier specifications, regulatory requirements and enterprise procedures 7.3 Equipment and surrounding areas are cleaned according to manufacturer or supplier specifications and enterprise procedures

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 1.2, 2.3, 3.1, 3.2, 4.3-4.5, 5.1, 6.2, 7.2, 7.3	Establishes job requirements from relevant information Identifies correct processes from procedural documentation
Writing	1.1, 3.3, 4.4, 5.2	Records information relating to outcomes of job requirements and machinery problems
Oral Communication	1.1, 3.3	Checks the progress and quality of the job with supervisor
Numeracy	2.1, 3.4, 4.1	Uses basic mathematical formula to calculate required resources and determine measurements and adjustments to equipment and settings
Navigate the world of work	5.2, 7.1-7.3	Complies with organisational, legal and regulatory requirements related to own work with specific reference to safety
Get the work done	1.1, 1.2, 2.2-2.4, 3.1, 3.2, 4.1-4.3, 4.5, 5.1, 5.2, 6.1, 6.2	Understands the purposes, specific functions and key features of common digital systems and tools, and operates them effectively to complete routine tasks Takes responsibility for planning and organising own workload, identifying ways of sequencing and combining elements for efficiency Automatically implements standard procedures for routine decisions Recognises and takes responsibility for addressing predictable problems in familiar work contexts

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPSCP375 Automatically produce complex screen prints	ICPSP375C Automatically produce complex screen prints	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPSCP375 Automatically produce complex screen prints

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

produce TWO different complex prints of more than two colours, containing line and tone, using an automatic machine according to job, manufacturer, enterprise and health and safety requirements

demonstrate use of computerised control, monitoring and data entry systems if available and appropriate.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

explain any machine adjustments required prior to setting up

describe machine and feeder maintenance required prior to printing

describe machine and feeder adjustments required to allow for characteristics of the substrate, including the need to prepare substrate when loading the feeder

outline the procedure to confirm the screen sequence of colour, ink, substrate and squeegee or flood coater prior to printing

describe the system for setting the feed board and loading substrate and the adjustment of the stock feed system

describe the method for ensuring the substrate is fed into the machine at the required production speed without damage, distortion or variation in position

outline the criteria for selecting the right substrate for the job and the ink and substrate compatibility

describe the characteristics of solvents and ink additives and compatibility to this ink system

explain the process for the correct positioning, registering and screen locking, and outline correct positioning of the squeegee or flood coater

describe factors that contribute to the adjustment requirements of the frame

explain the shore hardness of the squeegee blade and the process of selection

explain the relationship between ink deposit, squeegee speed and belt speed and temperature of the drying or curing unit

explain the health and safety requirements when working with infra-red or UV curing units

summarise routine maintenance to be undertaken on this drying or curing unit

outline the ink drying or ink curing characteristics of different substrates

explain the health and safety concerns when using an automatic machine

describe the assessment of colour to ensure it conforms to job specifications and other important checks to be completed on the initial proof run before continuing

describe the ongoing evaluation of print quality and substrate feeding during the run

identify ideal printing speeds for different substrates

describe the effect of humidity on the substrate

outline the ongoing maintenance of the correct viscosity of ink during the run and methods to determine if print is dried or cured before handling

describe the handling of the output to prevent offsetting of ink, blocking, sweating or rewetting of ink

describe the effect that weather conditions could have on output capacity

explain the importance of determining the exact output count and recording production details on the job sheet

describe the health hazards associated with ink or solvents

outline the correct procedure for removing the ink without damaging the screen

outline the correct method of cleaning squeegees or flood coaters, machine and surrounding area and the maintenance that is required on the machine after printing is completed

identify required manuals, safety and other documentation and briefly outline the relevant information in each source.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the screen printing field of work and include access to cleaning chemicals and automatic printing machines.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPSCP376 Operate an automatic screen printing machine

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to produce a print on a range of common substrates, using automatic equipment and screening techniques.

It applies to individuals working in the printing and graphic arts industry who may have to set up and operate power-driven or hand-operated screen printing machines. They may have to provide leadership and guidance to others and have some limited responsibility for the output of others.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Screen printing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1 Identify job requirements	1.1 Substrate is checked against job specifications with any irregularities reported and rectified where possible 1.2 Ink is checked against job specifications 1.3 Artwork is checked against job specifications
2 Prepare machine to print	2.1 Correct film and emulsion exposure is set and correctly completed according to job specifications 2.2 Substrate position and screen alignment are set according to job specifications 2.3 Ink is applied to screen in quantity required for screen size 2.4 Equipment is kept clean and spills are minimised
3 Produce proof print	3.1 Proof print is run off and checked for colour, strength, registration, adhesion, clarity, gloss level, drying or curing, artwork detail and other technical aspects according to job specifications 3.2 Adjustments are made according to product and machine specifications 3.3 Belt speed and temperature required are set to achieve desired curing or drying properties 3.4 Appropriate approval to commence production is sought prior to commencement
4 Run job and monitor print quality	4.1 Printing speed production is adjusted to maximise quality and output 4.2 Print quality is continuously evaluated and adjusted as required 4.3 Effects of ink alterations during run are monitored and appropriate action taken according to manufacturer or supplier and job specifications 4.4 Workplace documentation is completed as required 4.5 Curing and drying are constantly monitored and adjusted according to manufacturer or supplier and job specifications
5 Carry out routine user maintenance	5.1 Equipment is cleaned according to enterprise procedures 5.2 Lights are replaced as necessary and alerts or alarms are tested 5.3 Faults are identified and reported according to enterprise procedures
6 Stack production output	6.1 Output is checked for thorough drying or curing before stacking 6.2 Job is labelled and recorded according to enterprise procedures 6.3 Job status and progress are checked against job specifications and any necessary action is taken
7 Conduct shutdown of the production process	7.1 Material is transferred to correct destination in safe manner 7.2 Excess ink, screens, squeegees and flood coaters are removed and cleaned according to work health and safety (WHS) requirements and manufacturer or supplier specifications 7.3 Waste materials are disposed of according to manufacturer or supplier specifications, regulatory requirements and enterprise procedures 7.4 Equipment and surrounding areas are cleaned according to manufacturer or supplier specifications and enterprise procedures 7.5 Tools and equipment are stored and maintained according to manufacturer specifications to ensure ease of access and operator safety 7.6 Correct procedure for dealing with spilt chemicals is demonstrated according to WHS requirements

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1-1.3, 2.1, 2.2, 3.1, 3.2, 4.3, 4.5, 6.3, 7.2, 7.4, 7.5	Establishes job requirements from relevant information Identifies correct processes from procedural documentation
Writing	1.1, 3.4, 4.4, 5.3, 6.2	Records information relating to outcomes of job requirements and machinery problems
Oral Communication	1.1, 3.4	Checks the progress and quality of the job with supervisor
Numeracy	2.1, 2.3, 3.2, 3.3, 4.1, 4.5	Uses simple mathematical calculations to determine job requirements and equipment settings
Navigate the world of work	4.5, 5.1, 5.3, 6.2, 7.1-7.6	Appreciates the implications of legal and regulatory responsibilities related to own work with specific reference to safety Considers own role in terms of its contribution to broader goals of the work environment
Get the work done	1.1-1.3, 2.1, 2.2, 2.4, 3.1, 3.2, 4.2, 4.3, 4.5, 5.1, 5.2, 6.1, 6.3	Understands the purposes, specific functions and key features of common digital systems and tools, and operates them effectively to complete routine tasks Takes responsibility for planning and organising own workload, identifying ways of sequencing and combining elements for efficiency Automatically implements standard procedures for routine decisions Recognises and takes responsibility for addressing predictable problems in familiar work contexts

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPSCP376 Operate an automatic screen printing machine	ICPSP376C Operate an automatic screen printing machine	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPSCP376 Operate an automatic screen printing machine

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

complete TWO different jobs on an automatic printing machine according to manufacturer, job, enterprise and health and safety requirements.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

outline the process of recording and reporting any substrate irregularities

describe the checks used for ink compatibility and stencil compatibility

describe the process of setting the substrate position

name the products and materials used to keep the equipment clean

discuss health and safety concerns when applying ink to the screen and producing an automated print run

describe the quality control devices that are used to check the print standards and acceptable variables or tolerances when checking the print against the proof

describe the relationship between ink film thickness and ink density, and the maximum and minimum densities allowed

outline the properties that determine belt speed and heat unit setting for curing

name the person responsible for the final approval before commencing the production run

describe required quality inspection during the printing process and discuss the frequency of these inspections

outline the purpose of workplace documentation

discuss health and safety concerns in relation to monitoring drying or curing systems

outline the maintenance that should be carried out on the machine and the importance of reporting faulty equipment

describe stacking, storing and handling processes and the importance of labelling and recording processes

outline necessary health and safety practices when reclaiming screens

describe the importance of keeping equipment and surrounding areas clean, including the cleaning of screens and squeegees

describe the correct procedures for disposing of liquid waste

outline the process for storing screens to minimise damage

identify required manuals, safety and other documentation and briefly outline the relevant information in each source.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the screen printing field of work and include access to cleaning chemicals and automatic screen printing machines.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPSCP382 Produce computer image for screen printing

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to generate electronic art to a supplied layout film positive or computer cut stencil.

It applies to individuals working in the printing and graphic arts industry who may have to set up and operate power-driven or hand-operated screen printing machines. They may have to provide leadership and guidance to others and have some limited responsibility for the output of others.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Screen printing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1 Prepare for scanning	1.1 Original is scaled to conform to job specifications 1.2 Original is assessed to determine scanner settings 1.3 Original is cleaned and correctly mounted according to job specifications 1.4 Correct settings are selected for original to be scanned
2 Scan and check image	2.1 Original is scanned according to quality requirements 2.2 Quality of scanned image is checked against job specifications 2.3 Appropriate software is applied for any processing of text if necessary
3 Prepare combining strategy	3.1 Required data from electronic files is accessed 3.2 Appropriate application is opened to undertake combining tasks 3.3 Required fonts are accessed according to job specifications
4 Combine data	4.1 Page layout size is created according to job specifications 4.2 Elements are placed in page according to job specifications 4.3 Trapping (spread and chokes) is applied according to job specifications 4.4 Step and repeat function is accessed according to job specifications 4.5 Elements are stepped according to job specifications 4.6 Output menu is configured according to job specifications
5 Access and maintain output device	5.1 Output devices are set up and maintained according to manufacturer or supplier specifications and enterprise procedures 5.2 Suitable material is identified and loaded into output device
6 Produce image	6.1 System is activated to initiate output according to job specifications 6.2 Quality is monitored according to enterprise procedures

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 1.3, 2.2, 2.3, 3.3, 4.1-4.6, 5.1	Evaluates and establishes job requirements and correct processes from relevant information and instructions
Numeracy	1.1	Uses basic mathematical formula to calculate scaling measurements according to job requirements
Navigate the world of work	5.1, 6.2	Monitors adherence to organisational and enterprise policies and procedures and considers own role in terms of its contribution to the broader goals of the work environment
Get the work done	1.2-1.4, 2.1, 2.3, 3.1-3.3, 4.2-4.6, 5.2, 6.1	Understands the purposes, specific functions and key features of common digital systems and tools, and operates them effectively to complete routine tasks Takes responsibility for planning and organising own workload, identifying ways of sequencing and combining elements for efficiency Automatically implements standard procedures for routine decisions Recognises and takes responsibility for addressing predictable problems in familiar work contexts

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPSCP382 Produce computer image for screen printing	ICPSP382C Produce computer image for screen printing	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPSCP382 Produce computer image for screen printing

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

correctly produce TWO separate images on film or stencil according to manufacturer, job, enterprise and work health and safety (WHS) requirements.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

describe the tolerance that is allowed when scaling the original

name the common scanner dots per inch for graphic line images

describe the use of original angling and the resolutions that are used in scanning

name the format that the scan is saved in

describe how to retain the format when optical character recognition scanning and how to access external files

name the most appropriate software for this task

outline the checks required to maintain quality standards

outline the procedure used if required files are not readily accessible

describe the type of elements that can be used, the application of trapping and the amount of step and repeats in a job

list the types of output devices used in screen printing and describe the first step in configuring the output menu for the device used

discuss the importance of saving the file prior to sending it to the output device.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the screen printing field of work and include access to:

a computer and scanner and appropriate software original images

workplace documents.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPSCP383 Prepare film for complex screen printing

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to prepare film for complex screen printing using appropriate equipment and Raster Image Processor (RIP) software.

It applies to individuals working in the printing and graphic arts industry who may have to set up and operate power-driven or hand-operated screen printing machines. They may have to provide leadership and guidance to others and have some limited responsibility for the output of others.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Screen printing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1 Identify job requirements	1.1 Image specifications are checked according to job requirements and enterprise procedures 1.2 Orientation is checked against job specifications and adjusted if required 1.3 Resolution or dots per inch (DPI) is determined for template creation
2 Prepare and operate equipment	2.1 Scanner and computer is selected, turned on and scanner glass cleaned 2.2 Scanner software is selected and opened and correct settings made according to job requirements 2.3 Previews are made, image is selected, finished scan completed and image adjusted as required 2.4 Image format is determined and saved to storage device
3 Select imaging software	3.1 Software is selected, scan is opened and separations are produced on individual layers according to job specifications 3.2 Colours are excluded as required on separation layers 3.3 Stroke is applied for bleed according to printing equipment 3.4 Separation layers are coloured for RIP software 3.5 Image format is determined according to RIP software requirements 3.6 Supplied finished artwork or separation is checked for output capability
4 Select and operate appropriate equipment	4.1 Image setter or dye printer is selected, turned on and checked, and heads cleaned prior to outputting images 4.2 RIP software is selected and opened, and software settings checked and set according to output specifications 4.3 Nesting is checked to ensure no film is wasted 4.4 Image output is evaluated against job specifications and measuring, including checking with reflection densitometer valve 4.5 Film is handled according to manufacturer specifications 4.6 Output device is closed down according to manufacturer recommendations
5 Assess job specifications	5.1 Requirements of printing process and job specification are assessed 5.2 Quality of job elements, including resolution or DPI, is specified according to client requirements 5.3 Films, dye cartridges, their qualities and process requirements are determined 5.4 Stock levels are checked and maintained according to job specifications 5.5 Copy is checked and assessed according to job specifications
6 Prepare and operate equipment	6.1 Scanner and computer is selected and artwork or copy is placed squarely in scanner 6.2 Scanner software is selected and opened and correct settings are made according to job requirements 6.3 Previews are made, images selected, finished scan completed and image adjusted as required 6.4 Image format is determined and saved to storage device
7 Select and use appropriate imaging software	7.1 Software is selected, scan is opened using layers and software tools as required, and separations are provided on individual layers according to job specifications 7.2 Colours are excluded as required on separation layers 7.3 Separate layers are coloured for specific RIP software requirements 7.4 Image, layers or separations are manually nested, if required, in accordance with film output device size 7.5 Image format is determined according to RIP software requirements and saved to storage device 7.6 Supplied finished artwork or separations are checked for output suitability

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 1.2, 2.2, 3.1, 4.2, 4.4-4.6, 5.1, 5.2, 5.4, 5.5	Evaluates and establishes job requirements from relevant information Identifies correct process from manufacturer or supplier instructions
Numeracy	1.3, 7.4	Uses basic mathematical formula to calculate measurements and adjustments to equipment and settings
Navigate the world of work	1.1	Monitors adherence to organisational policies and procedures
Get the work done	1.2, 1.3, 2.1-2.4, 3.1-3.6, 4.1-4.4, 5.1, 5.3, 5.4, 6.1-6.4, 7.1-7.6	Understands the purposes, specific functions and key features of common digital systems and tools, and operates them effectively to complete routine tasks Takes responsibility for planning and organising own workload, identifying ways of sequencing and combining elements for efficiency Automatically implements standard procedures for routine decisions Recognises and takes responsibility for addressing predictable problems in familiar work contexts

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPSCP383 Prepare film for complex screen printing	ICPSP383A Prepare film for complex screen printing	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPSCP383 Prepare film for complex screen printing

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

prepare film for TWO different jobs involving a variety of image effects, according to manufacturer, job and enterprise requirements

correctly operate appropriate equipment and software, including Raster Image Processor (RIP) software, to meet TWO job specifications.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

identify image specifications, orientation and the resolutions or dots per inch (DPI) determination

explain the scanner settings, including adjusting the brightness or contrast of the image

discuss the exclusion of colours and bleed for a particular job and the purpose of colouring separation layers

outline the process for selecting ink and colour identification

explain the common file format when using RIP software and the settings that must be checked prior to ripping

explain the correct procedures for handling film

outline the nesting requirements of particular jobs and the output suitability prior to producing separations

outline the correct output device and the regular checks and maintenance that must be performed on an image setter or dye printer\

outline the procedures used for evaluating the output film to ensure it conforms to job specifications.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the screen printing field of work and include access to:

a computer and scanner and RIP software

workplace documentation

job specifications

enterprise procedures.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPSUP120 Pack product

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to safely and correctly pack basic printed or paper product without damage.

It applies to individuals who perform a range of mainly routine tasks in various sectors of the printing and graphic arts industry, using limited practical skills and fundamental knowledge in a defined context. They generally work under direct supervision.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Support

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Assess final product	1.1 Finished job is collected/received and checked against job specifications according to enterprise procedures 1.2 Defects, irregularities and discrepancies are identified and action taken according to enterprise procedures 1.3 Fanning, knock up and splitting of product is performed safely and efficiently to ensure ease of use in next stage
2. Pack product	2.1 Wrapping and packaging materials are prepared according to enterprise procedures 2.2 Product is packaged to specification 2.3 Packaged goods are checked, weighed and labelled according to delivery instructions and enterprise procedures
3. Prepare stock for next phase	3.1 Product is stacked onto pallets in a predetermined pattern that will stop the product falling or being damaged 3.2 If required, the pallet is wrapped and moved safely to another location in predetermined form as appropriate to product size and type 3.3 Documentation associated with tasks is accurately completed according to enterprise procedures

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 2.3, 3.3	Recognises text within job specifications and follows written instructions
Writing	2.3, 3.3	Completes relevant documentation associated with tasks
Numeracy	2.3	Uses simple mathematical techniques to calculate weight and size of packaged goods
Navigate the world of work	1.1-1.3, 2.1, 2.3, 3.3	Recognises and follows organisational and legislative requirements associated with own role
Get the work done	1.1-1.3, 2.2, 2.3, 3.1, 3.2	Follows pre-determined, sequenced plans for tasks with more than one step Follows clear, step-by-step instructions or procedures to address a small set of identified, routine problems directly relevant to own role

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPSUP120 Pack product	ICPSU120C Pack product	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPSUP120 Pack product

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

prepare and pack TWO lots of printed or other paper product following correct procedures, and job and workplace specifications.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

outline how to safely operate wrapping equipment and/or use wrapping and packing materials

explain how to decide on appropriate methods and types of packaging

explain how the type of transport or destination have a bearing on the wrapping and packing method

explain methods used to determine number of units to be wrapped in each parcel

explain the documents that must accompany packed product and the records that are needed.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the Support field of work and include access to resources and product to pack.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPSUP201 Prepare, load and unload reels and cores on and off machine

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to load and unload reels and cores on and off machines.

It applies to individuals who perform a range of mainly routine tasks in various sectors of the printing and graphic arts industry, and use limited practical skills and fundamental knowledge in a defined context. They generally work under direct supervision.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Support

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Prepare reels and cores	1.1 Faulty material is visually identified and removed according to enterprise procedures 1.2 Substrate is positioned in correct unwind direction 1.3 Substrate is spliced/joined according to job requirements 1.4 Reel cores are selected or prepared to meet work health and safety (WHS) requirements and job specifications
2. Load reels and cores onto machine	2.1 Reels are loaded according to WHS requirements and manufacturer’s and enterprise procedures and specifications 2.2 Reel cores are loaded to meet job specifications 2.3 Area around machine is cleaned during and on completion of loading
3. Unload reels off machine	3.1 Reels are unloaded according to WHS requirements and manufacturer’s and enterprise procedures and specifications 3.2 Reels are prepared (stripped, stacked, wrapped, labelled) for next process according to manufacturer’s and enterprise procedures and specifications 3.3 Reels are stored according to manufacturer’s and enterprise procedures and specifications

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 1.3, 1.4, 2.1, 2.2, 3.1-3.3	Recognises text within job specifications and follows written instructions
Navigate the world of work	1.4, 2.1, 3.1-3.3	Recognises and follows organisational and legislative requirements associated with own role
Get the work done	1.1-1.4, 2.1-2.3, 3.1-3.3	Follows pre-determined, sequenced plans for tasks with more than one step Follows clear, step-by-step instructions or procedures to address a small set of identified, routine problems directly relevant to own role

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPSUP201 Prepare, load and unload reels and cores on and off machine	ICPSU201C Prepare, load and unload reels and cores on and off machine	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPSUP201 Prepare, load and unload reels and cores on and off machine

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

identify all stop and safety controls on the machine

correctly load and unload reels and cores on and off machines while maintaining health and safety standards

prepare, load and unload at least TWO wide or narrow reels and cores, demonstrating both manual and either semi-automatic or automatic splicing, according to job specifications (both tapes and adhesive splicing mechanisms must be demonstrated).

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

identify health and safety factors relating to manual handling of reels as well as eliminating potential dangers by ensuring correct placement of all nip points, guards and safety devices on relevant machines

describe location of machine manuals, safety and other documentation relevant to this task and outline information included in them

explain techniques that could be used to:

combat distorted reels and cores

join reels to the web

identify reel grain direction

manually handle reels

prepare and load selected reels

unload reels off the machine for further processing

identify faulty reels and cores

summarise how to determine:

information that can be obtained from the reel label

characteristics of reels

features that indicate a reel is faulty

position of reels on the unwind unit

faults created by reels being unloaded incorrectly

preparations to consider for the next operation.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the Support field of work and include access to a printing or converting machine.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPSUP202 Prepare, load and unload product on and off machine

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to prepare, load and unload product on and off machines according to work health and safety (WHS) requirements and manufacturer/supplier’s specifications with minimum downtime.

This unit applies to individuals who provide production, corrugating and mail house support across various sectors of the printing and graphic arts industry. They use limited practical skills and fundamental knowledge in a defined context, and generally work under direct supervision.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Support

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Prepare product	1.1 Job sheets or equivalent are interpreted correctly 1.2 Product is located and prepared to meet job specifications 1.3 Product is positioned correctly on the machine to meet job specifications 1.4 Faulty product is visually identified and removed according to WHS requirements and enterprise procedures
2. Load product onto machine	2.1 Product is loaded according to WHS requirements and manufacturer’s and enterprise procedures and specifications 2.2 Area around machine is cleaned during and on completion of loading
3. Unload product off machine	3.1 Product is unloaded according to WHS requirements and manufacturer’s and enterprise procedures and specifications 3.2 Product is prepared (hand-stripped, stacked, wrapped, labelled) for next process according to manufacturer’s and enterprise procedures and specifications 3.3 Product is stored according to manufacturer’s and enterprise procedures and specifications

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1-1.4, 2.1, 3.1-3.3,	Recognises text within job specifications and follows written instructions
Writing	1.1, 3.2	Records key information related to outcomes of the job
Numeracy	1.1, 1.2, 3.2	Uses simple mathematical calculations and arranges sequential numerical information
Navigate the world of work	1.4, 2.1, 3.1-3.3	Recognises and follows organisational and legislative requirements associated with own role
Get the work done	1.2-1.4, 2.2, 3.2, 3.3	Follows pre-determined, sequenced plans for tasks with more than one step Follows clear, step-by-step instructions or procedures to address a small set of identified, routine problems directly relevant to own role

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPSUP202 Prepare, load and unload product on and off machine	ICPSU202C Prepare, load and unload product on and off machine	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPSUP202 Prepare, load and unload product on and off machine

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

correctly prepare, load and unload product on and off machines according to health and safety requirements and manufacturer’s/supplier’s specifications with minimum downtime

prepare, load and unload product on and off any ONE appropriate machine incorporating specific enterprise requirements; manual techniques; fanning, turning, jogging (where appropriate) and stacking; to job and workplace specifications.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

outline information that can be obtained from the package label

describe benefits of fanning sheets prior to stacking or loading

identify elements of a correctly knocked up stack

describe conditions that cause a stack to be become uneven

list techniques to combat distorted stacks

outline techniques to ensure the stack is knocked up correctly

identify health and safety concerns relating to manual handling of substrates as well as unloading sheets off the machine

explain how watermarks are identified in substrates and how to position them correctly

describe different characteristics of coated and uncoated stocks

outline faults created by substrates being unloaded incorrectly

identify the grain direction of a substrate

explain how to prepare and load selected substrates

demonstrate knowledge of correct manual handling of the substrate

explain how to unload sheets off the machine

describe procedures for turning substrates

locate machine manuals, safety and other documentation relevant to this task, and outline the information included in them.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the Support field of work and include access to a printing or converting machine.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPSUP203 Prepare and maintain the work area

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to undertake basic housekeeping functions, handle chemicals and liquid waste in the workplace, and prepare and maintain the work area according to work health and safety (WHS) and enterprise procedures.

It applies to individuals who perform a range of mainly routine tasks in various sectors of the printing and graphic arts industry, using limited practical skills and fundamental knowledge in a defined context. They generally work under direct supervision.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Support

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Perform general cleaning duties	1.1 Requirements for cleaning duties are identified 1.2 Personal safety equipment, where needed, is selected and used according to WHS and enterprise procedures 1.3 Appropriate cleaning equipment and chemicals/detergents for specific tasks are determined, prepared and mixed to manufacturer’s specifications and WHS procedures 1.4 Procedures for handling, storage and correct disposal of cleaning liquids are carried out according to enterprise, WHS and EPA specifications 1.5 Cleaning is carried out to WHS and enterprise requirements
2. Maintain supplies of materials	2.1 Requests are received, where relevant, and tasks are confirmed and organised according to specific procedures 2.2 Tools and equipment are identified, stored and maintained according to manufacturer’s recommendations to ensure ease of access and operator safety 2.3 Appropriate equipment for transferring material or equipment is identified and organised, where relevant 2.4 Material or equipment is loaded and unloaded using suitable equipment (other than forklift) according to materials handling requirements, safe work practices and correct manual handling techniques 2.5 Material is transferred to correct destination in a safe manner
3. Store and retrieve artwork, information, used plates and film	3.1 Inventory control procedures are followed to ensure correct filing and retrieval of artwork, information, used plates and film 3.2 Artwork and other materials are stored and retrieved according to enterprise procedures to ensure preservation
4. Handle chemicals and liquid waste	4.1 Material safety data sheets are used to identify safe chemical handling procedures 4.2 Chemicals and liquid waste are handled according to manufacturer’s specifications and enterprise WHS requirements 4.3 Correct procedure for dealing with spilt chemicals is demonstrated according to WHS requirements

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.2, 1.3, 1.5, 2.1, 2.2, 3.2, 4.1, 4.2	Recognises and interprets textual information from a range of sources to determine job requirements
Numeracy	1.3	Uses simple mathematical techniques to calculate weights of materials
Navigate the world of work	1.2-1.5, 2.4, 2.5, 4.2, 4.3	Recognises and follows organisational and legislative requirements associated with own role
Interact with others	2.1	Identifies main information from oral and written communication and generally responds appropriately
Get the work done	1.1-1.3, 2.2-2.4, 3.1	Follows pre-determined, sequenced plans for tasks with more than one step Follows clear, step-by-step instructions or procedures to address a small set of identified, routine problems directly relevant to own role Takes responsibility for routine low-impact decisions within familiar situations

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPSUP203 Prepare and maintain the work area	ICPSU203C Prepare and maintain the work area	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPSUP203 Prepare and maintain the work area

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

correctly perform general cleaning duties

maintain supplies of materials, information, used plates and film, and store and retrieve artwork

handle chemicals and liquid waste.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

identify health and safety factors that must be considered when:

using cleaning chemicals and other relevant materials and substrates used in the workplace

dealing with personal safety equipment required to perform cleaning duties

operating machinery – such as safely switching off machinery before cleaning

safely transporting finished products

disposing of liquid waste as well as storing and disposing chemicals

lifting – must use the correct techniques and demonstrate an understanding of weight limitations, and how to place loads to avoid back injury

explain how to correctly handle supplies and parts, as well as record necessary details in the transfer of finished product

outline how to operate inventory control systems and follow filing inventory procedures utilised in the work environment

describe key information on accurate storage and retrieval of materials

explain the nature of various materials and substrates

outline environmental considerations associated with storage of artwork, photographic materials and plates

describe potential dangers of handling supplies or parts

summarise potential accidents possible when cleaning or handling supplies.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the Support field of work and include access to a production environment.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPSUP207 Prepare machine for operation (basic)

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to prepare printing and finishing machines, and assist with their operation according to enterprise procedures.

It applies to individuals who undertake machine-minding duties in a production environment, as well as off-siders assisting in the operation of a machine.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Support

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Prepare or set up substrates (or loads)	1.1 Job sheets or equivalent instructions are interpreted correctly 1.2 Product is located, checked and prepared to meet job specifications according to enterprise procedures and work health and safety (WHS) procedures 1.3 Faulty material is visually identified and removed according to established enterprise procedures and WHS procedures
2. Set up delivery systems	2.1 Delivery systems are set up and adjusted according to job requirements 2.2 Readiness of transport and delivery systems is reported according to enterprise standards for final adjustments by designated person
3. Prepare machine	3.1 Machine is set up according to job instructions 3.2 Inks, glues, liquid and/or other materials are loaded as required according to manufacturer’s instructions and enterprise procedures 3.3 Plates, cutting or other devices are installed as required according to manufacturer’s instructions and enterprise procedures 3.4 Registration, alignment or centring is confirmed according to machine manufacturer’s/supplier’s instructions and enterprise procedures 3.5 Machine is run through cycle at the same time ensuring the substrate/product is positioned properly and the process is being performed according to established workplace and WHS procedures 3.6 Readiness of machine is reported according to enterprise procedures for final adjustments and proofing by designated person
4. Conduct shutdown of production process	4.1 Correct shutdown sequence is followed according to manufacturer’s specifications and enterprise procedures 4.2 Unused materials are stored according to manufacturer’s/supplier’s specifications and enterprise procedures 4.3 Used plates, cutting and other devices are removed and stored according to manufacturer’s/supplier’s specifications and enterprise procedures 4.4 All product is removed from operating area according to enterprise procedures and WHS standards 4.5 Machine faults requiring repair are identified and reported to designated person according to enterprise procedures 4.6 Repair/adjustment is verified prior to resumption of operations
5. Clean and wash up machine at end of run	5.1 Machine sections, as relevant to process, are cleaned ready for next run 5.2 Inking/gluing/coating system, if used in process, is washed ready for next run, and waste is disposed of according to enterprise and regulatory requirements 5.3 In-line printing/converting/binding/finishing/coating units are cleaned ready for next run 5.4 Feed, transportation and delivery systems are disengaged and cleaned ready for next run

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1-1.3, 3.1-3.4, 3.6, 4.1, 4.2, 4.3	Recognises text within job specifications and follows written instructions
Writing	2.2, 3.6, 4.5	Identifies and reports work progress and faults according to enterprise formats
Numeracy	3.5	Uses simple mathematical calculations and arranges sequential numerical information
Navigate the world of work	1.2, 1.3, 2.2, 3.2-3.6, 4.1-4.6, 5.2	Recognises and follows organisational and legislative requirements associated with own role
Interact with others	4.1	Seeks to cooperate with others to achieve results in immediate work context
Get the work done	1.2, 1.3, 2.1, 3.1-3.5, 4.5, 5.1, 5.3, 5.4	Follows pre-determined sequenced plans for tasks with more than one step Follows clear, step-by-step instructions to address a routine problems directly relevant to own role Takes responsibility for routine low-impact decisions within familiar situations Understands purpose and some specific functions of some common digital tools used in work contexts

Range of Conditions

This section specifies different work environments and conditions that may affect performance. Essential operating conditions that may be present (depending on the work situation, needs of the candidate, accessibility of the item, and local industry and regional contexts) are included.

Delivery systems MUST include EITHER:	reel OR sheet
Setting up and adjusting MUST include EITHER:	unwind and rewind reels webbing procedures and web control systems splicing/joining reels folder and sheeter OR feeder sheet/production pick-up and transportation system transfer system delivery systems

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPSUP207 Prepare machine for operation (basic)	ICPSU207C Prepare machine for operation (basic)	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPSUP207 Prepare machine for operation (basic)

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

demonstrate all safety devices on the machine

prepare machines and assist with their operation according to enterprise procedures

prepare and set up to final adjustment stage, any ONE machine according to manufacturer’s specifications, or set up a minor process on a dedicated machine.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

explain how to avoid back strain when lifting heavy objects

summarise best-practice handling of supplies, parts and finished product

outline how to avoid damaging finished product

identify supplies that require special handling

list health and safety considerations when preparing substrates and setting up a machine

outline health and safety procedures for operating machinery, such as safely switching off machinery before cleaning

summarise procedures for disposal of faulty materials

identify possible danger areas of the machine

describe location and function of registration section of the machine

describe problems that can interrupt the running cycle of the machine

list areas of the machine that are modified during shutdown

identify areas of the machine to check for possible repair

describe details to include when labelling unused ink

identify health and safety considerations for washing a machine

explain how ineffective wash-up can affect the next production run

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the Support field of work and include access to a printing or converting machine in a production environment.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPSUP208 Operate and monitor machines (basic)

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to operate and monitor machines under supervision according to enterprise requirements.

It applies to individuals working as machine-minders and off-siders assisting in the operation of a machine. This unit is an integral part of most printing and converting, and binding and finishing produce units.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Support

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Operate and monitor delivery systems	1.1 Job sheets or equivalent instructions are interpreted correctly 1.2 Delivery systems are monitored and adjusted to ensure efficient and continuous operation and avoid damage to finished product 1.3 Substrate is added to and removed from process according to job instructions 1.4 Need for major adjustment to process is identified and reported to designated person according to enterprise operating procedures
2. Maintain and monitor production process	2.1 Production process is operated and monitored in association with fellow workers and according to enterprise specifications and planned daily schedule 2.2 Product is monitored and minor adjustments are made to ensure quality of output is maintained 2.3 Need for major adjustments to process is identified and reported to appropriate person according to operating procedure 2.4 Faulty performance of equipment is identified and reported according to enterprise procedures within defined work area 2.5 Waste is sorted according to enterprise procedures
3. Conduct shutdown of production process	3.1 Correct shutdown sequence is followed according to manufacturer’s specifications and enterprise procedures 3.2 Shutdown is conducted in association with fellow workers and in compliance with work health and safety (WHS) requirements 3.3 Unused materials are stored according to manufacturer’s/supplier’s specifications and enterprise operating procedures 3.4 Used plates, cutting and other devices are removed and stored according to manufacturer’s/supplier’s specifications and enterprise operating procedures 3.5 All product is removed from operating area according to enterprise procedures and WHS standards 3.6 Machine faults requiring repair are identified and reported to designated person, according to enterprise procedures 3.7 Repair/adjustment is verified prior to resumption of operations
4. Clean and wash up machine at end of run	4.1 Machine units, as relevant to process, are cleaned ready for next run 4.2 Inking/gluing/coating system, if used in process, is washed ready for next run, and waste is disposed of according to enterprise and regulatory requirements 4.3 In-line printing/converting/binding/finishing/coating units are cleaned ready for next run 4.4 Feed, transportation and delivery systems are disengaged and cleaned ready for next run

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 1.3, 3.1, 3.3, 3.4, 3.5, 3.6	Reviews and interprets job sheet instructions correctly
Writing	1.4, 2.3, 2.4, 3.2, 3.6	Uses clear, specific and industry related terminology to complete and update workplace documentation
Oral Communication	2.1, 3.2	Identifies and reports adjustments and faults to co-workers
Numeracy	2.2, 3.7	Uses basic mathematical formulae to determine required consumables, adjust equipment and machinery, and estimate time required to complete job
Navigate the world of work	2.4, 2.5, 3.1, 3.2, 3.5, 3.6, 4.2	Takes some personal responsibility for adherence to organisational policies and procedures Considers own role for its contribution to broader goals of work team
Interact with others	2.1, 3.2	Cooperates with others as part of familiar, routine activities and contributes to specific activities requiring joint responsibility and accountability
Get the work done	1.1-1.4, 2.1-2.4, 3.3, 3.4, 3.6, 3.7, 4.1-4.4	With assistance, determines priorities and sequences steps involved in clearly defined, familiar tasks and identifies and assembles required resources Understands purpose and some specific functions of some common digital tools used in work contexts Takes responsibility for routine low-impact decisions within familiar situations Begins to identify and implement standard solutions for an increasing range of routine problems

Range of Conditions

This section specifies different work environments and conditions that may affect performance. Essential operating conditions that may be present (depending on the work situation, needs of the candidate, accessibility of the item, and local industry and regional contexts) are included.

Delivery systems MUST include EITHER:	reel OR sheet
Monitoring and adjusting MUST include EITHER:	reel stand and rewind section web control system sheeting section OR feeder sheet or product pick-up and transportation system transfer system delivery system

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPSUP208 Operate and monitor machines (basic)	ICPSU208C Operate and monitor machines (basic)	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPSUP208 Operate and monitor machines (basic)

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

correctly operate and monitor machines according to job and enterprise requirements

demonstrate knowledge of all safety devices on the machine

operate, monitor, shut down and clean any ONE machine according to manufacturer’s specifications under the supervision of, or in conjunction with, a worker with the appropriate skills.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

handling of supplies, parts and finished product

explain how to avoid back strain when lifting heavy objects

explain how to avoid damaging finished product

identify supplies that require special handling

For reel systems only

identify area of the web control system to adjust to maintain correct web tension

For sheet systems only

outline areas of the transport and delivery systems to monitor to ensure trouble-free operation

describe what to check when removing a substrate from the machine

Maintaining production processes

outline the basic criteria for assessing finished product

list adjustments to the machine to correct TWO different production or quality problems

Shutdown procedures

list areas of the machine that are modified during shutdown

identify areas of the machine to check for possible repair

describe details to include when labelling unused ink

Cleaning and washing machine

explain how an ineffective wash-up can effect the following production run

Health and safety

identify health and safety factors that must be considered when:

setting and/or operating machine transport and delivery systems

operating and monitoring the production process

washing a machine

safely switching off machinery before cleaning.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the Support field of work and include access to a printing or converting machine in a production environment.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPSUP211 Prepare ink and additives

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to prepare inks and additives in a range of printing processes.

It applies to individuals who perform a range of mainly routine tasks in various sectors of the printing and graphic arts industry, using limited practical skills and fundamental knowledge in a defined context. They generally work under direct supervision.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Support

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Select ink	1.1 Inks, dyes and additives are selected according to job specifications 1.2 Suitability of inks, dyes or additives are checked and appropriate action is taken to meet quality standards of client requirements, and enterprise and industry standards 1.3 Inks and dyes are selected according to suitability of substrate, adhesion, physical and chemical resistance, and light fastness, drying method and print process
2. Prepare ink	2.1 Inks, dyes and additives are prepared according to work health and safety (WHS) requirements, and manufacturer’s/supplier’s instructions with suitable precautions to minimise waste 2.2 Correct colour and weight/volume of ink are mixed and prepared to match requirements of the job specifications and the printing press to be used 2.3 Formulation of ink and approved colour is appropriately recorded
3. Store and handle ink	3.1 Inks, dyes and additives are appropriately stored, handled and labelled according to manufacturer’s/supplier’s instructions to prevent damage and hazards to personnel

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 2.2, 2.3, 3.1	Recognises text within job specifications and follows written instructions
Writing	2.3, 3.1	Records key information related to outcomes of the job
Numeracy	2.2	Uses simple mathematical techniques to determine weights and volume required
Navigate the world of work	1.2, 2.1, 3.1	Takes some personal responsibility for adherence to legal and regulatory requirements within industry standards and enterprise procedural frameworks
Get the work done	1.1-1.3, 2.2, 3.1	With assistance, determines priorities and sequences steps involved in clearly defined, familiar tasks, and identifies and assembles required resources Takes responsibility for routine low-impact decisions within familiar situations Recognises and responds to predictable routine problems related to role in immediate work context

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPSUP211 Prepare ink and additives	ICPSU211C Prepare ink and additives	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPSUP211 Prepare ink and additives

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

correctly prepare ink and additives as required by job specifications

prepare at least TWO lots of inks or additives to match a colour sample and specific end-use requirements according to workplace specifications.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

identify health and safety concerns related to preparation and matching of inks and additives

describe how inks and additives are correctly selected to match process and job requirements

explain how to determine suitability of ink for the particular process

describe characteristics of the chosen ink matched to the substrate

explain how to determine if ink adheres to the substrate

describe how to determine physical, chemical and light or colour fastness of ink

explain how correct handling procedures are determined

describe how to determine correct weight/volume required

outline methods to check and adjust ink colour and consistency

explain how to ensure quality of ink or additive is the required standard

describe the effect lighting conditions have on colour matching

outline how to determine compatibility of the ink being mixed

explain how to check inks for correct colour

list Material safety Data sheets (MSDS) for this ink system that are at hand

describe environmental conditions relevant to the storage of inks and additives

outline conventions for labelling mixed inks

describe how to dispose of inks, solvent and solvent rags

identify required manuals, safety and other documentation and briefly outline the relevant information in each source.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the Support field of work and include access to inks and additives.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPSUP212 Prepare coatings and adhesives

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to prepare coatings and adhesives.

It applies to individuals who perform a range of mainly routine tasks in various sectors of the printing and graphic arts industry, using limited practical skills and fundamental knowledge in a defined context. They generally work under direct supervision.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Support

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Select coatings, adhesives and additives	1.1 Coatings, adhesives and additives are selected according to job specifications 1.2 Suitability of coatings, adhesives and additives are checked and appropriate action is taken to meet quality standards of client requirements, and enterprise and industry standards 1.3 Coatings, adhesives and additives are selected according to suitability of substrate, physical and chemical properties and performance
2. Prepare coatings, adhesives and additives	2.1 Coatings, adhesives and additives are prepared according to Work Health and Safety (WHS) requirements and manufacturer’s/supplier’s instructions with suitable precautions to minimise waste 2.2 Correct weight/volume of coatings, adhesives and additives are mixed and prepared to match job specification and the process to be used 2.3 Formulation of coatings, adhesives and additives is appropriately recorded
3. Store and handle coatings, adhesives and additives	3.1 Coatings, adhesives and additives are appropriately stored, handled and labelled according to manufacturer’s/supplier’s instructions to prevent damage or hazards to personnel 3.2 Coatings, adhesives and additives are stored and used in a manner that ensures use before use-by dates

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 2.2, 2.3	Recognises text within job specifications and follows written instructions
Writing	2.3, 3.1	Records key information related to job outcomes
Numeracy	2.2	Uses simple mathematical techniques to determine weights and volume required
Navigate the world of work	1.2, 2.1, 3.1	Takes some personal responsibility for adherence to legal and regulatory requirements within industry standards and enterprise procedural frameworks
Get the work done	1.1-1.3, 2.1, 3.2	Determines priorities and sequences steps involved in clearly defined, familiar tasks and identifies and assembles required resources Takes responsibility for routine low-impact decisions within familiar situations

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPSUP211 Prepare ink and additives	ICPSU211C Prepare ink and additives	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPSUP212 Prepare coatings and adhesives

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

correctly prepare coatings and adhesives according to job specifications

prepare TWO different coatings or adhesives for specific end-use requirements to meet job and workplace specifications.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

summarise selection of coatings/adhesives to match process and job requirements

describe how to determine suitability of the coatings/adhesives for the particular process

explain how characteristics of coatings/adhesives are matched to the job/substrate

explain how to determine if coatings/adhesives adhere to the substrate

identify health and safety concerns related to preparation, handling and storage of coatings/adhesives

outline correct handling procedures

describe details required to calculate quantities of coatings/adhesives

describe details required to record the formulation of coatings/adhesives

identify environmental conditions relevant to the storage of coatings/adhesives

outline conventions for labelling coatings/adhesives

identify required manuals, safety and other documentation and briefly outline the relevant information in each source.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the Support field of work and include access to coatings, adhesives and substrates.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPSUP216 Inspect quality against required standards

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to inspect quality of work against job specifications.

It applies to individuals who perform a range of mainly routine tasks in various sectors of the printing and graphic arts industry, using limited practical skills and fundamental knowledge in a defined context. They generally work under direct supervision.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Support

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Carry out inspection of quality during job	1.1 Job is collected/received and inspected against job specifications according to enterprise standards and procedures 1.2 Quality specifications and tolerances are understood and meet client requirements as well as enterprise and industry standards 1.3 Variation to standards are monitored and corrective action taken to rectify problems according to enterprise procedures within the defined work area 1.4 Inspection and testing procedures are applied at regular intervals to determine conformity with specifications and to minimise waste 1.5 Unsatisfactory work is identified according to predetermined standards and enterprise procedures
2. Complete documentation	2.1 Documentation is accurately completed to meet required enterprise procedures 2.2 Problems and suggestions for improvement are documented and passed on to appropriate personnel

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 1.2, 1.5, 2.1, 2.2	Recognises text within job specifications and follows written instructions
Writing	2.1, 2.2	Records key information related to job outcomes
Navigate the world of work	1.1-1.5, 2.1	Takes some personal responsibility for adherence to legal and regulatory requirements within industry standards and enterprise procedural frameworks
Interact with others	2.2	Selects from a small range of communication modes, forms and channels to meet a specific purpose within the immediate work environment
Get the work done	1.1, 1.3, 2.2	Determines priorities and sequences steps involved in clearly defined, familiar tasks and identifies and assembles required resources Takes responsibility for routine low-impact decisions within familiar situations Begins to identify and implement standard solutions for an increasing number of routine problems

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPSUP216 Inspect quality against required standards	ICPSU216C Inspect quality against required standards	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPSUP216 Inspect quality against required standards

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

correctly inspect quality of work against job specifications

produce a record, maintained over a period of at least one month, which shows that no reasonable complaints or reports of faulty goods or documentation were received from customers (internal or external) relating to work handled by the individual.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

Principles of the quality system

list common faults that need to be recognised

explain why quality is important

Checking quality requirements before job commencement

describe quality standards set by the customer

outline enterprise procedures to achieve quality

identify areas that need to be inspected for quality

Quality inspection procedures

outline when quality inspections should be carried out

explain consequences unnecessary inspections have on production output

identify control instruments used in a quality inspection

outline an appropriate response to identified faults

identify who is responsible for product quality

Documentation procedures

describe types of specifications recorded on the job sheet

describe information that needs to be documented, and who should receive this information.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the Support field of work and include access to special purpose tools, equipment and materials.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPSUP221 Pack and dispatch product

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to pack and dispatch basic printed products according to enterprise procedures.

It applies to individuals who perform a range of mainly routine tasks in various sectors of the printing and graphic arts industry, using limited practical skills and fundamental knowledge in a defined context. They generally work under direct supervision.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Support

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Assess final product	1.1 Finished job is collected/received and checked against job specifications according to enterprise procedures 1.2 Defects, irregularities and discrepancies are identified and action taken according to enterprise procedures
2. Prepare stock for dispatch	2.1 Suitable area for wrapping/packaging is selected and prepared 2.2 Wrapping and packaging materials are prepared according to enterprise procedures 2.3 Product is wrapped and packaged in pre-determined parcel sizes according to enterprise procedures, job specifications, storage and delivery specifications 2.4 Packaged goods are checked, weighed and labelled according to delivery instructions, transportation/shipping regulations and enterprise procedures
3. Dispatch product	3.1 Packaged product is stacked on/in appropriate storage/shipping containers prior to dispatch 3.2 Product is dispatched via appropriate delivery mode according to enterprise procedures, job specifications and work health and safety (WHS) requirements 3.3 Product shipping/dispatch details are recorded according to enterprise procedures 3.4 Documentation associated with tasks, where relevant, is accurately completed according to enterprise procedures

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 2.2-2.4, 3.2-3.4	Recognises text within job specifications and follows written instructions
Writing	2.4, 3.3, 3.4	Records numerical and key information related to outcomes of the job
Numeracy	2.3, 2.4	Uses simple mathematical calculations and arranges sequential numerical information
Navigate the world of work	1.1, 1.2, 2.2-2.4, 3.2-3.4	Takes some personal responsibility for adherence to legal and regulatory requirements with specific reference to safe working practices
Get the work done	1.1, 1.2, 2.1-2.4, 3.1	Determines priorities and sequences steps involved in clearly defined, familiar tasks, and identifies and assembles required resources Takes responsibility for routine low-impact decisions within familiar situations Understands purpose and some specific functions of some common digital tools used in work contexts Begins to identify and implement standard solutions for an increasing number of routine problems

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPSUP221 Pack and dispatch product	ICPSU221C Pack and dispatch product	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPSUP221 Pack and dispatch product

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

prepare, pack and dispatch TWO lots of printed or printing related products, following correct procedures, job and workplace specifications

accurately complete required documentation for products.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

Preparing stock for dispatch

identify items required in the dispatch process

describe checks performed prior to packaging the product

explain how to identify a defective print or item

explain how defects are rectified

Wrapping and packing materials and methods

outline work health and safety requirements when wrapping and packing goods

describe how to determine the type of packaging to be used

explain how the type of transport or destination has a bearing on the wrapping and packing method

explain how to determine the number of units to be wrapped in each parcel

describe details to record on dispatching labels, and why they are required

Dispatching product

identify where shipping details are obtained

list weight limitations placed on dispatched products

describe priorities used for dispatching the product

explain how to determine the appropriate delivery mode

summarise how to complete documentation of dispatched product.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the Support field of work and include access to resources and product to pack and dispatch.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPSUP222 Pack and dispatch solid waste

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to pack and dispatch solid waste.

It applies to individuals who perform a range of mainly routine tasks in various sectors of the printing and graphic arts industry, using limited practical skills and fundamental knowledge in a defined context. They generally work under direct supervision.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Support

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Assess solid waste	1.1 Reusable waste is sorted from recyclable waste according to enterprise procedures 1.2 Waste is weighed, and weight and source of waste recorded
2. Prepare solid waste for removal from site	2.1 Waste is shredded according to enterprise procedures, storage and delivery specifications 2.2 Waste is baled as appropriate for waste destination, delivery method and method of transportation according to enterprise procedures
3. Dispatch solid waste	3.1 Waste is stacked/packed on/in appropriate storage/shipping containers prior to dispatch 3.2 Waste is dispatched via appropriate delivery mode according to enterprise procedures and job specifications 3.3 Waste is dispatched at pre-determined rate to prevent accumulation of waste around machines 3.4 Documentation associated with tasks is accurately completed according to enterprise procedures
4. Carry out minor routine maintenance and cleaning of waste packaging machines	4.1 Shredder is cleaned, checked and lubricated according to manufacturer’s specifications and enterprise standard operating procedures 4.2 Baler is cleaned, checked and lubricated according to manufacturer’s specifications and enterprise standard operating procedures

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 2.1, 2.2, 3.2, 3.4, 4.1, 4.2	Recognises text within job specifications and follows written instructions
Writing	1.2, 3.4	Records key information related to outcomes of the job
Numeracy	1.2, 3.3	Uses simple mathematical calculations and arranges sequential numerical information
Navigate the world of work	1.1, 2.1, 2.2, 3.2, 3.4, 4.1, 4.2	Takes some personal responsibility for adherence to legal and regulatory requirements with specific reference to safe working practices
Get the work done	1.1, 2.2, 3.1-3.3, 4.1, 4.2	Determines priorities and sequences steps involved in clearly defined, familiar tasks and identifies and assembles required resources Takes responsibility for routine low-impact decisions within familiar situations Understands purpose and some specific functions of some common digital tools used in work contexts

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPSUP222 Pack and dispatch solid waste	ICPSU222C Pack and dispatch solid waste	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPSUP222 Pack and dispatch solid waste

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

correctly pack and dispatch solid waste

assess, prepare and dispatch TWO lots of solid waste, and maintain and clean waste packaging machines according to job and workplace specifications.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

Sorting solid waste

differentiate between reusable and recyclable waste, and provide an example of each

describe how reusable waste is stored and used

identify weight limitations of each batch of solid waste

Processing solid waste

explain work health and safety (WHS) requirements when operating the shredding machine

describe capabilities of the shredding machine

explain how to determine the appropriate baling method

Dispatch and documentation

outline the appropriate method for storing solid waste prior to dispatching

describe problems caused by accumulation of waste around machines

list details recorded when dispatching solid waste

describe where details for dispatching are obtained

Maintaining waste packaging machines

identify WHS concerns related to cleaning and maintaining shredding and baling machines

describe how often these machines should be cleaned and lubricated

Information sources

outline the relevant information in machine manuals, safety and other documentation relevant to this task

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the Support field of work and include access to solid waste and disposal equipment.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPSUP235 Lift loads mechanically

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to safely use basic lifting equipment such as slings, ropes, shackles, eye bolts and spreader beams.

It applies to individuals who perform a range of mainly routine tasks in various sectors of the printing and graphic arts industry, using limited practical skills and fundamental knowledge in a defined context. They generally work under direct supervision.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Support

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Attach lifting gear to loads	1.1 All work is undertaken safely and to prescribed procedures 1.2 Load is inspected and best lifting method determined for weight and shape 1.3 Appropriate load shifting equipment is selected 1.4 Lifting gear is inspected and damaged or worn items are labelled and rejected 1.5 Where appropriate, safe working loads are calculated to Australian Standards 1.6 Lifting gear is attached to load in an appropriate and safe manner, and to specifications where required
2. Move loads	2.1 Load moving is performed to acceptable, safe working practices, Australian Standards, codes of practice and specifications 2.2 Lifting gear is connected to load mover using safe and appropriate techniques 2.3 Appropriate communication and signals are used to coordinate load movement safely 2.4 Load is grounded or put down in a safe and stable manner according to prescribed procedure 2.5 All lifting gear is detached from load mover and load

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 2.4	Recognises text within job specifications and follows written instructions
Writing	1.4	Damaged or worn items are labelled
Oral Communication	2.3	Incorporates verbal signals and whistles to coordinate load movement in a safe manner
Numeracy	1.2, 1.5, 2.1	Uses simple mathematical formulas to calculate loads and holding capacity of various equipment
Navigate the world of work	1.1, 1.5, 1.6, 2.1-2.4	Takes some personal responsibility for adherence to legal and regulatory requirements, with specific reference to safe working practices
Get the work done	1.2-1.4, 2.5	Determines priorities and sequences steps involved in clearly defined, familiar tasks and identifies and assembles resources required Follows clear, step-by-step instructions or procedures to address a small set of identified, routine problems directly relevant to own role Takes responsibility for routine low-impact decisions within familiar situations Understands purpose and some specific functions of some common digital tools used in work contexts

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPSUP235 Lift loads mechanically	ICPSU235C Lift loads mechanically	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPSUP235 Lift loads mechanically

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

safely lift loads using basic equipment such as slings, ropes, shackles, eye bolts and spreader beams

mechanically lift TWO loads according to enterprise and statutory requirements and regulations.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

Attach lifting gear and select appropriate equipment to lift loads

outline available references to determine safety practices for lifting loads

describe some important considerations when lifting loads mechanically

explain how to determine the best method to lift the load

list various types of mechanical lifting devices, and circumstances under which they are used

describe the type of damage that can occur to any particular piece of lifting equipment

outline problems that can occur if lifting gear is not attached properly

Correctly apply safe practices to move loads

demonstrate knowledge of safe practices to observe when moving loads

explain conventions to observe when connecting lifting gear to the load mover

list specific communication techniques used for moving the load

identify the safe distance for personnel not involved in moving the load

list other techniques for communication that could be used

describe effects of a load not being grounded correctly

outline where lifting gear should be stored after it has been detached

Information sources

outline the information in machine manuals, safety and other documentation relevant to this task

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the Support field of work and include access to slings, ropes, shackles, eye bolts, spreader beams and loads.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPSUP236 Shift loads mechanically

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to use pallet trucks, overhead travellers and load shifting equipment. It does not include forklifts.

It applies to individuals who perform a range of mainly routine tasks in various sectors of the printing and graphic arts industry, using limited practical skills and fundamental knowledge in a defined context. They generally work under direct supervision.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Support

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Attach lifting gear to loads	1.1 Routine pre-use checks are undertaken according to manufacturer’s specifications and regulatory safety requirements 1.2 Non-compliance with specifications is reported for repair/replacement
2. Move loads	2.1 Type of material is determined from labels, colour codes and signage 2.2 Material properties are understood 2.3 Load is inspected and best handling method determined for weight and shape 2.4 All unknowns are clarified with appropriately qualified authority 2.5 All relevant safety and emergency procedures are understood and implemented as required 2.6 All relevant regulations and codes of practices are understood and observed 2.7 Correct and appropriate handling methods are undertaken
3. Shift loads	3.1 Most appropriate load shifting device is selected 3.2 Load shifting device is operated within design specifications and safe working load 3.3 Load is lifted, ensuring balance, vision of operation, and protection of load 3.4 Safe and efficient path of movement is selected and used 3.5 Path of movement is checked and monitored for obstacles and hazards, and safely maintained
4. Place loads	4.1 Loads are placed ensuring safety, stability, protection of material and avoidance of on-site hazards 4.2 Shifting device is removed or secured according to enterprise procedures

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 1.2, 2.1, 2.4, 2.6, 3.2, 4.2	Recognises and interprets textual information to determine and adhere to requirements
Writing	1.2, 2.4	Uses clear, specific and industry related terminology to complete and update workplace documentation
Oral Communication	1.2, 2.4	Uses listening and questioning techniques to confirm requirements
Numeracy	2.3	Uses simple mathematical calculations to calculate loads and volumes
Navigate the world of work	1.1, 2.5-2.7, 3.2, 3.4, 3.5, 4.1, 4.2	Monitors adherence to organisational policies, procedures and regulatory requirements
Get the work done	1.1, 2.3, 3.1, 3.3	Plans routine tasks with familiar goals and outcomes, taking some limited responsibility for decisions regarding sequencing and timing Takes responsibility for routine, low-impact decisions within familiar situations Recognises and responds to predictable routine problems related to role in immediate work context

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPSUP236 Shift loads mechanically	ICPSU236C Shift loads mechanically	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPSUP236 Shift loads mechanically

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

mechanically shift TWO loads using at least an electric trolley, according to enterprise and statutory requirements.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

Maintenance and safety checks for load shifting equipment

explain how often routine checks on equipment should be conducted

identify who to notify to deal with problems relating to load shifting equipment

outline circumstances that necessitate replacement of shifting equipment

Determining correct handling methods

explain the meaning behind different types of material colour codes

outline personal injuries that might result from incorrect handling methods

explain how implementation of safety procedures impacts enterprise operations

identify the statutory authority responsible for regulating safety procedures

Safety requirements for load shifting operations

describe licensing requirements to operate various load shifting devices

list causes that might result in a load moving and becoming off balance during a shift

outline how to choose an appropriate path when shifting the load

describe the position shifting devices should be placed in after completing the load shift

explain how incorrect placement of loads affect job requirements and enterprise procedures

outline the information in machine manuals, safety and other documentation relevant to this task

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the Support field of work and include access to load shifting equipment, not including forklifts.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPSUP241 Undertake warehouse or stores materials processing

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to handle, dispatch and receive materials in a warehouse.

It applies to individuals who perform a range of mainly routine tasks in various sectors of the printing and graphic arts industry, using limited practical skills and fundamental knowledge in a defined context. They generally work under direct supervision.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Support

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Undertake dispatch/receiving procedures	1.1 Warehouse/store standard operating procedures are understood and followed 1.2 Warehouse/store materials are managed according to enterprise standard operating procedures 1.3 Incoming/outgoing materials are labelled according to enterprise standard operating procedures and legislative requirements 1.4 Warehouse/store materials are labelled and stored according to enterprise standard operating procedures and legislative requirements 1.5 Materials are issued/dispatched according to enterprise standard operating procedures
2. Determine handling methods	2.1 Type of material is determined from labels, colour codes and signage 2.2 Material properties are understood 2.3 All relevant uncertainties and unknowns are clarified with an appropriately qualified authority 2.4 All relevant safety and emergency procedures are understood and implemented as required 2.5 All relevant regulations and codes of practices are understood and observed 2.6 Correct and appropriate handling methods are undertaken
3. Shift loads	3.1 Materials are packaged to meet safety, storage conditions, and site and legislative requirements 3.2 Materials are stored in a safe, orderly and retrievable manner 3.3 Load is lifted, ensuring balance, vision of operation and protection of load 3.4 Materials are labelled/identified and recorded according to site procedures and legislative requirements
4. Store bulk fluids/gases	4.1 Correct storage conditions are determined from instructions and manufacturer’s specifications/directions 4.2 Containers are checked for safe and clean use 4.3 Containers are filled/emptied according to enterprise standard operational procedures and legislative requirements 4.4 Containers are handled and moved according to site procedures and legislative requirements 4.5 Containers are correctly labelled and stored according to enterprise standard operational procedures and legislative requirements

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 1.3-1.5, 2.1, 2.2, 2.4, 3.4, 4.1, 4.5	Recognises and interprets textual information to determine and adhere to requirements
Writing	1.3, 1.4, 2.3, 3.4, 4.5	Uses clear, specific and industry related terminology to complete and update workplace documentation
Oral Communication	2.3	Uses listening and questioning techniques to confirm requirements
Numeracy	3.3	Uses simple mathematical calculations to determine weights and loads
Navigate the world of work	1.2-1.5, 2.2, 2.4-2.6, 3.1, 3.2, 3.4, 4.2-4.5	Follows organisational policies, procedures and legislative requirements
Interact with others	2.3	Uses appropriate communication protocols and conventions to confirm or clarify requirements with external authorities
Get the work done	1.1, 1.2, 3.1-3.4, 4.3-4.5	Plans routine tasks with familiar goals and outcomes, taking some limited responsibility for decisions regarding sequencing and timing Takes responsibility for routine low-impact decisions within familiar situations

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPSUP241 Undertake warehouse or stores materials processing	ICPSU241C Undertake warehouse or stores materials processing	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPSUP241 Undertake warehouse or stores materials processing

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

correctly handle, dispatch and receive goods in a warehouse/store

demonstrate handling and storage techniques and procedures for at least THREE different types of goods/materials.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

Dispatching and receiving production materials

outline procedures in place for receipt and inspection of goods on arrival

list indicators that goods received have been approved for production and comply with the purchase order

explain reasons why goods have to be labelled according to operating procedures and legislative requirements

describe procedures in place if dispatched goods do not reach their destination

outline procedures in place if goods are not received as requested

identify who is authorised to sign for goods received

Handling methods and procedures

outline production problems caused by inconsistent stock handling

explain the procedure for reporting and recording damaged materials

list alternative uses for damaged stock or materials

describe the company insurance policy for damaged stock and materials

Storing and packaging of warehouse/store materials

explain the effect of relative humidity and temperature on substrates

outline the effect of ultra violet light on exposed rubber blankets or rollers

explain how materials should be stored in relation to their use-by date or shelf life

summarise the correct storing of heavy or liquid materials in a shelving system.

Information sources

outline the information in machine manuals, safety and other documentation relevant to this task

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the Support field of work and include access to special purpose tools, equipment and materials.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPSUP243 Reconcile process outputs

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to reconcile process requirements with process outputs, document the information and report any discrepancies.

It applies to individuals who perform a range of mainly routine tasks in a mail house environment or individuals who work in converting, binding and finishing, using limited practical skills and fundamental knowledge in a defined context. They generally work under direct supervision.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Support

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Confirm throughputs	1.1 Field values are verified as corresponding to values identified in job sheet 1.2 Where required, mail class is verified as the same as the job sheet 1.3 Collated data is correct and in sequence 1.4 Collated data is correctly matched to addressee 1.5 Address information is verified as accurate 1.6 Barcode information confirms correct sequence of addressees to collated information 1.7 Any discrepancies are reported to supervisor
2. Reconcile output	2.1 Total number of throughputs is equal to job specifications 2.2 Destination delivery unit rate matches job specification 2.3 Information matching trail is documented 2.4 Discrepancies are reported to supervisor

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1-1.6, 2.1-2.3	Recognises and interprets textual information to determine and adhere to requirements
Writing	1.7, 2.3, 2.4	Uses clear, specific and industry related terminology to complete and update workplace documentation
Oral Communication	1.7, 2.4	Uses listening and questioning techniques to confirm requirements
Numeracy	1.3, 1.6, 2.1, 2.2	Uses simple mathematical calculations and arranges numerical information sequentially Applies simple calculations to ensure throughputs match job specifications
Interact with others	1.7, 2.4	Uses appropriate communication protocols and conventions to report issues
Get the work done	1.6, 2.1	Plans routine tasks with familiar goals and outcomes, taking some limited responsibility for decisions regarding sequencing and timing Takes responsibility for routine, low-impact decisions within familiar situations

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPSUP243 Reconcile process outputs	ICPSU243C Reconcile process outputs	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPSUP243 Reconcile process outputs

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

correctly reconcile process requirements with process outputs, document the information and report any discrepancies.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

demonstrate basic literacy skills to follow work instructions and read job specifications

demonstrate basic numeracy skills to reconcile process outputs.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the Support field of work and include access to special purpose tools, equipment and materials.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPSUP260 Maintain a safe work environment

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to ensure work health and safety (WHS) procedures are followed in environments where computers are predominately used, but which may include limited access to chemicals and solvents.

It applies to individuals who perform a range of mainly routine tasks in various sectors of the printing and graphic arts industry, using limited practical skills and fundamental knowledge in a defined context. They generally work under direct supervision.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Support

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Follow workplace safety procedures	1.1 Hazards in work area are recognised while under direct supervision and reported to appropriate people according to enterprise procedures 1.2 Enterprise procedures and work instructions for assessing and controlling risks for own area of responsibility are followed accurately while under direct supervision 1.3 Enterprise procedures for dealing with incidents (accidents), fire and other emergencies are followed whenever necessary under direct supervision within scope of responsibilities and competencies
2. Contribute to WHS in the workplace	2.1 WHS issues are raised with appropriate people according to enterprise procedures and relevant WHS legislation 2.2 Contributions to participative arrangements for WHS management in the workplace are made within organisational procedures and scope of responsibilities and competencies 2.3 Information matching trail is documented 2.4 Any discrepancies are reported to supervisor
3. Ensure workspace health and safety	3.1 Workspace, furniture and equipment are adjusted to suit ergonomic requirements of the individual 3.2 Lighting is adjusted and glare is reduced to ensure healthy lighting levels 3.3 Work organisation meets organisational and WHS requirements for computer operation
4. Ensure safety from environmental discharges/emissions	4.1 Chemicals and solvents are correctly stored and appropriate ventilation is available when using chemicals and solvents 4.2 Abnormal or unacceptable emission levels are recognised and reported according to enterprise procedures 4.3 Emission levels are monitored and measured according to standard operating procedures where appropriate 4.4 Correct safety procedures are followed and personal protective equipment used properly 4.5 Containment procedures are applied according to standard operating procedures where required 4.6 Waste removal from work area complies with enterprise procedures and environmental regulations

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1-1.3, 2.1, 2.2, 4.2, 4.3, 4.6	Recognises and interprets textual information to determine and adhere to requirements
Writing	1.1, 2.1-2.4, 4.2	Uses clear, specific and industry related terminology to complete and update workplace documentation
Oral Communication	1.1, 2.1, 2.2, 2.4, 4.2	Uses listening and questioning techniques to confirm requirements
Numeracy	4.2, 4.3	Analyses numerical information to measure acceptable and safe emissions in the workplace
Navigate the world of work	1.1, 1.3, 2.1, 2.2, 3.1-3.3, 4.2, 4.4, 4.6	Monitors adherence to organisational policies, procedures and legislative requirements with specific reference to safety
Interact with others	1.1, 2.1, 2.2, 2.4, 4.2	Uses appropriate communication protocols and conventions to report issues
Get the work done	3.1-3.3, 4.1, 4.3, 4.5	Plans and implements routine tasks with familiar goals and outcomes Takes responsibility for routine low-impact decisions within familiar situations Begins to identify and implement standard solutions for an increasing number of routine problems

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPSUP260 Maintain a safe work environment	ICPSU260C Maintain a safe work environment	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPSUP260 Maintain a safe work environment

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

follow workplace safety directions/procedures

recognise and report hazards according to enterprise procedures

adjust own workspace to meet WHS requirements

raise work health and safety (WHS) issues

contribute to participative arrangements for WHS management in the workplace.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

outline relevant legislation from all levels of government which affect business operations, especially in regard to WHS and environmental issues

describe how WHS is managed in the workplace, including procedures for fire, emergency, accident and near-miss, and control of risks

summarise possible workplace hazards

identify designated personnel responsible for reporting WHS concerns

explain the meaning of WHS signs and symbols relevant to the area of work.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the Support field of work and include access to appropriate documentation and resources normally used in the workplace.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPSUP261 Follow WHS practices and identify environmental hazards

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to maintain basic work health and safety (WHS) standards in the workplace.

It applies to individuals who perform a range of mainly routine tasks in various sectors of the printing and graphic arts industry, using limited practical skills and fundamental knowledge in a defined context. They generally work under direct supervision.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Support

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Follow enterprise procedures for hazard identification and risk control	1.1 Hazards in work area are recognised and reported to designated personnel according to enterprise procedures 1.2 Enterprise procedures and work instructions for assessing and controlling risks for own area of responsibility are followed accurately while under direct supervision 1.3 Enterprise procedures for dealing with accidents, fire and emergencies are followed whenever necessary within scope of responsibilities and competencies
2. Follow enterprise procedures for control of environmental discharges/emissions	2.1 Abnormal or unacceptable emission levels are recognised and reported according to enterprise procedures 2.2 Waste removal from work area complies with enterprise procedures and environmental regulations 2.3 Containment procedures are applied according to standard operating procedures where required 2.4 Correct safety procedures are followed and personal protective equipment used properly
3. Contribute to participative arrangements for management of WHS	3.1 WHS issues are raised with designated personnel according to enterprise procedures and relevant WHS legislation 3.2 Contributions to WHS management in the workplace are made within organisational procedures and scope of responsibilities and competencies

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1,1.2, 2.1-2.4, 3.1, 3.2	Recognises text within job specifications and follows written instructions
Writing	1.1, 2.1, 3.1	Records and reports numerical and key information related to outcomes of the job
Oral Communication	1.1, 2.1, 3.1	Uses appropriate vocabulary, including technical language relevant to role and context
Navigate the world of work	1.1-1.3, 2.1, 2.2, 2.4, 3.1, 3.2	Takes personal responsibility for following organisational and legislative requirements associated with own role
Interact with others	1.1, 2.1, 3.1	Uses appropriate communication protocols and conventions to report issues
Get the work done	2.1, 2.3	Plans routine tasks with familiar goals and outcomes, taking some limited responsibility for decisions regarding sequencing and timing Begins to identify and implement standard solutions for an increasing number of routine problems

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPSUP261 Follow WHS practices and identify environmental hazards	ICPSU261C Follow OHS practices and identify environmental hazards	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPSUP261 Follow WHS practices and identify environmental hazards

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

recognise and report hazards according to enterprise procedures

follow workplace safety directions/procedures for dealing with hazards and risks

use personal protective equipment properly

raise work health and safety (WHS) issues

contribute to participative arrangements for WHS management in the workplace.

produce a record, maintained over at least one month, that demonstrates that the individual has followed safe working practices.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

Significant hazards in the workplace

identify the major hazards in this workplace

outline safety devices on this machine and their functions

Location and use of safety equipment and personnel

describe the location of fire extinguishers and fire exits

identify the location of the first aid kit and the first aid officer in own section

Enterprise procedures for dealing with fire and accidents

explain the procedure for responding to a fire or accident

identify the relevant person to report any dangerous situation to

Symbols used on WHS signs

describe the following symbols and what they mean in the workplace:

hazardous chemicals

goggles

footwear

fire equipment

Safety data sheets

describe where safety data sheets are kept and the information they contain

explain where information about safe levels for discharges or emissions can be found

Information sources

describe the location of machine manuals, safety and other documentation relevant to this task and outline the information included in them.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the Support field of work and include access to special purpose tools, equipment and materials.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPSUP262 Communicate in the workplace

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to participate in clear and logical workplace communication, including both written and spoken communication.

It applies to individuals who perform a range of mainly routine tasks in various sectors of the printing and graphic arts industry, using limited practical skills and fundamental knowledge in a defined context. They generally work under direct supervision.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Support

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Convey and handle information	1.1 Gather, record and convey simple and routine information in a workplace related context 1.2 Personal interaction is conducted in a courteous manner in the workplace context 1.3 Queries are made clearly and concisely in a workplace context 1.4 Procedures for location and storage of information are employed, and the particular workplace practices are adhered to 1.5 Information is organised clearly, concisely and logically, and complies with workplace practices 1.6 Workplace documents are completed clearly and accurately within a specified time 1.7 Time is used efficiently in a workplace context
2. Give and follow simple routine instructions	2.1 Safe work practices are incorporated in instructions 2.2 Instructions are accurate, clear, concise and comprehensive, and are consistent with the skills of the receiver 2.3 Appropriate methods of instruction are selected 2.4 Interaction with others is efficient, effective, responsive, courteous and supportive 2.5 Prescribed sequences are adhered to in a workplace related context 2.6 Routine checking of own and others’ performance is exercised 2.7 Task is carried out in a workplace related context
3. Participate in small informal work groups	3.1 Interaction is supportive, efficient, effective and courteous 3.2 Participation in discussions takes place in a workplace related context 3.3 Contributions are constructive in terms of the goal 3.4 Group decisions are understood and confirmed
4. Interact with clients	4.1 Interaction with clients within, and external to, an organisation about simple routine matters 4.2 Interaction is consistent with the needs of organisation, and organisation is presented in a positive and client-centred way 4.3 Correct forms of greeting, identification and address are used according to enterprise practices 4.4 Needs of the client are clarified and noted where appropriate 4.5 Referral processes are followed to establish contact between client and appropriate personnel 4.6 Discretion and confidentiality are exercised where appropriate 4.7 Appropriate follow-up steps are taken according to enterprise customer service practices

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1	Recognises text within job specifications and follows written instructions
Writing	1.1, 1.3, 1.5, 1.6, 2.1-2.3, 3.4, 4.3, 4.4	Records numerical and key information related to outcomes of the job
Oral Communication	1.1-1.3, 2.2-2.4, 3.1-3.4, 4.1, 4.3	Uses vocabulary relevant to role and context to convey or clarify information
Navigate the world of work	1.4, 1.5, 2.1, 2.6, 4.3, 4.6, 4.7	Takes personal responsibility for adherence to legal, ethical and regulatory requirements Follows organisational policies and procedures
Interact with others	1.2, 2.4, 3.1, 4.1-4.7	Uses appropriate protocols and conventions when communicating with clients Establishes connections with a number of people in immediate work context, using some accepted practices for building rapport Seeks to cooperate with others to achieve results in immediate work context Adapts personal communication style to build a positive working relationship and show respect for opinions, values and particular needs of others
Get the work done	1.1, 1.4, 1.7, 2.3, 2.5	Plans routine tasks with familiar goals and outcomes, taking some responsibility for decisions regarding sequencing and timing

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPSUP262 Communicate in the workplace	ICPSU262C Communicate in the workplace	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPSUP262 Communicate in the workplace

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

gather, record, convey, organise and store simple written documents logically and in accordance with workplace requirements

complete workplace documents clearly, accurately and within required timelines

provide and follow simple verbal and non-verbal instructions, taking into account safe work practices

use relevant industry terminology in verbal and written interactions

communicate with colleagues in a manner suitable to the work environment

interact with clients about simple matters according to enterprise practices.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

outline why grammar, spelling, diction and pronunciation are important in workplace communications

explain the requirements for locating and storing workplace information

outline the enterprise customer services practices

summarise the workplace documents that can provide assistance with task requirements.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the Support field of work and include access to special purpose tools, equipment and materials.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPSUP263 Perform basic industry calculations

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to perform basic trade calculations and measurements.

It applies to individuals who perform a range of mainly routine tasks in various sectors of the printing and graphic arts industry, using limited practical skills and fundamental knowledge in a defined context. They generally work under direct supervision.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Support

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Calculate costs and dimensions	1.1 Additions, subtractions, multiplications and divisions of costs and dimensions are correctly calculated 1.2 Material and time costs are correctly calculated for elements of a job/brief 1.3 Percentages of cost and time are correctly calculated to fulfil requirements of a job/brief 1.4 Results of calculations are correctly recorded
2. Calculate area, density and volume	2.1 Density and/or volume of fluids and colours are correctly calculated and applied 2.2 Percentages of densities and volumes are correctly calculated to fulfil requirements of a job/brief
3. Use basic measuring tools and apply results of measurement	3.1 Appropriate measuring tools are selected and used correctly and accurately 3.2 Measurements are correctly interpreted and used in appropriate calculations

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.2, 2.2	Recognises text within job specifications and follows written instructions
Writing	1.4	Records numerical and key information related to outcomes of the job
Numeracy	1.1-1.4, 2.1, 2.2, 3.2	Uses simple mathematical calculations to determine weights, areas and volumes required by various tasks
Get the work done	3.1	Plans and implements routine tasks with familiar goals and outcomes

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPSUP263 Perform basic industry calculations	ICPSU263C Perform basic industry calculations	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPSUP263 Perform basic industry calculations

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

perform numerical calculations involving basic arithmetic, percentages and geometry to calculate costs, dimensions, weights, areas, density and volumes

complete activities using basic measuring tools used in the printing industry

document the results of calculations.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

explain how to perform quick approximations of expected answers

describe parallax errors and how they affect measurements

explain how acceptable tolerances in measurement are determined

list the measuring tools available in the workplace and briefly describe the function of each tool.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the Support field of work and include access to special purpose tools, equipment and materials.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPSUP271 Provide basic instruction for a task

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to convey technical information to an individual client for their specific use, in a clear, concise and coherent manner.

It applies to individuals who are skilled workers and are required to instruct other workers in a task during normal work.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Support

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Prepare for training	1.1 Check with the individual that training is required, and conditions are suitable for training 1.2 Check that any necessary equipment is available 1.3 Check that instructor and trainee have sufficient time available
2. Instruct trainee in task	2.1 Instruct trainee in task using appropriate techniques 2.2 Provide individual with details of required knowledge about potential problems and causes of failure 2.3 Provide individual with information about potential hazards 2.4 Allow individual to practise task under supervision 2.5 Encourage individual to ask questions and provide feedback
3. Check learning has taken place	3.1 Check the individual can perform task to required standard 3.2 Check the individual is aware of potential problems and causes of failure 3.3 Check the individual is aware of potential hazards and knows how to avoid them
4. Arrange for necessary follow-up training	4.1 Estimate individual’s level of skill and their requirements for follow-up training, if required 4.2 Arrange for appropriate follow-up training or supervised practice sessions, if required

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	2.1	Recognises text within job specifications and follows written instructions
Writing	1.1, 2.1	Records key information related to outcomes of the job
Oral Communication	1.1, 1.3, 2.1-2.3, 2.5, 3.3,	Conveys information using relevant language suitable to the audience Employs listening and questioning techniques to confirm understanding
Interact with others	2.4, 3.1	Seeks to cooperate with others to achieve results in immediate work context
Get the work done	1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 4.1, 4.2	Plans routine tasks with familiar goals and outcomes, taking some limited responsibility for decisions regarding sequencing and timing

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPSUP271 Provide basic instruction for a task	ICPSU271C Provide basic instruction for a task	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPSUP271 Provide basic instruction for a task

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

on TWO separate occasions:

plan a training session taking into account what needs to be delivered, timeframes, trainee needs and equipment requirements

use appropriate techniques to clearly, concisely and coherently provide technical information to a trainee

check that the trainee can perform the required task safely and effectively

evaluate whether the trainee's level of skill is sufficient and organise appropriate follow-up, if required.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

outline questioning and active listening techniques for conveying and clarifying information

explain how to use basic negotiation skills in relation to other team members

explain how to utilise basic demonstrating and explaining skills.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the Support field of work and include access to special purpose tools, equipment and materials.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPSUP280 Enter data into electronic system

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to retrieve and amend job information from production machinery and document changes according to the particular production stage.

It applies to individuals who access job specifications and document changes using an electronic system. This unit can be applied to a wide range of machines to access job information and transfer information for the next production stage.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Support

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Access data	1.1 Data required for the job is called up electronically using industry program 1.2 Data is checked and amended to conform to job specifications
2. Input data	2.1 Load moving is performed to acceptable safe working practices, Australian Standards, codes of practice and specifications 2.2 Data is checked to ensure output conforms to job requirements

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 1.2, 2.2	Recognises text within job specifications and follows written instructions
Writing	1.2	Records key information related to outcomes of the job
Numeracy	2.2	Checks output data against job requirements
Navigate the world of work	2.1	Complies with legal and regulatory requirements
Get the work done	1.1, 1.2	Understands purpose and some specific functions of some common digital tools used in work contexts

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPSUP280 Enter data into electronic system	ICPSU280C Enter data into electronic system	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPSUP280 Enter data into electronic system

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

consistently and accurately access and enter data into a machine console or electronic system.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

summarise work health and safety and other requirements in relation to load moving

summarise the processes for accessing and entering data into the electronic system

explain how to transfer an electronic file across different computer platforms

explain necessary steps if a file fails to transfer correctly

list the programs used to manage this file

explain steps to ensure correct file format is used, and consequences of using an incorrect file format.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the Support field of work and include access to special purpose tools, equipment and materials.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPSUP281 Use computer systems

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to perform basic functions on a computer.

It applies to individuals who perform a range of mainly routine tasks in various sectors of the printing and graphic arts industry, using limited practical skills and fundamental knowledge in a defined context. They generally work under direct supervision.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Support

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Use a stand-alone computer/terminal correctly	1.1 Correct posture at the keyboard is adopted according to work health and safety (WHS) requirements 1.2 Data is correctly accessed to ensure no loss of data 1.3 Data is manipulated correctly to ensure access, retrieval and storage of data
2. Perform computer/terminal functions	2.1 Data is accessed, saved and retrieved for reference and amendment 2.2 Appropriate program is selected for the job to be undertaken 2.3 Mouse and/or keyboard functions are used correctly to operate the computer systems used in the printing industry 2.4 Features of applications are used correctly to deliver a specified output 2.5 Data is saved in correct format and file location 2.6 Master pages, templates and style sheets, as appropriate, are used consistently to ensure data is the same after exchange or transfer

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.2, 1.3, 2.1, 2.5, 2.6	Recognises text within job specifications and follows written instructions
Writing	1.3, 2.4	Records key information related to outcomes of the job
Navigate the world of work	1.1	Understands rights and responsibilities and complies with legal and regulatory requirements
Get the work done	1.2, 1.3, 2.1-2.6	Understands purpose and some specific functions of some common digital tools used in work contexts

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPSUP281 Use computer systems	ICPSU281C Use computer systems	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPSUP281 Use computer systems

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

correctly and safely perform basic functions on a stand-alone computer/terminal using industry software

use a stand-alone computer/terminal with at least TWO software applications relevant to the printing industry to create or access files, perform various computing functions, and save files in required format and location.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

explain the work health and safety requirements when performing keyboarding tasks

Starting, operating and shutting down the computer

Explain when computer power should be turned off

describe how to start or stop using the computer

explain appropriate procedures for using and sharing a password

outline how to access alternative file storage devices

Basic typing skills

show base finger positions on the keyboard

explain benefits of typing at an even and consistent pace

Use of applications

explain how to produce a compressed file

list and briefly describe the functions of master pages, templates, style sheets and macros

describe the workplace requirements for saving files.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the Support field of work and include access to a stand-alone computer or terminal.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPSUP282 Undertake basic machine maintenance

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to safely perform basic, routine maintenance of machines and equipment with minimum down-time.

It applies to individuals who perform a range of mainly routine tasks in various sectors of the printing and graphic arts industry, using limited practical skills and fundamental knowledge in a defined context. They generally work under supervision.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Support

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Plan and prepare for maintenance	1.1 Maintenance schedule is read and task requirements are determined 1.2 Work health and safety (WHS) standards, statutory requirements, relevant Australian standards, codes of practice, manufacturers’ specifications, environmental requirements and enterprise procedures are identified, applied and monitored throughout the work procedure. 1.3 Resources required are identified and obtained according to manufacturer’s recommendations and enterprise standard operating procedures
2. Carry out maintenance	2.1 Machine or equipment is isolated safely or checked for isolation 2.2 Units or machine sections are cleaned, checked and lubricated according to manufacturer’s recommendations and workplace standard operating procedures 2.3 Feeders and conveyers are cleaned, checked and lubricated according to manufacturer’s recommendations and enterprise standard operating procedures 2.4 Safety devices, gears and bearings are checked, lubricated and maintained according to manufacturer’s recommendations and enterprise standard operating procedures 2.5 Machine consumables are checked and replaced if worn or damaged 2.6 Basic maintenance is carried out according to WHS requirements
3. Complete maintenance	3.1 Any wear and tear to machinery is documented and/or referred to appropriate person for action 3.2 Any consumables used are documented for reordering 3.3 Used consumables are disposed of correctly according to enterprise procedures and WHS requirements

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1-1.3, 2.1-2.3, 3.1	Recognises relevant text within job specifications and follows written instructions
Writing	3.1, 3.2	Records key information related to outcomes of the job
Oral Communication	3.1	Clearly articulates requirements using language appropriate to audience and environment
Numeracy	3.2	Uses simple mathematical calculations and arranges sequential, numerical information
Navigate the world of work	1.2, 2.1-2.4, 2.3, 2.3, 3.3	Takes some personal responsibility for adherence to legal and regulatory requirements with specific reference to safe working practices
Interact with others	3.1	Uses appropriate communication protocols and conventions to report issues
Get the work done	1.1, 1.3, 2.1, 2.2, 3.1, 3.2	Determines priorities and sequences steps involved in clearly defined familiar tasks, and identifies and assembles required resources Follows clear instructions or procedures to address routine problems directly relevant to own role Takes responsibility for routine low-impact decisions within familiar situations Understands purpose and some specific functions of some common digital tools used in work contexts

Range of Conditions

This section specifies different work environments and conditions that may affect performance. Essential operating conditions that may be present (depending on the work situation, needs of the candidate, accessibility of the item, and local industry and regional contexts) are included.

Machine or equipment MUST include at least 2 of the following:	reel handling system sheet or object handling systems printing units ancillary units cutting units folding/collating units fastening units.

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPSUP282 Undertake basic machine maintenance	ICPSU225C Perform small machine maintenance	Substantial changes to remove necessity to provide access to all types of equipment. Content updated to reflect current industry practice.	Equivalent unit
ICPSU224C Perform basic machine maintenance	Element 1 – preparation for maintenance added. Element 2 combines previous elements 1 & 2. Element 3 – minor changes and incorporates previous PC 1.2.	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPSUP282 Undertake basic machine maintenance

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

correctly and safely carry out routine maintenance on small machines or equipment with minimum down-time

carry out routine maintenance on any TWO pieces of equipment or systems, satisfying job, workplace and statutory requirements.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

Reel handling system

list Work Health and Safety (WHS) requirements when maintaining and cleaning the reel handling system

outline common causes of failure or breakdown

describe precautions for working with compressed air

describe damage that can be caused to electronic sensors during cleaning

list checks performed on this area of the machine

explain how to determine appropriate chemicals for cleaning purposes

Sheet or object handling systems

identify WHS requirements for maintaining and cleaning the sheet or object handling system

list common causes of failure or breakdown

describe problems caused by inefficient cleaning

list parts of this area of the machine that require cleaning

outline the effect excessive lubricant has in this area of the machine

explain the need for regular maintenance in this area of the machine

Printing units

identify WHS requirements for maintaining and cleaning the printing units

list common causes of failure or breakdown

outline potential problems of continual inefficient washing of roller surfaces

explain why it is necessity to clean bearers on all cylinders in the printing unit

describe problems that can result from cylinder bodies being cleaned incorrectly

list safety devices that need to be checked in the printing unit

explain what to do if a safety device is inoperative

outline checks to carried out when replacing rollers in the inking system

Ancillary units

list WHS requirements for maintaining and cleaning ancillary units

identify common causes of failure or breakdown

outline checks to perform on ancillary units

explain precautions for cleaning ancillary units

Cutting units

identify WHS requirements for maintaining and cleaning cutting units

list common causes of failure or breakdown

outline checks to be carried out on cutting devices and knives

explain how to correctly store cutting knives after replacement

outline problems likely if the machine bed is not maintained

describe problems likely if blades or knives are not maintained

Folding/collating units

identify WHS requirements for maintaining and cleaning folding/collating units

list common causes of failure or breakdown

outline components to check with this equipment

describe problems with inefficient cleaning of the folding/collating unit

identify parts of this machine that require cleaning

name the type of lubricant to use on this equipment and why

Fastening units

list WHS requirements for maintaining and cleaning fastening units

identify common causes of failure or breakdown

outline chemicals to use when cleaning this equipment

explain how to correctly dispose of used chemicals

explain how frequency this equipment should be cleaned

describe problems likely to occur after inefficient cleaning

identify parts of the equipment that must be cleaned

outline consequence of excessive lubricant in this part of the machine

Information sources

describe location of machine manuals, safety and other documentation relevant to this task, and outline the information included.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the Support field of work and include access to machines or units and consumables.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPSUP311 Prepare ink and additives (advanced)

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to prepare inks and additives for special colour work or other special purpose inks.

It applies to individuals who perform a range of defined tasks relating to the printing and screen printing industry, and who may also provide some leadership and guidance to others with some limited responsibility for the output of others.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Pre-requisite Unit

ICPSUP211	Prepare ink and additives

Unit Sector

Support

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Select ink for special colour work or other specialised purpose	1.1 Inks and additives are selected according to job specifications 1.2 Quality and suitability of inks or additives are checked and appropriate action is taken to meet quality standards of client requirements and enterprise and industry standards 1.3 Inks are selected according to end-use of product, suitability of substrate, adhesion, physical and chemical resistance, light fastness, drying method and print process
2. Maintain and calibrate equipment	2.1 Equipment is inspected to ensure it is functional, and where necessary appropriate remedial action is taken prior to commencement 2.2 Equipment is calibrated, cleaned and adjusted according to manufacturer’s/supplier’s instructions
3. Prepare ink for special colour work or other specialised purpose	3.1 Inks and additives are prepared according to work health and safety (WHS) requirements and manufacturer’s/supplier’s instructions with suitable precautions to minimise waste 3.2 Correct colour and weight/volume of ink are calculated, mixed and prepared to match requirements of the job specification and the printing machine to be used 3.3 Formulation of ink and approved colour is appropriately recorded
4. Store and handle ink	4.1 Inks and additives are appropriately stored, handled and labelled according to manufacturer’s/supplier’s instructions to prevent damage and hazards to personnel

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 1.2, 2.2, 3.1, 3.2, 4.1	Recognises and interprets textual information to establish job requirements from relevant information
Writing	3.3, 4.1	Uses clear, specific and industry-related terminology to complete and update workplace documentation
Numeracy	2.2, 3.1-3.3	Uses basic mathematical formula to calculate whole numbers and decimals to determine supplies quantities
Navigate the world of work	1.2, 3.1, 4.1	Recognises and follows organisational and legislative requirements associated with own role
Get the work done	1.1-1.3, 2.1, 2.2, 3.1, 4.1	Takes responsibility for planning and organising own workload, identifying ways of sequencing and combining elements for greater efficiency Initiates standard procedures when responding to familiar problems within immediate context Understands purposes, specific functions and key features of common digital systems and tools and operates them effectively to complete routine tasks

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPSUP311 Prepare ink and additives (advanced)	ICPSU311C Prepare ink and additives (advanced)	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPSUP311 Prepare ink and additives (advanced)

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

prepare at least TWO different lots of ink and additives that require special colour matching and match colour sample by manual and electronic means

select suitable ink types for different substrates

meet client requirements, job specifications, enterprise and industry standards when selecting, preparing, storing and handling ink or additives, and using equipment.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

identify manuals, safety and other documentation needed for this task and briefly outline the relevant information in each source

WHS requirements

outline work health and safety (WHS) requirements for operating machinery or equipment

identify health hazards of using inks, solvents and additives

list pollution and environmental issues to be considered when working with inks and additives

summarise the enterprise procedures for working safely

Ink/additives and test substrate compatibility

describe substrate characteristics and the end use of the substrate

explain why ink colour fastness needs to be determined and considered

explain how to determine whether ink will adhere to the substrate

explain how to test compatibility of solvents, monomers and additives with ink

Ink quantity and match sample by hand/computer

explain the formula for calculating the correct quantity of ink

outline details required to calculate ink quantity

list any computer-based packages used to calculate ink quantity

Ink and check consistency and colour

explain the effect of ink coverage on screen mesh, machine and squeegee

describe the software program(s) used for matching colours and required inputs

describe ideal conditions for matching colours

explain the effect white mixed in colour has on finished colour light fastness

describe methods for checking and adjusting ink colour and consistency

list machine characteristics and other parameters that affect ink deposit and consequently colour

describe effects of viscosity changes in ink

Ink type and record information

explain procedures for recording formulation, by hand or by computer

identify who approves the mixed colour prior to commencing production

identify the process for recording the recipe for the colour

Storage, handling and labelling

explain systems for labelling mixed inks

describe environmental conditions in place for ink storage

explain where to find manufacturer’s specifications and MSDSs.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the Support field of work and include access to inks and additives.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPSUP321 Pack and dispatch (advanced)

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to coordinate and supervise packing and dispatch of printed products.

It applies to individuals who perform a range of defined tasks relating to the printing and graphic arts industry, and who may also provide some leadership and guidance to others with some limited responsibility for the output of others.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Support

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Assess final product	1.1 Finished job is collected/received and checked against job specifications according to enterprise procedures 1.2 Defects, irregularities and discrepancies are identified and action taken according to enterprise procedures
2. Assess wrapping and packaging requirements	2.1 Work instructions are checked to determine any specific customer wrapping and packaging requirements 2.2 Product is assessed to determine wrapping, parcelling and packaging requirements 2.3 Product destination and delivery time are confirmed to determine most appropriate delivery mode 2.4 Transportation/shipping requirements are determined
3. Prepare stock for dispatch	3.1 Suitable area for wrapping/packaging is selected and prepared 3.2 Wrapping and packaging materials are prepared 3.3 Product is wrapped in pre-determined parcel sizes as required 3.4 Product is packaged as appropriate to product size, type, destination, delivery route and method of transportation, according to workplace instructions, transportation/shipping regulations and work health and safety (WHS) requirements 3.5 Packaged goods are weighed using appropriate weighing machines and scales, and labelled according to delivery instructions, transportation/shipping regulations and enterprise procedures
4. Dispatch product	4.1 Packaged product is stacked on/in appropriate storage/shipping containers prior to dispatch 4.2 Product is dispatched via appropriate delivery mode according to workplace instructions, enterprise procedures and WHS requirements 4.3 Product shipping details are recorded according to enterprise procedures 4.4 Delivery schedules are monitored and amended as required according to enterprise procedures

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 2.1, 3.3-3.5, 4.2-4.4	Recognises relevant text within job specifications and enterprise documents and follows written instructions
Writing	3.5, 4.3, 4.4	Uses clear, specific and industry related terminology to complete and update workplace documentation
Oral Communication	2.1, 2.3, 2.4	Uses vocabulary suitable to audience to convey information Uses listening and questioning techniques to confirm understanding
Numeracy	2.3, 3.3, 3.5	Uses simple mathematical calculations and arranges numerical information sequentially
Navigate the world of work	1.1, 1.2, 3.4, 3.5, 4.2-4.4	Recognises and follows organisational and legislative requirements associated with own role
Get the work done	1.2, 2.2-2.4, 3.1-3.3, 4.1, 4.4	Takes responsibility for planning, organising and implementing tasks required to achieve required outcomes Initiates standard procedures when responding to familiar problems or making work related decisions Understands purposes, specific functions and key features of common digital systems and tools and operates them effectively to complete routine tasks

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPSUP321 Pack and dispatch (advanced)	ICPSU321C Pack and dispatch (advanced)	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPSUP321 Pack and dispatch (advanced)

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

supervise wrapping and packing of a variety of printed matter (at least THREE lots), and dispatch goods to at least THREE destinations according to job sheet specifications.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

Quality checking of printed matter for defects and discrepancies

give examples of defective print or items and explain how each defect can be rectified

explain how to check the job against job specifications

Specific customer instructions for wrapping, packing and dispatching

explain how to check customer’s specific requests for wrapping and packing

explain how to ascertain quantities required for each destination

Wrapping and packing materials, methods and equipment used

outline work health and safety (WHS) concerns when using packaging materials and equipment

identify requirements for mechanical and manual wrapping

list the modes of transport used to transfer loads and describe the packing requirements for each mode of transport

Use of weighing machines, scales and labelling equipment

identify the critical weight of each parcel for dispatch purposes

explain importance of weighing and noting the weight of each parcel

identify necessary labelling requirements

Use of pallet trucks, forklifts and storing and loading goods

identify WHS requirements and safety measures for use of forklifts

describe restrictions in place for personnel in the use of forklifts

identify maximum weight the pallet truck/forklift can lift

list checks in place to ensure goods are correctly loaded onto transport to prevent damage during transit

Monitoring delivery schedules

identify ways of ensuring time of delivery at each destination complies with client’s requirements

outline procedures in place if parcels do not reach their destination

Information sources

explain where to find relevant machine manuals, safety and other documentation and outline the information in each source

Modes of transport and writing of consignment notes

list factors that affect the mode of transport chosen for a particular consignment

explain the process for arranging the pickup of the consignment by the transport company

describe the labels required on the goods to ensure delivery to the right destination

outline the consignment note/dispatch documentation to be completed

explain why the signature of the driver and time of dispatch must be noted on documentation.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the Support field of work and include access to resources and product to pack and dispatch.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPSUP323 Dispose of waste

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to dispose of waste according to enterprise procedures and government regulations.

It applies to individuals who perform a range of defined tasks relating to the printing and graphic arts industry, and who may also provide some leadership and guidance to others with some limited responsibility for the output of others.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Support

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Prepare waste	1.1 Waste is stored according to work health and safety (WHS) and Environmental Protection Authority (EPA) requirements 1.2 Waste treatment system is monitored to ensure correct operation and changes to procedures are recommended if required 1.3 Waste is treated, if necessary, to ensure compliance with workplace and EPA standards
2. Dispose of waste	2.1 Appropriate disposal is arranged with regard to waste quality, quantity and EPA and government regulations 2.2 Waste is disposed of in an appropriate way to ensure compliance with workplace and EPA standards 2.3 Any subcontractors are checked to ensure they comply with EPA and government regulations 2.4 Wastage rates are documented or collated for further review

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 2.4	Comprehends information in complex texts including regulations and legislation Interprets written instructions
Writing	1.2, 2.3, 2.4	Uses clear, specific and industry related terminology to complete and update workplace documentation
Oral Communication	2.3	Uses vocabulary suitable to audience to convey information Uses listening and questioning techniques to gather or confirm information
Numeracy	1.2, 2.1, 2.4	Uses simple mathematical calculations and arranges sequential numerical information
Navigate the world of work	1.1, 2.1, 2.2, 2.3	Recognises and follows organisational and legislative requirements associated with own role
Get the work done	1.2, 2.1, 2.3, 2.4	Takes responsibility for planning, organising and implementing tasks required to achieve required outcomes

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPSUP323 Dispose of waste	ICPSU323C Dispose of waste	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPSUP323 Dispose of waste

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

treat and dispose of TWO lots of waste according to enterprise and statutory requirements and regulations.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

explain consequences of a company having excess waste

summarise how to follow segregating and packaging requirements for correct disposal

outline appropriate handling methods

outline consequences of incorrectly handling waste

identify appropriate storage method

demonstrate how to check results obtained against enterprise and statutory details

list details recorded when recording results of liquid waste treatment

explain why equipment must be kept clean and maintained

explain where to find relevant manuals, safety and other documentation and outline the information included in each source

identify work health and safety (WHS) concerns related to operating, cleaning and maintaining waste testing equipment

outline the Environmental Protection Authority requirements regarding storage and disposal of waste

describe WHS regulations on the handling of waste

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the Support field of work and include access to waste and waste disposal equipment.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPSUP342 Undertake inventory procedures

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to use inventory procedures and requisitioning.

It applies to individuals who perform a range of defined tasks relating to the printing and graphic arts industry, and who may also provide some leadership and guidance to others with some limited responsibility for the output of others.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Support

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Use inventory procedures	1.1 Inventory procedures are understood and carried out according to enterprise standard operating procedures 1.2 Requisition, purchase, shipping and invoice documentation is used as required according to enterprise standard operating procedures 1.3 Inward/outward recording/filing system is understood, accessed and maintained according to enterprise standard operating procedures 1.4 Customer orders are maintained according to enterprise standard operating procedures 1.5 Returned orders are booked back according to enterprise standard operating procedures
2. Requisition goods	2.1 Requisition procedures are understood and carried out according to enterprise standard operating procedures 2.2 Goods are requisitioned on time 2.3 All recording is completed and filed correctly according to enterprise standard operating procedures

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1-1.5, 2.1, 2.3	Recognises text within job specifications and follows written instructions
Writing	1.1-1.5, 2.3	Uses clear, specific and industry related terminology to complete and update workplace documentation
Numeracy	1.1-1.5, 2.3	Uses simple mathematical calculations to complete workplace requirements
Get the work done	1.1-1.5, 2.1-2.3	Follows standard operating procedures to plan, organise and implement tasks Uses familiar digital systems and tools to access, organise, analyse and display information

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPSUP342 Undertake inventory procedures	ICPSU342C Undertake inventory procedures	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPSUP342 Undertake inventory procedures

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

apply inventory and enterprise procedures for supply or requisition of goods

compile a portfolio of inventory paperwork over a period of ONE month that shows correct implementation of inventory procedures and requisitioning of goods.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

Standard operating procedures to maintain inventory

describe the effect poor inventory control can have on organisational procedures

explain the difference between requisitioning and purchasing

list the type of goods and materials filed under incoming or inward

list the type of goods and materials filed under outgoing or outward

explain how to maintain accurate recording and filing systems for inward/outward goods

summarise how to accurately maintain customer’s orders

discuss why an order might be returned

explain why checks are conducted on returned goods

identify when goods should be replenished

Routine stocktaking

describe the system used for stocktaking different types of goods (eg inks, substrates, consumables, perishables)

identify who is responsible for calculating value of stock at the date of stocktake

list records of stock value that are kept

describe the system in place for segregating non-current stock

Requisitioning and recording of goods

identify who has the authority to approve requisition of goods

outline any special approval required for requisition of certain goods or materials

explain procedures to indicate goods received have been approved for production and comply with the purchase order

describe procedures in place for urgent requisition of goods

list additional information that may need to be recorded prior to filing requisition orders.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the Support field of work and include access to special purpose tools, equipment and materials.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPSUP345 Purchase materials and schedule deliveries

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the knowledge required to purchase materials and schedule deliveries for production and/or storage. It is applicable to a production section or a stores/warehouse.

It applies to individuals who perform a range of defined tasks relating to the printing and screen printing industry, and who may also provide some leadership and guidance to others with some limited responsibility for the output of others.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Support

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Identify material requirements	1.1 Customer/client is consulted as appropriate and customer order specifications detailed 1.2 Supporting production data is examined 1.3 Required materials are identified including type, quality and quantity 1.4 Required quantities are estimated according to predetermined standards 1.5 Purchase order/list is developed according to enterprise standard operating procedures
2. Purchase materials and schedule deliveries	2.1 Delivery requirements are determined from production plan 2.2 Supplier/vendor is informed of requirements and specifications 2.3 Supply/purchasing schedules are adjusted where required according to enterprise standard operating procedures

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1-1.3, 2.1	Recognises relevant text in orders and enterprise documentation
Writing	1.1, 1.4, 1.5, 2.2, 2.3	Uses clear, specific and industry related terminology to complete and update workplace documentation
Oral Communication	1.1, 2.2	Clearly explains requirements using language appropriate to audience and environment
Numeracy	1.2-1.5, 2.1-2.3	Uses simple mathematical calculations and techniques to examine production data and determine material requirements
Navigate the world of work	1.4	Takes personal responsibility for adherence to enterprise standards
Get the work done	1.3, 1.5	Takes responsibility for planning, organising and implementing tasks according to standard operating procedures

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPSUP345 Purchase materials and schedule deliveries	ICPSU345C Purchase materials and schedule deliveries	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPSUP345 Purchase materials and schedule deliveries

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

identify type, quality and quantity of materials required according to order specifications and enterprise procedures

correctly purchase materials and arrange delivery

produce a portfolio of paperwork that shows purchasing of materials and scheduling of deliveries over a period of at least ONE month, where there were no major interruptions to production caused by absence of materials, and no excess materials in stock.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

Determining materials and purchasing requirements

explain how to obtain customer order specifications

explain the need to keep an accurate stock control system

outline the stock control systems in place

explain how to determine when stock needs replenishing

describe when it is appropriate to ask a customer or client to verify verbal instructions

Purchasing procedures

describe preferred suppliers and the products they supply

explain who should raise an order and where

describe which contracts are listed for purchase orders

explain reasons for purchasing contracts

identify who is responsible for determining the required quantity in the order

outline special instructions that can be listed on orders

outline how to maintain accurate purchasing records

Scheduling materials delivery

describe the actions required if delivery requirements cannot be met

explain why purchasing schedules may need adjustment

explain effects atmospheric conditions and light can have on materials in storage.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the Support field of work and include access to special purpose tools, equipment and materials.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPSUP351 Undertake basic production scheduling

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to schedule production for a small work unit.

It applies to individuals who perform a range of defined tasks relating to pre-press, printing, screen printing, converting or finishing. They may also provide some leadership and guidance to others with some limited responsibility for the output of others.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Support

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Identify production requirements and capacities	1.1 Printing, converting and finishing production data is identified 1.2 Inventory capacities and requirements are identified 1.3 Procurement and supply requirements and constraints are identified 1.4 Production capacity for the workgroup is identified 1.5 Production constraints for the workgroup are identified 1.6 Standard times for the workgroup are identified
2. Prepare production schedule for small work unit	2.1 Scheduling is done in conjunction with overall scheduling of other units and processes 2.2 Production schedule is prepared according to production, inventory, procurements, time constraints and supply capacities and requirements 2.3 Schedule is documented according to enterprise procedures 2.4 Schedule is modified as required
3. Monitor production	3.1 Production is monitored 3.2 Any necessary changes in scheduling, and reasons for this, are reported according to enterprise procedures

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1-1.3	Recognises text within job specifications and follows written instructions
Writing	2.1-2.4, 3.2	Uses clear, specific and industry related terminology to complete and update workplace documentation
Numeracy	1.2, 1.4, 1.6	Uses simple mathematical calculations and arranges numerical information sequentially
Navigate the world of work	2.3, 3.2	Takes personal responsibility for adherence to enterprise policies procedures and standards
Get the work done	1.1-1.6, 2.1, 2.2, 3.1	Takes responsibility for planning, organising and implementing tasks to achieve required outcomes, taking a range of factors into consideration Monitors outcomes of plans to inform decisions about possible changes

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPSUP351 Undertake basic production scheduling	ICPSU351C Undertake basic production scheduling	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPSUP351 Undertake basic production scheduling

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

effectively schedule production for a small unit in pre-press, printing, screen printing, converting or finishing according to enterprise procedures

produce a portfolio that documents ONE month’s scheduling activities and covers identifying production requirements and capacities, preparing a production schedule and monitoring production.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

Production requirements and capacities

describe the relationship between job requirements and production processes

list and describe special production requirements and possible problems that special requirements may cause

outline criteria used to determine availability of machines, materials and labour

explain work health and safety (WHS) concerns to consider when planning production

Checking stock levels

explain how stock levels are checked

identify information to obtain from outside suppliers that will allow job priorities to be established

describe the system used to select suppliers

Preparation and documentation of the production schedule

explain how to determine production workflow

identify the system used to work out job priorities

describe the purpose of documenting production workflow

explain how to communicate schedules to the workforce

Revising schedules

outline how to monitor and amend production schedules

describe the factors to consider if a production schedule is being revised.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the Support field of work and include access to special purpose tools, equipment and materials.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPSUP352 Plan operational processes

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to develop and plan for new, or to modify existing, operational or production processes.

It applies to individuals who perform a range of defined tasks relating to the printing and graphic arts industry, and may also provide some leadership and guidance to others with some limited responsibility for the output of others.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Support

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Identify production requirements	1.1 Overall production schedule is examined to identify production requirements 1.2 Material requirements are identified according to production requirements 1.3 Current processes are identified in consultation with other staff
2. Review customer order specifications	2.1 Customer order specifications are obtained and examined 2.2 Supporting production data is examined 2.3 Production process to be used is determined based on information supplied in production plan
3. Determine process operations	3.1 Existing process operations are reviewed in consultation with management 3.2 Existing problems are clarified with team and customers 3.3 Work operations required are identified in consultation with team 3.4 Suitable machinery or equipment is identified in consultation with team 3.5 Cost and duration are estimated against production estimates 3.6 Recommendations on possible solutions are made and documented
4. Determine production sequence	4.1 Steps required for the process are identified 4.2 Material and equipment requirement lists are prepared and documented 4.3 Quality assurance steps and specifications are identified 4.4 Process steps are documented and clearly represented

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1-1.3, 2.1-2.3, 3.1-3.6, 4.1-4.3	Recognises relevant text within job specifications, plans and production data
Writing	1.1-1.3, 3.1-3.6, 4.1-4.4	Uses clear, specific and industry related terminology to complete and update workplace documentation
Oral Communication	3.1-3.4	Clearly explains requirements using language appropriate to audience and environment
Numeracy	3.5	Uses basic mathematical calculations related to budget and workplace scheduling
Interact with others	3.2-3.4	Cooperates with others as part of familiar routine activities, and contributes to specific activities requiring joint responsibility and accountability
Get the work done	1.2, 2.1, 2.3, 3.2, 3.6, 4.1, 4.2	Plans and organises tasks required to achieve outcomes, including acquiring necessary resources and workplace scheduling Takes responsibility for addressing predictable, and some less predictable, problems in familiar work contexts

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPSUP352 Plan operational processes	ICPSU352C Plan operational processes	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	No equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPSUP352 Plan operational processes

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

produce a portfolio that includes documentation showing planning of operational processes (either a new process or modification of an existing process) in any ONE of pre-press, printing, screen printing, converting, binding and finishing, corrugating or laminating.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

Production requirements

summarise production plan information that will aid in determining a suitable production process

explain the relevance of production schedules, material requirements and customer requirements to process operations

describe the possible impacts of changes to process technology or product on existing production areas including:

whether existing machinery or equipment can be utilised

special provisions needed for new equipment or machinery

expected production life of equipment

Reviewing, testing and costing

explain the method used to review existing processes

explain the methods used to estimate costs and cost savings

explain the role of test and trials in identifying suitable processes

Determining production sequence

explain how steps for the process and equipment and material requirements are identified and documented

explain how quality assurance requirements are identified

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the Support field of work and include access to special purpose tools, equipment and materials.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPSUP357 Apply quick changeover procedures

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to carry out quick operational changeovers and recommend improvements within the scope and authority of the job.

It applies to individuals who perform a range of defined tasks relating to the printing and print finishing industry, who may also provide some leadership and guidance to others with some limited responsibility for the output of others.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Support

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Prepare for changeover	1.1 Timing of changeover is determined according to production schedule 1.2 All required tools/parts/materials are obtained for changeover 1.3 Process and tools/parts/materials are organised ready for changeover 1.4 Liaison with relevant people is conducted for quick changeover
2. Make quick changeover	2.1 Quick changeover is planned according to quick changeover principles 2.2 Changeover is completed according to enterprise procedures 2.3 Output is checked to meet specifications 2.4 Any steps which cause a problem are noted and changes recommended to problematic steps
3. Improve work health and safety (WHS)	3.1 Hazards in all steps/actions are identified 3.2 Risks from each hazard are determined 3.3 Actions which may be performed in a more ergonomic manner are identified 3.4 Changes are recommended to improve WHS

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1	Recognises text within job specifications and follows written instructions
Writing	2.4. 3.1. 3.4	Uses clear, specific and industry related terminology to complete and update workplace documentation
Oral Communication	1.4, 3.4	Clearly articulates requirements using language appropriate to audience and environment
Numeracy	1.1	Uses simple mathematical calculations to determine timeframes
Navigate the world of work	2.2, 3.1-3.4	Takes personal responsibility for adherence to enterprise policies, procedures and standards
Get the work done	1.1-1.3, 2.1, 2.3, 2.4, 3.1-3.3	Takes responsibility for planning and organising own workload, necessary resources and workplace scheduling Recognises and takes responsibility for addressing predictable and some less predictable problems in familiar work contexts

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPSUP357 Apply quick changeover procedures	ICPSU357C Apply quick changeover procedures	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent qualification

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPSUP357 Apply quick changeover procedures

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

plan a changeover including scheduling, organising tools, parts and materials, and liaising with required people

complete a changeover according to quick changeover procedures

identify hazards during all steps of changeover, determine risks, and recommend changes to improve health and safety.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

explain principles of a quick changeover

identify relevant procedures

explain purposes/requirements of changeover

describe how to recommend WHS or changover improvements

explain how to check that output meets quality requirements

outline the process for minimisation of changeover scrap

summarise work health and safety (WHS) requirements for completing changeovers.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the Support field of work and include access to machinery for changeover.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPSUP362 Communicate as part of a work team

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to communicate as part of a work team.

It applies to individuals who perform a range of defined tasks relating to the printing and graphic arts industry, and who may also provide some leadership and guidance to others with some limited responsibility for the output of others.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Support

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Participate in group discussions	1.1 Participant’s contribution in a small group discussion to reach agreement on a workplace related issue is clearly evident 1.2 Personal views are presented in a way that supports views of others involved in the discussion 1.3 Appropriate meeting procedures are adhered to 1.4 Information is conveyed in a logical, clear and concise manner 1.5 Follow-up steps are taken as specified
2. Prepare a presentation	2.1 Planning and preparation of a simple presentation is undertaken cooperatively with team members 2.2 Agreed tasks are completed to schedule 2.3 Participant’s purpose in the presentation is clearly evident from the context 2.4 Participant’s interaction is supportive and constructive
3. Present a job related report to a group	3.1 Views are presented clearly and logically and relate to the aims of the presentation 3.2 Stated purpose of the presentation is achieved

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.3, 2.1	Recognises relevant information within workplace documents
Writing	2.1	Uses clear, specific and industry related terminology to plan and prepare workplace documents
Oral Communication	1.4, 3.1	Provides information using language, tone and vocabulary appropriate to audience and environment
Navigate the world of work	1.3, 1.5, 2.3, 3.2	Understands and adheres to workplace procedures Understands nature and responsibilities of own role and how the role contributes to the work of others in the immediate work context
Interact with others	1.1, 1.2, 2.1, 2.4	Plays an active role in workgroup discussions, paying some attention to perspectives of others Cooperates with others as part of familiar routine activities and contributes to specific activities requiring joint responsibility and accountability Begins to recognise and accommodate individual differences
Get the work done	2.1, 2.2	Takes responsibility for planning, organising and implementing tasks required to achieve required outcomes

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPSUP362 Communicate as part of a work team	ICPSU362C Communicate as part of a work team	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPSUP362 Communicate as part of a work team

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

actively participate in a work group discussion by :

providing information and personal views clearly, logically and concisely

adhering to meeting procedures

completing required follow up after the discussion

plan and prepare a simple presentation with other team members

deliver a clear and logical presentation to a group that meets the purpose of the presentation.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

explain the importance of listening effectively, speaking clearly and taking concise notes

outline how to gather and organise information for a discussion or presentation

summarise the relevant procedures for conducting and participating in a meeting

describe how to set goals in a group environment

summarise how to negotiate outcomes within a group environment

explain how to handle conflict in a group environment

outline the key presentation techniques

summarise the presentation tools and media available

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the Support field of work and include access to special purpose tools, equipment and materials.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPSUP381 Operate and maintain computer resources

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to undertake basic computing skills including routine personal computer maintenance, upgrades, restorations, data storage, conversion and transmission.

It applies to individuals who perform a range of defined tasks relating to the printing and graphic arts industry, and who may also provide some leadership and guidance to others with some limited responsibility for the output of others.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Support

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Perform routine system maintenance	1.1 Required equipment is checked, and is in working order and available for use 1.2 Peripherals are fitted, maintained, cleaned and adjusted as required 1.3 Personal computer furniture and fittings are adjusted according to work health and safety (WHS) practices and protection of equipment considerations 1.4 Routine system maintenance and security processes are performed 1.5 Correct functioning of automated processes is monitored 1.6 Monitors are adjusted only when being calibrated and are otherwise left alone 1.7 All abnormalities and system malfunctions are reported 1.8 Off-line maintenance records are kept up-to-date
2. Perform back-ups and restorations on a personal computer	2.1 File system back-ups are performed regularly according to established workplace practices 2.2 Back-up media are labelled, stored and rotated according to established workplace practices 2.3 Files are restored from back-up as required 2.4 Data is recovered from damaged and corrupted files using small office tools 2.5 Adequate written records of back-ups are kept
3. Store and supply consumables	3.1 Consumables are stored and disposed of according to WHS, care of equipment and system security 3.2 Stock levels and user needs are monitored to ensure required consumables are available
4. Upgrade and configure a personal computer	4.1 Software and peripherals are installed, upgraded and configured according to enterprise policy 4.2 New software, upgrades and adjustments are tested to ensure adequate performance 4.3 Personal computer furniture and fittings are adjusted to meet workplace standards for WHS and care of equipment 4.4 Written records of installations, upgrades and configurations are maintained
5 Access documentation, records and updates	5.1 Documentation, including hardware and software manuals and equipment inventory and service records, is stored and accessed appropriately 5.2 Supplementary product information, updates and technical reference material are accessed using the internet, journals and other sources
6. Access and deliver data	6.1 Removable storage devices are connected, disconnected and configured as required 6.2 Data is accessed from different types of file systems 6.3 Data is stored and converted to suit a variety of operating systems, environments and applications 6.4 Data is transmitted effectively by the method most appropriate to the task

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	4.2, 5.1, 5.2, 6.1-6.4	Recognises text within job specifications and follows written instructions
Writing	1.8, 2.2, 2.5, 4.4	Uses clear, specific and industry related terminology to complete and update workplace documentation
Navigate the world of work	1.3, 2.1, 3.1, 4.3	Recognises and follows organisational and legislative requirements associated with own role
Interact with others	1.7	Uses appropriate communication protocols and conventions to report issues
Get the work done	1.1, 1.2, 1.4-1.8, 2.1-2.5, 3.1, 3.2, 4.1, 4.2, 4.4, 5.1, 5.2, 6.1-6.4	Takes responsibility for planning and organising own workload, identifying ways of sequencing and combining elements for greater efficiency Understands purposes, specific functions and key features of common digital systems and tools, and operates them effectively to complete routine tasks, adapting some functions to improve personal efficiency Initiates standard procedures when responding to familiar problems within immediate context Takes responsibility for outcomes of routine decisions related directly related to own role

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPSUP381 Operate and maintain computer resources	ICPSU381 Operate and maintain computer resources	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPSUP381 Operate and maintain computer resources

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

correctly operate and maintain computer resources

produce log books and written records showing system maintenance and configuration history over a period of THREE months, including all reported abnormalities and how they were addressed

perform a routine system back-up and restore a nominated file from an earlier back-up

convert a document from one common file format to another and make the file available for access on a different platform (eg Macintosh application to MS-Windows application via suitably encoded Internet email attachment)

research and report availability of upgrades and support for TWO pieces of hardware and TWO pieces of software currently in use.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

Work health and safety (WHS) requirements for terminal operators

describe correct positioning of the keyboard, mouse and screen to avoid fatigue

explain when a foot rest is appropriate

Computing technology

describe relationships between baud rate, bits per second and bandwidth

explain the meaning of MIPPS

describe the function of the video card

specify what must be checked before commencement of a software installation or upgrade

Security and storage of data

identify risks that might exist for the system, the enterprise and users if an individual proceeds to install their own software (assuming the software has been scanned for viruses)

describe back-up and restoration procedures currently used, as well as their strengths and weaknesses

explain why hand-written records are kept

describe how to identify and respond to a possible security breach or virus attack

list environmental factors that could cause data loss from removable media

File preparation, conversion and encoding including cross-platform considerations

describe how to retain fonts of converted files

explain differences in file naming conventions between IBM-PC, Macintosh and Unix

list three encoding methods for internet email transmission of files and state which platform each is used for

list four common graphics file formats and when each format should be chosen

Correct use of network and telecommunications technologies

explain how a Macintosh can communicate with another computer

identify types of cabling and network cards installed and their effect on data transmission speed

summarise how to transmit data

describe how to conduct a search for product information on the internet

identify the most efficient way to exchange files with clients or other companies

Specific hardware, peripherals and consumables for the pre-press area

list the configuration of a typical high performance pre-press computer

identify the form of computer language used to drive an image setter

describe types of removable media commonly used in the pre-press area

list pieces of hardware that require periodical cleaning

Pre-press software

specify the limiting factor of most desktop publishing pre-press software

explain where a multitasking computer operating system fits in the pre-press production process

identify appropriate software to:

scan for a virus

produce a logo

manipulate an image

set up a printer network

create a page of text

Information sources

list the machine manuals, safety and other documentation relevant to this task and outline the information included in these documents.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the Support field of work and include access to special purpose tools, equipment and materials.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPSUP389 Undertake basic root cause analysis

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to contribute to an advanced maintenance strategy.

It applies to individuals who work in an organisation and apply competitive manufacturing strategies. This involves taking responsibility for their work processes, undertaking basic root cause analysis of problems and generally contributing to overall equipment efficiency (OEE).

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Support

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Recognise problem	1.1 Equipment/plant condition is monitored according to enterprise procedures 1.2 Product is monitored against quality standards and job specifications 1.3 Conditions/product characteristics indicative of a problem are identified 1.4 Existing work-based problem and/or practice is recognised
2. Implement quick fix	2.1 Immediate problem is controlled/contained 2.2 Quick fix is recommended within scope of competency and authority
3. Determine root cause	3.1 Range of possible causes are identified 3.2 Information is gathered to eliminate/confirm causes 3.3 Assistance is sought as required according to level of responsibility and personal capabilities 3.4 Root cause is identified based on examination of the above
4. Develop permanent solution	4.1 Range of methods of eliminating root cause/breaking the cause tree is identified 4.2 Most appropriate solution is selected based on machinery capabilities, material requirements and job schedules 4.3 Relevant people are liaised with to confirm decision, if required 4.4 Solution is recommend/implemented within limits of competency and authority 4.5 Implementation is monitored and improvements are made as required

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.2, 3.2, 4.2	Recognises relevant text within job specifications and organisational procedures and follows written instructions
Writing	2.2, 4.1, 4.4	Uses clear, specific and industry related terminology to complete and update workplace documentation
Oral Communication	2.2, 3.3, 4.3, 4.4	Participates in verbal interactions using language, tone and vocabulary appropriate to audience and environment
Navigate the world of work	1.1, 1.2, 2.2, 3.3, 4.4	Adheres to enterprise policies procedures and standards Understands nature and purpose of own role and associated responsibilities and how it contributes to the work of others in immediate work context Seeks advice about procedures and expectations when taking on new tasks or roles
Interact with others	2.2, 3.3, 4.3, 4.4	Collaborates and cooperates with others to achieve joint outcomes
Get the work done	1.1, 1.3, 1.4, 2.1, 2.2, 3.1, 3.2, 3.4, 4.1, 4.2, 4.5	Takes responsibility for planning, organising, implementing and monitoring tasks required to achieve required outcomes Uses common digital systems to analyse data Initiates standard procedures when responding to problems within immediate context Reviews outcomes of decisions to identify opportunities for improvement

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPSUP389 Undertake basic root cause analysis	ICPSU389C Undertake basic root cause analysis	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPSUP389 Undertake basic root cause analysis

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

recognise problems and undertake a root cause analysis (RCA), either alone or with assistance, and propose permanent solutions.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

explain use of communication, documentation and problem solving techniques

summarise RCA methodology

outline indicators of a problem

identify principles of the process sufficient to undertake a RCA and propose solutions

explain what a 'quick fix' means

outline an analysis in conjunction with relevant analysis tools (cause/effect diagrams, Pareto Charts, 4W).

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the Support field of work and include access to:

RCA via simulation or an actual project

an organisation using RCA.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPSUP417 Perform laboratory quality tests of materials and finished product

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to quality-test materials and printed products in a laboratory.

It applies to individuals who perform a broad range of skilled tasks relating to the printing and graphic arts industry, and may also provide some leadership and guidance to others in the application and planning of the skills.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Support

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Prepare laboratory equipment	1.1 Appropriate equipment is selected and prepared 1.2 Equipment is checked for calibration where necessary
2. Test raw materials or finished goods	2.1 Raw material or finished goods specification is identified and test procedure established to determine test parameters 2.2 Raw material or finished goods are tested against specified quality standards using appropriate/prescribed testing procedures and adhering to Work Health and Safety (WHS) requirements
3. Record and report test result	3.1 Recording and reporting of test results are completed according to enterprise requirements 3.2 Problems and issues are documented and reported to appropriate personnel
4. Clean laboratory equipment	4.1 Equipment is cleaned and stored according to enterprise requirements 4.2 Chemicals and waste are disposed of according to enterprise procedures and WHS standards

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.2, 2.2, 3.1, 4.2	Recognises text within job specifications and follows written instructions
Writing	3.1, 3.2	Uses clear, specific and industry related terminology to complete and update workplace documentation
Numeracy	1.2	Uses mathematical calculations to calibrate equipment
Navigate the world of work	2.3, 3.1, 4.1, 4.2	Takes personal responsibility for following enterprise policies procedures, standards and legislative requirements
Interact with others	3.1, 3.2	Uses appropriate communication protocols and conventions to report issues
Get the work done	1.1, 1.2, 2.2, 3.2, 4.1	Takes responsibility for planning, organising and implementing tasks according to enterprise requirements Understands purposes and features of common digital systems and tools, and operates them effectively to complete routine tasks Initiates standard procedures when responding to familiar problems within immediate context

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPSUP417 Perform laboratory quality tests of materials and finished product	ICPSU417C Perform laboratory quality tests of materials and finished product	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPSUP417 Perform laboratory quality tests of materials and finished product

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

correctly perform laboratory tests for quality of materials and products

correctly dispose of chemicals and waste according to enterprise procedures and work health and safety (WHS) standards

produce a portfolio of documents showing tests carried out over a period of at least ONE month, including documentation of test results and reported problems.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

WHS and other statutory requirements

identify WHS concerns relating to testing equipment

identify statutory requirements that must be met regarding use of this equipment

Testing equipment

explain the need to work in a controlled, clean environment

list relevant testing equipment and why they are used

describe how the equipment is calibrated

Printing processes

describe some common tests required for various printing operations and products in this company

list common causes of failure in products tested personally

describe the test performed on this product and why

Sampling and quality control techniques

list sampling techniques used to select products for testing

explain how to determine appropriate size of samples for testing

Record keeping

describe the type of records that need to be kept on a particular test product

explain the purpose of keeping test results

explain how test results can be used in the future

Equipment maintenance

explain the need to keep equipment clean

describe how test equipment should be stored

list chemicals used to clean the equipment

Information sources

list the machine manuals, safety and other documentation relevant to this task and outline the information included in these documents.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the Support field of work and include access laboratory testing equipment.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPSUP455 Supervise and schedule work of others

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to supervise and schedule work of a team or individuals.

It applies to individuals who perform a broad range of skilled tasks relating to the printing and graphic arts industry, and who may also provide some leadership and guidance to others in application and planning of the skills.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Support

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Plan and implement work schedules	1.1 Tasks and/or jobs are identified and prioritised according to overall production schedule 1.2 Timelines, personnel and equipment are identified for each job and task 1.3 Schedules are communicated logically and in an easily understood manner 1.4 Changes to schedules are implemented through reorganisation of priorities, with reasons being clearly conveyed to the team or individuals 1.5 Priority of tasks is communicated to the team or individuals
2. Monitor performance of tasks	2.1 Required standard is effectively communicated to the team or individuals to ensure understanding of allotted task 2.2 Instruction or support to achieve required standard is provided as necessary 2.3 Standard of performance is monitored, including quality standards, to ensure achievement of outcomes, and is reported according to enterprise procedures 2.4 Completion times of tasks/jobs are monitored and scheduling is adjusted as appropriate
3. Monitor and support development of teams or individuals	3.1 Team or worker performance is monitored to determine effectiveness and is reported according to enterprise procedures 3.2 Support is provided to individuals or teams to ensure full participation 3.3 Procedures are provided to assist interaction and feedback on effectiveness between teams and individuals
4. Monitor application of WHS in the work area	4.1 Implementation of standards, both work health and safety (WHS) and environmental, is monitored to determine safety in the work area requirements 4.2 Strategies for prevention or correction of problems are determined from the monitoring process 4.3 Recommendations for prevention or correction are made to achieve established standards
5. Communicate with management, work teams and individuals	5.1 All information affecting work is explained logically and in an easily understood manner to team coordinators, teams or individuals where appropriate 5.2 Effective and appropriate information provision is carried out with management and/or external personnel 5.3 Written reports are concise and conform to enterprise procedures

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 1.3, 1.4, 2.4, 3.1, 3.3, 4.1	Recognises relevant text within organisational documents and follows written instructions
Writing	1.1, 1.4, 2.3, 2.4, 3.1, 3.3, 4.3, 5.1-5.3	Records numerical and textual information related to outcomes of the job
Oral Communication	1.3-1.5, 2.1, 2.2, 3.2, 3.3, 4.3, 5.1-5.3	Provides explanations using vocabulary and non-verbal features appropriate for audience and context
Numeracy	1.2-1.4, 2.4	Uses simple mathematical calculations related to timeframes and schedules
Navigate the world of work	2.3, 3.1, 4.1, 5.3	Recognises and follows organisational and legislative requirements associated with own role
Interact with others	1.3-1.5, 2.1, 2.2, 3.2, 3.3, 4.3, 5.1-5.3	Uses appropriate communication protocols and conventions to convey information to co-workers Plays a lead role in collaborating, consulting and cooperating with co-workers to achieve shared understanding of individual roles and group objectives
Get the work done	1.1, 1.2, 2.3, 2.4, 4.2	Takes responsibility for planning and organising own workload and workloads of others Initiates standard procedures when responding to familiar problems within immediate context

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPSUP455 Supervise and schedule work of others	ICPSU455C Supervise and schedule work of others	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPSUP455 Supervise and schedule work of others

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

effectively schedule and supervise a team or individuals

create a portfolio of documents showing:

planning, implementing and monitoring schedules

monitoring and reporting on the performance of others

providing support and feedback on performance to others

determining safety requirements in the work area

monitoring work health and safety and environmental standards. (Suitable documents for the portfolio include rosters, schedules, quality-related documentation and testimonials from superiors and workers being supervised.)

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

WHS standards

explain who is responsible for work health and safety (WHS) standards in the workplace

explain reporting procedures for WHS incidents

Planning and implementing work schedules

explain how priority of jobs is determined

describe work scheduling procedures used within the organisation

explain why changes to scheduling might be needed

Standards monitoring

outline information reported in performance monitoring

identify who is responsible for providing instruction to achieve the required standard

Staff and workforce development

describe how often teams or individuals should be monitored on performance

outline changes that can be made to enhance individual performance

outline changes that can be made to enhance team performance

list advantages of providing written reports to management.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the Support field of work and include access special purpose tools, equipment and materials.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPSUP456 Control production

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to manage production of a shift or section.

It applies to individuals who perform a broad range of skilled tasks relating to the printing and graphic arts industry, and who may also provide some leadership and guidance to others in the application and planning of the skills.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Support

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Identify requirements for efficient production	1.1 Machine operations, staff and production processes are organised to meet production requirements 1.2 Recommendations are made related to requirements and according to enterprise procedures, work health and safety (WHS) and Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) requirements 1.3 Quality standards and safe work practices are checked to ensure compliance with enterprise procedures and legislative requirements
2. Monitor production efficiency	2.1 Compliance to specified requirements (including quality standards, time taken, wastage) is checked to ensure efficiency is maintained 2.2 Non-compliance is identified, reported or recorded and investigated to determine causes
3. Implement improvements to production efficiency	3.1 Corrective or preventive action is recommended and implemented where appropriate 3.2 Changes are communicated to relevant personnel in a logical and easily understood manner 3.3 Changes are monitored to confirm improvement to production efficiency

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 1.2, 2.1, 2.2, 3.1, 3.3	Recognises text within job specifications and follows written instructions
Writing	1.2, 2.2, 3.1, 3.2	Uses clear, specific and industry related terminology to complete and update workplace documentation
Oral Communication	3.2	Provides explanations using language, tone and vocabulary appropriate to audience and environment
Navigate the world of work	1.2, 1.3	Takes personal responsibility for compliance with enterprise policies, procedures and standards Appreciates implications of legal and regulatory responsibilities related to own work with specific reference to safety and environmental concerns
Interact with others	1.2, 2.2, 3.1	Uses appropriate communication protocols and conventions to report recommendations
Get the work done	1.1, 2.1, 2.2, 3.1, 3.3	Takes responsibility for planning and organising own workload, identifying ways to achieve efficiencies Initiates standard procedures when responding to familiar problems within immediate context Takes responsibility for outcomes of routine decisions related directly to own role Evaluates effectiveness of decisions in terms of how well they meet stated goals

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPSUP456 Control production	ICPSU456C Control production	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPSUP456 Control production

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

effectively manage a shift or sections production

create a portfolio of documents showing how:

machine operations, staff and production processes are organised

quality standards and safe work practices are checked for compliance with procedures and legislative requirements

production is monitored for compliance

production improvement are identified, recorded, reported and implemented.
(Suitable documents for the portfolio include production summaries, quality-related documentation and testimonials from superiors and workers being supervised.)

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

Requirements for efficient production standards

describe the work health and safety requirements for production control

explain how the production process information is obtained

outline quality standards to check to ensure enterprise procedures are met

outline quality standards to check to ensure environmental protection requirements are met

identify monitoring systems available to aid production management

Maintaining production efficiency

identify problems that could cause non-compliance of production efficiency and how they can occur

describe what information is necessary to efficiently plan, schedule and reschedule production

Improving production efficiency

identify who has authority to implement production changes

describe the information that needs to be communicated to implement changes to production control.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the Support field of work and include access special purpose tools, equipment and materials.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPSUP458 Monitor production workflow

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to monitor production workflow, assess job steps and evaluate work progress.

It applies to individuals who perform a broad range of skilled tasks relating to the printing and graphic arts industry, and who may also provide some leadership and guidance to others in the application and planning of the skills.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Pre-requisite Unit

ICPSUP216	Inspect quality against required standards

Unit Sector

Support

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Input job	1.1 Each new job is assigned a unique identification number 1.2 Baselines are set for production and budget estimation 1.3 Number of actions or steps are identified for each job 1.4 Nature of actions are identified
2. Assess job step	2.1 Job step is identified using business workflow tools 2.2 Current step is compared against any baselines set for the job 2.3 Number of steps and iterations are identified and any corrective action undertaken if necessary 2.4 Actions within each step are logical to the step 2.5 Resources required for current and future steps are identified, and availability confirmed
3. Evaluate job progress	3.1 Job progress is evaluated and any improvement modifications to the workflow are identified 3.2 Parallel activities are fully utilised to meet baselines and quality standards 3.3 Reports are reviewed and possible process improvements identified

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	2.1, 2.3, 3.3	Recognises text within job specifications and follows written instructions Reviews documents to identify specific text
Writing	2.5, 3.1, 3.3	Produces documents using layout that meets audience needs and text purpose
Numeracy	1.1, 1.2	Uses simple mathematical calculations within budget constraints, and arranges numerical information sequentially
Get the work done	1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 2.1, 2.2, 2.3, 2.4, 2.5, 3.1, 3.2, 3.3	Takes responsibility for planning and organising own workload, identifying ways of sequencing and combining elements for greater efficiency Initiates standard procedures when responding to familiar problems within immediate context Reviews outcomes of decisions to identify opportunities for improvement

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPSUP458 Monitor production workflow	ICPSU458C Monitor production workflow	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPSUP458 Monitor production workflow

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

assign job identifier and set up baselines for production and budget estimation

identify job steps, actions and resource requirements

evaluate job progress against baselines and quality standards and report on possible improvements.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

explain what baselines are and how they are set

summarise the production workflow

explain how to conduct a job assessment

summarise techniques used for scheduling and resource allocation.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the Support field of work and include access to relevant hardware and software or non-computerised systems.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPSUP464 Provide customer service and education

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to liaise with customers and clients to ensure satisfactory provision of printed products or services.

It applies to individuals who perform a broad range of skilled tasks and services for customers in the printing and graphic arts industry. They may also provide some leadership and guidance to others in the application and planning of the skills.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Support

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Establish and maintain a positive client relationship	1.1 Rapport with client is built and maintained according to accepted business practices 1.2 Opportunities to provide additional services to client are identified 1.3 Client is advised of input requirements and restraints for relevant printing processes
2. Manage customer expectations	2.1 Internal and external customer needs and expectations are matched with production process requirements 2.2 Job requirements are clarified with client and compared with quote/estimate 2.3 Information and clarifications are passed between client and technical staff 2.4 Job specifications and job parameters are used to define appropriate production procedures and processes 2.5 Knowledge of company services, equipment capabilities, limitations and workflow is demonstrated 2.6 Project is evaluated and feedback provided to client as agreed, or according to enterprise customer service practices 2.7 Preliminary proof and contract proof are distinguished according to enterprise standards, and communicated to client 2.8 Client is provided with documentation to review and approves all dummies and proofs at appropriate stages in production process 2.9 Job information (eg work orders, quotes, job tickets) is documented and compiled
3. Manage project budget and timeline	3.1 Client requested changes are monitored and documented and impact on budget and timeline is communicated to client 3.2 Client is advised on alternative production techniques

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	2.2, 2.4, 2.6, 2.8, 2.9, 3.1	Recognises text within job specifications and follows written instructions Reviews documentation to identify scheduling changes
Writing	1.3, 2.2, 2.6, 2.7, 2.9, 3.1	Uses clear, specific and industry related terminology to complete and update workplace documentation
Oral Communication	1.1, 1.3, 2.2, 2.3, 2.6, 2.7, 3.1, 3.2	Clearly explains requirements using language appropriate to audience and environment Participates in a verbal exchange of ideas and solutions
Numeracy	2.2, 3.1	Uses mathematical formulas and calculations to operate within budgetary constraints
Navigate the world of work	1.2, 2.5-2.7	Regularly reviews current situation and work options, developing strategies to address possible opportunities Adheres to organisational policies and practices
Interact with others	1.1, 2.3, 2.8	Recognises importance of building rapport to establish effective working relationships Selects appropriate form, channel and mode of communication for a specific purpose relevant to own role
Get the work done	2.1, 2.5, 2.6, 2.9	Develops plans to manage relatively complex, non-routine tasks with an awareness of how they may contribute to longer term operational and strategic goals

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPSUP464 Provide customer service and education	ICPSU464C Provide customer service and education	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPSUP464 Provide customer service and education

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

use effective strategies to build client relationships, according to business practices

liaise with customers and staff to gather, clarify, convey or confirm information

explain the services and capabilities of the enterprise to customers

effectively manage customer expectations and make client aware of timelines and budget

prepare and document required job information

assemble a portfolio covering a period of at least ONE month that demonstrates satisfactory completion of a job (documents should indicate that the job has been completed within budget and to the customer's satisfaction).

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

outline requirements of all relevant printing processes

explain the relationship between pre-press, press and post-press

outline costs and characteristics of a range of substrates and inks

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the Support field of work and include access to special purpose tools, equipment and materials.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPSUP482 Troubleshoot and optimise materials and machinery

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to experiment with and extend the use of materials, and undertake non-routine adjustment and tuning of machinery to meet efficiency targets.

It applies to individuals who perform a broad range of skilled tasks and services to customers in the printing and graphic arts industry. They may also provide some leadership and guidance to others in the application and planning of the skills.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Support

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Review material behaviour	1.1 Evaluation of material or product structure is conducted to identify options for production 1.2 Material handling options are chosen to ensure best performance of materials during production 1.3 Options are assessed to determine most effective/efficient method of production, ensuring highest quality and yield from materials 1.4 Test run confirms correct options, or the need for further adjustment or trialling to meet quality standards 1.5 Options and recommendations are documented for future reference according to enterprise procedures
2. Tune and adjust machinery	2.1 Idiosyncrasies of machines are reviewed and adjustments or tuning undertaken to compensate or exploit the idiosyncrasy, within the manufacturer’s specifications 2.2 Options are assessed to determine most effective/efficient method of production, ensuring highest quality and yield from machinery 2.3 Test run confirms correct options and settings, or the need for further adjustment or tuning to meet quality standards 2.4 Options and recommendations are documented for future reference according to enterprise procedures 2.5 Instruction is provided to machine operator or finisher on new practices, if required
3. Troubleshoot machinery and material problems	3.1 Corrective or preventive action is recommended and implemented where appropriate 3.2 Changes are communicated to relevant personnel in a logical and easily understood manner 3.3 Changes are monitored to confirm improvement to production efficiency 3.4 Ongoing problems are reported according to enterprise procedures

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	2.1, 2.4	Recognises text within job specifications and organisational documentation and follows written instructions
Writing	1.5, 2.4, 2.5, 3.1, 3.2, 3.4	Uses clear, specific and industry related terminology to complete and update workplace documentation
Oral Communication	2.5, 3.2	Clearly explains requirements using language appropriate to audience and environment
Numeracy	1.3, 1.4, 2.2, 2.3	Uses mathematical calculations to confirm equipment settings and adjustments
Navigate the world of work	1.5, 2.4, 3.4	Follows organisational procedures and considers own role in terms of its contribution to broader goals of the work environment
Interact with others	3.4	Uses appropriate communication protocols and conventions to report issues
Get the work done	1.1-1.4, 2.1-2.3, 3.1, 3.3	Develops plans to manage relatively complex, non-routine tasks with an awareness of how they contribute to organisational goals Uses systematic, analytical processes to solve problems; setting goals, gathering relevant information and identifying and evaluating options against agreed criteria Utilises features of digital tools or systems to improve productivity

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPSUP482 Troubleshoot and optimise materials and machinery	ICPSU482C Troubleshoot and optimise materials and machinery	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPSUP482 Troubleshoot and optimise materials and machinery

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

recommend and implement new practices that extend every day use of materials and machinery, and troubleshoot problems with material and machinery

produce a portfolio that demonstrates each element has been carried out (including records of standards and monitoring procedures, and evidence they are being effectively carried out)

confirm production efficiencies through discussions with senior management and review of workplace documentation.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

Examine design and identification of materials and suitable processes

explain need to implement change

identify required changes to existing production areas

explain how the operation can be integrated into existing organisational processes

identify materials required in addition to existing ones

outline alternatives to the chosen process

explain the decision for choosing a particular process

Review customer and production requirements

explain the review conducted, to assess the process for suitability for customer requirements

list different materials that can be used to produce the same results without production problems

identify production plan information to aid in determining the process

Review existing operations and problems

describe the impact the process will have on existing operations

explain how training can be integrated into existing process operations

describe how the process can eliminate existing production problems

Identify operations and machinery

explain how to optimise existing machinery or equipment

describe special provisions that will be necessary to extend the use of equipment

calculate the expected production life of this equipment and machinery

identify technology that could see this equipment outdated

identify technology that could improve this equipment or machinery

summarise work health and safety considerations for operating machinery.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the Support field of work and include access to machinery and materials.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPSUP485 Implement a Just-in-Time system

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to facilitate the implementation and operation of a Just-In-Time (JIT), or Kanban, system in the organisation.

It applies to individuals who perform a broad range of skilled tasks and services to customers in the printing and graphic arts industry. They may also provide some leadership and guidance to others in the application and planning of the skills.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Support

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Monitor operation of JIT system	1.1 Track value of key measures 1.2 Recognise indicators of poor performance 1.3 Take appropriate quick fix action
2. Liaise with relevant stakeholders	2.1 Regularly communicate with team members regarding operation of the JIT system 2.2 Communicate with relevant personnel up and down the value chain regarding operation of the JIT system 2.3 Identify issues with stakeholders and take appropriate quick fix action
3. Improve JIT system	3.1 Identify areas requiring improvement in the JIT system 3.2 Recognise competency gaps of team members and other stakeholders 3.3 Recognise attitudinal issues of team members and other stakeholders 3.4 Develop appropriate improvement solutions 3.5 Liaise with relevant people regarding these solutions 3.6 Implement/assist with implementation of the solutions

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.2	Recognises text in organisational documents related to outcomes of the job
Writing	2.1, 2.2, 3.4	Uses clear, specific and industry related terminology to complete and update workplace documentation
Oral Communication	2.1-2.3, 3.5	Provides clear explanations using language appropriate to audience and environment Participates in verbal exchanges of ideas and solutions
Numeracy	1.1, 1.2, 3.1	Uses mathematical calculations to track value of key measures and monitor operation of the JIT system
Interact with others	3.3, 3.5	Recognises that attitudinal issues can affect implementation and uses strategies to address individual concerns Collaborates with others to achieve shared outcomes
Get the work done	1.1, 1.3, 2.3, 3.1, 3.2, 3.4, 3.6	Develops plans to manage relatively complex, non-routine tasks with an awareness of how they contribute to organisational goals Uses systematic, analytical processes to solve problems, setting goals, gathering relevant information and identifying and evaluating options to arrive at solutions Utilises digital systems and tools to monitor operations

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPSUP485 Implement a Just-in-Time system	ICPSU485C Implement a Just-in-Time (JIT) system	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages Title change	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPSUP485 Implement a Just-in-Time system

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

facilitate smooth operation of a just-in-time (JIT) system in a specific area across an extended period of time

make recommendations to improve a JIT system.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

summarise negotiation techniques

explain JIT principles relevant to job(s)

outline procedures for making/recommending improvements

identify reasons for delays/storages/inventories in that section of the value chain under their control and methods to reduce/eliminate them

explain competency gap analysis and methods of filling competency gaps

describe principles of the manufacturing process relevant to the section/team

outline production data generated by the process, and its application to JIT.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the Support field of work and include access to an organisation using JIT.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPSUP486 Mistake proof a production process

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to focus on preventing errors/backsliding to a previous behaviour.

It applies to individuals who perform a broad range of skilled tasks and services to customers in the printing and graphic arts industry. They may also provide some leadership and guidance to others in the application and planning of the skills

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Support

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Analyse the process	1.1 Identify sources of variability/non-conformance in the process 1.2 Identify critical control points in the process 1.3 Analyse causes of variability/non-conformance
2. Develop preventive techniques/systems	2.1 Liaise with team members and others to develop mistake-proof methods of performing operations 2.2 Test and validate mistake proofing
3. Implement permanent fix	3.1 Liaise with relevant people to have systems/procedures changed to implement solution 3.2 Liaise with relevant people to ensure the workforce has an appropriate skills set 3.3 Follow through to ensure implementation occurs
4. Monitor implementation	4.1 Critically observe implementation 4.2 Compare results of the implementation against expected outcomes 4.3 Modify solution to improve outcomes 4.4 Ensure procedures reflect change 4.5 Ensure training and assessment reflect change 4.6 Audit change at agreed period/cycle 4.7 Take action on any observed deviation
5. Seek improvements	5.1 Observe changes against enterprise expectations for production 5.2 Analyse process against enterprise expectations for production

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Reading	2.2, 3.1, 4.4-4.6, 5.2	Recognises text within job specifications and work processes related to outcomes of the job
Writing	2.1, 2.2, 3.1, 3.2, 4.3-4.7, 5.2	Uses clear, specific and industry related terminology to complete and update workplace documentation
Oral Communication	2.1, 3.1, 3.2	Provides clear explanations using language appropriate to audience and environment Participates in a verbal exchange of ideas and solutions
Navigate the world of work	5.1, 5.2	Understands and adheres to enterprise policies and procedures
Interact with others	2.1, 3.1, 3.2	Collaborates with others to achieve joint outcomes
Get the work done	1.1-1.3, 2.2, 3.1, 3.4, 4.1-4.3, 4.5, 4.6, 4.7, 5.1, 5.2	Develops and implements plans to manage relatively complex, non-routine tasks with an awareness of how they contribute to enterprise goals Uses systematic, analytical processes to solve problems; setting goals, gathering relevant information and identifying and evaluating options to reach solutions Utilises digital systems to monitor processes

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPSUP486 Mistake proof a production process	ICPSU486C Mistake proof a production process	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPSUP486 Mistake proof a production process

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

analyse ONE complex process or several simpler processes and implement systems to ensure processes are as error-proof as possible

monitor and evaluate the results of the modifications to the process(es).

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

explain the concept of 'mistake proofing'

explain the importance of communication, problem-solving and teamwork in developing and implementing improvements

identify factors in production processes which may cause variability

outline methods of controlling variability in production processes

discuss mistake-proofing methods relevant to the process/product

outline methods used to monitor performance.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the Support field of work and include access to an organisation using a competitive manufacturing approach.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPSUP487 Analyse manual handling processes

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to analyse manual handling in terms of its efficiency and safety.

It applies to individuals working as team leaders or senior team members who are required to examine the manual handling component of a job and improve it in terms of safety, effort required and efficiency.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Support

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Assess manual handling risks	1.1 Identify manual handling hazards in work area 1.2 Assess risks arising from those hazards
2. Analyse physical effort requirements of job	2.1 Determine basic manual handling requirements of job 2.2 Analyse requirements in terms of components such as lift, move, place and hold 2.3 Analyse items to be handled in terms of weight, size, shape or other hazards
3. Determine time/effort components of physical effort	3.1 Break required movement pattern down into movement components 3.2 Determine time and effort requirements of movements 3.3 Develop alternative movement patterns 3.4 Determine time and effort requirements of alternative movements 3.5 Determine handling aids required to assist movement 3.6 Determine preferred movement pattern(s)
4. Analyse ergonomics of physical effort	4.1 Analyse ergonomics of the preferred movement pattern 4.2 Develop substitute movements for any movement which is ergonomically unsound 4.3 Determine handling aids required to improve ergonomics of required movements
5. Optimise application of physical effort	5.1 Select movement patterns which are ergonomically sound and time and effort efficient 5.2 Train all relevant people to use these methods 5.3 Ensure procedures and practices reflect optimum methods

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Learning	5.2	Actively reinforces learning by training others to use safe working practices
Writing	1.2, 2.2, 2.3, 3.2, 3.4, 5.2, 5.3	Uses clear, specific and industry related terminology to record findings, or complete and update workplace documentation
Oral Communication	5.2	Provides clear explanations using language appropriate to audience and environment Participates in a verbal exchange of ideas and solutions
Numeracy	2.3, 3.2, 3.4	Estimates size and weights of objects relevant to manual handling in the workplace Uses mathematical ideas and techniques to determine physical effort
Navigate the world of work	1.1, 2.1	Understands organisational procedures and legislative and regulatory requirements with specific reference to safety
Get the work done	1.1, 1.2, 2.1-2.3, 3.1-3.6, 4.1-4.3, 5.2	Plans, organises and implements activities required to manage relatively complex, non-routine tasks, with an awareness of their contribution to the whole organisation Uses systematic, analytical processes to identify and solve problems and make decisions; gathering relevant information, identifying options, and evaluating choices

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPSUP487 Analyse manual handling processes	ICPSU487C Analyse manual handling processes	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPSUP487 Analyse manual handling processes

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

examine the manual handling components of a job and:

identify the associated hazards

assess the risks

determine the time, effort and ergonomic requirements of the current range of movements

determine aids or alternative movements that would improve the physical effort

implement and document identified improvements.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

identify relevant work health and safety (WHS) legislative requirements that apply to manual handling

outline principles of efficient movement

outline principles of efficient job and work method design

explain principles of work analysis

outline principles of ergonomics

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the Support field of work and include access to an environment that will allow examination and improvement of physical actions.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPSUP488 Ensure process improvements are sustained

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to ensure gains made by using improved methods, processes and equipment are sustained as the new standard for the team’s area of work, and so prevent regression to former practices or digression to less efficient practices.

It applies to individuals who work in an environment where continuous improvement in a manufacturing enterprise is being undertaken.

Improvement initiatives can be made by any number of methods and by teams or individuals. The unit assumes that desired levels of performance or quality are known to the team leader.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Support

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Ensure corrective actions are implemented	1.1 Liaise with relevant people 1.2 Negotiate solutions to allow implementation 1.3 Ensure the supply of resources (equipment, modifications, consumables, people) 1.4 Ensure workforce has relevant competency levels 1.5 Monitor implementation of corrective action 1.6 Make required adjustments
2. Analyse physical effort requirements of job	2.1 Ensure procedures reflect improvements 2.2 Ensure training and assessment systems reflect improvements 2.3 Liaise with relevant people to ensure their support for the new modified system(s)
3. Determine time/effort components of physical effort	3.1 Determine an appropriate audit period/cycle 3.2 Agree on relevant measures/indicators for the improvement 3.3 Measure performance at agreed time(s), using agreed measures 3.4 Investigate the cause(s) of underperformance 3.5 Take appropriate corrective action to improve performance 3.6 Re-audit the improvement on an agreed basis

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	2.1, 2.2, 3.1	Interprets workplace documents related to outcomes of the job
Writing	2.1, 2.2, 3.3, 3.6	Uses clear, specific and industry related terminology to complete and update workplace documentation
Oral Communication	1.1, 1.2, 2.3, 3.2	Provides clear explanations using language appropriate to audience and environment Participates in a verbal exchange of ideas and solutions
Numeracy	1.3, 3.1-3.3	Performs calculations required to ensure adequate resource levels Uses mathematical processes to develop and measure performance
Interact with others	1.1, 1.2, 2.3, 3.2	Uses collaborative techniques to engage personnel in consultations and negotiations to reach agreeable outcomes
Get the work done	1.2-1.6, 2.2, 3.1, 3.3-3.6	Develops plans to manage relatively complex, non-routine tasks with an awareness of how they may contribute to longer term operational and strategic goals Uses systematic, analytical processes to solve problems; setting goals, gathering relevant information and identifying and evaluating options against agreed criteria Recognises and anticipates an increasing range of familiar problems, their symptoms and causes, actively looking for early warning signs and implementing contingency plans Reviews decisions to identify whether goals were met

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPSUP488 Ensure process improvements are sustained	ICPSU488C Ensure process improvements are sustained	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPSUP488 Ensure process improvements are sustained

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

identify a process improvement (either from multiple small changes, or from one large change implemented over a period of several months) and:

describe the overall process relative to improvements being made

arrange all resources required for implementation

modify or develop procedures and training systems needed to support successful implementation

develop performance measurement tools and use these to measure performance after an agreed period of time

investigate causes of underperformance and implement action to improve performance

document how the process has resulted in sustained improvements in the workplace.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

explain ways that improvements can be made

explain the role of procedures and training in improving processes

identify appropriate methods of measuring performance

explain how business performance goals are relevant in determining best measures of improved performance.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the Support field of work and include access to:

an environment in which a process improvement can be implemented and reviewed

relevant documents, including records and procedures.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPSUP516 Set and apply quality standards

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to set and manage quality procedures within an enterprise or large section/department.

It applies to individuals who perform a broad range of skilled tasks relating to the printing and graphic arts industry, and who may also provide some leadership and guidance to others in the application and planning of the skills.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Support

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Set quality standards	1.1 Quality of items is determined according to job specifications and enterprise capacity 1.2 Production proofs are prepared for client approval to determine client’s requirements 1.3 Quality standards are determined and inspection specifications set for purpose intended
2. Determine inspection specifications	2.1 Inspection variables are determined in consultation with client, or are set to acceptable workplace standards, and are recorded in job specifications 2.2 Type of inspection is determined according to job specifications
3. Carry out inspection	3.1 Criteria for rejection are determined in consultation with machine operator and inspector/racker and recorded in job specifications 3.2 Variation to standards is monitored and action taken to rectify the problem according to enterprise procedures 3.3 Unsatisfactory work is separated according to pre-determined standards
4. Rework job	4.1 Unacceptable items are evaluated and possible methods of reworking are determined according to workplace quality standards 4.2 Reworking is monitored according to enterprise procedures 4.3 Reworked material/substrates is/are inspected to ensure previously determined requirements are met
5. Evaluate job process	5.1 Production processes are evaluated to determine cause of unacceptable items 5.2 Inspection records are maintained, including number of accepted and rejected items, and cause of rejection 5.3 Records are maintained to ensure faulty processes are identified, recorded and corrected
6. Participate in quality improvement	6.1 Performance is monitored to ensure product or service standards are maintained or improved 6.2 Participation in enterprise quality improvement processes occurs, where applicable

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1-1.3, 2.1, 2.2, 3.1, 3.2, 5.2, 5.3, 6.2	Recognises text within job specifications and workplace documents related to outcomes of the job
Writing	1.3, 2.1, 3.1, 3.2, 5.2, 5.3, 6.1, 6.2	Uses clear, specific and industry related terminology to complete and update workplace documentation
Oral Communication	2.1, 3.1	Participates in a verbal exchange of ideas and solutions
Numeracy	5.2	Uses simple mathematical calculations and arranges numerical information sequentially while maintaining records
Navigate the world of work	3.2, 4.1, 4.2	Monitors adherence to organisational policies, procedures and standards
Interact with others	2.1, 3.1, 6.2	Collaborates with others to achieve joint outcomes, playing an active role in facilitating effective outcomes
Get the work done	1.1, 1.2, 3.2, 3.3, 4.1, 4.3, 5.1, 6.1	Develops plans to manage relatively complex, non-routine tasks with an awareness of how they may contribute to longer term operational and strategic goals Uses systematic, analytical processes to solve problems in complex, non-routine situations; setting goals, gathering relevant information and identifying and evaluating options against agreed criteria Recognises and anticipates an increasing range of familiar problems, their symptoms and causes, actively looking for early warning signs and implementing contingency plans Considers purpose, needs and limitations when selecting devices and applications for different tasks

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPSUP516 Set and apply quality standards	ICPSU516C Set and apply quality standards	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPSUP516 Set and apply quality standards

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

Ensure, on TWO occasions, that correct procedures are implemented within an enterprise or large section/department to make sure quality standards are achieved

produce a portfolio that demonstrates each element has been carried out (including records of standards and monitoring procedures, and evidence they are being effectively carried out).

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

Setting quality standards

describe how criteria for print quality inspections are set

explain why quality of artwork/film has a bearing on quality of the printed product

list quality standards set by the customer

explain how quality standards determine inspection specifications

Determining inspection variables

describe quality specifications set to make the product acceptable for its intended purpose

identify who is responsible for inspection specifications

outline specifications recorded on the job sheet

describe the specific inspection standards set for printing and finishing

Causes of failure

list common causes of failure in each production area that need to be monitored

list procedures implemented to minimise the effect of failure.

Inspection procedures

explain the criteria for operator inspection (100%, random, periodic or continuous in-line)

describe the result an unnecessary inspection has on production output

explain how to determine the minimum number of inspections required to avoid rejects

outline the information that has to be conveyed for the operator to rectify a problem

Evaluating re-work methods

identify who is responsible for evaluating the re-work of unacceptable items

outline the method of re-work determined

describe the criteria set to monitor the re-work

list requirements established for the inspection of re-working material to customer's specifications

Determining unacceptable items and evaluating production procedures

identify the cause of unacceptable items

describe records kept of acceptable and rejected items

describe records kept of reasons for rejections

identify the cause for the rejection and how to rectify the problem

Quality improvements

explain what information needs to be monitored to maintain standards

identify who should be involved in monitoring quality standards

explain how enterprise improvements affect quality standards.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the Support field of work and include access to special purpose tools, equipment and materials.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPSUP553 Prepare production costing estimates

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to cost and estimate production processes.

It applies to individuals who perform a broad range of skilled tasks relating to the printing and graphic arts industry, and may also provide leadership and guidance to others in the application and planning of the skills.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Support

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Identify costing estimate requirements	1.1 Labour hours, times and other statistics required are identified and applied in calculations 1.2 Available machine hours are identified and applied in calculations 1.3 Economical batch sizes are identified 1.4 Material requirements are identified and applied in calculations
2. Prepare costing estimates	2.1 Costing estimates are calculated using material, labour and machine costs 2.2 Cost estimate details are calculated
3. Compare estimates with actual costs	3.1 Actual costs are compared with estimates 3.2 Costing basis is adjusted as appropriate

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 1.2, 1.4, 2.1, 2.2, 3.1, 3.2	Recognises text within job specifications and work processes related to outcomes of the job
Writing	1.1-1.4, 2.1, 2.2, 3.1, 3.2	Uses factual information and industry related terminology to complete required workplace documentation
Numeracy	1.1-1.4, 2.1, 2.2, 3.1, 3.2	Uses mathematical calculations and techniques to deal with numerical information, and prepare estimates and costing models
Get the work done	1.1-1.4	Takes responsibility for gathering information required to perform estimates

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPSUP553 Prepare production costing estimates	ICPSU553C Prepare production costing estimates	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPSUP553 Prepare production costing estimates

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

prepare an estimate of production costs that takes into account labour, machine and material requirements

compare estimated costs against actual cost and adjust costing methods, if required.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

Statutory requirements

outline the legal requirements that affect costing of operations

Production processes and operations

describe information required before costing/estimating can be done accurately

describe the references and resources on materials and suppliers required to help in costing/estimating

explain how choice of materials affects cost

list ways of minimising production costs on any given job

explain the relationship between costing and set up and changeover times for processes

Different costing/estimating methodologies

explain why a particular costing/estimating method was chosen

outline alternative methods and when it might be appropriate to use them

describe factors that might be adjusted in the estimations if they consistently do not match costs

Sampling and quality control techniques

describe effects that quality control has on costing

Production records

describe why it is necessary to keep accurate production records

outline how often a review of production records against actual costs should occur

identify production monitoring systems that can be used to accurately assess costs.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the Support field of work and include access to:

an environment that allows the preparation of production costing estimates and actual costs

appropriate sources of production data

suitable equipment and tools to assist with calculations.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPSUP554 Manage teams

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to supervise and coordinate other workers.

It applies to individuals who perform a broad range of skilled tasks relating to the printing and graphic arts industry, and who may also provide leadership and guidance to others in the application and planning of the skills.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Support

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Lead planning	1.1 Range of questioning and prompting techniques is applied to promote participative team or individual planning 1.2 Proposals are accurately recorded to reflect outcomes of planning 1.3 Plans take into account timelines, responsibilities and production requirements affecting the team or individual 1.4 Tasks are selected to suit skill levels of individuals or team members
2. Lead problem-solving	2.1 Problem is clearly defined by team or individuals involved, and criteria for selecting a solution are identified 2.2 Data or evidence is collected and analysed 2.3 Group or individual is encouraged to contribute to determine solutions 2.4 Alternatives are identified and solution selected 2.5 Implementation is planned and carried out 2.6 Implementation of solution is evaluated to determine effectiveness of decisions
3. Develop individual or team participation	3.1 Support is provided to individuals or team members to ensure full participation 3.2 Procedures are implemented to enable the team or individual to assess effectiveness
4. Check health and safety standards in work area	4.1 Applicable work health and safety (WHS) and environmental standards are identified, interpreted and implemented 4.2 Implementation of standards is monitored to determine work area safety 4.3 Improvements are recommended to achieve established standards
5. Monitor process standards	5.1 Quality and performance standards are identified, interpreted and implemented 5.2 Implementation of standards is monitored to determine effectiveness of process 5.3 Improvements are recommended to achieve established quality control standards
6. Communicate with work team, individuals and management	6.1 Information affecting work area, including WHS, is given logically and in an easily understood manner to other workers 6.2 Feedback from team members and individuals is sought to assist in the participation process 6.3 Communication and reporting is carried out, where required, with management and/or external personnel in a manner which ensures effective and appropriate information exchange

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	2.1, 2.2, 2.6, 4.1, 5.1	Recognises text within job specifications and workplace documentation related to outcomes of the job
Writing	1.2, 1.3, 2.2, 2.5, 2.6, 4.3, 5.3, 6.1, 6.3	Uses clear, specific and industry related terminology to complete and update workplace documentation
Oral Communication	1.1, 2.3, 6.1-6.3	Provides clear explanations using language appropriate to audience and environment Participates in verbal exchanges of ideas and solutions
Numeracy	1.3	Uses simple mathematical calculations when planning workplace deadlines
Navigate the world of work	4.1, 4.2, 6.1	Understands own legal rights and responsibilities, and is extending understanding of general legal principles across work contexts
Interact with others	2.3, 3.1, 6.2, 6.3	Collaborates with others to achieve joint outcomes, playing an active role in facilitating effective group interaction
Get the work done	1.3, 1.4, 2.1, 2.2, 2.4-2.6, 3.2, 5.1, 5.2	Develops plans to manage relatively complex, non-routine tasks with an awareness of how they may contribute to longer term operational and strategic goals Uses systematic, analytical processes to solve problems in complex, non-routine situations; setting goals, gathering relevant information and identifying and evaluating options against agreed criteria Recognises and anticipates an increasing range of familiar problems, their symptoms and causes; actively looking for early warning signs and implementing contingency plans Reflects on appropriateness and effectiveness of the problem-solving process used to identify improvement opportunities

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPSUP554 Manage teams	ICPSU554C Manage teams	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPSUP554 Manage teams

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

develop plans for individuals and teams that incorporate production requirements, responsibilities and timelines

devise and implement a solution to a workplace problem

monitor work health and safety (WHS), environmental quality and performance standards in the work area, and implement improvements if required

provide clear instructions and information to team members and management

develop and implement ways to seek feedback from others

produce a portfolio demonstrating each element has been carried out (which can include rosters, schedules, quality related documentation and testimonials from superiors and workers being supervised).

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

WHS standards in the work area

identify who is responsible for determining WHS standards

identify who monitors the WHS standards in the workplace

describe the responsibilities and rights of individuals in the workplace in relation to WHS

Planning production requirements of individuals to suit skill level

explain why it is important to determine the skill level of workers

describe methods used to determine the skill levels of workers

Promoting problem-solving and decision-making

describe typical problems that arise in the workplace

describe problem-solving techniques

Developing individual or team participation

outline ways to encourage team members to participate

outline ways to improve quality and performance standards

describe types of checks on quality standards

identify who has responsibility for implementing improvements to process standards

outline the ramifications of standards not being improved

Workplace communication

explain the principles of effective communication with individuals and teams in the workplace

describe methods of seeking feedback

outline reasons why seeking and using feedback is important to a team leader.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the Support field of work and include access to special purpose tools, equipment and materials.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPSUP561 Implement and monitor WHS

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to implement and monitor the organisation’s work health and safety (WHS) policies, procedures and programs in the relevant work area to achieve and maintain WHS standards.

It applies to individuals who perform a broad range of skilled tasks relating to the printing and graphic arts industry, and who may also provide leadership and guidance to others in the application and planning of the skills.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Support

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Provide information about organisation’s WHS	1.1 Relevant provisions of WHS legislation and codes of practice are accurately and clearly explained to the work group 1.2 Information on organisation’s WHS policies, procedures and programs is provided in a readily accessible manner and is accurately and clearly explained to the work group 1.3 Information about identified hazards and outcomes of risk identification and control procedures is regularly provided and is accurately and clearly explained to the work group
2. Implement and monitor WHS	2.1 Organisational procedures for consultation over WHS issues are implemented and monitored to ensure all members of the work group have opportunity to contribute 2.2 Issues raised through consultation are dealt with and resolved promptly or referred to appropriate personnel for resolution according to enterprise procedures for issue resolution 2.3 Outcomes of consultation over WHS issues are made known promptly to the work group 2.4 Existing and potential hazards in work area are identified and reported so risk assessment and control procedures can be applied
3. Implement and monitor risk control procedures	3.1 Existing risk control measures are monitored and results reported regularly according to enterprise procedures 3.2 Inadequacies in existing risk control measures are identified according to hierarchy of control, and reported to designated personnel 3.3 Inadequacies in resource allocation for implementation of risk control measures are identified and reported to designated personnel 3.4 Work procedures to control risks are implemented and adherence to them by the work group is monitored according to enterprise procedures
4. Implement hazardous events procedures	4.1 Enterprise procedures for dealing with hazardous events are implemented whenever necessary to ensure prompt control action is taken 4.2 Hazardous events are investigated to identify their cause, according to investigation procedures 4.3 Control measures to prevent recurrence and minimise risks of hazardous events are implemented based on hierarchy of control if within scope of responsibilities and competencies, or alternatively referred to designated personnel for implementation
5. Implement and monitor WHS training	5.1 WHS training needs are identified accurately specifying gaps between WHS competencies required and those held by work group members 5.2 Arrangements are made for fulfilling identified WHS training needs in both on and off-the-job training programs in consultation with relevant parties
6. Implement and monitor WHS recordkeeping procedures	6.1 WHS records for work area are accurately and legibly completed according to workplace requirements for WHS records and legal requirements for maintenance of records of occupational injury and disease 6.2 Aggregate information from area’s WHS records is used to identify hazards and monitor risk control procedures within work area according to organisational procedures and within scope of responsibilities

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	2.2, 3.1-3.4, 4.2, 4.3, 5.1, 5.2, 6.1, 6.2	Interprets and comprehends information in a range of texts including relatively complex regulatory documents and workplace policies and procedures Checks documents for accuracy
Writing	1.2, 1.3, 2.4, 3.1-3.3, 4.2, 4.3, 5.1, 5.2, 6.1, 6.2	Uses clear, specific and industry related terminology to complete and update workplace documentation
Oral Communication	1.1-1.3, 2.2, 3.3, 4.3, 5.2	Provides clear explanations using language appropriate to audience and environment Uses questioning and active listening to confirm understanding
Navigate the world of work	1.1-1.3, 2.1, 2.2, 3.1, 3.4, 4.2, 6.1, 6.2	Keeps up-to-date on changes to legislation and regulations relevant to own rights and responsibilities and considers implications of these when negotiating, planning and undertaking work Understands how own role meshes with others and contributes to broader work goals
Interact with others	1.2, 1.3, 2.1-2.3	Identifies requirements of important communication exchanges, selecting appropriate channels, format, and content to suit purpose and audience
Get the work done	2.2, 2.4, 3.2, 3.3, 4.2, 4.3, 5.1, 5.2, 6.1, 6.2	Plans and manages relatively complex, non-routine tasks with an awareness of how they contribute to the organisation's goals Uses systematic, analytical processes to solve problems in complex, non-routine situations Gathers and evaluates information to make informed decisions or recommendations Recognises and anticipates an increasing range of familiar problems, their symptoms and causes, actively looking for early warning signs and implementing contingency plans

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPSUP561 Implement and monitor WHS	ICPSU561C Implement and monitor OHS	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages Title changed to reflect legislation	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPSUP561 Implement and monitor WHS

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

provide written and oral information to a work group about work health and safety (WHS) legislation, codes of practice, and organisational policies, procedures and programs

identify and report on existing and potential hazards in the work area

monitor and report on existing risk control measures, including identified inadequacies

investigate hazardous events according to organisational procedures

identify WHS training needs and implement training for a work group

complete and store WHS records according to legal and organisational requirements

produce a portfolio of relevant documentation to demonstrate achievement of the unit requirements (including information distributed to workers, records kept, checklists and reports.)

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

identify all applicable WHS legislation and codes of practice

describe the hierarchy of control, including the preferred order of risk control measures

outline potential hazards associated with equipment and materials used in the workplace

explain the relevance of other management systems for WHS

explain why levels of literacy and communication levels in the workforce need to be considered when providing information about WHS

explain the role of the supervisor regarding implementation of WHS policies and procedures

explain why WHS training is important

list and describe available information sources about WHS.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the Support field of work and include access to special purpose tools, equipment and materials.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPSUP583 Troubleshoot and optimise the production process

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to troubleshoot and optimise the production process. This unit focuses on systems analysis and design.

It applies to individuals who perform a broad range of skilled tasks relating to the printing and graphic arts industry, and who may also provide leadership and guidance to others in the application and planning of the skills. They evaluate and recommend changes to the production process, and adjust and tune machinery to make efficiency gains.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Support

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Evaluate production for efficiency purposes	1.1 Machine operations, staff and production process organisation are evaluated on an ongoing basis to make production efficiency gains 1.2 Production schedule is analysed according to production output, inventory, procurements, time constraints, supply capacities and requirements 1.3 Quality standards and safe work practices are examined to ensure compliance 1.4 Changeover/make ready processes are reviewed for production efficiency gains 1.5 Recommendations covering the above areas are developed and documented
2. Optimise production efficiency	2.1 Compliance to specified requirements is checked to ensure efficiency is maintained 2.2 Non-compliance is identified and investigated to determine causes 2.3 Production standards or machines are set and/or changed according to enterprise procedures 2.4 Changeover/make ready times and processes are monitored to ensure times are maintained or improved 2.5 Production schedule is monitored and adjusted according to production output, inventory, procurements, time constraints and supply capacities and requirements to ensure efficiency is maintained
3. Troubleshoot production efficiency problems	3.1 Corrective or preventive action is implemented where appropriate 3.2 Changes are communicated to relevant personnel in a logical and easily understood manner 3.3 Changes are monitored and adjusted to confirm improvement to production efficiency
4. Troubleshoot material and machining problems	4.1 Evaluation of material or product structure is conducted to identify options for production and required tuning and adjustments are completed 4.2 Idiosyncrasies of machines are reviewed and adjustments or tuning undertaken to compensate or to exploit the idiosyncrasy within the manufacturer’s specifications 4.3 Options are assessed to determine most effective/efficient method of production, ensuring highest quality and yield from materials and ease of production 4.4 Options and recommendations are documented for future reference according to enterprise procedures
5. Document changes and remedies	5.1 Changes to production process are documented according to enterprise procedures 5.2 Adjustments to machines are recorded according to enterprise procedures 5.3 Documentation is circulated according to enterprise procedures, if required

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1-1.5, 2.1-2.5, 3.2, 4.4, 5.1-5.3	Interprets and comprehends information in a range of texts including relatively complex workplace policies and procedures Examines records to determine compliance
Writing	1.5, 2.3, 2.5, 3.3, 4.1, 4.4, 5.1, 5.2	Uses clear, specific and industry related terminology to complete and update workplace documentation
Oral Communication	3.2	Provides clear explanations using language appropriate to audience and environment
Numeracy	1.4, 2.4, 2.5, 4.2, 4.3	Uses simple mathematical calculations and arranges numerical information sequentially when dealing with time constraints and machine optimisation
Navigate the world of work	1.3, 2.1, 2.3, 4.4, 5.1-5.3	Takes full responsibility for compliance with organisational policies and procedures Understands how own role meshes with others and contributes to broader work goals
Interact with others	3.2, 5.3	Identifies requirements of important communication exchanges, selecting appropriate channels, format, and content to suit purpose and audience
Get the work done	1.1, 1.2, 1.5, 2.2-2.4, 3.1, 3.3, 4.1-4.3	Develops plans to manage relatively complex, non-routine tasks with an awareness of how they contribute to operational and strategic goals Uses systematic, analytical processes to solve problems in complex, non-routine situations; setting goals, gathering relevant information and identifying and evaluating options against agreed criteria Recognises and anticipates an increasing range of familiar problems and develop contingency plans for implementation, as required Reflects on how digital systems and tools are used, or could be used to achieve work goals

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPSUP583 Troubleshoot and optimise the production process	ICPSU583C Troubleshoot and optimise the production process	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPSUP583 Troubleshoot and optimise the production process

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

recommend and implement new, more efficient production processes and troubleshoot problems within the production process that affect efficiency gains

produce a portfolio that demonstrates each element has been carried out (including records of standards and monitoring procedures, and evidence of effectiveness)

create production efficiencies – confirmed through discussions with senior management and review of workplace documentation.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

Setting quality standards

describe how inspection criteria for print quality are set

explain why quality of artwork/film has a bearing on quality of the printed product

list quality standards set by the customer

explain how quality standards determine inspection specifications

Identifying production requirements and capacities

describe job requirements that determine production processes

explain how to identify special production requirements and possible problems

list criteria used to determine availability of machines, materials and labour

identify work health and safety (WHS) concerns to consider when planning production

Causes of failure

list common causes of failure in each production area that need to be monitored

list procedures implemented to minimise the effect of failure.

Revising schedules

explain how production schedules are monitored and amended

describe consideration given to revising production schedules to take customer requirements and job complexity into account

Evaluating re-work methods

outline who is responsible for evaluating re-work of unacceptable items

identify the method of re-work that has been determined

list criteria set to monitor re-work

describe requirements established for inspection of re-working material to customer’s specifications

Determining unacceptable items and evaluating production procedures

identify what causes unacceptable items

describe records kept on acceptable and rejected items

describe records kept on the reason for rejection

determine the cause for the rejection and explain how the problem has been rectified

Quality improvements

explain information that needs to be monitored to maintain standards

identify who should be involved in monitoring quality standards

explain how enterprise improvements affect quality standards.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the Support field of work and include access to special purpose tools, equipment and materials.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPSUP684 Determine and improve process capability

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to process capability; which is a statistical concept that allows a practitioner to assess required performance against actual (as distinct from design) capability of the process. Process capability is typically calculated using standard deviations.

It applies to individuals working as managers, or in a technical expert support role, who are responsible for developing plans to improve process capability and, following agreement, implementation of the plans to improve process capability.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Support

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Obtain data for process capability study	1.1 Identify the process requiring capability analysis 1.2 Obtain process capability data
2. Analyse data	2.1 Identify causes of systematic variation in liaison with relevant personnel 2.2 Develop solutions to eliminate/minimise systematic variation in liaison with relevant people
3. Take action to improve process capability	3.1 Develop plans to implement solutions 3.2 Liaise with relevant people to implement solutions 3.3 Gain necessary approvals as required 3.4 Monitor implementation and make adjustments as required 3.5 Determine new/revised process capability 3.6 Implement revised process capability regime

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 1.2, 3.4	Recognises text within job specifications and work processes related to outcomes of the job
Writing	2.2, 3.1, 3.4	Uses clear, specific and industry related terminology to complete and update workplace documentation
Oral Communication	2.1, 2.2, 3.2	Participates in a verbal exchange of ideas and solutions Uses questioning and active listening to identify issues or clarify understanding
Interact with others	2.1, 2.2, 3.2, 3.3	Collaborates with others to achieve joint outcomes playing an active role in facilitating agreement Uses appropriate communication protocols to gain approvals from relevant personnel
Get the work done	1.1, 1.2, 2.2, 3.1, 3.4-3.6	Develop and implements plans to gather and analyse data required to improve processes Identifies causes of problems and develops solutions in conjunction with relevant personnel Systematically evaluates effectiveness of systems and processes to inform decisions on how to implement improvements Evaluates outcomes of decisions to identify opportunities for improvement

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICPSUP684 Determine and improve process capability	ICPSU684C Determine and improve process capability	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICPSUP684 Determine and improve process capability

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

implement and review either ONE complex process capability system or SEVERAL smaller systems and make process improvements using process capability as a tool for monitoring and improvement or a suitable project

provide a portfolio of evidence to show that the implementation and review has included process capability studies, the improvement to process capability, and how the improvements were implemented.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

outline data collection and processing methods and techniques

describe concepts of variability and normal distribution

describe three sigma or six sigma processes

explain how to recognise assignable causes (random and non-random results)

outline causes of random variation

identify causes of different types of non-random results

understand process capability sufficiently to translate data into variations in the process and determine methods of controlling them.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the Support field of work and include access to an organisation using process capability.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

AUMAQA001 Apply quality assurance techniques

Modification History

Release	Comment
Release 1	Unit updated to reflect the new standards for Training Packages Replaces AUMAQA4001 Apply quality assurance techniques

Application

This unit describes the performance outcomes required to apply quality assurance techniques required in an automotive manufacturing environment.

It involves the application of skills and knowledge during the design, development and production of automotive plant, tools, equipment and systems at a production worker level.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Competency Field

Manufacturing - Common

Unit Sector

Quality

Elements and Performance Criteria

Elements	Performance Criteria
Elements describe the essential outcomes	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element. Where bold italicised text is used, further information is detailed in the range of conditions section
1. Interpret and apply workplace quality standards	1.1 Instructions and plans are interpreted to identify processes and materials to complete work tasks 1.2 Workplace quality standards are interpreted and applied to work tasks 1.3 Process improvement tools are used either individually or in a team to identify design, development and production quality problems
2. Monitor and report on quality	2.1 Finished materials and products are checked for quality against workplace quality standards and according to workplace procedures 2.2 Non-conforming materials and products are identified and reported 2.3 Quality problems are analysed to identify the root cause using analytical tools 2.4 Strategies to improve quality are developed and recommended according to workplace procedures

Foundation Skills

This section describes those language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills that are essential to performance.

Skills	Description
Reading skills to:	identify and review quality improvement plans interpret instructions and plans, relevant legislation, regulations, standards, codes of practice, safe work practices and workplace procedures.
Writing skills to:	legibly record and report quality improvement progress.
Oral communication skills to:	communicate between production and quality team members discuss quality improvement plans with team leader and clarify quality assurance requirements.
Numeracy skills to:	use analytical tools, instructions and plans calculate materials to complete work tasks.
Digital literacy skills to:	use computers and computer software, such as email, databases, spreadsheets and word processing.
Teamwork skills to:	work effectively with diverse team members.

Range of Conditions

This section specifies work environments and conditions that may affect performance. Essential operating conditions that may be present (depending on the work situation, needs of the candidate, accessibility of the item, and local industry and regional contexts) are included. Bold italicised wording, if used in the performance criteria, is detailed below.
Instructions must include:	engineering specifications and drawings operator instruction systems (OIS) or workplace equivalent process control plans (PCPs) or workplace equivalent standard operating procedures (SOPs) or workplace equivalent.
Workplace procedures must include:	quality standards use of tools and equipment work health and safety (WHS) requirements workplace recording and reporting.

Unit Mapping Information

No equivalent unit.

Links

Implementation Guide - http://www.asacompanionvolumes.com.au/aum-implementation-guide

Assessment Requirements for AUMAQA001 Apply quality assurance techniques

Modification History

Release	Comment
Release 1	Unit updated to reflect the new standards for Training Packages Replaces AUMAQA4001 Apply quality assurance techniques

Performance Evidence

Before competency can be determined, individuals must have competently applied quality standards on a minimum of three occasions.

Individuals must demonstrate they can:

comply with workplace production standards and quality assurance techniques

apply workplace procedures relating to quality assurance techniques

communicate effectively with team leaders and team members to ensure quality assurance

document quality improvement activity and techniques

complete quality improvement reports.

Knowledge Evidence

Individuals must be able to demonstrate knowledge of:

quality processes

workplace procedures relating to quality assurance techniques

process improvement tools

processes and procedures for implementing quality improvement activities, including:

processes and required resources from a quality improvement plan

identifying and allocating tasks from the quality improvement plan

recording and reporting procedures for monitoring progress of quality improvement plan activities

types, layout and application of quality improvement activity reports.

Assessment Conditions

Assessors must satisfy SNR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Competency is to be assessed in the workplace or a simulated environment that accurately reflects performance in a real workplace setting.

Where assessment of competency includes third-party evidence, individuals must provide evidence that links them to the application of quality assurance techniques.

Assessors must verify performance evidence through questioning on skills and knowledge to ensure correct interpretation and application.

The following resources must be made available:

automotive manufacturing workplace or simulated workplace

tools, equipment and machinery required when producing motor vehicles

workplace procedures relating to quality assurance techniques

quality improvement plan

process control plans (PCPs) or workplace equivalent.

Links

Implementation Guide - http://www.asacompanionvolumes.com.au/aum-implementation-guide

Assessment Strategies Guide - http://www.asacompanionvolumes.com.au/aum-assessment-guide

BSBCMM401 Make a presentation

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with BSB Business Services Training Package Version 1.0

Application

This unit covers the skills and knowledge required to prepare, deliver and review a presentation to a target audience.

This unit applies to individuals who may be expected to make presentations for a range of purposes, such as marketing, training and promotions. They contribute well developed communication skills in presenting a range of concepts and ideas.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Communication – Interpersonal Communication

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1 Prepare a presentation	1.1 Plan and document presentation approach and intended outcomes 1.2 Choose presentation strategies, format and delivery methods that match the characteristics of the target audience, location, resources and personnel needed 1.3 Select presentation aids, materials and techniques that suit the format and purpose of the presentation, and will enhance audience understanding of key concepts and central ideas 1.4 Brief others involved in the presentation on their roles/responsibilities within the presentation 1.5 Select techniques to evaluate presentation effectiveness
2 Deliver a presentation	2.1 Explain and discuss desired outcomes of the presentation with the target audience 2.2 Use presentation aids, materials and examples to support target audience understanding of key concepts and central ideas 2.3 Monitor non-verbal and verbal communication of participants to promote attainment of presentation outcomes 2.4 Use persuasive communication techniques to secure audience interest 2.5 Provide opportunities for participants to seek clarification on central ideas and concepts, and adjust the presentation to meet participant needs and preferences 2.6 Summarise key concepts and ideas at strategic points to facilitate participant understanding
3 Review the presentation	3.1 Implement techniques to review the effectiveness of the presentation 3.2 Seek and discuss reactions to the presentation from participants or from key personnel involved in the presentation 3.3 Utilise feedback from the audience or from key personnel involved in the presentation to make changes to central ideas presented

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 2.2	Reviews and analyses documents to identify information relevant to a specific presentation
Writing	1.1, 3.3	Develops material to convey ideas and information to target audience in an engaging way
Oral Communication	1.4, 2.1, 2.2, 2.3, 2.4, 2.5, 2.6, 3.2	Presents information using words and non-verbal features appropriate to the audience and context Uses listening and questioning techniques to gather information required to develop or modify presentations Interprets audience reactions and changes words or non-verbal features accordingly
Interact with others	1.4, 2.1, 2.2, 2.4, 2.5, 2.6, 3.2	Selects and uses appropriate conventions and protocols to encourage interaction or to present information Demonstrates sophisticated control over oral, visual and written formats, drawing on a range of communication practices to achieve goals Recognises the need to alter personal communication style in response to the needs or expectations of others
Get the work done	1.1-1.5, 2.2, 2.5, 3.1-3.3	Takes responsibility for planning, sequencing and prioritising tasks and own workload to achieve outcomes Uses feedback from others, analytical and lateral thinking to review current practices and develop new ideas Uses the main features and functions of digital tools to complete work tasks

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
BSBCMM401 Make a presentation	BSBCMM401A Make a presentation	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for BSBCMM401 Make a presentation

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with BSB Business Services Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

prepare and deliver presentations related to occupation or area of interest which demonstrate the use of:

effective presentation strategies and communication principles

aids and materials to support the presentation

select and implement methods to review the effectiveness of own presentation and document any changes which would improve future presentations.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

identify information collection methods that will support review and feedback of presentations

identify regulatory and organisational obligations and requirements relevant to presentations

describe the principles of effective communication

describe the range of presentation aids and materials available to support presentations.

Assessment Conditions

Assessment must be conducted in a safe environment where evidence gathered demonstrates consistent performance of typical activities experienced by individuals using interpersonal communication skills in the workplace and include access to:

equipment, materials and business software packages for making a presentation

business technology

interaction with others.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

BSBCRT301 Develop and extend critical and creative thinking skills

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with BSB Business Services Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes skills and knowledge required to develop the habit of thinking in a more creative way through looking at things differently, musing, testing, experimenting and challenging existing thought patterns.

It applies to individuals who need to develop and extend their critical and creative thinking skills to different issues and situations and have a range of problem solving, evaluation and analysis skills.

No licensing, legislative, regulatory or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Creativity and Innovation – Creative Thinking

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1 Develop a questioning mindset	1.1 Develop the habit of asking questions from different perspectives 1.2 Take responsibility for exploring a variety of information sources to provide relevant answers to own questions 1.3 Sort through information and ideas to identify the central questions, issues and challenges 1.4 Challenge preconceptions and assumptions to determine actual constraints in defining a problem for resolution
2 Generate ideas and responses	2.1 Explore and use a range of creative thinking techniques to generate ideas and responses 2.2 Muse on, play around with and have fun with ideas in relation to a perceived objective 2.3 Identify and challenge blockers to creative thinking 2.4 Consider and explore realities beyond the current situation 2.5 Evaluate, and where appropriate, challenge existing boundaries to determine perceived or actual constraints 2.6 Show willingness to take risks with ideas and thought processes 2.7 Look around in familiar and unfamiliar places for new inspiration and habitually record observations, experiences, ideas and reflective thoughts to broaden personal knowledge base 2.8 Acknowledge and accept the opportunity for revelation when least expected 2.9 Identify connections and associations from things that seem unconnected
3 Challenge, test and re invent ideas	3.1 Identify, interrogate and challenge the assumptions behind ideas 3.2 Experiment with variations, and explore and challenge a range of different solutions and ideas 3.3 Consciously change perspectives, and evaluate ideas and situations in new ways 3.4 Where appropriate, involve others in ideas and how they might change or be improved
4 Enhance creative thinking skills	4.1 Consciously challenge and question own thought patterns and ways of responding to work and life situations 4.2 Identify and take opportunities to selfassess and to learn about new ideas and different ways of thinking 4.3 Take opportunities to practise and experiment with creative thinking techniques across work and life situations 4.4 Proactively talk to others about ways that new ideas and patterns of thinking can be encouraged and developed

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Learning	1.2, 2.7, 4.2	Uses questioning as a strategy to expand knowledge Reflects on existing thinking and current practices to generate new ideas
Reading	1.2, 1.3	Comprehends textual information and integrates ideas and concepts from various sources
Writing	2.7	Takes notes on observations, experiences and thoughts
Oral Communication	3.4, 4.4	Participates in a verbal exchange of ideas and elicits the view and opinions of others by listening and questioning
Interact with others	3.4, 4.4	Collaborates with others to test, strengthen and explore new ideas and different ways of thinking
Get the work done	1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 2.1, 2.2, 2.3, 2.4, 2.5, 2.6, 3.2, 4.2, 4.3	Uses analytical techniques to identify issues and evaluate options Contributes to the design of new approaches within the immediate work environment Understands and applies some basic principles of analytical and lateral thinking to identify and select ideas

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
BSBCRT301 Develop and extend critical and creative thinking skills	BSBCRT301A Develop and extend critical and creative thinking skills	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for BSBCRT301 Develop and extend critical and creative thinking skills

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with BSB Business Services Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

ask relevant questions to challenge and enhance creative thinking

use various information sources to provide answers to own questions

use a range of creative thinking techniques to generate ideas or responses to questions or issues

record ideas in response to a predetermined issue or situation.

Note: if a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

explain why it is important to consider different perspectives when asking questions

list and describe different creative thinking techniques

describe common blockers to creative thinking,

explain boundaries that need to be considered when generating ideas and responses

describe ways of extending and developing individual creative thinking skills.

Assessment Conditions

Assessment must be conducted in a safe environment where evidence gathered demonstrates consistent performance of typical activities experienced in the creativity and innovation – critical thinking field of work and include access to specific challenges and situations to which creative thinking may be applied.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

BSBCUS301 Deliver and monitor a service to customers

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with BSB Business Services Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to identify customer needs, deliver and monitor customer service and identify improvements in the provision of customer service.

It applies to individuals who apply a broad range of competencies in various work contexts. In this role, individuals often exercise discretion and judgement using appropriate theoretical knowledge of customer service to provide technical advice and support to customers over short or long term interactions.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Stakeholder Relations – Customer Service

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1 Identify customer needs	1.1 Use appropriate interpersonal skills to accurately identify and clarify customer needs and expectations 1.2 Assess customer needs for urgency to determine priorities for service delivery according to organisational and legislative requirements 1.3 Use effective communication to inform customers about available choices for meeting their needs and assist in the selection of preferred options 1.4 Identify limitations in addressing customer needs and seek appropriate assistance from designated individuals
2 Deliver a service to customers	2.1 Provide prompt service to customers to meet identified needs in accordance with organisational and legislative requirements 2.2 Establish and maintain appropriate rapport with customers to ensure completion of quality service delivery 2.3 Sensitively and courteously handle customer complaints in accordance with organisational and legislative requirements 2.4 Provide assistance or respond to customers with specific needs according to organisational and legislative requirements 2.5 Identify and use available opportunities to promote and enhance services and products to customers
3 Monitor and report on service delivery	3.1 Regularly review customer satisfaction with service delivery using verifiable evidence according to organisational and legislative requirements 3.2 Identify opportunities to enhance the quality of service and products, and pursue within organisational and legislative requirements 3.3 Monitor procedural aspects of service delivery for effectiveness and suitability to customer requirements 3.4 Regularly seek customer feedback and use to improve the provision of products and services 3.5 Ensure reports are clear, detailed and contain recommendations focused on critical aspects of service delivery

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.2 2.1, 2.3, 2.4, 3.1, 3.5	Comprehends textual information to determine customer service requirements Proofreads texts for clarity of meaning and accuracy of grammar and punctuation
Writing	2.3, 3.5	Completes responses to customer complaints in required format Prepares reports using sequencing, format and words to communicate recommendations clearly and effectively
Oral Communication	1.1, 1.3, 1.4, 2.2, 2.3, 2.4	Provides information or advice using structure and language to suit the audience Asks questions and listens to gain information or confirm understanding
Navigate the world of work	1.2, 2.1-2.4, 3.1, 3.2	Recognises, understands and applies organisational policies and procedures relevant to role
Interact with others	1.1, 1.3, 1.4, 2.2, 2.3, 2.4, 3.4	Selects and uses appropriate communication conventions to establish connections, build rapport, seek information and develop professional working relationships Adjusts personal communication style in response to the opinions, values and particular needs of others
Get the work done	1.2, 2.3, 2.5, 3.1-3.5	Plans and implements systems to gather and organise information Monitor actions and progress against goals and implements adjustments as appropriate Uses problem-solving skills to analyse and respond to customer complaints or enquiries Identifies and follows up on opportunities to improve work practices and outcomes

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
BSBCUS301 Deliver and monitor a service to customers	BSBCUS301B Deliver and monitor a service to customers	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for BSBCUS301 Deliver and monitor a service to customers

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with Business Services Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

use communication skills to establish rapport and build relationships with customers in accordance with organisational requirements

identify customer needs using appropriate questioning and active listening skills

provide customer service in accordance with organisational requirements

respond to and record customer feedback and action taken according to organisational standards, policies and procedures

produce a report which identifies and recommends ways to improve service delivery.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

summarise key provisions of relevant legislation from all levels of government that may affect aspects of business operations

explain organisational policy and procedures for customer service, including handling customer complaints

provide examples of verifiable evidence that could be used to review customer satisfaction

outline the interpersonal skills needed for serving customers, including customers with specific needs.

Assessment Conditions

Assessment must be conducted in a safe environment where evidence gathered demonstrates consistent performance of typical activities experienced in the customer service field of work and include access to:

office equipment and technology

workplace documents, organisational policies and procedures for customer service

examples of customer complaints and feedback

case studies and, where possible, real situations

interaction with others.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

BSBCUS401 Coordinate implementation of customer service strategies

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with BSB Business Services Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to advise, carry out and evaluate customer service strategies.

It applies to individuals who have well developed skills and a broad knowledge of customer service strategies for addressing customer needs and problems, and who may provide guidance or delegate work related tasks to others.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Stakeholder Relations – Customer Service

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1 Advise on customer service needs	1.1 Clarify and accurately assess customer needs using appropriate communication techniques 1.2 Diagnose problems matching service delivery to customers and develop options for improved service within organisational requirements 1.3 Provide relevant and constructive advice to promote the improvement of customer service delivery 1.4 Use business technology and/or online services to structure and present information on customer service needs
2 Support implementation of customer service strategies	2.1 Ensure customer service strategies and opportunities are promoted to designated individuals and groups 2.2 Identify and allocate available budget resources to fulfil customer service objectives 2.3 Promptly action procedures to resolve customer difficulties and complaints within organisational requirements 2.4 Ensure that decisions to implement strategies are taken in consultation with designated individuals and groups
3 Evaluate and report on customer service	3.1 Review client satisfaction with service delivery using verifiable data in accordance with organisational requirements 3.2 Identify and report changes necessary to maintain service standards to designated individuals and groups 3.3 Prepare conclusions and recommendations from verifiable evidence and provide constructive advice on future directions of client service strategies 3.4 Maintain systems, records and reporting procedures to compare changes in customer satisfaction

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.2, 1.4, 2.3, 3.1	Reviews textual information and comprehends details that relate to the interests or requirements of the client and organisation
Writing	1.4, 3.3, 3.4	Creates a range of formal texts using structure, grammar and clear and specialised language to describe customer needs, maintain information and support a particular position
Oral Communication	1.1, 1.3, 2.1, 2.4, 3.2	Uses pace, intonation, intelligible pronunciation and listening and questioning techniques to interact effectively with others
Numeracy	2.2	Recognises and interprets numerical information and performs calculations on familiar mathematical information
Navigate the world of work	1.2, 2.3, 3.1, 3.2	Recognises and applies organisational protocols and meets expectations associated with own work
Interact with others	1.1, 1.3, 2.1, 2.4, 3.2, 3.3	Selects the appropriate form, channel and mode of communication for a specific purpose relevant to own role Uses a range of strategies to establish a sense of connection and build rapport with customers Collaborates with others contributing knowledge and skills to achieve joint outcomes
Get the work done	1.2, 1.4, 2.3, 3.1- 3.4	Applies formal and logical processes when planning and implementing tasks Applies standard procedures when responding to familiar problems within own work context Uses digital technologies to access, organise, present and store information relevant to own role

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
BSBCUS401 Coordinate implementation of customer service strategies	BSBCUS401B Coordinate implementation of customer service strategies	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for BSBCUS401 Coordinate implementation of customer service strategies

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with Business Services Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

identify the needs and priorities of the organisation in delivering services to customers

diagnose problems in delivery of customer service

respond to and report on customer feedback and complaints

review client satisfaction using verifiable data

consult and communicate effectively with relevant people

develop and implement strategies and methods to improve customer service delivery including:

budgeting

promotion to staff

documentation and follow up.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

outline the principles of customer service

explain sources of information and techniques for identifying customer needs and reviewing customer satisfaction

explain the organisational business structure, products and services related to customer service

describe product and service standards and best practice models.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the customer service field of work and include access to:

office equipment

business technology

organisational policies and procedures for customer service

examples of customer complaints and feedback

client satisfaction data

case studies and, where possible, real situations

interaction with others.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

BSBCUS501 Manage quality customer service

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with BSB Business Services Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to develop strategies to manage organisational systems that ensure products and services are delivered and maintained to standards agreed by the organisation.

It applies to individuals who supervise the provision of quality customer service within an organisation’s procedures framework by others. At this level, individuals must exercise considerable discretion and judgement, using a range of problem solving and decision making strategies.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Stakeholder Relations – Customer Service

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1 Plan to meet internal and external customer requirements	1.1 Investigate, identify, assess, and include the needs of customers in planning processes 1.2 Ensure plans achieve the quality, time and cost specifications agreed with customers
2 Ensure delivery of quality products and services	2.1 Deliver products and services to customer specifications within organisation’s business plan 2.2 Monitor team performance to consistently meet the organisation’s quality and delivery standards 2.3 Help colleagues overcome difficulties in meeting customer service standards
3 Monitor, adjust and review customer service	3.1 Develop and use strategies to monitor progress in achieving product and/or service targets and standards 3.2 Develop and use strategies to obtain customer feedback to improve the provision of products and services 3.3 Develop, procure and use resources effectively to provide quality products and services to customers 3.4 Make decisions to overcome problems and to adapt customer services, products and service delivery in consultation with appropriate individuals and groups 3.5 Manage records, reports and recommendations within the organisation’s systems and processes

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 1.2, 2.1, 3.1, 3.2, 3.3, 3.5	Interprets and analyses textual information from a variety of sources and applies the knowledge that has been gained to evaluate standards for organisation’s products and services
Writing	1.2, 3.1, 3.2, 3.3, 3.5	Produces a range of text types to convey information, requirements or recommendations matching style of writing to purpose and audience
Oral Communication	1.1, 1.2, 2.1, 2.3, 3.2	Clearly articulates systems and standards in a team environment using language suitable to diverse audiences Uses listening and questioning techniques to obtain feedback and confirm understanding
Numeracy	1.2	Interprets and comprehends mathematical information in organisation’s business and customer service plans.
Navigate the world of work	2.1, 2.2, 3.1, 3.5	Recognises and applies organisational protocols and meets expectations associated with own work
Interact with others	1.1, 2.3, 3.4	Identifies and uses appropriate conventions and protocols when communicating with colleagues and customers Collaborates with others, taking into account their strengths and experience, to achieve desired outcomes Provides support in field of expertise to team
Get the work done	1.1, 1.2, 2.1, 2.2, 3.1-3.5	Develops and implements plans using logical processes and monitors and evaluates progress against stated goals Accepts responsibility for addressing complex or non-routine difficulties, applying problem solving processes in determining a solution. Uses digital technology to access, organise and present information in a format that meets requirements

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
BSBCUS501 Manage quality customer service	BSBCUS501C Manage quality customer service	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for BSBCUS501 Manage quality customer service

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with Business Services Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

develop and manage organisational systems for quality customer service

develop and review plans, policies and procedures for delivering and monitoring quality customer service

implement policies and procedures to ensure quality customer service

solve complex customer complaints and system problems that lead to poor customer service

monitor and assist teams to meet customer service requirements

develop, procure and use human and physical resources to support quality customer service delivery.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

outline the legislative and regulatory context of the organisation relevant to customer service

describe organisational policy and procedures for customer service including handling customer complaints

identify service standards and best practice models

summarise public relations and product promotion

outline techniques for dealing with customers including customers with specific needs

explain techniques for solving complaints including the principles and techniques involved in the management and organisation of:

customer behaviour

customer needs research

customer relations

ongoing product and/or service quality

problem identification and resolution

quality customer service delivery

record keeping and management methods

strategies for monitoring, managing and introducing ways to improve customer service relationships

strategies to obtain customer feedback.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the customer service field of work and include access to:

legislation, regulations and codes of practice related to customer service

business technology

workplace documentation and resources

complex customer complaints

case studies and, where possible, real situations

interaction with others.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

BSBDES301 Explore the use of colour

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with BSB Business Services Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to explore the use of colour and to apply colour theory.

It applies to individuals whose work involves understanding and applying the effective use of colour.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Design – Design Process

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1 Source information on colour and colour theory	1.1 Identify and access sources of information on colour and colour theory 1.2 Evaluate and collate information to build knowledge of colour and its application in different contexts
2 Experiment with colour	2.1 Test different colours and colour-combinations through experimentation 2.2 Use own ideas as a way of testing, challenging or confirming colour theory 2.3 Ensure safe use of materials, tools and equipment during experimentation with colour
3 Communicate concepts and ideas through use of colour	3.1 Investigate how colour might be used to communicate a particular idea or concept 3.2 Select materials, tools and equipment relevant to the idea or concept 3.3 Apply colour to communicate the concept or idea based on own knowledge of colour and colour theory 3.4 Review and reflect on own use of colour and what it communicates 3.5 Seek and obtain feedback from others about the way colour has been used and its success in communicating the concept or idea 3.6 Present and store work any samples in a way which takes account of the need for professional presentation and potential relevance for future work

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 1.2, 2.3, 3.1	Evaluates and integrates facts and descriptions of colour from a range of texts including text embedded in visual media
Writing	1.2, 3.6	Produces a range of text types using appropriate vocabulary, grammatical structure and conventions Applies basic referencing and sequencing of professional and archival resources
Oral Communication	1.1, 3.5	Presents ideas, asks questions and listens, to seek feedback or generate ideas
Numeracy	2.1	Selects and uses mathematical information for measurement and volume
Navigate the world of work	2.3	Takes some personal responsibility for adherence to legal and regulatory requirements with specific reference to safety
Get the work done	1.1, 1.2, 2.1, 2.2, 3.1-3.4, 3.6	Plans, sequences and implements tasks required to achieve outcomes Takes responsibility for routine low-impact decisions within familiar situations Evaluates effectiveness of decisions on how well they meet stated goals Contributes to the design of new approaches within immediate work environment Follows routine procedures for using digital technology to enter, store and retrieve information directly relevant to role

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
BSBDES301 Explore the use of colour	BSBDES301A Explore the use of colour	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for BSBDES301 Explore the use of colour

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with BSB Business Services Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

research information on colour and colour theory to inform work

experiment with different colours and techniques to communicate a concept or idea

review completed work and present and store samples for future reference.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

explain colour attributes and colour relationships

describe and interpret different colour theories and their applications in different contexts

describe individual interpretation and choice in relation to the use of colour, and the potential limitations of theory

identify different materials, tools and equipment required to experiment with colour

describe ways other practitioners use colour in their work.

Assessment Conditions

Assessment must be conducted in a safe environment where evidence gathered demonstrates consistent performance of typical activities experienced in the design process field of work and include access to:

office equipment and resources

materials, resources and equipment needed to apply colour in the relevant work context.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

BSBDES302 Explore and apply the creative design process to 2D forms

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with BSB Business Services Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to explore and creatively apply the design process to the development of two-dimensional (2D) forms.

It applies to individuals who apply the creative design process to the development of 2D forms. The unit underpins many other specialised design units.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Design – Design Process

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1 Source information on 2D design	1.1 Identify and access relevant sources of information on 2D design 1.2 Evaluate and collate information to build knowledge of 2D design
2 Explore the creative design process for 2D forms	2.1 Use creative thinking techniques to generate a range of ideas and options 2.2 Use experimentation to explore and challenge a range of different ideas 2.3 Challenge assumptions, reflect on ideas and refine approaches 2.4 Consciously change perspective, and evaluate ideas and situations in new ways
3 Communicate concepts or ideas through application of design processes to 2D forms	3.1 Investigate and reflect on how a particular concept or idea might be communicated in 2D 3.2 Select materials, tools and equipment relevant to the realisation of the concept or idea 3.3 Apply a creative design process to produce a range of 2D concept realisations 3.4 Reflect on own application of design process and success in communicating the concept or idea 3.5 Seek and obtain feedback from others about the 2D form and its success in communicating the concept or idea 3.6 Present and store concept realisations or samples in a format which takes account of the need for professional presentation and the work’s potential value for future jobs

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 1.2, 3.1	Interprets textual information from relevant sources to determine and adhere to requirements
Writing	2.1, 3.6	Produces a range of text types using appropriate vocabulary, grammatical structure and referencing conventions
Oral Communication	2.1, 2.2, 2.3, 3.5	Participates in verbal exchanges using vocabulary, style and tone appropriate to audience Uses listening techniques to clarify understanding
Numeracy	3.1, 3.3, 3.5	Performs mathematical calculations to produce 2D designs
Get the work done	1.1, 1.2, 2.1-2.4, 3.1-3.4, 3.6	Plans and organises tasks required to achieve required outcomes Identifies ideas in use in other contexts and considers how they might be applied in own context Selects new ideas that may improve a process in immediate work context Takes responsibility for routine low-impact decisions within familiar situations Evaluates effectiveness of decisions on how well they meet stated goals

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
BSBDES302 Explore and apply the creative design process to 2D forms	BSBDES302A Explore and apply the creative design process to 2D forms	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for BSBDES302 Explore and apply the creative design process to 2D forms

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with BSB Business Services Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

produce a range of samples or concept realisations which demonstrate creative thinking techniques and experimentation processes based on available resource materials

review own work to determine future improvements.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

identify creative thinking techniques that can be used as part of the design process

describe the elements and principles of design as applied to twodimensional (2D) forms

list materials, tools and equipment required for the design of 2D forms in the relevant work context

describe the notion of individual interpretation and choice within the design process

explain the particular challenges that may arise in the design of 2D forms.

Assessment Conditions

Assessment must be conducted in a safe environment where evidence gathered demonstrates consistent performance of typical activities experienced in the design process field of work and include access to the materials, resources and equipment needed to apply design processes to 2D forms.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

BSBDES303 Explore and apply the creative design process to 3D forms

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with BSB Business Services Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to explore and creatively apply the design process to the development of three-dimensional (3D) forms.

It applies to individuals who work under supervision and apply an understanding of the design process using discretion and judgement.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Design – Design Process

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1 Source information on 3D design	1.1 Identify and access relevant sources of information on 3D design 1.2 Evaluate and collate information to build knowledge of 3D design
2 Explore the creative design process for 3D forms	2.1 Use creative thinking techniques to generate a range of ideas and options 2.2 Use experimentation to explore and challenge a range of different ideas 2.3 Challenge assumptions, reflect on ideas and refine approaches 2.4 Consciously change perspective, and evaluate ideas and situations in new ways
3 Communicate concepts or ideas through application of design processes to 3D forms	3.1 Investigate and reflect on how a particular concept or idea might be communicated in 3D form 3.2 Select materials, tools and equipment relevant to the realisation of the concept or idea 3.3 Apply a creative design process to produce a range of 3D concept realisations 3.4 Reflect on own application of design process and success in communicating the concept or idea 3.5 Seek and obtain feedback from others about the 3D form and its success in communicating the concept or idea 3.6 Present and store concept realisations or samples in a format which takes account of the need for professional presentation and the work’s potential value for future jobs

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 1.2, 3.1	Interprets textual information from relevant sources to determine and adhere to requirements
Writing	2.1, 3.6	Produces a range of text types using appropriate vocabulary, grammatical structure and referencing conventions
Oral Communication	2.1-2.3, 3.5	Participates in verbal exchanges using vocabulary, style and tone appropriate to audience Uses listening techniques to clarify understanding
Numeracy	3.1, 3.3, 3.5	Performs mathematical calculations required to produce 3D concept designs
Get the work done	1.1, 1.2, 2.1-2.4, 3.1-3.4, 3.6	Plans and organises tasks required to achieve outcomes Identifies ideas in use in other contexts and considers how they might be applied in own context Selects and adopts new ideas to improve a process in immediate work context Takes responsibility for routine low-impact decisions within familiar situations Evaluates effectiveness of decisions on how well they meet stated goals

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
BSBDES303 Explore and apply the creative design process to 3D forms	BSBDES303A Explore and apply the creative design process to 3D forms	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for BSBDES303 Explore and apply the creative design process to 3D forms

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with BSB Business Services Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

produce a range of samples or concept realisations which demonstrate creative thinking techniques and experimentation processes based on available resource materials for three-dimensional (3D) forms

review own work to determine future improvements.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

identify creative thinking techniques that can be used as part of the design process

describe the elements and principles of design as applied to 3D forms

list materials, tools and equipment required for the design of 3D forms in the relevant work context

describe the notion of individual interpretation and choice within the design process

explain the particular challenges and issues in the design of 3D forms

outline the relationships between form and space.

Assessment Conditions

Assessment must be conducted in a safe environment where evidence gathered demonstrates consistent performance of typical activities experienced in the design process field of work and include access to the materials, resources and equipment needed to apply design processes to 3D forms.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

BSBDES305 Source and apply information on the history and theory of design

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with BSB Business Services Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to source information on design history and theory, and to apply that information in the individual’s design work.

It applies to individuals who work in design and need to develop and maintain a general knowledge of design history and theory.

More complex research into design theory and design trends is covered by BSBDES602 Research global design trends and BSBDES801 Research and apply design theory.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Design – Design Process

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1 Collect information on design history and theory	1.1 Identify and access relevant sources of information on design history and theory 1.2 Organise research material and findings for current or future use in design practice, facilitating easy access and crossreferencing
2 Apply information to own area of work	2.1 Evaluate information in the context of current design practice 2.2 Assess which aspects of information on design history and theory could be used or adapted to inform current practice 2.3 Use relevant information in a culturally appropriate way to develop an understanding of own area of work
3 Update and maintain knowledge of design trends	3.1 Identify and use opportunities to update and expand knowledge of design trends and developments 3.2 Incorporate and integrate knowledge into design activities

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 2.1, 3.1	Identifies, interprets and evaluates information on historical and current design trends from a range of sources
Writing	1.2, 3.1	Notes findings and sources of information for design knowledge, trends and developments Documents information for colleagues and peers as requested
Oral Communication	1.1, 3.1	Asks questions to clarify information, listens to responses and shares ideas with others
Navigate the world of work	2.3	Understands main tasks, responsibilities and boundaries of own role
Get the work done	1.1, 1.2, 2.2, 3.2	Plans and implements tasks required to achieve required outcomes Contributes to new approaches within immediate work environment Takes responsibility for routine low-impact decisions within familiar situations Follows routine procedures for using digital technology to enter, store and retrieve information directly relevant to role

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
BSBDES305 Source and apply information on the history and theory of design	BSBDES305A Source and apply information on the history and theory of design	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for BSBDES305 Source and apply information on the history and theory of design

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with BSB Business Services Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

show how the history and theory of design can be adapted and used in own professional practice

maintain currency of theoretical and design knowledge.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

summarise current design trends

describe the evolution of design

identify the organisational information practices and their application

outline sources of information on design history and theory relevant to own design work.

Assessment Conditions

Assessment must be conducted in a safe environment where evidence gathered demonstrates consistent performance of typical activities experienced in the design process field of work and include access to information sources on design history and theory.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

BSBDES401 Generate design solutions

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with BSB Business Services Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to generate design solutions in response to a particular design need.

It applies to individuals who generate concepts and solutions in response to a design challenge in any industry context. The starting point may be an open or closed brief; a spontaneous idea; modification of an existing product, service, process or system; or a point in an ongoing design process.

This unit builds on BSBDES201 Follow a design process, and places greater focus on research, concept generation and collaboration with others as key aspects of the design process.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Design – Design Process

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1 Define the design challenge	1.1 Determine and evaluate user/client needs 1.2 Clarify specifications, parameters and constraints of the design challenge in consultation with relevant stakeholders 1.3 Articulate essence of the design challenge in an appropriate format
2 Undertake research to inform the design solution	2.1 Source, evaluate and acknowledge information that may assist in responding to the design challenge 2.2 Consider historical, current and future perspectives and trends that might inform design solutions 2.3 Consider relevant social, economic, environmental, ethical and cultural issues that may impact design solutions 2.4 Analyse, distil and collate information to inform the development of the design solution
3 Communicate and collaborate with others	3.1 Establish and develop working relationships with key stakeholders 3.2 Seek and integrate input and ideas from others during design process 3.3 Inform key stakeholders about progress of the design and related implications 3.4 Negotiate and agree on any changed requirements or modifications
4 Generate ideas and responses to the design challenge	4.1 Reflect on and integrate ideas generated from research and consultation 4.2 Use a range of creative thinking techniques to generate different options and ideas 4.3 Apply relevant principles of functionality, ergonomics, aesthetics and sustainability to development of different options
5 Select a design solution	5.1 Develop and use a range of criteria to evaluate different options and ideas 5.2 Select a preferred solution based on agreed criteria and in consultation with relevant key stakeholders 5.3 Adjust and refine proposed design solution based on research, testing and reflection 5.4 Present proposed design solution with appropriate supporting documentation according to project requirements

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 1.2, 2.1, 2.4	Researches, collates and analyses textual information from a wide range of sources
Writing	1.2, 1.3, 2.1, 2.4, 5.1, 5.3, 5.4	Documents ideas, sources and concepts using appropriate formats and specific language Refines and edits work
Oral Communication	1.2, 1.3, 3.2-3.4, 5.2, 5.4	Actively participates in verbal exchanges of ideas and elicits views and opinions of others by listening and questioning Clarifies, explains or presents information relating to design solution using clear and specific language appropriate to audience
Numeracy	1.3, 4.3, 5.1, 5.4	Interprets numeric data and applies mathematical calculations relevant to design solution
Navigate the world of work	2.3	Understands nature and purpose of own role and associated responsibilities and how it contributes to the work of others in immediate work context
Interact with others	1.3, 3.1, 5.4	Selects the appropriate form, channel and mode of communication for a specific purpose relevant to own role Cooperates with others as part of familiar routine activities and contributes to specific activities requiring joint responsibility and accountability
Get the work done	1.1, 2.1, 2.2, 2.4, 4.1-4.3, 5.1-5.3	Takes responsibility for planning and implementing tasks required to achieve outcomes, including those times when interaction with others is Systematically analyses and evaluates information to aid in decision making and problem solving Applies some basic principles of lateral thinking to generate new or innovative ideas

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
BSBDES401 Generate design solutions	BSBDES401A Generate design solutions	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for BSBDES401 Generate design solutions

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with BSB Business Services Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

develop and document a design solution through research, reflection, and generation and refinement of ideas

demonstrate effective collaboration with others in the design process.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

explain the elements and principles of design and their application in the relevant design context

describe key features of the wider industry, and the economic, social and historical context design solutions are being generated in

discuss design trends and technologies including other designs and the work of other design practitioners in the relevant industry context

identify sources of information that support the development of technical and other knowledge

describe the materials, tools, equipment, techniques and processes used in the generation of design solutions in the relevant industry context.

Assessment Conditions

Assessment must be conducted in a safe environment where evidence gathered demonstrates consistent performance of typical activities experienced in the design process field of work and include access to:

interaction with others to reflect the collaborative nature of the design process

sources of information on design for the relevant industry context.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

BSBDES402 Interpret and respond to a design brief

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with BSB Business Services Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to interpret and creatively respond to a design brief through the production of work.

It applies to individuals working in any industry or design context where work is prescribed by a commissioning agent/client in a brief. Individuals are required to integrate the creative, communication and planning processes that support effective response to a design brief.

Work is carried out independently, although guidance is available if required.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Design – Design Process

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1 Interpret design brief	1.1 Correctly interpret the specifications of design brief 1.2 Establish and clarify user or client for the proposed product/service to inform design decisions 1.3 Identify and clarify specifications, parameters or constraints of design brief in consultation with relevant colleagues 1.4 Source and evaluate information pertinent to design brief
2 Explore and develop design concept	2.1 Generate ideas for design concept through research, exploration and experimentation 2.2 Develop initial design concept consistent with design brief parameters 2.3 Evaluate and explore options for refining concept to best meet design brief parameters 2.4 Refine options and select approach which best meets design brief requirements
3 Liaise with client	3.1 Agree on communication process and frequency of communication with client 3.2 Present concepts for work at appropriate stages during design process as required 3.3 Present and explore different options and creative ideas with client when appropriate 3.4 Proactively seek and act on client feedback 3.5 Reach agreement on concept for work which complies with design brief
4 Plan production of work	4.1 Assess specific design production risks 4.2 Identify all components required to produce a prototype 4.3 Assess technical requirements for production against specified guidelines 4.4 Identify and consult with support services required for production 4.5 Produce a prototype and evaluate against design brief requirements 4.6 Analyse prototype and determine any further adjustments to production requirements 4.7 Finalise production specifications supported by accurate and complete documentation
5 Complete production of work	5.1 Collect and/or organise required components for the work 5.2 Produce or monitor the production of work ensuring all parameters of design brief are met 5.3 Accurately document work progress in a format appropriate to the nature of the design and requirements of design brief 5.4 Seek client approval for work where appropriate

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 1.3, 1.4, 2.1, 4.3, 4.5	Analyses textual information to accurately interpret job specifications
Writing	1.3, 3.2-3.5, 4.4, 4.5, 4.7, 5.3, 5.4	Uses specific industry-related terminology and appropriate formats to develop, document and amend workplace documentation
Oral Communication	1.3, 3.1-3.5, 4.4, 5.4	Actively participates in verbal exchanges of ideas and elicits the views and opinions of others by listening and questioning Uses clear language to clarify, explain and present information
Numeracy	1.1, 1.3, 4.5, 5.3	Interprets numeric data and applies mathematical calculations to produce prototype according to design specification
Interact with others	1.3, 3.1-3.5, 4.4, 5.4	Actively identifies the requirements of important communication exchanges, selecting appropriate channels, format, tone and content to suit purpose and audience Collaborates and negotiates with others to achieve joint outcomes
Get the work done	1.1, 1.2, 2.1-2.4, 3.2, 4.1-4.3, 4.6, 4.7, 5.1, 5.2	Takes responsibility for planning and implementing tasks required to achieve outcomes, including those times when interaction with others is Systematically analyses and evaluates information to aid in decision making and problem solving Applies some basic principles of lateral thinking to generate new or innovative ideas Understands and explicitly applies some basic principles of lateral thinking to generate new or innovative ideas

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
BSBDES402 Interpret and respond to a design brief	BSBDES402A Interpret and respond to a design brief	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for BSBDES402 Interpret and respond to a design brief

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with BSB Business Services Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

articulate and document the process of developing own design practice by learning to develop new skills, ideas and a unique voice

adjust work processes via peer feedback and self-evaluation

identify work options and incorporate networking in career development.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

list current and emerging designers in the relevant design discipline

discuss current and emerging trends and technologies in the relevant design discipline, and the opportunities and challenges they represent

identify professional development information and resources available to designers

summarise sources of information relating to work opportunities and career planning.

Assessment Conditions

Assessment must be conducted in a safe environment where evidence gathered demonstrates consistent performance of typical activities experienced in the design process field of work and include access to materials, resources and equipment used in the development of technical and conceptual skills in the relevant design context.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

BSBDES601 Manage design realisation

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with BSB Business Services Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to manage the process of taking a design from concept to final realisation or production. It has a strong focus on planning, implementation and monitoring skills, combined with a sound knowledge of design and production issues and challenges in a given context.

It applies to individuals working in any industry context or design discipline who take responsibility for turning design concept into reality – a product or service of value to the end-user. This person could be an individual designer-maker or a designer working as part of a larger design/production team.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Design – Design Process

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1 Plan realisation of design	1.1 Collect, analyse and maintain relevant information on the design 1.2 Discuss and agree on standards of work and monitoring requirements with appropriate stakeholders 1.3 Develop clear plan and schedule for design realisation, including key roles and responsibilities linked to timelines and budget
2 Implement and monitor realisation of design	2.1 Organise and/or allocate resources to achieve realisation of design within required standards, timeframes and budget 2.2 Liaise with others involved in design realisation to ensure obligations and quality standards are met within time, budget and technical resources 2.3 Maintain accurate, relevant and complete documentation in accordance with agreed standards 2.4 Monitor process to ensure integrity of design is maintained at all times, including through the process of challenging and interrogating own design work 2.5 Promptly identify difficulties or problems that arise in relation to realisation of design and take action to rectify situation
3 Liaise and negotiate with stakeholders	3.1 Establish and maintain appropriate communication channels with relevant stakeholders 3.2 Proactively seek and provide information to facilitate effective design realisation 3.3 Adhere to agreed terms and conditions or negotiate appropriate changes in light of changed circumstances 3.4 Negotiate and agree on revisions with relevant parties in a professional manner, to enhance quality of outcome
4 Complete design process	4.1 Finalise design outcomes in accordance with terms and conditions 4.2 Seek feedback from key stakeholders on finished design and make final adjustments as agreed 4.3 Evaluate completed design in relation to own work and overall process, to inform future practice

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 2.3	Collates and analyses textual information from a range of sources relevant to the design realisation
Writing	2.3, 3.1, 3.2, 4.3	Produces documentation using appropriate structure, language and context to articulate own ideas and positions
Oral Communication	1.2, 3.2-3.4, 4.2	Articulates clearly using specific language and appropriate tone to convey information Uses active questioning and listening techniques to confirm understanding
Numeracy	1.3, 2.1	Interprets and uses numeric information in budgets and to determine work schedules
Navigate the world of work	2.3, 3.3, 4.1	Works independently and collectively within broad parameters, with a strong sense of responsibility and ownership of plans, decisions and outcomes Adheres to organisational policies and procedures
Interact with others	1.2, 2.2, 3.1, 3.2, 3.4	Recognises the importance of taking audience, purpose and contextual factors into account when making decisions about what to communicate, with whom, why and how Fosters a collaborative culture within own sphere of influence, facilitating a sense of cohesion and commitment
Get the work done	1.1, 1.3, 2.1, 2.4, 2.5	Takes responsibility for planning and organising tasks to meet workplace deadlines, including those tasks that require liaison with other people Applies formal problem-solving processes when responding to unpredictable issues and challenges that arise during the design process Uses each experience to reflect on how variables impact outcomes to inform future practices

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
BSBDES601 Manage design realisation	BSBDES601A Manage design realisation	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for BSBDES601 Manage design realisation

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with BSB Business Services Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

produce a design according to all brief requirements

demonstrate highly-developed interpersonal and negotiation skills to deliver the finished product.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

outline key responsibilities of relevant personnel in this context

describe best practices when dealing with setbacks in the production process

explain production processes in a particular industry context or discipline including required materials, tools and equipment.

Assessment Conditions

Assessment must be conducted in a safe environment where evidence gathered demonstrates consistent performance of typical activities experienced in the design process field of work and include access to:

resources, tools, materials and equipment required for realising a design in a specific context

a design concept that the candidate can take to realisation stage

other people to reflect the collaborative nature of the work.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

BSBEBU501 Investigate and design e-business solutions

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with BSB Business Services Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to evaluate e-business models and strategies, as well as incorporate the results of these evaluations into the design of an e-business solution.

It applies to individuals who possess skills and knowledge in a specialist business area, as well as knowledge of software and other technologies. They apply these skills and knowledge in the evaluation, selection and implementation of new strategies for business, which incorporate e-business solutions. They may be responsible for overseeing these tasks along with technical or other knowledge experts.

No licensing, legislative, regulatory or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Information and Communications Technology – E-Business

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1 Investigate e-business opportunities	1.1 Undertake a competitive analysis to determine the likely impact new capabilities will have on industry sectors and competitors 1.2 Complete and assess value chain analysis to identify processes and relationships that may benefit from the adoption of ebusiness solutions 1.3 Identify threats and opportunities to ebusiness implementation and evaluate potential contributions to the business 1.4 Conduct resource analysis to identify cost and revenue implications in developing opportunities 1.5 Identify and evaluate legal and ethical issues relating to ebusiness opportunities
2 Evaluate e-business models	2.1 Identify and analyse businesstobusiness, businesstoconsumer, intraorganisational ebusiness applications and ebusiness models 2.2 Rank compatible ebusiness models in terms of their strengths and weaknesses, considering resourcing, technical and security requirements of each 2.3 Assess cost implications of implementation of ebusiness models 2.4 Determine an ebusiness model most appropriate in relation to business plan
3 Design an e-business	3.1 Formulate purpose, objectives and values for the ebusiness 3.2 Identify target market, and value chain structure in accordance with chosen ebusiness model 3.3 Identify and obtain technical needs and expertise required to implement ebusiness model 3.4 Investigate and develop plan to address culture change issues to manage transition to an ebusiness
4 Implement an e-business strategy	4.1 Develop policies and guidelines to support customers, supply chain and staff to ensure successful implementation 4.2 Monitor performance of business goals and adjust policies and procedures to respond to changing needs of customers, staff and supply chain 4.3 Review ebusiness systems and models, seeking feedback from users and personnel responsible for ebusiness implementation 4.4 Incorporate evaluation results and feedback to improve future ebusiness strategies

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1-1.5, 2.1-2.4, 3.2-3.4, 4.1-4.4	Interprets a range of textual information to evaluate opportunities, possible exemplars and technical considerations
Writing	1.1-1.5, 2.1-2.4, 3.1-3.4, 4.1-4.4	Takes personal notes and develops workplace documentation that clarifies complex ideas using language and structure to suit context and audience
Oral Communication	3.3, 4.3	Articulates information clearly using language and tone appropriate to audience and environment Uses active listening and questioning techniques to receive feedback and confirm understanding
Numeracy	1.4, 2.2, 2.3	Analyses numerical information to determine resources required for job
Navigate the world of work	1.1-1.5, 2.1-2.4, 3.1-3.4, 4.1-4.4	Develops and reviews organisational procedures to achieve broader workplace goals Monitors adherence to organisational procedures and legislative requirements
Interact with others	3.3, 4.3	Selects and uses appropriate conventions and protocols when communicating with others in a range of work contexts
Get the work done	1.5, 2.1-2.4, 3.1-3.4, 4.1-4.4	Takes responsibility for developing and implementing organisational processes that comply with legislative requirements and achieve required outcomes Systematically gathers and analyses all relevant information and evaluates options to solve problems or make decisions Considers the effectiveness of a solution in terms of how well it met stated goals, and seeks to make improvements Investigates new and innovative ideas as a means to continuously improve work practices and processes Uses digital technologies and systems safely, legally and ethically to access, store and share information

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
BSBEBU501 Investigate and design e-business solutions	BSBEBU501A Investigate and design e-business solutions	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for BSBEBU501 Investigate and design e-business solutions

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with BSB Business Services Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

analyse and evaluate ebusiness opportunities involving new business models and not simply electronic versions of existing businesses

provide supporting evidence for choice of ebusiness solution

implement, monitor and evaluate an e-business solution.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

explain the role of a value chain analysis when assessing potential e-business solutions

identify relevant legislation, regulations, standards and codes of practice that may affect the implementation of the e-business solution

list key features of a range of e-business models

outline the policies and guidelines relating to the implementation of the e-business solution.

Assessment Conditions

Assessment must be conducted in a safe environment where evidence gathered demonstrates consistent performance of typical activities experienced in the information and communications technology – e-business field of work and include access to:

office equipment and materials

documentation relating to analysis and implementation

relevant legislation, regulations and codes of practice.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

BSBEBU502 Implement e-business solutions

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with BSB Business Services Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the performance outcomes, skills and knowledge required to implement e-business solutions, including establishing the initial requirements and developing systems for implementation, and to support ongoing monitoring and review.

It applies to individuals who possess skills and knowledge in a specialist business area, as well as knowledge of software and other technologies. They apply these skills and knowledge in the implementation of e-business solutions. They may be responsible for overseeing these tasks along with technical or other knowledge experts.

No licensing, legislative, regulatory or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Information and Communications Technology – E-Business

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1 Set up e-business solution	1.1 Identify legislative and organisational requirements in consultation with relevant personnel 1.2 Evaluate security issues and rank them for acceptable risk 1.3 Evaluate the costs and technology requirements associated with ebusiness solution in relation to organisational requirements 1.4 Confirm technology and standards required for implementation with relevant personnel 1.5 Prepare budget for implementation of solution
2 Implement e-business solution	2.1 Delegate responsibility for solution in accordance with organisational policy, procedures and structures 2.2 Develop procedures for solution in accordance with organisational and other business requirements 2.3 Provide training for implementation of solution in accordance with organisational requirements 2.4 Develop security procedures and protocols in accordance with organisational requirements 2.5 Maintain records relating to solution in accordance with legal, ethical and accounting requirements
3 Monitor and review e-business solution	3.1 Monitor outcomes and processes in accordance with implementation strategy and established performance monitoring and reporting requirements 3.2 Use business data and reports to compare plans, budgets, timelines and forecasts relating to actual performance 3.3 Obtain feedback from users and personnel responsible for implementation, and make recommendations to improve future ebusiness strategies

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Learning	2.3	Provides training to extend relevant personnel’s understanding
Reading	1.2, 1.3, 1.5, 2.1, 3.1-3.3	Interprets a range of textual information to establish job requirements and implement solutions
Writing	1.1-1.5, 2.1-2.5, 3.1-3.3	Takes personal notes and develops workplace documentation that clarifies complex ideas using relevant language and structure appropriate to context and audience
Oral Communication	1.1, 1.4, 2.1, 2.3, 3.3	Articulates information clearly using language, syntax and tone appropriate to audience and environment Uses active listening and questioning techniques to receive feedback and confirm understanding
Numeracy	1.3, 1.5, 3.2	Interprets numerical information to evaluate costs and prepare budgets and timelines
Navigate the world of work	1.1, 1.3, 1.4, 2.1-2.5, 3.1	Develops and reviews organisational procedures to achieve broader workplace goals Monitors adherence to organisational procedures and legislative requirements
Interact with others	1.1, 1.4, 2.1, 2.3, 3.3	Selects and uses appropriate conventions and protocols when communicating with others in a range of work contexts
Get the work done	1.1-1.5, 2.1, 2.4, 3.1-3.3	Takes responsibility for developing, implementing and monitoring organisational processes to achieve required outcomes Plans and implements tasks required to achieve organisational requirements Systematically gathers and analyses all relevant information and evaluates options to solve problems or make decisions Considers the effectiveness of a solution in terms of how well it met stated goals, and seeks to make improvements Identifies digital systems, devices and applications with potential to meet current and/or future needs, including the need for data security

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
BSBEBU502 Implement e-business solutions	BSBEBU502A Implement e-business solutions	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for BSBEBU502 Implement e-business solutions

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with BSB Business Services Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

document processes and procedures for implementation of an ebusiness solution

develop, implement and review an e-business solution.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

briefly describe the key technology requirements for the e-business solution

identify key provisions of relevant legislation, regulations, standards and codes of practice that may affect implementation of e-business solutions

outline organisational policies and procedures relating to the e-business solution.

Assessment Conditions

Assessment must be conducted in a safe environment where evidence gathered demonstrates consistent performance of typical activities experienced in the information and communications technology – e-business field of work and include access to:

office equipment and materials

relevant legislation, regulations and codes of practice.

documentation to support analysis of organisational requirements for the e-business solution.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

BSBFLM309 Support continuous improvement systems and processes

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with BSB Business Services Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to support the organisation’s continuous improvement systems and processes. Particular emphasis is on actively encouraging the team to participate in the process, monitoring and reporting on specified outcomes and supporting opportunities for further improvements.

It applies to individuals with roles of responsibility who use initiative, organisational and communication skills to influence the ongoing development of the organisation.

At this level, work will normally be carried out within known routines, methods and procedures, and may also involve complex or non-routine activities that require some discretion and judgement.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Management and Leadership – Frontline Management

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1 Contribute to continuous improvement systems and processes	1.1 Actively encourage and support team members to participate in decision-making processes and to assume responsibility and exercise initiative 1.2 Communicate the organisation’s continuous improvement processes to individuals and teams 1.3 Effectively utilise mentoring and coaching to ensure that individuals/teams are able to support the organisation’s continuous improvement processes
2 Monitor and report specified outcomes	2.1 Utilise the organisation’s systems and technology to monitor team progress and to identify ways in which planning and operations could be improved 2.2 Apply continuous improvement techniques and processes to improve customer service
3 Support opportunities for further improvement	3.1 Communicate agreed recommendations for improvements in achieving the business plan to team members 3.2 Document and use work performance to identify opportunities for further improvement 3.3 Maintain records, reports and recommendations for improvement within the organisation’s systems and processes

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Learning	1.3	Contributes to ongoing organisational improvement by mentoring others to support continuous improvement processes
Reading	2.1, 3.3	Interprets everyday workplace documentation
Writing	1.2, 3.1-3.3	Uses appropriate vocabulary and grammatical structures to achieve precise meaning in a range of documentation
Oral Communication	1.1-1.3, 3.1	Articulates information in a positive manner using appropriate terminology, tone and style appropriate to context and audience Uses questioning and listening techniques to exchange and clarify information
Navigate the world of work	1.2, 3.3	Understands the nature and purpose of own role and associated responsibilities and how own role meshes with others and contributes to broader work goals Takes responsibility for adherence to organisational processes and systems
Interact with others	1.2, 1.3	Shares information and resources, offers assistance voluntarily and facilitates effective group interactions
Get the work done	2.1, 2.2, 3.2, 3.3	Takes responsibility for routine low-impact decisions within familiar situations Evaluates effectiveness of decisions in terms of how well they meet stated goals Uses a range of digitally based technology and applications to organise, monitor, manage and communicate relevant information effectively

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
BSBFLM309 Support continuous improvement systems and processes	BSBFLM309C Support continuous improvement systems and processes	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for BSBFLM309 Support continuous improvement systems and processes

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with BSB Business Services Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

perform actions to support continuous improvement including:

using work performance to identify improvement

adjusting plans to reflect changes

communicating effectively with all stakeholders

using technology to monitor operational progress

applying suitable recordkeeping processes.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

explain principles and techniques relating to:

continuous improvement systems and processes

benchmarking

best practice

describe the benefits of continuous improvement

list quality approaches which the organisation may implement

explain methods that can be used in continuous improvement

outline barriers to continuous improvement

explain recording, reporting and recommendation processes to facilitate continuous improvement applied within the organisation.

Assessment Conditions

Assessment must be conducted in a safe environment where evidence gathered demonstrates consistent performance of typical activities experienced in the management field of work and include access to:

relevant workplace documentation and resources

case studies and, where possible, real situations

interaction with others

business technology.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

BSBINN201 Contribute to workplace innovation

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with BSB Business Services Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to make a pro-active and positive contribution to workplace innovation.

It applies to individuals working in any industry or community context, in both small and large organisations who take a pro-active approach to identifying, suggesting and developing ideas about better ways of doing things at a practical operational level in a specific area of activity. While the individual’s overall work is undertaken with some supervision and guidance, they apply discretion, judgement and effective interpersonal skills in order to contribute to workplace innovation.

No licensing, legislative, regulatory or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Creativity and Innovation – Innovation

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1 Identify opportunities to do things better	1.1 Be aware of own role in workplace innovation 1.2 Proactively identify opportunities for improvement in own area of work 1.3 Gather and review information which may be relevant to ideas and which might assist in gaining support for ideas
2 Discuss and develop ideas with others	2.1 Identify people who could provide input into ideas for improvements 2.2 Select the best way of approaching people to begin sharing ideas 2.3 Seek feedback on improvement of ideas, and discuss and develop options and possible variations 2.4 Review and select ideas for follow up based on feedback and further review
3 Address the practicalities of change	3.1 Take action to implement routine changes in consultation with others and within scope of own responsibility 3.2 Identify and articulate issues and practical processes for implementing proposed ideas 3.3 Present ideas and practical suggestions to the appropriate people about how improvements could be made

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.3, 2.4, 3.2	Categorises, interprets and reviews information from a range of sources to generate ideas relevant to the workplace
Writing	3.2, 3.3	Communicates information using clear language and formats appropriate for the audience
Oral Communication	2.3, 3.1, 3.2, 3.3	Actively participates in verbal exchanges of ideas and elicits the view and opinions of others by listening and questioning Uses clear and relevant language to clarify workplace issues and promote ideas
Numeracy	1.3, 3.2	Performs basic mathematical calculations to estimate time and cost in relation to implementation of ideas
Navigate the world of work	1.1, 1.2, 3.1	Understands responsibilities of own role
Interact with others	2.3, 3.1-3.3	Follows accepted communication practices and protocols when discussing or presenting ideas to others Seeks and takes into account perspectives and opinions of others
Get the work done	1.2, 1.3, 2.1, 2.2, 2.4, 3.1-3.3	Plans and implements routine tasks making limited decisions and seeking assistance, when necessary Uses analytical or lateral thinking processes to identify improvements or new ways of approaching tasks Identifies and anticipates operational problems and develops possible solutions

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
BSBINN201 Contribute to workplace innovation	BSBINN201A Contribute to workplace innovation	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for BSBINN201 Contribute to workplace innovation

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with BSB Business Services Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

identify ideas for improvements and use information from a range of sources including other people to review and select ideas to put forward for implementation

communicate the ideas and seek input from others in order to identify how the ideas could be implemented

implement routine changes within scope of responsibility.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

explain the role of individuals in suggesting and making improvements and the importance of proactive involvement

list the positive impacts and the challenges of change and innovation

provide examples of the types of changes that can occur as a result of effective individual participation within own scope of responsibility

give examples of the types of changes that are within and outside own scope of responsibility

list typical reasons why suggested improvements or innovations may not be implemented, including operational and management constraints

explain how to prepare and communicate ideas for improvement to maximise likelihood of support.

Assessment Conditions

Assessment must be conducted in a safe environment where evidence gathered demonstrates consistent performance of typical activities experienced in the creativity and innovation and include access to:

workplace documents

case studies and, where possible, real situations

office equipment and resources

interaction with others.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

BSBINN301 Promote innovation in a team environment

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with BSB Business Services Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to be an effective and proactive member of an innovative team.

It applies to individuals who play a proactive role in demonstrating, encouraging or supporting innovation in a team environment. The individual may be a team participant or a team leader. Teams may be formal or informal and may comprise a range of personnel.

No licensing, legislative, regulatory or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Creativity and Innovation – Innovation

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1 Create opportunities to maximise innovation within the team	1.1 Evaluate and reflect on what the team needs and wants to achieve 1.2 Check out information about current or potential team members’ work in the context of developing a more innovative team 1.3 Bring people into the team or make suggestions for team members based on what needs to be achieved and the potential for cross fertilising ideas 1.4 Acknowledge, respect and discuss the different ways that people may contribute to building or enhancing the team
2 Organise and agree effective ways of working	2.1 Jointly establish ground rules for how the team will operate 2.2 Agree and communicate responsibilities in ways that encourage and reinforce teambased innovation 2.3 Agree and share tasks and activities to ensure the best use of skills and abilities within the team 2.4 Plan and schedule activities to allow time for thinking, challenging and collaboration 2.5 Establish personal reward and stimulation as an integral part of the team’s way of working
3 Support and guide colleagues	3.1 Model behaviour that supports innovation 3.2 Seek external stimuli and ideas to feed into team activities 3.3 Proactively share information, knowledge and experiences with other team members 3.4 Challenge and test ideas within the team in a positive and collaborative way 3.5 Proactively discuss and explore ideas with other team members on an ongoing basis
4 Reflect on how the team is working	4.1 Debrief and reflect on activities and on opportunities for improvement and innovation 4.2 Gather and use feedback from within and outside the team to generate discussion and debate 4.3 Discuss the challenges of being innovative in a constructive and open way 4.4 Take ideas for improvement, build them into future activities and communicate key issues to relevant colleagues 4.5 Identify, promote and celebrate successes and examples of successful innovation

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.2, 4.2	Interprets and analyses textual information, from a wide range of sources, to identify information relevant to team activities
Writing	2.2, 3.3, 4.4	Uses clear language and formats appropriate for the audience to highlight and present specific information
Oral Communication	1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 2.1, 2.2, 3.5, 4.1, 4.2, 4.3, 4.4, 4.5	Actively participates in verbal exchanges of ideas and elicits the views and opinions of team members by listening and questioning Uses clear language to clarify rules and roles relating to team activities in formal and informal situations
Numeracy	1.2, 4.2	Interprets numeric information relevant to team activities
Navigate the world of work	1.1, 3.1, 3.2, 3.5	Understands the nature and purpose of own role and how it affects others in the work context
Interact with others	1.1-1.4, 2.1, 2.2, 3.1, 3.2, 3.4, 3.5, 4.1, 4.2, 4.4, 4.5	Uses inclusive techniques to initiate, contribute and promote discussion amongst potentially diverse team members Recognises the importance of establishing and building effective working relationships Selects the appropriate form, channel and mode of communication for a specific purpose relevant to own role
Get the work done	1.3, 1.4, 2.2, 2.4, 2.5, 3.2, 3.4, 4.2, 4.4, 4.5	Plans, sequences and prioritises tasks for efficient and effective outcomes Contributes to continuous improvement of current work practices by applying basic principles of analytical and lateral thinking Uses problem-solving processes to address less predictable problems, and when appropriate, seeking input from others Reflects on outcomes and further explores own and the team’s role in implementing innovation

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
BSBINN301 Promote innovation in a team environment	BSBINN301A Promote innovation in a team environment	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for BSBINN301 Promote innovation in a team environment

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with BSB Business Services Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

apply practices that promote innovation within a team including:

modelling open and respectful communications

contributing to the make-up and rules of the team

planning and scheduling of activities

reflecting on activities, feedback and challenges to identity improvement options

encourage others to contribute to innovation in the team

implement improvements and communicate about them.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

explain what innovation is, the different types of innovation and the benefits of innovation

describe the internal and external factors that contribute to a team becoming and remaining innovative including:

team characteristics

the role of group dynamics and diversity

broader environmental factors

explain how activities can encourage or hinder innovation in a team including:

allocation of time and activities

modelling behaviour

rewards and recognition

communications

feedback.

Assessment Conditions

Assessment must be conducted in a safe environment where evidence gathered demonstrates consistent performance of typical activities experienced in the creativity and innovation and include access to:

workplace documents

case studies and, where possible, real situations

office equipment and resources

interaction with others.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

BSBIPR401 Use and respect copyright

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with BSB Business Services Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to use and respect copyright. It covers maintaining control over the copyright owner’s work, commercialising copyright material, preventing the unauthorised use of an original work and using other party’s original work legitimately.

It applies to people who may be authors, creators or other owners of works covered by copyright. It also applies to employees who have a role in ensuring that their organisation’s copyright is protected and/or that their organisation uses others’ copyright appropriately to benefit the organisation without infringing the rights of copyright owners.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Regulation, Licensing and Risk – Intellectual Property

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Identify extent of copyright protection for original works	1.1 Research copyright and its application to original works 1.2 Identify legislative requirements governing copyright 1.3 Determine the copyright owner of original works within or used by the organisation 1.4 Research the rights of the copyright owner, including moral rights 1.5 Determine whether a copyright notice is required 1.6 Identify sources of information and advice regarding copyright issues and use copyright professionals where required
2. Ensure that copyright protection is effective when using original works	2.1 Identify material within the organisation that may attract copyright 2.2 Identify and review organisation policies and procedures to ensure that own and others’ original works are protected against direct or indirect infringement of copyright 2.3 Implement policies and procedures to protect the organisation’s copyright, recognising exceptions that allow the legitimate use of own copyright material by others 2.4 Provide advice to relevant personnel about the legal and economic implications of copyright infringement 2.5 Evaluate and make recommendations for the commercialisation potential of copyright material 2.6 Research issues that need to be considered when licensing or selling copyright rights, including the use of copyright collection societies
3. Monitor policies and procedures for use of own copyright materials by other parties	3.1 Monitor policies and procedures to ensure that the organisation’s copyright is respected locally and internationally 3.2 Create and maintain documentation in relation to copyright agreements where established 3.3 Implement procedures to limit or deter infringement of organisation’s copyright and/or encourage the proper use of the organisation’s copyright 3.4 Make recommendations to appropriate personnel when real or potential infringements of organisation’s copyright may require further action
4. Monitor policies and procedures for legitimate use of others’ copyright materials	4.1 Research when permission is needed to use copyright material belonging to others 4.2 Advise appropriate personnel about restrictions on and licensing requirements for the use of others’ copyright material, and implement training if required 4.3 Advise appropriate personnel of legislative exceptions that allow use of copyright material without permission 4.4 Monitor policies and procedures covering organisational use of others’ copyright material to ensure it is to the benefit of the organisation 4.5 Monitor organisational use of others’ copyright material to reduce the risk of infringement 4.6 Take action to minimise damage if infringement of others’ copyright material occurs

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1-1.4, 2.1, 2.2, 2.6, 3.1, 4.1, 4.4	Researches and analyses complex texts, including legislation, to identify relevant information Monitors and reviews organisational policies and procedures to ensure compliance with legislative requirements
Writing	1.1, 1.3, 1.4, 2.2, 2.4, 2.5, 2.6, 3.2, 3.4, 4.1, 4.3	Summarises research findings relevant to the organisation Records and maintains copyright documentation according to organisational and legislative requirements Reviews and updates organisational policies and procedures to ensure compliance with legislative requirements
Oral Communication	1.3, 1.6, 2.4, 2.5, 3.4, 4.2, 4.3	Provides advice using language and terminology appropriate to audience Obtains information from others by listening and questioning
Navigate the world of work	1.2, 2.2, 2.3, 3.1, 3.3, 4.4	Identifies and complies with legislative requirements associated with own role Implements, monitors and reviews policies and procedures to ensure organisational compliance with legislative requirements
Interact with others	1.3, 1.6, 2.4, 2.5, 3.4, 4.2, 4.3	Follows accepted communication practices when seeking or providing advice about intellectual property
Get the work done	1.1-1.6, 2.1-2.3, 2.5, 2.6, 3.1-3.4, 4.1, 4.4-4.6	Plans, organises and implements tasks needed to ensure compliance with organisational and legislative requirements Systematically gathers and analyses information to decide on action needed to prevent or address copyright infringements Uses digital technologies or tools to access and record information

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
BSBIPR401 Use and respect copyright	BSBIPR401 Use and respect copyright	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for BSBIPR401 Use and respect copyright

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with BSB Business Services Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

review and interpret information to determine how copyright applies in the organisation

implement and review organisational policies and procedures to ensure that own and others’ original works are protected

recommend actions to address risks and infringements

communicate advice or recommendations about copyright to a range of stakeholders

identify the need for training on copyright and implement training as appropriate.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

outline the legislative framework for copyright and its application to the organisation

list and describe the types of works that attract copyright

identify sources of information and advice on copyright

explain methods to limit or deter unauthorised use of copyright material

explain direct and indirect infringement

give examples of action to take if infringement occurs

give examples of when authorisation for use of copyright material is needed and how to obtain it

outline different types of licenses and how they apply to the organisation

outline options for commercialisation of copyright and potential benefits for the organisation.

Assessment Conditions

Assessment must be conducted in a safe environment where evidence gathered demonstrates consistent performance of typical activities experienced in the regulation, licensing and risk – intellectual property field of work and include access to:

relevant legislation, regulations, standards and codes

relevant workplace documentation and resources

case studies and, where possible, real situations

interaction with others.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

BSBIPR601 Develop and implement strategies for intellectual property management

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with BSB Business Services Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to obtain a strategic advantage from developing and implementing strategies for the management of intellectual property. It covers the evaluation of approaches to the management of intellectual property and focuses on establishing, implementing, evaluating and monitoring an organisation’s intellectual property strategy.

It applies to directors or managers who take an active role in recognising and securing intangible assets which contribute to the organisation’s profitability, productivity and market leadership. These managers and coordinators may work in a range of contexts and may have responsibility for managing people, systems or processes.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Regulation, Licensing and Risk – Intellectual Property

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1 Evaluate approaches to the management of intellectual property	1.1 Analyse strategic and operational plans to determine intellectual property requirements 1.2 Identify sources of information and advice regarding approaches to the best practice management of intellectual property 1.3 Determine the implications and potential strategic advantage from protection of intellectual property 1.4 Determine the implications and potential strategic advantage from adopting a collaborative approach to intellectual property 1.5 Determine the implications and potential strategic advantage from adopting an open source approach to intellectual property
2 Establish a strategy for managing intellectual property	2.1 Develop an intellectual property strategy for management and use of own and others’ intellectual property in line with the organisation’s strategic goals or plans 2.2 Examine requirements and options for commercialisation or effective use of intellectual property 2.3 Establish required documentation for the management of the intellectual property strategy 2.4 Develop strategies for addressing intellectual property infringement 2.5 Ensure intellectual property strategy complies with legislative requirements and organisational policies 2.6 Communicate intellectual property strategy to key stakeholders within the organisation and externally
3 Evaluate proposed intellectual property strategy	3.1 Obtain legal and other professional advice regarding the proposed intellectual property management strategy 3.2 Identify and evaluate the benefits from the proposed intellectual property management strategy 3.3 Identify and evaluate the disadvantages, costs and risks of the proposed intellectual property management strategy 3.4 Adjust strategy according to legal advice and evaluation 3.5 Establish, document and present the business case for adopting the proposed intellectual property management strategy to senior management, directors and other key stakeholders
4 Implement and monitor the intellectual property management strategy	4.1 Work with others to ensure the implementation of the strategy 4.2 Monitor and evaluate the strategy and its implementation and report to senior management, directors and other key stakeholders 4.3 Make changes to strategy and its implementation as required

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 1.2, 2.1-2.3, 2.5, 3.2-3.4, 4.2, 4.3	Identifies and analyses complex texts to determine legislative, regulatory and business requirements Evaluates, interprets and uses content obtained from various sources to develop or review strategies
Writing	1.1, 1.2, 2.1, 2.3, 2.4, 2.6, 3.2-3.5, 4.2, 4.3	Records and summarises information in accordance with organisational or regulatory requirements Composes and edits texts, selecting appropriate vocabulary, structure and format for audience and purpose Prepares correspondence and documentation according to organisational formats and protocols
Oral Communication	2.6, 3.5, 4.1, 4.2	Presents information using language and non-verbal features appropriate to audience Participates in discussions using listening and questioning to elicit the views of others and to clarify or confirm understanding
Numeracy	3.3, 4.2	Reviews and analyses numerical data embedded in organisational documentation
Navigate the world of work	2.1, 2.5	Modifies or develops strategies to meet organisational goals, and ethical and legislative requirements Understands and applies knowledge of legislative and regulatory requirements in the conduct of own work
Interact with others	2.6, 3.5, 4.1, 4.2	Selects and uses appropriate conventions and protocols when communicating with internal and external stakeholders to seek or share information Plays a lead role in situations requiring effective collaboration, demonstrating the ability to engage and motivate others to achieve required outcomes
Get the work done	1.1-1.5, 2.1-2.4, 3.1-3.5, 4.2, 4.3	Takes responsibility for planning, organising, implementing and reviewing processes to ensure effective implementation of intellectual property strategy Systematically gathers and analyses all relevant information and evaluates options in order to make decisions about intellectual property strategies Evaluates outcomes of decisions to identify opportunities for improvement Uses analytical and lateral thinking to review current practices and develop new ideas Uses a range of digital technologies to access, analyse, organise, present and share information

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
BSBIPR601 Develop and implement strategies for intellectual property management	BSBIPR601A Develop and implement strategies for intellectual property management	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for BSBIPR601 Develop and implement strategies for intellectual property management

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with BSB Business Services Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

identify and analyse information from a range of sources to determine

legislation, regulations and organisational policies and procedures relevant to intellectual property (IP)

IP requirements in relation to organisational strategic or operational goals

current industry best practice of IP management

implications and/or strategic advantage of adopting particular approaches to managing IP

develop and evaluate a strategy for managing intellectual property that complies with legislative requirements and organisational policies, goals or plans

develop and present a business case to decision makers

implement, monitor and evaluate the strategy and its implementation and make improvements as appropriate

consult and communicate effectively with stakeholders to establish, evaluate or implement the strategy.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

describe types of intellectual property as they relate to the organisation

give examples of options for commercialisation of IP

outline typical barriers to making and implementing strategic decisions about IP and possible strategies to address them

explain the typical advantages and disadvantages of alternative approaches to managing intellectual property

identify relevant legislation and regulations relating to the organisation’s intellectual property rights and responsibilities

outline internal and external sources of information and advice relevant to intellectual property.

Assessment Conditions

Assessment must be conducted in a safe environment where evidence gathered demonstrates consistent performance of typical activities experienced in the regulation, licensing and risk – intellectual property field of work and include access to:

relevant legislation, standards and codes

workplace documentation and resources

case studies and, where possible, real situations

interaction with others.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

BSBITU306 Design and produce business documents

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with BSB Business Services Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to design and produce various business documents and publications. It includes selecting and using a range of functions on a variety of computer applications.

It applies to individuals who possess fundamental skills in computer operations and keyboarding. They may exercise discretion and judgement using appropriate theoretical knowledge of document design and production to provide technical advice and support to a team.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Information and Communications Technology – IT Use

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Select and prepare resources	1.1 Select and use appropriate technology and software applications to produce required business documents 1.2 Select layout and style of publication according to information and organisational requirements 1.3 Ensure document design is consistent with company and/or client requirements, using basic design principles 1.4 Discuss and clarify format and style with person requesting document/publication
2. Design document	2.1 Identify, open and generate files and records according to task and organisational requirements 2.2 Design document to ensure efficient entry of information and to maximise presentation and appearance of information 2.3 Use a range of functions to ensure consistency of design and layout 2.4 Operate input devices within designated requirements
3. Produce document	3.1 Complete document production within designated timelines according to organisational requirements 3.2 Check document produced to ensure it meets task requirements for style and layout 3.3 Store document appropriately and save document to avoid loss of data 3.4 Use manuals, training booklets and/or helpdesks to overcome basic difficulties with document design and production
4. Finalise document	4.1 Proofread document for readability, accuracy and consistency of language, style and layout prior to final output 4.2 Make any modifications to document to meet requirements 4.3 Name and store document in accordance with organisational requirements and exit application without data loss/damage 4.4 Print and present document according to requirements

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	2.1, 2.2, 3.2, 3.4, 4.1	Recognises and interprets textual information from a range of sources to determine and adhere to requirements Applies strategies to self-correct and verify clarity and conformity of information
Writing	2.2, 2.3, 3.1, 4.2, 4.3	Develops documents using required format, accurate spelling and grammar and terminology specific to requirements Organises content to support purposes and audience of material, using clear and logical language
Oral Communication	1.4	Confirms requirements with relevant personnel using specific terminology and listening and questioning techniques
Navigate the world of work	1.2, 1.3, 2.1, 2.4, 3.1, 3.2, 4.2-4.4	Recognises and follows explicit and implicit protocols and meets expectations associated with own role
Interact with others	1.4	Selects and uses appropriate conventions and protocols when communicating in a range of familiar work contexts
Get the work done	1.1-1.3, 2.1-2.4, 3.1-3.4, 4.1-4.4	Uses basic features and functions within applications to access, store, organise data and perform routine work tasks

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
BSBITU306 Design and produce business documents	BSBITU306A Design and produce business documents	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for BSBITU306 Design and produce business documents

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with BSB Business Services Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

select appropriate technology and software for design and production of business documents

adhere to organisational requirements when:

selecting layout and style

opening and generating files

producing documents within designated timelines

naming and storing documents

printing and presenting documents

adhere to task requirements when producing documents including:

applying basic design principles

applying consistent formatting

using appropriate styles

using correct layouts

proofreading as required

use appropriate data storage options

apply knowledge of functions and features of contemporary computer applications

print and present completed documents.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

identify appropriate technology for production requirements

describe functions and features of contemporary computer applications

outline organisational policies, plans and procedures

list organisational requirements for document design e.g. style guide.

Assessment Conditions

Assessment must be conducted in a safe environment where evidence gathered demonstrates consistent performance of typical activities experienced in the information and communications technology – IT use field of work and include access to:

office equipment and resources

relevant software applications

examples of style guides

organisational procedures.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

BSBLDR403 Lead team effectiveness

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with BSB Business Services Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit defines skills, knowledge and outcomes required to plan and supervise the performance of the team and develop team cohesion.

It applies team leaders, supervisors and new emerging managers who have an important leadership role in the development of efficient and effective work teams.

Leaders at this level also provide leadership for the team and bridge the gap between the management of the organisation and the team members. As such they must 'manage up' as well as manage their team/s.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Management and Leadership - Leadership

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Plan to achieve team outcomes	1.1 Lead the team to identify, establish and document team purpose, roles, responsibilities, goals, plans and objectives in consultation with team members 1.2 Engage team members to incorporate innovation and productivity measures in work plans 1.3 Lead and support team members in meeting expected outcomes
2. Lead team to develop cohesion	2.1 Provide opportunities for input of team members into planning, decision making and operational aspects of work team 2.2 Encourage and support team members to take responsibility for own work and to assist each other in undertaking required roles and responsibilities 2.3 Provide feedback to team members to encourage, value and reward individual and team efforts and contributions 2.4 Recognise and address issues, concerns and problems identified by team members or refer to relevant persons as required 2.5 Model expected behaviours and approaches
3. Participate in and facilitate work team	3.1 Actively encourage team members to participate in and take responsibility for team activities and communication processes 3.2 Give the team support to identify and resolve problems which impede its performance 3.3 Ensure own contribution to work team serves as a role model for others and enhances the organisation's image within the work team, the organisation and with clients/customers
4. Liaise with management	4.1 Maintain open communication with line manager/management at all times 4.2 Communicate information from line manager/management to the team 4.3 Communicate unresolved issues, concerns and problems raised by the team/team members to line manager/management and ensure follow-up action is taken 4.4 Communicate unresolved issues, concerns and problems related to the team/team members raised by line managers/management to the team and ensure follow-up to action is taken

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Writing	1.1, 4.2	Prepares workplace plans that communicate intent and elicits feedback clearly and effectively
Oral communication	1.1, 1.3, 2.2, 2.3, 3.1, 3.2, 4.2-4.4	Engages in discussions or provides information using structure and language appropriate to the audience and situation
Interact with others	1.1-1.3, 2.1-2.5, 3.1, 3.3, 4.1	Selects and uses appropriate conventions and protocols when communicating with team members Adapts personal communication style to model required behaviours, build trust and positive working relationships and to show respect for the opinions and values of others Plays a lead role in situations requiring effective collaboration, demonstrating conflict resolution skills and ability to engage and motivate others
Get the work done	1.1-1.3, 3.2	Develops, implements and monitors plans and processes to ensure team engagement and effectiveness Uses formal analytical thinking techniques to identify issues and generate possible solutions, seeking input from others as required

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
BSBLDR403 Lead team effectiveness	BSBWOR402A Promote team effectiveness	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages Title change Minor edits to clarify intent of performance criteria	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for BSBLDR403 Lead team effectiveness

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with BSB Business Services Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

apply knowledge of organisational goals, objectives and plans

develop a team work plan including documentation of how it was generated and how it will be monitored

identify and incorporate innovation and productivity measures into a team work plan

communicate with team members and management to identify and establish the team purpose, roles, responsibilities, goals plans and objectives and resolve problems

use techniques to consult, encourage, support and provide feedback to team members

model team leadership behaviours and approaches

liaise with management to develop the teamwork plan, resolve issues and ensure follow-up action is taken.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must explain principles and techniques associated with:

delegation and work allocation

goal setting

group dynamics and processes

individual behaviour and difference

leadership styles

motivation

negotiation

problem solving

planning

workplace innovation

workplace productivity.

Assessment Conditions

Assessment must be conducted in a safe environment where evidence gathered demonstrates consistent performance of typical activities experienced in the management and leadership field of work and include access to:

information about the organisation, including organisational structure, goals, objectives and plans

case studies, and where possible, real situations

workplace equipment and resources

interaction with others.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

BSBMGT402 Implement operational plan

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with BSB Business Services Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to implement the operational plan by monitoring and adjusting operational performance, planning and acquiring resources and providing reports on performance as required.

It applies to individuals who plan activities to achieve the measurable, stated objectives of the team and the organisation. At this level work will normally be carried out within routine and non-routine methods and procedures which require planning, evaluation, leadership and guidance of others.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Management and Leadership – Management

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Implement operational plan	1.1 Collate, analyse and organise details of resource requirements in consultation with relevant personnel, colleagues and specialist resource managers 1.2 Implement operational plans to contribute to the achievement of organisation’s performance/business plan 1.3 Identify and use key performance indicators (KPIs) to monitor operational performance 1.4 Manage contingencies by adjusting the implementation of the operational plan in consultation with others 1.5 Provide assistance in the development and presentation of proposals for resource requirements in line with operational planning processes
2. Implement resource acquisition	2.1 Recruit and induct employees within organisation’s policies, practices and procedures 2.2 Implement plans for acquisition of physical resources and services within organisation’s policies, practices and procedures and in consultation with relevant personnel
3. Monitor operational performance	3.1 Monitor performance systems and processes to assess progress in achieving profit/productivity plans and targets 3.2 Analyse and use budget and actual financial information to monitor profit/productivity performance 3.3 Identify unsatisfactory performance and take prompt action to rectify the situation according to organisational policies 3.4 Provide mentoring, coaching and supervision to support individuals and teams to use resources effectively, economically and safely 3.5 Present recommendations for variation to operational plans to the designated persons/groups and gain approval 3.6 Implement systems, procedures and records associated with performance in accordance with organisation’s requirements

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Learning	3.4	Actively reinforces learning by applying new knowledge and skills in mentoring, coaching and supervising others
Reading	1.1-1.5, 2.1, 2.2, 3.1, 3.2, 3.6	Identifies, interprets, analyses and reviews textual information related to the operational plan and monitoring of operational performance
Writing	1.1-1.5, 2.1, 2.2, 3.2-3.6	Communicates relationships between ideas and information, matching style of writing to purpose and audience Researches, plans and prepares workplace documentation for relevant stakeholders using organisational formats
Oral Communication	1.1, 1.4, 1.5, 2.1, 2.2, 3.3, 3.4, 3.5	Participates in a variety of spoken exchanges with a range of audiences varying structure and language to suit the audience
Numeracy	1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 2.2, 3.1, 3.2, 3.3	Selects and uses familiar mathematical techniques to organise timely supply of adequate resources for the operational plan and to use budgetary information to monitor performance
Navigate the world of work	1.5, 2.1, 2.2, 3.3, 3.4, 3.6	Monitors adherence to organisational policies and procedures and considers own role in terms of its contribution to broader goals of the work environment
Interact with others	1.1, 1.4, 1.5, 2.1, 2.2, 3.3, 3.4, 3.5	Selects and uses appropriate conventions and protocols when communicating with diverse individuals to build rapport, seek or present information Collaborates with others to achieve joint outcomes, playing an active role in facilitating effective group communication, influencing direction and taking a leadership role on occasion
Get the work done	1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 2.2, 3.1, 3.2, 3.3, 3.6	Takes responsibility for planning, organising, implementing and monitoring tasks required to achieve required outcomes Uses systematic, analytical processes in complex, non-routine situations, setting goals, gathering relevant information and identifying and evaluating options against agreed criteria Evaluates effectiveness of decisions in terms of how well they met stated goals Recognises and addresses an increasing range of familiar problems by implementing contingency plans

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
BSBMGT402 Implement operational plan	BSBMGT402A Implement operational plan	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages. Edits to clarify intent of Performance Criteria.	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for BSBMGT402 Implement operational plan

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with BSB Business Services Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

interact with a range of people/groups to identify resource requirements, performance objectives, systems, procedures and records relating to the operational plan

vary the operational plan and gain approval to deal with contingencies

monitor operational performance against the performance objectives and budgets and take action to rectify unsatisfactory performance

plan and acquire physical and human resources using organisation’s systems and procedures

manage and support personnel to achieve performance objectives. including inducting new employees and providing mentoring and coaching

present information and recommendations to support implementation and variation of the operational plan

document and provide reports on performance as required by the organisation.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

describe performance monitoring systems and processes

describe methods for problem solving

explain how organisational policies and procedures relate to the operational plan.

Assessment Conditions

Assessment must be conducted in a safe environment where evidence gathered demonstrates consistent performance of typical activities experienced in the management and leadership field of work and include access to:

organisational operational plans, policies and procedures

workplace documentation and resources including budgets, physical and human resource procurement documentation, employee induction and performance monitoring procedures

case studies and, where possible, real situations.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

BSBMGT403 Implement continuous improvement

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with BSB Business Services Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to implement the organisation’s continuous improvement systems and processes. It covers using systems and strategies to actively encourage the team to participate in the process, monitoring and reviewing performance, and identifying opportunities for further improvements.

It applies to managers who have an active role in implementing the continuous improvement process to achieve the organisation's objectives. Their position is closely associated with the creation and delivery of products and services which means that they have an important role in influencing the ongoing development of the organisation.

At this level, work will normally be carried out within routine and non-routine methods and procedures, which require planning, evaluation, leadership and guidance of others.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Management and Leadership – Management

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Implement continuous improvement systems and processes	1.1 Implement systems to ensure that individuals and teams are actively encouraged and supported to participate in decision making processes, assume responsibility and exercise initiative 1.2 Communicate the organisation’s continuous improvement processes to individuals and teams, and obtain feedback 1.3 Ensure effective mentoring and coaching allows individuals and teams to implement the organisation’s continuous improvement processes
2. Monitor and review performance	2.1 Use the organisation’s systems and technology to monitor and review progress and to identify ways in which planning and operations could be improved 2.2 Improve customer service through continuous improvement techniques and processes 2.3 Formulate and communicate recommendations for adjustments to those who have a role in their development and implementation
3. Provide opportunities for further improvement	3.1 Implement processes to ensure that team members are informed of savings and productivity/service improvements in achieving the business plan 3.2 Document work performance to aid the identification of further opportunities for improvement 3.3 Manage records, reports and recommendations for improvement within the organisation’s systems and processes

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 1.2, 2.1, 3.2, 3.3	Evaluates and integrates facts and ideas to construct meaning from a range of text types in an effort to implement continuous improvement systems and processes
Writing	1.1, 1.2, 2.1, 2.2, 2.3, 3.1, 3.2, 3.3	Selects vocabulary, grammatical structures and conventions appropriate to text Researches, plans and prepares continuous improvement documentation for relevant stakeholders
Oral Communication	1.2, 1.3, 2.3	Participates in a variety of spoken exchanges with a range of audiences using structure and language to suit the audience
Navigate the world of work	2.1	Monitors adherence to organisational policies and procedures and considers own role in terms of its contribution to broader goals of the work environment
Interact the work of others	1.2, 1.3, 2.3, 3.1	Selects and uses appropriate conventions and protocols when communicating with diverse individuals to seek or share information Collaborates with others to achieve joint outcomes, playing an active role in facilitating effective group communication, influencing direction and taking a leadership role on occasion
Get the work done	1.1, 1.3, 2.1, 2.2, 3.1, 3.2, 3.3	Takes responsibility for planning and organising own workload to achieve required outcomes Uses systematic, analytical processes in complex, non-routine situations, setting goals, gathering relevant information and identifying and evaluating options against agreed criteria Evaluates effectiveness of decisions in terms of how well they meet stated goals Uses digital applications to access and filter data, extract, organise, integrate and share relevant information Recognises the potential of new approaches to enhance work practices and outcomes

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
BSBMGT403 Implement continuous improvement	BSBMGT403A Implement continuous improvement	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for BSBMGT403 Implement continuous improvement

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with BSB Business Services Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

implement continuous improvement systems and provide mentoring and coaching support to enable individuals and teams to participate in decisions, take responsibility, show initiative and implement improvement processes

implement processes to inform team members about savings and productivity/service improvements achievements

communicate effectively to support the continuous improvement system and implementation of improvements

apply continuous improvement to customer services including internal and external customers

implement, monitor and adjust improvement plans, processes and procedures to improve performance

document performance to identify further opportunities for improvement

manage records and reports within the organisation’s systems and procedures.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

give examples of continuous improvement processes

list typical areas of need for coaching and mentoring to support continuous improvement

explain how change management techniques can support continuous improvement and initiative

identify the organisation’s systems and data that can be used for benchmarking and monitoring performance for continuous improvement.

Assessment Conditions

Assessment must be conducted in a safe environment where evidence gathered demonstrates consistent performance of typical activities experienced in the management and leadership field of work and include access to:

relevant workplace documentation and resources

case studies and, where possible, real situations

interaction with others.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

BSBMGT407 Apply digital solutions to work processes

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with BSB Business Services Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit defines the skills, knowledge and outcomes to integrate digital technologies into common management practice.

It applies to supervisors, team, new and emerging leaders who need to apply digital vision and solutions within structured work environments.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Management and Leadership - Management

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Utilise digital workplace information	1.1 Identify available workplace digital applications for communications, technologies and networks 1.2 Locate and use digital information as an integral part of workplace operations 1.3 Review digital information sources for validity and reliability 1.4 Create, store and retrieve information in digital format 1.5 Continuously review trends and innovations in relevant digital technology suitable for workplace innovation
2. Lead work processes in a digital environment	2.1 Select, integrate and use digital services in workplace operations 2.2 Review and select digital solutions that are fit for purpose 2.3 Integrate new digital innovations into workplace operations 2.4 Identify and adopt digital media protocols and conventions 2.5 Train, encourage and support team members in the application of digital solutions
3. Recognise and apply intellectual property requirements	3.1 Identify legislation, regulations and the organisation's policy relevant to intellectual property 3.2 Review digital process and applications for compliance with intellectual property requirements 3.3 Document, register and report matters related to intellectual property

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 1.3	Sources, analyses and interprets textual information, including technical data, in the context of organisational strategy and compliance requirements
Writing	3.3	Develops texts dealing with complex concepts using specialised and detailed language to convey explicit information, requirements and recommendations in accordance with legal and organisational requirements
Oral communication	2.5	Presents information using language and features appropriate to the audience
Navigate the world of work	2.4, 3.1-3.3	Monitors adherence to organisational policies and legal requirements
Interact with others	2.5	Uses a collaborative instructional approach to encourage, support and develop understanding and skills in others
Get the work done	1.2, 1.4, 1.5, 2.1- 2.4	Uses and investigates new digital technologies and applications to support organisational plans Supports the implementation and review of digital technologies

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
BSBMGT407 Apply digital solutions to work processes	Not applicable	New unit	No equivalent qualification

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for BSBMGT407 Apply digital solutions to work processes

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with BSB Business Services Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

identify digital applications, services and information and evaluate them for use in the workplace including:

the validity and reliability of digital information

monitoring trends and innovations in digital technology

selecting digital services and solutions suitable for the workplace

compliance to relevant legislation, regulations and organisational policies

identify and implement protocols and procedures to integrate digital services and solutions including:

intellectual property requirements

digital media protocols and conventions

storage and retrieval of digital information

training and/or mentoring or other support for team members.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

explain how legislation, regulations and the organisation's policies and procedures relate to working with digital technology and information

explain key elements to consider when evaluating whether digital technology and information options are fit for purpose

outline the intellectual property risks to the organisation in relation to digital technology.

Assessment Conditions

Assessment must be conducted in a safe environment where evidence gathered demonstrates consistent performance of typical activities experienced in the management and leadership field of work and include access to:

relevant legislation and regulations

office equipment and technology

relevant workplace documentation and resources

case studies and, where possible, real situations.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

BSBMGT516 Facilitate continuous improvement

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with BSB Business Services Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to lead and manage continuous improvement systems and processes. Particular emphasis is on the development of systems and the analysis of information to monitor and adjust performance strategies, and to manage opportunities for further improvements.

It applies to individuals who take an active role in managing a continuous improvement process in order to achieve an organisation’s objectives.

At this level, work will normally be carried out using complex and diverse methods and procedures which require the exercise of considerable discretion and judgement, using a range of problem-solving and decision-making strategies.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Management and leadership – Management

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Lead continuous improvement systems and processes	1.1 Develop strategies to ensure that team members are actively encouraged and supported to participate in decision-making processes, assume responsibility and exercise initiative as appropriate 1.2 Establish systems to ensure that the organisation’s continuous improvement processes are communicated to stakeholders 1.3 Ensure that change and improvement processes meet sustainability requirements 1.4 Develop effective mentoring and coaching processes to ensure that individuals and teams are able to implement and support the organisation’s continuous improvement processes 1.5 Ensure that insights and experiences from business activities are captured and accessible through knowledge management systems
2. Monitor and adjust performance strategies	2.1 Develop strategies to ensure that systems and processes are used to monitor operational progress and to identify ways in which planning and operations could be improved 2.2 Adjust and communicate strategies to stakeholders according to organisational procedures
3. Manage opportunities for further improvement	3.1 Establish processes to ensure that team members are informed of outcomes of continuous improvement efforts 3.2 Ensure processes include recording of work team performance to assist in identifying further opportunities for improvement 3.3 Consider areas identified for further improvement when undertaking future planning

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 2.1, 2.2, 3.3	Identifies and extracts relevant information from a range of complex texts Locates, interprets and analyses workplace documentation to gather information relating to continuous improvement
Writing	1.1, 1.2, 1.4, 1.5, 2.1, 2.2, 3.1-3.3	Develops complex texts related to continuous improvement processes according to organisational requirements Ensures the vocabulary, grammatical structures and conventions are appropriate for the context and target audience
Oral Communication	1.1, 1.2, 1.4, 2.2	Presents information to a range of audiences using appropriate structure and language Listens and comprehends information from a variety of spoken exchanges with clients, co-workers and other stakeholders Confirms understanding through questioning and active listening
Navigate the world of work	1.1-1.3, 2.1, 2.2	Develops strategies to enable compliance with legislative requirements and achievement of the organisation’s goals Monitors adherence to organisational policies, procedures and protocols and considers own role in terms of its contribution to broader goals of the work environment
Interact with others	1.1, 1.2, 1.4, 2.2	Identifies and uses appropriate conventions and protocols when communicating with colleagues and external stakeholders Collaborates with others to achieve joint outcomes, playing an active role in facilitating effective group interaction and influencing direction
Get the work done	1.1, 1.2, 1.4, 1.5, 2.1, 3.1, 3.2, 3.3	Takes responsibility for developing, implementing and monitoring systems and processes to achieve organisational outcomes Uses analytical and lateral thinking to review current practices and develop ideas for improvement Reflects on the ways in which digital systems and tools are used, or could be used, to achieve work goals

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
BSBMGT516 Facilitate continuous improvement	BSBMGT516C Facilitate continuous improvement	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for BSBMGT516 Facilitate continuous improvement

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with BSB Business Services Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to establish systems and processes for continuous improvement that:

facilitate effective contributions to and communications about continuous improvement processes and outcomes

address sustainability requirements

incorporate mentoring, coaching and other support to enable people to participate effectively in continuous improvement processes

capture insights, experiences and ideas for improvements and incorporate them into the organisation’s knowledge management systems and future planning.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

explain how systems and procedures can support effective continuous improvement

explain how continuous improvement systems and processes relate to other business systems and requirements including, knowledge management, quality, performance management and sustainability.

Assessment Conditions

Assessment must be conducted in a safe environment where evidence gathered demonstrates consistent performance of typical activities experienced in the management and leadership field of work and include access to:

relevant workplace documentation and resources

case studies and, where possible, real situations

interaction with others.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

BSBMGT517 Manage operational plan

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with BSB Business Services Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to develop and monitor implementation of the operational plan to provide efficient and effective workplace practices within the organisation’s productivity and profitability plans.

Management at a strategic level requires systems and procedures to be developed and implemented to facilitate the organisation’s operational plan.

This unit applies to individuals who manage the work of others and operate within the parameters of a broader strategic and/or business plan.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Management and Leadership – Management

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Develop operational plan	1.1 Research, analyse and document resource requirements and develop an operational plan in consultation with relevant personnel, colleagues and specialist resource managers 1.2 Develop and/or implement consultation processes as an integral part of the operational planning process 1.3 Ensure the operational plan includes key performance indicators to measure organisational performance 1.4 Develop and implement contingency plans for the operational plan 1.5 Ensure the development and presentation of proposals for resource requirements is supported by a variety of information sources and seek specialist advice as required 1.6 Obtain approval for the plan from relevant parties and explain the plan to relevant work teams
2. Plan and manage resource acquisition	2.1 Develop and implement strategies to ensure that employees are recruited and/or inducted within the organisation’s human resources management policies, practices and procedures 2.2 Develop and implement strategies to ensure that physical resources and services are acquired in accordance with the organisation’s policies, practices and procedures 2.3 Recognise and incorporate requirements for intellectual property rights and responsibilities in recruitment and acquisition of resources and services
3. Monitor and review operational performance	3.1 Develop, monitor and review performance systems and processes to assess progress in achieving profit and productivity plans and targets 3.2 Analyse and interpret budget and actual financial information to monitor and review profit and productivity performance 3.3 Identify areas of under-performance, recommend solutions and take prompt action to rectify the situation 3.4 Plan and implement systems to ensure that mentoring and coaching are provided to support individuals and teams to effectively, economically and safely use resources 3.5 Negotiate recommendations for variations to operational plans and gain approval from designated persons/groups 3.6 Develop and implement systems to ensure that procedures and records associated with documenting performance are managed in accordance with organisational requirements

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 1.5, 2.1, 2.2, 3.1, 3.2, 3.3, 3.4, 3.6	Identifies and extracts relevant information from a range of complex texts Gathers, interprets and analyses workplace documentation to determine requirements for the operational plan
Writing	1.1-1.5, 2.1, 2.2, 3.1-3.6	Develops and documents a range of detailed texts relating to the management of an operational plan according to organisational requirements Ensures the vocabulary, grammatical structures and conventions are appropriate for the context and target audience
Oral Communication	1.1, 1.2, 1.5, 1.6, 3.4, 3.5	Presents information to a range of audiences using appropriate register, vocabulary and paralinguistic features Listens and comprehends information from a variety of spoken exchanges with clients, co-workers and other stakeholders Confirms understanding through questioning and active listening
Numeracy	1.1, 1.3, 1.4, 3.1-3.4	Selects and uses mathematical problem-solving strategies to organise resource requirements, performance benchmarks and financial viability of the operational plan
Navigate the world of work	2.1, 2.2, 3.4, 3.6	Monitors adherence to organisational policies, procedures and considers own role in terms of its contribution to broader goals of the work environment Appreciates the implications of legal responsibilities with specific reference to health and safety
Interact with others	1.1, 1.2, 1.5, 1.6, 3.5	Identifies and uses appropriate conventions and protocols when communicating with colleagues and external stakeholders Collaborates with others to achieve joint outcomes, playing an active role in facilitating effective group interaction, influencing direction and taking a leadership role on occasion
Get the work done	1.1-1.5, 2.1, 2.2, 3.1, 3.3, 3.4, 3.6	Takes responsibility for developing and implementing systems and processes to achieve organisational objectives, seeking advice, feedback and support as required to assist in the development and planning phase Sequences and schedules complex activities, monitors implementation, and manages relevant communication Uses systematic analytical processes to aid decision making, identify potential problems and generate contingency plans or solutions

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
BSBMGT517 Manage operational plan	BSBMGT515A Manage operational plan	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages. Edits to clarify intent of Performance Criteria. Additional performance criterion and evidence for intellectual property.	No equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for BSBMGT517 Manage operational plan

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with BSB Business Services Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

develop and implement an operational plan using a variety of information sources and consultation (including using specialist advice if required) which includes:

resource requirements

key performance indicators

monitoring processes

contingency plans

communicate effectively with relevant stakeholders to explain the plan and supporting information, seek approvals, negotiate variations and engage work teams

develop and implement strategies to achieve the operational plan within the organisation’s policies, practices and procedures including:

recruiting, inducting and developing personnel

acquiring physical resources and services

protecting intellectual property

making variations to the plan

monitoring and documenting performance.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

describe models and methods for operational plans

explain the role of an operational plan in achieving the organisation’s objectives

explain budgeting processes

list alternative approaches to developing key performance indicators to meet business objectives

outline the legislative and regulatory context relevant to the operational plan of the organisation

outline the organisation’s policies, practices and procedures that directly relate to the operational plan.

Assessment Conditions

Assessment must be conducted in a safe environment where evidence gathered demonstrates consistent performance of typical activities experienced in the management and leadership field of work and include access to:

relevant legislation and regulations

workplace documentation and resources

case studies and, where possible, real situations

interaction with others.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

BSBMGT519 Incorporate digital solutions into plans and practices

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with BSB Business Services Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit defines the skills, knowledge and outcomes required to implement digital solutions into organisational processes and practices. It covers identifying and evaluating opportunities, accessing technological expertise, and managing the changes associated with new technology.

It applies to leaders and managers where the application of digital solutions can improve workplace innovation and productivity.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Management and Leadership - Management

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Identify trends in digital applications	1.1 Review digital applications and developments and related regulatory requirements relevant to the work context and industry 1.2 Consult with technology experts to identify suitable applications 1.3 Undertake cost-benefit analysis to qualify suitability of new or improved digital applications 1.4 Document risks, opportunities and barriers to implementation
2. Evaluate opportunities for new digital applications	2.1 Select and review processes, plans and practices to identify potential to integrate new digital solutions 2.2 Consult with others in the enterprise to identify flow on impacts 2.3 Work with technology specialists and others to identify proven intervention methods 2.4 Trial and evaluate proposed changes in line with enterprise risk policy and select options to progress
3. Implement digital solutions	3.1 Prepare new or revised procedure and process documentation 3.2 Prepare change plan and train personnel 3.3 Regularly monitor and adjust new applications as needed 3.4 Maintain data on new or revised practices
4. Evaluate solutions	4.1 Analyse implementation data to identify trends 4.2 Compare findings against expected benefits and productivity improvements 4.3 Document and recommend additional digital applications relevant to the workplace and industry

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 2.1, 4.1, 4.2	Sources, analyses and interprets textual information, including technical data, in the context of organisational strategy and compliance requirements to make comparisons and identify trends
Writing	1.4, 3.1, 3.2, 4.3	Develops texts dealing with complex concepts using specialised and detailed language to convey explicit information, requirements and recommendations in accordance with organisational requirements
Oral Communication	1.2, 2.2, 2.3, 3.2	Presents information and seeks advice using language and features appropriate to audience
Numeracy	1.3	Selects and uses familiar mathematical techniques to calculate costs and to conduct cost benefit analyses
Navigate the world of work	1.1, 2.4, 3.1, 3.3	Understands and adheres to legislative requirements and contributes to the development of organisational policy
Interact with others	1.2, 2.2, 2.3, 3.2	Cooperates and consults with others to identify options to support strategy
Get the work done	1.1, 1.3, 2.1, 2.4, 3.1, 3.2, 3.3, 3.4, 4.1, 4.2, 4.3	Plans and implements tasks required to implement digital solutions Collects and analyses data to decide on effectiveness of practices and to determine risk Actively identifies digital systems, devices and applications with potential to meet current and/or future needs

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
BSBMGT519 Incorporate digital solutions into plans and practices	Not applicable	New unit	No equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for BSBMGT519 Incorporate digital solutions into plans and practices

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with BSB Business Services Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

evaluate digital applications to determine costs, benefits, risks and suitability for the work context

consult with technology subject matter experts on digital applications and implementation

consult with stakeholders to plan for and implement changes

manage implementation of the changes including:

trialling and evaluation of options

preparing a change plan

new or revised procedures and documentation

providing training

monitoring and making adjustments as needed

managing the flow on impacts of the changes

monitor and evaluate new digital work practices against expected benefits and productivity improvements.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

describe current trends and practices in digital applications relevant to the work context and industry

outline the legislative and regulatory context of the organisation as it relates to digital solutions

explain the convergence between information technology and telecommunications applications in the relevant industry

explain how other systems, policies and procedures in an organisation are likely to be affected by new digital applications

outline typical challenges to implementing technology changes in an organisation and possible strategies to address them

describe methods for evaluating success of digital applications.

Assessment Conditions

Assessment must be conducted in a safe environment where evidence gathered demonstrates consistent performance of typical activities experienced in the management and leadership field of work and include access to:

relevant legislation and regulations

workplace documentation and resources

case studies and, where possible, real situations

interaction with others.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

BSBMGT608 Manage innovation and continuous improvement

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with BSB Business Services Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to sustain and develop an environment in which continuous improvement, innovation and learning are promoted and rewarded.

It applies to people with managerial responsibilities who aim to build a better and more effective work environment. Continuous improvement and innovation have links with the model of the learning organisation and people working at this level play an important role in building the culture, values and attitudes of the organisation.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Management and Leadership – Management

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Review programs, systems and processes	1.1 Establish strategies to monitor and evaluate performance and sustainability of key systems and processes 1.2 Undertake detailed analyses of supply chains, and operational, product and service delivery systems 1.3 Identify performance measures, and assessment tools and techniques, and evaluate their effectiveness 1.4 Analyse performance reports and variance from plans for key result areas of the organisation 1.5 Identify and analyse changing trends and opportunities relevant to the organisation 1.6 Seek advice from specialists, where appropriate, to identify technology and electronic commerce opportunities
2. Develop options for continuous improvement	2.1 Brief groups on performance improvement strategies and innovation as an essential element of competition 2.2 Foster creative climate and organisational learning by promoting interaction within and between work groups 2.3 Encourage, test and recognise new ideas and entrepreneurial behaviour where successful 2.4 Accept failure of an idea during trialling and recognise, celebrate and embed success into systems 2.5 Undertake risk management and cost-benefit analysis for each option or idea approved for trial 2.6 Approve innovations through agreed organisational processes
3. Implement innovative processes	3.1 Promote continuous improvement and sustainability as essential to doing business 3.2 Address the impact of change and consequences for people and implement transition plans 3.3 Ensure objectives, timeframes, measures and communication plans are in place to manage implementation 3.4 Implement contingency plans in the event of non-performance 3.5 Follow up failure by prompt investigation and analysis of causes and manage emerging challenges and opportunities effectively 3.6 Ensure that learnings from activities are captured and managed to inform future work 3.7 Regularly evaluate continuous improvement systems and processes 3.8 Communicate costs and benefits of innovations and improvements to relevant groups and individuals

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Learning	3.6	Plans and implements strategies to review and improve own performance
Reading	1.1-1.5, 2.5, 2.6, 3.2-3.5, 3.7	Analyses, evaluates and integrates facts and ideas to construct meaning from a range of text types
Writing	1.1-1.5, 2.1, 2.5, 3.2, 3.3, 3.5, 3.6, 3.7, 3.8	Integrates information and ideas from a range of sources, utilising appropriate support materials Communicates complex relationships between ideas and information, matching style of writing to purpose and audience
Oral Communication	1.6, 2.1-2.4, 3.1, 3.5, 3.8	Participates in a variety of spoken exchanges with co-workers and stakeholders when developing options and implementing the continuous improvement plan
Numeracy	1.1-1.5, 2.5, 3.3	Selects and interprets mathematical information to analyse performance Performs calculations required to establish timeframes, cost-benefits and measures for continuous improvement and innovation processes
Navigate the world of work	2.6	Adheres to organisational policies and procedures and considers own role in terms of its contribution to broader goals of the work environment
Interact with others	1.6, 2.1-2.4, 3.1, 3.5, 3.8	Recognises the importance of taking audience, purpose and contextual factors into account when making decisions about what to communicate, with whom, why and how Recognises the importance of building rapport to establish positive and effective working relationships Collaborates with others to achieve joint outcomes, playing an active role in encouraging innovation and facilitating effective group interaction
Get the work done	1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 1.5, 1.6, 2.3, 2.4, 2.5, 3.1, 3.2, 3.3, 3.4, 3.5, 3.7	Plans, organises, implements or reviews organisational strategies, systems and processes Applies problem-solving processes to identify risks, evaluate options and determine solutions Uses lateral and analytical thinking to evaluate options against needs, resources and constraints before making decisions Facilitates a climate in which creativity and innovation are accepted as an integral part of achieving outcomes Recognises that the current way is only one way of doing something and explores possibilities that challenge current approaches Actively identifies systems, devices and applications with potential to meet current and or future needs, with the help of specialists

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
BSBMGT608 Manage innovation and continuous improvement	BSBMGT608C Manage innovation and continuous improvement	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for BSBMGT608 Manage innovation and continuous improvement

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with BSB Business Services Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

analyse and evaluate systems and performance in key areas of the organisation and identify opportunities for improvement, seeking advice from experts as appropriate

promote the value of creativity, innovation and sustainability and recognise successes

support the testing and trialling of new ideas and undertake risk management and cost-benefit analysis for options

plan for and implement improvements using organisation’s processes for approvals, project management and change management

facilitate effective contributions to and communications about continuous improvement and innovation

capture insights, experiences and ideas for improvements and incorporate them into the organisation’s knowledge management systems and future planning.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

outline cost-benefit analysis methods

describe creativity and innovation theories and concepts

list organisational learning principles

identify quality management and continuous improvement theories

describe relevant risk management concepts

outline relevant sustainability practices.

Assessment Conditions

Assessment must be conducted in a safe environment where evidence gathered demonstrates consistent performance of typical activities experienced in the management and leadership field of work and include access to:

relevant workplace documentation and resources

case studies and, where possible, real situations

interaction with others.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

BSBMKG401 Profile the market

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with BSB Business Services Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to profile a target market or market segments in accordance with a marketing plan and to develop market positioning strategies.

It applies to individuals working in a variety of marketing communications occupational roles who have responsibility for a range of tasks involving analysis and planning.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Business Development – Marketing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Segment market	1.1 Identify criteria for use in segmenting market in accordance with marketing plan 1.2 Identify and access sources of information for segmenting and profiling markets in accordance with marketing plan 1.3 Segment market in accordance with identified criteria 1.4 Review market segments for their usefulness in terms of factors such as their size, potential, distinctive needs, easy identification of members or distinctive media use patterns 1.5 Select market segments to meet marketing objectives, and choose and apply new segmentation criteria if required
2. Identify target market	2.1 Evaluate approaches to determining and describing total market for a product or service 2.2 Define target market in terms of consumers to be included as prospective users of a product or service, and selected market segments 2.3 Use segment descriptors to describe target market 2.4 Identify available strategic marketing options and select targeting strategies that best meet requirements of the marketing plan
3. Profile target audience	3.1 Describe total market and selected market segments using a consumer profile 3.2 Identify consumer characteristics in standard statistical terms and/or descriptive terms used in media selection in consumer profile 3.3 Use demographic and/or psychographic descriptions in consumer profile in accordance with requirements of the marketing plan 3.4 Describe consumer attitudes to products or services being offered 3.5 Ensure profile meets organisational requirements of language, format, content and level of detail
4. Develop positioning strategy	4.1 Identify available positioning strategies and choose a strategy to meet marketing requirements and consumer profile 4.2 Write a positioning implementation plan containing several options, in accordance with organisational requirements 4.3 Submit plan to supervisor within specified timelines and make appropriate adjustments based on feedback

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1-1.4, 2.1, 2.2, 2.4, 3.2, 3.3, 4.1	Gathers, interprets and analyses a variety of textual information from a range of sources to identify relevant and key information
Writing	1.3, 2.2, 2.3, 3.1-3.5, 4.2, 4.3	Prepares strategic business documentation incorporating appropriate vocabulary, grammatical structure and conventions appropriate to text and audience
Numeracy	1.1-1.5, 2.1, 2.2, 2.4, 3.2, 3.3	Uses mathematical skills to interpret and process data and statistical information
Navigate the world of work	1.1, 1.2, 1.5, 2.4, 3.3, 3.5, 4.1, 4.2	Adheres to implicit and explicit organisational goals, policies and procedures
Interact with others	4.3	Selects appropriate form, channel and mode of communication for a specific purpose relevant to own role
Get the work done	1.2-1.5, 2.1, 2.4, 4.1-4.3	Develops and implements plans to manage relatively complex, non-routine tasks with an awareness of how they contribute to organisational goals Makes decisions by systematically analysing information, identifying and evaluating options against set criteria, and choosing most appropriate option

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
BSBMKG401 Profile the market	BSBMKG401B Profile the market	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for BSBMKG401 Profile the market

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with BSB Business Services Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

develop a market positioning strategy that documents market segmentation, consumer profiling, targeting and strategies relevant to a product or service being offered to the marketplace.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

identify relevant information relating to the Australian Marketing Institute Code of Professional Conduct

outline requirements of legislation affecting marketing roles

explain data collection and analysis techniques

outline relevant industry knowledge including:

components of marketing mix

elements of marketing planning

explain marketing communications concepts and processes

identify organisational structures, roles, responsibilities, business and marketing plans

demonstrate knowledge of relevant product and service standards and best practice models

outline relevant statistical terms used by the Australian Bureau of Statistics.

Assessment Conditions

Assessment must be conducted in a safe environment where evidence gathered demonstrates consistent performance of typical activities experienced in the business development – marketing field of work and include access to:

relevant legislation, regulations, standards and codes

relevant workplace documentation and resources

case studies and, where possible, real situations.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

BSBMKG412 Conduct e-marketing communications

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with BSB Business Services Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to prepare electronic advertisements for use in internet, email or facsimile marketing communications, and to evaluate their effectiveness in achieving marketing objectives.

It applies to individuals working in promotional roles who are required to use electronic communications and existing business websites to effectively convey marketing communications and achieve marketing objectives in accordance with marketing or e-marketing plans.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Business Development – Marketing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Prepare electronic advertisements	1.1 Choose media for electronic advertisements in accordance with the organisation’s marketing (or e-marketing) strategy 1.2 Select multiple marketing channels to optimise marketing effort 1.3 Ensure copy and design elements communicate desired image, features and benefits of products or services, and suit characteristics of chosen media 1.4 Position and size each element of advertisement to achieve balance and focus 1.5 Ensure typeface selections suit product, chosen media and central message of advertisement, and that layout achieves balance in its elements including white space and margins 1.6 Ensure any added sound, animation or graphics enhance content of advertisements and do not distract from message 1.7 Ensure advertisements meet requirements of marketing strategy as well as legal and ethical requirements
2. Use business website as e-marketing tool	2.1 Identify website marketing objectives in organisation’s marketing (or e-marketing) strategy and plan 2.2 Ensure website design meets objectives and conveys required image of the business and features and benefits of its products or services 2.3 Ensure website content, site map, navigation buttons, frames and multiple pages are in accordance with marketing strategy and plan 2.4 Ensure website incorporates data recording, contacts and feedback mechanisms to allow evaluation of website as a marketing tool
3. Use e-marketing	3.1 Identify required media vehicles and website hotlinks for electronic advertisements, and negotiate contracts for website development where necessary to meet requirements of the marketing strategy, budget and legal and ethical requirements 3.2 Promote marketing channels to identified target market segments 3.3 Place or disseminate electronic advertisements in accordance with marketing strategy, media contracts, and legal and ethical requirements
4. Monitor and evaluate results of e-marketing	4.1 Monitor transmission of electronic advertisements or other e-marketing products and rectify any errors or omissions 4.2 Develop measures of effectiveness for e-marketing advertisements and monitor effectiveness 4.3 Evaluate effectiveness of e-marketing advertisements against measures of effectiveness and record outcomes in accordance with organisational requirements 4.4 Use outcomes of evaluation activities and other feedback from marketing channels to plan for improvements to e-marketing strategies and products

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 1.3, 1.7, 2.1-2.4, 3.1-3.3, 4.1-4.4	Interprets textual information obtained from a range of sources and determines how content may be applied to individuals and to organisational requirements
Writing	1.3, 2.2-2.4, 3.2, 3.3, 4.1-4.4	Integrates information from a number of sources to develop material that supports the purposes and format of the documentation using suitable grammatical structure and clear, logical language
Oral Communication	3.1, 3.2	Articulates ideas and requirements clearly and creatively based on techniques appropriate to audience and environment Elicits the view and opinions of others by listening and questioning
Numeracy	1.4, 1.5, 3.1, 4.2-4.4	Uses basic mathematical skills to ensure advertisement layout designs are correct Interprets and analyses statistical information to help design and determine measures of effectiveness
Navigate the world of work	1.1, 1.7, 3.1, 3.3, 4.3	Appreciates the implications of ethical, legal and regulatory responsibilities related to own work Adheres to organisational policies and procedures and considers own role in terms of its contribution to broader goals of the work environment
Interact with others	3.2, 3.3	Selects the appropriate form, channel and mode of communication for a specific purpose relevant to own role
Get the work done	1.1-1.7, 2.1-2.4, 3.1, 4.2	Develops plans to manage tasks with an awareness of how they may contribute to longer term operational and strategic goals Takes responsibility for the outcomes of routine decisions related directly to own role Understands the purposes, specific functions and key features of common digital systems and tools and operates them effectively to complete routine tasks Understands and explicitly applies some basic principles of analytical and lateral thinking Recognises and takes responsibility for addressing predictable and some less predictable problems in familiar work contexts

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
BSBMKG412 Conduct e-marketing communications	BSBMKG412A Conduct e-marketing communications	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for BSBMKG412 Conduct e-marketing communications

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with BSB Business Services Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

develop electronic advertisement for a product or service using electronic media to convey marketing communications consistent with an organisational marketing strategy and objectives

monitor and evaluate results of electronic advertisements and marketing.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

identify key provisions of relevant legislation, codes of practice and national standards that affect marketing operations

describe industry products and services knowledge

explain intellectual property requirements

identify organisational structure, roles and responsibilities

outline principles of marketing and advertising

describe software applications used in conducting electronic advertising and marketing.

Assessment Conditions

Assessment must be conducted in a safe environment where evidence gathered demonstrates consistent performance of typical activities experienced in the business development – marketing field of work and include access to:

relevant legislation, regulations, standards and codes

relevant workplace documentation and resources

case studies and, where possible, real situations.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

BSBMKG413 Promote products and services

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with BSB Business Services Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to coordinate and review the promotion of an organisation’s products and services.

It applies to individuals with a broad knowledge of the promotion of products and services specific to an organisation. They may have responsibility to provide guidance or to delegate aspects of these tasks to others.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Business Development – Marketing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Plan promotional activities	1.1 Identify and assess promotional activities to ensure compatibility with organisational requirements 1.2 Plan and schedule promotional activities according to the marketing needs of the organisation 1.3 Determine overall promotional objectives in consultation with designated individuals and groups 1.4 Ensure that timelines and costs for promotion of activities are realistic and consistent with budget resources 1.5 Develop action plans to provide details of products and services being promoted
2. Coordinate promotional activities	2.1 Ensure personnel and resources to support promotional activities are identified and prepared to facilitate the achievement of promotional goals 2.2 Identify and agree roles and responsibilities for delivery of promotional services and allocate to relevant personnel 2.3 Establish and conduct relationships with targeted groups in a manner which enhances the positive image of the organisation 2.4 Use networks to assist in the implementation of promotional activities
3. Review and report on promotional activities	3.1 Analyse audience feedback and data to determine the impact of the promotional activity on the delivery of products and services 3.2 Assess effectiveness of planning processes to identify possible improvements in future activities 3.3 Collect feedback and provide to personnel and agencies involved in promotional activity 3.4 Analyse costs and time lines to evaluate the benefits accruing from the promotional activities 3.5 Prepare conclusions and recommendations from verifiable evidence and provide constructive advice on future directions of promotional activities

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 3.1	Interprets, analyses and collates textual information relevant to promotional activities from a range of sources
Writing	1.2, 1.5, 2.3, 3.1, 3.3, 3.5	Uses clear and specific language to develop formal and informal documents for different audiences in accordance with organisational requirements
Oral Communication	1.3, 2.3, 3.3, 3.5	Actively participates in verbal exchanges of ideas and elicits the views and opinions of others by listening and questioning Uses clear and specific language to clarify, explain and present information relating to the promotional activity
Numeracy	1.4, 1.5, 3.1, 3.3, 3.4, 3.5	Classifies, analyses and compares numeric information, including costs and timelines, relevant to the promotional activity
Navigate the world of work	1.1	Adheres to legislative requirements and organisational policies and procedures
Interact with others	1.3, 2.3, 2.4, 3.3, 3.5	Selects and uses appropriate conventions and protocols with a range of stakeholders to project a professional image while seeking or sharing information Recognises the importance of building rapport to establish and maintain positive working relationships
Get the work done	1.2, 1.2, 1.4, 1.5, 2.1, 2.2, 2.3, 3.1, 3.2, 3.3, 3.4, 3.5	Sequences and schedules complex activities, monitors implementation and manages relevant communication Uses systematic, analytical processes in complex, non-routine situations, gathering relevant information and identifying and evaluating options against agreed requirements Evaluates effectiveness of decisions in terms of how well they meet stated goals Uses a range of digital tools to access data, and to extract, organise, integrate and share relevant information

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
BSBMKG413 Promote products and services	BSBMKG413A Promote products and services	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for BSBMKG413 Promote products and services

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with BSB Business Services Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

identify the context for the promotional activities including:

relevant legislation/regulations

organisation’s goals, objectives, systems, policies and procedures

budget and timelines

marketing needs and, if defined, marketing plans

objectives of the promotional activities

consult with relevant stakeholders to plan promotional activities to meet objectives, budget and timelines

coordinate promotional activities including:

allocation of personnel, roles and responsibilities

sourcing other resources and promotional products as appropriate

use of networks and relationships

analyse feedback and data to evaluate the effectiveness of planning processes and promotional activities and make recommendations on future directions of promotional activities.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

outline the legislative and regulatory context of the organisation as relevant to the marketing plan

outline the planning processes for organising promotional activities

explain the organisation’s marketing objectives and how they support the overall business objectives

explain how common promotional activities could be used to support the marketing objectives with reference to

advertising

client functions

employee functions

media announcements

product launches

web pages.

Assessment Conditions

Assessment must be conducted in a safe environment where evidence gathered demonstrates consistent performance of typical activities experienced in the business development – marketing field of work and include access to:

relevant legislation, regulations, standards and codes

relevant workplace documentation and resources

case studies and, where possible, real situations

interaction with others.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

BSBMKG501 Identify and evaluate marketing opportunities

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with BSB Business Services Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to identify, evaluate and take advantage of marketing opportunities by analysing market data, distinguishing characteristics of possible markets and assessing viability of changes to operations.

It applies to individuals working in a supervisory or management marketing or advertising role within a marketing or advertising team or media organisation.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Business Development – Marketing

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Identify marketing opportunities	1.1 Analyse information on market and business needs to identify marketing opportunities 1.2 Research potential new markets and assess opportunities to enter, shape or influence each market, and the likely contribution to the business 1.3 Explore entrepreneurial, innovative approaches and creative ideas for their potential business application, and develop into potential marketing opportunities
2. Investigate marketing opportunities	2.1 Identify and analyse opportunities in terms of their likely fit with organisational goals and capabilities 2.2 Evaluate each opportunity to determine its impact on current business and customer base 2.3 Use an assessment of external factors, costs, benefits, risks and opportunities to determine the financial viability of each marketing opportunity 2.4 Determine probable return on investment and potential competitors 2.5 Describe and rank marketing opportunities on their viability, and likely contribution to the business
3. Evaluate required changes to current operations	3.1 Identify and document changes needed to current operations to take advantage of viable marketing opportunities 3.2 Ensure organisational changes to service an increased or different customer base including provision for continued quality of service to existing customers 3.3 Estimate resource requirements for changed operations 3.4 Determine and communicate viability of making changes to current operations to key stakeholders 3.5 Document newly identified marketing opportunities and required changes

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1-1.3, 2.1-2.4, 3.1	Evaluates and comprehends textual information from a range of sources and draws own conclusions
Writing	1.1-1.3, 2.5, 3.1, 3.4, 3.5	Integrates information from a number of sources to develop material that supports purposes of documentation using suitable grammatical structure and clear, logical language
Oral Communication	2.5, 3.4	Presents opinions, ideas and organisational requirements clearly and creatively using language and presentation techniques appropriate to audience and environment Elicits views and opinions of others by listening and questioning
Numeracy	2.3, 2.4, 3.3	Evaluates financial and marketing data using whole numbers, decimals and percentages to make accurate calculations
Navigate the world of work	2.1	Recognises and follows explicit and implicit organisational protocols and meets expectations associated with own role
Interact with others	2.5, 3.4	Selects appropriate form, channel and mode of communication for a specific purpose relevant to own role
Get the work done	1.1-1.3, 2.1-2.4, 3.1, 3.2, 3.3, 3.4	Develops plans to manage relatively complex tasks with an awareness of how they may contribute to longer-term operational and strategic goals Makes decisions by systematically analysing information, identifying and evaluating options against set criteria, and choosing most appropriate option Evaluates outcomes of decisions to identify opportunities for improvement Develops new and innovative ideas through exploration, analysis and critical thinking

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
BSBMKG501 Identify and evaluate marketing opportunities	BSBMKG501B Identify and evaluate marketing opportunities	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for BSBMKG501 Identify and evaluate marketing opportunities

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with BSB Business Services Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

identify and evaluate marketing opportunities to determine whether they can meet organisational objectives

document how current business operations need to be modified, and list resources required, to take advantage of newly identified and evaluated opportunities.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

outline key provisions of relevant legislation, codes of practice and national standards affecting marketing operations

describe organisational marketing plan, structure, products and services

explain principles of marketing and marketing mix

describe statistical methods and techniques to evaluate marketing opportunities, including forecasting techniques.

Assessment Conditions

Assessment must be conducted in a safe environment where evidence gathered demonstrates consistent performance of typical activities experienced in the business development – marketing field of work and include access to:

relevant legislation, regulations, standards and codes

relevant workplace documentation and resources

organisational strategic and marketing plans

case studies and, where possible, real situations.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

BSBPMG409 Apply project scope management techniques

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with BSB Business Services Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to contribute to the control of a project's scope by assisting with identifying its objectives, deliverables, constraints, assumptions and outcomes; and by applying controls once the project has commenced.

It applies to individuals who are project practitioners working in a project support role.

No licensing, legislative, regulatory or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Management and Leadership – Project Management

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Contribute to defining project scope	1.1 Review project initiation documentation and assist in identifying project objectives and requirements 1.2 Contribute to identifying project deliverables 1.3 Contribute to identifying measurable outcomes to enable evaluation of project performance 1.4 Contribute to developing and documenting the scope management plan 1.5 Assist in obtaining agreement to scope from relevant project authority
2. Apply project scope controls	2.1 Undertake work according to agreed project scope management plan and by using established change control procedures and performance measurement procedures 2.2 Communicate instances of non-compliance with overall scope to the project manager and other team members
3. Contribute to review of scope controls	3.1 Measure progress to determine potential, perceived and actual scope changes 3.2 Appropriately report scope changes 3.3 Assist in review of project outcomes to determine effectiveness of initial and subsequent scope management approaches

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1	Interprets and analyses complex texts
Writing	1.4, 1.5, 3.2	Develops and amends plans and associated documentation using appropriate organisational formats and vocabulary
Oral Communication	1.2-1.5, 2.2	Interacts effectively in verbal exchanges, using clear language to convey information, and active listening and questioning to clarify understanding
Numeracy	1.3, 3.1	Selects and applies a range of mathematical and problem-solving strategies to develop timelines and monitor progress
Interact with others	1.2-1.5, 2.2	Uses appropriate communication practices in a range of work contexts Collaborates and cooperates with others to achieve shared goals
Get the work done	2.1, 3.1, 3.2, 3.3	Plans and organises tasks required to monitor and report on project implementation Analyses outcomes to identify future improvements

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
BSBPMG409 Apply project scope management techniques	BSBPMG409A Apply project scope-management	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for BSBPMG409 Apply project scope management techniques

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with BSB Business Services Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

contribute to delineating and controlling project scope

record project scope management plan

interpret and follow project initiation documentation for purposes of documenting project scope.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

list components of a project scope management plan

identify and describe factors likely to impact project scope

outline formal change-control processes

identify and discuss methods for measuring work outcomes and progress against plans

identify and discuss methods for segmenting and documenting a work breakdown structure

explain procedures for reporting a change in scope

describe types of project initiation documentation.

Assessment Conditions

Assessment must be conducted in a safe environment where evidence gathered demonstrates consistent performance of typical activities experienced in the management and leadership – project management field of work and include access to:

project documentation which includes information about project scope

case studies and, where possible, real situations.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

BSBPRO401 Develop product knowledge

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with BSB Business Services Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to develop product knowledge in preparation for the sales process.

It applies to individuals who need to solve a defined range of unpredictable problems, analyse and evaluate information from a variety of sources and who may provide leadership and guidance to others with some limited responsibility for the output of others.

No licensing, legislative, regulatory or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Industry Capability – Product Skills and Advice

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Acquire knowledge of products in a specified area	1.1 Identify information sources about products in a specified area and evaluate them for reliability and validity 1.2 Identify product purpose/s and use/s 1.3 Identify key features of the product/s 1.4 Identify product strengths and weaknesses 1.5 Articulate guarantees and warranties and identify service support details
2. Convert product knowledge into benefits	2.1 Identify features of the product which have potential buyer appeal 2.2 Present features of the product which have buyer appeal as benefits to the buyer 2.3 Present product benefits within the context of organisational requirements and legislation
3. Evaluate competitors’ products	3.1 Use a range of information sources to identify competitors’ products 3.2 Compare features, benefits, strengths and weaknesses of competitors’ products with own products 3.3 Establish relative standing of the organisation’s product with the competitors’ product/s and communicate differences to the buyer

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 2.1, 3.1, 3.2, 3.3	Identifies, interprets, understands and compares information to monitor and evaluate quality of product and services and check against client requirements
Writing	1.1, 1.5, 2.2, 2.3, 3.2	Records results of product evaluations to show clear comparisons of features, benefits and weaknesses Uses clear and specific language to develop documents for different audiences in accordance with organisational requirements
Oral Communication	2.2, 2.3, 1.5, 3.3	Provides recommendations using language appropriate to the purpose and audience
Numeracy	1.3, 1.4, 3.2, 3.3	Analyses numerical information to measure, compare and evaluate features
Navigate the world of work	2.3	Understands and follows organisational policies and procedures and legislative requirement relevant to own role
Get the work done	1.1, 3.1, 3.3	Plans and implements tasks required to achieve required outcomes Analyses information to decide on appropriate recommendations

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
BSBPRO401 Develop product knowledge	BSBPRO401A Develop product knowledge	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for BSBPRO401 Develop product knowledge

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with BSB Business Services Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

use valid and reliable sources to gather information about the organisation’s products and competitors’ products

determine buyer needs and present key features and benefits of product to match needs, in accordance with organisational and legislative obligations

compare competitors’ products with own organisation’s products and communicate differences to buyer.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

list sources of information for own organisation’s products and competitors’ products

explain why it is important to discuss features, benefits, strengths and weaknesses when describing products

summarise industry competitors, including products offered and potential buyer markets

outline organisational policies and procedures, relevant to the sales process

outline the key provisions of relevant legislation, regulations, standards and codes of practice that are relevant to the sales process.

Assessment Conditions

Assessment must be conducted in a safe environment where evidence gathered demonstrates consistent performance of typical activities experienced in the industry capability – product skills and advice field of work and include access to:

information sources regarding an organisation’s and competitors’ products, service or ideas

office equipment and resources

relevant organisational policies and procedures

case studies and, where possible, real situations

interaction with others.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

BSBREL401 Establish networks

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with BSB Business Services Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to develop and maintain effective work relationships and networks through relationship building and negotiation skills required by workers within an organisation as well as freelance or contract workers.

It applies to individuals with a broad knowledge of networking and negotiation who contribute well developed skills in creating solutions to unpredictable problems through analysis and evaluation of information from a variety of sources. They may have responsibility to provide guidance or to delegate aspects of tasks to others.

No licensing, legislative, regulatory or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Stakeholder Relations – Relationship Management

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Develop and maintain business networks	1.1 Use appropriate network strategies to establish and maintain relationships that promote the development of business opportunities 1.2 Identify and pursue network opportunities to maximise a range of contacts 1.3 Communicate information regarding new networks to inform individuals, colleagues and clients of potential benefits 1.4 Participate in professional networks and associations to obtain and maintain personal knowledge and skills
2. Establish and maintain business relationships	2.1 Develop and maintain relationships to promote benefits consistent with organisational/client requirements 2.2 Gain and maintain trust and confidence of contacts through demonstration of high standards of business practices 2.3 Use a high level of negotiation skills to encourage positive outcomes 2.4 Identify difficult situations and negotiate solutions using collaborative problem-solving techniques 2.5 Seek specialist advice in the development of contacts where appropriate
3. Promote the relationship	3.1 Develop strategies to represent and promote the interests and requirements of the relationship 3.2 Use appropriate presentation skills to communicate the goals and objectives of the relationship 3.3 Effectively communicate issues, policies and practices of the relationship to a range of audiences, in writing and verbally 3.4 Obtain feedback to identify and develop ways to improve promotional activities within available opportunities

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Learning	1.4, 3.4	Seeks opportunities to develop and extend expertise and identify areas for professional improvement
Reading	2.1	Sources and analyses information to establish networks that consistently promote business opportunities
Writing	1.1-1.3, 2.1, 2.2, 2.5 3.1-3.4	Uses appropriate vocabulary, layout and grammatical structure to convey ideas and information
Oral Communication	1.1-1.4, 2.1-2.5, 3.2, 3.3, 3.4	Utilises persuasive language and appropriate non-verbal features to achieve mutually acceptable outcomes Uses active listening and questioning techniques to confirm understanding
Navigate the world of work	2.1	Understands and adheres to organisational policies and procedures
Interact with others	1.1-1.4, 2.1-2.5, 3.1, 3.2	Actively identifies the requirements of important communication exchanges, selecting appropriate channels, format, tone and content to suit purpose and audience Looks for ways of establishing connections and building genuine understanding with a diverse range of people Begins to cultivate relationships with people with the knowledge, skills and influence to get things done or provide support
Get the work done	1.1, 1.2, 2.1, 2.4	Takes responsibility for planning, sequencing and implementing tasks required to build and maintain networks Uses analytical processes to identify problems, gather relevant information, evaluate options and determine solutions

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
BSBREL401 Establish networks	BSBREL401A Establish networks	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for BSBREL401 Establish networks

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with BSB Business Services Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

identify and use networking opportunities

maintain records of relevant contacts

use written and verbal communication skills to establish, cultivate and promote professional business relationships

use feedback to improve promotional activities.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

list and describe strategies for establishing and maintaining business relationships

identify relevant networks, organisations, agencies, associations or individuals

describe the principles and techniques needed to negotiate positive outcomes

explain client or organisational policies, plans and procedures relevant to business relationships

outline methods for obtaining feedback on promotional activities.

Assessment Conditions

Assessment must be conducted in a safe environment where evidence gathered demonstrates consistent performance of typical activities experienced in the stakeholder relations – relationship management field of work and include access to:

relevant workplace documentation and resources

case studies and, where possible, real situations

interaction with others.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

BSBREL402 Build client relationships and business networks

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with BSB Business Services Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to establish, maintain and improve client relationships and to actively participate in networks to support attainment of key business outcomes.

It applies to individuals such as marketing and sales professionals who depend on excellent interpersonal relationships and communication skills to achieve outcomes but may also apply to other individuals working in any industry.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Stakeholder Relations – Relationship Management

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Initiate interpersonal communication with clients	1.1 Identify and use preferred client communication styles and methods 1.2 Establish rapport with clients using verbal and nonverbal communication processes 1.3 Investigate and act upon opportunities to offer positive feedback to clients 1.4 Use open questions to promote twoway communication 1.5 Identify and act upon potential barriers to effective communication with clients 1.6 Initiate communication processes which relate to client needs, preferences and expectations
2. Establish client relationship management strategies	2.1 Develop client loyalty objectives focusing on the development of long term business partnerships 2.2 Assess client profile information to determine approach 2.3 Develop client loyalty strategies to attract and retain clients in accordance with the business strategy 2.4 Identify and apply client care and client service standards
3. Maintain and improve ongoing relationships with clients	3.1 Develop strategies to obtain ongoing feedback from clients to monitor satisfaction levels 3.2 Develop strategies to elicit feedback which provide information in a form that can be used to improve relationships with clients 3.3 Obtain feedback to develop and implement strategies which maintain and improve relationships with clients
4. Build and maintain networks	4.1 Allocate time to establish and maintain business contacts 4.2 Participate in business associations and/or professional development activities to establish and maintain a network of support for the business and to enhance personal knowledge of the market 4.3 Establish communication channels to exchange information and ideas 4.4 Provide, seek and verify information to the network

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 1.3, 1.5, 2.2, 2.3, 2.4, 3.1, 4.2- 4.4	Interprets information from a range of sources to determine and adhere to communication and networking requirements
Writing	1.1,1.5, 2.1, 2.3, 2.4, 3.1, 3.2, 4.2, 4.3	Records notes from research and discussions for future reference Develops materials for a specific audience according to organisational standards
Oral Communication	1.1-1.6, 2.3, 2.4, 3.3, 4.2-4.4	Participates in spoken exchanges with a range of audiences using structure and language to suit the audience Involves others in discussions using active listening and questioning techniques appropriately
Numeracy	2.4, 4.1	Performs calculations to determine timeframes and measure actual performance against required standards
Navigate the world of work	2.3, 2.4	Considers wider organisational goals when developing customer relationship strategies
Interact with others	1.1, 1.2, 1.5, 1.6, 3.3, 4.2-4.4	Selects and uses appropriate conventions and protocols when communicating with clients or business contacts to build rapport, seek or present information Recognises the need to alter personal communication style in response to the needs, values, beliefs and cultural expectations of others Adapts personal communication style to build positive working relationships and show respect for the opinions, values and particular needs of others
Get the work done	1.1, 2.1-2.4, 3.1-3.3, 4.1-4.4	Takes responsibility for planning, sequencing and implementing tasks and own workload to achieve business outcomes Uses analytical processes to gather relevant information, identify and evaluate options and decide on appropriate systems and strategies Actively monitors and evaluates effectiveness of decisions to identify and implement improvements

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
BSBREL402 Build client relationships and business networks	BSBREL402A Build client relationships and business networks	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for BSBREL402 Build client relationships and business networks

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with BSB Business Services Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

identify clients’ preferred communication styles and methods and potential barriers to communications and use appropriate communication styles and strategies

apply communication techniques to establish rapport and promote two-way communication

develop and implement client loyalty strategies and service standards based on business objectives and client information

develop and implement strategies to elicit feedback from clients and use it to improve relationships and customer satisfaction

maintain contacts and participate in formal and informal networks that support the business and enhance personal knowledge of the market.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

give examples of strategies that can build client loyalty including those that focus on:

financial incentives and special offers

premium services and private/dedicated facilities

loyalty programs, rewards and recognition

outline issues that are commonly addressed in client care/service standards in the industry

outline typical barriers to communicating with clients and possible strategies to address them

give examples of strategies for feedback

describe the principles and techniques for effective communication and networking

outline networking opportunities relevant to the business with reference to:

government, industry and professional associations

trade shows, conferences, briefings and other professional development activities

existing groups or networks

businesses and individuals

outline aspects of organisational policies, procedures and processes that are relevant to communicating with clients and participating in networks.

Assessment Conditions

Assessment must be conducted in a safe environment where evidence gathered demonstrates consistent performance of typical activities experienced in the stakeholder relations - relationship management field of work and include access to:

relevant workplace documentation and resources

case studies and, where possible, real situations

interaction with others.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

BSBSLS407 Identify and plan sales prospects

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with BSB Business Services Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to identify potential sales prospects by applying prospecting methods, and manage own sales performance by establishing a sales plan, while managing stress, time and sales-related paperwork.

It applies to individuals working in a sales-related position in a small, medium or large enterprise in a wide variety of industries, who identify, collate and follow up sales prospect information to generate leads. Individuals undertaking this unit may be at entry level, or have experience in sales sufficient to provide advice and support about aspects of sales solutions as part of a sales team.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Business Development – Sales

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Employ prospecting methods and qualify prospects	1.1 Identify, consider and evaluate strengths and limitations of range of primary and secondary prospecting methods 1.2 Select prospecting methods to match market to which the product or service is targeted 1.3 Target present, previous and new clients through chosen prospecting methods 1.4 Research and establish criteria for qualifying leads according to buyer accessibility, buyer motives, product affordability, purchase authority, legal compliance and return for seller 1.5 Ensure established criteria represent a standard against which buying potential of individuals and groups is gauged
2. Manage prospect information	2.1 Develop and implement system for recording prospect information 2.2 Monitor and evaluate effectiveness of system for recording prospect information 2.3 Refine system for recording prospect information based on evaluation
3. Establish individualised sales plan	3.1 Establish individual sales goals and quotas to focus work activities, based on organisational sales and marketing objectives 3.2 Establish consultation and communication structures with clients and supervisors 3.3 Plan and document individualised sales plan to achieve sales goals and quotas within a work system constructed against clear timeframes 3.4 Monitor and adjust sales plan to established goals and quotas 3.5 Evaluate sales plan and adjust where necessary
4. Complete sales paperwork and reports	4.1 Establish system to collect, record and organise data associated with sales process 4.2 Complete routine reports at regular intervals according to organisational requirements 4.3 Use available technology to facilitate record-keeping and production of sales reports
5. Organise workload effectively	5.1 Establish routines to provide structure for work and to manage workload 5.2 Allocate time for specific work tasks and unanticipated events and activities 5.3 Conduct analysis of time spent on work-related activities and adjust time spent on tasks, if required 5.4 Apply time-management strategies to minimise non-productive sales activities 5.5 Delegate tasks to individuals or sales team members to share workload as appropriate 5.6 Identify and monitor symptoms of stress and seek expert assistance

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1-1.5, 2.1-2.3, 3.1-3.5, 4.1-4.3, 5.1-5.4	Analyses and evaluates textual information to develop research strategies, integrate facts and ideas and meet organisational requirements
Writing	1.1-1.5, 2.1-2.3, 3.1-3.5, 4.1-4.3, 5.1-5.4	Creates documents using specific and detailed language to convey explicit information, requirements and recommendations
Oral Communication	1.3, 5.2, 5.5	Presents information using clear language suited to the audience Uses listening and questioning skills to check and confirm understanding
Numeracy	1.4-1.5, 3.1, 3.3-3.5, 5.2-5.4	Applies ratios and percentages and relevant formulae to data to calculate and interpret time durations and establish financial goals
Navigate the world of work	1.4, 3.1, 3.4, 4.2	Follows explicit and implicit organisational objectives, protocols and legal requirements
Interact with others	1.3, 3.2, 5.5, 5.6	Tailors communication to achieve purpose, demonstrating a sophisticated understanding of audience needs Collaborates with others to achieve organisational objectives
Get the work done	1.1, 1.3, 1.4, 2.1, 2.2, 3.3-3.5, 4.1-4.3, 5.1, 5.3-5.6	Sequences and schedules complex activities of self and others and monitors implementation Uses systematic, analytical processes in complex, non-routine situations, setting goals, gathering relevant information and evaluating options against agreed criteria Monitor implementation of solutions and reflects on outcomes to identify appropriate action Develops new and innovative ideas through exploration, analysis and critical thinking Uses main features and functions of digital tools to complete work tasks and access information

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
BSBSLS407 Identify and plan sales prospects	BSBSLS407A Identify and plan sales prospects	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for BSBSLS407 Identify and plan sales prospects

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with BSB Business Services Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

evaluate and select the use and management of different sales prospecting methods

develop, monitor and refine a system for recording prospecting methods

plan, document and monitor individualised sales plan

establish data collection system

use appropriate technology

organise, analyse and delegate workloads to maximise productivity

identify and monitor symptoms of stress.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

describe information management strategies used to manage prospect and sales data

identify key principles associated with self-management

outline key provisions of relevant legislation, codes of practice and national standards related to the sales environment

describe prospecting methods used in sales process

identify principles of buyer motives

describe strategies and techniques used to prevent and manage stress.

Assessment Conditions

Assessment must be conducted in a safe environment where evidence gathered demonstrates consistent performance of typical activities experienced in the business development – sales field of work and include access to:

relevant legislation, regulations, standards and codes

relevant workplace documentation and resources

case studies and, where possible, real situations

interaction with others.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

BSBSLS408 Present, secure and support sales solutions

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with BSB Business Services Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to present sales solutions that respond to specific buying needs of a client, and to use sales processes associated with securing prospect commitment to proceed with a sale.

It also includes attending to post-sales activities that build and strengthen the partnership between a salesperson and client, and enhance the likelihood of future sales.

It applies to individuals working in sales-related positions in a small, medium or large enterprise, in a wide variety of industries, who may provide sales solutions individually, or provide advice and support on aspects of sales solutions to support a sales team.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication

Unit Sector

Business Development – Sales

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Prepare for sales presentation	1.1 Obtain and organise products, ideas and services for use within sales presentation 1.2 Review product information to ensure familiarity with products 1.3 Identify sales tactics, and assess and choose options that meet needs and preferences of the prospect 1.4 Consider variety of sales solutions and prepare to meet buyer needs 1.5 Identify and select sales aids 1.6 Identify alternatives for prospects and assess in relation to anticipated buyer needs
2. Present sales solution	2.1 Use gestures, posture, body language, facial expressions and voice to create a supportive selling environment 2.2 Use listening skills and open-ended questions to identify buyer needs, preferences, motives and objections 2.3 Adjust presentation to match needs and preferences of buyer 2.4 Use persuasive communication techniques to secure buyer interest 2.5 Ensure presentation demonstrates and communicates key features of product and emphasises benefits in relation to identified buyer needs 2.6 Obtain and present proof of benefits through product purchase 2.7 Use sales aids to build buyer understanding of how product aligns with needs
3. Respond to buyer signals	3.1 Identify and assess verbal and non-verbal buying signals 3.2 Use probing to identify source of buyer resistance 3.3 Identify strengths and limitations of buyer resistance strategies 3.4 Select and implement strategy for managing buyer resistance 3.5 Use trial closes strategically during different stages of sales process
4. Negotiate and finalise sale	4.1 Initiate formal close to sales process following one or more trial closes 4.2 Select strategy to close sale, and use supportive and confirming language to support closure 4.3 Negotiate conditions of agreement, outline a summary of agreement to buyer, and confirm buyer’s decision 4.4 Provide advice on financing arrangements, if required 4.5 Prepare and complete sales documents, and process and monitor client order 4.6 Identify and present cross-selling opportunities to buyer
5. Support post-sale activities	5.1 Ensure contact is made with buyer post-sale to ensure agreed expectations have been met 5.2 Provide technical assistance or advice and assist clients to access appropriate after-sales support 5.3 Use feedback solicitation regarding sales process and product satisfaction 5.4 Address and resolve service problems and difficulties identified through feedback 5.5 Develop and implement client loyalty strategies to secure buyer loyalty and facilitate ongoing contact 5.6 Offer and implement additional sales solutions and benefits to clients when opportunities arise

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1-1.6, 2.7, 4.3-4.6, 5.1-5.6	Analyses and evaluates textual information to develop research strategies, integrate facts and ideas, and meet organisational requirements
Writing	1.1, 4.5-4.6, 5.1-5.6	Creates documents using specific and detailed language to convey explicit information, requirements and recommendations
Oral Communication	1.1, 2.1-2.7, 3.1-3.5, 4.1-4.6, 5.1-5.6	Obtains information by listening and questioning, and Participates in discussions using detailed, clear and persuasive language to contribute details, express requirements and provide advice
Numeracy	2.6, 4.3-4.5, 5.5	Identifies, interprets and compares mathematical information in simple and familiar written texts
Interact with others	2.3, 2.4, 3.2-3.4, 4.2, 5.3-5.5	Uses a range of interpersonal skills to build rapport and establish relationships with others Tailors communication to achieve purpose, demonstrating a sophisticated understanding of audience needs
Get the work done	1.1-1.3, 2.1-2.7, 3.2, 3.4, 3.5, 4.1-4.6, 5.1-5.6	Sequences and schedules complex activities to achieve outcomes in a timely fashion Uses systematic, analytical processes in complex, non-routine situations, setting goals, designing strategies, gathering relevant information and evaluating options Uses formal and informal processes to monitor implementation of solutions and reflect on outcomes Uses main features and functions of digital tools to complete work tasks and access information

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
BSBSLS408 Present, secure and support sales solutions	BSBSLS408A Present, secure and support sales solutions	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for BSBSLS408 Present, secure and support sales solutions

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with BSB Business Services Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

identify principles of effective sales presentation

identify buyer needs and present sales solution

manage buyer resistance

finalise a sale

implement support for post-sale activities.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

demonstrate detailed product knowledge, including product:

advantages and disadvantages

features

service benefits

identify materials and aids that support presentations

identify principles for achieving an effective sales presentation mix

describe statistical methods used to demonstrate sales performance

describe strategies used to:

manage client accounts

build client goodwill

develop client loyalty.

Assessment Conditions

Assessment must be conducted in a safe environment where evidence gathered demonstrates consistent performance of typical activities experienced in the business development – sales field of work and include access to:

office equipment and resources

support materials for effective presentations

case studies and, where possible, real situations

interaction with others.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

BSBSLS501 Develop a sales plan

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with BSB Business Services Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to develop a sales plan for a product or service for a team covering a specified sales territory based on strategic objectives and in accordance with established performance targets.

It applies to individuals working in a supervisory or managerial sales role who develop a sales plan for a product or service.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication

Unit Sector

Business Development – Sales

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Identify organisational strategic direction	1.1 Obtain and analyse assessment of market needs and strategic planning documents 1.2 Review previous sales performance and successful approaches to identify factors affecting performance 1.3 Analyse information on market needs, new opportunities, customer profiles and requirements as a basis for decision making
2. Establish performance targets	2.1 Determine practical and achievable sales targets 2.2 Establish realistic time lines for achieving targets 2.3 Determine measures to allow for monitoring of performance 2.4 Ensure objectives of the sales plan and style of the campaign are consistent with organisational strategic objectives and corporate image
3. Develop a sales plan for a product	3.1 Determine approaches to be used to meet sales objectives 3.2 Identify additional expertise requirements and allocate budgetary resources accordingly 3.3 Identify risks and develop risk controls 3.4 Develop advertising and promotional strategy for product 3.5 Identify appropriate distribution channels for product 3.6 Prepare a budget for the sales plan 3.7 Present documented sales plan to appropriate personnel for approval
4. Identify support requirements	4.1 Identify and acquire staff resources to implement sales plan 4.2 Develop an appropriate selling approach 4.3 Train staff in the selling approach selected 4.4 Develop and assess staff knowledge of product to be sold
5. Monitor and review sales plan	5.1 Monitor implementation of the sales plan 5.2 Record data measuring performance versus sales targets 5.3 Make adjustments to sales plan as required to ensure required results are obtained

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1-1.3, 2.4, 3.5, 4.1, 5.1-5.3	Analyses and interprets workplace documentation Recognises information in job specifications and work processes related to sales requirements
Writing	1.2, 2.1-2.3, 3.1-3.6, 4.2, 4.3, 5.1- 5.3	Accurately records information according to organisational requirements Composes and edits texts, selecting appropriate vocabulary and structure for audience and purpose
Oral Communication	3.7, 4.1, 4.3, 4.4	Presents information to a range of audiences using appropriate structure and language Uses questioning and active listening to request feedback or to clarify or confirm understanding
Numeracy	1.1-1.3, 2.1-2.3, 3.2, 3.6, 5.2-5.3	Uses a wide range of mathematical calculations to enter or analyse information related to sales plans, targets and performance
Navigate the world of work	1.1, 2.4	Considers organisational goals when determining and developing sales plans and strategies
Interact with others	3.7, 4.1, 4.3, 4.4	Identifies and uses appropriate conventions and protocols when communicating with a range of personnel Demonstrates sophisticated control over oral, visual and/or written formats, drawing on a range of communication practices to achieve training goals
Get the work done	1.1, 1.3, 2.1-2.3, 3.2-3.7, 4.1, 4.2, 4.4, 5.1, 5.3	Sequences and schedules complex activities, monitors implementation and manages relevant communication Uses systematic, analytical processes in complex, non-routine situations, setting goals, designing strategies, gathering relevant information and evaluating options Uses formal and informal processes to monitor implementation of solutions and reflect on outcomes Develops new and innovative ideas through exploration, analysis and critical thinking

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
BSBSLS501 Develop a sales plan	BSBSLS501A Develop a sales plan	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages Minor edits to clarify the intent of Performance Criteria	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for BSBSLS501 Develop a sales plan

Modification History

Release	Comments
Version 1	This version first released with BSB Business Services Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

analyse information from a range of sources to develop a sales plan for a product and sales territory that meets organisational strategic direction including:

resource requirements and budget

achievable sales targets

performance measures

approaches to be used to meet objectives

risk management

advertising and promotional strategy

product distribution channels

acquire staff, develop selling approach and provide training support on product knowledge and sales approach

monitor and evaluate performance and adjust the plan as appropriate.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

outline principles and techniques for selling

outline methods for monitoring sales outcomes

explain the statistical techniques for analysing sales and market trends

outline internal and external sources of information that are relevant to identifying organisational strategic direction and developing a product sales plan.

Assessment Conditions

Assessment must be conducted in a safe environment where evidence gathered demonstrates consistent performance of typical activities experienced in the business development – sales field of work and include access to:

relevant workplace documentation and resources

case studies and, where possible, real situations

interaction with others.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

BSBSMB301 Investigate micro business opportunities

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with BSB Business Services Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to consider the major elements of a business idea, undertake research to determine viability of the business opportunity and present the idea with reference to the legislative frameworks affecting the business.

It applies to individuals who are establishing or operating a micro business for self-employment.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Management and Leadership – Small and Micro Business

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Describe business ideas	1.1 Gather information for business ideas from appropriate sources 1.2 List details of business ideas and opportunities 1.3 Research alternative business ideas in light of available resources 1.4 Specify and list products and services to match business ideas 1.5 Identify and research potential customer information for business ideas 1.6 Identify and take into account available financial, business and technical skills when researching business opportunities
2. Identify market needs	2.1 Collect information regarding market size and potential from appropriate sources 2.2 Investigate market trends and developments to identify market needs relative to business ideas 2.3 Gather market information from primary and secondary sources to identify possible market needs in relation to business ideas 2.4 Identify ethical and cultural requirements of the market, and their relevance for business ideas 2.5 Identify new and emerging markets and document their features 2.6 Identify and organise information on expected market growth or decline and associated risk factors
3. Investigate factors affecting the market	3.1 Identify projected changes in population, economic activity and labour force that may impact business ideas 3.2 Identify movements in prices, and projected changes in availability of resources 3.3 Review trends and developments and identify their potential impact on business ideas

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 1.3, 1.5, 2.1-2.6, 3.1-3.3	Analyses and evaluates textual information to develop research strategies, integrate facts and ideas and meet business requirements
Writing	1.1, 1.2, 1.4, 1.5, 2.3, 2.5	Uses factual information and industry related terminology to complete required documentation
Oral Communication	1.1, 1.5, 2.3, 2.5	Clearly articulates requests using specific and relevant language, and uses listening and questioning techniques to confirm understanding
Numeracy	2.1, 3.1, 3.2	Extracts, evaluates and compares numerical information to determine resources and identify trends
Get the work done	1.1, 1.5, 1.6, 2.1, 2.2, 2.5, 2.6, 3.1, 3.2	Identifies changes to processes, products or services within scope of own business opportunities May invest time in developing and shaping several options before making a final choice, using a combination of lateral and analytical thinking to tailor and strengthen an idea to suit needs, resources and constraints Uses a range of digitally based technology and applications to access and filter data, and then extract, organise, integrate and share relevant information in increasingly effective ways.

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
BSBSMB301 Investigate micro business opportunities	BSBSMB301A Investigate micro business opportunities	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for BSBSMB301 Investigate micro business opportunities

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with BSB Business Services Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

analyse information from a range of sources to investigate a business opportunity, including:

financial considerations

technical skills required to document, research and analyse market data and market changes

ethical and cultural requirements of the market

resource availability

risk management

review data for potential impact.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

locate and outline relevant legislation and regulation laws governing state and federal laws when starting and running a micro business in Australia

locate and analyse theory of ethical culture including how theory can be applied to achieve positive ethical outcomes within the business

identify sources of specialist advice such as trends in new and emerging markets and decline and risk factors

describe appropriate business research methods and data collection tools including how to monitor trends using specialised software.

Assessment Conditions

Assessment must be conducted in a safe environment where evidence gathered demonstrates consistent performance of typical activities experienced in the Management and Leadership – Small and Micro Business field of work and include access to:

office equipment and resources for analysis of data

relevant legislation, regulations, standards and codes

relevant workplace documentation

case studies and, where possible, real situations

interaction with others.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

BSBSMB402 Plan small business finances

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with BSB Business Services Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to identify financial requirements of a business, including profit targets, cash flow projections and strategies to garner financial support.

It applies to individuals who operate a small business or work within an existing micro or small businesses or in a department of a larger organisation. Individuals in this role interpret financial data competently and are skilled communicators.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Management and Leadership – Small and Micro Business

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Identify costs, calculate prices and prepare profit statement	1.1 Identify and document costs associated with production and delivery of the business’ products/services 1.2 Calculate prices based on costs and profit margin, as an hourly charge-out rate for labour or unit price for products 1.3 Calculate breakeven sales point to establish business viability and profit margins 1.4 Identify appropriate pricing strategies in relation to market conditions to meet business profit targets 1.5 Prepare projected profit statement to supplement the business plan
2. Develop a financial plan	2.1 Set profit targets/goals to reflect owner’s desired returns 2.2 Identify working capital requirements necessary to attain profit projections 2.3 Identify noncurrent asset requirements and consider alternative asset management strategies 2.4 Prepare cash flow projections to enable business operation in accordance with business plan and legal requirements 2.5 Identify capital investment requirements accurately for each operational period 2.6 Select budget targets to enable ongoing monitoring of financial performance
3. Acquire finance	3.1 Identify startup and ongoing financial requirements according to financial plan/budget 3.2 Identify sources of finance, including potential financial backers, to provide required liquidity for the business to complement business goals and objectives 3.3 Investigate cost of securing finance on optimal terms 3.4 Identify strategies to obtain finance as required to ensure financial viability of the business

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 1.5, 2.1-2.5, 3.1, 3.2	Identifies, analyses and evaluates complex information from a range of sources
Writing	1.1, 1.5, 2.1, 2.4, 3.2	Prepares written reports and workplace documentation that communicate complex information clearly and effectively
Oral Communication	1.1, 3.2	Uses specific and relevant language to secure finance and uses questioning and listening techniques to clarify outcomes Participates in verbal negotiations using language suitable to audience
Numeracy	1.1-1.5, 2.1, 2.2, 2.4-2.6, 3.1, 3.3, 3.4	Analyses numerical information to determine costs, prices, profit and losses, and other financial data
Navigate the world of work	2.4	Appreciates implications of legal and regulatory responsibilities related to own work
Get the work done	1.1, 1.4, 2.1-2.3, 2.5, 2.6, 3.1, 3.2, 3.4	Sequences and schedules tasks required to implement and monitor financial strategies Makes a range of critical and non-critical decisions in relatively complex situations, taking a range of constraints into account, making adjustments as necessary Regularly uses formal thinking techniques to generate new ideas

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
BSBSMB402 Plan small business finances	BSBSMB402A Plan small business finances	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for BSBSMB402 Plan small business finances

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with BSB Business Services Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

develop a financial plan which identifies financial requirements of the business, including cash flow projections and a projected profit statement

follow the business plan, including:

demonstrating an awareness of appropriate legal requirements

implementing strategies to monitor financial performance

identify sources and investigate costs of securing appropriate financial assistance.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

explain breakeven analysis

clarify costing for the business, including margin/markup, hourly charge-out rates and unit costs

summarise financial decision-making relevant to the business

outline methods and relative costs of obtaining finance

summarise principles for preparing balance sheets

provide a detailed explanation of:

principles for preparation of cash flow forecasts

principles for preparation of profit and loss statements

purpose of financial reports

describe working capital cycles.

Assessment Conditions

Assessment must be conducted in a safe environment where evidence gathered demonstrates consistent performance of typical activities experienced in the Management and Leadership – Small and Micro Business field of work and include access to:

office equipment and resources for financial calculations

relevant workplace documentation

case studies and, where possible, real situations

interaction with others.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

BSBSMB403 Market the small business

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with BSB Business Services Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to monitor and improve business performance via a clear strategy complementing the business plan.

It applies to individuals who operate a small business independently or within a larger organisation. Individuals in this role analyse and interpret market data and are proficient communicators.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Management and Leadership – Small and Micro Business

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Develop marketing strategies	1.1 Analyse the business and its key products or services to determine focus of marketing activities, in accordance with objectives of the business plan 1.2 Evaluate customer base and target market for the small business as a basis for marketing objectives and strategies 1.3 Determine marketing objectives and strategies are ethically and culturally appropriate, in consultation with relevant people and in accordance with the business plan
2. Determine a marketing mix for the business	2.1 Balance product mix, volumes and pricing to optimise sales and profit 2.2 Evaluate costs and benefits of using different distribution channels and/or providing different levels of customer service, and consider results in determining marketing mix 2.3 Determine promotional activities to suit target market 2.4 Consider customer needs and preferences in determining marketing mix 2.5 Determine marketing mix according to market and business needs
3. Implement marketing strategies	3.1 Brief those involved in the marketing effort on their roles and responsibilities, to ensure success of marketing strategies 3.2 Plan and implement promotional activities, in accordance with marketing objectives and budgetary requirements
4. Monitor and improve marketing performance	4.1 Monitor marketing activities and evaluate business performance according to objectives and targets of the business plan 4.2 Analyse performance gaps and take corrective action or set new targets 4.3 Encourage all relevant people to propose ways to improve marketing performance 4.4 Seek and analyse customer reaction to all aspects of the marketing mix, using culturally appropriate processes, to improve targeting and outcomes 4.5 Conduct ongoing research of customer requirements to identify opportunities for change and improvement 4.6 Monitor and investigate market changes for new opportunities to aid business development

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1-1.3, 2.2-2.4, 3.2, 4.1, 4.4, 4.6	Identifies, analyses and evaluates complex information from a range of sources
Writing	1.3, 2.3, 2.5, 3.1, 3.2, 4.4-4.6	Prepares reports and other workplace documentation using structure, layout and terminology appropriate to the audience
Oral Communication	1.3, 3.1, 4.3, 4.4	Presents ideas and requirements clearly and using language and non-verbal techniques appropriate to audience and environment Uses questioning and listening to check and confirm understanding
Numeracy	2.1, 2.2, 3.2, 4.2	Analyses numerical information to determine budgetary requirements and product quantities Uses a range of calculation methods to evaluate costs and benefits
Navigate the world of work	4.5	Regularly reviews current situation and develops strategies to address improvements in marketing performance
Interact with others	4.3	Recognises importance of building rapport to establish effective working relationships
Get the work done	1.1-1.3, 2.1-2.5, 3.2, 4.1, 4.2	Plans, organises and implements tasks required to develop and implement marketing strategies Implements actions as per plan, making slight adjustments if necessary and addressing some unexpected issues Makes a range of critical and non-critical decisions in relatively complex situations, taking a range of constraints into account Identifies concepts, principles and features of approaches in use in other contexts, and redesigns these to suit own situation Uses formal and informal processes to monitor implementation of solutions and reflect on outcomes

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
BSBSMB403 Market the small business	BSBSMB403A Market the small business	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for BSBSMB403 Market the small business

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with BSB Business Services Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

determine objectives of the business plan, including marketing activity focus

evaluate customer base

understand what is ethically and culturally appropriate

determine a marketing mix according to market and business needs, including:

ability to optimise sales and profit

ability to evaluate costs and benefits

determine customer needs and promotional activities

determine marketing strategies, including briefing appropriate personnel on their responsibilities

monitor and evaluate activities and performance, and correct performance gaps

consult and communicate effectively with relevant people

research and monitor ongoing changes and improvements.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

discuss industry market trends

identify performance evaluation methods

explain methods of analysing costs and benefits of marketing strategies

summarise methods of developing marketing objectives and marketing mix

outline methods of monitoring customer satisfaction

identify relevant market analysis and research

provide a detailed explanation of relevant marketing concepts and methods.

Assessment Conditions

Assessment must be conducted in a safe environment where evidence gathered demonstrates consistent performance of typical activities experienced in the Management and Leadership – Small and Micro Business field of work and include access to:

office equipment and resources for analysis of data

relevant workplace documents

case studies and, where possible, real situations

interaction with others.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

BSBSMB404 Undertake small business planning

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with BSB Business Services Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to research and develop an integrated business plan for achieving business goals and objectives.

It applies to individuals who operate a small business that operates independently, or as part of a larger organisation. Individuals in this role interpret business information and numerical data competently and are skilled communicators.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Management and Leadership – Small and Micro Business

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Identify elements of the business plan	1.1 Identify purpose of the business plan 1.2 Identify and review essential components of the business plan 1.3 Identify and document business goals and objectives as a basis for measuring business performance
2. Develop a business plan	2.1 Research resources, legal and compliance requirements, specifically in relation to occupational health and safety (OHS), in accordance with business goals and objectives 2.2 Research market needs, and market size and potential 2.3 Identify sources and costs of finance, from financial plan, to provide required liquidity and profitability for the business 2.4 Identify methods, from marketing strategies, to promote market exposure of the business 2.5 Identify methods/means of production/operation from production/operations plan to conform with business goals and objectives 2.6 Identify staffing requirements to effectively produce/deliver products/services 2.7 Identify specialist services and sources of advice, where required, and cost in accordance with available resources
3. Develop strategies for minimising risks	3.1 Identify specific interests and objectives of relevant people and seek and confirm their support of planned business direction 3.2 Identify and develop risk management strategies according to business goals and objectives, and relevant legal requirements 3.3 Develop a contingency plan to address possible areas of nonconformance with the plan

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1-1.3, 2.1-2.7, 3.1, 3.2	Identifies, analyses and evaluates complex workplace documentation during planning process
Writing	1.3, 2.3-2.7, 3.1-3.3	Prepares written reports and workplace documentation that communicate complex information clearly and effectively
Oral Communication	3.1	Articulates ideas and requirements using language appropriate to audience
Numeracy	2.2, 2.3, 2.5-2.7	Interprets numerical information to determine prospective markets, resource allocations and business profits/losses
Navigate the world of work	2.1, 3.2	Appreciates implications of legal and regulatory responsibilities related to own work
Get the work done	1.1, 1.2, 2.1-2.7, 3.2, 3.3	Plans, organises and implements tasks required to develop a business plan Implements actions as per plan, making slight adjustments if necessary, and addressing some unexpected issues Makes a range of critical and non-critical decisions in relatively complex situations, taking a range of constraints into account Identifies concepts, principles and features of approaches in use in other contexts, and redesigns these to suit own situation Uses formal and informal processes to monitor implementation of solutions and reflect on outcomes

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
BSBSMB404 Undertake small business planning	BSBSMB404A Undertake small business planning	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for BSBSMB404 Undertake small business planning

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with BSB Business Services Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

develop a business plan which provides for finance, marketing and provision of products/services to facilitate all business goals and objectives

identify and plan all work health and safety (WHS) responsibilities

develop risk management strategies including a contingency plan for non-conformance.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

discuss commonwealth, state/territory and local government legislative requirements and industry codes of practice relating to small business planning

explain methods of evaluation

summarise WHS responsibilities and procedures for identifying hazards relevant to the business

outline planning processes

describe preparation of a business plan

identify principles of risk management relevant to business planning

explain reasons for, and benefits of, business planning

outline setting goals and objectives

explain types of business planning – feasibility studies; strategic, operational, financial and marketing planning.

Assessment Conditions

Assessment must be conducted in a safe environment where evidence gathered demonstrates consistent performance of typical activities experienced in the Management and Leadership – Small and Micro Business field of work and include access to:

office equipment and resources

relevant legislation, regulations, standards and codes

relevant workplace documentation

case studies and, where possible, real situations

interaction with others.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

BSBSMB412 Introduce cloud computing into business operations

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with BSB Business Services Training Package Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to understand the fundamentals of internet computing and cloud services. It involves undertaking a basic review of business computing needs and identifying options for introducing cloud computing services into a small business or work area in an organisation.

It applies to individuals who use problem-solving skills and take responsibility for adopting and promoting approaches to improve business operations.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Management and Leadership – Small and Micro Business

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Review computing needs in the business	1.1 Review current computing resources and use, and document according to organisational requirements 1.2 Identify and discuss future computing needs and potential improvements to business operations with staff or team members 1.3 Collate information collected in review, and summarise business computing needs in line with organisational requirements
2. Investigate cloud computing services to meet business needs	2.1 Research fundamentals of cloud computing, types of services offered, and their costs 2.2 Seek assistance from specialist advisors as required, to determine relevant cloud computing services 2.3 Undertake basic cost-benefit analysis for introducing cloud computing 2.4 Identify potential opportunities and risks associated with introducing cloud computing 2.5 Prepare a business case for implementing cloud computing services or other required changes, and seek approval where required
3. Develop a plan to introduce cloud computing	3.1 Prioritise introduction of cloud computing, including short-term and longer-term goals 3.2 Prepare a budget catering for short and long-term priorities, following organisational format and requirements 3.3 Independently or through services of a specialist advisor, outline steps and activities required to introduce cloud computing into the business
4. Support implementation of the plan	4.1 Communicate and promote key features of the plan to others 4.2 Organise training and coaching to maximise cloud computing potential 4.3 Encourage and support individuals and work groups to become more efficient using cloud computing

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 1.3, 2.1	Organises, evaluates and critiques information from a wide variety of textual material
Writing	1.1, 1.3, 2.5, 3.2, 3.3, 4.1	Develops material for a specific audience using clear language and workplace conventions to convey explicit information, requirements and recommendations
Numeracy	2.1, 2.3, 3.2	Analyses numerical information to plan business budgets and analyse and compare data
Oral communication	1.2, 2.5, 4.1, 4.3	Uses appropriate, detailed and clear language to address key personnel and share information Uses listening and questioning skills to confirm understanding of requirements
Navigate the world of work	1.1, 1.3, 3.2	Appreciates implications of legal and regulatory responsibilities related to own work Adheres to organisational policies and procedures
Interact with others	1.2, 2.2, 3.3, 4.3	Collaborates with others to achieve joint outcomes, playing an active role in facilitating effective group interaction May seek expert guidance of others in specific areas
Get the work done	1.2, 1.3, 2.1, 2.2, 2.4, 2.5, 3.1, 4.2	Plans and implements tasks required to develop a cloud computing plan Uses analytical skills to identify computing use and business needs and decide on solutions Reflects on ways digital systems and tools are used, or could be used, to achieve work goals, and begins to recognise strategic and operational applications

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
BSBSMB412 Introduce cloud computing into business operations	BSBSMB412A Introduce cloud computing into business operations	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for BSBSMB412 Introduce cloud computing into business operations

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with BSB Business Services Training Package Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

review and analyse business computing needs, including equipment and software requirements, and business use

analyse research information about cloud computing including:

seeking assistance from specialist advisor as required

performing cost-benefit analysis

identifying potential risks

make the business case to introduce cloud computing

prepare plan and support others to implement cloud computing.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

explain fundamentals of cloud computing, including key terms and concepts

outline sources of information about cloud computing for micro or small business, and options specific to the business

describe organisational format and requirements for preparing a budget

summarise organisational protocols for using services of specialist advisors.

Assessment Conditions

Assessment must be conducted in a safe environment where evidence gathered demonstrates consistent performance of typical activities experienced in the Management and Leadership – Small and Micro Business field of work and include access to:

office equipment and resources

software for analysis of numerical data

relevant workplace documentation

case studies and, where possible, real situations

interaction with others.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

BSBSUS201 Participate in environmentally sustainable work practices

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with BSB Business Services Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to effectively measure current resource use and carry out improvements, including reducing the negative environmental impact of work practices.

It applies to individuals, working under supervision or guidance, who are required to follow workplace procedures and instructions, and work in an environmentally sustainable manner within scope of competency, authority and own level of responsibility.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Industry Capability – Sustainability

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Identify current resource use	1.1 Identify workplace environmental and resource efficiency issues 1.2 Identify resources used in own work role 1.3 Document and measure current usage of resources using appropriate techniques 1.4 Record and file documentation measuring current usage, using technology (such as software systems) where applicable 1.5 Identify and report workplace environmental hazards to appropriate personnel
2. Comply with environmental regulations	2.1 Follow workplace procedures to ensure compliance 2.2 Report breaches or potential breaches to appropriate personnel
3. Seek opportunities to improve resource efficiency	3.1 Follow organisational plans to improve environmental practices and resource efficiency 3.2 Work as part of a team, where relevant, to identify possible areas for improvements to work practices in own work area 3.3 Make suggestions for improvements to workplace practices in own work area

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 1.3, 2.1, 3.1	Recognises and interprets textual information to establish job requirements from relevant information
Writing	1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 2.2	Completes documents using required formats
Oral Communication	1.5, 2.2, 3.3	Articulates ideas clearly and uses simple and relevant language to identify and report issues to designated person
Numeracy	1.3	Calculates basic metric measurements to determine resource usage
Navigate the world of work	2.1	Understands and adheres to legal and regulatory responsibilities related to own work
Interact with others	1.5, 2.2, 3.2, 3.3	Selects and uses appropriate conventions and protocols when communicating with co-workers in range of work contexts Collaborates and cooperates with others to achieve joint outcomes
Get the work done	1.1-1.4, 3.1, 3.3	Implements actions as per plan, taking some responsibility for sequencing and timing of tasks Uses main features and functions of digital tools to complete work tasks and access information Analyses current practices to identify opportunities for improvement.

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
BSBSUS201 Participate in environmentally sustainable work practices	BSBSUS201A Participate in environmentally sustainable work practices	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for BSBSUS201 Participate in environmentally sustainable work practices

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with BSB Business Services Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

locate and interpret a range of environment/sustainability legislation and procedural requirements

participate in and support discussions for an improved resource efficiency process

identify, document and measure usage of resources

collaborate with team members on suggestions for improving workplace practices.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

identify environmental and resource hazards/risks as well as environmental or sustainability legislation, regulations and codes of practice applicable to own role

outline sustainability requirements in the workplace

identify reporting channels and procedures to report breaches and potential issues

identify where to find environmental and resource efficiency systems and procedures.

Assessment Conditions

Assessment must be conducted in a safe environment where evidence gathered demonstrates consistent performance of typical activities experienced in the sustainability field of work and include access to:

documentation, information and resources related to workplace environmental and resource efficiency issues

office equipment and resources

case studies and, where possible, real situations

interaction with others.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

BSBSUS301 Implement and monitor environmentally sustainable work practices

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with BSB Business Services Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to effectively analyse the workplace in relation to environmentally sustainable work practices and to implement improvements and monitor their effectiveness.

It applies to individuals with responsibility for a specific area of work or who lead a work group or team and addresses the knowledge, processes and techniques necessary to implement and monitor environmentally sustainable work practices, including the development of processes and tools.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Industry Capability – Sustainability

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Investigate current practices in relation to resource usage	1.1 Identify environmental regulations applying to the enterprise 1.2 Analyse procedures for assessing compliance with environmental/sustainability regulations 1.3 Collect information on environmental and resource efficiency systems and procedures, and provide to the work group where appropriate 1.4 Collect, analyse and organise information from a range of sources to provide information/advice and tools/resources for improvement opportunities 1.5 Measure and document current resource usage of members of the work group 1.6 Analyse and document current purchasing strategies 1.7 Analyse current work processes to access information and data to assist in identifying areas for improvement
2. Set targets for improvements	2.1 Seek input from stakeholders, key personnel and specialists 2.2 Access external sources of information and data as required 2.3 Evaluate alternative solutions to workplace environmental issues 2.4 Set efficiency targets
3. Implement performance improvement strategies	3.1 Source and use appropriate techniques and tools to assist in achieving efficiency targets 3.2 Apply continuous improvement strategies to own work area of responsibility, including ideas and possible solutions to communicate to the work group and management 3.3 Implement and integrate environmental and resource efficiency improvement plans for own work group with other operational activities 3.4 Supervise and support team members to identify possible areas for improved practices and resource efficiency in work area 3.5 Seek suggestions and ideas about environmental and resource efficiency management from stakeholders and act upon where appropriate 3.6 Implement costing strategies to fully utilise environmental assets
4. Monitor performance	4.1 Use and/or develop evaluation and monitoring, tools and technology 4.2 Document and communicate outcomes to report on efficiency targets to key personnel and stakeholders 4.3 Evaluate strategies and improvement plans 4.4 Set new efficiency targets, and investigate and apply new tools and strategies 4.5 Promote successful strategies and reward participants where possible

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1-1.4, 1.6, 1.7, 2.3, 3.1	Identifies and analyses complex texts to determine legislative, regulatory and business requirements Reviews reported information to evaluate workplace strategies and improvement practices
Writing	1.5, 1.6, 2.1, 2.2, 2.4, 3.1-3.3, 4.4, 4.5	Documents findings of investigations from written and oral sources according to organisational requirements Provides updates about progress using formats and language appropriate to the audience and context
Oral Communication	2.1, 2.2, 3.3-3.5, 4.4, 4.5	Presents information and seeks advice using structure and language appropriate to audience Participates in discussions using listening and questioning to elicit the views of others and to clarify or confirm understanding
Numeracy	1.5, 2.4, 3.1, 3.6, 4.4	Analyses numerical information to measure usage and calculates metric measurements, quantities/ratios and financial data using appropriate tools
Navigate the world of work	1.1, 1.2	Recognises and follows legislative requirements and organisational policies and procedures associated with own role
Interact with others	1.3, 2.1, 2.2, 3.3-3.5, 4.2, 4.4, 4.5	Selects and uses appropriate conventions and protocols when communicating with internal and external stakeholders to seek or share information Collaborates and consults with a range of stakeholders to achieve shared understanding of individual roles in meeting objectives
Get the work done	1.2, 1.4-1.7, 2.3, 2.4, 3.1, 3.2, 3.3, 3.5, 3.6, 4.1, 4.3, 4.4	Develops plans to manage routine and non-routine tasks for own work group with an awareness of how they contribute to the broader organisation Uses systematic, analytical processes to set environmental targets, gather relevant information, identify and evaluate alternative approaches Evaluates outcomes of decisions to identify opportunities for improvement Uses the main features and functions of digital tools to complete work tasks and access information

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
BSBSUS301 Implement and monitor environmentally sustainable work practices	BSBSUS301A Implement and monitor environmentally sustainable work practices	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for BSBSUS301 Implement and monitor environmentally sustainable work practices

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with BSB Business Services Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

analyse information from a range of sources to identify current procedures, practices and compliance requirements in relation to environmental and resource sustainability

consult and communicate with relevant stakeholders to seek input and encourage engagement with developing and implementing sustainability improvements, encourage feedback and suggestions and report on outcomes

plan and organise work group activities to:

measure current resource usage

solve problems and generate ideas for improvements

evaluate and implement strategies to improve resource usage

plan, implement and integrate improvements into operations

meet environmental requirements

apply continuous improvement approach to sustainability performance

apply change management techniques to support sustainability performance.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

identify relevant internal and external sources of information and explain how they can be used to identify sustainability improvements

explain the compliance requirements for the work area with reference to legislation, regulations, codes of practice and workplace procedures that relate to environmental and resource issues

outline common environmental and energy efficiency issues within the industry

give examples of benchmarks for environmental and resource sustainability that are relevant to the organisation

outline organisational systems and procedures that relate to environmental and resource sustainability improvements including:

supply chain, procurement and purchasing

quality assurance

making recommendations and seeking approvals

Assessment Conditions

Assessment must be conducted in a safe environment where evidence gathered demonstrates consistent performance of typical activities experienced in the sustainability field of work and include access to:

relevant legislation, regulations, standards and codes

relevant workplace documentation and resources

case studies and, where possible, real situations

interaction with others.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

BSBSUS501 Develop workplace policy and procedures for sustainability

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with BSB Business Services Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to develop and implement a workplace sustainability policy and to modify the policy to suit changed circumstances.

It applies to individuals with managerial responsibilities who undertake work developing approaches to create, monitor and improve strategies and policies within workplaces and engage with a range of relevant stakeholders and specialists.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Industry Capability – Sustainability

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Develop workplace sustainability policy	1.1 Define scope of sustainability policy 1.2 Gather information from a range of sources to plan and develop policy 1.3 Identify and consult stakeholders as a key component of the policy development process 1.4 Include appropriate strategies in policy at all stages of work for minimising resource use, reducing toxic material and hazardous chemical use and employing life cycle management approaches 1.5 Make recommendations for policy options based on likely effectiveness, timeframes and cost 1.6 Develop policy that reflects the organisation’s commitment to sustainability as an integral part of business planning and as a business opportunity 1.7 Agree to appropriate methods of implementation, outcomes and performance indicators
2. Communicate workplace sustainability policy	2.1 Promote workplace sustainability policy, including its expected outcome, to key stakeholders 2.2 Inform those involved in implementing the policy about expected outcomes, activities to be undertaken and assigned responsibilities
3. Implement workplace sustainability policy	3.1 Develop and communicate procedures to help implement workplace sustainability policy 3.2 Implement strategies for continuous improvement in resource efficiency 3.3 Establish and assign responsibility for recording systems to track continuous improvements in sustainability approaches
4. Review workplace sustainability policy implementation	4.1 Document outcomes and provide feedback to key personnel and stakeholders 4.2 Investigate successes or otherwise of policy 4.3 Monitor records to identify trends that may require remedial action and use to promote continuous improvement of performance 4.4 Modify policy and or procedures as required to ensure improvements are made

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 1.2, 4.2, 4.3	Identifies, analyses and evaluates complex textual information to determine legislative and regulatory requirements, trends and outcomes
Writing	1.2-1.7, 2.1, 2.2, 3.1, 3.3, 4.1, 4.3, 4.4	Researches, plans and prepares documentation using format and language appropriate to context, organisational requirements and audience
Oral Communication	1.2, 1.3, 2.1, 2.2, 3.1, 4.1	Presents information and seeks advice using language appropriate to audience Participates in discussions using listening and questioning to elicit the views of others and to clarify or confirm understanding
Numeracy	1.5, 4.3	Interprets and uses mathematical equations to calculate numerical information relating to time durations and costs
Navigate the world of work	1.1-1.6, 3.1, 4.4	Develops, monitors and modifies organisational policies and procedures in accordance with legislative requirements and organisation goals
Interact with others	1.2, 1.3, 2.1, 2.2, 3.1, 3.3, 4.1, 4.3	Selects and uses appropriate conventions and protocols when communicating with internal and external stakeholders to seek or share information Plays a lead role in consulting and negotiating positive outcomes with a range of stakeholders
Get the work done	1.2, 1.4-1.7, 2.3, 2.4, 3.1, 3.2, 3.3, 3.5, 3.6, 4.1, 4.3, 4.4	Plans, organises and implements work activities of self and others that ensure compliance with organisational policies and procedures, and legislative requirements Sequences and schedules complex activities, monitors implementation, and manages relevant communication Uses systematic, analytical processes in relatively complex, situations, setting goals, gathering relevant information, and identifying and evaluating options against agreed criteria Evaluates outcomes of decisions to identify opportunities for improvement

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
BSBSUS501 Develop workplace policy and procedures for sustainability	BSBSUS501A Develop workplace policy and procedures for sustainability	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages Minor edits to clarify performance criteria	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for BSBSUS501 Develop workplace policy and procedures for sustainability

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with BSB Business Services Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

scope and develop organisational policies and procedures that comply with legislative requirements and support the organisation’s sustainability goals covering at a minimum:

minimising resource use

resource efficiency

reducing toxic material and hazardous chemical use

employing life cycle management approaches

continuous improvement

plan and implement sustainability policy and procedures including:

agreed outcomes

performance indicators

activities to be undertaken

assigned responsibilities

record keeping, review and improvement processes

consult and communicate with relevant stakeholders to generate engagement with sustainability policy development, implementation and continuous improvement

review and improve sustainability policies.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

outline the environmental or sustainability legislation, regulations and codes of practice applicable to the organisation identify internal and external sources of information and explain how they can be used to plan and develop the organisation’s sustainability policy

explain policy development processes and practices

outline organisational systems and procedures that relate to sustainability

outline typical barriers to implementing policies and procedures in an organisation and possible strategies to address them.

Assessment Conditions

Assessment must be conducted in a safe environment where evidence gathered demonstrates consistent performance of typical activities experienced in the sustainability field of work and include access to:

relevant legislation, regulations, standards and codes

relevant workplace documentation and resources

case studies and, where possible, real situations

interaction with others.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

BSBWOR301 Organise personal work priorities and development

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with BSB Business Services Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to organise own work schedules, to monitor and obtain feedback on work performance and to maintain required levels of competence.

This unit applies to individuals who exercise discretion and judgement and apply a broad range of competencies in various work contexts.

No licensing, legislative, regulatory or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Industry Capability – Workplace Effectiveness

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Organise and complete own work schedule	1.1 Ensure that work goals, objectives or Key Performance Indicators (KPIs) are understood, negotiated and agreed in accordance with organisational requirements 1.2 Assess and prioritise workload to ensure tasks are completed within identified timeframes 1.3 Identify factors affecting the achievement of work objectives and incorporate contingencies into work plans 1.4 Use business technology efficiently and effectively to manage and monitor scheduling and completion of tasks
2. Monitor own work performance	2.1 Accurately monitor and adjust personal work performance through self assessment to ensure achievement of tasks and compliance with legislation and work processes or KPIs 2.2 Ensure that feedback on performance is actively sought and evaluated from colleagues and clients in the context of individual and group requirements 2.3 Routinely identify and report on variations in the quality of and products and services according to organisational requirements 2.4 Identify signs of stress and effects on personal wellbeing 2.5 Identify sources of stress and access appropriate supports and resolution strategies
3. Co-ordinate personal skill development and learning	3.1 Identify personal learning and professional development needs and skill gaps using self assessment and advice from colleagues and clients in relation to role and organisational requirements 3.2 Identify, prioritise and plan opportunities for undertaking personal skill development activities in liaison with work groups and relevant personnel 3.3 Access, complete and record professional development opportunities to facilitate continuous learning and career development 3.4 Incorporate formal and informal feedback into review of further learning needs

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Learning	3.1-3.4	Employs a range of approaches and investigative techniques to source the knowledge necessary to arrange personal learning experiences
Reading	1.1, 1.2, 2.1	Interprets textual information to determine organisation’s procedures, own work performance and objectives
Writing	1.3, 1.4, 2.3, 3.1, 3.2, 3.3	Prepares written reports and workplace documents that communicate information clearly and effectively
Oral Communication	2.2, 2.3, 3.1, 3.2	Clearly gives and receives feedback using specific and relevant language Uses listening and questioning techniques to confirm understanding
Numeracy	1.1, 1.3	Understands responsibilities and scope of role and complies with organisational policies, procedures and protocols
Interact with others	1.1, 2.2, 2.3, 3.1, 3.2	Selects the appropriate form, channel and mode of communication for a specific purpose relevant to own role Fosters and nurtures a culture of constructive and respectful feedback Proactively collaborates with others to achieve specific goals
Get the work done	1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 2.4, 2.5, 3.2	Plans and organises work commitments to ensure deadlines and objectives are met Uses formal analytical thinking techniques to recognise and respond to routine problems Uses digital systems and tools to enter, store and monitor information

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
BSBWOR301 Organise personal work priorities and development	BSBWOR301B Organise personal work priorities and development	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for BSBWOR301 Organise personal work priorities and development

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with BSB Business Services Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

prepare a work plan according to organisational requirements and work objectives

use business technology to schedule, prioritise and monitor completion of tasks in a work plan

assess and prioritise own work load and deal with contingencies

monitor and assess personal performance against job role requirements by seeking feedback from colleagues and clients

identify personal development needs and access, complete and record skill development and learning.

Note: if a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

outline key provisions of legislation that relate to own work role

describe goals, objectives or key performance indicators of own work role

explain ways to elicit, analyse and interpret feedback when communicating with other people in the workplace

explain the principles and techniques of goal setting, measuring performance, time management and personal assessment of learning and development needs

explain signs and sources of stress and strategies to deal with stress in the workplace

identify methods to identify and prioritise personal learning needs.

Assessment Conditions

Assessment must be conducted in a safe environment where evidence gathered demonstrates consistent performance of typical activities experienced in the industry capability - workplace effectiveness field of work and include access to:

office equipment and resources

work schedules and performance improvement plans

workplace documentation and resources

case studies and, where possible, real situations

interaction with others.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

BSBWOR404 Develop work priorities

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with BSB Business Services Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to monitor and obtain feedback on own work performance and access learning opportunities for professional development.

This unit applies to individuals who are required to design their own work schedules and work plans and to establish priorities for their work. They will typically hold some responsibilities for the work of others and have some autonomy in relation to their own role.

No licensing, legislative, regulatory or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Industry Capability – Workplace Effectiveness

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Plan and complete own work schedule	1.1 Prepare workgroup plans which reflect consideration of resources, client needs and workgroup targets 1.2 Analyse and incorporate work objectives and priorities into personal schedules and responsibilities 1.3 Identify factors affecting the achievement of work objectives and establish contingencies and incorporate them into work plans 1.4 Efficiently and effectively use business technology to manage and monitor planning completion and scheduling of tasks
2. Monitor own work performance	2.1 Identify and analyse personal performance through self-assessment and feedback from others on the achievement of work objectives 2.2 Seek and evaluate feedback on performance from colleagues and clients in the context of individual and group requirements 2.3 Routinely identify and report on variations in the quality of service and performance in accordance with organisational requirements
3. Co-ordinate professional development	3.1 Assess personal knowledge and skills against organisational benchmarks to determine development needs and priorities 3.2 Research and identify sources and plan for opportunities for improvement in consultation with colleagues 3.3 Use feedback to identify and develop ways to improve competence within available opportunities 3.4 Identify, access and complete professional development activities to assist career development 3.5 Store and maintain records and documents relating to achievements and assessments in accordance with organisational requirements

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Learning	3.1, 3.2, 3.3, 3.4	Develops strategies to reflect on own performance, obtain feedback, and plan and source professional development opportunities
Reading	1.2, 2.1, 2.3, 3.1, 3.5	Recognises and interprets textual information from relevant sources to understand organisation’s policies and practices
Writing	1.1, 1.3, 2.2, 2.3, 3.2, 3.5	Prepares written reports and workplace documentation that communicate complex information clearly and effectively
Oral Communication	2.2, 2.3, 3.2	Provides or seeks information using language suitable to audience and context Employs listening and questioning techniques to confirm understanding
Numeracy	1.1, 1.2, 1.3	Interprets numerical information related to budgets and timeframes
Navigate the world of work	1.2, 2.1, 2.3, 3.1, 3.5	Identifies and understands roles and responsibilities in relation to organisational objectives, policies and procedures
Interact with others	2.2, 2.3, 3.2	Selects and uses appropriate practices when communicating with internal and external stakeholders to seek or share information Establishes and builds rapport and relationships with others to foster a culture of trust and honesty in communications
Get the work done	1.1-1.4, 2.3, 3.1, 3.2, 3.4, 3.5	Plans, organises and implements tasks to meet organisational requirements Systematically gathers and analyses information and evaluates options in order to anticipate potential problems and develop contingency plans Uses the main features and functions of digital technologies and tools to complete work tasks efficiently and effectively

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
BSBWOR404 Develop work priorities	BSBWOR404A Develop work priorities	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for BSBWOR404 Develop work priorities

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with BSB Business Services Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

prepare and communicate own work plan

schedule work objectives and tasks to support the achievement of the workgroup goals

review own work performance against workgroup objectives through self-assessment and seeking and acting on feedback from clients and colleagues

plan and access learning opportunities to extend personal work competencies.

Note: if a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

explain how business technology applications can be used to schedule tasks and plan work

explain techniques to prepare personal plans and establish priorities

identify methods to identify and prioritise personal learning needs

outline a range of professional development options

explain methods to elicit, analyse and interpret feedback

provide a detailed explanation of methods that can be used to evaluate own performance.

Assessment Conditions

Assessment must be conducted in a safe environment where evidence gathered demonstrates consistent performance of typical activities experienced in the industry capability - workplace effectiveness field of work and include access to:

workplace documentation including policies and procedures, and benchmarks for work group productivity and performance

workplace equipment and resources

case studies and, where possible, real situations

interaction with others.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

BSBWOR501 Manage personal work priorities and professional development

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with BSB Business Services Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to create systems and process to organise information and prioritise tasks.

It applies to individuals working in managerial positions who have excellent organisational skills. The work ethic of individuals in this role has a significant impact on the work culture and patterns of behaviour of others as managers at this level are role models in their work environment.

No licensing, legislative, regulatory or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Industry Capability – Workplace Effectiveness

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Establish personal work goals	1.1 Serve as a positive role model in the workplace through personal work planning 1.2 Ensure personal work goals, plans and activities reflect the organisation’s plans, and own responsibilities and accountabilities 1.3 Measure and maintain personal performance in varying work conditions, work contexts and when contingencies occur
2. Set and meet own work priorities	2.1 Take initiative to prioritise and facilitate competing demands to achieve personal, team and organisational goals and objectives 2.2 Use technology efficiently and effectively to manage work priorities and commitments 2.3 Maintain appropriate work-life balance, and ensure stress is effectively managed and health is attended to
3. Develop and maintain professional competence	3.1 Assess personal knowledge and skills against competency standards to determine development needs, priorities and plans 3.2 Seek feedback from employees, clients and colleagues and use this feedback to identify and develop ways to improve competence 3.3 Identify, evaluate, select and use development opportunities suitable to personal learning style/s to develop competence 3.4 Participate in networks to enhance personal knowledge, skills and work relationships 3.5 Identify and develop new skills to achieve and maintain a competitive edge

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Learning	3.1, 3.2, 3.3, 3.4, 3.5	Investigates and uses a range of strategies to develop personal competence
Reading	1.2, 3.1, 3.2	Analyses and interprets textual information from organisational policies and practices or feedback to inform personal development planning
Writing	3.2	Uses feedback to prepare reports that summarise ways to improve competence
Oral Communication	3.2	Uses active listening and questioning to seek and receive feedback
Navigate the world of work	1.2, 2.1	Understands how own role contributes to broader organisational goals Considers organisational protocols when planning own career development
Interact with others	1.1, 3.2, 3.4	Selects and uses appropriate conventions and protocols when communicating with diverse stakeholders Uses interpersonal skills to establish and build positive working relationships with others
Get the work done	1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 2.1, 2.2, 2.3, 3.1	Plans and prioritises tasks in order to meet deadlines, manage role responsibilities and to manage own personal welfare Identifies and uses appropriate technology to improve work efficiency

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
BSBWOR501 Manage personal work priorities and professional development	BSBWOR501B Manage personal work priorities and professional development	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages Minor edits to clarify Performance Criteria	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for BSBWOR501 Manage personal work priorities and professional development

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with BSB Business Services Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

use business technology to create and use systems and processes to organise and prioritise tasks and commitments

measure and maintain personal work performance including assessing competency against competency standards and seeking feedback

maintain an appropriate work-life balance to manage personal health and stress

participate in networks

develop a personal development plan which includes career objectives and an action plan

develop new skills.

Note: if a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

explain principles and techniques involved in the management and organisation of:

performance measurement

personal behaviour, selfawareness and personality traits identification

a personal development plan

personal goal setting

time

discuss management development opportunities and options for self

describe methods for achieving a healthy work-life balance

outline organisation’s policies, plans and procedures

explain types of learning style/s and how they relate to the individual

describe types of work methods and practices that can improve personal performance.

Assessment Conditions

Assessment must be conducted in a safe environment where evidence gathered demonstrates consistent performance of typical activities experienced in the industry capability - workplace effectiveness field of work and include access to:

workplace equipment and resources

case studies and, where possible, real situations

interaction with others.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

BSBWOR502 Lead and manage team effectiveness

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with BSB Business Services Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to lead teams in the workplace and to actively engage with the management of the organisation.

It applies to individuals working at a managerial level who facilitate work teams and build a positive culture within their work teams. At this level, work will normally be carried out using complex and diverse methods and procedures requiring the exercise of considerable discretion and judgement, using a range of problem solving and decision making strategies.

No licensing, legislative, regulatory or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Industry Capability – Workplace Effectiveness

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Establish team performance plan	1.1 Consult team members to establish a common understanding of team purpose, roles, responsibilities and accountabilities in accordance with organisational goals, plans and objectives 1.2 Develop performance plans to establish expected outcomes, outputs, key performance indicators (KPIs) and goals for work team 1.3 Support team members in meeting expected performance outcomes
2. Develop and facilitate team cohesion	2.1 Develop strategies to ensure team members have input into planning, decision making and operational aspects of work team 2.2 Develop policies and procedures to ensure team members take responsibility for own work and assist others to undertake required roles and responsibilities 2.3 Provide feedback to team members to encourage, value and reward individual and team efforts and contributions 2.4 Develop processes to ensure that issues, concerns and problems identified by team members are recognised and addressed
3. Facilitate teamwork	3.1 Encourage team members and individuals to participate in and to take responsibility for team activities, including communication processes 3.2 Support the team in identifying and resolving work performance problems 3.3 Ensure own contribution to work team serves as a role model for others and enhances the organisation’s image for all stakeholders
4. Liaise with stakeholders	4.1 Establish and maintain open communication processes with all stakeholders 4.2 Communicate information from line manager/management to the team 4.3 Communicate unresolved issues, concerns and problems raised by team members and followup with line manager/management and other relevant stakeholders 4.4 Evaluate and take necessary corrective action regarding unresolved issues, concerns and problems raised by internal or external stakeholders

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 4.4	Analyses and interprets textual information from the organisation’s policies, goals and objectives to establish team goals or to determine corrective action
Writing	1.2, 2.1, 2.2, 2.4, 4.2, 4.3, 4.4	Prepares written reports and workplace documentation that communicate complex information clearly and effectively
Oral Communication	1.1, 2.3, 3.1, 4.1, 4.2, 4.3	Engages in discussions or provides information using appropriate vocabulary and non-verbal features Uses listening and questioning techniques to confirm understanding and to engage the audience
Navigate the world of work	1.1, 2.1, 2.2, 3.3	Understands how own role contributes to broader organisational goals Modifies or develops policies and procedures to achieve organisational goals
Interact with others	1.1, 1.3, 2.2, 2.3, 3.1, 3.2, 4.2, 4.3	Selects and uses appropriate conventions and protocols when communicating with diverse stakeholders Uses interpersonal skills to gain trust and confidence of team and provides feedback to others in forms that they can understand and use Adapts personal communication style to build positive working relationships and to show respect for the opinions, values and particular needs of others Plays a lead role in situations requiring effective collaboration, demonstrating high level conflict resolution skills and ability to engage and motivate others
Get the work done	1.2, 2.1, 2.2, 2.4, 3.2, 4.1, 4.3, 4.4	Develops, implements and monitors plans and processes to ensure team effectiveness Monitors and actively supports processes and development activities to ensure the team is focused on work outcomes Plans for unexpected outcomes and implements creative responses to overcome challenges

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
BSBWOR502 Lead and manage team effectiveness	BSBWOR502B Ensure team effectiveness	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages Title change	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for BSBWOR502 Lead and manage team effectiveness

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with BSB Business Services Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

use leadership techniques and strategies to facilitate team cohesion and work outcomes including:

encouraging and fostering shared understanding of purpose, roles and responsibilities

identifying and resolving problems

providing feedback to encourage, value and reward others

modelling desired behaviour and practices

develop policies and procedures to ensure team members take responsibility for own work and assist others to undertake required roles and responsibilities

establish processes to address issues and resolve performance issues

support team to meet expected performance outcomes including providing formal and informal learning opportunities as needed

develop performance plans with key performance indicators (KPIs), outputs and goals for individuals or the team which incorporate input from stakeholders

communicate effectively with a range of stakeholders about team performance plans and team performance

facilitate two-way flow of information between team and management relevant to team performance

evaluate and take necessary corrective action regarding unresolved issues, concerns and problems raised by internal or external stakeholders.

Note: if a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

explain how group dynamics can support or hinder team performance

outline strategies that can support team cohesion, participation and performance

explain strategies for gaining consensus

explain issue resolution strategies.

Assessment Conditions

Assessment must be conducted in a safe environment where evidence gathered demonstrates consistent performance of typical activities experienced in the industry capability - workplace effectiveness field of work and include access to:

workplace documents

case studies and, where possible, real situations

office equipment and resources

interaction with others.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

CUFANM301A Create 2D digital animations

Modification History

Not applicable.

Unit Descriptor

Unit descriptor	This unit describes the performance outcomes, skills and knowledge required to use industry-current software to create 2D animations. No licensing, legislative, regulatory or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of endorsement.

Application of the Unit

Application of the unit	This unit addresses basic 2D animation skills directed at developing animations for inclusion in interactive media products, short stand-alone animated sequences and basic games. A person in this role works closely with other members of a production team and reports to a senior animator, designer, director or producer. The short dynamic animations they produce may include audio components. Skills associated with 3D digital animation are covered in: CUFANM302A Create 3D digital animations. More complex skills associated with 3D character animation, including animating facial expressions and lip syncing, are covered in: CUFANM501A Create 3D digital character animation.

Licensing/Regulatory Information

Not applicable.

Pre-Requisites

Prerequisite units

Employability Skills Information

Employability skills	This unit contains employability skills.

Elements and Performance Criteria Pre-Content

Elements describe the essential outcomes of a unit of competency.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element. Where bold italicised text is used, further information is detailed in the required skills and knowledge section and the range statement. Assessment of performance is to be consistent with the evidence guide.

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Identify animation requirements	1. Clarify 2D animation requirements, including design specifications and storyboard in consultation with relevant personnel 2. Clarify target users/audience and requirements with regard to output formats and delivery platforms
Generate and assess ideas	3. Review animations, artworks and other creative sources that may inspire design ideas 4. Obtain other relevant information that may influence design ideas 5. Generate a range of animation ideas that are technically feasible, respond to specifications and provide creative solutions to all design issues 6. Present animation ideas to relevant personnel using appropriate design techniques
Plan approach	7. Assess the range of industry-current 2D animation software available to determine compatibility with design specifications 8. In consultation with relevant personnel, select the most appropriate 2D animation software for a given purpose 9. Evaluate initial design ideas and specifications against findings and discuss with relevant personnel to select final design concept
Produce animations	10. Apply basic screen principles, visual design principles, communication principles, animation techniques and animation principles to produce animated sequences 11. Source and import, or generate sufficient quantity of key drawings to establish required actions 12. Combine animated objects to produce single sequences according to creative requirements and specifications 13. Integrate audio assets where necessary 14. Save and store animations using appropriate output file formats and standard naming conventions
Finalise animations	15. Review animations to assess creative solutions to design specifications, appropriateness to users/audience and technical feasibility 16. Discuss and confirm with relevant personnel additional requirements or modifications to overall designs or animations and undertake necessary amendments

Required Skills and Knowledge

REQUIRED SKILLS AND KNOWLEDGE
This section describes the skills and knowledge required for this unit.
Required skills
communication, teamwork and literacy skills sufficient to: interpret and clarify written or verbal instructions interpret information in software user manuals and help features work as a member of a project team, both independently on assignment and under direction respond constructively to feedback received from other team members initiative and enterprise in the context of: generating a range of feasible ideas for 2D animated sequences visualising creative concepts technical skills sufficient to: use appropriate software to develop 2D animations produce hand-drawn sketches apply the basic principles of screen, visual design and communication to produce 2D animations create 2D animations in appropriate formats for a range of delivery platforms manage files and directories using standard naming conventions and version control protocols self-management and planning skills sufficient to: prioritise work tasks meet deadlines seek expert assistance when problems arise
Required knowledge
industry knowledge, including: roles and responsibilities of project team members basic understanding of the relationship between the technical and creative aspects and requirements of media projects basic animation techniques and principles basic screen principles principles of visual design and communication copyright clearance procedures OHS standards as they apply to use of computer and keyboard for periods of time

Evidence Guide

EVIDENCE GUIDE
The Evidence Guide provides advice on assessment and must be read in conjunction with the performance criteria, required skills and knowledge, range statement and the Assessment Guidelines for the Training Package.
Overview of assessment
Critical aspects for assessment and evidence required to demonstrate competency in this unit	Evidence of the following is essential: creation of a range of 2D digital animations that: meet specifications demonstrate the basic principles of screen, visual design and communication meet the technical requirements of at least two delivery platforms listed in the range statement satisfy client requirements collaborative approach to work.
Context of and specific resources for assessment	Assessment must ensure: access to a selection of resources, equipment and current industry-current software as listed in the range statement where sound is integrated in the animated sequence, access to a range of suitable software to support the integration of sound and visual elements access to appropriate learning and assessment support when required use of culturally appropriate processes and techniques appropriate to the language and literacy capacity of learners and the work being performed.
Method of assessment	A range of assessment methods should be used to assess practical skills and knowledge. The following examples are appropriate for this unit: direct questioning combined with review of portfolios of evidence and third-party workplace reports of on-the-job performance evaluation of a range of 2D digital animations created by the candidate in response to specifications written or oral questioning to test knowledge of visual design principles, communication principles, animation techniques and responsibilities of different members of a project team.
Guidance information for assessment	Holistic assessment with other units relevant to the industry sector, workplace and job role is recommended, for example: CUFANM302A Create 3D digital animations CUFDIG301A Prepare video assets CUFDIG304A Create visual design components.

Range Statement

RANGE STATEMENT
The range statement relates to the unit of competency as a whole. It allows for different work environments and situations that may affect performance. Bold italicised wording, if used in the performance criteria, is detailed below. Essential operating conditions that may be present with training and assessment (depending on the work situation, needs of the candidate, accessibility of the item, and local industry and regional contexts) may also be included.
2D animations may include:	basic games buttons characters illustrations logos morphs objects puzzles simulated sequences text titles and credits.
Design specifications may include:	characters and objects key frames objects references samples script storyboard technical specifications, including: output file format output file size operating system hardware specifications, including memory size, RAM delivery platform bandwidth media form.
Relevant personnel may include:	art director audio asset creator designer director graphic artist instructional designer navigation designer producer project manager system support personnel other technical and specialist personnel.
Output formats may include:	DIR/DCR FLA/SWF GIF HTML.
Delivery platforms may include:	CD DVD film games console internet kiosk mobile phone PDA (personal digital assistant) video other mobile devices.
Design techniques may include:	digital illustrations of objects and characters freehand sketches storyboards story trees.
Animation software may include:	Director Flash Toon Boon Studio.
Screen principles may include:	editing, including basic transitions framing lighting montage narrative story-telling style/genre.
Visual design principles may include:	balance composition emphasis focal point movement perspective proportion scale unity.
Communication principles may include:	communicating the message conveying meaning meeting audience requirements using functional components.
Animation techniques may include:	acceleration/deceleration audio integration hinges and pivots key frames and tweens looping backgrounds morphing/object exaggeration motion paths registration points rotation speed/motion blur.
Animation principles may include:	key frames motion pacing/timing point of view.
Audio assets may include:	music narration sound effects.

Unit Sector(s)

Unit sector

Competency field

Competency field	Visual communication - animation and digital effects

Co-requisite units

Co-requisite units

CUFANM302A Create 3D digital animations

Modification History

Not applicable.

Unit Descriptor

Unit descriptor	This unit describes the performance outcomes, skills and knowledge required to animate simple 3D models and create 3D animations. No licensing, legislative, regulatory or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of endorsement.

Application of the Unit

Application of the unit	This unit requires the application of basic 3D animation skills to create animations for inclusion in interactive media products, short stand-alone animated sequences and basic games. At this level, animators are working with 3D digital models that have already been created. Animated sequences may include audio components. Animations are created using a range of industry-current software that is constantly evolving, so it is essential that people working in this area keep up to date with the latest software. This unit does not include techniques for stop-motion, cell-analogue and real time animation. Nor does it cover more sophisticated animation techniques used in film, television and high-end games. These are addressed in: CUFANM501A Create 3D digital character animation CUFANM502A Create 3D digital environments.

Licensing/Regulatory Information

Not applicable.

Pre-Requisites

Prerequisite units

Employability Skills Information

Employability skills	This unit contains employability skills.

Elements and Performance Criteria Pre-Content

Elements describe the essential outcomes of a unit of competency.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element. Where bold italicised text is used, further information is detailed in the required skills and knowledge section and the range statement. Assessment of performance is to be consistent with the evidence guide.

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Clarify animation requirements	1. With reference to production documentation, clarify 3D animation requirements and design specifications in consultation with relevant personnel 2. Examine the models to be animated to determine the most appropriate animation techniques 3. Identify the file format and delivery platform for animated sequences 4. Identify factors that may influence animation design approach 5. In consultation with relevant personnel, clarify work flow sequences to ensure that production schedule deadlines are met
Plan approach	6. Research animations, artworks and other creative sources that may inspire visual design ideas 7. Generate a range of animation ideas that are technically feasible, respond to briefs and provide creative solutions to all design issues 8. Present animation ideas to relevant personnel using appropriate design techniques. 9. Adjust approach to incorporate feedback and agree on final design concepts 10. Discuss and select 3D animation software with relevant personnel to ensure that animated sequences meet specified outcomes 11. Analyse audio assets supplied for animations as required
Produce animated sequences for review	12. Create 3D animations using animation techniques to suit design requirements 13. Apply basic animation principles, screen principles, visual design principles and communication principles 14. Apply real world camera techniques to virtual cameras used in 3D animation 15. Render completed animated sequences 16. Save and store animated sequences using appropriate output file formats, standard naming conventions and version control protocols 17. Present 3D animated sequences to relevant personnel for evaluation by agreed deadlines
Finalise animated sequences	18. Review animated sequences to assess creative solutions to design briefs, appropriateness to users/audience and technical feasibility 19. Discuss and confirm with relevant personnel additional requirements or modifications and complete changes as required

Required Skills and Knowledge

REQUIRED SKILLS AND KNOWLEDGE
This section describes the skills and knowledge required for this unit.
Required skills
communication, teamwork and literacy skills sufficient to: interpret and clarify written or verbal instructions work as a member of a production team, both independently on assignment and under direction respond constructively to feedback received from other team members complete workplace documentation conceptual and creative skills in the context of: generating feasible ideas for animated sequences having a feel for movement and timing in order to produce convincing animations maintaining design integrity technical skills sufficient to: use industry-current animation software to develop digitally animated sequences apply the principles of basic screen, visual design and communication to produce 3D animated sequences output 3D animated sequences in appropriate file formats for a range of delivery platforms manage files and directories using standard naming conventions and version control protocols self-management and planning skills sufficient to: prioritise work tasks meet deadlines seek expert assistance when problems arise
Required knowledge
roles and responsibilities of project team members in the relevant industry sector basic understanding of the stages in the production process from initial design through to finished product issues and challenges that arise in the context of creating 3D digital animations basic 3D digital animation techniques basic screen principles principles of animation principles of visual design and communication features of a range of delivery platforms OHS standards as they relate to working for periods of time on computers

Evidence Guide

EVIDENCE GUIDE
The Evidence Guide provides advice on assessment and must be read in conjunction with the performance criteria, required skills and knowledge, range statement and the Assessment Guidelines for the Training Package.
Overview of assessment
Critical aspects for assessment and evidence required to demonstrate competency in this unit	Evidence of the following is essential: creation of 3D digital animated sequences that: demonstrate the principles of basic screen, visual design and communication meet the technical requirements of specific platforms satisfy the design brief and client requirements collaborative approach to work attention to detail ability to meet production deadlines.
Context of and specific resources for assessment	Assessment must ensure: access to a range of resources, equipment and current industry-current software as listed in the range statement where sound is integrated in animated sequences, access to a range of suitable software to support the integration of sound and visual elements access to appropriate learning and assessment support when required use of culturally appropriate processes and techniques appropriate to the language and literacy capacity of learners and the work being performed.
Method of assessment	A range of assessment methods should be used to assess practical skills and knowledge. The following examples are appropriate for this unit: direct questioning combined with review of portfolios of evidence, authenticated show reels and third-party workplace reports of on-the-job performance critical analysis of a range of 3D digital animated sequences created by the candidate to determine ability to meet design requirements written or verbal questioning to test knowledge as listed in the required skills and knowledge section of this unit informal questioning and discussion, including response to feedback and diagnostics.
Guidance information for assessment	Holistic assessment with other units relevant to the industry sector, workplace and job role is recommended, for example: CUFANM303A Create 3D digital models CUFDIG303A Produce and prepare photo images CUFDIG304A Create visual design components CUFSOU301A Prepare audio assets.

Range Statement

RANGE STATEMENT
The range statement relates to the unit of competency as a whole. It allows for different work environments and situations that may affect performance. Bold italicised wording, if used in the performance criteria, is detailed below. Essential operating conditions that may be present with training and assessment (depending on the work situation, needs of the candidate, accessibility of the item, and local industry and regional contexts) may also be included.
Production documentation may include	animatics brief storyboard technical specifications.
3D animations may include:	3D elements 3D panoramas basic games buttons characters illustrations logos models morphs/blend shapes puzzles simulated sequences text titles and credits.
Design specifications may include:	characters and objects key frames objects references samples script storyboard technical specifications, including: output file format version control protocols output file size operating system hardware specifications, including memory size, RAM delivery platform media form.
Relevant personnel may include:	3D modeller 3D producer animation director audio asset creator director graphic artist/designer instructional designer lead animator matte painter system support personnel other technical and specialist personnel.
Animation techniques may include:	acceleration/deceleration audio integration dynamic simulation hierarchies hinges and pivot points hybrid method key frames layered animation looping backgrounds morphing/object exaggeration motion capture motion paths pose to pose animation registration points rotation scripted animation speed/motion blur straight-ahead animation.
File formats may include:	AAS ACT ANI ANM ANS AVI AWA AWM CEL CFT CMV DIR/DCR FLA/SWF FLC FLI FLX GIF HTML IFF JPEG LWOB M3D MMM MOV MPEG MWF PNG QTVR SEC TIFF VAN VUE.
Delivery platforms may include:	CD DVD film games console internet kiosk mobile phone or device PDA (personal digital assistant) video.
Factors may include:	budget purpose of animation resources target audience timelines.
Design techniques may include:	digitally generated illustrations of objects and/or characters freehand sketches fully rendered hand-drawn illustrations story trees storyboards.
Animation software may include:	3D Studio Max Cinema 4D Houdini Lightwave Maya Motionbuilder Soft Image - XSI.
Audio assets may include:	music narration sound effects.
Animation principles may include:	anticipation asymmetry in body and facial poses balanced poses exaggeration movement in arcs overlapping actions and follow-through pacing/timing secondary actions singularity of message squash and stretch staging strong silhouette in poses weight.
Screen principles may include:	camera techniques editing, including basic transitions framing lighting montage narrative story-telling style/genre.
Visual design principles may include:	balance composition emphasis movement perspective proportion scale unity.
Communication principles may include:	communicating the message conveying meaning meeting audience requirements using functional components.

Unit Sector(s)

Unit sector

Competency field

Competency field	Visual communication - animation and digital effects

Co-requisite units

Co-requisite units

CUFANM303A Create 3D digital models

Modification History

Not applicable.

Unit Descriptor

Unit descriptor	This unit describes the performance outcomes, skills and knowledge required to create 3D digital models. This unit is a prerequisite for: CUFANM401A Prepare 3D digital models for production. No licensing, legislative, regulatory or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of endorsement.

Application of the Unit

Application of the unit	3D modellers working on relatively simple projects apply the skills and knowledge described in this unit. From reference material and established designs, they create 3D models using whatever software is applicable to the production. 3D models need to meet technical and design specifications, as well as being efficient, reliable, to scale, and easy to rig and animate. Modellers need to appreciate what will be required of their models in later stages of production because this can affect the work they produce. Close liaison with other team members is, therefore, important. Even though a senior modeller or technical director supervises the creation of models, people at this level are expected to work autonomously within clear guidelines. More complex skills associated with 3D digital modelling are covered in: CUFANM401A Prepare 3D digital models for production.

Licensing/Regulatory Information

Not applicable.

Pre-Requisites

Prerequisite units

Employability Skills Information

Employability skills	This unit contains employability skills.

Elements and Performance Criteria Pre-Content

Elements describe the essential outcomes of a unit of competency.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element. Where bold italicised text is used, further information is detailed in the required skills and knowledge section and the range statement. Assessment of performance is to be consistent with the evidence guide.

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Clarify work requirements	1. With reference to production documentation, clarify requirements and purpose for 3D digital models 2. In consultation with relevant personnel, clarify work flow sequences to ensure that production schedule deadlines are met 3. Select software that best suits the type of production and delivery platform for which 3D digital models are being created 4. Gather and analyse reference materials to help with visualisation of 3D models
Create 3D digital models	5. Use software features to block out models to determine correct proportions in relation to reference materials 6. Manipulate software features to apply basic lighting and shaders as required 7. Ensure that models' topology allows appropriate deformation, as required 8. Progressively refine and check integrity of models until they meet design requirements 9. Submit models to relevant personnel for comment on whether production requirements have been met and make final adjustments as required 10. Render and output models in required format and submit to relevant personnel by agreed deadlines 11. Make back-up copies of files and complete workplace documentation according to enterprise procedures

Required Skills and Knowledge

REQUIRED SKILLS AND KNOWLEDGE
This section describes the skills and knowledge required for this unit.
Required skills
communication, teamwork and literacy skills sufficient to: interpret and clarify written or verbal instructions work as a member of a production team, both independently on assignment and under direction respond constructively to feedback received from other team members complete workplace documentation technical skills sufficient to: use industry-current software applications to create 3D models to specifications manage files and directories using standard naming conventions and version control protocols make back-up copies of files and store appropriately initiative and creativity in the context of visualising and accurately creating 3D digital models of a range of animate and inanimate objects self-management and planning skills sufficient to: prioritise work tasks meet deadlines seek expert assistance when problems arise
Required knowledge
roles and responsibilities of project team members in the relevant industry sector basic understanding of the stages in the production process from initial design through to finished product issues and challenges that arise in the context of creating 3D digital models 3D digital modelling techniques strong sense of scale, form, weight and volume geometry as it applies to the creation of realistic 3D digital models features of a range of delivery platforms OHS standards as they relate to working for periods of time on computers

Evidence Guide

EVIDENCE GUIDE
The Evidence Guide provides advice on assessment and must be read in conjunction with the performance criteria, required skills and knowledge, range statement and the Assessment Guidelines for the Training Package.
Overview of assessment
Critical aspects for assessment and evidence required to demonstrate competency in this unit	Evidence of the following is essential: creation of 3D digital models that: demonstrate efficient use of geometry and attention to detail meet design requirements collaborative approach to work ability to meet deadlines.
Context of and specific resources for assessment	Assessment must ensure: access to a selection of industry-current software as listed in the range statement access to simulated or real production situations that require the creation of 3D digital models access to appropriate learning and assessment support when required use of culturally appropriate processes and techniques appropriate to the language and literacy capacity of learners and the work being performed.
Method of assessment	A range of assessment methods should be used to assess practical skills and knowledge. The following examples are appropriate for this unit: direct questioning combined with review of portfolios of evidence and third-party workplace reports of on-the-job performance evaluation of a range of 3D digital models created by the candidate to determine ability to create models for different kinds of objects written or verbal questioning to test knowledge as listed in the required skills and knowledge section of this unit.
Guidance information for assessment	Holistic assessment with other units relevant to the industry sector, workplace and job role is recommended, for example: CUFANM302A Create 3D digital animations CUVDSP11A Research and apply techniques for illustrative work CUVVSP16A Research and experiment with techniques to produce drawings.

Range Statement

RANGE STATEMENT
The range statement relates to the unit of competency as a whole. It allows for different work environments and situations that may affect performance. Bold italicised wording, if used in the performance criteria, is detailed below. Essential operating conditions that may be present with training and assessment (depending on the work situation, needs of the candidate, accessibility of the item, and local industry and regional contexts) may also be included.
Production documentation may include:	animatics brief storyboard technical specifications.
Requirements may include:	assets for integration collaboration with other team members creative expectations design specifications output format technical specifications timelines.
Purpose of 3D digital models may be for:	animations digital simulations, e.g.: architectural models e-learning resources demonstration of processes and procedures.
Relevant personnel may include:	3D designer or concept artist 3D modeller art director director head of department matte painter producer project manager storyboard artist supervisor technical director other technical/specialist personnel.
Production may include:	animated productions commercials digital media products, e.g.: simulations games e-learning resources virtual worlds/environments documentaries feature films filmed events or performances music video short films television productions.
Software may include:	3D, e.g.: 3D Studio Max Maya Softimage graphics, e.g.: Photoshop Illustrator.
Delivery platforms may include:	broadcast television CD DVD film internet Kiosk mobile phone PDA (personal digital assistant) other digital devices.
Reference materials may include:	books concept drawings and designs direct observation of actions to be simulated in 3D models real object on which models are to be based still images videos.
Progressive refinements may include:	achieving required shape achieving required topology.
Aspects to be checked for integrity may include:	double faces isolated vertices pivot points resetting transform scale of models relative to other components in final sequences.
Formats may include:	AVI IFF JPEG MPEG PNG Quicktime Targa TIFF.

Unit Sector(s)

Unit sector

Competency field

Competency field	Visual communication - Animation and digital effects

Co-requisite units

Co-requisite units

CUFANM401A Prepare 3D digital models for production

Modification History

Not applicable.

Unit Descriptor

Unit descriptor	This unit describes the performance outcomes, skills and knowledge required to prepare 3D digital models for a range of contexts. No licensing, legislative, regulatory or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of endorsement.

Application of the Unit

Application of the unit	This unit requires the application of 3D digital modelling skills to prepare 3D models (including character models) to a high level of finish so they are ready for use in animations, high-end games, virtual worlds or specialist digital resource materials in areas such as medicine, architecture, engineering and aeronautics. On small-scale productions, modellers also rig, build textures and create lighting. On larger projects, they may be required to liaise with riggers, texture and lighting artists. Even though work at this level is undertaken with minimum supervision, modellers are members of a production team and close collaboration with other team members is essential, as is an ability to deliver on schedule and to work under pressure. As they develop their skills and interests, modellers may concentrate on different areas, such as characters, objects, environments and special effects. Aspects of these skills are covered in: CUFANM402A Create digital visual effects CUFANM501A Create 3D digital character animation CUFANM502A Create 3D digital environments.

Licensing/Regulatory Information

Not applicable.

Pre-Requisites

Prerequisite units	CUFANM310A Create 3D digital models

Employability Skills Information

Employability skills	This unit contains employability skills.

Elements and Performance Criteria Pre-Content

Elements describe the essential outcomes of a unit of competency.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element. Where bold italicised text is used, further information is detailed in the required skills and knowledge section and the range statement. Assessment of performance is to be consistent with the evidence guide.

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Clarify work requirements	1. With reference to production documentation, clarify requirements and purpose for 3D digital models 2. In consultation with relevant personnel, clarify work flow sequences to ensure that production schedule deadlines are met 3. Select software that best suits the type of production and delivery platform for which 3D digital models are being prepared 4. Gather and analyse reference material to help with visualisation of final models
Prepare 3D models	5. Build and modify shaders to achieve required outcome 6. Apply texture coordinates or UV mapping as required 7. Paint required texture maps 8. Use appropriate lighting techniques to light the 3D models as required 9. Rig 3D models as required, ensuring that controls are logical and easy to use, and that rigs are robust and perform to specifications 10. Set up model deformations as required 11. Use scripting language as required to enhance the functionality of rigs 12. Create morph targets or blend shapes as required
Finalise 3D digital models	13. Test models to identify faults, and adjust as required 14. Submit final models to relevant personnel by agreed deadlines 15. Make back-up copies in accordance with enterprise procedures 16. Complete workplace documentation as required 17. Render final models as required 18. Review process of constructing 3D digital models and note areas for future improvement

Required Skills and Knowledge

REQUIRED SKILLS AND KNOWLEDGE
This section describes the skills and knowledge required for this unit.
Required skills
communication, teamwork and literacy skills sufficient to: interpret and clarify written or verbal instructions work collaboratively with other team members respond constructively to feedback received from other team members complete workplace documentation technical skills sufficient to: use the full range of features of industry-current software applications to prepare 3D digital models to specifications follow design reference accurately and work in a range of styles manage files and directories using standard naming conventions and version control protocols make back-up copies of files on a continuous basis and store appropriately initiative and creativity in the context of: visualising and modelling 3D characters, props and environments to a high level of finish analysing and solving problems as they arise during the modelling process self-management, learning and planning skills sufficient to: prioritise work tasks meet deadlines continuously improve skills and knowledge by keeping up to date with industry developments and new software features seek expert assistance as required
Required knowledge
industry knowledge, including: roles and responsibilities of project team members in the relevant industry sector sound understanding of the relationship between the technical and creative aspects and requirements of productions in which 3D digital models are used issues and challenges that arise in the context of preparing 3D digital models well-developed drawing skills, including use of light and shadow good understanding of anatomy modelling techniques with polygons and NURBS strong sense of scale, form, weight and volume strong understanding of light, colour, composition and mood technical parameters of various platforms and how these impact on the process of preparing 3D digital models OHS standards as they relate to working for periods of time on computers

Evidence Guide

EVIDENCE GUIDE
The Evidence Guide provides advice on assessment and must be read in conjunction with the performance criteria, required skills and knowledge, range statement and the Assessment Guidelines for the Training Package.
Overview of assessment
Critical aspects for assessment and evidence required to demonstrate competency in this unit	Evidence of the following is essential: 3D digital models created to a high level of finish that: are robust and perform to specifications demonstrate attention to detail meet design and aesthetic requirements collaborative approach to work ability to meet deadlines.
Context of and specific resources for assessment	Assessment must ensure: access to a selection of industry-current software as listed in the range statement access to simulated or real production situations that require the preparation of 3D digital models access to appropriate learning and assessment support when required use of culturally appropriate processes and techniques appropriate to the language and literacy capacity of learners and the work being performed.
Method of assessment	A range of assessment methods should be used to assess practical skills and knowledge. The following examples are appropriate for this unit: direct questioning combined with review of portfolios of evidence and third-party workplace reports of on-the-job performance evaluation of a range of 3D digital models prepared by the candidate to determine ability to create models in a range of styles written or verbal questioning to test knowledge as listed in the required skills and knowledge section of this unit.
Guidance information for assessment	Holistic assessment with other units relevant to the industry sector, workplace and job role is recommended, for example: BSBCRT402A Collaborate in a creative process CUFANM402A Create digital visual effects CUFANM501A Create 3D digital character animation CUFANM502A Create 3D digital environments.

Range Statement

RANGE STATEMENT
The range statement relates to the unit of competency as a whole. It allows for different work environments and situations that may affect performance. Bold italicised wording, if used in the performance criteria, is detailed below. Essential operating conditions that may be present with training and assessment (depending on the work situation, needs of the candidate, accessibility of the item, and local industry and regional contexts) may also be included.
Production documentation may include:	animatics brief storyboard technical specifications.
Requirements may include:	assets for integration collaboration with other team members creative expectations design specifications output format technical specifications timelines.
Purpose of 3D digital models may be for:	animations digital simulations, e.g.: architectural models e-learning resource demonstration of processes and procedures.
Relevant personnel may include:	3D designer or concept artist 3D modeller art director director head of department matte painter producer project manager storyboard artist supervisor technical director technical/specialist personnel.
Software may include:	graphics, e.g. Illustrator Photoshop 3D 3D Studio Max Maya Softimage.
Delivery platform may include:	broadcast television CD DVD film games console internet kiosk mobile phone mobile phone or other digital devices personal digital assistant (PDA) video.
Reference material may include:	books concept drawings and designs direct observation of actions to be simulated in 3D models maquette real objects on which models are to be based still images videos.
Application of texture coordinates involves:	efficient use of texture space logical layout to facilitate ease of painting textures minimal texture distortion minimal texture seams.
Texture maps may include:	bump colour normal reflection specular transparency.
Lighting techniques may include:	global illumination image-based lighting radiosity simple lighting set-ups vertex lighting.
Model deformations may include:	corrective morph targets muscle simulations skinning of model to rig weighting of vertices wrap deformers.
Scripting languages may include:	MAX MEL Python.

Unit Sector(s)

Unit sector

Competency field

Competency field	Visual communication - animation and digital effects

Co-requisite units

Co-requisite units

CUFANM403A Create titles for screen productions

Modification History

Not applicable.

Unit Descriptor

Unit descriptor	This unit describes the performance outcomes, skills and knowledge required to create digital titles for screen productions. No licensing, legislative, regulatory or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of endorsement.

Application of the Unit

Application of the unit	Titles designers or graphic artists working in the screen and media industries apply the skills and knowledge described in this unit. They are responsible for designing the opening titles and captions that appear in film and television productions and in digital media products, such as games and e-learning resources. They work closely with directors and post-production personnel to ensure that screen titles reflect the theme and mood of the overall production or product. A collaborative approach to work is therefore essential, as is an ability to meet deadlines.

Licensing/Regulatory Information

Not applicable.

Pre-Requisites

Prerequisite units

Employability Skills Information

Employability skills	This unit contains employability skills.

Elements and Performance Criteria Pre-Content

Elements describe the essential outcomes of a unit of competency.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element. Where bold italicised text is used, further information is detailed in the required skills and knowledge section and the range statement. Assessment of performance is to be consistent with the evidence guide.

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Clarify work requirements	1. With reference to production documentation, clarify requirements for screen titles 2. In consultation with relevant personnel, clarify work flow sequences to ensure that production schedule deadlines are met 3. Identify the available budget for the production of titles as required
Identify items to be included in titles	4. Produce and maintain a schedule of items to be included in titles 5. Determine if graphic items need to be imported from other sources and source these items as required 6. Obtain copyright clearances to use imported items as required 7. Select appropriate fonts and/or create fonts as required
Generate and assess ideas	8. Generate a range of ideas for the design of screen titles that respond sympathetically to briefs and provide creative solutions to all design issues 9. Discuss ideas and collaborate, as required, with relevant personnel to ensure contribution of ideas to initial concepts 10. Continuously reflect on and appraise ideas for implications on cost, technical feasibility and suitability to meet specifications
Create titles	11. Incorporate and manipulate moving or static graphic items to be included in titles 12. Modify titles and source items to ensure that the required visual effect is achieved 13. Trial various techniques and styles and produce initial compilation of titles ensuring that style, content and creative intentions are met 14. Decide upon the appropriate parameters of display to meet with creative requirements and technical specifications 15. Review initial titles to ensure that they meet technical and creative requirements 16. Ensure that the movement of titles and other graphic items maximises the visual impact required for productions 17. Ensure that titles incorporate captions with required images and sound, and are correctly synchronised with sound 18. Ensure that titles are legible and appropriately spaced 19. Record and store titles and other graphic images according to enterprise procedures
Finalise titles	20. Present initial title compilations to relevant personnel for feedback 21. Participate in initial and ongoing evaluation of titles 22. Confirm accuracy of text, spelling, punctuation and content 23. Negotiate and agree to additional requirements and modify titles as required 24. Ensure that agreement is reached with, and approval granted by, relevant personnel before proceeding with the final production of titles 25. Review process of creating titles and note areas for future improvement

Required Skills and Knowledge

REQUIRED SKILLS AND KNOWLEDGE
This section describes the skills and knowledge required for this unit.
Required skills
communication, teamwork and literacy skills sufficient to: interpret and clarify written or verbal instructions collect and interpret creative information, scripts and images use correct grammar and spelling in screen titles work collaboratively in a team environment, both independently and under direction respond constructively to feedback received from other team members complete workplace documentation technical skills sufficient to: use common features of industry-current visual effects software to create screen titles produce screen titles for a range of output formats manage files and directories using standard naming conventions and version control protocols initiative and creativity in the context of: visualising and interpreting creative concepts maintaining design integrity creatively integrating media assets to achieve the required digital visual effects troubleshooting and solving problems as they arise during the process of creating titles for screen productions self-management, learning and planning skills sufficient to: prioritise work tasks continuously improve skills and knowledge by keeping up to date with industry developments and new software features meet deadlines seek expert assistance as required
Required knowledge
industry knowledge, including: roles and responsibilities of project team members in the relevant industry sector sound understanding of the technical and creative elements of productions in which screen titles are used issues and challenges that arise in the context of creating titles for screen productions principles of typographic design the effects of caption movement in one plane the effects of caption movement in multiple planes and axes copyright requirements with regard to importing items into screen titles OHS standards as they relate to working for periods of time on computers

Evidence Guide

EVIDENCE GUIDE
The Evidence Guide provides advice on assessment and must be read in conjunction with the performance criteria, required skills and knowledge, range statement and the Assessment Guidelines for the Training Package.
Overview of assessment
Critical aspects for assessment and evidence required to demonstrate competency in this unit	Evidence of the following is essential: creation of a range of screen titles that: meet the requirements of a brief demonstrate attention to detail and an ability to achieve the required creative effect collaborative approach to work ability to meet deadlines.
Context of and specific resources for assessment	Assessment must ensure: access to industry-current software used to create screen titles access to simulated or real production situations that require the creation of screen titles access to appropriate learning and assessment support when required use of culturally appropriate processes and techniques appropriate to the language and literacy capacity of learners and the work being performed.
Method of assessment	A range of assessment methods should be used to assess practical skills and knowledge. The following examples are appropriate for this unit: direct questioning combined with review of portfolios of evidence and third-party workplace reports of on-the-job performance evaluation of a range of digital screen titles created by the candidate to determine ability to create different types of titles written or verbal questioning to test knowledge as listed in the required skills and knowledge section of this unit.
Guidance information for assessment	Holistic assessment with other units relevant to the industry sector, workplace and job role is recommended, for example: BSBCRT402A Collaborate in a creative process CUFANM402A Create digital visual effects CUFDIG304A Create visual design components.

Range Statement

RANGE STATEMENT
The range statement relates to the unit of competency as a whole. It allows for different work environments and situations that may affect performance. Bold italicised wording, if used in the performance criteria, is detailed below. Essential operating conditions that may be present with training and assessment (depending on the work situation, needs of the candidate, accessibility of the item, and local industry and regional contexts) may also be included.
Production documentation may include:	animatics brief script shot list storyboard technical specifications.
Titles may be:	animated crawling dissolved effect faded layered reveal rolling static zip.
Relevant personnel may include:	designers director director of photography editor head of department post-production manager producer SFX (sound effects) supervisor sound personnel storyboard artist supervisor technical director other technical/specialist personnel.
Items to be included in the titles may include:	background captured frames fonts images, e.g.: static moving graphic photographic cinematographic logos objects text.
Parameters of display may include:	colour duration punctuation shading spacing spelling style thickness typeface.
Technical and creative requirements include:	choreography of movement colour frequency focus signal requirements speed type.
Movement of titles and other graphic images may include:	bounce compression expansion rotation.
Productions may include:	animated productions commercials documentaries feature films filmed events or performances interactive digital media products, e.g.: e-learning resources games promotional/informational products music videos short films television productions training or promotional videos/DVDs.

Unit Sector(s)

Unit sector

Competency field

Competency field	Visual communication - animation and digital effects

Co-requisite units

Co-requisite units

CUFANM503A Design animation and digital visual effects

Modification History

Not applicable.

Unit Descriptor

Unit descriptor	This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to design animation and digital visual effects for screen productions. No licensing, legislative, regulatory or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of endorsement.

Application of the Unit

Application of the unit	Designers who specialise in animation or visual effects apply the skills and knowledge described in this unit. They work closely with people such as directors or producers to prepare design specifications for animation or visual effects for projects, which range in scope from television commercials to aspects of feature films, an entire animated film or interactive games. A high level of creative conceptualisation is required, along with an ability to undertake background research. Even though designers operate at a senior level with a high degree of autonomy, the process of generating concepts and ideas is collaborative. An ability to work in a team environment and with clients is therefore essential. Skills associated with implementing designs are covered in: BSBDES601A Manage design realisation.

Licensing/Regulatory Information

Not applicable.

Pre-Requisites

Prerequisite units

Employability Skills Information

Employability skills	This unit contains employability skills.

Elements and Performance Criteria Pre-Content

Elements describe the essential outcomes of a unit of competency.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element. Where bold italicised text is used, further information is detailed in the required skills and knowledge section and the range statement. Assessment of performance is to be consistent with the evidence guide.

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Clarify design requirements	1. With reference to production documentation identify the scope of design projects 2. Identify factors that may have an impact on the design process 3. Participate in preliminary concept meetings to clarify understanding of design requirements 4. With reference to production documentation, itemise elements that need to be addressed during the design phase
Generate and assess ideas	5. Generate a range of design ideas that respond sympathetically to the brief and provide creative solutions to design issues 6. Assess ideas and collaborate, as required, with relevant personnel to maximise contribution of ideas to initial concepts 7. Continuously reflect on and appraise ideas for implications on cost, technical feasibility, and creative requirements
Conduct research and experimentation	8. Research aspects of content and target audience characteristics that might influence production styles and techniques 9. Trial various techniques to test the suitability of their use in given design projects 10. Organise research and experimentation material for ease of access by relevant personnel during the design development process 11. Analyse and document research and experimentation findings for use during the design phase
Produce draft design specifications	12. In consultation with relevant personnel, evaluate initial concept ideas in light of research and experimentation findings and select the most appropriate approach 13. Ensure that agreement is reached with relevant personnel on a consistent interpretation of design and visual details 14. Create storyboards as required 15. Prepare or supervise the preparation of sample material to be included in design specifications as required 16. Write draft design specifications to include relevant advice to design and development teams 17. Discuss draft design specifications with relevant personnel to ensure that all requirements have been addressed
Finalise design specifications	18. Present draft design specifications to relevant personnel for review 19. Participate in the initial and ongoing evaluation of design specifications 20. Negotiate and agree to additions or modifications and amend design specifications as required 21. Clarify the ongoing role of the designer during the production phase and in the evaluation of the final animations or digital visual effects 22. Review process of designing animation and digital visual effects and note areas for future improvement

Required Skills and Knowledge

REQUIRED SKILLS AND KNOWLEDGE
This section describes the skills and knowledge required for this unit.
Required skills
communication, teamwork and literacy skills sufficient to: interpret creative concepts and briefs prepare design specifications present design ideas for discussion and feedback from team members clearly and concisely document specifications for the design of animation and digital visual effects work collaboratively with other members of a production team negotiate amendments and additions to design specifications initiative, enterprise and creativity in the context of: developing original, innovative and creative approaches to designing animation and visual effects experimenting with techniques to achieve desired visual effects extending creative boundaries for self and audience thinking laterally when developing concepts undertaking background research to inform design projects maintaining design integrity finding ways to minimise the effect of technical constraints finding creative solutions to problems identified during the process of designing animation and visual effects locating and using resources to broaden own creative experience technical skills sufficient to use standard word processing, spreadsheet and presentation software in the context of preparing design and technical specifications learning in the context of improving performance/product through self-reflection and reworking after feedback. self-management skills sufficient to: meet deadlines provide appropriate and timely documentation
Required knowledge
industry knowledge, including: roles and responsibilities of project team members in the relevant industry sector sound understanding of the relationship between the technical and creative aspects and requirements of productions for which animation and digital visual effects are being designed issues and challenges that arise in the context of designing animation and digital visual effects principles and techniques of animation, layout and composition screen principles principles of visual design and communication colour theory, line, dimension, depth and their application on the screen drawing techniques, including drawing to scale formats and techniques for documenting the design of animation and digital visual effects OHS standards as they relate to working for periods of time on computers intellectual property rights and copyright clearance procedures

Evidence Guide

EVIDENCE GUIDE
The Evidence Guide provides advice on assessment and must be read in conjunction with the performance criteria, required skills and knowledge, range statement and the Assessment Guidelines for the Training Package.
Overview of assessment
Critical aspects for assessment and evidence required to demonstrate competency in this unit	Evidence of the following is essential: design specifications for animation and digital visual effects that: are well documented and clearly presented supported by appropriate research meet production requirements ability to work effectively as a member of a production team effective verbal presentation skills.
Context of and specific resources for assessment	Assessment must ensure: practical demonstration of skills through the design of animation and digital visual effects for at least two projects access to project briefs on which designs can be based access to appropriate learning and assessment support when required use of culturally appropriate processes and techniques appropriate to the language and literacy capacity of learners and the work being performed.
Method of assessment	A range of assessment methods should be used to assess practical skills and knowledge. The following examples are appropriate for this unit: direct questioning combined with review of portfolios of evidence and third-party workplace reports of on-the-job performance evaluation of designs for animation and visual effects documented by the candidate and their effectiveness in terms of meeting production requirements observation of a candidate presenting their designs to team members and explaining how it meets requirements.
Guidance information for assessment	Holistic assessment with other units relevant to the industry sector, workplace and job role is recommended, for example: BSBDES601A Manage design realisation BSBCRT501A Originate and develop concepts.

Range Statement

RANGE STATEMENT
The range statement relates to the unit of competency as a whole. It allows for different work environments and situations that may affect performance. Bold italicised wording, if used in the performance criteria, is detailed below. Essential operating conditions that may be present with training and assessment (depending on the work situation, needs of the candidate, accessibility of the item, and local industry and regional contexts) may also be included.
Production documentation may include:	animatics brief script shot list storyboard technical specifications.
Design projects may include	animation and/or digital visual effects for: films television productions commercials/advertisements games e-learning resources websites mobile phones promotional/informational videos/DVDs digital simulations virtual worlds.
Factors may include:	audience/user availability of personnel availability of resources available budget complexity of project expectations of producers and/or directors intellectual property need to attract finance production schedule production values technical parameters, including: technology constraints console platform bandwidth memory/RAM HDTV timelines.
Relevant personnel may include:	animators clients. compositors designers director director of photography head of department producer supervisor technical director writers other technical/specialist personnel.
Research may include:	contacting historical or other special interest associations reading newspapers books and other reference material reading software manuals searching the internet talking and listening to experts watching documentary material.
Aspects of content may include:	cultural considerations historical period style of production: comic dramatic fantasy educational/instructive informational promotional.
Target audience characteristics may include:	computer literacy demographics, e.g.: age gender education occupation location cultural background hobbies interests internet literacy language, literacy and numeracy personas specific needs - physical or psychological.
Techniques may include:	2D animation 2D graphics and paint 3D models and animation compositing.
Design specifications may include:	content inventory diagrams flow charts illustrations maps models plans resource issues sample animation elements sketches storyboards technical drawings technical specifications video clips wire frames.

Unit Sector(s)

Unit sector

Competency field

Competency field	Visual communication - animation and digital effects

Co-requisite units

Co-requisite units

CUFCMP301A Implement copyright arrangements

Modification History

Not applicable.

Unit Descriptor

Unit descriptor	This unit describes the performance outcomes, skills and knowledge required to implement individual or collaborative copyright arrangements. This unit is related to CUFCMP501A Manage and exploit copyright arrangements. No licensing, legislative, regulatory or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of endorsement.

Application of the Unit

Application of the unit	This unit addresses the implementation of copyright arrangements, including sourcing copyright information, gaining clearance to use other people's material and protecting material from unauthorised use. It has application to people involved in using/creating original works, including literary works, computer programs, compilations, artistic works, dramatic works, musical works, cinematograph films, sound recordings, broadcasts, photographs, photographic imagery and published works. This unit does not address assigning copyright and licensing rights. This is addressed in: CUFCMP501A Manage and exploit copyright arrangements.

Licensing/Regulatory Information

Not applicable.

Pre-Requisites

Prerequisite units

Employability Skills Information

Employability skills	This unit contains employability skills.

Elements and Performance Criteria Pre-Content

Elements describe the essential outcomes of a unit of competency.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element. Where bold italicised text is used, further information is detailed in the required skills and knowledge section and the range statement. Assessment of performance is to be consistent with the evidence guide.

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Source information on copyright	1. Identify sources of information on copyright 2. Determine what is and is not protected by copyright 3. Identify and determine role of copyright collection societies 4. Check copyright legislation with appropriate person 5.
Obtain permission to use copyright material	6. Identify copyright owner's exclusive rights 7. Determine need for copyright clearance and identify potential for fair use of copyright material 8. Discuss and confirm copyright clearance issues 9. Determine if moral rights or performer's rights need to be credited 10. Obtain and accurately record copyright clearance
Protect material from unauthorised use	11. Confirm original work as being the result of individual/collaborative skill and effort 12. Discuss and formally record copyright ownership/proportional ownership 13. Identify and confirm individual/collaborative copyright responsibilities 14. Identify potential infringements to copyright and activities that will not infringe copyright 15. Apply copyright notices on creative works in a correct manner 16. Prepare, date and store documentation to track copyright requirements

Required Skills and Knowledge

REQUIRED SKILLS AND KNOWLEDGE
This section describes the skills and knowledge required for this unit.
Required skills
numeracy skills sufficient to determine the duration of copyright arrangements literacy skills sufficient to read copyright information and to complete copyright documentation learning skills sufficient to maintain knowledge of copyright issues teamwork skills sufficient to work with collaborators when discussing copyright ownership problem solving skills sufficient to recognise problems that arise from copyright ownership discussions and to seek expert advice on solving them technology skills sufficient to use documentation systems for tracking copyright requirements and for accessing/downloading copyright material
Required knowledge
basic understanding of copyright principles/legislation relevant to implementing copyright arrangements recognised procedures to determine copyright ownership function of the Australian Copyright Council as it relates to own work context

Evidence Guide

EVIDENCE GUIDE
The Evidence Guide provides advice on assessment and must be read in conjunction with the performance criteria, required skills and knowledge, range statement and the Assessment Guidelines for the Training Package.
Overview of assessment
Critical aspects for assessment and evidence required to demonstrate competency in this unit	Evidence of the following is essential: ability to source information and seek appropriate assistance as required to organise copyright arrangements, and ability to apply this information to day-to-day work activities knowledge of copyright principles/legislation.
Context of and specific resources for assessment	Assessment must ensure: access to a range of relevant and current industry information materials, such as the Copyright Act 1968, Copyright Amendment (Digital Agenda) Act 2000 and Australian Copyright Council information sheets access to an environment where copyright information can be applied and copyright ownership discussed access to appropriate personnel to check copyright legislation access to appropriate technology to source copyright information and prepare copyright documentation access to appropriate learning and assessment support when required use of culturally appropriate processes and techniques appropriate to the language and literacy capacity of learners and the work being performed.
Method of assessment	The following assessment methods are appropriate for this unit: direct observation of the candidate obtaining permission to use copyright material case studies to assess ability to identify sources of information on copyright written and verbal questioning or interview to test knowledge of the sources of information and the role of copyright collection societies problem solving activities to assess ability to recognise problems that arise from copyright ownership discussions review of portfolios of evidence and third party workplace reports of on-the-job performance by the candidate.
Guidance information for assessment	Holistic assessment with other units relevant to the industry sector, workplace and job role is recommended, for example: CUFIND201A Develop and apply creative arts industry knowledge CUFIND301A Work effectively in the screen and media industries.

Range Statement

RANGE STATEMENT
The range statement relates to the unit of competency as a whole. It allows for different work environments and situations that may affect performance. Bold italicised wording, if used in the performance criteria, is detailed below. Essential operating conditions that may be present with training and assessment (depending on the work situation, needs of the candidate, accessibility of the item, and local industry and regional contexts) may also be included.
Sources of information may include:	Australian Copyright Council copyright collection societies copyright legislation industry associations industry information sheets and journals internet libraries union publications (newsletters, magazines, bulletins and letters).
Copyright collection societies may include:	Australasian Mechanical Copyright Owners Society Ltd (AMCOS) Australasian Performing Right Association (APRA) Christian Copyright Licensing International Copyright Agency Ltd (CAL) International copyright collection societies Mediacom/LicenSing Phonographic Performance Company of Australia (PPCA) Screenrights VISCOPY Word of Life International.
Appropriate person may include:	agents/artists' managers/industry managers Australian Copyright Council representatives copyright collection society representatives employee association/union representatives industry/industry association representatives legal representatives licensers/publishers.
Exclusive rights may include:	communicating the work to the public importing the work into Australia licensing and assigning the work making an adaptation of the work making the work public for the first time performing/showing/transmitting the work in public reproducing the work.
Fair use of copyright material may include:	new exceptions for consumers and new flexible dealing exception professional advice by a lawyer, patent attorney or trade mark attorney reporting news research, study, criticism or review.
Moral rights may include the right of the creator:	not to have their work falsely attributed not to have their work treated in a derogatory way to be attributed (or credited) for their work.
Performer's rights may include:	the moral rights in performances the ownership of copyright in sound recordings the rights to control recording and communication of their performances.
Original work may include:	artistic works, e.g. paintings, drawings, cartoons, sculpture, craft work, architectural plans, buildings, photographs, photographic imagery, maps, plans, special effects make-up broadcasts, e.g. television, radio cinematograph films, e.g. film, video, DVD compilations, e.g. anthologies, directories, databases computer programs dramatic works, e.g. choreography, screenplays, plays, mime pieces, performances musical works/performances published editions sound recordings textual material, e.g. journal articles, novels, screenplays, poems, song lyrics, reports.
Copyright notices may include:	for sound recordings, the letter P (for phonogram) in a circle or in brackets is used the symbol Â©, followed by the name of the copyright owner and the year of first publication.
Documentation may include dated copies of:	artwork digital media products footage letters or other communications with people who have access to the original work manuscripts music (presented in any media or format) negatives/photographs/photographic imagery recordings scores (music/film).

Unit Sector(s)

Unit sector

Competency field

Competency field	Regulation, licensing and risk - Compliance

Co-requisite units

Co-requisite units

CUFDIG201A Maintain interactive content

Modification History

Not applicable.

Unit Descriptor

Unit descriptor	This unit describes the performance outcomes, skills and knowledge required to maintain interactive content. No licensing, legislative, regulatory or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of endorsement.

Application of the Unit

Application of the unit	People responsible for updating the content of websites apply the skills and knowledge described in this unit. Under direction, they upload a range of media assets and change text content, using a content management system that may be a proprietary system designed for a static or dynamic website. Changes to the interface and structure of the site are made by people in more senior positions.

Licensing/Regulatory Information

Not applicable.

Pre-Requisites

Prerequisite units

Employability Skills Information

Employability skills	This unit contains employability skills.

Elements and Performance Criteria Pre-Content

Elements describe the essential outcomes of a unit of competency.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element. Where bold italicised text is used, further information is detailed in the required skills and knowledge section and the range statement. Assessment of performance is to be consistent with the evidence guide.

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Check website information for relevance and currency	1. Confirm with relevant personnel frequency of upgrades 2. Obtain revised and additional electronic content and ensure correct versions 3. Confirm with relevant personnel the age limit of links that should be retained or deleted 4. Confirm with relevant personnel other revisions as required
Check links and navigation	5. Select appropriate link-checking software, run software to test links and check currency of existing links 6. Save report document according to technical and organisational requirements 7. Check broken or failed links to determine site closures or new site addresses
Update information	8. Access content management system and load appropriate files 9. Delete closed links and re-establish new site links if available 10. Check internal page links and rectify or delete as required 11. Import and/or change content material as required and specify appropriate metadata if required 12. Make heading, typographical and image revisions applying appropriate style sheets and alt tags if required 13. Insert additional pages or screens as required, applying appropriate templates or themes 14. Upload edited files to server using file transfer protocols (FTP). 15. Advise relevant personnel if new buttons, interface or navigation design are required to incorporate additional materials
Test and confirm changes	16. Check all links are valid 17. Confirm with relevant personnel that all changes have been made

Required Skills and Knowledge

REQUIRED SKILLS AND KNOWLEDGE
This section describes the skills and knowledge required for this unit.
Required skills
communication and literacy skills sufficient to: interpret and clarify written or verbal instructions interpret and apply information in user manuals for software applications ability to work as a member of a production team - both independently on assignment and under direction technical skills sufficient to: proficiently use a content management system use link-checking software manage files using standard naming conventions apply appropriate metadata to describe documents apply style sheets, templates and themes self-management and planning skills sufficient to: prioritise work tasks meet deadlines seek expert assistance when problems arise
Required knowledge
W3C Accessibility standards relevant to text and images internet protocols and data types OHS standards as they relate to working on computers for periods of time

Evidence Guide

EVIDENCE GUIDE
The Evidence Guide provides advice on assessment and must be read in conjunction with the performance criteria, required skills and knowledge, range statement and the Assessment Guidelines for the Training Package.
Overview of assessment
Critical aspects for assessment and evidence required to demonstrate competency in this unit	Evidence of the following is essential: accurate creation of interactive media information and links proficient use of content management systems attention to detail.
Context of and specific resources for assessment	Assessment must ensure: access to industry-standard authoring software, the internet and an FTP client for uploading content access to appropriate learning and assessment support when required use of culturally appropriate processes and techniques appropriate to the language and literacy capacity of learners and the work being performed.
Method of assessment	A range of assessment methods should be used to assess practical skills and knowledge. The following examples are appropriate for this unit: direct questioning combined with review of portfolios of evidence and third-party workplace reports of on-the-job performance evaluation of websites where content has been updated by the candidate on a regular basis written or oral questioning to test knowledge of internet protocols, data types and W3C Accessibility standards relevant to text and images.
Guidance information for assessment	Holistic assessment with other units relevant to the industry sector, workplace and job role is recommended, for example: CUFIND201A Develop and apply creative arts industry knowledge CUFRES201A Collect and organise content for broadcast or publication.

Range Statement

RANGE STATEMENT
The range statement relates to the unit of competency as a whole. It allows for different work environments and situations that may affect performance. Bold italicised wording, if used in the performance criteria, is detailed below. Essential operating conditions that may be present with training and assessment (depending on the work situation, needs of the candidate, accessibility of the item, and local industry and regional contexts) may also be included.
Relevant personnel may include:	client programmer and technical support people supervisor web manager other specialist creative and administrative staff as appropriate.
Electronic content may include:	audio HTML images (photographs and illustrations) PDF documents text video Word documents.
Link-checking software may include:	Xenu Linkbot software internal to content management systems.
Content management systems may include:	authoring tools, such as: Dreamweaver Contribute learning management systems, such as: WebCT Blackboard Janeson Moodle Sharepoint open source database systems other proprietary database systems.
Metadata may include:	author copyright date description subject title other metadata based on Dublin Core or other standards.

Unit Sector(s)

Unit sector

Competency field

Competency field	Visual communication - digital content and imaging

Co-requisite units

Co-requisite units

CUFDIG301A Prepare video assets

Modification History

Not applicable.

Unit Descriptor

Unit descriptor	This unit describes the performance outcomes, skills and knowledge required to prepare video assets for inclusion in interactive media. No licensing, legislative, regulatory or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of endorsement.

Application of the Unit

Application of the unit	The size of an organisation or project determines who undertakes the role described in this unit. In a large-scale environment, the person responsible for this task would typically be supervised by a video editor and an interactive media author. In a television production environment, the prime focus of the task involves converting television programs into podcast material or in a form appropriate to streaming or downloading, and this may be a dedicated role under the supervision of a producer. In a smaller organisation or project, a video editor or interactive author or programmer would absorb this task into their own role. In all cases, they are collaborating closely with other team members. Skills associated with other aspects of video production at this level are covered in: CUFCAM201A Assist with a basic camera shoot CUFPOS201A Perform basic vision and sound editing.

Licensing/Regulatory Information

Not applicable.

Pre-Requisites

Prerequisite units

Employability Skills Information

Employability skills	This unit contains employability skills.

Elements and Performance Criteria Pre-Content

Elements describe the essential outcomes of a unit of competency.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element. Where bold italicised text is used, further information is detailed in the required skills and knowledge section and the range statement. Assessment of performance is to be consistent with the evidence guide.

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Identify video assets	1. Obtain digital sources of video 2. Identify file format of source video 3. Identify output purpose, destination and platform 4. Discuss with relevant personnel required output file format and codecs for specified bandwidths 5. Discuss with relevant personnel appropriate video encoding software
Prepare video assets	6. Open appropriate video encoding software and load video file 7. Ensure duration of video sequences meets that required by the specification, and clip if necessary 8. Determine and apply appropriate video and audio codecs 9. Batch and optimise video files where possible 10. Save files in appropriate output file format using standard naming conventions
Package video assets	11. Assign metadata tags if required 12. Group files logically in folder system using standard naming conventions 13. Store in share drive or asset repository for production team access

Required Skills and Knowledge

REQUIRED SKILLS AND KNOWLEDGE
This section describes the skills and knowledge required for this unit.
Required skills
communication and literacy skills sufficient to interpret and clarify written or verbal instructions ability to work as a member of a production team - both independently on assignment and under direction technical skills sufficient to: proficiently use video software to prepare video sequences for inclusion in an interactive media product manage files using standard naming conventions apply appropriate metadata tags to describe files self-management and planning skills sufficient to: prioritise work tasks meet deadlines seek expert assistance when problems arise
Required knowledge
techniques for saving and preparing digital video output to optimise file size OHS standards as they relate to working for periods of time on computers industry knowledge, including: roles and responsibilities of project team members, e.g. designers, content creators, information architects, programmers and coders basic understanding of the relationship between technical and creative aspects and requirements of interactive media projects basic knowledge of the features of a range of delivery platforms basic understanding of what happens when video files are compressed for inclusion in interactive media products appropriate codecs for various platforms and destinations digital video source and output formats

Evidence Guide

EVIDENCE GUIDE
The Evidence Guide provides advice on assessment and must be read in conjunction with the performance criteria, required skills and knowledge, range statement and the Assessment Guidelines for the Training Package.
Overview of assessment
Critical aspects for assessment and evidence required to demonstrate competency in this unit	Evidence of the following is essential: preparation of a range of video sequences to be included in interactive media products that meet appropriate technical specifications proficient use of video encoding software.
Context of and specific resources for assessment	Assessment must ensure: access to industry-standard video encoding software access to appropriate learning and assessment support when required use of culturally appropriate processes and techniques appropriate to the language and literacy capacity of learners and the work being performed.
Method of assessment	A range of assessment methods should be used to assess practical skills and knowledge. The following examples are appropriate for this unit: direct questioning combined with review of portfolios of evidence and third-party workplace reports of on-the-job performance evaluation of video assets prepared by the candidate on a number of occasions written or oral questioning to test knowledge of codecs for various platforms and understanding of file compression.
Guidance information for assessment	Holistic assessment with other units relevant to the industry sector, workplace and job role is recommended, for example: CUFSOU301A Prepare audio assets.

Range Statement

RANGE STATEMENT
The range statement relates to the unit of competency as a whole. It allows for different work environments and situations that may affect performance. Bold italicised wording, if used in the performance criteria, is detailed below. Essential operating conditions that may be present with training and assessment (depending on the work situation, needs of the candidate, accessibility of the item, and local industry and regional contexts) may also be included.
File format of source video includes:	Betacam, including SP and digital DVC DVD miniDV SVHS Umatic VHS.
Purpose may include:	animation e-learning resource game interactive application website.
Destination may include:	computer-based playback software, such as iTunes downloading server internet video players, such as: QuickTime Windows Media Player RealPlayer progressive downloading (buffering) server streaming server.
Platform may include:	CD DVD games console internet kiosk mobile phone other video playback devices personal digital assistant (PDA) video player (iPods).
Relevant personnel may include:	client producer programmer and technical support people supervisor video editor other specialist creative and administrative staff.
Output file formats include:	FLV lossless and lossy M4V MOV MPEG-2 MPEG-4 RealMedia WAV WMV.
Codecs may include:	audio codecs, including: mono and stereo bit sampling rates and bit depth standardised and pre-set codecs video codecs, including: screen size frame rate bit rate (constant and variable) one pass and double pass standardised and pre-set codecs, such as: H.261, H.263 and H.264 MPEG Sorenson, Cinepak, RealVideo MMV.
Video encoding software may include:	specialised video compression tools, such as DivX and Squeeze video editing tools, such as: Adobe Premier Final Cut Pro Final Cut Express QuickTime Pro Media 100 iMovie Movie Maker WaveLab.
Metadata tags may include:	author copyright description other as specified resolution version.

Unit Sector(s)

Unit sector

Competency field

Competency field	Visual communication - digital content and imaging

Co-requisite units

Co-requisite units

CUFDIG302A Author interactive sequences

Modification History

Not applicable.

Unit Descriptor

Unit descriptor	This unit describes the performance outcomes, skills and knowledge required to use an authoring tool to produce discrete interactive sequences. No licensing, legislative, regulatory or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of endorsement.

Application of the Unit

Application of the unit	People responsible for developing small components to be integrated into a larger project apply the skills and knowledge described in this unit. They could be working under the direction of an interactive author or programmer to produce several web pages, or a sequence of screens for other forms of delivery. They need to draw on technical assistance from a programmer or other technical support personnel to produce sequences for server side technologies. In all cases, they are collaborating with other members of a team and need a sound understanding of the project on which they are working. More complex skills associated with authoring are covered in: CUFDIG401A Author interactive media CUFDIG404A Apply scripting language in authoring.

Licensing/Regulatory Information

Not applicable.

Pre-Requisites

Prerequisite units

Employability Skills Information

Employability skills	This unit contains employability skills.

Elements and Performance Criteria Pre-Content

Elements describe the essential outcomes of a unit of competency.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element. Where bold italicised text is used, further information is detailed in the required skills and knowledge section and the range statement. Assessment of performance is to be consistent with the evidence guide.

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Plan use of authoring tool	1. Identify a range of appropriate authoring software 2. Discuss with relevant personnel the range of authoring software and their application to various delivery platforms 3. Discuss with relevant personnel design specifications of the project 4. Discuss with relevant personnel technical requirements of the project in order to select authoring software
Prepare to use authoring tool	5. Load selected authoring software 6. Create a new file for the specified task and name file using standard naming conventions 7. Display and use tools and features of authoring software relevant to the authoring process
Produce interactive sequences	8. Produce screens and layout according to design specifications applying basic visual design principles 9. Create interactive media components as required 10. Source text content and apply style sheets to format text 11. Source relevant media assets, optimise if required and integrate using appropriate file formats 12. Produce and link all components according to storyboard and apply templates or themes 13. Manipulate markup code where errors are occurring or to finetune functionality 14. Save in appropriate file format to directory
Check functionality of interactive sequence	15. Check that interactive elements function with minimal error on a variety of systems 16. Present sequence to relevant personnel 17. Incorporate changes as required

Required Skills and Knowledge

REQUIRED SKILLS AND KNOWLEDGE
This section describes the skills and knowledge required for this unit.
Required skills
communication and literacy skills sufficient to: interpret and clarify written or verbal instructions and design specifications interpret and apply information in user manuals for software applications ability to work as a member of a production team - both independently on assignment and under direction technical skills sufficient to: use appropriate authoring software to proficiently author the sequences applying style sheets, templates or themes integrate media assets for specific bandwidths manage files and create appropriate directories efficiently use a computer, including keyboard shortcuts self-management and planning skills sufficient to: prioritise work tasks meet deadlines seek expert assistance when problems arise
Required knowledge
industry knowledge, including: roles and responsibilities of project team members, e.g. designers, content creators, information architects, programmers and coders basic understanding of the relationship between technical and creative aspects and requirements of interactive media projects basic knowledge of the features of a range of delivery platforms file formats of digital media assets and basic optimisation techniques HTML W3C Accessibility standards relevant to text and images basic visual design principles as listed in the range statement OHS standards as they relate to working for periods of time on computers

Evidence Guide

EVIDENCE GUIDE
The Evidence Guide provides advice on assessment and must be read in conjunction with the performance criteria, required skills and knowledge, range statement and the Assessment Guidelines for the Training Package.
Overview of assessment
Critical aspects for assessment and evidence required to demonstrate competency in this unit	Evidence of the following is essential: development of several discrete interactive media sequences that function as planned and demonstrate an understanding of basic visual design principles accuracy and attention to detail in the process of developing interactive media sequences.
Context of and specific resources for assessment	Assessment must ensure: access toa range of resources, equipment and current industry-standard software, as listed in the range statement access to appropriate learning and assessment support when required use of culturally appropriate processes and techniques appropriate to the language and literacy capacity of learners and the work being performed.
Method of assessment	A range of assessment methods should be used to assess practical skills and knowledge. The following examples are appropriate for this unit: direct questioning combined with review of portfolios of evidence and third-party workplace reports of on-the-job performance evaluation of interactive sequences authored by the candidate written or oral questioning to test knowledge of file formats and delivery platforms.
Guidance information for assessment	Holistic assessment with other units relevant to the industry sector, workplace and job role is recommended, for example: CUFDIG304A Create visual design components.

Range Statement

RANGE STATEMENT
The range statement relates to the unit of competency as a whole. It allows for different work environments and situations that may affect performance. Bold italicised wording, if used in the performance criteria, is detailed below. Essential operating conditions that may be present with training and assessment (depending on the work situation, needs of the candidate, accessibility of the item, and local industry and regional contexts) may also be included.
Authoring software may include:	Director Dreamweaver Flash FrontPage PageMill.
Relevant personnel may include:	designer graphic designer information architect interaction designer programmer supervisor trainer user interface designer other specialist staff.
Delivery platforms may include:	CD DVD internet kiosk mobile phone personal digital assistant (PDA) other wireless/mobile devices.
Design specifications may include:	content inventory interactive script personas storyboard target audience technical requirements, such as: delivery platform screen resolution and size templates, style sheets and themes bandwidth information user interface design.
Projects may include:	production of interactive sequences to be incorporated in a: game educational product promotional product information product training product e-commerce.
Visual design principles may include:	balance emphasis focal point movement perspective proportion scale unity.
Interactive media components may include:	backgrounds banners icons interactive buttons interactive controls logos text titles user interfaces.
Media assets may include:	animation audio documents, such as PDF, Word, PowerPoint and Excel graphics photo images text video.
File formats may include:	DIR/DCR FLA/SWF GIF HTML JPEG MOV MPEG PDF PICT RTF TIFF WMV.

Unit Sector(s)

Unit sector

Competency field

Competency field	Visual communication - digital content and imaging

Co-requisite units

Co-requisite units

CUFDIG304A Create visual design components

Modification History

Not applicable.

Unit Descriptor

Unit descriptor	This unit describes the performance outcomes, skills and knowledge required to create visual designs for a range of interactive media components. People in this role work closely with other members of a production team. They create visual design components in response to specifications and under the supervision of a graphic designer or producer. They contribute creative ideas to the overall concept that needs to take account of technical considerations, such as the final delivery platform. No licensing, legislative, regulatory or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of endorsement.

Application of the Unit

Application of the unit	This unit requires the application of the key principles and practice of graphic design in the context of creating visual design components that could be integrated into a range of media products, including print media. A graphic artist usually undertakes this role and is expected to be competent in a range of design techniques, including freehand drawing. The visual design output will nevertheless be in a digital format for inclusion in a final media product. More complex skills associated with visual design aspects of a whole interactive media product are covered in: CUFDIG402A Design user interfaces CUFDIG403A Create user interfaces.

Licensing/Regulatory Information

Not applicable.

Pre-Requisites

Prerequisite units

Employability Skills Information

Employability skills	This unit contains employability skills.

Elements and Performance Criteria Pre-Content

Elements describe the essential outcomes of a unit of competency.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element. Where bold italicised text is used, further information is detailed in the required skills and knowledge section and the range statement. Assessment of performance is to be consistent with the evidence guide.

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Clarify work requirements	1. Clarify type of visual design components required, in consultation with relevant personnel 2. In discussion with relevant personnel, identify factors that may determine or affect visual design concepts, including design techniques 3. Clarify in discussion with relevant personnel the target user and audience, and determine format and delivery platform
Generate and assess ideas	4. Review media products, designs, images, artwork and other creative sources that may inspire visual design ideas 5. Obtain other relevant information that may influence design ideas 6. Generate a range of visual design ideas that are technically feasible, respond to specifications and provide creative solutions to all design issues 7. Present visual design ideas to relevant personnel using design techniques
Plan approach	8. Experiment with traditional and digital imaging techniques to create required visual design components 9. Explore range of typographical and visual design elements to create the components 10. Evaluate initial design ideas and specifications against findings and discuss with relevant personnel to select final design concept 11. Select design technique and discuss with relevant personnel to ensure appropriate output format meets delivery platform requirements
Produce visual design components	12. Develop structure for components based on the final design concept using selected design techniques 13. Apply visual design principles and communication principles to produce components 14. Save visual design in an appropriate format that satisfies the technical parameters determined in consultation with relevant personnel
Finalise visual design components	15. Review visual design components to assess whether creative solutions meet design and technical specifications 16. Discuss and confirm with relevant personnel additional requirements or modifications and undertake any necessary amendments

Required Skills and Knowledge

REQUIRED SKILLS AND KNOWLEDGE
This section describes the skills and knowledge required for this unit.
Required skills
communication, teamwork and literacy skills sufficient to: interpret and clarify written and verbal instructions work as a member of a production team - both independently on assignment and under direction respond constructively to feedback received from other team members initiative and enterprise in the context of generating a range of feasible ideas for visual designs technical skills sufficient to: use a range of design techniques for creating visual designs, including industry-standard graphics software apply visual design and communication principles to produce visual designs create visual design components in appropriate formats for a range of delivery platforms manage files and directories using standard naming conventions self-management and planning skills sufficient to: prioritise work tasks meet deadlines seek expert assistance when problems arise
Required knowledge
industry knowledge, including: roles and responsibilities of project team members basic understanding of the relationship between technical and creative aspects and requirements of media projects basic design principles of layout and composition characteristics of digital and traditional imaging visual design and communication principles typography copyright clearance procedures OHS standards as they apply to the use of computer and keyboard for periods of time

Evidence Guide

EVIDENCE GUIDE
The Evidence Guide provides advice on assessment and must be read in conjunction with the performance criteria, required skills and knowledge, range statement and the Assessment Guidelines for the Training Package.
Overview of assessment
Critical aspects for assessment and evidence required to demonstrate competency in this unit	Evidence of the following is essential: creation of visual design components that respond effectively to specifications and demonstrate the application of visual design and communication principles ability to apply a selection of the design techniques listed in the range statement ability to work collaboratively in a team environment.
Context of and specific resources for assessment	Assessment must ensure: access toa range of resources, equipment and current industry-standard software as listed in the range statement access to appropriate learning and assessment support when required use of culturally appropriate processes and techniques appropriate to the language and literacy capacity of learners and the work being performed.
Method of assessment	A range of assessment methods should be used to assess practical skills and knowledge. The following examples are appropriate for this unit: direct questioning combined with review of portfolios of evidence and third-party workplace reports of on-the-job performance evaluation of a range of visual design components created by the candidate written or oral questioning to test knowledge of visual design principles, communication principles and responsibilities of different members of a project team.
Guidance information for assessment	Holistic assessment with other units relevant to the industry sector, workplace and job role is recommended, for example: CUFDIG303A Produce and prepare photo images CUFANM301A Create 2D digital animations.

Range Statement

RANGE STATEMENT
The range statement relates to the unit of competency as a whole. It allows for different work environments and situations that may affect performance. Bold italicised wording, if used in the performance criteria, is detailed below. Essential operating conditions that may be present with training and assessment (depending on the work situation, needs of the candidate, accessibility of the item, and local industry and regional contexts) may also be included.
Components may include:	2D animation objects backgrounds banners basic user interfaces colours flow charts icons illustrations interactive buttons interactive controls logos simple 2D animation characters text titles other components required by the project.
Relevant personnel may include:	art director asset creator client editor producer programmer supervisor technical director technical staff other specialist creative and administrative staff.
Design techniques may include:	drawing freehand drawing on a tablet flow charts scanning drawings and photographs storyboards thumbnail sketches using graphics software, such as: Corel Draw Corel Paint Shop Pro Photoshop Photoshop Elements Illustrator Paint.net Fireworks.
Format may include:	bitmap image digital formats, such as: GIF JPEG PDF TIFF PICT PNG PSD HTML hard copy vector image.
Delivery platform may include:	CD DVD film games console internet kiosk mobile phone other wireless/mobile devices personal digital assistant (PDA) print media television.
Relevant information may include:	brands logos previous versions of components printed materials promotion materials style guides trademarks.
Typographical design elements may include:	alignment fonts and typefaces kerning leading point and size serif or sans serif tracking.
Visual design elements may include:	colour form line shape texture tone.
Visual design principles may include:	balance emphasis focal point movement perspective proportion scale unity.
Communication principles may include:	communicates message conveys meaning meets audience requirements uses functional components.

Unit Sector(s)

Unit sector

Competency field

Competency field	Visual communication - digital content and imaging

Co-requisite units

Co-requisite units

CUFDIG401A Author interactive media

Modification History

Not applicable.

Unit Descriptor

Unit descriptor	This unit describes the performance outcomes, skills and knowledge required to author a complete interactive media product, for example, a whole website. No licensing, legislative, regulatory or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of endorsement.

Application of the Unit

Application of the unit	People in this role need a sound understanding of mark-up languages (HTML and XML). In addition, they need to be familiar enough with scripting languages to use script libraries in authoring software to provide interactive features. Authors work primarily on client-side technologies. In the construction of dynamic websites, for example, they develop the templates, themes and style sheets for the programmers and technical support team to integrate into the database and install on a web server. Authors also develop forms and form objects, but the scripting for form processing is provided by programmers. Authors may also use a variety of authoring software to produce complex interactions such as digital simulations, games and puzzles. In interactive media development, authors are working with a team, including user interface designers, interactive designers, asset creators and server-side programmers. Skills associated with scripting are covered in: CUFDIG404A Apply scripting language in authoring.

Licensing/Regulatory Information

Not applicable.

Pre-Requisites

Prerequisite units

Employability Skills Information

Employability skills	This unit contains employability skills.

Elements and Performance Criteria Pre-Content

Elements describe the essential outcomes of a unit of competency.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element. Where bold italicised text is used, further information is detailed in the required skills and knowledge section and the range statement. Assessment of performance is to be consistent with the evidence guide.

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Identify multimedia elements	1. Obtain design specifications 2. Locate content required for productions 3. Discuss issues of integration and formats of media assets with relevant personnel 4. Determine with relevant personnel an interactive sequence to become the prototype
Identify scope of authoring software	5. Identify range of industry-standard authoring software 6. Assess the authoring software in relation to specified delivery platform 7. Discuss selection of authoring software with relevant personnel to ensure selection will meet specified outcomes 8. Select authoring software best suited to job requirements
Use authoring software	9. Load authoring software 10. Create a new file for the specified task and name using standard naming conventions 11. Display and use tools and features of authoring software relevant to the authoring process
Create interactive sequence	12. Slice and reassemble the user interface appropriate to the authoring software 13. Import and assemble components in appropriate sequence according to creative requirements 14. Create interactive features according to creative and technical requirements, sourcing and writing appropriate markup and scripting languages as required 15. Check that interactive sequence conforms to navigation design 16. Integrate media assets to ensure highest levels of technical performance 17. Check that interactive sequence conforms to loading specifications 18. Test for interoperability, eliminate all bugs and validate scripting 19. Present interactive sequence as a prototype ensuring that sequence meets creative, production and technical requirements 20. Save output file formats and identify for specified purpose
Evaluate interactive prototype	21. Present prototype to relevant personnel 22. Evaluate prototype against design specifications, including achievement of a creative and user-centred product 23. Discuss and agree on required changes 24. Assist in user trials as required 25. Evaluate feedback from user trials 26. Seek confirmation from relevant personnel to transform prototype into final product
Seek confirmation from relevant personnel to transform prototype into final product	27. Make necessary changes as indicated by user trials 28. Replicate prototype functionality to complete the interactive product 29. Make final checks to ensure sequences conform to design specifications 30. Test for interoperability, eliminate bugs and validate scripting 31. Save to specified storage system accessible to production team 32. Assist in loading product to specified platform as required

Required Skills and Knowledge

REQUIRED SKILLS AND KNOWLEDGE
This section describes the skills and knowledge required for this unit.
Required skills
communication and literacy skills sufficient to interpret and clarify written or verbal instructions ability to work as a member of a production team - both independently on assignment and under direction technical skills sufficient to: correctly interpret design briefs, and design and technical specifications proficiently use appropriate authoring and graphics software seamlessly integrate and optimise a range of media assets to highest levels of technical performance create and apply style sheets, templates or themes to conform with W3CAccessibility standards as they apply to client-side technology manage files and directories using standard naming conventions and version control protocols initiative and flexibility in the context of troubleshooting and solving problems as they arise during the authoring process self-management and planning skills sufficient to: prioritise work tasks meet deadlines seek expert assistance as required
Required knowledge
scope and applicability of industry-standard authoring software technical requirements for integrating digital content for use on a range of delivery platforms, including: animation graphics text video audio user-centred design principles design principles of layout and composition industry knowledge, including: roles and responsibilities of project team members, e.g. designers, content creators, information architects, programmers and coders sound understanding of the relationship between technical and creative aspects and requirements of interactive media projects sound knowledge of the features of a range of delivery platforms markup and scripting languages as they apply to relevant authoring software W3C Accessibility standards purpose and process of validation and the role of interoperability standards issues and challenges that arise in developing interactive media products OHS standards as they relate to working on computers for periods of time

Evidence Guide

EVIDENCE GUIDE
The Evidence Guide provides advice on assessment and must be read in conjunction with the performance criteria, required skills and knowledge, range statement and the Assessment Guidelines for the Training Package.
Overview of assessment
Critical aspects for assessment and evidence required to demonstrate competency in this unit	Evidence of the following is essential: development of an integrated and fully functional interactive media product that: conforms to design specifications meets W3C Accessibility standards demonstrates creativity in design solutions collaborative approach to work.
Context of and specific resources for assessment	Assessment must ensure: access toa range of resources, equipment and current industry-standard software as listed in the range statement access to appropriate learning and assessment support when required use of culturally appropriate processes and techniques appropriate to the language and literacy capacity of learners and the work being performed.
Method of assessment	A range of assessment methods should be used to assess practical skills and knowledge. The following examples are appropriate for this unit: direct questioning combined with review of portfolios of evidence and third-party workplace reports of on-the-job performance evaluation of at least two interactive products authored by the candidate written or oral questioning to test knowledge of the processes followed to develop an interactive product and the respective roles and responsibilities of team members.
Guidance information for assessment	Holistic assessment with other units relevant to the industry sector, workplace and job role is recommended, for example: CUFDIG404A Apply scripting language in authoring ICAU4207B Apply web authoring tool to convert client data for websites.

Range Statement

RANGE STATEMENT
The range statement relates to the unit of competency as a whole. It allows for different work environments and situations that may affect performance. Bold italicised wording, if used in the performance criteria, is detailed below. Essential operating conditions that may be present with training and assessment (depending on the work situation, needs of the candidate, accessibility of the item, and local industry and regional contexts) may also be included.
Design specifications may include:	creative requirements navigation design priority levels of W3C Accessibility standards storyboards technical specifications, including: disk space delivery platform file format for final product time user interface design.
Productions may include:	e-commerce educational product game information product interactive application promotional product training product website.
Media assets may include:	animation audio graphics images text video.
Relevant personnel may include:	animator artist asset creator graphic designer graphic interface designer instructional designer navigation designer programmer project manager sound engineer video producer other specialist staff.
Industry-standard authoring software may include:	Authorware Breeze Captivate Contribute Director Dreamweaver Flash GoLive PageMill RoboDemo graphics software, including: Photoshop Fireworks Illustrator simulation software, such as LabView.
Delivery platform may include:	CD DVD internet kiosk mobile phone personal digital assistant (PDA) other wireless/mobile devices.
Markup and scripting languages may include:	ActionScript HTML JavaScript Lingo XML other proprietary scripting languages.
Output file formats may include:	DIR/DCR FLA/SWF HTML PDB PDF PRC TXT WAP XML other proprietary formats.

Unit Sector(s)

Unit sector

Competency field

Competency field	Visual communication - digital content and imaging

Co-requisite units

Co-requisite units

CUFDIG402A Design user interfaces

Modification History

Not applicable.

Unit Descriptor

Unit descriptor	This unit describes the performance outcomes, skills and knowledge required to design user interfaces for interactive media products. Prototype testing of interfaces with, for example, focus groups, is a key aspect of the role. No licensing, legislative, regulatory or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of endorsement.

Application of the Unit

Application of the unit	This unit requires the application of visual communication principles to the design of user interfaces that form part of interactive media products, such as web environments, games or e-learning resources. People in this role respond to clearly defined briefs. They work collaboratively in a team environment where the expertise of other team members, e.g. designers and programmers, contributes to the final specifications for user interface designs. More complex skills associated with the testing and design of whole interactive media products are covered in: CUFDIG501A Coordinate the testing of interactive media products CUFDIG502A Design web environments CUFDIG503A Design e-learning resources CUFDIG504A Design games.

Licensing/Regulatory Information

Not applicable.

Pre-Requisites

Prerequisite units

Employability Skills Information

Employability skills	This unit contains employability skills.

Elements and Performance Criteria Pre-Content

Elements describe the essential outcomes of a unit of competency.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element. Where bold italicised text is used, further information is detailed in the required skills and knowledge section and the range statement. Assessment of performance is to be consistent with the evidence guide.

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Identify project requirements	1. Discuss concept with relevant personnel to ensure that design briefs are fully understood 2. Identify technical parameters of interactive media products, including delivery platform 3. Identify target audience and user characteristics 4. Obtain information architecture specifications if available
Draft design specifications	5. Visualise concepts and develop preliminary sketches based on content architecture and audience characteristics 6. Sketch basic screen layout showing main spatial zones 7. Specify functional areas within screen layouts 8. Specify metaphors and look and feel of user interfaces 9. Develop final detailed sketches taking into consideration all ideas generated 10. Gain approval from relevant personnel to ensure that interfaces meet all requirements 11. Write user interface design specifications to include relevant advice to development teams
Finalise user interface designs	12. Develop focus test plans for user interfaces to identify their strengths and weaknesses 13. Incorporate design changes to information architecture in design specifications 14. Obtain final agreement from relevant personnel for finished designs

Required Skills and Knowledge

REQUIRED SKILLS AND KNOWLEDGE
This section describes the skills and knowledge required for this unit.
Required skills
communication, teamwork and literacy skills sufficient to: interpret and clarify written or verbal instructions interpret design briefs and results of focus tests work collaboratively in a team environment present user interface design concepts to team members for discussion and feedback respond constructively to feedback received from other team members complete workplace documentation conceptual and creative skills to generate a range of ideas for user interfaces technical skills sufficient to create designs using storyboards, maps and other diagrams to specify the architecture and navigation of interactive media products self-management and planning skills sufficient to: prioritise work tasks and meet deadlines seek expert assistance when problems arise
Required knowledge
industry knowledge, including: roles and responsibilities of project team members, e.g. designers, content creators, information architects, programmers and coders sound understanding of the relationship between technical and creative aspects and requirements of interactive media projects issues and challenges that arise in designing user interfaces principles of visual design and communication, including user-centred design principles technical parameters of various platforms and how these impact on user interface designs typical formats and techniques for documenting user interface designs OHS standards as they relate to working for periods of time on computers

Evidence Guide

EVIDENCE GUIDE
The Evidence Guide provides advice on assessment and must be read in conjunction with the performance criteria, required skills and knowledge, range statement and the Assessment Guidelines for the Training Package.
Overview of assessment
Critical aspects for assessment and evidence required to demonstrate competency in this unit	Evidence of the following is essential: clearly documented and user-tested user interface design specifications for an interactive media product ability to work effectively as a member of a production team.
Context of and specific resources for assessment	Assessment must ensure: access to briefs on which to base user interface designs access to appropriate learning and assessment support when required use of culturally appropriate processes and techniques appropriate to the language and literacy capacity of learners and the work being performed.
Method of assessment	A range of assessment methods should be used to assess practical skills and knowledge. The following examples are appropriate for this unit: direct questioning combined with review of portfolios of evidence and third-party workplace reports of on-the-job performance evaluation of at least two user interfaces designed by the candidate written or oral questioning to test knowledge as listed in the required skills and knowledge section of this unit.
Guidance information for assessment	Holistic assessment with other units relevant to the industry sector, workplace and job role is recommended, for example: CUFDIG304A Create visual design components CUFDIG403A Create user interfaces.

Range Statement

RANGE STATEMENT
The range statement relates to the unit of competency as a whole. It allows for different work environments and situations that may affect performance. Bold italicised wording, if used in the performance criteria, is detailed below. Essential operating conditions that may be present with training and assessment (depending on the work situation, needs of the candidate, accessibility of the item, and local industry and regional contexts) may also be included.
Relevant personnel may include:	art director client educator graphic designer head of department information architect instructional designer programmer technical director technical staff other specialist creative and administrative staff.
Delivery platform may include:	CD DVD games console internet kiosk mobile phone personal digital assistant (PDA) other wireless/mobile devices.
Audience and user characteristics may include:	computer literacy demographics, such as: age gender education occupation cultural background location hobbies interests internet literacy language, literacy and numeracy personas specific needs - physical or psychological.
Information architecture specifications may include:	content inventory diagrams flow charts maps navigation charts plans storyboards wire frames.
Spatial zones may include:	banners content areas grids headings images logos media assets menu systems subheadings.
Functional areas may include:	2D and 3D viewports buttons edit boxes list boxes login facility menus picture boxes radio buttons scroll bars search facility text boxes.
Look and feel may include:	ambience brand colour combinations design elements meaning message metaphor theme tone.
Design specifications may include:	composition design features, including: logos banners photographs illustrations diagrams layout look and feel sketches.
Focus test may include:	documentation of focus test outcomes environment and facilities focus test implementation plan focus test objectives test group members selected according to test plan and criteria, such as: age sex location other socioeconomic factors.

Unit Sector(s)

Unit sector

Competency field

Competency field	Visual communication - digital content and imaging

Co-requisite units

Co-requisite units

CUFDIG403A Create user interfaces

Modification History

Not applicable.

Unit Descriptor

Unit descriptor	This unit describes the performance outcomes, skills and knowledge required to create a user interface for an interactive media product. No licensing, legislative, regulatory or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of endorsement.

Application of the Unit

Application of the unit	A person who applies the skills and knowledge outlined in this unit works to technical and creative specifications provided by a user interface designer or other designers. There is scope for individual creativity because a person in this role is expected to generate a range of design options that respond to concepts documented in design specifications. However, these ideas need to demonstrate a sound understanding of user-centred design principles, as well as comply with standards that apply to the specific platforms on which the user interface will be run. This work is undertaken with some supervision or guidance. Skills associated with designing user interfaces are covered in: CUFDIG402A Design user interfaces.

Licensing/Regulatory Information

Not applicable.

Pre-Requisites

Prerequisite units

Employability Skills Information

Employability skills	This unit contains employability skills.

Elements and Performance Criteria Pre-Content

Elements describe the essential outcomes of a unit of competency.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element. Where bold italicised text is used, further information is detailed in the required skills and knowledge section and the range statement. Assessment of performance is to be consistent with the evidence guide.

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Clarify project requirements	1. Use design specifications in consultation with relevant personnel to clarify the target user, audience and purpose of interactive media products 2. Obtain samples of text content and media assets to be integrated into user interfaces 3. Determine file output format for delivery platform of interactive media products
Generate ideas	4. Research interactive media product user interfaces, designs, images, artwork and other creative sources that may inspire design ideas 5. Obtain other relevant information that may influence or be incorporated into design ideas 6. Determine need for copyright clearance and identify potential for fair use of copyright material 7. Obtain and record copyright clearance if required 8. Use sketches and concepts in specifications as the basis for generating range of design ideas that are technically feasible and provide creative solutions to all design issues 9. Present interface design ideas to relevant personnel for discussion and feedback
Plan approach	10. Select final design, incorporating feedback from relevant personnel as required 11. Identify range of appropriate industry-standard graphics software 12. Discuss and select graphics software with relevant personnel to ensure selection meets specified outcomes 13. Explore range of typographical and visual design elements that could be used in development of interface designs
Produce user interfaces	14. Use graphics software to develop structure for user interfaces based on final design concepts 15. Source or create and integrate all graphic interactive components 16. Apply visual design and communication principles to the development of user interfaces 17. Ensure that user interfaces meet the principles of user-centred design and relevant standards 18. Ensure that user interfaces enhance the display of digital content 19. Document styles for text and presentation for use in style sheets and templates or themes 20. Save user interfaces in an appropriate output format that satisfies technical parameters in consultation with relevant personnel
Evaluate user interfaces	21. Review user interfaces to assess effectiveness of creative solutions, appropriateness to the user and audience, and technical feasibility 22. Discuss and confirm with relevant personnel additional requirements or modifications to the overall design and undertake any necessary amendments

Required Skills and Knowledge

REQUIRED SKILLS AND KNOWLEDGE
This section describes the skills and knowledge required for this unit.
Required skills
communication, teamwork and literacy skills sufficient to: interpret and clarify written or verbal instructions interpret design specifications work collaboratively in a team environment - both independently on assignment and under direction present a range of user interface designs to team members for discussion and feedback respond constructively to feedback received from other team members complete workplace documentation creative skills sufficient to: generate feasible ideas for user interface designs that meet specifications apply visual design and communication principles to produce user interface designs technical skills sufficient to: proficiently use graphics software to produce user interface designs create user interface designs to meet standards and platform parameters manage files and directories using standard naming conventions self-management and planning skills sufficient to: prioritise work tasks meet deadlines seek expert assistance when problems arise
Required knowledge
industry knowledge, including: roles and responsibilities of project team members, e.g. designers, content creators, information architects, programmers and coders sound understanding of the relationship between technical and creative aspects and requirements of interactive media projects issues and challenges that arise in creating user interfaces standards as they apply to user interfaces, including W3C Accessibility, interoperability, usability and readability visual design and communication principles, including user-centred design principles design elements typography copyright clearance procedures OHS standards as they relate to working for periods of time on computers

Evidence Guide

EVIDENCE GUIDE
The Evidence Guide provides advice on assessment and must be read in conjunction with the performance criteria, required skills and knowledge, range statement and the Assessment Guidelines for the Training Package.
Overview of assessment
Critical aspects for assessment and evidence required to demonstrate competency in this unit	Evidence of the following is essential: creation of user interfaces that: visually communicate to target user and audience meet required standards and technical parameters of the specified platform ability to work effectively as a member of a production team.
Context of and specific resources for assessment	Assessment must ensure: access to design specifications typically used in industry access to current industry-standard software as listed in the range statement access to appropriate learning and assessment support when required use of culturally appropriate processes and techniques appropriate to the language and literacy capacity of learners and the work being performed.
Method of assessment	A range of assessment methods should be used to assess practical skills and knowledge. The following examples are appropriate for this unit: direct questioning combined with review of portfolios of evidence and third-party workplace reports of on-the-job performance evaluation of a range of user interfaces created by the candidate in response to design specifications written or oral questioning to test knowledge as listed in the required skills and knowledge section of this unit.
Guidance information for assessment	Holistic assessment with other units relevant to the industry sector, workplace and job role is recommended, for example: CUFDIG304A Create visual design components CUFDIG402A Design user interfaces.

Range Statement

RANGE STATEMENT
The range statement relates to the unit of competency as a whole. It allows for different work environments and situations that may affect performance. Bold italicised wording, if used in the performance criteria, is detailed below. Essential operating conditions that may be present with training and assessment (depending on the work situation, needs of the candidate, accessibility of the item, and local industry and regional contexts) may also be included.
Design specifications may include:	creative requirements manufacturing specifications navigation design priority levels of W3C Accessibility standards storyboards technical specifications, including: disk space bandwidth delivery platform file format for final product user interface design.
Relevant personnel may include:	graphic designer information architect instructional designer navigation designer product designer programmer project manager other specialist staff.
Purpose may include:	business and corporate community education entertainment personal promotion training.
Interactive media products may include:	e-commerce educational product game information product interactive application promotional product social network training product website.
Media assets may include:	animation audio graphics images text video.
Output formats may include:	bitmap image digital formats, such as: GIF JPEG PDF TIFF PICT PNG HTML PSD vector image.
Delivery platform may include:	CD/DVD games console internet kiosk mobile phone personal digital assistant (PDA) other wireless/mobile devices.
Relevant information may include:	brands logos previous versions of interfaces printed materials promotion materials style guides trademarks.
Graphics software may include:	Fireworks Illustrator Photoshop Photoshop Elements.
Typographical elements may include:	alignment fonts and typefaces kerning leading point and size serif or sans serif tracking.
Visual design elements may include:	colour form line shape texture tone.
Interactive components may include:	backgrounds banners icons interactive buttons interactive controls logos menus search boxes.
Visual design principles may include:	balance emphasis focal point movement perspective proportion scale unity.
Communication principles may include:	communicates message conveys meaning meets audience requirements uses functional components.
Principles of user-centred design may include:	clear feedback and instructions consistent behaviour and design for: common interface elements menu systems search boxes layout iconography typography colour easy exit if wrong path selected plain English for text and instructions simplicity support for work tasks.
Standards may include:	interoperability readability usability W3C Accessibility.

Unit Sector(s)

Unit sector

Competency field

Competency field	Visual communication - digital content and imaging

Co-requisite units

Co-requisite units

CUFDIG404A Apply scripting language in authoring

Modification History

Not applicable.

Unit Descriptor

Unit descriptor	This unit describes the performance outcomes, skills and knowledge required to write and apply scripting language in authoring interactive media. An interactive media author is often required to integrate and develop basic scripting routines that are either external or internal to authoring software. This may be necessary to enhance levels of interaction or to remedy errors in the functionality of an interactive media product developed using authoring software. This unit outlines the skills and knowledge required by interactive media authors to write and customise their own code. These routines are relevant to client-side technology only. No licensing, legislative, regulatory or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of endorsement.

Application of the Unit

Application of the unit	In all interactive media development, authors are working with a team, including primarily a user interface designer, asset creators and programmers. Markup languages such as HTML and XML are covered in: CUFDIG302A Author interactive sequences CUFDIG401A Author interactive media.

Licensing/Regulatory Information

Not applicable.

Pre-Requisites

Prerequisite units

Employability Skills Information

Employability skills	This unit contains employability skills.

Elements and Performance Criteria Pre-Content

Elements describe the essential outcomes of a unit of competency.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element. Where bold italicised text is used, further information is detailed in the required skills and knowledge section and the range statement. Assessment of performance is to be consistent with the evidence guide.

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Investigate scripting options	1. Obtain design specifications 2. Identify areas where scripting languages may be required 3. Locate script libraries for pre-written scripts 4. Identify areas where customised or new scripts may be necessary 5. Present and discuss scripting options with relevant personnel to ensure compliance with design specifications
Write scripts	6. Scope control structures and algorithms using pseudo-code and flow charts 7. Ensure objects and assets are in place and identified by appropriate labels 8. Identify and recommend event handlers 9. Write code using correct syntax to meet functional requirements 10. Write comments to document coding where necessary 11. Use authoring environment where appropriate to check code and syntax 12. Save code
Integrate scripting language	13. Source and integrate scripts into authoring environment 14. Ensure scripted elements comply with all navigation and graphic design interface considerations 15. Eliminate or merge redundant code
Test scripting language	16. Test routines to verify script fulfils requirements 17. Conduct tests to ensure that scripted elements conform to required technical specifications 18. Test for faults and document findings 19. Use standard techniques to remove faults
Evaluate scripting language	20. Liaise with relevant personnel to evaluate process and record decisions 21. Archive suitable and relevant scripts for future use

Required Skills and Knowledge

REQUIRED SKILLS AND KNOWLEDGE
This section describes the skills and knowledge required for this unit.
Required skills
communication and literacy skills sufficient to: interpret and clarify written or verbal instructions and design specifications interpret and apply information in user manuals for software applications ability to work as a member of a production team - both independently on assignment and under direction initiative and flexibility in troubleshooting and solving problems as they arise during the authoring process technical skills sufficient to: write and apply scripting language in authoring a range of interactive media and behaviours efficiently use a computer, including keyboard shortcuts self-management and planning skills sufficient to: prioritise work tasks meet deadlines seek expert assistance as required
Required knowledge
industry knowledge, including: roles and responsibilities of project team members, e.g. designers, content creators, information architects, programmers and coders sound understanding of the relationship between technical and creative aspects and requirements of interactive media projects sound knowledge of the features of a range of delivery platforms issues and challenges that arise in developing interactive media products file formats of digital media assets and basic optimisation techniques Document Object Model (DOM) and Object Oriented Programming (OOP) OHS standards as they relate to working for periods of time on computers

Evidence Guide

EVIDENCE GUIDE
The Evidence Guide provides advice on assessment and must be read in conjunction with the performance criteria, required skills and knowledge, range statement and the Assessment Guidelines for the Training Package.
Overview of assessment
Critical aspects for assessment and evidence required to demonstrate competency in this unit	Evidence of the following is essential: ability to write code to meet functional requirements correct and appropriate integration of scripting language into the process of authoring interactive media products.
Context of and specific resources for assessment	Assessment must ensure: access to a range of resources, equipment and current industry-standard software as listed in the range statement appropriate authoring environments access to appropriate learning and assessment support when required use of culturally appropriate processes and techniques appropriate to the language and literacy capacity of learners and the work being performed.
Method of assessment	A range of assessment methods should be used to assess practical skills and knowledge. The following examples are appropriate for this unit: direct questioning combined with review of portfolios of evidence and third-party workplace reports of on-the-job performance evaluation of at least two interactive products for which the candidate has written and integrated code written or oral questioning to test knowledge as listed in the required skills and knowledge section of this unit.
Guidance information for assessment	Holistic assessment with other units relevant to the industry sector, workplace and job role is recommended, for example: CUFDIG401A Author interactive media.

Range Statement

RANGE STATEMENT
The range statement relates to the unit of competency as a whole. It allows for different work environments and situations that may affect performance. Bold italicised wording, if used in the performance criteria, is detailed below. Essential operating conditions that may be present with training and assessment (depending on the work situation, needs of the candidate, accessibility of the item, and local industry and regional contexts) may also be included.
Design specifications may include:	delivery platforms, such as: internet CD mobile devices interface design navigation design storyboards and flow charts. technical specifications, such as: memory/RAM bandwidth file formats computer operating systems browsers user requirements.
Scripting languages may include:	ActionScript Javascript Lingo MEL Perl VBScript other proprietary scripting languages.
Relevant personnel may include:	designers interactive authors IT support programmers other specialist technical staff.
Authoring environment may include:	authoring software, such as: Flash Director browser text editor.
Scripted elements may include:	calculations changes to browser windows, such as pop-up and colour cursor changes forms that include elements, such as: radio buttons text fields check boxes list menu hot spot interactions pop-up windows/messages preloaded images rollover buttons other behaviours.

Unit Sector(s)

Unit sector

Competency field

Competency field	Visual communication - digital content and imaging

Co-requisite units

Co-requisite units

CUFDIG501A Coordinate the testing of interactive media products

Modification History

Not applicable.

Unit Descriptor

Unit descriptor	This unit describes the performance outcomes, skills and knowledge required to manage the testing of interactive media products. No licensing, legislative, regulatory or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of endorsement.

Application of the Unit

Application of the unit	This is a central team role, working with the whole production team, including designers, authors, programmers and graphic artists. In larger projects and particularly in games, testing is a continuous process and may have a quality assurance unit devoted to testing. A person in this position plans and coordinates the testing process and is also responsible for analysing testing results, writing reports and communicating the results to appropriate members of the production team.

Licensing/Regulatory Information

Not applicable.

Pre-Requisites

Prerequisite units

Employability Skills Information

Employability skills	This unit contains employability skills.

Elements and Performance Criteria Pre-Content

Elements describe the essential outcomes of a unit of competency.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element. Where bold italicised text is used, further information is detailed in the required skills and knowledge section and the range statement. Assessment of performance is to be consistent with the evidence guide.

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Determine the criteria for testing	1. Define testing criteria that ensure products meet technical and quality requirements 2. Identify with relevant personnel the production points at which development will be measured 3. Document and communicate testing criteria to relevant personnel
Plan an approach for product testing	4. Identify the various testing methods relevant for interactive media products 5. Determine characteristics and appropriateness of testing methods to be used during development and on completion 6. Consider testing methods in relation to appropriate testing strategy 7. Develop a plan for testing products at specified points during development and on completion 8. Establish records system to document testing results, including problems and faults
Test interactive media at specified production points	9. Determine progress towards completion of identified production points 10. Coordinate testing of products at identified production points 11. Apply testing methods to ensure that products meet creative, production and technical requirements 12. Record problems and faults detected by testing and remedial steps taken in records system 13. Resolve problems and faults detected during testing in accordance with agreed project or industry practice 14. Evaluate final products against the previously determined criteria 15. Document the testing process 16. Convey summarised evaluation report to relevant production personnel
Evaluate the testing process	17. Identify testing methods that were successful and those that led to difficulties 18. Evaluate the testing process and records system 19. Document findings to inform subsequent projects

Required Skills and Knowledge

REQUIRED SKILLS AND KNOWLEDGE
This section describes the skills and knowledge required for this unit.
Required skills
communication, teamwork and literacy skills sufficient to: interpret and clarify project specifications interpret and analyse information and statistics, and write summary reports convey information to others in the production team work as a member of a production team, including providing leadership in relation to product testing organisational skills sufficient to: plan testing processes coordinate testing staff establish records systems ability to address and solve problems and challenges in a timely and collaborative manner self-management skills sufficient to: prioritise work tasks work under pressure and meet deadlines seek expert assistance as required
Required knowledge
industry knowledge, including: roles and responsibilities of project team members, e.g. designers, content creators, information architects, programmers and coders sound understanding of the relationship between technical and creative aspects and requirements of interactive media projects issues and challenges that arise in testing interactive media products testing criteria range of methods for testing interactive media products OHS standards as they apply to computers and environments in which testing may be conducted

Evidence Guide

EVIDENCE GUIDE
The Evidence Guide provides advice on assessment and must be read in conjunction with the performance criteria, required skills and knowledge, range statement and the Assessment Guidelines for the Training Package.
Overview of assessment
Critical aspects for assessment and evidence required to demonstrate competency in this unit	Evidence of the following is essential: documented plans for testing interactive media products ability to identify appropriate testing methods for specific interactive media products analysis of test results summary reports containing test results effective coordination of the testing process, including ability to work collaboratively with team members.
Context of and specific resources for assessment	Assessment must ensure: development of more than one test plan to ensure that skills can be adapted to different circumstances development of a test plan within commercially-realistic time constraints involvement of and interaction with others to reflect the collaborative nature of the testing process access to interactive media products under development access to equipment used for testing access to appropriate learning and assessment support when required use of culturally appropriate processes and techniques appropriate to the language and literacy capacity of learners and the work being performed.
Method of assessment	A range of assessment methods should be used to assess practical skills and knowledge. The following examples are appropriate for this unit: direct questioning combined with review of portfolios of evidence and third-party workplace reports of on-the-job performance evaluation of at least two test plans developed by the candidate evaluation of at least two test reports written by the candidate written or oral questioning to test knowledge of the process followed to test an interactive media product, testing methods, testing criteria and the respective roles and responsibilities of team members.
Guidance information for assessment	Holistic assessment with other units relevant to the industry sector, workplace and job role is recommended, for example: BSBPMG510A Manage projects.

Range Statement

RANGE STATEMENT
The range statement relates to the unit of competency as a whole. It allows for different work environments and situations that may affect performance. Bold italicised wording, if used in the performance criteria, is detailed below. Essential operating conditions that may be present with training and assessment (depending on the work situation, needs of the candidate, accessibility of the item, and local industry and regional contexts) may also be included.
Testing criteria may include:	accessibility bug detection controls ease of learning effectiveness efficiency functionality, including flow interoperability learning outcomes levels of difficulty performance reliability satisfaction security usability.
Relevant personnel may include:	author game designer game level designer information architect instructional designer interaction designer producer programmer user interface designer visual artist other specialist staff.
Production points may include:	alpha beta completion continuous milestone prototype staged.
Testing methods may be:	aggressive automated black box card sorting concept debugging focus group heuristic analysis inspection platform testing prototyping regression survey user trial visual impact white box.
Interactive media products may include:	e-commerce e-learning resource game information product promotional product training product web environments.
Testing strategy may be determined by:	complexity of the project money available project specifications time available.
Records system may include:	metadata that includes: description of fault identification of code user responses written or verbal comments quantitative data remedial action taken retest result date tester's details questionnaire survey.

Unit Sector(s)

Unit sector

Competency field

Competency field	Visual communication - digital content and imaging

Co-requisite units

Co-requisite units

CUFDIG502A Design web environments

Modification History

Not applicable.

Unit Descriptor

Unit descriptor	This unit describes the performance outcomes, skills and knowledge required to design web environments. A web environment may consist of one or many web applications and technologies integrated in various combinations. The design is focused on how these applications and technologies are combined and used, and the way in which interactive content is accessed by users. No licensing, legislative, regulatory or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of endorsement.

Application of the Unit

Application of the unit	A person in this role works with clients to develop design specifications for web environments. Other specialised designers, graphic artists and programmers working as a team undertake the development of design specifications. Higher order skills associated with developing and documenting concepts that could be used as the basis for design specifications are covered in: BSBCRT501A Originate and develop concepts.

Licensing/Regulatory Information

Not applicable.

Pre-Requisites

Prerequisite units

Employability Skills Information

Employability skills	This unit contains employability skills.

Elements and Performance Criteria Pre-Content

Elements describe the essential outcomes of a unit of competency.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element. Where bold italicised text is used, further information is detailed in the required skills and knowledge section and the range statement. Assessment of performance is to be consistent with the evidence guide.

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Determine project requirements	1. Analyse project brief to identify purpose of, and target audience for, web environments 2. Consult with clients to clarify project requirements 3. Identify target audience characteristics and determine how these influence all aspects of design 4. Identify content to be incorporated and generated and how this content is to be accessed, searched or delivered
Research and select web environments	5. Research web environments and analyse their potential 6. Analyse how these web environments meet audience and content requirements 7. Identify issues relating to delivery platform and standards, and determine how these may affect web environment options 8. Consult relevant personnel to ensure that all possible web environment options are considered 9. Select web environments that will meet creative, production and technical requirements
Draft design specifications	10. Design the architecture of web environments to show interrelationship between environment components 11. Identify each web environment and specify its individual interactive features, functionality and navigation and its relationship to design as a whole 12. Identify content components and specify how these will be logically structured and integrated into and/or generated by web environments 13. Specify levels of access permissions to web environments as required 14. Specify media assets as required 15. Specify user interfaces of web environments 16. Specify production requirements, including appropriate testing strategies 17. Write draft design specifications to include all relevant advice to design and development teams 18. Discuss draft design specifications with client to ensure designs are consistent with project briefs
Review and confirm design specifications	19. Review designs against required project outcomes, as well as client and audience needs 20. Review designs to ensure they meet creative and technical requirements 21. Adjust designs as necessary after discussions with relevant personnel 22. Clarify legislative or ownership issues to comply with production and organisational requirements 23. Confirm with client acceptance of design specifications, including deliverables, milestones and timelines

Required Skills and Knowledge

REQUIRED SKILLS AND KNOWLEDGE
This section describes the skills and knowledge required for this unit.
Required skills
communication, teamwork and literacy skills sufficient to: interpret and clarify written proposals and creative briefs work collaboratively in a team environment present ideas for the design of web environments for discussion and feedback from team members clearly and concisely document specifications for the design of web environments initiative, enterprise and creativity in the context of: generating ideas for the design of web environments thinking laterally when developing concepts undertaking background research into web environments maintaining design integrity finding solutions to problems encountered when designing web environments finding ways to minimise the effect of technical constraints ensuring there is an intuitive and logical flow to the navigation of web environments technical skills sufficient to create storyboards, maps and other diagrams to specify the architecture and navigation of web environments self-management skills sufficient to: meet deadlines provide appropriate and timely documentation
Required knowledge
industry knowledge, including: roles and responsibilities of project team members, e.g. designers, content creators, information architects, programmers and coders sequence and interrelationship of stages in the process of developing web environments broad range of web applications and technologies web design and its relationship to web optimisation strategies web standards, including SCORM, usability, W3C Accessibility and interoperability issues and challenges that arise in designing and developing web environments typical formats and techniques for documenting the design of web environments OHS standards as they relate to working for periods of time on computers intellectual property rights and copyright clearance procedures

Evidence Guide

EVIDENCE GUIDE
The Evidence Guide provides advice on assessment and must be read in conjunction with the performance criteria, required skills and knowledge, range statement and the Assessment Guidelines for the Training Package.
Overview of assessment
Critical aspects for assessment and evidence required to demonstrate competency in this unit	Evidence of the following is essential: design specifications for web environments that: are well documented and clearly presented meet client and audience requirements are technically feasible ability to work effectively as a member of a production team.
Context of and specific resources for assessment	Assessment must ensure: practical demonstration of skills through the design of web environments for at least two projects access to project briefs on which designs can be based access to appropriate learning and assessment support when required use of culturally appropriate processes and techniques appropriate to the language and literacy capacity of learners and the work being performed.
Method of assessment	A range of assessment methods should be used to assess practical skills and knowledge. The following examples are appropriate for this unit: direct questioning combined with review of portfolios of evidence and third-party workplace reports of on-the-job performance evaluation of designs for web environments documented by the candidate and of their effectiveness in terms of meeting project requirements observation of a candidate presenting his/her design for web environments to team members and explaining how it meets requirements written or oral questioning to test knowledge as listed in the required skills and knowledge section of this unit.
Guidance information for assessment	Holistic assessment with other units relevant to the industry sector, workplace and job role is recommended, for example: CUFDIG505A Design information architecture CUFPPM404A Create storyboards.

Range Statement

RANGE STATEMENT
The range statement relates to the unit of competency as a whole. It allows for different work environments and situations that may affect performance. Bold italicised wording, if used in the performance criteria, is detailed below. Essential operating conditions that may be present with training and assessment (depending on the work situation, needs of the candidate, accessibility of the item, and local industry and regional contexts) may also be included.
Purpose may include:	business and corporate community education entertainment government information and news knowledge management personal promotion training.
Project requirements may include:	access to facilities and resources budget deliverables milestones personnel, including: number availability expertise prototyping technical issues, including: delivery platform disk space bandwidth testing plan timelines.
Audience characteristics may include:	computer literacy demographics, such as: age gender education occupation location cultural background hobbies interests internet literacy language, literacy and numeracy personas specific needs - physical or psychological.
Web environments may include one or combinations of:	audio streaming blog chat conferencing tool content learning management system (CLMS) content management system (CMS) database repository discussion forum dynamic website electronic newsletter interactive calendar interactive form learning management system (LMS) podcast RSS feed static website TiVo video streaming other online collaboration and social network tools.
Delivery platform may include:	digital television set internet mobile phone other wireless/mobile devices personal digital assistant (PDA).
Standards may include:	interoperability SCORM usability W3C Accessibility.
Relevant personnel may include:	art director client educator graphic designer head of department information architect instructional designer programmer technical director technical staff other specialist creative and administrative staff.
Media assets may include:	animation audio audio/visual files, such as PowerPoint graphics images text text documents, such as PDF and Word video.
Production requirements may include:	levels of expertise production deadlines production schedules production team production values testing strategies.
Testing strategies may include:	alpha beta completion continuous milestone prototype staged.
Design specifications may include:	content inventory diagrams flow charts maps navigation charts plans storyboards technical specifications user interface mock-ups wire frames.
Legislative or ownership issues may be:	access and equity clearances confidentiality copyright intellectual property rights non-disclosure agreements open source licensing ownership of assets product licensing.

Unit Sector(s)

Unit sector

Competency field

Competency field	Visual communication - digital content and imaging

Co-requisite units

Co-requisite units

CUFDIG503A Design e-learning resources

Modification History

Not applicable.

Unit Descriptor

Unit descriptor	This unit describes the performance outcomes, skills and knowledge required to design an e-learning resource. No licensing, legislative, regulatory or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of endorsement.

Application of the Unit

Application of the unit	The skills and knowledge outlined in this unit are applied by people working in education or training organisations, or in media production companies that specialise in the development of e-learning resources. The focus of this unit is different to that of the two units in the Training and Assessment Training Package that deal with e-learning resources. Namely: TAADES503B Research and design e-learning resources TAADES504B Develop and evaluate e-learning resources. These two units are written from the perspective of people in training organisations who are responsible for developing and delivering learning materials to be included in e-learning resources. CUFDIG503A is written from the perspective of a department or company responsible for developing the design of broad ranging e-learning resources in consultation with clients. However, there are synergies between the units and it may be appropriate to combine them in learning programs.

Licensing/Regulatory Information

Not applicable.

Pre-Requisites

Prerequisite units

Employability Skills Information

Employability skills	This unit contains employability skills.

Elements and Performance Criteria Pre-Content

Elements describe the essential outcomes of a unit of competency.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element. Where bold italicised text is used, further information is detailed in the required skills and knowledge section and the range statement. Assessment of performance is to be consistent with the evidence guide.

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Identify project requirements	1. With reference to project briefs, identify target learner characteristics and their impact on the way resources are designed 2. Identify content to be incorporated or generated and how this content is to be accessed or delivered 3. Identify delivery platforms and implications that these will have on selection of media assets 4. Consult with clients to clarify project requirements
Research and select instructional design model	5. Analyse content to clearly establish learning outcomes and assessment strategies 6. Research a range of instructional design models, considering their characteristics, differences and ability to meet briefs 7. Identify standards that may apply for a range of delivery platforms 8. Identify learning styles of target learners and consider how these may impact on the design 9. Consider a range of learning activities that best meet learning objectives and needs of target learners 10. Consult with relevant personnel to ensure that a full range of instructional design models has been identified and sourced 11. Select the instructional design model that best meets learning needs and project requirements
Draft design specifications	12. Use selected instructional design model to design the overall architecture of an e-learning resource 13. Design sequences and interactivity based on content and project requirements 14. Develop content templates for content experts if required 15. Specify media assets as required 16. Specify communication and collaborative tools as required 17. Specify user interface of the e-learning resource 18. Specify production requirements, including appropriate testing strategies 19. Write draft design specifications to include relevant advice to design and development teams 20. Discuss draft design specifications with clients to ensure designs are consistent with project briefs
Finalise design specifications	21. Review designs against required project outcomes and target learner needs 22. Review designs to ensure they meet creative and technical requirements 23. Adjust designs as necessary after discussions with relevant personnel 24. Clarify legislative or ownership issues to comply with production and organisational requirements 25. Confirm with clients acceptance of design specifications, including deliverables, milestones and timelines

Required Skills and Knowledge

REQUIRED SKILLS AND KNOWLEDGE
This section describes the skills and knowledge required for this unit.
Required skills
communication, teamwork and literacy skills sufficient to: interpret and clarify project briefs establish rapport with clients work collaboratively in a team environment to find the best design solutions clearly and concisely document specifications for the design of e-learning resources initiative and enterprise in the context of: generating ideas for the design of e-learning resources that meet the needs of target learners thinking laterally when developing ideas selecting the most appropriate instructional design model maintaining design integrity technical skills sufficient to: create storyboards, maps and other diagrams to specify the architecture and navigation of e-learning resources construct material in a logical order, one sequence flowing on from another develop techniques for holding learner's attention self-management skills sufficient to: meet deadlines provide appropriate and timely documentation
Required knowledge
typical formats and techniques for documenting the design of e-learning resources OHS standards as they relate to working for periods of time on computers range of learning models way in which various learning styles impact on learning models industry knowledge, including: roles and responsibilities of project team members, e.g. designers, content creators, information architects, programmers and coders sequence and interrelationship of stages in the process of developing e-learning resources web standards, including usability, W3C Accessibility and interoperability web applications and technologies that are relevant to e-learning issues and challenges that arise in designing and developing e-learning resources intellectual property rights and copyright clearance procedures

Evidence Guide

EVIDENCE GUIDE
The Evidence Guide provides advice on assessment and must be read in conjunction with the performance criteria, required skills and knowledge, range statement and the Assessment Guidelines for the Training Package.
Overview of assessment
Critical aspects for assessment and evidence required to demonstrate competency in this unit	Evidence of the following is essential: design specifications for e-learning resources that: are well documented and clearly presented meet learner requirements are technically feasible ability to work effectively as a member of a production team.
Context of and specific resources for assessment	Assessment must ensure: practical demonstration of skills through the design of at least two e-learning resources for delivery on different platforms access to project briefs on which designs can be based access to appropriate learning and assessment support when required use of culturally appropriate processes and techniques appropriate to the language and literacy capacity of learners and the work being performed.
Method of assessment	A range of assessment methods should be used to assess practical skills and knowledge. The following examples are appropriate for this unit: direct questioning combined with review of portfolios of evidence and third-party workplace reports of on-the-job performance evaluation of designs for e-learning resources documented by the candidate and of their effectiveness in terms of meeting project requirements role-play involving a candidate presenting his/her design for an e-learning resource to a client and explaining how it meets requirements written or oral questioning to test knowledge as listed in the required skills and knowledge section of this unit.
Guidance information for assessment	Holistic assessment with other units relevant to the industry sector, workplace and job role is recommended, for example: CUFPPM404A Create storyboards.

Range Statement

RANGE STATEMENT
The range statement relates to the unit of competency as a whole. It allows for different work environments and situations that may affect performance. Bold italicised wording, if used in the performance criteria, is detailed below. Essential operating conditions that may be present with training and assessment (depending on the work situation, needs of the candidate, accessibility of the item, and local industry and regional contexts) may also be included.
Target learner characteristics may include:	computer literacy demographics, such as: age gender education occupation location cultural background hobbies interests internet literacy language, literacy and numeracy levels learning environment, such as: workplace classroom home community mobile personas preferred learning styles skills level specific needs - physical or psychological.
Content may include:	audio/visual materials curriculum documents, such as: Training Packages and their units of competency modules guides manuals PowerPoint presentations pre-existing learning materials printed materials reference texts training handouts.
Delivery platform may include:	CD/DVD digital television set internet, including: websites blogs wikis database repositories learning management systems, such as: Blackboard WebCT Janeson Moodle virtual classrooms conferencing discussion forums flash-based chat podcasting video streaming audio streaming other online collaboration tools mobile phone personal digital assistant (PDA) other wireless/mobile devices.
Media assets may include:	animations audio audio/visual files, such as PowerPoint graphics images text documents, such as PDF and Word video.
Project requirements may include:	access to facilities and resources assessment strategies budget deliverables learner characteristics milestones personnel, including: number availability expertise prototyping technical issues, including: delivery platform disk space bandwidth testing plan timelines.
Instructional design models include:	exploration game instructional lock step mentoring problem-solving puzzle simulation story-telling.
Standards may include:	AQTF interoperability SCORM usability W3C Accessibility.
Learning styles may include:	activist learning preferences, including auditory, visual or sensory pragmatist reflective theorist
Learning activities may include:	blogs case studies checklists discussions and debates games interviews media presentations problems projects quizzes research reports role-plays simulations tasks work-based practical activities.
Relevant personnel may include:	art director client content expert educator graphic designer head of department information architect language, literacy and numeracy specialist programmer reference group member technical director technical staff other specialist creative and administrative staff.
Communication and collaborative tools may include:	blogs chat discussion forums messaging TiVo wikis other social software tools.
Production requirements may include:	levels of expertise production deadlines production schedules production team testing strategies.
Testing strategies may include:	alpha beta completion continuous milestone prototype staged.
Design specifications may include:	content inventory diagrams flow charts maps navigation charts plans storyboards technical specifications user interface mock-ups wire frames
Legislative or ownership issues may be:	access and equity clearances confidentiality copyright intellectual property rights non-disclosure agreements open source licensing ownership of assets product licensing.

Unit Sector(s)

Unit sector

Competency field

Competency field	Visual communication - digital content and imaging

Co-requisite units

Co-requisite units

CUFDIG504A Design games

Modification History

Not applicable.

Unit Descriptor

Unit descriptor	This unit describes the performance outcomes, skills and knowledge required to design games and document the process for developing them. Game design requires a high degree of collaboration between script writers, programmers and graphic designers. Low-end games can be constructed using interactive authoring tools, but for video game productions, designers need to work with high level programmers to ensure that designs are technically feasible. No licensing, legislative, regulatory or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of endorsement.

Application of the Unit

Application of the unit	A lead designer typically applies the skills and knowledge described in this unit, which relate to generating and then working on a game idea until the mechanics and design of the game are fully documented. A lead designer communicates the vision for a game to the rest of the team, takes ideas submitted during design meetings and analyses them to ensure they fit the game's intended objectives. This vision is captured in the game design document. Depending on the size of an enterprise, a lead designer may supervise assistant or level designers and would typically report to a design or creative director. Skills associated with story-telling are covered in: CUFWRT402A Write extended stories.

Licensing/Regulatory Information

Not applicable.

Pre-Requisites

Prerequisite units

Employability Skills Information

Employability skills	This unit contains employability skills.

Elements and Performance Criteria Pre-Content

Elements describe the essential outcomes of a unit of competency.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element. Where bold italicised text is used, further information is detailed in the required skills and knowledge section and the range statement. Assessment of performance is to be consistent with the evidence guide.

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Identify project requirements	1. Confirm the objective and desired outcomes of a game proposal or brief in consultation with relevant personnel 2. Identify factors that may have an impact on how a game is designed 3. Clarify target audience to determine format and delivery platform of the game through discussion with relevant personnel
Research games and generate ideas	4. Select state of the art games from different genres to play as a source of inspiration 5. Search game literature for each game and identify the games' objectives 6. Generate range of ideas for game designs that are technically feasible, respond to the proposal or brief, and provide creative solutions to design issues 7. Discuss ideas and collaborate, as required, with relevant personnel to ensure contribution of a range of ideas and creative solutions to initial concepts
Select a game genre	8. Identify and present a range of game genres to relevant personnel for consideration in terms of their characteristics, differences and ability to meet requirements of proposal or brief 9. Consult with relevant personnel to ensure that a full range of genres has been identified and sourced 10. Select the game genre that best meets the creative, technical and production requirements of proposal or brief
Draft game design document	11. Establish the game strategy outcomes 12. Use design techniques to develop the structure of a game ensuring that all elements, including style and game mechanics, are fully documented 13. Use a range of criteria to determine the scope of a prototype to be used in the development phase 14. Ensure that the prototype selected is capable of testing the effectiveness of the proposed game 15. Include a register of game assets in consultation with relevant personnel 16. Present draft game design document for discussion with and feedback from other team members
Finalise game design document	17. Re-evaluate game design objectives on the basis of feedback on the prototype and draft game design document 18. Discuss and confirm additional requirements or modifications to the game design with relevant personnel 19. Specify the game production specifications, including appropriate testing strategies 20. Write final game design document to reflect all additional requirements or modifications

Required Skills and Knowledge

REQUIRED SKILLS AND KNOWLEDGE
This section describes the skills and knowledge required for this unit.
Required skills
communication, teamwork and literacy skills sufficient to: interpret and clarify written proposals and creative briefs work collaboratively in a team environment present game design ideas for discussion and feedback from team members document game design specifications clearly and concisely initiative, enterprise and creativity in the context of: generating innovative ideas for game designs thinking laterally when developing concepts undertaking background research into game ideas maintaining design integrity technical skills sufficient to create complex designs using storyboards, maps and other diagrams to specify the architecture and navigation of game mechanics self-management skills sufficient to: meet deadlines provide appropriate and timely documentation
Required knowledge
industry knowledge, including: roles and responsibilities of project team members, e.g. designers, content creators, information architects, programmers and coders sound understanding of game theory, including traditional games broad range of game genres and styles technical parameters of various games platforms issues and challenges that arise in designing games research methods for staying abreast of the latest changes and design enhancements requirements of game play design documents typical formats and techniques for documenting game designs intellectual property rights and copyright clearance procedures OHS standards as they relate to working for periods of time on computers

Evidence Guide

EVIDENCE GUIDE
The Evidence Guide provides advice on assessment and must be read in conjunction with the performance criteria, required skills and knowledge, range statement and the Assessment Guidelines for the Training Package.
Overview of assessment
Critical aspects for assessment and evidence required to demonstrate competency in this unit	Evidence of the following is essential: development of original and innovative concepts for games design of game play methods that are compelling for the user and technically feasible production of clear and well-presented game design documentation ability to work effectively as a member of a design team.
Context of and specific resources for assessment	Assessment must ensure: practical demonstration of skills through the design of a variety of games for at least two platforms access to game proposals or briefs on which designs can be based access to a range of games for viewing access to appropriate learning and assessment support when required use of culturally appropriate processes and techniques appropriate to the language and literacy capacity of learners and the work being performed.
Method of assessment	A range of assessment methods should be used to assess practical skills and knowledge. The following examples are appropriate for this unit: direct questioning combined with review of portfolios of evidence and third-party workplace reports of on-the-job performance evaluation of game designs documented by the candidate and of their quality in terms of meeting creative briefs written or oral questioning to test knowledge as listed in the required skills and knowledge section of this unit case studies to assess ability to develop designs for different types of games.
Guidance information for assessment	Holistic assessment with other units relevant to the industry sector, workplace and job role is recommended, for example: CUFPPM404A Create storyboards BSBCRT501A Originate and develop concepts.

Range Statement

RANGE STATEMENT
The range statement relates to the unit of competency as a whole. It allows for different work environments and situations that may affect performance. Bold italicised wording, if used in the performance criteria, is detailed below. Essential operating conditions that may be present with training and assessment (depending on the work situation, needs of the candidate, accessibility of the item, and local industry and regional contexts) may also be included.
Relevant personnel may include:	art director client designers director graphic artist head of department producer programmer publisher script writer software engineer other technical and creative staff.
Factors may include:	availability of personnel availability of resources available budget complexity of proposed game intellectual property need to attract finance production schedule production values technical parameters, including: technology constraints console platform bandwidth memory/RAM timelines user and audience.
Delivery platforms may include:	CD/DVD digital television set games console internet mobile phone personal digital assistant (PDA) other wireless/mobile devices.
State of the art games may include:	best selling games games that show unique and innovative approaches.
Game literature may include:	game design books game post-mortems magazine, newspaper and journal articles previews and reviews strategy guides user manuals walkthroughs other online game resources.
Game genres may include:	adventure arcade first person shooter massively multiplayer online mazes platforms puzzles racing rhythm role playing simulation sport strategy third person shooter.
Design techniques may include:	drawing flow chart scanning storyboard using image and background generating tools.
Game mechanics may include:	environment and object interactions environment dynamics game objects game play elements that may include: skill levels judgements choices decisions codes rules levels of progression goals actions events levels of difficulty scoring calculation of scoring user control user interaction options for single player or multiplayer customisation key systems object actions object to object interactions.
Criteria may include whether the prototype:	can be demonstrated to a specialist target group can be used for promotional purposes can demonstrate the full potential of the game can sell a concept to potential investors is appropriate for the chosen genre and style.
Testing the effectiveness of the prototype may include:	comparing game design with original objectives group discussion techniques identifying any logical inconsistencies in: design game timing story-lines measuring the levels of user satisfaction paper and pencil techniques (dry running).
Game assets may include:	animations audio, including: sound effects dialogue narration music cut scenes titles video sequences.
Game design document may include:	agent architectures artificial intelligence asset register background story comprehensive designs for each mission and level decision-making systems game mechanics game tools graphics inventories overview production specifications scripts spatial design storyboard and flow chart synopsis title user interface walkthroughs.
Production specifications may include:	budget intellectual property levels of staff expertise production schedule production values size and composition of the development team technology constraints testing strategies timelines.
Testing strategies may include:	alpha beta completion continuous milestone prototype staged.

Unit Sector(s)

Unit sector

Competency field

Competency field	Visual communication - digital content and imaging

Co-requisite units

Co-requisite units

CUFDIG505A Design information architecture

Modification History

Not applicable.

Unit Descriptor

Unit descriptor	This unit describes the performance outcomes, skills and knowledge required to design the information architecture of an interactive media product. No licensing, legislative, regulatory or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of endorsement.

Application of the Unit

Application of the unit	Depending on the size and type of organisation, information architects or senior web designers apply the skills and knowledge outlined in this unit. They work collaboratively with senior personnel, such as creative directors and other members of a development team, to develop the content, structure and navigation of interactive media products. Liaison with clients and team members is a key feature of this role, as is prototype testing (wire framing), which is undertaken as part of the design process. Attention to detail is also required to ensure that all aspects of content are effectively addressed. Skills associated with testing interactive media products are covered in: CUFDIG501A Coordinate the testing of interactive media products.

Licensing/Regulatory Information

Not applicable.

Pre-Requisites

Prerequisite units

Employability Skills Information

Employability skills	This unit contains employability skills.

Elements and Performance Criteria Pre-Content

Elements describe the essential outcomes of a unit of competency.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element. Where bold italicised text is used, further information is detailed in the required skills and knowledge section and the range statement. Assessment of performance is to be consistent with the evidence guide.

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Identify project requirements	1. Discuss concepts with relevant personnel to ensure that design briefs are fully understood 2. Identify technical parameters of interactive media products, including delivery platform 3. Identify target audience characteristics 4. Identify content to be integrated into or generated by interactive media products
Classify and organise content	5. Research and select appropriate thesaurus and metadata standards if relevant 6. Organise content and construct a content inventory detailing levels of hierarchy using classification techniques 7. Assign labels to content that are appropriate and meaningful for target audiences 8. Identify content search requirements 9. Discuss proposed content classification with relevant personnel to ensure that it meets project requirements
Draft information architecture design specifications	10. Sketch overall architecture showing the relationship between interactive content 11. Design forms that detail content input process if required 12. Specify search functionality and search return displays 13. Construct wire frame of the content architecture and navigation pathways 14. Write draft design specifications to include all relevant advice to development teams 15. Present draft design specifications for discussion with and feedback from other team members 16. Amend draft design specifications to accommodate feedback as required 17. Discuss final draft design specifications with clients to ensure designs are consistent with project requirements
Finalise information architecture designs	18. Conduct usability test using appropriate testing techniques 19. Incorporate design changes to information architecture in design specifications 20. Obtain final agreement from relevant personnel for finished design

Required Skills and Knowledge

REQUIRED SKILLS AND KNOWLEDGE
This section describes the skills and knowledge required for this unit.
Required skills
communication, teamwork and literacy skills sufficient to: interpret and clarify written proposals and creative briefs work collaboratively in a team environment present information architecture designs for discussion and feedback from team members and clients document clearly and concisely the information architecture design for an interactive media product initiative and flexibility in the context of: analysing, processing and classifying content finding solutions to content classification problems finding ways to minimise the effect of technical constraints ensuring there is an intuitive and logical flow to the navigation of an interactive media product technical skills sufficient to: create complex designs using storyboards, maps and other diagrams to specify the architecture and navigation of interactive media products construct wire frames self-management skills sufficient to: meet deadlines provide appropriate and timely documentation
Required knowledge
industry knowledge, including: roles and responsibilities of project team members, e.g. designers, content creators, information architects, programmers and coders content classification techniques of taxonomy and folksonomy metadata standards as they apply to specific products technical parameters of various platforms and how these impact on information architecture issues and challenges that arise in designing games understanding the way users scan and read or view interactive content typical formats and techniques for documenting information architecture designs OHS standards as they relate to working for periods of time on computers

Evidence Guide

EVIDENCE GUIDE
The Evidence Guide provides advice on assessment and must be read in conjunction with the performance criteria, required skills and knowledge, range statement and the Assessment Guidelines for the Training Package.
Overview of assessment
Critical aspects for assessment and evidence required to demonstrate competency in this unit	Evidence of the following is essential: clearly documented and user-tested design specifications for the information architecture of an interactive media product ability to work effectively as a member of a design team high level of attention to detail.
Context of and specific resources for assessment	Assessment must ensure: practical demonstration of skills through the design of information architecture for at least two interactive media products access to interactive media proposals or briefs on which designs can be based that information architecture designs can be tested access to appropriate learning and assessment support when required use of culturally appropriate processes and techniques appropriate to the language and literacy capacity of learners and the work being performed.
Method of assessment	A range of assessment methods should be used to assess practical skills and knowledge. The following examples are appropriate for this unit: direct questioning combined with review of portfolios of evidence and third-party workplace reports of on-the-job performance evaluation of information architecture designs documented by the candidate and of their effectiveness in terms of meeting requirements observation of a candidate presenting his/her information architecture design to team members and explaining how it meets requirements written or oral questioning to test knowledge as listed in the required skills and knowledge section of this unit case studies to assess ability to develop information architecture designs for a range of interactive media products.
Guidance information for assessment	Holistic assessment with other units relevant to the industry sector, workplace and job role is recommended, for example: CUFDIG501A Coordinate the testing of interactive media products CUFDIG502A Design web environments CUFDIG503A Design e-learning resources CUFDIG504A Design games CUFDIG506A Design interaction.

Range Statement

RANGE STATEMENT
The range statement relates to the unit of competency as a whole. It allows for different work environments and situations that may affect performance. Bold italicised wording, if used in the performance criteria, is detailed below. Essential operating conditions that may be present with training and assessment (depending on the work situation, needs of the candidate, accessibility of the item, and local industry and regional contexts) may also be included.
Relevant personnel may include:	art director client educator graphic designer head of department instructional designer programmer technical director technical staff user interface designer other specialist creative and administrative staff.
Delivery platform may include:	CD/DVD games console internet kiosk mobile phone personal digital assistant (PDA) other wireless/mobile devices.
Audience characteristics may include:	computer literacy demographics, such as: age gender education occupation location cultural background hobbies interests internet literacy language, literacy and numeracy personas specific needs - physical or psychological.
Content may include:	animation audio/visual files, such as PowerPoint graphics images text text documents, such as PDF and Word.
Metadata standards may include:	Australian Government Locator Service (AGLS) CIDOC Conceptual Reference Model (CRM) Dublin Core EdNa metadata standards other standards as appropriate.
Organising content may include:	categorisation, based on: alphabet numbers location time continuum subject category random chunking graphical message metadata metaphor.
Classification techniques may include:	folksonomy taxonomy.
Search requirements may include:	advanced search browse via menu systems browse via quick search metadata search search site by text box.
Project requirements may include:	access to facilities and resources budget deliverables milestones personnel, including: number availability expertise prototyping technical issues, including: delivery platform disk space bandwidth testing plan timelines.
Wire frames may include:	digital software, such as: PowerPoint Dreamweaver paper-based.
Design specifications may include:	content inventory diagrams flow charts maps navigation charts plans search functions and search display storyboards technical specifications wire frames.
Testing techniques may include:	card sorting focus group heuristic analysis inspection user trial.

Unit Sector(s)

Unit sector

Competency field

Competency field	Visual communication - digital content and imaging

Co-requisite units

Co-requisite units

CUVACD101A Use basic drawing techniques

Modification History

Version	Comments
CUVACD101A	This version first released with CUV11 Visual Arts, Craft and Design Training Package version 1.0

Unit Descriptor

This unit describes the performance outcomes, skills and knowledge required to create a basic visual representation of objects or ideas. It does not relate to drawing as an art form.

Application of the Unit

This unit is introductory in nature and applies to any context where a basic sketch or drawing of objects, ideas or layouts is required.

Licensing/Regulatory Information

No licensing, legislative, regulatory or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of endorsement.

Pre-Requisites

Not applicable.

Employability Skills Information

This unit contains employability skills

Elements and Performance Criteria Pre-Content

Element	Performance Criteria
Elements describe the essential outcomes of a unit of competency.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element. Where bold italicised text is used, further information is detailed in the required skills and knowledge section and the range statement. Assessment of performance is to be consistent with the evidence guide.

Elements and Performance Criteria

1. Prepare for drawing	1.1 Clarify purpose of drawings with appropriate people 1.2 Identify tools and materials required for basic drawing techniques 1.3 Select appropriate tools and materials for basic drawing techniques
2. Produce basic drawings	2.1 Apply a limited range of techniques to represent objects or ideas 2.2 Handle tools and materials safely 2.3 Seek feedback on drawings from relevant people and refine drawings as required

Required Skills and Knowledge

This section describes the skills and knowledge required for this unit.

Required skills

communication skills to:

clarify purpose of drawings

seek feedback to refine drawings

learning skills to respond to feedback from others to improve own drawing skills

literacy skills to read basic safety information

numeracy skills to deal with basic scaling and layout issues

Required knowledge

materials and tools commonly used for drawing

different types of drawing

ways of minimising waste in drawing projects

OHS issues associated with tools and materials used in drawing work

Evidence Guide

The evidence guide provides advice on assessment and must be read in conjunction with the performance criteria, required skills and knowledge, range statement and the Assessment Guidelines for the Training Package.

Overview of assessment
Critical aspects for assessment and evidence required to demonstrate competency in this unit	Evidence of the ability to: produce more than one drawing that represents an object or idea apply a range of basic drawing techniques.
Context of and specific resources for assessment	Assessment must ensure access to: materials and tools used in drawing work.
Method of assessment	A range of assessment methods should be used to assess practical skills and knowledge. The following examples are appropriate for this unit: direct observation of work in progress review of drawings produced by the candidate oral or written questioning to assess knowledge of drawing techniques and materials review of portfolios of evidence review of third-party reports from experienced practitioners. Assessment methods should closely reflect workplace demands (e.g. literacy) and the needs of particular groups (e.g. people with disabilities and people who may have literacy or numeracy difficulties, such as speakers of languages other than English, remote communities and those with interrupted schooling).
Guidance information for assessment	Holistic assessment with other units relevant to the industry sector, workplace and job role is recommended.

Range Statement

The range statement relates to the unit of competency as a whole. It allows for different work environments and situations that may affect performance. Bold italicised wording, if used in the performance criteria, is detailed below. Essential operating conditions that may be present with training and assessment (depending on the work situation, needs of the candidate, accessibility of the item, and local industry and regional contexts) may also be included.

Appropriate people may include:	colleagues mentors supervisors teachers.
Techniques may include:	application of pigment linear marks of differing character linear marks to produce illusion of form in space simple linear perspective tonal ranges to produce illusion of form in space.
Tools and materials may include:	board charcoal coloured pencils drafting equipment graphite pencils measuring tools natural ochres pastels and chalks pigments rags range of papers sticks wood or bark.
Objects or ideas may include:	artwork of any type, 2-D or 3-D costume or wearable object design solution movement sequences props room layout sets stage setup story or narrative technical solution.

Unit Sector(s)

Visual communication – art, craft and design

CUVACD201A Develop drawing skills to communicate ideas

Modification History

Version	Comments
CUVACD201A	This version first released with CUV11 Visual Arts, Craft and Design Training Package version 1.0

Unit Descriptor

This unit describes the performance outcomes, skills and knowledge required to develop simple drawing techniques for representing and communicating ideas. It does not relate to drawing as an art form. In a work or learning context this unit may relate to visually communicating ideas about objects, as well as the use of space, narratives or the steps in a process.

Application of the Unit

People working in many industries apply the skills and knowledge in this unit.

At this level, a limited range of techniques would be expected, and work would normally be completed under supervision.

Licensing/Regulatory Information

No licensing, legislative, regulatory or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of endorsement.

Pre-Requisites

Not applicable.

Employability Skills Information

This unit contains employability skills.

Elements and Performance Criteria Pre-Content

Element	Performance Criteria
Elements describe the essential outcomes of a unit of competency.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element. Where bold italicised text is used, further information is detailed in the required skills and knowledge section and the range statement. Assessment of performance is to be consistent with the evidence guide.

Elements and Performance Criteria

1. Prepare to use a range of drawing techniques	1.1 Clarify purpose of drawings with appropriate people 1.2 Identify suitable techniques to represent ideas 1.3 Select tools and materials required for selected techniques 1.4 Take presentation context into account when selecting techniques, tools and materials
2. Produce simple drawings	2.1 Explore ways of representing ideas through application of different techniques 2.2 Seek feedback from others on different drawing techniques 2.3 Select techniques best suited to represent ideas 2.4 Draw ideas using selected techniques 2.5 Respond positively to feedback from others on own work and take action to improve own skills as required

Required Skills and Knowledge

This section describes the skills and knowledge required for this unit.

Required skills

communication skills to confirm and discuss purpose of drawings

learning skills to:

improve techniques for producing drawings through practice

respond appropriately to feedback on own work

literacy skills to read product labels and instructions

numeracy skills to deal with basic scaling and layout issues

planning and organising skills to organise resources for simple drawing projects.

Required knowledge

physical properties and capabilities of tools and materials commonly used for drawing

different approaches to drawing and how other practitioners use drawing to represent ideas

elements and principles of design

intellectual property issues and legislation in relation to drawing

ways of minimising waste in drawing projects

OHS issues associated with tools and materials used for drawing.

Evidence Guide

The evidence guide provides advice on assessment and must be read in conjunction with the performance criteria, required skills and knowledge, range statement and the Assessment Guidelines for the Training Package.

Overview of assessment
Critical aspects for assessment and evidence required to demonstrate competency in this unit	Evidence of the ability to: produce multiple drawings that: demonstrate a basic command of nominated techniques communicate ideas are appropriate for the presentation context.
Context of and specific resources for assessment	Assessment must ensure access to: equipment and materials used to produce drawings.
Method of assessment	A range of assessment methods should be used to assess practical skills and knowledge. The following examples are appropriate for this unit: direct observation of work in progress evaluation of drawings oral or written questioning to assess knowledge of drawing techniques and materials review of portfolios of evidence review of third-party reports from experienced practitioners. Assessment methods should closely reflect workplace demands (e.g. literacy) and the needs of particular groups (e.g. people with disabilities, and people who may have literacy or numeracy difficulties, such as speakers of languages other than English, remote communities and those with interrupted schooling).
Guidance information for assessment	Holistic assessment with other units relevant to the industry sector, workplace and job role is recommended.

Range Statement

The range statement relates to the unit of competency as a whole. It allows for different work environments and situations that may affect performance. Bold italicised wording, if used in the performance criteria, is detailed below. Essential operating conditions that may be present with training and assessment (depending on the work situation, needs of the candidate, accessibility of the item, and local industry and regional contexts) may also be included.

Appropriate people may include:	colleagues mentors supervisors teachers.
Techniques may include:	digital drawing techniques integration of text and drawing linear marks of differing intensity and character linear marks to produce illusion of form in space linear perspective scaling techniques tonal range to produce illusion of form in space use of positive and negative space.
Ideas may relate to:	crafted objects design concepts digital work installations movement sequences narrative paintings and prints performance sculptures story technical solutions for a design or work.
Tools may include:	blades brushes digital technology drawing and design applications measuring tools printer rags scanner sponges sticks.
Materials may include:	boards charcoal coloured pencils crayons graphite pencils inks natural ochres pastels and chalks pigments range of papers solvents watercolour wood or bark.
Presentation context may include:	design proposal proposal for product or work development proposal in response to a brief visualisation of an idea.

Unit Sector(s)

Visual communication – art, craft and design

CUVACD401A Integrate colour theory and design processes

Modification History

Version	Comments
CUVACD401A	This version first released with CUV11 Visual Arts, Craft and Design Training Package version 1.0

Unit Descriptor

This unit describes the performance outcomes, skills and knowledge required to explore and integrate colour theory and design processes into two-dimensional or three-dimensional work.

Application of the Unit

Any person working with the design process in a visual communication context applies the skills and knowledge in this unit.

At this level, work would be undertaken independently, with supervision and guidance as required.

Licensing/Regulatory Information

No licensing, legislative, regulatory or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of endorsement.

Pre-Requisites

Not applicable.

Employability Skills Information

This unit contains employability skills.

Elements and Performance Criteria Pre-Content

Element	Performance Criteria
Elements describe the essential outcomes of a unit of competency.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element. Where bold italicised text is used, further information is detailed in the required skills and knowledge section and the range statement. Assessment of performance is to be consistent with the evidence guide.

Elements and Performance Criteria

1. Research information on colour theory and design processes	1.1 Identify and access relevant sources of information on colour theory and design processes 1.2 Research historical and contemporary approaches to colour and design in the context of the work project 1.2 Evaluate information with consideration of how colour and design issues may be integrated into the design process
2. Communicate ideas through the application of colour and design theory	2.1 Select, combine and explore materials, tools and equipment to determine ways in which colour theory and design processes may be integrated 2.2 Explore and develop new ideas through a process of experimentation 2.3 Achieve solutions by working with the fundamental elements and principles of design and different aspects of colour
3. Evaluate design work	3.1 Reflect on own application of design process and success in communicating concepts and ideas 3.2 Identify areas for future improvement, especially in terms of own skill development 3.3 Communicate about completed work with others and respond positively to feedback

Required Skills and Knowledge

This section describes the skills and knowledge required for this unit.

Required skills

communication skills to present and discuss ideas about design

critical thinking and analytical skills to evaluate information from a wide range of sources in order to develop design ideas

initiative and enterprise skills to consider new and different ways of achieving required design outcomes

literacy skills to interpret information about design and colour from a range of sources

problem-solving skills to identify and resolve technical and conceptual design issues

numeracy skills to use numerical aspects of software programs

self-management skills to plan and coordinate own work

technology skills to use the internet as a research tool.

Required knowledge

awareness of the notion of individual interpretation and choice within the design process, including the potential limitations of sticking too closely to theory

ways in which colour theory and design processes can be explored and combined to meet the needs of a brief

materials, tools and equipment required for the production of samples that integrate colour theory and design processes

how other artists and designers have applied colour theory and design processes

intellectual property issues and legislation and their impact on aspects of design

role and nature of a brief within the design process, including different types of briefs and how designers use them

sustainability considerations for the design process in the relevant context

OHS procedures relevant to design context.

Evidence Guide

The evidence guide provides advice on assessment and must be read in conjunction with the performance criteria, required skills and knowledge, range statement and the Assessment Guidelines for the Training Package.

Overview of assessment
Critical aspects for assessment and evidence required to demonstrate competency in this unit	Evidence of the ability to: solve design challenges through the application of colour theory and design processes apply knowledge of the ways in which colour theory and design processes may be used in the production of design or artwork.
Context of and specific resources for assessment	Assessment must ensure access to: tools, materials and equipment used in the design process in the relevant context.
Method of assessment	Assessment may incorporate a range of methods to assess performance and the application of essential underpinning knowledge, and might include: evaluation of processes used by the candidate to solve design challenges evaluation of a candidate’s visual diary or other forms of documentation showing the development of the designs questioning and discussion about candidate’s intentions and the work outcome review of portfolios of evidence review of third-party reports from experienced practitioners. Assessment methods should closely reflect workplace demands (e.g. literacy) and the needs of particular groups (e.g. people with disabilities, and people who may have literacy or numeracy difficulties, such as speakers of languages other than English, remote communities and those with interrupted schooling).
Guidance information for assessment	Holistic assessment with other units relevant to the industry sector, workplace and job role is recommended.

Range Statement

The range statement relates to the unit of competency as a whole. It allows for different work environments and situations that may affect performance. Bold italicised wording, if used in the performance criteria, is detailed below. Essential operating conditions that may be present with training and assessment (depending on the work situation, needs of the candidate, accessibility of the item, and local industry and regional contexts) may also be included.

Sources of information may include:	art and design work books and magazines manufactured structures natural and architectural forms optics personal observation scientific texts software programs.
Materials may include:	clays and plaster drawing media and implements hard materials, such as: metal stone wood fabrics and textiles fixing agents and mechanisms paints and inks papers and cardboard
Tools and equipment may include:	air guns and brushes clamps cutting blades digital equipment hand tools light sources pens and nibs receptacles rulers scissors spatulas sponges.
Elements and principles of design relate to:	alignment balance coherence colour composition contrast direction dominance emphasis form line movement negative and positive space pattern proportion proximity repetition rhythm shape simplicity and complexity subordination texture unity.
Aspects of colour may relate to:	addition and subtraction chroma colour mix complementary colours desaturation high key intensity low key saturation temperature transparency value.

Unit Sector(s)

Visual communication – art, craft and design

CUVDIG401A Experiment with techniques to enhance digital images

Modification History

Version	Comments
CUVDIG401A	This version first released with CUV11 Visual Arts, Craft and Design Training Package version 1.0

Unit Descriptor

This unit describes the performance outcomes, skills and knowledge required to proactively experiment and innovate with various digital imaging techniques and ideas to develop an individual style or voice.

Application of the Unit

People with a command of digital techniques apply the skills and knowledge outlined in this unit. They could be producing digital images for electronic media or physical output.

At this level, work is undertaken independently with supervision and guidance as required.

Licensing/Regulatory Information

No licensing, legislative, regulatory or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of endorsement.

Pre-Requisites

Not applicable.

Employability Skills Information

This unit contains employability skills.

Elements and Performance Criteria Pre-Content

Element	Performance Criteria
Elements describe the essential outcomes of a unit of competency.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element. Where bold italicised text is used, further information is detailed in the required skills and knowledge section and the range statement. Assessment of performance is to be consistent with the evidence guide.

Elements and Performance Criteria

1. Develop proficiency with a range of digital imaging techniques and media	1.1. Evaluate the potential for new approaches to digital imaging based on capabilities of techniques already used 1.2. Adapt or introduce new tools, equipment and materials to achieve different effects 1.3. Extend the capabilities of digital imaging techniques through experimentation 1.4. Take account of the safety and sustainability considerations for different techniques and media
2. Develop ideas for digital imaging	2.1. Articulate creative and other goals for digital image work 2.2. Research, adapt and use relevant ideas and approaches from other practitioners with consideration of intellectual property requirements 2.3. Apply knowledge of different digital imaging techniques to inform ideas 2.4. Allow techniques and ideas to work together to inform each other 2.5. Consider the professional potential and other criteria for work when developing ideas 2.6. Refine and confirm ideas based on experimentation, research and collaboration with others
3. Organise digital imaging resources	3.1. Assess specific resource requirements for the chosen work 3.2. Research and access potential sources of supply for digital imaging resources 3.3. Evaluate cost and other constraints that impact on the development of work 3.4. Evaluate and respond to presentation considerations for finished digital images 3.5. Set up or coordinate resource requirements according to safety and other workplace requirements
4. Create finished digital images	4.1. Create digital images, using techniques and media selected from research and experimentation 4.2. Review and refine ideas and approaches based on ongoing experience with the production of work 4.3. Use safe and sustainable work practices throughout the production of work 4.4. Document and record the development of the work and the research and ideas that inform it
5. Evaluate own digital imaging work	5.1. Reflect on own work in terms of conceptual development and technical execution 5.2. Identify areas for future improvement especially in terms of own skill development 5.3. Discuss completed work with others and respond positively to feedback

Required Skills and Knowledge

This section describes the skills and knowledge required for this unit.

Required skills

communication skills to:

discuss ideas and techniques in own work

create a record of the digital imaging work

initiative and enterprise skills to:

experiment with digital imaging techniques to enhance final digital images

apply critical thinking and analytical skills when developing ideas for digital imaging

learning skills to:

refine and improve a range of techniques

evaluate quality of own work and identify ways to enhance own practice

literacy skills to undertake research about the work of other digital imaging artists and arts practitioners

numeracy skills to:

evaluate resource costs

calculate material requirements

planning and organising skills to plan work tasks and resources

problem-solving skills to identify and resolve technical and conceptual issues in digital imaging work

technology skills to use the internet as a research tool.

Required knowledge

role of experimentation in developing and refining ideas for digital imaging and how this relates to the development of an individual style or voice

ways to adapt, extend and combine the capabilities of a wide range of digital imaging technologies and techniques

characteristics of different materials under different treatments and the potential of these characteristics to achieve different effects in work

formal elements and principles of design and how they may be used, adapted and challenged in digital imaging work

research methodologies used by artists

historical and theoretical contexts for digital imaging and how they may be used to inform individual practice

sources of raw, part-processed and processed digital imaging materials

sources of other resources needed in a professional digital imaging practice

intellectual property issues and legislation to be considered by independent arts practitioners

sustainability considerations for the professional operation of a digital imaging practice

OHS requirements for the set-up and operation of digital imaging work space.

Evidence Guide

The evidence guide provides advice on assessment and must be read in conjunction with the performance criteria, required skills and knowledge, range statement and the Assessment Guidelines for the Training Package.

Overview of assessment
Critical aspects for assessment and evidence required to demonstrate competency in this unit	Evidence of the ability to: develop ideas and techniques through a process of research and experimentation produce a series of digital images or single major work that demonstrates a command of techniques apply knowledge of digital imaging techniques, equipment and materials and the ways they may be adapted and combined.
Context of and specific resources for assessment	Assessment must ensure access to: equipment and materials used in digital imaging work.
Method of assessment	A range of assessment methods should be used to assess practical skills and knowledge. The following examples are appropriate for this unit: evaluation of technical execution of work pieces produced by the candidate direct observation of digital imaging in progress, including exploration of, and experimentation with, techniques questioning and discussion about candidate’s intentions and the work outcome review of portfolios of evidence review of third-party reports from experienced practitioners. Assessment methods should closely reflect workplace demands (e.g. literacy) and the needs of particular groups (e.g. people with disabilities, and people who may have literacy or numeracy difficulties, such as speakers of languages other than English, remote communities and those with interrupted schooling).
Guidance information for assessment	Holistic assessment with other units relevant to the industry sector, workplace and job role is recommended, for example: CUVPRP401A Realise a creative project ICPPP430C Manage colour.

Range Statement

The range statement relates to the unit of competency as a whole. It allows for different work environments and situations that may affect performance. Bold italicised wording, if used in the performance criteria, is detailed below. Essential operating conditions that may be present with training and assessment (depending on the work situation, needs of the candidate, accessibility of the item, and local industry and regional contexts) may also be included.

Techniques may include:	acquiring images: from the internet through digital photography through scanning manipulating images using the full range of features in industry-standard digital imaging software matching resolution and format of output to reproduction requirements outputting image as: a print CD other storage medium uploading images to the internet.
Equipment may include:	computer digital camera digital imaging software discs and memory cards guillotine output devices scanner.
Materials may include:	a range of printing surfaces: papers acetate fabrics hard copy source material, such as: photos magazine clippings paintings.
Safety and sustainability considerations may include:	federal, state and territory legislation, regulations and standards personal protection recycling safe disposal of waste.
Research may involve:	approaching individuals with relevant expertise attending lectures and talks conducting material and technical experiments and tests seeking out information in books, journals and newspapers searching the internet visiting exhibitions and museums.
Ideas may be influenced by:	artistic aspirations current capability with techniques historical and theoretical contexts subject matter or theme for the work, such as: built environment land and place natural world political, cultural and social issues the body spiritual concerns.
Intellectual property requirements may relate to:	extent to which the work may be used form of acknowledgement or credit procedures for seeking permission to use the work of others, including systems for the administration of copyright protocols for the adaptation of work by others.
Professional potential may relate to:	cost of production existence of an established market how to promote or sell the work market trends professional development.
Other criteria may relate to:	client and user expectations environment in which work will be viewed materials quality of final product techniques timelines tools.
Process followed to refine ideas may include:	adjustment to consideration of elements and principles of design adjustment to subject matter or theme adjustment to use the extended capabilities of the technique.
Sources of supply may include:	commercial outlets imaging bureaux internet share ware software resources.
Cost and other constraints may relate to:	availability of materials and equipment budgeting sponsorship timeframe.
Presentation considerations may include:	availability of space and equipment cost practical considerations presentation context timeframe.

Unit Sector(s)

Visual communication – digital content and imaging

CUVGRD301A Prepare files for publication

Modification History

Version	Comments
CUVGRD301A	This version first released with CUV11 Visual Arts, Craft and Design Training Package version 1.0

Unit Descriptor

This unit describes the performance outcomes, skills and knowledge required to prepare electronic files for pre-press processing. It applies to files that still require some processing before printing or electronic distribution.

Application of the Unit

People working in any industry apply the skills and knowledge outlined in this unit. They may work as individuals providing administrative support in an enterprise, or may be technical or knowledge experts responsible for preparing their own files for publication as either hard or soft copy documents.

At this level, work would be undertaken independently but within established parameters. Supervision or guidance is available as required.

Licensing/Regulatory Information

No licensing, legislative, regulatory or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of endorsement.

Pre-Requisites

Not applicable.

Employability Skills Information

This unit contains employability skills.

Elements and Performance Criteria Pre-Content

Element	Performance Criteria
Elements describe the essential outcomes of a unit of competency.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element. Where bold italicised text is used, further information is detailed in the required skills and knowledge section and the range statement. Assessment of performance is to be consistent with the evidence guide.

Elements and Performance Criteria

1. Clarify formatting requirements	1.1. Review documentation that provides information on printing requirements and the end use for text and image files 1.2. Plan work to comply with pre-press requirements in consultation with relevant people 1.3. Take account of the requirements for different publication processes when planning work and selecting software
2. Prepare text for pre-press processing	2.1. Save text in appropriate format 2.2. Review text to remove extraneous or unnecessary formatting 2.3. Apply templates and styles as required
3. Prepare graphics for pre-press processing	3.1. Ensure scans are completed at appropriate resolution 3.2. Use appropriate scanning curve 3.3. Save colour in required format 3.4. Undertake basic manipulation of digital images as required 3.5. Ensure that combined images can be edited and adjusted 3.6. Check that all templates and styles have been applied correctly 3.7. Save final graphic images in appropriate format
4. Finalise work	4.1. Evaluate final files for visual impact, effectiveness and fitness for purpose 4.2. Use feedback from others to improve own skills in preparing files for publication 4.3. Submit files to relevant personnel as required 4.4. Make back-up copies of files in line with organisational procedures

Required Skills and Knowledge

This section describes the skills and knowledge required for this unit.

Required skills

communication skills to clarify written and verbal instructions

initiative and enterprise skills to make adjustments to the layout and look of text and image files to produce the optimum visual outcome

learning skills to improve own skills from feedback

literacy skills to interpret information and material related to preparing files for publication

numeracy skills to calculate document layout requirements

planning and organising skills to plan work tasks in a logical sequence

self-management skills to prioritise work tasks and complete work within agreed timeframes

problem-solving skills to use processes flexibly and interchangeably

technology skills to:

proficiently use common page layout software applications

proficiently use a scanner to reproduce photo images to specification

use digital imaging software for basic manipulation of digital images

manage files using standard naming conventions.

Required knowledge

design issues related to different hard copy and electronic publishing processes

file formats for various outputs

basic colour theory in relation to preparing files for pre-press

basic typographic theory in relation to preparing files for pre-press

elements and principles of design

intellectual property issues and legislation associated with pre-press preparation

sustainability considerations for equipment, tools and materials associated with pre-press processing work

OHS procedures in relation to preparation for pre-press processing work, including ergonomics.

Evidence Guide

The evidence guide provides advice on assessment and must be read in conjunction with the performance criteria, required skills and knowledge, range statement and the Assessment Guidelines for the Training Package.

Overview of assessment
Critical aspects for assessment and evidence required to demonstrate competency in this unit	Evidence of the ability to: prepare text and graphic files that meet required output specifications for at least two hard copy and two soft copy jobs apply knowledge of current pre-press techniques and technologies.
Context of and specific resources for assessment	Assessment must ensure access to: industry-standard page layout and digital imaging software.
Method of assessment	A range of assessment methods should be used to assess practical skills and knowledge. The following examples are appropriate for this unit: direct observation of the candidate undertaking pre-press processing work evaluation of files prepared by the candidate discussion and questioning about candidate’s intentions and the work outcome review of portfolios of evidence review of third-party reports from experienced practitioners. Assessment methods should closely reflect workplace demands (e.g. literacy) and the needs of particular groups (e.g. people with disabilities and people who may have literacy or numeracy difficulties, such as speakers of languages other than English, remote communities and those with interrupted schooling).
Guidance information for assessment	Holistic assessment with other units relevant to the industry sector, workplace and job role is recommended, for example: BSBITU309A Produce desktop published documents CUFDIG303A Produce and prepare photo images CUVGRD302A Use typography techniques.

Range Statement

The range statement relates to the unit of competency as a whole. It allows for different work environments and situations that may affect performance. Bold italicised wording, if used in the performance criteria, is detailed below. Essential operating conditions that may be present with training and assessment (depending on the work situation, needs of the candidate, accessibility of the item, and local industry and regional contexts) may also be included.

Requirements may relate to:	file formats: images text file size image resolution.
End use of text and images may be for:	annual reports book covers corporate presentations corporate stationery electronic distribution, including as attachments: to electronic communications for download from websites invitations posters.
Pre-press includes:	pre-press section of a printing company pre-press trade houses or bureaus.
Relevant people may include:	client designer graphic artist manager online production personnel other specialist creative and administrative staff supervisor.
Publication processes may include:	any hard copy printing process electronic platforms: CD DVD games console internet kiosk mobile phone other video playback devices personal digital assistant (PDA) video players (iPods).
Software may include:	computer-aided design and drafting (CADD) digital imaging: Adobe Photoshop Corel Paint Shop Pro layout and page description applications word processing applications.
Format may relate to:	colour: CMYK RGB image files: GIF JPEG PICT PNG PSD TIFF text files: PDF file outputs from word processing applications.
Resolution may be:	high low, e.g. for position only (FPO) medium.
Manipulation may relate to:	appending text/type for files and captions brushing creating artistic effects cropping eliminating red eye emulating photographic effects image enhancement, including: tones contrast colour cast or tint saturation masking layers retouching sharpening.

Unit Sector(s)

Visual communication – graphic design

CUVGRD302A Use typography techniques

Modification History

Version	Comments
CUVGRD302A	This version first released with CUV11 Visual Arts, Craft and Design Training Package version 1.0

Unit Descriptor

This unit describes the performance outcomes, skills and knowledge required to use typography techniques in design work. It includes a general knowledge of typography and its application to different design briefs.

Application of the Unit

People working in many industries apply the skills and knowledge outlined in this unit. They may work as individuals providing administrative support within an enterprise, or they may work in specialist design and printing companies where print jobs vary from brochures and corporate stationery to the artwork for billboards, display banners and textile products.

At this level, work would be undertaken independently but within established parameters. Supervision or guidance is available as required.

Licensing/Regulatory Information

No licensing, legislative, regulatory or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of endorsement.

Pre-Requisites

Not applicable.

Employability Skills Information

This unit contains employability skills.

Elements and Performance Criteria Pre-Content

Element	Performance Criteria
Elements describe the essential outcomes of a unit of competency.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element. Where bold italicised text is used, further information is detailed in the required skills and knowledge section and the range statement. Assessment of performance is to be consistent with the evidence guide.

Elements and Performance Criteria

1. Prepare to undertake typographic work	1.1 With reference to briefing documentation, clarify design requirements for typographic work in consultation with relevant personnel 1.2 Source reference material on typography pertinent to the brief 1.3 Confirm equipment, materials and work space requirements 1.4 Take account of the requirements for different publication processes when planning work 1.5 Set up work space and equipment with due regard to safety considerations and organisational procedures
2. Test and explore a range of typographical techniques	2.1 Identify possible approaches to typography design and establish criteria for the selection of a final approach 2.2 Select appropriate materials, tools and equipment for the testing of approaches and techniques 2.3 Trial typography techniques that may meet the requirements of the brief 2.4 Evaluate trialling against criteria and select the preferred design approach
3. Complete typographic work	3.1 Develop the typographic work ensuring consistency with the selected approach and the brief 3.2 Review work in progress against project objectives and specifications 3.3 Seek and use feedback on work in progress to make adjustments to typographic work as required
4. Ensure quality of typographic output	4.1 Check that typography meets the requirements of the brief, including grammar and technical production and/or printing requirements 4.2 Finalise operations in line with organisational procedures 4.3 Present completed work within agreed time and quality parameters

Required Skills and Knowledge

This section describes the skills and knowledge required for this unit.

Required skills

communication skills to:

clarify written and verbal instructions

complete routine workplace documentation

initiative and enterprise skills to experiment with typographical elements and techniques that best respond to design specifications

learning skills to improve own skills in using typography based on feedback and experimentation

literacy skills to:

interpret specifications and briefs for typographic work

apply a knowledge of spelling and grammar to proofreading text

numeracy skills to calculate layout requirements, font sizes and enlargement factors

planning and organising skills to:

plan work tasks in a logical sequence

organise resources

problem-solving skills to adjust fit and fonts to ensure best possible results

self-management skills to prioritise work tasks and complete work within time and quality parameters

technology skills to use a broad range of typographical features of industry-standard software.

Required knowledge

evolution and history of type at an overview level

characteristics of, and uses for, a range of typefaces

work space requirements for typographic work, including selection and set-up of work space

physical properties and capabilities of a range of materials, tools and equipment used for typographic work

typographic output devices and processes

elements and principles of design and how they may be used in the development of ideas for typographic work

intellectual property issues and legislation associated with typographic work

sustainability issues associated with the materials, tools and equipment used in typographic work

OHS requirements relevant to typographic work.

Evidence Guide

The evidence guide provides advice on assessment and must be read in conjunction with the performance criteria, required skills and knowledge, range statement and the Assessment Guidelines for the Training Package.

Overview of assessment
Critical aspects for assessment and evidence required to demonstrate competency in this unit	Evidence of the ability to: apply typography in line with design concepts and briefs produce typography that can be reproduced and transferred across design and pre-press sectors.
Context of and specific resources for assessment	Assessment must ensure access to: a range of products that require the application of typographic techniques computers and industry-standard software.
Method of assessment	A range of assessment methods should be used to assess practical skills and knowledge. The following examples are appropriate for this unit: evaluation of typography work produced by the candidate in response to particular brief questioning and discussion about candidate’s intentions and the work outcome review of portfolios of evidence review of third-party reports from experienced practitioners. Assessment methods should closely reflect workplace demands (e.g. literacy) and the needs of particular groups (e.g. people with disabilities and people who may have literacy or numeracy difficulties, such as speakers of languages other than English, remote communities and those with interrupted schooling).
Guidance information for assessment	Holistic assessment with other units relevant to the industry sector, workplace and job role is recommended, for example: CUFDIG304A Create visual design components CUVGRD301A Prepare files for publication.

Range Statement

The range statement relates to the unit of competency as a whole. It allows for different work environments and situations that may affect performance. Bold italicised wording, if used in the performance criteria, is detailed below. Essential operating conditions that may be present with training and assessment (depending on the work situation, needs of the candidate, accessibility of the item, and local industry and regional contexts) may also be included.

Briefing documentation may contain information, such as:	aesthetic considerations background information about clients clients’ needs constraints: budget end use for typographical work timeframe availability of support services copy creative and design objectives details of type fonts required legal, contractual, ethical and copyright considerations equipment materials medium personnel involved in the project purpose of or audience for final product relevant statutory requirements scope for making adjustments technical objectives technology timeframe.
Typographic work may be generated by manual or electronic means and can be targeted towards:	advertising or promotion for large or small scale projects, such as: banners billboards brochures identity and branding labelling packaging publishing websites.
Relevant personnel may include:	art department client creative director designer director manager mentor other technical or specialist personnel producer production manager project manager representative of organisation commissioning the work supervisor technical director.
Reference material may include:	functions, practice and use of typeface in historical and contemporary contexts information on the main typefaces legal, ethical contractual and copyright considerations market analysis and strategies moral issues new technology role of text (copy) in visual communication.
Equipment may include:	brushes calligraphy pens CDs computer discs DVDs printer scanner software.
Materials may include:	a range of: papers board plastics textiles drawing materials, such as: pencils pens inks.
Work space requirements may include:	consideration of OHS issues, including: ergonomics lighting ventilation process space specific needs, such as: equipment materials tools wet and dry areas.
Publication processes may include:	any hard copy printing process electronic platforms, such as: CD DVD games console internet kiosk mobile phone other video playback devices personal digital assistant (PDA) video players (iPods).
Criteria may include:	access to materials, tools and equipment required for typographic work choice of typography that is consistent with specifications in the brief ease of production or outputting personal affinity with materials, tools and equipment.
Techniques may include:	applying colour for specific effects applying variations to the display of typeface, such as: bold captions headlines scale titles applying variations to the properties of a given typeface composing type with overlays and tints kerning positioning typeface and images serif or sans serif size slope techniques that accentuate the message, such as: font size and position font type use of images use of white space weight use of typesetting technology.
Organisational procedures may relate to:	completing routine workplace documentation cost control making backup copies of files managing typographic work to facilitate effective storage, retrieval and output by manual or digital means process-specific procedures recycling removing debris replacing protective covers and lids reporting safety use of materials washing and drying tools.

Unit Sector(s)

Visual communication – graphic design

CUVGRD401A Research and apply graphic design techniques

Modification History

Version	Comments
CUVGRD401A	This version first released with CUV11 Visual Arts, Craft and Design Training Package version 1.0

Unit Descriptor

This unit describes the performance outcomes, skills and knowledge required to research and apply techniques to produce graphic design work. It involves interpreting work briefs, organising resources, testing ideas, and refining approaches to a range of design challenges.

Application of the Unit

Individuals still developing a full repertoire of graphic design skills apply the skills and knowledge in this unit. Research, experimentation and refinement are used to produce a range of design work, which is likely to be generalist in nature. Work is carried out independently, with guidance and supervision as required.

Licensing/Regulatory Information

No licensing, legislative, regulatory or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of endorsement.

Pre-Requisites

Not applicable.

Employability Skills Information

This unit contains employability skills.

Elements and Performance Criteria Pre-Content

Element	Performance Criteria
Elements describe the essential outcomes of a unit of competency.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element. Where bold italicised text is used, further information is detailed in the required skills and knowledge section and the range statement. Assessment of performance is to be consistent with the evidence guide.

Elements and Performance Criteria

1. Interpret graphic design briefs	1.1 Interpret the specifications of graphic design briefs 1.2 Take user or client requirements into account when making decisions about graphic design work 1.3 Clarify issues about specifications, parameters and constraints with relevant people as required 1.4 Research and evaluate information pertinent to briefs
2. Organise resources	2.1 Identify resources required for graphic design work, including work space, materials, tools and equipment 2.2 Prepare and care for resources according to requirements 2.3 Follow storage and inventory procedures
3. Test graphic design approaches	3.1 Produce preliminary visual representations 3.2 Identify possible design approaches and establish criteria for selecting final approach 3.3 Select materials, tools and equipment and test approaches and techniques 3.4 Evaluate testing processes against criteria and select the approach that best meets the requirements of briefs 3.5 Critique own work and seek feedback as required 3.6 Refine and document the design approach based on testing and evaluation
4. Produce graphic design work	4.1 Create graphic designs using selected approach 4.2 Respond positively to feedback and refine graphic design work as required 4.3 Present finished work within agreed work parameters

Required Skills and Knowledge

This section describes the skills and knowledge required for this unit.

Required skills

communication skills to engage with others about approaches to graphic design work

initiative and enterprise skills to experiment with graphic design techniques to produce effects that enhance the final product

learning skills to refine and improve a range of techniques

literacy skills to interpret design briefs and research information to support graphic design work

numeracy skills to work with technical issues, such as layouts and image resolution

self-management and planning skills to plan graphic design work

technical skills to evaluate, adapt and integrate a range of graphic design techniques

technology skills to use a range of digital imaging and design software.

Required knowledge

role of experimentation in developing and refining graphic design work

work and ideas of other graphic designers

formal elements and principles of design and their application to graphic design

techniques, materials, tools and equipment used in graphic design

types of graphic design briefs

history and theory of graphic design

intellectual property issues and legislation and their relevance to graphic design

OHS requirements for graphic design work.

Evidence Guide

The evidence guide provides advice on assessment and must be read in conjunction with the performance criteria, required skills and knowledge, range statement and the Assessment Guidelines for the Training Package.

Overview of assessment
Critical aspects for assessment and evidence required to demonstrate competency in this unit	Evidence of the ability to: produce multiple examples of graphic design work that meet the requirements of briefs demonstrate a command of selected graphic design techniques.
Context of and specific resources for assessment	Assessment must ensure access to: briefs on which to base graphic design work equipment and tools used to produce graphic design work.
Method of assessment	A range of assessment methods should be used to assess practical skills and knowledge. The following examples are appropriate for this unit: evaluation of graphic designs produced by the candidate questioning and discussion about the candidate’s intentions and the work outcome review of portfolios of evidence review of third-party reports from experienced practitioners. Assessment methods should closely reflect workplace demands (e.g. literacy) and the needs of particular groups (e.g. people with disabilities, and people who may have literacy or numeracy difficulties, such as speakers of languages other than English, remote communities and those with interrupted schooling).
Guidance information for assessment	Holistic assessment with other units relevant to the industry sector, workplace and job role is recommended, for example: BSBDES401A Generate design solutions BSBDES402A Interpret and respond to a design brief.

Range Statement

The range statement relates to the unit of competency as a whole. It allows for different work environments and situations that may affect performance. Bold italicised wording, if used in the performance criteria, is detailed below. Essential operating conditions that may be present with training and assessment (depending on the work situation, needs of the candidate, accessibility of the item, and local industry and regional contexts) may also be included.

Specifications may refer to:	audience medium purpose style.
Briefs are usually prepared by a commissioning body or organisation and may be:	diagrammatic verbal visual written.
Graphic design work may be:	advertising annual reports banners book designs corporate presentations corporate stationery invitation logos posters visual merchandising web design.
Parameters and constraints may refer to:	considerations, such as: client’s organisational background legal contractual ethical copyright health and safety subject matter cost material characteristics product characteristics and statistics quantity technology timeframe.
Relevant people may include:	clients colleagues industry practitioners managers mentors supervisors.
Work space needs may include:	drafting table electronic equipment lighting and power requirements process-specific needs.
Materials may include:	board drawing implements fabrics inks metal surfaces perspex range of papers of differing weights and textures wet mediums wood.
Tools and equipment may include:	computer digital camera drafting table and equipment hand tools light box nibs and pens printer projection equipment and screens range of brushes, including air brushes scanner scrapers software spatulas sponges spray cans spray guns storage devices.
Preliminary visual representations may involve:	computer-aided drawing sketching technical drawing.
Approaches may encompass:	aesthetic considerations choice of medium and materials design solutions parameters of the brief.
Criteria may include:	access to materials, tools and equipment required for graphic design access to specialist support services consistency with briefs ease of application of techniques personal affinity with medium and materials.
Strategies to test techniques may involve:	exploring techniques by making practice pieces, test pieces, mock-ups or samples testing materials and their application.
Techniques may include:	digital imaging handbuilding: displays installations mock-ups hand drawn illustration lettering preparing work for printing processes.
Process followed to refine the design approach may involve:	adjustment to content adjustment to take account of elements and principles of design adjustment to use extended capabilities of techniques.
Process used to document the approach may involve:	final drawings illustrations photographs plans written rationale or description.

Unit Sector(s)

Visual communication – graphic design

CUVPRP401A Realise a creative project

Modification History

Version	Comments
CUVPRP401A	This version first released with CUV11 Visual Arts, Craft and Design Training Package version 1.0

Unit Descriptor

This unit describes the performance outcomes, skills and knowledge required to organise and realise a creative project from the development of ideas to the creation of the work. The result may be creative work in any media.

Application of the Unit

People with sound technical, conceptual and theoretical skills in a particular area of creative practice apply the skills and knowledge in this unit. Increasingly the individual takes responsibility for own work at all levels, though still with supervision and guidance as required.

The process of experimenting with ideas and techniques to find an individual style or voice takes place in the context of a whole project conceived and realised over time. The project results in completed work, often at a pre-professional level.

Licensing/Regulatory Information

No licensing, legislative, regulatory or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of endorsement.

Pre-Requisites

Not applicable.

Employability Skills Information

This unit contains employability skills.

Elements and Performance Criteria Pre-Content

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes of a unit of competency.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element. Where bold italicised text is used, further information is detailed in the required skills and knowledge section and the range statement. Assessment of performance is to be consistent with the evidence guide.

Elements and Performance Criteria

1. Develop ideas for project work	1.1 Identify and analyse sources that inform ideas for work 1.2 Explore ideas using visual representation and design tools 1.3 Consider possible constraints, based on nature and purpose of work 1.4 Challenge and play with ideas, and engage with others as required 1.5 Refine and select options based on own analysis and communication with others
2. Organise the creative project	2.1 Confirm the scope and objectives of the work in consultation with relevant people as required 2.2 Organise financial, physical and other resources 2.3 Evaluate safety considerations for the project 2.4 Consider options for documenting and recording work and the ideas and research that inform it 2.5 Document the production of work using selected approaches 2.6 Monitor the project workflow against the plan
3. Create finished work	3.1 Extend skills in manipulating selected materials, processes and technologies to fulfil project objectives 3.2 Critique work in progress and make adjustments as required 3.3 Apply safe work practices relevant to the chosen creative form
4. Evaluate own work	4.1 Reflect on own work in terms of conceptual development, technical execution and professional potential 4.2 Identify areas for future improvement especially in terms of own skill development 4.3 Evaluate overall work process for efficiency and effectiveness 4.4 Seek input from others as required and respond positively to feedback

Required Skills and Knowledge

This section describes the skills and knowledge required for this unit.

Required skills
communication skills to engage with others about conceptual and technical issues in creative work critical thinking and analytical skills to develop ideas and skills from exploration and experimentation initiative and enterprise skills to recognise and act on opportunities for refinement learning skills to: receive and integrate constructive criticism from others engage in an ongoing process of skills development literacy skills to: interpret information dealing with complex or abstract ideas document work in ways that communicate processes and ideas research and evaluate source materials for the development of ideas numeracy skills to calculate project costs problem-solving skills to identify and respond to conceptual and technical issues in creative work self-management and planning skills to organise a creative project technical skills to apply and adapt specialised skills relevant to the particular creative form
Required knowledge
relationship between technique, materials and process in the relevant creative form historical and contemporary references in chosen area of practice typical problems that occur during the development of a creative project, and how to avoid or resolve them commonly used research methodologies for creative practitioners current and emerging practices for documenting work in a creative context basic project management techniques, particularly in relation to work planning, time management and resource management intellectual property issues and legislation associated with professional creative practice sustainability issues associated with the tools and materials used in the chosen creative form OHS procedures in relation to chosen creative form

Evidence Guide

The evidence guide provides advice on assessment and must be read in conjunction with the performance criteria, required skills and knowledge, range statement and the Assessment Guidelines for the Training Package.

Overview of assessment
Critical aspects for assessment and evidence required to demonstrate competency in this unit	Evidence of the ability to: take responsibility for the complete process of producing creative work develop and refine technical and conceptual skills through a demonstrated process of experimentation produce work that reflects an emerging individual style document the work from initial idea to realisation communicate effectively with others about ideas evaluate work in an informed way use safe and sustainable work practices.
Context of and specific resources for assessment	Assessment must ensure access to: appropriate resources for the production of work, including work space, tools, equipment and materials studio and workshop facilities.
Method of assessment	A range of assessment methods should be used to assess practical skills and knowledge. The following examples are appropriate for this unit: evaluation of creative work produced by the candidate evaluation of processes used by the candidate to conceive, plan and realise the creative work direct observation of work in progress evaluation of a candidate’s visual diary or other forms of documentation showing the development of the work group peer review of the work questioning and discussion about candidate’s intentions and the work outcome review of portfolios of evidence review of third-party reports from experienced practitioners. Assessment methods should closely reflect workplace demands (e.g. literacy) and the needs of particular groups (e.g. people with disabilities, and people who may have literacy or numeracy difficulties, such as speakers of languages other than English, remote communities and those with interrupted schooling).
Guidance information for assessment	Holistic assessment with other units relevant to the industry sector, workplace and job role is recommended, for example: specialisation units for any creative form.

Range Statement

The range statement relates to the unit of competency as a whole. It allows for different work environments and situations that may affect performance. Bold italicised wording, if used in the performance criteria, is detailed below. Essential operating conditions that may be present with training and assessment (depending on the work situation, needs of the candidate, accessibility of the item, and local industry and regional contexts) may also be included.

Sources may include:	art critics art history texts artworks cultural theorists design ideas exhibitions films galleries images internet journal articles museums myths and legends objects oral history own experience performances presentations philosophers social commentators technical or medium-specific information writings.
Ideas may relate to:	relationship of the work to a theoretical and historical or contemporary context relationship of the work to new and emerging technology and its current and potential application subject matter or theme for the work, such as: identity land and place political, cultural and social issues the body spiritual concerns.
Constraints may include:	availability of materials, tools and equipment budget safety requirements saleability sponsorship time.
Ways to engage with others may include:	face-to-face discussions virtual communication.
Scope and objectives of the work may relate to:	brief for the work competition criteria creative criteria ideas to be communicated number of items to be produced potential to exhibit and sell self-development potential time for creation.
Relevant people may include:	employers mentors other artists other creative practitioners peers potential customers supervisor teachers.
Options for documenting and recording work may involve developing:	blogs or wikis digital presentations notes and other written text online forums photographic records physical portfolios practice pieces verbal presentations visual diaries.
Efficiency and effectiveness may relate to:	aesthetic or functional quality of the work completion on budget completion on time positive or negative impact on own health quality of the work success in communicating ideas technical standard of work.

Unit Sector(s)

Industry capability – professional practice

CUVGRD504A Create and manipulate graphics

Modification History

Version	Comments
CUVGRD504A	This version first released with CUV11 Visual Arts, Craft and Design Training Package version 1.0

Unit Descriptor

This unit describes the performance outcomes, skills and knowledge required to create and manipulate graphics by using a combination of creative design skills and technical software proficiency.

Application of the Unit

Graphic designers work in many different industry contexts. They may be employed in graphic design studios, commercial printing companies, advertising agencies, book and magazine publishers, television stations or in the marketing division of any business. Graphic designers also frequently offer their services on a freelance basis.

Graphic designers need to be able to create original graphics as well as work with graphic objects created by others. At this level, the designer works independently, with mentoring and guidance available as required.

Licensing/Regulatory Information

No licensing, legislative, regulatory or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of endorsement.

Pre-Requisites

Not applicable.

Employability Skills Information

This unit contains employability skills.

Elements and Performance Criteria Pre-Content

Element	Performance Criteria
Elements describe the essential outcomes of a unit of competency.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element. Where bold italicised text is used, further information is detailed in the required skills and knowledge section and the range statement. Assessment of performance is to be consistent with the evidence guide.

Elements and Performance Criteria

1. Analyse design needs	1.1 Confirm communication objectives for the graphics work based on the design brief and consultation with relevant people as required 1.2 Evaluate design brief specifications 1.3 Source and evaluate other information pertinent to the project
2. Develop and refine ideas for graphics	2.1 Identify relevant sources and conduct research to inform ideas for graphics 2.2 Consider the opportunities and constraints offered by different techniques and technologies 2.3 Assess the relationship of the graphic objects to the other elements of the design 2.4 Create and refine ideas and options by working with the fundamental elements and principles of design 2.5 Refine ideas through use of ongoing technical experimentation 2.6 Evaluate and select approaches based on their potential to meet the communication need 2.7 Produce and present visual representations of design ideas and communicate with others to confirm as required
3. Manipulate graphic objects	3.1 Create graphic objects based on selected ideas 3.2 Manipulate, edit and enhance objects through use of an extended range of tools and features 3.3 Integrate graphics with other visual design elements 3.4 Identify and resolve technical problems based on developing expertise 3.5 Achieve desired outcomes through application of design skills and technical expertise 3.6 Establish and follow safe work practices in the work process
4. Finalise technical aspects of graphics work	4.1 Edit and refine graphics to meet technical requirements 4.2 Follow correct protocols for saving, exporting and storing files 4.3 Establish appropriate file formats for output
5. Evaluate graphics work	5.1 Critique graphics from both a technical and aesthetic perspective in the context of the design objectives 5.2 Seek feedback from others as required, and make appropriate adjustments

Required Skills and Knowledge

This section describes the skills and knowledge required for this unit.

Required skills

communication skills to liaise with others about work requirements

critical thinking and analytical skills to:

interpret and respond to a design brief

evaluate information from a wide range of sources to develop design ideas

initiative and enterprise skills to consider new and different ways of achieving required design outcomes

literacy skills to interpret technical information associated with using software programs at an advanced level

planning and organising skills to develop and monitor a logical workflow for the technical design process

problem-solving skills to identify and resolve technical and conceptual issues with graphics

numeracy skills to use numerical aspects of software programs

self-management skills to plan and coordinate own work

technology skills to:

use the advanced features of a range of industry-current software programs

manage files and file formats.

Required knowledge

ways that graphics are used within different types of communication, including corporate, editorial and promotional communication

sources of information for developing ideas about different graphics options

current range of software programs available to graphic designers and the opportunities and constraints of different technologies

different graphic file formats and how and why these are used in different contexts

technical requirements for the manipulation and formatting of varying visual components and file types, including:

bitmap images

charts

graphics

page layouts

text

vector graphics

file management protocols and procedures for a range of publications, both print and web-based

intellectual property issues to be considered in the context of graphic design work

OHS requirements as they apply to the use of computer and keyboard for periods of time.

Evidence Guide

The evidence guide provides advice on assessment and must be read in conjunction with the performance criteria, required skills and knowledge, range statement and the Assessment Guidelines for the Training Package.

Overview of assessment
Critical aspects for assessment and evidence required to demonstrate competency in this unit	Evidence of the ability to: create original graphics for at least two different graphic design projects use an extended range of tools and features of relevant software with a high level of technical proficiency integrate technical and creative processes to produce outcomes that meet design objectives.
Context of and specific resources for assessment	Assessment must ensure access to: industry-current graphic design software.
Method of assessment	A range of assessment methods should be used to assess practical skills and knowledge. The following examples are appropriate for this unit: evaluation of audience response to graphics produced by the candidate evaluation of processes used by the candidate to develop the work evaluation of technical aspects of the graphics direct observation of work in progress, including use of software tools evaluation of a candidate’s visual diary or other forms of documentation showing the development of the designs group peer review of graphics created by the candidate questioning and discussion about candidate’s intentions and the work outcome review of portfolios of evidence review of third-party reports from experienced practitioners. Assessment methods should closely reflect workplace demands (e.g. literacy) and the needs of particular groups (e.g. people with disabilities, and people who may have literacy or numeracy difficulties, such as speakers of languages other than English, remote communities and those with interrupted schooling).
Guidance information for assessment	Holistic assessment with other units relevant to the industry sector, workplace and job role is recommended, for example: CUVGRD505A Design and manipulate complex layouts.

Range Statement

The range statement relates to the unit of competency as a whole. It allows for different work environments and situations that may affect performance. Bold italicised wording, if used in the performance criteria, is detailed below. Essential operating conditions that may be present with training and assessment (depending on the work situation, needs of the candidate, accessibility of the item, and local industry and regional contexts) may also be included.

Communication objectives may be to:	challenge compare contrast entertain inform inspire motivate persuade.
Design briefs may be:	diagrammatic verbal visual written.
Relevant people may include:	clients employers end users mentors other artists and designers peers potential customers supervisors teachers technical experts.
Specifications may relate to:	cost delivery platform environmental sustainability material characteristics quantity technical requirements technology timeframe.
Other information may relate to:	client’s organisational background conflicting demands considerations, such as: contractual copyright ethical legal historical information product characteristics and statistics style considerations subject matter.
Sources may include:	art and design texts corporate information films images internet exhibitions own experience previous iterations technical data.
Opportunities and constraints may relate to:	audience capacity or skills cost own level of technical expertise potential for innovative approaches technical feasibility time.
Fundamental elements and principles relate to:	alignment balance coherence colour composition contrast direction dominance emphasis form line movement pattern positive and negative space proportion proximity repetition rhythm shape simplicity or complexity subordination texture unity.
Technical experimentation may involve:	challenging established ways of doing things combining different approaches using new features and tools.
Visual representations may be:	computer-aided drawing mock-ups models presentations sketching technical drawings.
Tools and features may include:	adjusting strokes and fills alignment tools applying envelopes blending clipping compound objects cutting, extending and closing paths duplicating filters and special effects gradients and mesh joining paths modifying paths moving in increments other object manipulation tools and features reshaping scaling, rotating, skewing and distorting slicing and cutting specialty fills and swatches stroke and outline adjustments transforming transparency trim, merge and outline warping.
Safe work practices may relate to:	ergonomics use of consumables.
Technical requirements may relate to:	bleed colour compression export options formats layering linking metadata tags resolution spread and choke traps.
File formats may include:	encapsulated postscript (EPS) graphic interchange format (GIF) joint photographic experts group (JPEG) native format other suitable formats portable document format (PDF) portable network graphics (PNG) tagged image file format (TIFF).

Unit Sector(s)

Visual communication – graphic design

Custom Content Section

Not applicable.

CUVGRD505A Design and manipulate complex layouts

Modification History

Version	Comments
CUVGRD505A	This version first released with CUV11 Visual Arts, Craft and Design Training Package version 1.0

Unit Descriptor

This unit describes the performance outcomes, skills and knowledge required to design complex publication layouts by combining creative design skills with technical software proficiency.

Application of the Unit

Graphic designers work in many different industry contexts. They may be employed in graphic design studios, commercial printing companies, advertising agencies, book and magazine publishers, television stations or in the marketing division of any business. Graphic designers also frequently offer their services on a freelance basis.

A complex layout is one that requires the application of technical and design skills to achieve its communication objective. This may involve challenges such as large amounts of information, incorporation of many different visual elements, or particular restrictions on format or size.

At this level, the designer is responsible for the overall layout design and works independently. Mentoring and guidance are available as required.

Licensing/Regulatory Information

No licensing, legislative, regulatory or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of endorsement.

Pre-Requisites

Not applicable.

Employability Skills Information

This unit contains employability skills.

Elements and Performance Criteria Pre-Content

Element	Performance Criteria
Elements describe the essential outcomes of a unit of competency.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element. Where bold italicised text is used, further information is detailed in the required skills and knowledge section and the range statement. Assessment of performance is to be consistent with the evidence guide.

Elements and Performance Criteria

1. Analyse design needs	1.1 Confirm communication objectives for the publication based on the design brief and consultation with relevant people as required 1.2 Evaluate particular specifications of the design brief 1.3 Source and evaluate other information pertinent to the project
2. Develop and refine layout ideas	2.1 Identify relevant sources and conduct research to inform layout ideas 2.2 Consider the opportunities and constraints offered by different techniques and technologies 2.3 Assess the different elements that need to be incorporated into the overall layout 2.4 Create and refine ideas and options by working with the fundamental elements and principles of design 2.5 Refine ideas through use of ongoing technical experimentation 2.6 Evaluate and select approaches based on their potential to meet the communication need 2.7 Produce and present visual representations of design ideas and communicate with others to confirm as required
3. Create and manipulate layouts	3.1 Set up the document using the capabilities of appropriate software 3.2 Manipulate and enhance the layout through use of an extended range of tools and features 3.3 Support communication objectives with effective integration of text and visuals 3.4 Identify and resolve technical problems based on developing expertise 3.5 Achieve desired outcomes through application of design skills and technical expertise 3.6 Enhance outcomes by allowing the creative and technical processes to work together 3.7 Establish and follow safe work practices in the work process
4. Evaluate design work	4.1 Critique the layout from both a functional and aesthetic perspective in the context of the design objective 4.2 Seek feedback from others as required, and make appropriate adjustments 4.3 Make assessment of own work and identify key learnings to inform future work
5. Finalise technical aspects	5.1 Edit and refine layouts to meet technical requirements 5.2 Follow correct protocols for saving, exporting and storing files 5.3 Establish appropriate file formats for output and appropriate colour management profiles

Required Skills and Knowledge

This section describes the skills and knowledge required for this unit.

Required skills

communication skills to liaise with others about work requirements

critical thinking and analytical skills to:

interpret and respond to a design brief

evaluate information from a wide range of sources to develop design ideas

initiative and enterprise skills to consider new and different ways of achieving required design outcomes

literacy skills to interpret technical information associated with using software programs at an advanced level

planning and organising skills to develop and monitor a logical workflow for the technical design process

problem-solving skills to identify and resolve technical and conceptual issues with layouts

numeracy skills to use numerical aspects of software programs

self-management skills to plan and coordinate own work

technology skills to:

use the advanced features of a range of industry-current software programs

manage files and file formats.

Required knowledge

common features and formats of different types of publications

sources of information for developing ideas about different layout options

interrelationships between different visual design components within a complex layout

current range of software programs available to graphic designers and the opportunities and constraints of different technologies

different graphic file formats and how and why these are used in different contexts

technical requirements for the manipulation and formatting of varying visual components and file types, including:

bitmap images

charts

graphics

page layouts

text

vector graphics

file management protocols and procedures for a range of publications, both print and web-based

intellectual property issues and legislation to be considered in the context of graphic design work

OHS requirements as they apply to the use of computer and keyboard for periods of time.

Evidence Guide

The evidence guide provides advice on assessment and must be read in conjunction with the performance criteria, required skills and knowledge, range statement and the Assessment Guidelines for the Training Package.

Overview of assessment
Critical aspects for assessment and evidence required to demonstrate competency in this unit	Evidence of the ability to: create original designs for the layout of at least two publications use an extended range of tools and features of relevant software with a high level of technical proficiency integrate technical and creative processes to produce outcomes that meet design objectives.
Context of and specific resources for assessment	Assessment must ensure access to: industry-current graphic design software.
Method of assessment	A range of assessment methods should be used to assess practical skills and knowledge. The following examples are appropriate for this unit: evaluation of audience response to layouts produced by the candidate evaluation of processes used by the candidate to develop the work evaluation of technical aspects of the layouts direct observation of work in progress, including use of software tools evaluation of a candidate’s visual diary or other forms of documentation showing the development of the designs group peer review of layouts created by the candidate questioning and discussion about candidate’s intentions and the work outcome review of portfolios of evidence review of third-party reports from experienced practitioners. Assessment methods should closely reflect workplace demands (e.g. literacy) and the needs of particular groups (e.g. people with disabilities, and people who may have literacy or numeracy difficulties, such as speakers of languages other than English, remote communities and those with interrupted schooling).
Guidance information for assessment	Holistic assessment with other units relevant to the industry sector, workplace and job role is recommended, for example: CUVGRD504A Create and manipulate graphics.

Range Statement

The range statement relates to the unit of competency as a whole. It allows for different work environments and situations that may affect performance. Bold italicised wording, if used in the performance criteria, is detailed below. Essential operating conditions that may be present with training and assessment (depending on the work situation, needs of the candidate, accessibility of the item, and local industry and regional contexts) may also be included.

Communication objectives may be to:	challenge compare contrast entertain inform inspire motivate persuade.
Publications may be:	annual reports brochures business reports complex forms magazines newsletters style manuals technical reports web interfaces.
Design brief may be:	diagrammatic verbal visual written.
Relevant people may include:	clients employers end users mentors other artists and designers peers potential customers supervisors teachers technical experts.
Specifications may relate to:	cost delivery platform environmental sustainability material characteristics quantity technical requirements technology timeframe.
Other information may relate to:	client’s organisational background conflicting demands considerations, such as: contractual copyright ethical legal historical information product characteristics and statistics style considerations subject matter.
Sources may include:	art and design texts examples of similar publications films images internet exhibitions own experience previous iterations.
Opportunities and constraints may relate to:	audience capacity or skills cost own level of technical expertise potential for innovative approaches technical feasibility time.
Elements may relate to:	captions colour headlines quotes sidebars visual elements, such as graphics and photo images.
Fundamental elements and principles relate to:	alignment balance coherence colour composition contrast direction dominance emphasis form line movement pattern positive and negative space proportion proximity repetition rhythm shape simplicity or complexity subordination texture unity.
Technical experimentation may involve:	challenging established ways of doing things combining different approaches using new features and tools.
Visual representations may be:	electronic drawing mock-ups models presentations sketching technical drawings.
Capabilities may relate to:	colour palettes columns heading hierarchies master pages navigational aspects templates style sheets.
Tools and features may include:	adjusting strokes and fills alignment tools applying envelopes blending clipping compound objects cutting, extending and closing paths duplicating filters and special effects gradients and mesh joining paths modifying paths moving in increments other object manipulation tools and features reshaping scaling, rotating, skewing and distorting slicing and cutting specialty fills and swatches stroke and outline adjustments transforming transparency trim, merge and outline warping.
Safe work practices may relate to:	ergonomics use of consumables.
Technical requirements may relate to:	banding bleeding choke colour cut and fold marks file formatting font use imposition schemes packaging resolution separations size spread trapping.
File formats may include:	encapsulated postscript (EPS) graphic interchange format (GIF) joint photographic experts group (JPEG) native format other suitable formats portable document format (PDF) portable network graphics (PNG) tagged image file format (TIFF).

Unit Sector(s)

Visual communication – graphic design

Custom Content Section

Not applicable.

CUVPHI529A Employ colour management in a digital imaging workplace

Modification History

Version	Comments
CUVPHI529A	This version first released with CUV11 Visual Arts, Craft and Design Training Package version 1.0

Unit Descriptor

This unit describes the performance outcomes, skills and knowledge required to manage colour in a digital imaging workplace.

Application of the Unit

This unit applies to any digital imaging industry where digital files are captured, acquired, created, manipulated, integrated, enhanced, output, managed and archived to a variety of media in which colour accuracy is integral.

This unit requires the self-directed application of skills and knowledge to research, evaluate, plan, coordinate and manage the accuracy, consistency and integrity of colour in born digital and hybrid (digitised/scanned film or print) workflows.

This work is usually undertaken autonomously, with guidance where required.

Licensing/Regulatory Information

No licensing, legislative, regulatory or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of endorsement.

Pre-Requisites

Not applicable.

Employability Skills Information

This unit contains employability skills.

Elements and Performance Criteria Pre-Content

Element	Performance Criteria
Elements describe the essential outcomes of a unit of competency.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element. Where bold italicised text is used, further information is detailed in the required skills and knowledge section and the range statement. Assessment of performance is to be consistent with the evidence guide.

Elements and Performance Criteria

1. Research history and apply theory of colour in a digital imaging context	1.1 Identify colour theories as they apply to the digital imaging context using appropriate sources of information and standards 1.2 Evaluate currency and credibility of information gathered and ensure research scope is sufficiently broad 1.3 Examine how colour is created, defined and managed in contemporary digital imaging devices 1.4 Investigate the areas of capture, display, output and archive spaces in contemporary digital imaging devices where colour management is critical to the production of a quality product 1.5 Maintain accurate and comprehensive details of sources of information and standards
2. Identify appropriate colour management systems and strategies and apply to a workplace	2.1 Identify and select appropriate colour management systems and strategies for specific digital imaging devices 2.2 Evaluate suitability of selected colour management systems and strategies in terms of relevance and cost efficiency 2.3 Adopt and adapt selected colour management systems and strategies to digital workplace
3. Review and update colour management strategies	3.1 Review performance and assess impact of adapted colour management systems and strategies 3.2 Develop systems to update and respond to future colour management systems and strategies as they arise from emerging technologies and workplace practices

Required Skills and Knowledge

This section describes the skills and knowledge required for this unit.

Required skills

research skills to access information on colour theory and management

literacy skills to interrogate and interpret a broad range of information on colour theory and management

numeracy skills to understand numeric values and meaning against colour theory and how RGB, CMYK and LAB colour values are quantified

communication skills to:

critique and discuss colour theory and management

use industry and community networks as sources of information

critical thinking skills to identify best practice options and adopt and adapt colour management strategies

problem-solving skills to:

recognise and resolve workplace issues when adopting and adapting colour management systems into digital workplace

solve colour issues

learning skills to seek expert advice when adopting and adapting colour management strategies

planning and organising skills to:

develop strategies to respond to future colour theory and management strategies

document research findings clearly and concisely

plan integration of colour management strategies into digital workplace practice

technology skills to coordinate the installation of colour management systems.

Required knowledge

colour theories and their application to colour management systems

commonly used research methodologies

current trends and emerging technologies in colour management systems

OHS requirements relating to computer usage.

Evidence Guide

The evidence guide provides advice on assessment and must be read in conjunction with the performance criteria, required skills and knowledge, range statement and the Assessment Guidelines for the Training Package.

Overview of assessment
Critical aspects for assessment and evidence required to demonstrate competency in this unit	Evidence of the ability to: research colour theory and digital colour management systems and strategies evaluate and adapt appropriate digital colour management systems and strategies maintain and review digital colour management systems and strategies.
Context of and specific resources for assessment	Assessment must ensure: access to: appropriate technology and sources of information to research colour theory and digital colour management systems and strategies an environment where a range of digital imaging devices and colour management systems can be applied appropriate learning and assessment support when required the use of culturally appropriate processes, and techniques appropriate to the oracy, language and literacy capacity of the candidate and the work being performed.
Method of assessment	A range of assessment methods should be used to assess practical skills and knowledge. The following examples are appropriate for this unit: direct questioning combined with review of portfolios of evidence review of third-party reports from experienced practitioners direct observation of candidate’s evaluation, adaptation and management of appropriate colour management practices and strategies case studies to assess candidate’s ability to evaluate workplaces and use digital colour management practices and strategies problem-solving activities to assess candidate’s critical thinking skills. Assessment methods should closely reflect workplace demands (e.g. literacy) and the needs of particular groups (e.g. people with disabilities, and people who may have literacy or numeracy difficulties, such as speakers of languages other than English, remote communities and those with interrupted schooling).
Guidance information for assessment	Holistic assessment with other units relevant to the industry sector, workplace and job role is recommended.

Range Statement

The range statement relates to the unit of competency as a whole. It allows for different work environments and situations that may affect performance. Bold italicised wording, if used in the performance criteria, is detailed below. Essential operating conditions that may be present with training and assessment (depending on the work situation, needs of the candidate, accessibility of the item, and local industry and regional contexts) may also be included.

Colour theories may include:	colour charts, including: colour look-up tables (CLUTs) Indexed Colour Pantone Matching System Web Safe Colour colour/light measurement: Angstrom candela colour frequency colour rendering index (CRI) colour temperature Kelvin Lumens Lux Mired nanometres wavelength colour spaces, including: Adobe RGB (1998) Atkinson Bruce RGB CMYK ColorMatch RGB Epson RGB (2001) Fraser and EktaSpace greyscale HiFi colour spaces (e.g. Hexachrome) LAB ProPhoto RGB sRGB wide gamut RGB xvRGB xvYCC YCbCr colour synthesis (additive and subtractive colour) colour systems and models, including: Chamber of Commerce Colour Chart (CCIC) Commission Internationale de l’Eclairage (CIE): Lab, Luv, XYZ Herring’s opponent processes model HSL HSV Munsell colour atlas Natural Colour System (NCS) Ostwald Surface Colour System Practical Colour Coordinate System (PCCS) subjective versus objective Young-Helmholtz’s tri-pigments model colour theorists, including: Isaac Newton – Opticks Johann Wolfgang von Goethe – Theory of Colours Michel-Eugène Chevreul – The Law of Simultaneous Colour Contrast Hermann Günther Grassmann – Grassmann’s Law Hermann Ludwig Ferdinand von Helmholtz – Handbook of Physiological Optics Ewald Hering – colour opponency or opponent process theory Ogden Rood – Modern Chromatics Albert Munsell – Munsell Book of Color Wilhelm Ostwald – Color Atlas Wassily Kandinsky, Johannes Itten, Faber Birren, Josef Albers Chenguang Lu – Decoding Model: A Symmetrical Zone Model of Color Vision human vision nature of light (e.g. electromagnetic spectrum, natural light phenomena).
Digital imaging context may include:	any digital imaging workplace where colour management is required, including: designer’s studio digital media studio film and television studio photography studio photo imaging lab or bureau pre-press bureau.
Sources of information may include:	discussions with industry practitioners electronic and print media, such as news, reviews and articles events, such as industry functions, conferences, trade fairs and expositions government bodies and associated publications industry association digital standards internet libraries and archives, such as text, film, video, sound and graphic national and international journals, such as artist, computing and design journals personal observations and experience professional development opportunities, such as training programs, seminars, conferences, competitions, awards, exhibitions, symposiums, workshops and master classes retail and wholesale suppliers of products and services technical publications and reference books.
Standards may include:	ISO 15076-1:2005 Image technology colour management – Architecture, profile format and data structure – Part 1: Based on ICC.1:2004-10 (Profile version 4.2.0.0) Image technology colour management – Architecture, profile format, and data structure ISO 12646:2004 Graphic technology – Displays for colour proofing – Characteristics and viewing conditions ISO 3664:2000 Viewing conditions – Graphic technology and photography IEC 61966-9 Multimedia systems and equipment – Colour measurement and management – Part 9: Digital cameras IEC 61966-8 Multimedia systems and equipment – Colour measurement and management – Part 8: Multimedia colour scanners IEC 61966-7-1 Multimedia systems and equipment – Colour measurement and management – Part 7-1: Colour printers – Reflective prints – RGB inputs IEC 61966-4 Multimedia systems and equipment – Colour measurement and management – Part 4: Equipment using liquid crystal display panels IEC 61966-3 Multimedia systems and equipment – Colour measurement and management – Part 3: Equipment using cathode ray tubes IEC 61966-2-1 and IEC 61966-2-1-am1 Multimedia systems and equipment – Colour measurement and management – Part 2-1: Colour management – Default RGB colour space – sRGB IEC 61966-2-2 Multimedia systems and equipment – Colour measurement and management – Part 2-2: Colour management – Extended RGB colour space – scRGB IEC 61966-2-4 Multimedia systems and equipment – Colour measurement and management – Part 2-4: Colour management – Extended-gamut YCC colour space for video applications – xvYCC ISO 22028-1:2004 Photography and graphic technology – Extended colour encodings for digital image storage, manipulation and interchange – Part 1: Architecture and requirements (ISO TC42) ISO 12234-4: Photography – Electronic still-picture imaging – Part 4: Exchangeable image file format (Exif 2.2) (ISO TC42) IEC 61966-5 Multimedia systems and equipment – Colour measurement and management – Part 5: Equipment using plasma display panels.
Digital imaging devices may include:	cameras computer hardware and software output devices: data projectors desktop printers film writers graphic arts printers image setters lab or bureau printers output to screen based display scanners self-contained capture backs (microscopes and telescopes) video.
Quality product may include:	computer or game software digital images documents for output via: CMYK printing presses desktop printers film writers LED and CRT printers wide format inkjet printers interactive sequences videos websites.
Colour management systems and strategies may include:	calibration devices: colourimeters devices for camera, screen, scan and output calibration spectrophotometer profiling: canned and custom profile colour and resolution targets for scanning and/or digital camera capture device-dependent and device-independent embed, apply, discard and convert profile options ICC profiles reference cards and printer colour reference swatch books workplace environment: airborne pollutants ambient lighting controlled viewing conditions temperature and humidity WYSIWYG (what you see is what you get) and closed loop system: colour management policies colour picker colour space gamut and gamut warnings dynamic range gamma hue and saturation rendering intents soft proofing white and grey balance and black point.

Unit Sector(s)

Visual communication – photo imaging

CUVPHI530A Prepare digital images for pre-press processing

Modification History

Version	Comments
CUVPHI530A	This version first released with CUV11 Visual Arts, Craft and Design Training Package version 1.0

Unit Descriptor

This unit describes the performance outcomes, skills and knowledge required to prepare client image files for pre-press processing.

This unit is based on CUVGRD301A Prepare files for publication and ICPPP430A Manage colour, and has been contextualised for application to the photo imaging industry.

Application of the Unit

This unit applies to the digital imaging industry where image files require processing before printing. It requires the self-directed application of skills and knowledge to prepare digital images for pre-press processing.

This work would usually be carried out independently although guidance would be available if required.

Licensing/Regulatory Information

No licensing, legislative, regulatory or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of endorsement.

Pre-Requisites

Not applicable.

Employability Skills Information

This unit contains employability skills.

Elements and Performance Criteria Pre-Content

Element	Performance Criteria
Elements describe the essential outcomes of a unit of competency.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element. Where bold italicised text is used, further information is detailed in the required skills and knowledge section and the range statement. Assessment of performance is to be consistent with the evidence guide.

Elements and Performance Criteria

1. Consult with pre-press bureau about formatting requirements	1.1 Source a checklist for printing requirements from appropriate people and follow throughout preparation process 1.2 Obtain relevant specifications for software and image file formatting from appropriate people 1.3 Ensure constraints of different printing processes and other diffusion techniques are understood
2. Prepare files for pre-press processing	2.1 Prepare image files using appropriate pre-press processing techniques 2.2 Choose suitable test charts/targets and print to appropriate specifications for ink density and stock on a linearised proofer 2.3 Calibrate digital proofing device to examine test charts and use results to generate colour profile 2.4 Print test file on calibrated digital proofing device and use results to generate output profile for press and stock 2.5 Proof sample image and confirm with client 2.6 Optimise images and output image product to profile specifications using industry standards 2.7 Save image files in appropriate format for pre-press processing and prepare invoice or account for client 2.8 Pack completed images for electronic or physical dispatch with invoice or account and deliver to agreed location by appropriate methods within agreed timeframe 2.9 Conclude and maintain management procedures
3. Wrap up and review print preparation	3.1 Catalogue and archive images appropriately 3.2 Review response from client against final printed product 3.3 Maintain contractual and financial records for business and taxation purposes 3.4 Review personal performance within job context 3.5 Identify future opportunities, work directions, equipment needs and workflow changes resulting from job

Required Skills and Knowledge

This section describes the skills and knowledge required for this unit.

Required skills

research skills to access information on colour theory and management as it applies to pre-press processing

communication skills to:

collaborate and negotiate between client and printing bureau

discuss colour, its theory and management

literacy skills to:

interpret a broad range of information on colour theory and management as it applies to pre-press processing

interpret material specifications necessary for pre-press processing

numeracy skills to:

calculate layout requirements and material specifications for pre-press processing

compare a colour sampler reading

determine colour cast and neutrality from a colour sampler reading

identify and assign numeric values to colour as required by pre-press processing

read and evaluate out of gamut colours and total ink/black ink limits

understand numeric values and meaning against colour theory and how RGB, CMYK and LAB colour values are quantified

planning and organising skills to plan integration of colour management into pre-press processing contexts

problem-solving skills to identify and resolve common colour management problems in pre-press processing

technology skills to use and calibrate scanning and digital proofing devices.

Required knowledge

colour theory and management associated with pre-press processing

copyright, moral rights, intellectual property and legislative issues associated with pre-press processing

different printing and diffusion techniques and their constraints with respect to design

environmental issues associated with pre-press processing

equipment, tools and materials associated with pre-press processing

organisational and OHS requirements associated with pre-press processing and computer usage.

Evidence Guide

The evidence guide provides advice on assessment and must be read in conjunction with the performance criteria, required skills and knowledge, range statement and the Assessment Guidelines for the Training Package.

Overview of assessment
Critical aspects for assessment and evidence required to demonstrate competency in this unit	Evidence of the ability to: produce CMYK, CMYK with spot colour channel and Duo/Tri/Quad tone image files that cause no pre-press processing problems produce clipping paths (deep etched) to suit the needs of the image and client or job requirements manage colour in pre-press processing to ensure test prints and final products match.
Context of and specific resources for assessment	Assessment must ensure: access to: an environment where digital image files can be prepared for pre-press processing appropriate sources of information to research colour theory and management appropriate learning and assessment support when required the use of culturally appropriate processes, and techniques appropriate to the oracy, language and literacy capacity of the candidate and the work being performed.
Method of assessment	A range of assessment methods should be used to assess practical skills and knowledge. The following examples are appropriate for this unit: direct questioning combined with review of portfolios of evidence review of third-party reports from experienced practitioners case studies to assess candidate’s ability to manage colour in pre-press processing direct observation of candidate preparing digital image files for print processing problem-solving activities to assess candidate’s critical thinking skills. Assessment methods should closely reflect workplace demands (e.g. literacy) and the needs of particular groups (e.g. people with disabilities, and people who may have literacy or numeracy difficulties, such as speakers of languages other than English, remote communities and those with interrupted schooling).
Guidance information for assessment	Holistic assessment with other units relevant to the industry sector, workplace and job role is recommended, for example: CUVPHI521A Produce commercial photo images CUVPHI523A Produce media photo images CUVPHI525A Plan, capture and exploit visual art photo images CUVPHI526A Produce technical photo images CUVPHI527A Make illustrative images for publication and display CUVPHI528A Plan, capture and exploit stock photo images.

Range Statement

The range statement relates to the unit of competency as a whole. It allows for different work environments and situations that may affect performance. Bold italicised wording, if used in the performance criteria, is detailed below. Essential operating conditions that may be present with training and assessment (depending on the work situation, needs of the candidate, accessibility of the item, and local industry and regional contexts) may also be included.

Checklist for printing requirements may include:	dot gain and dot gain curves inks and ink limits metadata requirements optimal screen frequency PostScript colour management profile – embedded or not screen: angles half tone ruling stochastic stock transfer function.
Appropriate people may include:	staff at pre-press trade houses and bureaux staff within pre-press sections of printing companies.
Software may include:	colour management software computer-aided design and drafting (CADD) software densitometry/spectrophotometry software drawing and graphics software page layout and page description software profile creating software scanner profiling software.
Appropriate pre-press processing techniques may include:	generating output profiles that allow for: achromatic reproduction black generation black values dot gain total gradients under colour removal (UCR), under colour addition (UCA) or varying levels of grey component replacement (GCR), including skeleton black printing appropriate test charts: 3- and 4-colour neutrals CMYK colour scales colour swatches providing combined images in editable/adjustable formats providing combined images in security enabled or locked formats providing scans in appropriate resolution: low resolution FPO (for position only) high resolution saving colour in required formats using appropriate digital proofing devices: densitometers spectrophotometers, including strip reader style devices using appropriate ICC profiles using templates correctly.
Stock may include:	high-groundwood newsprint super calendared uncoated uncoated.
Press may include:	gravure heatset offset image setters sheetfed offset waterless sheetfed web press offset (rollfed).
Appropriate format may include:	bit depth compression options encoding file format/extension: encapsulated postscript (EPS) portable document format (PDF) tagged image file format (TIFF) PostScript level resolution: dots per inch lines per inch pixels per inch sample points per inch spots per inch.

Unit Sector(s)

Visual communication – photo imaging

ICAB4135B Create a simple mark-up language document to specification

Modification History

Not Applicable

Unit Descriptor

Unit descriptor	This unit defines the competency required to design, create and save a simple markup language document to a given specification using a text editor rather than an authoring tool. The following unit is linked and forms an appropriate cluster: ICAB4137B Produce basic client side script for dynamic web pages No licensing, legislative, regulatory or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Application of the Unit

Application of the unit

Licensing/Regulatory Information

Refer to Unit Descriptor

Pre-Requisites

Prerequisite units

Employability Skills Information

Employability skills	This unit contains employability skills.

Elements and Performance Criteria Pre-Content

Elements describe the essential outcomes of a unit of competency.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element. Where bold italicised text is used, further information is detailed in the required skills and knowledge section and the range statement. Assessment of performance is to be consistent with the evidence guide.

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
1. Analyse specification	1.1. Determine the uses and audience of the document 1.2. Determine the appropriate mark-up language based on the document uses and audience 1.3. Determine relevant document structure 1.4. Determine appropriate browser-safe colours
2. Create document structure to specification	2.1. Create and assign the basic elements of the document, taking into account accessibility 2.2. Add content text to the body of the document 2.3. Save document using a descriptive name and an appropriate extension
3. Format document to specification	3.1. Apply a suitable format for the text 3.2. Apply a suitable background colour 3.3. Apply suitable positional elements 3.4. Create lists
4. Create tables, hyperlinks and graphics	4.1. Create tables 4.2. Create hyperlinks, anchors and image maps for internal and external navigation 4.3. Define the colours for unvisited, visited and active links 4.4. Create hyperlinks for sending email 4.5. Attach images in a suitable format
5. Validate documents	5.1. Validate mark-up language document against specifications and record outcomes 5.2. Validate mark-up language document in different browsers for compatibility and record outcomes

Required Skills and Knowledge

REQUIRED SKILLS AND KNOWLEDGE
This section describes the skills and knowledge required for this unit.
Required skills
Ability to use a variety of mark-up languages to meet a variety of needs Using keyboard and mouse in an integrated development environment Ability to follow documented instruction from a supplied guide Problem solving skills in mark-up language and an ability to troubleshoot problems Reading and writing at a level where workplace instructions and documents are clearly understood Ability to communicate ideas and concepts in a clear and precise manner
Required knowledge
Mark-up language and associated standards Open platforms

Evidence Guide

EVIDENCE GUIDE
The evidence guide provides advice on assessment and must be read in conjunction with the performance criteria, required skills and knowledge, range statement and the Assessment Guidelines for the Training Package.
Overview of assessment
Critical aspects for assessment and evidence required to demonstrate competency in this unit	Evidence of the following is essential: Assessment must confirm the ability to design, create and save a simple mark-up language document using a mark-up language without the automated generation of code. To demonstrate competency in this unit the person will require access to: Organisational style guide/policy User requirements Development platform
Context of and specific resources for assessment	Mark-up languages are a common means of promoting websites, providing security via limited internet access and when using open source software, provides a powerful means to control a wide variety of operations. The scope and complexity of knowledge and skills is dependent on the tasks undertaken as part of creating the code to specification. The assessment of this unit of competency will usually include observation of mark-up code results and performance of real or simulated work. The breadth, depth and complexity of knowledge and skills in this competency would cover a broad range of varied activities or application in a wider variety of contexts most of which are complex and non-routine. Leadership and guidance would be involved when organising activities of self and others as well as contributing to technical solutions of a non-routine or contingency nature. Assessment must ensure: Performance of a broad range of skilled applications including the requirement to evaluate and analyse current practices, develop new criteria and procedures for performing current practices and provision of some leadership and guidance to others in the application and planning of the skills would be characteristic. Applications may involve responsibility for, and limited organisation of, others.
Method of assessment	The purpose of this unit is to define the standard of performance to be achieved in the workplace. In undertaking training and assessment activities related to this unit, consideration should be given to the implementation of appropriate diversity and accessibility practices in order to accommodate people who may have special needs. Additional guidance on these and related matters is provided in ICA05 Section 1. Competency in this unit should be assessed using summative assessment to ensure consistency of performance in a range of contexts. This unit can be assessed either in the workplace or in a simulated environment. However, simulated activities must closely reflect the workplace to enable full demonstration of competency. Assessment will usually include observation of real or simulated work processes and procedures and/or performance in a project context as well as questioning on underpinning knowledge and skills. The questioning of team members, supervisors, subordinates, peers and clients where appropriate may provide valuable input to the assessment process. The interdependence of units for assessment purposes may vary with the particular project or scenario.
Guidance information for assessment	Holistic assessment with other units relevant to the industry sector, workplace and job role is recommended, for example: ICAB4137B Produce basic client side script for dynamic web pages An individual demonstrating this competency would be able to: Demonstrate understanding of a broad knowledge base incorporating some theoretical concepts Apply solutions to a defined range of unpredictable problems Identify and apply skill and knowledge areas to a wide variety of contexts, with depth in some areas Identify, analyse and evaluate information from a variety of sources Take responsibility for own outputs in relation to specified quality standards Take limited responsibility for the quantity and quality of the output of others Demonstrate relevant mark-up language coding skills Maintain knowledge of industry products and services

Range Statement

RANGE STATEMENT
The range statement relates to the unit of competency as a whole. It allows for different work environments and situations that may affect performance. Bold italicised wording, if used in the performance criteria, is detailed below. Essential operating conditions that may be present with training and assessment (depending on the work situation, needs of the candidate, accessibility of the item, and local industry and regional contexts) may also be included.
Accessibility may be in relation to:	cultural awareness ethnicity physical impairments remote locations
Content may include:	information and interactive features, such as product information, company information, copyright and disclaimer notices, site map, frequently asked questions, what's new, customer-specific information, customer only information, error messages, instructions, feedback mechanisms, reference pages, forms, background articles, ratings/rankings/testimonials/quotes from reviews, hyperlink titles
Mark-up language may include but are not limited to:	HTML DHTML XHTML SGML VRML XML
Extension may include but is not limited to:	HTM HTML XML DHTML XHTML
Format includes:	consideration of the combination of typeface and other attributes, such as size, pitch and spacing of the font
Browser may include but is not limited to:	Netscape Navigator Internet Explorer Mozilla Opera Galleon Phoenix Konqueror Lynx

Unit Sector(s)

Unit sector	Build

Co-requisite units

Co-requisite units

Competency field

Competency field

ICTDBS504 Integrate database with a website

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICT Information and Communications Technology Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to ensure the database is integrated with a website.

It applies to individuals employed as web developers who are responsible for creating data-driven web applications.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Database

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Connect to the database	1.1 Identify site data needs from the technical requirements 1.2 Connect to the database from a web application using a web development language
2. Retrieve data from database and display on web pages	2.1 Retrieve data using structured query language (SQL) 2.2 Display the data in the most appropriate control 2.3 Format the data so that it is displayed in the most effective way
3. Update the database data from user input	3.1 Update the existing data stored in the database with user-supplied input 3.2 Insert the data in the database with user-supplied input 3.3 Delete the data stored in the database 3.4 Validate the data and check for errors

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 3.1, 3.3, 3.4	Interprets textual information from the sources in order to identify relevant and key information
Writing	1.2, 2.3, 3.1, 3.2	Writes and edits computer input data, code and technical data, ensuring correct syntax and accuracy
Get the work done	All	Uses systematic, analytical processes in complex, non-routine situations, setting goals, gathering relevant information, and identifying, and evaluating options against agreed criteria Uses analytical processes to decide on a course of action, and establishes the criteria for deciding between different options Demonstrates a sophisticated understanding of principles, concepts, language and practices associated with the digital world, and uses these to connect to a database from a web application, retrieving, displaying and updating data

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalent status
ICTDBS504 Integrate database with a website	ICADBS504A Integrate database with a website	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages. Minor edits to clarify intent of the performance criteria	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICTDBS504 Integrate database with a website

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICT Information and Communications Technology Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

access database using a web development language

retrieve and display web-based data

update web-based data.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

describe a database structure

outline internet technology as it relates to the use of databases

identify and apply programming control structures, including object-oriented programming and structured query language (SQL)

explain web programming concepts, including:

authentication and web security

hypertext transfer protocol (HTTP)

session management

defining the principles of stateless programming.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the database field of work, and include access to:

equipment

industry software packages

the requirements documentation

a web server

a database

the web development environment

browsers.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICTNWK301 Provide network systems administration

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICT Information and Communications Technology Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to technically manage the elements of a network, including contributing to a disaster recovery plan.

It applies to individuals working as frontline technical support personnel responsible for administering a network.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Networking

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Provide client access and security	1.1 Provide logons, passwords and applications file access to users, and prepare the documentation in line with organisational requirements 1.2 Examine the records of user accounts, to determine access privileges and usage 1.3 Take the necessary action to ensure the maintenance of system integrity and security
2. Provide the input into and disseminate the disaster recovery plan	2.1 Provide input into the organisation's disaster recovery plan 2.2 Disseminate the disaster recovery plan to users, as required
3. Monitor the network performance	3.1 Perform the diagnostic tests associated with administering the network or system 3.2 Analyse and respond to diagnostic information 3.3 Monitor software usage, including any inappropriate or illegal use 3.4 Delete any illegal software from the system 3.5 Monitor the hardware response time, and other performance indicators 3.6 Determine and action, methods for improving the network and systems efficiency, according to the organisational guidelines

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 1.2, 3.6	Recognises and interprets textual information from organisational guidelines to establish the job requirements
Writing	1.1	Uses specific and relevant language to complete workplace documentation
Oral Communication	1.1, 2.1	Articulates information clearly, using specific and relevant language suitable to the audience, to convey requirements, and listening and questioning techniques, to confirm understanding
Numeracy	3.2	Interprets numerical data to monitor network operations
Interact with others	2.2	Selects the appropriate form, channel and mode of communication for a specific purpose, relevant to own role
Get the work done	1.3, 3.1, 3.2, 3.3, 3.6	Takes responsibility for planning and organising own workload, identifying ways of sequencing and combining elements for greater efficiency, and considering how to link with the work of others Understands the purposes, specific functions and key features of common digital systems, and tools, and operates them effectively to complete routine tasks Responds to highly obvious routine problems, using step by step instruction and procedures, or by a trial and error process, for non-critical situations

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICTNWK301 Provide network systems administration	ICANWK301A Provide network systems administration	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages.	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICTNWK301 Provide network systems administration

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICT Information and Communications Technology Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

sustain the operation of the network through the maintenance of network integrity, and by performing diagnostic tests

contribute to the formulation of a disaster recovery plan, and provide the client with an optimised network that complies with the organisational guidelines

implement network and systems efficiency, according to organisational guidelines

provide the appropriate access to the network for users

maintain, limit or enhance user access, according to authorised requests.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

outline the network’s operating system

outline the different approaches to backing-up, and restoring, computer data

describe the key elements contained in a disaster recovery policy

describe the features of network file and folder permissions

outline the vendor service-level agreement

summarise operating systems supported by the organisation, their functions and basic features

outline the organisation’s access and security procedures

identify and describe the organisational and technical systems

describe the organisational procedures for protection against, and elimination, of computer viruses

describe the policies and procedures for deleting, restoring and archiving files

describe the procedures for creating logons

outline the security, and network, guidelines and procedures

state the responsibilities for software copyright.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the network industry, and include access to:

a live network

systems administration tools currently used in the industry

the organisational policy and procedures

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICTNWK302 Determine and action network problems

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICT Information and Communications Technology Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to document network related problems, determine solutions, or escalate problems to a new support level.

It applies to individuals, working as frontline technical support personnel, who maintain network continuity by isolating and rectifying network problems as they arise.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Networking

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Determine client requirements and identify if problem exists	1.1 Log calls from help-desk support staff 1.2 Determine and document problem based on client requirements
2. Determine whether problem is covered by policy	2.1 Verify the scope and coverage of maintenance and technical support agreements relative to the problem and client requirements 2.2 Provide assistance according to organisational guidelines
3. Carry out maintenance support on identified problem	3.1 Conduct diagnostic tests around identified problem 3.2 Complete maintenance according to organisational guidelines 3.3 Obtain new components as part of the resolution, where necessary 3.4 Store or dispose of components according to organisational and environmental guidelines
4. Prepare maintenance report and confirm solution	4.1 Prepare maintenance report according to organisational guidelines and support agreements 4.2 Refer unresolved maintenance requirements to appropriate higher level service area 4.3 Follow up with the client to determine solution success and close the report

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	2.1, 2.2, 3.2, 3.4, 4.1	Recognises and interprets textual information from organisational guidelines and support agreements to establish the job requirements
Writing	1.1, 1.2, 4.1	Uses industry-specific language to document problems and prepare maintenance reports in line with organisational guidelines and support agreements
Oral Communication	4.2, 4.3	Provides clear explanations using language suitable to audience to discuss unresolved challenges Uses listening and questioning techniques to confirm understanding
Navigate the world of work	2.2, 3.4	Complies with explicit organisational policies and procedures
Get the work done	1.2, 2.1, 2.2, 3.1-3.4, 4.3	Takes responsibility for planning and organising own workload, identifying ways of sequencing and combining elements for greater efficiency, and considering how to link with the work of others Understands the purposes, specific functions and key features of common digital systems and tools, and operates them effectively to complete routine tasks May reflect on outcomes and identify what worked, or develop an improved approached for future situations Initiates standard diagnostic procedures when responding to familiar and unfamiliar problems within immediate context and seeks input from others when problems remain unresolved

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICTNWK302 Determine and action network problems	ICANWK302A Identify and resolve network problems	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages. The title has been edited to correct the wording to that of the original competency intent.	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICTNWK302 Determine and action network problems

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICT Information and Communications Technology Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

document network related problems and determine the required resources

solve client problems or escalate the problem according to organisational guidelines

maintain the network with minimal disruption to clients.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

explain environmentally sound recycling and disposal procedures

identify and summarise common networking procedures for:

call logging

contracting and maintenance requirements

problem escalation procedures

outline inventory processes

describe technical features and functions of network hardware and software systems

describe common network problems relating to organisational information

describe agreements used for technical support.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the network industry, and include access to:

a network

hardware

diagnostic tools, components and software

records and reports

organisational guidelines and procedures.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICTNWK303 Configure and administer a network operating system

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICT Information and Communications Technology Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit defines the skills and knowledge required to create the network configuration required by a client and to set up and use administrative tools to manage the network.

It applies to individuals working as frontline technical support personnel who are required to maintain network continuity through changing requirements.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Networking

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Assess network features	1.1 Determine organisational policies and administration arrangements used to administer the network 1.2 Determine the type of network operating system (NOS) and interfaces used by the existing network and potential compatibility issues caused by integration of other networks 1.3 Identify the risks associated with administration of a network to minimise the loss of data or service during operations 1.4 Determine network administration tools that can be used with the NOS to manage network performance and enforce organisational policies
2. Administer and support the system using administration interfaces	2.1 Use interfaces to format hard drives, set up security restrictions and establish user log-in information to administer a basic network 2.2 Use administration tools to develop a map of system interaction to determine the data required by particular users and how often the data is accessed 2.3 Examine existing applications and software, and plan required upgrades or reconfigurations to new system or applications 2.4 Test reconfiguration for successful interface with existing system to ensure compatibility
3. Set up and manage the network file system	3.1 Create a required file and folder structure using appropriate administration and system tools 3.2 Set the security, access and sharing of file system to meet user requirements 3.3 Identify and implement the virus protection requirements for the network in line with organisational procedures 3.4 Test and document the file system to ensure that appropriate access is available to the user groups according to organisational standards
4. Administer user services and user accounts	4.1 Determine the user services required, and implement using the appropriate administration and system tools 4.2 Create users and groups as required to facilitate user security and network access according to user authorisation 4.3 Verify successful access by users to authorised network data and resources, and record outcomes 4.4 Set or modify user settings to ensure compliance with security and access policies 4.5 Review procedures and take action to ensure that users who are no longer part of the organisation have their accounts disabled, deleted or modified
5. Provide and support backup security	5.1 Scan and clean the network of viruses before performing backup of the network 5.2 Determine security risks to which data is exposed and provide appropriate prevention methods and recovery processes 5.3 Report identified security risks to appropriate person 5.4 Implement systems to provide backup and service restoration capability in the event of a disaster, according to organisational policies 5.5 Document and disseminate the disaster recovery procedures

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 1.4, 3.2-3.4, 4.4, 4.5, 5.4	Recognises and interprets information from organisational policies and procedures to establish the job requirements
Writing	3.4, 4.3, 5.5	Uses specific and relevant language to document new file systems, user access and disaster recovery procedures
Oral Communication	5.3	Articulates information clearly using specific and relevant language suitable to audience to convey requirements, and uses listening and questioning techniques to confirm understanding
Navigate the world of work	1.1, 3.3, 5.4	Complies with explicit organisational policies and procedures
Interact with others	5.3, 5.5	Selects the appropriate form, channel and mode of communication for a specific purpose relevant to own role
Get the work done	1.1-1.4, 2.1-2.4, 3.1-3.4, 4.2-4.5, 5.1, 5.2, 5.4	Takes responsibility for planning and organising own workload, identifying ways of sequencing and combining elements for greater efficiency, and considering how to link with the work of others Understands the purposes, specific functions and key features of common digital systems and tools, and operates them effectively to complete routine tasks May reflect on outcomes and identify what worked, or develop an improved approached for future situations Initiates standard diagnostic procedures when responding to familiar and unfamiliar problems within immediate context and seeks input from others when problems remain unresolved

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICTNWK303 Configure and administer a network operating system	ICANWK303A Configure and administer a network operating system	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICTNWK303 Configure and administer a network operating system

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICT Information and Communications Technology Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

use network administrative tools to carry out system administration tasks

manage the network file system

create the network configuration required by the client

provide user services and user accounts

provide backup and service restoration capability.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

describe antivirus software, its operation, installation and update procedures

summarise current industry standard network operating system (NOS)

outline the facilities available in the operating environment

describe the features and capabilities of networking technologies

explain the implementation of network security in a local area network (LAN) including:

file and folder permissions

users and group settings

provide a summary of monitoring aspects of network performance or traffic including:

system administration tools

third-party tools.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the network industry, and include access to:

user network requirements

antivirus software

network administration tools

a live network with a representative range of networked environments and operating systems

a server

technical records, organisational policies, access policy and documentation.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICTNWK304 Administer network peripherals

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICT Information and Communications Technology Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to manage an environment of networked peripheral devices, in order to provide services to client users.

It applies to individuals working as frontline technical support personnel responsible for connecting, maintaining and administering peripheral devices attached to networks.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Networking

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Install peripherals to a network	1.1 Plan the location of peripherals to provide appropriate services to users and to take work health and safety (WHS) standards into consideration 1.2 Connect peripherals to network, using vendor approved method and technology 1.3 Connect peripherals to computers in the network using parallel, serial or other direct connection methods 1.4 Add peripheral accessories or upgrades to printer, such as memory or high-volume paper trays 1.5 Test peripherals for correct operation
2. Configure peripheral services to manage peripherals	2.1 Install software required to manage local and network connected peripherals 2.2 Use meaningful names for peripherals and control queues 2.3 Configure security and access to allow appropriate users to make use of peripherals 2.4 Configure workstation for peripherals to allow applications to work with peripherals
3. Administer and support peripheral services	3.1 Assign priority to control queues 3.2 Use peripheral management software supplied as part of the network operating system (NOS) or by third parties 3.3 Create templates for use on the network 3.4 Configure settings on the network to create maintenance schedules, usage logs, and cost centre usage statistics 3.5 Demonstrate to the user the methods for using peripheral services from their application or workstation
4. Maintain peripherals and fix common problems	4.1 Establish and follow a regular maintenance schedule as recommended by peripheral manufacturer 4.2 Replace consumables and components when required 4.3 Fix peripheral mishaps and malfunctions 4.4 Monitor peripheral usage and traffic and recommend additional peripherals if needed 4.5 Determine failures of peripheral services or devices and rectify as required

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	4.1	Recognises and interprets textual information from manufacturers guidelines to establish and follow a regular maintenance schedule
Writing	2.2, 4.1	Uses specific and relevant language when naming a peripheral device or creating new profiles
Oral Communication	3.5	Articulates information clearly using specific and relevant language suitable to audience to convey information Uses listening and questioning techniques to confirm understanding
Navigate the world of work	1.1	Takes personal responsibility for adherence to legal/regulatory responsibilities relevant to own work context with specific reference to work health and safety (WHS) requirements
Interact with Others	3.5	Uses a limited range of accepted practices for communicating in a work environment Recognises common cultural and other differences of people in the work context and makes adjustments in addressing these differences
Get the work done	1.1, -1.5, 2.1- 2.4, 3.1-3.5, 4.2-4.5	Takes responsibility for planning and organising own workload, identifying ways of sequencing and combining elements for greater efficiency, and considering how to link with the work of others Understands the purposes, specific functions and key features of common digital systems and tools, and operates them effectively to complete routine tasks Recognises and takes responsibility for addressing predictable and some less predictable problems, including equipment services or devices malfunctions

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICTNWK304 Administer network peripherals	ICANWK304A Administer network peripherals	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICTNWK304 Administer network peripherals

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICT Information and Communications Technology Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

plan and install peripherals

connect and test peripherals to network

manage the use of peripheral services with workstations

maintain networked peripherals according to a maintenance schedule

rectify faulty peripheral services or devices.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

identify and describe common network peripherals and their configuration

identify and summarise current industry standards for network peripherals

outline the general construction and operation of peripheral devices to facilitate troubleshooting.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the network industry and include access to:

a range of peripherals

network administration tools

a live network with a representative range of networked client server environments and operating systems

technical records, organisational policies and documentation.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICTNWK305 Install and manage network protocols

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICT Information and Communications Technology Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to install and manage network protocols in a networking environment.

It applies to individuals with competent information and communications technology (ICT) skills, working as network administrators who are required to ensure that appropriate protocols have been installed in networks to allow user functionality and maintenance.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Networking

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Install and manage network protocols	1.1 Select, test and validate appropriate network protocol services 1.2 Design a network addressing system, with subnet and host IDs, including appropriate devices 1.3 Configure hosts and workstations to use IP addresses either manually or through automatic allocation of addresses, such as found with dynamic host configuration protocol (DHCP)
2. Identify network protocol applications	2.1 Review a range of well-known network protocol applications 2.2 Evaluate client user requirement and recommend network protocol services 2.3 Apply internet protocol (IP) addressing scheme according to approved policy and procedures

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	2.2, 2.3	Recognises and interprets textual information, including technical manuals, to establish the job requirements
Writing	2.2	Uses specific and relevant language to document new file systems, user access and disaster recovery procedures
Oral Communications	2.2	Articulates clearly using specific and relevant language suitable to audience to convey requirements Uses listening and questioning techniques to confirm understanding
Navigate the world of work	2.3	Complies with explicit organisational policies and procedures Ensures knowledge of legislative requirements and products is kept up to date
Get the work done	1.1-1.3, 2.1	Takes responsibility for planning and organising own workload, identifying ways of sequencing and combining elements for greater efficiency, and considering how to link with the work of others Understands the purposes, specific functions and key features of common digital systems and tools, and operates them effectively to complete routine tasks Initiates standard procedures when developing and refining configuration protocols

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICTNWK305 Install and manage network protocols	ICANWK305A Install and manage network protocols	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICTNWK305 Install and manage network protocols

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICT Information and Communications Technology Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

configure, test and validate network protocols in order to facilitate interconnectivity

install and manage network protocols in a network, and troubleshoot problems.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

describe the client business domain, including client organisation structure and business functionality

list current communications technologies and their associated protocols

outline current industry accepted hardware and software products, and general features and capabilities

summarise network protocols currently in use in the organisation and industry, including:

transmission control protocol

internet protocol (TCP/IP)

OSI models

clarify the vendor product range and development directions

describe how network protocols transcend organisational size and network complexity.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the network industry, and include access to:

a live network

application software and operating system

appropriate learning and assessment support when required

networked computers

organisational guidelines

technical documentation and installation manuals

vendor software.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICTNWK401 Install and manage a server

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICT Information and Communications Technology Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to install and manage a server. Server management includes initial configuration and testing, ongoing administration, software distribution and updates, profiling and monitoring servers, and troubleshooting.

It applies to individuals with competent information and communications technology (ICT) skills, employed in network management or server administration roles.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Networking

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Prepare to install a server	1.1 Prepare for work, according to site specific safety requirements and enterprise workplace health and safety (WHS) processes and procedures 1.2 Obtain server applications and features from appropriate person 1.3 Choose most suitable operating system features and network services with reference to required server solution and technical requirements 1.4 Review required installation options 1.5 Analyse data migration requirements 1.6 Back up local data in preparation for installation 1.7 Arrange access to site and advise client of deployment and potential down time
2. Install server as required by the specification	2.1 Create disk partitioning scheme 2.2 Create file systems and virtual memory 2.3 Install network operating system 2.4 Install and configure server applications and network services 2.5 Reconnect and reconfigure connectivity devices 2.6 Patch the operating system and applications to ensure maximum security and reliability 2.7 Restore local data to new server
3. Configure and administer the server	3.1 Configure network directory service 3.2 Create and manage accounts to facilitate security and network access 3.3 Configure user environment using operating system policies and scripts 3.4 Create directory structure and quotas to meet client requirements 3.5 Configure and manage print services 3.6 Set the security, access and sharing of system resources to meet client requirements 3.7 Implement security policy to prevent unauthorised access to the system 3.8 Implement backup and recovery methods to enable restoration capability in the event of a disaster 3.9 Configure update services to provide automatic updates for operating system and applications
4. Monitor and test the server	4.1 Test server for benchmarking against client specification and requirements according to test plan, and record outcomes 4.2 Analyse the error report and make changes as required 4.3 Use troubleshooting tools and techniques to diagnose and correct server problems 4.4 Test required changes or additions 4.5 Validate changes or additions against specifications
5. Complete documentation and clean up worksite	5.1 Make and document server configuration and operational changes 5.2 Complete client report and notification of server status 5.3 Clean up and restore worksite to client’s satisfaction 5.4 Secure sign-off from appropriate person

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.3, 3.3, 4.2	Recognises and interprets technical documentation to determine job requirements
Writing	4.1, 4.2, 5.1, 5.2	Uses clear, specific and industry related terminology to produce and update workplace documentation
Oral Communication	1.2, 1.7	Articulates information clearly using specific and relevant language suitable to audience to convey information Uses listening and questioning techniques to confirm understanding
Numeracy	1.5, 4.2	Uses mathematical formulae to take test measurements, interpret results and evaluate performance and interoperability of the network
Navigate the world of work	1.1, 5.3	Takes personal responsibility for adherence to legal/regulatory responsibilities relevant to own work context Understands nature and purpose of own role and associated responsibilities, and how it contributes to the work of others in the immediate work context
Interact with others	5.4	Selects the appropriate form, channel and mode of communication for a specific purpose relevant to own role
Get the work done	1.3, 1.4, 1.6, 1.7, 2.1-2.7, 3.1-3.9, 4.1, 4.3, 4.4, 4.5, 5.1	Determines job priorities, resources and equipment, and works logically and systematically to undertake clearly defined and familiar tasks Implements actions according to a predetermined plan, making slight adjustments if necessary Takes responsibility for routine decision making by selecting from a range of predetermined options in routine situations, identifying and taking some situational factors into account Initiates standard procedures when adapting configuration procedures, depending on differing operational contingencies, risk situations and environments Understands the purposes, specific functions and key features of common digital systems and tools, and operates them effectively to complete routine tasks, adapting some functions to improve personal efficiency

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICTNWK401 Install and manage a server	ICANWK401A Install and manage a server	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICTNWK401 Install and manage a server

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICT Information and Communications Technology Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

install and configure server

configure network connectivity

manage the server operating system, including user accounts, file, network directory and print services

perform backup and recovery

update operating system and software

monitor and test server

troubleshoot server and network failures.

Candidates should demonstrate competency in at least TWO different network operating systems.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

identify and describe current network hardware and software systems and their requirements, including:

network operating systems (NOS)

server applications including compatibility issues and resolution procedures

desktop applications and operating systems

recognise and describe basic server installation and maintenance processes and procedures, including:

documentation skills for networks

error logging and reporting

high availability options for file systems, including redundant array of independent disks (RAID) and replication

network directory services and network service configuration

options for performance tuning

user authentication

specify and describe processes and procedures required to support and manage a server, including:

best practice for implementing backup and recovery procedures

boot process

operating system help and support utilities

operating system installation methods, including installation from CD or DVD, universal serial bus (USB) boot disk, network and script (automated install)

printer management

process and task management, including process termination

task scheduling utilities

troubleshooting tools and techniques, including network diagnostic utilities

user account and password management.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the network industry, and include access to:

a site where server installation may be conducted

relevant server specifications including:

cabling

local area networked (LAN) computers

server diagnostic software

switch

client requirements

wide area network (WAN) service point of presence

workstations

relevant regulatory documentation that affects installation activities.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICTNWK402 Install and configure virtual machines for sustainable ICT

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICT Information and Communications Technology Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to develop and implement virtualisation technologies with the goal of providing a more sustainable information and communications technology (ICT) environment.

It applies to individuals who work in the network area of organisations and are responsible for the use of virtual machines to increase sustainability.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Networking

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Identify virtualisation benefits and features	1.1 Research and determine government and industry guidelines and policies for use of desktop and server virtualisation 1.2 Identify benefits of virtualisation of desktop and server environments 1.3 Identify available features of current virtualisation software 1.4 Select virtualisation solution based on current and future needs of the client
2. Install and configure virtualisation software	2.1 Identify, clarify and organise requirements of the client relating to virtualisation technologies, following organisational requirements 2.2 Identify hardware, software and infrastructure components required to be installed and configured to meet technical requirements 2.3 Install and configure software to provide support for virtualisation of desktop and server operating systems 2.4 Configure virtualisation software application features to accommodate required functionality, relating to client and business needs
3. Install and configure virtual machines	3.1 Install virtual machine consistent with client, commercial and business requirements 3.2 Configure virtual machine consistent with client, commercial and business requirements 3.3 Test functionality of installed virtual machine
4. Configure virtual networks of virtual machines	4.1 Configure internet protocol (IP) addressing to match chosen network configuration 4.2 Configure virtual network as host only configuration 4.3 Configure virtual network as bridged configuration 4.4 Configure virtual network as network address translation (NAT) configuration 4.5 Configure services to operate under current network configuration 4.6 Test functionality of virtual network configuration
5. Back up and restore virtual machines	5.1 Back up virtual machine state on shutdown 5.2 Restore state on start-up of virtual machine 5.3 Back up virtual hard drive and software configuration files 5.4 Restore virtual hard drive and software configuration files

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 2.1, 3.1, 3.2	Recognises and interprets industry and government guidelines and organisational policy to determine job requirements
Oral Communication	1.4, 2.1	Elicits information and client business needs by using listening and questioning techniques
Navigate the world of work	2.1	Complies with explicit organisational policies and procedures
Get the work done	1.2-1.4, 2.1, 2.3, 2.4, 3.1-3.3, 4.1-4.6, 5.1-5.4	Determines job priorities, resources and equipment, and works logically and systematically to undertake clearly defined and familiar tasks Takes responsibility for routine decision making by selecting from a range of predetermined options in routine situations, identifying and taking some situational factors into account Initiates standard procedures when adapting configuration procedures, depending on differing operational contingencies, risk situations and environments Understands key principles and concepts underpinning the design and operation of digital systems and tools, and applies these when troubleshooting existing technology and when seeking to understand the potential impact of new technology In familiar contexts, responds promptly and intuitively to problems involving virtualised machine environments requiring immediate attention

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICTNWK402 Install and configure virtual machines for sustainable ICT	ICANWK402A Install and configure virtual machines for sustainable ICT	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICTNWK402 Install and configure virtual machines for sustainable ICT

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICT Information and Communications Technology Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

apply sustainability practices related to current information and communications technology (ICT) network design

research, identify and develop a virtual machine environment

implement and maintain a virtual machine environment.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

summarise the current government and industry policies and guidelines related to developing sustainable ICT environments

identify and describe current technologies and processes designed to produce a sustainable ICT environment

state the available tools and software applications required to manage virtual machines

define the structure, function and business organisation of client

outline the configuration of software applications required to manage virtual machines

describe the configuration requirements required to integrate virtual machines into an existing network design.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the network industry, and include access to:

a site or prototype where virtual machine environments may be implemented

network technical requirements

software tools to support implementation of virtual machines.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICTNWK403 Manage network and data integrity

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICT Information and Communications Technology Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to lead the development of asset protection processes, determining threats and implementing controls to mitigate risk.

It applies to individuals working as middle managers including information security managers, network engineers and network technicians who are responsible for implementing and managing the organisational disaster recovery and asset protection policy and procedures.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Networking

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Ensure compliance with company network and security policies	1.1 Review company security policies 1.2 Audit and record security access 1.3 Ensure user accounts are controlled 1.4 Ensure secure file and resource access
2. Conduct audit on system assets	2.1 Use appropriate tools and techniques to conduct audit on system hardware and software assets 2.2 Develop a system to record assets 2.3 Use system to develop reports on assets for management
3. Implement an antivirus solution	3.1 Research appropriate antivirus and anti-malware solutions 3.2 Implement antivirus or anti-malware solution 3.3 Test antivirus and anti-malware solution functionality
4. Implement systems to protect assets from threats	4.1 Determine environmental threats to data 4.2 Document systems to protect from environmental threat 4.3 Implement system to protect data from environmental threat
5. Develop a backup solution	5.1 Determine appropriate backup type to meet systems needs 5.2 Investigate current backup media options 5.3 Implement a backup solution 5.4 Demonstrate functionality of backup solution 5.5 Demonstrate restore of data from backup media 5.6 Implement a real time backup and data sync solution
6. Monitor network performance	6.1 Determine available network performance monitoring tools 6.2 Implement network performance monitoring tools to monitor network 6.3 Produce report on network performance

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 3.1	Interprets textual information from relevant sources to identify software solutions and adherence to company security policies
Writing	1.2, 2.2, 2.3, 4.2, 6.3	Develops material for a specific audience, using clear and detailed language in order to convey explicit information, requirements and recommendations
Navigate the world of work	1.1	Complies with explicit organisational policies and procedures
Get the work done	1.2, 1.3, 2.1-2.3, 3.2, 3.3, 4.1, 4.3, 5.1-5.6, 6.1, 6.2	Determines job priorities, resources and equipment, and works logically and systematically to undertake clearly defined and familiar tasks Takes responsibility for routine decision making by selecting from a range of predetermined options in routine situations, identifying and taking some situational factors into account Initiates standard procedures when applying solutions in networks, including systems management processes, and deploys rapid solutions to problems involving management of network assets Understands the purposes, specific functions and key features of common digital systems and tools, and operates them effectively to complete routine tasks Understands the importance of secure information and privacy, and takes personal responsibility for identifying and managing risk factors

Range of Conditions

This section specifies different work environments and conditions that may affect performance. Essential operating conditions that may be present (depending on the work situation, needs of the candidate, accessibility of the item, and local industry and regional contexts) are included.

Security policies must include:	data security physical security remote access user logon.
Tools must include:	hardware and software audit tools, including: MSINFO32 DXdiag Microsoft Software Inventory Analyzer (MSIA) E-Z Audit hardware and software logs.
Backup type must include:	copy differential folder and drive synchronisation full and normal incremental redundant array of independent disks (RAID).

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICTNWK403 Manage network and data integrity	ICANWK403A Manage network and data integrity	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICTNWK403 Manage network and data integrity

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICT Information and Communications Technology Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

identify user access control issues

use appropriate tools to conduct audit on system assets

implement and test antivirus solution

employ systems to negate environmental threats

demonstrate features of data backup, restore and system roll back

perform network monitoring using a variety of current standard tools

add network controls according to network and data integrity policies.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

summarise the broad principles of data integrity on a network, including:

auditing and control of user access

asset tracking and auditing

current antivirus solutions and techniques

describe backup, restore and rollback procedures

identify and describe system and network monitoring tools and their related functions

recognise and overview the client organisation structure and business functionality as they relate to data integrity

select and describe the tools and applications required to manage network and data integrity, including the disaster recovery processes.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the network industry, and include access to:

a site or prototype where network and data integrity strategies may be implemented and managed

use of network support tools currently used in industry

the organisation’s security policies, manufacturer recommendations and network and data integrity protection standards.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICTNWK404 Install, operate and troubleshoot a small enterprise branch network

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICT Information and Communications Technology Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to utilise networking fundamentals, including wide area network (WAN) technologies, basic security, routing and switching fundamentals, and to configure simple networks.

It applies to individuals working in a network support position. They would use the appropriate tools, equipment, software and protocols to install, operate, and troubleshoot, a small enterprise branch network.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Networking

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Specify the operation of a data network	1.1 Identify the various network elements 1.2 Use the open system interconnections (OSI) and transmission control protocol, or internet protocol (TCP/IP), models to explain how data flows in a network 1.3 Define the purpose, and basic operation, of the protocols in the OSI and TCP/IP models 1.4 Identify common network problems at layers 1, 2, 3 and 7, using a layered model approach
2. Implement a small switched network	2.1 Select the appropriate media, cables, ports, and connectors to connect switches to other network devices and hosts 2.2 Identify the network segmentation, basic traffic management and switching requirements 2.3 Perform, save and verify the initial switch configuration tasks 2.4 Verify the network status and switch the operation using basic utilities 2.5 Implement and verify the basic security for a switch
3. Implement an IP addressing scheme and IP services to meet network requirements	3.1 Specify the need and role of addressing in a network 3.2 Create and apply an addressing scheme to a network 3.3 Assign and verify valid IP addresses to hosts, servers and networking devices in a local area network (LAN) environment 3.4 Specify the operational requirements of private and public IP addressing 3.5 Implement static and dynamic addressing services for hosts in a LAN environment 3.6 Enable the network address translation (NAT) for a small network, with a single internet service provider (ISP) and connection, and verify the operation 3.7 Configure the dynamic host configuration protocol (DHCP) on a router
4. Implement a small routed network	4.1 Select the appropriate media, cables, ports, and connectors to connect routers to other network devices and hosts 4.2 Research and select a basic router 4.3 Perform, save and verify basic router configuration tasks 4.4 Configure and verify, a classless routing protocol 4.5 Verify the device configuration and network connectivity, using basic utilities 4.6 Implement the password, and physical security
5. Implement and verify WAN links	5.1 Research different methods for connecting to a WAN 5.2 Configure and verify, the basic WAN serial connection
6. Troubleshoot a small enterprise branch network	6.1 Identify and resolve, common switched network issues 6.2 Identify and correct, IP addressing issues 6.3 Troubleshoot DHCP and NAT on a router 6.4 Identify and resolve, common routing problems 6.5 Troubleshoot basic WAN connection problems

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 1.3, 1.4, 2.1, 2.2, 4.1, 4.2, 4.6, 5.1	Interprets and critically analyses complex texts Applies appropriate strategies to construct meaning from complex texts
Writing	3.1, 3.4, 4.4	Communicates complex relationships between ideas and information, matching the style of writing to the purpose and audience Writes and edits computer code, and technical data, ensuring the correct syntax and accuracy
Oral Communication	1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 2.2, 3.1, 3.4, 4.2, 5.1	Articulates clearly using specific and relevant language suitable to the audience, to convey information Uses listening and questioning techniques to confirm the understanding of clients
Get the work done	1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 2.1, 2.2, 2.3, 2.4, 2.5, 3.1, 3.2, 3.3, 3.4, 3.5, 3.6, 3.7, 4.1, 4.2, 4.3, 4.4, 4.5, 4.6, 5.1, 5.2, 6.1, 6.2, 6.3, 6.4, 6.5	Determines job priorities, resources and equipment and works logically and systematically, to undertake clearly defined and familiar tasks Understands the purposes, specific functions, and key features of common digital systems and tools, and operates them effectively to complete routine tasks Recognises and responds to predictable routine problems, related to own role in the immediate work context, including debugging, switch and router network issues

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICTNWK404 Install, operate and troubleshoot a small enterprise branch network	ICANWK404A Install, operate and troubleshoot a small enterprise branch network	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages. Minor changes to Performance Criteria for clarity.	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICTNWK404 Install, operate and troubleshoot a small enterprise branch network

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICT Information and Communications Technology Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

specify the network elements

implement a small switched network

select and implement the suitable network addressing protocols

select and install a router

identify and verify, wide area network (WAN) links

test and resolve the problems for a small enterprise branch network.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

summarise the design of an internet protocol (IP) addressing scheme

describe how to install, configure and test the network elements, in order to ensure interoperability within the network

explain how to apply network topologies, protocols and security solutions and troubleshoot defined network problems.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the network industry, and include access to:

a site where the network installation may be conducted

small enterprise routers and switches

the network’s design documentation

the equipment specifications

hardware and software

the organisational guidelines

computers.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICTNWK405 Build a small wireless local area network

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICT Information and Communications Technology Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to build and arrange connectivity to a single zone wireless local area network (WLAN).

It applies to individuals with competent information and communications technology (ICT) skills using one wireless access point or wireless router in a small-to-medium enterprise.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Networking

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Confirm client and equipment requirements	1.1 Identify, clarify and organise client requirements according to network needs and organisational requirements 1.2 Ensure an appropriate person has given the authority for wireless network access 1.3 Evaluate requirements along with business needs, and translate into technical requirements 1.4 Identify components to be installed in order to meet the technical requirements 1.5 Select position for access point, based on user requirements and environmental conditions 1.6 Arrange for preliminary work to be carried out to meet cabling and power requirements
2. Select, install and configure wireless access point	2.1 Select access point device based on current and future client needs 2.2 Install and configure access point to provide wireless access to network 2.3 Configure services 2.4 Test access point and verify wireless connection and security arrangements 2.5 Select, install and configure appropriate wireless card where necessary for legacy equipment
3. Configure network	3.1 Configure security and other key parameters consistent with commercial and business requirements 3.2 Test security and firewall arrangements with appropriate test equipment 3.3 Test the network with user equipment for general compatibility and access
4. Train users	4.1 Determine devices to be connected to the network 4.2 Demonstrate how pairing and log-on arrangements are established to user 4.3 Inform users of wireless network etiquette and traffic capacity issues 4.4 Develop user documentation

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 1.3, 1.5	Recognises and interprets textual information to determine business requirements and all environmental requisites
Writing	4.4, 5.3	Develops material for a specific audience, using clear and detailed language in order to convey explicit information, and keeps a record of relevant setting information
Oral Communication	1.1, 1.2, 4.2, 4.3	Uses listening and questioning skills to clarify job requirements Uses appropriate, detailed and clear language to address key personnel and to disseminate information
Navigate the world of work	1.1	Complies with explicit organisational policies and procedures
Get the work done	1.1, 1.3-1.6, 2.1-2.5, 3.1- 3.3,4.1, 5.1-5.3	Determines job priorities, resources and equipment, and works logically and systematically to undertake clearly defined and familiar tasks Understands the purposes, specific functions and key features of common digital systems and tools, and operates them effectively to complete routine tasks Recognises and responds to predictable routine problems related to role in the immediate work context, including connectivity and security issues

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICTNWK405 Build a small wireless local area network	ICANWK405A Build a small wireless local area network	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICTNWK405 Build a small wireless local area network

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICT Information and Communications Technology Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

develop, implement and maintain wireless networks

install, configure and test wireless access points

test security and network to business specifications

develop user training material

monitor and resolve wireless network issues.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

outline features of security threats

summarise the basic principles of network security, including:

audit and intrusion detection systems

auditing and penetration testing techniques

authentication methods

network protocols and operating systems

security protocols, standards and data encryption

describe the factors that impact on a small wireless network, including:

bandwidth and quality of service

factors affecting signal quality

layer 2 and layer 3 design issues

features of a small office or home office (SOHO) network

wireless security strategies

wireless topologies

wireless local area network (WLAN) solutions

outline the protocols and their application for wireless networks, including:

transmission control protocol (TCP)

internet protocol (IP).

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the network industry, and include access to:

network technical requirements

network infrastructure, including wireless hardware and software.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICTNWK406 Install, configure and test network security

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICT Information and Communications Technology Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to install, configure and test network security in an information and communications technology (ICT) network.

It applies to individuals working as ICT professionals who install, configure and test secure networks of any size.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Networking

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Assess network security threats and vulnerabilities to identify risk	1.1 Assess and report on current system security, according to required asset security level 1.2 Determine additional network, software, hardware and system security threats and vulnerabilities 1.3 Use identified threats and vulnerability information to identify security risks 1.4 Make recommendations to management to address security deficiencies, according to current and future commercial and business requirements
2. Implement countermeasures for identified vulnerabilities and threats	2.1 Implement required level of perimeter security based on current and future business needs 2.2 Assess and implement best practice server and network hardening techniques and measures 2.3 Implement secure authentication and user account controls 2.4 Secure data integrity and transmission
3. Test and verify functionality and performance of security system implemented	3.1 Design test items to verify key function and performance measures against criteria 3.2 Conduct function and performance tests recording results 3.3 Modify and debug security system as necessary 3.4 Develop documentation on current system settings and file for future reference
4. Provide systems for monitoring and maintaining security	4.1 Monitor current network security, including physical aspects, using appropriate third party testing software where applicable 4.2 Review logs and audit reports to identify and record security incidents, intrusions or attempts 4.3 Carry out spot checks and audits to ensure that procedures are not being bypassed 4.4 Document newly discovered security threats, vulnerabilities and risks in a report for presentation to appropriate person to gain approval for changes to be made

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	4.2	Recognises and interprets textual information to determine specific information about security incidents
Writing	1.1, 1.4, 3.2, 3.4, 4.4	Accurately records test results and develops material for a specific audience, using clear and detailed language in order to convey explicit information
Oral Communication	1.1, 1.4, 4.4	Articulates information clearly, using specific and relevant language suitable to audience to convey recommendations and provide verbal reports Uses listening and questioning techniques to confirm understanding
Numeracy	1.4	Extracts and evaluates the mathematical information embedded in a range of tasks and texts
Get the work done	1.1-1.4, 2.1, 2.3, 2.4, 3.1-3.3, 4.1, 4.3	Determines job priorities, resources and equipment, and works logically and systematically to undertake clearly defined and familiar tasks Understands the purposes, specific functions and key features of common digital systems and tools, and operates them effectively to complete routine tasks Recognises and responds to predictable routine problems related to own role in the immediate work context, including detecting intrusion and debugging the system when required Automatically implements standard procedures for routine decisions

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICTNWK406 Install, configure and test network security	ICANWK406A Install, configure and test network security	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICTNWK406 Install, configure and test network security

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICT Information and Communications Technology Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

assess and identify security threats, vulnerabilities and risks

determine appropriate countermeasure for threat, vulnerability or risk

implement countermeasure per threat or risk

install, configure and test network elements to ensure perimeter security

test and verify function and performance of selected security measures

monitor network for suspicious activity and take appropriate action where necessary

document newly discovered threats, vulnerabilities and risks, including change recommendations for approval.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

outline authentication issues

summarise the security requirements of the client business domain, including:

organisation structure and business functionality

features and capabilities of networking technologies

privacy issues and privacy legislation

security information sources

risk analysis

outline common virtual private network (VPN) issues, including bandwidth and dynamic security environment

explain how to configure routers and switches

summarise current industry accepted hardware and software security products, including general features and capabilities

outline the function and operation of VPN concepts, including encryption, firewalls, packet tunnelling and authentication

outline network protocols and operating systems

summarise organisational issues surrounding security

outline security perimeters and their functions

describe security protocols, standards and data encryption

summarise security threats, including eavesdropping, data interception, data corruption and data falsification

outline types of VPNs, including site-to-site and user-to-site internet traffic and extranets

summarise the systems and procedures related to:

audit and intrusion detection systems

auditing and penetration testing techniques

cryptography

local area network (LAN), wireless local area network (WLAN) and wide area network (WAN)

screened subnets

transmission control protocols or internet protocols (TCPs/IPs) and applications

use of virus detection software.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the network industry, and include access to:

a site where secure network installation may be conducted

network security documentation

equipment specifications

network components

hardware and software

firewalls (hardware and software)

a live network

organisational guidelines

networked (LAN) computers

WAN service point of presence.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICTNWK407 Install and configure client-server applications and services

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICT Information and Communications Technology Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to install, configure, maintain and support server-side applications as well as client applications on network workstations, in both Windows based and Linux based networks.

It applies to individuals working as network administrators and network support staff who implement the installation and configuration of client-server based software.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Networking

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Determine client -server software requirements	1.1 Select a client-server solution that best fits the desired outcome for a given scenario 1.2 Select hardware required to implement the client-server solution for the desired outcome 1.3 Select an appropriate host operating system for the client’s server software
2. Obtain and configure server application software according to industry best practice	2.1 Investigate the range of client-server products available for the desired outcome, including commercial and open source 2.2 Identify hardware requirements 2.3 Identify available operating system platforms to host the client-server software
3. Install, configure, and manage services to meet business requirements	3.1 Install client-server software to both server and client hardware according to business guidelines 3.2 Configure the client-server software according to vendor guidelines 3.3 Monitor client-server performance to ensure performance, according to business requirements 3.4 Manage the installation of upgrades and patches to the client-server software environment 3.5 Backup and maintain client-server software
4. Assess configuration effect on overall network design	4.1 Identify appropriate utilities to monitor and determine network performance 4.2 Create network performance benchmarks prior to and on completion of client-server software installation 4.3 Compare benchmarks to assess performance effect on network after installation of client-server software
5. Test and sign off	5.1 Test operation of the client-server software to ensure client requirements are met 5.2 Obtain sign-off from appropriate person

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 3.1, 3.2	Recognises and interprets technical and vendor-specific information to determine business requirements
Writing	4.2	Develops material for a specific audience, using clear and detailed language in order to convey explicit information
Numeracy	4.2, 4.3	Interprets numerical information to analyse memory, hard disk and performance requirements
Navigate the world of work	3.1, 3.2	Recognises and follows explicit and implicit protocols, and meets expectations associated with own role
Interact with others	5.2	Selects the appropriate form, channel and mode of communication for a specific purpose relevant to own role
Get the work done	1.1-1.3, 2.1-2.3, 3.1-3.5, 4.1, 5.1	Uses logical planning processes and an increasingly intuitive understanding of context to identify relevant information to plan business operating system requirements Reflects on the ways in which digital systems and tools are used, or could be used, to achieve work goals, and begins to recognise strategic and operational applications Uses familiar digital systems and tools to access, organise, analyse and display relevant information Troubleshoots configuration and operational requirements by recognising and anticipating an increasing range of familiar problems, their symptoms and causes

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICTNWK407 Install and configure client-server applications and services	ICANWK407A Install and configure client-server applications and services	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICTNWK407 Install and configure client-server applications and services

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICT Information and Communications Technology Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

install and configure server based client-server software

install and configure client software to communicate with appropriate server software

test operation of client-server software

identify and implement required updates for client-server software

monitor performance of client-server software

backup and maintain client-server software.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

summarise the requirements for client-server applications and services, including:

computer hardware and software required

internet protocol (IP) addressing

networking fundamentals

operating systems

identify and describe the operating system help and support utilities required, including:

procedures for implementing backup and recovery

software installation and configuration

user account and password management

troubleshooting tools and techniques

network diagnostic utilities.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the network industry, and include access to:

a client-server based network

appropriate client-server software.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICTNWK408 Configure a desktop environment

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICT Information and Communications Technology Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to install, configure and support a desktop or workstation operating system in a networked environment.

It applies to individuals with competent technical skills employed in information and communications technology (ICT) support roles.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Networking

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Prepare to install a desktop operating system	1.1 Prepare for work according to site specific safety requirements and enterprise work health and safety (WHS) processes and procedures 1.2 Obtain desktop applications and features from appropriate person 1.3 Review required installation options and file systems 1.4 Determine and apply knowledge of licensing, hardware and system requirements 1.5 Analyse data migration requirements 1.6 Backup local data in preparation for installation 1.7 Arrange access to site and advise client of deployment and potential down times
2. Install desktop operating system	2.1 Install or upgrade desktop operating system using appropriate installation or update method 2.2 Install desktop applications according to identified requirements 2.3 Configure network settings to connect workstation to network 2.4 Patch the operating system and applications to ensure maximum security and reliability 2.5 Restore local data to new workstation
3. Configure desktop environment	3.1 Configure hardware devices 3.2 Administer user environment 3.3 Create file and directory structure using appropriate administration and system tools 3.4 Configure access to external data 3.5 Configure desktop applications according to business requirements
4. Operate command line interface	4.1 Open a command line interface 4.2 Run commands and scripts from the command line interface 4.3 Manipulate files using the command line
5. Configure desktop security	5.1 Modify default user settings to ensure that they match organisational security policies 5.2 Modify file and directory ownership and permissions to ensure data security requirements are met 5.3 Ensure password security 5.4 Check appropriate legal notices are displayed at logon 5.5 Implement security options for network protocols 5.6 Configure security settings for desktop applications according to business requirements
6. Monitor and test the desktop	6.1 Test desktop environment to ensure that client, functionality and performance requirements have been met 6.2 Analyse and respond to diagnostic information 6.3 Use troubleshooting tools and techniques to diagnose and correct desktop problems 6.4 Document the desktop environment, according to organisational policy

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 1.4, 3.5, 5.1, 5.4, 5.6, 6.4	Recognises and interprets technical material, organisational policy and regulatory information to determine job requirements
Writing	6.4	Prepares written reports and workplace documentation that communicate information clearly and effectively
Oral Communication	1.2, 1.7	Articulates clearly using specific and relevant language suitable to audience to convey important information Uses listening and questioning techniques to confirm understanding
Numeracy	1.5, 6.2	Analyses numerical test measurements to evaluate workstation performance
Navigate the world of work	1.1	Appreciates the implications of legal and regulatory responsibilities related to own work
Get the work done	1.1, 1.3-1.6, 2.1- 2.5, 3.1-3.5, 4.1-4.3, 5.1-5.3, 5.5, 5.6, 6.1-6.3	Uses logical planning processes and an increasingly intuitive understanding of context to identify relevant information to plan business operating system requirements Reflects on the ways in which digital systems and tools are used, or could be used, to achieve work goals, and begins to recognise strategic and operational applications Uses familiar digital systems and tools to access organise, analyse and display relevant information Recognises and takes responsibility for addressing predictable and some less predictable problems in familiar work contexts

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICTNWK408 Configure a desktop environment	ICANWK408A Configure a desktop environment	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICTNWK408 Configure a desktop environment

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICT Information and Communications Technology Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

install and configure a desktop operating system

attach the desktop to the network

configure the desktop operating system, including user accounts, file and print services, and security

perform backup and recovery

update operating system and software

monitor and troubleshoot the desktop environment.

Candidates should demonstrate competency in at least TWO different desktop operating systems.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

outline the features of current desktop operating systems, applications, compatibility issues and the resolution procedures

summarise the configuration requirements of a desktop environment, including:

command line interface and scripts

controlling the boot process

error logging and reporting

file naming conventions related to selected operating system

network protocols and transmission control protocol or internet protocol (TCP/IP) network connectivity

operating systems and their functions, including file system, memory management and process scheduling

printer driver and queue management

process or task management, including process termination

tools available for remote assistance and administration

troubleshooting tools and techniques, including network diagnostic utilities

user account, group and password administration and guidelines for selecting a secure password

explain file system navigation and manipulation utilities, including:

edit, copy, move and search

operating system help and support utilities

summarise relevant work health and safety (WHS) and regulatory requirements for desktop operators.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the network industry, and include access to:

a site where server installation may be conducted

relevant server specifications, including:

cabling

local area network (LAN)

diagnostic software

switch

client requirements

wide area network (WAN) service point of presence

desktop workstations

relevant regulatory documentation that affects installation activities.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICTNWK409 Create scripts for networking

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICT Information and Communications Technology Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to undertake scripted programming tasks for networking related activities.

It applies to individuals with competent technical skills employed in network or systems administration roles.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Networking

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Develop algorithms to represent solutions to a given problem	1.1 Consult with client and key stakeholders to identify the problem and associated script requirements 1.2 Employ abbreviated software development cycle to script creation 1.3 Develop an algorithm to solve the problem and meet client requirements 1.4 Develop an algorithm which takes account of expected possible situations 1.5 Develop an algorithm which is guaranteed to end 1.6 Use structure, sequence, selection and iteration
2. Create code	2.1 Select appropriate scripting language 2.2 Demonstrate understanding and application of basic language syntax rules and best practices 2.3 Select and use language data types, operators and expressions to create clear and concise code 2.4 Use techniques of selection, iteration and sequence to control script execution flow 2.5 Use techniques for sequential file input and output to retrieve and store information 2.6 Obtain and use user input to affect the operation of the script 2.7 Apply internal document principles to created code 2.8 Follow organisational guidelines for developing maintainable code when creating scripts 2.9 Adhere to coding standards when creating scripts
3. Use operating system tools	3.1 Use searching and sorting tools to select information from the logging output of operating system (OS) 3.2 Implement controls to ensure that where significant events occur, script creates and maintains a log of operations via operating system logging mechanism 3.3 Register and run scripts with OS scheduling facility
4. Test and debug code	4.1 Engineer, document and conduct simple tests to confirm code meets design specification 4.2 Identify areas that are not covered or are covered incorrectly in the script 4.3 Take action to ensure that code complies with security policy 4.4 Take action to ensure that code operates with proper permissions 4.5 Use script debugging techniques suitable for use with scripting language to detect and resolve errors of syntactical, logical and design origin
5. Document script	5.1 Create technical-level documentation 5.2 Create user-level documentation

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	2.8, 2.9, 4.3	Recognises and interprets technical material, organisational policy and regulatory information to determine job requirements
Writing	2.7, 3.2, 4.1, 5.1, 5.2	Prepares user, peer and technical documentation that communicates complex information clearly and effectively
Oral Communication	1.1, 2.6	Uses listening and questioning skills to confirm understanding for requirements, participates in a verbal exchange of ideas/solutions and uses appropriate, detailed and clear language to address key personnel and to disseminate information
Navigate the world of work	2.8, 2.9, 4.3	Recognises and follows explicit protocols and meets expectations associated with own role
Numeracy	1.3-1.5, 2.3	Creates complex algorithms to calculate and process data for code creation
Get the work done	1.2, 2.1-2.5, 2.8, 3.1-3.3, 4.1, 4.2, 4.4, 4.5	Uses logical planning processes and an increasingly intuitive understanding of context to identify relevant information to plan business requirements Reflects on the ways in which digital systems and tools are used, or could be used, to achieve work goals and begins to recognise strategic and operational applications Understands the key principles and concepts underpinning the design and operation of digital systems and tools, and applies these when troubleshooting existing technology Seeks advice and feedback from client when making decisions Applies formal problem solving processes when tackling an unfamiliar problem, breaking complex issues into manageable parts and identifying and evaluating options

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICTNWK409 Create scripts for networking	ICANWK409A Create scripts for networking	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICTNWK409 Create scripts for networking

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICT Information and Communications Technology Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

develop an algorithmic statement of a solution for a set process

design, document, construct and test a small single purpose operating system (OS) utility application in response to a problem description

create scripted programs that access information stored in files on the system and use system utility programs to sort or find information within these files

validate and record script results.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

summarise the principles of algorithm design

identify and describe operating system components and processes, including:

command line interface

log files

program scheduling utilities

development methodologies

tools and utilities

testing methods

explain debugging for a variety of scripting scenarios

outline programming structured control constructs: sequence, selection and iteration

summarise scripting techniques and language syntax.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the network industry, and include access to:

technical requirements

software development environment

software testing environment.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICTNWK410 Install hardware to a network

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICT Information and Communications Technology Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to plan, manage and install new hardware components in a network.

It applies to individuals employed in technical information and communications technology (ICT) support roles, such as network administrators, who support network hardware in a peer-to-peer or client-server networked environment.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Networking

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Determine network hardware requirements	1.1 Assess client network hardware and cabling requirements, considering compatibility with existing application software and operating system 1.2 Analyse requirements against local area network (LAN), wide area network (WAN), wireless networks, and mobile equipment access design limitations and organisational guidelines 1.3 Evaluate client requirements according to organisational guidelines, corporate purchasing procedures, licensing arrangements and budget
2. Obtain network hardware	2.1 Contact vendors and obtain technical specifications 2.2 Evaluate or test hardware according to client requirements and organisational guidelines 2.3 Document recommendations and provide copies to appropriate person 2.4 Determine and document licensing requirements and security issues 2.5 Acquire hardware according to recommendations and organisational procedures 2.6 Organise cabling infrastructure where required
3. Install network hardware	3.1 Conduct installation with minimal disruption to clients 3.2 Install hardware according to appropriate installation procedures 3.3 Configure and test the installation to ensure that it meets client needs
4. Provide instruction and support for installed products	4.1 Determine and document client instructions and needs 4.2 Provide one-to-one or group instruction to client and users as required 4.3 Obtain client evaluation and feedback to ensure that client requirements have been met

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.2, 2.2, 2.5	Recognises and interprets licensing and security issues, technical information and organisational procedures to determine job requirements
Writing	2.4, 4.1	Prepares information which incorporates evaluation of information and specialised and cohesive language in a format and style appropriate to a specific audience
Oral Communication	2.1, 2.3, 4.1-4.3	Uses listening and questioning skills to confirm understanding for requirements Participates in regular verbal exchanges and uses appropriate, detailed and clear language to address key personnel and to disseminate information
Numeracy	1.3	Uses mathematical formulas and calculations to estimate and plan costs according to business budgets
Navigate the world of work	1.2, 1.3, 2.4, 2.5	Appreciates the implications of legal and regulatory responsibilities related to own work
Get the work done	1.1-1.3, 2.2, 2.5, 2.6, 3.1- 3.3	Determines job priorities, resources and equipment, and works logically and systematically to maintain the continuity of network operations and business functions during network installation tasks Understands the purposes, specific functions and key features of common digital systems and tools, and operates them effectively to complete routine tasks Recognises and responds to predictable routine problems related to own role in the immediate work context Automatically implements standard procedures for routine decisions

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICTNWK410 Install hardware to a network	ICANWK410A Install hardware to a network	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICTNWK410 Install hardware to a network

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICT Information and Communications Technology Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

evaluate client user requirements and hardware installation

install a range of network hardware by planning, managing and supporting the installation of new components in a network, according to organisational policies and procedures.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

summarise current industry, data and voice networking, security products, devices and procedures, including:

current industry accepted network protocols

organisational contracting procedures and responsibilities

system diagnostic software

outline current industry accepted network hardware and software products

explain hardware and software installation procedures

describe local area network (LAN) capabilities and characteristics, such as network type, internet protocol (IP) addressing, switch or hub operation

describe various features of network connections, including types of cables, cabling distance limitations and wireless connections

outline operating systems sufficient to enable basic installation

summarise set-up and configuration procedures

describe software packages supported by the organisation.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the network industry, and include access to:

vendor hardware and software components

application software and operating system

hardware maintenance tools

a live network

networked computers

organisational guidelines

technical documentation and installation manuals.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICTNWK411 Deploy software to networked computers

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICT Information and Communications Technology Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to plan, manage and support the installation of new or upgraded software to networked computers according to vendor and organisation specifications.

It applies to individuals involved in installing, configuring, maintaining and supporting software, such as network administrators and network support staff.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Networking

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Determine operating system and software and hardware requirements	1.1 Assess client software and licensing requirements, considering compatibility with existing application software and operating system 1.2 Assess hardware requirements 1.3 Analyse requirements against local area network (LAN), wide area network (WAN), and wireless networks within organisational guidelines 1.4 Evaluate client requirements according to organisational guidelines, corporate purchasing procedures and budget
2. Obtain deployment software to automate deployment	2.1 Evaluate deployment software according to client requirements and organisational guidelines 2.2 Contact vendors and obtain technical specifications, including support arrangements and licensing 2.3 Acquire software and licences according to organisational procedures 2.4 Store software licences and manuals according to organisational guidelines
3. Automate installation of operating system via network	3.1 Plan and deploy operating system according to appropriate vendor installation procedures, with minimal disruption to network and clients 3.2 Configure and test installation to ensure that it meets client needs and vendor specifications 3.3 Install updates and patches
4. Automate installation of software packages via network	4.1 Plan and deploy software packages according to appropriate vendor installation procedures, with minimal disruption to network and clients 4.2 Configure and test installation to ensure that it meets client needs and vendor specifications 4.3 Install updates and patches
5. Test and sign off	5.1 Test installed operating system and software for error-free performance, identifying and resolving problems 5.2 Determine and document security and licensing issues 5.3 Obtain client evaluation and feedback to ensure that client requirements have been met

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.4, 2.1, 2.3, 2.4, 3.1, 3.2, 4.1, 4.2	Recognises and interprets technical, licensing and organisational information to determine business requirements
Writing	1.3, 5.2	Develops material for a specific audience, using clear and detailed language in order to convey explicit information
Oral Communication	2.2, 5.3	Uses active listening, observational and questioning techniques in order to identify information and confirm, clarify or revise understanding Uses specific and relevant language to obtain information to determine job requirements
Numeracy	1.4	Uses mathematical formulas and calculations to estimate and plan costs according to business budgets
Navigate the world of work	1.1, 1.3, 1.4, 2.1-2.4, 5.2	Appreciates the implications of legal and regulatory responsibilities related to own work
Get the work done	1.1-1.4, 2.1, 2.3, 2.4, 3.1-3.3, 4.1-4.3, 5.1	Determines job priorities, resources and equipment, and works logically and systematically Understands the purposes, specific functions and key features of common digital systems and tools, and operates them effectively to complete routine tasks Uses analytical processes to respond to deployment and configuration issues in the immediate work context Automatically implements standard procedures for routine decisions

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICTNWK411 Deploy software to networked computers	ICANWK411A Deploy software to networked computers	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICTNWK411 Deploy software to networked computers

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICT Information and Communications Technology Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

identify client software requirements

plan and deploy automatic installation of operating system and software

configure and test installation, ensuring client needs are met.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

summarise network protocols and operating systems, including:

transmission control protocols (TCP)

internet protocols (IPs)

network applications

describe organisational contracting procedures and responsibilities

outline software licensing requirements and documentation

explain current industry standards related to software deployment, including:

deployment software configuration

configuration of automated deployment processes

operating system deployment

software package deployment

troubleshooting deployment processes.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the network industry, and include access to:

a site or prototype where deployment processes may be implemented

a live network

software tools to support implementation of deployment processes

technical documentation and installation manuals

organisational guidelines.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICTNWK412 Create network documentation

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICT Information and Communications Technology Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to determine network requirements, and produce and evaluate appropriate network documentation.

It applies to individuals with good task management and competent information and communications technology (ICT) skills, who are working as network administrators, technicians and support personnel.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Networking

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Determine network documentation requirements	1.1 Consult with appropriate personnel 1.2 Identify network documentation standards 1.3 Define network configuration 1.4 Develop naming standards and labelling schemes 1.5 Develop network addressing scheme and verify, using calculations
2. Design network diagrams and checklists	2.1 Identify network software mapping tools 2.2 Use network software mapping tools to design network diagrams 2.3 Develop plans and checklists 2.4 Develop manuals
3. Produce network documentation	3.1 Validate documentation structure with appropriate personnel 3.2 Produce network diagrams 3.3 Produce network plans and checklists 3.4 Produce procedure and policy manuals 3.5 Prepare documentation for publication
4. Complete network documentation	4.1 Check network documentation with appropriate personnel 4.2 Select appropriate media 4.3 Publish network documentation 4.4 Record and store essential network documentation 4.5 Notify appropriate personnel of the completed network documentation

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.2	Gathers, interprets and analyses current industry information from a range of sources and identifies relevant and key information
Writing	1.4, 2.3, 2.4, 3.2-3.5, 4.4, 4.5	Prepares workplace documentation which incorporates an evaluation of information and specialised and cohesive language in a format and style appropriate to a specific audience
Oral Communication	1.1, 3.1, 4.1, 4.5	Articulates requirements and strategies clearly and distinctively, using technical language appropriate to audience and environment
Numeracy	1.5	Recognises, compares and interprets technical data when developing network addressing scheme
Get the work done	1.2, 1.3, 1.5, 2.1, 2.2, 4.2- 4.4	Takes responsibility for planning and organising own workload, identifying ways of sequencing, prioritising and monitoring own work Uses familiar digital systems and tools to access, organise, analyse and display information relevant to role Understands the purposes, specific functions and key features of common digital systems and tools, and operates them effectively to complete routine tasks Makes a range of important decisions in relatively complex situations, taking a range of constraints into account

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICTNWK412 Create network documentation	ICANWK412A Create network documentation	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICTNWK412 Create network documentation

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICT Information and Communications Technology Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

determine client requirements

design network documentation according to standards

produce network documentation according to design specifications.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

explain open systems interconnect (OSI) layered communication model

summarise network requirements related to:

applications

life cycles

manageability

quality of service

explain network design concepts related to:

financial constraints

network topologies

organisation requirements

physical constraints

security issues.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the network industry, and include access to:

relevant network documentation

legislation and standards documentation

industry codes of practice.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICTNWK414 Create a common gateway interface script

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICT Information and Communications Technology Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to define and produce common gateway interface (CGI) script and install that script on a server.

It applies to individuals working in the network or web development area who are required to use CGI scripting as a common means of interacting with websites, providing security access to directories and databases.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Networking

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Define specification for CGI script	1.1 Determine the functionality of the CGI form 1.2 Define the functionality of the CGI script 1.3 Choose appropriate language in which to write the CGI script 1.4 Determine server requirements
2. Create CGI form and write script	2.1 Produce a hypertext markup language (HTML) web document that uses the form elements required by the CGI script specification and includes the uniform resource locator (URL) for the CGI script 2.2 Write the CGI script to function as required by the CGI script specification
3. Test CGI script	3.1 Configure the server, if required, that will host the CGI script 3.2 Upload the CGI script to the server 3.3 Run the CGI form and assess its output 3.4 Reiterate until the specification for the CGI script is met

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Writing	1.2, 2.1, 2.2	Prepares workplace documentation that incorporates an evaluation of technical information and specialised and cohesive language in a format and style appropriate to a specific audience
Numeracy	2.1, 3.3, 3.4	Analyses numerical data to determine functionality of script
Get the work done	1.1, 1.3, 1.4, 2.1, 3.1-3.4	Takes responsibility for planning and organising own workload, identifying ways of sequencing, prioritising and monitoring own work Uses familiar digital systems and tools to access, organise, analyse and display information relevant to role Understands the purposes, specific functions and key features of common digital systems and tools, and operates them effectively to complete routine tasks Makes a range of important decisions in relatively complex situations, taking a range of constraints into account When dealing with complex issues, may use intuition to identify the general problem area, switching to analytical processes to clarify goals

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICTNWK414 Create a common gateway interface script	ICANWK414A Create a common gateway interface script	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICTNWK414 Create a common gateway interface script

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICT Information and Communications Technology Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

review the requirements

produce common gateway interface (CGI) forms and scripts to meet the requirements

upload scripts to a server

test the script and rework until requirements are met.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

identify and describe a scripting language suitable for CGI

describe CGI 1.1/1.2 specifications and their functionality

describe the security issues surrounding CGI

outline common web servers

outline the principles behind copyleft and Free Software Foundation

describe copyright and intellectual property issues relating to programming.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the network industry, and include access to:

web servers

an e-business website

file transfer protocol (FTP) or file transfer client software

server access.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICTNWK416 Build security into virtual private networks

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICT Information and Communications Technology Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to build security into a virtual private network (VPN).

It applies to individuals with competent information and communications technology (ICT) skills and who are working in the network area and are required to ensure that VPNs contain required security.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Networking

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Configure router to provide for network security monitoring and management	1.1 Create and apply audit rules consistent with policies, standards, protocols and management systems 1.2 Configure router to provide appropriate level of asset security and monitoring of security consistent with commercial and business requirements 1.3 Monitor and manage system to assess the level of security and attempts to breach security of framework components 1.4 Employ appropriate hardware and software to monitor and address security issues and provide VPN solutions
2. Secure a site-to-site VPN	2.1 Configure internet key exchange (IKE) and internet protocol security (IPSec) 2.2 Configure site-to-site IPSec VPN using pre-shared keys 2.3 Configure site-to-site IPSec VPN using digital certificates
3. Secure a remote access VPN	3.1 Configure a VPN server 3.2 Install and administer a router management console 3.3 Develop documentation on current system settings and framework components, and file securely for future reference

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1	Gathers, interprets and analyses current industry rules from a range of sources and identifies relevant and key information
Writing	1.1, 3.3	Prepares workplace documentation that incorporates an evaluation of information and specialised and cohesive language in a format and style appropriate to a specific audience
Navigate the world of work	1.1	Recognises and follows explicit and implicit protocols, and meets expectations associated with own role
Get the work done	1.2-1.4, 2.1-2.3, 3.1-3.3	Uses a combination of formal, logical planning processes and an increasingly intuitive understanding of context to identify relevant information and risks Understands the importance of secure information in relation to own work and takes personal responsibility for identifying and managing risk Understands the purposes, specific functions and key features of common digital systems and tools, and operates them effectively to complete routine tasks Initiates standard procedures when responding to familiar problems within the immediate context

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICTNWK416 Build security into virtual private networks	ICANWK416A Build security into virtual private networks	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICTNWK416 Build security into virtual private networks

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICT Information and Communications Technology Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

configure a router to provide the required security

implement and maintain security functionality for a virtual private network (VPN), including:

site to site VPN

remote access VPN

produce security documentation.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

outline the characteristics of a VPN system, including:

site to site

remote access systems

network protocols and operating systems relevant to VPN, including its features, issues and functions

describe the security requirements for a VPN, including:

auditing and penetration testing techniques

configuration of routers and switches

security protocols, standards and data encryption

processes and techniques related to security perimeters and their functions

security threats, including eavesdropping, data interception, data corruption and data falsification

transmission control protocol or internet protocol (TCP/IP) protocols and applications audit and intrusion detection systems

authentication issues

recognise and describe the differences between common networks, including:

local area network (LAN)

wireless local area network (WLAN)

wide area networks (WAN)

identify and describe organisational issues surrounding:

security cryptography

screened subnets

virus detection software.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the network industry, and include access to:

network technical requirements

network infrastructure, including servers and security hardware and software.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICTNWK417 Build an enterprise wireless network

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICT Information and Communications Technology Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to build an enterprise, community or mesh wireless network within and outside buildings.

It applies to individuals with excellent task management, interpersonal and information and communications technology (ICT) skills working in senior design roles in the networking area, who are required to develop complex wireless networks for organisations.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Networking

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Confirm client requirements and network equipment required	1.1 Identify and clarify organisational requirements of the client 1.2 Evaluate client requirements along with business needs in order to translate into technical requirements 1.3 Review existing network design documentation to ensure it is authorised, current and complete 1.4 Identify network topology 1.5 Identify the components required to be installed to meet the technical requirements 1.6 Contact vendors and service suppliers to obtain specifications and availability of identified components 1.7 Ensure preliminary work is completed within the required timeframe
2. Prepare for installation	2.1 Ensure client and users are aware of date and time of installation 2.2 Gather, prepare and check installation and safety equipment 2.3 Assess on-site safety arrangements for installers and users
3. Select, install and configure access points and other wireless devices	3.1 Select appropriate hardware based on identified components 3.2 Install and configure hardware to provide wireless access to network 3.3 Ensure connections are secured against intrusion or data access by unauthorised persons, are safe for users, and are protected from the environment 3.4 Configure security, monitoring, logging and quality of service features consistent with standards and protocols 3.5 Ensure test equipment is calibrated 3.6 Test wireless network systems performance and verify that it meets enterprise requirements and is consistent with standards and protocols
4. Select, install and configure antennas	4.1 Select appropriate antennas based on design plan 4.2 Safely install and configure antennas to provide wireless access to network 4.3 Measure and assess signal strength within and outside building 4.4 Resolve and report radio frequency interference issues
5. Select, install and configure antennas	5.1 Identify possible security threats to assets 5.2 Configure client server and helper security devices 5.3 Configure associations and filters
6. Train users	6.1 Provide training for users to establish and manage network connections 6.2 Resolve pairing and log-on difficulties for users 6.3 Inform users of wireless network etiquette and traffic capacity issues 6.4 Advise users of help desk contact details
7. Monitor and administer wireless network	7.1 Monitor wireless network performance using diagnostic tools, including appropriate software 7.2 Debug networking issues to maintain trouble-free wireless connection 7.3 Document current settings and store securely, consistent with commercial and business requirements
8. Finalise build process	8.1 Review network for performance issues, planned maintenance or upgrade requirements 8.2 Report to client with network documentation and recommendations for performance issues 8.3 File documentation according to organisational guidelines

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.2, 1.3, 1.5, 3.4, 3.6, 4.1, 8.3	Gathers, interprets and analyses information from a range of sources and identifies relevant and key information
Writing	4.4, 7.3	Prepares workplace documentation that incorporates an evaluation of information and specialised language in a format and style appropriate to a specific audience
Oral Communication	1.1, 1.2, 1.6, 2.1, 4.4, 6.1, 6.3, 6.4, 8.2	Uses active listening and observational and questioning techniques to identify information and confirm, clarify or revise understanding Articulates requirements and strategies clearly and distinctively, using technical language appropriate to audience and environment
Numeracy	3.5, 4.3	Interprets numerical information to calibrate equipment and measure and assess signal strength
Navigate the world of work	8.3	Complies with explicit organisational policies and procedures
Interact with others	6.1, 6.3, 6.4, 8.2	Recognises and applies the protocols governing what to communicate, with whom and how in a range of different contexts
Get the work done	1.4, 1.5, 1.7, 2.2, 2.3, 3.1-3.6, 4.1, 4.2, 4.4, 5.1-5.3, 6.2, 7.1-7.3, 8.1, 8.3	Uses a combination of formal, logical planning processes to ensure work is completed according to time constraints and an increasingly intuitive understanding of context to identify relevant information and risks Understands the importance of secure information in relation to own work and takes personal responsibility for identifying and managing risk Understands the purposes, specific functions and key features of common digital systems and tools, and operates them effectively to complete routine tasks Initiates standard procedures when solving a broad range of ICT problems Uses familiar digital systems and tools to access, organise, analyse and store information

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICTNWK417 Build an enterprise wireless network	ICANWK417A Build an enterprise wireless network	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICTNWK417 Build an enterprise wireless network

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICT Information and Communications Technology Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

confirm client organisational and business requirements

determine hardware and software requirements

prepare for safe installation

select, install and configure required wireless hardware

train users

test, monitor, and administer the installation

finalise installation and prepare required documents documentation.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

Identify and describe current wireless local area network (WLAN) and wireless area network (WAN) solutions, including:

audit and intrusion detection systems

auditing and penetration testing techniques

bandwidth and quality of service

factors affecting signal quality

layer 2 and layer 3 design issues

suitability for small office home office (SOHO) and enterprise local area networks (LANs)

transmission control protocols or internet protocols (TCPs/IPs) and applications

wireless topologies

describe the common features of security threats and how to develop a security strategy, including:

security protocols

standards

data encryption

identify and describe common network protocols and operating systems.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the network industry, and include access to:

technical requirements

network infrastructure, including wireless hardware and software.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICTNWK418 Implement backbone technologies in a local area network

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICT Information and Communications Technology Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to implement core layer (backbone) connectivity in a local area network (LAN) for applications between floors in a multi-storey building or between separate buildings.

This unit focuses on configuring high-speed (high-bandwidth) channels between high-end switches.

It applies to individuals who are required to enable backbone connectivity in a LAN.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Networking

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Define network	1.1 Identify current and future network requirements based on the organisation's business and technical requirements 1.2 Design an appropriate structure to meet client requirements, such as video, audio or data application services 1.3 Design a network addressing system with subnet and host identities (IP addressing) and virtual LANs (VLANs) 1.4 Identify and document resource requirements according to network design
2. Install and configure network backbone	2.1 Install and configure switches and routers according to network requirements and resources 2.2 Install network protocol suites using configurations on switch uplink ports as required by network design specifications 2.3 Configure hosts and workstations for network access
3. Test and validate network	3.1 Test network connectivity to ensure operation parameters are met between hosts on segments or VLANs 3.2 Make adjustments as required 3.3 Validate and document network performance

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	2.2	Gathers, interprets and analyses current network design specifications and identifies relevant and key information
Writing	1.4, 3.3	Prepares technical documentation that incorporates an evaluation of information and specialised and cohesive language in a format and style appropriate to a specific audience
Get the work done	1.1-1.4, 2.1-2.3, 3.1-3.3	Uses a combination of formal, logical planning processes and an increasingly intuitive understanding of context to prioritise tasks and contingency arrangements Uses mobile communication tools and specialised software to ensure that geographically distributed team members remain connected in virtual environments Understands the purposes, specific functions and key features of common digital systems and tools, and operates them effectively to complete routine tasks Initiates standard procedures when responding to familiar problems within the immediate context
Reading	2.2	Gathers, interprets and analyses current network design specifications and identifies relevant and key information
Writing	1.4, 3.3	Prepares technical documentation that incorporates an evaluation of information and specialised and cohesive language in a format and style appropriate to a specific audience
Get the work done	1.1-1.4, 2.1-2.3, 3.1-3.3	Uses a combination of formal, logical planning processes and an increasingly intuitive understanding of context to prioritise tasks and contingency arrangements Uses mobile communication tools and specialised software to ensure that geographically distributed team members remain connected in virtual environments Understands the purposes, specific functions and key features of common digital systems and tools, and operates them effectively to complete routine tasks Initiates standard procedures when responding to familiar problems within the immediate context

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICTNWK418 Implement backbone technologies in a local area network	ICANWK418A Implement backbone technologies in a local area network	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages.	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICTNWK418 Implement backbone technologies in a local area network

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICT Information and Communications Technology Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

define, design and document the structure of the network and subnets required for the network

build and test an asynchronous transfer mode (ATM) local area network (LAN) that provides the required services at the required communication standards

document resource requirements and network performance.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

outline current and emerging industry practice associated with:

bandwidth limitations, measuring and testing

LAN and wide area network (WAN) network topologies (three-layer LAN hierarchy: core distribution and access)

MAC addresses, network layer protocols

open systems interconnect (OSI) layer modelling

routers

virtual LANs

identify and describe network interface cards (NICs) and switches, including:

fast Ethernet

gigabit

10-gigabit Ethernet

store-and-forward

fast-forward

fragment-free

identify and describe internetworking protocol suites, including:

TCP/IP

IPX

DECnet

AppleTalk

IPv6.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the network industry, and include access to:

local area network infrastructure

switches with various interfaces.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICTWEB401 Design a website to meet technical requirements

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICT Information and Communications Technology Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to design a website to specifications, within a particular technical and human interface environment.

This unit applies to individuals who are responsible for analysis, documentation and design, including identifying the technical and human computer interface requirements that drive design.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Web

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Define the technical environment	1.1 Identify the business requirements 1.2 Identify the appropriate standards required to develop the site 1.3 Identify the appropriate hardware and software required
2. Define the human computer interface	2.1 Conduct a user analysis, in order to determine a user profile and user needs 2.2 Determine the user content, and requirements 2.3 Determine the appropriate design principles for the site 2.4 Identify the appropriate operating system
3. Determine the site hierarchy	3.1 Identify the hierarchy of pages 3.2 Ensure that the content is logical and accessible to the user 3.3 Ensure that navigation between pages is consistent and clear
4. Integrate the design components	4.1 Apply the appropriate information hierarchy to the site design 4.2 Ensure that the design principles are appropriate to the business, and to the user 4.3 Ensure that the process flow is developed in a logical and simple manner 4.4 Test the site against user needs 4.5 Complete and document the design structure

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1-1.3, 2.1-2.4, 3.1-3.3	Interprets, analyses, and syntheses, technical and organisational information to inform decision-making, to construct and validate solutions, and to produce responses to pre-determined requirements and work tasks
Writing	2.2, 3.2, 3.3, 4.5	Develops content in a manner that supports and conveys information, using the appropriate structures, templates, software, and specialised language Produces a logically sequenced text to convey exact procedural requirements and specific, and concise, instructions/meaning
Navigate the world of work	1.2	Takes personal responsibility for adherence to the standards of industry bodies, where related to own work context
Interact with others	2.1, 2.2, 4.2	Selects the appropriate communication protocols and conventions, when conferring with clients to elicit information, and to determine specific needs and requirements
Get the work done	1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 2.1, 2.2, 2.3, 2.4, 3.1, 3.2, 3.3, 4.1, 4.2, 4.3, 4.4	Takes responsibility for planning, sequencing, and prioritising tasks within own workload, for efficiency and effective outcomes Uses analytical processes to make routine and some complex decisions, to develop logical structures within the website information and operation that meet client needs Understands the purposes, specific functions and , key features of common digital systems, tools and software, and operates them effectively to complete routine tasks

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICTWEB401 Design a website to meet technical requirements	ICAWEB401A Design a website to meet technical requirements	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICTWEB401 Design a website to meet technical requirements

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICT Information and Communications Technology Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

identify and select, the appropriate tools and procedures required to develop a website

conduct a user analysis to identify the website, or design structure, required

define the user interface

determine the site hierarchy

test the website, to ensure that it meets the standards required by the user.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

explain the basic aspects of information architecture

describe the business process design

outline copyright and intellectual property requirements

provide an overview of the customer, and business, liaison

detail e-business sites and corporate strategy

describe the implications of technology connectivity

explain the procedures for documenting technical specifications

discuss the relevant standards relating to website design

compare website design methods, and standard website structures

recognise and define, common operating systems

recognise and operate, common computer hardware.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the website technologies field of work, and include access to the:

analysis software

customer relationship model

e-business website

requirements documentation

site server

site server software

web servers

relevant standards, and copyright information.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICTWEB402 Confirm accessibility of websites for people with special needs

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICT Information and Communications Technology Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to ensure that a website is accessible to users with auditory, visual, mobility, and cognitive impairments, and those people who use assistive technology.

It applies to individuals who use analysis and technical skills, to build and test websites.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Web

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Identify the accessibility standards	1.1 Research and identify, specific user groups with particular accessibility requirements 1.2 Identify general legislated and industry accessibility standards, and requirements, to understand the wider context of accessibility 1.3 Identify web development standards, and prioritise application 1.4 Consolidate specific and general standards, and requirements, into an accessibility checklist for application to website related work
2. Test for website accessibility	2.1 Select and prepare, the appropriate automatic testing tools and software 2.2 Run the automatic testing tools and make document changes, based on the results 2.3 Ensure that the text equivalent for every non-text element is present in the website, where feasible 2.4 Verify that information conveyed with colour is also available without colour 2.5 Identify any changes in the natural language of a document text 2.6 Check and ensure, that the document can be read without style sheets 2.7 Check and ensure that the priorities identified in the analysis of web development standards are met and completed 2.8 Test the site with different user groups, to ensure that the site transforms successfully and maintains accessibility
3. Test the pages	3.1 Check and ensure that the pages are not dependent on colour, and can operate in a monochrome environment 3.2 Check and ensure that the pages are logical and accessible, in a text-only environment 3.3 Verify that the pages operate on a text-to-speech browser 3.4 Ensure that the accessibility of the website is signed off by the appropriate person, as meeting the web-development standards

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1-1.3, 2.1-2.8	Identifies, analyses, and evaluates complex texts to determine work requirements
Writing	1.4, 2.1, 2.2, 2.4-2.8, 3.1-3.4	Uses specific software and technical language to format, review, and amend web-based documents and diagrams Generates checklists that include accessibility standards criteria and other specific requirements
Oral Communication	2.8	Participates in verbal exchanges with stakeholders, using listening and questioning to elicit information and to share viewpoints
Navigate the world of work	1.2, 1.3	Takes personal responsibility for adherence to the regulatory and legislative standards related to own work context
Interact with others	3.4	Selects and uses the appropriate conventions and protocols, to communicate with others in a specific work context
Get the work done	1.4, 2.1, 2.2, 2.7, 2.8, 3.1, 3.2, 3.3, 3.4	Accepts responsibility and the ownership of tasks, and makes decisions on completion parameters, and the need for consultation and coordination with others Plans, sequences and prioritises tasks, and own workload, for efficiency and effective outcomes Understands the purposes, specific functions and the key features of common digital systems, tools and software, and operates them effectively to complete a series of diagnostic tests, and tasks, that meet prioritised web development standards for accessibility

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICTWEB402 Confirm accessibility of websites for people with special needs	ICAWEB402A Confirm accessibility of websites for people with special needs	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICTWEB402 Confirm accessibility of websites for people with special needs

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICT Information and Communications Technology Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

identify accessibility standards

test a website for accessibility using a range of tools and tests

check website documents and other web components for accessibility issues

test web pages for accessibility.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

identify and describe the relevant legislation, regulations and codes of practice, relating to access and equity

describe the computing and programming standards that apply to access and equity

describe the access and equity issues of web page design, in relation to:

customer and business liaison approaches, and processes

electronic commerce modelling language

government, advocacy group, and user group liaison

discuss the application of privacy principles to website development, user access and user usage

describe technical performance measurement principles

describe the Web Accessibility Initiative (WAI)

explain the importance of website accessibility, security, and equity legislation

compare website design methods and standard website structures

explain website security

explain workload metrics

list World Wide Web Consortium (W3C) standards.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the website technologies field of work, and include access to:

a live website

the requirements documentation

the customer-relationship model

automatic accessibility measuring tools

organisational requirements and relevant standards.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICTWEB403 Transfer content to a website using commercial packages

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICT Information and Communications Technology Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to transfer content, from a remote location to a web server, using a range of commercial information and communications technology (ICT) products. The objective is the successful upload of new, or revised, information on a website.

It applies to individuals who are required to update websites.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Web

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Configure the file transfer protocol client	1.1 Review and select the file transfer protocol (FTP) client, based on features and functions 1.2 Ensure that the file transfer protocol client is suitable for the technical environment 1.3 Enter client details, including the user identity (ID), password and the host name or ID, into profile fields to create a permanent profile 1.4 Choose settings such as auto-detect, save profile, and password, depending on organisational security and privacy policy, and the organisational guidelines 1.5 Test and verify, the configuration by connecting to the web-hosting server
2. Plan and prepare for the data transfer	2.1 Prepare the data content, and back it up on the local computer or server 2.2 Identify data as compressed, or uncompressed, with the tools available on the server to manage uploaded data 2.3 Ensure that the files are in an appropriate form for recognition and interaction by the operating system 2.4 Ensure that the receiving directory structure is applicable for the data to be uploaded
3. Establish the connection to server	3.1 Log on to remote server using administrative, guest or anonymous accounts 3.2 Proceed through the security layers, based on organisational guidelines 3.3 Initiate the file transfer protocol client program and locate the destination directory
4. Transfer the data to a remote server	4.1 Select files to be transferred and choose the mode, American Standard Code for Information Interchange (ASCII), or binary 4.2 Run the antivirus software on the downloaded files 4.3 Move, rename, copy, and delete files on the server as necessary, and as permissions allow 4.4 Store and order files, according to requirements and file extensions 4.5 Conduct appropriate steps for downloaded files, such as translation, decompression, or de-archival of the files for use 4.6 Confirm the data transfer and content functionality, and close the connection

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 1.4, 1.5, 2.1-2.4, 3.2, 4.1-4.6	Accesses and evaluates technical information, standards, and data, to ensure alignment between work requirements, implementation protocols and specified outcomes
Writing	1.3-1.5, 2.1-2.4, 3.1-3.3, 4.1, 4.3-4.5	Uses specific standards, software and technical language to create, update, enter and verify data and information, according to work requirements, implementation protocols, and specified outcomes
Navigate the world of work	1.4, 3.2, 4.3, 4.4	Takes personal responsibility for adherence to legislative requirements and the organisational policies and guidelines, related to own work context
Get the work done	1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 2.1, 2.2, 2.3, 2.4, 3.1, 3.2, 3.3, 4.1, 4.2, 4.3, 4.4, 4.5, 4.6	Plans, sequences and prioritises tasks and own workload, for efficiency and effective outcomes Understands the purposes, specific functions and the key features of common digital systems, tools and software, and operates them effectively, to complete a series of sequential tasks required to prepare, and transfer, data successfully to a website

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICTWEB403 Transfer content to a website using commercial packages	ICAWEB403A Transfer content to a website using commercial packages	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICTWEB403 Transfer content to a website using commercial packages

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICT Information and Communications Technology Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

configure a file transfer protocol (FTP) client

prepare the content to be transferred

connect to the server

transfer the content.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

describe the process of transferring content to a website including:

the FTP server and the client software

internet protocols

security issues

server access security procedures

server operating systems

website server architecture (e.g. Linux, Windows, Unix)

outline the range of organisational policies, and procedures, that impact on web site development

identify and describe the legislation, regulations, and codes of practice as they relate to web design, including:

codes of ethics

privacy

copyright

intellectual property.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the website technologies field of work, and include access to the:

web servers

e-business website

FTP client software

server security password, and access procedures.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICTWEB404 Maintain website performance

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICT Information and Communications Technology Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to ensure that a website maintains performance levels during peak traffic times, and full use access.

It applies to individuals who use planning and analytical skills to maintain and improve website performance.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Web

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Benchmark website performance	1.1 Review client performance expectations, from the specifications and business requirements 1.2 Test the administration and maintenance requirements, against the specifications and business requirements 1.3 Establish performance benchmarks, from the specifications and business requirements 1.4 Ensure that performance benchmarks are tested 1.5 Record measured performance benchmarks against the specifications
2. Track website performance	2.1 Measure actual website performance against performance benchmarks in key areas and record the outcomes 2.2 Establish policies and procedures for maintaining the stability of actions and processes related to the website 2.3 Identify faults, or suggest improvements, to the website 2.4 Implement improvements according to the business requirements and organisational policy, and procedures 2.5 Establish automatic fault reporting procedures and processes 2.6 Monitor and maintain website security measures 2.7 Implement administration and maintenance schedules 2.8 Establish preventative maintenance and administration indicators, and ensure that an alert system is enabled 2.9 Track user activities and make changes to policies or procedures, depending on the findings
3. Tune performance	3.1 Compare actual website performance against benchmarks over an appropriate period, and make changes based on inconsistencies 3.2 Record performance inconsistencies, and incorporate learning, into revised policy and procedures 3.3 Use diagnostic and software tools, to identify and correct, any website faults 3.4 Plan and action, preventative maintenance on a regular basis to ensure the continuous and consistent performance of the website 3.5 Complete and record the fault, correction and maintenance reports
4. Initiate and monitor performance improvement	4.1 Establish a mechanism for capturing client initiatives, to assist in identifying maintenance, or administration, or performance problems 4.2 Review the security tools, and procedures and conduct improvements, where necessary 4.3 Document and implement the maintenance schedules 4.4 Review the maintenance and administration documentation, according to policy and procedures, in order to identify areas for performance improvement 4.5 Update the website on a regular basis, including information, links, multimedia links, and back-end software 4.6 Provide a timely and appropriate response to the client

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.2-1.3, 2.1-2.9, 3.1	Examines, constructs, organises and validates relationships between discrete, and interrelated, data and information
Writing	1.5, 2.2, 2.2, 2.9, 3.1, 3.2, 3.4, 3.5, 4.1-4.6	Designs and develops, the procedural documents that convey critical performance information to end users Modifies documents using on-going analysis of performance data and feedback Prepares a well structure and cohesive document, that presents analysis of evidence and actions utilising the appropriate format, technical language, correct spelling and grammar
Numeracy	1.3, 1.5, 2.1, 3.1, 3.2, 3.5, 4.1, 4.4	Assigns a numerical value to performance requirements, and uses measurement data to inform decisions, track performance, and establish actions to be taken in relation to the required work task
Navigate the world of work	2.2, 2.4, 2.9, 3.2, 4.4	Takes personal responsibility for following, explicit and implicit, organisational policies relevant to own work Implements revisions to existing policies and procedures, or initiates new policies, relating to website use and performance for others
Interact with others	4.6	Selects and uses appropriate conventions and protocols, to communicate with others in a specific work context
Get the work done	1.1, 1.3, 1.4, 2.1, 2.3, 2.4, 2.5, 2.6, 2.7, 2.8, 2.9, 3.1, 3.3, 3.4, 4.1, 4.2, 4.3, 4.5	Determines job specifications and requirements, and performs clearly defined tasks in a logical, systematic sequence Uses analytical thinking and diagnostic processes Understands the purposes, specific functions, and key features of common digital systems, tools and software, and operates them effectively

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICTWEB404 Maintain website performance	ICAWEB404A Maintain website performance	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICTWEB404 Maintain website performance

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICT Information and Communications Technology Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

review and establish, website performance benchmarks

ensure that the website meets specifications

identify and rectify faults, where the performance is not met

implement scheduled and non-scheduled maintenance

effectively monitor, and tune, website performance.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

describe the process of maintaining a website performance including:

security issues

website server architecture (e.g. Linux, Windows, Unix)

website security protocols

workload (web traffic) metrics

outline the business process design methodologies

identify and describe legislation, regulations, and codes of practice as they relate to web performance, including:

codes of ethics

privacy

copyright

intellectual property.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the website technologies field of work, and include access to:

web servers and websites

the technical requirements

web traffic diagnostic tools, including timing tools to gauge website response times

the appropriate learning and assessment support, when required

the relevant organisational policies and procedures.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICTWEB405 Monitor traffic and compile website traffic reports

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICT Information and Communications Technology Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to monitor website traffic and to compile traffic reports as specified.

It applies to individuals who are required to maintain websites.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Web

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Select web traffic monitoring tools	1.1 Identify and analyse the available site-analysis software, according to organisational requirements, and the website architecture 1.2 Choose and install the most suitable site-analysis software or internet service provider, according to the vendor requirements 1.3 Identify the required report options, according to organisational requirements and the website architecture 1.4 Develop a traffic monitoring program
2. Monitor web traffic	2.1 Specify the required traffic reports, according to information requirements 2.2 Generate the required traffic reports 2.3 Analyse the reports, to identify improvements to the server and to site performance 2.4 Apply forecasting methodologies to predict traffic peaks
3. Make recommendations for improvements	3.1 Recommend any changes in hardware and software 3.2 Implement the changes, as directed 3.3 Continue the traffic monitoring program, as required

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 1.3, 2.1, 2.3	Identify, analyse and evaluate, a range of organisational documents and technical information
Writing	1.4, 2.1-2.3, 3.1	Constructs a data collection tool, incorporating the timelines and information to be collected Prepares a technical report, using the appropriate punctuation, language and layout, in order to convey the results and recommendations of investigations
Numeracy	1.3, 1.4, 2.3, 2.4	Evaluates and presents, numerical and statistical data, to inform decisions and actions
Navigate the world of work	1.1, 1.3, 2.1	Takes personal responsibility for following explicit and implicit organisational requirements, relevant to own work
Interact with others	3.1, 3.2	Selects and uses the appropriate conventions and protocols, when communicating in a range of familiar work contexts
Get the work done	1.1, 1.2, 1.4, 2.2, 2.4, 3.1, 3.2, 3.3	Determines job specifications and requirements, and performs clearly defined tasks in a logical, systematic sequence Uses analytical thinking and diagnostic processes, to monitor the web server and site performance, and to suggest improvements Understands the purposes, specific functions, and key features of common digital systems, tools and software, and operates them effectively to monitor website traffic to meet requirements

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICTWEB405 Monitor traffic and compile website traffic reports	ICAWEB405A Monitor traffic and compile website traffic reports	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICTWEB405 Monitor traffic and compile website traffic reports

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICT Information and Communications Technology Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

select and install the site-analysis software, or an internet service provider (ISP)

monitor website traffic

generate and analyse traffic reports

recommend and implement changes, as required.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

describe the problems and challenges that arise with an organisation web site related to:

data queues and bottlenecks

website security

website copyright and intellectual property requirements

identify and describe legislation, regulations, and the codes of practice as they relate to monitoring website traffic, including:

codes of ethics

privacy

describe the process of monitoring website traffic, including:

functionality of network device drivers

functionality of network operating systems

queuing systems

website architecture

workload metrics

server design and functionality

outline the features and functionality of commercially available:

log file analysis software

traffic tracking software

network device drivers

network operating systems

queuing systems.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the website technologies field of work, and include access to:

analysis software

the e-business website

a web server

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICTWEB406 Create website testing procedures

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICT Information and Communications Technology Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to design and implement procedures, which measure the performance of a website, and compare these procedures to the initial design specifications.

It applies to individuals who may use significant judgement in planning, design, evaluation, technical or leadership and communications functions in frontline technical support roles.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Web

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Document and define the performance criteria	1.1 Review the performance specifications and determine the benchmark criteria 1.2 Validate and document the performance functions 1.3 Select the measurement methodology, and test it on the website 1.4 Validate each performance function separately 1.5 Record and document the metric tools, using the appropriate methodology 1.6 Prepare the performance benchmarks, and seek agreement on the criteria with the client
2. Validate the performance measures	2.1 Develop inspection and test plans, in order to validate performance measures throughout the performance cycle 2.2 Test the performance functions, and record the results, according to technical documentation standards 2.3 Compare the results of performance function testing to benchmark 2.4 Redesign functions that do not meet the appropriate performance benchmarks 2.5 Re-implement functions that have been redesigned during performance testing 2.6 Document the benchmarks and obtain sign-off
3. Obtain sign-off	3.1 Validate and document, performance standards and benchmarks 3.2 Submit the methodology and function testing document, and results, to the client for approval 3.3 Review client comments and make changes, as appropriate 3.4 Obtain sign-off for the website testing procedure

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1-1.6, 2.1-2.5, 3.1, 3.3	Evaluates, integrates, and confirms the authenticity of the data and information, to reach an understanding of the contextual and procedural nature of business solutions
Writing	1.2, 1.5, 1.6, 2.1, 2.2, 2.6, 3.1-3.3, 3.4	Develops and documents benchmark standards, performance plans, measurements, and detailed results, and recommendations for client approval Uses the appropriate formats and writing principles, in accordance with technical standards and organisational conventions
Oral Communication	1.6, 2.6, 3.2-3.4	Participates in complex verbal exchanges with clients that require active listening and responses to questions, to elicit relevant and specific information, and to obtain feedback, and consensus
Numeracy	1.1-1.6, 2.1-2.6, 3.1	Measures and evaluates performance, against established baseline numerical values
Navigate the world of work	2.2, 2.6	Takes personal responsibility for following explicit, and implicit, organisational requirements relevant to own work
Interact with others	1.6, 3.2, 3.4	Selects and uses, the appropriate conventions and protocols, when communicating in a range of familiar work contexts
Get the work done	1.3, 1.4, 2.1, 2.2, 2.3, 2.4, 2.5, 3.1, 3.2, 3.3	Uses analytical thinking, systematic decision- making and diagnostic processes, to determine, implement and evaluate, testing and validation processes Understands the purposes, specific functions and the key features of common digital systems, tools and software, and operates them effectively, to perform testing procedures to meet requirements

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICTWEB406 Create website testing procedures	ICAWEB406A Create website testing procedures	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICTWEB406 Create website testing procedures

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICT Information and Communications Technology Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

identify the critical functions to be tested

develop the appropriate metrics for each function, and assign the benchmarked performance standards

test each performance function, and compare against the appropriate benchmarks

validate the performance of the site against technical requirements

document the results, to establish performance benchmarks for subsequent development of the site.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

identify and describe the legislation, regulations, codes of practice, and standards as they relate to web testing, including:

codes of ethics

privacy

copyright

intellectual property

naming

documentation

describe the client business domain, including client organisation structure and business functionality

identify current industry-accepted hardware and software products

outline the desktop applications and operating systems, as required by organisational guidelines

describe queuing systems, workload metrics, and user request classes

describe the key features, and use of, a standard generalised markup language (SGML) and its associated standards

explain standard web-testing procedures and optimisation tools

outline website design methodologies and standard website structures.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the website technologies field of work, and include access to:

analysis software

the e-business website

industry standards, and organisational guidelines

site design and technical requirements documentation

site-development software and tools.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICTWEB407 Conduct operational acceptance tests of websites

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICT Information and Communications Technology Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to provide high-level assurance, that websites can be effectively and efficiently provisioned and deployed live, in a systematic manner.

It applies to individuals employed as web designers and web developers who are involved in testing the effectiveness of websites.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Web

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Prepare the test	1.1 Establish and document, the testing framework and schedule 1.2 Determine the processes and functions to be tested, and assign the quantitative and qualitative performance benchmarks to each process and function 1.3 Benchmark and document the page templates, style guides and expected traffic loads 1.4 Determine and document the test methodology 1.5 Assemble and brief, the testing panel on the conduct of the test 1.6 Develop user and installation manuals, according to the target audience’s understanding and needs
2. Test individual pages	2.1 Test the pages, against style guides and templates 2.2 Test the pages, for consistency in structure and content 2.3 Apply the automatic testing software 2.4 Document page gross statistics of confirmed results of tests
3. Test page relationships against the business requirements	3.1 Test the installation, and the examples listed in instruction manual 3.2 Test page navigability using a variety of browsers 3.3 Test the ease of use and functionality against the requirements 3.4 Test software interface points, against the business and technical requirements 3.5 Test site security and privacy against the business requirements 3.6 Test the response time against the business requirements 3.7 Conduct load simulation testing, using single and multiple independent browsers, or automated load testing tools
4. Apply and document further tests	4.1 Test the website's ability to handle concurrent access 4.2 Test conformance to the applicable privacy, accessibility, and acceptable usage policy standards 4.3 Apply the automatic testing software 4.4 Collect, collate and document the results from the sample user, and data from the automated test
5. Evaluate the test results	5.1 Consolidate and compare the results to the benchmarks 5.2 Identify results that fail to meet the benchmarks, and conduct a site remedial iteration 5.3 Record and document the test results as the site performance baseline, against which further development or updating can be measured 5.4 Provide evaluation feedback to the appropriate person 5.5 Ensure that the appropriate person signs off on the site, prior to the ‘go live’ date

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1-1.4, 2.1-2.3, 3.1-3.7, 4.1, 4.2, 5.1, 5.2	Examines, constructs, organises and validates relationships, between both discrete and interrelated data and information
Writing	1.6, 2.4, 4.4, 5.1-5.5	Produces a concise formal document that conveys technical information and procedures, utilising the appropriate format, technical language, correct spelling and grammar Uses specific software and technical language to create, format, review, save and access documents
Oral Communication	1.5, 5.4, 5.5	Conveys information by participating in verbal exchanges including listening, questioning and discussing, data and information with a group of people in order to elicit an understanding of, and obtain a consistency of approach to, work requirements Uses clear and detailed verbal language in order to convey explicit information, and to elicit approval for proposed solutions and activities
Numeracy	1.2, 2.4, 5.1, 5.3	Determines analyses and presents, numerical and statistical, data to inform the decisions and actions to be taken to achieve pre-determined outcomes
Navigate the world of work	3.4, 3.5, 3.6, 4.2,	Ensures compliance of the product against business requirements and against the protocols
Get the work done	1.1-1.6, 2.1-2.4, 3.1-3.7, 4.1-4.4, 5.1-5.5	Sequences and schedules complex activities, monitors implementation, and manages relevant communication Develops options, resolves issues, designs and implements tests, to ascertain the functionality of solutions prior to full implementation Utilises a combination of lateral and analytical thinking, to design, and refine, ideas to suit needs, resources and constraints Uses a range of digitally-based technologies and the software packages and hardware required for creating, and refining, websites

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICTWEB407 Conduct operational acceptance tests of websites	ICAWEB407A Conduct operational acceptance tests of websites	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICTWEB407 Conduct operational acceptance tests of websites

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICT Information and Communications Technology Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

prepare an operational acceptance test that measures the independent and integrated structural content, and the technical components, of the site

apply automatic testing software and collect, collate and document the results or tests

evaluate and provide feedback on the test results.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

outline the client business domain

describe the structure, function and business organisation of the client, including the business-process design

identify the organisational policies and procedures that cover routine work processes, and the use of:

web optimising tools

web monitoring tools

web testing procedures

describe technical performance measurement

explain website accessibility and equity principles

outline website structures, design and testing methodologies, and standards

describe common website security issues and the methods employed to mitigate risk

list and describe, common testing software and the metrics used

identify and describe, the application of common website testing software.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances should be typical of those experienced in the website technologies field of work, and include access to:

special purpose tools, equipment and materials including:

web servers

the e-business website

the site server

relevant industry software packages, including site server software and analysis software

the organisational requirements documentation, customer relationship model, website manuals and instructions.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICTWEB408 Ensure basic website security

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICT Information and Communications Technology Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to provide basic website server, and protocol security appropriate to the level required by an organisation.

It applies to individuals employed as web maintenance staff who are required to ensure that a website meets basic security requirements.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Web

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Determine business security requirements	1.1 Identify the level of security required based on the business, and the commercial intent of the website 1.2 Identify whether password protection is needed for the site, or part of the site 1.3 Decide on minimum or maximum password protection solutions, based on the business requirements
2. Ensure web server security	2.1 Ensure that the web server password is obscure and non-traceable 2.2 Install and maintain an effective intrusion detection system, according to business requirements 2.3 Ensure that user accounts have only the required permissions on the server 2.4 Ensure that interpreters’ programs, that run common gateway interfaces (CGIs), are not stored in the CGI-bin directory 2.5 Ensure that web forms check data before passing it to the server
3. Ensure protocol security	3.1 Protect the fixed internet connection, and the internet protocol (IP) address 3.2 Protect shared network resources from intrusion, according to business requirements 3.3 Ensure that personal computer (PC) protocols and preferences follow security protocols 3.4 Disable control protocol, or internet protocol (TCP/IP), bindings for file and printer sharing 3.5 Ensure that network basic input/output system (NetBIOS) over TCP/IP is disabled

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1-1.3, 2.1-2.5, 3.1-3.5	Identify and evaluate technical information to produce solutions to business requirements Identify critical information and cross check for accuracy
Writing	2.2, 3.1-3.5	Writes and edits, computer code and technical data, ensuring the correct syntax and accuracy
Oral Communication	1.1, 1.2	Listens and asks questions to elicit information
Navigate the world of work	1.3	Ensures the compliance of the product against the business requirements and protocols
Get the work done	1.1-1.3, 2.1-2.5, 3.1-3.5	Plans approach to work based on the analysis of business needs and requirements Sequences, schedules and prioritises own work activities Resolves issues and implements tests, to ascertain the functionality of solutions prior to full implementation Utilises a combination of lateral and analytical thinking, to evaluate and validate reliability, and the efficacy of the website Uses a range of digitally-based technologies, and the software packages and hardware, required for interrogating vendor databases and websites

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICTWEB408 Ensure basic website security	ICAWEB408A Ensure basic website security	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICTWEB408 Ensure basic website security

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICT Information and Communications Technology Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

identify the level of security required by the business for the website

implement password protection solutions, for the website and the server

install and maintain, an intrusion detection system

implement protocol security.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

outline the client business domain, including the client organisation structure and business functionality

identify current industry-accepted hardware and software products

outline desktop applications and operating systems, as required

describe firewall functionality

describe hypertext transfer protocol (HTTP) and disk and executing monitor tools (daemons)

outline the range of security protocols, including:

secure socket layer (SSL)

point-to-point network tunnelling protocol (PPTP)

layer 2 tunnelling protocol (L2TP)

define security patches

explain specific purpose security computers, acting as bastion hosts

explain web-server operating systems.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances should be typical of those experienced in the website technologies field of work, and include access to:

special purpose tools, equipment, materials

industry software packages

a basic website and web servers

the organisational requirements documentation

website manuals and instructions.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICTWEB409 Develop cascading style sheets

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICT Information and Communications Technology Training Package Version 1.0

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to develop cascading style sheets (CSS) that are attached to a markup language document, in order to externally define, and control, styles to enhance and achieve commonality between web documents.

It applies to individuals who are required to layout and ensure consistency of appearance between web pages.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Web

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Format, style and lay out the elements on a web page	1.1 Obtain user requirements 1.2 Style the elements of a web page using CSS 1.3 Apply CSS to multiple pages in a website 1.4 Position the document elements using CSS
2. Test and validate the web pages	2.1 Test the website in various browsers 2.2 Validate CSS against industry standards 2.3 Report the test results to the appropriate person

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1-1.3, 2.1, 2.2	Identifies, interprets and uses information from technical and business documents to complete a work task
Writing	1.1-1.4, 2.3	Uses specific software and technical language to create, format, review, save and access web- based documents, diagrams and images
Oral Communication	1.1, 2.3	Identifies work outcomes through open-ended questioning, active listening, paraphrasing and summarising Uses clear and detailed verbal language in order to convey explicit information
Numeracy	1.2-1.4	Extracts and evaluates the mathematical information embedded in a range of tasks and texts Takes measurements and performs calculations for website layout
Navigate the world of work	1.1, 2.2	Completes work to user requirements and industry standards
Get the work done	1.1-1.4, 2.1-2.3	Sequences and schedules complex activities within the specified timeframe, monitors implementation, and manages relevant communication Analyses documentation in order to apply and obtain desired results, and to resolve problems Utilises a combination of lateral and analytical thinking, to design and refine solutions that are adaptable to different contexts Uses a range of digitally-based technologies, and the software packages and hardware required

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICTWEB409 Develop cascading style sheets	ICAWEB409A Develop cascading style sheets	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICTWEB409 Develop cascading style sheets

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICT Information and Communications Technology Training Package Version 1.0

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

develop a website style and format, using cascading style sheets (CSS), to user requirements

lay out page elements, using CSS

test web pages in a variety of browsers

validate the CSS against industry standards.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

discuss standard web and CSS design principles

identify and describe the application of the following to CSS:

hypertext transfer protocol (HTTP)

hypertext mark-up language (HTML)

extensible hypertext mark-up language (XHTML)

industry standards for web design

recognise a range of internet browsers.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances should be typical of those experienced in the website technologies field of work and, include access to:

special purpose tools, equipment and materials

industry software packages

a computer

a variety of web browsers

the organisational requirements documentation including:

an aesthetic presentation brief

website manuals

HTML documents

the internet, for access to the World Wide Web Consortium (W3C).

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICTWEB410 Apply web authoring tool to convert client data for websites

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICT Information and Communications Technology Training Package Version 1.0

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to use web development software to create website content. The unit is designed to use a web-authoring tool to convert text and images to the appropriate web protocols.

It applies to individuals employed as web developers who are responsible for developing websites using client data.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Web

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Create the files	1.1 Create files and save, in the correct location and directory 1.2 Insert and format text content, according to the business requirements 1.3 Insert and optimise images, as required
2. Create the formatting templates	2.1 Create basic external cascading style sheets (CSS) 2.2 Define styles for the required tags, according to the business requirements 2.3 Link CSS to the files, and display formatting
3. Define library items	3.1 Identify items that recur on several pages, and include in the library 3.2 Format selected items, according to CSS definition 3.3 Check the tags of selected items 3.4 Create and clearly name, the selected library items 3.5 Update the items contained in the library, according to the business requirements
4. Develop the templates	4.1 Create and save file as template, and link with CSS 4.2 Format the template and create, and name, editable regions 4.3 Place the generic image icons in a page, as required by the business image 4.4 Save and modify the templates
5. Identify the authoring requirements	5.1 Select the preferred web authoring tool, according to the business requirements 5.2 Set the preferences for the web-authoring tool, including the site file transfer protocol (FTP) client 5.3 Customise and navigate, the web author tool environment or workspace, to meet individual requirements 5.4 Select buttons and tools, both opened and closed, to access the full range of features 5.5 Define and name the site and root folder
6. Create simple forms	6.1 Add form elements to the page 6.2 Set the form element properties for each form element 6.3 Insert additional fields, as required for the processing form 6.4 Identify the availability, and location, of the common gateway interface (CGI) script 6.5 Connect the form to a script in a server CGI bin 6.6 Test the form to ensure that there are no errors
7. Create simple navigation	7.1 Create the site map in order to plan navigation 7.2 Create the links between pages to reflect the content structure, using both text and images 7.3 Check the links in multiple browsers for errors 7.4 Check the website content across a number of different browsers, and browser versions, to ensure consistency of presentation, performance and accessibility

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.2, 3.1, 3.2, 3.5, 5.1-5.5	Identifies, and interprets, information from technical and business documentation to complete a work tasks, according to the business requirements and technical specifications
Writing	1.1-1.3, 2.1-2.3, 3.2, 3.4, 3.5, 4.1-4.4, 5.2-5.5, 6.1-6.5, 7.1-7.3	Uses specific software and technical language to create, format, review, save and access web based documents, templates, diagrams and images Electronically enters data and information that meet business requirements, and adheres to the technical requirements and specifications
Navigate the world of work	1.1, 2.2, 3.5, 5.1	Completes tasks in accordance with the specified business requirements
Get the work done	1.1-1.3, 2.1-2.3, 3.1-3.5, 4.1-4.4, 5.1-5.5, 6.1-6.6, 7.1-7.4	Prioritises and monitors own work Solves operational problems, as they arise Analyses the business requirements and interprets the technical aspects of implementation Designs simple forms Operates software applications, selects the appropriate authoring tools to meet the required specifications, and writes and maintains, the hypertext markup language (HTML)

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICTWEB410 Apply web authoring tool to convert client data for websites	ICAWEB410A Apply web authoring tool to convert client data for websites	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICTWEB410 Apply web authoring tool to convert client data for websites

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICT Information and Communications Technology Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

develop web content, using authoring tools to meet the business requirements

create cascading style sheets (CSS)

define library items

create templates

use authoring tools to create cross-browser web documents

create forms

create navigation tools.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

identify and describe, the client business domain

identify and describe the legislation, regulations, codes of practice and standards, as they relate to websites

outline the accessibility guidelines regarding web-authoring tools

explain the standard generalised markup language (SGML), and describe the associated standards

describe standard web and CSS design principles and structures.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances should be typical of those experienced in the website technologies field of work, and include access to:

special purpose tools, equipment and materials

industry software packages

the website, where content may be developed

site authoring software and tools

the business expectations brief

the appropriate standards, and current legislation.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICTWEB411 Produce basic client-side script for dynamic web pages

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICT Information and Communications Technology Training Package Version 1.0

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to develop interactive and engaging websites, using a range of features from various, appropriate languages.

It applies to individuals working in web development environments who are required to produce client-side scripts as a common means of creating interactive websites. These scripts offer an effective simple means of enabling websites to provide greater interaction with clients.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Web

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Analyse the requirements for web documents	1.1 Determine the necessary dynamic functionality of the web document 1.2 Determine the appropriate language to achieve that functionality 1.3 Determine the web document requirements
2. Design and produce web documents	2.1 Design the web document, and embedded scripts to achieve the required functionality 2.2 Write a simple hypertext markup language (HTML), considering accessibility 2.3 Write embedded scripts
3. Test the scripts and debug	3.1 Test the web document against the required functionality, and reiterate until correct 3.2 Complete the documentation and submit it to the appropriate person for their approval

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.3	Recognises and interprets textual information in various information and communications technology (ICT) languages, in order to determine the dynamic functionality of the web document
Writing	1.1, 1.3, 2.1, 2.2, 2.3, 3.2	Develops material for a specific audience, using detailed ICT language, to convey explicit information
Oral Communication	1.1, 1.3	Articulates clearly, using the specific language suitable to technical, operational and business audiences, to convey requirements and listening, and questioning, techniques to confirm understanding
Get the work done	1.1-1.3, 2.1-2.3, 3.1-3.2	Plans approach to work based on internet protocols, and the analysis of business needs and requirements Sequences, schedules and prioritises own work activities Resolves issues, including design and functionality conflicts, debugging and handling errors, and implements tests to ascertain the functionality of solutions, prior to full implementation Utilises a combination of lateral and analytical thinking, and practice, to design and validate the reliability, and efficacy of web documents Uses a range of digitally-based technologies, software packages, and hardware to view the active elements or objects across different platforms, and to design, and produce, web documents

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICTWEB411 Produce basic client-side script for dynamic web pages	ICAWEB411A Produce basic client-side script for dynamic web pages	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICTWEB411 Produce basic client-side script for dynamic web pages

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICT Information and Communications Technology Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

determine the dynamic functionality and requirements of web documents

select the appropriate language

design web documents with embedded script

produce dynamic web page documents

test and debug, the web document functionality

document and gain client approval.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

discuss the basic principles behind open platform programming

describe client-side scripting and its application to dynamic web page design, including:

events and event handlers

internet operation related to servers and clients

internet protocols

standard generalised markup language (SGML)

associated standards

identify and outline, security restrictions on servers

describe the difference between server-side and client-side scripting

describe the standards associated with programming documentation.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances should be typical of those experienced in the website technologies field of work, and include access to:

special purpose tools

equipment and materials

industry software packages

the web server

the client requirements

the security policy

functionality and scope requirements.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICTWEB412 Produce interactive web animation

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICT Information and Communications Technology Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to create interactive animated enhancements, to advertisements and web pages.

It applies to individuals working as web designers who generate and apply advertisements for website clients, create animations to enhance a web page message and produce fully animated websites.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Web

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Analyse project requirements	1.1 Determine the necessary dynamic functionality of the animation to be included inside the web document 1.2 Determine the appropriate language to achieve that functionality 1.3 Determine web document requirements 1.4 Research and evaluate, current requirements for online advertising with major agencies and websites
2. Design the web animations	2.1 Design the web document and animations, to enhance the page 2.2 Design the advertisements to promote the web page, within a website 2.3 Design the advertisements to promote the web page, on externally hosted, paid advertising 2.4 Design advertisements that meet current website advertising specifications for size, number or loops, sound and buttons 2.5 Design and create gif replacements for animation, as per major advertising agency requirements 2.6 Design the animations for a website that will add to the overall professionalism, or entertainment value, of a website
3. Produce the animations	3.1 Produce the web animations, for web pages 3.2 Produce the web animations, for external advertising 3.3 Produce the web animations, for internal website advertising 3.4 Produce the web animations, for a website that will enhance the overall professionalism, or entertainment value, of the website 3.5 Test and debug, scripts against the required functionality and reiterate until correct
4. Publish animations	4.1 Publish the animations in an acceptable web format 4.2 Incorporate the web animations into a hypertext markup language (HTML) page 4.3 Complete the documentation and submit it to the appropriate person for their approval

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Learning	1.4, 2.1, 2.2, 2.3, 3.4	Identifies and explores, connections between ideas and methodologies, and uses research techniques to source the knowledge required to resolve technical difficulties, and the extend understanding of the job’s requirements
Reading	1.4, 2.4, 2.5	Analyses and compares industry-specific and related text, to determine all advertising, client and technical requirements
Writing	1.1	Prepares, and produces, dynamic material for a specific audience using clear and detailed language in order to convey explicit information, requirements and recommendations
Oral Communication	1.1	Clearly articulates requirements, using the language appropriate to the audience and environment, and participates in a verbal exchange of ideas/solutions
Numeracy	2.4	Interprets numerical information, and applies basic mathematical calculations, to recurring technical features
Get the work done	1.1-1.4, 2.1-2.6, 3.1-3.5	Takes responsibility for planning, sequencing and prioritising tasks and own workload, for efficiency and effective outcomes Makes routine decisions and implements standard procedures for routine tasks, using formal decision-making processes for more complex and non-routine situations Uses familiar digital technologies and systems to access information, search and enter, data and code, present information, and communicate with others, cognisant of data security and safety

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICTWEB412 Produce interactive web animation	ICAWEB412A Produce interactive web animation	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICTWEB412 Produce interactive web animation

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICT Information and Communications Technology Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

determine the requirements for the animation

design the interactive animations requirements

create animations for web pages and advertising applications

publish the animations to the web environment.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

outline web animation programming concepts, including:

acceptable formats for importing assets

component libraries

cross-browser issues

importing and exporting libraries

inserting the published work to a hypertext markup language (HTML), or extensible hypertext markup language (XHTML) page

internet-animation player statistics

masking

movements and automated movements

publishing the finished work to an acceptable web format

shape animation and manipulation

symbols

text manipulation

transparencies

explain programming control structures, object-oriented programming, including:

buttons

scripting to go to uniform resource locators (URLs)

scripting to jump to different parts of the animation

scripting using the programming language

summarise internet technology, including selecting the right scripting type to reach a maximum determined audience

outline the principles of the analysis of web parameters, and the design of suitable animations, for advertisements and website enhancements

explain the methods and attributes of animation, and how it enhances the website to entice buyers.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the website technologies field of work, and include access to:

a development environment

the internet

browsers

the appropriate web design software.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICTWEB413 Optimise search engines

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICT Information and Communications Technology Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to create and implement, good internet-marketing practices using search engine optimisation (SEO) techniques, including introducing web pages to search engines, and monitoring search engine performance.

It applies to individuals who make recommendations and monitor keyword enhancements, search engine marketing (SEM) and social network marketing (SNM).

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Web

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Analyse internet-marketing requirements	1.1 Determine the main business of the website, and the keywords currently used on each page 1.2 Create a keyword suggestion list for the website, using online tools 1.3 Analyse the best keywords for macro and sub-keywords 1.4 Create recommendations for improved optimisation for image search optimisation (ISO), keyword density on web pages, and keywords used in headings and heading levels meta-elements and page tiles 1.5 Analyse the pages, and recommend sections for content 1.6 Analyse the current website position in organic listings 1.7 Analyse the current success of online advertising 1.8 Analyse current traffic analysis reports, using online tools and the web-hosting statistics 1.9 Analyse the current success of the social network marketing content
2. Prepare an internet marketing strategy report	2.1 Use detail from the analysis to prepare a recommendation report for the client, covering the differences between search engine optimisation, search engine marketing, and social network marketing 2.2 Make recommendations about search engines and social network media to the target, based on the volume of users 2.3 Make recommendations regarding a timeframe for expecting improved search engine results 2.4 Explain the search terms 2.5 Make recommendations for the implementation of search engine optimisation, and search engine marketing, including a summary of recommendations on the methods to improve search engine rankings, both organic and pay per click (PPC)
3. Implement the SEO strategy	3.1 Implement the macro and sub-keywords on pages 3.2 Implement keywords 3.3 Implement the sections for content, and back links from quality websites 3.4 Create online profiles for updating search engine data 3.5 Introduce the website to major search engines
4. Review the SEO	4.1 Determine current website position in organic listings 4.2 Review the current success of online advertising with regard to the website’s position 4.3 Evaluate current traffic analysis reports, and compare these with previous results
5. Prepare a client SEO result report	5.1 Analyse website statistics, for site reports and listings 5.2 Compare current statistics with previous site reports and listings 5.3 Summarise the findings, and make further recommendations

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7, 1.8, 1.9, 4.3, 5.1, 5.2	Critically analyses complex documentation from a variety of sources, and consolidates the information relating to specific criteria, to determine requirements
Writing	1.2, 1.4, 1.5, 2.1, 2.2, 2.3, 2.4, 2.5, 3.2, 3.4, 3.5, 5.1, 5.3	Accurately records and completes organisational documents, and correspondence, using clear language and the correct spelling, grammar and terminology
Oral Communication	1.1, 2.2, 2.3, 2.4, 2.5, 5.3	Uses collaborative and inclusive techniques, including active listening and questioning, and the reading of verbal and non-verbal signals, to convey and clarify information, and to confirm understanding
Numeracy	2.2, 2.3, 5.1, 5.2	Interprets statistical information, and compares information, to measure usage and prepare client reports Uses mathematical calculations to estimate timeframes for improved search engine results
Get the work done	1.1-1.9, 3.1-3.5	Takes responsibility for planning, sequencing and prioritising tasks and own workload, for efficiency and effective outcomes Addresses less predictable problems and initiates standard procedures in response to these problems, applying problem-solving processes to determine a solution Contributes to continuous improvement of current work, by applying basic principles of analytical and lateral thinking Uses familiar digital technologies and systems to access information, search and enter data and code, present information and communicate with others

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICTWEB413 Optimise search engines	ICAWEB413A Optimise search engines	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICTWEB413 Optimise search engines

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICT Information and Communications Technology Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

analyse internet marketing requirements

prepare and implement, an internet search engine marketing strategy

monitor search engine performance

make recommendations for:

keyword enhancements

search engine marketing (SEM)

social network marketing (SNM).

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

describe internet marketing methods and best practices, including:

search terms

keywords

keyword density

search engine ranking

search engine methods of assessing search engine optimisation (SEO)

back links

social network media in the context of SEO

analyse and interpret, the internet marketing strategy of a website.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in website technologies field of work, and include access to the:

website files

file transfer protocol (FTP)

internet

profiling tools

social network marketing logins.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICTWEB414 Design simple web page layouts

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICT Information and Communications Technology Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to scope web page requirements, and to create and implement designs.

It applies to individuals working as web designers and web developers, who apply a wide range of knowledge and skills for basic web development.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Web

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Identify main layout sections from design specification	1.1 Identify the required sections of the web page 1.2 Create the web page structure
2. Layout the web page to match design specification	2.1 Position document elements 2.2 Style web page elements to match the design specifications
3. Test and validate the layout	3.1 Test the website in various browsers 3.2 Validate the web pages against industry standards

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Learning	1.1	Identifies and explores, the connections between ideas and methodologies to extend the understanding of requirements
Reading	2.2, 3.2	Recognises and interprets textual information, in order to determine and adhere to, requirements
Writing	1.1	Develops clear and well-organised material for a specific audience, using precise language to convey explicit information, and requirements
Oral Communication	1.1	Clearly articulates requirements, using the language appropriate to the audience and environment, and participates in a verbal exchange of ideas/solutions
Numeracy	1.2, 2.1	Takes measurements, and performs calculations for the web page layout
Navigate the world of work	3.2	Identifies and acts on issues that contravene the relevant industry standards
Get the work done	1.2, 2.1, 2.2, 3.1, 3.2	Takes responsibility for planning, sequencing, and prioritising tasks and own workload, for efficiency and effective outcomes Addresses less predictable problems, and initiates standard procedures in response to these problems, applying problem-solving processes in determining a solution Uses familiar digital technologies and systems to access information, search and enter data, and code, present information and communicate with others, cognisant of data security and safety

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICTWEB414 Design simple web page layouts	ICAWEB414A Design simple web page layouts	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICTWEB414 Design simple web page layouts

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICT Information and Communications Technology Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

develop a website according to design specifications

lay out page elements

test the web pages in a variety of browsers

validate the web pages, against industry standards.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

summarise standard web and web scripting design principles

define and explain the application of the following for website development:

cascading style sheets (CSS)

the hypertext transfer protocol (HTTP)

a markup language, such as hypertext markup language (HTML), or extensible hypertext markup language (XHTML)

World Wide Web Consortium (W3C) standards.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the website technologies field of work, and include access to:

a computer

an aesthetic presentation brief

a variety of browsers

the internet, to validate against the W3C.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICTWEB415 Produce server-side script for dynamic web pages

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICT Information and Communications Technology Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to produce server-side scripts for dynamic web pages, using a range of relevant features from different but appropriate languages.

It applies to individuals working as web designers who apply a wide range of knowledge and skills across different information and communications technology (ICT) environments to support small to medium enterprises (SMEs) that require broader, rather than more specialised, ICT support.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Web

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Analyse the requirements for web documents requiring server-side dynamic interaction	1.1 Determine the necessary dynamic functionality of the web document 1.2 Determine the appropriate language, to achieve that functionality 1.3 Determine web document requirements
2. Design server-side scripts	2.1 Design the web document and server-side code, to interact with an external data source 2.2 Design the web document and server-side code, to allow an administrator to insert, update, and delete entries to the external data source 2.3 Implement security features in the web document
3. Produce the web documents	3.1 Write the extensible hypertext markup language (XHTML), considering accessibility 3.2 Write server-side scripts to current XHTML standards
4. Test the scripts and debug	4.1 Test the web document against required the functionality and reiterate until correct 4.2 Complete the documentation and submit it to the appropriate person for their approval
5. Set up security	5.1 Determine the necessary permissions to prevent error messages displaying to the public 5.2 Configure server software to minimise potential database attacks

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 1.3	Identifies, analyses and evaluates workplace instructions and technical documentation, to determine all business requirements
Writing	2.2, 2.3, 3.1, 3.2, 4.2	Develops clear and well-organised material for a specific audience, using precise language to convey explicit information requirements and recommendations
Oral Communication	1.1, 1.3	Clearly articulates requirements using the language appropriate to the audience, and participates in a verbal exchange of ideas/solutions
Navigate the world of work	3.2	Identifies and complies with the current standards
Interact with others	4.2	Uses a range of strategies to establish a sense of connection, and to build rapport, with clients and co-workers
Get the work done	1.2, 2.1, 2.2, 2.3, 4.1, 5.1, 5.2	Takes responsibility for planning, sequencing and prioritising tasks and own workload, for efficiency and effective outcomes Makes routine decisions and implements standard procedures for routine tasks, using formal decision- making processes for more complex and non-routine situations Uses familiar digital technologies and systems to access information, search and enter, data and code, present information and communicate with others, cognisant of data security and safety

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICTWEB415 Produce server-side script for dynamic web pages	ICAWEB415A Produce server-side script for dynamic web pages	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICTWEB415 Produce server-side script for dynamic web pages

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICT Information and Communications Technology Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

create dynamic web pages according to all job requirements, using server-side scripting to retrieve information from a web-hosted database

create scripts for:

the quick upload of data to web-hosted databases

inserting, updating, and deleting data from a web server database

encoding passwords

uploading and retrieving images

managing sessions, and creating a secure login.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

explain server-side technologies, and the relevant web scripting languages

discuss server-side web analysis and design parameters

summarise and apply, programming control structures and object-oriented programming

outline web-programming concepts including:

the hypertext transfer protocol (HTTP)

stateless programming

session management

authentication and web security.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the website technologies field of work, and include access to the:

client requirements

functionality and scope requirements

security policy

database server

internet and server

software development environment

web browsers.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICTWEB416 Customise content management system

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICT Information and Communications Technology Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to create and integrate, a website into an open-source content management system.

It applies to individuals working as web developers who apply a wide range of knowledge and skills, across ICT, to support small to medium enterprises (SMEs) that require broader, rather than more specialised, ICT support.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Web

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Analyse the specifications and requirements	1.1 Determine the required functionality of the website 1.2 Determine the appropriate server-side language that will be used to produce the website 1.3 Determine the content structure and navigation of the website 1.4 Determine the pre-existing restraints that need to be considered when developing a website solution
2. Research the requirements	2.1 Research the appropriate solutions, based on website requirements, including the programming language, content management system (CMS), licensing structure and hosting structure 2.2 Research the techniques, plug-ins and additions to the existing content management system, in order to allow the solution to fulfil the needs determined while analysing website requirements
3. Create a content-management system powered website	3.1 Install and configure the chosen CMS 3.2 Insert and manage, the website content 3.3 Install and implement the appropriate techniques, and plug-ins
4. Validate and evaluate the final website	4.1 Validate the final website markup against current website standards 4.2 Validate the content management system performance in different browsers, checking compatibility, and core content management system functionality

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Learning	1.1, 1.2, 1.4, 2.1, 2.2	Researches, analyses and validates information to determine the best solution for client requirements, and builds on prior knowledge to extend understanding
Reading	1.1, 1.2, 2.1, 2.2	Identifies, analyses and evaluates industry standards, workplace instructions, online and other technical documentation, to determine all business requirements
Writing	3.2	Develops clear and well-organised material for a specific audience, using precise language to convey explicit information requirements, and recommendations
Oral Communication	1.1, 1.2	Clearly articulates requirements, using language appropriate to the audience and participates in a verbal exchange of ideas/solutions
Navigate the world of work	2.1	Takes personal responsibility for following explicit and implicit requirements for licencing policies, procedures and regulatory requirements
Get the work done	1.1-1.4, 2.1-2.2, 3.1-3.3, 4.1, 4.2	Takes responsibility for planning, sequencing and prioritising tasks and own workload, for efficiency and effective outcomes Makes routine decisions and implements standard procedures for routine tasks, using formal decision- making processes for more complex and non-routine situations Addresses less predictable problems, and initiates standard procedures in response to these problems, applying problem-solving processes in determining solutions Uses familiar digital technologies and systems to access information, search and enter, data and code, present information and communicate with others, cognisant of data security and safety

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICTWEB416 Customise content management system	ICAWEB416A Customise content management system	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICTWEB416 Customise content management system

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICT Information and Communications Technology Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

research and evaluate client requirements

create a content management system (CMS) powered website using an open-source solution

validate the CMS against the standards set by the World Wide Web Consortium (W3C).

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

define "content management system" and describe its purpose

explain markup language and its associated standards

outline server-side language and security techniques

discuss web accessibility

evaluate a content management system (front and backend) in commonly used browsers

outline W3C standards and their application to website development.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the website technologies field of work, and include access to:

the client requirements, and content

a text editor

a range of browsers

the internet for research and code validation.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICTWEB417 Integrate social web technologies

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICT Information and Communications Technology Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to successfully develop and integrate social networking code into new and existing websites.

It applies to individuals working as web developers who apply a wide range of knowledge and skills across a range of general information and communications technology (ICT) environments and support small to medium enterprises (SMEs) that require broader, rather than more specialised, ICT support.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Web

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Analyse the specifications and requirements	1.1 Evaluate different popular social networking websites 1.2 Discuss the benefits of social networking in websites 1.3 Discuss the negative aspects of social networking 1.4 Define goals, based on the client requirements, for successful social networking integration
2. Develop the code and documentation	2.1 Develop the guidelines for implementing social networking in a website 2.2 Develop the code to integrate a social networking website, into a pre-existing website 2.3 Use the pre-existing scripts and tools, to integrate a social networking website into a pre-existing website
3. Validate the integration	3.1 Validate social networking integration 3.2 Validate the performance of the social networking integration in different browsers, checking compatibility and display

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 1.4, 2.3, 3.2	Analyses and consolidates information and data, from a range of sources, against the defined criteria and requirements, and checks for accuracy and completeness
Writing	1.4, 2.1, 2.2	Develops clear and well-organised material for a specific audience, using precise language to convey explicit information requirements and recommendations
Oral Communication	1.2, 1.3	Determines and confirms client requirements using collaborative and inclusive techniques, including active listening and questioning, and reading of verbal and non-verbal signals, to convey and clarify information and to confirm understanding
Interact with others	1.2, 1.3	Selects and uses the appropriate conventions and protocols, when communicating with clients in a range of work contexts
Get the work done	1.1, 1.4, 2.1-2.3, 3.1, 3.2	Takes responsibility for planning, sequencing and prioritising tasks, and own workload, for efficiency and effective outcomes Makes routine decisions, and implements standard procedures for routine tasks, using formal decision- making processes for more complex and non-routine situations Addresses less predictable problems and initiates standard procedures in response to these problems, applying problem-solving processes in determining a solution Uses familiar digital technologies and systems, to access information, search and enter, data and code, present information and communicate with others, cognisant of data security and safety

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICTWEB417 Integrate social web technologies	ICAWEB417A Integrate social web technologies	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICTWEB417 Integrate social web technologies

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICT Information and Communications Technology Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

analyse requirements for the integration of a social networking website into a pre-existing website

determine the content management functionality, against current programming and security standards

select an appropriate social networking platform

develop and implement, social networking integration codes into an existing website

validate frontend code markup, against the standards set by the World Wide Web Consortium (W3C).

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

outline the markup language and its associated standards

summarise server-side language

describe the advantages and disadvantages, of integrating social networking into web sites.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the website technologies field of work, and include access to:

client requirements

a text editor

a range of browsers

the internet for research

application programming interface (API) documentation.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICTWEB418 Use development software and ICT tools to build a basic website

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICT Information and Communications Technology Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to build a basic website, consistent with the design, technical requirements and expectations, of a client’s business, using current industry software and tools.

It applies to individuals working as web developers who use a wide range of knowledge and skills across a range of general information and communications technology (ICT) environments, and support small to medium enterprises (SMEs) that require broader, rather than more specialised, ICT support.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Web

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Select and analyse the website structure and development tools	1.1 Analyse the business specification, and select the appropriate software 1.2 Identify the website’s technical needs, and select the appropriate software tools 1.3 Identify the site’s structure and navigation flow, and demonstrate an understanding of functionality 1.4 Review the design documentation, and integrate the design work with the site’s structure and navigation, according to web development standards
2. Begin site construction	2.1 Take action to ensure user input during website construction 2.2 Validate the existing information and basic content, when incorporating data on the website 2.3 Apply consistent design specifications to all aspects of the website 2.4 Gather feedback from the user on web design, content, accessibility and structure, using the appropriate feedback mechanism
3. Complete and validate the website construction and content	3.1 Undertake an evaluation of the website, against the technical requirements and the design specification 3.2 Test each function, and, process of the website 3.3 Conduct navigation tests and hypertext markup language (HTML) compliance with website standards 3.4 Stress test the website to meet the design criteria and user load 3.5 Record testing results to ensure that the website meets user requirements 3.6 Obtain the sign-off and approval of the user

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 1.2, 1.4, 3.1	Critically analyses complex documentation from a variety of sources, and consolidates information relating to specific criteria to determine requirements
Writing	2.1, 2.4, 3.5, 3.6	Prepares and produces dynamic material for a specific audience, using clear and detailed language in order to convey explicit information, requirements and recommendations
Oral Communication	2.1, 2.4, 3.6	Uses collaborative and inclusive techniques, including active listening and questioning, and reading of verbal and non-verbal signals, to convey and clarify information, and to confirm understanding
Navigate the world of work	1.4, 3.3	Accepts responsibility and ownership for the task, and makes decisions on completion parameters, and the need for coordination with others Takes personal responsibility for following explicit and implicit policies, procedures and standards
Interact with others	2.1, 2.4, 3.5, 3.6	Selects and uses appropriate conventions and protocols, when communicating with clients in a range of work contexts Uses a range of strategies, to establish a sense of connection, and to build rapport with clients and co-workers Elicits and provides feedback to others
Get the work done	1.1-1.4, 2.2, 2.3, 3.1-3.4	Takes responsibility for planning, sequencing, and prioritising tasks and own workload, for efficiency and effective outcomes Makes routine decisions and implements standard procedures for routine tasks, using formal decision-making processes for more complex and non-routine situations Addresses less predictable problems and initiates standard procedures in response to these problems, applying problem-solving processes in determining a solution Uses familiar digital technologies and systems, to access information, search and enter data, and code, present information and communicate with others, cognisant of data security and safety

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICTWEB418 Use development software and ICT tools to build a basic website	ICAWEB418A Use development software and IT tools to build a basic website	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages. Minor change to title.	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICTWEB418 Use development software and ICT tools to build a basic website

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICT Information and Communications Technology Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

conduct an assessment of, and document the specifications relating to, the client’s website needs

build a basic website according to client specifications

validate the final web design against the client’s requirements

confirm and obtain client sign off.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

outline a basic knowledge of:

design principles

the issues around accessibility and equity principles, when building for diverse users

identify and describe the software, and tools, that are used in website development

outline the general principles of the standard generalised markup language (SGML), and associated documentation standards

outline the principles of website design

describe the technical attributes specific to the web

describe and apply, the types of code used in the generation of web sites.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the website technologies field of work, and include access to:

basic website specifications and guidelines

the website development software and tools

an internet server

organisational and industry standards.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICTWEB419 Develop guidelines for uploading information to a website

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICT Information and Communications Technology Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to support the effective operation of a website, by establishing content upload guidelines and procedures, in the context of site policies.

It applies to individuals who work in website maintenance roles who are required to ensure that a website remains operational.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Web

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Develop site policies	1.1 Develop and disseminate policies on acceptable usage, security, privacy and copyright issues, based on technical security and privacy requirements 1.2 Develop and disseminate, roles and responsibilities for updating and loading content, and removing redundant information 1.3 Document and disseminate information about the nature of content able to be updated and loaded 1.4 Establish the upload documentation, and disseminate the processes and procedures for the updating, loading or removal of content on the site 1.5 Implement automatic and routine, updating and archiving procedures
2. Establish the updating and loading procedures	2.1 Allocate, and make available to contributors, directory space to update and load new site content 2.2 Identify and make available for use, authoring guides and resources, based on cascading style sheets (CSS) and business style guides 2.3 Develop and make available, new content templates to be applied by authors for use based on CSS parameters 2.4 Allocate and monitor server permissions 2.5 Identify preferred file transfer protocol (FTP) client based on best fit with the technical environment, and make available for use 2.6 Customise the FTP client to meet requirements 2.7 Identify and develop authoring support tools, such as help files and links 2.8 Disseminate authoring support tools, such as help files and links, as necessary
3. Document the guidelines	3.1 Develop documentation for loading information, taking into consideration security and privacy 3.2 Document and make available, links to recommended support tools 3.3 Automate the details of recent updates and loading of information, and document on the site

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1-1.3, 2.2, 2.5	Critically analyses complex documentation from a variety of sources, and consolidates information, relating to specific criteria to determine requirements
Writing	1.1-1.5, 2.3, 2.7, 3.1-3.3	Develops procedural material for a specific audience, using clear and detailed language, in order to convey explicit information, requirements and recommendations
Navigate the world of work	1.1, 1.2, 1.5, 3.1	Modifies or develops organisational policies and procedures, to comply with legislative requirements and organisation goals Contributes to roles and responsibilities, of self and others
Interact with others	1.1-1.4, 2.1, 2.4, 2.8, 3.2	Selects and uses, the appropriate conventions and protocols when communicating with clients and co-workers, in a range of work contexts Uses a range of strategies to establish a sense of connection, and to build rapport with clients and co-workers Cooperates with others, and contributes to work practices, where joint outcomes are expected, and deadlines are to be met Identifies and explores, differences in a diverse range of people in the work context, and makes adjustments to communication in recognition of these differences
Get the work done	1.1-1.5, 2.1, 2.2, 2.4-2.7, 3.3	Takes responsibility for planning, sequencing and prioritising tasks and own workload, for efficiency and effective outcomes Contributes to the continuous improvement of current work practices, by applying basic principles of analytical and lateral thinking Uses familiar digital technologies and systems to access information, search and enter data, present information and communicate with others, cognisant of data security and safety

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICTWEB419 Develop guidelines for uploading information to a website	ICAWEB419A Develop guidelines for uploading information to a website	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICTWEB419 Develop guidelines for uploading information to a website

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICT Information and Communications Technology Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

develop a policy for uploading and removing website content that:

ensures that the policy reflects the strategic intent of the site, while maintaining site security and privacy standards

adheres to quality standards for the updating process and data

ensures that updates occur in a secure and convenient manner

develops updating and loading procedures for website content

reviews guidelines for uploading content to websites.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

outline copyright and intellectual property issues

summarise the information architecture

identify and describe, internet protocols

outline the procedures for disseminating and documenting technical specifications

clarify the website’s architecture and business process design, and how e-business sites may fit into corporate strategy.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the website technologies field of work, and include access to:

the servers

an e-business website

the file transfer protocol (FTP) software

the organisational documentation, requirements and guidelines.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICTWEB420 Write content for web pages

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICT Information and Communications Technology Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to write concise, and clear, content for web pages on behalf of a client.

It applies to individuals who are proficient communicators in the web development field.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Web

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Prepare to develop content for the site	1.1 Identify customer information needs, with reference to the audience, site functionality and client requirements 1.2 Confirm site purpose and functionality, with reference to client specification 1.3 Select content channels and format as part of client requirements 1.4 Obtain the templates and style guides 1.5 Identify the content and analyse with reference to audience needs, maintenance requirements, information architecture, and site design and functionality 1.6 Negotiate any alterations to site design, as required by the content and by client requirements
2. Write the site content	2.1 Create the content according to content and client requirements 2.2 Establish that the content is easily and conveniently, accessible and visible, and that information is clear, understandable, and logical 2.3 Edit the content with reference to audience needs, site functionality, content and client requirements
3. Upload the content	3.1 Log into the server site, using either the administrative or anonymous file transfer protocol in preparation for upload 3.2 Launch the transfer file transfer protocol (FTP) client, and navigate to the destination directory, either graphically or by using a command line interface 3.3 Store and order the files according to logical design and user needs, using an accepted file extension scheme 3.4 Demonstrate the operation in closed contention mode

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1-1.6, 2.1-2.3, 3.1-3.3	Reads and interprets specifications, computer program interface and other documentation, from a variety of sources, and consolidates information, to determine requirements
Writing	1.2, 1.6, 2.1, 2.3, 3.1-3.3	Writes, edits and proofreads documents for internet use, to ensure clarity of meaning, and accuracy and consistency of information
Oral Communication	1.1, 1.2, 1.6	Determines and confirms client requirements, using collaborative and inclusive techniques, including active listening and questioning, and reading of verbal and non-verbal signals, to convey and clarify information, and to confirm understanding
Get the work done	1.1, 1.3-1.5, 2.2, 2.3, 3.1-3.4	Takes responsibility for planning, sequencing, and prioritising tasks and own workload, for efficiency and effective outcomes Makes routine decisions, and implements standard procedures for routine tasks, using formal decision- making processes for more complex and non-routine situations Uses familiar digital technologies and systems to access information, search and enter, data and code, present information, and communicate with others, cognisant of data security and safety

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICTWEB420 Write content for web pages	ICAWEB420A Write content for web pages	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICTWEB420 Write content for web pages

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICT Information and Communications Technology Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

write content for web pages that recognises cultural differences and diversity, in developing website content

upload content for a website

remove content on a website.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

outline content features, including clarity, ease of viewing and readability

explain copyright and intellectual property legislation, relating to web page content

summarise the document design, web design and usability

discuss the functions and features of:

micro-content elements, such as headings, highlighted words and link text

style guides, such as cascading style sheets (CSS)

explain the information architecture

summarise the instructional design principles

outline the obligations of merchants and service providers

outline the organisational requirements relating to web page content and user diversity

explain privacy requirements relating to web page content.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the website technologies field of work, and include access to:

copy edit resources

culturally reviewed content

style guides and templates

the website specifications

word-processing and web development software

the organisational documentation, and industry requirements.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICTWEB421 Ensure website content meets technical protocols and standards

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICT Information and Communications Technology Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to ensure content for a website is in accordance with customer specifications, and is compatible with the appropriate technical and infrastructure protocols.

It applies to individuals working in the web development area who are required to populate websites according to clear benchmarks.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Web

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Confirm that content meets the required standards	1.1 Take action to ensure that text-based content meets client needs, and the required style standards 1.2 Confirm that the multimedia-based content meets the business design standards, or the overall look of the website 1.3 Check that the mix between multimedia and text-based content, provides the required level of interaction identified in the project brief 1.4 Test that the content conforms to client expectations and the technology
2. Confirm that the technology supports the content	2.1 Take action to ensure that the protocols required for multimedia content are available 2.2 Check and confirm, that the bandwidth required to support the content is available 2.3 Check and confirm, that the servers support the content and levels of interaction 2.4 Check and confirm, that the plug-ins required to support content are made available 2.5 Test and confirm, that compression techniques support delivery of content
3. Test the content	3.1 Test and confirm that content displays as intended and according to business requirements in target browsers 3.2 Test with beta users that content encourages interaction and content interaction performs as intended and record results 3.3 Test and confirm that plug-ins download with a minimum of steps, complication and time 3.4 Test that interactive tools are available and provide the expected results

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 2.2, 3.1	Identifies and analyses, online information and client specifications, to ensure that all business requirements are met
Writing	3.2	Documents outcomes of tests using industry relevant terminology and recognised symbols
Oral Communication	1.1	Clearly articulates requirements, using the language appropriate to the audience, and participates in a verbal exchange of ideas/solutions
Numeracy	3.3	Uses basic mathematical formula to time technological processes
Navigate the world of work	1.1, 1.2, 3.1	Takes personal responsibility for following explicit and implicit policies, procedures and specifications
Interact with others	1.1, 1.2, 3.2	Elicits feedback and provides feedback to others, in order to improve work practices and processes Selects and uses the appropriate conventions and protocols, when communicating with clients and co-workers in a range of work contexts
Get the work done	1.1, 1.4, 2.1-2.5, 3.1-3.4	Takes responsibility for planning, sequencing and prioritising tasks and own workload, for efficiency and effective outcomes Makes routine decisions and implements standard procedures for routine tasks, using formal decision-making processes for more complex and non-routine situations Uses familiar digital technologies and systems to access information, search and enter, data and code, present information, and communicate with others, cognisant of data security and safety

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICTWEB421 Ensure website content meets technical protocols and standards	ICAWEB421A Ensure website content meets technical protocols and standards	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICTWEB421 Ensure website content meets technical protocols and standards

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICT Information and Communications Technology Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

carry out checks and tests, for a mix of content for a website, to ensure that it meets specifications and standards

check and use, correct streaming and compression techniques

manage the file transfer protocols (FTPs)

test and confirm, content functionality and operability.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

outline the applicability of copyright, privacy and intellectual property to website development

explain common software compression algorithms, and associated technologies

summarise the file transfer protocol (FTP) software protocols

identify and summarise internet protocols

explain the server access security principles and procedures

outline the server operating systems

summarise streaming technologies.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the website technologies field of work and, include access to:

documents detailing organisational style guide or policies

a personal computer, on which software installation may be performed

compression and streaming software

an internet connection

a live network

network components, hardware and software

networked computers

a server, and workstation hardware and software

style guides, and the design brief

technical documentation and installation manuals

software currently used in industry

vendor hardware and software components.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICTWEB422 Ensure website access and useability

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICT Information and Communications Technology Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to apply the principles of accessibility and equity in the context of website development.

It applies to individuals who are proficient communicators and who provide frontline technical support for ensuring that websites are accessible to end users.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Web

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Design a site user test	1.1 Establish the usability test methods 1.2 Identify critical business functions 1.3 Identify the full range of users 1.4 Confirm user expectations through market analysis, business intelligence and customer feedback 1.5 Establish the performance potential of the business, from the business requirements or other approved sources 1.6 Establish the performance measurement and success criteria, to measure actual performance against user expectations 1.7 Test the site when ready and record the outcomes
2. Conduct the user test	2.1 Document the process performance indicators and benchmarks, and disseminate them to a sample group of users 2.2 Assemble a full representative range of users and preferred technologies, to test site features and functions, based on the business specification 2.3 Ensure maximum user satisfaction, through ease of navigation controls and design 2.4 Ensure that user and legal, accessibility, privacy and equity requirements and expectations are met
3. Evaluate the user test	3.1 Collate site performance results and measure them against performance indicators and benchmarks, based on user expectations 3.2 Identify performance shortfalls, and ensure that acceptable performance solutions are developed according to business requirements 3.3 Establish an evaluation feedback mechanism and provide to users
4. Document the results	4.1 Identify solutions to the problems encountered during the testing phase 4.2 Discuss problems with developers and ensure that the solutions are continuously refined 4.3 Ensure that the proposed solutions meet business requirements and user expectations 4.4 Document the final solutions in line with organisational guidelines, and distribute to the appropriate person

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 2.2, 3.1, 3.2, 4.3, 4.4	Analyses and consolidates information and data from a range of sources, against the defined criteria and requirements, and checks for accuracy and completeness
Writing	1.5, 1.6, 1.7, 2.1, 3.1, 3.2, 3.3, 4.4	Accurately records information and prepares correspondence, and documentation, using clear language, and organisational formats and protocols
Oral Communication	1.4, 1.5, 4.2, 4.3	Uses listening and questioning skills to confirm understanding for requirements, participates in a verbal exchange of ideas/solutions, and uses appropriate, detailed and clear language, to address key personnel and website users
Numeracy	3.1, 3.2	Performs mathematical calculations to analyse test and performance data, and statistics
Navigate the world of work	2.2, 2.4, 4.4	Takes personal responsibility for following explicit and implicit policies, procedures and legislative requirements
Interact with others	2.1-2.3, 3.3, 4.4	Selects and uses appropriate conventions and protocols, when communicating with clients and co-workers in a range of work contexts Elicits feedback and provides feedback to others, while testing usability
Get the work done	1.1-1.7, 2.1-2.3, 3.1, 3.2, 4.1-4.3	Takes responsibility for planning, sequencing and prioritising tasks and own workload, for efficiency and effective outcomes Addresses less predictable problems, and initiates standard procedures in response to these problems, applying problem-solving processes in determining solutions Uses familiar digital technologies and systems to access information, search and enter data, and code, present information and communicate with others, cognisant of data security and safety

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICTWEB422 Ensure website access and useability	ICAWEB422A Ensure website access and useability	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICTWEB422 Ensure website access and useability

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICT Information and Communications Technology Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

research user needs

design a valid usability test, and set benchmark metrics

facilitate the test process and document the results

document and propose solutions, to meet user needs and the current, and future, needs of the business.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

explain the principles of accessibility and equity, in the context of website development

outline the technical performance measurement of a typical web site

describe common user testing principles and techniques

outline the following important considerations for a website:

architecture

privacy

security

describe workload metrics, and explain the implications for website design

describe the website design as it applies to:

business process

customer and business liaison

electronic commerce modelling language

outline the organisational policies and procedures relating to website functionality.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the website technologies field of work, and include access to:

analysis software

the e-business website

the organisational policy and procedures

the requirements documentation

a site server

site server software

web servers.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICTWEB423 Ensure dynamic website security

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICT Information and Communications Technology Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to ensure, and maintain, the security of a dynamic commercial website.

It applies to individuals working as website developers responsible for security of dynamic websites, who are proficient communicators and can analyse technical data capably and with efficiency.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Web

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Undertake the risk assessment	1.1 Identify the functionality and features of the website, and confirm these with the client 1.2 Identify security threats, with reference to the functionality of the site and organisational security policy, legislation and standards 1.3 Complete a risk analysis to prioritise the security threats, and identify system vulnerabilities 1.4 Identify resource and budget constraints, and validate with the client as required 1.5 Source the appropriate products, security services and equipment, according to enterprise purchasing policies
2. Secure the operating systems	2.1 Identify operating system (OS) and cross-platform vulnerabilities 2.2 Make the appropriate scripting or configuration adjustments, with reference to the functionality of the site and the security policy 2.3 Identify and rectify weaknesses specific to the OS
3. Secure the site server	3.1 Configure the web server securely, with reference to the required functionality and the security policy 3.2 Review and analyse, server-side scripting with reference to the required functionality and the security policy 3.3 Install firewalls as required 3.4 Establish access control permissions to the server and database
4. Secure data transactions	4.1 Identify data transactions, with reference to the functionality and features of the website 4.2 Identify and apply, the channel protocols related to the requirements 4.3 Install and configure, the payment systems
5. Monitor and document the security framework	5.1 Develop a program of selective independent audits and penetration tests 5.2 Determine the performance benchmarks 5.3 Implement audit and test programs, and record, analyse and report the results 5.4 Make security framework changes based on the test results 5.5 Develop the site-security plan, with reference to the security policy and requirements 5.6 Develop and distribute, related policy and procedures to the client

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.3-1.5, 2.1, 2.3, 3.2, 4.1, 4.2, 5.4	Reads and interprets plans, specifications, computer program interface, and other documentation from a variety of sources, and consolidates information to determine requirements
Writing	1.1, 1.3, 1.4, 2.2, 3.3, 4.3, 5.1, 5.2, 5.3, 5.5, 5.6	Makes adjustments to software scripting, and creates procedural and related workplace documentation, for a specific audience, using clear and detailed language in order to convey explicit information
Oral Communication	1.1, 1.3, 1.4, 5.3, 5.6	Uses listening and questioning skills to confirm understanding for technical, operational and business requirements, participates in a verbal exchange of ideas/solutions, and uses appropriate, detailed and clear language to address the client
Numeracy	1.4, 1.5, 4.3	Undertakes numerical analyses during testing, and calculates, and evaluates system results and performance
Navigate the world of work	1.2, 1.5, 3.1, 3.2, 5.5	Accepts responsibility and ownership of tasks, and makes decisions on completion parameters, and the need for coordination with others Takes personal responsibility for following explicit and implicit policies, procedures and legislative requirements
Interact with others	1.1, 1.4, 5.6	Selects and uses, the appropriate conventions and protocols, when communicating with clients and co-workers in a range of work contexts
Get the work done	1.1-1.5, 2.2, 2.3, 3.2-3.4, 4.3, 5.1-5.5	Takes responsibility for planning, sequencing and prioritising tasks and own workload, for efficiency and effective outcomes Makes routine decisions and implements standard procedures for routine tasks, using formal decision-making processes for more complex and non-routine situations Addresses less predictable problems and initiates standard procedures in response to these problems, applying problem-solving processes in determining a solution Uses familiar digital technologies and systems to access information, search and enter, data and code, present information, and communicate with others, cognisant of data security and safety

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICTWEB423 Ensure dynamic website security	ICAWEB423A Ensure dynamic website security	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICTWEB423 Ensure dynamic website security

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICT Information and Communications Technology Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

determine the client security framework, and its requirements

identify any potential security threats to a website, and document the risk and performance benchmarks

develop and implement, strategies to secure a dynamic website.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

summarise the Australian Computer Society Code of Ethics

explain a client business domain, its structure, function and organisation, including the organisational issues surrounding security

identify and outline the legislation, regulations, and codes of practice pertinent to website information, including:

copyright

intellectual property

privacy

ethics

outline current industry-accepted hardware and software products

describe desktop applications and operating systems (OS), as they relate to website security

explain the functions and features of:

automated intrusion detection software

authentication and access control

common stored account payment systems

cryptography

common gateway interface (CGI) scripts

generic secure protocols

stored-value payment systems

explain the implications of network address translation (NAT), related to:

securing internal, internet protocol (IP) addresses

buffer overruns and stack smashing

operating system deficiencies

the protocol stack for internet communications

physical web server security, particularly remote

describe the advantages, and disadvantages, of using a range of security features

identify and describe, host security threats.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the website technologies field of work, and include access to:

a dynamic website

a security plan

the user requirements

all relevant legislation, standards and organisational requirements.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICTWEB424 Evaluate and select a web hosting service

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICT Information and Communications Technology Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to determine a client’s current and future internet service providers (ISPs) needs.

It applies to individuals working in information and communications technology (ICT) who take responsibility for comparing and evaluating internet service provider (ISP) services, and are technically adept and proficient communicators, with a broad knowledge of internet technologies.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Web

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Select the ISP	1.1 Review comparable characteristics of a range of hosting services 1.2 Review the client usage, and ensure that email and mailing list services are flexible enough, to meet current and future business needs 1.3 Review the support service standards, to ensure that they meet the business needs 1.4 Ensure that the ISP hosting service has sufficient data capacity to cover partial outages 1.5 Determine the availability of security technologies 1.6 Determine the availability of scripting languages 1.7 Evaluate optional server applications for advanced web business functions 1.8 Confirm the client selection criteria, and select the ISP hosting service that best matches the criteria
2. Ensure guarantee of a permanent online presence	2.1 Establish that the web-hosting service has systems in place to monitor server performance and availability 2.2 Negotiate the escalation procedures and performance standards with the ISP 2.3 Establish that the security and backup procedures are articulated, and that they meet business needs
3. Ensure that the web host meets the technical requirements	3.1 Take action to ensure that the operating system supports the preferred business development software, applications, extensions and databases 3.2 Establish that the web-host servers support dynamic websites, using the preferred business technologies 3.3 Establish that the web host provides current, and future, disk space requirements 3.4 Establish that site-analysis reports are available, and are flexible enough to meet business needs 3.5 Establish that security systems and payment technologies, meet business and customer expectations, and requirements
4. Benchmark performance and test it against specified criteria	4.1 Test the performance of the ISP during on and off peak times, and record the outcomes 4.2 Establish that email and mailing services have backup procedures in place, and are protected from damage, erasure or unwanted damage 4.3 Take action to ensure that the support services perform according to business needs

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1-1.8, 2.1, 3.1	Reads and interprets specifications, the computer program interface, and documentation from a variety of sources, and consolidates information to determine requirements
Writing	2.1-2.3, 3.5, 4.1	Prepares documentation expressing ideas, explores complex issues, and is constructed logically, succinctly and accurately
Oral Communication	2.2, 2.3	Uses listening and questioning skills to confirm understanding for all business requirements, participates in a verbal exchange of ideas/solutions, and uses appropriate, detailed and clear language to address client and ISP personnel
Numeracy	1.4	Uses mathematical formulas to estimate data storage requirements
Interact with others	2.2, 2.3	Selects and uses, the appropriate conventions and protocols, when communicating with clients and co-workers in a range of work contexts
Get the work done	1.1, 1.2, 1.4, 1.8, 2.1-2.3, 3.1-3.5, 4.1-4.3	Takes responsibility for planning, sequencing and prioritising tasks and own workload, for efficiency and effective outcomes Makes routine decisions and implements standard procedures for routine tasks, using formal decision-making processes for more complex and non-routine situations Addresses less predictable problems and initiates standard procedures in response to these problems, applying problem-solving processes in determining a solution Uses familiar digital technologies and systems to access information, search and enter, data and code, present information, and communicate with others, cognisant of data security and safety

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICTWEB424 Evaluate and select a web hosting service	ICAWEB424A Evaluate and select a web hosting service	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICTWEB424 Evaluate and select a web hosting service

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICT Information and Communications Technology Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

assess client needs for the current and future needs of the business

select an internet service provider (ISP)

evaluate the web hosting service by ensuring that:

the price meets the client’s budgetary requirements

the security and technical requirements of the business are met

comply with the client benchmarks, and test

monitor the performance of the ISP during on and off peak times.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

outline different web hosting service provision options, and their scalability

discuss internet security issues

explain the operating systems used by ISPs

summarise performance expectations from customers and end users

outline server technologies

summarise web hosting services, and performance benchmarks.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the website technologies field of work, and include access to:

hosting plans, prices and service agreements

the current technology underpinning the ISP, and the services offered

a business plan, outlining the future directions for the business.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICTWEB425 Apply structured query language to extract and manipulate data

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICT Information and Communications Technology Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to produce structured query language (SQL) statements to work with server-side scripts, enabling web designers to interact with web server databases.

It applies to individuals who are employed as web designers responsible for creating server-side interaction with dynamic web pages, using SQL as a means of communicating with the database.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Web

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Identify SQL requirements from the specification documentation	1.1 Determine the information to be used from the database 1.2 Identify the tables that hold this information 1.3 Identify the primary keys in these tables 1.4 Identify the relationships between these tables, including foreign keys
2. Create a relational database	2.1 Create tables in a database, using SQL statements 2.2 Identify the primary and foreign keys for database table 2.3 Manipulate the data in a database, using SQL statements 2.4 Query the database, using SQL statements 2.5 Write SQL statements to retrieve information from the database
3. Test SQL results	3.1 Construct test data to test SQL statements 3.2 Determine the expected results in order to verify SQL statements 3.3 Verify the result of the constructed SQL statements, against the expected results

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1-1.4, 2.3, 3.3	Analyses and consolidates information and data from a range of sources, against the defined criteria and requirements, and checks for accuracy and completeness
Writing	2.1, 2.3-2.5, 3.1, 3.2	Uses clear and specialised technical syntax when creating codes and interrogating databases Prepares and produces, diagrammatic models and associated documents, that that convey complex relationships between data
Get the work done	1.1, 1.4, 2.2-2.5, 3.2, 3.3	Takes responsibility for planning, sequencing and prioritising tasks and own workload, for efficiency and effective outcomes Makes routine decisions and implements standard procedures for routine tasks, using formal decision-making processes for more complex and non-routine situations Addresses less predictable problems and initiates standard procedures in response to these problems, applying problem-solving processes in determining a solution Uses familiar digital technologies and systems to access information, search and enter, data and code, present information, and communicate with others, cognisant of data security and safety

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICTWEB425 Apply structured query language to extract and manipulate data	ICAWEB425A Apply structured query language to extract and manipulate data	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICTWEB425 Apply structured query language to extract and manipulate data

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICT Information and Communications Technology Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

identify structured query language (SQL) requirements

create the databases and tables

generate queries for one or more tables, to provide the required data

add, modify and delete records from the database tables

test and verify SQL statements.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

explain the features and application of the following aggregate functions:

MIN

MAX

SUM

AVG

COUNT

COUNT(*)

explain the features and application of the following clause functions:

GROUP BY

HAVING

ORDER BY

dates and times

SQL data types

numbers

text

SQL syntax:

SELECT

FROM

WHERE

LIKE

DISTINCT

CREATE

ALTER TABLE

INSERT INTO

UPDATE

DELETE

DROP

describe the principles of "combining and/or condition" in SQL statements and Boolean operators:

IN and BETWEEN conditional operators

mathematical operators

table joins (relationships).

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the website technologies field of work, and include access to:

a development environment

a database server.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICTWEB429 Create a markup language document to specification

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICT Information and Communications Technology Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to use a text editor to design, create and save web pages to a given specification, rather than using an authoring tool.

It applies to individuals working as web designers and developers who interpret client briefs, generate a framework for internet information, and are resourceful in their application of technology in using a markup language.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Web

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Analyse the specifications and requirements	1.1 Determine the uses and audience of the document 1.2 Determine the appropriate markup language, based on the document’s uses and audience, and current industry best practice 1.3 Determine the document structure
2. Create the document structure	2.1 Create and assign the basic elements of the document, taking into account accessibility 2.2 Mark-up the sections of the document required to describe the structure
3. Incorporate the web page components	3.1 Identify the web page components 3.2 Evaluate suitable web page components 3.3 Include the required web page components
4. Validate the documents	4.1 Validate the markup language document, against the specifications and record the outcomes 4.2 Validate the markup language document in different browsers for compatibility, and record the outcomes

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.3, 4.1, 4.2	Identifies, analyses and evaluates instructions, technical information and industry guidelines, to determine client needs and business requirements
Writing	1.3, 2.1, 2.2, 3.3, 4.1, 4.2	Produces documentation for a specific audience, using clear and detailed language in order to convey explicit information Writes, edits and proofreads documents to ensure clarity of meaning, and accuracy and consistency of information
Navigate the world of work	1.2	Takes personal responsibility for following explicit and implicit policies, procedures and industry best practice
Get the work done	1.1, 1.2, 3.1, 3.2, 4.1, 4.2	Takes responsibility for planning, sequencing and prioritising tasks and own workload, for efficiency and effective outcomes Makes routine decisions and implements standard procedures for routine tasks, using formal decision-making processes for more complex and non-routine situations Addresses less predictable problems and initiates standard procedures in response to these problems, applying problem-solving processes in determining a solution Uses familiar digital technologies and systems to access information, search and enter, data and code, present information, and communicate with others, cognisant of data security and safety

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICTWEB429 Create a markup language document to specification	ICAWEB429A Create a markup language document to specification	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICTWEB429 Create a markup language document to specification

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICT Information and Communications Technology Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

design, create and save a document using a markup language, without using an automated code generation program

use a text editor for generating the markup language code for use on common web browsers

validate the markup document against the standards set by the World Wide Web Consortium (W3C).

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

recognise and outline the use of markup languages including:

dynamic hypertext markup language (DHTML)

hypertext markup language (HTML)

standard generalised markup language (SGML)

virtual reality modelling language (VRML)

extensible hypertext markup language (XHTML)

extensible markup language (XML)

identify and describe, standards applicable to a markup language

summarise the range of available web browsers and their accessibility

identify and describe, the issues of accessibility.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the website technologies field of work, and include access to:

an organisational style guide or policy

all user requirements

a text editor

a range of browsers

the internet, to validate the markup.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICTWEB502 Create dynamic web pages

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICT Information and Communications Technology Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to produce both server and client-side content.

It applies to individuals working as web developers who are responsible for creating dynamic pages to provide interaction between the user and the website. They use highly developed technical and analytical skills when developing the user-website interface.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Web

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Identify the client and server-side dynamic content	1.1 Review the technical requirements 1.2 Identify the sections of the website, requiring client-side dynamic content 1.3 Identify the sections of the website, requiring server-side dynamic content 1.4 Select the appropriate languages and technology to meet the requirements
2. Create the dynamic content	2.1 Create pages using the appropriate languages 2.2 Ensure that the code conforms to current industry best practice and standards
3. Test the dynamic pages	3.1 Test the website in a variety of browsers 3.2 Ensure that the required dynamic content functions according to the specified requirements

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1, 3.2	Critically analyses documentation from a variety of sources and records, and consolidates information, to determine requirements
Writing	2.1	Prepares documentation expressing ideas, explores complex issues, and is constructed logically, succinctly and accurately Writes and edits computer code, and technical data, to ensure the correct syntax and accuracy
Navigate the world of work	2.1	Takes full responsibility for following policies, procedures and standards
Get the work done	1.2-1.4, 3.1, 3.2	Accepts responsibility for planning and sequencing complex tasks and workload, negotiating key aspects with others and taking into account capabilities, efficiencies and effectiveness Applies systematic and analytical decision-making processes for complex and non-routine situations Uses and investigates new digital technologies, and applications, to manage and manipulate data, and to communicate effectively with others in a secure and stable digital environment

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICTWEB502 Create dynamic web pages	ICAWEB502A Create dynamic web pages	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICTWEB502 Create dynamic web pages

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICT Information and Communications Technology Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

produce dynamic web pages that include both client and server-side dynamic content

create efficient and effective code to meet technical requirements

test the website and code in a variety of web browsers.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

explain web-programming concepts, including:

authentication and web security

hypertext transfer protocol (HTTP)

session management

stateless programming

identify and describe internet technologies including:

programming control structures

object-oriented programming

recognise and outline various web browsers.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the website technologies field of work, and include access to:

a development environment

a server

a database server

browsers.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICTWEB510 Analyse information and assign meta tags

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICT Information and Communications Technology Training Package Version 1.0.

Application

This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to analyse material and assign meta tags to ensure the accurate and consistent retrieval of information by users.

It applies to individuals in a range of information and communications technology (ICT) areas that use various techniques and software to create, update and enhance meta tags according to industry guidelines and client specifications.

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.

Unit Sector

Web

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Identify the requirements for meta tags	1.1 Identify the scope and uses of material from the previous and current business, and the stakeholder requirements process 1.2 Determine the appropriate type and structure of meta tags, taking into account identified client needs, requirements and expectations 1.3 Identify and incorporate, new or contemporary client requirements, and expectations
2. Analyse the material	2.1 Use the analysis and the description tools, standards, precedents and techniques that are appropriate, given the nature of the material 2.2 Ensure that the analysis of the subject content of the material reflects expected client usage requirements 2.3 Clearly distinguish significant information from minor information 2.4 Ensure that the concepts derived from the analysis of the material are appropriate to the business requirements, and the intended use
3. Create meta tags	3.1 Develop meta tags using appropriate software 3.2 Ensure that meta tags represent the concepts appropriately, depending on the overall purpose, and intended use, of the material 3.3 Ensure that the meta tags conform to general conventions and to the business rules 3.4 Develop the reference structure of descriptors, where required, to display relationships to assist clients 3.5 Enhance the meta tags to meet identified client needs
4. Test and monitor meta tagging practices and procedures	4.1 Test meta tagging of material and make changes, if necessary 4.2 Regularly review meta tagging practices and procedures, to ensure that client needs are being met 4.3 Regularly review industry developments in meta tagging and take the appropriate action to improve practices 4.4 Check meta tags regularly for internal consistency and compliance with the established structure, rules and authorities

Foundation Skills

This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.

Skill	Performance Criteria	Description
Reading	1.1-1.3, 2.1-2.4, 3.2, 3.5, 4.2-4.4	Reads and interprets plans, specifications, computer program data, and other documentation from a variety of sources, and consolidates information to determine requirements
Writing	3.1, 3.4, 3.5, 4.1, 4.3	Prepares documentation expressing ideas, explores complex issues, and is constructed logically, succinctly and accurately Writes and edits, computer code and technical data, ensuring the correct syntax and accuracy
Navigate the world of work	3.3, 4.2, 4.3, 4.4	Takes full responsibility for following policies, procedures, industry standards and legislative requirements, and identifies the organisational implications of new regulations
Get the work done	1.1-1.3, 2.1-2.4, 3.2-3.4, 4.1, 4.2	Accepts responsibility for planning and sequencing complex tasks and workload, negotiating key aspects with others and taking into account capabilities, efficiencies and effectiveness Monitors progress of plans and schedules, and reviews, and changes them to meet new demands and priorities Applies systematic and analytical decision-making processes for complex and non-routine situations Uses and investigates new digital technologies and applications, to manage and manipulate data, and to communicate effectively with others, in a secure and stable digital environment

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title current version	Code and title previous version	Comments	Equivalence status
ICTWEB510 Analyse information and assign meta tags	ICAWEB510A Analyse information and assign meta-tags	Updated to meet Standards for Training Packages	Equivalent unit

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

Assessment Requirements for ICTWEB510 Analyse information and assign meta tags

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This version first released with ICT Information and Communications Technology Training Package Version 1.0.

Performance Evidence

Evidence of the ability to:

analyse and identify the meta tag requirements

use software to create and test meta tags

update meta tags in line with the client needs and/or industry developments.

Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least once.

Knowledge Evidence

To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:

explain the business conventions and rules for applying meta tags

summarise the client business domain

outline data modelling

explain database management system (DBMS) fundamentals

summarise the decision support systems

summarise document indexing and search engines

outline the functions and features of databases

summarise metadata standards, including Dublin Core and simple hypertext markup language (HTML) ontology extensions

describe how reference structure of descriptors can assist clients.

Assessment Conditions

Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must be typical of those experienced in the website technologies field of work, and include access to:

business and client information and materials

the metadata software

the project-related documentation.

Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.

Links

Companion volumes available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

MSACMT270A Use sustainable energy practices

Modification History

Not applicable.

Unit Descriptor

Unit descriptor	This unit covers the skills needed to use and make improvements in sustainable energy practices in production, maintenance and logistics.

Application of the Unit

Application of the unit	In a typical scenario, a team member will be aware of energy use. Some of this energy use is necessary but typically a large part of energy use is unnecessary waste and so should be eliminated. The team member will observe energy use and ensure it is according to the organisation's plans and will also engage in continuous improvement for energy use. This unit requires the application of skills associated with interpreting workplace information on energy use and using procedures and technology to minimise energy use and waste.

Licensing/Regulatory Information

Not applicable.

Pre-Requisites

Prerequisite units

Employability Skills Information

Employability skills	This unit contains employability skills.

Elements and Performance Criteria Pre-Content

Elements describe the essential outcomes of a unit of competency.	Performance Criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the Element. Where bold italicised text is used, further information is detailed in the required skills and knowledge section and the Range Statement. Assessment of performance is to be consistent with the Evidence Guide.

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
1. Identify energy use	1.1. Identify energy consuming processes in relation to own work 1.2. Recognise the type/source of energy consumed
2. Follow energy conservation plans	2.1. Check energy use in accordance with conservation plans 2.2. Identify most efficient or appropriate equipment or procedures to comply with conservation plans 2.3. Identify any uses which do not comply with conservation plans 2.4. Take action in accordance with procedures to bring energy use back in line with conservation plans
3. Improve energy use	3.1. Note any waste of energy use 3.2. Recommend improvements to energy use

Required Skills and Knowledge

REQUIRED SKILLS AND KNOWLEDGE
This section describes the skills and knowledge required for this unit.
Required skills
analysis basic mathematics communication problem solving
Required knowledge
types and sources of energy relevant to the process basic principles of energy efficiency process needs for energy

Evidence Guide

EVIDENCE GUIDE
The Evidence Guide provides advice on assessment and must be read in conjunction with the performance criteria, required skills and knowledge, the range statement and the assessment guidelines for this training package.
Overview of assessment requirements	The team member will be able to identify the energy use of any/all parts of the process and recommend better ways of using it.
What are the specific resource requirements for this unit?	Access to an organisation seeking to improve its energy usage.
What critical aspects of evidence are required to demonstrate competency in this unit?	Evidence of conformance to energy usage plans and suggestions for improvement should be available.
In what context should assessment occur?	Assessment needs to be conducted in an organisation where energy is a significant cost component or by use of a project, simulation or case study.
Are there any other units which could or should be assessed with this unit or which relate directly to this unit?	This unit is related to: MSACMT271A Use sustainable environmental practices - which covers general environmental practices, and MSACMT670A Develop and manage sustainable energy practices - which covers higher level aspects.
What method of assessment should apply?	Assessors must be satisfied that the person can consistently perform the unit as a whole, as defined by the Elements, Performance Criteria, skills and knowledge. A holistic approach should be taken to the assessment. Assessors should gather sufficient, fair, valid, reliable, authentic and current evidence from a range of sources. Sources of evidence may include direct observation, reports from supervisors, peers and colleagues, project work, samples, organisation records and questioning. Assessment should not require language, literacy or numeracy skills beyond those required for the unit. The assessee will have access to all techniques, procedures, information, resources and aids which would normally be available in the workplace. The method of assessment should be discussed and agreed with the assessee prior to the commencement of the assessment.
What evidence is required for demonstration of consistent performance?	Evidence should be available from the daily routine of the job to show that there is consistent performance.

Range Statement

RANGE STATEMENT
The range statement relates to the unit of competency as a whole. It allows for different work environments and situations that may affect performance. Bold italicised wording, if used in the performance criteria, is detailed below. Essential operating conditions that may be present with training and assessment (depending on the work situation, needs of the candidate, accessibility of the item, and local industry and regional contexts) may also be included.
Waste	Waste (also known as muda in the Toyota Production System and its derivatives) is any activity which does not contribute to customer benefit/features in the product. Within manufacturing, categories of waste include: excess production and early production delays movement and transport poor process design inventory inefficient performance of a process making defective items. Waste for this unit may include activities which do not yield any benefit to the organisation or any benefit to the organisations customers.
Energy	Energy is used to mean all sources of energy used by the process be it electricity, gas or mobile transport fuel. The uses of the energy will also be potentially wide and include heating and cooling, lighting, moving materials (including pumps and conveyors), modifying materials (including cutting, forming, weaving, knitting, reacting, moulding, extruding, mixing), generating pressure/vacuum or providing motive power for equipment and transport.

Unit Sector(s)

Unit Sector	CM Tools

Co-requisite units

Co-requisite units

Functional area

Functional Area

MSACMT271A Use sustainable environmental practices

Modification History

Not applicable.

Unit Descriptor

Unit descriptor	This unit covers the knowledge and skills needed to use and make improvements in sustainable environmental practices in production, maintenance and logistics.

Application of the Unit

Application of the unit	In a typical scenario, a team member will be aware of environmental resource use. Some of this is necessary but typically a large part of environmental resource use may be unnecessary waste and so should be eliminated or at least minimised. The team member will observe resource use and ensure it is according to the organisations plans and will also engage in continuous improvements for resource use. This unit requires the application of skills associated with applying workplace information on use of resources and managing own application of technology and workplace practices to minimise use and waste of resources.

Licensing/Regulatory Information

Not applicable.

Pre-Requisites

Prerequisite units

Employability Skills Information

Employability skills	This unit contains employability skills.

Elements and Performance Criteria Pre-Content

Elements describe the essential outcomes of a unit of competency.	Performance Criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the Element. Where bold italicised text is used, further information is detailed in the required skills and knowledge section and the Range Statement. Assessment of performance is to be consistent with the Evidence Guide.

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
1. Identify resource use	1.1. Identify resources used by processes in area of responsibility 1.2. Recognise the type/source of resource used 1.3. Identify sources of information to expand knowledge and understanding of resources used
2. Comply with environmental obligations	2.1. Follow procedures to ensure there is no breach of environmental regulations/licence conditions 2.2. Identify situations related to job which may lead to a breach of regulations/licence conditions
3. Follow resource conservation plans	3.1. Identify resource conservation plan/section of plan relevant to area of responsibility 3.2. Identify most efficient or appropriate equipment or processes to comply with conservation plans 3.3. Check resource use is in accordance with plan 3.4. Sort/recycle waste according to procedures 3.5. Note any uses which do not comply with plan 3.6. Take appropriate action specified in plan to bring resource use back in line with plans 3.7. Apply energy conservation plans to the use of equipment and tools
4. Improve resource use	4.1. Identify waste of resource use 4.2. Recommend improvements to resource use

Required Skills and Knowledge

REQUIRED SKILLS AND KNOWLEDGE
This section describes the skills and knowledge required for this unit.
Required skills
analysis basic mathematics communication problem solving
Required knowledge
the '3 Rs' - reduce, re-use, recycle regulatory/licensing requirements relevant to the process/plant types and sources of resource basic principles of resource efficiency process needs for resource

Evidence Guide

EVIDENCE GUIDE
The Evidence Guide provides advice on assessment and must be read in conjunction with the performance criteria, required skills and knowledge, the range statement and the assessment guidelines for this training package.
Overview of assessment requirements	The competent team member will be able to identify the resource use of any/all part/s of the process and recommend better ways of using it.
What are the specific resource requirements for this unit?	Access to an organisation seeking to improve its resource usage.
What critical aspects of evidence are required to demonstrate competency in this unit?	Evidence of conformance to resource usage plans and suggestions for improvement should be available.
In what context should assessment occur?	Assessment needs to be conducted in an organisation where resource is a significant cost component or by project, simulation or case study.
Are there any other units which could or should be assessed with this unit or which relate directly to this unit?	This unit is related to: MSACMT270A Use sustainable energy practices - which covers energy specifically, and MSACMT671A Develop and manage sustainable environmental practices - which covers the higher skill levels.
What method of assessment should apply?	Assessors must be satisfied that the person can consistently perform the unit as a whole, as defined by the elements, Performance Criteria, skills and knowledge. A holistic approach should be taken to the assessment. Assessors should gather sufficient, fair, valid, reliable, authentic and current evidence from a range of sources. Sources of evidence may include direct observation, reports from supervisors, peers and colleagues, project work, samples, organisation records and questioning. Assessment should not require language, literacy or numeracy skills beyond those required for the unit. The assessee will have access to all techniques, procedures, information, resources and aids which would normally be available in the workplace. The method of assessment should be discussed and agreed with the assessee prior to the commencement of the assessment.
What evidence is required for demonstration of consistent performance?	Evidence should be available from the daily routine of the job to show that there is consistent performance.

Range Statement

RANGE STATEMENT
The range statement relates to the unit of competency as a whole. It allows for different work environments and situations that may affect performance. Bold italicised wording, if used in the performance criteria, is detailed below. Essential operating conditions that may be present with training and assessment (depending on the work situation, needs of the candidate, accessibility of the item, and local industry and regional contexts) may also be included.
Waste	Waste (also known as muda in the Toyota Production System and its derivatives) is any activity which does not contribute to customer benefit/features in the product. Within manufacturing, categories of waste include: excess production and early production delays movement and transport poor process design inventory inefficient performance of a process making defective items. Waste for this unit may include activities which do not yield any benefit to the organisation or any benefit to the organisations customers.
Necessary waste	Necessary waste is any activity or cost which does not contribute directly to customer benefit/feature in the product, and which cannot be avoided (for example regulatory compliance and fixed costs). Necessary waste cannot be eliminated but should be managed.
Unnecessary waste	Unnecessary waste is any activity or cost which does not contribute directly to customer benefit/features in the product and can be avoided. Unnecessary waste should be eliminated as quickly as practical.
Resource	Resource is used to mean resources used by the process be it raw materials, components, process water, cooling water, cleaning water and so on.
Recognise	Recognition of type of resource is at an appropriate level for the person and the area and includes things like recognising steam/electric heating, cooling water/refrigerated cooling, raw materials waste materials.

Unit Sector(s)

Unit Sector	CM Tools

Co-requisite units

Co-requisite units

Functional area

Functional Area

MSAENV272B Participate in environmentally sustainable work practices

Modification History

Not applicable.

Unit Descriptor

Unit descriptor	This competency covers the outcomes required to effectively measure current resource use and carry out improvements including those reducing negative environmental impacts of work practices. This unit is based on the sustainability guideline standard GCSSUS01A Participate in environmentally sustainable work practices.

Application of the Unit

Application of the unit	This competency applies to operators/team members who are required to follow procedures so as to work in an environmentally sustainable manner. This ensures regulatory compliance and also aims at minimising environmental risks and maximises the environmental performance of the process and the organisation. It includes: Resources used Potential environmental hazards Improving environmental performance (within scope of competency and authority). This competency applies to all sectors of the manufacturing industry and members of its value chain. It may also be applied to all sections of an organisation, including office, warehouse etc. This unit will need to be appropriately contextualised as it is applied across an organisation and across different industry sectors.

Licensing/Regulatory Information

Not applicable.

Pre-Requisites

Prerequisite units	This unit has no prerequisites

Employability Skills Information

Employability skills	This unit contains employability skills.

Elements and Performance Criteria Pre-Content

Elements describe the essential outcomes of a unit of competency.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element. Where bold italicised text is used, further information is detailed in the required skills and knowledge section and the range statement. Assessment of performance is to be consistent with the evidence guide.

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
1. Identify current resource use and environmental issues.	1.1. Identify workplace environmental and resource efficiency issues. 1.2. Identify resources used in own work role. 1.3. Measure and record current usage of resources using appropriate techniques. 1.4. Identify and report workplace environmental hazards to appropriate personnel.
2. Comply with environmental regulations.	2.1. Follow procedures to ensure compliance. 2.2. Report environmental incidents to appropriate personnel.
3. Seek opportunities to improve environmental practices and resource efficiency.	3.1. Follow enterprise plans to improve environmental practices and resource efficiency. 3.2. Make suggestions for improvements to workplace practices in own work area.

Required Skills and Knowledge

REQUIRED SKILLS AND KNOWLEDGE
This section describes the skills and knowledge required for this unit.
Required skills
Required skills include the ability to: report as required by procedures follow procedures and instructions and respond to change ask questions and seek clarifications relating to work requirements Reading and writing is required in order to interpretrequired procedures and complete required workplace forms/reports. Numeracy is required to interpret numeric workplace information, readings and measurements, handle data as required and complete numeric components of workplace forms/reports.
Required knowledge
Competency includes sufficient knowledge to: have a basic understanding of sustainability know the environmental hazards/risks, resource use and inefficiencies associated with own workplace (at an appropriate level) know the relevant environmental and resource efficiency systems and procedures for own work area know the impact of laws and regulations to a level relevant to the work context

Evidence Guide

EVIDENCE GUIDE
The Evidence Guide provides advice on assessment and must be read in conjunction with the performance criteria, required skills and knowledge, range statement and the Assessment Guidelines for the Training Package.
Overview of assessment	A person who demonstrates competence in this unit must be able to provide evidence of the ability to follow workplace procedures according to instructions given and to participate in the improvement of environmental and resource efficient work practices at own level of responsibility. Evidence must be strictly relevant to the particular workplace role.
Critical aspects for assessment and evidence required to demonstrate competency in this unit	It is essential that competence is demonstrated in the knowledge and skills defined in this unit. These may include the ability to: identify and measure resources used in their job identify situations likely to lead to an environmental incident follow procedures related to environmental performance. Consistent performance should be demonstrated. For example, look to see that: work is routinely to procedures the minimum of resources is used consistent with the job requirements, good practice and the procedures.
Context of and specific resources for assessment	Assessors must be satisfied that the person can consistently perform the unit as a whole, as defined by the Elements, Performance Criteria and skills and knowledge. Depending on the selected methods of assessment access may be required to: workplace procedures and plans documentation in relation to production, waste, overheads, hazard control/management reports from supervisors/managers case study/scenarios
Method of assessment	A holistic approach should be taken to the assessment. Competence in this unit may be assessed: by demonstration in the workplace using targeted questioning for appropriate portions by use of a suitable simulation and/or a range of case studies/scenarios by a combination of these techniques. In all cases it is expected that practical assessment will be combined with targeted questioning to assess the underpinning knowledge and theoretical assessment will be combined with appropriate practical/simulation or similar assessment.
Guidance information for assessment	Assessors need to be aware of any cultural issues that may affect responses to questions. Assessment processes and techniques must be culturally appropriate and appropriate to the oracy, language and literacy capacity of the assessee and the work being performed.

Range Statement

RANGE STATEMENT
The range statement relates to the unit of competency as a whole. It allows for different work environments and situations that may affect performance. Bold italicised wording, if used in the performance criteria, is detailed below. Essential operating conditions that may be present with training and assessment (depending on the work situation, needs of the candidate, accessibility of the item, and local industry and regional contexts) may also be included.
Procedures	All operations are performed in accordance with procedures including all relevant workplace procedures, work instructions, temporary instructions and relevant industry and government codes and standards.
Environmental and resource efficiency issues	Environmental and resource efficiency issues include minimisation of environmental risks and maximisation of opportunities to improve business environmental performance and to promote more efficient production and consumption of natural resources, for example by: minimisation of waste, through implementation of the waste management hierarchy efficient and effective use of energy and other resources seeking alternative sources of energy efficient use of materials and appropriate disposal of waste use of controls to minimise the risk of environmental damage from hazardous substances efficient water use reducing emissions life cycle analysis applied to issues such as energy supply, materials, transport, production
Measure	Measure should be interpreted in a manner consistent with the scope of the job and may include things like: counting the number of items entering/leaving a work area reading indicators in the work area obtaining relevant information from support personnel other simple means
Appropriate techniques	Appropriate techniques include: material fed to/consumed by plant/equipment plant meters and gauges job cards including kanbans examination of invoices from suppliers measurements made under different conditions examination of relevant information and data.
Compliance	Compliance includes meeting relevant federal, state and local government laws, by-laws, regulations and mandated codes of practice. It also includes any codes and standards that the enterprise applies voluntarily.
Incidents	Incidents include: breaches or potential breaches of regulations occurrences outside of standard procedure which may lead to lower environmental performance.
Enterprise plans	Enterprise plans include: documented policies and procedures work plans to minimise waste, increase efficiency of water/energy use, minimise environmental hazards
Suggestions	Suggestions include ideas that help to: prevent and minimise environmental risks and maximise opportunities reduce emissions of greenhouse gases reduce use of non-renewable resources improve energy efficiency increase use of renewable, recyclable, reusable and recoverable resources reduce waste increasing the reusability/recyclability of wastes/products reduce water usage and/or water wastage.

Unit Sector(s)

Unit sector

Competency field

Competency field	Competitive manufacturing tools

Co-requisite units

Co-requisite units

MSAENV472B Implement and monitor environmentally sustainable work practices

Modification History

Not applicable.

Unit Descriptor

Unit descriptor	This competency covers the outcomes required to effectively analyse the workplace in relation to environmentally sustainable work practices and to implement improvements and monitor their effectiveness. This unit is based on the sustainability guideline standard GCSSUS02A Implement and monitor environmentally sustainable work practices.

Application of the Unit

Application of the unit	This competency applies to those who have responsibility for a specific area of work or who lead a work group or team. It addresses the knowledge, processes and techniques necessary to implement and monitor environmentally sustainable work practices, including the development of processes and tools. It includes: Identifying areas for improvement Developing plans to make improvements Implementing and monitoring improvements in environmental performance. This competency applies to all sectors of the manufacturing industry and members of its value chain. It may also be applied to all sections of an organisation, including office, warehouse etc. This unit will need to be appropriately contextualised as it is applied across an organisation and across different industry sectors.

Licensing/Regulatory Information

Not applicable.

Pre-Requisites

Prerequisite units	This unit has no prerequisites

Employability Skills Information

Employability skills	This unit contains employability skills.

Elements and Performance Criteria Pre-Content

Elements describe the essential outcomes of a unit of competency.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element. Where bold italicised text is used, further information is detailed in the required skills and knowledge section and the range statement. Assessment of performance is to be consistent with the evidence guide.

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
1. Investigate current practices in relation to resource usage.	1.1 Identify environmental regulations applying to the enterprise. 1.2 Assess procedures for assessing compliance with environmental regulations. 1.3 Collect information on environmental and resource efficiency systems and procedures, and provide to the work group where appropriate. 1.4 Measure and record current resource usage by members of the work group. 1.5 Analyse and record current purchasing strategies. 1.6 Analyse current work processes to access information and data and assist in identifying areas for improvement.
2. Set targets for improvements.	2.1 Seek input from stakeholders, key personnel and specialists. 2.2 Access external sources of information and data as required. 2.3 Evaluate alternative solutions to workplace environmental issues. 2.4 Set efficiency targets.
3. Implement performance improvement strategies.	3.1 Source techniques/tools to assist in achieving targets. 3.2 Apply continuous improvement strategies to own work area of responsibility and communicate ideas and possible solutions to the work group and management. 3.3 Integrate environmental and resource efficiency improvement plans for own work group with other operational activities and implement them. 3.4 Seek suggestions and ideas about environmental and resource efficiency management from stakeholders and act upon them where appropriate. 3.5 Implement costing strategies to fully value environmental assets.
4. Monitor performance.	4.1 Document outcomes and communicate reports on targets to key personnel and stakeholders. 4.2 Evaluate strategies. 4.3 Set new targets and investigate and apply new tools and strategies. 4.4 Promote successful strategies and reward participants where possible.

Required Skills and Knowledge

REQUIRED SKILLS AND KNOWLEDGE
This section describes the skills and knowledge required for this unit.
Required skills
Required skills include: using relevant environmental and resource efficiency systems, tools and procedures applying quality assurance systems relevant to own work area applying relevant supply chain procedures measurement and calculation techniques communication/consultation skills to ensure information is supplied to the work group Reading and writing is required to comprehend documentation and interpret environmental and energy efficiency requirements and to document and maintain records Numeracy is required to interpret numeric workplace information, readings and measurements, handle data as required and complete numeric components of workplace forms/reports.
Required knowledge
Required knowledge includes: how to access and use relevant environmental and resource efficiency systems, tools and procedures understanding of best practice approaches relevant to own area of responsibility strategies to maximise opportunities and minimise impacts relevant to own work area relevant environmental and resource efficiency issues specific to industry practices methods for measuring and calculating resource usage

Evidence Guide

EVIDENCE GUIDE
The Evidence Guide provides advice on assessment and must be read in conjunction with the performance criteria, required skills and knowledge, range statement and the Assessment Guidelines for the Training Package.
Overview of assessment	A person who demonstrates competence in this unit must be able to provide evidence of the ability to implement and monitor integrated environmental and resource efficiency management policies and procedures within an organisation.
Critical aspects for assessment and evidence required to demonstrate competency in this unit	It is essential that competence is demonstrated in the knowledge and skills defined in this unit. These may include the ability to: monitor and investigate current resource usage develop plans to improve sustainability implement environmental improvements. Consistent performance should be demonstrated. For example, look to see that: environmental performance is routinely monitored and investigated areas for improvements are followed through and the implemented changes are in turn monitored and investigated.
Context of and specific resources for assessment	This section should be read in conjunction with the range of variables for this unit of competency. Assessors must be satisfied that the person can consistently perform the unit as a whole, as defined by the Elements, Performance Criteria and skills and knowledge. Resources required include suitable access to an operating plant or equipment that allows for appropriate and realistic simulation. A bank of case studies/scenarios and questions will also be required to the extent that they form part of the assessment method. Questioning may take place either in the workplace, or in an adjacent, quiet facility such as an office or lunchroom. No other special resources are required. Access must be provided to appropriate learning and/or assessment support when required. Where applicable, physical resources should include equipment modified for people with disabilities.
Method of assessment	A holistic approach should be taken to the assessment. Competence in this unit may be assessed: by demonstration in the workplace using targeted questioning for appropriate portions through use of specific project(s) by use of a suitable simulation and/or a range of case studies/scenarios by a combination of these techniques. In all cases it is expected that practical assessment will be combined with targeted questioning to assess the underpinning knowledge and theoretical assessment will be combined with appropriate practical/simulation or similar assessment.
Guidance information for assessment	Assessors need to be aware of any cultural issues that may affect responses to questions. Assessment processes and techniques must be culturally appropriate and appropriate to the oracy, language and literacy capacity of the assessee and the work being performed.

Range Statement

RANGE STATEMENT
The range statement relates to the unit of competency as a whole. It allows for different work environments and situations that may affect performance. Bold italicised wording, if used in the performance criteria, is detailed below. Essential operating conditions that may be present with training and assessment (depending on the work situation, needs of the candidate, accessibility of the item, and local industry and regional contexts) may also be included.
Procedures	All operations are performed in accordance with procedures. Procedures include all relevant workplace procedures, work instructions, temporary instructions and relevant industry and government codes and standards. Where reference is made to industry codes of practice, and/or Australian/international standards, the latest version must be used.
Environmental and resource efficiency issues	Environmental and resource efficiency issues include: addressing environmental and resource sustainability initiatives such as Environmental Management Systems, action plans, surveys and audits reference to standards, guidelines and approaches such as: ISO 14001 Environmental Management Systems Life Cycle Analyses Cradle to cradle Global Reporting Initiative Ecological footprinting Triple Bottom Line reporting Product Stewardship determining enterprise's most appropriate waste treatment including waste to landfill, recycling, re-use and wastewater treatment applying the waste management hierarchy in the workplace initiating and/or maintaining appropriate enterprise procedures for operational energy consumption, including stationary energy and non stationary (transport) efficient use of water minimising greenhouse gas emissions use of controls to minimise the risk of environmental damage from hazardous substances
Measure	Measuring techniques include: material fed to/consumed by plant/equipment plant meters and gauges job cards including kanbans examination of invoices from suppliers measurements made under different conditions examination of relevant information and data others as appropriate to the specific industry contexts.
Techniques and tools	Techniques and tools may includeÂ : visual workplace concepts measurement, display and/or recording devices changed work practices/procedures competence development and awareness training process and equipment items
Compliance	Compliance includes meeting relevant federal, state and local government laws, by-laws, regulations and codes of practice.
Incidents	Incidents include: breaches or potential breaches of regulations occurrences outside of standard procedure which may lead to lower environmental performance
Purchasing strategies	Purchasing strategies include: influencing suppliers to take up environmental sustainability selecting materials/components with a lower environmental profile.
Stakeholders, key personnel and specialists	Stakeholders, key personnel and specialists include individuals and groups both inside and outside the organisation that have some direct interest in the enterprise's conduct, actions, products and services, including: employees at all levels of the organisation customers suppliers other organisations key personnel within the organisation, and specialists outside it who may have particular technical expertise
Suggestions	Suggestions includes ideas that help to: prevent and minimise environmental risks and maximise opportunities reduce emissions of greenhouse gases reduce use of non-renewable resources make more efficient use of energy, water and other resources maximise opportunities to re use and recycle materials identify strategies to offset or mitigate environmental impacts. e.g. purchasing of carbon credits express purchasing power through the selection of suppliers with improved environmental performance. e.g. purchasing renewable energy and materials with lower embedded carbon eliminate the use of hazardous and toxic materials increasing the reusability/recyclability of wastes/products.

Unit Sector(s)

Unit sector

Competency field

Competency field	Competitive manufacturing tools

Co-requisite units

Co-requisite units

MSAPMSUP390A Use structured problem solving tools

Modification History

Not applicable.

Unit Descriptor

Unit descriptor

This competency covers the solving of process and other problems, beyond those associated directly with the process unit/equipment, using structured process improvement tools to identify improvements and/or solve problems.

Application of the Unit

Application of this unit

The competency is typically performed by an experienced operator, team leader or supervisor.

Generally the person would be part of a team during the solving of complex or systemic problems and would be expected to perform all parts of this unit and at all times would be liaising and cooperating with other members of the team. This includes:

using a range of formal problem solving techniques

identifying and clarifying the nature of the problem

devising the best solution

evaluating the solution

developing an implementation plan to rectify the problem.

This unit does not cover the solving of problems undertaken as part of the operator's normal role which is covered in the relevant operation competency unit.

Licensing/Regulatory Information

Not applicable.

Pre-Requisites

Prerequisites

This unit has no prerequisites.

Employability Skills Information

Employability Skills

This unit contains employability skills.

Elements and Performance Criteria Pre-Content

ELEMENT Elements describe the essential outcomes of a unit of competency	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA Performance Criteria describe the required performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the Element. Assessment of performance is to be consistent with the Evidence Guide.

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA Performance Criteria describe the required performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the Element. Assessment of performance is to be consistent with the Evidence Guide.
1. Identify the problem.	1.1 Identify variances from normal operating parameters and product quality. 1.2 Define the extent, cause and nature of the problem by observation and investigation. 1.3 State and specify the problem clearly.
2. Determine fundamental cause of problem.	2.1 Identify possible causes based on experience and the use of problem solving tools/analytical techniques. 2.2 Develop possible cause statements. 2.3 Identify fundamental cause.
3. Determine corrective action.	3.1 Consider all possible options for resolution of the problem. 3.2 Consider strengths and weaknesses of possible options. 3.3 Determine corrective action to remove the problem and possible future causes. 3.4 Develop implementation plans identifying measurable objectives, resource needs and timelines in accordance with safety and operating procedures. 3.5 Develop recommendations for ongoing monitoring and testing.
4. Communicate recommendations.	4.1 Prepare report on recommendations. 4.2 Present recommendations to appropriate personnel. 4.3 Follow up recommendations if required.

Required Skills and Knowledge

This describes the essential skills and knowledge and their level required for this unit.

Competence includes a thorough knowledge and understanding of the process, normal operating parameters, and product quality to recognise non-standard situations.

This unit of competency includes use of analytical techniques in problem solving such as:

brainstorming

fishbone diagrams/cause and effect diagrams

process logic/process requirements

logic tree

similarity/difference analysis

Pareto analysis

force field/SWOT analysis

flow charts

control charts, runcharts and graphs

scattergrams.

Action plans to solve problems are prepared including:

priority requirements

measurable objectives

resource requirements

methods for reaching objectives

timelines

coordination and feedback requirements

safety requirements

risk assessment

environmental requirements.

Language, literacy and numeracy requirements

This unit requires the ability to read and interpret typical product specifications, job sheets and material labels as provided to operators.

Writing is required to the level of report writing and completing workplace forms.

Basic numeracy is also required, eg to interpret quality data and graphs.

Evidence Guide

The Evidence Guide provides advice on assessment and must be read in conjunction with the Performance Criteria, required skills and knowledge, the Range Statement and the Assessment Guidelines for this Training Package.

Overview of assessment

A holistic approach should be taken to the assessment.

Assessors must be satisfied that the person can consistently perform the unit as a whole, as defined by the Elements, Performance Criteria and skills and knowledge.

Critical aspects for assessment and evidence required to demonstrate competency in this unit

It is essential that competence is demonstrated in the knowledge and skills defined in this unit. These may include the ability to apply and explain:

relevant equipment and operational processes

enterprise policies and procedures

enterprise goals, targets and measures

enterprise quality, OHS and environmental requirements

principles of decision-making strategies and techniques

enterprise information systems and data collation

industry codes and standards.

Consistent performance should be demonstrated. For example, look to see that:

problems are recognised and clarified

possible causes are identified, based on experience and use of analytical techniques in solving the problem, including:

identifying variations

identifying cause and effect

separating single problems from multiple problems

recognising recurring problems.

fundamental cause of process or equipment faults is determined

corrective/preventative implementation plans are developed to avoid recurrence of the problem

implementation plan is presented to relevant personnel.

Assessment method and context

Assessment will occur on the job or in a simulated workplace.

Competence in this unit may be assessed:

in a situation allowing the generation of evidence of the ability to recognise and respond to problems

by using a suitable simulation and/or a range of case studies/scenarios

through a combination of these techniques.

In all cases it is expected that practical assessment will be combined with targeted questioning to assess the underpinning knowledge and theoretical assessment will be combined with appropriate practical/simulation or similar assessment. Assessors need to be aware of any cultural issues that may affect responses to questions.

Assessment processes and techniques must be culturally appropriate and appropriate to the oracy, language and literacy capacity of the assessee and the work being performed.

Specific resources for assessment

This section should be read in conjunction with the Range Statement for this unit of competency. Resources required include suitable access to an operating plant or equipment that allows for appropriate and realistic simulation. A bank of case studies/scenarios and questions will also be required to the extent that they form part of the assessment method. Questioning may take place either in the workplace, or in an adjacent, quiet facility such as an office or lunchroom. No other special resources are required.

Access must be provided to appropriate learning and/or assessment support when required. Where applicable, physical resources should include equipment modified for people with disabilities.

Range Statement

RANGE STATEMENT

The Range Statement relates to the unit of competency as a whole. It allows for different work environments and situations that may affect performance. Add any essential operating conditions that may be present with training and assessment depending on the work situation, needs of the candidate, accessibility of the item, and local industry and regional contexts.

Where reference is made to industry codes of practice, and/or Australian/international standards, the latest version must be used.

Context

The competency unit applies to a wide range of processes and equipment. The process manufacturing technical units of competency include a problem solving element where problems specific to that competency unit are to be resolved. This competency unit is where structured problem solving techniques are to be applied more broadly, or with greater depth/rigour than is implied by the problem solving element of the technical units.

In large plants or manufacturing organisations with multiple processes, it may apply to more than one process if those processes interact with each other. It applies to all operators across all functions.

Procedures

All operations are performed in accordance with procedures.

Procedures include all relevant workplace procedures, work instructions, temporary instructions and relevant industry and government codes and standards.

Hazards

Typical hazards include leaks, spillages and equipment hazards that can occur during the walk-through of a plant.

Problems

'Anticipate and solve problems' means resolve a wide range of routine and non-routine problems, using product and process knowledge to develop solutions to problems which do not have a known solution/a solution recorded in the procedures.

Typical process and product problems may include:

non- routine process and quality problems

equipment selection, availability and failure

teamwork and work allocation problems

safety and emergency situations and incidents.

Unit Sector(s)

Not applicable.

MSL933001A Maintain the laboratory/field workplace fit for purpose

Modification History

Not applicable.

Unit Descriptor

Unit descriptor	This unit of competency covers the general cleaning of work surfaces, cleaning and storage of equipment and the monitoring of laboratory stocks under direct supervision.

Application of the Unit

Application of the unit	This unit of competency is applicable to laboratory assistants and instrument operators working in all industry sectors. This unit of competency forms a major part of the work of laboratory assistants. They work in accordance with work instructions and standard operating procedures which incorporate all relevant aspects of occupational health and safety (OHS) legislation and the codes, guidelines, regulations and Australian standards applying to environmental hazards and dangerous goods. Industry representatives have provided case studies to illustrate the practical application of this unit of competency and to show its relevance in a workplace setting. These are found at the end of this unit of competency under the section 'This competency in practice'.

Licensing/Regulatory Information

Not applicable.

Pre-Requisites

Prerequisite units

Employability Skills Information

Employability skills	This unit contains employability skills.

Elements and Performance Criteria Pre-Content

Elements describe the essential outcomes of a unit of competency.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element. Where bold italicised text is used, further information is detailed in the required skills and knowledge section and the range statement. Assessment of performance is to be consistent with the evidence guide.

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
1. Clean work preparation areas	1.1. Clean preparation areas using appropriate cleaning agents and equipment according to enterprise procedures 1.2. Remove spillages, if they occur, using appropriate agents, personal protective equipment and enterprise procedures 1.3. Collect and segregate wastes in accordance with enterprise procedures, relevant codes and regulations
2. Clean and store equipment	2.1. Collect used equipment, inspect for faults and, where necessary, remove from service 2.2. Use appropriate agents, apparatus and techniques to clean equipment 2.3. Store clean equipment in the designated locations and manner
3. Monitor stocks of materials and equipment	3.1. Perform stock checks and maintain records of usage as directed 3.2. Store labelled stocks for safe and efficient retrieval 3.3. Inform appropriate personnel of impending stock shortages to maintain continuity of supply
4. Maintain a safe work environment	4.1. Use established safe work practices and personal protective equipment to ensure personal safety and that of other personnel 4.2. Report potential hazards and/or maintenance issues in own work area to designated personnel 4.3. Minimise the generation of wastes and environmental impacts 4.4. Dispose of wastes in accordance with enterprise procedures, relevant codes and regulations

Required Skills and Knowledge

REQUIRED SKILLS AND KNOWLEDGE
This section describes the skills and knowledge required for this unit.
Required skills
Required skills include: safely cleaning work preparation areas and equipment using appropriate cleaning agents, equipment and techniques safely removing spillages and disposing of wastes minimising the exposure to hazards of self, others and the laboratory safely storing equipment and materials using enterprise procedures, relevant codes and guidelines monitoring and reporting stock levels and the condition of laboratory materials and equipment keeping accurate, up-to-date records reporting potential hazards and maintenance issues using enterprise procedures
Required knowledge
Required knowledge includes: enterprise procedures for the cleaning of work preparation areas, materials and equipment storage requirements for specific materials and equipment enterprise procedures for minimisation and disposal of waste enterprise procedures for monitoring of laboratory stocks information contained in material safety data sheets (MSDS) for materials handled regularly during the performance of maintenance tasks relevant health, safety and environment requirements

Evidence Guide

EVIDENCE GUIDE
The Evidence Guide provides advice on assessment and must be read in conjunction with the performance criteria, required skills and knowledge, range statement and the Assessment Guidelines for the Training Package.
Overview of assessment
Critical aspects for assessment and evidence required to demonstrate competency in this unit	Assessors should ensure that candidates can: follow enterprise procedures, relevant codes and guidelines when maintaining the laboratory/field workplace work safely and minimise exposure of hazards to self, others and the laboratory keep accurate up-to-date records and report potential hazards and maintenance issues.
Context of and specific resources for assessment	This unit of competency is to be assessed in the workplace or simulated workplace environment. This unit of competency may be assessed with: MSL943002A Participate in laboratory/field workplace safety. Resources may include: access to work preparation areas, stocks, materials and equipment cleaning, decontamination and/or disinfection agents and equipment personal protective equipment stock order firms, labels and records/forms.
Method of assessment	The following assessment methods are suggested: observation of the candidate's techniques for cleaning and/or removal of spillages and waste disposal review of stock records completed by the candidate feedback from supervisors and peers questioning to assess underpinning knowledge of regulations and procedures where direct observation is difficult (such as dealing with hazards) and choice of materials and equipment. In all cases, practical assessment should be supported by questions to assess underpinning knowledge and those aspects of competency which are difficult to assess directly. Where applicable, reasonable adjustment must be made to work environments and training situations to accommodate ethnicity, age, gender, demographics and disability. Access must be provided to appropriate learning and/or assessment support when required. The language, literacy and numeracy demands of assessment should not be greater than those required to undertake the unit of competency in a work like environment.
This competency in practice	Industry representatives have provided the case studies below to illustrate the practical application of this unit of competency and show its relevance in a workplace setting. Manufacturing On receipt of a bulk container of cleaning or sanitising agent, a laboratory assistant always attached to the container a description of its method of use. The assistant also attached a list of the surfaces, apparatus, utensils and machines that could be safely treated with that chemical agent as outlined in the company's quality manual. This practice reduced the likelihood of misuse of the chemical, wastage, damage to equipment and inadequate cleaning and sanitation. Biomedical and environmental Laboratory assistants and technical officers routinely examine fluids for micro-organisms using a microscope. They examine fluids, such as urine, seawater, chlorinated pool water, water from catchment areas and bottled water. To maintain microscopes in working order, they thoroughly clean the stage, oculars and each objective after use and sometimes between samples. The 100X objective requires particular care since this is the oil immersion objective. The oil is slightly acidic and will slowly corrode the objective if it is not cleaned thoroughly and regularly. After using the 100X objective they also take care not to drag the other objectives through the oil. Food processing A laboratory assistant regularly uses standard pH solutions to calibrate the laboratory's pH meters. The assistant is aware from the label that the shelf life of these solutions after opening is two months and records the opening and disposal dates on the container. The assistant is also aware that the shelf life of unopened buffer solutions is twelve months from the date of manufacture and monitors this by noting the production date on the bottle. Requests for stock replacement take into account the normal rate of use of these buffer solutions so that unopened bottles have not reached their expiry date before use.

Range Statement

RANGE STATEMENT
The range statement relates to the unit of competency as a whole. It allows for different work environments and situations that may affect performance. Bold italicised wording, if used in the performance criteria, is detailed below. Essential operating conditions that may be present with training and assessment (depending on the work situation, needs of the candidate, accessibility of the item, and local industry and regional contexts) may also be included.
Codes of practice	Where reference is made to industry codes of practice, and/or Australian/international standards, it is expected the latest version will be used
Standards, codes, procedures and/or enterprise requirements	Standards, codes, procedures and/or enterprise requirements may include: Australian and international standards such as: AS 1678 Emergency procedure guide - Transport AS 1940-2004 Storage and handling of flammable and combustible liquids AS 2252 Biological safety cabinets AS 3780-2008 The storage and handling of corrosive substances AS 4332-2004 The storage and handling of gases in cylinders AS ISO 17025-2005 General requirements for the competence of testing and calibration laboratories AS/NZS 1269 Set:2005 Occupational noise management set AS/NZS 1337 Eye protection AS/NZS 2161 Set:2008 Occupational protective gloves set AS/NZS 2210:1994 Occupational protective footwear AS/NZS 2243 Set:2006 Safety in laboratories set AS/NZS 2243.8:2006 Safety in laboratories - Fume cupboards AS/NZS 2865 Set:2005 Safe working in a confined space set AS/NZS 2982.1:1997 Laboratory design and construction - General requirements AS/NZS 4187:2003 Cleaning, disinfecting and sterilising reusable medical and surgical instruments and equipment, and maintenance of associated environments in health care facilities AS/NZS 4452:1997 The storage and handling of toxic substances AS/NZS 4501 Set:2008 Occupational clothing set AS/NZS ISO 14000 Set:2005 Environmental management standards set animal welfare legislation and codes of practice Australian code of good manufacturing practice for medicinal products (GMP) Australian Dangerous Goods Code Australian Quarantine and Inspection Service (AQIS) Export Control (Orders) Regulations 1982 Australian Quarantine and Inspection Service (AQIS) Import Guidelines Australian Radiation Protection and Nuclear Safety Agency (ARPANSA) Codes of Practice enterprise or standard operating procedures (SOPs) equipment manuals and warranties, supplier catalogues and handbooks gene technology regulations guide to physical containment levels and facility types HB 9-1994 Occupational personal protection material safety data sheets (MSDS) National Code of Practice for the labelling of workplace substances (NOHSC:2012 (1994)) national environment protection measures National Health and Medical Research Council (NHMRC) Guidelines national measurement regulations and guidelines occupational health and safety (OHS) national standards and codes of practice principles of good laboratory practice (GLP) Therapeutic Goods Regulations 1009
Equipment, material procedures and facilities	Equipment, material procedures and facilities may include: animal cages autoclaves balances blenders, centrifuges and separating equipment brushes cell counters and staining machines colorimeters/spectrometers and polarimeters compaction rammers and soil classification equipment conductivity meters and pH meters dishwashers, refrigerators, freezers, ovens, microwave ovens, incubators and water baths disintegration apparatus, thermometers and incubators fume hoods, biohazard containers and biological safety cabinets gas cylinders glassware, plastic ware; glass, plastic and quartz cuvettes hotplates, mantles, burners and muffle furnaces instrument chart recorders, penetrometers, force measuring equipment and tensiometers light and fluorescence microscopes melting point apparatus, viscometers and hardness testing equipment microtomes and tissue processors mixing and separating equipment such as centrifuges, rifflers and splitters and mixers noise meters and blasting meters optical microscopes pipettes, burettes and volumetric glassware shovels, scoops, plates, rods, cylinder moulds and buckets steel ruler/tapes and spirit levels thermometers, thermohygrographs, instrument chart recorders, hydrometers, pH meters and ion-selective electrodes ultrasonic cleaners vehicles
Typical materials	Typical materials may include: consumable items, such as syringes, pipette tips, weigh boats disposable clothing and personal protective equipment distilled water, reagents, chemicals, disinfectants, detergents, agar media and plates equipment spares, such as fuses, bulbs and batteries oils/lubricants, fuels, industrial gases and cryogenics, such as dry ice and liquid nitrogen paper and stationery reference samples and standards
Maintenance	Maintenance may include: checking serviceability before storage cleaning prevention of contamination storing
Cleaning requirements	Cleaning requirements may include: decontamination and/or disinfection hygiene monitoring minimising environmental impacts operation of automatic cleaning apparatus, such as pipette washer, ultrasonic cleaners and dishwashers sterilisation and disposal of wastes using boiling, high pressure air or steam, microwaves, chemicals, gas, filtration, ultraviolet radiation and autoclaving use of specialised techniques, such as chromic acid baths and soaking in hypochlorite
Preparation areas	Preparation areas may include: benches fume cupboards sheds sinks
Agents for cleaning	Agents for cleaning may include: cleaning solutions decontaminants organic solvents
Spillages	Spillages may include: chemicals radioactive materials biologically active materials
Wastes	Wastes may include: broken glass batteries disposable personal protective equipment excess test samples micro-organisms plastic and metals sharps solvents spent reagents spent samples and test pieces used containers, boxes, bags and palettes
Stock records	Stock records may include: calibration and maintenance history data sheets handbooks, warranty documents, catalogues, manuals and MSDS records of usage, loans and breakages
Communication	Communication could involve other people, such as: laboratory, production, administration and cleaning staff internal/external contractors emergency personnel
Maintenance issues	Maintenance issues could involve: checking materials and equipment are fit for purpose equipment malfunction hygiene issues potential hazards, incidents and emergencies recycling and waste disposal spillages, leakages, breakages and contamination stock requirements and shortages
Hazards	Hazards may include: aerosols from broken centrifuge tubes and pipetting chemicals, such as acids, heavy metals, pesticides and hydrocarbons crushing, entanglement and cuts associated with moving machinery or falling objects cryogenics, such as dry ice and liquid nitrogen electric shock fluids under pressure, such as steam and industrial gas cylinders manual handling, working at heights and working in confined spaces microbiological organisms and agents associated with soil, air, water, blood and blood products, and human or animal tissue and fluids occupational overuse syndrome, slips, trips and falls pedestrian and vehicular traffic sharps, broken glassware and hand tools solar radiation, dust and noise sources of ignition, flammable liquids and gases
Established safe work practices	Established safe work practices may include: applying containment procedures through the use of appropriate equipment, such as biohazard containers, laminar flow cabinets, Class I, II and III biohazard cabinets and Class PCII, PCIII, and PCIV physical containment facilities ensuring access to service shut-off points following established manual handling procedures for tasks involving manual handling handling and storage of all hazardous materials and equipment in accordance with labelling, MSDS and manufacturer's instructions identifying and reporting operating problems or equipment malfunctions labelling of samples, reagents, aliquoted samples and hazardous materials recognising and observing hazard warnings and safety signs reporting to appropriate personnel of abnormal emissions, discharges and airborne contaminants, such as noise, light, solids, liquids, water/waste water, gases, smoke, vapour, fumes, odour and particulates use of MSDS use of personal protective equipment, such as hard hats, hearing protection, gloves, safety glasses, goggles, face guards, coveralls, gown, body suits, respirators and safety boots
Occupational health and safety (OHS) and environmental management requirements	OHS and environmental management requirements: all operations must comply with enterprise OHS and environmental management requirements, which may be imposed through state/territory or federal legislation - these requirements must not be compromised at any time all operations assume the potentially hazardous nature of samples and require standard precautions to be applied where relevant, users should access and apply current industry understanding of infection control issued by the National Health and Medical Research Council (NHMRC) and State and Territory Departments of Health

Unit Sector(s)

Unit sector	Maintenance

Competency field

Competency field

Co-requisite units

Co-requisite units

MSL954001A Obtain representative samples in accordance with sampling plan

Modification History

Not applicable.

Unit Descriptor

Unit descriptor	This unit of competency covers the ability to obtain a range of samples that are representative of the source material (e.g. raw ingredients, product in process and final product) and to prepare the samples for testing. All sampling activities are conducted in accordance with a defined sampling plan. This unit does not cover the subsequent testing of the samples.

Application of the Unit

Application of the unit	This unit of competency is applicable to laboratory technicians in all industry sectors. It involves: a range of sampling plans, samples and sampling procedures, which apply to the enterprise site, plant laboratory or field sites enterprise products/materials and hazardous materials a range of sampling points and/locations. Industry representatives have provided case studies to illustrate the practical application of this unit of competency and to show its relevance in a workplace setting. These are found at the end of this unit of competency under the section 'This competency in practice'.

Licensing/Regulatory Information

Not applicable.

Pre-Requisites

Prerequisite units

Employability Skills Information

Employability skills	This unit contains employability skills.

Elements and Performance Criteria Pre-Content

Elements describe the essential outcomes of a unit of competency.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element. Where bold italicised text is used, further information is detailed in the required skills and knowledge section and the range statement. Assessment of performance is to be consistent with the evidence guide.

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
1. Prepare for sampling	1.1. Confirm the sampling location, number and type of samples, and timing and frequency of sampling from enterprise or client's sampling plan 1.2. Liaise with relevant personnel to arrange site access and, if appropriate, all necessary clearances and/or permits 1.3. Select sampling equipment and conditions to achieve representative samples and preserve sample integrity during collection, storage and transit 1.4. Check that all procedures are in accordance with client or enterprise requirements, relevant standards and codes 1.5. Identify site and sampling hazards and review enterprise safety procedures 1.6. Assemble and check all sampling equipment, materials, containers and safety equipment 1.7. Arrange suitable transport to, from and around site as required
2. Conduct sampling and log samples	2.1. Locate sampling sites and, if required, services at the site 2.2. Conduct representative sampling in accordance with sampling plan and defined procedures 2.3. Record all information and label samples in accordance with traceability requirements 2.4. Record environment or production conditions and any atypical observations made during sampling that may impact on sample representativeness or integrity 2.5. Transport all samples back to base according to standard operating procedures (SOPs) and relevant codes
3. Prepare samples for testing	3.1. Prepare sub-samples and back-up sub-samples that are representative of the source 3.2. Label all sub-samples to ensure traceability and store in accordance with SOPs 3.3. Follow defined preparation and safety procedures to limit hazard or contamination to samples, self, work area and environment 3.4. Distribute sub-samples to defined work stations maintaining sample integrity and traceability requirements
4. Address client issues	4.1. Enter approved information into laboratory information management system (LIMS) 4.2. Report all relevant aspects of the sampling and preparation phases in accordance with enterprise procedures 4.3. Ensure that information provided to client is accurate, relevant and authorised for release 4.4. Maintain security and confidentiality of all client/enterprise data and information
5. Maintain a safe work environment	5.1. Clean all equipment, containers, work area and vehicles according to enterprise procedures 5.2. Check serviceability of all equipment before storage 5.3. Use defined safe work practices and personal protective equipment to ensure personal safety and that of other laboratory personnel 5.4. Minimise the generation of wastes and environment impacts 5.5. Ensure the safe collection of all hazardous wastes for appropriate disposal

Required Skills and Knowledge

REQUIRED SKILLS AND KNOWLEDGE
This section describes the skills and knowledge required for this unit.
Required skills
Required skills include: collecting representative samples in accordance with a sampling plan techniques to preserve the integrity of samples identifying atypical materials and samples and taking appropriate action maintaining sampling equipment completing sampling records working safely following requirements for the disposal of waste and the preservation of the environment
Required knowledge
Required knowledge includes: principles of representative samples principles and procedures for random, systematic and stratified sampling, consistency of sampling procedures preservation of the integrity of samples maintaining identification of samples relative to their source enterprise and/or legal traceability requirements cost effectiveness of sampling characteristics of product/material to be sampled and likely contaminants links between quality control, quality assurance, quality management systems and sampling procedures enterprise procedures dealing with legislative requirements for the handling, labelling and transport of hazardous goods links between correct occupational health and safety (OHS) procedures and personal and environmental safety particularly at high risk sites Specific industry Additional knowledge requirements may apply for different industry sectors. For example:Biomedical and environmental services: specific legislation on biohazards documentation procedures for the chain of custody for samples to be used as evidence or for blood transfusion

Evidence Guide

EVIDENCE GUIDE
The Evidence Guide provides advice on assessment and must be read in conjunction with the performance criteria, required skills and knowledge, range statement and the Assessment Guidelines for the Training Package.
Overview of assessment
Critical aspects for assessment and evidence required to demonstrate competency in this unit	Assessors should ensure that candidates can: collect the specified quantity of sample to enable all processing and testing to occur and back-up samples to be stored obtain a sample that is representative of the bulk material preserve the integrity of samples by closely adhering to procedures label samples and sub-samples to satisfy enterprise/legal traceability requirements identify atypical materials and samples and take appropriate action maintain sampling equipment in appropriate condition complete sampling records using enterprise procedures follow safety regulations and enterprise OHS procedures during sampling, transport and storage follow relevant legislative requirements for the disposal of waste and the preservation of the environment.
Context of and specific resources for assessment	This unit of competency is to be assessed in the workplace or simulated workplace environment. This unit of competency may be assessed with: MSL924001A Process and interpret data MSL943002A Participate in laboratory/field workplace safety relevant MSAL974000 series units of competency relevant MSAL975000 series units of competency relevant to the sampling. Resources may include: variety of sample types sampling plans a selection of sampling containers and sampling equipment.
Method of assessment	The following assessment methods are suggested: inspection of samples collected by the candidate review of sampling documentation completed by the candidate feedback from peers, customers and supervisors that sampling plans were followed questioning to assess underpinning knowledge of representative sampling procedures observation of the candidate taking a range of samples. In all cases, practical assessment should be supported by questions to assess underpinning knowledge and those aspects of competency which are difficult to assess directly. Where applicable, reasonable adjustment must be made to work environments and training situations to accommodate ethnicity, age, gender, demographics and disability. Access must be provided to appropriate learning and/or assessment support when required. The language, literacy and numeracy demands of assessment should not be greater than those required to undertake the unit of competency in a work like environment.
This competency in practice	Industry representatives have provided the case studies below to illustrate the practical application of this unit of competency and to show its relevance in a workplace setting. Manufacturing A metallurgical laboratory technician is very familiar with preparing representative samples for a range of final products in a steelmaking plant. One day, he/she is asked to sample a 50 tonne small-particle coal delivery which is believed to have a higher than acceptable sulphur content. Having never prepared representative samples for such a large quantity of material, the technician consulted their supervisor and developed an appropriate sampling plan. The technician arranged for the operator of a small front-end loader to take buckets of coal from five equally spaced points around the pile. The resulting material was then combined and mixed in one heap. The technician coned and quartered the heap enough times to obtain a representative sample of about 5kg. He/she arranged for the unwanted material to be returned to the stockpile. On return to the laboratory, the technician crushed the sample and repeatedly coned and quartered the material to obtain an analytical portion. Environmental A field technician trained in sampling natural water systems is asked to sample a bright yellow industrial wastewater discharge into a small creek. The relevant sampling plan specifies that the samples should be collected where the waste water is well mixed near the centre of the creek and at the mid-depth point. The technician also notes that the samples must be collected where turbulence is at a maximum so that the settling of solids is minimal. On arrival at the site, the technician locates where the wastewater is entering the creek. He/she moves downstream to where the waste water and creek water is well mixed and there is little apparent loss of the yellow suspended solids. The technician dons the required personal protective equipment and uses a convenient bridge to collect a set of six samples and duplicates over a half-hour period using the equipment and procedures specified in the sampling plan. Using a field notebook, the technician records all information specified in the laboratory's chain of custody requirements and safety plan for handling potentially hazardous industrial waste.

Range Statement

RANGE STATEMENT
The range statement relates to the unit of competency as a whole. It allows for different work environments and situations that may affect performance. Bold italicised wording, if used in the performance criteria, is detailed below. Essential operating conditions that may be present with training and assessment (depending on the work situation, needs of the candidate, accessibility of the item, and local industry and regional contexts) may also be included.
Codes of practice	Where reference is made to industry codes of practice, and/or Australian/international standards, it is expected the latest version will be used
Standards, codes, procedures and/or enterprise requirements	Standards, codes, procedures and/or enterprise requirements may include: Australian and international standards, such as: AS 1199 Sampling procedures and tables for inspection by attributes AS 1678 Emergency procedure guide -Transport AS 1940-2004 Storage and handling of flammable and combustible liquids AS 3780-2008 The storage and handling of corrosive substances AS 4433.2-1997 Guide to the sampling of particulate materials - Preparation of samples AS/NZS 4452:1997 The storage and handling of toxic substances American Association of Cereal Chemists (AACC) Approved Methods of Analysis Australian Dangerous Goods Code enterprise and/or client sampling schemes and sampling plans enterprise recording and reporting procedures gene technology regulations material safety data sheets (MSDS) methods and procedures which may be written to meet enterprise, client and/or regulatory/certifying body requirements National Code of Practice for the labelling of workplace substances [NOHSC:2012 (1994)] site plans, maps and specifications
Basic principles of sampling	Basic principles of sampling include: representative samples preservation of integrity of samples maintaining identification of samples relative to their source, enterprise and legal traceability cost-effectiveness of sampling consistency of sampling procedures sampling principles, including random, systematic and stratified sampling
Materials sampled	Materials sampled may include: gas or air samples liquid samples, such as water, groundwater, waste water, stormwater, sludges and sewage solid samples, such as soil, sediments, rocks, concrete, quarry and mining material solid wastes raw materials, start, middle, end of production run samples, final products and materials used in production processes, such as flocculants plants animals microbiological samples
Types of samples	Types of samples may include: grab samples composite samples quality control samples research or one-off samples environmental or survey samples
Sampling tools and equipment	Sampling tools and equipment may include: shovels, augers and chain saws sampling frames, sampling tubes, dip tubes, spears, flexible bladders and syringes front-end loader, backhoe, excavator and drill rig sample bottles or containers, plastic containers and disposable buckets access valves sample thief auto samplers pumps and stainless steel bailers traps and cages sterile containers, pipettes, inoculating loops and disposable spoons
Maintenance of integrity of samples	Maintenance of integrity of samples may include: use of compatible container, such as glass, plastic, amber and opaque bottles use of appropriate preservatives, such as sodium azide, toluene or antibiotics decontamination of sampling tools between collection of consecutive samples wrapping container in foil purging of sample lines and boxes handling and transport to avoid disturbance or damage temperature control which may involve insulation of sample without direct contact with the coolant wrapping in wet newspaper, cloth, sand or sawdust transfer of sterile sample into sterile container monitoring of storage conditions
Site and sampling hazards	Site and sampling hazards may include: solar radiation, dust and noise wildlife, such as snakes, spiders and domestic animals biohazards, such as micro-organisms and agents associated with soil, air, water, blood and blood products, and human or animal tissue and fluids chemicals, such as acids and hydrocarbons aerosols sharps and broken glassware manual handling of heavy sample bags and containers crushing, entanglement and cuts associated with moving machinery and hand tools vehicular and pedestrian traffic
Safety procedures	Safety procedures may include: use of MSDS use of personal protective equipment, such as hard hats, hearing protection, gloves, safety glasses, goggles, face guards, coveralls, gowns, body suits, respirators and safety boots use of biohazard containers and laminar flow cabinets correct labelling of reagents and hazardous materials handling, and storing hazardous materials and equipment in accordance with labels, MSDS, manufacturer's instructions, and enterprise procedures and regulations regular cleaning and/or decontaminating equipment and work areas machinery guards signage, barriers, service isolation tags, traffic control and flashing lights lockout and tag-out procedures
Occupational health and safety (OHS) and environmental management requirements	OHS and environmental management requirements: all operations must comply with enterprise OHS and environmental management requirements, which may be imposed through state/territory or federal legislation - these requirements must not be compromised at any time all operations assume the potentially hazardous nature of samples and require standard precautions to be applied where relevant, users should access and apply current industry understanding of infection control issued by the National Health and Medical Research Council (NHMRC) and State and Territory Departments of Health

Unit Sector(s)

Unit sector	Sampling

Competency field

Competency field

Co-requisite units

Co-requisite units

MSL973001A Perform basic tests

Modification History

Not applicable.

Unit Descriptor

Unit descriptor	This unit of competency covers the ability to perform tests and measurements using standard methods with access to readily available advice from supervisors.

Application of the Unit

Application of the unit	This unit of competency is applicable to laboratory/field assistants working in all industry sectors. In general, they do not calibrate equipment and make only limited adjustments to the controls. They do not interpret or analyse results or troubleshoot equipment problems. Industry representatives have provided case studies to illustrate the practical application of this unit of competency and to show its relevance in a workplace setting. These are found at the end of this unit of competency under the section 'This competency in practice'.

Licensing/Regulatory Information

Not applicable.

Pre-Requisites

Prerequisite units

Employability Skills Information

Employability skills	This unit contains employability skills.

Elements and Performance Criteria Pre-Content

Elements describe the essential outcomes of a unit of competency.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element. Where bold italicised text is used, further information is detailed in the required skills and knowledge section and the range statement. Assessment of performance is to be consistent with the evidence guide.

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
1. Interpret test requirements	1.1. Review test request to identify samples to be tested, test method and equipment involved 1.2. Identify hazards and enterprise controls associated with the sample, preparation methods, reagents and/or equipment
2. Prepare sample	2.1. Record sample description, compare with specification, record and report discrepancies 2.2. Prepare sample in accordance with appropriate standard methods
3. Check equipment before use	3.1. Set up test equipment in accordance with test method 3.2. Perform pre-use and safety checks in accordance with enterprise procedures and manufacturer's instructions 3.3. Identify faulty or unsafe equipment and report to appropriate personnel 3.4. Check calibration status of equipment and report any out of calibration items to appropriate personnel
4. Perform tests on samples	4.1. Identify, prepare and weigh or measure sample and standards to be tested 4.2. Conduct tests in accordance with enterprise procedures 4.3. Record data in accordance with enterprise procedures 4.4. Perform calculations on data as required 4.5. Identify and report out of specification or atypical results promptly to appropriate personnel 4.6. Shut down equipment in accordance with operating procedures
5. Maintain a safe work environment	5.1. Use established safe work practices and personal protective equipment to ensure personal safety and that of other laboratory personnel 5.2. Minimise the generation of wastes and environmental impacts 5.3. Ensure safe disposal of laboratory and hazardous wastes 5.4. Clean, care for and store equipment and reagents as required

Required Skills and Knowledge

REQUIRED SKILLS AND KNOWLEDGE
This section describes the skills and knowledge required for this unit.
Required skills
Required skills include: interpreting enterprise procedure or standard methods accurately using safety information, such as material safety data sheets (MSDS) and performing procedures safely checking test equipment before use completing all tests within required timeline without sacrificing safety, accuracy or quality calculating, recording and presenting results accurately and legibly maintaining security, integrity and traceability of all samples, data/results and documentation cleaning and maintaining equipment
Required knowledge
Required knowledge includes: concepts of metrology the international system of units (SI) purpose of test principles of the standard method pre-use equipment checks relevant standards/specifications and their interpretation sources of uncertainty in measurement and methods for control enterprise and/or legal traceability requirements interpretation and recording of test result, including simple calculations procedures for recognition/reporting of unexpected or unusual results relevant health, safety and environment requirements

Evidence Guide

EVIDENCE GUIDE
The Evidence Guide provides advice on assessment and must be read in conjunction with the performance criteria, required skills and knowledge, range statement and the Assessment Guidelines for the Training Package.
Overview of assessment
Critical aspects for assessment and evidence required to demonstrate competency in this unit	Assessors should ensure that candidates can: accurately interpret enterprise procedures or standard methods complete all tests within the required timeline without sacrificing safety, accuracy or quality demonstrate close attention to the accuracy and precision of measurements and the data obtained maintain the security, integrity and traceability of all samples, data/results and documentation.
Context of and specific resources for assessment	This unit of competency is to be assessed in the workplace or simulated workplace environment. This unit of competency may be assessed with: MSL922001A Record and present data. Resources may include: standard laboratory equipped with appropriate equipment standards and materials enterprise procedures and standard methods, and equipment manuals MSDS.
Method of assessment	The following assessment methods are suggested: review of the quality of test data/results achieved by the candidate over time inspection of records and workplace documentation completed by the candidate feedback from peers and supervisors observation of the candidate performing a range of basic tests oral or written questioning to check underpinning knowledge of test procedures. In all cases, practical assessment should be supported by questions to assess underpinning knowledge and those aspects of competency which are difficult to assess directly. Where applicable, reasonable adjustment must be made to work environments and training situations to accommodate ethnicity, age, gender, demographics and disability. Access must be provided to appropriate learning and/or assessment support when required. The language, literacy and numeracy demands of assessment should not be greater than those required to undertake the unit of competency in a work like environment.
This competency in practice	Industry representatives have provided the case studies below to illustrate the practical application of this unit of competency and to show its relevance in a workplace setting. Manufacturing Standard testing methods may be viewed as legal requirements that must be followed to ensure that a product manufactured in a chemical plant meets the specification by which it is sold to the customer. Technical assistants perform tests in a quality control laboratory to ensure that material meets legal requirements and the material is safe and effective in use. Peroxides may be present in ether as a result of light-catalysed air oxidation. Peroxides are toxic and can give rise to mixtures which are explosive when distilled. Technical assistants test ether to ensure that the level of peroxide is within acceptable limits. The test is done by shaking ether with a solution of potassium iodide. After standing for 30 minutes in the dark the yellow colour of the aqueous phase, due to the liberation of iodine, must not be more intense than a prepared standard solution. These tests ensure the quality and safety of the ether. Food processing A snack food company produces a range of high quality, impulse purchase snack foods. Some of these products are moisture and/or oxygen sensitive and are therefore packaged in multi-layer flexible packaging to provide optimum shelflife. The packaging must also be able to withstand the rigours of the production and distribution process. While the packaging is purchased to meet the shelflife and distribution specifications, the quality assurance program requires the periodic evaluation of the packaging materials against these specifications. A laboratory assistant uses standard methods to test the tearing resistance, bursting strength, impact resistance and permeability and/or leakage of the snack food packaging. Tests are also conducted on aspects of the manufacturing process that can affect shelflife. These tests involve the measuring of the heat-seam strength and the sealing performance of the closure process. The test results are recorded by the laboratory assistant to verify the conformance of the materials to the supplier specifications and of the process to the manufacturing specifications. The assistant reports any anomalies or non-conformances to the appropriate personnel. Construction materials testing A technician performs an Aggregate Stripping Test (AS 1141.50) and enters the results in the laboratory's information management system (LIMS). The resulting 20-30% stripped values (i.e. 70-80% adhering) indicate a 'fail' result. The technician notes that he has repeated the test and obtained the same 'fail' result. The laboratory manager reviews the results and asks the technician to explain how he performed the test. He describes how he prepared 3-4 mm thick plates of bitumen and binding agent in the mould and then placed 50 small clean pieces of aggregate on top. After treatment in an oven for 24 hours and a 50°C water bath in accordance with the test method, the technician had then carefully pulled out the pieces of aggregate and avoiding any twisting motion. He then estimated the % of bitumen adhering to each of the stones with the expectation that the stripped value would be about 5% (i.e. 95% adhering). The manager is satisfied that the technician has performed the test in accordance with the method and suggested that he now re-run the test with a known aggregate as a control. This test gives a stripped value of 5-7% (i.e. 93-95% adhering). The manager is now sufficiently confident of the laboratory's results to sign and issue the test report and explain the aggregate's 'test failure' to the client.

Range Statement

RANGE STATEMENT
The range statement relates to the unit of competency as a whole. It allows for different work environments and situations that may affect performance. Bold italicised wording, if used in the performance criteria, is detailed below. Essential operating conditions that may be present with training and assessment (depending on the work situation, needs of the candidate, accessibility of the item, and local industry and regional contexts) may also be included.
Codes of practice	Where reference is made to industry codes of practice, and/or Australian/international standards, it is expected the latest version will be used
Standards, codes, procedures and/or enterprise requirements	Standards, codes, procedures and/or enterprise requirements may include: Australian and international standards, such as: AS ISO 1000-1998 The international system of units (SI) and its application AS ISO 17025-2005 General requirements for the competence of testing and calibration laboratories AS/NZS 2243 Set:2006 Safety in laboratories set Australian code of good manufacturing practice for medicinal products (GMP) calibration and maintenance schedules enterprise recording and reporting procedures equipment manuals equipment startup, operation and shutdown procedures MSDS and safety procedures material, production and product specifications national measurement regulations and guidelines principles of good laboratory practice (GLP) production and laboratory schedules quality manuals standard operating procedures (SOPs)
Concepts of metrology	Concepts of metrology may include: that all measurements are estimates measurements belong to a population of measurements of the measured parameters repeatability precision accuracy significant figures sources of error uncertainty traceability
Preparation of samples	Preparation of samples may include: sub-sampling or splitting using procedures, such as riffling, coning and quartering, manual and mechanical splitters diluting samples physical treatments, such as ashing, dissolving, filtration, sieving, centrifugation and comminution moulding, casting or cutting specimens
Typical tests carried out by laboratory/field assistants	Typical tests carried out by laboratory/field assistants may include: visual/optical tests of appearance, colour, texture, identity, turbidity, refractive index (alcohol content and Baume/Brix) physical tests: density, specific gravity and compacted density moisture content and water activity particle size, particle shape and size distribution chemical tests: gravimetric colorimetric electrical conductivity (EC) and pH specific ions using dipsticks and kits nutrients (e.g. nitrates and orthophosphates) using basic kits ashes, including sulphated ashes biological/environmental tests: pH, oxygen reduction potential (ORP), dissolved oxygen (DO) and (EC) E coli using test kits surface hygiene/presence of microbes packaging tests: tearing resistance, bursting strength and impact resistance permeability and/or leakage mechanical tests: Emerson class concrete slump
Measurements	Measurements may include: simple ground surveys meteorological parameters, such as wind direction/strength, rainfall, maximum/minimum temperature, humidity and solar radiation simple background radiation survey production/process parameters, such as temperature, flow and pressure gas levels in a confined space
Common measuring equipment	Common measuring equipment may include: dimension apparatus DO and EC analogue and digital meters and charts/recorders basic chemical and biological test kits dipsticks and site test kits (e.g. HACK) timing devices temperature measuring devices, such as thermometers and thermocouples
Hazards	Hazards may include: electric shock biohazards, such as microbiological organisms and agents associated with soil, air, water, blood and blood products, and human or animal tissue and fluids solar radiation, dust and noise chemicals, such as sulphuric acid, fluorides and hydrocarbons aerosols sharps, broken glassware and hand tools flammable liquids dry ice and liquid nitrogen fluids under pressure sources of ignition occupational overuse syndrome, slips, trips and falls manual handling, working at heights and working in confined spaces crushing, entanglement and cuts associated with moving machinery or falling objects
Enterprise controls to address hazards	Enterprise controls to address hazards may include: use of MSDS use of signage, barriers and service isolation tags use of personal protective equipment, such as hard hats, hearing protection, sunscreen lotion, gloves, safety glasses, goggles, face guards, coveralls, gowns, body suits, respirators and safety boots use of appropriate equipment, such as biohazard containers and cabinets and laminar flow cabinets recognising and observing hazard warnings and safety signs labelling of samples, reagents, aliquoted samples and hazardous materials handling and storage of all hazardous materials and equipment in accordance with labelling, MSDS and manufacturer's instructions, and enterprise procedures and regulations cleaning and decontaminating equipment and work areas regularly using recommended procedures following established manual handling procedures for tasks involving manual handling
Minimising environmental impacts	Minimising environmental impacts may involve: recycling of non-hazardous waste, such as chemicals, batteries, plastic, metals and glass appropriate disposal of hazardous waste correct disposal of excess sample/test material correct storage and handling of hazardous chemicals
Occupational health and safety (OHS) and environmental management requirements	OHS and environmental management requirements: all operations must comply with enterprise OHS and environmental management requirements, which may be imposed through state/territory or federal legislation - these requirements must not be compromised at any time all operations assume the potentially hazardous nature of samples and require standard precautions to be applied where relevant, users should access and apply current industry understanding of infection control issued by the National Health and Medical Research Council (NHMRC) and State and Territory Departments of Health

Unit Sector(s)

Unit sector	Testing

Competency field

Competency field

Co-requisite units

Co-requisite units

MSL973002A Prepare working solutions

Modification History

Not applicable.

Unit Descriptor

Unit descriptor	This unit of competency covers the ability to prepare working solutions and to check that existing stocks are suitable for use. Calculations of quantities, choice of reagent grades and required dilutions will be specified by the supervisor.

Application of the Unit

Application of the unit	This unit of competency is applicable to laboratory assistants working in all industry sectors. Test solutions include those required to perform laboratory tests. Industry representatives have provided case studies to illustrate the practical application of this unit of competency and to show its relevance in a workplace setting. These are found at the end of this unit of competency under the section 'This competency in practice'.

Licensing/Regulatory Information

Not applicable.

Pre-Requisites

Prerequisite units

Employability Skills Information

Employability skills	This unit contains employability skills.

Elements and Performance Criteria Pre-Content

Elements describe the essential outcomes of a unit of competency.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element. Where bold italicised text is used, further information is detailed in the required skills and knowledge section and the range statement. Assessment of performance is to be consistent with the evidence guide.

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
1. Safely use laboratory chemicals, glassware and equipment	1.1. Apply appropriate safety precautions for use of laboratory equipment and hazardous chemical materials 1.2. Use appropriate laboratory glassware and measuring equipment 1.3. Clean and store glassware and equipment in accordance with enterprise procedures
2. Make up working solutions	2.1. Identify the relevant standard methods for solution preparation 2.2. Assemble specified laboratory equipment 2.3. Select and prepare materials and solvent of specified purity 2.4. Measure appropriate quantities of reagents for solution preparation and record data 2.5. Prepare labels and log solution details in laboratory register 2.6. Transfer solutions to appropriately labelled containers
3. Check existing stock of solutions	3.1. Monitor shelf life of working solutions according to laboratory procedures 3.2. Replace out-of-date or reject solutions according to laboratory procedures 3.3. Conduct routine titrimetric analyses, if appropriate, to determine if solutions are fit for purpose

Required Skills and Knowledge

REQUIRED SKILLS AND KNOWLEDGE
This section describes the skills and knowledge required for this unit.
Required skills
Required skills include: using appropriate materials, equipment and procedures to prepare solutions following appropriate occupational health and safety (OHS), and hygiene procedures, if appropriate using all equipment safely and efficiently using enterprise procedures to calculate concentrations identifying solutions not fit for use using titrations to determine the concentration of solutions labelling, storing and disposing of solutions appropriately recording and presenting data appropriately
Required knowledge
Required knowledge includes: relevant biological, chemical, food and laboratory terminology principles of metrology the international system of units (SI) concentration terms, such as % w/w, % w/v, % v/v, ppm (mg/L) and molarity basic theory of acids, bases, salts, buffers and neutralisation enterprise procedures for preparing solutions calculations required to prepare specified amounts of solutions of specified concentration appropriate OHS procedure for preparing, handling and disposal of solutions use of material safety data sheets (MSDS) relevant health, safety and environment requirements

Evidence Guide

EVIDENCE GUIDE
The Evidence Guide provides advice on assessment and must be read in conjunction with the performance criteria, required skills and knowledge, range statement and the Assessment Guidelines for the Training Package.
Overview of assessment
Critical aspects for assessment and evidence required to demonstrate competency in this unit	Assessors should ensure that candidates can: prepare working solutions in compliance with relevant standards, appropriate procedures and/or enterprise requirements follow OHS procedures to safely use laboratory chemicals glassware and equipment make up working solutions according enterprise procedures check existing stocks of solutions as being fit for purpose.
Context of and specific resources for assessment	This unit of competency is to be assessed in the workplace or simulated workplace environment. This unit of competency may be assessed with: MSL922001A Record and present data MSL943002A Participate in laboratory/field workplace safety. Resources may include: standard laboratory equipped with appropriate equipment and reagents SOPs and testing methods access to appropriate containers and storage facilities.
Method of assessment	The following assessment methods are suggested: inspection of solutions prepared, labelled and stored by the candidate review of solution records and workplace documentation completed by the candidate feedback from peers and supervisors observation of the candidate preparing working solutions oral or written questioning. In all cases, practical assessment should be supported by questions to assess underpinning knowledge and those aspects of competency which are difficult to assess directly. Where applicable, reasonable adjustment must be made to work environments and training situations to accommodate ethnicity, age, gender, demographics and disability. Access must be provided to appropriate learning and/or assessment support when required. The language, literacy and numeracy demands of assessment should not be greater than those required to undertake the unit of competency in a work like environment.
This competency in practice	Industry representatives have provided the case studies below to illustrate the practical application of this unit of competency and show its relevance in a workplace setting. Manufacturing When starting materials used for the manufacture of common household materials are in transit from the supplier to the manufacturer, they may degrade if subjected to conditions, such as heat, moisture, light and oxygen. Even when the supplier ships quality materials to the manufacturing plant, the materials may be sub-standard when they arrive. Quality control tests are designed to test starting materials to ensure they are within specification. For example, aspirin forms salicylic acid when stored under adverse conditions. Laboratory assistants prepare and monitor the quality of solutions, such as ferric chloride solution, which gives an intense violet colour when added to salicylic acid but gives no colour with aspirin. Absence of the violet colouration indicates that breakdown of the aspirin hasn't occurred. Biomedical A laboratory assistant made up 1 litre of buffer solution using buffer tablets and a 1 litre volumetric flask as specified in the method. To ensure the solution was suitable for use the assistant measured the pH and found it was within acceptable range. The assistant then appropriately labelled a storage vessel and stored the buffer according to requirements. By following enterprise procedures the shelf life of the buffer was maximised. Environmental An environmental laboratory is contracted to determine the acidity of water samples taken from local lakes and streams. A laboratory assistant is required to make up small batches of 0.01M sodium hydroxide and to determine its concentration by titrating it against a standard solution of potassium acid phthalate using phenolphthalein indicator. This procedure is carried out monthly to ensure that the concentration of the sodium hydroxide solution is accurately known. Alternatively, the laboratory assistant may be required to prepare and standardise a fresh batch of sodium hydroxide on a monthly basis. In this case, he/she must understand the underpinning knowledge of basic acid/base theory, potential problems of interferences (such as slow absorption of carbon dioxide by sodium hydroxide solution) so as to ensure that the concentrations of workup solutions are accurately known. He/she must also be skilled in calculating and performing dilution when required to prepare such low concentrations (0.01M) of working solutions.

Range Statement

RANGE STATEMENT
The range statement relates to the unit of competency as a whole. It allows for different work environments and situations that may affect performance. Bold italicised wording, if used in the performance criteria, is detailed below. Essential operating conditions that may be present with training and assessment (depending on the work situation, needs of the candidate, accessibility of the item, and local industry and regional contexts) may also be included.
Codes of practice	Where reference is made to industry codes of practice, and/or Australian/international standards, it is expected the latest version will be used
Standards, codes, procedures and/or enterprise requirements	Standards, codes, procedures and/or enterprise requirements may include: Australian and international standards, such as: AS 2163-2000 Laboratory glassware - Measuring cylinders AS 2165-1996 Laboratory glassware - Burettes AS 2162.1-1996 Verification and use of volumetric apparatus - General - Volumetric glassware AS ISO 1000-1998 The international system of units (SI) and its application AS ISO 17025-2005 General requirements for the competence of testing and calibration laboratories AS/NZS 2243 Set:2006 Safety in laboratories set Australian code of good manufacturing practice for medicinal products (GMP) calibration and maintenance schedules enterprise recording and reporting procedures equipment manuals equipment startup, operation and shutdown procedures MSDS and safety procedures material, production and product specifications national measurement regulations and guidelines principles of good laboratory practice (GLP) production and laboratory schedules quality manuals standard operating procedures (SOPs)
Concepts of metrology	Concepts of metrology may include: that all measurements are estimates measurements belong to a population of measurements of the measured parameters repeatability precision accuracy significant figures sources of error uncertainty traceability
Typical test solutions	Typical test solutions may include: solutions required for diagnostic/analytical and limit tests in food and chemical laboratories, such as sulphates, chlorides and heavy metals solutions, such as stains for standard diagnostic/analytical procedures in biomedical/environmental laboratories, such as cell staining, fixation of cells and tissues, suspension of cells and titrimetric indicators solutions required for laboratory maintenance and disinfection, such as 70% ethanol and hypochlorite
Laboratory equipment	Laboratory equipment may include: pH meters balances magnetic stirrers, water baths and hot plates measuring cylinders, beakers, conical flasks, volumetric flasks, pipettes and burettes filter papers and funnels fume cupboards
Hazards	Hazards may include: corrosive chemicals, such as acids and alkalis sources of heat, such as burners sharps and broken glassware spillages
Safety precautions	Safety precautions may include: use of MSDS use of personal protective equipment, such as safety glasses, gloves and coveralls correct labelling of reagents and hazardous materials handling and storing hazardous materials and equipment in accordance with labels, MSDS, manufacturer's instructions, and enterprise procedures and regulations regular cleaning and/or decontamination of equipment and work areas
Monitoring quality of solutions	Monitoring quality of solutions may include: noting turbidity to exclude absorption of moisture noting deposits to exclude microbial contamination or chemical degradation noting crystals to exclude evaporation conducting titrations to check concentration noting colour changes indicating a pH shift with solutions containing indicators checking expiry dates on solution containers
Occupational health and safety (OHS) and environmental management requirements	OHS and environmental management requirements: all operations must comply with enterprise OHS and environmental management requirements, which may be imposed through state/territory or federal legislation - these requirements must not be compromised at any time all operations assume the potentially hazardous nature of samples and require standard precautions to be applied where relevant, users should access and apply current industry understanding of infection control issued by the National Health and Medical Research Council (NHMRC) and State and Territory Departments of Health

Unit Sector(s)

Unit sector	Testing

Competency field

Competency field

Co-requisite units

Co-requisite units

MSL974001A Prepare, standardise and use solutions

Modification History

Not applicable.

Unit Descriptor

Unit descriptor	This unit of competency covers the ability to prepare, standardise and monitor the quality of solutions.

Application of the Unit

Application of the unit	This unit of competency is applicable to laboratory technicians working in all industry sectors. Industry representatives have provided case studies to illustrate the practical application of this unit of competency and to show its relevance in a workplace setting. These are found at the end of this unit of competency under the section 'This competency in practice'.

Licensing/Regulatory Information

Not applicable.

Pre-Requisites

Prerequisite units

Employability Skills Information

Employability skills	This unit contains employability skills.

Elements and Performance Criteria Pre-Content

Elements describe the essential outcomes of a unit of competency.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element. Where bold italicised text is used, further information is detailed in the required skills and knowledge section and the range statement. Assessment of performance is to be consistent with the evidence guide.

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
1. Prepare solutions	1.1. Select appropriate procedure for solution preparation 1.2. Select equipment, materials and solvent of specified purity 1.3. Measure appropriate quantities of reagents for solution preparation and record data. 1.4. Select and assemble specified laboratory equipment and appropriate grade of glassware 1.5. Perform specified dilutions 1.6. Prepare solutions to achieve homogeneous mix of the specified concentration 1.7. Label and store solutions to maintain identity and stability
2. Standardise and use volumetric solutions	2.1. Assemble appropriate laboratory equipment 2.2. Perform serial dilutions as required 2.3. Standardise the solution to the required specified range and precision 2.4. Label and store solutions to maintain identity and stability 2.5. Use standard volumetric solutions to determine concentration of unknown solutions
3. Calculate and record data	3.1. Calculate specified concentrations 3.2. Use authorised procedure if data is to be modified 3.3. Estimate and document uncertainty of measurement in accordance with enterprise procedures, if required 3.4. Record all relevant details according to laboratory procedures and report results 3.5. Report concentration with appropriate units
4. Monitor the quality of laboratory solutions	4.1. Check solutions for visual deterioration and expiry date 4.2. Restandardise or dispose of dated or deteriorated solutions 4.3. Record details and label solutions according to laboratory procedures
5. Maintain a safe work environment	5.1. Use established safe work practices and personal protective equipment to ensure personal safety and that of other laboratory personnel 5.2. Clean up spills using appropriate techniques to protect personnel, work area and environment 5.3. Minimise generation of waste and environmental impacts 5.4. Ensure the safe collection of laboratory and hazardous waste for subsequent disposal 5.5. Store equipment and reagents as required

Required Skills and Knowledge

REQUIRED SKILLS AND KNOWLEDGE
This section describes the skills and knowledge required for this unit.
Required skills
Required skills include: interpreting and following enterprise standard operating procedures (SOPs) determining equivalence points using indicators and graphical methods using calculation methods, including appropriate units, uncertainties, balancing equations, the concentration of the solution given the chemical reaction for the titration using apparatus and reagents to prepare standard solutions such as balances and volumetric glassware selecting and using primary and secondary standards and indicators performingquality assurance checks for solution performance performing titrations recognising control results that are not within acceptable range interpreting and using safety information, such as that provided by material safety data sheets (MSDS) and follow relevant safety procedures
Required knowledge
Required knowledge includes: solution terminology, chemistry of acids, bases, buffers, redox reactions and complexiometric reactions concepts of metrology grades of glassware, reagents and their use reactions used for standardisation and desirable characteristics enterprise communication and reporting procedures occupational health and safety (OHS) procedures, including those for using corrosive materials relevant health, safety and environment requirements

Evidence Guide

EVIDENCE GUIDE
The Evidence Guide provides advice on assessment and must be read in conjunction with the performance criteria, required skills and knowledge, range statement and the Assessment Guidelines for the Training Package.
Overview of assessment
Critical aspects for assessment and evidence required to demonstrate competency in this unit	Assessors should ensure that candidates can: use balances and volumetric glassware select and use primary and secondary standards select and use indicators perform quality assurance checks for solution performance perform titrations using laboratory procedures with required accuracy and precision and within required timelines calculate the concentration of the solution given the chemical reaction for the titration recognise control results that are not within acceptable range record results to enterprise standards label and store solutions in accordance with enterprise procedures interpret and follow enterprise SOPs interpret and use safety information, such as that provided by MSDS and follow relevant safety procedures.
Context of and specific resources for assessment	This unit of competency is to be assessed in the workplace or simulated workplace environment. This unit of competency may be assessed with: relevant MSAL974000 series units of competency, and relevant MSAL975000 series units of competency dealing with sampling, tests and measurements. Resources may include: standard laboratory equipped with appropriate volumetric equipment laboratory reagents and equipment SOPs and testing methods.
Method of assessment	The following assessment methods are suggested: inspection and/or testing of solutions prepared by the candidate review of records and workplace documentation completed by candidate review of work outputs by the candidate over time to ensure accuracy, consistency and timeliness feedback from peers and supervisors observation of the candidate preparing, standardising and using a range of solutions oral or written questioning. In all cases, practical assessment should be supported by questions to assess underpinning knowledge and those aspects of competency which are difficult to assess directly. Where applicable, reasonable adjustment must be made to work environments and training situations to accommodate ethnicity, age, gender, demographics and disability. Access must be provided to appropriate learning and/or assessment support when required. The language, literacy and numeracy demands of assessment should not be greater than those required to undertake the unit of competency in a work like environment.
This competency in practice	Industry representatives have provided the case studies below to illustrate the practical application of this unit of competency and to show its relevance in a workplace setting. Manufacturing A standard solution is used to determine the concentration of unknown solutions. The quality of these analyses is critically related to the accuracy with which the concentration of the standard solution is known. Therefore, laboratory technicians spend considerable effort to ensure that the materials and methods used for the preparation and standardisation will lead to a solution of accurately known concentration. For example, anhydrous sodium carbonate is often used to prepare solutions to determine the concentrations of acids. The sodium carbonate is heated at a suitable temperature to remove any trace of moisture and cooled in a dessicator. An appropriate quantity is dissolved in distilled water and made up to volume in a volumetric flask. This solution of known concentration is then titrated with acids of unknown concentration and the concentration of the acids determined. Environmental A laboratory technician was required to determine the total acidity of a water sample as part of a quality control program. The total acidity was measured by titrating the water sample with sodium hydroxide of known concentration using an appropriate indicator. The concentration of the sodium hydroxide was determined via a volumetric titration against a primary standard of potassium hydrogen phthalate. The value of the total acidity was determined by multiplying the volume of sodium hydroxide used with a numerical 'factor' which had been determined by the laboratory supervisor in order to save time. The value of the 'factor' was displayed on the titration equipment. However, a new technical assistant did the full calculation and found that his/her result differed slightly from that obtained using the 'factor'. After discussion with the laboratory supervisor it was agreed that the error was in the 'factor' and the assumption that each new batch of sodium hydroxide prepared was exactly the same concentration as all previous batches. This was incorrect as the concentration of each batch differed slightly and its actual concentration was determined accurate, using the primary standard. The procedure was changed so that the full calculation was required for all tests.

Range Statement

RANGE STATEMENT
The range statement relates to the unit of competency as a whole. It allows for different work environments and situations that may affect performance. Bold italicised wording, if used in the performance criteria, is detailed below. Essential operating conditions that may be present with training and assessment (depending on the work situation, needs of the candidate, accessibility of the item, and local industry and regional contexts) may also be included.
Codes of practice	Where reference is made to industry codes of practice, and/or Australian/international standards, it is expected the latest version will be used
Standards, codes, procedures and/or enterprise requirements	Standards, codes, procedures and/or enterprise requirements may include: Australian and international standards, such as: AS 2163-2000 Laboratory glassware - Measuring cylinders AS 2165-1996 Laboratory glassware - Burettes AS 2162.1-1996 Verification and use of volumetric apparatus - General - Volumetric glassware AS ISO 1000-1998 The international system of units (SI) and its application AS/NZS ISO 9000 Set:2008 Quality management systems set AS ISO 17025-2005 General requirements for the competence of testing and calibration laboratories AS/NZS 2243 Set:2006 Safety in laboratories set Australian code of good manufacturing practice for medicinal products (GMP) calibration and maintenance schedules enterprise recording and reporting procedures equipment manuals equipment startup, operation and shutdown procedures MSDS and safety procedures material, production and product specifications national measurement regulations and guidelines principles of good laboratory practice (GLP) production and laboratory schedules quality manuals SOPs waste minimisation and safe disposal procedures
Solutions	Solutions may include but are not limited to: solutions of strong/weak acids and bases oxidising/reducing agents solutions used for complexometric or precipitation titrations stains for cells and tissues, enzymes, buffers and antibodies diluents for maintaining isotonicity organic solutions and histological fixatives
Apparatus and reagents to prepare standard solutions	Apparatus and reagents to prepare standard solutions may include: balances pipettes, burettes, volumetric glassware and weighing bottles dessicators and filtering media ovens and muffle furnaces solutions, indicators and primary and secondary standards auto titrators, pH meters and other related meters and electrodes for determining equivalence points, top pan and analytical balances magnetic stirrers and heaters, and water baths
Checking useability of solutions	Checking useability of solutions may include: examining stained samples for correct staining reactions performing pH checks confirming enzyme activity checking red cell suspensions for haemolysis ferric chloride for phenolic solutions isotonicity for saline
Hazards	Hazards may include: chemicals, such as strong acids and bases, and stains sharps and broken glassware burners, hot plates, ovens and furnaces
Safe work practices	Safe work practices may include: use of MSDS use of personal protective equipment, such as gloves, safety glasses, goggles, faceguards, coveralls and gowns use of biohazard containers, laminar flow cabinets and fume hoods correct labelling of reagents and hazardous materials handling and storing hazardous materials and equipment in accordance with labels, MSDS, manufacturer's instructions, and enterprise procedures and regulations regular cleaning and/or decontaminating of equipment and work areas
Occupational health and safety (OHS) and environmental management requirements	OHS and environmental management requirements all operations must comply with enterprise OHS and environmental management requirements, which may be imposed through state/territory or federal legislation - these requirements must not be compromised at any time all operations assume the potentially hazardous nature of samples and require standard precautions to be applied where relevant, users should access and apply current industry understanding of infection control issued by the National Health and Medical Research Council (NHMRC) and State and Territory Departments of Health

Unit Sector(s)

Unit sector	Testing

Competency field

Competency field

Co-requisite units

Co-requisite units

MSS402001A Apply competitive systems and practices

Modification History

New unit, superceding MSACMS200A Apply competitive manufacturing practices - Equivalent

Unit Descriptor

This unit of competency covers the skills and knowledge required to implement basic improvement practices within an organisation using competitive systems and practices. The unit focuses on bringing together the basic concepts and the holistic application of these basic concepts and processes to operations. It would typically be carried out working as part of a team.

Application of the Unit

This unit applies to an individual in an organisation that has embarked on competitive systems and practices. The unit covers the skills and knowledge required to contribute to the competitive systems and practices processes and assumes that they are to be used within the scope of the individual’s job and authority.

This unit requires the application of skills associated with planning and organising an individual’s own role within the competitive systems and practices framework.

Licensing/Regulatory Information

Not applicable.

Pre-Requisites

Not applicable.

Employability Skills Information

This unit contains employability skills.

Elements and Performance Criteria Pre-Content

Elements describe the essential outcomes of a unit of competency.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element. Where bold italicised text is used, further information is detailed in the required skills and knowledge section and the range statement. Assessment of performance is to be consistent with the evidence guide.

Elements and Performance Criteria

1	Identify own place in the value chain	1.1	Identify customers relevant to own work and their needs/requirements
1.2	Identify suppliers for own work
1.3	Identify value contributions along the chain
1.4	Identify and recommend methods of increasing own contribution to the value chain

2	Improve the product and process value	2.1	Identify customer features/benefits in the product and process
2.2	Identify aspects of product and process which contribute to customer features/benefits
2.3	Identify aspects of product and process which do not contribute to customer benefits/features
2.4	Recommend methods of reducing waste and increasing features/benefits

3	Use competitive systems and practices	3.1	Identify competitive systems and practices used in organisation and own work area
3.2	Apply practices appropriate for the job or process
3.3	Monitor the job/process and make adjustments to improve it in accordance with procedures
3.4	Identify own skill requirements and seek skill development, if required

Required Skills and Knowledge

This section describes the skills and knowledge required for this unit.
Required skills
Required skills include: communicating with others to clarify scope of competitive systems and practices implementation and contributing suggestions for improvement visualising normal operational procedures in terms of flow and contribution to customer outcomes planning own tasks to support competitive systems and practices implementation implementing competitive systems and practices in own work area according to instructions identifying waste (muda)
Required knowledge
Required knowledge includes: internal and external customers and the value they derive from operations suppliers, their capabilities and contribution to value (this may be obtained from an existing value stream map or other enterprise documentation) waste (muda) relevant competitive systems and practices for own job and how to apply them factors impacting on product, operations and waste, particularly those wholly or partially under their control (and how to control them)

Evidence Guide

The evidence guide provides advice on assessment and must be read in conjunction with the performance criteria, required skills and knowledge, range statement and the Assessment Guidelines for the Training Package.
Overview of assessment	A person being assessed against this unit will work effectively in a competitive systems and practices environment, making continual positive contributions to the improvement of the business within the scope of their job.
Critical aspects for assessment and evidence required to demonstrate competency in this unit	A person who demonstrates competency in this unit must be able to provide evidence of the ability to: identify the scope of competitive systems and practices implemented in their work area identify services and/or functions supplied by suppliers and to customers identify own tasks and responsibilities and relate them to organisation and customer requirements identify aspects of products and process which add to or detract from customer benefit contribute suggestions for improvement.
Context of and specific resources for assessment	Assessment of performance must be undertaken in a workplace using or implementing one or more competitive systems and practices. Access may be required to: workplace procedures and plans relevant to work area specifications and documentation relating to planned, currently being implemented, or implemented changes to work processes and procedures relevant to the assessee documentation and information in relation to production, waste, overheads, and hazard control/management reports from supervisors/managers case studies and scenarios to assess responses to contingencies.
Method of assessment	A holistic approach should be taken to the assessment. Competence in this unit may be assessed by using a combination of the following to generate evidence: demonstration in the workplace workplace projects suitable simulation case studies/scenarios (particularly for assessment of contingencies, improvement scenarios, and so on targeted questioning reports from supervisors, peers and colleagues (third-party reports) portfolio of evidence. In all cases it is expected that practical assessment will be combined with targeted questioning to assess underpinning knowledge. Where applicable, reasonable adjustment must be made to work environments and training situations to accommodate ethnicity, age, gender, demographics and disability.
Guidance information for assessment	Assessment processes and techniques must be culturally appropriate and appropriate to the oracy, language and literacy capacity of the candidate and the work being performed.

Range Statement

The range statement relates to the unit of competency as a whole. It allows for different work environments and situations that may affect performance. Bold italicised wording, if used in the performance criteria, is detailed below. Essential operating conditions that may be present with training and assessment (depending on the work situation, needs of the candidate, accessibility of the item, and local industry and regional contexts) may also be included.
Competitive systems and practices	Competitive systems and practices may include, but are not limited to: lean operations agile operations preventative and predictive maintenance approaches monitoring and data gathering systems, such as Systems Control And Data Acquisition (SCADA) software, Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) systems, Materials Resource Planning (MRP) and proprietary systems statistical process control systems, including six sigma and three sigma Just in Time (JIT), kanban and other pull-related operations control systems supply, value, and demand chain monitoring and analysis 5S continuous improvement (kaizen) breakthrough improvement (kaizen blitz) cause/effect diagrams overall equipment effectiveness (OEE) takt time process mapping problem solving run charts standard procedures current reality tree Competitive systems and practices should be interpreted so as to take into account: the stage of implementation of competitive systems and practices the size of the enterprise the work organisation, culture, regulatory environment and the industry sector
Customers	Customers may include: internal or external customers and should be sufficiently close to the individual’s work as to be easily identifiable final customers used as the basis for the identification of value and waste The individual does not need to interface directly with the external customer, but should be provided with sufficient information to enable them to identify customer benefits and customer features
Suppliers	Suppliers may be: internal or external suppliers and should be sufficiently close to the individual’s work as to be easily identifiable The operator does not need to interface directly with external suppliers, but should be provided with sufficient information to enable them to identify supplier contribution to their own work and to customer benefit
Procedures	Procedures may include: work instructions standard operating procedures formulas/recipes batch sheets temporary instructions and similar instructions provided for the smooth running of the organisation good operating practice as may be defined by industry codes of practice (e.g. good manufacturing practice (GMP) and responsible care) and government regulations Procedures may be: written, verbal, computer-based or in some other format

Unit Sector(s)

Unit sector	Competitive systems and practices

Custom Content Section

Not applicable.

MSS402002A Sustain process improvements

Modification History

New unit, superseding MSACMS201A Sustain process improvements - Not equivalent

Unit Descriptor

This unit of competency covers the skills and knowledge required to prevent process improvements in their own work from slipping back to former practices or digressing to less efficient practices.

Application of the Unit

This unit applies to organisations implementing competitive systems and practices and continuous improvement. It covers the skills needed to ensure that process improvements are sustained and opportunities taken to suggest further improvements.

Improvement initiatives can be made by any of a number of methods and by teams or individuals. The unit assumes that desired levels of performance or quality are known to employees.

The unit can be applied to all areas of an organisation, including production, maintenance, logistics and office functions.

This unit requires the application of skills associated with problem solving, initiative and enterprise and self-management in order to understand implement and monitor improvement practices. It also requires the ability to identify and address personal skill gaps in order to manage own ability to implement change.

Licensing/Regulatory Information

Not applicable.

Pre-Requisites

Not applicable.

Employability Skills Information

This unit contains employability skills.

Elements and Performance Criteria Pre-Content

Elements describe the essential outcomes of a unit of competency.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element. Where bold italicised text is used, further information is detailed in the required skills and knowledge section and the range statement. Assessment of performance is to be consistent with the evidence guide.

Elements and Performance Criteria

1	Examine previous improvements	1.1	Identify impact of previous process improvements to equipment, operations, services or products in own work area
1.2	Identify improvements where objectives have not been met

2	Implement corrective actions	2.1	Identify corrective actions that can be taken by self on process improvements that have not met objectives
2.2	Obtain any required approvals
2.3	Identify any additional, personal skill gaps and seek skill development
2.4	Adopt improved processes

3	Check changes	3.1	Identify claimed improvements
3.2	Identify methods of observing and measuring claimed improvements in own work area
3.3	Check if claimed improvements are occurring and report problems in accordance with procedures

4	Check for further improvements	4.1	Look for areas of possible further improvement
4.2	Discuss further improvements with peers and supervisors
4.3	Take action to implement improvements in accordance with procedures

Required Skills and Knowledge

This section describes the skills and knowledge required for this unit.
Required skills
Required skills include: communicating with others to clarify scope and stage of implementation of competitive systems and practices and contribute suggestions for further improvements in implementation visualising normal operational procedures in terms of flow and contribution to customer outcomes planning own tasks to support competitive systems and practices implementation implementing competitive systems and practices in own work area according to instructions identifying waste (muda) monitoring competitive systems and practices performance indicators in own work and work area
Required knowledge
Required knowledge includes: internal and external customers and the value they derive from own work area operations suppliers to own work area, their capabilities and contribution to customer benefit waste (muda) relevant competitive systems and practices for own job and how to apply and monitor the outcomes factors impacting on product, operations and waste, particularly those wholly or partially under their control (and how to control them)

Evidence Guide

The evidence guide provides advice on assessment and must be read in conjunction with the performance criteria, required skills and knowledge, range statement and the Assessment Guidelines for the Training Package.
Overview of assessment	A person being assessed against this unit will be able to demonstrate their willing adoption of new equipment, processes, procedures and practices as well as their expertise at implementing them and making critical reviews of their performance in line with their level of competence and authority.
Critical aspects for assessment and evidence required to demonstrate competency in this unit	A person who demonstrates competency in this unit must be able to provide evidence of the ability to: implement and monitor process improvements in own work area against objectives contribute suggestions for further improvement/s apply procedures for seeking approvals and reporting non-conformances.
Context of and specific resources for assessment	Assessment of performance must be undertaken in a workplace using or implementing one or more competitive systems and practices. Access may be required to: workplace procedures and plans relevant to work area specifications and documentation relating to planned, currently being implemented, or implemented changes to work processes and procedures relevant to the assessee documentation and information in relation to production, waste, overheads and hazard control/management reports from supervisors/managers case studies and scenarios to assess responses to contingencies.
Method of assessment	A holistic approach should be taken to the assessment. Competence in this unit may be assessed by using a combination of the following to generate evidence: demonstration in the workplace workplace projects suitable simulation case studies/scenarios (particularly for assessment of contingencies, improvement scenarios, and so on) targeted questioning reports from supervisors, peers and colleagues (third-party reports) portfolio of evidence. In all cases it is expected that practical assessment will be combined with targeted questioning to assess underpinning knowledge. Where applicable, reasonable adjustment must be made to work environments and training situations to accommodate ethnicity, age, gender, demographics and disability.
Guidance information for assessment	Assessment processes and techniques must be culturally appropriate and appropriate to the oracy, language and literacy capacity of the candidate and the work being performed.

Range Statement

The range statement relates to the unit of competency as a whole. It allows for different work environments and situations that may affect performance. Bold italicised wording, if used in the performance criteria, is detailed below. Essential operating conditions that may be present with training and assessment (depending on the work situation, needs of the candidate, accessibility of the item, and local industry and regional contexts) may also be included.
Competitive systems and practices	Competitive systems and practices may include, but are not limited to: lean operations agile operations preventative and predictive maintenance approaches monitoring and data gathering systems, such as Systems Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA)software, Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP)systems, Materials Resource Planning (MRP) and proprietary systems statistical process control systems, including six sigma and three sigma Just in Time (JIT), kanban and other pull-related operations control systems supply, value, and demand chain monitoring and analysis 5S continuous improvement (kaizen) breakthrough improvement (kaizen blitz) cause/effect diagrams overall equipment effectiveness (OEE) takt time process mapping problem solving run charts standard procedures current reality tree Competitive systems and practices should be interpreted so as to take into account: the stage of implementation of competitive systems and practices the size of the enterprise the work organisation, culture, regulatory environment and industry sector
Customers	Customers may be: internal or external customers and should be sufficiently close to the individual’s work as to be easily identifiable final customers used as the basis for the identification of value and waste The individual does not need to interface directly with the external customer, but should be provided with sufficient information to enable them to identify customer benefits and customer features
Suppliers	Suppliers may be: internal or external suppliers and should be sufficiently close to the individual’s work as to be easily identifiable The operator does not need to interface directly with external suppliers, but should be provided with sufficient information to enable them to identify supplier contribution to their own work and to customer benefit
Measuring improvements	Measuring improvements may include: personally taking measurements arranging for measurements to be taken/made by appropriate personnel
Procedures	Procedures may include: work instructions standard operating procedures formulas/recipe batch sheets temporary instructions and similar instructions provided for the smooth running of the plant good operating practice as may be defined by industry codes of practice (e.g. good manufacturing practice (GMP) and responsible care) and government regulations Procedures may be: written, verbal, computer-based or in some other format
Improvements	Improvements include: techniques for preventing mistakes by designing the operations process, equipment and tools so that an operation literally cannot be performed incorrectly (e.g. baka-yoke) techniques that generate warning signals were a mistake is about to be performed (poka-yoke)

Unit Sector(s)

Unit sector	Competitive systems and practices

Custom Content Section

Not applicable.

MSS402010A Manage the impact of change on own work

Modification History

New unit, superseding MSACMC210A Manage the impact of change on own work - Equivalent

Unit Descriptor

This unit of competency covers the skills and knowledge required by an employee to effectively manage the changes in their own work resulting from their organisation’s implementation of competitive systems and practices.

Application of the Unit

This unit applies to an employee in an organisation implementing competitive systems and practices that affect the employee’s own work. The unit includes the skills required to positively participate in ongoing and continuous change as it affects their work. The employee will be expected to deal with these changes as part of a team and to give feedback from their own perspective.

This unit requires the application of skills associated with problem solving, planning and organising and self-management for assessing and managing the impact of change on own work. This unit also requires the ability to seek information and feedback from team members on the impact of changes and suggested improvements.

Licensing/Regulatory Information

Not applicable.

Pre-Requisites

Not applicable.

Employability Skills Information

This unit contains employability skills.

Elements and Performance Criteria Pre-Content

Elements describe the essential outcomes of a unit of competency.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element. Where bold italicised text is used, further information is detailed in the required skills and knowledge section and the range statement. Assessment of performance is to be consistent with the evidence guide.

Elements and Performance Criteria

1	Examine the impact of change on own work practices	1.1	Identify competitive systems and practices relevant to changes in own work
1.2	Examine changes to work flow
1.3	Examine changes to equipment/process/physical environment
1.4	Examine changes to work relationship with team members and other teams
1.5	Examine changes to data collection needs
1.6	Examine changed work for impacts on health, safety and environment (HSE)
1.7	Examine changes to quality requirements
1.8	Identify any additional individual skill needs
1.9	Identify other areas requiring assistance

2	Implement change	2.1	Review changes which may have an adverse impact with team leader
2.2	Adopt changes to individual work practice
2.3	Seek assistance in gathering/processing data, as required
2.4	Implement the data collection/processing and take actions on resulting information in accordance with procedures
2.5	Seek assistance/training to meet needs caused by change

3	Implement continuous improvement	3.1	Critically examine all changes
3.2	Identify impacts of changes both up and down the immediate value stream
3.3	Identify areas for improvement
3.4	Make recommendations for improvement in accordance with procedures

Required Skills and Knowledge

This section describes the skills and knowledge required for this unit.
Required skills
Required skills include: identifying the competitive systems and practices being implemented in the organisation that are relevant to own work, including, if implemented: Just in Time (JIT) and kanban systems preventative maintenance 5S housekeeping continuous improvement processes (e.g. kaizen) waste (muda) elimination formal problem solving procedures (e.g. root cause analysis (RCA)) analysing own work procedures communicating with others in work area, team leaders and other employees relevant to changes in own work solving problems relevant to changes in own work identifying sources of assistance in organisation if difficulty is experienced with changes interpreting relevant procedures and instructions working as part of a team
Required knowledge
Required knowledge includes: features of common competitive systems and practices sufficient for identification, including: JIT and kanban systems preventative maintenance 5S housekeeping continuous improvement processes (e.g. kaizen) waste (muda) elimination formal problem solving procedures (e.g. RCA) current processes and principles of operation sources of data on the process/plant and possible applications to information methods of determining own skill needs and developing skills, if required HSE principles as relevant to own job change implementation contacts and procedures relevant to work area employee assistance mechanisms in the organisation

Evidence Guide

The evidence guide provides advice on assessment and must be read in conjunction with the performance criteria, required skills and knowledge, range statement and the Assessment Guidelines for the Training Package.
Critical aspects for assessment and evidence required to demonstrate competency in this unit	A person who demonstrates competency in this unit must be able to provide evidence of the ability to: identify the competitive systems and practices used in their own work identify changes to their own work flowing from the implementation of the relevant competitive systems and practices implement changes know when and how to seek assistance with work changes make suggestions for improvements.
Context of and specific resources for assessment	Assessment of performance must be undertaken in a workplace using or implementing one or more competitive systems and practices. Access may be required to: workplace procedures and plans relevant to work area specifications and documentation relating to planned, currently being implemented, or implemented changes to work processes and procedures relevant to the assessee documentation and information in relation to production, waste, overheads and hazard control/management reports from supervisors/managers case studies and scenarios to assess response to contingencies.
Method of assessment	A holistic approach should be taken to the assessment. Competence in this unit may be assessed by using a combination of the following to generate evidence: demonstration in the workplace workplace projects suitable simulation case studies/scenarios (particularly for assessment of contingencies, improvement scenarios, and so on. targeted questioning reports from supervisors, peers and colleagues (third-party reports) portfolio of evidence. In all cases it is expected that practical assessment will be combined with targeted questioning to assess underpinning knowledge. Where applicable, reasonable adjustment must be made to work environments and training situations to accommodate ethnicity, age, gender, demographics and disability.
Guidance information for assessment	Assessment processes and techniques must be culturally appropriate and appropriate to the oracy, language and literacy capacity of the candidate and the work being performed.

Range Statement

The range statement relates to the unit of competency as a whole. It allows for different work environments and situations that may affect performance. Bold italicised wording, if used in the performance criteria, is detailed below. Essential operating conditions that may be present with training and assessment (depending on the work situation, needs of the candidate, accessibility of the item, and local industry and regional contexts) may also be included.
Competitive systems and practices	Competitive systems and practices may include, but are not limited to: lean operations agile operations preventative and predictive maintenance approaches monitoring and data gathering systems such as Systems Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) software, Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) systems, Materials Resource Planning (MRP) and proprietary systems statistical process control systems, including six sigma and three sigma JIT, kanban and other pull-related operations control systems supply, value, and demand chain monitoring and analysis 5S continuous improvement (kaizen) breakthrough improvement (kaizen blitz) cause/effect diagrams overall equipment effectiveness (OEE) takt time process mapping problem solving run charts standard procedures current reality tree Competitive systems and practices should be interpreted so as to take into account: the stage of implementation of competitive systems and practices the size of the enterprise the work organisation, culture, regulatory environment and the industry sector
Managing impact of change	Managing impact of change may include: elements being undertaken individually or as part of a team seeking assistance from team leaders for areas outside the employee’s range of responsibility and authority
Procedures	Procedures may include: all work instructions standard operating procedures formulas/recipes batch sheet temporary instructions and similar instructions provided for the smooth running of the plant good operating practice as may be defined by industry codes of practice (e.g. good manufacturing practice (GMP) and responsible care) and government regulations Procedures may be: written, verbal, computer-based or in some other format
Gathering and monitoring performance data	The gathering and monitoring of performance data may be: undertaken manually by individual employees through charts, tally sheets or keypad/board entry collected automatically through software, such as SCADA software, ERP systems, MRP and proprietary systems
Continuous improvement	Continuous improvement in competitive systems and practices (often referred to as kaizen) includes: the continual evaluation and improvement of all process in terms of time required, resources used, resultant quality, and other aspects relevant to the process
Value stream	The value stream begins with the customer and includes all actions (both value adding and non-value added) by both internal sections/departments and external organisations to meet a customer requirement. Depending on the operations and the customer requirement stages where value stream actions may occur include: sales outlet/representative information gathering, data analysis and research product design raw material sourcing intermediate processing final assembler/collation/preparation support services (e.g. accounting, finance and legal) storage and delivery to customer after market support

Unit Sector(s)

Unit sector	Competitive systems and practices

Custom Content Section

Not applicable.

MSS402030A Apply cost factors to work practices

Modification History

New unit, superseding MSACMT230A Apply cost factors to work practices - Equivalent

Unit Descriptor

This unit of competency covers the skills and knowledge required by an individual to identify cost components in their work and to be able to determine, in general terms, the cost impacts of alternative actions.

Application of the Unit

This unit applies to an individual who is required to contribute to, and be involved in, the assessment of cost factors in their work. This may be done individually or in a team environment.

The unit covers the skills to be able to assess the relative costs of the alternatives and use this as one of the key factors in making decisions. Decisions are made within the scope of the employee's authority and according to procedures. Typical decisions include those that contribute to the efficient organisation of own work and the improvement of production time and cycle times.

This unit requires the application of skills associated with problem solving to identify cost factors and cost implications of own work and self-management to apply cost-effective practices.

Licensing/Regulatory Information

Not applicable.

Pre-Requisites

Not applicable.

Employability Skills Information

This unit contains employability skills.

Elements and Performance Criteria Pre-Content

Elements describe the essential outcomes of a unit of competency.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element. Where bold italicised text is used, further information is detailed in the required skills and knowledge section and the range statement. Assessment of performance is to be consistent with the evidence guide.

Elements and Performance Criteria

1	Identify the major cost components of product or process in own work area	1.1	Identify cost components in the product or process in own work area
1.2	Recognise the impact of current or alternative actions on costs

2	Identify constraints to cost-efficiency	2.1	Identify required production/process rate and major costs
2.2	Identify costs factors under individual or team control
2.3	Relate identified costs factors to impact on overall cost of production/process
2.4	Identify cost factors that are a constraint to cost-efficiency in own work area

3	Apply cost-efficient work practices	3.1	Identify and explain to relevant people the implications of possible actions/changes to improve cost-efficiency in simple financial terms
3.2	Identify non-financial implications of proposed changes in discussion with relevant people
3.3	Select actions which minimise overall costs
3.4	Monitor actions to ensure cost-efficiency in own work area is maintained

Required Skills and Knowledge

This section describes the skills and knowledge required for this unit.
Required skills
Required skills include: communicating with others to clarify cost factors and contribute suggestions for improvement visualising normal operational procedures in terms of flow distinguishing between fixed and variable costs identifying fixed and variable cost components relevant to own work, including where applicable: power/energy materials, plant and equipment production or process time, including impact on salary and wages office expenses government taxes and charges
Required knowledge
Required knowledge includes: cost components of products made costs concepts, such as expense and income major cost contributors to product (e.g. energy) the difference between internally and externally controlled costs difference between overhead, labour and consumables

Evidence Guide

The evidence guide provides advice on assessment and must be read in conjunction with the performance criteria, required skills and knowledge, range statement and the Assessment Guidelines for the Training Package.
Critical aspects for assessment and evidence required to demonstrate competency in this unit	A person who demonstrates competency in this unit must be able to provide evidence of the ability to: identify the scope of their own and their teams work and relate it to the overall flow of work in the organisation express cost factors in specific terms (e.g. cost per item, process and task) and not just in a general manner identify and express costs factors in simple financial terms use cost factors to select lower cost alternatives when making decisions.
Context of and specific resources for assessment	Assessment of performance must be undertaken in a workplace using or implementing one or more competitive systems and practices. Access may be required to: workplace procedures and plans relevant to work area specifications and documentation relating to planned, currently being implemented, or implemented changes to work processes and procedures relevant to the assessee documentation and information in relation to production, waste, overheads and hazard control/management reports from supervisors/managers case studies and scenarios to assess responses to contingencies.
Method of assessment	A holistic approach should be taken to the assessment. Competence in this unit may be assessed by using a combination of the following to generate evidence: demonstration in the workplace workplace projects suitable simulation case studies/scenarios (particularly for assessment of contingencies, improvement scenarios, and so on) targeted questioning reports from supervisors, peers and colleagues (third-party reports) portfolio of evidence. In all cases it is expected that practical assessment will be combined with targeted questioning to assess underpinning knowledge. Where applicable, reasonable adjustment must be made to work environments and training situations to accommodate ethnicity, age, gender, demographics and disability.
Guidance information for assessment	Assessment processes and techniques must be culturally appropriate and appropriate to the oracy, language and literacy capacity of the candidate and the work being performed.

Range Statement

The range statement relates to the unit of competency as a whole. It allows for different work environments and situations that may affect performance. Bold italicised wording, if used in the performance criteria, is detailed below. Essential operating conditions that may be present with training and assessment (depending on the work situation, needs of the candidate, accessibility of the item, and local industry and regional contexts) may also be included.
Competitive systems and practices	Competitive systems and practices may include, but are not limited to: lean operations agile operations preventative and predictive maintenance approaches monitoring and data gathering systems, such as Systems Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) software, Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) systems, Materials Resource Planning (MRP) and proprietary systems statistical process control systems, including six sigma and three sigma Just in Time (JIT), kanban and other pull-related operations control systems supply, value, and demand chain monitoring and analysis 5S continuous improvement (kaizen) breakthrough improvement (kaizen blitz) cause/effect diagrams overall equipment effectiveness (OEE) takt time process mapping problem solving run charts standard procedures current reality tree Competitive systems and practices should be interpreted so as to take into account: the stage of implementation of competitive systems and practices the size of the enterprise the work organisation, culture, regulatory environment and the industry sector
Cost components	Cost components include: fixed and variable costs, such as power/energy, materials, plant and equipment, production or process time, including impact on salary and wages office expenses, such as telephone government taxes and charges
Process	Process may include: a production, maintenance, logistics, office or other support process in an organisation
Overall cost	Overall cost may include: the assessment of negative and positive financial implications negative long-term issues, such as occupational health and safety (OHS), environmental and regulatory issues

Unit Sector(s)

Unit sector	Competitive systems and practices

Custom Content Section

Not applicable.

MSS402040A Apply 5S procedures

Modification History

New unit, superseding MSACMT240A Apply 5S procedures in a manufacturing environment - Equivalent

Unit Descriptor

This unit of competency covers the skills and knowledge required by an employee to apply 5S procedures to their own job and work area. The unit assumes the employee has a particular job and an allocated work area and that processes in the work area are known by the individual.

Application of the Unit

This unit applies to an individual in an organisation who works in an operational position as part of production, maintenance, logistics, and so on. The unit can also apply to individuals in other organisations who have a discrete role and responsibility for individually managed processes. For employees in an office, the specific office-related unit MSS402041A Apply 5S in an office should be selected.

This unit applies where an organisation has decided to embark on a competitive systems and practices strategy and as part of this has adopted the philosophy of 5S as one of the tools to improve performance. The employee needs to apply 5S to their job and work area and maintain the housekeeping and other standards set by 5S.

This unit requires the application of skills associated with planning and organising, problem solving and self-management, in order to identify and implement 5S housekeeping practices.

Licensing/Regulatory Information

Not applicable.

Pre-Requisites

Not applicable.

Employability Skills Information

This unit contains employability skills.

Elements and Performance Criteria Pre-Content

Elements describe the essential outcomes of a unit of competency.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element. Where bold italicised text is used, further information is detailed in the required skills and knowledge section and the range statement. Assessment of performance is to be consistent with the evidence guide.

Elements and Performance Criteria

1	Sort needed items from unneeded	1.1	Identify all items in the work area
1.2	Sort items to achieve deliverables and value expected by downstream and final customers
1.3	Sort items required for regulatory or other required purposes
1.4	Place any non-essential item in a appropriate place other than the workplace
1.5	Regularly check that only essential items are in the work area

2	Set the workplace in order	2.1	Identify the best location for each essential item
2.2	Place each essential item in its assigned location
2.3	After use immediately return each essential item to its assigned location
2.4	Regularly check that each essential item is in its assigned location

3	Shine the work area	3.1	Keep the work area clean and tidy at all times
3.2	Conduct regular housekeeping activities during shift
3.3	Ensure the work area is neat, clean and tidy at both beginning and end of shift

4	Standardise activities	4.1	Follow procedures
4.2	Follow checklists for activities, where available
4.3	Keep the work area to specified standard

5	Sustain the 5S system	5.1	Clean up after completion of job and before commencing next job or end of shift
5.2	Identify situations where compliance to standards is unlikely and take actions specified in procedures
5.3	Inspect work area regularly for compliance to specified standard
5.4	Recommend improvements to lift the level of compliance in the workplace

Required Skills and Knowledge

This section describes the skills and knowledge required for this unit.
Required skills
Required skills include: communicating with others to clarify issues during 5S implementation, communicate results and contribute suggestions for improvement visualising operations in terms of flow and contribution to customer outcomes planning own tasks in implementation of 5S implementing 5S in own work area according to instructions identifying waste (muda) prioritising activities and items reading and interpreting documents describing procedures recording activities and results against templates and other prescribed formats working with others solving problems
Required knowledge
Required knowledge includes: operations and processes relevant to own job meaning and application of 5S steps to own job and work area principles of efficient workplace organisation purposes of 5S methods of making/recommending improvements

Evidence Guide

The evidence guide provides advice on assessment and must be read in conjunction with the performance criteria, required skills and knowledge, range statement and the Assessment Guidelines for the Training Package.
Critical aspects for assessment and evidence required to demonstrate competency in this unit	A person who demonstrates competency in this unit must be able to provide evidence of the ability to: identify own tasks and responsibilities and relate them to organisation and customer requirements identify and explain the stages of 5S implement 5S in own work area identify waste (muda) in the work area.
Context of and specific resources for assessment	Assessment of performance must be undertaken in a workplace using or implementing one or more competitive systems and practices. Access may be required to: workplace procedures and plans relevant to work area specifications and documentation relating to planned, currently being implemented, or implemented changes to work processes and procedures relevant to the assessee documentation and information in relation to production, waste, overheads and hazard control/management reports from supervisors/managers case studies and scenarios to assess responses to contingencies.
Method of assessment	A holistic approach should be taken to the assessment. Competence in this unit may be assessed by using a combination of the following to generate evidence: demonstration in the workplace workplace projects suitable simulation case studies/scenarios (particularly for assessment of contingencies, improvement scenarios, and so on) targeted questioning reports from supervisors, peers and colleagues (third-party reports) portfolio of evidence. In all cases it is expected that practical assessment will be combined with targeted questioning to assess underpinning knowledge. Where applicable, reasonable adjustment must be made to work environments and training situations to accommodate ethnicity, age, gender, demographics and disability.
Guidance information for assessment	Assessment processes and techniques must be culturally appropriate and appropriate to the oracy, language and literacy capacity of the candidate and the work being performed.

Range Statement

The range statement relates to the unit of competency as a whole. It allows for different work environments and situations that may affect performance. Bold italicised wording, if used in the performance criteria, is detailed below. Essential operating conditions that may be present with training and assessment (depending on the work situation, needs of the candidate, accessibility of the item, and local industry and regional contexts) may also be included.
Competitive systems and practices	Competitive systems and practices may include, but are not limited to: lean operations agile operations preventative and predictive maintenance approaches monitoring and data gathering systems, such as Systems Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) software, Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) systems, Materials Resource Planning (MRP) and proprietary systems statistical process control systems, including six sigma and three sigma Just in Time (JIT), kanban and other pull-related operations control systems supply, value, and demand chain monitoring and analysis 5S continuous improvement (kaizen) breakthrough improvement (kaizen blitz) cause/effect diagrams overall equipment effectiveness (OEE) takt time process mapping problem solving run charts standard procedures current reality tree Competitive systems and practices should be interpreted so as to take into account: the stage of implementation of competitive systems and practices the size of the enterprise the work organisation, culture, regulatory environment and the industry sector
5S	5S is a system of work organisation originally developed in Japan based around housekeeping principles. A close translation of the five stages in the housekeeping approach is: sort set in order shine standardise sustain
Sort	Sort involves keeping only what is absolutely necessary for the processes in the work area. Sort includes: clearing the work area of all non-essential equipment and materials Non-essential items are those not required to either produce product, conduct process or operations, or make required adjustments to equipment during process or operations
Set in order	Set in order includes: assigning required equipment and materials appropriate locations in the work area
Shine	Shine includes: keeping the work area clean at all times. This should be carried out to a regular daily schedule against allowed time and, on most occasions, at the end of a job
Standardise	Standardising includes: activities that help maintain the order and the housekeeping standards using procedures and checklists developed from a procedure
Sustain	Sustain includes: making sure that daily activities are completed every day regardless of circumstance cleaning up after a job undertaking inspections, including: informal inspections carried out often, at least weekly formal inspections carried out at least monthly generating continuous improvement actions from daily activities following up specific actions to generate continuous improvement
Items in work area	Items in work area may include: tools jigs/fixtures materials/components plant and equipment manuals personal items (e.g. bags, lunch boxes and posters) safety equipment and personal protective equipment other items which happen to be in the work area
Procedures	Procedures may include: work instructions standard operating procedures formulas/recipes batch sheets temporary instructions and similar instructions provided for the operation of the plant good operating practice as may be defined by industry codes of practice (e.g. good manufacturing practice (GMP) and responsible care) and government regulations Procedures may be: written, verbal, computer based or in some other format

Unit Sector(s)

Unit sector	Competitive systems and practices

Custom Content Section

Not applicable.

MSS402080A Undertake root cause analysis

Modification History

New unit, superseding MSACMT280A Undertake root cause analysis - Equivalent

Unit Descriptor

This unit of competency covers the skills and knowledge required to undertake root cause analysis (RCA) by any person. This will often be undertaken by people working in a team. This unit also covers the competencies needed by operators to contribute to an advanced maintenance strategy using RCA coupled with diagrams and charts.

Application of the Unit

This unit applies to individuals working in an organisation which is applying competitive systems and practices strategies. The unit applies to the formal problem solving to root cause that the individual must undertake in their own work area or where the individual contributes to problem solving to root cause as part of a team.

This unit requires an ability to seek and apply information from a variety of sources in order to inform RCAs. Initiative and enterprise is also required to identify quick fix and permanent solutions to problems.

Where training in a wider range of problem solving techniques and tools is required the unit MSAPMSUP390A Use structured problem solving tools should be selected.

Licensing/Regulatory Information

Not applicable.

Pre-Requisites

Not applicable.

Employability Skills Information

This unit contains employability skills.

Elements and Performance Criteria Pre-Content

Elements describe the essential outcomes of a unit of competency.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element. Where bold italicised text is used, further information is detailed in the required skills and knowledge section and the range statement. Assessment of performance is to be consistent with the evidence guide.

Elements and Performance Criteria

1	Recognise problems	1.1	Identify features or occurrences indicative of a problem
1.2	Use appropriate tools, techniques and charts to define the problem

2	Implement quick fix	2.1	Recommend a quick fix within the scope of competency and authority
2.2	Use technology or processes relevant to the problem to implement quick fix

3	Determine root cause	3.1	Identify a range of possible causes
3.2	Gather data and other information to eliminate or confirm possible causes
3.3	Use available data and information to link causes and effects
3.4	Seek assistance, as required
3.5	Identify root cause

4	Develop permanent solution	4.1	Identify a range of methods to eliminate the root cause or break the cause tree
4.2	Select the most appropriate solution
4.3	Liaise with relevant people
4.4	Recommend or implement solution within the limits of competency and authority
4.5	Monitor impact of solution and make further recommendations, as required

Required Skills and Knowledge

This section describes the skills and knowledge required for this unit.
Required skills
Required skills include: cooperating and working with others on problem solving assessing and recording information from a variety of sources defining potential problems factually, including: location and extent of problem or incident sequence of events where relevant extent of deviation from normal operation or performance analysing potential problems across a range of varied activities and knowledge applications reading and constructing simple charts, such as cause and effect diagrams
Required knowledge
Required knowledge includes: RCA methodology, including difference between quick fixes and root cause elimination or breaking of causal tree principles and normal operation of equipment, plant and processes in own work area sufficient to undertake a RCA and propose solutions common variances to normal performance that are indicators of a problem use of relevant analysis tools (e.g. cause/effect diagrams, Pareto charts and 5 Whys) operations in own work area

Evidence Guide

The evidence guide provides advice on assessment and must be read in conjunction with the performance criteria, required skills and knowledge, range statement and the Assessment Guidelines for the Training Package.
Critical aspects for assessment and evidence required to demonstrate competency in this unit	A person who demonstrates competency in this unit must be able to provide evidence of the ability to: undertake problem identification use appropriate processes to achieve root cause identification prioritise solutions recommend solutions and implementation procedures to problems within own area and range of technical skills and knowledge evaluate implementation of solutions.
Context of and specific resources for assessment	Assessment of performance must be undertaken in a workplace using or implementing one or more competitive systems and practices. Access may be required to: workplace procedures and plans relevant to work area specifications and documentation relating to planned, currently being implemented, or implemented changes to work processes and procedures relevant to the assessee documentation and information in relation to production, waste, overheads and hazard control/management reports from supervisors/managers case studies and scenarios to assess response to contingencies.
Method of assessment	A holistic approach should be taken to the assessment. Competence in this unit may be assessed by using a combination of the following to generate evidence: demonstration in the workplace workplace projects suitable simulation case studies/scenarios (particularly for assessment of contingencies, improvement scenarios, and so on) targeted questioning reports from supervisors, peers and colleagues (third-party reports) portfolio of evidence. In all cases it is expected that practical assessment will be combined with targeted questioning to assess underpinning knowledge. Where applicable, reasonable adjustment must be made to work environments and training situations to accommodate ethnicity, age, gender, demographics and disability.
Guidance information for assessment	Assessment processes and techniques must be culturally appropriate and appropriate to the oracy, language and literacy capacity of the candidate and the work being performed.

Range Statement

The range statement relates to the unit of competency as a whole. It allows for different work environments and situations that may affect performance. Bold italicised wording, if used in the performance criteria, is detailed below. Essential operating conditions that may be present with training and assessment (depending on the work situation, needs of the candidate, accessibility of the item, and local industry and regional contexts) may also be included.
Competitive systems and practices	Competitive systems and practices may include, but are not limited to: lean operations agile operations preventative and predictive maintenance approaches monitoring and data gathering systems, such as Systems Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) software, Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) systems, Materials Resource Planning (MRP) and proprietary systems statistical process control systems, including six sigma and three sigma Just in Time (JIT), kanban and other pull-related operations control systems supply, value, and demand chain monitoring and analysis 5S continuous improvement (kaizen) breakthrough improvement (kaizen blitz) cause/effect diagrams overall equipment effectiveness (OEE) takt time process mapping problem solving run charts standard procedures current reality tree Competitive systems and practices should be interpreted so as to take into account: the stage of implementation of competitive systems and practices the size of the enterprise the work organisation, culture, regulatory environment and the industry sector
Features or occurrences indicative of a problem	Examples of features or occurrences indicating problems include: variation to normal plant or equipment operation unplanned or non-conforming process or operations outcomes out of specification products excess scrap accidents and emergencies regulatory breaches customer returns and complaints reduction or loss of sales
Root cause	There are many possible causes of any problem. The root cause contrasts with other possible causes of a problem which when eliminated have no impact or only ameliorate the problem. Elimination of the root cause permanently eliminates the problem. There should only be one root cause for any problem and so the analysis should continue until this one cause is found.
Cause tree	The series of causes is referred to as the cause tree. Not all root causes are accessible and able to be eliminated. Breaking the cause tree is such a way that the problem cannot recur is an acceptable alternative. Not all situations can wait for the RCA and eventual elimination of the root cause as there may be serious current impacts. The quick fix will control these immediate impacts, but does not eliminate the root cause.
Quick fix	A quick fix is not a short cut or side step for a permanent solution to the root cause. It is a necessary step designed to control the immediate impacts of a problem, for example, to prevent ongoing errors or to ameliorate damage.
Appropriate techniques/charts	Appropriate techniques/charts may include: control charts Pareto charts run charts flow charts cause and effect diagrams tree diagrams 5 Whys analysis

Unit Sector(s)

Unit sector	Competitive systems and practices

Custom Content Section

Not applicable.

MSS403010A Facilitate change in an organisation implementing competitive systems and practices

Modification History

New unit superseding MSACMC410A Lead change in a manufacturing environment - Equivalent

Unit Descriptor

This unit of competency covers the skills and knowledge required by individuals responsible for facilitating change processes in an organisation implementing competitive operational practices.

Application of the Unit

This unit applies to people who facilitate the change process resulting from implementing one or more competitive systems or practices. This implementation may also be associated with other changes, such as the introduction of new products, processes or equipment. The unit will usually apply to people whose responsibility is at the team, area or section level rather than the whole organisation. The responsibility may be formally designated or be informal, as in mentoring and assisting fellow employees.

This unit assumes that consultation and agreement on the implementation of the competitive systems and practices and other associated changes has already occurred and the nature and extent of the change has been agreed.

This unit does not cover the negotiation of change in a formal industrial relations sense but does cover the skills needed to identify real or potential change implementation issues, including those that may need to be referred to formal consultation and/or dispute settlement procedures.

This unit has a strong emphasis on planning, encouraging and facilitating in a changing environment within the organisation, including using appropriate communication, teamwork, problem solving, initiative and self-management.

Licensing/Regulatory Information

Not applicable.

Pre-Requisites

Not applicable.

Employability Skills Information

This unit contains employability skills.

Elements and Performance Criteria Pre-Content

Elements describe the essential outcomes of a unit of competency.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element. Where bold italicised text is used, further information is detailed in the required skills and knowledge section and the range statement. Assessment of performance is to be consistent with the evidence guide.

Elements and Performance Criteria

1	Define nature and impact of change for designated area and processes	1.1	Identify the organisation’s aims and objectives for the competitive systems and practices techniques related to the change process
1.2	Identify opportunities for implementation of change within work area
1.3	Determine impacts of change for work area, including potential benefits and impacts on own work and work of fellow employees

2	Identify key performance indicators (KPIs)	2.1	Liaise, where required, with managers, engineers and other staff responsible for designing and/or implementing change
2.2	Identify KPIs for own work responsibility and that of the work area
2.3	Communicate KPIs to fellow employees
2.4	Check that data collection and processing are appropriate for KPIs
2.5	Raise and resolve issues related to KPIs with relevant personnel

3	Liaise with key stakeholders	3.1	Identify key stakeholders impacted by the change
3.2	Communicate with key stakeholders within scope of authority
3.3	Identify and address issues and concerns of each stakeholder if within scope of authority
3.4	Develop and/or locate information required to address key concerns
3.5	Refer issues and concerns outside of scope of authority to appropriate personnel

4	Develop a strategy to help implement change	4.1	Identify or develop a work plan for implementing change
4.2	Make information required to support change available to team members
4.3	Communicate/circulate draft work plan to other employees in work area, supervisors, technical experts and other appropriate personnel for comment
4.4	Assess suggested changes and incorporate into work plan, where appropriate

5	Implement change	5.1	Obtain authorisation to commence change implementation in accordance with organisation procedures
5.2	Implement change in accordance with work plan and organisational occupational health and safety (OHS) and consultation procedures

6	Monitor implementation of change	6.1	Maintain open communication channels with all stakeholders during implementation
6.2	Monitor KPIs during implementation
6.3	Encourage and facilitate improvement suggestions of team members
6.4	Identify areas requiring improvement in change implementation
6.5	Make improvements to implementation according to organisation procedures

Required Skills and Knowledge

This section describes the skills and knowledge required for this unit.
Required skills
Required skills include: identifying the competitive operational practices being implemented in the organisation, including: Just in Time (JIT) and kanban systems preventative maintenance 5S housekeeping continuous improvement processes (e.g. kaizen) waste (muda) elimination formal problem solving procedures (e.g. root cause analysis (RCA)) identifying other products, processes or equipment changes being implemented within area of responsibility identifying the work and culture changes required for effective implementation of the competitive systems and practices being implemented and other products, processes or equipment changes identifying organisation KPIs and contextualise for area of responsibility to determine successful change implementation planning strategies for change implementation, including: required communication with others negotiations if any required with internal and external suppliers, customers and delegates analysis of any skill gaps in self and others required training data collection work organisation and procedure changes risk identification and contingency measures monitoring performance against KPIs and taking appropriate corrective action in the event of a non-conformance identifying and communicating with sources of assistance if difficulty is experienced with changes
Required knowledge
Required knowledge includes: features of common competitive operational practices, including: JIT and kanban systems preventative maintenance 5S housekeeping continuous improvement processes (e.g. kaizen) waste (muda) elimination formal problem solving procedures (e.g. RCA) health, safety and environment (HSE) principles and requirements for area of responsibility change implementation contacts and procedures relevant to work area employee assistance mechanisms in the organisation processes to develop work plans, including consideration of timetable, KPIs, training needs, OHS implications, contingency plans and responsibilities (the work plan must be capable of being coherently communicated to others)

Evidence Guide

The evidence guide provides advice on assessment and must be read in conjunction with the performance criteria, required skills and knowledge, range statement and the Assessment Guidelines for the Training Package.
Critical aspects for assessment and evidence required to demonstrate competency in this unit	A person who demonstrates competency in this unit must be able to provide evidence of the ability to: identify the competitive systems and practices used in their own work identify changes to their own work flowing from the implementation of the relevant competitive systems and practices implement changes know when and how to seek assistance with work changes make suggestions for improvements.
Context of and specific resources for assessment	Assessment of performance must be undertaken in a workplace using or implementing one or more competitive systems and practices. Access may be required to: workplace procedures and plans relevant to work area specifications and documentation relating to planned, currently being implemented, or implemented changes to work processes and procedures relevant to the assessee documentation and information in relation to production, waste, overheads and hazard control/management reports from supervisors/managers case studies and scenarios to assess responses to contingencies.
Method of assessment	A holistic approach should be taken to the assessment. Competence in this unit may be assessed by using some combination of the following to generate evidence: demonstration in the workplace workplace projects suitable simulation case studies/scenarios (particularly for assessment of contingencies, improvement scenarios, and so on) targeted questioning reports from supervisors, peers and colleagues (third-party reports) portfolio of evidence. In all cases it is expected that practical assessment will be combined with targeted questioning to assess underpinning knowledge. Where applicable, reasonable adjustment must be made to work environments and training situations to accommodate ethnicity, age, gender, demographics and disability.
Guidance information for assessment	Assessment processes and techniques must be culturally appropriate and appropriate to the oracy, language and literacy capacity of the candidate and the work being performed.

Range Statement

The range statement relates to the unit of competency as a whole. It allows for different work environments and situations that may affect performance. Bold italicised wording, if used in the performance criteria, is detailed below. Essential operating conditions that may be present with training and assessment (depending on the work situation, needs of the candidate, accessibility of the item, and local industry and regional contexts) may also be included.
Competitive systems and practices	Competitive systems and practices may include, but are not limited to: lean operations agile operations preventative and predictive maintenance approaches monitoring and data gathering systems, such as Systems Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) software, Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) systems, Materials Resource Planning (MRP) and proprietary systems statistical process control systems, including six sigma and three sigma JIT, kanban and other pull-related operations control systems supply, value, and demand chain monitoring and analysis 5S continuous improvement (kaizen) breakthrough improvement (kaizen blitz) cause/effect diagrams overall equipment effectiveness (OEE) takt time process mapping problem solving run charts standard procedures current reality tree Competitive systems and practices should be interpreted so as to take into account: the stage of implementation of competitive systems and practices the size of the enterprise the work organisation, culture, regulatory environment and the industry sector
Team	Team may include: work teams from all sections of an organisation, including production or other operational areas, maintenance, technical, administration/finance, and sales/marketing
Change	The philosophy of continual improvement is that every process can and should be continually evaluated and improved in terms of time required, resources used, resultant quality, and other aspects relevant to the process. Superimposed on this is the concept of breakthrough change when a large change/improvement is made which can shift the direction or operation of the organisation. Once such breakthrough change is the introduction of competitive operational practices.
Work plan for change	The work plan for change covers the designated work area and may include, depending on the organisation and work area processes: timetable KPIs training needs OHS implications contingency plans responsibilities with team members and senior managers, engineers and other staff responsible for designing and/or implementing change
Issues and concerns	Issues and concerns may be communicated formally and informally and may include: individual and group concerns those expressed by and through industrial processes
Gathering and monitoring performance data	Performance data may be gathered and monitored: manually by individual employees through charts, tally sheets or keypad/board entry automatically through software, such as SCADA software, ERP systems, MRP and proprietary systems

Unit Sector(s)

Unit sector	Competitive systems and practices

Custom Content Section

Not applicable.

MSS403040A Facilitate and improve implementation of 5S

Modification History

New unit, superseding MSACMT440A Lead 5S in a manufacturing environment - Not equivalent

Unit Descriptor

This unit of competency covers the skills and knowledge required to facilitate the implementation and improvement of the 5S by self and others in a team or work area.

Application of the Unit

This unit applies to individuals who facilitate 5S in a team or work area, including implementation, monitoring and improvement. The facilitation may be undertaken by formally designated supervisory staff, such as team leaders or other individuals in a competitive systems and practices implementation role, who need to provide support and encouragement to others to facilitate the achievement of 5S outcomes in the workplace.

This unit requires the application of skills associated with communication, teamwork, problem solving, initiative and enterprise, planning and organising, and self-management in order to provide leadership in a 5S environment. This unit has a strong emphasis on planning and change management, but also requires an ability to learn from experience and feed new information back into strategies to improve performance.

For planning, implementing and leading the application of 5S in an office environment see unit MSS403039A Facilitate and improve 5S in an office.

Licensing/Regulatory Information

Not applicable.

Pre-Requisites

Not applicable.

Employability Skills Information

This unit contains employability skills.

Elements and Performance Criteria Pre-Content

Elements describe the essential outcomes of a unit of competency.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element. Where bold italicised text is used, further information is detailed in the required skills and knowledge section and the range statement. Assessment of performance is to be consistent with the evidence guide.

Elements and Performance Criteria

1	Facilitate the set-up of 5S	1.1	Assist others to determine what are necessary and unnecessary items in the work area
1.2	Assist others to determine optimum assigned location for all necessary items
1.3	Liaise with relevant production and occupational health and safety (OHS) personnel in determining optimum locations
1.4	Assist others to determine optimum location for unnecessary items
1.5	Assist others to determine 5S schedule
1.6	Ensure procedures reflect 5S practices
1.7	Assist others to achieve the required level of skill

2	Facilitate the implementation of 5S	2.1	Ensure procedures reflect 5S practices
2.2	Assess skill base of team or work group members in 5S and arrange for any required training
2.3	Ensure that any damage and/or safety risks reported by the team or work group are addressed through correct mechanisms

3	Monitor 5S	3.1	Check work area for 5S implementation as part of normal routine
3.2	Identify non-conformances
3.3	Negotiate solutions to non-conformances

4	Improve 5S	4.1	Work with others to find areas for improvement
4.2	Assist others to develop improvement solutions
4.3	Facilitate the availability of resources required for the improvement solution
4.4	Facilitate the implementation of the improvement solution

Required Skills and Knowledge

This section describes the skills and knowledge required for this unit.
Required skills
Required skills include: communicating with other employees and managers to engender commitment to achieving 5S outcomes, conduct formal and informal meetings and to explain 5S and related concepts facilitating team or work area goals, activities and communications and accessing resources visualising normal operational procedures in terms of flow and contribution to customer outcomes planning and prioritising activities problem solving to determine potential improvements to the 5S system reading and interpreting the application of operating procedures for jobs within team or target work area analysing work practices, procedures and 5S principles to facilitate setting up the 5S system and to identify improvements identifying gaps in skills and/or knowledge and options to address them
Required knowledge
Required knowledge includes: principles and purpose of 5S methods of identifying waste in the work area, such as: waste walk document tagging tracking/log sheets spaghetti diagrams existing information technology and enterprise resource systems (e.g. Systems Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) software, Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) systems, Materials Resource Planning (MRP) and proprietary systems organisational policies, plans and procedures processes for identifying and addressing skill gaps ways of encouraging team members to find and suggest areas for improvement methods of identifying and evaluating options and making/recommending improvements methods of accessing required resources OHS requirements relevant to team and work area

Evidence Guide

The evidence guide provides advice on assessment and must be read in conjunction with the performance criteria, required skills and knowledge, range statement and the Assessment Guidelines for the Training Package.
Critical aspects for assessment and evidence required to demonstrate competency in this unit	A person who demonstrates competency in this unit must be able to provide evidence of the ability to: identify the scope of the services and/or functions supplied to and by the team or work area and the deliverables expected by customers, including the ultimate customer facilitate a systematic approach to implementing 5S lead and motivate others in achieving 5S outcomes and making improvements to the 5S systems set up systems for monitoring and improving 5S implementation manage non-conformances in implementation of 5S.
Context of and specific resources for assessment	Assessment of performance must be undertaken in a workplace using or implementing one or more competitive systems and practices. Access may be required to: workplace procedures and plans relevant to work area specifications and documentation relating to planned, currently being implemented, or implemented changes to work processes and procedures relevant to the assessee documentation and information in relation to production, waste, overheads and hazard control/management reports from supervisors/managers case studies and scenarios to assess responses to contingencies.
Method of assessment	A holistic approach should be taken to the assessment. Competence in this unit may be assessed by using a combination of the following to generate evidence: demonstration in the workplace workplace projects suitable simulation case studies/scenarios (particularly for assessment of contingencies, improvement scenarios, and so on) targeted questioning reports from supervisors, peers and colleagues (third-party reports) portfolio of evidence. In all cases it is expected that practical assessment will be combined with targeted questioning to assess underpinning knowledge. Where applicable, reasonable adjustment must be made to work environments and training situations to accommodate ethnicity, age, gender, demographics and disability.
Guidance information for assessment	Assessment processes and techniques must be culturally appropriate and appropriate to the oracy, language and literacy capacity of the candidate and the work being performed.

Range Statement

The range statement relates to the unit of competency as a whole. It allows for different work environments and situations that may affect performance. Bold italicised wording, if used in the performance criteria, is detailed below. Essential operating conditions that may be present with training and assessment (depending on the work situation, needs of the candidate, accessibility of the item, and local industry and regional contexts) may also be included.
Competitive systems and practices	Competitive systems and practices may include, but are not limited to: lean operations agile operations preventative and predictive maintenance approaches monitoring and data gathering systems, such as SCADA software, ERP systems MRP and proprietary systems statistical process control systems, including six sigma and three sigma Just in Time (JIT), kanban and other pull-related operations control systems supply, value, and demand chain monitoring and analysis 5S continuous improvement (kaizen) breakthrough improvement (kaizen blitz) cause/effect diagrams overall equipment effectiveness (OEE) takt time process mapping problem solving run charts standard procedures current reality tree Competitive systems and practices should be interpreted so as to take into account: the stage of implementation of competitive systems and practices the size of the enterprise the work organisation, culture, regulatory environment and the industry sector
Procedures	Procedures may include: work instructions standard operating procedures formulas/recipes batch sheets temporary instructions and similar instructions provided for the smooth running of the plant good operating practice as may be defined by industry codes of practice (e.g. good manufacturing practice (GMP) and Responsible Care) government regulations Procedures may be: written, verbal, computer-based or in some other format
5S	5S is a system of work organisation originally developed in Japan based around a close translation of the five stages in the housekeeping approach is: sort set in order shine standardise sustain
Sort	Sort involves keeping only what is absolutely necessary for the work processes that comprise the job and includes: clearing the work area of all non-essential items Non-essential items are items not required to either produce product, conduct process or operations or make required adjustments to equipment during process or operations
Set in order	Set in order includes: assigning required equipment and materials appropriate locations in the work area
Shine	Shine includes: keeping the work area clean at all times. This should be carried out to a regular daily schedule against allowed time, usually at the end of the day or of a particular process Cleaning includes: noting any signs of wear, damage, leakage, safety risks or other issues that require immediate attention
Standardise	Standardising includes: activities that help maintain the order and the housekeeping standards using procedures and checklists developed from a procedure
Sustain	Sustain includes: making sure that daily activities are completed every day regardless of circumstance undertaking inspections, including: informal inspections that should be carried often, at least weekly generating continuous improvement actions from daily activities formal inspections that should be carried out at least monthly
Items in work area	Items in work area may include: tools jigs/fixtures materials/components plant and equipment manuals personal items (e.g. bags, lunch boxes and posters) safety equipment and personal protective equipment other items which happen to be in the work area
Team	The term team is used to apply to all individuals in the target work area who are involved in the implementation of 5S. The team may or may not be a formally designated team working to a team leader
Work area	The work area includes: all areas where aspects of the job are performed and that are under the direct control of the employee. In a team environment 5S should be applied to all work areas under the control of the team
Target work area	The target work area may be identified as a physical and/or virtual work space: used by a person, a team or a cross-functional group common to part/s of a process or value stream (already defined) shared by people who undertake a defined procedure or set of procedures needed to support a particular function
Appropriate place	Appropriate places may include areas designated for: recycling rubbish removal staff room/lunch room/kitchen storage holding area until status is confirmed
Optimum assigned location	The optimum assigned location may include: making changes to the layout of furniture, equipment and personnel in order to facilitate the smooth and continuous flow of work through process steps taking into account OHS considerations
Non-conformance	Non-conformance includes: incorrect or incomplete application of 5S procedures, including any daily tasks, scheduled inspections and continuous improvement procedures

Unit Sector(s)

Unit sector	Competitive systems and practices

Custom Content Section

Not applicable.

MSS405021A Develop a Just in Time system

Modification History

New unit, superseding MSACMT621A Develop a Just in Time (JIT) system* - Not equivalent

* Prerequisite MSACMC410A Lead change in a manufacturing environment - removed

Unit Descriptor

Not applicable.

Application of the Unit

This unit applies to a person responsible for planning and implementing a JIT system. It includes consulting with employees, suppliers and customers regarding the change. This may require identification of training and other employee support as well as identifying possible logistical support.

The unit includes kanban-based JIT systems but also applies to other sectors and systems where a traditional kanban-type JIT may not be suitable through the unit’s coverage of JIT principles.

This unit requires the application of skills associated with communication in gathering, analysing and applying information, consulting with stakeholders, problem solving, and demonstrating initiative and enterprise. This unit also requires aspects of self-management and learning to ensure feedback and new learning is integrated into the JIT design.

Licensing/Regulatory Information

Not applicable.

Pre-Requisites

Not applicable.

Employability Skills Information

This unit contains employability skills.

Elements and Performance Criteria Pre-Content

Elements describe the essential outcomes of a unit of competency.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element. Where bold italicised text is used, further information is detailed in the required skills and knowledge section and the range statement. Assessment of performance is to be consistent with the evidence guide.

Elements and Performance Criteria

1	Design the JIT system/system improvements	1.1	Identify value chain members
1.2	Consult with internal and external value chain members
1.3	Identify current storage/inventory in value chain
1.4	Determine flow authorisation indicators
1.5	Determine minimum and maximum operations rate
1.6	Determine lead time for product or service
1.7	Determine number of units per kanban
1.8	Draft workable procedures to implement JIT

2	Implement the JIT system/improvements	2.1	Consult with key internal stakeholders to develop solutions to JIT issues
2.2	Ensure all stakeholders have required JIT-related skills and related issues have been resolved
2.3	Liaise with key external members of the value chain to develop solutions to JIT issues
2.4	Develop implementation plan for JIT
2.5	Determine key measures of JIT

3	Monitor the JIT system	3.1	Monitor key measures of JIT
3.2	Regularly liaise with key stakeholders seeking areas for improvement
3.3	Identify areas in need of improvement

Required Skills and Knowledge

This section describes the skills and knowledge required for this unit.
Required skills
Required skills include: communicating at all levels in the organisation and value stream and to audiences of different levels of literacy and numeracy undertaking self-directed problem solving and decision-making on issues of a broad and/or highly specialised nature and in a wide variety of contexts analysing equipment, operations and value stream and determining best flow authorisation strategy, including: form of kanban or flow authorisation indicator integration with operations and other competitive systems and practices tools and techniques key measures and monitoring strategy for JIT system procedures to be adopted in the event of a non-conformance problem solving JIT issues and non-conformances to root cause
Required knowledge
Required knowledge includes: needs of internal and external value chain members principles of JIT, including: demand pull flow authorisation kanban capability rate monitoring non-conformance procedures reasons for delays/storages/inventories in the value stream and methods of reducing/eliminating them methods of identifying skill gaps and methods of filling skill gaps key business objectives associated with implementing JIT principles of the operational processes relevant to the JIT implementation production data generated by the process and its application to JIT

Evidence Guide

The evidence guide provides advice on assessment and must be read in conjunction with the performance criteria, required skills and knowledge, range statement and the Assessment Guidelines for the Training Package.
Critical aspects for assessment and evidence required to demonstrate competency in this unit	A person who demonstrates competency in this unit must be able to provide evidence of their ability to: develop a complete JIT system, including: implementation strategy key measures training and support strategy for employees and value chain members procedures in the event of a non-conformance communicate and negotiate complex issues to a wide variety of individuals supervise JIT implementation and suggest improvements.
Context of and specific resources for assessment	Assessment of performance must be undertaken in a workplace using or implementing one or more competitive systems and practices. Access may be required to: workplace procedures and plans relevant to work area specifications and documentation relating to planned, currently being implemented, or implemented changes to work processes and procedures relevant to the assessee documentation and information in relation to production, waste, overheads and hazard control/management reports from supervisors/managers case studies and scenarios to assess responses to contingencies.
Method of assessment	A holistic approach should be taken to the assessment. Competence in this unit may be assessed by using a combination of the following to generate evidence: demonstration in the workplace workplace projects suitable simulation case studies/scenarios (particularly for assessment of contingencies, improvement scenarios, and so on) targeted questioning reports from supervisors, peers and colleagues (third-party reports) portfolio of evidence. In all cases it is expected that practical assessment will be combined with targeted questioning to assess underpinning knowledge. Where applicable, reasonable adjustment must be made to work environments and training situations to accommodate ethnicity, age, gender, demographics and disability.
Guidance information for assessment	This unit may be assessed concurrently with: MSS405002A Analyse and map a value stream, and/or MSS405050A Determine and improve process capability. This unit is related to: MSS402021A Apply Just in Time procedures MSS403021A Facilitate a Just in Time system which cover the lowest and intermediate skill levels in competitive systems and practices respectively. Assessment processes and techniques must be culturally appropriate and appropriate to the oracy, language and literacy capacity of the candidate and the work being performed.

Range Statement

The range statement relates to the unit of competency as a whole. It allows for different work environments and situations that may affect performance. Bold italicised wording, if used in the performance criteria, is detailed below. Essential operating conditions that may be present with training and assessment (depending on the work situation, needs of the candidate, accessibility of the item, and local industry and regional contexts) may also be included.
Competitive systems and practices	Competitive systems and practices may include, but are not limited to: lean operations agile operations preventative and predictive maintenance approaches monitoring and data gathering systems, such as Systems Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) software, Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) systems, Materials Resource Planning (MRP) and proprietary systems statistical process control systems, including six sigma and three sigma JIT, kanban and other pull-related operations control systems supply, value, and demand chain monitoring and analysis 5S continuous improvement (kaizen) breakthrough improvement (kaizen blitz) cause/effect diagrams overall equipment effectiveness (OEE) takt time process mapping problem solving run charts standard procedures current reality tree Competitive systems and practices should be interpreted so as to take into account: the stage of implementation of competitive systems and practices the size of the enterprise the work organisation, culture, regulatory environment and the industry sector
JIT	JIT is a production scheduling concept that calls for any item or service needed at a production operation, whether raw material, components, fuel, power, finished item, or anything else in between raw material and delivery to the final customer, to be produced and available precisely when needed, neither a moment earlier nor a moment later. JIT principles may also be applied to non-product based manufacturing operations (e.g. where services must be delivered on demand, such as transport)
Kanban	Kanban is a signal to authorise production or movement of an item to the next stage of production or operations. It is often a physical item for example a card, bin or sheet. When fully implemented, kanban operates according to the following rules: all production and movement of parts, material or other necessary items takes place only as required by a downstream operation the specific tool which authorises production or movement is called a kanban Kanban is typically applied to batch type operations and the production is measured in units produced. In continuous operations organisations, production is measured in terms of production rate (e.g. kg/h, tonne/day) and rate is increased/decreased according to the flow authorisation which may be a kanban (e.g. ticket or order from a supplier) or may be a SCADA signal from a remote facility (e.g. customer tank) saying that resupply is required or similar. In service operations a physical kanban may not be used – see flow authorisation indicator
SCADA	SCADA refers to: a number of systems which automatically collect critical process data, perform required mathematical manipulations on it and then make control decisions and/or give required information personnel for action
Value stream	The value stream begins with the customer and includes all actions (both value-adding and non-value added) by both internal sections/departments and external organisations to meet a customer requirement. Depending on the operations and the customer requirement stages where value stream actions may occur include: sales outlet/representative information gathering, data analysis and research product design raw material sourcing intermediate processing final assembler/ collation/preparation support services (e.g. accounting, finance and legal) storage and delivery to customer after market support
Flow authorisation indicator	Flow authorisation indicator may include: kanban bin, ticket or similar other indicator of demand pull
Pull system	Pull system includes: an operations planning system which makes to demand, rather than for stock or to a forecast
Cards/bins	Cards/bins include: the indicators used for production authorisation and may be physical cards or bins or some other suitable indicator
Procedures	Procedures may include: work instructions standard operating procedures formulas/recipes batch sheets temporary instructions and similar instructions provided for the smooth running of the plant good operating practice as may be defined by industry codes of practice (e.g. good manufacturing practice (GMP) and responsible care) government regulations Procedures may be: written, verbal, computer-based or in some other format
Key measures	Key measures may include: inventory levels lead time in full, on time and in specification (IFOTIS) delivery productivity/production rate other measures of pull through the value chain quality

Unit Sector(s)

Unit sector	Competitive systems and practices

Custom Content Section

Not applicable.

SIRXCCS006A Maintain business to business relationships

Modification History

Not applicable.

Unit Descriptor

Unit descriptor	This unit describes the performance outcomes, skills and knowledge required to develop and maintain enduring relationships with business customers, focusing on identification of customer needs.

Application of the Unit

Application of the unit	This unit requires sales team members to identify key customer contacts, and service-specific customer needs and confirm trading terms with customer contacts to build and maintain sustainable relationships with business customers.

Licensing/Regulatory Information

Not applicable.

Pre-Requisites

Prerequisite units	Nil

Employability Skills Information

Employability skills	The required outcomes described in this unit contain applicable facets of employability skills. The Employability Skills Summary of the qualification in which this unit is packaged will assist in identifying employability skills requirements.

Elements and Performance Criteria Pre-Content

Elements describe the essential outcomes of a unit of competency.	Performance criteria describe the required performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element. Where bold italicised text is used, further information is detailed in the required skills and knowledge and/or the range statement. Assessment of performance is to be consistent with the evidence guide.

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
1	Develop techniques to maintain close contact with business customers.	1.1	Confirm relevant contact personnel at each business or account customer.
1.2	Participate and contribute to team efforts to service business customers.
1.3	Build external relationships to improve supply chain efficiency, including product or service supply, account management, product management, supply arrangements, distribution systems, information and communication.
1.4	Maintain business customer contact consistent with business policy and procedures.
2	Identify business customer needs.	2.1	Confirm means to identify business customer needs.
2.2	Consult relevant customer contacts to review business needs.
2.3	Analyse current business and promotional activities and determine future directions.
2.4	Outline and confirm trading terms for specific customers.
2.5	Confirm pricing policy and procedures.
2.6	Process business reviews using latest forecasts of current and future trends.

Required Skills and Knowledge

REQUIRED SKILLS AND KNOWLEDGE
This section describes the essential skills and knowledge and their level, required for this unit.
The following skills must be assessed as part of this unit: identify and maintain key contact personnel at customer businesses contribute to team service to specific customers confirm trading terms, pricing policies and other relevant procedures to customers process business forecasts for implementation interpersonal skills review business needs and basic forecasts collect and organise information effective use of technology literacy skills to read, analyse and interpret a range of business policy and procedures documents and research information flexibility when communicating within teams, and responding to customers.
The following knowledge must be assessed as part of this unit: prioritising work schedule business policy and procedures for building relationships with business customers pricing policies trading terms information sources on product and supply arrangements for customers OHS aspects of job relevant consumer law, commercial law and legislation.

Evidence Guide

EVIDENCE GUIDE
The evidence guide provides advice on assessment and must be read in conjunction with the performance criteria, required skills and knowledge, the range statement and the Assessment Guidelines for this Training Package.
Critical aspects for assessment and evidence required to demonstrate competency in this unit	Evidence of the following is essential: builds sustainable relationships with business customers that deliver agreed business outcomes identifies key contact personnel for businesses with a given territory or customer account describes and utilises a range of means to accurately identify specific needs of business customers confirms trading terms for customers according to business policy and procedures
Context of and specific resources for assessment	Assessment must ensure access to: a retail or wholesale work environment relevant sources of product information relevant documentation, such as policy and procedures manuals forecasts for current and future market trends a range of business customers with different requirements an appropriate range of products or services customer information.
Methods of assessment	A range of assessment methods should be used to assess practical skills and knowledge. The following examples are appropriate for this unit: observation of performance in the workplace third-party reports from a supervisor customer feedback written or verbal questioning to assess knowledge and understanding. Holistic assessment with other units relevant to the industry sector, workplace and job role is recommended.
Assessing employability skills	Employability skills are integral to effective performance in the workplace and are broadly consistent across industry sectors. How these skills are applied varies between occupations and qualifications due to the different work functions and contexts. Employability skills embedded in this unit should be assessed holistically in the context of the job role and with other relevant units that make up the skill set or qualification.

Range Statement

RANGE STATEMENT
The range statement relates to the unit of competency as a whole. It allows for different work environments and situations that may affect performance. Bold italicised wording in the performance criteria is detailed below.
Relevant contact personnel may include:	new or repeat contacts internal and external contacts people from a range of social, cultural and ethnic backgrounds and with varying physical and mental abilities.
Team members may include:	full-time, part-time, casual or contract staff people with varying degrees of language and literacy people from a range of cultural, social and ethnic backgrounds people with a range of responsibilities and job descriptions.
Business policy and procedures in relation to:	sale and distribution of products and services interaction with customers client relationship management pricing arrangements trading terms.
Methods to identify business customer needs may include:	verbal or non-verbal communication with: customer contacts staff supervisors and management suppliers observation appropriate questioning and active listening review of sales records.
Promotional activities may include:	internal and external activities corporate or locally based activities dealing with advertising agencies and consultants advertising catalogues newspapers posters radio or TV suppliers internet website.
Trading terms may be influenced by:	due diligence requirements value for money risk sharing market position planning cycles and timing terms and conditions agreed intellectual property and technology rights continuous improvement supply chain management infrastructural and capital outlay requirements organisational systems integration and compatibility.

Unit Sector(s)

Sector	Cross-Sector

Competency field

Competency field	Client and Customer Service

SIRXCCS509 Manage business customers

Modification History

The version details of this endorsed unit are in the table below. The latest information is at the top.

Release	Comments
First Release	This is a revised unit, based on and equivalent to SIRXCCS005A Manage business customers.

Unit Descriptor

This unit describes the performance outcomes, skills and knowledge required to manage contracts, reinforce trading terms, and negotiate deals with business customers.

The unit covers ways to negotiate and finalise legally binding contractual agreements with a range of business customers, according to company policy and legislative requirements, to meet business targets and strategic outcomes.

Application of the Unit

This unit applies to senior sales personnel who negotiate contractual arrangements with customers to meet business outcomes and strategic goals.

Licensing/Regulatory Information

No licensing, legislative, regulatory or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of endorsement.

Pre-Requisites

Nil

Employability Skills Information

This unit contains employability skills.

Elements and Performance Criteria Pre-Content

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes of a unit of competency.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element. Where bold italicised text is used, further information is detailed in the required skills and knowledge section and the range statement. Assessment of performance is to be consistent with the evidence guide.
1. Negotiate deals.	1.1.Establish special deals, according to business policy and procedures. 1.2.Negotiate and complete deals, according to business policy and procedures. 1.3.Determine supporting promotional and merchandising activities. 1.4.Negotiate optimal sales and distribution arrangements with customer prior to completion of deals according to standard organisational policies and procedures. 1.5.Approve special deals falling outside company policy and procedures according to business guidelines. 1.6.Negotiate and confirm supply arrangements for goods of services under special deals prior to completion of deals in line with standard organisational policies and procedures. 1.7.Ensure deals conform to business performance and marketing objectives. 1.8.Ensure deals are legally valid and binding.
2. Manage trading terms.	2.1.Negotiate and confirm trading terms for product and services in line with standard organisational policies and procedures. 2.2.Establish procedures and policies to approve new or amended trading terms. 2.3.Communicate trading terms to internal and external personnel according to legislative and business procedures. 2.4.Confirm procedures and policies for processing breaches of trading terms and communicate to relevant staff. 2.5.Establish processes for reviewing trading terms. 2.6.Establish policy and procedures for managing trading terms to achieve business and customer service objectives.
3. Manage business contracts.	3.1.Negotiate and confirm contractual obligations and terms with business customers in line with standard organisational policies and procedures. 3.2.Seek expert advice regarding the framing of contracts as required and in line with standard organisational policies and procedures. 3.3.Apply established terms and conditions of contractual arrangements with business account customers. 3.4.Complete requirements for amendment or variation to existing contract with a business according to business procedures and legal requirements. 3.5.Monitor performance of contract against agreed business objectives and standards. 3.6.Investigate and resolve contract variations according to contractual and business outcomes. 3.7.Resolve disputes over contracts to obtain business and customer outcomes. 3.8.Regularly complete contract reviews with customers, stakeholders and contract holders. 3.9.Conclude business contracts according to organisational and legal requirements.

Required Skills and Knowledge

This section describes the skills and knowledge required for this unit.
Required skills
communication and interpersonal skills to: build relationships with business customers consult and negotiate make presentations resolve disputes literacy and numeracy skills to: develop and amend contracts, according to business procedures and legal requirements develop guidelines for approving and implementing special deals document plans and decisions establish, confirm and review trading terms read and interpret information undertake financial and budget planning planning and organising skills to: establish procedures and policies complete contract reviews conclude business contracts monitor contract performance project and contract management skills technical skills to design promotional and merchandising activities
Required knowledge
business policy and procedures in relation to: approval processes dealing with internal and external groups and teams negotiating contracts and trading terms quality assurance and control selling and supplying products and services using and maintaining standard business technology competitor activities configuration of management systems elements that make a successful business partnership or relationship features and advantages of a contractual relationship information sources on product and supply arrangements for customers internal and external management systems work health and safety (WHS) aspects of job principles and techniques in negotiation public and private sector purchasing and procurement guidelines and rules relevant commercial law and legislation, including: law of contract Australian consumer law relating to the retail industry

Evidence Guide

The evidence guide provides advice on assessment and must be read in conjunction with the performance criteria, required skills and knowledge, range statement and the Assessment Guidelines for the Training Package.
Critical aspects for assessment and evidence required to demonstrate competency in this unit	Evidence of the following is essential: actively negotiates and finalises legally binding contractual agreements with a range of business customers according to company policy identifies and understands business targets and strategic goals manages business contacts and trading terms to achieve agreed business targets and strategic outcomes demonstrates a high level of ethical and personal integrity in conduct of negotiations and management of contractual relationships.
Context of and specific resources for assessment	Assessment must ensure access to: a retail work environment relevant documentation, such as: business policy and procedures information on the internal and external operating environment a range of business customers with different requirements.
Method of assessment	A range of assessment methods should be used to assess practical skills and knowledge. The following examples are appropriate for this unit: observation of performance in the workplace third-party reports from a supervisor customer feedback review of portfolio of evidence written or verbal questioning to assess knowledge and understanding.
Guidance information for assessment	Holistic assessment with other units relevant to the industry sector, workplace and job role is recommended.

Range Statement

The range statement relates to the unit of competency as a whole. It allows for different work environments and situations that may affect performance. Bold italicised wording, if used in the performance criteria, is detailed below. Essential operating conditions that may be present with training and assessment (depending on the work situation, needs of the individual, accessibility of the item, and local industry and regional contexts) may also be included.
Business policy and procedures in relation to:	approval processes interaction with clients and customers negotiating contracts and trading terms quality assurance and control sale and supply of products and services.
Promotional and merchandising activities may vary to accommodate variations in:	competition demographics economics legal factors natural factors political influences social and cultural factors technology.
Sales and distribution arrangements may include:	delivery of products leasing agreements and consultancies maintenance and support agreements provision of services research and development.
Supply arrangements may relate to:	cost coverage and content quality quantity time schedules.
Relevant staff may include:	employees internal or external contacts relevant managers supervisors.
Negotiation issues may include:	contract variations, including ability to vary or modify targets, processes and clauses innovations modification and amendment rights scope.
Business customers may include:	commercial enterprises community and not-for-profit organisations governments internal business units and divisions public agencies or organisations.
Expert advice may be sought from a range of professionals, including:	accountants and auditors industry association advisory services in-house or external lawyers senior in-house staff.
Contractual arrangements may include:	common-use arrangements or standing offers consequences contracts, including: contracts as detailed under Australian consumer law external contracts in-house service level agreements letters of appointment or intent memorandums of understanding or memorandums of agreement noncompliance petty cash purchase order trade partners verbal and written orders.

Unit Sector(s)

Cross-Sector

Competency Field

Client and Customer Service

SIRXSLS002A Advise on products and services

Modification History

The version details of this endorsed unit are in the table below. The latest information is at the top.

Release	Comments
Second Release	Editorial updates

Unit Descriptor

This unit describes the performance outcomes, skills and knowledge required to apply a depth of specialist or general product knowledge and a need for experience and skill in offering advice to customers.

Application of the Unit

This unit applies to team member who develop, maintain and convey detailed and specialised product knowledge to customers and other staff in accordance with store policy and relevant legislation. Specialist sales personnel undertake this function.

Licensing/Regulatory Information

No licensing, legislative, regulatory or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of endorsement.

Pre-Requisites

Nil

Employability Skills Information

This unit contains employability skills.

Elements and Performance Criteria Pre-Content

Elements and Performance Criteria

Elements	Performance Criteria
Elements describe the essential outcomes of a unit of competency.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element. Where bold italicised text is used, further information is detailed in the required skills and knowledge section and the range statement. Assessment of performance is to be consistent with the evidence guide.
1. Develop product and service knowledge.	1.1.Develop and maintain product knowledge according to store policy and legislative requirements. 1.2.Convey product knowledge to other staff as required. 1.3.Research and apply comparisons between products and services. 1.4.Demonstrate knowledge of competitors’ product and service range and pricing structure.
2. Recommend specialised products or services.	2.1.Evaluate merchandise according to customer requirements. 2.2.Demonstrate features and benefits of products and services to customer to create a buying environment. 2.3.Apply detailed specialised knowledge of product to provide accurate advice to customers.

Required Skills and Knowledge

This section describes the essential skills and knowledge and their level, required for this unit.
Required skills
interpersonal skills to: convey product knowledge to staff apply knowledge to provide advice to customers handle difficult customers through clear and direct communication ask questions to identify and confirm requirements share information use language and concepts appropriate to cultural differences use and interpret non-verbal communication literacy skills in regard to: use a range of communication and electronic equipment access relevant product and service information interpret product information interpret store policies and procedures record information numeracy skills to: estimate and calculate costs relevant to pricing products
Required knowledge
specialised product knowledge, including: warranties benefits and features shelf life and useby date storage requirements ingredients or materials contained in product product and ingredient origins care and handling of products corresponding or complementary products and services stock availability store and industry manuals and documentation stock and merchandise range service range store policies and procedures including: procedures for taking orders pricing procedures, including GST requirements relevant legislation and statutory requirements and industry code of practice relating to the retail industry

Evidence Guide

The Evidence Guide provides advice on assessment and must be read in conjunction with the Performance Criteria, Required Skills and Knowledge, the Range Statement and the Assessment Guidelines for this Training Package.
Critical aspects for assessment and evidence required to demonstrate competency in this unit	Evidence of the following is essential: consistently applies store policies and procedures and industry codes of practice in regard to customer service and selling products and services develops, maintains and conveys product knowledge to customers and other staff applies detailed and specialised product knowledge to provide accurate advice according to the needs of the customer.
Context of and specific resources for assessment	Assessment must ensure access to: a retail work environment a range of stock and merchandise relevant documentation, such as: price lists policy and procedures manuals a range of customers with different requirements a range of communication equipment.
Methods of assessment	A range of assessment methods should be used to assess practical skills and knowledge. The following examples are appropriate for this unit: observation of the candidate in the workplace third-party reports from a supervisor customer feedback answers to questions about specific skills and knowledge review of portfolios of evidence and third-party workplace reports of on-the-job performance.
Guidance information for assessment	Holistic assessment with other units relevant to the industry sector, workplace and job role is recommended.

Range Statement

The range statement relates to the unit of competency as a whole. It allows for different work environments and situations that may affect performance. Bold italicised wording in the performance criteria is detailed below.
Product knowledge may include:	brand options product features and benefits warranties safety features use-by dates handling and storage requirements stock availability price.
Product knowledge may be developed and maintained by:	accessing the internet attending product launches attending product seminars discussions with staff accessing product information booklets and pamphlets.
Store policy and procedures in regard to:	interaction with customers selling products and services.
Legislative requirements may include:	Trade Practices and Fair Trading Acts tobacco laws liquor laws lottery legislation industry codes of practice WHS sale of second-hand goods sale of X and R rated products trading hours transport, storage and handling of goods.
Staff may include:	full-time, part-time or casual under contract people with varying degrees of language and literacy people from a range of cultural, social and ethnic backgrounds people with a range of responsibilities and job descriptions.
Customer requirements may include:	specific brand sizing quality quantity price range usage.
Customers may include:	new or repeat contacts external and internal contacts customers with routine or special requests people from a range of social, cultural and ethnic backgrounds and with varying physical and mental abilities.
Pricing structure may include:	sales reductions pricing procedures, including GST requirements mark-downs.

Unit Sector(s)

Cross-Sector

Competency field

Sales

SIRXSLS008A Develop a sales strategy

Modification History

The version details of this endorsed unit are in the table below. The latest information is at the top.

Release	Comments
Second Release	Editorial updates

Unit Descriptor

This unit describes the performance outcomes, skills and knowledge required to develop a sales strategy to underpin the attainment of targets within a marketing plan.

Application of the Unit

This unit applies to sales team leaders or managers who evaluate current company sales strategies against agreed targets and collaboratively plan, review and implement sales strategies to meet business goals and outcomes.

Licensing/Regulatory Information

No licensing, legislative, regulatory or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of endorsement.

Pre-Requisites

Nil

Employability Skills Information

This unit contains employability skills.

Elements and Performance Criteria Pre-Content

Elements and Performance Criteria

Element	Performance Criteria
Elements describe the essential outcomes of a unit of competency.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element. Where bold italicised text is used, further information is detailed in the required skills and knowledge section and the range statement. Assessment of performance is to be consistent with the evidence guide.
1. Review existing sales strategy.	1.1.Review current sales strategy for all products and services. 1.2.Compare and contrast current sales strategies for products and services. 1.3.Identify joint business sales strategies.
2. Devise a sales strategy.	2.1.Enhance efficient decision making on sales planning through securing relevant information. 2.2.Use appropriate tools to complete sales planning and analysis activities for a specific market. 2.3.Devise sales targets. 2.4.Review and set sales targets through involvement of relevant people using latest data.
3. Implement sales strategy.	3.1.Ensure sales targets underpin business goals and outcomes. 3.2.Ensure sales strategies support marketing and promotional plans.

Required Skills and Knowledge

This section describes the essential skills and knowledge and their level, required for this unit.
Required skills
analytical skills to evaluate sales strategies interpersonal skills to: present reports and present to groups and consult through clear and direct communication ask questions to identify and confirm requirements share information give instructions use language and concepts appropriate to cultural differences use and interpret non-verbal communication literacy skills to: document strategic plans access and interpret information numeracy skills to: interpret and maintain data set territory sales targets that link to sales, marketing and strategic plans
Required knowledge
business policy and procedures in regard to: strategic planning sales and service delivery principles and techniques in interpersonal communication business merchandise and service range existing sales plans joint promotional programs business and direct customer requirements information sources and their reliability and accuracy marketing and promotional planning targets Work Health and Safety (WHS) aspects of job relevant commercial law and legislation

Evidence Guide

The Evidence Guide provides advice on assessment and must be read in conjunction with the Performance Criteria, Required Skills and Knowledge, the Range Statement and the Assessment Guidelines for this Training Package.
Critical aspects for assessment and evidence required to demonstrate competency in this unit	Evidence of the following is essential: accesses, analyses and integrates information regarding current company sales strategies develops realistic sales strategy targets that relate to strategic and business planning targets develops a successful sales strategy for a product or service in consultation with relevant personnel establishes procedures and mechanisms to collect and report on sales strategy during the development stage presents concise implementation procedures and review mechanisms for a sales strategy.
Context of and specific resources for assessment	Assessment must ensure access to: a sales-oriented work environment relevant documentation, such as: strategic plans information on the internal and external operating environment a team.
Methods of assessment	A range of assessment methods should be used to assess practical skills and knowledge. The following examples are appropriate for this unit: observation of the candidate in the workplace third-party reports from a supervisor review of portfolios of evidence written or verbal questioning to assess knowledge and understanding review of portfolios of evidence and third-party workplace reports of on-the-job performance.
Guidance information for assessment	Holistic assessment with other units relevant to the industry sector, workplace and job role is recommended.

Range Statement

The range statement relates to the unit of competency as a whole. It allows for different work environments and situations that may affect performance. Bold italicised wording in the performance criteria is detailed below.
Key elements of a sales strategy may include:	promotional activities sales techniques territory management rapport building product knowledge administration procedures and requirements time management negotiation skills.
Products and services may be grouped by:	brand merchandise classification category range customer.
Sales strategy may vary according to:	product or service merchandising and sales strategy discount periods, e.g. annual sale promotional strategies and their duration, cycle, territory coverage and product or service focus.
Joint business sales strategies will vary based on:	product, range, line, or category performance requirements objectives such as those for price, profit, brand share, market share.
Relevant information may include:	current performance data sales and contracts forecasted trends and opportunities available resource commitments and capacity.
Planning and analysis activities for a specific market may include consideration of:	location product and service mix packaging or presentation quality factors (time, cost, variations) access continuity.
Relevant people may include:	internal or external consultants employees supervisors relevant managers.
Business goals and outcomes may include:	key performance indicators strategic objectives price market and sales indicators brand value quality standards and criteria performance benchmarks milestones.

Unit Sector(s)

Cross-Sector

Competency field

Sales

SIRXSLS201 Sell products and services

Modification History

The version details of this endorsed unit are in the table below. The latest information is at the top.

Release	Comments
First Release	This is a revised unit, based on and equivalent to SIRXSLS001A Sell products and services.

Unit Descriptor

This unit describes the performance outcomes, skills and knowledge required to sell products and services in a retail environment.

It involves the use of sales techniques and encompasses key selling skills, from approaching the customer to closing the sale.

It requires a basic level of product knowledge and the recognition and demonstration of verbal and nonverbal communication skills to determine customer requirements, sell the benefits of products and services, overcome objections and close sales.

Personal evaluation is used to maximise sales, according to industry codes of practice, relevant legislation and store policy.

Application of the Unit

This unit applies to frontline sales personnel.

Licensing/Regulatory Information

No licensing, legislative, regulatory or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of endorsement.

Pre-Requisites

Nil

Employability Skills Information

This unit contains employability skills.

Elements and Performance Criteria Pre-Content

Elements and Performance Criteria

Element	Performance criteria
Elements describe the essential outcomes of a unit of competency.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element. Where bold italicised text is used, further information is detailed in the required skills and knowledge section and the range statement. Assessment of performance is to be consistent with the evidence guide.
1. Develop and apply product knowledge.	1.1.Develop product knowledge by accessing relevant sources of information and confirm with relevant staff. 1.2.Apply knowledge of the use and application of relevant products and services in interactions with customers according to store policy and legislative requirements. 1.3.Identify gaps in product knowledge and resolve by accessing relevant sources of information.
2. Approach customer.	2.1.Identify customers by name where possible. 2.2.Develop knowledge of customer buying behaviour by accessing relevant sources of information. 2.3.Determine and apply appropriate timing of customer approach according to store policy and customer behaviour. 2.4.Initiate customer contact according to store policy. 2.5.Convey a positive impression to encourage customer interest according to store policy.
3. Gather and respond to information.	3.1.Apply questioning techniques and listening skills to determine customer buying motives and requirements. 3.2.Interpret and clarify non verbal communication cues. 3.3.Direct customer to specific merchandise according to customer requirements and store policy.
4. Sell benefits.	4.1.Match customer needs to appropriate products and services. 4.2.Communicate knowledge of product features and benefits clearly to customers. 4.3.Describe product use and safety requirements to customers. 4.4.Refer customers to appropriate product specialist as required. 4.5.Answer routine customer questions about merchandise accurately and honestly or refer to senior sales staff.
5. Overcome objections.	5.1.Identify and acknowledge customer objections according to store policy. 5.2.Categorise objections into price, time and merchandise characteristics and consider solutions. 5.3.Offer solutions to customer objections according to store policy. 5.4.Apply problem solving within personal scope of responsibilities to overcome customer objections or refer to senior staff.
6. Close sale.	6.1.Monitor, identify and respond appropriately to customer buying signals. 6.2.Encourage customer to make purchase decisions. 6.3.Select and apply appropriate method of closing sale.
7. Maximise sales opportunities.	7.1.Recognise and apply opportunities for making additional sales according to store policy. 7.2.Advise customer of complementary products or services according to customer’s identified need. 7.3.Review personal sales outcomes and consider strategies to maximise future sales in consultation with relevant staff.

Required Skills and Knowledge

This section describes the skills and knowledge required for this unit.
Required skills
communication and interpersonal skills to: handle difficult customers verbal and nonverbal communication skills to: question, listen and observe overcome objections and close sale literacy and numeracy skills to: handle payments for goods read product information read store policies and procedures record information weigh and measure goods selling skills to use a range of selling techniques
Required knowledge
customer types and needs, including: customer behaviour and cues customer buying motives demographics, lifestyle and income individual and cultural differences types of customer needs, such as: functional psychological relevant industry codes of practice, legislation and statutory requirements relating to the sale of products and services selling techniques, including: add-ons and complementary sales closing techniques opening techniques overcoming customer objections recognising buying signals using strategies to focus customer on specific merchandise specific product knowledge for area or section store merchandise and service range store policies and procedures in regard to: allocated duties and responsibilities selling products and services and sales performance

Evidence Guide

The evidence guide provides advice on assessment and must be read in conjunction with the performance criteria, required skills and knowledge, range statement and the Assessment Guidelines for the Training Package.
Critical aspects for assessment and evidence required to demonstrate competency in this unit	Evidence of the following is essential: applies product knowledge and uses appropriate sales approach to sell the benefits of products and services, overcome objections and close sales uses questioning, listening and observation skills to determine customer requirements applies store policies and procedures in regard to selling products and services maximises sales opportunities according to store policies and procedures applies industry codes of practice, relevant legislation and statutory requirements in regard to selling products and services evaluates personal sales performance to maximise future sales.
Context of and specific resources for assessment	Assessment must ensure access to: a real or simulated retail work environment relevant documentation, such as policy and procedures manuals a range of customers with different requirements a range of merchandise and products appropriate to the retail workplace product labels and sources of product information.
Method of assessment	A range of assessment methods should be used to assess practical skills and knowledge. The following examples are appropriate for this unit: observation of the candidate in the workplace customer feedback answers to questions about specific skills and knowledge review of portfolios of evidence and third-party workplace reports of on-the-job performance.
Guidance information for assessment	Holistic assessment with other units relevant to the industry sector, workplace and job role is recommended.

Range Statement

The range statement relates to the unit of competency as a whole. It allows for different work environments and situations that may affect performance. Bold italicised wording, if used in the performance criteria, is detailed below. Essential operating conditions that may be present with training and assessment (depending on the work situation, needs of the individual, accessibility of the item, and local industry and regional contexts) may also be included.
Product knowledge may include:	features and benefits handling and storage requirements price safety features stock availability use-by dates warranties.
Relevant sources of information may include:	demonstrations internet labels product profiles staff members store or supplier product manuals store tours videos.
Legislative requirements may include:	industry codes of practice liquor laws lottery legislation work health and safety (WHS) sale of second-hand goods sale of X and R-rated products tobacco laws Australian consumer law and fair trading Acts trading hours transport, storage and handling of goods.
Customers may include:	customers with routine or special requests internal and external contacts new or repeat contacts people from a range of social, cultural and ethnic backgrounds people with varying physical and mental abilities.
Routine customer questions may relate to:	availability features and benefits price and price reductions quality.
Problem solving may be affected by:	resource implications store policies and procedures.
Sales transactions may be completed:	face-to-face online over the telephone.

Unit Sector(s)

Cross-Sector

Competency Field

Sales

SIRXSLS406 Manage sales and service delivery

Modification History

The version details of this endorsed unit are in the table below. The latest information is at the top.

Release	Comments
First Release	This is a revised unit, based on and equivalent to SIRXSLS005A Manage sales and service delivery.

Unit Descriptor

This unit describes the performance outcomes, skills and knowledge required to monitor, maintain and improve sales and service delivery. It involves market research, developing new markets, and marketing products and services within the culture of the overall store policy.

The unit requires the team member to develop and maintain excellence in sales and service delivery by ensuring the provision of a wellresourced working environment for fellow staff. The team member is required to proactively pursue the continuous improvement of operations by seeking, evaluating and reporting feedback from customers and colleagues on sales and service delivery and working conditions; and locating and negotiating adequate supply of stock and other necessary resources according to store policy.

Application of the Unit

This unit applies to staff with managerial responsibility.

Licensing/Regulatory Information

No licensing, legislative, regulatory or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of endorsement.

Pre-Requisites

Nil

Employability Skills Information

This unit contains employability skills.

Elements and Performance Criteria Pre-Content

Elements and Performance Criteria

Element	Performance Criteria
Elements describe the essential outcomes of a unit of competency.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element. Where bold italicised text is used, further information is detailed in the required skills and knowledge section and the range statement. Assessment of performance is to be consistent with the evidence guide.
1. Establish and respond to customer requirements.	1.1.Plan and develop strategies to enhance provision of customer service according to store policy. 1.2.Research and analyse customer needs in regard to local geographic and cultural issues. 1.3.Resolve customer complaints referred by staff, according to store policy. 1.4.Monitor sales and service targets and plans to ensure that customer requirements are met, and take appropriate remedial action if required. 1.5.Encourage staff to take responsibility for meeting customer requirements. 1.6.Seek and use feedback from customers to improve future operations.
2. Monitor, maintain and improve sales and service delivery.	2.1.Implement, communicate and review policies and procedures for sales and service delivery on a regular basis. 2.2.Maintain adequate resource allocation for client service provision in line with store policy and procedures. 2.3.Ensure sales and service targets and plans are consistent with quality and functional specifications. 2.4.Communicate sales and service targets and plans to relevant personnel according to implementation schedules. 2.5.Provide feedback to staff on operations and outcomes. 2.6.Take corrective measures to minimise factors that may cause disruption to operations. 2.7.Monitor and evaluate effectiveness of corrective actions for future operational planning. 2.8.Ensure current and accurate records on sales are available to authorised personnel. 2.9.Interpret and act on relevant reports as required.
3. Negotiate supply of goods.	3.1.Negotiate and implement arrangements with suppliers, according to store policies and procedures, and communicate to relevant personnel. 3.2.Authorise and communicate special pricing arrangements and customer payment agreements to relevant staff and management personnel according to store policy. 3.3.Monitor records of suppliers and stock for accuracy and legibility and take appropriate action where necessary. 3.4.Identify and communicate market factors affecting supply to relevant personnel. 3.5.Convey complete and accurate records of negotiations and agreements to appropriate personnel within designated time limits. 3.6.Take immediate corrective action where potential or actual problems with supply are indicated. 3.7.Identify and develop new suppliers to maintain and improve sales and service delivery.
4. Provide productive work environment.	4.1.Establish and maintain a sufficient supply of resources of the necessary quantity and quality to meet customer requirements. 4.2.Regulate and monitor access to and use of resources for maximum efficiency and sustainability. 4.3.Maintain staff working conditions to meet requirements of relevant legislation and store policy. 4.4.Ensure that maintenance frequency and use of equipment conform to recommended schedules and procedures. 4.5.Replace, repair or adapt resources that do not meet requirements as soon as practicable and with minimum disruption to work activity. 4.6.Communicate recommendations for improving conditions to relevant personnel within designated timeframe. 4.7.Maintain complete, accurate records and make them available to authorised personnel.

Required Skills and Knowledge

This section describes the skills and knowledge required for this unit.
Required skills
communication and interpersonal skills to: ask questions to identify and confirm requirements communicate with staff through clear and direct communication negotiate with suppliers and customers present information share information use and interpret non-verbal communication use language and concepts appropriate to cultural differences literacy and numeracy skills to: calculate costs and pricing arrangements document results estimate volume interpret and maintain data prepare reports research, analyse and interpret a broad range of written material technical skills to use new technology
Required knowledge
customer demand and market trends principles and techniques for: interpersonal communication purchasing and supply specifications stock control product quality standards range and availability of new products and services, especially those with enhanced sustainability features relevant industry codes of practice applicable to the sales environment relevant legislation and statutory requirements, including work health and safety (WHS) requirements applicable to the sales environment store merchandise and service range store merchandising plan store policies and procedures in regard to: efficient and sustainable use of resources pricing procedures, including GST requirements quality assurance and control sales and service delivery stock maintenance and control supply specifications

Evidence Guide

The evidence guide provides advice on assessment and must be read in conjunction with the performance criteria, required skills and knowledge, range statement and the Assessment Guidelines for the Training Package.
Critical aspects for assessment and evidence required to demonstrate competency in this unit	Evidence of the following is essential: maintains, monitors and evaluates sales and service delivery communicates sales and service targets and plans and provides feedback on operations and outcomes to relevant personnel according to store policy proactively improves sales and service delivery operations interprets and maintains data on sales and services delivery negotiates and arranges supply of goods according to store policy and procedures authorises pricing and payment agreements according to store policy and procedures maintains, monitors and evaluates supply of stock.
Context of and specific resources for assessment	Assessment must ensure access to: a retail work environment relevant documentation, such as: policy and procedures manuals sales and service delivery targets and plans records of sales and service legislation and statutory requirements industry codes of practice WHS legislation and codes of practice suppliers a team.
Method of assessment	A range of assessment methods should be used to assess practical skills and knowledge. The following examples are appropriate for this unit: observation of the candidate in the workplace customer feedback research report written or verbal questioning to assess knowledge and understanding review of portfolios of evidence and thirdparty workplace reports of onthejob performance.
Guidance information for assessment	Holistic assessment with other units relevant to the industry sector, workplace and job role is recommended.

Range Statement

The range statement relates to the unit of competency as a whole. It allows for different work environments and situations that may affect performance. Bold italicised wording, if used in the performance criteria, is detailed below. Essential operating conditions that may be present with training and assessment (depending on the work situation, needs of the candidate, accessibility of the item, and local industry and regional contexts) may also be included.
Methods used to analyse customer needs may be:	qualitative quantitative.
Customer may include:	customers with routine or special requests internal and external contacts new or repeat contacts people from a range of social, cultural and ethnic backgrounds people with varying physical and mental abilities.
Staff may include:	fulltime, parttime, casual or contract staff people from a range of social, cultural and ethnic backgrounds people with varying degrees of language and literacy levels.
Policies and procedures for sales and service delivery may involve:	customer complaints customer service and sales training service standards staff induction staff presentation.
Resource may include:	equipment and technology finances materials people time.
Store policy and procedures in regard to:	interaction with customers interaction with other team members WHS quality assurance and control acquisition and sale of products and services.
Specifications may include:	customer agreements operational means for meeting agreements specific functional duties within the organisation.
Relevant personnel may include:	managers members of own or other work teams supervisors.
Feedback may be sought and given:	in groups in writing individually verbally.
Factors that may cause disruption to operations may include:	operational resources quality of materials supply.
Records may be:	electronic hard copy.
Techniques used to negotiate with suppliers may include:	correspondence email face-to-face contact meetings telephone.
Arrangements with suppliers may relate to:	credit levels delivery partnerships and exclusivity pricing.
Sources of supply may include:	external organisations internal departments and teams internal and external personnel.
Problems with supply may involve:	cost coverage or content quality quantity time schedules or scales.
Relevant legislation may include:	equal employment opportunity and antidiscrimination laws federal, state and local legislation WHS.
Recommendations may be communicated to:	colleagues, specialists, staff from other departments external organisations with a health, safety or environmental responsibility government bodies higherlevel managers subordinates.

Unit Sector(s)

Cross Sector

Competency Field

Sales

TAEASS402B Assess competence

Modification History

Version	Comments
TAEASS402B	Released with TAE10 Training and Education Training Package version 2.0

Unit Descriptor

This unit describes the performance outcomes, skills and knowledge required to assess the competence of a candidate.

Application of the Unit

This unit typically applies to assessors.

Licensing/Regulatory Information

Not applicable.

Pre-Requisites

Not applicable.

Employability Skills Information

This unit contains employability skills.

Elements and Performance Criteria Pre-Content

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Elements describe the essential outcomes of a unit of competency.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element. Where bold italicised text is used, further information is detailed in the required skills and knowledge section and the range statement. Assessment of performance is to be consistent with the evidence guide.

Elements and Performance Criteria

1. Prepare for assessment	1.1 Interpret assessment plan and confirm organisational, legal and ethical requirements for conducting assessment with relevant people 1.2 Access and interpret relevant benchmarks for assessment and nominated assessment tools to confirm the requirements for evidence to be collected 1.3 Arrange identified material and physical resource requirements according to assessment system policies and procedures 1.4 Organise specialist support required for assessment 1.5 Explain, discuss and agree details of the assessment plan with candidate
2. Gather quality evidence	2.1 Use agreed assessment methods and instruments to gather, organise and document evidence in a format suitable for determining competence 2.2 Apply the principles of assessment and rules of evidence in gathering quality evidence 2.3 Determine opportunities for evidence gathering in actual or simulated activities through consultation with the candidate and relevant personnel 2.4 Determine opportunities for integrated assessment activities and document any changes to assessment instruments where required
3. Support the candidate	3.1 Guide candidates in gathering their own evidence to support recognition of prior learning (RPL) 3.2 Use appropriate communication and interpersonal skills to develop a professional relationship with the candidate that reflects sensitivity to individual differences and enables two-way feedback 3.3 Make decisions on reasonable adjustments with the candidate, based on candidate’s needs and characteristics 3.4 Access required specialist support in accordance with the assessment plan 3.5 Address any OHS risk to person or equipment immediately
4. Make the assessment decision	4.1 Examine collected evidence and evaluate it to ensure that it reflects the evidence required to demonstrate competence 4.2 Use judgement to infer whether competence has been demonstrated, based on the available evidence 4.3 Make assessment decision in line with agreed assessment procedures and according to agreed assessment plan 4.4 Provide clear and constructive feedback to candidate regarding the assessment decision and develop any follow-up action plan required
5. Record and report the assessment decision	5.1 Record assessment outcomes promptly and accurately 5.2 Complete and process an assessment report according to agreed assessment procedures 5.3 Inform other relevant parties of the assessment decision according to confidentiality conventions
6. Review the assessment process	6.1 Review the assessment process in consultation with relevant people to improve own future practice 6.2 Document and record the review according to relevant assessment system policies and procedures

Required Skills and Knowledge

This section describes the skills and knowledge required for this unit.

Required skills
analysis and interpretation skills to: break down competency standards interpret assessment tools and other assessment information, including those used in RPL identify candidate needs make judgements based on assessment of available evidence observation skills to: recognise candidate’s prior learning determine candidate’s performance identify when candidate may need assistance during the assessment processes research and evaluation skills to: access required human and material resources for assessment access assessment system policies and procedures access RPL policies and procedures evaluate evidence evaluate assessment process cognitive skills to: weigh up the evidence and make a judgement consider and recommend reasonable adjustments decision-making skills to: recognise a candidate’s prior learning make a decision on a candidate’s competence literacy skills to: read and interpret relevant information to conduct assessment prepare required documentation and records or reports of assessment outcomes in required format communication and interpersonal skills to: explain the assessment, including RPL process give clear and precise instructions ask effective questions provide clarification discuss process with other relevant people give appropriate feedback discuss assessment outcome use language appropriate to candidate and assessment environment establish a working relationship with candidate.
Required knowledge
competency-based assessment, including: vocational education and training as a competency-based system criterion-referenced assessment as distinct from norm-referenced assessment competency standards as the basis of qualifications structure and application of competency standards principles of assessment and how they are applied rules of evidence and how they are applied range of assessment purposes and assessment contexts, including RPL different assessment methods, including suitability for gathering various types of evidence, suitability for content of units, and resource requirements and associated costs reasonable adjustments and when they are applicable types and forms of evidence, including assessment instruments that are relevant to gathering different types of evidence used in competency-based assessment, including RPL potential barriers and processes relating to assessment tools and methods assessment system, including policies and procedures established by the industry, organisation or training authority RPL policies and procedures established by the organisation cultural sensitivity and equity considerations relevant policy, legislation, codes of practice and national standards, including commonwealth and state or territory legislation that may affect training and assessment in the vocational education and training sector, such as: copyright and privacy laws in terms of electronic technology security of information plagiarism training packages and competency standards licensing requirements industry and workplace requirements duty of care under common law recording information and confidentiality requirements anti-discrimination, including equal employment opportunity, racial vilification and disability discrimination workplace relations industrial awards and enterprise agreements OHS responsibilities associated with assessing competence, such as: requirements for reporting hazards and incidents emergency procedures procedures for use of relevant personal protective equipment safe use and maintenance of relevant equipment sources of OHS information.

Evidence Guide

The evidence guide provides advice on assessment and must be read in conjunction with the performance criteria, required skills and knowledge, range statement and the Assessment Guidelines for the Training Package.

Overview of assessment
Critical aspects for assessment and evidence required to demonstrate competency in this unit	Evidence of the ability to: assess competence of a number of candidates within the vocational education and training context against different units of competency or accredited curricula, following the relevant assessment plan assess at least one candidate for RPL consider reasonable adjustment and the reasons for decisions in at least one assessment cover an entire unit of competency and show: the application of different assessment methods and instruments involving a range of assessment activities and events two-way communication and feedback how judgement was exercised in making the assessment decision how and when assessment outcomes were recorded and reported assessment records and reports completed in accordance with assessment system and organisational, legal and ethical requirements how the assessment process was reviewed.
Context of and specific resources for assessment	Evidence must be gathered in the workplace whenever possible. Where no workplace is available, a simulated workplace must be provided.
Method of assessment
Guidance information for assessment

Range Statement

The range statement relates to the unit of competency as a whole. It allows for different work environments and situations that may affect performance. Bold italicised wording, if used in the performance criteria, is detailed below. Essential operating conditions that may be present with training and assessment (depending on the work situation, needs of the candidate, accessibility of the item, and local industry and regional contexts) may also be included.

Assessment plan may include:	overall planning, describing: what is to be assessed when assessment is to take place where assessment is to take place how assessment is to take place.
Benchmarks for assessment:	refer to a criterion against which the candidate is assessed may be a competency standard/unit of competency, assessment criteria of course curricula, performance specifications, or product specifications.
Assessment tools include:	the learning or competency unit(s) to be assessed the target group, context and conditions for the assessment the tasks to be administered to the candidate an outline of the evidence to be gathered from the candidate the evidence criteria used to judge the quality of performance (i.e. the assessment decision-making rules) the administration, recording and reporting requirements the evidence of how validity and reliability have been tested and built into the design and use of the tool.
Specialist support may include:	assistance by third party, such as carer or interpreter support from specialist educator provision of developed online assessment activities support for remote or isolated candidates and assessors support from subject matter or safety experts advice from regulatory authorities assessment teams and panels support from lead assessors advice from policy development experts.
Assessment methods include:	particular techniques used to gather different types of evidence, such as: direct observation structured activities oral or written questioning portfolios of evidence review of products third-party feedback.
Individual differences may include:	English language, literacy and numeracy barriers physical impairment or disability intellectual impairment or disability medical condition that may impact on assessment, such as arthritis, epilepsy, diabetes and asthma learning difficulties mental or psychological disability religious and spiritual observances cultural images and perceptions age gender.
Feedback may include:	ensuring assessment/RPL process is understood ensuring candidate concerns are addressed enabling questions and answers confirming outcomes identifying further evidence to be provided discussing action plans confirming gap training needed providing information regarding available appeal processes suggesting improvements in evidence gathering and presentation.
Consultation may involve:	moderation with other assessors, or training and assessment coordinators discussions with client, team leaders, managers, RPL coordinators, supervisors, coaches and mentors technical and subject experts English language, literacy and numeracy experts.

Unit Sector(s)

Assessment

Custom Content Section

Not applicable.

TAEDEL402A Plan, organise and facilitate learning in the workplace

Modification History

Not applicable.

Unit Descriptor

Unit descriptor	This unit describes the performance outcomes, skills and knowledge required to plan, organise and facilitate learning for individuals in a workplace.

Application of the Unit

Application of the unit	This unit typically applies to a person working as an entry level trainer, teacher or facilitator, team leader or workplace supervisor, or any employee responsible for guiding learning through work.

Licensing/Regulatory Information

Not applicable.

Pre-Requisites

Prerequisite units

Employability Skills Information

Employability skills	This unit contains employability skills.

Elements and Performance Criteria Pre-Content

Elements describe the essential outcomes of a unit of competency.	Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element. Where bold italicised text is used, further information is detailed in the required skills and knowledge section and the range statement. Assessment of performance is to be consistent with the evidence guide.

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
1. Establish effective work environment for learning	1.1. Establish and agree upon objectives and scope of the work-based learning 1.2. Analyse work practices and routines to determine their effectiveness in meeting established learning objectives 1.3. Identify and address OHS implications of using work as the basis for learning
2. Develop a work-based learning pathway	2.1. Address contractual requirements and responsibilities for learning at work 2.2. Arrange for integration and monitoring of external learning activities with the work-based learning pathway 2.3. Obtain agreement from relevant personnel to implement the work-based learning pathway
3. Establish the learning-facilitation relationship	3.1. Identify context for learning and individual's learning style 3.2. Select appropriate technique or process to facilitate learning and explain the basis of the technique to learner 3.3. Develop, document and discuss individualised learning plan with learner 3.4. Access, read and interpret documentation outlining the OHS responsibilities of the various parties in the learning environment 3.5. Monitor supervisory arrangements appropriate to learner's levels of knowledge, skill and experience to provide support and encouragement and ensure learner's health and safety
4. Implement work-based learning pathway	4.1. Sequence introduction of workplace tasks, activities and processes to reflect the agreed work-based learning pathway 4.2. Explain objectives of work-based learning and the processes involved to learner 4.3. Encourage learner to take responsibility for learning and to self-reflect 4.4. Develop techniques that facilitate learner's transfer of skills and knowledge
5. Maintain and develop the learning/facilitation relationship	5.1. Prepare for each session 5.2. Structure learning activities to support and reinforce new learning, build on strengths, and identify areas for further development 5.3. Observe learner cues and change approaches where necessary to maintain momentum 5.4. Practise ethical behaviour at all times 5.5. Monitor effectiveness of the learning/facilitation relationship through regular meetings between the parties
6. Close and evaluate the learning/facilitation relationship	6.1. Carry out the closure smoothly, using appropriate interpersonal and communication skills 6.2. Seek feedback from learner on the outcomes achieved and value of the relationship 6.3. Evaluate and document process, including impact, self evaluation and reflection, and file according to legal and organisational requirements
7. Monitor and review the effectiveness of the work-based learning pathway	7.1. Document work performance and learning achievement and keep records according to organisational requirements 7.2. Evaluate effectiveness of the work-based pathway against the objectives, processes and techniques used 7.3. Recommend improvements to work-based practice in light of the review process

Required Skills and Knowledge

REQUIRED SKILLS AND KNOWLEDGE
This section describes the skills and knowledge required for this unit.
Required skills
oral communication and language skills to: motivate the learner transfer skills and knowledge interpersonal skills to maintain appropriate relationships observation skills to monitor individual progress literacy skills to: read and interpret organisational documents, legal documents and contracts complete and maintain documentation organisational skills to provide guidance and feedback to individuals communication skills, including: using effective verbal and non-verbal language using critical listening and questioning techniques giving constructive and supportive feedback assisting learners to paraphrase advice or instructions back to the trainer/facilitator providing clear and concrete options and advice using appropriate industry/profession terminology and language ensuring language, literacy and numeracy used is appropriate to learners
Required knowledge
systems, processes and practices within the organisation where work-based learning is taking place operational demands of the work and impact of changes on work roles organisational work culture, including industrial relations environment systems for identifying skill needs introductory knowledge of different learning styles and how to encourage learning in each, for example: visual learners audio learners kinaesthetic learners theoretical learners relevant policy, legislation, codes of practice and national standards that may affect training and assessment in the vocational education and training sector OHS relating to the work role, including: hazards relating to the industry and specific workplace reporting requirements for hazards and incidents specific procedures for work tasks safe use and maintenance of relevant equipment emergency procedures sources of OHS information

Evidence Guide

EVIDENCE GUIDE
The Evidence Guide provides advice on assessment and must be read in conjunction with the performance criteria, required skills and knowledge, range statement and the Assessment Guidelines for the Training Package.
Overview of assessment	Assessment must address the scope of this unit and reflect all components of the unit. Arange of appropriate assessment methods and evidence-gathering techniques must be used to determine competency. A judgement of competency should only be made when the assessor is confident that the required outcomes of the unit have been achieved and that consistent performance has been demonstrated.
Critical aspects for assessment and evidence required to demonstrate competency in this unit	Evidence of the ability to: prepare and facilitate work-based learning provide evidence of a minimum of two examples of developing work-based learning pathways, that include: identifying needs for learning analysing work practices, work environment and work activities organising and allocating work in a way that reflects learning needs and provides effective learning opportunities through work processes provide a minimum of two examples of a learning facilitation relationship being conducted: with different individuals demonstrating communication skills and flexibility demonstrating one or more of the processes or techniques identified.
Context of and specific resources for assessment	Evidence must be gathered in the workplace wherever possible. Where no workplace is available, a simulated workplace must be provided. Assessment must ensure access to information about work activities.
Method of assessment
Guidance information for assessment	For further information about assessment of this and other TAE units, refer to relevant implementation guidance published on the IBSA website (www.ibsa.org.au).

Range Statement

RANGE STATEMENT
The range statement relates to the unit of competency as a whole. It allows for different work environments and situations that may affect performance. Bold italicised wording, if used in the performance criteria, is detailed below. Essential operating conditions that may be present with training and assessment (depending on the work situation, needs of the candidate, accessibility of the item, and local industry and regional contexts) may also be included.
OHS implications may include:	OHS obligations workplace OHS policies and procedures ensuring work practices, routines and proposed changes do not pose a risk to learners and others.
Contractual requirements may include:	training plans under apprenticeships/traineeships requirements of government-funded training programs, such as Workplace English Language and Literacy (WELL).
Work-based learning pathway may include:	identifying specific goals for work-based learning identifying job tasks or activities to be included in learning process appropriate sequencing of job tasks/activities to reflect learner incremental development direct guidance and modelling from experienced co-workers and experts opportunities for practice.
Individualised learning plan may include:	information about individual's learning style, learner characteristics, and the context for learning clear boundaries and expectations of the learning/facilitation relationship documented equity or additional support needs for the learner performance benchmarks to be achieved activities and processes which together will achieve the benchmarks.
Ethical behaviour includes:	trust integrity privacy and confidentiality of the session following organisational policies knowing own limitations having a range of other intervention referrals ready when needed honesty fairness to others.
Impact may be:	successful achievement, rate of achievement, or lack of achievement of identified goals achievement of other outcomes as a result of the relationship development of new goals new or increased motivation to learn greater capacity to learn increase in learner's self-confidence.
Self-evaluation and reflection may include:	asking critical questions about: own ability what worked or didn't work how the relationship building process could be improved reviewing records and journals on sessions and critically evaluating own performance reviewing feedback from learner and identifying critical aspects and areas for improvement.

Unit Sector(s)

Unit sector	Delivery and facilitation

Competency field

Competency field

Co-requisite units

Co-requisite units

TLIA2041A Manually sort mail and parcels

Modification History

Not Applicable

Unit Descriptor

Unit Descriptor	This unit involves the skills and knowledge required to manually sort mail and parcels in accordance with workplace requirements, including carrying out required preparations of the work area, manually sorting mail and parcels, and finalising the required sorting processes. The sorting processes include accurately and efficiently organising mail and parcels into groups for further processing or distribution and containerising processed mail and parcels ready for transfer to the next processing or distribution point. Licensing, legislative, regulatory or certification requirements are applicable to this unit.

Application of the Unit

Application of the Unit	Work must be carried out in compliance with the regulations and workplace requirements pertaining to the processing of mail and parcels. Work is normally performed under general supervision, usually in a team or outstation environment. It involves the application of workplace procedures and regulatory requirements to the manual sorting of mail and parcels as part of work activities in the postal and allied industries.

Licensing/Regulatory Information

Refer to Unit Descriptor

Pre-Requisites

Not Applicable

Employability Skills Information

Employability Skills	This unit contains employability skills.

Elements and Performance Criteria Pre-Content

Elements describe the essential outcomes of a unit of competency.	Performance criteria describe the required performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element. Assessment of performance is to be consistent with the evidence guide.

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
1 Prepare to sort mail and parcels manually	1.1 Individual and work team priorities and responsibilities are identified and confirmed 1.2 All OH&S and environment protection procedures and requirements for the workplace are identified, accessed and applied 1.3 The availability of mail and parcels to be processed is identified and confirmed 1.4 Mail and parcels to be processed are transferred to processing point 1.5 Labels for identifying the destination of mail are created and affixed to trays
2 Sort mail and parcels manually	2.1 Internal operating procedures and standards are applied to the manual processing of parcels and mail 2.2 Mail and parcels are inspected to ensure that all criteria have been met 2.3 Mail and parcels are sorted accurately and correctly in compliance with priority for processing and manual sorting procedures 2.4 Mail and parcels are handled safely to minimise risk of injury to people and damage to mail and parcels 2.5 Mail and parcels that are damaged, underpaid, incorrectly classified, or are non-conforming items are identified, separated and re-processed in accordance with workplace procedures 2.6 Legal requirements and workplace policies and procedures in relation to the security of mail and parcels are followed
3 Complete process for manually sorting mail and parcels	3.1 Mail and parcel sorting frames/bag racks are cleared down, and mail and parcel containers/bags are sealed and labelled in accordance with workplace procedures 3.2 Mail and parcels are transferred to next processing or distribution point using appropriate shifting equipment and labels scanned as required 3.3 Information required to complete records of mail and parcels processed is provided and recorded 3.4 Excess equipment is removed and work area is prepared for next activity/shift

Required Skills and Knowledge

REQUIRED KNOWLEDGE AND SKILLS
This describes the essential knowledge and skills and their level required for this unit.
Required knowledge:
Australian and international codes and regulations relevant to mail operations
Relevant OH&S and environmental protection procedures and guidelines
Workplace procedures and policies for the manual sorting of mail and parcels
Focus of operation of work systems, equipment, management and site operating systems for the manual sorting of mail and parcels
Problems that may occur when manually sorting mail and parcels and appropriate action that can be taken to resolve/avoid the problems
Requirements of mail sorting systems, operations and relevant equipment
Hazards that may occur during the manual sorting of mail and parcels and ways of controlling the risks involved
Site layout
Relevant personal protective equipment and procedures for its use

Required skills:
Communicate effectively with others when manually sorting mail and parcels
Read and interpret instructions, procedures and labels relevant to the manual sorting of mail and parcels
Interpret and follow operational instructions and prioritise work
Complete documentation related to the manual sorting of mail and parcels
Work collaboratively with others when manually sorting mail and parcels
Adapt appropriately to cultural differences in the workplace, including modes of behaviour and interactions with others
Promptly report and/or rectify any identified problems, faults or malfunctions that may arise during the manual sorting of mail and parcels in accordance with regulatory requirements and workplace procedures
Implement contingency plans for unplanned events that may arise during the manual sorting of mail and parcels
Plan own work including predicting consequences and identifying improvements
Apply security and safety precautions and required action to minimise, control or eliminate hazards that may exist during work activities
Modify activities depending on differing operational contingencies, risk situations and environments
Work systematically with required attention to detail without injury to self or others, or damage to goods or equipment
Operate and adapt to differences in equipment and systems in accordance with standard operating procedures
Select and use required personal protective equipment conforming to industry and OH&S standards
Identify, select and use relevant equipment, processes and procedures when manually sorting mail and parcels

Evidence Guide

EVIDENCE GUIDE
The evidence guide provides advice on assessment and must be read in conjunction with the performance criteria, required knowledge and skills, the range statement and the assessment guidelines for this Training Package.
Critical aspects for assessment and evidence required to demonstrate competency in this unit	The evidence required to demonstrate competency in this unit must be relevant to and satisfy all of the requirements of the elements and performance criteria of this unit and include demonstration of applying: the underpinning knowledge and skills relevant legislation and workplace procedures other relevant aspects of the range statement
Context of and specific resources for assessment	Performance is demonstrated consistently over a period of time and in a suitable range of contexts Resources for assessment include: a range of relevant exercises, case studies and/or other simulated practical and knowledge assessment, and/or access to an appropriate range of relevant operational situations in the workplace In both real and simulated environments, access is required to: relevant and appropriate materials and equipment, and applicable documentation including workplace procedures, regulations, codes of practice and operation manuals
Method of assessment	Assessment of this unit must be undertaken by a registered training organisation As a minimum, assessment of knowledge must be conducted through appropriate written/oral tests Practical assessment must occur: through activities in an appropriately simulated environment at the registered training organisation, and/or in an appropriate range of situations in the workplace

Range Statement

RANGE STATEMENT
The range statement relates to the unit of competency as a whole. It allows for different work environments and situations that may affect performance.
Work may be conducted:	in a range of work environments by day or night
Workplaces may comprise:	large, medium or small worksites
Operations may include:	shiftwork
Customers may be:	internal or external
Hazards may include:	vehicular traffic and pedestrians dust and vapours hazardous or dangerous materials humidity, air temperature lighting conditions machinery/equipment moving parts noise
Weighing devices may be:	mechanical automated weighbridge
Work priorities may be communicated through:	briefings noticeboards announcements
Equipment may include:	mail trays, tubs and bags sorting frame/bag rack scanners tipping belt knife pallet jack/maverick powered lifters king fishers scales carousel Unit Load Device (ULD) and Wheeled Unit Load Device (WULD) Vertical Sorting Frame (VSF) and Vertical Sorting Division (VSD) ULD tipper conveyor belts strapping machine
Personal protective equipment may include:	gloves safety headwear and footwear safety glasses two-way radios protective clothing high visibility clothing
Communication in the work area may include:	phone fax email electronic data transfer (EDI) RF systems radio oral, aural or signed communications
Depending on the type of organisation concerned and the local terminology used, workplace procedures may include:	company procedures enterprise procedures organisational procedures established procedures
Information/documents may include:	workplace policies, operating procedures and practices Management Operating System (MOS) Management Information System (MIS) sorting system information which may include: postcode book, national sort plan and state sort plan post guide international postcode directory labels chart mail identification numbers, codes and labels manifests, consignment notes, bar codes, mail and container identification quality assurance procedures induction documentation competency standards and training materials job specifications and procedures award, enterprise bargaining agreement or other industrial arrangements manufacturers specifications codes of practice, including national standards for manual handling and the industry safety code supplier and or/client instructions HAZCHEM chart/material safety data sheets safety observation feedback program emergency procedures
Applicable regulations and legislation may include:	relevant codes and regulations pertaining to mail operations Australian and international regulations and codes of practice for the handling and transport of dangerous goods and hazardous substances relevant state/territory OH&S and environmental protection legislation workplace relations regulations workers compensation regulations equal opportunity, equal employment opportunity and affirmative action legislation

Unit Sector(s)

Not Applicable

Competency Field

Competency Field	A - Handling Cargo/Stock

TLIA2043A Consolidate mail

Modification History

Not Applicable

Unit Descriptor

Unit Descriptor	This unit involves the skills and knowledge required to consolidate mail in accordance with workplace requirements, including carrying out required preparations, consolidating mail, and completing the consolidation operations. The process includes the initial identification and separation of mail prior to movement to the despatch dock. Licensing, legislative, regulatory or certification requirements are applicable to this unit.

Application of the Unit

Application of the Unit	Work must be carried out in compliance with the regulations and workplace requirements pertaining to the processing of mail and parcels. Work is performed under some supervision generally within a team environment. It involves the application of workplace procedures and regulatory requirements to consolidation of mail as part of work activities in the postal and allied industries.

Licensing/Regulatory Information

Refer to Unit Descriptor

Pre-Requisites

Not Applicable

Employability Skills Information

Employability Skills	This unit contains employability skills.

Elements and Performance Criteria Pre-Content

Elements describe the essential outcomes of a unit of competency.	Performance criteria describe the required performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element. Assessment of performance is to be consistent with the evidence guide.

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
1 Prepare for consolidation of mail	1.1 Individual and work team priorities and responsibilities are identified and confirmed 1.2 All OH&S and environment protection procedures and requirements for the workplace are identified, accessed and applied 1.3 Mail to be consolidated is identified and accessed
2 Consolidate mail	2.1 Internal operating procedures and standards are applied to the consolidation of mail 2.2 Mail is consolidated accurately and correctly in compliance with workplace requirements 2.3 Mail is handled safely to minimise risk of injury to people and damage to mail 2.4 Mail to be consolidated is placed into mail containers for movement to next process point
3 Complete consolidation of mail	3.1 Mail containers are sealed and labelled accurately and correctly in accordance with workplace procedures 3.2 Information required to complete records of mail processed is provided and recorded 3.3 Mail containers are transferred to designated storage area to await movement to next processing point using appropriate shifting equipment 3.4 Excess equipment is removed from work area and stored appropriately

Required Skills and Knowledge

REQUIRED KNOWLEDGE AND SKILLS
This describes the essential knowledge and skills and their level required for this unit.
Required knowledge:
Australian and international codes and regulations relevant to mail operations
Relevant OH&S and environmental protection procedures and guidelines
Workplace procedures and policies for the consolidation of mail
Focus of operation of work systems, equipment, management and site operating systems for the consolidation of mail
Problems that may occur when consolidating mail and appropriate action that can be taken to resolve or avoid the problems
Requirements of mail consolidation systems, operations and relevant equipment
Safety and security hazards that may occur during the consolidation of mail and ways of controlling the risks involved
Relevant personal protective equipment and procedures for its use
Site layout

Required skills:
Communicate effectively with others when consolidating mail
Read and interpret instructions, procedures and labels relevant to the consolidation of mail
Complete documentation related to the consolidation of mail
Work collaboratively with others when consolidating mail
Adapt appropriately to cultural differences in the workplace, including modes of behaviour and interactions with others
Promptly report and/or rectify any identified problems that may occur when consolidating mail in accordance with regulatory requirements and workplace procedures
Plan own work including predicting consequences and identifying improvements
Implement contingency plans for unplanned events that may occur when consolidating mail
Interpret and apply relevant agreements, codes of practice or other legislative requirements
Apply safety and security precautions and required action to minimise, control or eliminate hazards that may exist during work activities
Modify activities depending on differing operational contingencies, risk situations and environments
Work systematically with required attention to detail without injury to self or others, or damage to mail or equipment
Operate and adapt to differences in equipment in accordance with standard operating procedures
Select and use required personal protective equipment conforming to industry and OH&S standards
Identify, select and use relevant equipment, processes and procedures when consolidating mail

Evidence Guide

EVIDENCE GUIDE
The evidence guide provides advice on assessment and must be read in conjunction with the performance criteria, required knowledge and skills, the range statement and the assessment guidelines for this Training Package.
Critical aspects for assessment and evidence required to demonstrate competency in this unit	The evidence required to demonstrate competency in this unit must be relevant to and satisfy all of the requirements of the elements and performance criteria of this unit and include demonstration of applying: the underpinning knowledge and skills relevant legislation and workplace procedures other relevant aspects of the range statement
Context of and specific resources for assessment	Performance is demonstrated consistently over a period of time and in a suitable range of contexts Resources for assessment include: a range of relevant exercises, case studies and/or other simulated practical and knowledge assessment, and/or access to an appropriate range of relevant operational situations in the workplace In both real and simulated environments, access is required to: relevant and appropriate materials and equipment, and applicable documentation including workplace procedures, regulations, codes of practice and operation manuals
Method of assessment	Assessment of this unit must be undertaken by a registered training organisation As a minimum, assessment of knowledge must be conducted through appropriate written/oral tests Practical assessment must occur: through activities in an appropriately simulated environment at the registered training organisation, and/or in an appropriate range of situations in the workplace

Range Statement

RANGE STATEMENT
The range statement relates to the unit of competency as a whole. It allows for different work environments and situations that may affect performance.
Work may be conducted:	in a range of work environments by day or night
Workplaces may comprise:	large, medium or small worksites
Facilities may be:	within an airport environment
Customers may be:	external (including international) or internal
Hazards may include:	vehicular traffic and pedestrians dust and vapours hazardous or dangerous materials humidity, air temperature lighting conditions machinery/equipment moving parts noise insects
Weighing devices may be:	mechanical automated weighbridge
Work priorities may be communicated through:	briefings noticeboards announcements
Equipment may include:	forklift BT lifting equipment kingfishers plastic and cardboard trays bags flute trays bins pallet jacks stillages unit load device (ULD) wheeled unit load device (WULD) strapping machine TMS (Tray Management System) scanners label printers
Personal protective equipment may include:	gloves safety headwear and footwear safety glasses two-way radios protective clothing high visibility clothing
Communication in the work area may include:	phone fax email electronic data transfer (EDI) RF systems radio oral, aural or signed communications
Depending on the type of organisation concerned and the local terminology used, workplace procedures may include:	company procedures enterprise procedures organisational procedures established procedures
Information/documents may include:	workplace policies, operating procedures and practices Management Operating System (MOS) Management Information System (MIS) manifests, consignment notes, bar codes, mail and container identification mail identification numbers, codes and labels machine/equipment operations manuals air and surface movement schedules international aviation codes (IATA) quality assurance procedures induction documentation competency standards and training materials job specifications and procedures award, enterprise bargaining agreement or other industrial arrangements manufacturers specifications codes of practice, including national standards for manual handling and the industry safety code supplier and or/client instructions HAZCHEM chart/material safety data sheets safety observation feedback program emergency procedures
Applicable regulations and legislation may include:	relevant codes and regulations pertaining to mail operations Australian and international regulations and codes of practice for the handling and transport of dangerous goods and hazardous substances relevant state/territory OH&S and environmental protection legislation workplace relations regulations workers compensation regulations equal opportunity, equal employment opportunity and affirmative action legislation

Unit Sector(s)

Not Applicable

Competency Field

Competency Field	A - Handling Cargo/Stock

TLIA2047A Stream mail

Modification History

Not Applicable

Unit Descriptor

Unit Descriptor	This unit involves the skills and knowledge required to stream mail in readiness for the next stage of processing in accordance with workplace requirements, including preparing to stream mail, streaming mail in accordance with workplace procedures, and finalising all required streaming operations. The process may include opening, facing up and traying mail. Licensing, legislative, regulatory or certification requirements are applicable to this unit.

Application of the Unit

Application of the Unit	Work must be carried out in compliance with the regulations and workplace requirements pertaining to the streaming of mail and parcels. Work is normally performed under general supervision, usually within a team environment. It involves the application of workplace procedures and regulatory requirements to the streaming of mail as part of work activities in the postal and allied industries.

Licensing/Regulatory Information

Refer to Unit Descriptor

Pre-Requisites

Not Applicable

Employability Skills Information

Employability Skills	This unit contains employability skills.

Elements and Performance Criteria Pre-Content

Elements describe the essential outcomes of a unit of competency.	Performance criteria describe the required performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element. Assessment of performance is to be consistent with the evidence guide.

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
1 Prepare to stream mail	1.1 Individual and work team priorities and responsibilities are identified and confirmed 1.2 All OH&S and environment protection procedures and requirements for the workplace are identified, accessed and applied 1.3 Mail to be streamed is identified, accessed and prepared
2 Stream mail	2.1 Internal operating procedures and standards are applied to the streaming of mail 2.2 Mail is categorised and streamed accurately and correctly in compliance with priority for streaming 2.3 Mail is handled safely to minimise risk of injury to people and damage to mail
3 Complete streaming of mail	3.1 Mail containers are loaded onto appropriate mail movement device and labelled 3.2 Information required to complete records of mail processed is provided and recorded 3.3 Mail containers are transferred to next processing point using appropriate shifting equipment 3.4 Excess equipment is removed and work area is prepared for next activity shift

Required Skills and Knowledge

REQUIRED KNOWLEDGE AND SKILLS
This describes the essential knowledge and skills and their level required for this unit.
Required knowledge:
Australian and international codes and regulations relevant to mail operations
Relevant OH&S and environmental protection procedures and guidelines
Workplace procedures and policies for the streaming of mail
Focus of operation of work systems, equipment, management and site operating systems for the streaming of mail
Problems that may occur when streaming mail and appropriate action that can be taken to resolve avoid the problems
Requirements of mail streaming systems, operations and relevant equipment
Hazards that may occur during the streaming of mail and ways of controlling the risks involved
Relevant personal protective equipment and procedures for its use
Site layout

Required skills:
Communicate effectively with others when streaming mail
Read and interpret instructions, procedures and labels relevant to the streaming of mail
Complete documentation related to the streaming of mail
Work collaboratively with others when streaming mail
Adapt appropriately to cultural differences in the workplace, including modes of behaviour and interactions with others
Promptly report and/or rectify any identified problems, faults or malfunctions that may occur when streaming mail in accordance with regulatory requirements and workplace procedures
Implement contingency plans for unplanned events when streaming mail
Plan own work including predicting consequences and identifying improvements
Interpret and apply relevant agreements, codes of practice or other legislative requirements
Apply safety and security precautions and required action to minimise, control or eliminate hazards that may exist when streaming mail
Monitor work activities in terms of planned schedule
Modify activities depending on differing operational contingencies, risk situations and environments
Work systematically with required attention to detail without injury to self or others, or damage to goods or equipment
Operate and adapt to differences in equipment in accordance with standard operating procedures
Identify, select and use relevant equipment, processes and procedures when streaming mail
Select and use required personal protective equipment conforming to industry and OH&S standards

Evidence Guide

EVIDENCE GUIDE
The evidence guide provides advice on assessment and must be read in conjunction with the performance criteria, required knowledge and skills, the range statement and the assessment guidelines for this Training Package.
Critical aspects for assessment and evidence required to demonstrate competency in this unit	The evidence required to demonstrate competency in this unit must be relevant to and satisfy all of the requirements of the elements and performance criteria of this unit and include demonstration of applying: the underpinning knowledge and skills relevant legislation and workplace procedures other relevant aspects of the range statement
Context of and specific resources for assessment	Performance is demonstrated consistently over a period of time and in a suitable range of contexts Resources for assessment include: a range of relevant exercises, case studies and/or other simulated practical and knowledge assessment, and/or access to an appropriate range of relevant operational situations in the workplace In both real and simulated environments, access is required to: relevant and appropriate materials and equipment, and applicable documentation including workplace procedures, regulations, codes of practice and operation manuals
Method of assessment	Assessment of this unit must be undertaken by a registered training organisation As a minimum, assessment of knowledge must be conducted through appropriate written/oral tests Practical assessment must occur: through activities in an appropriately simulated environment at the registered training organisation, and/or in an appropriate range of situations in the workplace

Range Statement

RANGE STATEMENT
The range statement relates to the unit of competency as a whole. It allows for different work environments and situations that may affect performance.
Work may be conducted:	in a range of work environments by day or night
Workplaces may comprise:	large, medium or small worksites
Facilities may be:	within an airport environment
Customers may be:	internal or external
Hazards may include:	vehicular traffic and pedestrians dust and vapours hazardous or dangerous materials humidity, air temperature lighting conditions machinery/equipment moving parts noise insects
Weighing devices may be:	mechanical automated weighbridge
Work priorities may be communicated through:	briefings noticeboards announcements
Equipment may include:	streaming indicators kingfishers plastic and cardboard mail trays tubs receptacles BT lifting equipment label printer opening knife belts trolleys bins unit load device (ULD) wheeled unit load device (WULD) stillages forklifts pallet jack
Personal protective equipment may include:	gloves safety headwear and footwear safety glasses two-way radios protective clothing high visibility clothing
Communication in the work area may include:	phone fax email electronic data transfer (EDI) RF systems radio oral, aural or signed communications
Depending on the type of organisation concerned and the local terminology used, workplace procedures may include:	company procedures enterprise procedures organisational procedures established procedures
Information/documents may include:	workplace policies, operating procedures and practices Management Operating System (MOS) Management Information System (MIS) sorting system information including: postcode book, national sort plan and state sort plan postal guide international postcode directory label charts manifests, consignment notes, bar codes, mail and container identification mail identification numbers, codes and labels machine equipment operations manuals quality assurance procedures induction documentation competency standards and training materials job specifications and procedures award, enterprise bargaining agreement or other industrial arrangements manufacturers specifications codes of practice, including national standards for manual handling and the industry safety code supplier and or/client instructions HAZCHEM chart/material safety data sheets safety observation feedback program emergency procedures
Applicable regulations and legislation may include:	relevant codes and regulations pertaining to mail operations Australian and international regulations and codes of practice for the handling and transport of dangerous goods and hazardous substances relevant state/territory OH&S and environmental protection legislation workplace relations regulations workers compensation regulations equal opportunity, equal employment opportunity and affirmative action legislation

Unit Sector(s)

Not Applicable

Competency Field

Competency Field	A - Handling Cargo/Stock

TLIW3006A Operate computerised mail and parcels sorting equipment

Modification History

Not Applicable

Unit Descriptor

Unit Descriptor	This unit involves the skills and knowledge to operate computerised mail and parcels sorting equipment in accordance with workplace requirements including setting up mail and parcels sorting equipment for operation, operating the equipment in accordance with workplace procedures, and completing the sorting process for mail and parcels as required. The process includes containerising processed mail and parcels for transfer to the next processing or distribution point. Licensing, legislative, regulatory or certification requirements are applicable to this unit.

Application of the Unit

Application of the Unit	Work must be carried out in compliance with the regulations and workplace requirements pertaining to the processing of mail and parcels. Work is normally performed under general supervision, usually in a team or out-station environment. Work involves the application of workplace procedures and regulatory requirements to the operation of computerised mail and parcels sorting equipment as part of work activities in the postal and allied industries.

Licensing/Regulatory Information

Refer to Unit Descriptor

Pre-Requisites

Not Applicable

Employability Skills Information

Employability Skills	This unit contains employability skills.

Elements and Performance Criteria Pre-Content

Elements describe the essential outcomes of a unit of competency.	Performance criteria describe the required performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the element. Assessment of performance is to be consistent with the evidence guide.

Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT	PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
1 Set up mail and parcels sorting equipment for operation	1.1 Individual and work team priorities and responsibilities are identified and confirmed 1.2 All OH&S and environment protection procedures and requirements for the relevant mail and parcels sorting equipment are identified, accessed and applied 1.3 The availability of mail and parcels to be sorted is identified and confirmed 1.4 The appropriate equipment configuration and sort plan is identified, accessed and applied 1.5 Mail and parcels to be sorted are transferred to sorting point 1.6 Labels for identifying the destination of mail are created and affixed to trays
2 Operate mail and parcels sorting equipment	2.1 Internal operating procedures and equipment operating procedures are applied 2.2 Mail and parcels are sorted accurately and correctly in compliance with priority for sorting 2.3 Mail and parcels are handled safely to minimise risk of injury to people and damage to mail and parcels and processing equipment 2.4 Mail and parcels that are incorrectly classified and non-conforming items are identified, separated and re-processed 2.5 Mail and parcels that have been sorted to their correct destination are placed in appropriate mail container for distribution
3 Complete sorting process for mail and parcels	3.1 Mail and parcels stackers/containers/bags are cleared down, sealed and labelled in accordance with workplace procedures 3.2 Mail and parcels are transferred to next sorting point using appropriate shifting equipment, and labels are scanned as required 3.3 Information required to complete records of mail and parcels processed is provided and recorded 3.4 Excess equipment is removed and work area is prepared for next activity/shift

Required Skills and Knowledge

REQUIRED KNOWLEDGE AND SKILLS
This describes the essential knowledge and skills and their level required for this unit.
Required knowledge:
Australian and international codes and regulations relevant to mail operations
Relevant OH&S and environmental protection procedures and guidelines
Workplace procedures and policies for the operation of computerised mail and parcels sorting equipment
Focus of operation of work systems, equipment, management and site operating systems for the operation of computerised mail and parcels sorting equipment
Problems that may occur when operating computerised mail and parcels sorting equipment and appropriate action that can be taken to resolve/avoid the problems
Requirements of automated mail processing systems, operations and relevant equipment
Hazards that may occur during the operation of computerised mail and parcels sorting equipment and ways of controlling the risks involved
Site layout
Relevant personal protective equipment and procedures for its use

Required skills:
Communicate effectively with others when operating computerised mail and parcels sorting equipment
Read and interpret instructions, procedures, information and labels relevant to the operation of computerised mail and parcels sorting equipment
Interpret and follow operational instructions and prioritise work when operating computerised mail and parcels sorting equipment
Interpret and apply relevant agreements, codes of practice or other legislative requirements
Complete documentation related to the operation of computerised mail and parcels sorting equipment
Operate electronic communication equipment to required protocol
Work collaboratively with others when operating computerised mail and parcels sorting equipment
Adapt appropriately to cultural differences in the workplace, including modes of behaviour and interactions with others
Promptly report and/or rectify any identified problems, faults or malfunctions that may occur operating computerised mail and parcels sorting equipment in accordance with regulatory requirements and workplace procedures
Plan own work including predicting consequences and identifying improvements
Monitor work activities in terms of planned schedule
Modify activities depending on differing operational contingencies, risk situations and environments
Work systematically with required attention to detail without injury to self or others, or damage to equipment
Select and use required personal protective equipment
Identify, select and use relevant equipment, processes and procedures when operating computerised mail and parcels sorting equipment

Evidence Guide

EVIDENCE GUIDE
The evidence guide provides advice on assessment and must be read in conjunction with the performance criteria, required knowledge and skills, the range statement and the assessment guidelines for this Training Package.
Critical aspects for assessment and evidence required to demonstrate competency in this unit	The evidence required to demonstrate competency in this unit must be relevant to and satisfy all of the requirements of the elements and performance criteria of this unit and include demonstration of applying: the underpinning knowledge and skills relevant legislation and workplace procedures other relevant aspects of the range statement
Context of and specific resources for assessment	Performance is demonstrated consistently over a period of time and in a suitable range of contexts Resources for assessment include: a range of relevant exercises, case studies and/or other simulated practical and knowledge assessment, and/or access to an appropriate range of relevant operational situations in the workplace In both real and simulated environments, access is required to: relevant and appropriate materials and equipment, and applicable documentation including workplace procedures, regulations, codes of practice and operation manuals
Method of assessment	Assessment of this unit must be undertaken by a registered training organisation As a minimum, assessment of knowledge must be conducted through appropriate written/oral tests Practical assessment must occur: through activities in an appropriately simulated environment at the registered training organisation, and/or in an appropriate range of situations in the workplace

Range Statement

RANGE STATEMENT
The range statement relates to the unit of competency as a whole. It allows for different work environments and situations that may affect performance.
Work may be conducted:	in a range of work environments by day or night
Workplaces may comprise:	large, medium or small worksites
Operations may include:	shiftwork
Customers may be:	internal or external
Hazards may include:	vehicular traffic and pedestrians dust and vapours hazardous or dangerous materials humidity, air temperature lighting conditions machinery/equipment moving parts noise
Weighing devices may be:	mechanical automated weighbridge
Work priorities may be communicated through:	briefings noticeboards announcements
Equipment may include:	mail trays, tubs and bags multi-line OCR AEG OCR bar code sorter flat sorting machine large parcels sorting machine small parcels sorting machine large letters sorting machine flat mail OCR scanners tipping belt pallet jack/maverick powered lifters kingfishers scales Unit Load Devices (ULDs) and Wheeled Unit Load Devices (WULDs) Vertical Sorting Frame (VSF) and Vertical Sorting Divisions (VSDs) ULD tipper conveyor belts strapping machine
Personal protective equipment may include:	gloves safety headwear and footwear safety glasses two-way radios protective clothing high visibility clothing
Communication in the work area may include:	phone fax email electronic data transfer (EDI) RF systems radio oral, aural or signed communications
Depending on the type of organisation concerned and the local terminology used, workplace procedures may include:	company procedures enterprise procedures organisational procedures established procedures
Information/documents may include:	workplace policies, operating procedures and practices Management Operating System (MOS) Management Information System (MIS) sorting system information including: postcode book, national sort plan and state sort plan postal guide international postcode directory label charts mail identification numbers, codes and labels manifests, consignment notes, bar codes, mail and container identification quality assurance procedures induction documentation competency standards and training materials job specifications and procedures award, enterprise bargaining agreement or other industrial arrangements manufacturers specifications codes of practice, including national standards for manual handling and the industry safety code supplier and or/client instructions HAZCHEM chart/MSDS safety observation feedback program emergency procedures
Applicable regulations and legislation may include:	relevant codes and regulations pertaining to mail operations Australian and international regulations and codes of practice for the handling and transport of dangerous goods and hazardous substances, relevant state/territory OH&S and environmental protection legislation workplace relations regulations workers compensation regulations equal opportunity, equal employment opportunity and affirmative action legislation

Unit Sector(s)

Not Applicable

Competency Field

Competency Field	W - Equipment and Systems Operations

ICP Printing and Graphic Arts

Modification History

Release Number	Release Date	Comments
Release 1.1	April 2015	Industry Skills Council (ISC) upgrade to correct mapping errors
Release 1.0	March 2015	Primary release of restructured training package This release of the ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package contains 16 Qualifications, 1 Skill Set, 288 native Units of Competency (including 286 units that have been updated for the Standards for Training Packages and 2 new units), and 167 imported units Digital literacy qualification and skill set added

Credit Arrangements

Links

Companion volumes are available from the IBSA website: http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes - http://www.ibsa.org.au/companion_volumes

ICPSS00001 Digital Fundamentals skill set

Modification History

Release	Comments
Release 1	This skill set first released with ICP Printing and Graphic Arts Training Package Version 1.0.

Description

This skill set comprises a set of units of competency which aim to develop underpinning digital literacy skills.

Pathways Information

These units of competency provide credit towards Certificate III and Certificate IV qualifications in ICP Printing and Graphic Arts, and many other qualifications across multiple training packages.

Licensing/Regulatory Information

No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this skill set at the time of publication.

Skill Set Requirements

ICPPRN497 Work with digital information

ICPPRN385 Apply software applications to digital production

Target Group

Existing workers in the printing industry who need to develop skills in working with digital information.

Suggested words for Statement of Attainment

These units meet the requirements for fundamental digital literacy skills in the printing and graphic arts context.